Catalog XVII

The most comprehensive source

for all fields of microscopy and
general laboratory research

electron microscopy • light microscopy

and histology supplies • chemicals • equipment

www.emsdiasum.com
 Dear Valued Customer,
NIGHTSEA Fluorescence On behalf of myself and the entire team at Electron needs. We hope you will discover exciting products that will
Viewing Systems, page 880 Microscopy Sciences, let me say that it is our honor and benefit your research. Keep in mind, this is not merely a list
privilege to provide you with this catalog — the most of available products, it’s an educational resource. You will
comprehensive source of products for all fields of find research citations and technical data alongside our
microscopy and general laboratory research available. products so you can learn how to take full advantage of the
As we come upon our 45th year in the industry, we truly products you receive from us. There is an index of this
believe the effort we put into producing a printed catalog in information located on pages 1148-1150 for your
addition to our other endeavors (website, bulletins, emails, convenience. There is also a completely updated listing of
post cards) proves to be a valuable resource for you, our Technical Data Sheets on page 1151. We invite you to
our customer, who deserves the very best. visit our website as another resource for this information as
LatticeAx Wafer Cleaving A lot has happened since we last released a comprehensive well as for Material Safety Data Sheets which we keep up to
Systems, page 432 catalog. New technological achievements are here date as a courtesy to our customers who find them
(Datacolor ChromaCal color calibration system, EMS invaluable. We are pleased to be of service and hope you
Cryo-Sem Preparation System, Graphene — the strongest will join our mailing list so we may continue to send you
material ever measured, LatticeAx cleaving systems, additional updates throughout the year.
Nightsea fluorescence viewing systems and the EMS Freeze It is with great pleasure we
Substitution Kit to name a few). The way we communicate continue to offer to you our
using new media continues to evolve as well (EMS is now outstanding selection of
on Facebook, Twitter, and YouTube). Although all these Chemicals for Electron
changes have taken place, one thing remains the same – Microscopy, Light Microscopy
Datacolor CHROMACAL™ our commitment to manufacturing and distributing the and Histology; the industry-
Color Calibration System,
page 160 highest quality chemicals, supplies, equipment and leading line of Aurion
accessories available to the Microscopy and Histology ImmunoGold Reagents; the
community today. In fact, our team is working harder than highest quality, most precise
ever to provide you with friendly service, competitive pricing, sectioning and incomparable
accurate technical support and swift delivery. durability DiATOME Diamond
We know a lot of our customers look Knives line, our superb line of
forward to this catalog to learn about EMS Sputter and Carbon
exciting new products on the market. We Coaters, world-renowned
carefully select these products, offering Technovit ® embedding resins,
only those that meet our high standards and the list goes on. Most of
LYNX II Tissue Processor, these lines have been
page 987 before we present them to you.
Highlights of this catalog include two enhanced with new options,
new sections: Cleaving (pages 432-444) so it’s worth taking a look.
and Antigen Retrieval (pages 612-616); We hope that this catalog
the addition of over 1500 new exceeds your expectations
thicknesses for Formvar and carbon and we look forward to
support film grids (pages 116-133); and working with you. Please
products available exclusively from contact our customer service
Electron Microscopy Sciences: Datacolor and technical departments if we can help discuss any of
CHROMACAL™ (page 160-163); Nightsea these products with you in further detail regarding your
CryoJane Workstation, (page 880-883); LatticeAx (page 432- particular application. Your comments and suggestions are
page 600
435); Lynx II Tissue Processor (pages always welcome. It’s how we continue to grow. We achieve
987-989); Cryo Workstation (pages 600-601); FIRM (page 32, success if you do.
37, 473); EMS-UAR (page 68), and much more.
For those new to our catalog, you will find the products
organized in sections to enhance your experience. There are
entire sections devoted to particular fields, such as Histology
or Materials Sciences, to help researchers quickly narrow Stacie Kirsch and the EMS Team
their focus on products and equipment appropriate for their

Electron Microscopy Sciences

P.O. Box 550 • 1560 Industry Rd.
Hatfield, Pa 19440
look for us...
Tel: (215) 412-8400 • (800) 523-5874
Fax: (215) 412-8450
email: sgkcck@aol.com
stacie@ems-secure.com
www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec01_007_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 5/18/15 11:44 PM Page 1

Table of Contents
1. Chemicals for Electron Microscopy,
Light Microscopy and Histology .................................................8-70
• Adhesives and Mountants...9-21 • Buffers: Prepared...26-30 • FIRM...32
• Fixatives...38-45 • Formaldehyde...40-41 • Glutaraldehyde...43-44
• Osmium...55 • Picric...58 • Uranium Products...68-69

2. ImmunoGold Reagents...................................................72-90
• Introduction/Micrographs...72–73 • Product Information...74–81
• Product Listing...82–85 • Frequently Asked Questions...86–89
• Custom Labelling...89 • Immunogold Newsletters & Flyers...89
• EMS and Aurion ImmunoGold/Silver Staining Workshops...90

3. Embedding Media Kits for Biological & Materials Science .....92-102

• Durcupan, Epo-Fix, JB-4, LR White, Histocryl, and more...92-97 • Technovit
GMA and MMA...98-100 • Unicryl...101 • Casting, Potting, and Encapsulating
Resins...101-102

4. Grids, TEM Support Films, Grid Staining

& Storage...................................................................104-150
• Gilder – a reliable support specimen grid source...104-107 • EMS – Square
Mesh and Oval Hole...107 • Veco – the most rigid grids available...108-111
• Maxtaform – smooth edges, firm support, and a large open area...112
• Athene Grids...112 • Index – Alpha Numeric and Asbestos Index Grids...112-113
• Synaptek™ unflexible grids, made of beryllium-copper...114 NEW: Athene Grids,
• Beryllium Grids for TEM...114 • Embra and Molybdenum Grids...115 see page 112
• Support Film on Grids...116-133 • C-flat™ Holey Carbon Grids for cryo-
TEM...134-137 • QUANTIFOIL Holey Carbon Films...138-139 • Graphene
Films for TEM...140-141 • Grid Preparation Supplies...142-150

5. Silicone Nitride Mesh and Films................................152-158

• DuraSiN™ Film and Mesh for TEM...152-156 • DuraSiN™ Customization...157
• Pyrolytic Graphite...158

6. Calibration Standards, Specimens, and Aids.............160-174

• Color Calibration System for Optical Microscopy...160-163
• Low Magnification Calibration Standards for SEM and LM...164-165
• SEM Calibration Specimens...164-165 • Resolution and Gray Level Test
Specimens...164-165 • Back-Back-Scattered Electron and EDS...165
• Calibration Specimens for TEM and STEM...165-166 • MAG*I*CAL®...168
• Diffraction Standards...168 • Measuring Aids...168 • Tip Check and NEW: Color Calibration
Nioprobe for SPM...169 • Magnification References SPM, AFM, SEM...170-174 System for Optical
Microscopy,
7. Microscope Accessories ............................................176-190 see pages 160-163

• Apertures and Aperture Cleaning...176-177 • Recoating TEM Viewing

Screens...178 • Standard Loop Filaments...179 • Lanthanum Hexaboride
LaB6 Cathodes...181 • Denka LaB6 Cathodes...180 • Applied Physics
Lanthanum and Cerium Hexaboride CeB6 Cathodes...182-185 • Pt and "PTFE"
Crucibles...190 • Apezion Vacuum Greases and Diffusion Pump Oils...186-189

8. Nanomanipulation and FIB Lift Outs..........................192-194

• Nanomanipulation Probe Tips...192 • Lift-Out Grids, TEM Holders, and
Thinning...193-194

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 1

Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec01_001-006_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 7/2/14 3:38 AM Page 2

Table of Contents
9. MAC Standards ..........................................................196-204
• MAC Reference Standards for X-ray Microanalysis...197-204 • MAC X-ray
Microanalysis for TEM...198 • Compound, Pure Metal, NBS, and BAS
Standards...198-199 • MAC Reference Materials for Auger Electron
Microscopy...200-201 • MAC Standards for X-ray Fluorescence
Spectroscopy...202 • SEM PSEM Performance Standards...203-204

10. Mailers and Shippers.................................................206-212

• Laboratory and Diagnostic Mailing Systems

11. Specimen Preparation and Embedding Supplies.......214-367

• General Supplies...214-217 • Beakers and Bottles...217-224 • Vials,
Racks, Holders, and Lyophilization Containers...223-228 • Plastic, Pasteboard,
and Cocoon Boxes...230-233 • Sample Storage Sets, Membrane Boxes, and
Gel-Pak® 234-236 • Embedding Capsules and Holders...237-241 • Biopsy
Pads, Cloth, Lens Tissues, Towels...244-245 • Scribers, Slide Coating, and
Release Agents...248-250 • Molds, Chucks, and Holders...250-253
• Weighing Boats, Canoes, Dishes, and Paper...254 • Glass Knife Making
Supplies and microtomy supplies...255-257 • Laboratory Gloves...258-259
• Ultramicrotomy Aid Tools...255-258 • Netwell, Cell Strainers and Glass
Bottom Boats...269-271 • Cell Culture, Petri, Permanox Dishes, and
Seals...263-268 • Tissue Grinders...271-274 • Lab-Tek® Chamber Slide
Products...275-280 • Wells, Plates, Covers, Tissue Culture Inserts...281-283
• Mica Sheets and Disks...284-285 • ACLAR®–Fluoropolymer Films...286
• Pipettes and Pipette Fillers...287-293 • Dissecting Kits...295
• Razor Blades, Scapels, and Saws...296-302 • Tissue Matrices and Sampling
Tools...303-308 • Slide Markers, Liquid Blockers, Bio-Imager, and PAP
Pens...309-311 • Slide Printer, Bar Code Scanner...312-313
NEW: FLOWMI™
Cell Strainers, • Microscope Slides...313-322: - Plastic and Glass Microscope Slides...314-
see page 271 323 - Micro Cover Glasses and Cover Slips...324-327 - Microscope Slide
Storage Boxes, Trays, and Holders...328-335 - Microscope Slide Mailers, Files,
Drains, and Container...328-335 • Microarrays and Hybridization...336-361
• Filtration, Filters, Syringes, and Hypodermic Needles, Swabs...362-366
• Gel Electrophoresis and X-ray Autography...367

12. Material Sciences and Metrology ..............................370-430

• Cold and Hot Mounting Media, Molds, and Pressure Chamber...370-372
• Adhesives and Mountants...373-375 • Replicating Films and Membrane
NEW: Slide Printer,
see pages 312-313 Boxes...375-377 • Polishing Supplies...378-382 - Cloths, Lapping Films,
and Film Discs...378-382 - Powders, Pastes, Suspensions and Diamond
Compounds...378-382 • Sample Grinding and Sectioning...382-383
• Micro & Mini-tools...384-391 • Tools - Probes, Scribers, Pin Vise, Cleavers,
Sharpeners...392 • Instrumentation...392-430: - Micro-Manipulators, Micro
Drilling Systems, and Disc Punch...392 - Grinder, Otolith Polishing, and Micro
Polisher...394-395 - Spark Cutter and Accessories...396-398 - Rotary Disc and
UltraSonic Cutters...398 - Electropolisher and Electrolytic Jet Thinning...399
- Diamond Wheel Saws...400-401 - Wire Saws...402-406 - Dimpler for TEM
Preparation...407 - Tripod Polishers for SEM TEM Preparation...408 - Lapping
and Polishing Machines and Fixtures...412-421 - Rail Polisher, Twin Jet
Electropolishing System and UniDisc...422-424 - Plasma Cleaning and Etching
and Ion Beam Sputter...425-429 - Crystal Orientation...429
NEW: Fiber Lensing & - Micro Cleaving...430
Polishing Instruments,
see pages 414-419
2 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec01_001-006_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 7/2/14 3:38 AM Page 3

Table of Contents
13. Silicon Wafer Cleaving System, Tools
and General Accessories ...........................................432-444
• Cleaving System...432-435 General Supplies...436 • Adhesives...437 •
Omni Grids...439 • Membrane and Gel Boxes...440-441 • Hand-held Micro &
Mini Tools...438 • Wafer Tweezers...442-444

14. Histology and Light Microscopy ................................446-610

• Reagents for Fixing, Dehydrating, Clearing and Staining...446-465 • Chart of
Dyes and Stains for Histopathlogy...466-467 • Certified Dyes/Stains...468-471
• Staining Solutions...472-475 • Prepared Staining Kits...476-491: -
Bacterial, Fungal and Inclusion Body Stains - Stain for Blood and Hematological
Elements - Bones and Calcium- Carbohydrate and Mucosubstance- Connective
Tissue- Cytoplasmic Granule - Fat and Lipid- Mineral & Pigment- Neurological NEW: Silicon Wafer
Tissue- Nuclear Stains- Papanicolaou, General & Misc • Embedding Cleaving Systems,
Media...492-495 • Aldehyde Control Systems...494 • Tools and Gadgets for see pages 432-435
Histology Preparation...496-510: - Scalpels Blades and Knives...496-498
- Scissors and Probes...498-502 - Loops, Needles, Sterilizers and
Spatulas...502-510 - Bone Rongeurs, Cutters, Shears, and Saws...508-512
- Forceps and Dissecting Kits...511 • Adhesives and Mounting Media...512-517
• Staining Apparatus...518-526 • General Supplies...527-531 • Marker
Pens...532-534 • Tissue Embedding and Processing Cassettes...540-545
• Cryo-Embedding...546-547 • Cytology Funnel Sample Chambers...548-549
• Embedding Supplies, Capsules, Molds, and Markers...550-555 • Slide Printer,
Bar Code Scanner...556 • Microscope Slides...558-571: - Plastic and Glass
Microscope Slides...558-567 - Micro Cover Glasses and Cover Slips...568-571 NEW: CRYOJANE,
see pages 600-601
- Microscope Slide Storage Boxes, Trays, and Holders...572-575 - Microscope
Slide Mailers, Files, Drains, and Container...576-579 • Microtome Blades,
Holders and Supplies...580-583 • Tissue-Tek® Tissue Processor and
Embedding System...584-586 • Microtome and Microtome/Cryostat...587-594
• Cytocentrifuge...595 • Tissue Stainer and Embedding Center...596-600
• CRYO JANE: Cryostat Section Preparation Aids...600-601 • Paraffin
Embedding and Section Mounting...602-604 • Slide Warmers and
Ovens/Incubators...604-606 • Pathscan IV Digital Histology Slide Scanner...606
• Slide, Cassette, and Tissue Block Storage...607-610

15. Antigen Retrieval .......................................................612-616

• Antigen Retrievers...612-614 • Retriever Slides...614 • Buffers...614-616

16. Scanning Electron Microscope Supplies ...................618-676

• Scintillators...618 • Specimen Mounts...619-624 • Fornesic Kits...626-628
NEW: HistoPro® 200
• SEM Specimen and FIB and STEM Sample Holders...629-638 • Portable see page 598
Storage Containers and Mount Storage Boxes...637-638 • Colloidal Compounds
and Conductive Adhesives...640-645 • Conductive Adhesives Tabs, Tapes, and
Sheets...645-649 • WETSEM® Capsules for Hydrated SEM Samples...650-664
• SPM, AFM, SEM Calibration Standards...665-669 • MeX 3D Scanning
Electron Microscope...670-675 • Scanning Electron Microscope Digital
Images...676

NEW: Tools and Supplies

for Forensics,
see page 626-628

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 3

Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec01_001-006_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 7/2/14 3:38 AM Page 4

Table of Contents
17. Cryo Supplies and Accessories .................................678-698
• Cryo Chambers...678 • Cryo Accessories including aprons, gloves, tissue
freezing medium, cryogen spray, and dewars ...679-680 • Cryo Vials, Tubes,
Storage and Racks...680-684 • Freezer racks...685 • Cooling Chambers
and Ice Baths...686-689 • Cryo Dewars and Flasks...690-691 • Freeze
Substitution...693-693 • Dry Ice Makers...693 • Cryogenic Labels, Tags
and Markers...694-698

18. DiATOME Diamond Knives ..........................................700-716

• Manufacturing...701 • Characteristics of the DiATOME knives...701
• The different knife types and ordering information and their applications...702-703
• DiATOME ultra...704 • DiATOME ultra sonic...705 • DiATOME cryo...706
• DiATOME cryo 25... • DiATOME cryo immuno...706 • DiATOME trimtool 20
and trimtool 45...707 • DiATOME AFM, ultra and cryoPage...708 • DiATOME
histo and histo jumbo...709 • DiATOME histo-cryo...709 • manipulator...710
• Special DiATOME Diamond Knife Programs...711 • DiATOME Services
NEW: DiATOME ...712-713 • DiATOME Unique Characteristics and Justifications ...713
manipulator, • Diamond Knife Handling and Use Manual...714-716
see page 710

19. Photography: Film and Supplies................................718-755

• Kodak Film including Electron Microscopy Film...718 • Instant Films and Film
Holders from Fujifilm...720 • Photographic Papers from Ilford...720
• Photographic Chemicals from Ilford and Kodak...720 • Darkroom Exhaust
Fans and Louvers...722 • Mohr Automatic Film and Print Processor...723
• Developing Tanks, Film Racks, Tongs, Squeegees, and Dryers...724-727
• Cutters and Rotary Trimmers...728-729 • Easels and Enlargers...729-733
NEW: INFINITY 3-3UR • Enlarging Focusing Aids, and Light Gathering Magnifiers...734 • Film Safes,
Research-Grade Film Cleaner, and Static Eliminators...735 • Tapes, Sprays, and Adhesives for
Microscopy Camera,
see page 751 Photo Mounting...736-739 • Darkroom Timers, Safe Lights, and Light
Boxes...740-743 • Dry Transfer Lettering Sheets...744-745 • Negative
NEW: EMS High-End Envelopes, Film Sleeves, and CD Sleeving...746-747 • File Cabinet Systems
Medical Tweezers, and Portable Storage Chests...746-749 • Scanning Electron Microscope Digital
see page 756-757 Images...749 • INFINITY Digital Microscope Cameras...750-754

20. Tweezers, Dissecting Tools, Instruments,

and Gadgets...............................................................756-853
• EMS's Tweezer Line...756-771: - Medical Tweezers...756-757
-High Precisions and Ultra Fine Tweezers...758-762 - Thin and Long...762
- Ergonomic...763 - Flat Tip...764 - ESD Safe...765 - Ceramic and Ceramic
Tipped...765 - General Purpose Tweezers...766 - Fiber and Fiber Tipped...767
- EMS Synthetic Fiber Tweezers...768 - Surface Mount and Optoelectric...769
- Wafer...770-771 • Dumont Tweezers...772-797: - Positive Action Standard
and Biological...772-781 - Medical...782-784 - Medical Tweezers; Clamp
Style...785 -Diamond Tipped...788 - Negative-Action Standard and
Biological...785-788 - Straight Positive Action Electronic Grade...788-791
- Curved and Angled Positive Action, Electronic Grade...792-793 - Negative
Action Style; Electronic Grade...793-794 - Mini, ESD, and Wafer Handling
Tweezers...794-796 - Tweezer Sets and Boxes...797 • Rubis Steel, Plastic,
and Wafer Tweezers...797-809: - High Tech Tweezers (Nano, Ion, Grip)/Plastic
Tweezers and Tweezer Accessories
continued...

4 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874

Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec01_001-006_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 7/2/14 3:39 AM Page 5

Table of Contents
20. Tweezers, Dissecting Tools, Instruments, and Gadgets (continued)
• Dissecting Tools and Instruments...812-820: - Diamond Dissecting Scalpel
Blade...812 - MicroPoint Scissors, Micro Forceps, and Micro Dissecting...813-816
- Forceps, Scissors, Needles, and Dissecting Kits...816-828 • Files, Calipers,
Scribers, Burnishing Tools, Sharpening Stones...829-831 • Flexible Shaft
Machine and Abrasive Wheels...831-832 • Vises, Clamps, Wrenches, NEW: Rotary Diamond
Micro-Engraver Pen,
Screwdrivers, Pliers, and Tool Kits...833-835 • Micro Manipulators see page 838
and Probes...836 • Mini-Tools, Pin Vise, Diamond Scribing Tools,
and Spatulas...837-845 • Forceps Warmer, Heaters, Demagnetizer and
Third Hand...846 • Timers, pH, Counters, Light Meters, Thermometers,
Microwave Detectors...847 • Smart Tweezers,Vacuum Pick-up, and Pen
Vac...852 • MicroSample Manipulation and Measurements: Tools...840-843
21. Illuminators, Magnifiers, Microscopes
and Graticules ...........................................................854-930
• Compound Light Microscopes: Upright and Inverted...854-855 • Digital
Microscopes; EVOS...856-861 • Microscopes for Educational and Clinical
Uses...862-864 • Polarized and Metallurgical Light Microscopes...868-869
• Stereo Microscopes...865-868 • Digital Hand Held Microscope...870-877
• Mobile Device Microscope...878-879 • NightSea, Fluorescence Adapters,
Lights...880-883 • Head Band Magnifiers, Loupes, Pocket Microscope, and
Stereo Viewers...886-890 • Illuminated Magnifiers including Magnilite...890-894
• Measuring Magnifiers, Scales, and Focusing Eyepieces...895 • Microscope
NEW: EVOS Digital
Graticles and Stage Micrometers...896-899 • Standard Reticles...900-902 Microscopes, see pages
• Eyepiece Graticules...903-914 • Stage Graticules...915-921 856-861
• Optical Resolution Charts, Ronchi Rulings and Grids...922-923
• Counting Chambers...924-930

22. Air and Environmental Sampling Tools..................... 932-936

• Air and Environmental Sampling Tools / Equipment

23. Cleaning Solutions and Accessories..........................938-954

• LAB-AIR System; Electronic Air Purifiers...938 • Laboratory Cleaning Solutions
and Supplies...939-941 • Ultrasonic Benchtop Cleaners...942-943 NEW MODELS:
• Duster Products and Pressure Sprayers...945-946 • Static Eliminators...947 Branson Ultrasonic
Benchtop Cleaners,
• Laboratory Gloves...948-950 • Cloths, Tissue, Mini-Vac, Metal Polish, see pages 942-943
and Applicators...951-954

24. Vacuum Pumps & Evaporation Supplies....................956-962

• Vacuum Pumps...956-957 • Metal Wire, Foils, Baskets, and Boats...958-959
• Carbon and Graphite for Evaporation...960-961 • Sputter Coater Targets...962

25. Cell Stretcher.............................................................964-968

• Computer Controlled Cell Deforming - Cell Stretcher

26. Vibration Isolation .....................................................970-978

• Vibration Tables and Isolation • Isolation Platforms

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 5

Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec01_001-006_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 7/2/14 3:39 AM Page 6

Table of Contents
27. Equipment and Accessories ....................................980-1100
• EMS-820 Precision Pulsed Laboratory Microwave Oven...980-981
• Supplies for the EMS 820 Laboratory Microwave Oven...981-982 • EMS 9000
Microwave Oven and Accessories...984-986 • EMS LYNX II Automated Tissue
Processor...987-989 • EMS Oscillating Tissue Slicers...990-993
• Vibrating Microtomes...994-997 • Rapid Immersion Freezer...998-1000
• Cooling Stage for Scanning Electron Microscopes...1004-1105
• Thermocirculator and Recirculating Heater / Chillers...1006-1007
• Coaters and Coater Targets Replacement Parts...1008-1043 • “Mini” Sputter
Coater Glow Discharge...1014-1015 • Rotary Pumped Carbon and Sputter
Coating System...1018-1021 • Turbo-Pumped Sputter and Carbon
Coater...1022-1025 • Turbo-Pumped Sputter/Carbon Coater for Glove
Box...1026-1029 • Large Chamber Sputter Coaters...1030-1033
• Dual Head Turbo-Pumped Sputter Coater...1040-1043 • Plasma Ashers
NEW MODELS: For Ashing, Etching, and Cleaning...1056-1057 • Freeze Drier and Turbo Freeze
Vibrating Microtomes,
see pages 994-997 Drier...1044-1047 • Critical Point Driers...1048-1055 • Cryo-SEM Preparation
System...1058-1063 • Desiccators and Desiccants...1064-1071
• Centrifuges, Tubes, and Racks...1072-1074 • Stirrers, Stirring Hotplates,
and Digital Hotplates...1074-1080 • Dri Baths, Modular Blocks, and Fixed
Baths...1081-1082 • Stirring Bars, Stirring Rods, and Hand Mixers...1083-1085
• Vortex Mixers, Microplate Mixers, and Magnetic Stirrers...1086-1087
• Tissue Rotators, Mixer Vortex, and Rotator/Rocker...1088-1093
• Oven/Incubator, Vacuum Ovens, and Incubators...1094-1097
• Cooling Chambers...1098-1099 • Freeze Substitution...1100
• Ultraviolet Lamps and Lab...1100 • Jacks...1100

28. Safety and Lab Organization .................................1102-1124

NEW: Turbo-Pumped • Spill Control, Stabilizers, and Cleanup...1102-1103 • Hand Care, Cleansers,
Sputter/Carbon Coater
for Glove Box, see and Germicidal Solutions...1106-1107 • Lab Organizers...1108-1111
pages 1026-1029 • Lab Carts, Shelves, and Trays...1111-1112 • Drying Racks, Holders, Carriers,
Turntables...1120-1121 • Lead Shields, Surface Protectors, Hot Mits,
and Wash Bottles...1122-1123 • Air Purifiers...1124

29. Labels, Tapes, Dispensers......................................1126-1144

• Histology and Microscope Slide Labels...1126-1127 • Temperature
and Specialty Tapes & Dispensers...1128-1138 • Tough-Tags Polyester
Labels...1131-1137

30. Starter EM Kits ......................................................1146-1147

NEW: AirChek® Badges, • Kits for TEM Preparation...1146-1147 • CleanKit for SEM, TEM
see page 1120 and Microtomy...1147

Technical Tips, Data Sheets ...................................1148-1151

• Technical Tips and Recommended Articles Listing...1148-1150 • Technical
Data Sheets Listing...1151

Catalog Number Index ...........................................1152-1183

Alphabetical Index .................................................1184-1198
Ordering Information and Conditions of Sale .................1199

6 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874

Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec01_007_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 7/2/14 3:35 AM Page 7

SECTION 1

Chemicals for Electron Microscopy,

Light Microscopy, and Histology
Adhesives and Mountants
Colloidal Compounds
Ready-To-Use Prepared Buffers
Prepared Fixatives
FIRM
Formaldehyde
Glutaraldehyde
Immersion Oils
Osmium Tetroxide
Paraplast Embedding Medium
Uranyl and Uranium Compunds
Xylene and Xylene Substitutes

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 7

Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec01_008-021_EMS_Full Line 2011_sec03 5/17/15 1:09 PM Page 8

SECTION 1 Chemicals for Electron Microscopy, Light Microscopy, & Histology

ABOUT OUR CHEMICALS...
 Storage conditions of EACH chemical are noted in the box left of
the catalog number. CODE: RT = Room Temperature  Acetone, Glass Distilled
 For increased shelf life of room temperature stored chemicals, see equip- CAS #67-64-1 U.V. Absorption - 1cm cell vs. H2O
ment section for our complete line of Desiccator Cabinets. All chemicals
must be kept away from direct sunlight. λ(nm) 400 350 340 330
 All specific gravities, unless otherwise specified are measured at water = 1 A 0.01 0.02 0.10 1.0
 All of the EMS stains are certified.
RT 10015 100ml
 For a chart of uses and applications of our Dyes & Stains, see pages 466-467
 EM Grade = ACS Reagent
RT 10016 4x 100ml

 Acetone: Alchohol
 4-Acetamido-4’-Isothiocyanato-2, See Histology Section, page 446 
2’-Stilbenedisulfonic Acid Disodium
Salt Hydrate  Acetonitrile, Reagent, A.C.S.
(Disodium 4 acetamido-4’-isothiocyanato-stilben-2, CH3CN FW 41.05 CAS #75-05-8
2’-disulfonate; SITS) A non-carcinogenic substitute for Propylene Oxide, used in tissue processing
C17H12N2O7S3Na2 F.W. 498.50 CAS #1023-76-8 for TEM. Good for infiltration with EMbed-812 or other Epon-812 substitutes.
Tarnowski, B.I. et al, EMSA proceedings, Detroit, MI page 38 (1984)
SITS has been used as a vital stain, as a label for immunostaining, and
RT 10020 450ml
as a neuronal tracer. SITS is also a non-penetrating fluorescent marker RT 10021 4x450ml
for erythrocyte membranes which acts as a potent inhibitor of anion
transport. For more information related to the preparation and
characterization of SITS, please refer to: Jakobsen, P. and Horobin,
Richard W. (1989). Stain Technology, Vol.64, No.6 pg.301-313.
TECHNICAL TIP
RT 10030 SITS, Disodium Salt 250mg Acetonitrile Is A Better And Safer Dehydrating
Solvent For Transmission Electron Microscopy.
 Acetate Buffer Propylene Oxide and Ethanol are commonly used dehydrating solvents for
See Buffer Section page 26  processing tissues for electron microscopy. But both solvents, however,
RT 11480 225 ml have some undesirable properties: they are highly flammable, volatile,
RT 11482 500 ml toxic and potentially carcinogenic. Acetonitrile is a direct substitute for
ethanol and propylene oxide; furthermore, it is safer to use and requires
 Acetic Acid, Glacial, Reagent A.C.S shorter dehydration times. It is freely miscible with water, alcohol, acetone
and epoxy resin and it does not interfere with epoxy polymerization.
C2H4O2 F.W. 60.05 CAS 64-19-7 Harold H. Edwards, Yu-Yan Yeh, Betty I. Tarnowsky, and Gregory R.
Assay min 99.7% Schonbaum. (1992). Acetonitrile as a Substitute for Ethanol/ Propylene
Oxide in Tissue Processing for Transmission Electron Microscopy:
RT 10040 Acetic Acid, Glacial 500 ml Comparison of Fine Structure and Lipid Solubility in Mouse Liver, Kidney,
RT 10041 Acetic Acid, Glacial 2.5 L and Intestine. Microsc. Res. and Technique Vol 21, pg.39-50

 Acetic Acid, Aqueous Solution

Prepared from acetic acid glacial with de-ionized water  Acid Alcohols
An acidified alcohol solution for the differentiation of regressive stains.
RT 10042-02 Acetic Acid, 0.2% (v/v) Solution 500 ml
RT 10042-05 Acetic Acid, 0.5% (v/v) Solution 500 ml RT 26071-01 Acid Alcohol, 0.5% HCl in 70% Alcohol 1L
RT 10042-10 Acetic Acid, 1.0% (v/v) Solution 500 ml RT 26071-04 Acid Alcohol, 0.5% HCl in 70% Alcohol 4x1 L
RT 10042-50 Acetic Acid, 5.0% (v/v) Solution 500 ml RT 26072-01 Acid Alcohol, 1% HCl in 70% Alcohol 1L
RT 26072-04 Acid Alcohol, 1% HCl in 70% Alcohol 4x1 L
26073-01
 Acetone, Reagent, A.C.S. RT

RT 26073-04
Acid Alcohol, 1% HCl in 95% Alcohol
Acid Alcohol, 1% HCl in 95% Alcohol
1L
4x1 L
CH3COCH3 F.W. 58.08 CAS #67-64-1
A.C.S. Specifications:  Acid Fuchsin, Certified, C.N. #DcR-8
Assay ..............................................................................Min. 99.5%
Aldehyde (as HCHO) ..............................................................0.002% (Rubin S, Fuchsin S, Fuchsin Acid, Acid Magenta, Acid Violet 19)
Density (G/ml) at 25°C ..................................................Max. 0.7857 C20H17N3Na2O9S3 F.W. 585.54 CAS #3244-88-0
Titratable Acid ............................................................0.0003 meq/g. Solubility: 0.053% Water; 1.21% Alcohol
Titratable Base............................................................0.0006 meq/g. RT 10035 25 g
Isopropyl Alcohol ....................................................................0.05%
Methanol (CH3OH)....................................................................0.05%  Acridine Orange
Residue after Evaporation ......................................................0.001% (Basic Orange 14)
Solubilty in water ............................................................To Pass test C17H19N3HCl•ZnCl2 F.W. 369.94 CAS #10127-02-3
Substances Reducing Permanganate ............................To Pass Test Ultrastructural probes on DNA templates within human bone marrow and
Water ........................................................................................0.5% lymph node cells. Frenstar, J., Adv. Cell Mol. Biol., 3, 1(1974) Used to
detect changes in DNA template activity within cells. Frenster, J. Cell
RT 10000 1qt. (946ml)
RT 10010 4x1qt.
Nucl., 1, 565 (1974) Fluorescent dye for cytochemistry. J. Histochem.
RT 10012 250ml Cytochem., 31, 737 (1983) J. Lab. Med., 15 (3),180, (1984)
RT 10014 4x250ml RT 10050 25g

8 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874

Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec01_008-021_EMS_Full Line 2011_sec03 6/30/14 12:21 AM Page 9

Chemicals for Electron Microscopy, Light Microscopy, & Histology SECTION 1

ADHESIVES AND MOUNTANTS

 Acrytol Mounting Media  Biobond;
Acrytol is a rapid-drying mounting medium which enables slides to be Tissue Section
screened immediately. It has a low viscosity, allowing the medium to flow Adhesive
easily. It also prevents air bubbles from becoming trapped. Having prepared the tissue
Acrytol contains an antioxidant to inhibit stain fading and prevent the specimen for
formulation of annual rings. A thin coating of Acrytol is all that is needed to immunolabeling it is then
adhere a coverglass to a microscope slide. imperative to perform the
incubations with a protocol
It is soluble in xylene, toluene and most xylene substitutes.
designed to maximize the
specific signal and minimize
RT 13518 Acrytol Mounting Medium Pint the background. Some
incubation conditions may
cause the tissue sections to
 Aron Alpha®-Ethyl Ultra Speed Adhesive (Quickbond) be removed from the glass slide. Typical tissue
Aron Alpha®, type 200 is a one component, room temperature section adhesives such as poly-L-lysine, Elmer’s
curing structural adhesive composed mainly of alpha cyanoacrylate glue, chrome alum, etc... are not suitable for
monomer in a liquid state. When this monomer is applied in a use with immunogold labeling because of the
single thin coating to the bonding surface of the material, it instantly increased background caused by the attraction
solidifies through polymerization to produce an extra high strength, of gold particles to the adhesive on the slide.
colorless bond with virtually no shrinkage. Aron Alpha bonds almost Furthermore, the surface of glass slides is
any non-porous material except fluorocarbons. Solvents such as uneven and it is activated by the silicon
gasoline, propane, oil, alcohol or benzene do not affect resinified tetrahedral structure. It, therefore, provides
Aron Alpha. The adhesive itself contains no solvents. The Aron active sites for absorbtion of proteins or
Alpha bond has a high tensile strength but a relatively lower shear reactions with chemicals and reagents. Thus, it
strength. Aron Alpha is not a gap filler. Good surface contact is is important to minimize this possibility by
essential. Meets MIL-A-46050 C. Ideal for the bonding of tissues coating the surface with a material that is of low
to a tissue-slicer, tissue block or to a blank block etc. reactivity towards reagents. BIOBOND produces
a very strong adhesion between the glass slide
Physical Properties of Type 200 and the tissue section for subsequent
Before use (Liquid state) After use (Bonded state) incubations, as well as a protective layer to
Refractive Index, N20°C/D ......................1.4363 Solubility Paramete ...................................10.72 minimize the interaction between the charged
Viscosity @25°C (Brookfield)............................2 Softening Temp. glass surface with the reagents.
Specific Gravity, 20°C/4°C ........................1.050 (Viscat State), (°F) ........................................293 BIOBOND is suitable for all kinds of tissue
Boiling Point, 5mmHg, °F .....................140-144 Melting Point (°F)...............................392 – 406 specimens including but not limited to paraffin
Melting Point (°F)........................................-130 Specific Gravity, 20°C / 4°C....................1.2483 wax, resin sections, cell smears, cytospins and
Flash Point (°F) ............................................181 Refractive Index, N20°C/D ......................1.4870
cryostat sections.
Solubility.......................acetone, MEK, benzene, Electric resistance ...............................10 11-13
BIOBOND is supplied in a 20ml vial, which is
toluene, ethylacetate, nitromethane Solubility .........................acetone, nitromethane
sufficient to coat at least 1000 slides.
RT 72588 Quick Bond – Aron Alpha 200 5x2g/bx 0-5˚C 71304 Biobond 20 ml

CoreDish™
Multiple Biopsy Containers Half Prefilled
with 10% Formalin
We are proud to offer a multi-compartment container in the shape of a dish
and half prefilled with 10% Neutral buffered Formalin, for holding and
transporting biopsies. It is supplied with a leak-proof closure with O-ring
ensuring total protection of contents. It conforms to OSHA directives.

For more information, see page 42. 

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 9

Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec01_008-021_EMS_Full Line 2011_sec03 6/30/14 12:21 AM Page 10

SECTION 1 Chemicals for Electron Microscopy, Light Microscopy, & Histology

ADHESIVES AND MOUNTANTS
 Biomeda™ Substitutes
 Fluoro-Gel (A Direct Substitute for
BioMeda™ Gel-Mount)
Fluoro-Gel is a water based mounting medium designed for the
permanent mounting of fluorescent stained tissues, which may either be
damaged or soluble in organic solvents, such as xylene or toluene. This
unique formula prevents rapid photo-bleaching of FITC, Texas Red,
AMCA, Cy2, Cy3, Cy5, Alexa Fluoro 488, Alexa Fluoro 594, Green
Fluorescent Protein (GFP), Tetramethylyrhodamine, Redox, Phycoerythrin
(RP-E), Phyocyanin (PC), and Allophycocyanin (APC). The fluorescence is
retained during prolonged storage at 4ºC in the dark.
 Fluoro Gel with DABCO™
Application: Immunofluorescence, confocal microscope. Fluoro Gel with antifading agent 1, 4-Diazobicyclo-(2,2,2-octane
For our original formula: (DABCO™) is an aqueous mounting medium for preserving
fluorescence of tissue and cell smears. This unique formula prevents
0-5˚C 17985-10 Fluoro-Gel, (with Tris Buffer) 20 ml
0-5˚C 17985-11 Fluoro-Gel, (with Tris Buffer) 100 ml rapid photobleaching of FITC, Texas Red, AMCA, Alexa fluoro 488, Alexa
fluoro 594, Cy dyes, tetramethyly rhodamine, and Redox. The
For a more stable pH:
fluorescence is retained during prolonged storage at 4°C in the dark.
0-5˚C 17985-30 Fluoro-Gel, (with TES Buffer) 20 ml Refractive Index: 1.366 +/- 0.002
0-5˚C 17985-31 Fluoro-Gel, (with TES Buffer) 100 ml
0-5˚C 17985-40 Fluoro-Gel, (with PIPE Buffer) 20 ml Application: Immunofluorescence, confocal microscopy.
0-5˚C 17985-41 Fluoro-Gel, (with PIPE Buffer) 100 ml Reagent: Ready to use mounting medium with anti-fading agent
Storage: 2-8°C is recommended
 Fluoro-Gel II Mounting Medium 2-8˚C 17985-01 Fluoro Gel with DABCO 20 ml
Fluoro-Gel II is similar to Fluoro-Gel, but Fluoro-Gel II contains DAPI (4, 2-8˚C 17985-02 Fluoro Gel with DABCO 100 ml
6-diamino-2-phenylindole), which is a counter stain for DNA. This 2-8˚C 17985-03 Fluoro Gel with DABCO 250 ml
product is to be used in in situ hybridization techniques or other 2-8˚C 17985-04 Fluoro Gel with DABCO 1000 ml
methods where fluorescence of DNA staining is required. DAPI excites
at 360 nm and emits at 460 nm, producing blue fluorescence. RNA is  Fluoro-Gel with Anti-Fading Mounting
also stained with DAPI. Medium
Application: Immunofluorescence, confocal microscopy. Fluoro-Gel Mounting Medium with a strong anti-fading agent 1,4-
phenylenediamine is an aqueous mounting medium for preserving
0-5˚C 17985-50 Fluoro-Gel II 20 ml
fluorescence of tissue and cell smears. This unique formula preserves
0-5˚C 17985-51 Fluoro-Gel II 100 ml
rapid photobleaching of FITC, Texas Red, AMCA, Cy2, Cy3, Cy5, Alexa
Fluoro 388, Alexa Fluoro 594 tetramethyly rhodamine, and Redox. The
 Fluoro-Gel III Mounting Medium fluorescence is retained during prolong storage at 4°C in the dark. This
Fluoro-Gel III Mounting Medium is similar to Fluoro-Gel, however, Fluoro- medium contains Phynylenediamine and is not suitable for
Gel III with the addition of PI (Propidium Iodide) which is a counterstain immunofluorescence of Cy dyes, Phycoerythrin (R-PR) phycocyanin (PC),
for DNA, makes this a unique mounting medium, which prevents rapid and allophycocyanin (APC). Refractive index: 1.366 +/- 0.002
photobleaching of FITC, Texas Red, AMCA, Cy2, Cy3, Cy5, Alexa Fluoro
488, Alexa Fluoro 594, Green Fluorescent protein (GFP), Application: Immuno-fluorescence, confocol microscopy.
Tetramethylyrhodamine, Redox, Phycoerythrin (RP-E), Phyocyanin (PC), Reagent: Prepared from TRIS buffer. Ready-to-use mounting medium
and Allophycocyanin (APC). The fluorescence is retained during with dark coffee color, this is normal, and does not interfere with
prolonged storage at 4ºC in the dark. This medium does not contain immuno-fluorescence
Phynylenediamine, which destroys immunofluoresccence of Cy dyes, Storage: 2 – 8°C is recommended. Protect from light. DO NOT FREEZE.
RP-E, PC, and APC. This product is to be used in in situ hybridization Cat. # Description Qty
techniques or other method where fluorescence of DNA staining is 2-8˚C 17983-20 Fluoro-Gel with Anti-Fading Agent 20 ml
required. PI excites at 535 nm, emits at 615 nm, producing a red 2-8˚C 17983-100 Fluoro-Gel with Anti-Fading Agent 100 ml
fluorescence. RNA is also stained with PI.
Application: Immunofluorescence, confocal microscope
 In-Situ Mount (A Direct Substitute for
BioMeda™ Situ Mount)
0-5˚C 17985-60 Fluoro-Gel III 20 ml
0-5˚C 17985-61 Fluoro-Gel III 100 ml In-Situ mounting medium is a unique mounting medium designed for
permanent preservation of tissue sections and cell smear with alkaline
phosphatase chromogens like NBT/BCIP and red stain.
Application: Mounting tissues and cell smears.
0-5˚C 17988-30 In-Situ Mount 30 ml

*The names BioMeda Gel Mount, Crystal Mount, Clarion, Situ Mount are all owned by
BioMeda Corporation

10 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874

Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec01_008-021_EMS_Full Line 2011_sec03 6/30/14 12:21 AM Page 11

Chemicals for Electron Microscopy, Light Microscopy, & Histology SECTION 1

ADHESIVES AND MOUNTANTS

 Biomeda™ Substitutes (continued)
 Clear-Mount (A Direct Substitute for BioMeda™ Crystal Mount)
Clear-Mount is a water based mounting medium designed for the permanent mounting of hydrated tissues, which may be
damaged by organic solvents. Such samples include cell smears, with peroxidase and alkaline phosphatase chromogens.
This mounting medium preserves Fast Red, Aminoethylycarbazole (AEC), NBT/BCIP, INT/BCIP chromogens and is
also compatible with counter-stain such as Hematoxylin and Nuclear Fast Red. It is also suitable for chromogens
like DAB and DAB with Nickel and Cobalt. It is not compatible with H & E staining.
Application: Mounting of Immunohisto slides.
For our original formula: For a more stable pH:
0-5˚C 17985-12 Clear-Mount, (with Tris Buffer) 30 ml 0-5˚C 17985-16 Clear-Mount, (with PIPE Buffer) 30 ml
0-5˚C 17985-15 Clear-Mount, (with Tris Buffer) 250 ml 0-5˚C 17985-17 Clear-Mount, (with PIPE Buffer) 100 ml
 Limonene-Mount (A Direct Substitutefor BioMeda™ Clarion Mount)  Biomount™
This mounting medium is made with limonene, a natural product from orange peels. It preserves tissues and cell Some mounting media oxidize
smears that can be dehydrated with organic solvents in immunohistochemistry, e.g. DAB and DAB with nickel or rapidly upon exposure to air,
cobalt. Our Limonene-Mount also works well with alkaline phosphatase chromogens, and organic solvent resistant forming carboxyl groups. This
Supper Fast Red. It is also a good choice for mounting H & E stained slides. can be more pronounced when
Application: Mounting tissues and cell smears. sections have been cleared in a
0-5˚C 17987-01 Limonene-Mount 100 ml solution containing aldehyde. It
0-5˚C 17987-06 Limonene-Mount 6x100 ml/bx is sometimes observed that the
0-5˚C 17987-25 Limonene-Mount 250 ml immunogold/silver signal fades
 EMS-Mount after a few weeks, or even in a
EMS-Mount is a non-permanent, low viscosity an aqueous mounting medium designed for mounting of tissue sections shorter time, from sections that
and cell smears with peroxidase and alkaline phosphatase chromogens that cannot be dehydrated with organic have been mounted with these
solvents. This mounting medium preserves Fast red, Aminoethylycarbazole (AEC), BCIP/NBT, BCIP/INT chromogens and media under cover slips. The
is also compatible with counterstain like Hematoxylin and Nuclear fast red (NFR). It is also suitable for chromogens like silver is still present, but has
DAB and DAB with nickel and cobalt. (It is not compatible with H and E staining). Refractive Index: 1.372 +/- 0.002 formed translucent silver
carboxylate salts. Visibility can
Application: Mounting of chromogens that cannot be dehydrated with organic solvents. be retrieved by removing the
Reagent: Ready to use mounting medium cover slip and washing in xylene
Storage: 2-8°C is recommended and then immersing the slide in
2-8˚C 17985-05 EMS-Mount 30 ml photographic developer, but this
2-8˚C 17985-06 EMS-Mount 100 ml is a tedious procedure.
2-8˚C 17985-07 EMS-Mount 250 ml BIOMOUNT is a specially
2-8˚C 17985-08 EMS-Mount 1000 ml
formulated mounting medium
 EMS Shield Mount that reduces fading of
EMS Shield Mount is an aqueous non-permanent, low viscosity mounting medium for immunofluorescence. This immunogold/silver signals in
unique formula prevents rapid photobleaching of FITC, Texas Red, AMCA, Cy2, Cy3, Cy5, Alexa fluoro 488, Alexa sections on glass slides. It is
fluoro 594, Green fluorescent protein (GFP), tetramethyly rhodamine and Redox. The fluorescence is retained suitable for resins as well as wax
during storage at 4°C in the dark. This medium does not contain phenylenediamine, which destroys embedded sections of tissue.
immunofluorescence of Cy dyes. Refractive Index : 1.380 +/- 0.002 RT 17894 BioMount 100ml
Application: Immunofluorescence, confocal microscopy.
Reagent: Ready to use mounting medium for Immunofluorescence.
Storage: 2-8°C is recommended TECHNICAL TIP
2-8˚C 17985-09 EMS Shield Mount 30 ml
Temperature Conversion
2-8˚C 17985-100 EMS Shield Mount 100 ml

 EMS Shield Mount with Anti Fading Degree Fahrenheit =

(1.8 x Degree Celsius) + 32
EMS Shield Mount with antifading agent 1, 4-Diazobicyclo-(2,2,2-octane (DABCO™) is an aqueous non-permanent,
low viscosity mounting medium for immunofluorescence. This unique formula prevents rapid photobleaching of FITC, Degree Celsius =
Texas Red, AMCA, Cy2, Cy3, Cy5, Alexa fluoro 488, Alexa fluoro 594, Green fluorescent protein (GFP), tetramethyly 0.555 (Degree Fahrenheit – 32)
rhodamine and Redox. The fluorescence is retained during storage at 4°C in the dark. This medium does not contain
phenylenediamine, which destroys immunofluorescence of Cy dyes. Refractive Index: 1.382 +/- 0.002
Application: Immunofluorescence, confocal microscopy.
Reagent: Ready to use mounting medium for Immunofluorescence.
Storage: 2-8°C is recommended
2-8˚C 17985-150 EMS Shield Mount with DABCO™ 30 ml
2-8˚C 17985-200 EMS Shield Mount with DABCO™ 100 ml

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 11

Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec01_008-021_EMS_Full Line 2011_sec03 6/30/14 12:21 AM Page 12

SECTION 1 Chemicals for Electron Microscopy, Light Microscopy, & Histology

ADHESIVES AND MOUNTANTS
® Certified Conductive Adhesives
EMS introduces a new reliable line of conductive adhesives which are certified by the Bureau
Veritas Quality International. Quality Standards: ISO 9001; EN29001; ANSI/ASQC Q91
® Silver Conductive 18DB70X ® Carbon Conductive
Silver Conductive Coating 18DB70X is a direct Adhesive 502
substitute for Silver Conductive Fluid 416, which is no A High Temperature Conductive Paint
longer available. This material was specially formulated
for use in geographic areas that demand the use of low Conductive Adhesive 502 is a combination of
VOC (Volatile Organic Compounds) products. It provides specially processed carbon particles in a
low ohms at very thin dry film thickness on almost any fluoroelastomer resin system designed to provide
surface, and exhibits excellent long term shielding and high resistance values. In its cured form, it exhibits
grounding properties. both high and low temperature flexibility and
Typical Properties: moisture resistance.
T As supplied (Liquid)
Pigment ..................................................Silver Advantages:
Binder ....................................................Acrylic T Withstands ambient temperatures of over
Solids content by weight ..............50.8% ± 5% 500°F (260°C)
Density ............................13.9 lb/gal (1.67kg/l) ® Silver Conductive T Remains flexible over temperature range of
T As applied: Adhesive 503 –40°F to over 500°F (260°C)
VOC ....................................0.5 lb/gal (59.6g/l) A High Temperature Conductive Paint T Cures at room temperature
Diluent ................Acetone (1:1 ratio by volume)
Drying time Silver paint 503 is a flexible, high temperature T Good adhesion to a variety of substrate
5 minutes air dry to touch/10 minutes to handle conductive material designed for a wide variety of T Excellent oxidation resistance
then 5 minutes at 180°–225°F (82° – 107°C) or uses, and adheres to most substrates. T Ready to use - easy to apply
air cure for 24 hrs.
T When dried: Advantages: T Typical Properties (as supplied)
Service temperature ..................300°F (150°C) T Withstands ambient temperatures of over Pigment ..............Specially Processed Carbon
Sheet resistance ......0.015 ohms/sq. in./mil (25μm) 500°F (260°C) Binder....................................Fluoroelastomer
Attenuation..............................................75 dB T Remains flexible over temperature range of Diluent ....................MethylEthylKetone (MEK)
–40°F to 500°F Color......................................................Black
RT 12684-15 Silver Conductive Coating 15 g
T Highly conductive – good adhesion to sub- Consistency ............................................Fluid
strates Density ..........................7.2lbs/gal (0.87 kg/l)
® Silver Conductive Adhesive T Dries at room temperature Solid content by weight ..........................13%
T Ready to use – easy to apply Viscosity ..............................600 ± 200 mPas
Paste 478SS (Brookfield RVT @ 20rpm)
Our adhesive 478SS is a conductive, silver-based
polymer which is used for thick film coatings where T Typical Properties (as supplied): Flash point....................................23°F (-°5C)
liquid silver is not an option. Once cured, it offers a very Pigment ............Specially Treated Silver 56% Shelf life for this product is one year under
high Tg (glass transition temperature) 153°F (67°C) to Binder....................................Fluoroelastomer original seal. Store in cool place
prevent blocking, and offers superior adhesion to Carrier ..........Methyl Isobuthyl Ketone (MIBK)
T Typical Properties (as cured)
polyester film. Adhesive 478SS can be cured at 200°F Color ......................Silver - Consistency: fluid
Density........................14.6 lbs/gal (1.75kg/L) Color......................................................Black
(93°C) within 15 minutes. Higher temperatures will
Solid content by volume ..........................18% Maximum service
reduce the time needed to achieve a final cure. Temperature: ..........................525°F (275°C)
Weight solids ..........................................62%
T Typical Properties (as supplied): Viscosity............................................1700cps Sheet resistance........130 ± 100 ohms/sq.in./
Shelf life for this product is two years under ..................................................1 mil dry film
Pigment ..................................................Silver
Binder ................................................Polyester original seal. Store in cool place Drying
Color ........................................................Silver T Typical Properties (as cured):
Air drying of the product is adequate for most
Dilutent ....................................Carbitol Acetate Color......................................................Silver applications. To assure complete solvent loss, the
Consistency ............Paste (13,000-28,000 cps) Service temperature ................525°F (275°C)
Solid content..................................72.5-75.5% coating can be baked for 15 minutes at 302°F
Sheet resistance ................0.05 ohms/sq. in/
Flash point ................................230°F (110°C) (150°C)
..................................................1mil dry film
Shelf life ..............6 months under original seal
Drying 12684-30 Carbon Conductive Paint 502 30 g
T Typical Properties (as cured): RT

Air dry coated part approximately 10 minutes

Color ......................................................Silver
(depending on humidity) before carrying out
Sheet Resistance ..<0.025 ohm/square inch @1 mil continued UUUUU
resistance checks. Air dry to touch in 30
RT 12685-15 Silver Conductive 15g seconds and it is ready for use in 2 minutes.
Adhesive 478SS
RT 12685-25 Silver Adhesive 25ml RT 12686-15 Silver Conductive 15g
478SS Thinner Adhesive 503

12 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874

Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec01_008-021_EMS_Full Line 2011_sec03 7/2/14 2:10 AM Page 13

Chemicals for Electron Microscopy, Light Microscopy, & Histology SECTION 1

ADHESIVES AND MOUNTANTS

 Certified Conductive  Colloidal Compounds and Conductive
Adhesives (cont.)
Adhesives
 Graphite Conductive  A) Silver Adhesives
Adhesive 154 Liquid; Colloidal Silver: 1-Methoxy-2-propanol
Adhesive 154 is an easy-to-apply resistance coating base. Fast drying. Average grain size less than
designed to provide high lubricity, conductivity, and 1 μm and Silver content is 60%. Sheet resistance is
excellent release properties to many non-conductive 0.02 ohm per square inch @ 1 mil thickness.
substrates, including most plastics. It is made from a Comes with a brush attached to the cap. Service
dispersion of colloidal graphite in an isopropanol base temperature is 30 minutes at 200°C.
which quickly air-dries, forms an uniform thin film
adherent layer. Air dries to touch in 5 minutes and is RT 12630 Silver Liquid 15g  D) Leit-C-Plast
ready for use in 30 minutes. After air drying, bake for RT 12641 Colloidal Silver A special adhesive with very high electrical
5 minutes at 167°F (75°C) to achieve optimum coating Extender 25ml conductivity and permanent plasticity for the
qualities in a shorter curing cycle. preparation of big specimens in SEM work.
 Typical Properties (as supplied) Paste; Colloidal Silver: Clear Lacquer base. Thick RT 12667 Leit-C-Plast 15g
Pigment ............................................Graphite base — ideal for non-flowing requirements. Easily
Color......................................................Black applied with micro-spatula or wooden toothpick.
Binder ......................................Celluosic resin Particle size ranging from 0.4–1 μm. 80% are less
Carrier ..........................................Isopropanol than 1 μm. Cure in 16–20 hours at room
Dilutent....................Isopropanol or equivalent temperature or 30 minutes at 125–150˚C
Consistency ..........................................Liquid
Weight solids ..........................................20%
RT 12640 Silver Paste 25g
Volume solids..........................................14% RT 12641 Colloidal Silver
Flash point ..................................52°F (11°C) Extender 25ml  E) Tempfix Adhesive
Shelf life ............6 months under original seal A thermoplastic adhesive for mounting powder
 Typical Properties (as cured) Wooden Picks, See Specimen Prep. specimens and small particles for SEM. It does
page 366  not contain any solvents and it is stable in high
Color ............................................Matte black
vacuum. It is not sticky at room temperature but
Service temp. ............................150°F (65°C)
Sheet resistance ..................1.2 K ohms/sq inch
 B) Graphite Adhesives becomes adhesive at 40°C and melts at 120°C.
..................................................@ 1 mil dry film Water Base: Flat surface texture. The average flake Tempfix may also be used as an embedding
size is 1μm. Service temperature: 200°C. medium.
RT 12691-30 Graphite Conductive Adhesive 154 30g
RT 12650 Graphite, Water base 50g RT 12668 Tempfix Adhesive Set each
 Graphite Conductive Isopropanol base: Flat surface texture.
Adhesive 112 The average flake size is 1μm. Service
Adhesive 112 is an air drying graphite coating of temperature is 65°C.
TECHNICAL TIP
unusually high conductivity. It provides excellent Mounting Powders,
RT 12660 Graphite, Isopropanol base 30g
static bleed properties and acts as a protective Granules, And Fibers
energy absorbing layer. It also offers good shielding RT 12661 Graphite Extender 30ml
performance (30-50 db over 50-450 MHz) at a
The thermoplastic adhesive, Tempfix (EMS
coating thickness of 2 mils. It is water based and  C) CCC Cat.# 12668), is an excellent smooth
useful in solvent prohibited applications. Carbon embedding medium for stabilizing powders,
Adhesive granules and fibers. Tempfix becomes sticky
To use: Air dry until all water has flashed off. Air An electrically at 40°C and melts at 120°C. To use: spread
dries to touch in 20 minutes, to handle in 25 minutes. Carbon a thin layer over a sample support disc and
It will continue to harden for 24 hours. It can be Conductive
forced dried at temperatures up to 160°F (71°C).
allow to cool. The sample is then sprinkled
Cement for on the hard surface and the temperature is
 Typical Properties (as supplied) specimen raised to 40°C for 30-60 seconds and
Pigment ............................................Graphite mounting in all allowed to cool again to room temperature.
Binder ..................................................Acrylic SEM work. After Excess particles are then removed by gentle
Dilutent ..................................................None drying of the cement, immediate investigation of
brushing or compressed air. At room temper-
Color......................................................Black conductive specimens is possible. Non-conductive
ature Tempfix has a smooth featureless
Solid content ..........................................34% specimens need only to be coated with carbon or
surface that allows specimens to be imaged
Shelf life ............6 months under original seal metal. Thinner is available if the cement viscosity is
too thick. and clearly distinguished from the support
 Typical Properties (as cured) media. Silvio Marchese-Ragona, Renee Jobe,
Color......................................................Black RT 12664 CCC Adhesive 30g
Aleda Jacobs. “AFM Preparation Techniques
Service temp.........................350°F (190.8°C) RT 12665 CCC Thinner 30ml for Bulk and Powder Samples”. EMSA
Sheet resistance: ..........20 ohms/square inch Bulletin 22:3 Nov., 1992.
............................................@ 1 mil dry film
RT 12693-30 Graphite Conductive Adhesive 112 30g continued 

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 13

Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec01_008-021_EMS_Full Line 2011_sec03 6/30/14 12:21 AM Page 14

SECTION 1 Chemicals for Electron Microscopy, Light Microscopy, & Histology

ADHESIVES AND MOUNTANTS
 Colloidal Compounds  Electrically/Thermally Conductive Adhesives (ETC/TC)
and Conductive We offer a broad line of electrically and thermally conductive materials, which provide solutions
to a variety of electrical, electronic, and thermal design problems throughout the laboratories
Adhesives (cont.) and industries.
 F) EMS Conductive Epoxy ELECTRICALLY/THERMALLY THERMALLY
Gold- Paste PROPERTIES CONDUCTIVE CONDUCTIVE
EMS one part Epoxy Gold Paste is a gold-filled Product Number 525 556 597A 598FS 568 805 860
Filler Silver Silver Silver Nickel Aluminum Aluminum Aluminum
conductive bonding, exhibiting high electrical Nitride
conductivity and bond strength. This Gold Paste Mix Ratio NA 1:1 NA NA 1:1 100:12 1;1
is used in preference to silver-epoxy or other by Weight:
silver preparations to avoid silver migration Resin : Hardener
problems, or when a higher signal is required. Mixes 1.85 2.8 2.3/2.1 2.87/1.5 .85 1.66 1.9
Specific Gravity,
This Gold Paste is well suited to all SEM work, g/cc @ 25°C
and it bonds well to alumina ceramic substrate, Mixes Viscosity, Paste Paste Paste/ Paste/ Paste 85,000 Paste
phenolic circuit boards, and transistor headers. @25°C, cps Paste 480
Pot Life, N/A 1 N/A N/A 4.0 ≤1.0 4.0
It is also useful in a variety of applications in solid 100g mass
state and hybrid circuits including attachment, @25°C, hrs.
bonding semiconductor devices, heat sinks, Recommended 2/300 24/RT 2/RT 2RT 2/200 2/100 2/200
capacitor chips Cure, hr/°F +2/200 +2/200 +2/200
Alternative Cure, 6/250 4/170 - - 24-48/RT 24-48/RT 24-48/RT
Properties of Epoxy Gold-Paste: hr/°F or 2/210
Composition: 88% Gold System: One-part epoxy Temperature 340 340 1200 1000 400 572 400
Resistance, (171) (171) (649) (538) (204) (300) (204)
Viscosity: 175,000 cps °F (°C)
Pot Life (25°C): 6 months CTE, in/in/°F 29.0 13.9 9.6 6.5 33.0 25.0 18.7
Cure: 15 hrs. @150°C, or 1 hr. @ 150°C x 106 (°C) (52.2) (25.0) (17.3) (11.7) (60.0) (45.0) (33.3)
plus 2 hrs. @200°C Thermal 62.2 65.0 63.1 17.9 9.0 12.5 8.5
Elec. Resist (Ohm-cm): 4 x 104 Conductivity,
Bond Shear Strength: 1000 psi Btu-in/hr-ft2-°F
Outgasing (postcure): 0.70% 1000 hrs @125°C Tensile 2,500 1,500 - - 1,400 1,200 1,375
Shear Strength,
Thinner: Butyl carbitol acetate or butyl cellosolve
psi *
acetate Volume 0.01 0.0052 0.0002 0.005 1.0x105 1.0x1014 1.0x1014
Serv. Temp. Range: -65°C to +200°C Resistivity,
RT 12640-01 Gold Epoxy Paste 2g ohm-cm
Dielectric – – – – 80 50 250
RT 12685-26 Gold Thinner Strength,
(Butyl Carbitol Acetate) 25 ml volts/mil
Chemical Excellent Excellent Excellent Excellent Excellent Good Excellent
 G) EMS Conductive Resistance
Color Silver Silver Silver Dark Gray Grey Grey Grey
Gold-Paste
This EMS Conductive Gold-Paste is a one part * Tested according to ASTM D1002-94. This is a standard test method for determining the shear strength of a single lap-
joint metal coupons in tension loading.
adhesive. Fast drying – dries at room Application Notes: Surface Preparation: All surfaces must be free of oil, dirt, corrosives, oxides, paint or other foreign
temperature. Maximum service temperature is matter.
65°C. This adhesive is not for permanent use, Mixing: Two-component products should be mixed thoroughly to a uniform consistency. Preheat high viscosity epoxies to
approximately 125°F to facilitate pouring and mixing.
useful for testing and temporary work where a Application: In most cases, the adhesive should be applied to both surfaces maintaining a glue line of less than 10 mils
high signal is required from the adhesive. (25.4μm). After assembling the parts, pressure should be applied to the assembly to prevent warpage and reduce air
entrapment. Refer to curing guidelines in above property chart.
Gold content is ~75%, including sphere sizes <
2 μm, and flake size <10 μm, in organic binders RT 50380-525 ETC Bond 525—Electrically conductive, silver filled, one-part epoxy paste.
and a solvent. Keep refrigerated for good shelf Good chemical resistance and mechanical strength to 340°F. 5g
life.
RT 50380-556 ETC Bond 556—Electrically conductive. Silver filled, 1:1 Epoxy paste.
Good corrosion resistance and mechanical strength to 340°F. 5g
Sheet resistance is 0.02 to 0.05 ohm-cm @ 1 RT 50380-597 ETC Bond 597A—Electrically and thermally conductive. Silver filled.
mil thickness. One part system. Inorganic system for bonding applications up to 1200°F. 5g
RT 12642 EMS Conductive Gold-Paste 2 gm
RT 50380-598 ETC Bond 598FS—Electrically and thermally conductive. Nickel filled.
One part system. Low viscosity. For applications up to 1000°F. 50g
RT 12643 Conductive Gold-Paste Extender 25ml RT 50380-568 TC Bond 568—Thermally conductive. Aluminum filled, 1:1 epoxy paste.
Excellent mechanical strength to 400°F. Packed 2 x 25g
RT 50380-805 TC Bond 805—Thermally conductive. Aluminum filled. Two part epoxy paste.
Low shrink rate. Excellent mechanical strength to 570°F. 2 x 25g
RT 50380-860 TC Bond 860—Thermally conductive. Aluminum nitride filled. 1:1 epoxy paste.
Excellent mechanical & thermal properties to 400°F. 2 x 25g

14 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874

Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec01_008-021_EMS_Full Line 2011_sec03 6/30/14 12:22 AM Page 15

Chemicals for Electron Microscopy, Light Microscopy, & Histology SECTION 1

ADHESIVES AND MOUNTANTS

 EPO-TEK – Epoxy Conductive Adhesive
 EPO-TEK® EE129-4  EPO-TEK® H20E
Epo-Tek EE129-4 is a room temperature cure, silver-filled epoxy,
®
Epo-Tek® H20E is a two component, 100% solid
designed for making electrical connection in SEM mounting sample, circuit silver-filled epoxy system, silver-resin paste and
assembly, semiconductor, LCD applications. liquid hardener, mixing ration is 1:1.
Epo-Tek® EE129-4 comes with two parts: A & B and mixing ratio is 1:1.  Epo-Tek H22E features high thermal
Shelf life is one year at room temperature conductivity, and is very well suited for
extensive high temperature applications
Works well with surface like Au, Ag-Pd, Cu, brass, Kovar, stainless steel, (300 – 400°C)
as well as ceramic, PCB, solder masks, most plastic and glasses
 Epo-Tek H20E is also a conductive adhesive
 Low temperature cures capable from 23°C to 80°C. of choice for old or new applications.
 Suggested for cryogenic cooling applications  Its applications include: chip bonding and
electronic bonding as well as SEM mounting.
 Works well in SEM, microscopy applications
 H20E contains no solvents and will not
 Works well in aerospace hybrid circuits and ITO electrodes in
outgas.
LCD packaging and assembly
 When cured, H20E is resistant to solvents,
 Reasonable pot life of 3 hours, allows for preparation.
resin and moisture
 Smooth thixotropic paste allows for many way of application
 Long Pot life (2½ days)
 Shelf life is one year when store at 23°C
Maximum Bond Line Cure Schedules:
100°C......................15 minutes 23°C............................24 hours Maximum Bond Line Cure Schedules:
80°C ...............................1 hour Pot Life .........................3 hours 175°C......................15 minutes 120°C............................2 hours
70°C..............................2 hours 150°C .............................1 hour 80°C............................24 hours
Typical Properties (to be used as a guide only, not a specification) Typical Properties (to be used as a guide only, not a specification)

Physical Properties: Physical Properties:

Color: Part A – silver; Part B – silver Color: Part A – silver; Part B – silver
Consistency: Smooth, thixotropic – 4000 cPs Consistency: Smooth, thixotropic
Viscosity (@ 100 RPM / 23˚C): 2,000 – 4000 cPs 2,200 – 3,200 cPs
Viscosity (@ 100 RPM / 23˚C):
Thixotropic Index: 4.6 Thixotropic Index: 3.69
Glass Transition Temp (Tg): ≥ 45˚C (Dynamic cure Glass Transition Temp (Tg):≥ 80˚C (Dynamic cure 20 – 200˚C / ISO 25 Min;
20 – 200˚C / ISO 25 Min; Ramp -10 – 200˚C @20˚C/Min)
Ramp -10 – 200˚C @20˚C/Min) Coefficient of Thermal Below Tg: 31 x 10-6 in/in/˚C
Coefficient of Thermal Below Tg: 30 x 10-6 in/in/˚C Expansion (CTE): Above Tg: 158 x 10-6 in/in/˚C
Expansion (CTE): Above Tg: 227 x 10-6 in/in/˚C Shore D Hardness: 75
Shore D Hardness: 63 Lap Shear Strength @ 23˚C: 1,475 psi
Lap Shear Strength @ 23˚C: 1,110 psi Die Shear Strength @ 23˚C: ≥ 5 kg / 1,700 psi
Die Shear Strength @ 23˚C: ≥ 5 kg / 1,700 psi Weight Loss: @200˚C: 0.59%; @250˚C: 1.09%; @300˚C: 1.67%
Weight Loss: @200˚C: 0.18%; @250˚C: 0.54%; Degradation Temp (TGA): 425˚C
@300˚C: 2.06% Operating Temp: Continuous: -55˚C to 200˚C
Degradation Temp (TGA): 303˚C Intermittent: -55˚C to 300˚C
Operating Temp: Continuous: -55˚C to 150˚C Storage Modulus @ 23˚C: 808, 700 psi
Intermittent: -55˚C to 250˚C Ion: Cl- 73 ppm; Na+ 2 ppm; NH4+ 98 ppm; K+ 3 ppm
Storage Modulus @ 23˚C: 156, 318 psi
Particle Size: ≤ 45 microns
Ion: Cl- 223 ppm; Na+ 26 ppm
NH4+ 22 ppm; K+ 12 ppm Electrical Properties:
Particle Size: ≤ 45 microns Volume Resistivity @ 23˚C: ≤ 0.0004 Ohm-cm
Electrical Properties: Thermal Properties
Volume Resistivity @ 23˚C: ≤ 0.0003 Ohm-cm Thermal Conductivity: 2.50 W/mK
Volume Resistivity @ 23˚C Thermal Conductivity: 29 W/mK Based on Thermal Resistance Data:
(23˚C/24 hour cure): 0.01 Ohm-cm R=L x K-1 x A-1
Thermal Resistance: (Junction to Case): TO-18 package with
Thermal Properties nickel-gold metalized 20 x 20 mil chips and
Thermal Conductivity: 1.60 W/mK bonded with Epo-Tek H20E (2 mil thick)
Epo-Tek®H20E: 6.7 to 7.0˚C/W
Solder: 4.0 to 5.0˚C/W

RT 12670-EE Epo-Tek® EE129-4 Adhesive 1 oz RT 12671-20E Epo-Tek® H20E Adhesive 1 oz

continued 

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 15

Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec01_008-021_EMS_Full Line 2011_sec03 6/30/14 12:22 AM Page 16

SECTION 1 Chemicals for Electron Microscopy, Light Microscopy, & Histology

ADHESIVES AND MOUNTANTS
 EPO-TEK – Epoxy Conductive Adhesive (continued)
 EPO-TEK H20S ®
 EPO-TEK® H22
Epo-Tek H20S is a modified version of Epo-
®
Epo-Tek® H22 is a two component, silver-filled epoxy system. Mixing ratio
Tek®H20E. Epo-Tek® H20S is a highly reliable, two of silver resin paste and liquid hardener is 100:4.5. Pot life 16 hours, and
component, silver-filled epoxy with a smooth, shelf life is 6 months at room temperature.
thixotropic consistency (mixing ratio 1:1). This
modified version offers high electrical conductivity,  Smooth, free-flowing, slightly thixotropic paste
short curing cycles, proven reliability, and the  High Tg allows it to be used for high temperature applications
convenient mix ratio, Epo-Tek® H20S is extremely ≤300°C)
simple to use. Epo-Tek® H20S pot life is 2.5 days  Contains no solvents – It is a NASA approved low outgasing epoxy.
and shelf life is one year when store at room  Excellent resistance to solvents, chemicals and moisture
temperature.  Extended pot life and fast curing at low temperature <100°C
Maximum Bond Line Cure Schedules:  Designed for die bonding and sealing hybrid circuit. Recommended
for SEM small angle cleavage and wafer bonding.
175°C ..........................................45 seconds
150°C ............................................5 minutes Maximum Bond Line Cure Schedules:
120°C ..........................................15 minutes 150°C................................................................................5 minutes
100°C ..........................................45 minutes 120°C..............................................................................10 minutes
80°C ............................................90 minutes 100°C..............................................................................20 minutes
80°C................................................................................45 minutes

Typical Properties (to be used as a guide only, not a specification) Typical Properties (to be used as a guide only, not a specification)

Physical Properties: Physical Properties:

Color: Part A – silver; Part B – silver Color: Part A – silver; Part B – amber
Consistency: Smooth, thixotropic – 4000 cPs Consistency: Smooth, flowing paste
Viscosity (@ 100 RPM / 23˚C): 1,800 – 2,800 cPs Viscosity (@ 100 RPM / 23˚C): 12,000 – 20,000 cPs
Thixotropic Index: 5 Thixotropic Index: 2.36
Glass Transition Temp (Tg): ≥ 80˚C (Dynamic cure Glass Transition Temp (Tg): ≥ 100˚C (Dynamic cure
20 – 200˚C / ISO 25 Min; 20 – 200˚C / ISO 25 Min;
Ramp -10 – 200˚C @20˚C/Min) Ramp -10 – 200˚C @20˚C/Min)
Coefficient of Thermal Below Tg: 31 x 10-6 in/in/˚C Coefficient of Thermal Below Tg: 39 x 10-6 in/in/˚C
Expansion (CTE): Above Tg: 120 x 10-6 in/in/˚C Expansion (CTE): Above Tg: 224 x 10-6 in/in/˚C
Shore D Hardness: 57 Shore D Hardness: 80
Lap Shear Strength @ 23˚C: 1,240 psi Lap Shear Strength @ 23˚C: 1,980 psi
Die Shear Strength @ 23˚C: ≥ 5 kg / 1,700 psi Die Shear Strength @ 23˚C: ≥ 5 kg / 1,700 psi
Weight Loss: @200˚C: 0.40%; @250˚C: 0.60%; Weight Loss: @200˚C: 0.09%; @250˚C: 0.23%;
@300˚C: 1.37% @300˚C: 1.42%
Degradation Temp (TGA): 414˚C Degradation Temp (TGA): 454˚C
Operating Temp: Continuous: -55˚C to 200˚C Operating Temp: Continuous: -55˚C to 250˚C
Intermittent: -55˚C to 300˚C Intermittent: -55˚C to 350˚C
Storage Modulus @ 23˚C: 339, 720 psi Storage Modulus @ 23˚C: 540, 120 psi
Ion: Cl- 162 ppm; Na+ 0 ppm Ion: Cl- 175 ppm; Na+ 60 ppm
NH4+ 282 ppm NH4+ 148 ppm; K+ 6 ppm
Particle Size: ≤ 20 microns Particle Size: ≤ 45 microns
Electrical Properties: Electrical Properties:
Volume Resistivity @ 23˚C: ≤ 0.0005 Ohm-cm Volume Resistivity @ 23˚C: ≤ 0.005 Ohm-cm
Thermal Properties Thermal Properties
Thermal Conductivity: 3.25 W/mK Thermal Conductivity: .94 W/mK

RT 12672-20S Epo-Tek® H20S Adhesive 1 oz RT 12673-22 Epo-Tek® H22 Adhesive 1 oz

16 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874

Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec01_008-021_EMS_Full Line 2011_sec03 6/30/14 12:22 AM Page 17

Chemicals for Electron Microscopy, Light Microscopy, & Histology SECTION 1

ADHESIVES AND MOUNTANTS

® Mounting Medium for all ® CFM-1 and CFM-1 Plus Antifadent
Laser Scanning and This glycerol-phosphate buffered saline based
Conventional Microscopes mountant solution has been specially formulated so as
to have a refractive index of ~1.52 @ room
A revolutionary new Mounting Medium which temperature. The addition of antifadent retards the
helps to control the effects of Refraction. bleaching of fluorochromes. Its refractive index is
These Mountant Solutions: similar to glass; therefore effects of refraction on image
quality are minimized. The CFM-1 Plus antifadent will
T Have a refractive index of 1.52 to match the be particularly useful for high magnification work,
refractive index of your slides and coverslips
where immersion oils are used to minimize distortion of
T Are simple to use – Just apply the solution the image due to the refraction of the viewing light and
to the specimen followed by a cover slip where bleaching of the flurochrome occurs.
T May be kept at room temperature – comes The solutions should also be very valuable for laser useful for high magnification work where immersion
with dropper tip to aid in dispensing scanning microscopy where, three-dimensional oils are used to minimize distortion of the image due to
T Are water miscible (aqueous glycerol imaging of specimens is carried out e.g. with confocal refraction of the viewing light. The solutions should also
based), and therefore the specimen does fluorescence microscopy where integrity of the image be particularly valuable for lasing scanning microscopy
not need to be dehydrated prior to the has to be maintained. where three-dimensional imaging of specimens is
addition of the mounting solution. carried out e.g. with confocal microscopy.
Both solutions are medium viscosity, and water-clear.
T Have a pH compatible with the specimens: The solution has a medium viscosity, and it is water-
CFM-1 has a pH of ~6.5, and CFM-2 has a pH CFM-1 Plus Antifadent have a pH of ~10
CFM-1 has a pH of ~6.5 clear, and has a pH of ~8.5
of ~8.5
T Contain an antifadent to help reduce the ® CFM-2 Mountant
bleaching of the fluorochromes (CFM-1 Plus This glycerol-tris-buffered based mountant solution has RT 17980-10 CFM-1 10 ml
Antifadent) been specially formulated to have a refractive index of RT 17980-25 CFM-1 25 ml
T May be used as a immersion oils in addition ~1.52 (at room temperature) i.e. a refractive index similar
RT 17981-10 CFM-1 Plus 10 ml
to being a mountant solution and since they
RT 17981-25 CFM-1 Plus 25 ml
to glass so that the effects of refraction on image quality
RT 17982-10 CFM-2 10 ml
are water-based, they facilitate cleaning the are minimized. This mountant solution may also be used RT 17982-25 CFM-2 25 ml
microscope optics. as an immersion oil. The CFM solutions will be particularly

® CITIFLUOR™ - Antifadent Mountant Solutions After 15 Seconds Illumination

A mounting medium for immunofluorescence, which overcomes the problems of fading.

This mounting media is designed to reduce AF2 (Glycerol solution containing additives for use
the fading of the fluorescence of dyes used with labeled tissue sections) is simply a glycerol
for labeling biological specimens. solution of the antifadent. Refractive Index is 1.47. After 1 Minute Illumination After 5 Minutes Illumination
In the technique of fluorescence microscopy, the AF3 (Phosphate-buffered saline solution containing
fluorescence is stimulated by high intensity UV and/or additives for examination of whole cell) is appropriate.
visible light. Absorption of the light populates an Refractive Index is 1.34.
excited state of the dye (usually a singlet state) and AF87, the antifadent, is contained in non-fluorescent
this leads to fluorescence. However, the excited state immersion oil. It is designed for those requiring work After 3 minutes Illumination After 45 Minutes Illumination
of the dye may undergo chemical reaction, which at high magnification. It is useful for preventing the
leads to destruction as evidenced by the fading of the fading of such dyes as DAPI, which have the tendency
fluorescence and consequent loss of the image. to disperse in glycerol based mountant solutions.
Citifluor™ mounting media is designed to solve this CFPVOH is an aqueous solution of poly (vinyl alcohol)
problem. for use as a solid mountant. Apply a few drops of the
Selection of the appropriate product: solution to your sample, and allow drying to give a temperature. With LD50’s >2000mg/kg (in rat), this
There is no universal antifadent due to the fact that clear film. Refractive Index is 1.34–1.35. product exhibits no toxicological problems.
biological material is so varied in nature that the AF100 is a solution of antifadents to be used with
fluorescence fading of fluorochromic conjugates is CFPVOH when fading of fluorescence in the poly(vinyl
a complex process.
RT 17970-25 CitiFluor™ AF1 25 ml
alcohol) is a problem. To prepare a CFPVOH solution RT 17970-100 CitiFluor™ AF1 100 ml
The general anti-fadents are AF1, AF2, and AF3. containing AF100, add 0.1ml of Af100 to 0.9ml of RT 17971-25 CitiFluor™ AF2 25 ml
The AF87 is a specialist immersion oil-based CFPVOH. If more or less of the solid mountant solution RT 17971-100 CitiFluor™ AF2 100 ml
antifadent. is required, mix the reagent in the appropriate ratio. RT 17972-25 CitiFluor™ AF3 25 ml
AF1 (Glycerol-phosphate buffered solution Once these solutions have been made up, they should RT 17972-100 CitiFluor™ AF3 100 ml
containing an additive for use with labeled tissue be used within a period of days since the solution RT 17976-10 CitiFluor™ AF87 10 ml
sections). Should be used if you normally examine deteriorates on storage. Refractive Index is 1.34-1.35. RT 17976-25 CitiFluor™ AF87 25 ml
specimens in glycol solution. If you normally use RT 17978-35 Set of CitiFluor™ 25 ml + 5 ml
All of these products have a long shelf life, a minimum
saline solution with your specimens. Refractive CFPVOH and AF100*
of 2 years. The solution can be stored at room
Index is 1.46. * Only available when ordering with CFPVOH

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 17

Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec01_008-021_EMS_Full Line 2011_sec03 6/30/14 12:22 AM Page 18

SECTION 1 Chemicals for Electron Microscopy, Light Microscopy, & Histology

ADHESIVES AND MOUNTANTS
 CitraMount® Mountant  Eukitt™; Mounting Medium
This butyl acetate and acrylic resin mixture is the first mounting medium Eukitt is a mounting medium (contains 45% Acrylic
developed for coverslipping directly from d-limonene based clearants. Resin and 55% Xylenes), used in microscopy. It is an
Superior results are also achieved with xylene. CitraMount® medium is adhesive and specimen preservative that can be used
recommended for manual coversliping only as it may cause damage to manually and in automated cover-slipping equipment.
the valves of automated coverslippers. Adhesive and sealant for use with glass, non plastic
 Clear seal with drying time is less than 24 hours and other non-reactive materials. Spreads quickly and
 Refractive index is 1.42 – Viscosity is 90 cPs evenly without forming any air bubbles.
RT 18005-01 CitraMount® Mountant 100 ml Properties:
RT 18005-05 CitraMount® Mountant 500 ml
 Fast-drying (20 minutes)  Temperature limits: 42ºC-17ºC
Clearium® Mounting Media  Refractive index close to  Passive to ultraviolet light
glass (1.510)  Can be used in place of epoxy
Clear and coverslip your slide preparations
 Chemically neutral resins for mounting petro-
in one easy step
 Little sensitivity to water graphic thin sections
This unique product eliminates the need for hazardous  Used in fluorescence dyes
 No reaction to staining
xylene or xylene substitutes as a clearing agent in in bones
histology and cytology laboratories. With Clearium, RT 15320 Eukitt™ 100ml
simply do away with the final step of clearing and RT 15322 Eukitt™ 500ml
coverslip directly from absolute isopropyl alcohol.
Cat No. Description Qty.  Fluoromount-G™ Slide Mounting Medium
RT 13520-11 Clearium®, Pint each A special mounting media for immunofluorescent staining
RT 13520-12 Clearium®, Pint 4/case procedures. It is a water soluble, non-fluorescing
RT 13520-13 Clearium®, 4 oz. Dripper Bottle 12/case medium which is well suited for use when the staining
 CMCP Macroinvertebrate Mounting Medium procedure has an aqueous final step. It contains 10%
polyvinyl alcohol in phosphate buffered glycerol with 0.1%
CMCP is a colorless, non resinous, water miscible mounting medium for
sodium azide as a preservative. One bottle is sufficient to
permanent transparent mounts. This medium used like Canada Balsam,
mount up to 500 slides. Refractive Index: 1.46
it can be used to mount almost any material, provided it is not stained,
0-5˚C 17984-25 Fluoromount-G 25 ml
calciferous material, or thin tissue sections. This mounting media has
the advantage of allowing live or preserved specimens to be mounted  DAPI-Fluoromount G™
directly from water or alcohol. DAPI-Fluoromont™ G is a water-soluble, instant blue nuclear probe
Free living nematodes and live parasitic worms are among the organism fluorescing (455nm) compound for mounting fixed slides using a staining
suitable for mounting with CMCP. The CMCP mounting provide then procedure having an aqueous final step. Mounting slides with DAPI
with rapid relaxation, death, and clearing action. Fluoromont™ G stains the cell nucleus and may reduce fluorochrome
RT 18003-01 CMCP-9 Low Viscosity Mountant 100 ml quenching during analysis of slides by fluorescence microscopy. this
RT 18003-05 CMCP-9 Low Viscosity Mountant 500 ml mounting medium also provides a semi permanent seal for long term
RT 18004-02 CMCP-10 High Viscosity Mountant 250 ml storage of slide preparations.
RT 18404-05 CMCP-10 High Viscosity Mountant 500 ml
0-5˚C 17984-24 DAPI Fluoromount-G™ 20 ml
 Crystalbond; Wafer Mount See page 372-373: 437   DPX Mountant for Microscopy
 Cytoseal Mounting Medium See page 515  A mixture of Distyrene, a plasticizer, and xylene. A colorless synthetic
 Entellan A rapid mounting media for microscopy
® resin mounting media which replaces Xylene-Balsam. It preserves the
stain and dries quickly. R.I. 1.5175 @ 23ºC.
For long life preparations, without bubble formation at high ambient
temperatures. It can be used for all dehydrated microscopic RT 13510 100ml
preparations. Cure time is 20 minutes at room temperature. It is RT 13512 500ml
colorless with an acid number less than 2.50 and a R.I. ND20 approx  DEPEX Mounting Media
1.49-1.5. (Contains xylene).
A colorless, neutral, xylene miscible mountant which is suitable for
RT 14800 Entellan® 100ml preparations where Canada Balsam is usually used. R.I. 1.5222 @ 23ºC.
RT 14802 Entellan® 500ml
RT 13514 DEPEX Mounting Media 100ml

TECHNICAL TIP DEPEX (EMS Cat. #13514) is an Improved Mounting Medium

Most mounting media cause fading of histological preparations over time. A study was conducted to find the most suitable mounting media that
would not fade. Depex as a Mounting Media appeared to have a conserving effect on the stain as compared to other available mounting media. The
study was based on Araldite embedded semithin sections of rabbit cerebral cortex stained with Toluidine Blue and Pyronin G. The study also showed
that the average optical density of sections prepared with DEPEX after one year was higher than the sections treated with other mounting techniques.
Cordula Schmolke (1993). Effects of Mounting Media on Fading of Toluidine Blue and Pyronin G Staining in Epoxy Sections. Biotech. & Histochem. 68/3, pg.132-136

18 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874

Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec01_008-021_EMS_Full Line 2011_sec03 6/30/14 12:22 AM Page 19

Chemicals for Electron Microscopy, Light Microscopy, & Histology SECTION 1

ADHESIVES AND MOUNTANTS

 Histomount
A mixture of xylene - mixed isomers and non hazardous ingredients to offer
 Loctite Adhesives
a very good synthetic mountant. Once dried the refractive index is 1.58. Loctite 409™ Super Bonder®
For a general-purpose gel adhesive, clear, gap fills
RT 17995-01 Histomount 100 ml 0.010”; surface insensitive Ethyl, tensile shear strength
RT 17995-05 Histomount 450 ml 3,200 psi, and temperature range –65°F to 180°F.
Cure speed: fixture - 75 seconds, full - 24 hours.
 Hydromount™ Loctite 454™ Prism®
Ideal for frozen tissue sections For use with porous surfaces, clear, gap fills 0.010”,
Hydromount™ is the traditional choice whenever a nonfluorescing surface insensitive Ethyl, gel type, tensile shear strength
aqueous medium is needed. Hydromount™ is water-based and 3200 psi, temperature range –65°F to 180°F. Cure
is suitable for mounting specimens that have been processed in speed: fixture – 15 seconds, full - 24 hours.
water. Hydromount™ is effective for frozen sections, amyloid, Loctite 4861™ Prism®
and immunofluorescent staining procedures. Should it become necessary, For use with flexible surfaces, clear, gap fill 0.008”, surface flexible Alkyl,
Hydromount™ may be removed by soaking the slides in warm saline. viscosity 4,000 cP, tensile shear strength 2465 psi, temperature range
RT 17966-01 Hydromount™ 100ml –65°F to 212°F. Cure speed: fixture – 25 seconds, full – 24 hours.
Histomount™ and Hydromount™ are Trademarked names of National Diagnostics Loctite 349™ Impruv®
For bond glass/metal, appearance: clear/straw, cure type: UV, viscosity:
 Glycerin Jelly 9,500cP, shore hardness: D70, temperature range: –65°F to 266°F
For the mounting of hydrated sections. Loctite 4011™ Prism®
Designed for the assembly of difficult-to-bond materials, such as wood,
paper, leather and fabric. Suitable for use in the assembly of disposable
medical devices. The product provides rapid bonding of a wide range of
RT 17998-10 Glycerin Jelly, 100ml
materials, including metals, plastic and elastomers. Cure speed: 2 to 20
RT 17998-50 Glycerin Jelly, 500ml
seconds depending on the material.
Chemical type: Ethyl cyanoacrylate, transparent, colorless to straw
 Krazy GlueTM Pen colored fluid. One part required no mixing. Low-viscosity (100 cP). Cure
The one we all know and have used. Ready to by humidity, and temperature range –65°F to 180°F
use. Requires no mixing or preparation. This
RT 72570-09 Loctite Super Bonder 409 3 g Tube
pen contains cyanoacrylate. Clear in color and RT 72571-54 Loctite Prism 454 Adhesive 3 g Tube
bonds immediately. Comes in a 3g tube. RT 72572-61 Loctite Prism 4861 Adhesive 20 g
RT 72582-01 Loctite 349 Impruv Adhesive 50 ml
RT 72573-11 Loctite Prism 4011 Adhesive 20 g

Loctite 404 Quick Set Tissue Adhesive

RT 12646-05 Krazy GlueTM Pen each This adhesive is perfect for those applications where a
quick-curing adhesive is needed. Comes in an applicator-
 Liquid Coverglass; tipped bottle, 0.33 oz. (10ml).
SHUR/Mount™ RT 12687-01 Loctite 404 Quick Set Tissue Adhesive 10ml
Shur/Mount is a liquid coverglass and
mounting medium. Its low viscosity minimizes Loctite™ 460 Adhesive
bubble formation under the coverglass. An Our LoctiteTM 460 is a quick curing low viscosity glue that
antioxidant present in the medium prevents can be used for mounting samples to any substrate (glass,
fading of the stain even over years of storage. metal and/or plastic). It is soluble in acetone. Comes in an
A UV absorbent present in our Shur/Mount applicator-tipped plastic bottle — 20 g.
prevents the yellowing of the resin. RT 12646-08 LoctiteTM 460 Adhesive each
Available in three types: Loctite® Fixmaster® Poxy Pak™,
 A toluene-based acrylic resin; rapid drying. It is used for mount- Fast Cure Epoxy
ing and preservation of microscope slide specimens, and is ideal This fast cure, general purpose epoxy bonds virtually any
for manual coverslipping. Refractive index: 1.49 material. It will also fill or seal cracks and rebuild worn
 A xylene-based formula which is used for automatic cover surfaces. Comes in a 1 oz. syringe with a built-in plunger
slipping instruments. Refractive index: 1.48 for easy dispensing without equipment. Working time is
 A unique water based mounting medium for Immuno procedures. approximately 4 minutes. Includes nozzle and mixing stick.
RT 17990-01 Shur/Mount - Toluene Based 4 oz. This unique adhesive may be made electrically conductive
RT 17990-12 Shur/Mount - Toluene Based 12x4 oz./cs with the addition of any conductive powder (Silver, Carbon
RT 17991-01 Shur/Mount - Xylene Based 16 oz. etc.)
RT 17991-06 Shur/Mount - Xylene Based 4x16 oz./cs RT 12646-09 Loctite® Fixmaster® Poxy Pak™,
RT 17992-01 Shur/Mount - Water Based 20ml Fast Cure Epoxy each
RT 17992-04 Shur/Mount - Water Based 4x20ml

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 19

Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec01_008-021_EMS_Full Line 2011_sec03 6/30/14 12:22 AM Page 20

SECTION 1 Chemicals for Electron Microscopy, Light Microscopy, & Histology

ADHESIVES AND MOUNTANTS
 M-Bond System  Cargille Meltmounts
The M-Bond system includes M-Bond 43-B, M-bond  Instant thermal mountants that require
600 and M-Bond 610. These adhesives are high- “no-oven-time”.
performance epoxy resins, which are formulated  100% Usable; contains no solvents.
especially for bonding strain gages and special-  Reversible, thermally, for particle
purpose sensors. When properly cured, these retrieval or re-orientation
adhesives are useful in temperatures ranging from -  Soluble in toluene for special
techniques or clean-up.
452°F to +350° F (-269°C to+ 175°C) with M-Bond
 Fluid at 65°C, a temperature chosen
43-B, and to +700°F (+370°C) for short periods with because it makes permanent mount and Melt Mount is also available in a Quick-Stick™
M-bond 600 and 610. In common with other organic protects the majority of specimens from form which can be used to make permanent
materials, oxidation and sublimation effects at thermal changes. microscope slide mounts quickly. These Melt
elevated temperatures limit life. M-Bond 43B is  PCB-Free. Mount sticks can be applied to a slide on a
particularly recommended for transducer applications  Direct replacement for old mountant hotplate. As soon as the specimen and
up to+250°F (+120°C) and M-Bond 610 for mediums (Canada Balsam, Aroclor coverglass are positioned and the slide is
transducers up to +450°F (+230°C) 5442, Naphrax...)
cooled you have a permanent prepared slide
Shelf Life and Pot Life: At room temperature, M- Cargille Meltmount™ (optical quality) is a that can be reversed by reheating, if you
Bond 600 has a useful storage life of approximately series of mounting media which are should wish to retrieve a particular particle.
three months, while M-Bond 43-B and M-Bond 610 specifically formulated for use in microscope Each Quick-Stick™ weighs approximately 2⁄3
will last about nine months. slide mounting and in other optical coupling oz. (18g).
applications.
Once opened and mixed, M-Bond 600 and 610 have
room temperature pot lives of two weeks and six 1. Meltmount™ 1.539
weeks, respectively. Since M-Bond 43B is supplied Has a refractive index (nD @25°C) of 1.539 and an Abbe V dispersion of 45.
already mixed, its pot life is about the same as its Its optically similar to Canada Balsam and therefore ideal for mounting many biological
shelf life when kept in a tightly closed container. These specimens but without the long drying time of Canada Balsam.
periods of adhesive usefulness can often be doubled RT 17994-10 Meltmount 1.539 1 oz.
by refrigeration at +30º to +40ºF (0 to +5ºC). Never RT 17994-11 Meltmount 1.539 Quick-Stick™ each
open a refrigerated bottle until it has reached room
2. Meltmount™ for Chrysotile Asbestos
temperature. It has dispersion characteristics making it appropriate for mounting chrysotile asbestos.
Curing Time: RT 17994-20 Meltmount for Chrysotile 1 oz.
M-Bond 43B is about 2 hours at +375°F (+190°C)
M-Bond 600 is about 3.5 hours at +350°F (170°C) 3. Meltmount 1.582 ™

M-Bond 610 is about 3 hours at 375°F (190°C) It has a refractive index nD @25°C) of 1.582 and an Abbe V dispersion of 33.
0-5˚C 50410-10 M-Bond 43B Kit Its optical clarity makes it the preferred choice for minimum visible absorption.
0-5˚C 50410-20 M-Bond 600 Kit RT 17994-30 Meltmount 1.582 1 oz.
0-5˚C 50410-30 M-Bond 610 Kit RT 17994-31 Meltmount 1.582 Quick-Stick™ each
4. Meltmount™ 1.605
 Mascot Instant Adhesive
®
It has a refractive index (nD @25°C) of 1.605 and an Abbe V dispersion of 30, making it
appropriate for mounting Asbestiform Tremolite, Anthophyllite, and Actinolite.
RT 17994-40 Meltmount 1.605 1 oz.
RT 17994-41 Meltmount 1.605 Quick-Stick™ each
5. Meltmount™ 1.662
It has a refractive index (nD @25°C) of 1.662 and an Abbe V dispersion of 26, optically
similar to Aroclor 5442 but is PCB-free.
RT 17994-50 Meltmount 1.662 1 oz.
RT 17994-51 Meltmount 1.662 Quick-Stick™ each
A gel type, no-drip formula that fills the gaps and is 6. Meltmount™ 1.680
ideal for use on vertical surfaces. A high It has a refractive index (nD @25°C) of 1.680 and an Abbe V dispersion of 25, making it
performance, extended range cyanoacrylate appropriate for mounting Amosite and Crocidolite asbestos.
adhesive that bonds metals, most plastics, rubber, RT 17994-60 Meltmount 1.680 1 oz.
ceramics, and glass, in seconds. It is optically RT 17994-61 Meltmount 1.680 Quick-Stick™ each
transparent and sets in about 30 seconds depending 7. Meltmount™ 1.704
upon the objects being joints. Pack 0.1 oz (3g) per It has a refractive index (nD @25°C) of 1.704 and an Abbe V dispersion of 24, similar to
dispensing tube. Naphrax.
RT 72587-01 Mascot® Instant Adhesive 3g RT 17994-70 Meltmount 1.704 1 oz.
RT 17994-71 Meltmount 1.704 Quick-Stick™ each

20 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874

Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec01_008-021_EMS_Full Line 2011_sec03 6/30/14 12:22 AM Page 21

Chemicals for Electron Microscopy, Light Microscopy, & Histology SECTION 1

ADHESIVES AND MOUNTANTS

 MikrostikTM Adhesive,  Permount™* Mounting
Non-Conductive Medium
Fast drying, ultrathin clear adhesive suitable for mounting A toluene-based synthetic resin mounting medium.
small particles which can be submerged in other adhesives. The right choice for both rapid mounting and long term
It can be diluted with methyl ethyl ketone. Quick-drying. storage of slides. Its low viscosity allows for a thinner
Comes in a bottle with an applicator brush. 14 ml. mounting layer offering better optical quality and
12646-01 MikrostikTM Adhesive, Non-Conductive 14ml bubble-free preparations. It has a refractive index near
that of a fixed protein which helps to keep images free
of distortion. Ideal for mounting coverslips to slides
 Mount Quick, with thick or thin specimens. Permount preserves most
Solvent/Water Base biological stains with little or no fading when the slides are stored in darkness.
Mounting media for cover glass. It It contains an anti-oxidant to prevent the formation of annular rings and its
comes in a convenient dispensing high softening point (155°C/311°F) makes it suitable for microprojection.
tube or bottle. Solvent based media
RT 17986-01 Permount Mounting Medium 100ml
which is soluble in xylene and has a
RT 17986-05 Permount Mounting Medium 500ml
10 minute dry time. Its viscosity is *Ownership of Fisher Scientific
33 cps at 25°C.
 Quick Bond See page 216 
RT 18000 Mount Quick-Solvent Base; 30cc
RT 18002 Mount Quick-Water Base; 30cc  Rubber Cement, Non-Wrinkle
Elmer’s non-wrinkle rubber cement is a combination of
 Omnimount™ isopropanol, heptane and natural rubber. Comes with a
 Optical clarity combined with exceptional brush applicator for ease of use. Dries fast and it does not
durability wrinkle.
 Compatible with HistoClear II 72170 Non-Wrinkle Rubber Cement 4 oz
 Higher flash point and lower toxicity than
xylene based mountants
 Slide Coating Adhesive
Specially developed to provide compatibility with National See Specimen Preparation section, page 555 
Diagnostic clearing agents, HistoClear II. Omnimount™
combined outstanding optical characteristics with low
fluororescence and exceptional durability. In addition to
 Sub-X Mounting Medium
being the ideal partner for HistoClear II, Omnimount is a truly universal Sub-X Mounting Medium is a toluene based low
mounting medium compatible with all common clearing agents: xylene, viscosity quick-drying, permanent mountant formulated
toluene, limonene, and petroleum derived products. to be compatible with all xylene substitutes on the
market. It may be used for all ocverslip preparations
The Omnimount solvent has a higher flash point and a lower toxicity than that are cleared in xylene and or toluene. It may be
xylene based mountants, so Omnimount™ provides both a safer work used for manual as well as automated coverslipping.
environment and reduce shipping costs. Sub-X contains an antioxidant to inhibit fading of stains.
RT 17997-01 Omnimount™ 100 ml 13519 Sub-x Mounting Medium Pint

MM 24® Mounting Media  Tissue-Tack Adhesive

 Good for JB-4 and JB-4 Plus Sections.
Specially formulated for automatic glass
 Improves permanent adhesion of sections to the glass slide dur-
coverslippers
ing prolonged staining procedures and washes.
MM 24 is a low viscosity mounting medium that is
 Useful for immunofluorescent, immunoperoxidase and routine
compatible with both aliphatic (eg Sub-X) and aromatic staining procedures.
(eg xylene) clearing agents. It is specially formulated to
achieve optimum results with automatic glass
RT 71301-01 Tissue-Tack Adhesive 100ml
RT 71301-05 Tissue-Tack Adhesive 500ml
coverslippers, yet is also effective for manual slide
preparation. Set up time before permanent filing is normally 24 hours
with aromatic agents and 48 to 72 hours with aliphatics.
 UV Mount Medium
 A mounting medium that is (365nm) when applied to
Cat No. Description Qty. moist sections.
designed to match the refrac-
RT 13520-21 MM 24® Mounting Media, Pint each
RT 13520-22 MM 24® Mounting Media, Pint 4/case
tive index of JB-4 embedded  Sections are mounted after
sections. last staining water rinse.
RT 13520-23 MM 24® Mounting Media, 4 oz. Dripper Bottle 12/case
 Cures within 2 minutes when  Slides must be coverslipped.
exposed to long wave UV light
 Permabond 910, Tissue Adhesive
See Specimen Preparation, page 216  0-5˚C 17996 UV Mount Medium 100ml

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 21

Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec01_022-025_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 12:24 AM Page 22

SECTION 1 Chemicals for Electron Microscopy, Light Microscopy, & Histology

 Agar, Powder, Bacteriological Grade  Agarose SFR™ trademark of Amresco®
(C12H18O9)x F.W. 3000-9000 CAS #9002-18-0 (C6H10O5·C6H8O4)n CAS #9012-36-6
Geling Temperature (1.5% in H2O) ..............................................~35°C  Super fine resolution: Resolve 238 bp & 242 bp band
Gel Strength (1.5% gel) ..........................................................300g/cm2  Low melting point
Specifications:  Consistent & reproducible results
Acid insoluble ash......................................................................0.5%  Nuclease & protease free
Arsenic..............................................................................3ppm max
Gelatin ............................................................................To Past Test  Ideal for AFLPs, STRs & Tetranucleotide repeats.
Heavy Metals ......................................................................<0.004% Agarose SFR is a high resolution sieving agarose with unsurpassed clarity.
Lead....................................................................................<0.001% DNA bands differing in size by 2% can be resolved in the range of 200 –
Total ash ................................................................................<6.5% 1,000 bp. This agarose is suitable for the analysis of AFLPs (Amplified
Water ......................................................................................<20% Fragment Length Polymorphisms), STRs (Short Tandem Repeats) and
tetranucleotide repeats. The low melting point of agarose SFR makes it an
RT 10200 100g
excellent medium for analytical and preparative electrophoresis.
RT 10202 500g
Biotechnology Grade
 Agarose I™ trademark of Amresco®
Gel Strength (1.5%) ........................................................≥ 500 g/cm2
(C6H10O5·C6H8O4)n CAS # 9012-36-6 Gelling Range (1.5%) ..............................................................≤ 30°C
 All purpose, high-purity Agarose Melting Point ..........................................................................≤ 70°C
 Exceptional Band Resolution & Clarity EEO ....................................................................................≤ 0.12 mr
 Convenient Tablet Form is available — no weighing required Sulfate ................................................................................≤ 0.11 %
Moisture (KF) ........................................................................≤ 7.0 %
 Nuclease & Protease free Ash ....................................................................................≤ 0.35 %
Agarose I is standard melting/gelling agarose, suitable for routine nucleic DNase ........................................................................None Detected
acid analytical/preservative applications. Agarose I has a low EEO for RNase ........................................................................None Detected
shorter electrophoresis runs without compromising resolution. Excellent Protease ....................................................................None Detected
for blotting technique and general manipulations. pH (3%, Water) @ 25°C ......................................................5.7 – 7.7
Biotechnology Grade: Conductivity (3%, Water) @ 25°C ................................≤ 10.0 μohms
Gel Strength (1.5%) ......................................................≥ 1200 g/cm2 RT 10207 Super Fine Resolution Agarose SFR™ 100g
Gelling Range (1.5%)............................................................36-39°C
Melting Point ........................................................................87-89°C
EEO ....................................................................................≤ 0.10 mr
 Alcian Blue 8GX, Certified, C.N. #AnAn-6
Sulfate ................................................................................≤ 0.15 % (Ingrain Blue I)
DNase ........................................................................None Detected C56H68N16S4CU F.W. 1298.88 CAS #12040-44-7
RNase ........................................................................None Detected Solubility: Water-soluble
Protease ....................................................................None Detected Dye Content: Approx. 50%
pH (3%, Water) @ 25°C ......................................................5.7 – 7.7 Used as a fixative: 0.5-2% Alcian Blue in Glutaraldehyde fixative
Conductivity (3%, Water) @ 25°C ................................≤ 17.0 μohms enhances the preservation and contrast of the cell coat and intercellular
Moisture (KF)..........................................................................≤ 10 % substances. Used as a stain: For staining cell surface materials and
Endonuclease/Ligase Inhibitory Factors ......................None Detected cartilage components.
RT 10205 Agarose I™ Powder 100g Schofield, et al., Histochem J. 7, 139,1975
RT 10206 Agarose I™ 500 mg/Tablet 100 Tabs Used as a wetting agent: Sommer, J. R (1977). To cationize glass.
J.Cell Bio. 75, 245a. Alcian Blue and Ruthenium Red were used to
study cartilage ultrastructure. Thyberg, J., Lohmander, S., and Friberg,
TECHNICAL TIP U., J. Ultrastruct. Res., 45, 407 (1973).
Purification Of Alcian Blue RT 10350 25g
Commercially available Alcian Blue contains about 49% dye; the
remaining constituents are boric acid, sulphates, dextrin, and other  Alcoholic Congo Red Solution
unknown organic substances. It can be purified by the following A stock solution of alcoholic congo red for Amyloid staining.
method, presented by McAuliffe. W.G. McAuliffe (1983) - A Note on the RT 26090-05 Alcoholic Congo Red Solution 500ml
Purification of Alcian Blue. Stain Technology, 58, pg 374. RT 26090-06 Alcoholic Congo Red Solution 1L
• One gram of Alcian Blue is placed in a flask to which is added 100ml
of 9:1 mixture of acetone and distilled water.  Alizarin Red S, Certified, C.N. #DcAr-5
• This mixture is stirred for 1 hour and then filtered through No. 2 filter
(Alizarin Carmine, Mordant Red 3)
paper. Small quantities of additional acetone are used to wash the
C14H7O7SNa.H2O F.W. 360.28 CAS #130-22-3
dye from the flask and down the side of the filter paper.
Solubility: 7.69% Water; 0.1% Alcohol.
• The filtrate has a faint yellow-green color. The residue is recovered
Certified for Staining Bone. Stain for nervous tissue in small
from the filter paper and dried.
invertebrates, and for sections of nervous tissue. Lee, “The
• Small quantities of the dye should be purified as they are needed.
Microtomist’s Vade-Mecum”, 10th Ed., The Blakiston Co., Phila., 1937;
The above method yields Alcian Blue containing about 78.7-83.5% dye,
Dawson, Stain Tech., 1, 123 (1926); Lundvall, Anat. Anz., 27, 521
depending on the commercial source. Hayat, M. A. (Ed.). (1989).
(1905); 137. Used to differentiate bone from cartilage in mammalian
Principles and Techniques of Electron Microscopy. Third Edition. CRC
embryos; used with Toluidine Blue. William, Stain Tech., 16, 23 (1941)
Press Inc., Florida.
RT 10360 25g

22 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874

Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec01_022-025_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 12:24 AM Page 23

Chemicals for Electron Microscopy, Light Microscopy, & Histology SECTION 1

 Aluminum Oxide, 90 Basic (63-200μm)  Antibody Diluent

Al2O3 F.W. 101.96 CAS 1344-28-1 Buffer for diluting your primary and secondary antibodies, especially if
Specifications: they were stored for a while, even at -20 in glycerol, or in refrigerator.
Chloride: ................................................................................0.005% Nonspecific binding of the antibodies, negative effects of disturbing
Iron (Fe) ..................................................................................0.03% substances and low or medium affinity cross-reactivities of the
Substances not precipitated by NH4OH: ..................................0.75% antibodies will be minimized, making your result more reliable. Excellent
Loss on Ignition: ........................................................................5.0%
for IHC (frozen and formalin sections), flow cytometry on fixed cells,
RT 10400 500 g Western Blot and other immune assays.
 Amphibian Ringer Solution When used in pathology, in also greatly reduces non-specific reactivity
of human serum components and immunoglobulins in tissue, vessels
Ingredients: NaCl; KCl; CaCl2.6H2O and Distilled water.
and cells with mouse antibodies used on section.
RT 11762-05 Amphibian Ringer Solution 500ml
RT 11762-10 Amphibian Ringer Solution 1L For especially "trouble"-giving antibodies, as well as for in situ PCR
applications, this dilutent may also be used as a washing buffer,
 Ammonium Hydroxide, 28% Reagent, A.C.S. preventing secondary binding of your analystes during washing.
NH4OH FW. 35.05 CAS #1336-21-6 Specific Gravity: 0.91 4-8°C 62713 Antibody Diluent 50 ml
4-8°C 62714 Antibody Diluent 125 ml
Assay ..................................................................................28-30% 4-8°C 62715 Antibody Diluent 500 ml
Specifications: 4-8°C 62713-01 Antibody Diluent for Frozen Sections 50 ml
Residue After Ignition ............................................................0.002% 4-8°C 62714-01 Antibody Diluent for Frozen Sections 125 ml
Carbon Dioxide ......................................................................0.002% 4-8°C 62715-01 Antibody Diluent for Frozen Sections 500 ml
Chloride ................................................................................0.5 ppm
Phosphate................................................................................2 ppm  Araldite Resin
Sulfate ....................................................................................2 ppm W.P.E. number included on each bottle.
Heavy Metals ........................................................................0.5 ppm RT 10900 Araldite 502; CAS #84-74-2, Specific Gravity: 1.13 450ml
Iron ......................................................................................0.2 ppm RT 10910 Araldite 506; CAS #25068-38-6, Specific Gravity: 1.13 450ml
RT 10600 450ml RT 10920 Araldite 6005; CAS #3101-60-8, Specific Gravity: 1.16 450ml
RT 10601 4x450ml RT 10930 Araldite 507; CAS #26447-14-3, Specific Gravity: 1.14 450ml

 Ammonium Molybdate, Reagent, 99%  Araldite Embedding Kits

(Molybdic acid, ammonium salt) See Embedding Media Kits, Page 92 
(NH4)6MO7O24 .4H20 FW 1235.86 CAS #12027-67-7
RT 13900 Araldite 502 Kit consists of: kit
Used in the negative staining of viruses for TEM.
450 ml Araldite 502
Modifications caused by uncoupling agents.
450 ml DDSA; Specially Distilled
Muscatello, U., et al, J. Ultrastruct., Res., 52, 2 (1975) *50 ml DMP-30
RT 10500 100g RT 13920 Araldite 6005 Kit consists of: kit
450 ml Araldite 6005
 Amyl Acetate, Reagent, A.C.S. 450 ml DDSA; Specially Distilled
CH3C00C5H11 FW 130.18 CAS #628-63-7 100 ml BDMA
Boiling Range: 140°C-150°C 225 ml DBP
Specific Gravity @ 25/25/° C: 0.870-0.875 RT 13940 Araldite-EMbed (Mollenhauer’s Kit): kit
A.C.S. Specifications: 450 ml EMbed-812
Acidity (as CH3C00H)................................................................0.01% 450 ml Araldite 502
Non-volatile Matters ................................................................0.01% 450 ml DDSA; Specially Distilled
Water (W/W) ............................................................................0.2 % *50 ml DMP-30
RT 10800 1qt (946ml) * Please note that wherever DMP-30 is listed as the accelerator in our embedding media kits
RT 10810 4x1qt you have the option to use BDMA in place of it. BDMA is less viscous, has a longer shelf
life, and offers better penetration (it should be noted, however, that in order to achieve the
 Amyl Acetate, Purified, optimum results when using BDMA in place of DMP-30 you must vary the amount.
DMP-30: 1.5-2%; BDMA: 2.5-3%).
Glass Distilled
CAS #628-63-7
RT 10815 100ml TECHNICAL TIP
RT 10816 4x100ml
For Araldite RD-1 see BGE (catalog # 12000) page 30.
 Aniline Blue Disodium Salt, Water For Araldite RD-2 see BDE (catalog # 11800) page 30.
Soluble, Certified, C.N. #DcK-11
C32H25N3O9S3Na2 F.W. 737.74 CAS #28631-66-5  Auramine O, Certified, C.N. #DcAu-4
(Acid Blue 22; China Blue; Cotton Blue; Marine Blue V; Soluble Blue (Pyoctanunum aureum; Basic Yellow 2; Pyoktanin Yellow; Canary Yellow)
3M, 2R; Water Blue) C17H21N3HCl•H2O F.W. 321.86 CAS # 2465-27-2
Solubility: 50% Water; 0.0% Alcohol; 4.5% Cellosolve; 7.8% Glycol; Solubility: 1.0% Water; 4.0% Alcohol; 1.2% Cellosolve; 1.75%
0.0% Xylene. Used in connective tissue staining procedures to stain collagen. Glycol; 0.05% Xylene
Used in differential staining. Snodgress el al., Lab Invest. 26:329, 1972.
RT 10840 25g
RT 10850 25 g

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 23

Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec01_022-025_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 12:24 AM Page 24

SECTION 1 Chemicals for Electron Microscopy, Light Microscopy, & Histology

 Azocarmine G  Benzoin Ethyl Ether
(Acid red 101; Basalan Carmine GE; Rosinduline) (Ethoxy phenylacetophenone)
C28H17N3Na2O6S2 F.W. 601.57 CAS #25641-18-3 C6H5COCH(CO2H5)C6H5 F.W. 240.31 CAS #574-09-4
Solubility: 1.0% Water; 0.1% Alcohol; 1.75% Cellosolve; 4.5% Glycol; m.p. 56-59°C
0.01% Xylene RT 11280 50g
RT 11150 5g
 Benzoin Methyl Ether, UV Catalyst
 Azur A [alpha-Ethoxy-alpha-phenylacetophenone)
(Methylene Azur A) C6H5CH(OCH3)COC6H5 F.W. 226.28 CAS #3524-62-7
C14H14ClN3S F.W. 291.80 CAS #531-53-3 Assay ......................................................................................>98%
Solubility: Water-soluble; Alcohol-soluble m.p. 47 - 49°C
Used in nuclear staining; A polychromatic blood stain.
RT 11290 10ml
RT 11240 10G

 Azur B  (BDMA), Benzyldimethylamine

(Azur I; Methylene Azur B) N-Benzyl-N, N-Dimethylamine
C15H16N3SCl F.W. 305.83 CAS #531-55-5 C6H5CH2N(CH3)2 FW. 135.21 CAS #103-83-3
Solubility: Water-soluble; Alcohol-slightly soluble. An important b.p. 177-180 °C
component of Giemsa’s stain for blood protozoa. Used for staining Specific Gravity @ 20°C: 0.898g/ml
semi-thin sections of plant tissue. Hoefert, L.L. (1968). Polychromatic An amine accelerator for polymerization of epoxy resins.
stains for thin sections of Beta embedded in epoxy resin. A direct alternative to DMP-30 with a longer shelf life and better
Stain Tech. 43:145 penetration. Purity: 98%
11200 10g RT 11400 100ml
RT
RT 11400-25 25ml
 Azur II
(Azur B/Methylene Blue 1:1) CAS #37247-10-2
RT 11210 10g TECHNICAL TIP
Accelerators For Epoxy Resins
 Azur II Eosin Embedding media for Electron Microscopy based on the epoxy resins
(Azur B/Methylene Blue/Eosin 1:1:1) CAS #53092-85-6 Araldite and Epon (replacements) all require the addition of an amine
RT 11220 10g accelerator to hasten polymerization (Glauert, 1974).
• DMP-30 • BDMA
 Azur Mixture Solution, Both of the above accelerators are equally efficient during
polymerization, but BDMA has the great advantage of being much less
See Giemsa Sol, Page 46, 473 
viscous than DMP-30. This is important since accurate measurement of
 Basic Fuchsin, Certified, C.N. #DcFb-26 small amounts of the accelerator and its complete mixing with the other
components of the embedding media are essential for the production of
(Rasaniline Hydrochloride; Basic Violet 14, Dye Content: ~88% min.)
satisfactory blocks.See Audrey Glauert (Proc. Roy. Micros., Vol 22/5
C20H19N3.HCl F.W. 337.86 CAS #632-99-5 Sept. 1987) NOTE: In order to achieve optimum results when using
Berkowitz et al., (1968). Selective staining of nervous tissue for light BDMA in place of DMP-30 you must remember that the amount of DMP-
microscopy following preparation for electron microscopy. J. Histochem. 30 added is 1.5% - 2% of the final mixture and BDMA is 2% - 3%.
Cytochem. 16:808.Sato, T., and Shamoto, M (1973). A simple rapid
polychrome stain for epoxy-embedded tissue. Stain Technol. 48:223.
RT 11260 25g  Biebrich Scarlet, Water Soluble
(Bonceau BS; Acid Red 66; Croceine Scarlet; Double Scarlet BSF)
 Basic Green 4, Certified, C.N. #DcMg-11 C22H14N4Na2O7S2 F.W. 556.49 CAS #4196-99-0
(Malachite Green Oxalate; Diamond Green B; BX or P Extra; Light Green N, Solubility: 5.0% Water; 0.25% Alcohol; 1.5% Cellosolve; 1.5% Glycol;
Solid Green O; Victoria Green B or WB; Dye Content ~90%, (oxalate form) 0.0% Xylene
2(C23H25N2).2(C2H2O4).C2O4 F.W. 927.03 CAS #2437-29-8
RT 11265 25 g
Solubility: 10.0% Water; 8.5% Alcohol; 5.5% Cellosolve; 7.0% Glycol;
0.0% Xylene.
 BioBond; Tissue Section Adhesive
Used as a bacteria stain and a counterstain for botanical material.
See Adhesives and Mountants, Page 9 
RT 18100 25g

 Benzoin, U.V. Catalyst  BioMeda Mounting Media

C6H5CH(OH)COC6H5 F.W. 212.25 CAS #579-44-2 See Adhesives and Mountants, Page 10-11,
m.p. 134-136°C 512-513 
11270
RT 100g
 BioMount
See Adhesives and Mountants, Page 11, 512 

24 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874

Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec01_022-025_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 12:24 AM Page 25

Chemicals for Electron Microscopy, Light Microscopy, & Histology SECTION 1

 Bismarck Brown Y Bismuth Staining Procedures

(Basic Brown 1; Basic Brown G, GX, GXP; Vesuvine; Leather Brown;
Manchester Brown; Phenylene Brown)
 Bismuth Subnitrate, Crystalline, USP Grade
C18H18N8•2HCl F.W. 419.32 CAS #10114-58-6 (Bismuth Nitrate, Basic; Bismuth Oxynitrate Hydrate)
Solubility: 1.5% Water; 3.0% Alcohol; 3.0% Cellosolve; 7.9% Glycol; 4BiNO3(OH2).BiO(OH) F.W. 1461.99 CAS #1304-85-4
0.05% Xylene Bismuth staining for light and electron microscopy. M .Locke and P. Huie,
Tissue & Cell, 9, 347 (1977); G.L. Brown & M. Locke, ibd. 10, 365 (1978)
RT 11310 25 g
RT 11450 25g
 Bismuth Carbonate, Basic, Purified  Bismuth Stain Kit
(Bismuth Subcarbonate) Approx. CAS # 5892-10-4 (BiO)2CO3
Bismuth specifically stains Golgi beads and interchromatin granules
Used for staining synapses. after fixation with glutaraldehyde, whereas it stains nucleoli, basic
Pfenninger, K., Sandri, C., Albert, K. and Eugster, C.H. (1969). protein, and biogenic amines after formaldehyde fixation. Bismuth
Contribution of the problem of structural organization of the presynaptic staining of sections is relatively nonspecific: it can stain glycogen,
area. Brain Res., 12:10 lysosomes, ribosomes, polysaccharides, ferritin, and DNA.
RT 11420 25g M.A. Hayat, “Basic Techniques for TEM” p. 184 (1986).
1. Specific En Bloc Staining (Locke & Huie, 1977)
 Borax Tetra, Sodium Borate, Reagent, A.C.S.
Kit contains:
(Sodium Tetraborate, Decahydrate) 10 x 5ml Solution A (Sodium tartrate, Sodium hydroxide and Bismuth
Na2B4O7.10H20 FW. 381.37 CAS #1303-96-4 Subnitrate,
A.C.S. Specifications 10x10ml solution B (.2M Triethanolamine-HCl buffer)
Assay ..............................................................................99.5-105%
Calcium ................................................................................0.005%
Procedures
Chloride ................................................................................0.001% Mix Solution A and B together (One part of A into two parts of B) then
Insoluble Matter ....................................................................0.005% adjust to pH 7.0 with 1N HCl.
Iron (Fe) ....................................................................................5ppm Aldehyde-fixed tissue blocks are rinsed in the above buffer and stained
pH of 0.01M Solution @ 25° C ..........................................9.15-9.20 en-bloc with Bismuth for one hour at room temperature on a gentle
Other Heavy Metals (as Pb)....................................................0.001% rotary shaker. Postfixation is carried out with 1% Osmium Tetroxide in
Phosphate (PO4 ) ..................................................................0.001% 0.05M Sodium Cacodylate buffer, pH 7.2.
Sulfate (S04) ..........................................................................0.005% Post-staining is not needed.
RT 21130 500g RT 11430 Kit

 Boric Acid, Reagent, Powder, A.C.S. 2. Enhancing Contrast in General (Riva, 1974)
H3BO3 FW 61.83 CAS #10043-35-3 Kit contains:
Assay 99.95% minimum. 5 x 10ml Solution A(Sodium tartrate in NaOH)
A buffer component in Tris-EDTA-Borate buffer. Also used in Silver- 5 x 200mg ingredient B (Bismuth subnitrate)
Methenamine buffer. Swift, J.A. (1968). The Electron histochemistry of Procedures
cystine-containing proteins in thin transverse sections of human hair.
Drops of solution A are added into the ingredient B (Bismuth
J.R. Microsc. Soc. 88,449.
Subnitrate). The mixture is cleared after 6-8ml of solution A is added;
RT 11460 500g
and after the addition of all of solution A, all the Bismuth is chelated.
 Bouin's Fixative Conventionally fixed tissue specimens are stained en-bloc with a
saturated Uranyl Acetate aqueous solution for 20 minutes. Thin sections
A fixative that is used in light microscopy for the preservation of soft on grids are stained under cover for 3 minutes by immersion in the
delicate structure. Bismuth Subnitrate chelated above, and then rinsed with distilled water.
RT 15990* 10x10ml
RT 11434 Kit
See page 38, 446 for different packaging. 
3. Staining of Mucosubstances & Polysaccharides
 Brilliant Cresyl Blue, Certified, C.N.#DcV-5 (Ainsworth et al., 1972)
(Brilliant Blue C; Cresyl Blue 2RN) Kit contains:
C17H21N4OCl F.W. 332.84 CAS #10127-36-3 10 x 10ml Solution A (Periodic acid, Ethanol, Sodium acetate)
Solubility: 3.0% Water; 2.6% Alcohol; 2.25% Cellosolve; 8.0% Glycol; 10 x 10ml Solution B (Sodium tartrate, NaOH, Bismuth subnitrate)
9.5% Xylene Procedures
RT 11465 10g Thin sections of conventionally fixed tissues are mounted on copper
grids and floated on solution A for 10-30 minutes at room temperature.
 Bromophenol Blue, Reagent, A.C.S. After being thoroughly washed 20-30 times for 5-10 minutes with
(3’,3”,5 ’5”-Tetrabromophenol-sulfonthalein) distilled water to remove periodate, the grids are floated on solution B
C19H10O5SBr4 F.W. 669.97 CAS #115-39-9 for 30-60 minutes at room temperature. They are then again thoroughly
RT 11470 5g washed with distilled water.
RT 11471 25g RT 11436 Kit

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 25

Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec01_026-037_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 12:26 AM Page 26

SECTION 1 Chemicals for Electron Microscopy, Light Microscopy, & Histology

READY-TO-USE PREPARED BUFFERS
All of our ready-to-use buffers are... The buffer is a vehicle for the fixative and requires certain properties:
...Conveniently packaged. a.) To maintain constant pH during the time of the b.) The ionic constitution to prevent the extraction of
...Prepared fresh for each order. fixation. The pH of the fixative in EM is adjusted cellular components, or the deposition of
...Economical and time-saving. using the buffer system chosen; e.g. range 6.5-8.0. precipitates of fixative chemicals.

Desired pH should be specified  Borate Buffer

when ordering. RT 11455-78 Borate Buffer, pH 7.8 500 ml
RT 11455-82 Borate Buffer, pH 8.2 500 ml
 Acetate Buffer RT 11455-90 Borate Buffer, pH 9.0 500 ml
Acetic Acid and Sodium Acetate 0.2M pH range 3.6-5.6
0-5˚C 11480 Acetate Buffer 225ml  Citrate Buffer
0-5˚C 11482 Acetate Buffer 500ml Citric acid and Sodium citrate 0.1M pH range 4.6-6.2
0-5˚C 11490 225ml
 Acetate Buffer 0-5˚C 11492 500ml

RT 11482-42 Acetate Buffer, 0.2M, pH 4.2 500 ml  Citrate Buffer 0.2M

RT 11482-50 Acetate Buffer, 0.2M, pH 5.0 500 ml
RT 11482-56 Acetate Buffer, 0.2M, pH 5.6 500 ml Buffer of Citric Acid and Sodium Citrate
0-5˚C 11492-04 Citrate Buffer 0.2M, pH 4.0 1L
 Antibody Diluent 0-5˚C 11492-06 Citrate Buffer 0.2M, pH 6.0 1L

Buffer for diluting your primary and secondary antibodies, especially if

they were stored for a while, even at -20 in glycerol, or in refrigerator.
 Citrate Buffer pH 6.0 (10x)
Nonspecific binding of the antibodies, negative effects of disturbing Description: This buffer is intended for heat-induced antigen retriever on
substances and low or medium affinity cross-reactivities of the formalin-fixed paraffin-embedded (FFPE) tissue sections prior to application
antibodies will be minimized, making your result more reliable. Excellent of antibodies. In IHC most commonly used fixative like formalin mask tissue
for IHC (frozen and formalin sections), flow cytometry on fixed cells, antigens (cellular, membrane and nuclear) by cross-linking process, this
Western Blot and other immune assays. results in poor or no staining in IHC. The use of this buffer on FFPE tissue
section improves accessibility of antibodies to tissue antigens.
When used in pathology, in also greatly reduces non-specific reactivity
Storage: 2–8˚C. DO NOT FREEZE
of human serum components and immunoglobulins in tissue, vessels
Intended Use: 1X buffer solution is intended for heat-induced antigen
and cells with mouse antibodies used on section.
retriever in IHC. Please refer to primary antibody protocol.
For especially "trouble"-giving antibodies, as well as for in situ PCR Reagent: 10 X, pH 6 antigen retriever solution.
applications, this dilutent may also be used as a washing buffer, Preparation of Working Solution: Dilute this 10X buffer as needed
preventing secondary binding of your analystes during washing. (e.g. 90 ml of deionized or distilled water + 10 ml of this buffer), mix
4-8°C 62713 Antibody Diluent 50 ml well, 1X buffer can be stored at 2–8ºC
4-8°C 62714 Antibody Diluent 125 ml
2–8˚C 64142-07 Citrate Buffer pH 6.0 100 ml
4-8°C 62715 Antibody Diluent 500 ml
2–8˚C 62142-08 Citrate Buffer pH 6.0 1000 ml
4-8°C 62713-01 Antibody Diluent for Frozen Sections 50 ml
4-8°C 62714-01 Antibody Diluent for Frozen Sections 125 ml
4-8°C 62715-01 Antibody Diluent for Frozen Sections 500 ml  Dulbecco’s Phosphate Buffer Saline – D-PBS
All of our Dullbecco’s Phosphate Buffer Saline Solutions contain:
 Antibody Dilution Buffer with Potassium Chloride, Potassium Phosphate Monobasic, Sodium Chloride,
Immunoglobulin- Free BSA Sodium Phosphate Dibasic, and D-Glucose. Some formulations may
This ready-to-use Antibody Dilution Buffer is designed for the dilution of contain additional components. Use the table below as a quick
antibodies in all immunoassays, including immunofluorescence, IHC, reference for identifying the one that best suits your application. All of
ELISA, WB. This buffer contains immunoglobulin free BSA and does not the solutions are prepared 1X strength.
contain phosphate, sodium azide, or mercury preservatives. It can be
used for the dilution of all antibodies, including peroxidase, and Ingredients F.W. Formula I Formula II Formula III
KCl 74.56 X X X
antibodies to phophoproteins. However, it is not suitable for dilution of
NaCl 58.44 X X X
antibodies to S100 proteins. This buffer contains green food color. Na2HPO4 . 7H2O 268.07 X X X
 Reagent Supplied: Ready to use buffer KH2PO4 136.09 X X X
 Application: Dilute antibodies, primary or secondary as recom- CaCl2, 2H2O 147.02 X X X
mended in the protocol by the manufacturer of these products. MgCl2 . 6H2O 203.31 X X X
Phenol Red – – 0.2 g/L
 Storage: 2 – 8°C. Diluted antibodies can be stored at 2˚ – 8˚C
for several weeks, depending upon the stability of antibodies. RT 11772-05 D-PBS, Formula I, 0.15M 500 ml
2–8˚C 25886-01 Antibody Dilution Buffer, free BSA 100 ml
RT 11772-10 D-PBS, Formula I, 0.15M 1L
2–8˚C 25886-05 Antibody Dilution Buffer, free BSA 500 ml
RT 11773-05 D-PBS, Formula II, 0.19M 500 ml
RT 11773-10 D-PBS, Formula II, 0.19M 1L
RT 11774-05 D-PBS, Formula III, 0.15M 500 ml
RT 11774-10 D-PBS, Formula III, 0.15M 1L

26 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874

Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec01_026-037_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 12:26 AM Page 27

Chemicals for Electron Microscopy, Light Microscopy, & Histology SECTION 1

READY-TO-USE PREPARED BUFFERS

 EARLE’s Balanced Salts Solutions - EBSS  ImmunoHistoZyme™, Ready-to-Use
All of our Earle’s Balanced Salt Solution contains: Potassium Chloride, Description: ImmunoHistoZyme is used for proteolytic digestion of
Sodium Chloride, Sodium Phosphate Monobasic, and D-glucose. Some formalin-fixed paraffin-embedded (FFPE) tissue sections prior to
formulations may contain additional components. Use the table below application of antibodies. In IHC most commonly used fixative like
as a quick reference for identifying the one that best suits your formalin mask tissue antigens (cellular, membrane and nuclear) by
application. All of the solutions are prepared 1X strength. cross-linking process, this results in poor or no staining in IHC.
ImmunoHistoZyme digestion of FFPE tissue section improves
Ingredients F.W. Formula I Formula II Formula III accessibility of antibodies to tissue antigens.
KCl 74.56 X X X Storage: 2–8˚C. DO NOT FREEZE
NaCl. 58.44 X X X
Intended Use: Use as antigen retriever for some antibodies in IHC.
NaH2PO4 . H2O 137.99 X X X
D-Glusose 180.16 1 g/L — 1 g/L Please refer to primary antibody protocol for IHC.
MgSO4. 7H2O 246.48 X X X Reagent: Ready-to-use ImmunoHistoZyme Reagent.
CaCl2 2H2O 147.02 X X X 2–8˚C 64142-13 ImmunoHistoZyme 15 ml
NaHCO3 84.01 X X X 2–8˚C 62142-14 ImmunoHistoZyme 100 ml
Phenol Red — 0.015 g/L 0.050 g/L
 Michel’s Buffer
RT 11765-05 ESBSS, Formula I, 0.157M 500 ml RT 18041-05 Michel’s Buffer 500 ml
RT 11765-10 ESBSS, Formula I, 0.157M 1L RT 18041-10 Michel’s Buffer 1L
RT 11766-05 ESBSS, Formula II, 0.152M 500 ml
RT 11766-10 ESBSS, Formula II, 0.152M 1L
RT 11767-05 ESBSS, Formula III, 0.157M 500 ml  Millonig’s Phosphate Buffer
RT 11767-10 ESBSS, Formula III, 0.157M 1L Millonig (1964); Karlsson and Schultz (1965)
Ingredients: Sodium Phosphate, monobasic (NaH2PO4•xH2O);
 EDTA Buffer pH 8.5 (10x) Sodium Phosphate, dibasic (Na2HPO4•xH2O); 0.5% Sodium Chloride (NaCl)
Description: This buffer is intended for heat-induced antigen retriever on
Shipping Conditions: Ambient Temperature
formalin-fixed paraffin-embedded (FFPE) tissue sections prior to application
The pH of this buffer is 7.4 (0.1M); the osmolarity is 440 mosmols, so
of antibodies. In IHC most commonly used fixative like formalin mask tissue
this buffer is hypertonic to most body fluids. Millonig recommended to
antigens (cellular, membrane and nuclear) by cross-linking process, this
use this buffer for the fixation of very hydrated tissues with osmium
results in poor or no staining in IHC. The use of this buffer on FFPE tissue
tetroxide. For marine organisms, a higher concentration of sodium
section improves accessibility of antibodies to tissue antigens.
chloride (3%) is recommended. We supply it in a double strength (0.2M),
Storage: 2–8˚C. DO NOT FREEZE pH 7.4. Dilution is needed before use.
Intended Use: 1X buffer solution is intended for heat-induced antigen
retriever in IHC. Please refer to primary antibody protocol. 0-5˚C 11582-05 Millonig’s Phosphate Buffer 0.2M 500ml
Reagent: 10 X, pH 8.5 antigen retriever solution. 0-5˚C 11582-10 Millonig’s Phosphate Buffer 0.2M 1L
Preparation of Working Solution: Dilute this 10X buffer as needed
(e.g. 90 ml of deionized or distilled water + 10 ml of this buffer), mix  Mops, Biological Buffer
well, 1X buffer can be stored at 2-8ºC (3-(N-Morpholino) propanesulfonic acid)
Cat. # Description Qty. pH range 6.5-7.9
4-8°C 64142-09 EDTA Buffer pH 8.5 100 ml
0-5˚C 18900 Mops, Biological Buffer 100g
4-8°C 62142-10 EDTA Buffer pH 8.50 1000 ml

 Hepes Buffer Solution  Pepsin Reagent, Ready To Use

0.2M pH range: 7.0-8.0 Description: Pepsin is used for proteolytic digestion of formalin-fixed
0-5˚C 11494 Hepes Buffer Solution 500ml paraffin-embedded (FFPE) tissue sections prior to application of
antibodies. In IHC most commonly used fixative like formalin mask tissue
 Hepes, Good’s Buffer antigens (cellular, membrane and nuclear) by cross-linking process, this
results in poor or no staining in IHC. Pepsin digestion of FFPE tissue
Crystalline, See page 48  section improves accessibility of antibodies to tissue antigens.
Storage: 2–8˚C. DO NOT FREEZE
 HRP-Conjugate Dilutent Intended Use: Use as antigen retriever for some antibodies in IHC.
Specifically designed for preparing solution of your HRP-conjugate used Please refer to primary antibody protocol for IHC.
as the detection reagent. It is the Antibody-dilutent buffer with additional Reagent: Ready-to-use Pepsin reagent available in 2 sizes:
component for stabilizing your HRP-conjugate. Allows you to further 15 and 100 ml
standardize the assay preparing ready-to-use conjugate solutions in
Cat. # Description Qty.
advance and store them in refrigerator without loss of activity. 2–8˚C 64142-05 Pepsin Reagent 15 ml
Cat. # Description Qty. 2–8˚C 62142-06 Pepsin Reagent 100 ml
4-8°C 62716 HRP Conjugate Dilutent 50 ml
4-8°C 62717 HRP Conjugate Dilutent 125ml
4-8°C 62718 HRP Conjugate Dilutent 500 ml

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 27

Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec01_026-037_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 12:26 AM Page 28

SECTION 1 Chemicals for Electron Microscopy, Light Microscopy, & Histology

READY-TO-USE PREPARED BUFFERS
 Phosphate Buffer, 0.1M*  Section Block
Prepared from Sodium Phosphate Monobasic Hydrate and Sodium A new class of blocking solutions based on chemically modified and
Phosphate Dibasic Heptahydrate Non-Sterile. Meant for research fragmented ultra-pure casein. Effectively reduces unwanted binding of primary
purposes only. antibody and conjugates you use to charged surface of the slide and tissue
0-5˚C 19340-60 Phosphate Buffer, pH 6.0 1L section. Greatly reduces non-specific binding while preserving the specific
0-5˚C 19340-65 Phosphate Buffer, pH 6.5 1L reaction, by saturating potential non-specific protein-protein interactions.
0-5˚C 19340-70 Phosphate Buffer, pH 7.0 1L Moreover, in contrast to BSA-based, IgGm casein or serum -based blocking
0-5˚C 19340-72 Phosphate Buffer, pH 7.2 1L solutions there is no interaction of specific antibody and blocking protein itself.
*Meant for biological research only. Not to be used for medical or any other purposes.
or oth Is not comparable to other commercially available or home-made
 Phosphate Buffer Saline (PBS) blocking solutions. Recommended for research and diagnostic pathology,
PBS is commonly used in biochemistry. It is a salty solution containing especially for retrieved sections and polyclonal antibodies..
calcium chloride, sodium phosphate and potassium phosphate. PBS is 62710 Section Block 50 ml
isotonic and non-toxic to cells. 1X PBS final concentration is 0.137M 62711 Section Block 125 ml
NaCl, 0.01M Na2HPO4, 0.0027M KCl and pH 7.4. 62712 Section Block 500 ml
0-5˚C
0-5˚C
19342-10
19242-40
Phosphate Buffered Saline, 10X
Phosphate Buffered Saline, 10X
1L
1 gal
 Sodium Cacodylate Buffer
0-5˚C 19343-10 Phosphate Buffered Saline, 2X 1L Prepared from Sodium Cacodylate Trihydrate (F.W. 214.02).
0-5˚C 19343-40 Phosphate Buffered Saline, 2X 1 gal 0-5˚C 11650 Sodium Cacodylate Buffer, 0.2M, pH 7.4 225 ml
0-5˚C 19344-10 Phosphate Buffered Saline, 1X 1L 0-5˚C 11652 Sodium Cacodylate Buffer, 0.2M, pH 7.4 500 ml
0-5˚C 19344-20 Phosphate Buffered Saline, 1X 1 gal 0-5˚C 11653 Sodium Cacodylate Buffer, 0.2M, pH 7.4 1L
0-5˚C 11654 Sodium Cacodylate Buffer, 0.4M, pH 7.2 500 ml
 Pipes, Good’s Buffer 0-5˚C 11655 Sodium Cacodylate Buffer, 0.4M, pH 7.2 1L
Crystalline, See Page 58 
 Sorensen’s Phosphate Buffer
 Pipes Buffer Solution, 0.3M (Phosphate Mixed Sodium Salts)
Aqueous PIPES solution adjusted by 0.1N Sodium Hydroxide to pH 5.5-6.0. Sorensen, see Dawson et. al, (1969)
0-5˚C 11610 Pipes Buffer Solution, 0.3M 500ml Sodium Phosphate, dibasic (Na2HPO4•xH2O)
Sodium Phosphate, monobasic (NaH2PO4•xH2O)
 Pronase Reagent, Ready To Use 0.2M, pH range 5.8 - 8.0
Description: Pronase is used for proteolytic digestion of formalin-fixed Shipping Conditions: Ambient Temperature
paraffin-embedded (FFPE) tissue sections prior to application of Maximum shelf life after receipt: 3 month
antibodies. In IHC most commonly used fixative like formalin mask tissue The osmolarity of a 0.1 M at a pH 7.2 is 226 mosmols; with the addition
antigens (cellular, membrane and nuclear) by cross-linking process, this of 0.18 M of sucrose to the solution, the osmolarity raises to 425
results in poor or no staining in IHC. Pronase digestion of FFPE tissue mosmols. Standard pH 7.2; 0.2M is supplied. Otherwise, specify pH
section improves accessibility of antibodies to tissue antigens. when ordering.
Storage: 2–8˚C. DO NOT FREEZE
0-5˚C 11600-05 Sorensen’s Phosphate Buffer, pH 7.2 500ml
Intended Use: Use as antigen retriever for some antibodies in IHC. 0-5˚C 11600-10 Sorensen’s Phosphate Buffer, pH 7.2 1L
Please refer to primary antibody protocol for IHC. 0-5˚C 11600-10 Sorensen’s Phosphate Buffer, 0.2M, pH 7.2 1L
Reagent: Ready-to-use Pronase reagent available in 2 sizes: 15 and 100 ml. 0-5˚C 11600-40 Sorensen’s Phosphate Buffer, 0.2M, pH 7.2 4L
2–8˚C 64142-03 Pronase Reagent 15 ml 0-5˚C 11601-10 Sorensen’s Phosphate Buffer, 0.2M, pH 7.4 1L
2–8˚C 62142-04 Pronase Reagent 100 ml 0-5˚C 11601-40 Sorensen’s Phosphate Buffer, 0.2M, pH 7.4 4L
0-5˚C 11682-05 Sorensen’s Phosphate Buffer, 0.15M, pH 7.4 500 ml
 R-UNIVERSAL Epitope Recovery Buffer 0-5˚C 11682-10 Sorensen’s Phosphate Buffer, 0.15M, pH 7.4 1L
(10x stock)  Sym-Collidine Buffer Kit
Properties: Clear, non-toxic solution. 2,4,6-Trimethylpyridine
Presentation: R-Universal Buffer is supplied as 10x concentrate. For N:C(CH3)CH:C(CH3)CH:CCH3
epitope recovery dilute 1 part of stock with 9 parts of deionized water. CAS #108-75-8 F.W. 121.18
Application: For epitope recovery dilute 1 part of stock with 9 parts of Bennett & Luft., Biophys & Biochem. Cytol., 6,113 (1959).
deionized water.
A very stable buffer, used with Osmium tetroxide; provides excellent
Stability and Storage: The preparation is stable for 1 year when stored fixation, better stability and buffering capacity. The pH can be adjusted by
unopened at +4˚C. Every lot is issued with a certificate indicating the expiry varying the amount of hydrochloric acid in the final volume of 200ml.
date. After opening, store at +4˚C in the refrigerator and use within 6 months. Preparation Instructions: Pour 9ml of 2N HCl; add 5.34ml of Sym-Collidine,
Certification: Each lot is certified for compliance to specifications. The mix well and add distilled water up to 200ml for a pH 7.4 solution.
product is produced under DIN EN ISO 9001: 2008 Quality Management Set consists of:
system for the products in Immunoassay Development and
1 amp 5.34ml Sym Collidine
Measurement, Products for Bioanalytics and lmmunoassays.
1 amp 9.0ml of 2N HCl
0–4˚C 62719-10 R-UNIVERSAL Epitope Recovery Buffer (10x stock) 125 ml RT 11500 Sym-Collidine Buffer Kit One set
0–4˚C 62719-20 R-UNIVERSAL Epitope Recovery Buffer (10x stock) 500 ml
RT 11510 Sym-Collidine Buffer Kit Box/5 sets

28 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874

Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec01_026-037_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 12:26 AM Page 29

Chemicals for Electron Microscopy, Light Microscopy, & Histology SECTION 1

READY-TO-USE PREPARED BUFFERS

 Sym-Collidine, Reagent  Trypsin Reagent
2,4,6-Collidine; 2,4,6-Trimethylpyridine Description: Trypsin is used for proteolytic digestion of formalin-fixed
(C5H2N)(CH3)3 paraffin-embedded (FFPE) tissue sections prior to application of antibodies.
CAS #108-75-8 F.W. 121.18 In IHC most commonly used fixative like formalin; mask tissue antigens
Assay: 99% Specific Gravity: 0.9170 (cellular, membrane and nuclear) by cross-linking process, this results in
poor or no staining in IHC. Trypsin digestion improves immunoreactivity of
RT 11520 Sym-Collidine Reagent 100ml some antigens in FFPE tissue sections. For cytokeratin clone AE3 and
AE1/AE3, this enzyme works much better than boiling the tissue with
 Tris, (hydroxymethyl) aminomethane, citrate buffer.
Crystalline, See Page 67  Storage: 2–8˚C. DO NOT FREEZE
 Tris, (hydroxymethyl) aminomethane Intended Use: Use as antigen retriever for some antibodies in IHC.
Please refer to primary antibody protocol for IHC.
maleate Reagent: This enzyme is supplied as concentrated form along with
Tris Maleate Buffer buffer. The kit comes in 2 sizes. Small: Reagent B (Buffer) is 15 ml and
0.2M pH range 6.4-8.0 the Reagent E (Enzyme) is 2 ml
0-5˚C 11730 250ml
0-5˚C 11740 500ml Large: Reagent B (Buffer) is 100 ml and the Reagent E (Enzyme) is 10 ml
Cat. # Description Qty.
Tris Buffer 2–8˚C 64142-01 Trypsin Kit Small Kit
0.2M pH 8.0 2–8˚C 62142-02 Trypsin Kit Large Kit
0-5˚C 11730-05 250ml
0-5˚C 11730-06 500ml  Universal Immunoassay Buffer™, 10X
Immunoassay buffer is used as a 1X in all immunoassays
Tris Buffered Saline
pH 7.4 (immunofluorescence, IHC, ELISA, WB etc.) as a washing buffer and it can
be used as a dilution buffer for antibodies; however it does not contain any
0-5˚C 11730-08 250ml
carrier proteins. This buffer also does not contain any phosphate, sodium
0-5˚C 11730-09 500ml
azide or mercury as preservatives and can be used for dilution of all
antibodies, including peroxidase, antibodies to phosphoproteins. It is not
Tris-HCL Buffer suitable for dilution of antibodies to S100 proteins.
1M pH range 6-8  Reagent Supplied: 10X Buffer
0-5˚C 11730-12 250ml  Application: Dilute this 10X buffer 10 times with DI water. (90 ml
0-5˚C 11730-15 500ml water + 10 ml this buffer – mixed well). Wash 3-5 times with
Tris HCL Buffer this buffer in between the steps of your immunoassay protocol.
pH range 7.2-9.0 RT 25880-01 Universal Immunoassay Buffer, 10X 100 ml
0-5˚C 11730-20 250ml RT 25880-10 Universal Immunoassay Buffer, 10X 1L
0-5˚C 11730-25 500ml
 Universal Antibody Dilution Buffer™
 Tris Buffer pH 10.0 (10x) This ready-to-use Universal Antibody Dilution Buffer is designed for dilution
Description: This buffer is intended for heat-induced antigen retriever on of antibodies in all immunoassays, including immunofluorescence, IHC,
formalin-fixed paraffin-embedded (FFPE) tissue sections prior to application ELISA, WB. This buffer does not contain any mammalian proteins,
of antibodies. In IHC most commonly used fixative like formalin mask tissue phosphate, sodium azide, or mercury preservatives and can be used
antigens (cellular, membrane and nuclear) by cross-linking process, this for dilution of all antibodies, including peroxidase, and antibodies to
results in poor or no staining in IHC. The use of this buffer on FFPE tissue phophoproteins. However, it is not suitable for dilution of antibodies
section improves accessibility of antibodies to tissue antigens. to S100 proteins,
Storage: 2–8˚C. DO NOT FREEZE  Application: Dilute antibodies, primary or secondary as recom-
Intended Use: 1X buffer solution is intended for heat-induced antigen mended in the protocol by the manufacturer of these products.
retriever in IHC. Please refer to primary antibody protocol.  Storage: 2 – 8°C. Diluted antibodies can be stored at 2˚ – 8˚C
Reagent: 10 X, pH 10 antigen retriever solution. for several weeks, depending upon the stability of antibodies.
Preparation of Working Solution: Dilute this 10X buffer as needed (e.g. 2–8˚C 25885-01 Universal Antibody Dilution Buffer 100 ml
90 ml of deionized or distilled water + 10 ml of this buffer), mix well, 1X 2–8˚C 25885-05 Universal Antibody Dilution Buffer 500 ml
buffer can be stored at 2-8ºC 2–8˚C 25886-01 Antibody Dilution Buffer, free BSA 100 ml
2–8˚C 25886-05 Antibody Dilution Buffer, free BSA 500 ml
Cat. # Description Qty.
2–8˚C 64142-11 Tris Buffer pH 10.0 100 ml
2–8˚C 62142-12 Tris Buffer pH 10.0 1000 ml

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 29

Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec01_026-037_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 12:26 AM Page 30

SECTION 1 Chemicals for Electron Microscopy, Light Microscopy, & Histology

 1,4-Butanediol Diglycidyl Ether  (BGE), n-Butyl Glycidyl Ether
(Araldite RD-2) C10H18O4 F.W. 202.2 CAS #2425-79-8 (Araldite RD-1) (Butoxymethyl oxirane)
Approx. 70% Specific Gravity: 1.10 C7H14O2 F.W. 130.19 CAS #2426-08-6
RT 11800 100ml b.p. 166-168°C Specific Gravity: 0.912
RT 12000 100ml
 2-Butoxy Ethanol
CAS #111-76-2  n-Butyl Methacrylate, Monomer
(Butyl Cellosolve®; Ethylene Glycol Monobutyl Ether) CH2C(CH3)CO2CH2CH2CH2CH3 F.W. 142.20 CAS #97-88-1
CH3(CH2)3OCH2CH2OH F.W. 118.18 b.p. 162-164°C
Specific Gravity: 0.90 b.p. 169°C Stabilized with 10ppm MEHQ. (Hydroquinone, Mononethylether)
11820 450ml
RT
RT 12100 225ml

 Butvar B-98 Powder  Cacodylic Acid, Free Acid

CAS #63148-65-2 (Dimethylarsinic Acid)
(Terpolymer of polyvinyl butyl, polyvinyl alcohol & polyvinyl acetate) (CH3)2AsO2H F.W. 137.99 CAS #75-60-5
Polyvinyl butyl resin for thin film support. Stronger than Formvar and Assay ......................................................................................99.5%
more sticky, resulting in a firm attachment for slotted or meshed grids. RT 12200 25g
The standard solution is 0.25% Butvar B-98 in Chloroform. Handley, RT 12201 100g
D.A., et. al., Ultramicroscopy, 4,479 (1979).  Cacodylic Acid - Sodium Salt, Trihydrate
RT 11850 100g Sodium Cacodylate
Sodium dimethyl arsenate
TECHNICAL TIP C2H6AsNaO2.3H20
F.W. 214.02
Tips For Butvar B-98 Support Films CAS #124-65-2
At the University of California, San Francisco a simplified and less
hazardous method from the original Handley method (Handley, D.A. et al Certificate of Analysis:
Butvar B-98 as a Thin Support Film. Ultramicroscopy 4, 479 (1979)) has Identity ............................................................................Conforming
been employed for the fabrication of Butvar support films. Antonia M. Appearance ................................................................Small Crystals
Milroy, Anatomy Department, University of California, San Francisco, CA. Color ........................................................................................White
94143-0452 FOR REPRINTS OF THE PROCEDURE PLEASE CONTACT US. Odor ..........................................................................................None
Aqueous solution (2g+10ml)................................................Colorless
Assay % ..................................................................................99.52
 Butvar B-98 Solution Loss on drying %......................................................................25.39
Stock solution: 1% in Chloroform. Chlorides % ............................................................................0.0050
Sulfates % ..............................................................................0.0150
RT 11860 100ml
Inorganic Arsenic %................................................................0.0030
 n-Butyl Acetate, Reagent, A.C.S. RT 12300-25 25g
RT 12300 100g
CH3COO(CH2)3CH3 F.W. 116.16 CAS #123-86-4 RT 12310 500g
b.p . 127°C Specific Gravity: 0.88
 Cadmium Iodide, Crystal, Reagent, A.C.S.
RT 11900 450ml
CdI2 F.W. 366.21 CAS #7790-80-9
 n-Butyl Alcohol, Reagent, A.C.S. Assay ..........................................................................min. 99.0%
(Butanol) Used for negative staining.
CH3CH2CH2CH2OH F.W. 74.12 CAS # 71-36-3 m.p. 387°C
Specific Gravity: 0.81 Possible Carcinogen.
RT 12320 25g
Assay ......................................................................................99.4% RT 12321 100g
Residue after evaporation ......................................................0.005%
Titratable acid ..............................................................0.0008meq/g  Calcium Chloride, Dihydrate, Reagent, A.C.S.
Butyl Ether ................................................................................0.2% CaCl2.2H2O F.W. 147.02 CAS #10035-04-8
Water ........................................................................................0.1%
RT 12340 100g
RT 11920 450ml
RT 11921 4x450ml  Carbohydrazide
CO(NHNH2)2 F.W. 90.08 CAS #497-18-7
TECHNICAL TIP m.p. 152-153°C
For GACH embedding kit.
Preservation of Phospholipids
A water-miscible, lipid-retaining, embedding polymer for E.M..
The best method for preserving phospholipids and triglycerides is
through ultrarapid cryofixation followed by freeze drying. Hagler, H.K. and Heckman, et. al., Ultrastruct. Res., 42,156 (1973).
12350 25g
Buja, L.M. (1986). Reference: Effect of specimen preparation and RT

section transfer techniques on the preservation of ultrastructure, liquids

and elements in cryosections. J. Microsc.,141:311
 Carbon Adhesives, See Adhesives and
Mountants pages 12-16, 640-643 

30 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874

Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec01_026-037_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 5/17/15 1:35 PM Page 31

Chemicals for Electron Microscopy, Light Microscopy, & Histology SECTION 1

 Carbowax, Polyethylene Glycol  Chloroform, Reagent, A.C.S.

H(OCH2CH2)nOH CAS #25322-68-3 CHCl3 FW 119.38 CAS #67-66-3
An embedding medium for microscopy and histochemistry. A.C.S. Specifications:
Melting/ Color (APHA) ..................................................................................10
Average Density Freezing Density @ 25°C..............................................................1.471-1.476
Cat# Carbowax M.W. @ 20°C @60°C range, °C Pack Residue after Evaporation ......................................................0.001%
RT 19700 PEG 200 set to glass Acetone & Aldehyde (about 0.00%). ..............................To Pass Test
viscous liquid 190-210 1.2390 1.0922 <-65 450ml
RT 19710 PEG 300 Acid & Chloride ..............................................................To Pass Test
viscous liquid 285-315 1.1250 1.0928 -15 to -8 450ml Free Chlorine (Cl). ..........................................................To Pass Test
RT 19720 PEG 400 Lead (Pb) ............................................................................0.05ppm
viscous liquid 380-420 1.1254 1.0930 4 to 8 450ml Subs. darkened by H2SO4 ..............................................To Pass Test
RT 19730 PEG 600 Suitability for Dithizone Test...........................................To Pass Test
viscous liquid 570-630 1.1257 1.0930 20 to 25 450ml
RT 12540 450ml
RT 19740 PEG 1000 Waxy 950-1050 — 1.0926 37 to 40 1 kilo RT 12541 4x450ml
RT 19750 PEG 1450 Waxy 1300-1600 — 1.0919 43 to 46 1 kilo
RT 19760 PEG 3350 Waxy 3000-3700 — 1.0926 54 to 58 1 kilo
RT 19770 PEG 8000  Chloroform, Glass Distilled
Flakes 7000-9000 — 1.0845 60 to 63 1 kilo Specifications:
UV Absorption - 1 cm cell vs H2O
Gao, K.X., (1993). Polyethylene Glycol as an Embedment for Microscopy and Histochemistry.
CRC Press; ISBN# 0-8493-4323-2. λ (nm) 290 270 260 255 245
A 0.01 0.02 0.05 0.15 1.0

ARTICLES OF INTEREST Assay ..............................................................................99.7% min.

Evaporation Residue ........................................................3ppm max.
The Use of Polyethylene Glycol; Carbowax Water .............................................................................0.03% max.
Polyethylene Glycol 1500 (Carbowax 1500) is an excellent embedding RT 12550 100ml
medium for immunohistochemical studies. It provides structural RT 12551 4x100ml
preservation superior to frozen sections and increased sensitivity of
antigen detection compared with paraffin sections. One limitation of PEG  Chromic Acid Reagent, Crystals, A.C.S.
embedment is that PEG sections are difficult to handle and adhere poorly CrO3 FW 99.99 CAS #1333-82-0
to glass slides. This article will share with you a simple and effective
A.C.S. Specifications:
method to overcome those limitations. Refer to: Kuixiong Gao and James
Chloride (Cl)...........................................................................0.005%
D. Godkin. (1991) “A New Method for Transfer of Polyethylene Glycol-
Insoluble Matter ......................................................................0.01%
embedded Tissue Sections to Silanated Slides for Immunocytochemistry”.
Nitrate (NO3) ...........................................................................0.05%
The J. of Histochem. and Cytochem. Vol. 39, No. 4, pg. 537-540.
Sodium (Na)...............................................................................0.2%
Iron, Aluminum, Barium. .........................................................0.03%
 Cardolite NC-513™ Sulfate (SO4) ...........................................................................0.05%
Assay..........................................................................................98%
CH2OCHCH2OC6H4C15H27 F.W. 356 W.P.E. 490
RT 12555 100g
15-M-Phenylglycidyl-(n-pentadecca-8,11-dienyl) CAS #106-89-8
Specific Gravity: 0.97 at 24°C For Chromic Acid Solutions, see page 450 
A Long-chain, monofunctional epoxide; stable when mixed with resins.
 Citrate Buffer
Viscosity 50 cps at 25°C. Citric acid and Sodium citrate 0.1M pH range 4.6-6.2
RT 12400 225ml 0-5˚C 11490 225ml
0-5˚C 11492 500ml
 Carmine, Certified, C.N. #DcCa-16
Alum Lake of Carminic acid  Citrate Buffer 0.2M
(Natural Red 4) CAS # 1390-65-4 Buffer of Citric Acid and Sodium Citrate
Solubility: 0.0% Water; 0.2% Alcohol; 0.5% Cellosolve; 4.0% Glycol; 0-5˚C 11492-04 Citrate Buffer 0.2M, pH 4.0 1L
0.0% Xylene. 0-5˚C 11492-06 Citrate Buffer 0.2M, pH 6.0 1L
RT 12410 10g
 Citrate Buffer pH 6.0 (10x)
 Cedar Wood Oil This buffer is intended for heat-induced antigen retriever on formalin-fixed
CAS #8000-27-9 Refractive Index @ 20°C 1.504+/-.002 paraffin-embedded (FFPE) tissue sections prior to application of antibodies.
For clearing. Storage: 2–8˚C. DO NOT FREEZE
RT 12420 100ml Intended Use: 1X buffer solution is intended for heat-induced antigen
retriever in IHC. Please refer to primary antibody protocol.
 Cedar Wood Oil Reagent: 10 X, pH 6 antigen retriever solution.
CAS #8000-27-9 Refractive Index @ 20°C 1.515-1.520 Preparation of Working Solution: Dilute this 10X buffer as needed
Used as an immersion oil. (e.g. 90 ml of deionized or distilled water + 10 ml of this buffer), mix
RT 12430 100ml well, 1X buffer can be stored at 2–8ºC
64142-07 Citrate Buffer pH 6.0 100 ml
 Certified Dyes For Biological Staining
2–8˚C
2–8˚C 62142-08 Citrate Buffer pH 6.0 1000 ml
See Histology section, pages 466-467 

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 31

Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec01_026-037_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 12:27 AM Page 32

SECTION 1 Chemicals for Electron Microscopy, Light Microscopy, & Histology

 Citric Acid, Anhydrous, Reagent, A.C.S.  Cresyl Fast Violet, (FIRM)
C6H8O7 FW 192.13 CAS #77-92-9 Rapid staining technique that provides high-contrast fluorescence
A.C.S. Specifications: microscopy imaging of resin embedded samples, reminiscint of low
Assay ..............................................................................Min. 99.5% magnification transmission electron microscopy.
Insoluble Matters ...................................................................0.005%  Works with Epoxy and Acrylic type resins
Residue after Ignition ..............................................................0.02%  Simply mount your sections on glass slides, air dry, and overlay
Chloride ................................................................................0.001% with 100 microliters FIRM for 30 seconds, wash and coverslip with
Oxalate (C2O4) (about 0.05%)..........................................To Pass Test water or an aqueous mountant. View in Rhodamine channel of a
Phosphate ............................................................................0.001% standard wide field Fluorescence Microscope.
Sulfate...................................................................................0.002%
 FIRM staining is unique in that the brightly fluorescent dye infil-
Heavy Metal (as Pb) ..................................................................2ppm
trates the resin, revealing tissue structures in negative relief, with
Subs. carbonized by hot H2SO4 ......................................To Pass Test
extremely high contrast and resolution.
Iron ..........................................................................................3ppm
 Perfect for previewing specimens prior to EM Analysis
12480 500g
 High Throughput, high contrast image phenotyping of model organ-
RT

 Cobalt Napthenate Solution isms such as drosophila

 Ideal for material and food science analytical microscopy
(55% Cobalt Napthenate; CAS#61789-51-3 and 45% Mineral Spirit;
CAS #64742-88-7)
12780-05 FIRM for Acrylic Resin Sections 10ml
Used as an activator for the Vestopal embedding resin.
12780-06 FIRM for Epoxy Resin Sections 10ml
RT 12500 10ml
12501
RT 25ml
 Crystal Violet, Certified, C.N. #DcC-38
 s-Collidine Buffer See Buffer Section Page 28-29 (Basic Violet 3; Gentian Violet; Methyl Violet 10B; Hexamethyl Violet)
RT 11500 One Set C25H30N3Cl F.W. 407.99 CAS #548-62-9
RT 11510 box/5 sets Solubility: 9.0% Water; 8.75% Alcohol; 7.5% Cellosolve; 7.0% Glycol;
 Collodion, 5% Solution, USP 0.0% Xylene
25% Alcohol, 75% Diethyl Ether in Pyroxylin CAS #9004-70-0 Dye Contents ~88% min.
RT 12600 100ml Certified Stain. For differentiating between gram-negative and gram-positive
RT 12600-30 30ml bacteria. Using Safranine O as a counterstain. Certified for staining
chromatin and nucleoli in plant tissue. Biological Stains, 9th Ed. 586 (1977)
 Collodion (Parlodion), 2% in Amyl Acetate RT 12785 25 g
Highly purified nitrocellulose (parlodion strip) in glass distilled amyl For Crystal Violet Solutions, see page 472 
acetate. Useful for forming a negative replica to very fine detail. Two
types are available: Our sterile formula which is filtered down to 0.45
micron and our non-sterile formula.  Cuprolinic Blue™
RT 12620-00 Non-Filter 2% Collodion in Amyl Acetate 100 ml Quinolinic Phthalocyanine
RT 12620-10 Sterile 2% Collodion in Amyl Acetate (Ultra-Pure) 100 ml 4,11,18, 25-tetraazoniaphthalocyamine tetrakis (methyl sulfate)
RT 12620-30 Non-filter 2% Collodion in Amyl Acetate 30 ml C36H36N2O16S4Cu F.W. 1084.5
RT 12620-34 Non-filter 2% Collodion in Amyl Acetate 4x30 ml
Used in the study of RNA in the fields of Histochemistry, Histology, and
RT 12620-50 Sterile 2% Collodion in Amyl Acetate (Ultra-Pure) 30 ml
RT 12620-55 Sterile 2% Collodion in Amyl Acetate (Ultra-Pure) 4x30 ml
Genetics. Also used to study the molecular composition of the nature
TM (Tectorial membrane) by specifically localizing and examining the
 Conjugates; ImmunoGold Reagents, morphology of Sulfated PGs (Proteoglycans) in the TM.
Peter A.Santi, M. Kathryn Lease, Robert G. Harrison and Eileen M.
See Section 2, Pages 72-90 
Wicker. J. of Electron Micro. Tech. 15:293-300 (1990) : Ultrastructure
of Proteoglycans in the Tectorial Membrane.
 Cresyl Fast Violet, Certified, C.N.#DcW-5 RT 12800 For a 50ml solution 0.1g
(Cresyl Violet Acetate) RT 12802 For a 100ml solution 0.2g
C18H15N3O3 F.W. 321.33 CAS # 10510-54-0
Solubility: 0.13% water Dye Contents ~ 75% For our Davidson's Fixative, see page 39, 452 
Certified Stain. To differentiate DNA and Nissl bodies in spinal cord and
brain tissues.  Deionized Water, Reagent Grade A.C.S.
For staining Nissl substances in nerve cells and for bulk staining of nerve H2O F.W. 18.02 CAS #7732-18-5
tissue. Stain Technol., 30, 83 (1955) EMS Reagent Grade Water is typically prepared at 18 megohm/cm
Stain for fresh tumor tissue for biopsy. J. Lab. Clin. Med., 8, 250 specific resistance using a reverse osmosis, mixed deionization,
(1923). Biological Stains 9th Ed., 601 (1987 activated filtration and final filtration at 0.2 microns.
RT 12780 5g Color (APHA) ............................................................................<+/-5
For Cresyl Fast Violet Solutions, see page 472  Bacteriological purity ..........................................................0 CFUs/L
Residue after evaporation ......................................................10ppm
Coliform................................................................................negative
RT 22800-01 Deionized Water 1 gal
RT 22800-05 Deionized Water 5 gal

32 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874

Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec01_026-037_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 12:27 AM Page 33

Chemicals for Electron Microscopy, Light Microscopy, & Histology SECTION 1

TECHNICAL TIP  (DAB), 3,3’-Diaminobenzidine,

EM Grade, Purified free-base
The Use of Flexibilizers and Plasticizers
Flexibilizers such as Cardolite-513 and DER 736 helps embedding (3,3’,4,4’-Biphenyltetramin)
resins gain its stabilization under the electron beam. Plasticizers, such as C12H14N4 F.W. 214.27 CAS #91-95-2
DPB, prevents excessive brittleness and improves sectioning properties. m.p. 173°C
Used as an ultrastructural protein tracer for immuno-cytochemistry.
 DER 736 Resin A possible carcinogen.
CAS #041638-13-5 Specific Gravity: 1.14 0-5˚C 13060 1g
A light colored, flexible epoxy.
Epoxide equivalent weight: 175-205.  (TMB), 3,3,5,5-Tetramethyl Benzidine
Used to simplify infiltration in combination with Epon 812 (Embed 812) A non-carcinogenic substitute for Benzidine (DAB-HCI); used as a
Kushida, J. Electron Micro., 16,278 (1964) sensitive and specific reagent for the detection of blood.
RT 13000 225ml J. Histochem. Cytochem., 26, 106 (1978).
RT 13001 10x225ml lot See page 65 for more information. 
 DER 732 Resin  (DAB-HCl), 3,3-Diaminobenzidine Tetra
CAS #026142-30-3 Specific Gravity: 1.06 Hydrochloride, EM Grade
Used as a flexibilizer in Maraglas 655-epoxy formulation. Relatively low C12H14N4.4HCl F.W. 360.12 CAS #7411-49-6
Viscosity (55-100 at 25°C).
Erlandson, J. Cell Bio., 22,704 (1964). m.p. 300°C
RT 13010 225ml Used for histochemical localization of peroxidase with DAB and in
immunocytochemistry.
 DER 332 Resin Sternberger, et.al., J. Histochem, Cytochem., 18,215 (1970)
CAS #001675-54-3 Specific Gravity : 1.16 0-5˚C 13080 1g
A relatively soft embedding resin used when slower polymerization is needed.
We are now offering DAB 4HCl pre-weighed and packed in tablet form,
Lockwood, Anat. Rec., 150,129 (1964).
to facilitate your work. Each tablet contains 10mg. Just break the tablet
RT 13030 225ml
or tablets in a suitable bottle and add your buffer. All weighing and
 DER 332/732 Embedding Kit contact with the solid (DAB-HCl) is avoided.
See Embedding Media Kits, Page 92  0-5˚C 13082 10 tablets/pkg
RT 14000 kit 0-5˚C 13083 20 tablets/pkg

 Dextrose, Anhydrous, Reagent  (DBP) Dibutyl Phthalate

(D-Glucose) C6H4(COOC4H9)2 F.W. 278.35 CAS #84-74-2
C6H12O6 FW 180.16 CAS #50-99-7 Specific Gravity: 1.049
Assay Purity ............................................................................99.8% A plasticizer for epoxy resins.
Insolubles ..............................................................................0.005%
Moisture (1050C)........................................................................0.2% RT 13100 225ml
Ash..........................................................................................0.02% RT 13101 Lot of 10x225ml
Chloride ..................................................................................0.01% RT 13110 450ml
Sulfate and Sulfite ................................................................0.005%
Arsenic ..............................................................................0.00004%
Heavy Metal (as Pb) ..........................................................0.00005%  1,2-Dichloroethane, Reagent, A.C.S.
Iron....................................................................................0.00005% (Ethylene Dichloride)
RNAse & DNAse Activity..............................................None Detected CH2ClCH2Cl F.W. 98.96 CAS #107-06-2
RT 13050 500g A.C.S. Specifications
Color (A.H.S.A.) ..............................................................................10
TECHNICAL TIP Appearance................................................................................Clear
Odor ........................................................ Resembling odor of CHCl
Stability Of Special Staining Solutions Density @25°C..............................................................1.241 -1.251
General Guidelines Concerning Solutions Boiling Range, Incl. 83.5°C ........................................................20°C
1. Check stock solutions regularly for signs of deterioration. Residue after Evaporation ......................................................0.002%
2. All solutions should be dated and initialed by the person who prepared the solution. Titratable Acid..............................................................0.0003 meq/g
3. Use caution to prevent cross solution contamination. Water ......................................................................................0.03%
4. Use distilled or double distilled water to prepare solutions. RT 13250 450ml
5. Use reagent grade chemicals. RT 13251 4x450ml
6. Use dyes which are certified .
7. Keep solutions in well stoppered bottles at all times.
8. Refrigerated solutions should be poured into the staining jar, and the bottled  Diethylene Glycol Distearate
solution returned to the refrigerator before it warms to room temperature. RT 13255 500gm
9. Return all staining solutions to shelves soon after use to prevent mix-up.
10. Always use clean glassware. See Embedding Media Kits page 92 
11. Make sure that balance, pH meter, etc., are in proper working order.

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 33

Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec01_026-037_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 12:27 AM Page 34

SECTION 1 Chemicals for Electron Microscopy, Light Microscopy, & Histology

 Digitonin, Crystal, Reagent  N,N-Dimethylaniline
C56H92029 F.W. 1229.34 CAS #11024-24-1 C6H5N(CH3)2 F.W. 121.18 CAS #121-69-7
An additive which stabilizes cholesterol. 0.2% digitonin in buffer added Specific Gravity: 0.96 g/ml
to Glutaraldehyde fixative may help to stabilize and retain the fine RT 13360 100ml
structural localization of free cholesterol and cholesterol esters.
 Okros, I Histochemie 13-91, 1968. Windaus, A. Hoop Seyler’s Z.  (DMSO), Dimethyl Sulfoxide, Reagent, A.C.S.
Physio. Chem. 65:110, 1910. J. Cell Bio., 40, 802, 1969. (CH3)2SO FW 78.13 CAS #67-68-5
 Temkin, Robert J. (1993); Microscopy Research and Tech. A.C.S. Specifications:
26:260-271 Appearance ..............................................................Clear, Colorless
RT 13260 1g Density (g/ml)@25°C ........................................................min. 1.095
Freezing Point ........................................................Not below 18.0°C
 (DMAE), 2-Dimethylaminoethanol Residue after evaporation ........................................................0.01%
C4H11NO F.W. 89.14 CAS #108-01-0
Water ........................................................................................0.2%
Specific Gravity: 0.883-0.888 b.p. 132-134°C RT 13390 450ml
A curing agent for epoxy resins.
13300 25ml
RT
TECHNICAL TIP
 (DMA) N,N-Dimethylaminoethyl Cryo-Protectants
Methacrylate Studies have shown that: Glycerol and Dimethyl Sulfoxide give good
C8H15NO2 F.W. 157.21 CAS #2867-47-2 structural preservation for cryo-protectants, but they also cause gross
physical damage to cells, and they should not be used in microanalytical
Specific Gravity: 0.933 b.p. 76°C studies. For better results, high-molecular-weight nonpenetrating
A water soluble monomer. cryoprotectants such as polyvinylpyrolidone (PVP) and hydroxyethyl
RT 13350 450ml starch (HES) can give good morphological preservation, and only cause
minimal perturbation to the functional physiology of the tissue.
 (DMP), 2,2-Dimethoxypropane Sauberman, A.J., Riley, W., and Echlin, p. 1977a SEM/1977/I,II T
Research Institute, Chicago, Illinois, p.347
(Acetone Dimethyl Acetal)
(CH3)2C(OCH3)2 F.W. 104.15 CAS #77-76-9
 Divinyl Benzene, Mixed Isomers
Specific Gravity: 0.849
Used as a dehydration agent. C6H4(CH:CH2)2 F.W. 130.19 CAS #1321-74-0
A cross-linking monomer. Inhibited with up to 1,500 ppm p-tert-butyl
 Miller, L.L. and Jacks, T.J. (1975). Rapid chemical dehydration
of samples for electron microscopic examinations. J. catechol.
Histochem. Cytochem, 23:107 Specific Gravity: 0.91
 Thorpe J.R. and Harvey D.M.R. (1979). Optimization and investi- RT 13450 100ml
gation of the use of 2,2-dimethoxypropane as a dehydration
agent for plant tissue in TEM. J. Ultrastrut. Res. ,68:186  D.D.S.A.
 Beckmann H.J. and Dierichs, R. (1982). Lipid extracting properties (Dodecenyl Succinic Anhydride)
of 2,2-Dimethoxypropane as revealed by electron microscopy and C16H26O3 F.W. 266.38 CAS #25377-73-5
thin layer chromatography Histochemistry, 76:407 Specific Gravity: 1.005
RT 13280 450ml
RT 13700 450ml
RT 13281 4x450ml
RT 13701 Lot 4x450ml

TECHNICAL TIP  D.D.S.A., Specially Distilled

(Dodecenyl Succinic Anhydride)
The Use of DMP (2,2-Dimethoxy Propane)
Much better than DDSA, we now offer an ultra pure
DMP (2,2-Dimethoxypropane, EMS Cat. #13280) is a quick and
DDSA, distilled by a new, slower process, which has a distinct effect on the
inexpensive material for processing tissue preparations for SEM. It
requires no special equipment as critical point drying does and it is not color control of embedding resins, and offers complete infiltration of tissues.
complicated as with freeze-drying or freeze-substitution. Please refer to: Produces blocks which are totally transparent.
Weyda, F. (1992). Simple Dessication Method for Scanning Electron RT 13710 450ml
Microscopy Using Dimethoxypropane. Proc. EMSA/MAS/MSC/SCM p. 760. RT 13711 Lot 4x450ml

 DPX Mountant for Microscopy

 DMP-30 RT 13510 100ml
(2,4,6-Tri (dimethylaminomethyl) phenol) RT 13512 500ml
C15H29N8OH F.W. 265.0 CAS #90-72-2 See Adhesives and Mountants,
Specific Gravity: 0.973 @ 25°C/25°C Refractive Index @25°C :1.514 page 18, 515 for more information. 
A tertiary amine, used as an accelerator for anhydride cures. One of
the most popular accelerators available! Keep as dry as possible. Short  DEPEX Mountant
shelf life. Use as fresh as possible. RT 13514 100m
RT 13600 25ml See Adhesives and Mountants,
page 18, 515 for more information. 

34 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874

Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec01_026-037_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 12:27 AM Page 35

Chemicals for Electron Microscopy, Light Microscopy, & Histology SECTION 1

 Dulbecco’s Phosphate Buffer Saline – D-PBS  EDTA, Disodium Salt, Dihydrate, A.C.S.
All of our Dullbecco’s Phosphate Buffer Saline Solutions contain: (Ethylenediamine Tetraacetic acid)
Potassium Chloride, Potassium Phosphate Monobasic, Sodium Chloride, Na2C10H14N2O8.2H2O F.W. 372.20 CAS #6381-92-6
Sodium Phosphate Dibasic, and D-Glucose. Some formulations may A.C.S. Specifications:
contain additional components. Use the table below as a quick Assay. ......................................................................................99+%
reference for identifying the one that best suits your application. All of Insoluble matter ............................................................max 0.005%
the solutions are prepared 1X strength. Nitrilotriacetic acid ............................................................max 0.1%
Ingredients F.W. Formula I Formula II Formula III
Heavy Metal (as Pb) ......................................................max 0.005%
KCl 74.56 X X X Iron ..................................................................................max 0.01%
NaCl 58.44 X X X Organic chelating for staining glutaraldehyde fixed tissues, pre-stained
Na2HPO4 . 7H2O 268.07 X X X with uranyl acetate, followed by lead citrate. Bernard, W., J. Ultrastruct.
KH2PO4 136.09 X X X Res., 27. 250 (1969)
CaCl2, 2H2O 147.02 X X X RT 15200 100g
MgCl2 . 6H2O 203.31 X X X
Phenol Red – – 0.2 g/L
RT 11772-05 D-PBS, Formula I, 0.15M 500 ml  EDTA Buffer pH 8.5 (10x)
RT 11772-10 D-PBS, Formula I, 0.15M 1L Description: This buffer is intended for heat-induced antigen retriever on
RT 11773-05 D-PBS, Formula II, 0.19M 500 ml formalin-fixed paraffin-embedded (FFPE) tissue sections prior to application
RT 11773-10 D-PBS, Formula II, 0.19M 1L of antibodies. In IHC most commonly used fixative like formalin mask tissue
RT 11774-05 D-PBS, Formula III, 0.15M 500 ml antigens (cellular, membrane and nuclear) by cross-linking process, this
RT 11774-10 D-PBS, Formula III, 0.15M 1L results in poor or no staining in IHC. The use of this buffer on FFPE tissue
section improves accessibility of antibodies to tissue antigens.
 Durcupan (Water Soluble) Storage: 2–8˚C. DO NOT FREEZE
See Embedding Media Kits page 92  Intended Use: 1X buffer solution is intended for heat-induced antigen
RT 14020 kit retriever in IHC. Please refer to primary antibody protocol.
RT 14021 Single Component A each Reagent: 10 X, pH 8.5 antigen retriever solution.
RT 14022 Single Component B each Preparation of Working Solution: Dilute this 10X buffer as needed
(e.g. 90 ml of deionized or distilled water + 10 ml of this buffer), mix
 Durcupan ACM Epoxy well, 1X buffer can be stored at 2-8ºC
See Embedding Media Kits page 92 
Cat. # Description Qty.
RT 14040 kit 4-8°C 64142-09 EDTA Buffer pH 8.5 100 ml
RT 14041 Single Component A/M Epoxy resin 100ml 4-8°C 62142-10 EDTA Buffer pH 8.50 1000 ml
RT 14042 Single Component B Hardener 964 100ml

 Ehrlich’s Hematoxylin
 EA Counterstain, Gill’s Modified Solution Stain selectivity for nuclei. Ready-to-use.
For use with Papanicolaou stain; a general tissue stain. Ready-to-use.
RT 26040-05 Ehrlich’s Hematoxylin 500ml
RT 26050-05 EA Counterstain, Gill’s Modified 500ml RT 26040-06 Ehrlich’s Hematoxylin 1L
RT 26050-06 EA Counterstain, Gill’s Modified 1L
 EMbed 812
 EARLE’s Balanced Salts Solutions - EBSS CAS # N.A. Specific Gravity: 1.08-1.10
All of our Earle’s Balanced Salt Solution contains: Potassium Chloride,
EMbed 812 has the same characteristics as Epon 812, physically, and
Sodium Chloride, Sodium Phosphate Monobasic, and D-glucose. Some
provides the same results in preservation, handling, curing and
formulations may contain additional components. Use the table below
sectioning. EMbed 812 may cause etching on selected plastics. All
as a quick reference for identifying the one that best suits your
formulas for mixing and using Epon 812 can be applied to EMbed 812,
application. All of the solutions are prepared 1X strength.
e.g. Luft’s procedure, Mollenhauer’s and EPON-ARALDITE mixtures.
Ingredients F.W. Formula I Formula II Formula III RT 14900 450ml
KCl 74.56 X X X RT 14901 4x450ml
NaCl. 58.44 X X X
NaH2PO4 . H2O 137.99 X X X  EMbed 812 Embedding Kit and
D-Glusose 180.16 1 g/L — 1 g/L EMbed 812, Hard Plus Embedding Kit
MgSO4. 7H2O 246.48 X X X
See Embedding Media Kits page 93-94 
CaCl2 2H2O 147.02 X X X
RT 14120 kit
NaHCO3 84.01 X X X
Phenol Red — 0.015 g/L 0.050 g/L  EMbed 812 / DER 736 Embedding Kit
RT 11765-05 ESBSS, Formula I, 0.157M 500 ml See Embedding Media Kits page 93 
RT 11765-10 ESBSS, Formula I, 0.157M 1L RT 14130 kit
RT 11766-05 ESBSS, Formula II, 0.152M 500 ml
RT 11766-10 ESBSS, Formula II, 0.152M 1L
RT 11767-05 ESBSS, Formula III, 0.157M 500 ml
RT 11767-10 ESBSS, Formula III, 0.157M 1L

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 35

Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec01_026-037_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 12:27 AM Page 36

SECTION 1 Chemicals for Electron Microscopy, Light Microscopy, & Histology

 Entellan®  Epoxy Tissue Stain,
For more information, see Adhesives and Mountants, Ready-to-use
page 18, 515  Toluidine Blue and Basic Fuchsin. For staining semi
RT 14800 100ml
thin sections of epoxy embedded tissues.
RT 14802 500ml
Spurlock, B.O., (1966) et al., Am. J. of Clin. Path.
 Eosin Y, Certified, C.N. #DcE-40 RT 14950 100ml
(Acid Red 87, Eosin Yellowish)
C20H6Br4Na2O5 F.W. 691.88 CAS #17372-87-1  ERL 4221-An ERL-4206 Replacement
Solubility: 44.0% Water; 2.0% Alcohol; 25.0% Cellosolve; 27.5% Due to the supply shortage of ERL-4206, ERL-4221 has now been
Glycol; 0.0% Xylene. specially formulated to replace it. ERL 4206 is one of the main
Used with Hematoxylin for showing cell nuclei in embryos and kidneys. components of the low viscosity (Dr. Spur) embedding resin kit.
Conn, “Biological Stain” 9th ed., The Williams and Wilkens Co., Specifications:
Baltimore 1977, pg. 7. ERL-4221 is a Cycloaliphatic Epoxide Resin.
Component of Wright’s stain for blood corpuscles. Specific Gravity (H2O=1): 1.173 @ 20ºC/20ºC
Wright, J. Med. Res., 7, 138 (1902) Flash Point — Closed Cup: 118ºC (245ºF)
For staining bone marrow to show cell morphology. Bech, “Lab. Manual Boiling Point (760mm/Hg):>250ºC (>482ºF)
of Hematological Tech.”, W. B. Saunders Co., Phila., 1908, p. 233 RT 15004 ERL-4221 225ml
RT 14850 10g
RT 15005 ERL-4221 4 X 225ml
14851 25g
 Erythrosin B, Certified, C.N. #DcEr-5
RT

For our Eosin Y Solutions, see page 472  (Acid Red 51, Erythrosin extra Bluish; Eosin J; Iodeosin B; Pyrosin B)
C20H6O5I4Na2 F.W. 879.87 CAS #16423-68-0
 EPO-Fix Embedding Media
See Embedding Media Kits, page 93, 371  Solubility: 10.0% Water; 5.0% Alcohol; 7.0% Cellosolve; 8.25% Glycol;
0.0% Xylene.
 Epon-812 Resin RT 15010 10 g
See Embedding Media Kits, EMbed-812, page 93 
 Epon-815 Resin  Ethyl Alcohol, Specially Denatured
CAS # NA Specific Gravity: 1.13 C2H5OH F.W. 46.07 CAS #64-17-5
An aromatic resin. Blended 95% Ethanol and 5% Methanol
Suitable for all routine histology/cytology preparations.
RT 14910 450ml
Specifications:
Evaporation Residue ........................................................5ppm max.
TECHNICAL TIP Water ........................................................................................0.1%
The Search For The Epon-812 Replacement Filtered SDA-3A. ........................................................................95%
Since the discontinuation by Shell of Epon 812 many replacements RT 15050 1qt (946ml)
have been introduced. Many of these replacements have shown much RT 15051 4x1qt
closer characteristics to the original than others. For an in depth study of
the work that has been done regarding many of the replacements for the  Ethyl Alcohol, Anhydrous
original Epon 812 we highly recommend the following publications: (Ethanol) - 200 Proof
1. Mascorro, J.A. and Kirby, G.S. Physical Characteristics of “Old” Epon CH3CH2OH F.W. 46.07 CAS # 64-17-5
812 and Various Epon Like Replacements”. Proc. 44th Ann. Meet.
EMSA., pp. 222-223 (1986) Specifications:
2. Mascorro, J.A. and Kirby G.S. Novel/ Epoxy/Anhydride Alternatives for Specific Gravity ....................................................................<0.7942
Biological Electron Microscopy: Physical and Performance Purity ....................................................................................>99.9%
Characteristics of Embed 812 and LX112 in Combination with Acidity ................................................................................<0.002%
NSA/NMA/DMAE. Proc. 47th Ann. Meet. EMSA., pp.1000-1001(1989) Water (Karl Fisher) ..................................................................<0.1%
3. Mascorro, J.A. and Kirby G.S. Viscosity Characteristics and Hardening Non-Volatile Matter ..........................................................<0.0025%
Rates For Embed 812 and LX112 With Alternative Anhydride and RT 15055 450ml
Catalyst Choices. Proc. 49th Ann. Meet. EMSA., (1991) RT 15056 4x450ml
RT 15058 1 liter
 EMS Cured Epoxy Remover *Tax has already been paid.

Studies show that in order to get good results in positive  Ethylene Dichloride, Reagent, A.C.S.
staining of sections, the removal of cured epoxy (embedding material) as well 1,2-Dichloroethane, See Page 33 
as the reduced-osmium (fixation materials) from the sections is necessary; RT 13250 450ml
especially when double fixation with an Aldehyde and Osmium tetroxide is RT 13251 4x450ml
employed to process specimens for E.M. We offer a CURED-EPOXY-
REMOVER kit, which removes the polymerized resin as well as the reduced-
osmium. The structure of the resin free section will remain unchanged.
RT 14942 kit

36 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874

Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec01_026-037_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 12:27 AM Page 37

Chemicals for Electron Microscopy, Light Microscopy, & Histology SECTION 1

TECHNICAL TIP  Ferric Chloride, Hexahydrate, Reagent, A.C.S.

FeCl3.6H2O F.W. 270.30 CAS #10025-77-1
Re-embedding of Tissue Poorly Embedded in Resin Assay ..............................................................................97.0-102%
Refer to: Ogura, H. and Oda (1973). A method for the recovery of Insoluble Matters. ....................................................................0.01%
inadequately epoxy resin-embedded tissue for electron microscopy. J. Nitrate (about 0.001%) ..................................................To Pass Test
Electron Microsc., 22:365 Phosphorous Compound ........................................................0.01%
Re-embedding of Thick Resin Sections Sulfate ..................................................................................0.01%
Refer to: 1/ McNelly, N.A. and Hinds, J.W. (1975). Rescuing poorly Arsenic ..................................................................................0.002%
embedded tissue for electron microscopy: A new and simple technique Copper ..................................................................................0.003%
of re-embedding. Stain Technol., 50:209 2/ Johnson, P.C. (1976). A Zinc ......................................................................................0.003%
rapidly setting glue for resectioning and remounting epoxy embedded
tissue. Stain Technol., 51:275. References for use:
Membrane stains
• Gasic, G., Berwick et al (1963). Hale stain for sialic acid containing mucins. J. Cell
Biol., 19:223
 Ethylene Glycol Dimethacrylate • Gasic, G., Berwick, et al (1968). Positive and Negative colloidal iron as cell surface
electron stains. Lab. Invest., 18:63
(Ethylene dimethacrylate) • Blanquet, P.R. and Loiez, A. (1974). Colloidal iron used at pHs lower than 1 as
electron stain for surface proteins. J. Histochem. Cytochem., 22:368
C10H14O4 F.W. 198.22 CAS #97-90-5 • Matukafs, V.J., Panner et al (1967). Studies on ultrastructural identification and
Specific Gravity: 1.053 distribution of protein-polysaccharides in cartilage matrix. J. Cell Biol., 32:365
• Benedetti, E.L. and Emmelot, P. (1967). Studies on plasma membranes IV. The
b.p. 66-68°C Ultrastructural localization and content of sialic acid in plasma membranes isolated
from rat liver and hepatoma. J. Cell Sci., 2:499
Inhibited with 100 ppm HQ. (Hydroquinone) • Rowley, J.R. (1971). Resolution of channels in the exine by translocation of colloidal
0-5˚C 15300 225ml iron. Pro. 29th Ann. EMSA Meet., p.352. Claitor’s Pub. Division, Baton Rouge, LA
• Nicolson, G.L. (1973). Anionic sites of human erythrocyte membranes.I. Effects of
 Ethylene Glycol Monoethyl Ether, Purified trypsin, phospholipase C, and pH on the topography of bound positively charged
colloidal particles. J. Cell Biol., 57:373
• Hendy, R. (1971). Electron microscopy of lipofucsin pigment stained by the Schmorl
(Cellosolve; 2-Ethoxyethanol; Ethyl Glycol) and Fontana technique. Histochemie, 26:311.
HOCH2CH2OCH2CH3 F.W. 90.12 CAS #110-80-5 RT 15510 500g
bp 133-135°C
Specific Gravity @20°C: 0.931
 Ferritin
CAS #9007-73-2
Assay ....................................................................................>99.5% Cationized: This polycationic derivative of ferritin is useful in labeling
Water ......................................................................................<0.1% negative charges on cell surfaces and to study membrane structure.
Residue after evaporation......................................................<0.001% Cationized ferritin is prepared by coupling ferritin from horse spleen with N,N-
Suitable for histological use. dimethyl-1,3-propanediamine (DMPA). Sterile filtered solution in 0.15M NaCl.
RT 15310-01 1L Ferritin Concentration: 10mg per ml, coupled with DMPA.
RT 15310-06 6x1L
A cationic derivative used to label negatively charged cell membranes for
 Eukitt Mounting Media visualization by EM.Danon, D et al. (1972), J. Ultrastruct. Res., 38, 500.
See Adhesives and Mountants, page 18, 515  0-5˚C 15550 Cationized 1ml

 Farnesol  Fluorophore-Infiltrated Resin Microscopy

(3,7,11-Trimethyl-2,6,10-dodecatrien-1-ol) (FIRM)
C15H26O F.W. 222.57 CAS #4602-84-0 Rapid staining technique that provides high-contrast fluorescence
Specific Gravity: 0.886 microscopy imaging of resin embedded samples, reminiscint of low
Mixture of Stereoisomers: Approx. 90% Synthetic magnification transmission electron microscopy.
0-5˚C 15340 10ml  Works with Epoxy and Acrylic type resins
 Simply mount your sections on glass slides, air dry, and overlay
 Fast Green FCF, Certified, C.I. 42053 with 100 microliters FIRM for 30 seconds, wash and coverslip with
(Food Green 3) water or an aqueous mountant. View in Rhodamine channel of a
C37H34O10N2S3Na2 F.W.808.86 CAS #2353-45-9 standard wide field Fluorescence Microscope.
Solubility:4.0% Water; 9.0% Alcohol; 8.0% Cellosolve; 6.25%  FIRM staining is unique in that the brightly fluorescent dye infil-
trates the resin, revealing tissue structures in negative relief, with
Glycol; 0.0% Xylene extremely high contrast and resolution.
The main advantage of this dye is its resistance to fading. Mammalian  Perfect for previewing specimens prior to EM Analysis
tissue stain for visualizing collagen, muscle, cystoplasma, cells and  High Throughput, high contrast image phenotyping of model organ-
cornified epithelium. Kornhauser, Stain Tech., 18,95 (1943); 20, 23 isms such as drosophila
(1945); Lillie, Arch. Path., 29, 705 (1940). Modified Feulgen stain for  Ideal for material and food science analytical microscopy
visualizing chromosomes in root tips and other meristematic tissue.
DeTomasi, Stain Tech., 11, 137 (1936). Used in plant histology. O. RT 12780-05 FIRM for Acrylic Resin Sections 10ml
Conn, “Biological Stains” 9th ed., Williams & Wilkens Co., Baltimore, RT 12780-06 FIRM for Epoxy Resin Sections 10ml
1977, pp. 252-3; Haynes, Stain Tech., 3, 40 (1928).
RT 15500 5g

For our Fast Green Solutions, see page 472 

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 37

Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec01_038-045_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 12:28 AM Page 38

SECTION 1 Chemicals for Electron Microscopy, Light Microscopy, & Histology

FIXATIVES, PREPARED
Premixed, prebuffered fixatives, that are pH adjusted for immediate  Bouin’s Solution
laboratory use. They are freshly prepared upon receipt of order to Bouin’s solution can be used as a fixation and a staining fluid. Bouin’s
ensure maximum shelf life. The fixatives are filled in 20ml glass vials fixative is excellent for use on biopsy specimens of the gastrointestinal
(10ml/vial). This allows for the immediate fixation of your specimens tract. Tissue from the endocrine system are well fixed and many
without costly and time consuming transfer associated with ampoule antibodies react well with tissue fixed in Bouin’s. Bouin’s solution may
contained fixatives.If you desire any prepared fixative that is not be used as a routine fixative or a staining solution, but should not be
already listed in our catalog or you have special size and used as a preservative for tissue. Tissue cannot be held in Bouin’s
packaging requirements, please call us. solution for extended periods. The maximum fixation time in this solution
should be less than 48 hours and should be transferred to alcohol.
Packaged in leak-proof histo-containers, prefilled and ready-to-use.
Formulated with Picric Acid saturated aqueous solution 75%,
Formalin (40% aqueous formaldehyde) 25% and Glacial Acetic
acid 5% in de-ionized water
RT 15990-01 Bouin’s Fluid 1L
RT 15990-04 Bouin’s Fluid 4L
Bouin’s Fluid in Pre-filled cups:
RT 15990-10 Bouin’s Fluid 50 x 10 ml/cs
RT 15990-20 Bouin’s Fluid 50 x 20 ml/cs
RT 15990-30 Bouin’s Fluid 20 x 30 ml/cs

 Brasil Fixative
Ethanol, Picric Acid, Formalin, Acetic Acid, Glacial
This fixative is most popular when glycogen is the target. The solution is
similar to Bouins Solution (alcoholic) offering quick hardening and good
 0.2% Formaldehyde/0.1% Chromic Acid staining with acid dyes.
in 0.1M Sodium Cacodylate Buffer, pH 7.4 RT 15995-10 Brasil Fixative 10x10ml
0-5˚C 15953 10x10ml RT 15995-20 Brasil Fixative 100 ml
 2% Formaldehyde/0.02% Picric Acid  Carnoy’s Fixatives
in 0.1M Sodium Phosphate Buffer, pH 7.2
0-5˚C 15956 10x10ml Stock solution
64130-05 Carnoy’s Fluid 500 ml
 Formaldehyde/Glutaraldehyde, 2.5% each RT
RT 64130-50 Carnoy’s Fluid Without Chloroform 500 ml
in 0.1M Sodium Cacodylate Buffer, pH 7.4
0-5˚C 15949 10x10ml  Carson’s Phosphate Buffered Formalin
Millonig’s phosphate buffered formalin as modified by Carson, Martin
 Formaldehyde/Glutaraldehyde, 3% each
and Lynn, by using 4% formalin in 0.1M sodium phosphate monobasic
in 0.1M Sodium Cacodylate Buffer, pH 7.4
0-5˚C 15950 10x10ml with sodium hydroxide to pH 7.2
15732-05 Carson’s Phosphate Buffered Formalin 500 ml
 2.5% Glutaraldehyde in 0.1M Sodium Cacodylate
RT
RT 15732-10 Carson’s Phosphate Buffered Formalin 1L
Buffer, pH7.4
0-5˚C 15960 10x10ml  Carson’s Phosphate Buffered
 2.5% Glutaraldehyde in 0.1M Millonig’s Sodium Paraformaldehyde
Phosphate Buffer pH 7.2 For some tissues, the use of formalin (contains 10 – 15% Methanol) is
0-5˚C 15970 10x10ml not suitable, we offer the alternative formaldehyde (prepared from
paraformaldehyde – contains no methanol) for your convenience.
 2.5% Glutaraldehyde in 0.1M Sorensen’s Sodium-
Potassium Phosphate Buffer, pH 7.2 RT 15733-05 Carson’s Phosphate Buffered Paraformaldehyde 500 ml
0-5˚C 15980 10x10ml RT 15733-10 Carson’s Phosphate Buffered Paraformaldehyde 1L

 B-5 Fixative  CytoPrep Fixative

For lymph nodes. CytoPrep Fixative forms a clear protective coating over specimens
RT 64122-05 B-5 Fixative 500 ml while fixing cells. It is ideal for cytological smears and it dries within
RT 64122-06 B-5 Fixative 1 lt 4 to 6 minutes. Good for safe storage and transportation of slides.
RT 64122-10 B-5 Fixative 4 lt It is water soluble and contains no chlorofluorocarbons. Comes in
a 4 oz. spray can.
 Bouin’s Fixative RT 64145-01 CytoPrep Fixative 4 oz.
A fixative that is used in light microscopy for the preservation of soft delicate RT 64145-12 CytoPrep Fixative 12 x 4 oz.
structure.
RT 15990 Bouin’s Fixative 10x10ml

38 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874

Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec01_038-045_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 12:29 AM Page 39

Chemicals for Electron Microscopy, Light Microscopy, & Histology SECTION 1

FIXATIVES, PREPARED
 Davidson’s Fixative (Hartmann’s/  Formalin, Neutral, Buffered
Davidson’s Fixative) 10% w/v in Acetate Buffer
This is rapid fixative. Results with good nuclear detail and minimal Buffered with Sodium Acetate in accordance with the A.F.I.P. Manual
formalin pigment. Hatmann’s (Davidson’s) Fixative is useful for of Histology. pH 6.0 to ph 7.1 at 20°C. Filtered and ready-to-use.
preparing tumors, bone marrow, gynecologic specimen, fatty breast, RT 15738-01 Formalin 10% Buffered in Acetate 1L
medical biopsies. Fixation of small specimen is rapid. Exposure to the RT 15738-04 Formalin 10% Buffered in Acetate 4L
fixative should be limited to 24 hours (tissue may then be transferred to
neutral buffered formalin or 70% alcohol for storage).  Formalin, Neutral, Buffered
Based on the volume of 1125 ml solution, there is 2 part Formalin (35- 10% w/v in Phosphate Buffer
39%), 3 part Ethanol, 1 part Glacial Acetic acid, and 3 part of tap water. Buffered with phosphate in accordance with the A.F.I.P. Manual
RT 64133-10 Hartmann’s (Davidson’s Fixative) 1L of Histology. pH 6.9 to 7.1 at 25°C. Filtered and ready-to-use.
RT 64133-14 Hartmann’s (Davidson’s Fixative) 4L RT 15740 Formalin 10% Buffered in Phosphate 450 ml
RT 15740-01 Formalin 10% Buffered in Phosphate 1L
 Modified Davidson’s Fixative RT 15740-04 Formalin 10% Buffered in Phosphate 4L
(14% Ethyl Alcohol, Denatured, 37.5% Formalin 37-39%, 6.25% Glacial
Acetic Acid, and D.I. Water)  TissuePrep Buffered 10% Formalin
RT 64133-50 Modified Davidson's Fixative 1L Prefilled with 10% formalin Cat# 15740. Ready-to-use in pre-filled cups.
Labeled in accordance to OSHA requirements, which gives you
 Dietrich’s Fixative immediate information regarding handling and first aid procedures. Pre-
measured in wide-mouth, leak-proof, opaque polypropylene containers
Ethanol, formalin, glacial acetic acid, distilled water
which limits your exposure to formaldehyde and saves you time.
RT 15958-10 Dietrich’s Fixative 10x10ml
RT 15958-20 Dietrich’s Fixative 100 ml Cat.# Cup Size Filled Pack/cs
RT 15742-10 15 ml 10 ml 50/cs
 Fast Frozen Fix RT 15742-20 30 ml 20 ml 50/cs
RT 15742-30 60 ml 30 ml 20/cs
Prepared fixative – This is one step quick fix for frozen sectioned tissue. RT 15742-60 120 ml 60 ml 20/cs
Fixes tissue to slide to allow for staining procedures. Apply to most
tissue types.  Formalin Prefilled HistoTainer™
RT 15280-01 Fast Frozen Fix™ 100 ml The HistoTainer™ (Empty Vials, see page 482) is half filled with 10%
RT 15280-05 Fast Frozen Fix™ 500 ml Neutral Buffered Formalin as a fixative. These ready-to-use prefilled
containers are timer saving and make your work more efficient.
 Fixative/Decalcifier
EMS # Description Vial Size Prefilled Qty
 A solution that fixes and decalcifies in one step. RT 15743-20 Formalin Prefilled HistoTainer 20 ml 10 ml 24
 Prevents loss of cellular structure. RT 15743-40 Formalin Prefilled HistoTainer 40 ml 20 ml 24
 Enhances hematoxylin staining. RT 15743-60 Formalin Prefilled HistoTainer 60 ml 30 ml 24
RT 64148-01 Fixative/Decalcifier 1L RT 15743-90 Formalin Prefilled HistoTainer 90 ml 45 ml 24
RT 64148-06 Fixative/Decalcifier 6x1L RT 15743-120 Formalin Prefilled HistoTainer 120 ml 60 ml 24

For our RDO Rapid Decalcifier, see the Histology  Formalin 1% Non Buffered
section, page 450-451  RT 15734-01 Formalin 1% Non-Buffered 1L
15734-04 Formalin 1% Non-Buffered 4L
 Formalde-Fresh Low Odor Solution;
RT

Histology Grade  Formalin 2%, Non-Buffered

A specially formulated odor-mask which neutralizes the formalin odor RT 15735-01 Formalin 2% Non-Buffered 1L
without affecting subsequent tissue processing, handling, or staining. RT 15735-04 Formalin 2% Non-Buffered 4L
Low odor, ready-to-use 10% formalin solution. May be used as a fixative
or preservative of specimens. Its shelf life is 24 months.  Formalin 3%, Non-Buffered
RT 15678-01 Formalde-Fresh 4L RT 15735-10 Formalin 3% Non-Buffered 1L
RT 15678-04 Formalde-Fresh 4x4L RT 15735-20 Formalin 3% Non-Buffered 4L

 Buffered Formalde-Fresh, Low-Odor  Formalin 4%, Non-Buffered

10% Formalin Solution RT 15735-30 Formalin 4% Non-Buffered 1L
RT 15735-40 Formalin 4% Non-Buffered 4L
Low odor, prepared w/v, pH 6.9 to 7.1 at 25°C. 10% formalin
in Phosphate buffer according to the A.F.I.P. Manual of Histology.  Formalin 5%, Non-Buffered
This solution allows for long-term storage of tissue specimens.
RT 15735-50 Formalin 5% Non-Buffered 1L
RT 15741-01 Low-Odor Formalin 10% Buffered 4L RT 15735-60 Formalin 5% Non-Buffered 4L
RT 15741-04 Low-Odor Formalin 10% Buffered 4x4L

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 39

Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec01_038-045_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 12:29 AM Page 40

SECTION 1 Chemicals for Electron Microscopy, Light Microscopy, & Histology

FIXATIVES, PREPARED
 Hollande’s Fixative  Paraformaldehyde, Prepared Fixatives
Please see Hollande’s Fixative, page 45, 458  In addition to our complete line of Formaldehyde solutions
 Karnovsky's Fixative we have now added to the line.
Please see Paraformaldehyde-Glutaraldehyde  Paraformaldehyde 0.5% in 0.1M phosphate buffer pH7.4
Solution Karnovsky's Fixative, page 44, 454, 457  0-5˚C 15951-10 Paraformaldehyde, 0.5% each in 0.1M Phosphate Buffer 10x10ml
15720 kit 0-5˚C 15951-15 Paraformaldehyde, 0.5% each in 0.1M Phosphate Buffer 500 ml
15730 box of 5 kits
 Paraformaldehyde 1% Aqueous
 Fixative Reagent Grade (Karnovsky’s) RT 15953-10 Paraformaldehyde, 1% each Aqueous 10x10ml
RT 15953-15 Paraformaldehyde, 1% each Aqueous 500 ml
This fixative contains 3% glutaraldehyde and 2% formaldehyde in 0.1M
phosphate buffer, pH 7.4.  Paraformaldehyde 1% in 0.1M Phosphate Buffer pH, 7.4
Karnovsky’s with formalin 2% and Biological glutaraldehyde 3% in 0.1m 0-5˚C 15952-10 Paraformaldehyde, 1.0% each in 0.1M Phosphate Buffer 10x10ml
0-5˚C 15952-15 Paraformaldehyde, 1.0% each in 0.1M Phosphate Buffer 500 ml
Phosphate Buffer.
15731-10 Karnovsky Fixative Reagent Grade 1L  Paraformaldehyde 1% Glut 2% in 0.1M Phosphate
Buffer, pH 7.4
 Karnovsky’s with paraformaldehyde solution 0-5˚C 15949-30 Paraformaldehyde 1 % Glutaraldehyde 2% 10x10ml
and EM grade glutaraldehyde in 0.1M Phosphate Buffer
0-5˚C 15949-35 Paraformaldehyde 1 % Glutaraldehyde 2% 500 ml
Please Note: This kit can be formulated to fit your requirements.
in 0.1M Phosphate Buffer
Please contact us.
15732-10 Karnovsky Fixative EM Grade 1L  Paraformaldehyde 3% Glutaraldehyde 0.35% in 0.1M
Sodium Cacodylate, pH 7.4
0-5˚C 15949-50 Paraformaldehyde 3 % Glutaraldehyde 0.35% 10x10ml
in 0.1M Sodium Cacodylate Buffer
Handle Your Ampoules Safely... 0-5˚C 15949-60 Paraformaldehyde 3 % Glutaraldehyde 0.35% 500 ml
in 0.1M Sodium Cacodylate Buffer
 Break-Safe™
 Paraformaldehyde 4% and Glutaraldehyde 1% in
Ampoule Opener Phosphate Buffer, pH 7.0
EMS Introduces Break-Safe™ 0-5˚C 15949-70 Paraformaldehyde 4 % Glutaraldehyde 1% 10x10ml
allowing you to safely open up to in 0.1M Phosphate Buffer
3 ampoules at one time 0-5˚C 15949-80 Paraformaldehyde 4 % Glutaraldehyde 1% 500 ml
in 0.1M Phosphate Buffer
Box style design allows one handed
opening of up to 3 ampoules at a time.  Paraformaldehyde 4% in 0.1M Sodium Cacodylate, pH7.4
Gently pressing down on the lid snaps ampule necks clean while 0-5˚C 15952-10S Paraformaldehyde 4 % in 0.1M Sodium Cacodylate Buffer 10x10ml
keeping them contained within the device and away from fingers. After 0-5˚C 15952-15S Paraformaldehyde 4 % in 0.1M Sodium Cacodylate Buffer 500 ml
removing ampoule contents, simply turn the device upside down over a
 Paraformaldehyde 4% in 0 .1M Phosphate Buffer, pH 7.4
trash receptacle to safely discard ampoules and tops. 0-5˚C 15735-10S Paraformaldehyde 4% in 0 .1M Phosphate Buffer 10x10ml
Features: 15735-20S Paraformaldehyde 4% in 0 .1M Phosphate Buffer 500 ml
0-5˚C

 4 inserts allow opening of 1ml, 2ml, 5ml and 10 ml ampoules  Paraformaldehyde 4% in 0 .2M Phosphate Buffer, pH 7.4
 Open ampoules easily and safely
0-5˚C 15735-30S Paraformaldehyde 4% in 0 .2M Phosphate Buffer 10x10ml
0-5˚C 15735-40S Paraformaldehyde 4% in 0 .2M Phosphate Buffer 500 ml
 Transparency allows unobstructed viewing of ampoule contents
at all times  Paraformaldehyde 4% in 0 .1M Phosphate Buffer, pH 7.2
 Copolyester plastic construction has broad chemical resistance 0-5˚C 15735-50S Paraformaldehyde 4% in 0 .1M Phosphate Buffer 10x10ml
0-5˚C 15735-60S Paraformaldehyde 4% in 0 .1M Phosphate Buffer 500 ml
60607 Break-Safe™ Ampoule Opener each
 Paraformaldehyde 4% in 0 .2M Phosphate Buffer, pH 7.2
 Ampoule Breaker; 0-5˚C

0-5˚C
15735-70 Paraformaldehyde 4% in 0 .2M Phosphate Buffer
15735-80 Paraformaldehyde 4% in 0 .2M Phosphate Buffer
10x10ml
500 ml
Soft Silicone
Reusable – Made from  Paraformaldehyde 4% in 0 .1M Phosphate Buffer Saline,
soft silicone. It offers a pH7.4
0-5˚C 15735-85 Paraformaldehyde 4% in 0 .1M Phosphate Buffer Saline 10x10ml
simple way to break 0-5˚C 15735-90 Paraformaldehyde 4% in 0 .1M Phosphate Buffer Saline 500 ml
pre-scored glass ampoules safely.
Accommodates 5, 7, and 10 ml size  Paraformaldehyde 4% in 0 .2M Phosphate Buffer Saline,
ampoules. Reduces injury and spillage. pH 7.4
0-5˚C 15735-95 Paraformaldehyde 4% in 0 .2M Phosphate Buffer 10x10ml
60600 Ampoule Breaker; Soft Silicone each 0-5˚C 15735-100 Paraformaldehyde 4% in 0 .2M Phosphate Buffer 500 ml

 Ampoule Cracker™ Please see page 214 

40 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874

Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec01_038-045_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 12:29 AM Page 41

Chemicals for Electron Microscopy, Light Microscopy, & Histology SECTION 1

FIXATIVES, PREPARED
® Formaldehyde ® Formaldehyde Aqueous Solution, 16%
(Paraformaldehyde Aqueous Solution)
(Formalin) EM Grade
® Formaldehyde, Reagent, Paraformaldehyde - methanol free solution.
A.C.S. A more efficient and rapid penetrant fixative
HCHO F.W. 30.03 CAS #50-00-0 used in combination with Glutaraldehyde and
Acrolein fixatives. Easy to break, prescored,
Specific Gravity ......................................1.09
10ml ampoules sealed under inert gas, or
A.C.S. Specifications: 100ml bottles.
Assay ......................................35.5 to 38.0%
Residue after ignition ........................0.005% 16% Aqueous Solution 20% Aqueous Solution
Color (A.P.H.A.) ..........................................10 RT 15700 10 ml RT 15713 10 x 10 ml
RT 15710 10 x 10 ml RT 15713-S 100 ml
Sulfate (SO4) ......................................0.002%
RT 15710-S 100 ml
Heavy Metal (as Pb) ..............................5ppm 32% Aqueous Solution
RT 15711 10 box/lot
Titrate Acid ................................0.006 meq/g RT 15714 10 x 10 ml
10% Aqueous Solution RT 15714-S 100 ml
Chloride (Cl) ..........................................5ppm RT 15712 10 x 10 ml
Iron (Fe) ................................................5ppm RT 15712-S 100 ml
RT 15680 450 ml
METHANOL
In addition to our complete line of Formaldehyde solutions
RT
RT
15681
15682
4 x 450 ml
1 qt (946 ml) shown above we have now added to the line. FREE
® Formaldehyde, 37%, Since the DOT (Department of Transportation) has changed the definition of what a non dangerous
solution of formaldehyde is to under 10%, we are now offering an 8% and a 4% solution. This will
Microfiltered (Formalin allow us to ship overnight as well as overseas without any hazardous charges saving our
Microfiltered) customers a good deal of money.
HCHO F.W. 30.03 CAS# 50-00-0 The quality of our 8% and 4% aqueous Paraformaldehyde solution is as good as all of the other
Microfiltered with a 0.45 micron membrane; concentrations that we offer.
suitable as an EM fixative when a methanol
free solution is not necessary. 4% Aqueous Solution 8% Aqueous Solution
RT 157-4 10 x 10 ml RT 157-8 10 x 10 ml
RT 15686 10 x 10 ml
RT 157-4-100 100 ml RT 157-8-100 100 ml
® Formaldehyde ® Perfusion Wash and Perfusion Fixative Ready to use
(Paraformaldehyde) GLUTARALDEHYDE (Karnovskys)
For all of the best results we offer ready to use Perfusion washes and fixatives which
RT 15720 kit are recommended by the NeuroScience Association. All of our solutions are ready made
RT 15730 box of 5 kits
and are of the highest quality.
® Formaldehyde/Zinc Fixative We have three groups of solutions Perfusion Fixative (1224SK):
Prepared: Ready-to-use. commercially available. Paraformaldehye 4%/Sucrose 4%
Group I : Perfusion wash and Fixative in Phosphate Buffer 0.2M pH 7.2
T Preserves fine nuclear details.
Technical Grade. To be used Group III: Perfusion wash and Fixative
T Good for immunostaining. for Standard stains: Superior Reagent Grade.For
T Contains no mercury. the best results use this group.
Perfusion Wash (1220SK):
T Can be used with automated tissue processors. Phosphate Buffered Saline 01.M This is Sodium Cacodylate based
T Works well with standard and special stains Phosphate Buffer pH 7.2-7.4 for NSA’S Disintegrative
because zinc is a stain enhancing mordant. Degeneration Stain
Perfusion Fixative (1221SK): 10%
RT 15675-01 Formaldehyde/Zinc Fixative 1L Phosphate Buffered Formaldehyde Perfusion Wash (1222SK): 0.8%
NaCl/0.4% Dextrose/0.8% Sucrose/
RT 15675-04 Formaldehyde/Zinc Fixative 4L Group II: Perfusion wash and Fixative 0.023% CaCl2/Sodium Cacodylate
Reagent Grade. To be used for 0.034%
® Formalin Spill Control; Standard and ImmunoHistochemistry
Stains. Perfusion Fixative (1223SK): 4%
F-gard- ER Paraformaldehyde/4% Sucrose/
For the handling and disposing of formaldehyde Perfusion Wash (1219SK): 1.4% Sodium Cacodylate
Phosphate Buffered Saline 0.1M
containing solutions. It immobilizes, cools, and Phosphate Buffer pH 7.2-7.4
contains spills. As well, it reduces the escape
of formaldehyde gas and significantly reduces For a complete procedure and protocol for the use of these washes and fixatives please see the following site:
www.neuroscienceassociates.com/perf-solution1 or 2 or 3.htm
formalin concentration. F-gard- ER aids in
1220SK Perfusion Wash, Technical 1000 ml If you want a custom wash or
reducing exposure to formaldehyde gases by 1221SK Perfusion Fixative, Technical 1000 ml
immobilizing the formalin and transforming it to an fixative made, please just let
1219SK Perfusion Wash, Reagent 1000 ml
easily removed semi-solid mass. The mass cools us know and we will be happy to
1224SK Perfusion Fixative, Reagent 1000 ml
rapidly minimizing formaldehyde off-gassing. 1222SK Perfusion Wash, Super Reagent 1000 ml
make you whatever you require.
RT 24140-01 Formalin Spill Control 11 oz. 1223SK Perfusion Fixative, Super reagent 1000 ml
RT 24140-06 Formalin Spill Control 5 x 11 oz.

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 41

Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec01_038-045_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 12:29 AM Page 42

SECTION 1 Chemicals for Electron Microscopy, Light Microscopy, & Histology

FIXATIVES, PREPARED
® CoreDish™ Multiple Biopsy Containers Half Prefilled with 10% Formalin
Few recommendations concerning how the biopsies should be handled have been published. Performing a large number of biopsies means an increase in
the number of containers handled and consequently a technical overload of the transmission network, which occurs without any financial counterpart. A new
approach had to be developed in order to increase productivity.
We are proud to offer a multi-compartment container in the shape of a dish and half prefilled with 10% Neutral buffered Formalin, for holding and
transporting biopsies. It is supplied with a leak-proof closure with O-ring ensuring total protection of contents. It conforms to OSHA directives. These
CoreDisn™ measure only 15mm H x 95 mm Diameter. Each compartment is clearly identified to allow proper placement and visualization of the biopsy
being inserted. Thanks to CoreDish™ it is no more necessary to use a multiple of individual containers, thereby reducing cost and risks of confusion.
CoreDish™ available in many configurations to serve in different biopsy, such as prostate, upper GI tract and lower GI tract. A label allows recording the
related information, patient ID, doctor, date and time.

® M970-D5B-2 CoreDish™ Breast Biopsy Container

Half Prefilled with 10% Formalin
This multi-compartment container (out of five compartments, four are labeled: LUQ, RUQ, LLQ, RLQ) in the shape of a dish
and half prefilled with 10% Neutral Buffered Formalin, for holding and transporting biopsies. It is supplied with a leak-proof
screw closure with O-ring ensuring total protection of contents. It conforms to OSHA directives. The dish measures only 15 x
95 mm in diameter. Each compartment is clearly identified to allow proper placement and visualization of the breast biopsy
being inserted. A writing area for patient information is provided.
15736-10
Cat. # For Compartments Qty
RT 15736-10 Breast 5 10/pk

® M970-D8P CoreDish™ Prostate Biopsy Container

Half Prefilled with 10% Formalin
For prostate biopsies. Eight compratments. Leakproof seal with O-ring lid. An area for patient information is provided. Seven
labeled compartments: Base, Lateral Base, Medium, Lateral Medium, Apex, Lateral Apex.

Cat. # For Compartments Qty

RT 15736-20 Prostate 8 10/pk
15736-20

® M970-D8UGI CoreDish Upper GI Biopsy Container

™

Half Prefilled with 10% Formalin

For upper GI track biopsies. Eight compratments. Leakproof seal with O-ring lid. An area for patient information is provided.
Seven labeled compartments: Gastric Card, Gastric Body, GE Junction, Gastric ATR, Distal Esophage, Pylorus, Duodeum.

Cat. # For Compartments Qty

RT
15736-30 Upper GI 8 10/pk 15736-30

® M970-D8LGI CoreDish™ Lower Gi Biopsy Container

Half Prefilled with 10% Formalin
For lower GI track biopsies. Twelve compratments. Leakproof seal with O-ring lid. An area for patient information is provided.
Ten labeled compartments: Proximal Flexure Colon, Hepatic Fleure Colon, Distal Transverse Colon, Ascending Colon, Splenic
flexure Colon, Cecum, Decending Colon, Terminal lleum, Rectum, Sigmmoid Colon.
Cat. # For Compartments Qty
RT 15736-40 Lower GI 12 10/pk
15736-40

® M970-D12P CoreDish™ Prostate Biopsy Container

Half Prefilled with 10% Formalin
For prostate biopsies. Twelve compratments. Leakproof seal with O-ring lid. An area for patient information is
provided. TWelve labeled compartments: L Base, R Base, L Lateral Base, R Lateral Base, L Medium, R Medium, L
Lateral Medium, R Lateral Medium, L Lateral , L Apex, R Apex, R Lateral Apex.
Cat. # For Compartments Qty
RT 15736-50 Prostate 12 10/pk
15736-50

42 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874

Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec01_038-045_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 12:29 AM Page 43

Chemicals for Electron Microscopy, Light Microscopy, & Histology SECTION 1

FIXATIVES, PREPARED
® Glutaraldehyde
OCHCH2CH2CH2CHO F.W. 100.12 THE HIGHEST
CAS #111-30-8 PURITY!
Specific Gravity @ 20/20°C: 1.131

® EM Grade Distillation Purified

T The Universal Fixative for Electron Microscopy.
T Purified to EM Grade from commercial grade by “all-glass
vacuum-distillation.”
T THE HIGHEST PURITY, free from polymers and other contaminants.
T Each lot is tested and assayed in our lab before we ship and
guarantee its purity.
T Sealed under dry nitrogen. For any special concentration, or packaging requirements
T Refrigerated prior to shipment. other than those already listed, please call us today. We
After glutaraldehyde has been purified to EM grade, it has a high risk of will manufacture in accordance to your specifications.
polymerizing if it is not handled properly. Electron Microscopy Sciences
takes special precautions to assure a polymer-free, pure glutaraldehyde. ® Biological Grade
0-5˚C 16400 25% Solution 450 ml ea
Every lot of our EM grade glutaraldehyde is assayed prior to shipping 0-5˚C 16401 25% Solution 4 x 450 ml bx
assuring you consistent purity and the highest possible quality. If stored 0-5˚C 16410 25% Solution 1 gal. ea
properly, our Glutaraldehyde has a very long shelf life. 0-5˚C 16411 25% Solution 4 x 1 gal. bx
We package our glutaraldehyde in 10ml, single dose ampoules, sealed 0-5˚C 16500 50% Solution 450 ml ea
0-5˚C 16501 50% Solution 4 x 450 ml bx
under dry nitrogen, and kept refrigerated until it is shipped. We offer our
0-5˚C 16520 50% Solution 1 liter ea
glutaraldehyde in a wide range of percentages to simplify mixing
0-5˚C 16521 50% Solution 4 x 1 liter bx
procedures and avoiding waste.
EM grade glutaraldehyde, stored in volumes greater than 100ml, with ® Serum Vial Glutaraldehyde
repeated defrosting and recapping, will polymerize in time, producing an Over the years, many of our valued customers have requested
absorption peak of 235nm rather than the 280nm of pure EM grade. The purchasing our Glutaraldehyde in serum vials. This packaging allows
presence of polymerized glutaraldehyde greatly reduces its efficiency as a the user to puncture the special non-reactive seal with a hypodermic
cross-linking agent, preventing proper fixation. For this reason, we provide syringe and draw out the exact quantity of Glutaraldehyde needed
10ml ampoules and 100ml bottle quantities for larger applications. without opening the container. This packaging assures freshness
and purity of the Glutaraldehyde at all times
8% Aqueous Solution
0-5˚C 16000 10 ml ampoule ea 0-5˚C 16216 25% Aqueous EM Grade 10 x 10 ml
0-5˚C 16019 Box 10 x 2 ml bx 0-5˚C 16214 Glutaraldehyde in serum Vial 100 ml
0-5˚C 16020 Box 10 x 10 ml ampoules bx 0-5˚C 16316 50% Aqueous EM Grade 10 x 10 ml
0-5˚C 16021 same as 16020 10 bxs + bx 0-5˚C 16314 Glutaraldehyde in serum Vial 100 ml
* All other concentrations are available in serum vials upon request.
0-5˚C 16022 same as 16020 20 bxs + bx
0-5˚C 16010 100 ml bottle ea ® Anhydrous EM Grade Glutaraldehyde:
10% Aqueous Solution Specially Prepared–10% Solution
0-5˚C 16100 10 ml ampoule ea
Rapid-Freezing on a polished metal surface, at the temp. of liquid
0-5˚C 16120 Box 10 x 10 ml ampoules bx
helium or liquid nitrogen, followed by freeze-substitution in osmium-
0-5˚C 16121 same as 16120 10 bxs + bx
0-5˚C 16122 same as 16120 20 bxs + bx
acetone, has been shown to be a very useful technique for capturing
0-5˚C 16110 100 ml bottle ea
rapid cellular events and for preserving cell ultrastructure.
25% Aqueous Solution T John M. Robinson and Morris J. Karnovsky, 1991. "Rapid-freezing
0-5˚C 16200 10 ml ampoule ea Cytochemistry: Preservation of Tubular Lysosomes and Enzyme
0-5˚C 16220 Box 10 x 10 ml ampoules bx Activity". J. of Histochem., Cytochem. Vol. 39, No. 6, pp 787-792
0-5˚C 16221 same as 16220 10 bxs + bx Ordering Information: (please call for additional information)
0-5˚C 16222 same as 16220 20 bxs + bx
0-5˚C 16210 100 ml bottle ea
0-5˚C 16530 10% in Acetone 10 x 10 ml bx
0-5˚C 16531 10% in Ethanol 10 x 10 ml bx
50% Aqueous Solution 0-5˚C 16532 10% in Methanol 10 x 10 ml bx
0-5˚C 16300 10 ml ampoule ea
0-5˚C 16533 10% in Solvent of your choice 10 x 10 ml bx
0-5˚C 16320 Box 10 x 10 ml ampoules bx
We would be pleased to fill your specific glutaraldehyde needs. Please call for prices on
0-5˚C 16321 same as 16320 10 bxs + bx special concentrations or size requirements.
0-5˚C 16322 same as 16320 20 bxs + bx
0-5˚C 16310 100 ml bottle ea
70% Aqueous Solution
TECHNICAL TIP
0-5˚C 16350 10 ml ampoule ea The Fixative for Use in Fixing Cornea
0-5˚C 16360 box 10 x 10 ml ampoules bx To fix cornea, one should use the following fixative: 2% Glutaraldehyde,
0-5˚C 16365 box 10 x 2 ml ampoules bx 1% Paraformaldehyde (Formaldehyde) in a 0.1M Sodium Cacodylate
buffer; pH 7.4 containing 0.02% Picric Acid. (Assouline, et al 1992)

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 43

Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec01_038-045_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 12:29 AM Page 44

SECTION 1 Chemicals for Electron Microscopy, Light Microscopy, & Histology

FIXATIVES, PREPARED
® Glutaraldehyde, Pre-Made, Glutaraldehyde 3.0% Aqueous
16537-19 Glutaraldehyde 3% Aqueous 100ml
Ready-to-Use, in Buffer 0-5˚C
0-5˚C 16537-20-S Glutaraldehyde 3% Aqueous 500ml
0-5˚C 16537-21 Glutaraldehyde 3% Aqueous 1 Liter
Glutaraldehyde 0.625% in 0.1M Phosphate Buffer, pH 7.4
0-5˚C 16535-05 Glutaraldehyde 0.625% in Phosphate Buffer, pH 7.4 500 ml
Glutaraldehyde 3.0% Paraformaldehyde3%
in 0.1M Phosphate Buffer, pH 7.4
0-5˚C 16535-10 Glutaraldehyde 0.625% in Phosphate Buffer, pH 7.4 1L
0-5˚C 16538-06 Glutaraldehyde 3% Paraformaldehyde 3% in 10x10ml
Glutaraldehyde 2% in 0.1M Phosphate Buffer, pH 7.4 Phosphate Buffer, pH 7.4
0-5˚C 16536-05 Glutaraldehyde 2% in Phosphate Buffer, pH 7.4 500 ml 0-5˚C 16538-07 Glutaraldehyde 3% Paraformaldehyde 3% in 500ml
0-5˚C 16536-10 Glutaraldehyde 2% in Phosphate Buffer, pH 7.4 1L Phosphate Buffer, pH 7.4
0-5˚C 16538-08 Glutaraldehyde 3% Paraformaldehyde 3% in 1 Liter
Glutaraldehyde 2% in 0.1M Sodium Cacodylate Buffer, pH 7.4 Phosphate Buffer, pH 7.4
0-5˚C 16536-15 Glutaraldehyde 2% in Sodium Cacodylate Buffer, pH 7.4 500 ml
0-5˚C 16536-20 Glutaraldehyde 2% in Sodium Cacodylate Buffer, pH 7.4 1L Glutaraldehyde 4% in 0.1M in Sodium Cacodylate Buffer, pH 7.4
Glutaraldehyde 2.5% in 0.1M Phosphate Buffer, pH 7.4 0-5˚C 16539-06 Glutaraldehyde 4% in 0.1M Sodium 10x10ml
Cacodylate Buffer, pH 7.4
0-5˚C 16537-05 Glutaraldehyde 2.5% in Phosphate Buffer, pH 7.4 500 ml 0-5˚C 16539-07 Glutaraldehyde 4% in 0.1M Sodium 500ml
0-5˚C 16537-10 Glutaraldehyde 2.5% in Phosphate Buffer, pH 7.4 1L
Cacodylate Buffer, pH 7.4
Glutaraldehyde 2.5% in 0.1M Sodium Cacodylate Buffer, pH 7.4 0-5˚C 16539-08 Glutaraldehyde 4% in 0.1M Sodium 1 Liter
0-5˚C 16537-15 Glutaraldehyde 2.5% in Sodium Cacodylate Buffer, pH 7.4 500 ml Cacodylate Buffer, pH 7.4
0-5˚C 16537-20 Glutaraldehyde 2.5% in Sodium Cacodylate Buffer, pH 7.4 1L
Glutaraldehyde 5.0% Aqueous
Glutaraldehyde 3% in 0.1M Phosphate Buffer, pH 7.4 0-5˚C 16539-15 Glutaraldehyde 5% Aqueous 10x10ml
0-5˚C 16538-05 Glutaraldehyde 3% in Phosphate Buffer, pH 7.4 500 ml 0-5˚C 16539-20 Glutaraldehyde 5% Aqueous 500ml
0-5˚C 16538-10 Glutaraldehyde 3% in Phosphate Buffer, pH 7.4 1L 0-5˚C 16539-25 Glutaraldehyde 5% Aqueous 1 Liter
Glutaraldehyde 3% in 0.1M Sodium Cacodylate Buffer, pH 7.4 Glutaraldehyde 5% in 0.1M Phosphate Buffer, pH 7.4
0-5˚C 16538-15 Glutaraldehyde 3% in Sodium Cacodylate Buffer, pH 7.4 500 ml 0-5˚C 16539-30 Glutaraldehyde 5% in 0.1M Phosphate Buffer, pH 7.4 10x10ml
0-5˚C 16538-20 Glutaraldehyde 3% in Sodium Cacodylate Buffer, pH 7.4 1L 0-5˚C 16539-35 Glutaraldehyde 5% in 0.1M Phosphate Buffer, pH 7.4 500ml
Glutaraldehyde 3% Sodium Phosphate Buffer, pH 7.2 0-5˚C 16539-40 Glutaraldehyde 5% in 0.1M Phosphate Buffer, pH 7.4 1 Liter
0-5˚C 16539-45 Glutaraldehyde 3% in Sodium Phosphate Buffer, pH 7.2 10x10 ml
0-5˚C 16539-50 Glutaraldehyde 3% in Sodium Phosphate Buffer, pH 7.2 500 ml ® Glutaraldehyde/Formaldehyde
0-5˚C 16539-55 Glutaraldehyde 3% in Sodium Phosphate Buffer, pH 7.2 1L Fixative (Karnovsky’s)
Glutaraldehyde 4% in 0.1m Phosphate Buffer, pH 7.3 This fixative contains 3% glutaraldehyde and 2% formaldehyde in 0.1M
0-5˚C 16539-60 Glutaraldehyde 4% in 0.1m Phosphate Buffer, pH 7.3 10x10 ml phosphate buffer, pH 7.4
0-5˚C 16539-65 Glutaraldehyde 4% in 0.1m Phosphate Buffer, pH 7.3 500 ml
0-5˚C 16539-70 Glutaraldehyde 4% in 0.1m Phosphate Buffer, pH 7.3 1L Karnovsky’s with formalin 2% and Biological
glutaraldehyde 3% in 0.1m Phosphate Buffer
Glutaraldehyde 2% Paraformaldehyde 2%
in Phosphate Buffer, pH 7.4
0-5˚C 15731-10 Karnovsky Fixative Reagent Grade 1L
0-5˚C 16536-06 Glutaraldehyde 2% Paraformaldehyde 2% in 100ml Karnovsky’s with paraformaldehyde solution
Phosphate Buffer, pH 7.4 and EM grade glutaraldehyde
0-5˚C 16536-07 Glutaraldehyde 2% Paraformaldehyde 2% in 500ml 0-5˚C 15732-10 Karnovsky Fixative EM Grade 1L
Phosphate Buffer, pH 7.4
Please Note: This kit can be formulated to fit your requirements. Please contact us.
0-5˚C 16536-08 Glutaraldehyde 2% Paraformaldehyde 2% in 1 Liter
Phosphate Buffer, pH 7.4
® Glutaraldehyde Spill Control; G-gard-ER
Glutaraldehyde 2.5% Paraformaldehyde 1% Transforms glutaraldehyde to a nearly neutral solution and renders
in Phosphate Buffer, pH 7.4
the solution acceptable for sewer disposal. Prepares glutaraldehyde
0-5˚C 16537-06 Glutaraldehyde 2.5% Paraformaldehyde 1% in 100ml
for biodegradation. Reduces biocidal activity and odor. 65g G-gard
Phosphate Buffer, pH 7.4
pre-treats one gallon of 1% solution.
0-5˚C 16537-07 Glutaraldehyde 2.5% Paraformaldehyde 1% in 500ml
Phosphate Buffer, pH 7.4
RT 24142-01 Glutaraldehyde Spill Control 64 g
0-5˚C 16537-08 Glutaraldehyde 2.5% Paraformaldehyde 1% in 1 Liter RT 24142-10 Glutaraldehyde Spill Control 10 x 64 g
Phosphate Buffer, pH 7.4

Glutaraldehyde 2.5% Aqueous

0-5˚C 16537-16 Glutaraldehyde 2.5% , Aqueous 10x10ml TECHNICAL TIP
0-5˚C 16537-17 Glutaraldehyde 2.5% Aqueous 500ml
0-5˚C 16537-18 Glutaraldehyde 2.5% Aqueous 1 Liter The Use of Glutaraldehyde, Acrolein, and
Paraformaldehyde Buffer
2.5% Glutaraldehyde, 1.0% Acrolein, 0.1% Para-formaldehyde, 20mM
MgCl2 buffer with 0.09M Sodium Cacodylate to pH 7.4. This fixative
preserves the structure of both hair cells and neurons of the organ of
corti. (Siegel and Brownell 1986)

44 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874

Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec01_038-045_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 12:29 AM Page 45

Chemicals for Electron Microscopy, Light Microscopy, & Histology SECTION 1

FIXATIVES, PREPARED
® HISTOCHOICE™ MB® * ® Mirsky’s Fixative™
The Molecular Biology Fixative T Saponin/Glyoxylate Fixative
T SAFE - Contains no Formaldehyde, Glutaraldehyde or Mercury T Preserves Immunohistological activity
T NON-TOXIC – Is completely odorless and can be safely disposed T Contains no formaldehyde
of down the drain T Fast-acting
HISTOCHOICE™ MB® Tissue Fixative is the first fixative designed for the Mirsky’s Fixative™ is a superior fixing agent for use
molecular biologist. It is specialty formulated to preserve antigenic sites in immunohistological and immunological
for antibody probes and nucleic acid sites for immunohistochemistry. protocols. Mirsky’s contains no formaldehyde or
HISTOCHOICE™MB® replaces formaldehyde based, alcohol based, Zenkers, glutaraldehyde. Therefore, it has considerably
B-5, B-3, Bouin’s and other fixatives with superior results. Tissue fixed in reduced toxicity and virtually no odor. Mirsky’s
HISTOCHOICE™MB® exhibit vibrant staining, better nuclear and cytoplasmic Fixative is neutral, buffered, and isotonic (308 mOsmol). Additionally,
detail, and will retain a crisp appearance even after long-term fixation.
Mirsky’s Fixative does not contain toxic or hazardous buffers such as
Because this formula is designed specially for molecular biology cacodylate or barbital. Hardening or shrinkage of tissue is considerably
applications, HISTOCHOICE™MB® fixed sections do not require pre-digestion reduced.
or other recovery procedures to make important sites available. This means
you spend less time preparing slides and more time doing research. Double reactive sites afford excellent cross-linking properties while
More than a fixative, HISTOCHOICE™MB® is a preservative that leaves antigens maintaining sample enzyme activity. Samples processed in Mirsky’s
and nucleic acids in their native state, allowing binding for specific probes. Fixative for light microscopy can subsequently be used in electron
Primary antibodies can often be diluted several-fold due to the increased microscopy procedures. Special buffer systems may be used in place of
number of preserved antigenic sites, saving cost on every slide you process. the buffer provided.
HISTOCHOICE™MB® fixed tissue retains a much more natural look and feel Use as replacement for formalin and/or glutaraldehyde fixatives in
than formalin fixed tissue. It is important to remember that these tissues immunohistological and immnocytological staining protocols. Tissue size
are not fixed by formalin, but rather preserved by HISTOCHOICE™MB®. is unlimited, as long as the sample is no thicker than 0.5cm in at least
RT 64115-01 HISTOCHOICE™MB® Fixative 1L one plane to assure uniformity of tissue penetration. The gross visual
RT 64115-04 HISTOCHOICE™MB® Fixative 4L appearance will be different than in formaldehyde and tissue may seem
RT 64115-44 HISTOCHOICE™MB® Fixative 4x4L “raw”. This is due to double site binding of the fixative with a resultant
* HISTOCHOICE™ is registered name of Amresco
reduction in tissue shrinkage. Microscopic examination of tissue
® Hollande’s Fixative morphology will be noticeably improved. This material is intended to
A modification of Bouin’s solution. It is stable and will decalcify small bone maintain enzyme and antibody activity. For best results, tissue section of
specimens. Tissue that is fixed with Hollande’s can be stained successfully high digestive enzyme content should be thoroughly rinsed in saline
with most stains, and the cupric acetate in the solution stabilizes red blood solution before fixation (e.g. trypsin in intestinal samples). Once fixed,
cell membranes and cosinophil and endocrine cell granules so that less tissue may be retained in Mirsky’s Fixative and ethanol indefinitely.
lysis occurs than with Bouin’s solution. Hollande’s is widely used as a Mirsky’s Fixative is normally distributed as a concentrated two bottle
fixative for biopsy specimens of the gastrointestinal tract. system, although high through-put laboratories often use the single
Thorough washing of the fixative prior to placing the specimen in a bottle ready-to-use format. The two bottle system is comprised of
phosphate buffered formalin solution is necessary because the salts Mirsky’s Fixative 10X Concentrated and Mirsky’s Fixative 10X Buffer. To
present in the solution will form an insoluble phosphate precipitate. reconstitute to working strength, add 1 part Mirsky’s Fixative 10X Buffer
Packaged in leak-proof histo-containers; prefilled ready-to-use.
to 8 parts distilled or deionized water, mix thoroughly, then add 1 part
Cat.# Cup Size Filled Pack/cs Mirsky’s Fixative 10X Concentrate and mix again.
RT 64120-10 15 ml 10 ml 50/cs
RT 64120-20 30 ml 20 ml 50/cs The two bottle system has a shelf life of 12 months while the ready-to-
RT 64120-30 60 ml 30 ml 20/cs use format has a shel life of 30 days.
Bulk packaging is available: RT 15560 Mirsky’s Fixative System 200 ml
RT 64120-01 Hollande’s Fixative 1L RT 15561-05 Mirsky’s Fixative Ready-to-Use 500 ml
RT 64120-04 Hollande’s Fixative 4L RT 15561-10 Mirsky’s Fixative Ready-to-Use 1L
15561-20 Mirsky’s Fixative Ready-to-Use 2L
® McDowell Trumps Fixative
RT

18030-05 McDowell Trumps Fixative 500 ml

® Russell’s Zenker Fixative
RT
RT 18030-10 McDowell Trumps Fixative 1L
(Russel’s Modified Zenker)
® Michel’s Fixative, pH 7.0 – 7.4 Due to the hazardous nature of mercury, Zenker’s fluid is no longer
RT 18040-05 Michel’s Fixative 500 ml
RT 18040-10 Michel’s Fixative 1L
available however in place of it we are offering Russell’s Zenker
RT 18040-20 Michel’s Fixative Pre-filled 20 x 10 ml Fixative, which contains Zinc Chloride, and the staining results produces
by this fixative are comparable to those of Zenker’s Stock solution.
Russell’s Modified Zenker’s is used in the same manner as Zenker’s
TECHNICAL TIP stock solution.
Tissue Biopsy in Michel's Fixative RT 64123-05 Russell’s Modified Zenker’s Solution 500 ml
Place tissue biopsy in Michel’s fixative for 24-48 hours and then wash RT 64123-06 Russell’s Modified Zenker’s Solution 1L
the tissue with Michel’s Buffer three changes a minimum of 10 minutes
each change and freeze at –70˚C.

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 45

Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec01_046-055_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 12:30 AM Page 46

SECTION 1 Chemicals for Electron Microscopy, Light Microscopy, & Histology

® Fluorescein Isothiocyanate, Isomer I, ® Gelatin, Powder, U.S.P.
Certified CAS #9000-70-8
(FITC) Solubility: 12% in H2O at 20°C pH (1% in H2O): 3.5-5.0
C21H11NO5S F.W. 389.39 CAS #3326-32-7 Residue after ignition: <2%
Assay >90% T Type A-from Porcine skin (acid cured tissue)
Water soluble. T Type B-from Bovine skin (base cured tissue)
0-5˚C 15670 1⁄2gm The strength of the gel is based on the bloom number. The higher the
bloom number the stronger the gel.
® Fluoromount-G, Slide Mountant T Used as a combination Acrylamide-Gelatin-Jung resin for cryosec-
See Adhesives and Mountants, page 18, 516 UUUUU tioning of large and soft tissues (eggs, fishes, insects) Hartmann,
R. (1984). A new embedding medium for cryosectioning eggs of
® Formamide, Ultra High Purity high yolk and lipid content. Eur. J. Cell Biol., 34:206
T Used to prepare gelatin-chrome alum adhesive to coat glass
HCONH2 F.W. 45.04 CAS #75-12-7 slides for mounting semi-thin sections for staining.
Specific Gravity: 1.128-1.132 pH 7.1
Glass Distilled. Exceeds A.C.S. Specifications RT 16560 Gelatin, Type A; ≈ 60 Bloom 100g
RT 16562 Gelatin, Type A; ≈ 175 Bloom 100g
Specifications: RT 16564 Gelatin, Type A; ≈ 300 Bloom 100g
Assay ......................................................................................99.9% RT 16566 Gelatin, Type B; ≈ 75 Bloom 100g
Iron. ......................................................................................0.5ppm RT 16568 Gelatin, Type B; ≈ 225 Bloom 100g
Copper ..................................................................................0.1ppm
Lead ......................................................................................0.5ppm
Zinc ......................................................................................0.5ppm ® Giemsa Solution, C.N.#DcGe-19
RT 15745 100ml Ingredients:
RT 15746 500ml Glycerin (cas# 56-81-5): ............................................................61%
RT 15747 4x500ml Methyl Alcohol (cas# 67-56-1): ............................................ 38.3%
Azur II (cas# 37247-10-2) : ....................................................0.16%
® Formic Acid 96%, Reagent, A.C.S. Azur II Eosin (cas# 53092-85-6): ..............................................0.6%
HCOOH F.W. 46.03 CAS #64-18-6 Specific Gravity: 0.89
Specific Gravity: 1.22 Differentiates types of leucocytes, bacteria and inclusion bodies.
RT 15750 225ml Giemsa, Centralbl. F. Publ., Abt. 1,37, 308 (1904) Stain for thick blood
RT 15760 1 liter films; shows malarial parasites. Barber and Komp, Publ. Health Rep.,
44, 2330 (1929) Bone marrow and stain for showing cell morphology;
® Formvar 15/95 Resin, Powder together with May-Grunwald Solution for pap staining. Pappenheim,
CAS #63450-15-7 Folia Haemat., 13, 338 (1912)
Polyvinyl formvar desiccated. Used to prepare Support films. RT 15940 Giemsa Stain Solution 100ml
Soluble in ethylene dichloride, chloroform or dioxane.
RT 15800 100g ® Giemsa Stain, C.N.#DcGe-19, Powder
® Formvar Solution in Ethylene Dichloride CAS #51811-82-6
RT 15942 10 g
Microfiltered-ready to use.
RT 15810 0.25% 100ml For our Giemsa Stain Solution, see the Histology
RT 15820 0.50% 100ml Section page 473 UUUUU
RT 15830 1.00% 100ml For our Differential Quick Staining Kit (Modified
TECHNICAL TIP: A Full-Proof Method for Mounting Giesma) Stain Solution, see the Histology Section,
Serial Sections on Single Hole Grids. For a complete page 473 UUUUU
description of this method, see page 120 UUUUU
® Gill’s Hematoxylin Staining Solution
® Gach Kit Gill’s Hematoxylin is a specially formulated solution for use as a
See Embedding Media Kits, page 93 UUUUU biological stain for the nuclei and nuclear chromatin of normal and
RT 15920 kit abnormal cells whether in whole or sliced cells. Our Gill’s Hematoxylin is
designed to use at its full strength. It is microfiltered prior to shipment;
therefore, filtration before use is not required. For repeated use further
filtration is recommended. At the discretion of the user, the Gill’s
TECHNICAL TIP Hematoxylin No. 2 and No. 3 may be diluted with ethylene glycol (25%
Preparation of Gelatin Adhesive is recommended) to produce a weaker stain solution.
To prepare gelatin-chrome alum adhesive: Dissolve 5g gelatin in RT 26030-10 Gill’s Hematoxylin No. 1 1L
1000ml of distilled water. Warm up to 50°C and then add 0.5g of RT 26030-14 Gill’s Hematoxylin No. 1 4L
chromium potassium sulphate. To obtain good adherance, slides coated RT 26030-20 Gill’s Hematoxylin No. 2 1L
with this solution must be dried before mounting the sections. RT 26030-24 Gill’s Hematoxylin No. 2 4L
RT 26030-30 Gill’s Hematoxylin No. 3 1L
RT 26030-34 Gill’s Hematoxylin No. 3 4L

46 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874

Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec01_046-055_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 12:30 AM Page 47

Chemicals for Electron Microscopy, Light Microscopy, & Histology SECTION 1

® Glycerine, Reagent, A.C.S. ® Graphite Adhesives

(Glycerol) C3H5(OH)3 F.W. 92.10 CAS #56-81-5 See Adhesives and Mountants, page 13 UUUUU
Specific Gravity: 1.23 For our Gum Mastic, see page 459 UUUUU
Assay ....................................................................................<99.5%
Residue after Ignition ..............................................................0.005% ® Graphene
Chlorinated Compounds(as Cl) ................................................0.003% For our Graphene products, see page 140-141 UUUUU
Sulfate ............................................................................To Pass Test
Heavy Metals (as Pb) ............................................................0.0002% ® Hanks’ Balanced Salt Solution (HBSS)
RT 16550 450ml All of our Hanks’ Balanced Salt Solutions contain: Potassium Chloride,
Potassium Phosphate Monobasic, Sodium Chloride, Sodium Phosphate
® (GMA), Glycol-Methacrylate, Low Acid Dibasic, and D-Glucose. Some formulations may contain additional
(2-Hydroxyethyl methacrylate monomer, inhibited; HEMA) components. Use the table below as a quick reference for identifying
C6H10O3 F.W. 130.14 CAS#868-77-9 the one that best suits your application. All solutions are prepared in 1X
strength.
Specific Gravity: 1.07
b.p. 67°C Ingredients F.W. Formula I Formula II Formula III
Inhibited with approximately 330ppm MEHQ KCl 74.56 X X X
A water soluble monomer NaCl 58.44 X X X
Na2HPO4. 7H2O 268.07 X X X
RT 16800 450 ml D-Glusose 180.16 2 g/L 1 g/L —
MgSO4. 7H2O 246.48 X X X
ARTICLE OF INTEREST CaCl2, 2H2O 147.02 X X X
KH2PO4 136.09 X X X
Preparation of Glycol Methacrylate NaHCO3 84.01 X X X
Methods for preparing standardized glycol methacrylate (GMA) based Phenol Red 0.02 g/L 0.02 g/L 0.015 g/L
embedding media for use in light microscopy in a rational, precise and
reproducible manner are described. The application of these procedures RT 11768-05 HBSS, Formula I, 0.179M 500 ml
resulted in a versatile, low toxicity GMA embedding medium. RT 11768-10 HBSS, Formula I, 0.179M 1L
Please refer to: P. O. Gerrits, B. Eppinger, H. V. Goor, and R. W. Horobin. RT 11769-05 HBSS, Formula II, 0.155M 500 ml
(1991). A Versatile, Low Toxicity Glycol Methacrylate Embedding Medium RT 11769-10 HBSS, Formula II, 0.155M 1L
for Use in Biological Research, and for Recovered Biomaterials RT 11770-05 HBSS, Formula III, 0.147M 500 ml
Prostheses. Cell & Materials. 1: 189-198. RT 11770-10 HBSS, Formula III, 0.147M 1L

® Harris’ Hematoxylin
® GMA-PEG Embedding Kit Stain selectivity for nuclei, fat and lipids. Ready-to-use.
Polyethylene Glycol- Glycol methacrylate mixture. RT 26041-05 Harris’ Hematoxylin 500ml
See Embedding Media Kits, page 94 UUUUU RT 26041-06 Harris’ Hematoxylin 1L
14250 kit
® Hematoxylin, Certified, C.I.#75290
® GMA Embedding Kit (Natural Black I, Hydroxybrasilin)
See Embedding Media Kits, page 93 UUUUU
C16H14O6 F.W. 302.29 CAS #517-28-2
14200 kit
Solubility: 10.0% Water; 10.0% Alcohol; 9.5% Cellosolve; 10%
® Gold Chloride, Hydrate Glycol; 0.0% Xylene. A certified biological stain used in histology and
cytology and plastic embedded tissues.
(Chloroauric Acid; Hydrogen Tetrachloroaurate) Chen, Chang, S., J Arch. of Path., 93,334 (1972).
H(AuCl4).H20 F.W. 357.79 CAS #16961-25-4 RT 16620 10g
Assay ................................................................................99.9985%
For our Hemotoxylin Solutions, page 473 UUUUU
Gold contents ............................................................................49%+
A highly purified gold compound for the preparation of Colloidal
Gold sols. Preweighed to facilitate your work. TECHNICAL TIP
(Preparation instructions for Gold Sols included)
RT 16580 10x1/10g bx
Staining Tips With Hematoxylin
RT 16582 10x1/2g bx 1. Check a slide from each batch of slides during times the workload is
RT 16583 1g g heavy to insure good staining by the Hematoxylin.
RT 16584 10x1g bx 2. Do not allow the slides to dry out at any point during your staining
procedure.
For our Gold Chloride Solutions, see page 459 UUUUU 3. Increase your staining time in Hematoxylin for tissues that have been
Also see Tannic Acid, used to prepare gold sols, in fixative longer than normal.
page 65 Cat. #21710 UUUUU 4. Increase your staining time by at least 1⁄3 for autopsy tissues.
5. Do not agitate the slides if you are using Ammonia water to Blue.
® Gram’s Iodine Solution The tissues are more susceptible to washing off if you agitate the
For use as a bacterial, fungal and inclusion body stain. slides.
RT 26054-05 Gram’s Iodine Solution 500ml 6. Check the pH of the Hematoxylin daily.
RT 26054-06 Gram’s Iodine Solution 1L

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 47

Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec01_046-055_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 12:30 AM Page 48

SECTION 1 Chemicals for Electron Microscopy, Light Microscopy, & Histology

® Hepes 0.2M Buffer Solution, ® HRP-Conjugate Dilutent
See page 27 UUUUU Specifically designed for preparing solution of your HRP-conjugate used
RT 11494 500ml as the detection reagent. For more information, see page 617.
Cat. # Description Qty.
® Hepes, Crystal, Biological Buffer 4-8°C 62716 HRP Conjugate Dilutent 50 ml
(N-2-Hydroxyethylpiperazine-N’-2-Ethanesulfonic acid) 4-8°C 62717 HRP Conjugate Dilutent 125ml
C8H18O4N2S F.W. 238.30 CAS #7365-45-9 4-8°C 62718 HRP Conjugate Dilutent 500 ml
Assay ......................................................................................>99% ® Hydrochloric Acid Solution 0.1N
pKa @20°C ................................................................................7.55
HCl CAS #7647-01-0
pH Range ..............................................................................7.0-8.0
Used to adjust the pH of buffers and fixative solutions.
A260 (1.0M in H2O) ....................................................................<0.05 RT 16760 100ml
Ash ........................................................................................<0.1%
Good’s buffer. ® Hydrochloric Acid Solution 1N
RT 16780 25g HCl CAS #7647-01-0
RT 16782 100g Used to adjust the pH of buffers and fixative solutions.
RT 16770 100ml
® (HMDS), Hexamethyldisilazane, Reagent For all our Hydrochloric Acid Solutions, see page 460 UUUUU
(CH3)3SiNHSi(CH3)3 F.W. 161.40 CAS #999-97-3
b.p. 126.7°C ® Hydrogen Peroxide 30% Solution-
Assay ....................................................................................>97.0% Stabilized, Reagent, A.C.S.
Specific Gravity @25°C 0.774 H2O2 F.W. 34.01 CAS #7722-84-1
Refractive Index @20°C: 1.407
Assay ....................................................................................29-32%
T For fast preparation of soft insect tissues for SEM. A good sub-
stitution for critical point drying. Int. J. Insect Morh. Embryol., Maximum of Impurities:
12(4), 201 (1983) Stain Tech., 58(6), 347 (1983) Chloride(Cl) ..........................................................................0.0003%
T Bray, D.F., Et-al. (1993). Micros. Res. and Technique. 26:489- Nitrate ................................................................................0.0002%
495. A comparison of HMDS, Peldri II, and critical point drying Phosphate ..........................................................................0.0002%
methods for SEM of biological specimens.
Sulfate ................................................................................0.0005%
RT 16700 100ml Heavy Metal ........................................................................0.0001%
Iron....................................................................................0.00005%
® Hexamethylenetetramine, Titratable Acid ..............................................................0.0006meq/g
A.C.S. Reagent, Granular RT 16790 100ml
(Urotropine; Methenamine) RT 16792 450ml
C6H12N4 F.W. 140.19 CAS #100-97-0
Assay ............................................................................99.0-100.5%
® 2-Hydroxyethyl Methacrylate
Residue after Ignition ................................................................0.1%
Chloride ................................................................................0.014% (GMA) Glycol methacrylate. See GMA page 47 UUUUU
Sulfate ..........................................................................To Pass Test RT 16800 450ml
Heavy Metals. ........................................................................0.001%
For all our Hydroquinone Solutions, see page 460 UUUUU
Used in silver stains.
Swift, J.A. (1968) Microsc. Soc. 88, 449. ® (HPMA), 2-Hydroxypropyl Methacrylate
RT 16710 50g (Propylene glycol monomethacrylate)
RT 16710-25 25g C7H12O3 F.W. 144.17 CAS #27813-02-1
b.p. 70°C/1mmHg
® Hexylene Glycol, Reagent, A.C.S. Specific Gravity @25°C 1.028
(2-Methyl-2,4-pentanediol)
Solubility in Water: 13%
(CH3)2C(OH)CH2CH(OH)CH3 F.W. 118.18 CAS #107-41-5 Inhibited with approx. 300ppm MEHQ.
Specific Gravity @25°C-0.923 A water miscible monomer.
A.C.S. Specifications: RT 16900 450ml
Assay..........................................................................................99% RT 16901 4x450ml
IR Spectrum ..................................................................To Pass Test
Refractive Index @20°C ................................................0.921-0.923 ® Imidazole, Reagent
Mixed with water in all proportions. Used as a dehydrating agent for (Glyoxaline) C3H4N2 F.W. 68.08 CAS #288-32-4
fat tissues. Assay................................................................................min 99.5%
RT
16740 450ml Imidazole is a lipid-enhancing buffer agent. When used with 4%
RT
16750 4x450ml osmium tetroxide solution in the post-fixation of tissue blocks, it
For our Histo Choice Fixatives, see page 45, 458 UUUUU produces a prominent electron-opaque staining of lipid droplets with no
evidence of diffusion.
® HPMA Embedding Kit Reference: Angermuller, S. Fahimi, H., Histochem. Journal 14,
See Embedding Media Kits, page 94 UUUUU 823-35 (1982)
RT 14220 kit RT 16905 100g

48 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874

Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec01_046-055_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 12:31 AM Page 49

Chemicals for Electron Microscopy, Light Microscopy, & Histology SECTION 1

® Immersion Oils
Which Type–Which Application? specialized viscosity and exacting controls for its
consistency.
For Normal Light Microscopy:
Types A & B, with viscosities of 150 and 1250cSt For Horizontal, Inverted & Inclined
respectively, meet these requirements. The greater Instruments and Project Equipment:
the gap between the cover glass and objective, or Higher viscosities are generally required. Type
condenser and slide, the more desirable high NVH meets the requirement, having a viscosity of
viscosity becomes. For extremely large gaps, type 21,000cSt.
NVH should be used. All Cargille Immersion Oils ® Immersion Oils NVH and OVH
can be blended for intermediate viscosities. Inverted, Inclined, Projection, and Long Focus
® Immersion Oils Intruments: Use type NVH or OVH; The greater
Cargille PCB-Free Immersion oils were introduced the gap between the cover glass and objective,
in 1972. Today, no other immersion oil meets FDA or between the slide and condenser, the more
criteria. Now four standard types are available with desirable high viscosity becomes. The very high
the introduction of Type NVH, a very high viscosity viscosities of Type NVH at 21,000 cSt and Type
oil. All Cargille Immersion Oils meet DIN 58 884 OVH at 46,000 cSt give excellent results for
these applications.
(Deutsched Institut Fur Normung e.V.) RT 16907-01 Type A 1oz.
® 37°C Immersion Oils For Fluorescence Microscopy: RT 16907 Type A 4oz.
A number of research projects require microscopic After years of development and field testing, we RT 16907-16 Type A 16oz.
now have available two new PCB-Free Immersion RT 16908-01 Type B 1oz.
studies at internal body temperature. Since the
Oils for Fluorescence Microscopy.
RT
16908 Type B 4oz.
index/temperature relationship is inverse, increasing RT
16908-16 Type B 16oz.
temperature significantly reduces the index of the ® Immersion Oil Type HF RT
16909-01 Type NVH 1oz.
immersion oil and consequently the imagery Type HF provides low fluorescence and the RT
16909 Type NVH 4oz.
RT
deteriorates. This problem has been resolved by the correct optical properties. 16914-01 Type 37 1oz.
RT
formation of Cargille 37°C immersion Oils, which 16909-04 Type 37 4oz.
® Immersion Oil Type FF RT
16915-01 Type HF 1 oz.*
have an index of 1.515@37°C. Type FF has virtually no background fluorescence RT
16915-04 Type HF 4 oz.
Consideration of these oils is also suggested where which makes it ideal for observing low levels of RT
16916-01 Type FF 1 oz.*
stage temperatures are elevated by sub-stage fluorescence. It is highly stable, water white, and RT
16916-04 Type FF 4 oz.
RT
illuminators and high wattage projection equipment. non-hydroscopic. Type FF can be substituted for RT 16917 Type 300 1oz
® Immersion Oil Type 300 all other fluorescence microscopy immersion oils RT 16917-01 Type 300 4 oz
Automated Hematology Systems: Use Type in nearly all fluorescence applications. RT 16917-16 Type 300 16 oz
16918 Type OVH 1 oz
300; Automated Hematology Systems depend on ® Immersion Oil LDF: RT
RT 16918-01 Type OVH 4 oz
accurate, precisely controlled physical and optical Extremely low fluorescence is achieved by Type RT 16918-16 Type OVH 16 oz
properties of immersion oil for successful LDF . It is the replacement of choice for the DF RT 16919 Type LDF 1 oz
imaging and mechanical processing. Type 300 is which is no longer being manufacturer, The LDF RT 16919-01 Type LDF 4 oz
designed and manufactured to meet the stringent possesses the highest resolution of the oils for RT 16919-16 Type LDF 16 oz.
requirements of this equipment, which include fluorescence applications * 1 oz. applicator bottles have a glass ball rod in the cap.

Optical and Physical Properties:

Standard Special Fluorescent
Immersion Oil Type A Type B Type 300 Type NVH Type 37* Type OVH Type LDF Type HF Type FF
Refractive Index: @23°C @23°C @23°C @23°C @37°C @23°C @23°C @23°C @23°C
F Line (4861 Å) 1.5239 1.5236 1.5238 1.5230 1.5238 1.5230 1.5239 1.5234 1.4850
E Line (5461 Å) 1.5180 1.5180 1.5180 1.5178 1.5180 1.5178 1.5181 1.5180 1.4810
D Line (5893 Å) 1.5150 1.5150 1.5150 1.5150 1.5150 1.5150 1.5150 1.5150 1.4790
C Line (6563 Å) 1.5114 1.5115 1.5116 1.5118 1.5115 1.5118 1.5115 1.5117 1.4766
Dispersion: nF-nC 0.0125 0.0119 0.0123 0.0113 0.0123 0.0111 0.0125 0.0118 0.0084
Abbe VD 41.3 43.2 41.8 45.7 42.0 46.3 41.3 43.8 57.3
Abbe Ve 41.0 42.8 41.5 45.4 41.7 46.0 41.0 43.6 56.8
Temperature Coefficient
(15-35°C) - dnD/dt -0.00033 -0.00031 -0.00033 -0.00034 -0.00035 -0.00034 -0.00036 -0.00038 -0.00037
Stability (change in
nD @25°C after 24 hrs 60°C: 0 0 0 0 0 0 -0.0004 0 0
at stated temperature) * 100°C: 0 0 0 0 0 0 -0.0043 +0.0006 0
FluorescenceA: Short UV: low low low low low low very low very low none
Long UV: low low low low low low very low very low none
Color: (Gardner) 1 1 1 1 1 <3 <1 <1 <1
Viscosity: Centistokes 150 1250 300 21,000 1250B 46000 500 700 170
+/-10% @ 23°C: low high medium very high high very high medium medium low
Density: @ 23°C g/cc: .923 .923 0.923 .919 0.917 0.918 0.984 .9306 0.877
(US) lb/gal 7.70 7.70 7.70 7.67 7.73 7.66 8.21 7.77 7.32
Cloud Point: <-13°C <-13°C <-13°C <-13°C <-13°C <-13°C <-14°C <-6°C <-6°C
Flash Point (Cleveland Open Cup): 325°F 325°F 325°F 325°F 325°F 325°F 171°F 340°F 420°F
Neutralization: (mg KOH/gm) 0.01 max. 0.01 max. 0.01 max 0.01 max. 0.01 max. 0.04 max <0.01 max 0.03max 0.01max
A
Relative to Cedarwood Oil *These values for type 37 are standardized at 37°C B
Type 37 is 3800 cSt at 23°C

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 49

Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec01_046-055_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 12:31 AM Page 50

SECTION 1 Chemicals for Electron Microscopy, Light Microscopy, & Histology

® Immuno-Bed™ Embedding Kit TECHNICAL TIP
See Embedding Media Kit, Page 94 UUUUU
Elimination of Section Contamination During
® ImmunoHistoZyme™, Ready-to-Use Staining
ImmunoHistoZyme is used for proteolytic digestion of formalin-fixed To eliminate section contamination during the staining
paraffin-embedded (FFPE) tissue sections prior to application of procedure please refer to:
antibodies. For more information, see page 616. Mollenhauer, H.H. and Morre’, D.J. (1978). Contamination of thin
2–8˚C 64142-13 ImmunoHistoZyme 15 ml sections, cause and elimination. Proc. 9th Int. Cong. Electron.
2–8˚C 62142-14 ImmunoHistoZyme 100 ml Microsc., Vol.II, p.78
Mollenhauer, H.H. (1986b). Stain contamination and embedding
® Indigo Carmine, Certified, C.I. #73015 in electron microscopy. Proc. 44th Ann. Meet. EMSA, p.50. San
Francisco Press, San Francisco
(Acid Blue 74; Carmine Blue; Indigotine 1, 1A)
Kuo, J., et al (1981). Forming and removing stain precipitates on
C16H8N2O8S2Na2 F.W.466.36 CAS #860-22-0 ultrathin sections. Stain Technol., 56:199
Dye content: approx. 85%
Solubility: 1.3% Water; 0.0% Alcohol; 4.0% Cellosolve; 2.85%
Glycol; 0.0% Xylene
Shunway’s stain for animal embryos. Used with Acid Fuchsin for ® Kinyoun’s Solution
staining Negri bodies. Stain Tech., 5, 34 (1928) Kinyoun’s carbol fuchsin staining solution for acid-fast bacteria.
RT 26087-05 Kinyoun’s Solution 500 ml
Counterstain to Hematoxylin for staining vaginal smears. Am. J. Anat., RT 26087-06 Kinyoun’s Solution 1L
61, 505 (1937).
RT 16910 25g ® Lanthanum Nitrate, Hexahydrate, Reagent
La(NO3)3.6H20 F.W. 433.03 CAS #10277-43-7 m.p. 40°C
Assay................................................................................Min 99.9%
TECHNICAL TIP
Calcium ................................................................................0.001%
Achieving Maximum Contrast with Stain Magnesium..........................................................................0.0001%
When a stain is applied both en-bloc and as a post-stain for thin
sections, maximum contrast will be achieved. A metal stain, intracellular tracer.
T Lane, N,J. and Treherne, J.E. (1970). Lanthanum staining of
neurotubules in axons from cockroach ganglia. J. Cell Sci.,
7:217
® Indium Trichloride, Anhydrous T Lane, N.J. (1972) Fine structure of a lipidopteran nervous sys-
InCl3 F.W. 221.18 CAS #10025-82-8 tem and its accessibility to peroxidase and lanthanum. Z.
Chloride Content: 98% Zellforsch., 131:205.
A metal stain for nucleic acid. RT 17300 50g
J. Biophys Biochem Cytol, 11,257 (1961)
RT 16920 5g ® Lead Acetate, Trihydrate Reagent, A.C.S.
Pb(CH3COO)2.3H20 F.W. 379.33 CAS #6080-56-4
® Ingrain Blue, C.I. #74240 A.C.S. Specifications:
See Alcian Blue 8GX, page 22, 468 UUUUU Assay ............................................................................99.0-103.0%
RT 10350 25g Chloride ....................................................................................5ppm
® Isopropyl Alcohol, Reagent, A.C.S. Copper ..................................................................................0.002%
Insoluble Matter ......................................................................0.01%
(2-Propanol) CH3CH(OH)CH3 F.W. 60.10 CAS #67-63-0
Iron........................................................................................0.001%
A.C.S. Specifications:
Nitrate and Nitrite (as NO3)..............................................To pass test
Color (APHA) ..................................................................................10
RT 17600 100g
Density @ 25°C..............................................................0.781-0.783 RT 17600-25 25g
Boiling Range (including 82.3°C)..................................................1°C
Titratable Acid or Base ................................................0.0001 meq/g ® Lead Citrate, Trihydrate
Residue after Evaporation ......................................................0.001% Pb3(C6H5O7)2.3H2O FW 1053.82 CAS #512-26-5
Solubility in water ..........................................................To pass test Minimum assay ........................................................................99.%
Water ........................................................................................0.2% The most widely used metal stain for ultra thin sections.
RT 16930 1qt T Reynolds, E.S., J. Cell Bio., 17, 208 (1963)
RT 16931 4x1qt T Sato, T., J. Electron Micro., 116, 133 (1976)
T Venable, J.H. and Coggeshall, R. (1965). A simplified lead citrate
® JB-4™ Embedding Kit, stain for use in electron microscopy. J. Cell Biol., 25:407
See Embedding Media Kit, page 94, 495 UUUUU T Famy, A. (1967). An extemporaneous lead citrate for electron
microscopy. Proc. 25th Ann. EMSA Meet., p.148. Claitor’s Pub.
® Karnovsky's Fixative, See page 44, 454, 457 UUUUU Division, Baton Rouge, LA.
0-5˚C 15720 1 kit RT 17800 25g
0-5˚C 15730 5 kit/bx RT 17810 100g

50 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874

Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec01_046-055_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 12:31 AM Page 51

Chemicals for Electron Microscopy, Light Microscopy, & Histology SECTION 1

® Lead Nitrate, Lead Solutions and Staining

Reagent, A.C.S.
Pb(NO3)2 F.W. 331.21 I. Common Lead Stock Solutions The stock lead solution is made up as follows:
CAS #10099-74-8 The following are some Lead Stock solutions, Calcined Lead Citrate 0.20 g
which are commonly used: Lead Nitrate 0.15 g
Minimum Assay ...............................99.5%
Lead Acetate 0.15 g
Insoluble matter .............................0.005% A. Lead Staining stock solution by
Sodium Citrate 1.00 g
Reaction .....................Not less than pH 3.5 Reynold’s (1963)
Distilled Water 41.00 ml
Chloride .......................................0.0005% 1. In a 50 ml volumetric flask add:
Calcium............................................0.01% Lead Nitrate Pb(NO3)2 1.33 g The calcined lead citrate is obtained by heating
Copper .........................................0.0005% Sodium Citrate Na3(C6H5O7).2H2O 1.76 g crystal lead citrate for several hours in a
Iron ..............................................0.0005% Boiled, cooled, CO2 free dist. water 30 ml melting pot (200°C to 300°C) until the color
Potassium ......................................0.002% 2. Cover the flask. Shake vigorously for at changes to a light brownish yellow. NOTE:
Sodium. .........................................0.002% least one minute. Overheated Lead Citrate with a dark
A metal stain for ultra thin sections. brownish or black color can’t be used.
3. Add 8 ml of 1N NaOH CO2 free (EMS Cat.
Sato, T., (1967) J. Electron Micro., 16, 733 #21170). The above reagents are placed in a 50 ml
17900 25g volumetric flask and mixed well to produce a
RT 4. Mix until clear.
yellowish milky solution. Then 9.0 ml of 1N
5. Check the pH. It should be 12.0 ±0.1. If the
® Light Green SF Yellowish, pH is low add more NaOH to the clear solu-
NaOH is added to the solution and mixed well
until the solution becomes clear with a light
Certified, C.I. #42095 tion. If the pH is above 12.1 start over this yellowish color. The solution is then transferred
(Acid Green 5; Light Green 2G, S or 2GN; time adding a smaller amount of NaOH. to an amber glass with a screw cap bottle for
Acid Green F; Fast Acid Green N) 6. Add CO2 free water to bring the solution storage. The solution can be stored at room
C37H34N2Na2O9S3 F.W. 792.86 to a final volume of 50 ml. temperature or in the refrigerator for over 1
CAS #5141-20-8 7. Let stand several hours before use. year. Takamasa Hanaichi et al. (1986) “A
Solubility: 20.35% Water; 4.0% Alcohol; 8. Store in amber, tightly covered bottle in Stable Lead by Modification of Sato’s Method”.
5.25% Cellosolve; 12.0% Glycol; 0.0% Xylene refrigerator. J. Electron Microsc., Vol. 35. No. 3. 304-306.
RT 17920 10 g B. Lead Staining Stock Solution by Venable Handling of Lead Solutions
and Coggeshall (1965) Prepare and store LEAD SOLUTION in plastics
® Light Green Solution 1. In 12 ml sample bottles (EMS Cat. rather than glass containers. Avoid breathing
Light SF Yellowish, 0.2% in 0.2% acetic acid #64254) add 0.01g - 0.04g Lead Citrate on sections during LEAD staining in order to
for use in the GM Method; as a fungal stain. (EMS Cat. #17800) to 10 ml CO2 free dis- maintain a CO2-free environment. REASON:
RT 26085-05 Light Green Solution 500ml tilled water. Pb + CO2 in the presence of Oxygen forms
RT 26085-06 Light Green Solution 1L 2. Add 0.1 ml 10N NaOH. Cap the bottle and PbCO3 a white precipitate.
shake well until clear.
III. Lead Staining
® (SPURR), Low Viscosity, To use, draw a small portion up with a syringe Lead stains are very sensitive and will
Embedding Kit, and use a syringe filter, or, centrifuge a small precipitate quickly upon contact with CO2. To
See Embedding, page 96 UUUUU covered sample at 6000 rpm for 15 minutes. prevent this from happening either during
RT 14300 kit NOTE: Removal of heavy metal precipitates preparation, storage, or staining the following
(artifacts) Uranyl acetate (small, needle steps should be followed:
® Lowicryl, Embedding Kit shaped), crystals or lead carbonate (large, 1. Prepare CO2 free water: boil double distilled
See Embedding, page 96 UUUUU spherical) is imperative. The reason being is water and store it at once (while still hot) in
RT 14330 Lowicryl K4M. kit these precipitates can obscure vital detail and tightly capped bottles or glass stop-pered
RT 14340 Lowicryl HM20 kit the end result is poor quality micrographs. bottles. When these bottles are opened you
RT 14350 Lowicryl K11M kit Kuo, et al (1981), suggested that these should hear a hissing sound which indicates
RT 14360 Lowicryl HM23 kit artifacts can often be removed by a 30 second the bottles were sealed properly. The water
dip into freshly prepared 10% glacial acetic bottle should be opened only prior to use.
® Lowicryl MonoStep Single acid followed by two rinses in distilled water. The above procedure needs to be repeated if
Component Embedding ample amount of water remains in the bottle
II. A Stable Lead Staining Solution and the bottle was left open for an extended
Media A Stable Lead by Modification of Sato’s period of time (more than 10 minutes).
The same as our Lowicryl complete kits but this Method Lead staining solution: Calcined lead
new formulation allows you one stop embedding 2. Construct a staining apparatus: A sheet of
citrate - long term storage lead solution. Since
dental wax is placed on top of wetted filter
without all of the cumbersome preparation and the first introduction by Watson (1958), various
paper (1N NaOH) and it is surrounded with
mixing. This pre-mixed, ready to use resin, lead stains have been developed in order to
several NaOH pellets inside of a petri dish
saves you time and minimizes chemical contact. increase contrast and reduce contamination in
which serves as the staining chamber. The
MonoStep Lowicryl is ideal for use in sections for electron microscopy. One of the
NaOH will quickly absorb CO2 in the chamber,
Immunohistochemistry, and immunolabeling. disadvantages of lead stains developed to date
giving a CO2 free area for lead staining.
is that the staining solution is apt to produce
Store at room temperature. For a detailed description and explanation of
precipitates of lead carbonate, resulting in
RT 14335 Lowicryl K4M Polar difficulty for long-term storage of the stains. lead staining, please refer to the following book:
Embedding Medium;
Now there is a new stable lead solution which Electron Microscopy
Monostep 225g
is free from precipitates when kept at room Principles And Techniques For Biologists
RT 14345 Lowicryl HM-20 Non-Polar
temperature for over 1 year. By John J. Bozzola And Lonnie D. Russell.
Embedding Medium;
Monostep 225g 1992 Pp.115-118

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 51

Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec01_046-055_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 12:31 AM Page 52

SECTION 1 Chemicals for Electron Microscopy, Light Microscopy, & Histology

ARTICLE OF INTEREST TECHNICAL TIP

Flat Embedding with LR-White Embedding Resin Stain Permability
A technique for flat embedding of microorganisms on slides with LR Polyester embedding resins are more permeable to acid stains.
White for Immunocytochemistry. Please refer to: Epoxy embedding resins are more permeable to basic stains.
T P.A. Vesk, T.P. Dibbayawan, M. Vesk. (1993). Flat Embedding Of Reference: Bryant V. and Watson, J.H.L. (1967). A comparison of
Microorganism On Slides With LR White For Immunocytochemistry. light microscopy staining methods applied to a polyester and
Microscopy Research and Technique. 26:352-353. three epoxy resins. Henry Ford Hosp. Med. Bull., 15:65

® LR White And LR Gold Resin, ® May-Grunwald Staining Solution

See Embedding Media Kits, page 95 UUUUU A ready-to-use stain for bone marrow staining.
RT 14370 LR Gold Complete kit RT 26064-05 May-Grunwald Stain Solution 500ml
RT 14380 LR White Complete kit RT 26064-06 May-Grunwald Stain Solution 1L

For PTFE Flat Embedding Molds for LR White, ® Mayer’s Hematoxylin

see page 253 UUUUU Stain selectivity for nuclei. Ready-to-use.
26043-05
® Lucifer Yellow, CH, Dilithium Salt Mayer’s Hematoxylin 500ml
RT
RT 26043-06 Mayer’s Hematoxylin 1L
C13H9Li2N2O9S2 F.W. 457.25 CAS #67769-47-5 RT 26043-10 Mayer’s Hematoxylin 4L
A technique producing an electron dense osmiophilic polymer when
Lucifer Yellow is injected into cells. Lucifer Yellow also can be viewed in ® Modified Mayer’s Hematoxylin
living cells as a dye marker and is more sensitive than any other dye. Stock Solution, Ready to use.
Cell Tissue Res., 204, 37 (1979) J. Histochem Cystochem, 30, 189 Ingredients: Hematoxylin 0.4`%, Ammonium Aluminum Sulfate 0.5%,
(1982) Science, 217, 953 (1982); 215, 1641 (1982); 214, 801 Sodium Iodate: 0.03%, Citric Acid 0.1%, Chloral Hydrate 5%
(1981); 225, 851 (1984); Cell, 14, 741 (1978). RT 26043-18 Modified Mayer’s Hematoxylin 500ml
A fluorescent dye. Nature 292, 17 (1981)
0-5˚C 17950 25mg McDowells Trumps Fixative, see page 458 UUUUU

® Lugol’s Iodine ® Methacrylic Acid, Glacial

For use as a bacterial, fungal and inclusion body stain. (2-Methylpropenoic Acid)
RT 26055-05 Lugol’s Iodine Solution 500ml CH2:C(CH3)COOH F.W. 86.09 CAS #79-41-4
RT 26055-06 Lugol’s Iodine Solution 1L Assay ......................................................................................>98%
Stab. with 0.25% Hydroquinone monomethyl ether
® Magnesium Chloride, Hexahydrate, RT 18500 450ml
Reagent, A.C.S.
MgCl2.6H2O F.W. 203.30 CAS #7791-18-6 ® Methanol, Reagent, A.C.S.
Assay ............................................................................99.0-102.0% (Methyl Alcohol) CH3OH F.W. 32.04 CAS #67-56-1
RT 18010 100g Assay ......................................................................................99.8%
Specific Gravity ..........................................................................0.79
® Malachite Green 4, Certified A.C.S. Specifications:
Basic Green Oxalate
Residue after Evaporation ......................................................0.001%
See page 24, 468 UUUUU Boiling Range (Boiling point 64.6°C) ....................................2°C max
RT 18100 25g Appearance................................................................................Clear
Color (A.P.H.A.) ......................................................................10 max
® Maleic Acid, Crystalline, Repurified, A.C.S. Acetone & Aldehydes (0.001%) ......................................To pass test
(Toxilic Acid; cis-Butenediodic Acid) Titratable Acid..............................................................0.0003 meq/g
HOOCCH:CHCOOH F.W. 116.08 CAS #110-16-7 Titratable Base ............................................................0.0002 meq/g
m.p. 132-134°C Water ................................................................................0.2% max
Assay ......................................................................................99.5% RT 18510 1qt
Insoluble Matter ....................................................................0.005% RT 18511 4x1qt
Fumaric Acid ..........................................................................0.15%
Chloride ..................................................................................0.01% ® Methenamine
Sulfate...................................................................................0.001% See Hexamethylenetetramine, page 48 UUUUU
RT 18150 250g RT 16710 50g

® Mammalian Ringer Solution ® Methenamine Solution

A stock solution for use in bacterial and fungal stains (Grocott’s
Ingredients: NaCl; KCl; CaCl2.6H2O; NaHCO3; MgCl2.6H2O; Glucose and Method/GMS).
Distilled water. RT 26083-05 Methenamine, 3% Aqueous Solution 500ml
RT 11763-05 Mammalian Ringer Solution 500ml RT 26083-06 Methenamine, 3% Aqueous Solution 1 L
RT 11763-10 Mammalian Ringer Solution 1L

52 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874

Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec01_046-055_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 12:31 AM Page 53

Chemicals for Electron Microscopy, Light Microscopy, & Histology SECTION 1

® 2-Methyl Butane, Reagent TECHNICAL TIP

(Isopropentane)
CH2H5CH(CH3)2 F.W. 72.15 CAS #78-78-4 Storage of Epoxy Resins
To gain the maximum shelf life of Epoxy Resins note the following:
b.p. 27-31°C Store most epoxy resins in well-capped containers, in the range of 18 -
Specific Gravity @ 20°C: 0.62 40°C. Store out of contact with moisture to avoid hydrolysis to a free
RT 18550 450ml acid, which contributes to the spoiling of embedding materials

® Methyl Cellulose, 400 cPS,USP/NF ® Methylene Chloride, Reagent, A.C.S.

(Methylcel MC; Cellulose Methyl Ether)
(Dichloromethane; Plastisolve)
CAS #9004-67-5
CH2Cl2 F.W. 84.93 CAS #75-09-2
Methoxyl (-CH3) content: 27.5-31.5%
Specific Gravity @25°C: ..................................................1.315-1.321
Medium viscosity (2% in water, @20°C): 230-550 cps
Assay ....................................................................................>99.5%
Used with polyethylene glycol in the presence of acidic uranyl acetate to
stain cryo sections. Specifications:
Residue After Evaporation .......................................................0.002%
RT 18560 100g Titratable Acid ...............................................................0.0003 meq/g
Water .......................................................................................0.02%
® Methylene Blue Chloride, Certified, Free Halogens..................................................................To Pass Test
C.I. #52015 RT 19600 1qt (946ml)
(Basic Blue 9; Swiss Blue) RT 19610 4x1qt.
C16H18N3SCl•3H2O F.W. 373.86 CAS #7220-79-3
® Methyl Green, Certified, C.I. #42590
Solubility: 9.5% Water; 6.0% Alcohol; 6.5% Cellosolve; 10.0% Glycol;
(Zinc Chloride Salt; Ethyl Green)
0.0% Xylene.
T Used to distinguish autonomic nerves. Richardson, K.C., (1969) C27H35N3Cl2.ZnCl2 F.W. 608.79 CAS #7114-03-6
Anat. Rec., 164, 231. General stain for animals, histology. Solubility: 8.0% water; 3.0% Alcohol; 1.8% Cellosolve; 3.5%
T A simple rapid staining procedure for methacrylate embedded Glycol; 0.0% Xylene.
tissue sections using chromotrope 2R and Methylene Blue. T Used as a counterstain in Almann’s aniline acid fuchsin
Dougherty, M.M., and King, J.S., (1984) Stain Tech., 59, 149 technique for mitochrondria; used in Kurnick’s Methyl Green-
T An established routine method for differential staining of Pyonin stain for nuclei and cystoplasmic granules of liver cells.
epoxy-embedded tissue sections. Schroeder, H.E., Rossinsky, Marker for DNA at acid and neutral conditions. J.B. Boyd, H.R.
K., and Muller, W., (1980) Microsc. Acta 83, 111 Mitchell, (1965) Anal. Biochem., 13, 28.
T Used with Basic Fuchsin for stain epoxy-embedded tissue. Sato, T Used for epoxy-embedded thick sections. Sievers, J. (1971).
T. and Shamoto, M. (1973). A simple rapid polychrome stain for Basic two-dye stains for epoxy-embedded 0.3-1 micron sec-
epoxy-embedded tissue. Stain Technol., 48:223 tions. Stain Technol., 46:195
RT 18600 25g RT 18700 25g
For our Methylene Blue Solutions, see page 474 UUUUU
® Methyl Methacrylate, Monomer
(Methacrylic Acid Methyl Ester)
TECHNICAL TIP CH2:C(CH3)COOCH3 F.W. 100.12 CAS #80-62-6
Superior Methylene Blue-Azure Ii Stain for b.p. 99-100°C
Semithin Sections Specific Gravity @20°C:............................................................0.943
The most common stain used in the electron microscopy lab for thick Inhibitor (Hydroquinone):........................................0.0025% (25ppm)
sections is toluidine blue. Unfortunately its general lack of polycromasia
makes it unsuitable for photomicro-graphy. Much better results are 0-5˚C 18800 225ml
obtained for general work as well as for photomicrography (especially
with the use of filters for black and white film) with the methylene blue, ® Methyl Methacrylate/Butyl Methacrylate
azure II combinations. Embedding Kit
Hildegard H. Crowley, Dept. of Biological Sciences, University of Denver, See Embedding Media Kits, page 97 UUUUU
Denver, CO. 80208
® Methyl Violet 2B, Certified, C.I. #42535
(Basic Violet 1; Dahlia B; Gentian Violet; Paris Violet;
® Methyl Ethyl Ketone, Reagent Pyoktanium Coeruleum)
(2-Butanone) C24H28N3Cl F.W. 393.96 CAS #8004-87-3
CH3COCH2CH3 F.W. 72.11 CAS #78-93-3 Solubility: 9.0% Water; 8.25% Alcohol; 9.0% Cellosolve; 8.5%
Assay ......................................................................................>98% Glycol;0.01% Xylene; Dye content: 75% min.
Specific Gravity (H2O=1) ................................................0.799-0.802 Used with Methyl Green to stain Epoxy-embedded sections.
Acidity (as CH3COOH) ............................................................0.003% RT 18850 25g
Water ........................................................................................0.2%
RT 18650 450ml
® Michel’s Fixative Fixative and Buffer
See page 458 UUUUU

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 53

Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec01_046-055_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 12:31 AM Page 54

SECTION 1 Chemicals for Electron Microscopy, Light Microscopy, & Histology

® Microbed Embedding Kit ® Ninhydrin, Crystal, Reagent
See Embedding Media Kits, page 97 UUUUU (1,2,3-Triketohydrindene Monohydrate)
C9H6O4.H2OF.W. 178.15 CAS #485-47-2
® Millonig's Phosphate Buffer
19030 25g
See Buffers Section, page 27, 447 UUUUU
RT

11582-05
0-5˚C
0-5˚C 11582-10
500ml
1 lit
® Nitro Blue Tetrazolium Chloride
(Nitro, BT, p-Nitrotetrazolium blue; 2, 2´-Di-p-nitrophenyl-5, 5´diphenyl-
® Molybdic Acid, Ammonium Salt [3, 3´-dimethoxy-4, 4´-diphenylene] ditetrazolium chloride)
See Ammonium Molybdate, page 23 UUUUU C40H30Cl2N10O6 F.W. 817.6 CAS 298-83-9
Approx. 98% (TLC).
RT 10500 100g Contains up to 10% solvent. A substrate for dehydrogenases and other
® MOPS, Biological Buffer oxidases.
0-5˚C 19035-01 100mg
(3-(N-Morpholino) propanesulfonic acid)
0-5˚C 19035-05 1gm
C7H15NO4S F.W.209.26 CAS #1132-61-2
Also available in tablet form. Tablet contains 10mg substrate per tablet.
Assay ......................................................................................>99.% 0-5˚C 19035-10 10 tablets/pk
pKa @20°C ................................................................................7.20
pH range ...............................................................................6.5-7.9
® Nitrocellulose
RT 18900 100g
Methanol Free!
® Mucicarmine/Metanil See Parlodion Purified Strips, page 57 UUUUU
For use with hematoxylin and metanil yellow for the determination of RT 19220 10g
carbohydrates and mucosubstances.
RT 26080-05 Mucicarmine Stock Solution 500ml ® NSA, Nonenyl Succinic
RT 26080-06 Mucicarmine Stock Solution 1L Anhydride,
RT 26081-05 Metanil, 0.25% Stock Solution 500ml Specially Distilled
RT 26081-06 Metanil, 0.25% Stock Solution 1L EM Grade F.W. 227 CAS 28928-97-4
b.p. 325°C
® NMA Viscosity: ......................................................................102.8 at 25°C
(Methyl-5-Norbornene-2,3-Dicarboxylic Anhydride) Density: ..........................................................................1.08gm/cm3
C10H10O3 F.W. 178.19 CAS #25134-21-8 An epoxy hardener specially distilled. The special distillation process
Specific Gravity @20/20°C: ......................................................1.245 offers you much clearer blocks than the standard NSA.
b.p. @ 10mm Hg: ....................................................................140°C RT 19050 450ml
An epoxy hardener. RT 19051 4x450ml
19000
RT
RT 19001
450ml
4x450ml
® Orange II
(Acid Orange 7; Acid Orange II, Y or A; Gold Orange; Mandarin G;
® Nigrosine, Certified, C.I. #50420, Orange A, P or R; Orange Extra; Tropaoelin OOO No.2)
Water Soluble C16H11N2O4SNa F.W. 350.33 CAS #633-96-5
(Acid Black 2; Gray R, B, BB; Indulin Black; Nigrosin W, WL; Silver Gray; Solubility: 3.0% Water; 0.15% Alcohol; 2.5% Cellosolve; 8.0% Glycol;
Steel Gray) 0.0% Xylene; Dye Content: approx. 75%
CAS #8005-03-06 A general tissue stain with Eosin and Azur-C. French, Stain Tech., 1, 79
Solubility: 10.0% Water; 0.0% Alcohol; 1.0% Cellosolve; (1926). Counterstain for Heidenhain’s Hematoxylin in animal histology.
11.0% Glycol; 0.0% Xylene A substitute for Orange G if a stronger yellow is desired for contrast. J.
For negative staining of bacteria. With Basic Fuchsin, staining bacteria Lab. Med., 28, 995 (1943)
spores. Dorner, Le Lait, 6, 8 (1926). RT 19060 25g
Biochem. Biophys. Acta 69,159 (1963).
RT 19010 25g ® Orange G, Certified, C.N. #DcO-13
(Acid Orange 10, Wood Orange 2G)
® Nile Blue A, Certified, C.I. #51180 C16H10N2O7S2Na2 F.W. 452.38 CAS #1936-15-8
(Basic Blue 12, Nile Blue Sulfate) Solubility: 8.0% Water; 0.22% Alcohol; 1.7% Cellosolve; 3.0% Glycol;
(C20H20N3O)2SO4 F.W. 732.84 CAS #3625-57-8 0.0% Xylene; Dye Content: approx. 60%
Solubility: 6.0% Water; 5.0% Alcohol; 5.0% Cellosolve; 5.0% Glycol; Kornhauser’s Quad stain for most elementary structures of tissues. Stain
0.25% Xylene. Dye content: approx. 65% Tech., 18, 985 (1943) Mallory’s tissue stain for connective tissue.
Differentiates melamins and lipofuscins; Used in fat staining. Mallory, J. Exper. Med., 5,15 (1900). Used with safranin and tannic acid
Lillie, Stain Tech., 31,151 (1956); J. Histochem., 4,377; for showing shoot apex in plant tissue. Stain Tech., 18, 105 (1943).
Z. Anal. Chem. 260, 290 (1972). RT 19070 25g
For staining bone sections. Cytologia, 11, 261 (1940)
RT 19020 10g For our Orange G Solutions, see page 474 UUUUU

54 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874

Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec01_046-055_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 12:31 AM Page 55

Chemicals for Electron Microscopy, Light Microscopy, & Histology SECTION 1

® Osmium Tetroxide
® Osmium Tetroxide, Crystalline,
Highest Purity, 99.95%
(Osmic Acid Anhydride) OsO4 F.W. 254.20
CAS #20816-12-0
Melting Range: ................................................................39.5-41.0°C
Boiling Point:..........................................................................129.7°C
Vapor Pressure @25°C: ......................................................9.8 mmHg
Solubility: ........................................5.07% in Cold Water; 6.5% in Hot
..........................................................................Water; 250% in CCl4
Osmium Purity: ..................................................................>99.95%
Non-Volatile matter: ..............................................................<0.02%
Small size (2ml), Light-gauge, pre-scored amber glass ampoules.
Ampoules containing OsO4 Crystal, are pre-cleaned and heat sealed in TECHNICAL TIP
plastic bags to assure a contaminant-free solution. Ampoules are also Neutralization And Disposal of Osmium Tetroxide
free of pressure-sensitive labels and, therefore, do not require cleaning A 2% solution of Osmium Tetroxide can be fully neutralized by twice
prior to solution preparation. the volume of oil (corn oil is preffered because of its high percentage of
unsaturated bonds).1 That is to say, for every 10ml of 2% Osmium
RT 19100 1g solution, 20ml of corn oil is required.
RT 19110 10x1g
RT 19102 20x1g Procedure:
RT 19103 30x1g 1. Do all work under a fume hood.
RT 19104 40x1g 2. Pour twice the volume of corn oil into used Osmium Tetroxide solution.
RT 19105 50x1g 3. Wait for the oil to completely turn black.
Please call us for special prices on all other quantities and package sizes. 4. Test to check that complete neutralization has taken place. (To
confirm neutralization; take either a glass coverslip coated in corn oil
RT 19112 5x2g/Ampoule or a piece of filter paper soaked in corn oil and suspend it over the
RT 19114 5x4g/Ampoule solution. Blackening indicates OsO4 is still present.)2
RT 19115 5g/Amp
5. Dispose in accordance to local regulations. Contact your Disposal
RT 19116 6g/Amp
Agency or Environmental Health & Safety Office at your Institute to
RT 19120 1⁄2g
RT 19130 10x1⁄2g
obtain local regulations.
RT 19131 Same as 19130 (5 bxs + /lot) References:
RT 19132 10x1⁄4g 1. Cooper, K. (1988) Neutralization of Osmium Tetroxide in case of
RT 19134 10x1⁄10g accidental spillage and for disposal. Bulletin of The Microscopical
Society of Canada. 8:24-28
® Aqueous Solution 2. Lunn, G.; Sansone, E.B. Osmium Tetroxide. Destruction of Hazardous
To facilitate your work, we now have available a complete line of Chemicals in the Laboratory; Program Resources, Inc. Frederick, MD;
Osmium Tetroxide Aqueous Solutions with various concentrations. pg. 211-213
Sealed under dry nitrogen. Prepared in our plant daily. Exact
T Inadequate dehydration of the specimen.
concentrations and volume in pre-scored amber-ampoules.
T Inadequate mixing.
4% Aqueous Solution: T Inadequate addition of the accelerator to the mixture.
RT 19140 2ml ea
RT 19150 10x2ml bx
RT 19151 Same as 19150 (5 bxs + /lot) bx
RT 19160 5ml ea SAFETY TIP
RT 19170 10x5ml bx An Air-Tight Container for Small Amounts of
RT 19171 Same as 19170 (5bxs/lot) bx
RT 19180 10ml ea
Osmium Tetroxide
RT 19190 10x10ml bx An Air-Tight Container for Small Amounts of Osmium Tetroxide Osmium
RT 19191 Same as 19190 (5 bxs + /lot) bx vapors readily leak out of many containers as is evidenced by the black
precipitates on inside refrigerator walls in many E.M. laboratories. A
2% Aqueous Solution convenient way to prevent such leakage is to store the osmium solutions
RT 19152 10x2ml bx in glass vacuum-type blood collection tubes. The osmium vapors will not
RT 19153 Same as 19152 (5 bxs + /lot) bx penetrate past the rubber stopper and contaminate the surrounding area.
RT 19172 10x5ml bx
RT 19173 Same as 19172 (5 bxs + /lot) bx Lynn D. Gray, Ph. D., The University of Texas Health Center at Tyler,
RT 19192 10x10ml bx Dept. of Cell Biology and Env. Sci., P.O. Box 2003, Tyler, TX. 75710
RT 19193 Same as 19192 (5 bxs + /lot) bx

Special orders are encouraged for different solution Storage: Room Temperature in a desiccator, kept
concentrations and packaging requirements. away from direct sunlight. For our full line of desicca-
tors, see Equipment section, pages 1064–1070. UUUUU

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 55

Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec01_056-070_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 12:38 AM Page 56

SECTION 1 Chemicals for Electron Microscopy, Light Microscopy, & Histology

® Papanicolaou Stain, OG-6 ® Paramat and Paramat Extra,
RT 26048-05 OG-6 Stain Solution 500ml See Histology section, page 492-494 UUUUU
RT 26048-06 OG-6 Stain Solution 1L
® Tissue-TEK Paraffin,
See Histology section page 492 UUUUU
® Papanicolaou Stain, EA-50 (EA
RT
Counterstain)
26049-05 EA-50 Stain Solution 500ml
® Paraplast Embedding Medium
RT 26049-06 EA-50 Stain Solution 1L

® Paraformaldehyde, EM Grade, Purified

(Polyoxymethylene)
OH(CH2O)nH F.W. Average: 600 CAS #30525-89-4
Paraformaldehyde is the condensation product of methylene glycol, a
substance not so far isolated in its pure form; it is a white solid with a
formaldehyde content between 78 and 98% and is supplied either as a
Prills or Granular. All forms contain more than 95.5% paraformaldehyde
content. The Prill and Granular forms are small, free-flowing, dust-free
beads, the most desired by EM users. A fast-penetrating EM fixative
used in combination with Glutaraldehyde, Acrolein, and Osmium
Tetroxide. Karnovsky, M.J., J. Cell Biol., 27, 137A (1965). Hayat, M.A.
Principles & Tech., of EM (Univ. Park Press), 68 (1981)
RT 19200 Prills 500g ® Paraplast X-tra
RT 19202 Prills kilo
Handy pellet form melts rapidly. Melting Point 53-54°C. Cuts to 2
RT 19208 Granular 500g
RT 19210 Granular kilo micron thickness with exceptional ribbon continuity. Extra compression
resistance provides total support of tissues.
RT 19214 1 kilo
TECHNICAL TIP RT 19215 8 kilo
Paraformaldehyde Static Jumps ® Paraplast Plus
Spray the outside of the container with Anti-Static Spray (EMS
Reduces infiltration time by one-third. Cuts to 2 micron thickness with
#60615) prior to opening the lid and this will help to eliminate static
charge and the paraformaldehyde from jumping out of the container. excellent ribbon continuity. Convenient pellet form melts rapidly.
Melting point 56°C. Double filtered. No need for filtration before use.
RT 19216 1 kilo
19217
® Paraformaldehyde Solution -16% RT 8 kilo

(Formaldehyde Solution, 16%)

CAS #30525-89-4
® Paraplast Medium
METHANOL Handy pellet form melts rapidly. Melting Point 56°C. Cuts to 4 micron
Prepared from Paraformaldehyde crystal,
16% aqueous solution, methanol free. FREE! thickness with excellent ribbon continuity - no crumbling or cracking.
Double filtered. No need for filtration before use.
Microfiltered and stored in pre-scored ampoules.
RT 19218 1 kilo
RT 15700 10ml amp RT 19219 8 kilo
RT 15710 10x10ml bx
RT 15711 Same as 15710 (10bxs/lot) bx For a continuation of our Paraffin Waxes,
We can prepare in accordance to your special requirements (any See pages 492-494 UUUUU
concentration desired). Call for more information.
See page 40-41 for other standard concentrations. UUUUU ARTICLE OF INTEREST
Re-Embedding Of Paraffin-Embedded
Specimen Tissue In Resin:
® Paraformaldehyde-Glutaraldehyde T Chien K., et al (1982). A one step method for reembedding
Solution paraffin embedded specimens for electron microscopy. Proc.
40th Ann. EMSA Meet., pp. 356. Claitor’s Pub. Div., Baton
Karnovsky’s Fixative Ready to mix. Rouge, LA.
Kit consists of:
T Lehner, T. et al (1966). Electron microscopy of paraffin
2x10ml ampoules 16% Formaldehyde embedded material in amyloidois. J. Path. Bact., 91:297
1x10ml ampoules 50% Glutaraldehyde
T Johannessen, J.V. (1977).Use of paraffin material for electron
1x50ml 0.2M Sodium Phosphate Buffer microscopy. Pathol. Ann., 12:189
0-5˚C 15720 1 kit T Bergh Weerman, M.A. v.d. and Dingemans, K.P. (1984). Rapid
0-5˚C 15730 Lot of 5 kits
deparaffinization for electron microscopy. Ultra. struct.
Pathol., 5:75

56 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874

Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec01_056-070_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 12:38 AM Page 57

Chemicals for Electron Microscopy, Light Microscopy, & Histology SECTION 1

® Peel-A-Way® Disposable Embedding ® Periodic Acid, Reagent

Molds, See Histology Section, page 250, 554 UUUUU H5IO6 F.W. 227.96 CAS #10450-60-9
Assay ....................................................................................>99.0%
® For our complete line of Embedding Waxes, Heavy Metals .........................................................................0.005%
See Histology section, pages 492-494 UUUUU Insoluble Matters ....................................................................0.01%
Iron .......................................................................................0.003%
® PEG - GMA Embedding Kit Other Halogen (Cl) ..................................................................0.01%
See Embedding Media Kits, page 94 UUUUU Residue after Ignition ..............................................................0.01%
RT 14250 kit Sulfate ....................................................................................0.01%

T Ainsworth, S.K. et al. (1972). Alkaline bismuth reagent for high

® Parlodion (Pyroxylin Purified Strips) resolution ultrastructural demonstration of periodic-reactive
C12H16N4O18 F.W. 504.28 CAS #9004-70-0 sites. J. Histochem. Cytochem., 20:995.
T Mowry, R.W. (1958). Improved procedure for the staining of acid
polysaccharides by Muller’s colloidal (hydrous) ferric oxide and
its combination with the Feulgen and the periodic acid Schiff
reaction. Lab. Invest., 7:566
T Mowry, R.W. (1959). Effect of Periodic Acid used prior to
Chromic Acid on the staining of Polysaccharides by Gomori’s
methenamine silver. J. Histochem. Cytochem., 7:288
T Tsuchiya, A. and Ogawa, K. (1973). Ultracytochemistry of the
Periodic Acid (PA) - Phosphotungstic Acid (PTA) reaction. J.
Electr. Microsc., 22:290
T Hanker, J.S. et al (1964). Osmiophilic reagents: new cytochemi-
cal principles for light and electron microscopy. Science New
York, 146:1039
T Derenzini, M. et al (1986). An improved periodic acid-thiosemi-
Highly purified from cellulose nitrate; speembedding tissue for sectioning carbazide-osmium technique to reveal glycoconjugates at the
and for preparing semi-permeable membranes. molecular level in-situ. J. Histochem. Cytochem., 34:1161
RT 19220 10g RT 19325 25g

® Parlodion 2% in Amyl Acetate For our Periodic Acid Solutions, see page 461 UUUUU
See Collodion, page 32 UUUUU
® Permount Mounting Medium
See Adhesives and Mountants, page 21, 516 UUUUU
® Pepsin Reagent, Ready To Use
Pepsin is used for proteolytic digestion of formalin-fixed paraffin- ® Phenol Red
embedded (FFPE) tissue sections prior to application of antibodies. In (Phenolsulfonphthalein)
IHC most commonly used fixative like formalin mask tissue antigens C19H14O5S F.W. 354.38 CAS #143-74-8
(cellular, membrane and nuclear) by cross-linking process, this results in
poor or no staining in IHC. Pepsin digestion of FFPE tissue section A standard indicator for preparing buffers, pH range 6.4-8.2.
improves accessibility of antibodies to tissue antigens. RT 19327 5g

Storage: 2-8°C. DO NOT FREEZE

® Phenol Red Sodium Salt
Intended Use: Use as antigen retriever for some antibodies in IHC.
(Phenolsulfonphthalein Sodium Salt)
Please refer to primary antibody protocol for IHC.
C19H13NaO5S F.W. 376.37 CAS #34487-61-1
Reagent: Ready-to-use Pepsin reagent available in 2 sizes: 15 and 100
A standard indicator for preparing buffers, pH range 6.8-8.2.
ml
RT 19328 5g
2-8˚C 64142-05 Pepsin Reagent 15 ml
2-8˚C 64142-06 Pepsin Reagent 100 ml
® (PMSF), Phenylmethylsulphonyl Fluoride
C6H5CH2SO2F F.W. 174.20 CAS #329-98-6
Assay ....................................................................................>99.0%
Water ......................................................................................<0.1%
RT 19330 1g
RT 19331 5g

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 57

Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec01_056-070_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 12:38 AM Page 58

SECTION 1 Chemicals for Electron Microscopy, Light Microscopy, & Histology

® Phosphate Mixed Sodium Salts ® Picric Acid, Reagent, Crystal, A.C.S.
0.2 M Buffer/0.1 M Buffer (2,4,6-Trinitrophenol)
See Buffer Section, pages 27-29, 461 UUUUU C6H2(NO2)3OH FW 229.11 CAS #88-89-1
0-5˚C 11600-05 500ml A.C.S. Specifications:
0-5˚C 11600-10 1 liter Water...................................................................................min 30%
Melting Point (dried) ........................................................121-123°C
® Phloxine B, Certified, C.I. #45410 Insoluble in Resinous Matter. ..................................................0.01%
(Acid Red 92; Cyanosine; Eosin 10B; Phloxine TA, N, BP Super, RB, TB, or BB)
Insoluble in benzene ..................................................................0.1%
C20H2O5Cl4Br4Na2 F.W. 829.66 CAS #18472-87-2
Sulfate ....................................................................................0.01%
Solubility: 10.5% Water; 5.0% Alcohol; 9.0% Cellosolve; 4.5% Glycol; RT 19550 100g
0.0% Xylene
RT 19350 25 g For our Picric Acid Solutions, see page 462 UUUUU

® Phosphomolybdic Acid, ® Pipes Buffer Solution

See buffer solutions, page 28 UUUUU
Crystal, Reagent, A.C.S. RT 11610 500ml
(Dodeca-Molybdophosphoric Acid)
H3PO4.12(MoO3).24H2O F.W. 2257.6 CAS #51429-74-4 ® Pipes, 1.5 Sodium Salt, Crystal
RT 19400 100g [Piperazine-N,N-bis (2-ethanesulfonic acid,) 1.5 Sodium]
F.W. 335.3 pK = pH = 6.8 @25°C CAS #10010-67-0
Phosphomolydic Acid Solutions, see page 23, 462 UUUUU
RT 19230 25g
RT 19240 100g
® Phosphotungstic Acid, Crystal, Reagent,
Highest Purity ® Plastisolve
(Tungstophosphoric Acid) Methylene Chloride, see page 53 UUUUU
For the clean up of epoxy resins.
H3[P(W3O10)4]. aq F.W. 2880.17+aq CAS #12501-23-4
RT 19600 1qt
Specifications: RT 19610 4x1qt
Solubility ......................................Practically clear, colorless solution
Ammonia (NH ) .....................................................................0.004% ® Platinum Blue, an EM Stain
Chloride (CI).............................................................................0.03%
IBI Blue Platinum Stain Pt4N8H6O24C20
Insoluble Matter ......................................................................0.02%
An EM stain that may have the ability to replace Uranyl Acetate in some
Nitrate (NO3 ) .........................................................................0.004%
instances. If you have issues with having Uranium salts that are
Sulfate (SO4 ) .........................................................................0.005% radioactive (depleted or not) in the lab this may be the answer for you.
Heavy Metals and Iron..............No color formation on addition of H2S An alternative for staining TEM thin sections
Used as a Fixative: Issidorides, M.R., and Kasorchis, T. (1981). RT 22407 Platinum Blue 1 ml
Dispersed and compact chromatin demonstrated with a new EM Method:
phosphotungstic acid-hematoxylin block-staining. Histochemistry 73,21.
® Poly-L-Lysine Solutions
Used widely as a Negative Stain: ® A/ Poly-L-Lysine Hydrobromide 30,000-70,000
T As Spray method: Horne, R.W., and Pasquali-Ronchette, I. CAS #25988-63-0
(1974). A negative staining-carbon film technique for studying
A polycation, which binds to DNA, red cell membranes and any negatively
viruses in the electron microscope.
charged proteins. It is useful for promoting cell adhesion; for the
T Preparation procedures for examining icosahedral and
preparation of polycationic beads, useful in immobilization techniques;
filamentous viruses. J. Ultrastruct. Res. 47, 361. Locke, M., and
immobilization of membranes; immobilization of plant protoplasts. In cell
Kirhman, N. (1971).
culture, immobilization by micro encapsulation with the alginate-poly-L-
T Hot Alcoholic phosphotungstic acid and uranyl acetate as
lysine microcapsule system. We offer a prepared 0.1% aqueous solution,
routine stains for thick and thin sections. J. Cell Biol., 50, 550.,
micro-filtered, which is ideal for cell culture growth.
Farragiana, T., and Marinozzi, V. (1979). RT 19320-A Poly-L-lysine 0.1% Solution 10ml
T Phosphotungstic acid staining of polysaccharides containing RT 19321-A Poly-L-lysine 0.1% Solution 100ml
structures on epoxy embedded tissues. J. Submicrosc. Cytol.
11, 263.Bloom, E.E., And Aghajanian, G.K. (1968). ® B/ Poly-L-Lysine Hydrobromide 70,000-150,000
T Fine structural and cytochemical analysis of the staining of CAS #25988-63-0
synaptic junctions with PTA. J. Ultrastruct. Res. 22, 261.
Poly-L-lysine with a molecular weight of >70,000. This solution is useful
RT 19500 100g in promoting cell adhesion to solid substrates. Used for nuclear antigen-
coated red cells in hymolytic plaque assay. We offer a prepared 0.1%
Phosphotungstic Acid Solutions, see page 462 UUUUU aqueous solution which is micro-filtered and is used to increase tissue
adhesion to the glass slide, which is needed for immunohistochemical
and immunolabeling techniques, as well as lengthy staining procedures.
RT 19320-B Poly-L-lysine 0.1% Solution 10ml
RT 19321-B Poly-L-lysine 0.1% Solution 100ml

58 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874

Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec01_056-070_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 12:38 AM Page 59

Chemicals for Electron Microscopy, Light Microscopy, & Histology SECTION 1

® Polyester Wax ® Potassium Dichromate, Crystal, Reagent,

A synthetic polyester wax with a very low melting point (37°C). Invented A.C.S.
by Dr. H.F. Steedman, as a ribboning embedding medium. Its main K2Cr2O7 F.W. 294.18 CAS #7778-50-9
advantage over paraffin and ester waxes is its low melting point, which A.C.S. Specifications:
reduces tissue hardening, shrinkage, and eliminates the need for Insoluble and NH4OH ppt. .....................................................0.005%
infiltration ovens. Chloride ................................................................................0.001%
The wax is soluble in most organic solvents, including alcohol, ethers, Sulfate ..................................................................................0.005%
esters, ketones and hydrocarbons. The wax is water tolerant, almost Calcium ................................................................................0.003%
opaque, and sections easily. No electrification of ribbons occurs during Sodium ...................................................................................0.02%
Loss on drying at 105°C ..........................................................0.05%
sectioning. Sections of 2 microns and more may be cut at room
temperatures between 10 and 22°C. It is advantageous to keep the wax RT 20100 250g
in its solid state prior to use. For Potassium Dichromate Solutions, see page 462 UUUUU
RT 19312 Polyester Wax 500g
® Potassium Ferricyanide, Reagent, A.C.S.
® Polyethylene Glycol, Carbowax K3Fe(CN)6 F.W. 329.25 CAS #13746-66-2
See page 31 UUUUU A.C.S. Specifications:
Chloride ...................................................................................0.01%
® Polyvinyl Alcohol 15000 Ferro Compounds (Fe(Cn)4) ....................................................0.05%
(CH2CHOH)n F.W. 14000-15000 CAS #9002-89-5 Insoluble Matters. ..................................................................0.005%
Degree of Hydrolyzation: 86-89 mol% Sulfate.....................................................................................0.01%
T A water-miscible embedding medium: Munoz-Guerra,S. and RT 20150 100g
Subrirana, J.A. (1982).
T A crosslinked polyvinyl alcohol: a water-miscible polymer used For Potassium Ferricyanide Solutions, see page 463 UUUUU
as an embedding medium for electron microscopy.
Mikroskopie, 39:346 ® Potassium Hydroxide, Pellets, Reagent, ACS.
RT 19800 500g KOH F.W. 56.11 CAS #1310-58-3
Assay ...................................................................................>85.0%
® Ponceau B.S., Water contains: ....................................................................10-15%
See Biebrich Scarlet, page 24, 469 UUUUU RT 20155 100g
For Potassium Hydroxide Solutions, see page 463 UUUUU
® Potassium Bromide, Reagent, A.C.S.
KBr F.W. 119.00 CAS #7758-02-3 ® Potassium Iodide, Granular, Reagent, A.C.S.
Specifications: KI F.W. 166.00 CAS #7681-11-0
Insoluble Matters ...................................................................0.005% Refer to Bismuth Carbonate for references on use.
Bromate ........................................................................To Pass Test RT 20158 50g
Chloride .....................................................................................0.2%
Iodide ....................................................................................0.001%
Nitrogen.................................................................................0.005% ® Potassium Oxalate, Reagent, A.C.S.
Sulfate ..................................................................................0.005% (CO2K)2.H2O F.W. 184.23 CAS #6487-48-5
Barium ..................................................................................0.002% Specifications:
Heavy Metals .......................................................................0.0005% Assay ...........................................................................98.5-101.0%
Sodium ....................................................................................0.02% Neutrality ......................................................................To Pass Test
Used in the preparation for autoradiography Insoluble Matters ....................................................................0.01%
RT 20040 100g Chloride ................................................................................0.002%
Sulfate ....................................................................................0.01%
® Potassium Chloride, Crystal, Reagent, A.C.S. Ammonium ............................................................................0.002%
KCl F.W. 74.55 CAS #7447-40-7 Heavy Metal ........................................................................0.0025%
Specifications: Iron........................................................................................0.001%
Sodium ...................................................................................0.02%
Insoluble Matters ..................................................................0.005%
Iodide ....................................................................................0.002%
RT 20160 100g
RT 20162 500g
Bromide ..................................................................................0.01%
Chlorate and Nitrate ..............................................................0.003%
Sulfate ..................................................................................0.001% ® Potassium Permanganate, Reagent, A.C.S.
Phosphate ..........................................................................0.0005% KMnO4 F.W. 158.03 CAS #7722-64-7
Sodium ..................................................................................0.005% A.C.S. Specifications:
RT 20060 100g
Chloride & Chlorate................................................................0.005%
Nitrogen Compounds .............................................................0.005%
Sulfate.....................................................................................0.02%
Insoluble Matters ......................................................................0.2%
An EM fixative and a metal stain.J. Ultrastruct. Res., 21,424 (1968)
RT 20200 250g

For Potassium Permanganate Solutions, see page 463 UUUUU

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 59

Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec01_056-070_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 12:38 AM Page 60

SECTION 1 Chemicals for Electron Microscopy, Light Microscopy, & Histology

 Potassium Phosphate, Monobasic,  Propylene Glycol, Reagent, A.C.S.
Reagent, A.C.S. (1,2-Propanediol)
KH2PO4 F.W. 136.09 CAS #7778-77-0 CH3CHOHCH2OH FW 76.10 CAS #57-55-6
A.C.S. Specifications: Specific Gravity (H2O=1): 1.04
Insls. and Calcium, and NH4OH ppt ..........................................0.01% Assay ....................................................................................>99.5%
Loss on drying over H2SO4 .........................................................0.2%
pH of 5% Solution @ 25°C ....................................................4.1-4.5 Specifications:
Chloride ................................................................................0.001% Residue after Ignition ............................................................0.005%
Nitrogen Compounds ............................................................0.001% Chloride ....................................................................................1ppm
Sulfate ..................................................................................0.003% Water ........................................................................................0.2%
Sodium ..................................................................................0.005% Titratable Acid ..............................................................0.0005meq/g
Iron ...................................................................................... 0.002% RT 20350 450ml
RT 20250 500g
RT 20352 4x450ml

 Potassium Pyroantimonate, Trihydrate  Propylene Oxide, EM Grade

Potassium antimonate (1,2-Epoxypropane, Methyloxirane)
KSbO3•3H2O F.W. 262.90 CAS #12208-13-8 CH3CHCH2O F.W. 58.08 CAS #75-56-9
Minimum assay ..........................................................................94% m.p. -112°C; b.p. 34°C; f.p. -37°C
Minimum sensitivity to Na.........................................................1:430 Specifications:
Insoluble matter................................................not more than 0.01% Specific Gravity @ H2O=1 .........................................................0.831
Ultrastructural localization sodium. Vapor pressure @ 33°C: ....................................................980 mbar
J. Histochem Cystochem., 24, 740 (1976) Acidity, Wt. ppm as Acetic Acid .................................................... 2
RT 20220 25g Aldehydes, ppm as Propionaldehyde................................................3
Water,wt. ppm ..............................................................................35
 Potassium Sodium Tartrate, Tetrahydrate Total Chloride, wt. ppm as Cl ..........................................................1
Nonvolatile matter, g/100ml..............................................max 0.001
Reagent, A.C.S. Color, Platinum-Cobalt .....................................................................0
(Sodium Potassium Tartrate) A solvent agent for epoxy resins. Used widely for infiltration and gradual
KNaC4H4O6•4H2O F.W. 282.22 CAS #6381-59-5 replacement of the dehydration agent.
Assay ............................................................................99.0-102.0% RT 20401 Metal Can 450ml
Water ..............................................................................21.0-27.0% RT 20411 Metal Can 4 x 450ml
Used with bismuth subnitrate for staining polysaccharides, including RT 20412 Metal Can* 250ml
glycogen without oxidizing agents. RT 20414 Metal Can* 4 x 250ml
Shinji, Y., et al (1975). A new electron microscopic histo-cyto chemical *(Glass for International Only)
staining method: demonstration of glycogen particles.
Acta Histochem., Cytochem., 8:139  Pyronin Y, Certified, C.I. #45005
RT 20260 100g (Pyronin G) C17H19N2OCl F.W. 302.81 CAS #92-32-0
Solubility: 9.0% Water; 0.5% Alcohol; 1.85% Cellosolve; 4.35% Glycol;
 Pronase Reagent, Ready To Use 0.0% Xylene
Pronase is used for proteolytic digestion of formalin-fixed paraffin- RT 19560 5g
embedded (FFPE) tissue sections prior to application of antibodies. In
IHC most commonly used fixative like formalin mask tissue antigens  Quetol 651, Resin
(cellular, membrane and nuclear) by cross-linking process, this results in (Ethylene Glycol Diglycidyl Ether)
poor or no staining in IHC. Pronase digestion of FFPE tissue section C8H14O4 F.W. 174.20 CAS #2224-15-9
improves accessibility of antibodies to tissue antigens. Specific Gravity (H2O=1): 1.15
0-5˚C 20440 225ml
Storage: 2-8°C. DO NOT FREEZE
Intended Use: Use as antigen retriever for some antibodies in IHC.
Please refer to primary antibody protocol for IHC.  Quetol 651, NSA Kit
See Embedding Media Kits, page 97 
Reagent: Ready-to-use Pronase reagent available in 2 sizes: 15 and 0-5˚C 14640 kit
100 ml.
2-8˚C 64142-03 Pronase Reagent 15 ml  Quinolinic Phthalocyanine
2-8˚C 64142-04 Pronase Reagent 100 ml (Cuprolinic Blue) See page 32 
RT 12800 0.1gm
 2-Propanol, Propyl Alcohol RT 12802 0.2gm
Iso-propyl Alcohol, See page 50 
RT 16930 1 qt
RT 16931 4x1qt

60 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874

Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec01_056-070_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 12:38 AM Page 61

Chemicals for Electron Microscopy, Light Microscopy, & Histology SECTION 1

® Replicating Materials ® Safranin O, Certified, C.I. #50240

See Materials Science section, pages 375 UUUUU (Safranin T, Y or A; Basis Red 2; Cotton Red; Gossypimine)
C20H19N4Cl F.W. 350.85 CAS #477-73-6
® R-UNIVERSAL Epitope Recovery Buffer Solubility: 4.5% Water; 3.5% Alcohol; 5.0% Cellosolve; 3.5% Glycol;
(10x stock) 0.0% Xylene
Properties: Clear, non-toxic solution. RT 20800 25g
Presentation: R-Universal Buffer is supplied as 10x concentrate. For
epitope recovery dilute 1 part of stock with 9 parts of deionized water. For our Safranin O Solutions, see page 471, 474 UUUUU
Application: For epitope recovery dilute 1 part of stock with 9 parts of ® Schiff’s Reagent
deionized water. For use in the Periodic Acid Leucofuchsin (PAS) method as a general
Stability and Storage: The preparation is stable for 1 year when stored tissue stain.
unopened at +4˚C. Every lot is issued with a certificate indicating the expiry 0-5˚C 26052-05 Schiff’s Reagent 500ml
date. After opening, store at +4˚C in the refrigerator and use within 6 months. 0-5˚C 26052-06 Schiff’s Reagent 1L
Certification: Each lot is certified for compliance to specifications. The
product is produced under DIN EN ISO 9001: 2008 Quality Management ® Scott’s Tap Water Substitute
system for the products in Immunoassay Development and Magnesium sulfate buffered with sodium bicarbonate. Ready-to-use.
Measurement, Products for Bioanalytics and lmmunoassays. RT 26070-06 Scott’s Tap Water Substitute 1L
0-4˚C 62719-10 R-UNIVERSAL Epitope Recovery Buffer (10x stock) 125 ml RT 26070-07 Scott’s Tap Water Substitute 4L
0-4˚C 62719-20 R-UNIVERSAL Epitope Recovery Buffer (10x stock) 500 ml
® Section Block
® Ruthenium Red, 37.5% Ru A new class of blocking solutions based on chemically modified and
[(NH3)5RuORu(NH3)4ORu(NH3)5]Cl6.4H2O F.W.858.42 fragmented ultra-pure casein. Effectively reduces unwanted binding of primary
CAS #11103-72-3 antibody and conjugates you use to charged surface of the slide and tissue
T Stain for monopolysaccharides and tight junctions. Luft, J.T., section. Greatly reduces non-specific binding while preserving the specific
Proc. 6th Int. Cong. Em (1966); J. Cell. Biol., 57, 874 (1973). reaction, by saturating potential non-specific protein-protein interactions.
T Stain for pectin and for diverse cell surfaces. J. Cell Biol.,23, Moreover, in contrast to BSA-based, IgGm casein or serum -based blocking
54A (1964).
solutions there is no interaction of specific antibody and blocking protein itself.
T “Positive Staining for EM” van Nostrand Reinhold Co., New
York, NY (1975) pp 163-165. or oth Is not comparable to other commercially available or home-made
T Electron microscopy of cell extraneous coats as revealed by blocking solutions. Recommended for research and diagnostic pathology,
ruthenium red staining. Luft, J.H. J. Cell Biol., 23:54A, (1964) especially for retrieved sections and polyclonal antibodies..
T Ruthenium Red and Violet II. Fine structural localization in ani- 62710 Section Block 50 ml
mal tissues. Luft J.H. Anat. Rec., 171:369, (1971a) 62711 Section Block 125 ml
T Structure and staining characteristics of myofiber external lami- 62712 Section Block 500 ml
na. Zacks, S.I. et al. J. Histochem. Cytochem., 21:703 (1973)
T Glycoaminoglycans in developing chick-embryo aorta revealed ® Silver, Collodial
by ruthenium red: an electron microscopy study. Kadar, A. et al.
J. Pathol., 108:275 (1973) See Collodial Silver, pages 12-14; 640-641 UUUUU
T Uptake of marker particles by in vitro ventilated and perfused
rat lung. Vidic, B. Am. J. Anat., 138:521 (1973) ® Silver Lactate, Powder
RT 20600 1g
CH3CH(OH)CO2Ag F.W. 196.94 CAS #128-00-7
Silver content: approx. 90% min.
T To localize intracellular anions (Cl-). Komnick, (1962).
® Ruthenium Tetroxide T Elektronemikrokopische Lokalisation von Na+ und Cl- in Zellan
0.5% Stabilized Aqueous Solution und Geweban. Protoplasma, 55,414.
In Crystal form: RT 21000 5g
RuO4 F.W. 165.70 CAS #20427-56-96
m.p. 25.4°C b.p. 40°C ® Silver Protein, Strong
Ruthenium tetroxide is very similar to Osmium Tetroxide, and is used as a Protargol, 8.3% Ag CAS #9008-42-8 Thiery, (1967).
fixation/staining agent for electron microscopy. Ruthenium Tetroxide offers See Silver Nitrate, page 62 UUUUU
excellent staining of saturated and unsaturated polymer materials as well RT 21100 10g
as stabilizing thin sections under the bombardment of the electron beam.
NOTE: Penetration of ruthenium tetroxide into the tissue is poor.
T Caughey, R.C. and Miller, M.A., Proceed. of 44th Ann. Mtg.
EMSA (1986), page 256
T Hayat, M.A., Basic Technique for Electron Microscopy,
Academic Press, NY, 1986, p 22.
T Trent, J.S., Macromolecules, 17, 2930 (1984); 16, 539 (1983).
Packaged in 10ml ampoules-5 ampoules in a box.
RT 20700-05 Box

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 61

Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec01_056-070_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 12:38 AM Page 62

SECTION 1 Chemicals for Electron Microscopy, Light Microscopy, & Histology

® Silver Nitrate, Reagent, A.C.S. ® Sodium Bisulfite Solution
AgNO3 F.W. 169.89 CAS #7761-88-8 A 1% aqueous stock solution for fungal staining.
Assay ....................................................................................99.9+% RT 26084-05 Sodium Bisulfite Solution 500ml
RT 26084-06 Sodium Bisulfite Solution 1L
A.C.S. Specifications:
Substances not precipitated by HCl................................max 0.010%
Sulfate ........................................................................max 0.0002% ® Sodium Borate, Tetra, Granular, Reagent,
Copper ........................................................................max 0.0002% A.C.S.
Iron ..............................................................................max 0.0002% See Borax Tetra, page 25 UUUUU
Lead ..............................................................................max 0.001%
® Sodium Cacodylate Trihydrate
References for Silver stain: Sodium dimethyl arsenate
T Elektronemikrokopische Swift, J.A. (1968). The electron histo- See Cacodylic Acid-Sodium salt, page 30 UUUUU
chemistry of cystine-containing proteins in thin transverse sec-
tions of human hair. J.R. Microsc. Soc. 88,449. RT 12300 100g
12310 500g
T Elektronemikrokopische Thiery, J.P. (1967). Mise en evidence
RT

des Polysaccharides sur coupes fines en microscopie eletron-

ique. J. Microsc. (Paris) 6,987. ® Sodium Cacodylate, Buffer Solution
T Elektronemikrokopische Rambourg, A. (1967). An improved sil- See Buffer Section, page 28 UUUUU
ver methenamine technique for the detection of periodic acid- RT 11650 225ml
reactive complex carbohydrates with the electron microscope.J. RT 11652 500ml
Histochem. Cytochem. 15, 409.
T Elektronemikrokopische Hermandez et al., (1968)). Periodic ® Sodium Carbonate, Anhydrous, Reagent, A.C.S.
acid-chromic acid-methenamine silver technique for glycopro-
tein detection in the electron microscope. J. Histochem. Na2CO3 F.W. 105.99 CAS #497-19-8
Cystochem. 16, 507. Specifications:
T Elektronemikrokopische Ribi, W.A. (1976). A golgi-electron micro- Insoluble Matters ....................................................................0.01%
scope method for insect nervous tissue. Stain Technol. 51,13. Loss on Heating at 280°C..........................................................1.0%
T Elektronemikrokopische Braak, H., and Braak, E. (1982). A sim- Chloride .................................................................................0.001%
ple procedure for electron microscopy of Golgi-impregnated Phosphate. ............................................................................0.001%
nerve cells. Neurosci. Lett. 32,1. Nitrogen Compounds .............................................................0.001%
RT 21050 25g Sulfur Compounds. ...............................................................0.003%
RT 21052 100g Ammonium Hydroxide ppt.. .....................................................0.01%
For our Silver Nitrate Solutions, see page 463 UUUUU Arsenic. ....................................................................................1ppm
Ca and Mg ..............................................................................0.01%
Heavy Metals ............................................................................5ppm
® Sodium Acetate,Trihydrate Reagent, A.C.S. Iron ..........................................................................................5ppm
CH3COONa.3H2O F.W. 136.08 CAS #6131-90-4 Potassium. ............................................................................0.005%
A.C.S. Specifications: Silica (SiO2)............................................................................0.005%
Assay ...........................................................................99.0-100.5% RT 21135 500g
Ca, Mg and R2O3 ppt ................................................................0.01%
Chloride ................................................................................0.001% ® Sodium Citrate, Granular, USP Grade
Insoluble Matter ....................................................................0.005% Na3C6H5O7.2H2O F.W. 294.11 CAS #6132-04-3
Iron, Heavy metal, Phosphate ..............................................5ppm/ea Assay ......................................................................................99.9%
Sulfate ..................................................................................0.002% Insoluble Matters ...................................................................0.005%
Potassium .............................................................................0.005% Free Acid (as Citric) ................................................................0.02%
pH of 5% sol. @ 25°C ............................................................7.5-9.2
Free Alkali ..............................................................................0.05%
RT 21120 500g Chloride ................................................................................0.003%
Sulfate ..................................................................................0.005%
® Sodium Bicarbonate, Powder, Reagent, A.C.S. Calcium ................................................................................0.005%
NaHCO3 F.W. 84.01 CAS #144-55-8 Heavy Metals ...........................................................................3ppm
Iron........................................................................................0.001%
Assay ............................................................................97.7-100.3%
Specifications:
RT 21140 500g
Insoluble Matters ...................................................................0.015%
Chloride ................................................................................0.003%
Phosphate ............................................................................0.001% ® Sodium Ethylate
Sulfur Compounds ................................................................0.003% (Sodium Ethoxide) C2H5ONa F.W. 68.05 CAS #141-52-6
Ammonium ..............................................................................5ppm Used as an agent for flattening thick sections (0.5-2.0 micron) of epoxy
Iron........................................................................................0.001% embedded material.
Potassium................................................................................0.05% Felix Sierra, Christa Hegele-Hartung and Henning M. Beier (1990).
RT 21125 500g An improved technique for flattening semithin sections of epoxy-
embedded tissues used for high resolution light microscopy.
J. of Microscopy Vol 159, Pt 1, (July 1990), pp. 95-98
RT 21150 25g

62 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874

Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec01_056-070_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 12:39 AM Page 63

Chemicals for Electron Microscopy, Light Microscopy, & Histology SECTION 1

TECHNICAL TIP ® Sodium Phosphate, Dibasic, Heptahydrate,

Reagent, A.C.S.
An Improved Technique For Flattening Na2HPO4.7H20 F.W. 268.07 CAS #7782-85-6
Semithin Sections Of Epoxy-Embedded Tissues
Assay ............................................................................98.0-102.0%
Used For High-Resolution Light Microscopy
Loss on Drying @ 105ºC ......................................................43-50%
A stock solution (saturated sodium ethoxide in absolute ethanol)
pH of a 5% solution @25ºC ....................................................8.7-9.3
is stored in a dark, closed bottle, and is diluted prior to use with
an equal volume of absolute ethanol. The exposure time is no Specifications:
longer than 2 minutes, and the section thickness is not more Insoluble Matters ................................................................<0.005%
than 0.5 - 1.0 micron. Use with the above solution permits Chloride ................................................................................0.001%
successful flattening of epoxy-embedded sections and therefore Nitrogen Compounds ............................................................0.001%
improves the staining properties of semithin sections and also Sulfate ..................................................................................0.005%
offers better immunoreactions in immunocyto-chemistry. As Arsenic ................................................................................0.0005%
well, it is a useful agent for removing folds and crumbles from Heavy Metals .........................................................................0.001%
semithin epoxy resin sections. Iron........................................................................................0.001%
Felix Sierra, et al. (1990) J. of Microscopy, Vol. 159, Pt 1, pg. 95-98. RT 21180 500g
RT 21182 1 kg

® Sodium Hydroxide, Pellets, Reagent, A.C.S. ® Sodium Phosphate, Monobasic, Hydrate,

NaOH F.W. 40.00 CAS #1310-73-2 Reagent, A.C.S.
Assay ....................................................................................>97.0% NaH2PO4.H20 F.W. 137.99 CAS #10049-21-5
Specifications: Assay ..............................................................................98.0-102%
Sodium Carbonate ........................................................................1% pH of a 5% solution @25ºC ....................................................4.1-4.5
Nitrogen Compounds ............................................................0.001% Specifications:
Chloride ................................................................................0.005%
Phosphate ............................................................................0.001% Insoluble Matters ..................................................................<0.01%
Sulfate ..................................................................................0.003% Chloride ....................................................................................5ppm
Heavy Metals ........................................................................0.002% Nitrogen Compounds ............................................................0.001%
Ammonium Hydroxide ppt........................................................0.02% Sulfate...................................................................................0.003%
Iron........................................................................................0.001% Arsenic. ................................................................................0.5ppm
Potassium ...............................................................................0.02%
Heavy Metals ........................................................................0.001%
Nickel ....................................................................................0.001%
Mercury ................................................................................0.1ppm Iron........................................................................................0.001%
RT 21160 100g RT 21190 500g
RT 21162 500g
RT 21192 1 kg

For our Sodium Hydroxide Solutions, see page 464 UUUUU ® Sodium Sulfite, Reagent, A.C.S.
Na2SO3 F.W. 126.04 CAS #7757-83-7
® Sodium Hydroxide, Solution Assay ....................................................................................>98.0%
CAS #1310-73-2 Specifications:
Carbonate-free. This solution is prepared from ACS Reagent grade Insoluble Matters ...................................................................0.005%
sodium hydroxide, and is standardized colormetrically against potassium
Free Acid ......................................................................To Pass Test
biphthalate primary reference material.
Titratable Free Base..........................................................0.03meq/g
Normal Concentration 1.98-2.02
Chloride ...................................................................................0.02%
RT 21170 Sodium Hydroxide Solution 2N 225ml
RT 21170-01 Sodium Hydroxide Solution 1N 225ml Arsenic ................................................................................0.0001%
Heavy Metals .........................................................................0.001%
® Sodium Methoxide, Anhydrous Iron........................................................................................0.001%
(Sodium Methylate) CH3ONa F.W. 54.03 CAS #124-41-4
RT 21300 1 kg
Used in the removal of resin from sections.
For our Sodium Bisulfite Solutions, see page 464 UUUUU
RT 21200 25g

TECHNICAL TIP
Temperature Conversion for Your Convenience

Degree Fahrenheit = (1.8 x Degree Celsius) + 32

Degree Celsius = 0.555 (Degree Fahrenheit – 32)

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 63

Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec01_056-070_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 12:39 AM Page 64

SECTION 1 Chemicals for Electron Microscopy, Light Microscopy, & Histology

® Sodium Tartrate, Reagent, A.C.S. ® Staining Solutions
Na2C4H4O6.2H2O F.W. 230.08 CAS #6106-24-7 We now offer a complete line of prepared, ready-to-use, high quality
Assay ........................................................................99.5%-101.0% staining solutions for all standard staining procedures used by the Biological
pH of a 5% solution @25ºC ....................................................7.0-9.0 Staining Commission and the Armed Forces Institute of Pathology.
Loss on Drying @150ºC ..............................................15.61-15.71% T All solutions and concentrations are packaged and prepared in
Specifications: convenient and precise quantities.
T Premixed ready-to-use; saves you time and effort
Insoluble Matters ..................................................................0.005% T Consistently uniform results are obtained.
Chloride ..............................................................................0.0005%
For a complete list and description of all of our stains,
Phosphate ..........................................................................0.0005% please see pages 466-475 UUUUU
Sulfate ..................................................................................0.005%
For Prepared Staining Kits, see pages 476-487 UUUUU
Ammonium ...........................................................................0.003%
Calcium ..................................................................................0.01%
Heavy Metals ......................................................................0.0005% ® Styrene Embedding Kit
Iron .......................................................................................0.001% See Embedding Media Kits, page 97 UUUUU
T Used with Bismuth subnitrate to enhance contrast in general. RT 14650 kit
Riva, A. (1974). A simple and rapid staining method for enhanc-
ing the contrast of tissues previously treated with uranyl
acetate. J. Microscopie, (Paris) 19:105 ® Styrene, Reagent
T Ainsworth, S.K., Ito, S. and Karnovsky, M.J. (1972). Alkaline (Vinylbenzene) C6H5CH:CH2 F.W. 104.14 CAS #100-42-5
Bismuth reagent for high resolution ultrastructural demonstra- Specific Gravity (H2O=1): ........................................................ 0.909
tion of periodic-reactive sites. J. Histochem. Cytochem., 20:995 Assay ....................................................................................>99.0%
RT 21350 25g Stabilizer (p-tert-Butylcatechol) ........................................10-15ppm
For our Sodium Thiosulfate Solutions, see page 464 UUUUU A monomeric styrene used as an embedding media for ultramicrotomy.
T DeLamater, E.D., et al (1971). The use of styrenes as embed-
® Sodium Tungstate, Reagent, A.C.S. ding media for electron microscopy. Pro. 29th Ann. Meet. EMSA,
p. 488. Claitor’s Pub. Divsion, Baton Rouge, LA
Na2WO4.2H2O FW 329.86 CAS #10213-10-2 T Kushida, H. (1962b). On ultraviolet polymerization of styrene
Assay ............................................................................99.0-101.0% resins in embedding for electron microscopy. J. Electron
Specifications: Microsc., Vol. 2. p.10. Academic Press, New York.
Insoluble Matters ....................................................................0.01% T Kushida, H. (1961a). A styrene-methacrylate resin embedding
Chloride ................................................................................0.005% method for ultrathin sectioning. J. Electron Micro., 10:16
Molybdenum..........................................................................0.001% RT 21500 450ml
Nitrogen ................................................................................0.001%
Sulfate ....................................................................................0.01% ® Succinic Acid, Crystal, Reagent, A.C.S.
Arsenic ................................................................................0.0005% (CH3COOH)2 F.W. 118.09 CAS #110-15-6
Heavy Metals ........................................................................0.001% m.p. 185-191°C
T Stockert,J.C. (1977). Sodium Tungstate as a stain in electron Assay ....................................................................................>99.0%
microscopy. Biol. Cellul., 29:211 Specifications:
T Takeuchi, I.K. (1981). Differential staining of nucleoli and chro- Insoluble Matters .....................................................................0.01%
matin by sodium tungstate. J. Electron Microsc., 30:150 Chloride ................................................................................0.001%
RT 21400 25g Sulfate ..................................................................................0.003%
Phosphate ............................................................................0.001%
Nitrogen Compound...............................................................0.001%
® Sorensen's Phosphate Buffers Heavy Metals ...........................................................................5ppm
0-5˚C 11682-05 500ml Iron ..........................................................................................5ppm
0-5˚C 11682-10 1L RT 21550 100g

® (SPURR), Low Viscosity Embedding Kit ® Sucrose, Reagent, A.C.S.

See Embedding Media Kits, page 96 UUUUU C12H22O11 F.W. 342.20 CAS #57-50-1
RT 14300 kit Specifications:
Insoluble Matters ..................................................................0.005%
Loss on Drying 105ºC .............................................................0.03%
TECHNICAL TIP Residue after Ignition ..............................................................0.01%
Improving the Adhesion of Sections Filmless Titratable acid ..............................................................0.0008meq/g
Grids Chloride ................................................................................0.005%
To increase the adhesion of sections to the grids in order to Sulfate...................................................................................0.005%
perform a lengthy immunolabeling procedure or with serial Heavy Metals ............................................................................5ppm
sections, refer to: Zelecchowska, M.G. and Potworowski, E.F. Iron ..........................................................................................5ppm
(1985). Improved adhesion of ultrathin sections to filmless grids. Invert Sugar ............................................................................0.05%
J. Electron Microsc. Tech., 2:389 RT 21600 500g

64 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874

Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec01_056-070_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 12:39 AM Page 65

Chemicals for Electron Microscopy, Light Microscopy, & Histology SECTION 1

® Sudan Black B, Certified, C.I. #26150 ® TMB, 3,3’5,5’-Tetramethylbenzidine

(Solvent Black 3) C29H24N6 M.W. 456.56 CAS #4197-25-5 C16H20N2 F.W.240.35 CAS #54827-17-7
Solubility: Water-insoluble; Alcohol-soluble; 4.0% Cellosolve; 1.0% Glycol. m.p. 166-169°C
RT 21610 25g Assay ......................................................................................>98%
A non-carcinogenic substitute for DAB and DAB-HCl. Used as a
® Sure-cut Surfactant sensitive and specific reagent for the detection of blood.
Epoxy resins are easier to section with glass, as T Standefer, J.C., Vanderjagt, D. (1977) Assay of Hemoglobin. Clin.
well as diamond knives, when the embedding Chem. 23, 749.
medium contains 0.5-1.0% of our SURE-CUT. T Boss, E.S., et al., (1981). Assay of Peroxidases. J. of
The life of the diamond knife will be extended with its use because it Immunoassay. 2,187.
will reduce the friction of the plastic block during sectioning. T Holland, V.R., et al., (1974) Tetrahedron, 30, 3299.
RT 13070 1g
RT 21630 50g

® Sym-Collidine, Buffer kit ® TMB-HCl, Dihydrochloride TMB

See Buffers section, page 28 UUUUU C16H20N2•2HCl F.W. 313.30 CAS #64285-73-0
RT 11500 one set m.p. >300°C
RT 11510 box/5 sets Assay ................................................................................>98% (Cl)
0-5˚C 13074 TMB-HCl 1gm
® Sym-Collidine, Reagent Also available in tablet form. 1mg/ tablet, ready to use.
See page 29 for more information. UUUUU 0-5˚C 13075 TMB-HCl tablets 10 tabs/bottle
RT 11520 Sym-Collidine 100ml 0-5˚C 13076 TMB-HCl tablets 50 tabs/bottle

® Tannic Acid, Reagent, A.C.S: EM Grade ® (TMA), Tetramethylene Glycol

C76H52O46 F.W. 1701.28 CAS #1401-55-4 Dimethacrylate (1,4-Butanediol dimethacrylate)
RT 21700 100g [H2C=C9CH3)CO2CH2CH2]2 F.W. 226.68 CAS #2082-81-7
Specific Gravity (H2O=1): 1.023
® Tannic Acid, Reagent, A.C.S. b.p. @4 mmHg 132-134ºC
Gallotannin; Chiefly (C14H10O9)n F.W. range 1000.00-1500.00 Inhibited with 200 ppm hydroquinone monomethyl ether.
CAS #1401-55-4 RT 21750 100ml
Low Molecular Weight. Suitable for electron microscopy
T Takagi, M., Parmley, R.T., Denys, F.R. and Kageyama, M. (1983). ® TMS, Tetramethylsilane, 99.9%
Ultrastructural visualization of complex carbohydrates in epi- Si(CH3)4 M.W. 88.22 CAS #75-76-3
physeal cartilage with the tannic acid-metal salt methods. J. b.p. 26.6-26.7°C
Histochem. Cytochem.,31:783 Flashpoint: 28°C
T Simionescu, N. el al., J. Cell Biol., 70:608 (1976) A Combination An organo-silicon compound tetramethylsilane (TMS) is used as an internal
of Tannic acid - Glutaraldehyde - Osmium Tetroxide (TAGO) standard for nuclear magnetic resonance (NMR). It is chemically inert and
Method. improving membranes contrast. has a boiling point of 26.6°C which is lower than acetone (53.6°C), and
T Roubos, E. W. and Van DerWal-Divendel, R.M. (1980). other highly volatile liquids, such as diethyl ether (34.5°C) and 1,2-epoxy
Ultrastructural analysis of peptide-hormone released by exocy-
propane (36.4°C). It is soluble in most organic solvents but insoluble in
tosis. Cell Tiss. Res., 207:267
T Buma, P.,Roubos, E.W. and Buijs, R.M. (1984). Ultrastructural water. All of these properties make TMS an ideal solvent for tissue drying,
demonstration of exocytosis of neural, neuroendocrine, and which preserves excellent tissue surface details. Dey, Sudip. et al. (1989).
endocrine secretions with an in vitro tannic acid (TARI) method. A new rapid method of air-drying for scanning electron microscopy using
Histochemistry, 80:247 tetramethylsilane. J. of Microscopy, Vol 156, pp. 259-261.
T Buma, P. and Nieuwenhuys, R. (1987). Ultrastructural demon- RT 21760 100ml
stration of oxytocin and vascopressin release sites in the neural
lobe and median eminence of the rat by tannic acid and
immunogold methods. Neurosci. Lett., 74:151 ® (TC-NBT), Thiocarbamyl Nitro-Blue
T Brooks, J.C. and Carmicheal, S.W. (1987). Ultrastructural Tetrazolium
demonstration of exocytosis in intact and saponin-permeabi- (2,2’-Di[p-nitrophenyl]-5,5’-di[p-thiocarbamylphenyl]-
lized cultured bovine chromaffin cells. Am. J. Anat., 178:85 3,3’-[3,3’-dimethoxy-4,4’-biphenylene]ditetrazolium chloride)
RT 21710 100g C42H32Cl2N12O6S2 F.W. 935.8 CAS #36889-43-7
RT 21800 100mg
For Nitro-Blue Tetrazolium, see page 54 UUUUU
For our Tannic Acid Solutions, see page 464 UUUUU

Technovit: Glycol Methacrylate Embedding Kits,

see Embedding Media Kits, page 98-100 UUUUU

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 65

Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec01_056-070_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 12:39 AM Page 66

SECTION 1 Chemicals for Electron Microscopy, Light Microscopy, & Histology

® (TCH), Thiocarbohydrazide, Highest Purity ® Toluidine Blue 0, Certified, C.I. #52040
H2NNHCSNHNH2 F.W. 106.15 CAS #2231-57-4 (Basic blue; Methylene Blue T50 or T Extra)
b.p. 171°C (decomposed) C15H16N3SCI FW 305.83 CAS #92-31-9
Osmiophilic reagent. Dye Content: approx. 85% min.
Solubility: 3.25% Water; 1.75% Alcohol; 3.5% Cellosolve; 5.5% Glycol;
An indefinite shelf life due to a special 0.0% Xylene
purification process. T A general stain for epoxy thick sections. Barajas et al.(1981)
T Seligman A.M. et al (1965).Histochemical demonstration of Identification of renal neuroeffector junctions by electron microscopy
some oxidized macromolecules with thiocarbohydrazide (TCH) of reembedded light microscopic autoradiograms of semithin sec-
or thiosemicarbazide (TSC) and osmium tetroxide. J. Histochem. tions. J. Ultrastruct. Res. 77: 379.Campbell, R.D., And Hermans, C.O.
Cytochem., 13:629 (1972). A rapid method for resectioning 0.5 - 4.0 micron epoxy sec-
T Seligman, A.M. et al (1966). A new staining method (OTO) for tions for electron microscopy. Stain Technol . 47:115.
enhancing contrast of lipid-containing membranes and droplets RT 22050 50g
in osmium tetroxide fixed tissue with osmiophilic thiocarbohy-
drazide (TCH). J. Cell Biol., 30:424
T Thiery, J.P. (1967). Mise en evidence des polysaccharides sur
coupes fines en microscopie electronique. J. Microsc., 6:987
TECHNICAL TIP
T Lo, H.K. et al (1987). A modified periodic acid-thiocarbo- A Toluidine Blue/Basic Fuchsin Stain For Gma
hydrazide-silver proteinate staining sequence for enhanced Embedded Tissues
contrast and resolution of glycogen depositions by transmission Solution A: Toludine blue O (EMS #22050)/Sodium Borate Tetra
electron microscopy. J. Histochem. Cytochem., 35:393 (EMS #21130); 1% each in distilled water
T Neiss, W.F. (1988). Enhancement of the periodic acid-Schiff (PAS)
Solution B: 1% Basic Fuchsin; 50% Ethanol in distilled water.
and periodic acid-thiocarbohydrazide-silver proteinate (PA-TCH-
SP) reaction in LR White sections. Histochemistry, 88:603 Both solutions are stable in amber glass-stoppered bottles for 6
T Hanker, J.S. et al (1964). Osmiophilic reagents: new cytochemical months when stored at room temperature. The working solution
principles for light and electron microscopy. Science, N.Y., is prepared by adding 3ml of Solution B to 60ml distilled water.
146:1039 The section is covered with a few drops of Solution A for 3 to 5
T Derenzini, M., et al (1986). An improved periodic acid-thiosemi- minutes on a hot plate at 55-60°C. Excess stain is washed off in
carbazide-osmium technique to reveal glyco-conjugates at the running tap water. After drying on the hot plate, the sections are
molecular level in situ. J. Histochem. Cytochem.,34:1161 then stained by covering them with a few drops of Solution B for
1 minute at room temperature. They are washed well in running
RT 21900 5g tap water, dried on a hot plate, and mounted with mounting
medium (such as Entellan, EMS #14800; DPX, EMS #13510;
® Thiosemicarbazide Depex, EMS #13514; etc.) The colors that are obtained on
NH2CSNHNH2 F.W. 91.14 CAS #79-19-6 human tissue with this staining technique are as follows: nuclei:
m.p. 181-183°C stained dark-blue; cytoplasm and connective tissue fibers:
Assay ....................................................................................>99.0% stained in various shades and intensities of red.
References for use-see Thiocarbohydrazide above. Monica A. Abrew, et al. (1993) The J. of Histotechnology,Vol. 16,
RT 22000 25g No. 2.

® Tissue Marking Dyes

See Histology section, Page 532 UUUUU ® Tricresyl Phosphate
(Tritolyl Phosphate)
® Toluene Reagent, A.C.S. (CH3C6H4O)3PO F.W. 368.37 CAS #1330-78-5
Specific Gravity (H2O=1): 1.16
C6H5CH3 FW 92.14 CAS #108-88-3
A mixture of isomeric Tritolyl Phosphates, usually excluding the
Specific Gravity (H2O=1): 0.866
very toxic group ortho-isomer. Used to prepare benzoyl peroxide paste,
b.p. 110-111ºC
Assay ......................................................................................99.9% which acts as a catalyst for water miscible resins.
RT 22150 225ml
Specifications:
Color (A.P.H.A.) ............................................................................10. ® 2,4,6-Tri(Dimethylaminomethyl)-Phenol
Residue after evaporation ......................................................0.001%
See DMP-30, page 34 UUUUU
Subs. darkened by H2SO4 ................................................To pass test
Sulfur compound (as S) ........................................................0.003% RT 13600 50ml
Water ......................................................................................0.03%
RT 22030 450ml ® 2,4,6-Trinitrophenol
RT 22032 4x450ml See Picric acid, page 58 UUUUU
RT 19550 100g

66 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874

Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec01_056-070_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 12:39 AM Page 67

Chemicals for Electron Microscopy, Light Microscopy, & Histology SECTION 1

 Tris (Hydroxymethyl) Aminomethane,  Trypsin Reagent

Free-base, Reagent Grade Trypsin is used for proteolytic digestion of formalin-fixed paraffin-
White crystalline powder embedded (FFPE) tissue sections prior to application of antibodies.
C4H11NO3 F.W. 121.14 CAS #77-86-1 Reagent: This enzyme is supplied as concentrated form along with
A 40% (w/v) aqueous solution. It is clear and colorless. buffer. The kit comes in 2 sizes. Small: Reagent B (Buffer) is 15 ml and
Assay ....................................................................................>99.9% the Reagent E (Enzyme) is 2 ml
Water .....................................................................................<0.2% Large: Reagent B (Buffer) is 100 ml and the Reagent E (Enzyme) is 10 ml
Heavy Metals ............................................................................2ppm
For more information, see page 29 
RT 11700 100g 2–8˚C 64142-01 Trypsin Kit Small Kit
RT 11720 500g 2–8˚C 62142-02 Trypsin Kit Large Kit

 Tris (Hydroxymethyl) Aminomethane  12-Tungstosilicic Acid

For more information, see page 29 
(Silicotungstic acid)
Tris Maleate Buffer 0.2M pH range 6.4-8.0 H4[SiO4.(W3O9)4].xH2O M.W. 2878.29+aq CAS #11130-20-4
0-5˚C 11730 250ml
0-5˚C 11740 500ml
RT 22240 25g

Tris Buffer 0.2M pH 8.0  Tyrode Solution

0-5˚C 11730-05 250ml
0-5˚C 11730-06 500ml Ingredients: NaCl; KCl; CaCl2.6H2O; MgCl2.6H2O; NaHCO3; NaH2PO4;
Tris Buffered Saline pH 7.4 Glucose; and Distilled water.
0-5˚C 11730-08 250ml RT 11760-05 Tyrode Solution 500ml
0-5˚C 11730-09 500ml RT 11760-10 Tyrode Solution 1L
Tris-HCL Buffer 1M pH range 6-8
0-5˚C 11730-12 250ml  Universal Immunoassay Buffer™, 10X
0-5˚C 11730-15 500ml Immunoassay buffer is used as a 1X in all immunoassays
Tris HCL Buffer pH range 7.2-9.0 (immunofluorescence, IHC, ELISA, WB etc.) as a washing buffer and it can
0-5˚C 11730-20 250ml be used as a dilution buffer for antibodies; however it does not contain any
0-5˚C 11730-25 500ml carrier proteins. This buffer also does not contain any phosphate, sodium
azide or mercury as preservatives and can be used for dilution of all
Tris Buffer pH 10 (10x)
2–8˚C 64142-11 100 ml antibodies, including peroxidase, antibodies to phosphoproteins. It is not
2–8˚C 62142-12 1000 ml suitable for dilution of antibodies to S100 proteins.
 Reagent Supplied: 10X Buffer
 Triton® X-100  Application: Dilute this 10X buffer 10 times with DI water. (90 ml
(Polyethylene glycol tert-octylphenyl ether) water + 10 ml this buffer – mixed well). Wash 3-5 times with
C14H22O(C2H4O) CAS #9002-93-1 this buffer in between the steps of your immunoassay protocol.
Specific Gravity (H2O=1): 1.065 RT 25880-01 Universal Immunoassay Buffer, 10X 100 ml
RT 25880-10 Universal Immunoassay Buffer, 10X 1L
RT 22140 100ml
22142 500ml
 Universal Antibody Dilution Buffer™
RT

 Triton® X-100, 1% Aqueous Solution This ready-to-use Universal Antibody Dilution Buffer is designed for dilution
of antibodies in all immunoassays, including immunofluorescence, IHC,
Prepared 1% Triton X-100 in Deionized-Distilled water. Used for whole-
ELISA, WB. This buffer does not contain any mammalian proteins,
cell preparations. Marek, L.F., and Kelly, R.O. (1983). A simple technique
phosphate, sodium azide, or mercury preservatives and can be used
for the visualization of whole mount cytoskeletons with transmission
for dilution of all antibodies, including peroxidase, and antibodies to
electron microscopy. Anat. Rec. 207, 365. Pudney, J., and Singer, R.H.
phophoproteins. However, it is not suitable for dilution of antibodies
(1980). Intracellular filament bundles in whole mounts of chick and
to S100 proteins,
human myoblasts extracted with Triton X-100. Tissue cell 12, 595.
 Application: Dilute antibodies, primary or secondary as recom-
RT 22145 500ml
mended in the protocol by the manufacturer of these products.
 Storage: 2 – 8°C. Diluted antibodies can be stored at 2˚ – 8˚C
 Triton® X-100, 0.08% Aqueous Solution for several weeks, depending upon the stability of antibodies.
A prepared solution for the cleaning of diamond knives.
2–8˚C 25885-01 Universal Antibody Dilution Buffer 100 ml
RT 22146 500ml
2–8˚C 25885-05 Universal Antibody Dilution Buffer 500 ml
25886-01 Antibody Dilution Buffer, free BSA 100 ml
 Trypsin 1:100, Powder
2–8˚C
2–8˚C 25886-05 Antibody Dilution Buffer, free BSA 500 ml
CAS #9002-07-7
Extract from Porcine Pancreas.  Unicryl Embedding and Staining Kit
Activity ..................................................................>100 NF units/mg See Embedding Media Kits, page 101 
Used for whole cell preparations. (see references in RT 14960 kit
Triton X-100) 
RT 22200 25g

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 67

Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec01_056-070_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 12:39 AM Page 68

SECTION 1 Chemicals for Electron Microscopy, Light Microscopy, & Histology

URANYL AND URANIUM COMPOUNDS
Here at Electron Microscopy Sciences we have a complete range of ® Uranyl Acetate Solution
Uranyl and Uranium compounds, such as Uranyl Chloride, Uranium
We are now offering Uranyl Acetate Pre-Made and ready to use in solution
Oxide (U308), Uranium Tri-Oxide (UO3), Uranium Dioxide (UO2), just to
making your work easier. The following Percentages are available off the
name a few.
shelf (1, 2, 3, 4,). All other percentages are available upon request.
All of our products are manufactured from depleted Uranium. RT 22400-1 1% Uranyl Acetate Solution 100ml
We also manufacture Uranium Mono Carbide and Uranium Di Carbide RT 22400-2 2% Uranyl Acetate Solution 100ml
products for Ion Beam Research. RT 22400-3 3% Uranyl Acetate Solution 100ml
RT 22400-4 4% Uranyl Acetate Solution 100ml
For any that are not listed please contact us today.

® Uranyl Acetate, Reagent, A.C.S. TECHNICAL TIP

UO2(OCOCH3)2.2H2O F.W. 424.14 CAS #541-09-3 Contamination Of Ultra Thin Sections
Assay ............................................................................98.0-102.0% Hilton H. Mollenhauer (JEMT 5:59-63, 1987) suggested two ways to
eliminate contamination of ultra thin sections by precipitation when staining
Specifications: with uranyl acetate and/or lead citrate (lead acetate). One of the ways is as
Insoluble Matters .......................................................................0.01 follows: Place each nickel or copper grid (with section) on a drop of 0.5N
Chloride ................................................................................0.003% HCl for 0.5 minutes for Lowicryl K4M sections or for 1-2 minutes for Epon
Sulfate ....................................................................................0.01% 812 (or replacement) sections. Then rinse each grid in deionized water and
Alkalies (as SO4) ......................................................................0.05%
Heavy Metals ........................................................................0.002% blot dry on filter paper. Now you can restain with uranyl acetate and/or lead
Iron........................................................................................0.001% as the HCl does have a tendency to bleach the sections.
A universal EM stain for thin sections, en-block staining, and negative staining. • Suzanne J. Botkin. “A Staining Tip” EMSA Bulletin 22:3 Nov. 1992.
RT 22400 25g

® UAR-EMS Uranyl Acetate Replacement Stain TECHNICAL TIP

A non-radioactive substitute for uranyl acetate with comparable results.
Removal Of Lead Citrate And Uranyl Acetate
Avoids the tedious authorization, shipping and disposal issues involving
Precipitates On L.R. White Sections
uranyl acetate without sacrificing performance. Two lanthanide salts,
samarium and gadolinium triacetate, effectively used for staining plastic- Pamela Neill, Center of Biotechnology, Baylor College of Medicine,
The Woodlands, TX
embedded animal and plant tissues. Also for negative staining of
INTRODUCTION: L.R. White (EMS cat. #14380) is a hydrophilic
macromolecules. Not recommended as a fixative. embedding agent which allows aqueous solutions to easily pass through
RT 22405 UAR-EMS Stain 25 ml thin sections. Conventional methods for eliminating uranyl acetate
precipitates (Hayat, 1986) suggest treating sections with 0.5% oxylic acid
for 12 sec., 10% acetic acid for 1 min., or 2% aqueous (or ethanolic)
solution (EMS cat. #22400) of uranyl acetate for 1 min. Lead precipitates
TECHNICAL TIP are eliminated by treatment with 2% aqueous uranyl acetate 2-8 min. at
EMS’ UAR-EMS Stain is a new negative stain which room temperature or 10% aqueous acetic acid for 1-5 min. Unfortunately,
may be used as an alternative to Uranyl Acetate these methods may destroy the continuity of L.R. White sections. Our lab
Procedure: The UAR Stain is supplied as a concentrate. Please use the has modified the conventional methods of Hayat to avoid or eliminate
following dilutions: stain precipitates on L.R. White sections before and after they have been
• For most samples, including but not limited to, virus', dilute by 4x in under the electron beam, while keeping the section intact.
distilled water MATERIALS AND DISCUSSION: Our first objective is to prevent stain
• If you are working with Bacillus, then a dilution of 15-40x is needed. precipitates from forming during the staining process. Warm distilled
Staining will take place in 30 minutes at room temperature. For increased water is used for the final rinse of the grid to avoid uranyl acetate
contrast of the stain, simply adjust the staining time. precipitate. A 10ml beaker of distilled water is set into the curing oven
Reference Article: Nakakoshi, Masamichi, Hideo Nishioka and Eisaku (50°C) during the staining procedure and taken out for use prior to the
Katayama, 2011. New versatile reagents for biological transmission electron rinse step. To avoid lead precipitate during the staining process, add one
microscopy that substitute for uranyl acetate. Journal of Electron sodium hydroxide pellet in 10ml distilled water. Stain with lead, dip once
Microscopy, 60(6): 401-407. in the solution, then wash with distilled water.
We have successfully removed uranyl acetate and lead salts from L.R.
White embedded sections by dipping the grid in 0.25% filtered oxalic
® Platinum Blue, an EM Stain acid. Retain the section 3-4 times longer than the original stain time.
This method has worked in our laboratory on sections that have not been
IBI Blue Platinum Stain Pt4N8H6O24C20 under the electron beam for prolonged exposure (30 min. or longer).
An EM stain that may have the ability to replace Uranyl Acetate in some
T Hayat, M.A. (1986.) Basic Techniques for Transmission
instances. If you have issues with having Uranium salts that are Electron Microscopy. pg. 225
radioactive (depleted or not) in the lab this may be the answer for you.
An alternative for staining TEM thin sections
RT 22407 Platinum Blue 1 ml

68 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874

Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec01_056-070_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 12:39 AM Page 69

Chemicals for Electron Microscopy, Light Microscopy, & Histology SECTION 1

URANYL AND URANIUM COMPOUNDS (CONTINUED) ® Van Gieson’s Solution

To use with Weigert’s Iodine or Weigert’s Iron as a connective tissue stain.
26046-05
® Uranyl Formate RT
RT 26046-06
Van Gieson’s Solution
Van Gieson’s Solution
500ml
1L
UO2(HCO2)2.H2O F.W. 378.08 CAS #16984-59-1
Purity ..............................................................................99.9-100% ® Water Deionized, Reagent Grade A.C.S.
Specifications:
H2O F.W. 18.02 CAS #7732-18-5
Specific Gravity:........................................................................3.695
Appearance ................................................................Yellow Crystals EMS Reagent Grade Water is typically prepared at 18 megohm/cm
Melting Point ..........................................................................110OC specific resistance using a reverse osmosis, mixed deionization,
For ultra fine grain structure, our Uranyl Formate offers amazing activated filtration and final filtration at 0.2 microns.
advancement in negative staining for microscopy. Color (APHA) ............................................................................<+/-5
RT 22450 1 gram
Bacteriological purity ..........................................................0 CFUs/L
RT 22451 5 grams Residue after evaporation ......................................................10ppm
Coliform................................................................................negative
® Uranyl Magnesium Acetate RT 22800-01 Deionized Water 1 gal
RT 22800-05 Deionized Water 5 gal
UO2Mg(CH3COO)4 F.W.530.0 CAS # 20596-93-4
Used as a substitute for uranyl acetate in either double-staining
® Weigert’s Iodine Solution
techniques and also as a solo stain.
A histological stain. Demonstration of connective tissue is useful in
RT 22500 5 grams cases of emphysema, arteriosclerosis and other vascular diseases.
RT 22501 1 gram RT 26045-05 Weigert’s Iodine Solution 500ml
RT 26045-06 Weigert’s Iodine Solution 1L
® Uranyl Nitrate, Hexahydrate
Reagent Grade, A.C.S. ® Weigert’s Iron Hematoxylin
UO2(NO3)2.6H2O F.W. 502.13 CAS #13520-83-7 Stain selectivity for nuclei, fungal, and general applications. Ready-to-use.
Purity ..............................................................................99.9-100% RT 26044-05 Weigert’s Iron Hematoxylin A 500ml
Specifications: RT 26044-06 Weigert’s Iron Hematoxylin A 1L
Density ..........................................................................2.807 g/cm3
RT 26044-15 Weigert’s Iron Hematoxylin B 500ml
Solubility ..................................................................~66g/100g H2O
RT 26044-16 Weigert’s Iron Hematoxylin B 1L
Melting Point ............................................................................60OC
Boiling Point ............................................................................118OC ® Wright’s Stain, Certified
Insoluble Matter ..................................................................<0.005% CAS #68988-92-1
Chloride (Cl) ........................................................................<0.002% Solubility: 0.091% Water; 0.23% Alcohol
Sulfate (SO4) ......................................................................<0.005%
RT 22720 25g
Alkalies & Alkaline Earths (Sulfates) ........................................<0.1%
Heavy Metals (as Pb) ..........................................................<0.002%
Iron (Fe) ..............................................................................<0.002%
® Wright Staining Solution
Substances Reducing Permanganate (as UIV) ......................<0.06% For use as a blood stain. Ready-to-use.
RT 26060-05 Wright Stain Solution 500ml
A Universal EM Negative Stain used for viruses. In tissue samples it RT 26060-06 Wright Stain Solution 1L
stabilizes nucleic acids and cell membranes. These solutions are more
stable than uranyl acetate and they react primarily with negatively
charged groups in the absence of phosphate ions. ® Xylenes, Reagent, A.C.S.
RT 22600 5 grams (Xylol, Dimethylbenzene)
C6H4(CH3)2 FW 106.27 CAS #1330-20-7
® Uranyl Oxalate
Specific Gravity (H2O=1): 0.865
(COO)2 UO2 .3H2O M.W.412.2
b.p. 136-140°C
To adjust the pH of Uranyl compounds as well as a negative stain for
electron microscopy. This reagent is a mixture of isomers (ortho, meta, and para)
RT 22510 1 gram and may contain Ethylbenzene
Specifications:
® Uranyl Zinc Acetate Color (A.P.H.A.) ..............................................................................10
ZnUO4(CH3COO)2 CAS # 33959-50-1 Subs. darkened by H2SO4 ...............................................To pass test
Sulfur Compounds (as S) ......................................................0.003%
Used as a laboratory reagent in the determination of sodium
Water ......................................................................................0.05%
concentrations of solutions.
Residue after evaporation .....................................................0.002%
RT 22610 5 grams
RT 23400 450 ml

® Xylene: Peanut Oil, 2:1

RT 23402 Xylene:Peanut oil, 2:1 500 ml

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 69

Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec01_056-070_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 12:39 AM Page 70

SECTION 1 Chemicals for Electron Microscopy, Light Microscopy, & Histology

® Xylene Substitute ® Histo-Clear®/Histo-Clear II® *
A xylene substitute for use in histology and cytology. It is safer and a more Histo-Clear (Distilled essential oils –food grade) and Histo-Clear II (A
preferable alternative to xylene. It can be used as a solvent and clearing mixture of Aliphatic Hydrocarbon and Distilled essential oils – food
agent, as well as for dissolving paraffin waxes, glues and adhesives. grade, reduced citrus odor) are excellent non-toxic clearing agents
replacing Xylene.
PROPERTIES:
T Minimal tissue shrinkage. RT 64110-01 Histo-Clear 1L
RT 64110-04 Histo-Clear 1 gal
T Dries faster with no residue. RT 64110-10 Histo-Clear 5 gal
T Non-corrosive and far less toxic than xylene. RT 64111-01 Histo-Clear II 1L
T Soluble with alcohol, paraffin embedding media, and mounting media. RT 64111-04 Histo-Clear II 1 gal
It can be used in all procedures that require xylene.Biodegradable. RT 64111-10 Histo-Clear II 5 gal
* Histo-Clear® is register name of National Diagnostics
RT 23410-01 Xylene Substitute 1 gal
23410-04 Xylene Substitute 4 x 1 gal
® Histosol™ - Xylene Substitute
RT

® Xylene Substitute – Hemo-De® * Histosol™ is the original high flash point (114ºF TCC) histological clearing
agent. It is intended to be used as a replacement for xylene where the
An intensive study from 1992 throughout 2000 has shown that Hemo- hazards associated with aromatic hydrocarbon vapors are to be reduced.
De® (d-Limonene) a terpene-based chemical with a pleasant citrus Museum-quality tissue slides can be prepared with Hitosol without
fragrance, was able to replace many of the clinical laboratories toxic change in protocol or procedure. Histosol is manufactured from
reagents, such as carbol-xylene, xylene, ethyl acetate and formalin. petrochemical products and is miscible in all proportions with ethanol,
In Parasitology – Hemo-De replaces ethyl acetate in the concentration isopropanol, and t-butanol. It is also miscible with all paraffin-based
procedure; Hemo-De replaces carbol-xylene, xylene and formalin in tissue embedding media and all permanent mounting materials.
the trichrome procedure. 23405-01 Histosol – Xylene Substitute 1 gal
In Histology – Hemo-De replaces xylene in most all procedures. Hem-De 23405-04 Histosol – Xylene Substitute 4 x 1 gal
is a superior solvent and Clearing agent that can be used in all tissue
processing, deparaffiniating and slide preparation. ® Z6040 Embedding Primer
Hemo-De Features: This unique primer affords you better adhesion between your resin and
specimen that you are embedding and prevents the sample from pulling
T Soluble with alcohol and mounting media
away from the resin during sectioning.
T Biodegradable, non-corrosive, non-flammable (Combustible)
T Low toxicity levels RT 50440-10 Z6040 Primer 100ml
T Contains no benzene and no toluene
For our Zenkers Solution, see page 465 UUUUU
T Minimal tissue shrinkage
T Reasonably fast drying and leaves no residue
® Zinc/Formalin – see Formaldehyde/Zinc
#15675, page 454 UUUUU
Hemo-De Application:
In Research and Medical – Hematology, Cytology, Pathology,
Microbiology, Histology, Pathology, Hospital
In Mechanical Applications – Cleaning of machine parts, cleaning
tools, engines etc.
In Electronic Applications – Circuits boards, electronic components, tools.
General Applications – Clean metal and glass surfaces. Dilute with water
can be used to clean all plastic surfaces. Removal of adhesives, glues, tars…
Hemo-De Information:
Chemical name: ..............d-Limonene (Terpene Hydrocarbon, n.o.s.)
Composition: ....................................d-Limonene, CAS [5989-27-5]
98.0% Butylated Hydroxyanisolve (BHA),
CAS [25013-16-5] <0.024%
Flash Point (TCC):........................................................121ºF (49.4ºC)
Boiling Point: ..........................................349ºF (176ºC) @ 760mmHg
Freezing Point: ..........................................................................-74ºC
Shipping: ................Terpene Hydrocarbons, n.o.s. ID No. 04858003,
Flammable Liquid, Group III
RT 23412-01 Xylene Substitute 1 gal
RT 23412-04 Xylene Substitute 4 x 1 gal
RT 23412-05 Xylene Substitute 5 gal
NOTE: Hemo-De® is a product of Scientific Solvents

70 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874

Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec02_071_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 12:56 AM Page 71

SECTION 2

ImmunoGold
Reagents
product information
micrographs
product listings & ordering
frequently asked questions
immunogold and silver staining
workshops
custom labeling services
incubation protocols
immunogold newsletters
& flyers

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 71

Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec02_072-090_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 12:51 AM Page 72

SECTION 2 ImmunoGold Reagents

Dear Fellow Researchers,

Here at Electron Microscopy Sciences we are
very proud to be the exclusive agents of
Aurion, the leading manufacturer and
developer of a complete line of ImmunoGold
Reagents and Accessories in the Netherlands.
Aurion is led by the renowned Dr. Jan
Leunissen, whom many of you may know
through his books that he has written on
ImmunoGold labeling as well as the workshops
he teaches throughout the world.
Over the years the Aurion line has grown and
has been further enhanced to include many
unique and exclusive products not available
elsewhere. Today their line includes not only
the more commonly known reagents for EM Immunogold Silver Staining of E-cadherin on a paraffin section of human skin.
Courtesy of R. Moella, Dept. of Exp. Path. EUR, The Netherlands.
and LM but, as well, a newly introduced line of
products such as Silver Enhancement PRODUCTS USED: • Mouse monoclonal anti E-cadherin • GAM lgG UltraSmall • Aurion
specifically for EM, Ultra-Small Fab fragments, R-Gent SE-LM
Blocking Solutions, and even a line of donkey
gold conjugates. With all of the new additions Combination regular
light microscopy and
to the line up Aurion and EMS have something epi-polarization microscopy Epi-polarization microscopy
Regular Light Microscopy
for everyone in the ImmunoGold Field.
Sincerely,
The EMS Team

Table of Contents
Introduction/Micrographs ................72–73
Product Information ............................74–81
Product Listing ......................................82–85
Frequently Asked Questions ..........86–89
Custom Labelling ........................................89 Routine paraffin section of Hodgkin lymphoma stained for CD 15. Reed-Sternberg cells show
Immunogold Newsletters & Flyers ......89 positive staining in the cytoplasm.
Courtesy of H. Stoop, Laboratory of Pathology and Anatomy, Dordrecht, The Netherlands.
EMS and Aurion ImmunoGold/
Silver Staining Workshops ......................90 PRODUCTS USED: • Mouse monoclonal CD 15 • GAM lgG UltraSmall • Aurion R-Gent SE-LM

Immunogold silver staining of alpha- Immunogold silver staining of Pre-embedding Immunogold IGSS of tubulin on coverslip culture
amylase on Lowicryl HM20 section alpha-amylase on Lowicryl HM20 Labeling of Huntingtin Interacting of PtK2 cells Courtesy of Peter van
of rat pancreas. section of rat pancreas. Protein 3 in Mouse Brain using de Plas, Aurion Costerweg 5, The
• Goat-anti-Rabbit,15nm Aurion GAR Fab-US and Aurion Netherlands.
• Goat-anti-Rabbit
SEEM. Courtesy of Ms Hong Yi,
• Ultra Small Silver Enhanced Emory University, Atlanta GA
(Danscher Method)

72 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874

Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec02_072-090_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 12:51 AM Page 73

ImmunoGold Reagents SECTION 2

Regular light microscopy Combination regular light microscopy Epi-polarization microscopy

and epi-polarization microscopy
ImmunoGold silver staining of alpha-amylase in light microscopy
Products used: Rabbit polyclonal to alpha-amylase, GAR-GP-Ultrasmall R-Gent

AURION R-Gent SE-EM

Application Example
ER exit site in 60 nm-thin cryosection of Hepg2
cells, labeled for COPII (primary antibody against
sec23 was obtained by ABR) and detected with
Fab-goat-anti-rabbit, conjugated to ultra-small
gold, silver enhanced for 30 minutes (from Aurion).
The arrows point to labeled COPII-coats on
vesicular and tubular membranes, which are
located close to the ER.
The information of a thin section is not sufficient
to conclude how the membranes are related to
each other- if they are still connected to the ER,
or if they are free.
Therefore we performed 3D electron tomography
on 400nm thick cryosections, which were labeled
similar for COPII. (see next picture).
ER = endoplasmic reticulum, PM = plasma membrane, MVB = multi-vesicular body, Bar = 100 micrometer

2 views of a model of a COPII-labeled ER-exit

site, resolved from 400nm thick cryo-sections of
Hepg2 cells, labeled like described for the
ultrathin section before.
Note that the labeling for COPII is assessable
throughout the section.
Courtesy of: Dagmar Zeuschner, Judith Klumperman
(Department of Cell Biology, UMC Utrecht, The
Netherlands) and Willie Geerts, Abraham Koster
(Molecular Cell Biology, Utrecht University, The
Netherlands) ER = light blue, Free membrane carriers of vesicular and tubular shape, partially labeled for COPII = yellow,
COPII = silver enhanced-red

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 73

Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec02_072-090_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 12:51 AM Page 74

SECTION 2 ImmunoGold Reagents

 Conventional ImmunoGold TECHNICAL TIP
Reagents Application Instructions:
Conventional Immunogold Reagents are available in four On-Grid Labeling
size classes. The monodisperse size population makes For most applications grids are floated on top of drops
the conjugates suited for multiple labeling with no over- of dilute reagent displayed on a sheet of Parafilm™.
lap. The Conventional Immunogold Reagents are the The use of gold or nickel grids is recommended.
classical conjugates in immuno electron microscopy; Whole mount and intact cell labeling
they are a good choice when the antigen is abundant Specimens are kept floating in dilute reagent on a
and the accessibility of the antigen is relatively good. rocking table.

Introduction Recommended Incubation Solution:

PBS, (10 mM Phosphate buffer, 150 mM NaCl),
The conventional labeling approach in transmission and scanning electron microscopy utilizes
secondary immunogold reagents based on particles that can be observed without enhance- 0.1-0.2 % AURION BSA-C™
ment. These conjugates are suited for single and multiple labeling in electron microscopy, 15 mM NaN3
when the number of antigens available for binding is such that a relevant signal can be pH 7.4
obtained. Additional Information
The AURION Conventional Immunogold Reagents are built around colloidal gold particles with For additional information please see the Aurion
sizes of 6, 10, 15 or 25 nm. The particle population is monodisperse and thus shows minimal Immunogold Newsletter and Protocol sections.
size variation and overlap. Typically, the coefficient of variance for the 6 and 25 nm particle
size conjugates is less than 12%, whereas the 10 and 15 nm size conjugates show less then
10% variation.
The table below lists a few physical characteristics of gold conjugates.
TECHNICAL TIP
Particle +⁄– #Au +⁄– MWt. +⁄– #Particles +⁄– #Ab
How to control background in a
Diameter atoms (daltons) /ml (/part) nutshell
6 6500 1.3.106 2.4.1013 1-2 Background Is Controlled by Three Independent Steps
10 30.103 6.106 5.1012 7-12
15 100.103 20.106 1.5.1012 25-40 1. Low Molecular Weight Block (before
25 470.103 92.106 3.3.1011 115-180 protein block)
Purpose: to inactivate residual fixative e.g. aldehydes,
Features of Conventional Immuno Gold Reagents using
 for single and multiple labeling  minimal size variation and overlap • amino acids such as glycin or lysin, or
 gold particle sizes of 6, 10,15 and 25 nm  coefficient of variance: <12% for the 6
• aldehyde inactivating compounds such as NaBH4
 monodisperse particle population and 25 nm conjugates and <10% for
the 10 and 15 nm conjugates and NH2OH
 OD520 nm of 1.0 to warrant cluster free
storage using a dot-spot test system. 2. High Molecular Weight Protein Block
Product Description (before immunolabeling)
Purpose: to prevent stickiness to hydrophobic areas
AURION Conventional Immunogold Reagents are tailored
and domains with excessive positive charges based on
to contain 10-20 μg of specific protein/ml. The reagents
multiple point interactions (high affinity protein binding
are supplied in PBS with 1% Bovine Serum Albumin and
capacity), using
15 mM NaN3 at an OD520nm of 1.0 to warrant prolonged
cluster free storage. The activity of each lot is determined • albumin
using a dot-spot test system as described by Moeremans • normal serum
et al., J. Immunol. Methods, 74, (1984), 353. Actual lot
3. Incubation and Wash solution (during
specifications (size, variation and expiry date) are indicat-
immunolabelling)
ed on the accompanying package insert. Purpose: to eliminate aspecific binding of
Regular package: for the labeling of 1000-2000 grids immunoconjugates based on hydrophilic interactions
Immunolabeling of the periplasmic
Small package: for the labeling of 400-800 grids space in ultrathin cryosections of (“oligo” point interactions) by competition, using
Specificity Escherichia coli with a protein A gold • acetylated albumin (AURION BSA-c™) in the
Aurion offers the widest range of Conventional conjugate. Courtesy M. de Jong incubation buffer
Abandoning BSA-c™ molecules compete with
antibodies and secondary immuno reagents for
Immunogold Reagents.
aspecific binding to positively charged specimen
AURION Conventional Immunogold Reagents are prepared using the highest quality antibodies compounds, thus minimizing background.
or binding agents available. All antibodies are immuno affinity purified and immuno cross-
adsorbed to reduce non-specific reactions. Please refer to our Newsletter 1 and Newsflyer 1 for
Storage more information on the subject of background.
AURION Conventional Immunogold Reagents have a guaranteed shelf life of 18 months from You can find incubation protocols in "The Aurion
the date of quality control analysis. method" section.
The products should be stored at 4-8°C. Freezing is not recommended.

74 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874

Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec02_072-090_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 12:52 AM Page 75

ImmunoGold Reagents SECTION 2

TECHNICAL TIP  Ultra Small ImmunoGold

Why Ultra-Small Gold Conjugates? Reagents
 More gold particles/secondary antibody instead of Aurion Ultra Small Immunogold Reagents are prepared
more antibodies/gold particle. with subnanometer gold particles. These particles have
 Reduced Steric hindrance. far less influence on the adsorbed antibodies or detecting
 More gold particles/surface area in the specimen. molecules, and consequently the conjugates behave as
 Maximum penetration. though they are uncoupled. In conjunction with the high-
Reduced Molecular Weight… ly efficient and easy-to-use R-Gent SE-LM and SE-EM sil-
 Increased diffusion rates. ver enhancement reagents, the Ultra Small Immunogold
 Ultra-Small probes behave similar as uncoupled Reagents are the best choice for any application.
antibodies. Introduction
Reduced Probe Size… Reduction of the gold particle size provides Ultra Small Immunogold Reagents with fundamentally
 Reduced overall probe size. different characteristics when compared with conjugates built around larger particles. While the
 Reduced hydrodynamic radius. Conventional Immunogold Reagents can be thought of as particles coated with proteins, Ultra
 Significantly increases penetration into sections and Small Immunogold Reagents are proteins coated with one or more gold particles. With this struc-
tissues. ture, both the overall size of the conjugates, as well as steric hindrance are decreased.
The Choice for Ligand Receptor Interactions… Gold conjugates physical characteristics.
 Each Ligand is separate. Particle +⁄– #Au +⁄– MWt. +⁄– #Particles +⁄– #Ab
 No capping or patching, each probe unit consists of a Diameter atoms (daltons) /ml (/part)
single ligand. 0.8 15 3.103 5.1015 0.1-1
6 6500 1.3.106 2.4.1013 1-2
Universal Probes…
10 30.103 6.106 5.1012 7-12
 Optimally suited for high resolution EM, immuno EM,
immunohisto at the LM level, and suited for bio-assays The small gold particles also have a tight
as well. particle surface curvature which makes it
 One probe for all purposes. less likely that a structured water dipole
layer will build-up around the gold particles.
Hence, the hydrodynamic radius
of the ultra small gold colloids is reduced.
TECHNICAL TIP Finally, small gold particles carry less net
negative charge; thus, they undergo less
Ultra Small ImmunoGold Reagents charge determined repulsion when The reagents are supplied in PBS with 1%
Application Instructions approaching the sample surface. Bovine Serum Albumin and 15 mM NaN3.
Electron Microscopy Labeling: The activity of each lot is determined using
Aurion offers Ultra Small Immunogold
For post-embedding labeling, incubate thin sections by a dot-spot test system as described by
Reagents with an average gold particle
placing grids on drops of reagent arrayed on a sheet of Moeremans et al., J. Immunol. Methods,
diameter of 0.8 nm or less. These ultra
Parafilm™. The use of nickel grids is recommended, 74, (1984), 353.
small gold particles can be visualized direct-
especially if silver enhancement procedures are intended.
ly in high angle annular dark-field-scanning The products are available in two
For pre-embedding labeling, float specimens in dilute
TEM. However, the gold signal is normally package sizes:
reagent on a rocking table.
visualized after increasing the particle diam- Regular package: for 1200 grids
For more information on post and pre-embedding labeling
eter with silver enhancement. The reagents or 600 slides
see protocols.
can be used in electron and light
Light Microscopy Slide or Coverslip Labeling: Small package: for 480 grids
microscopy as well as in blotting experi-
Apply a few drops of dilute reagent to cover the specimen. or 240 slides.
ments. The universal applicability makes it
easy to compare results obtained with dif- Specificity
Recommended Incubation Solution: Aurion offers the widest range of Ultra Small
PBS, ferent procedures.
Immunogold Reagents. The most commonly
(10 mM Phosphate buffer, 150 mM NaCl) AURION Ultra Small Immunogold Reagents used reagent types are available as intact
0.1-0.2 % AURION BSA-c™ contain 60-80 μg of specific protein/ml for IgG, F(ab’)2 and Single Fab conjugates.
15 mM NaN3 IgG conjugates. F(ab’)2, Fab and biotinylated
pH 7.4 AURION Ultra Small Immunogold Reagents
albumin conjugates contain equimolar
are prepared using the highest quality anti-
Additional Information amounts of conjugated protein. The average
bodies or binding agents available. All anti-
"Ultra Small Gold Reagents and R-Gent SE-EM in Pre- gold cluster diameter is less than 0.8 nm.
bodies are immuno affinity purified and
embedding Single and Double Labeling" Hong Yi and Jan AURION Ultra Small Immunogold Reagents immuno cross-adsorbed to reduce non-spe-
L.M. Leunissen are used in conjunction with AURION R-Gent cific interactions.
"Optimised Immuno Labelling using AURION BSA-c™ and SE-EM or SE-LM silver enhancement
AURION Blocking Solutions" by J.L.M. Leunissen and reagents, developed for electron microscopy Storage
P.F.E.M. van de Plas and light microscopy/immunoblotting AURION Immunogold Reagents have a guar-
For additional information please see the Aurion Immunogold respectively. anteed shelf life of 18 months from the date
Newsletter and Protocol sections. of quality control analysis.

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 75

Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec02_072-090_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 12:52 AM Page 76

SECTION 2 ImmunoGold Reagents

TECHNICAL TIP  Blocking Solutions

Blocking Solutions Application Instructions The signal-to-noise ratio determines the
Detailed information is provided on the package inserts. quality of any detection experiment. This
Electron Microscopy ratio is in principle determined by the
On-Grid Labeling characteristics of specimen and detection
Placing grids on top of drops of Blocking Solution arrayed on a reagents. With adequate blocking and
sheet of Parafilm™ after they have been treated for aldehyde incubation media, background reactions are
inactivation. minimized whereas specific reactions are not hampered.
Pre-embedding Labeling Aurion has developed Blocking Solutions which effectively block
Floating specimens in Blocking Solution, preferably on a rocking table. ‘sticky’ surfaces by multi-point hydrophobic and charge-based
Light Microscopy interactions. The Blocking Solutions are specifically designed to
On-slide or -coverslip Labeling meet the characteristics of each type of secondary conjugate.
Applying a few drops of Blocking Solution to cover the specimen.
Introduction
Bio Assays The AURION Blocking Solutions are used to prevent immunoreagents from
Incubating specimens (e.g. immunoblot strips) in Blocking Solution binding non-specifically to specimens with “sticky” surface properties.
on a rocking table in screw-cap sealed disposable tubes.
Procedures to eliminate background comprise three main steps:
Additional Information  To suppress residual aldehyde activity
For additional information please see the Aurion Immunogold
 To saturate multipoint hydrophobic moieties and positive
Newsletter and Protocol sections. charges with high molecular weight compounds such as those
present in the AURION Blocking Solutions
 To reduce aspecific binding of immunoreagents caused by
hydrophilic interaction with competing molecules in the
N-Cadherin detection in heart muscle cells incubation and washing solution. AURION BSA-c™ is a
Immunofluorescence using Alexa 568 labeled Fab goat antimouse. For reasons of particularly effective reagent for this purpose.
comparability areas of specific labeling are pictured with similar density (arrowheads). These steps should be balanced for optimum results.
Courtesy of Lauren Hruby and John Harris; Dept. Physiology, University of Otago, Dunedin, New Zealand
Product Description
Left hand panel: Right hand panel: AURION Blocking Solutions are prepared using specially selected
Background using a commonly used N-Cadherin immunolabelled areas obtained
protocol obscures sites of specific labeling. using Aurion Blocking Solution and BSA-c™
compounds. All ruminant proteins are obtained from healthy livestock.
stand out with much clearer definition. AURION Blocking solutions contain Bovine Serum Albumin and Cold
Water Fish Skin Gelatine in phosphate buffered saline with sodium azide
as preservative. Normal serum may have been added as indicated on
the label. The blocking capacity of each lot is determined using a dot-
spot test system as described by Moeremans et al., J. Immunol.
Methods 74, (1984), 353.
Each package contains 30 ml of solution. It accommodates 300
specimens for light microscopy at 100 μl/specimen (~ 3 drops), or
1000 EM grids at 30 μl/specimen (~ 1 drop).
Specificity
Blocking Solutions are available in the following specificities:
 serum-free: for use with Protein A and Protein G Gold conjugates.
 with Normal Goat serum: for use with reagents based on
secondary antibodies raised in Goat.
 with Normal Rabbit serum: for use with reagents based on
secondary antibodies raised in Rabbit.
 with Normal Sheep serum: for use with reagents based on
secondary antibodies raised in Sheep.
 with Normal Donkey serum: for use with reagents based on
secondary antibodies raised in Donkey.
Storage
AURION Blocking Solutions have a guaranteed shelf life of 18 months
from the date of quality control analysis.
The products should be stored at 4-8°C. Freezing is not recommended.

76 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874

Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec02_072-090_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 12:52 AM Page 77

ImmunoGold Reagents SECTION 2

TECHNICAL TIP  Incubation Solution Additive

AURION BSA-c™
Recommended Incubation Solution:
PBS, In the blocking step, hydrophobic moieties causing “stickiness”
(10 mM Phosphate buffer, 150 mM NaCl) in the specimen surface are rendered hydrophilic to minimize
0.1-0.2 % AURION BSA-c™ background. Nevertheless, the more dynamic charge-based
15 mM NaN3 interaction between the specimen surface and immunoreagents
pH 7.4 also needs to be controlled in order to eliminate background.
After addition of the BSA-c™ concentrate the pH should be
checked and adjusted to 7.4 if necessary. Aurion has developed BSA-c™, a unique incubation buffer additive with an unparalleled
This Incubation Solution is used throughout the whole set of ability to effectively prevent charge based background. BSA-c™ is prepared by
reactions and washing steps (i.e. from immediately after the acetylation of bovine serum albumin (BSA). Polycationic sites in the specimen interact
blocking step, through the primary antibody incubations, in- readily with negatively charged acetylated BSA molecules. This significantly reduces
between washing steps, secondary incubation and the final the risk that such sites might bind negatively-charged immunoreagents and
washing steps). immunogold conjugates and thus reduces the risk of background.
Additional Information
"Optimised Immuno Labelling using AURION BSA-c™ and Introduction
AURION Blocking Solutions" by J.L.M. Leunissen and Procedures to eliminate background comprise three main steps:
P.F.E.M. van de Plas  To suppress residual aldehyde activity
For additional information please see the Aurion Immunogold  To saturate multipoint hydrophobic moieties and positive charges with high
Newsletter and Protocol sections. molecular weight compounds such as those present in the AURION Blocking
Storage Solutions
AURION BSA-c™ concentrate has a guaranteed shelf life of 18
months from the date of quality control analysis. The products  To reduce non-specific binding of immunoreagents caused by hydrophilic
should be stored at 4-8°C. Freezing is not recommended. interaction with competing molecules in the incubation and washing solution.
AURION BSA-c™ is a particularly effective reagent for this purpose.
AURION BSA-c™ is a buffer additive that helps prevent immunodetection reagents (i.e.
TECHNICAL TIP primary antibodies and secondary reagents) from binding nonspecifically to charged
How to control background in a nutshell moieties within the specimen. Thus, it suppresses background competitively with little or no
Background is controlled by three independent steps effect on the specific reaction. Its successful application is not limited to immunogold
detections but it is equally efficient in fluorescent and enzyme-based detection systems.
1. Low Molecular Weight Block (before AURION BSA-c™ concentrations as low as 0.01-0.1% inhibit binding of gold conjugate to
protein block) polycationic poly-l-lysine coated grids almost completely (>99%).
Purpose: to inactivate residual fixative e.g. aldehydes,
The surface properties of the specimen can be simplified by division into four compartments:
using
• amino acids such as glycin or lysin, or - negatively charged (polyanions, proteins, especially after
• aldehyde inactivating compounds such as NaBH4 aldehyde fixation, lipids); 0 neutral; + positively charged
(histone proteins, polycations) and H hydrophobic (lipids,
and NH2OH fat droplets, resins). After an appropriate blocking step
2. High Molecular Weight Protein Block these areas are covered with blocking compounds.
(before immunolabeling)
In low ionic strength media negatively charged antibodies
Purpose: to prevent stickiness to hydrophobic areas and gold conjugates are repulsed by negatively charged
and domains with excessive positive charges based on specimen areas which frequently may contain the
multiple point interactions (high affinity protein binding antigens to be detected. Background does not likely
capacity), using occur in such areas. The positively charged areas attract
• albumin antibodies and gold conjugates potentially leading to
• normal serum background. In a moderate ionic strength incubation solution, repulsion and attraction are
3. Incubation and Wash solution (during diminished due to the presence of ions. The negatively charged BSA-c™ competes with
immunolabelling) the negatively charged antibodies and gold reagents for non-specific binding to the
Purpose: to eliminate aspecific binding of positively charged specimen compounds, thus reducing background to the greatest possible
extent without interfering with antigen detection.
immunoconjugates based on hydrophilic interactions
(“oligo” point interactions) by competition, using Product Description
• acetylated albumin (AURION BSA-c™) in the AURION BSA-c™ concentrated solution contains acetylated bovine serum albumin as the
incubation buffer functional constituent. By acetylation of amines on basic amino acids these groups are no
Abandoning BSA-c™ molecules compete with longer as easily protonated and the isoelectric point of such molecules is lowered and
antibodies and secondary immuno reagents for hydrophobicity is increased. BSA-c™ is a 10% solution of acetylated BSA at slightly alkaline
pH with Kathon CG as preservative. The bovine serum albumin that Aurion uses to prepare
aspecific binding to positively charged specimen
BSA-c™ is obtained from healthy livestock.
compounds, thus minimizing background.
The charge dependent background inhibition capacity of the BSA-c™ in each lot is
Please refer to our Newsletter 1 and Newsflyer 1 for
determined using a dot-spot test system with polycationic compounds.
more information on the subject of background.
Two package volumes are available which yield 1.5 - 3 and 5 -10 litres of incubation buffer
You can find incubation protocols in "The Aurion respectively
method" section.

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 77

Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec02_072-090_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 12:52 AM Page 78

SECTION 2 ImmunoGold Reagents

 BSA/CWFS/ TECHNICAL TIP
Tween 20/ Application Instructions
Normal Sera The best results will be obtained with our Blocking reagents and with
Many compounds have BSA-c as incubation buffer additive. Alternatively the recipes below may
been added empirically to be followed:
immunolabeling solutions
for the purpose of
Blocking Solution for
minimizing background protein A or G reagents
Phosphate buffered saline
staining. Based on years of
(10mM Phosphate buffer, 150 mM NaCl)
experience and controlled
5 % BSA
testing, Aurion has selected 0.1% CWFS Gelatin
a group of compounds that are proven to be the most effective 15 mM NaN3
in their background reduction action. Researchers can obtain pH 7.4
these items separately from Aurion and prepare blocking and
incubation media to suit the needs of their own protocols. Blocking Solution for secondary
Introduction antibody reagents
The ready-to-use Blocking Solutions and the incubation media additive Phosphate buffered saline
BSA-c™ are tuned for optimum background prevention and signal-to- (10mM Phosphate buffer, 150 mM NaCl)
noise ratio. In-depth information can be found in the respective product 5 % BSA
data sheets. 0.1% CWFS Gelatin
AURION also offers a number of components that allow researchers to 5-10 % normal serum
formulate blocking, incubation and wash solutions according to the (same species as in the secondary antibody reagent)
needs of their own experiments. 15 mM NaN3
Product Description pH 7.4

Aurion’s Bovine Serum Albumin is obtained from healthy livestock. Incubation solution for Conventional
BSA should be dissolved in an appropriate buffer, such as phosphate
buffered saline, taking care not to denature the protein by foaming.
Immunogold Reagents
The addition of BSA may cause a drop in pH of the final solution and Phosphate buffered saline
correction may be required. As a preservative the use of NaN3 or (10mM Phosphate buffer, 150 mM NaCl)
Kathon CG is recommended. 0.1-0.2 % BSA
0.1% CWFS Gelatin
The use of Cold Water Fish Skin Gelatin to prevent background 1-5 % normal serum
reactions has been recommended by e.g. Behnke et al. (J. Cell Biol. 41, (same species as in the secondary antibody reagent)
[1986], 386). The product is supplied as a liquid concentrate (40%). 15 mM NaN3
Tween-20™ is a non-ionic detergent with a molecular weight of about pH 7.4
600 and a critical micelle concentration (CMC) of 0.06-0.07% in water
at room temperature. Its working mechanism may in part be based on Incubation solution for Ultra Small
its action as a detergent, binding to the hydrophobic moieties of water
Immunogold Reagents
insoluble compounds, rendering them hydrophilic. In addition, immuno-
Phosphate buffered saline
compounds may become incorporated into micelles when the Tween-
(10mM Phosphate buffer, 150 mM NaCl)
20™ concentration is higher than the CMC, for instance at 0.1 % in PBS
0.8 % BSA
at pH 7.4.
0.1% CWFS Gelatin
Normal sera are used to counteract the non-specific interaction 1-5 % normal serum
between the sample and immunoglobulins. They can be added to the (same species as in the secondary antibody reagent)
blocking solution and the incubation media. 15 mM NaN3
As a rule the normal serum species should be the same as the pH 7.4
secondary antibody species (e.g. use normal goat serum with goat-
anti-rabbit conjugates). Storage
Note: normal sera should not be used in combination with Protein The products should be stored at 4-8°C.
A and Protein G gold reagents. Freezing is not recommended.

Additional Information
For additional information please see the Aurion Immunogold Newsletter
and Protocol sections.

78 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874

Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec02_072-090_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 12:52 AM Page 79

ImmunoGold Reagents SECTION 2

 R-Gent SE-EM Product Description

Silver Enhancement AURION R-Gent SE-EM is a high efficiency silver enhancement reagent
for electron microscopy. It intensifies the gold particles by homogeneous
Reagents deposition of metallic silver on the particle surface. The resulting
For most applications the detection of electron dense signal is easily detected and is compatible with heavy
ultra small gold particles in electron metal counterstaining. The reagent has extremely delayed auto-
microscopy requires a particle nucleation and can be used under standard laboratory light conditions.
enhancement procedure. Danscher’s It also has low viscosity, which is especially advantageous for pre-
method has always been the standard embedding immunogold applications. The enhancement mixture has a
pH of 8.1-8.2.
for this purpose and for a long time attempts to improve the
features of Danscher’s system met with only limited success. AURION R-Gent SE-EM has been tested ntensively for the enhancement
of AURION Ultra Small Immunogold reagents.
The goal in the development of AURION R-Gent SE-EM was to
AURION R-Gent SE-EM is available in a kit containing the following:
create a new system with enhancement efficiency and
homogeneity at least comparable to Danscher’s method, but  30 ml or 90 ml of ready-to-use ENHANCER,
with reduced acidity and light sensitivity. In addition, the  3 ml of concentrated INITIATOR and
reagents should have low viscosity for the suitability in pre-  30 ml of ACTIVATOR.
embedding immunogold labeling.  a 3 ml empty dropping bottle, labeled “DEVELOPER”.
Introduction The INITIATOR is a concentrated solution which must be diluted and
The silver enhancement reaction is a gold particle-catalyzed reduction activated before use, using the ACTIVATOR. This resulting mixture is the
in which silver ions are reduced to metallic silver with a photographic DEVELOPER.
developing compound as the electron source. In addition in many
The now ready-to-use DEVELOPER has a shelf life of one month. It is
applications a “protective colloid” is added to the enhancement solution
suggested to prepare fresh DEVELOPER at least every month.
to limit diffusion of reagents to the gold particle surface, thus providing
a means for controlling particle growth. The undiluted solutions have a shelf life of 10 months when stored at
4°C. INITIATOR can be stored at -20°C for prolonged shelf life.
For enhancement, 1-2 drops of DEVELOPER are mixed with 20 drops of
ENHANCER. The typical enhancement time is between 20 and 40
minutes. Specimens may be contrasted according to standard
procedures.
The kit with 30 ml of ENHANCER accomodates up to 1000 EM grid
specimens. The kit with 90 ml of ENHANCER is suitable for pre-
embedding immunogold labeling; the number of specimens it
"...silver enhancement reaction is a gold particle-catalyzed reduction in which accomodates depends on the volume of reagent used per specimen.
silver ions are reduced to metallic silver with a photographic developing
compound as the electron source..” For each lot, the specific enhancement activity and level of
autonucleation are monitored by spectrophotometric techniques.

TECHNICAL TIP
R-Gent SE-EM for Electron Microscopy
Post-embedding enhancement (on-grid)
Place grids on drops of the enhancement mixture arrayed on a sheet of
Parafilm™.
Pre-embedding enhancement
Incubate specimens (e.g. vibratome sections) in Petri dishes or Eppendorf
tubes containing the enhancement mixture, with agitation. When
enhancement is completed, the specimens are washed with distilled
water. A fixation step with photographic fixer is not required.
Storage
The AURION R-Gent SE-EM components are stored at 4°C and allowed to
reach room temperature before use. SE-EM INITIATOR may be stored at -
Desmin labeling in heart muscle with Ultra Small Gold conjugate and AURION 20°C for prolonged shelf life.
R-Gent SE-EM. Courtesy Prof. Dr. Müller Höcker, University Munich, FRG.

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 79

Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec02_072-090_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 12:52 AM Page 80

SECTION 2 ImmunoGold Reagents

 R-Gent SE-LM For enhancement, equal amounts of the DEVELOPER and ENHANCER are
mixed well and applied to the specimen. The enhancement mixture is easy-
Silver Enhancement to-use, exhibits extremely delayed auto-nucleation and can be used under
Reagents standard laboratory light conditions. Typical enhancement times are between
The Immunogold Silver Staining technique (IGSS) 15 and 30 minutes. Auto-nucleation becomes visible only after 40-60
finds application both at the electron microscope minutes. Light microscopical specimens may be counterstained according to
and the light microscope level. In addition the standard procedures. The enhancement mixture has a pH value of 8.3-8.5.
technique can be equally used to identify AURION R-GENT SE-LM is available as a kit in two unit sizes (2 x 30 ml
proteins or nucleic acids after blotting. or 2 x 250 ml) and consists of a separate DEVELOPER and ENHANCER.
Light microscopical and macroscopical visualization of the latent gold The supplied amounts accomodate 600 and 5000 LM specimens
signal requires an enhancement system that renders a high contrast respectively at 100 μl/specimen, or 60 and 500 bio assay specimens at
signal. Light insensitivity and negligible autonucleation are required for 1 ml/specimen. The reactivity is tested on dot-spots and the absence of
ease of handling and low background. AURION R-Gent SE-LM is a two- autonucleation is monitored by spectrophotometric techniques.
component reagent that meets these requirements. Storage
Introduction The AURION R-GENT SE-LM components are stored at 4°C and allowed
The silver enhancement reaction is based on the gold particle catalyzed to reach room temperature before use.
reduction of Ag+ to metallic silver using photographic developing compounds
as the electron source. For light microscopy and immunoblotting applications
the generated silver signal should be of high contrast. Furthermore the signal
TECHNICAL TIP
should be permanent and compatible with counterstaining. R-Gent SE-LM for Light Microscopy
Slide or Coverslip Labeling
Product Description A few drops of the freshly prepared enhancement mixture are applied to
The AURION R-GENT SE-LM cover the specimen. During enhancement the specimens are kept in a
components constitute a Silver moist chamber. The ongoing enhancement may at intervals be monitored
Enhancement Reagent which increases with an inverted light microscope. When enhancement is judged to be
the average gold cluster or particle size complete, the specimens are washed with distilled water. A fixation step
by deposition of metallic silver with photographic fixer is not required.
facilitating detection at the light Whole Mount Labeling
microscopical level. The generated Specimens like floating (vibratome) sections can be enhanced in Petri
brown-black signal is also easily dishes or 6-24 well plates.
detected in bio assays and is Bio Assays
compatible with counterstaining in light Depending on the type of assay the enhancement for bio assays can be
microscopy. AURION R-GENT SE-LM performed in sealed plastic bags, Petri dishes or in disposable screw cap
Light microscopy evaluation of sealed tubes.
has been tailored for the enhancement
tubulin labeling with Ultra Small Additional Information
of AURION Ultra Small Immunogold Immunogold Reagents and silver For additional information please see the Aurion Immunogold Newsletter
reagents and is equally suited for the enhancement. and Protocol sections.
larger sized particles in the AURION Upper panel: bright field mode
Conventional Immunogold reagents. Lower panel: epi-polarization mode

 COL-AURION: Colloidal Gold Based Protein Stain

Col-Aurion is a colloidal gold particle based total particles with an average particle diameter of 15 nm. The staining
protein stain, developed for the sensitive principle is based on the electrostatic binding of negatively charged gold
staining of electrophoretically separated protein particles to proteins with a positive charge present at low pH.
bands on nitrocellulose or PVDF™ blotting A unique feature of Col-Aurion is the use of BSA-c™ to shield off the
membranes. Colloidal gold particles accumulate surface of the gold particles. Destabilization of gold particles that might
at the site of the protein bands on the occur as a result of interaction with detached protein is thus prevented.
membrane, generating an intense dark red The strong negative charge of BSA-c™ gives an additional increase in
staining pattern. The total protein stain assists in sensitivity of the stain.
assessing immunoblotting results and to
evaluate the effectivity of the blotting procedure. Col-Aurion total protein stain has a pH of 3.2 and is ready to use. For
removal of surplus of weakly bound protein from the membrane, a 10
Introduction ml vial of Tween-20™ is included.
The negative surface charge of colloidal gold particles is responsible for
their high affinity for positively charged macromolecules. This Storage
characteristic was the basis for the development of a total protein stain Col-Aurion has a guaranteed shelf life of 18 months from the date of
based on colloidal gold. quality control analysis. Store at 4-8°C. Do not freeze.

Product Description
Col-Aurion is a total protein stain consisting of a solution of coated gold

80 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874

Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec02_072-090_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 12:52 AM Page 81

ImmunoGold Reagents SECTION 2

 Gold Sols  Gold Tracers

To prepare a high quality (immuno)gold Aurion Gold Tracers are used to
conjugates it is important to have particles with visualize charged moieties in
uniform size and highly adsorptive surfaces. specimens: anionic tracers bind to
The Aurion gold sols are prepared according to polycationic moieties (basic proteins
unique production protocols. This provides for e.g. histones, cationic tracers bind to
sol particles with the same narrow size polyanionic moieties (membranes,
distribution and adsorption properties as acidic proteins). “Neutral” BSA coated
employed in the Conventional Immunogold gold tracers are useful for detecting
Reagents. open connections and tissue damage. Under proper conditions and with
suitable microscopical techniques the tracers can also be used to follow
Introduction cellular events in time.
The preparation of conventional gold reagents is based on gold particles
with a diameter suited for direct electron microscopic visualization. Introduction
Aurion offers a range of Conventional Immunogold Reagents which The AURION Anionic and Cationic Gold Tracers are designed to detect
cover the majority of approaches in transmission and scanning electron charged areas; the anionic tracers detecting multiple positive charge
microscopy. moieties, the cationic tracers detecting multiple negative charges.

Aurion Gold Sols (solutions of high quality unconjugated gold particles) Product Description
provide opportunities for users to prepare conjugates with primary The AURION Gold Tracers are available in the full range of particle sizes:
antibodies, ligands and other binding agents with the same particle Ultra Small, 6, 10, 15 and 25 nm. Anionic Gold Tracers are prepared
characteristics as in the Conventional Immunogold Reagents. with BSA-c™ as particle conjugated protein. Cationic Gold Tracers are
prepared with methylated BSA. AURION Gold Tracers are available in 5
Product Description and 10 ml volume packages and are supplied at an OD520nm of 2.0 for
AURION Gold Sols are prepared Particle size and size distributions the conventional particle size range and at equivalent OD for the Ultra
according to a unique protocol, of the AURION Gold Sols
Small tracers.
warranting narrow size 6 nm
distribution and reproducible The products are supplied in PBS, with 15 mM NaN3.
adsorption characteristics. AURION Gold Tracers are also available in bulk and at different optical
The AURION gold sols are density if required.
available in the same size range AURION Gold Tracers are shipped containing NaN3 as preservative. If
as the Conventional they are intended for use in living organisms, the preservative has to be
Immunogold Reagents: 6, 10, removed prior to use. This can be achieved either by dialysis or by
15 and 25 nm. The particle buffer exchange using for instance a GE Healthcare Life Sciences
population is monodisperse and Pharmacia PD-10 column.
thus shows minimal size 10 nm
Additional Information
variation and overlap. Typically, For additional information please see the Aurion Immunogold Newsletter
the coefficient of variance for and Protocol sections.
the 6 and 25 nm particle size
sols is less than 12%, whereas
Storage
Aurion gold tracers have a guaranteed shelf life of 18 months from the
the 10 and 15 nm size sols
date of quality control analysis.
show less then 10% variation.
Actual lot specifications (size, The products should be stored at 4-8°C.
variation and expiry date) are 15 nm Freezing is not recommended.
indicated on the accompanying
package insert.
Package size: 100 ml of high
TECHNICAL TIP
quality gold sol at an OD520nm In order to obtain a positive reaction when using these tracers the
of approximately 1. following should be kept in mind:
1) charge interactions are influenced by the presence of ions, di- and
Storage trivalent ions being of more influence than univalent ions. The influence
AURION gold sols have a is concentration dependent. Binding is stronger in low ionic-strength
guaranteed shelf life of 12 25 nm media.
months from the date of quality 2) charge interactions are influenced by pH. The charge of components
control analysis. in the specimen is dependent of their isoëlectric point (IEP). Below the
The products should be stored IEP the charge is positive, above the IEP negative. Significant binding
at 4-8°C. will only occur at a pH at least one to two pH-units higher or lower than
the IEP.
Freezing is not recommended. Anionic tracers are negatively charged at pH >5
Cationic tracers are positively charged at pH <10
BSA tracers are intended for tracking fine capillaries or connecting
spaces in intact tissues.

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 81

Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec02_072-090_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 12:52 AM Page 82

SECTION 2 ImmunoGold Reagents

 New Cross NEWLY
Goat-anti-Mouse lgG (H&L)
Particle Size Cat # Size(ml) Cat # Size(ml)
Adsorbed INTRODUCED 4–8˚C Ultra-Small 25120 1.5 25121 .6
Products 4–8˚C EM-grade 6nm 25123 2.5 25124 1.0
4–8˚C EM-grade 10nm 25128 2.5 25129 1.0
Cross reactivity can be a problem when working with primary 4–8˚C EM-grade 15nm 25132 3.5 25133 1.4
antibodies sourced from animal species that are evolutionary 4–8˚C EM-grade 25nm 25135 3.5 25136 1.4
closely related to the source of tissues or cells that antigens are
to be detected in. Goat-anti-Mouse lgM (μ-chain)
Particle Size Cat # Size(ml) Cat # Size(ml)
An example is using a mouse monoclonal on rat tissue. With 4–8˚C Ultra-Small 25140 1.5 25141 .6
many monoclonal antibodies of mouse origin and some of rat, 4–8˚C EM-grade 6nm 25143 2.5 25144 1.0
and the prevailing animal cells and tissues being used in studies 4–8˚C EM-grade 10nm 25148 2.5 25149 1.0
likewise originating from rat or mouse, it often happens that 4–8˚C EM-grade 15nm 25152 3.5 25153 1.4
4–8˚C EM-grade 25nm 25155 3.5 25156 1.4
cross reactivity occurs, leading to false positive results.
A second problem that derives from cross-reactivity occurs in Goat-anti-Mouse lgG+lgM
double labeling, when using primary antibodies from closely Particle Size Cat # Size(ml) Cat # Size(ml)
related animal sources. With this in mind, Aurion has developed 4–8˚C Ultra-Small 25160 1.5 25161 .6
two series of new conjugates: 4–8˚C EM-grade 6nm 25163 2.5 25164 1.0
4–8˚C EM-grade 10nm 25168 2.5 25169 1.0
4–8˚C EM-grade 15nm 25172 3.5 25173 1.4
Goat-anti-Mouse IgG (H+L)xRat 4–8˚C EM-grade 25nm 25175 3.5 25176 1.4
(cross adsorbed against Rat immunoglobulins)
Particle Size Cat # Size(ml) Cat # Size(ml)
Goat-anti-Rabbit lgG (H&L)
4–8˚C EM-grade Ultra Small 25900 1.5 25901 0.6
Particle Size Cat # Size(ml) Cat # Size(ml)
4–8˚C EM-grade 10nm 25902 2.5 25903 1.0
4–8˚C Ultra-Small 25100 1.5 25101 .6
4–8˚C EM-grade 6nm 25103 2.5 25104 1.0
Goat-anti-Rat IgG (H+L)xMouse 4–8˚C EM-grade 10nm 25108 2.5 25109 1.0
(cross adsorbed against Mouse immunoglobulins) 4–8˚C EM-grade 15nm 25112 3.5 25113 1.4
4–8˚C EM-grade 25nm 25115 3.5 25116 1.4
Particle Size Cat # Size(ml) Cat # Size(ml)
4–8˚C EM-grade Ultra Small 25904 1.5 25905 0.6
4–8˚C EM-grade 10nm 25906 2.5 25907 1.0 Goat-anti-Rat lgG (H&L)
Particle Size Cat # Size(ml) Cat # Size(ml)
Secondary antibodies have been thoroughly purified using solid phase 4–8˚C Ultra-Small 25180 1.5 25181 .6
technique. These purified antibodies allow detection of antigens with 4–8˚C EM-grade 6nm 25183 2.5 25184 1.0
mouse monoclonal antibodies in rat tissue or rat monoclonal antibodies 4–8˚C EM-grade 10nm 25188 2.5 25189 1.0
in mouse tissue, without causing interfering binding to either 4–8˚C EM-grade 15nm 25192 3.5 25193 1.4
endogenous mouse or rat immunoglobulins 4–8˚C EM-grade 25nm 25195 3.5 25196 1.4

The antibodies can be used for double labeling as well when both
Goat-anti-Human lgG (H&L)
mouse and rat primary antibodies are used with other than mouse or rat
Particle Size Cat # Size(ml) Cat # Size(ml)
tissue. 4–8˚C Ultra-Small 25200 1.5 25201 .6
Please note: 4–8˚C EM-grade 6nm 25203 2.5 25204 1.0
4–8˚C EM-grade 10nm 25208 2.5 25209 1.0
Cross adsorption against closely related species may result in epitope 4–8˚C EM-grade 15nm 25212 3.5 25213 1.4
recognition with reduced binding force and lower labeling density. 4–8˚C EM-grade 25nm 25215 3.5 25216 1.4
EMS and Aurion would like to inform you that the strongest labeling
intensity is usually achieved with the least refined antibodies. Users are Rabbit-anti-Goat lgG (H&L)
advised to take this into account when choosing a product from the Particle Size Cat # Size(ml) Cat # Size(ml)
Aurion range of anti-mouse or anti-rat conjugates. In case of doubt, our 4–8˚C Ultra-Small 25220 1.5 25221 .6
technical staff will gladly assist you in making the best choice. 4–8˚C EM-grade 6nm 25223 2.5 25224 1.0
4–8˚C EM-grade 10nm 25228 2.5 25229 1.0
4–8˚C EM-grade 15nm 25232 3.5 25233 1.4
4–8˚C EM-grade 25nm 25235 3.5 25236 1.4

Goat-anti-Biotin
Particle Size Cat # Size(ml) Cat # Size(ml)
4–8˚C Ultra-Small 25240 1.5 25241 .6
4–8˚C EM-grade 6nm 25243 2.5 25244 1.0
4–8˚C EM-grade 10nm 25248 2.5 25249 1.0
4–8˚C EM-grade 15nm 25252 3.5 25253 1.4
4–8˚C EM-grade 25nm 25255 3.5 25256 1.4

82 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874

Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec02_072-090_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 12:53 AM Page 83

ImmunoGold Reagents SECTION 2

Streptavidin F(ab’)2 Fragment of Goat-anti-Rabbit lgG (H&L)

Particle Size Cat # Size(ml) Cat # Size(ml) Particle Size Cat # Size(ml) Cat # Size(ml)
4–8˚C Ultra-Small 25260 1.5 25261 .6 4–8˚C Ultra-Small 25360 1.5 25361 .6
4–8˚C EM-grade 6nm 25263 2.5 25264 1.0 4–8˚C EM-grade 6nm 25363 2.5 25364 1.0
4–8˚C EM-grade 10nm 25268 2.5 25269 1.0 4–8˚C EM-grade 10nm 25362 2.5 25365 1.0
4–8˚C EM-grade 15nm 25272 3.5 25273 1.4 4–8˚C EM-grade 15nm 25366 3.5 25367 1.4
4–8˚C EM-grade 25nm 25275 3.5 25276 1.4 4–8˚C EM-grade 25nm 25368 3.5 25369 1.4

Protein A F(ab’)2 Fragment of Goat-anti-Mouse lgG (H&L)

Particle Size Cat # Size(ml) Cat # Size(ml) Particle Size Cat # Size(ml) Cat # Size(ml)
4–8˚C EM-grade 6nm 25282 2.5 25283 1.0 4–8˚C Ultra-Small 25370 1.5 25371 .6
4–8˚C EM-grade 10nm 25284 2.5 25285 1.0 4–8˚C EM-grade 6nm 25373 2.5 25374 1.0
4–8˚C EM-grade 15nm 25286 3.5 25287 1.4 4–8˚C EM-grade 10nm 25372 2.5 25375 1.0
4–8˚C EM-grade 25nm 25288 3.5 25289 1.4 4–8˚C EM-grade 15nm 25376 3.5 25377 1.4
4–8˚C EM-grade 25nm 25378 3.5 25379 1.4
Biotinylated Albumin
Particle Size Cat # Size(ml) Cat # Size(ml) F(ab’)2 Fragment of Goat-anti-Mouse lgG+lgM
4–8˚C Ultra-Small 25290 1.5 25291 .6 Particle Size Cat # Size(ml) Cat # Size(ml)
4–8˚C EM-grade 6nm 25293 2.5 25294 1.0 4–8˚C Ultra-Small 25380 1.5 25381 .6
4–8˚C EM-grade 10nm 25298 2.5 25299 1.0 4–8˚C EM-grade 6nm 25383 2.5 25384 1.0
4–8˚C EM-grade 15nm 25302 3.5 25303 1.4 4–8˚C EM-grade 10nm 25382 2.5 25385 1.0
4–8˚C EM-grade 25nm 25305 3.5 25306 1.4 4–8˚C EM-grade 15nm 25386 3.5 25387 1.4
4–8˚C EM-grade 25nm 25388 3.5 25389 1.4
Mouse Monoclonal anti-FITC
Gold Conjugates: F(ab) Fragment of Sheep-anti-Digoxigen
Particle Size Cat # Size(ml) Cat # Size(ml)
For the electron microscopic visualization of FITC labels used in 4–8˚C Ultra-Small 25410 1.5 25411 .6
light microscopic specimens. For retrieval of faded FITC in 4–8˚C EM-grade 6nm 25393 2.5 25394 1.0
DNA/RNA probes, fatty acids, and proteins. 4–8˚C EM-grade 10nm 25398 2.5 25399 1.0
4–8˚C EM-grade 15nm 25402 3.5 25403 1.4
Particle Size Cat # Size(ml) Cat # Size(ml) 4–8˚C EM-grade 25nm 25405 3.5 25406 1.4
4–8˚C Ultra-Small 25580 1.5 25581 .6
4–8˚C EM-grade 10nm 25582 2.5 25583 1.0
F(ab’) Fragment of Goat-anti-Rabbit lgG (H&L)
Particle Size Cat # Size(ml) Cat # Size(ml)
Goat-anti-Chicken lgG (H&L) 4–8˚C Ultra-Small 25412 1.5 25413 .6
Particle Size Cat # Size(ml) Cat # Size(ml)
4–8˚C Ultra-Small 25584 1.5 25585 .6
4–8˚C EM-grade 6nm 25586 2.5 25587 1.0 F(ab’) Fragment of Goat-anti-Mouse lgG (H&L)
4–8˚C EM-grade 10nm 25588 2.5 25589 1.0 Particle Size Cat # Size(ml) Cat # Size(ml)
4–8˚C EM-grade 15nm 25590 3.5 25591 1.4 4–8˚C Ultra-Small 25414 1.5 25415 .6
4–8˚C EM-grade 25nm 25592 3.5 25593 1.4

F(ab’) Fragment of Goat-anti-Rat lgG (H&L)

Protein G Particle Size Cat # Size(ml) Cat # Size(ml)
Particle Size Cat # Size(ml) Cat # Size(ml) 4–8˚C Ultra-Small 25416 1.5 25417 .6
4–8˚C EM-grade 6nm 25312 2.5 25313 1.0
4–8˚C EM-grade 10nm 25314 2.5 25315 1.0 Rabbit-anti-Chicken lgG (H&L)
4–8˚C EM-grade 15nm 25316 3.5 25317 1.4
Particle Size Cat # Size(ml) Cat # Size(ml)
4–8˚C EM-grade 25nm 25318 3.5 25319 1.4
4–8˚C Ultra-Small 25420 1.5 25421 .6
4–8˚C EM-grade 6nm 25423 2.5 25424 1.0
Goat-anti-Guinea Pig lgG (H&L) 4–8˚C EM-grade 10nm 25428 2.5 25429 1.0
Particle Size Cat # Size(ml) Cat # Size(ml) 4–8˚C EM-grade 15nm 25432 3.5 25433 1.4
4–8˚C Ultra-Small 25320 1.5 25321 .6 4–8˚C EM-grade 25nm 25435 3.5 25436 1.4
4–8˚C EM-grade 6nm 25323 2.5 25324 1.0
4–8˚C EM-grade 10nm 25328 2.5 25329 1.0
4–8˚C EM-grade 15nm 25332 3.5 25333 1.4
4–8˚C EM-grade 25nm 25335 3.5 25336 1.4

Rabbit-anti-Sheep lgG (H&L)

Particle Size Cat # Size(ml) Cat # Size(ml)
4–8˚C Ultra-Small 25340 1.5 25341 .6
4–8˚C EM-grade 6nm 25343 2.5 25344 1.0
4–8˚C EM-grade 10nm 25348 2.5 25349 1.0
4–8˚C EM-grade 15nm 25352 3.5 25353 1.4
4–8˚C EM-grade 25nm 25355 3.5 25356 1.4

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 83

Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec02_072-090_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 12:53 AM Page 84

SECTION 2 ImmunoGold Reagents

 Donkey Conjugate Line TECHNICAL TIP
In many cases double labeling experiments are based on using two
primary antibodies from different animal species, for instance mouse
Reactivity of Protein A
and rabbit. Of late, we have noticed an increasing number of users that
and Protein G
have primary antibodies developed in goat. It is impossible to perform a Membrane labeling with protein A
double labeling experiment in combination with, for instance, a mouse 15 nm gold conjugate.
primary antibody, since applicable secondary antibodies are either Courtesy of T.Wakefield,
raised in rabbit or goat. Hence the Goat-anti-Mouse would be University of Auburn, Alabama
recognized by the Rabbit-anti-Goat, and it would be impossible to get
reliable results. In the past, only using directly labeled primary
Species Ig(sub)class Protein A Protein G
antibodies would solve this. This would require researchers to go
Rabbit Ig ++ ++
through the lengthy procedure of preparing such conjugates and even Mouse IgG1 - +
then with limited success. To overcome this difficulty we are proud to IgG2a + +
release the Aurion Series of Secondary ImmunoGold conjugates based IgG2b + +
on antibodies raised in Donkey, including Donkey-anti-Goat. It is then IgG3 + ++
known that mixing Donkey-anti-Goat and Donkey-anti-Mouse provides a IgA - ?
successful solution to the above mentioned case. IgM - ?
Rat IgG1 - ?
IgG2a - ++
Donkey-anti-Rabbit lgG (H&L) IgG2b - +
Particle Size Cat # Size(ml) Cat # Size(ml) IgG2c + +
4–8˚C Ultra-small 25700 1.5 25701 .6 IgM - ?
4–8˚C EM-grade 6nm 25702 2.5 25703 1.0 Man IgG1 ++ ++
4–8˚C EM-grade 10nm 25704 2.5 25705 1.0 IgG2 ++ ++
4–8˚C EM-grade 15nm 25706 3.5 25707 1.4 IgG3 - ++
4–8˚C EM-grade 25nm 25708 3.5 25709 1.4 IgG4 ++ ++
Donkey-anti-Goat lgG (H&L) IgA - -
IgM + -
Particle Size Cat # Size(ml) Cat # Size(ml) IgD - -
4–8˚C Ultra-Small 25800 1.5 25801 .6 Goat Ig - ++
4–8˚C EM-grade 6nm 25802 2.5 25803 1.0 Sheep Ig - ++
4–8˚C EM-grade 10nm 25804 2.5 25805 1.0 Guinea Pig Ig ++ +
4–8˚C EM-grade 15nm 25805 3.5 25807 1.4 Chicken Ig - -
4–8˚C EM-grade 25nm 25808 3.5 25809 1.4 Pig Ig ++ +
Horse Ig - ++
Donkey-anti-Mouse lgG (H&L) Cow Ig + ++
Particle Size Cat # Size(ml) Cat # Size(ml) Dog Ig + +
4–8˚C Ultra-Small 25810 1.5 25811 .6
4–8˚C EM-grade 6nm 25812 2.5 25813 1.0
4–8˚C EM-grade 10nm 25814 2.5 25815 1.0 BSA Gold Tracer
4–8˚C EM-grade 15nm 25816 3.5 25817 1.4
Particle Size Cat # Size(ml) Cat # Size(ml)
4–8˚C EM-grade 25nm 25818 3.5 25819 1.4
4–8˚C Ultra-Small 25480 10 25481 5
Donkey-anti-Sheep lgG (H&L) 4–8˚C EM-grade 6nm 25483 10 25484 5
Particle Size Cat # Size(ml) Cat # Size(ml) 4–8˚C EM-grade 10nm 25486 10 25487 5
4–8˚C Ultra-Small 25820 1.5 25821 .6 4–8˚C EM-grade 15nm 25489 10 25490 5
4–8˚C EM-grade 6nm 25822 2.5 25823 1.0 4–8˚C EM-grade 25nm 25492 10 25493 5
4–8˚C EM-grade 10nm 25824 2.5 25825 1.0 Aurion BSA-Fragment Stabilized
4–8˚C EM-grade 15nm 25826 3.5 25827 1.4
4–8˚C EM-grade 25nm 25828 3.5 25829 1.4 Particle Size Cat # Size(ml) Cat # Size(ml)
Ultra-Small Gold 25498 20 - -
Cationic Gold Tracer Gold Sol
Particle Size Cat # Size(ml) Cat # Size(ml)
Particle Size Cat # Size(ml) Cat # Size(ml)
4–8˚C Ultra-Small 25440 10 25441 5
4–8˚C Ultra-Small 25509 20 - -
4–8˚C EM-grade 6nm 25443 10 25444 5
4–8˚C EM-grade 6nm 25510 100 - -
4–8˚C EM-grade 10nm 25446 10 25447 5
4–8˚C EM-grade 10nm 25512 100 - -
4–8˚C EM-grade 15nm 25449 10 25450 5
4–8˚C EM-grade 15nm 25514 100 - -
4–8˚C EM-grade 25nm 25452 10 25453 5
4–8˚C EM-grade 25nm 25516 100 - -
Anionic Gold Tracer Blocking Solutions
Particle Size Cat # Size(ml) Cat # Size(ml) Particle Size Cat # Size(ml)
4–8˚C Ultra-Small 25460 10 25461 5 4–8˚C Basic Blocking (For Protein A&G) 25595 30
4–8˚C EM-grade 6nm 25463 10 25464 5 4–8˚C Goat Gold Conjugates 25596 30
4–8˚C EM-grade 10nm 25466 10 25467 5 4–8˚C Rabbit Gold Conjugates 25597 30
4–8˚C EM-grade 15nm 25469 10 25470 5 4–8˚C Sheep Gold Conjugates 25598 30
4–8˚C EM-grade 25nm 25472 10 25473 5 4–8˚C Donkey Gold Conjugates 25599 30

84 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874

Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec02_072-090_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 12:53 AM Page 85

ImmunoGold Reagents SECTION 2

 Immunogold Reagent Kits – EM Grade

Complete kits with the following characteristics:  Ultra-Small Kits
 Two non-overlapping gold  Unparalleled low background Benefits of our US-KIT:
particle sizes. levels.
FOR EM:
 Coupled to: either  For use with rabbit and  For the most sensitive labeling in electron microscopy
Goat-anti-Rabbit and mouse monoclonal and
 For the penetration in ultra thin cryosections resulting in
Goat-anti-Mouse polyclonal primary antibodies.
enhanced detectability and sensitivity
lgG/lgM antibodies.  Acetylated serum albumin  New possibilities for pre-embedding labeling
 Affinity purified and cross with increased exposure of
 For the labeling of at least 330 on-grid specimens
adsorbed antibodies. negative charges.
Benefits: FOR LM:
 Covering over 90% of all applications in EM.  Premium reagents for penetration in hydrated sections
(paraffin, cryostat) and in slightly fixed cells
 For single and double labeling in Electron Microscopy
 Permanent, non-fading silver signal
 Most sensitive reagents compatible with counterstaining
4–8˚C
25540 EM-kit GAR-6/GAM-10/BSA-c™  For the immunolabeling of 200 slides
Kit consists of:
FOR IMMUNOBLOTTING:
• 1ml Goat-anti-Rabbit 6nm
• 1ml Goat-anti-Mouse lgG/lgM 10nm  Highest sensitivity
• 30ml BSA-c™ background suppressing agent  Black to brown/black signal suited for low level detection where
colored precipitates fail
4–8˚C 25544 EM-kit GAM-6/GAR-10/BSA-c™  For the immunogold labeling of 10-20 nitrocellulose
Kit consists of: immunoblot strips
• 1ml Goat-anti-Mouse lgG/lgM 6nm 4–8˚C 25550 US-kit GAR/GAM/BSA-c™/R-Gent SE-LM
• 1ml Goat-anti-Rabbit 10nm
• 30ml BSA-c™ background suppressing agent Kit consists of:
• 0.6ml Goat-anti-Rabbit GP-Ultra-Small
4–8˚C 25548 EM-kit PrA-6/PrA-10/BSA-c™ • 0.6ml Goat-anti-Mouse lgG/lgM GP-Ultra-Small
Kit consists of: • 30ml BSA-c™ background suppressing agent
• 1ml Protein A 6nm • SE-LM Silver Enhancement
• 1ml Protein A 10nm
• 30ml BSA-c™ background suppressing agent
4–8˚C
25552 US-kit GAR/GAM/BSA-c™/R-Gent SE-EM
Kit consists of:
 Custom Kits • 0.6ml Goat-anti-Rabbit GP-Ultra-Small
4–8˚C 25540-05 Custom EM Kit • 0.6ml Goat-anti-Mouse lgG/lgM GP-Ultra-Small
For customization of our EM Kits you get to choose the 2 vials of your • 30ml BSA-c™ background suppressing agent
EM Grade Reagent. Supplied with the kit as well is 30ml of BSA-c™. • SE-EM Silver Enhancement

4–8˚C 25550-05 Custom Ultra-Small Kit

4–8˚C
25550-10 Ultra-Small Starter Kit
For customization of our Ultra-Small Kits we now have available a make To give yourself the opportunity to make yourself familiar with our
it yourself kit where you get to choose the two vials of your Ultra-Small Ultra-Small Gold Conjugates – we have our Starter Kit. These kits are
Reagent. Also supplied with the kit is 30ml BSA-c™ and 2x30ml SE-LM sufficient for approximately 50 specimens.
Kit consists of:
4–8˚C 25550-06 Custom Ultra-Small Kit • 100 μl Ultra-Small Conjugate
For customization of our Ultra-Small Kits we now have available a make • 10ml BSA-c™
it yourself kit where you get to choose the two vials of your Ultra-Small • 2x2.5ml R-Gent SE-LM
Reagent. Also supplied with the kit is 30ml BSA-c™ and 30ml SE-EM. and a sample pack R-Gent SE-EM

 Blocking Solutions, Background Suppression, R-Gent Silver Enhancement

4–8˚C 25520 AURION R-Gent Silver Enhancement Kit 2x30ml 4–8˚C 25560 Cold Water Fish Skin Gelatin 40% 10ml
4–8˚C 25522 AURION R-Gent Silver Enhancement Kit 2x250ml 4–8˚C 25564 Tween-20 10ml
4–8˚C 25521 AURION R-Gent SE-EM Kit 30ml 4–8˚C 25568 Normal Rabbit Serum 5ml
4–8˚C 25521-90 AURION R-Gent SE-EM Kit 90ml 4–8˚C 25570 Normal Goat Serum 5ml
4–8˚C 25536 COL-AURION Total Protein Stain 500ml 4–8˚C 25574 Gum Arabic 20gr
4–8˚C 25554 Bovine Serum Albumin 25gr 4–8˚C 25578 Normal Sheep Serum 5ml
4–8˚C 25558 AURION BSA-c™ (acetylated BSA) 100ml 4–8˚C 25572 Normal Donkey Serum 5ml
4–8˚C 25557 AURION BSA-c™ (acetylated BSA) 30ml 4–8˚C 25830 Enhancement Conditioning Solution 100ml

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 85

Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec02_072-090_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 12:53 AM Page 86

SECTION 2 ImmunoGold Reagents

Fequently Asked Questions
We have collected answers to frequently asked questions from Is there a training program for immunogold (silver)
immunogold users. They are listed below. If your question is not staining where I can bring my own specimens?
listed on this page or you have further queries, please contact us EMS and Aurion organizes wet-workshops in Europe and the USA where
directly by phone or e-mail. We remain at your disposal. you preferably work with your own specimens and primary antibodies.
After all, that is where your interest lies. If required, we will expand our
What kind of particle size should I use?
activities to additional venues. The workshops last for two days and give
Always use the smallest particle size to fit your application. an in-depth view in immunogold (silver) staining. Detailed information on
Conjugates based on smaller particles are more efficient than larger the setup of our workshops can be found in this publication.
particle based conjugates. If visualization is difficult with smaller
particles these can be enlarged with silver enhancement. Very Is it possible to do pre-embedding labeling of
sensitive specimens for SEM observation are best served with a intracellular antigens?
larger particle size conjugate. This prevents ultra structural Yes. Single cells are most suited. Plant material with a thick
enhancement reagents. impenetrable wall is not. The Ultra-Small gold conjugates are the
conjugates of choice. In many cases a permeabilization step with
Is it true that gold conjugates are more background
NaBH4 suffices to open up the specimens and allow penetration of
prone than other conjugates?
reagents. Low concentrations of mild detergents like saponin help.
No! This fairy tale comes from the fact that gold conjugates are One thing should be emphasized: reaction times have to be
based on particles and that visualization is also based on separate prolonged since full penetration of the reagents to the internal
particles. Contrary to enzyme and fluorescent markers, gold antigens has to be achieved. To remove unreacted reagents after
conjugates are more like a digital system, either they are there and incubation wash procedures have to be adapted likewise! The
then you will see them, or they are not present. Enzyme and Aurion Newsletter #5 deals with this topic.
fluorescent markers are sooner to be considered as “analogue”
markers, their visibility in detection increases with their local How can I verify that my conjugates are still active?
concentration or with the time the enzyme marker can produce a There is a simple procedure to check this. It is described in great
visible reaction product. An unbiased look at controls in detail in Aurion’s Newsletter #4. In short: you need a nitro-cellulose
fluorescence shows always a low level of light that is inherent to the strip, apply dots from a dilution series of your primary antibody and
presence of double bonds in biological compounds and on top of incubate the strip with the gold reagent. The dots will stain red with
this comes the fluorescence from the labeled antibodies. Likewise the larger conjugates. When testing an Ultra-Small conjugate silver
will an unbiased look at control specimens incubated only with enhancement has to be applied for visualization.
alkaline phosphatase or peroxidase labeled antibodies usually show
a faint overall staining of the specimen. Such faint levels are easily How can I verify that the silver enhancement
accepted or even filtered out. You cannot do this with gold reagents are still fine?
conjugates since they are based on particles. Again, there is a simple procedure to check this. It is described in
great detail in our Newsletter #4. In short: you need a nitro-cellulose
Should I use a secondary gold conjugate or strip, apply dots from a dilution series of your gold conjugate and
Protein A (or G)? incubate the strip with the silver enhancement reagents. The dots
That depends on what your goal is. Using secondary conjugates should become brown-black. During this period of time the mix of
results in a higher labeling density. Therefore it is often said that reagents should remain glass clear without any visible presence of
secondary conjugates are more sensitive than Protein A conjugates. silver caused by auto nucleation.
This is partly true. Protein A (or G) recognizes only one site on a
The activity of the Silver Enhancement reagent SE-EM for Electron
primary antibody molecule. Binding will occur only when this site is
microscopy can be tested by adding 10μl of the enhancement mix.
available and not obscured by its environment. Secondary
The solution s should turn yellow in 30-45 minutes.
conjugates recognize more sites on primaries and therefore the
chance that a primary antibody will be detected is greater. Is it advisable to use outdated conjugates?
Essentially this is the increase in sensitivity. As long as their reactivity is OK and there are not too many clusters
If all primary antibodies would be available to the sane extent for formed this is no problem. Gold conjugates are very stable. There
binding to either Protein A or a secondary antibody conjugate, then may be some release of protein from the particle surface with time,
the use of the latter would only result in more particles. This helps but generally this does not result in reduced reactivity. The reactivity
in localizing antigens at low magnifications, in other words this is an of the conjugate is easily checked with a dot-spot test as described
increase in detectability. in Newsletter #4. Cluster formation may increase with time,
depending on the type of conjugated protein and the particle size.
The larger the particles the more clusters. These can be removed by
centrifugation of the diluted conjugate before use.

86 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874

Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec02_072-090_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 12:53 AM Page 87

ImmunoGold Reagents SECTION 2

Fequently Asked Questions

Is it possible to double label using two antibodies were used at all) on the gold conjugate that was used. If silver
from the same animal source? enhancement is fine, the next step is to test the gold conjugate on
Yes, there are ways to do this. One is by using Protein G or Protein the primary antibody used and so on.
A conjugates with different particle sizes. The procedure would be: If it proves that the problem is not in the reagents, you will have to
first incubate with primary antibody l, detect this with Protein A (or look into antigen preservation. Is a different fixation due? Or a
G) with the smaller particle size. Then incorporate an incubation different embedding medium? Using light microscopical evaluation
with excess free Protein A or G (50-100 μg/ml). This will block of the results such questions are answered without tedious EM
practically all binding sites for Protein A or G. Next, incubate for the experimental work.
second antigen with primary antibody ll and detect this with the
I am having background problems. Is this due to the
larger sized Protein A or G gold conjugate.
gold conjugate?
A second possibility is to use one-step incubations with a mix of
When specimens are blocked correctly and the right composition
primary antibodies, each labeled directly with a different gold
and condition of incubation buffer is used, background levels should
particle size. We offer a custom labeling service. Details can be
not be interfering with specific signals. Some background will
found in the section on custom labeling.
always exist: to some extent all compounds have a certain affinity
What kind of grids should I use for silver for other compounds and depending on availability and
enhancement? concentration an interaction may occur. There is no absolute black
Nickel is the material of choice. Gold grids are out of the question and white in this respect.
as they will be neatly enhanced as well. The same with copper. When you leave out the primary antibody incubation and only use
Nickel grids are preferred to copper ones for immuno incubations the gold step and your background has become much reduced,
anyway, since nickel is more inert and less poisonous to immuno or then your primary antibody causes background. Remedy: purify the
enzyme reactions. primary antibody by either affinity chromatography (in case of an
Nickel grids can be annoying because of their magnetic properties. antiserum) and/or by cross-adsorption. If you have unacceptable
This is easily overcome by using either non-magnetic tweezers or by levels of background without using a primary incubation, then the
using a flattened loop to transfer grids from droplet to droplet during specimen has a tendency to bind to gold conjugates.
immuno incubations. We do sell a perfect-loop (70944) for this Background may have many causes which are centered around
application. three different types of interactions:

What about silver enhancement and OsO4? • Residual fixative activity, which is eliminated by using a NaBH4 or
Glycine block step prior to the protein block step.
OSO4 fixation can be used before incubation, after incubation or
after silver enhancement. • Stickiness to hydrophobic areas (embedding medium, lipid rich
specimen compounds). This is reduced by using an adequate
• Because of its destructive effect on antigens OSO4 fixation is not protein block step involving a partly hydrophobic protein like BSA
often used when immuno incubations are intended. However, in or Casein.
general silver enhancing immuno incubated OSO4 fixed
specimens causes no difficulties. • Charge-based interactions causing negatively charged reagents
such as antibodies and gold conjugates to adhere to oppositely
• An Osmium fixation step can be introduced after incubation to charged areas in the specimen (notorious are the histone
improve contrast in specimens. As stated before, applying silver proteins, some collagen types and poly-L-lysine that is sometimes
enhancement generally causes no difficulties. used to make sections stick to surfaces). This type of interaction
• On occasion in the past, using OSO4 fixation after silver can only be overcome by adding an excess of negatively charged
enhancement used to lead to the removal of part of the deposited indifferent molecules to the incubation media. We have developed
silver. However, with the introduction of SE-EMplus this is no longer a chemically modified BSA especially for this purpose. Newsletter
the case, as the resulting enhanced particles are no longer #1 gives in-depth information regarding it.
sensitive to oxidation.

I get no positive results, now what?

When your incubated specimens look as clean as your controls,
either (one or more of) the reagents are inactive, or the antigens are
destroyed, masked or absent. The cause is easily found by
performing tests working backwards through the incubation protocol
using dot-spot tests as described in Newsletter #4.
First test the activity of the silver enhancement reagents (if they

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 87

Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec02_072-090_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 12:53 AM Page 88

SECTION 2 ImmunoGold Reagents

Fequently Asked Questions
Are there any fora which I can address with What about sensitivity, signal-to-noise ratios and
questions regarding labelling or microscopy? detectability?
Feel free to address our HELPDESK by e-mail with questions Sensitivity can be considered at different levels in the total
regarding immunolabeling. preparation and incubations. Ideally during preparation one would
There are a few newsgroups which may be of interest: like to preserve all antigens present. In many cases this is not
bionet.cellbiol, bionet.cellbiol.cytonet, bionet.molbio.methds- possible. But at least a representative fraction should be preserved
reagnts and sci.bio.immunocytochem. There is a microscopy and be available for immuno labeling. It all depends on the
listserver to which you can subscribe and which offers a platform to preparation procedure (fixation, embedding, temperature, etc.),
ask questions regarding light and electron microscopy in all its which leaves you with a specimen or section with a given number of
facets. You can subscribe by sending an e-mail message to available and recognizable antigens. The ensuing detection protocol
ListServer@MSA.Microscopy.Com. The message only has to has 100% sensitivity if all the remaining antigens are detected, i.e.
contain the words "subscribe micrsocopy". are represented by at least one gold particle or marker molecule.
Again, due to masking and steric hindrance by the specimen
How can I do a controlled silver enhancement with composition this will only in exceptional cases by fully attained.
pre-embedding? The immuno labeling sensitivity thus expresses the degree to which
With pre-embedding there are 2 possibilities: either the available antigens can be detected by the employed combination of
enhancement is done before embedding or on the sections after primary antibody and secondary conjugate.
embedding. We prefer to do the enhancement on sections (on
The quality of the primary antibody is the next important item.
nickel grids) since this gives more control over the degree of
Theoretically the Kd-value of an antibody/antigen reaction is a
enhancement. Using longer enhancement times allows to observe
measure for the dilution at which the incubations should be
larger (even ultra thin) sections in the light microscope. This
performed and for the stability of the ensuing bond. Sensitivity will
facilitates searching for the area in the specimens where a reaction
go up with more concentrated antibody solutions up to a maximum
has occurred and allows easy targeting and trimming down to the
level. However, when the primary antibody shows cross-reactivity
area of interest for EM sectioning. Shorter enhancement is then
there is not necessarily an improved signal-to-noise ratio. The
used on sections for EM.
reliability of the detection by the primary antibody improves in such
Using enhancement before embedding has the disadvantage that cases with higher dilutions, probably leading to a smaller amount of
once enhancement proves to be too long (resulting in too large antigens detected, but to an improved signal-to-noise ratio.
particles) this can not be reversed.
Thus, sensitivity at the level of the primary antibody has to be
In which case should I use a Single Fab or F(ab’)2 balanced against the signal-to-noise ratio.
conjugate instead of the complete immunoglobulin The last step is the quality of the secondary reagent. In fact you will
conjugate? be looking at a number of gold particles which represents a number
The size of a conjugate is co-responsible for its efficiency. The of secondary antibodies which have detected a number of primary
overall size is determined by the particle size and by the size of the antibodies. For the interaction between the secondary reagent and
proteins adsorbed onto the particle surface. That is why we the primary antibody the same rules apply as indicated for the
introduced Ultra-Small particles in the first place. Whenever a antigen/primary antibody reaction.
specimen is relatively dense or intensely cross-linked immuno Detectability reflects the degrees to which the final result of all the
reagents will be more hindered in their action. If you are already reactions involved can actually be seen. This is depending on the
using an Ultra-Small conjugate further improvement may result from right match between particle size and magnification. Ultra-Small
using a single Fab or F(ab’)2 fragment of the specific secondary particle-based conjugates for instances are among the most
antibody instead of the intact lg-molecule. efficient detection systems, but you will only detect them after silver
enhancement (in most applications).
When should I use normal serum in the incubations?
It is a good idea to use normal serum as an additive to the blocking What is epi-polarization microscopy?
and incubation buffer when using secondary antibody conjugates. Epi-polarization is a technique used for the very sensitive light
The normal serum should be the same species as the secondary microscopical observation of metal particles. Where bright field
antibody conjugate. Its action is similar to the action of BSA. Please microscopy depends on contrast levels in discriminating signals,
be careful when using normal sera to suppress background with epi-polarization works differently: provided particles are large
Protein A or Protein G conjugates. These conjugates detect several enough individual particles will be observed. So in fact you are
lg-types from different species which, when used as normal serum evaluating your labelingresults on the same basis as with an
additive, would lead to an impressive amount of gold particles all electron microscope by looking at individual particles. This makes
over the specimen. We offer several Blocking Solutions tailored for this technique so valuable as it builds a bridge between the light
specific secondary antibody or protein A/G incubations. level and the electron microscopical observation.

88 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874

Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec02_072-090_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 12:53 AM Page 89

ImmunoGold Reagents SECTION 2

Fequently Asked Questions Custom Labeling

What you need to do is this: a high-quality light The standard series of AURION ImmunoGold reagents is intended for the two and three step
microscope equipped with an epi-illumination detection of antigens. Although these approaches cover the majority of applications
occasionally there may exist a need for a direct label where the gold particles are coupled
source, preferably a high pressure Hg-lamp
directly to the primary antibody or, more general, to a protein or peptide with specific
(although a halogen source may also do). Many binding properties.
laboratories have an epi-fluorescence microscope
To fulfill these needs AURION and EMS offers a custom labeling service for antibodies,
at their disposition with a 40X (or higher) oil
antibody fragments, proteins, and peptides with gold particles of any requested size,
objective. Such microscope equipment forms the including ULTRA SMALL gold clusters. AURION designs and manufactures such custom
correct basis. You only need to implement an epi- conjugates in close cooperation and in agreement with the principal investigator.
polarization filter (the so-called epi-block or IGSS
Starting material
filter) in the filter housing. The epi-block contains
two polarizers, differing 90 degrees in orientation As a rule AURION will only accept pure substances as starting material, either lyophilized or
dissolved in a medium of known chemical composition. Interfering substances must not be
with respect to each other.
present.
How does it work (in short)? High intensity light Quality control criteria
passes the first polarizer in the epi-block and
The custom prepared product is quality controlled by AURION according to our in-house
becomes polarized. The polarized incident light
standards with respect to size distribution and clustering. In agreement with the principal
passes the objective lens and interacts with the investigator the binding substance’s specific quality control criteria are determined. These
specimen. The biological material hardly gives any are tailored for each individual assignment. As a matter of course the custom conjugate is
reflection, and the reflected light is unmodified. approved only when both sets of quality control criteria have been met.
The metal particles mirror the polarized light,
A FEW EXAMPLES
thereby randomizing the polarization angle.
• AURION successfully conjugated a number of polyclonal antibodies, mouse mono-
Reflected light passes up through the objective clonal antibodies, F(ab’)2 and F(ab) fragments, high and low density lipoproteins,
lens. On its way to the eye pieces or the photo as well as peptides such as an Angiotensin derivative (octapeptide), Interleukin II,
camera the light passes the second polarizer in the Tumor Necrosis Factor and a number of peptide hormones.
epi-block. While doing so, light with the original • The efficiency of coupling (recovery of protein) for the above mentioned custom
conjugates has been greater than 70% on all occasions, while efficiencies up to
polarization angle (the way it was polarized in the
90% are no exception.
first place before ever hitting the specimen) is
extinguished, whereas light that has become No cure, no pay
randomly polarized (and which comes from the The custom labeling service is on the basis of “no cure, no pay,” with the exception that an
silver metal particles) passes the epi-block. As a intake fee applies to each actual laboratory attempt.
result you will see individual bright stars (the We invite you to contact us directly if you require information which is more tailored to your specific applications.

gold/silver particles) against a dark background.

Epi-polarization observation can be combined in
real time with bright field imaging, providing for a ImmunoGold Newsletters & Flyers
very sensitive detection of even extremely low T Newsletter 1 “Optimized Immuno labelling using AURION Blocking Solutions and AURION BSA-c™”
by Jan L. M. Leunissen and P. van de Plas
amounts of antigen while still having the advantage
T Newsletter 2 “In Situ Hybridization for Light and Electron Microscopy using Ultra-Small
of full morphological details in the specimen. ImmunoGold Detection and Silver Enhancement” by O. Sibon
My specimens for pre-embedding have T Newsletter 3 “The Dot-Spot Test: a Simple Method to Monitor Immunoreagent Reactivity and
Influence of Fixation on Antigen Recognition” by P. van de Plas
a lot more antigens than a T Newsletter 4 “Ultra-Small gold conjugates and R-Gent SE-EM. Silver Enhancement Reagent in
corresponding ultrathin section. Should Pre-embedding Single and Double Immuno labeling.” by Hong Yi and Jan L. M. Leumissen
I use more concentrated reagents? T Newsletter 5 “Ultra Small Gold Reagents and R-Gent SE-EM in Pre-embedding Single and Double
Labeling” Hong Yi and Jan L.M. Leunissen
The increased amount of antigens should be
T Newsflyer 1 “Background Suppression in Immunoperoxidase Cytochemistry using AURION BSA-
balanced by a larger amount of reagent volume at c™” by Wim Voorhout and Katja Teerds
an appropriate dilution (the same as used on T Newsflyer 2a) “Double Label Immunohistochemistry for the Separate Observation of Two
sections with low amounts of antigen), and not by Antigens using Epi-Polarization Microscopy for the ImmunoGold-Silver Technique and Fluorescence
more concentrated reagents. The reason is that Microscopy for the Alkaline Phosphatase Staining” by C.M. van der Loos
with increased concentration more cross-reactions T Newsflyer 2b) “A Comparison between the Streptavidin-Biotin-Alkaline Phosphatase Method and
may occur and signal-to-noise ratios will decrease. the ImmunoGold Technique using Ultra-Small Gold Particles and Silver Enhancement” by R.
Willemsen
Incubating specimens for pre-embedding in larger
volume quantities is best performed on a rocking
table for a prolonged time to warrant penetration to
antigenic sites in the specimen.

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 89

Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec02_072-090_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 12:53 AM Page 90

SECTION 2 ImmunoGold Reagents

EMS and Aurion ImmunoGold/Silver Staining Workshops

Reactions of Participants During a 3 day training the theoretical and practical aspects of the most up-to-date methods and
applications will be dealt with both for light and electron microscopy.
Preferentially participants work with their own specimens and primary antibodies so that applicability
and advantages of the ImmunoGold Silver Staining technique are maximally exploited by each individual
participant. Personal attention provides for optimum broadening of knowledge which is of permanent
advantage in individual daily work situations in terms of time savings and improvements of results!

ImmunoGold Workshop
SET-UP Theory and Practice
DURATION 3 days
• labeling of own or Aurion specimens (LM & EM)
PRACTICE • incubation methods
• testing antigenicity/reactivity
• principles of immunogold labeling
• preparation of conjugates
• LM & EM applications
THEORY • immuno detections
• in situ hybridisation
• silver enhancement for LM & EM
• background problems
TUTORS • Ing. P. van de Plas, Dr. J. Leunissen

If you are interested in attending or sponsoring a workshop

please give us a call and ask for Stacie Kirsch.

90
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec03_091_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 12:57 AM Page 91

SECTION 3

Embedding
Media Kits
Durcupan, Epo-Fix, JB-4,
LR White, Histocryl,
and more...
Technovit GMA and MMA
Unicryl
Casting, Potting, and
Encapsulating Resins

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 91

Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec03_092-102_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 1:05 AM Page 92

SECTION 3 Embedding Media Kits

*Please note that wherever DMP-30 is listed as the ® DER 332-732
accelerator in our embedding media kits you have the Three different mixtures: one for relatively soft blocks, one for harder blocks for
option to use BDMA in place of it. BDMA is less viscous, collagenous tissue, and a tougher one if required. Lockwood, W.R.
has a longer shelf life, and offers better penetration Anatomical Record, 150, 129 (1964)
(it should be noted, however, that in order to achieve RT 14000 DER 332-732 Kit consists of:
the optimum results when using BDMA in place of 2x225ml DER 332 kit
225ml DER 732
DMP-30 you must vary the amount. DMP-30: 1.5-2%;
450ml DDSA; Specially Distilled
BDMA: 2.5-3%). *50ml DMP-30

TECHNICAL TIP ® Durcupan,

DMP-30 and DMAE vs. BDMA Water Soluble
As has been stated in our first issue of NEWS AND VIEWS Issue A water soluble
1 pg. 3, BDMA proves to be a much better choice for an embedding medium for
accelerator than BMP-30. It is much less viscous, has a longer EM based on an aliphatic
shelf life, and offers better penetration of the tissue. When using
polyepoxide.
BDMA in place of DMP-30 more uniform embedding is obtained.
Now it has been shown that the same holds true for BDMA vs. A Fluka A.G., Buchs.
DMAE. It is highly recommended that when choosing and Switzerland-Registered
embedding medium and its corresponding accelerator you Trademark.
consider using BDMA in place of DMP-30 and DMAE. Here at
ELECTRON MICROSCOPY SCIENCES we have now made available RT 14020 Kit 260g for a minimum of 10 embeddings kit
all of our epoxy resin (Araldite and Embed) kits that come with
DMP-30 or DMAE., as standard, BDMA as an alternative to them. ® Durcupan ACM, Epoxy Resin
PLEASE NOTE THAT IN ORDER TO ACHIEVE OPTIMUM An aromatic polyepoxide; a colorless resin of relatively
RESULTS WHEN USING BDMA IN PLACE OF DMP-30 THE low viscosity, with virtually no shrinkage.
FOLLOWING PROPORTIONS SHOULD BE USED:
DMP-30: 1.5-2% ADDED TO THE FINAL VOLUME; RT 14040 Kit 1200ml: kit
BDMA: 2.5-3% ADDED TO THE FINAL VOLUME. Single Component A
Single Component B

® Diethylene Glycol Distearate (DEGDS/DGD)

® Araldite 502
DGD is a removable embedding medium (for thin and thick sections)
Luft’s Formula Polymerization takes place overnight so blocks can be
that provides embedment free sections. Good for immunolabeling and
sectioned the next day. J. Biochem. Biophy. Cytol. 9, 409 (1961)
high resolution light microscopy.
RT 13900 Araldite 502 Kit consists of:
450ml Araldite 502 kit Advantages:
450ml DDSA; Specially Distilled T Thin or thick embedment free sections can be obtained.
*50ml DMP-30
T Sections are easy to cut and ribbons are easily obtainable.
T Enhances the integrity of the specimen as it floats on the water.
® Araldite 6005 T Sections produce interference colors according to its thickness.
Also known as American Araldite.
The blocks are slightly harder than those produced by Araldite 502. Ethanol and n-butyl alcohol are used as dehydrating agents
RT 13920 Araldite 6005 Kit consists of: T Capco, Krockmalnic, & Penman (1984). A New Method of
450ml Araldite 6005 kit Preparing Embedment Free Sections For TEM: Applications to
450ml DDSA; Specially Distilled the Cytoskeletal Framework and Other 3D Networks. JCB Vol.
100ml BDMA 98, pp. 1878.
225ml DBP T Valdimarsson & Huebner (1989). DEGDS as an Embedding Medium
for Immunofluorescence Microscopy. Biochem. Cell Biol. 67:242.
® Araldite, Embed 812 (Epon-812) T Nickerson, Krockmalnic, He, & Penman (1990). Immuno-localiza-
tion in Three Dimensions: Immunogold Staining of Cytoskeletal
Mollenhauer Epon-Araldite Formula. For hard blocks and high image and Nuclear Matrix Proteins in Resinless Electron Microscopy
contrast. Blocks are easily sectioned.Stain Tech., 39,11 (1964) Sections. PNAS Vol. 87, pp. 2259.
RT 13940 Araldite-EMbed (Mollenhauer’s Kit) consists of:
450ml EMbed-812 kit RT 14010 Kit consists of:
450ml Araldite 502 450ml DGD kit
450ml DDSA; Specially Distilled 450ml Ethanol
*50ml DMP-30 450ml n-Butyl alcohol
DGD Embedding Kit

92 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874

Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec03_092-102_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 1:05 AM Page 93

Embedding Media Kits SECTION 3

TECHNICAL TIP
Epoxy Resins
Common problems, causes, and solutions
Problems associated with poor embedding in epoxy resins:
• Blocks are difficult to section
• Sections may disintegrate upon contact with water or the  Epo-Fix
electron beam Epo-Fix is an old product that has
• Holes in the sections existed only in the metallographic
• Unevenly cured blocks
field until now. After extensive
• Blocks are either too soft or too hard
Factors that cause poor embedding in epoxy resins: testing in our labs we have found that it is a perfect embedding media
• The presence of water in absolute dehydration solvents and in for a majority of material specimens.
the ingredients of the embedding mixture Until now, LR White has been the most commonly used embedding
Solutions to the causes: media for materials due to the block hardness it offered, but there are
• Use either fresh or well capped bottles of dehydration solvents. difficulties associated with LR White. For instance, the adherance to the
• Embedding should be carried out at relative humidities below specimen is poor and additives are required to improve its adherance.
50%. Dellman, H.D. and Pearson, C.B. (1977). “Better epoxy Another major problem is the inability to orient the specimen correctly in
resin embedding for electron microscopy at a low relative order to cut you block afterwards. This is due to the fact that LR White
humidity”. Stain Technol., 52:5 needs to be oxygen starved and gelatin capsules (vertical) are
• Since epoxy resin is hygroscopic, extreme care should be
recommended by the manufacturer for use. Another problem is that
taken to prevent contamination by water.
• Accurate measurement of accelerators. polymerization time in the oven can take over 24 hours.
• Complete mixing without incurring air into the mixture (Use a Epo-Fix remedies all of these problems. It has very good sectioning
ptfe or glass rod for at least 20 minutes). properties, good adherance to the sample, very low viscosity, easy
curing in molds (no orientation problems), and quick cure times.
 EMbed-812/ DER 736 Epo-Fix Technical Data: A two component epoxy resin, characterized by
negligible shrinkage during curing and good mechanical properties in its
This mixture is less viscous than the final embedding mixture of EMbed-
hardened state. It is particularly suited for embedding hard samples of
812.
complicated shape and for vacuum impregnation. Samples such as paper,
RT 14130 Kit consists of: silicon, ceramics, metals, wafers, and chips are suitable to be used with
2x225ml DER 736 kit Epo-Fix. It has low viscosity, low vapour pressure, good wetting properties,
450ml EMbed-812 and minimal shrinkage. It hardens at room temperature without significant
450ml NMA
generation of heat in approximately 8 hours (no damage from heat or
*50ml DMP-30
pressure), and at increased temperatures, 60°C, the hardening time is
reduced to 2 hours. It should be noted that if you place Epo-Fix in a
 EMbed-812 desiccator during curing you will eliminate any air bubbles.
Electron Microscopy
Sciences’ replacement for RT 1232 Epo-Fix Kit consists of:
1kg resin, kit
the discontinued Epon-
120gm hardener,
812. Produces the same 15 cups,
results in terms of 15 stirrers,
preservation, handling, 1 x 5ml and 20ml syringes
sectioning, and staining as
the old Epon-812.  Gach (Glutaraldehyde/Carbohydrazide)
A water and lipid-retaining embedding polymer for EM. Excellent
 Hayat, M. A. Principles & Tech. for EM. Second Edition (1981) preservation of lipids and ultrastructure.
 Mascorro, J.A. and Kirby, G.S. Physical characteristics of “old” Hechman, C.A. et al. (1973) J. Ultrastruct. Res. 42,156.
Epon 812 and various Epon-like replacements. Proc. 44th Ann. RT 15920 Gach Kit consists of:
Meet. Electron. Microsc. Soc. Am., pp.222-223 (1986) 10x10ml 50% EM grade Glutaraldehyde kit
 Mascorro, J.A. and Kirby, G.S. Novel Epoxy/Anhydride 10x1.5g Carbohydrazide
Alternatives for Biological Electron Microscopy: Physical and
Performance Characteristics of EMbed 812 and LX 112 in combi-
nation with NSA/NMA/DMAE. Proc. 47th Ann. Meet. EMSA., pp.  GMA, Water Soluble
1000-1001 (1989). Glycol Methacrylate embedding medium provides excellent preservation
 Mascorro, J.A. and Kirby, G.S. Viscosity Characteristics and (especially enzymatic autoradiographic studies). Good for E.M., L.M., and
Hardening Rates for EMbed 812 and LX 112 with alternative Histo. Leduc. & Bernard, (1967) J. Ultrastr. Res., 4, 196-99.
Anhydride and Catalyst Choices. Proc. 49th Ann. Meet. EMSA. (1991). RT 14200 GMA Kit consists of:
450ml GMA kit
RT 14120 EMbed-812 Kit consists of:
225ml n-Butylmethacrylate
450ml EMbed-812 kit
15g 2,4-Dichlorobenzoyl Peroxide paste
450ml DDSA; Specially Distilled
450ml NMA
*50ml DMP-30

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 93

Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec03_092-102_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 1:05 AM Page 94

SECTION 3 Embedding Media Kits

 GMA/PEG  JB-4™ Embedding Kit
Polyethylene Glycol - Glycol methacrylate mixture. A water miscible A water soluble embedding media which is based on Glycol Methacrylate
embedding medium for cytochemical studies and enzyme localization (GMA) plastic embedding. It is intended for use in preparing samples for
when light and electron microscopy need to be correlated. high resolution microscopes (HRLM). The catalyzed monomer acts as a
Spaur, R.C. & Moriarty, G., (1977) J Histochem. Cytochem., 23:163. dehydration and infiltration agent; therefore, complete dehydration through
100% ethanol is not necessary (although recommended for large or dense
RT 14250 GMA/PEG Kit consists of: tissues). Conventional paraffin sections have a greater degree of shrinkage
450ml Glycol methacrylate, GMA kit
225ml n-Butyl methacrylate
and produce inadequate morphology when compared to JB-4.
50ml Ethylene glycol dimethacrylate Features:
20ml Polyethylene Glycol 400
15g Benzoyl Peroxide Paste  Thin sections (.5-2.0 micron) with excellent morphological
structure preservation.
 Hard-Plus Resin-812  Water-clear blocks; casts in 90 minutes max. at room temp.
A newly formulated resin that enables the processing of specimens that  Good lipid and enzyme retention when processing at low
have a tendency to wrinkle and be problematic. temperatures (4°C).
 Removal of JB-4 resin prior to staining is not necessary.
In general, Hard Plus Resin-812 and its WPE numbers (weight per
epoxide) do not vary much from batch to batch and it also has good  Clearing agents such as xylene and chloroform are not needed.
stability under the electron beam and it stains well with heavy metals.  Higher clarity and contrast than with paraffin sections.
Furthermore, the viscosity of the Hard-Plus Resin-812 is lower than the  Easy processing of difficult specimens such as calcified bone
original Epon-812, making infiltration of the tissue more complete. For and delicate embryonic tissue.
processing and embedding, it can be used exactly the same way as  It produces harder blocks which is ideal for dense samples,
Epon-812, but normally, it is not necessary to use intermediate such as bone
solvents, such as propylene oxide, hence, infiltration can immediately References:
follow with absolute alcohol. Polymerization is normally at 60ºC for 24 1. Hofman E.O. & Flores, T.R., High Resolution LM in Renal Path., Amer. J. of
– 48 hours. Longer times or higher temperatures (70ºC or more) will Clin. Path., 76:5 (1981)
give a harder block. 2. Beckstead, J.H., Blood, 57(6):1008 (1981)
For larger samples (>1x1mm3) the use of a intermediate solvent is 3. Brinn, N &Pickett, P., J. Histotech., 2(5):125-130 (1979)
recommended. 4. Block, Matthew H., et al., Lab. Med., 13(5)(1982)
5. Helander, K.G., J. Microscopy, 132:223 (1983)
Hard-Plus Resin-812 is supplied only as a premix kit. All components
6. Cole, M.B., J. Microscopy, 127:139 (1982)
are pre-measured, and you have to do is combine them in the right 7. Higuchi, S., et al., Stain Tech., 54(1):5-12 (1979)
order and mix thoroughly. Each kit contains five separate mini-kits, 8. Van DeVeldt, S., Am. J. Clin. Path.,73:121 (1980)
making approximately 100g each. 9. Horton, W.A., J. Histochem. Cytochem., 31:417 (1983)
RT 14115 Hard-Plus Resin-812 Kit consists of: 10. Tacha, D.E. & Richard, T.C.., J. Histotech., 4(2):59 (1981)
5x50g Hard-Plus Resin-812 kit
5x50g Hardener Hard-Plus
RT 14270-00 JB-4 Kit Consists of:
5x 2.5ml Accelerator 800 ml Solution A kit
Hard-Plus Resin-812 Kit 30 ml Solution B
12 g Catalyst
RT 14270-01 JB-4 Solution A only 800ml
 HPMA, Water Soluble RT 14270-04 JB-4 Solution B only 30ml
HPMA is a water-soluble resin used for cytochemical applications. RT 14270-06 JB-4 Catalyst 12g
Infiltration follows fixation of the tissue so there is no extraction of
materials caused by dehydration in alcohols. Leduc, E.H. et al., (1965)
 JB-4 Plus™ Embedding Kit
J. Cell Biol., 26:137. JB-4 Plus offers all of the same features as JB-4 with the
following additions:
RT 14220 HPMA Kit consists of:
 It produces less of an exothermic reaction than JB4 which is
450ml HPM kit
good for temperature sensitive tissues.
15g Benzoyl Peroxide paste
 It produces harder blocks which is ideal for dense samples,
 Immuno-Bed™ Embedding Resin such as bone.
 A low viscosity media for light microscopy and immuno- histo- RT 14272-00 JB-4 Plus Embedding Kit Consists of:
chemistry techniques. 500 ml Solution A kit
15 ml Solution B
 It allows for the penetration of large immunoglobulins through 8 g Benzoyl Peroxide Catalyst
the plastic sections for demonstration of antigenic sites. RT 14272-01 JB-4 Plus Solution A only 500ml
J. Histochem, Cytochem., 35:595 (1987) RT 14272-04 JB-4 Plus Solution B only 15ml
14260-00 Immuno-Bed ™ Embedding Resin Kit consists of: RT 14272-06 JB-4 Plus Catalyst 8g
7500 ml Solution A kit
50 ml Solution B  Block Holder, Chucks and Molding Cup Trays
9 g Catalyst Kit See page 250 
0-5˚C 14260-01 Immuno-Bed Solution A only 750 ml
RT 14260-04 Immuno-Bed Solution B only 50 ml
 Tissue-Tack Adhesive for JB-4  See page 21, 517
RT
14260-06 Immuno-Bed Catalyst only 9g  UV Mount Medium for JB-4  See page 21, 517

94 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874

Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec03_092-102_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 1:05 AM Page 95

Embedding Media Kits SECTION 3

® LR Gold Resin ® LR White Resin
The London Resin Company’s acrylic “LR Gold” offers the histochemist A very low viscosity (8cps), non-toxic
and immunocytochemist the advantage of working with unfixed tissues resin, suitable for both Light and
at low temperatures, thus allowing many fixation-sensitive procedures to Electron Microscopy.
be carried out in 1-4 microns resin sections at -25°C using visible light. LR White is a polar monomer
It is non-toxic and has a low viscosity. polyhydroxylated acromatic acrylic
RT 14370 LR Gold Resin Kit consists of: resin. It can be cured by heat or by UV
500ml LR Gold Resin kit light. Sections of polymerized LR White
100g Polyvinylpyrolidone resin are hydrophilic. This character
50g Benzoyl Peroxide allows immuno-cytochemistry reagents
50g Benzil to easily penetrate into the sections and
RT 14371 LR Gold Resin only; 500ml
etching of the sections is not necessary (etching sections will effect
delicate tissue antigens). LR White sections also show minimal non-
specific staining. Its low viscosity makes it ideal for infiltrating
TECHNICAL TIP decalcified bone and teeth as well as plant tissues. It is available in
LR White Technical Tips medium and hard grade.
1. If you are having difficulty locating your tissue in LR White T Newman, G.R. (1987). Use and abuse of LR White. Histochem. J.,
after it polymerizes due to the fact that the color of your tissue is 19:118
the same as LR White once polymerized, there is a solution. Dye T Newman, G.R. (1989). LR White embedding medium for colloidal
the LR White using any oil soluble dye. Remember, however, that gold methods. In: Colloidal Gold: Principles, Methods, and
the intensity of the dye needs to be very high if contrast is to be Applications, Vol.2 (Hayat, M.A., Ed.). Academic Press. San Diego
seen at high magnification. Dyes with phenol or tertiary amine and London
groups should be avoided because they effect the rate of cure of
the resin. Note for ordering and using LR White:
It is our experience that Sudan Black (cat. # 21610) is the best LR White supplied by EMS as a standard already is catalyzed to make it
dye to use due to its color intensity. convenient for the end user (For those customers overseas,you do have
To make up a stock solution, add the dry stain to the resin until a a choice to receive the LR White with the catalyst on the side, with
saturated solution is obtained. Then proceed as usual. instructions showing you how to catalyze the resin).
2. If you require the pH of LR White to be neutral (the standard is For most biological embedments, the LR-White-resin-only is needed.
5) you can adjust it by adding small amounts of caustic soda or a When the accelerator is used only 1 drop of accelerator is added to 10
primary amine. The best primary amine to use is Ethanolamine ml of LR White resin. This mixture polymerizes at room temperature in a
(absolute) for it will mix into the resin very easily. Small amounts
short period of time (<1 hour) Infiltration with this mixture is poor.
are to be titrated into the resin and the pH should be constantly
checked until 7 is reached. Do not add more than 50ml. This mixture is mainly intended for one who embeds rocks, metals,
minerals etc. where infiltration is not needed.
Kit consists of: 500ml LR White Resin, 10ml UV accelerator
TECHNICAL TIP 0-5˚C 14380 Medium Grade (14381, 14385) kit
0-5˚C 14382 Hard Grade (14383, 14385) kit
Adherance Of LR White Sections To Glass Slides 0-5˚C 14381 LR White resin only; Med. Grade 500ml
For Silver Enhancement Immunogold Labeling 0-5˚C 14381-UC LR White resin only; Med. Grade Uncatalyzed 500ml
A continuing problem in immunogold labeling of 1 micron thick 0-5˚C 14383 LR White resin only; Hard Grade 500ml
0-5˚C 14383-UC LR White resin only; Hard Grade Uncatalyzed 500ml
sections from blocks embedded in the hydrophilic acrylic resin
0-5˚C 14384 LR White resin only; Soft Grade 500ml
LR White for Light Microscopy is the lack of adherance of the
0-5˚C 14384-UC LR White resin only; Soft Grade Uncatalyzed 500ml
sections to the glass slide during the silver enhancement. This
0-5˚C 14385 LR White UV accelerator 10ml
problem can be solved by using a 2% formvar solution to coat
the glass slide. ® PTFE Flat Embedding Mold 70143 Series
• Cleaned glass slides are dipped in a solution of 2% formvar in See page 253 UUUUU
chloroform and left to dry horizontally.
® Histocryl Resin
• Mark the coated surface with a diamond tip scriber and clean
the under side of the slide with acetone. Histocryl acrylic resin has been
specially formulated for light
• Transfer the section to the coated slide, which will then be
placed in an oven to dry at 50°C. microscopy. It is water clear, and
because it is hydrophilic (polar) it
• Use the Pap-Pen (EMS Cat. #71310) to draw a water repellent
circle aroung the section, which will facilitate the labeling permits the use of most routine
procedures. staining techniques without prior
removal or etching.
Slater, M. (1989) Adherance of LR White Sections to Glass Slides
for Silver Enhancement.
Immunogold Labeling. Vol. 65, No. 6 Stain Technology. pp. 297-299 RT 14390 Histocryl Resin Kit consists of:
500ml Histocryl resin kit
25g Histocryl Catalyst (B.P.)
10ml Histocryl Accelerator

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 95

Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec03_092-102_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 1:05 AM Page 96

SECTION 3 Embedding Media Kits

® Lowicryl Resin ® Low Viscosity,
Lowicryl resins are highly as reported by
cross-linked acrylate-based
embedding resins, designed
Dr. Spurr
for use over a wide range of Provides excellent
embedding conditions. These penetration for embedding
resins provide low viscosity at biological tissues and rapid
low temperatures. infiltration. Easy to prepare.
The hardness is adjusted by
The K4M kit is usable to - changing the proportion of
35°C and is a polar (hydrophilic) medium, while the HM20 kit can be used the flexibilizer (DER 736). The
down to -70°C and is nonpolar (hydrophobic). blocks have good trimming
Lowicryl’s K11M and HM23 have properties similar to K4M and HM20, but and sectioning qualities. Thin sections are tough under the electron beam.
can be used at temperatures 20 degrees lower than others: K11M at - Spurr, A.R., (1969) J. Ultrastruct. Res. 26, 31-42.
60°C, HM23 at least -80°C. All of these resins are photopolymerized by
long wavelength (360nm) ultraviolet light. Since the initiation of the RT 14300 Low Viscosity Kit consists of:
polymerization is largely independent of temperatures, blocks may be 450ml NSA kit
polymerized at the same temperatures used for infiltration. The resin may 225ml ERL 4221
also be chemically polymerized at 60°C. 225ml DER 736
25ml DMAE
T Armbruster, B.L. et al, (1982). J. Microscopy 126: 77
T Carlemalm, E. et al, (1985). J. Microscopy 140:55
T Hayat, M.A. (Ed.). (1989) Priciples and Techniques of Electron
Microscopy, 3rd Edition. CRC Press,Inc. Boca Raton, Florida.
ARTICLE OF INTEREST
RT 14330 Lowicryl K4M kit As many of our valued customers know ERL4206 has been
RT 14340 Lowicryl HM20 kit replaced by ERL 4221. Although they should work exactly the
RT 14350 Lowicryl K11M kit same as each other we have found the following recommendations
RT 14360 Lowicryl HM23 kit help to obtain much higher quality results. Please feel free to
contact us regarding these tips or any of the tips in our catalog
® Lowicryl MonoStep Single Component Mixing Directions :
Embedding Media ERL 4221 18ml
DER 736 14ml
The same as our Lowicryl complete kits but this new formulation allows
NSA 48 ml
you one stop embedding without all of the cumbersome preparation and DMAE 0.6ml
mixing. This pre-mixed, ready to use resin, saves you time and
minimizes chemical contact. MonoStep Lowicryl is ideal for use in For Biopsies from Kidney/Liver/GI/Esophagus Dehydration:
50%, 70%, 95% ETOH for 20-30 minutes each change
Immunohistochemistry and immunolabeling. 2 x 100% ETOH for 30 minutes
RT 14335 Lowicryl K4M Polar
Infiltration*:
Embedding Medium; Monostep 225g
RT
1 part Spurr to 2 parts ETOH for 3 hours
14345 Lowicryl HM-20 Non-Polar 1 TO 1 overnight/over weekend
Embedding Medium; Monostep 225g 3 to 1 (Spurr to ETOH) 3 hours
100% Spurr 6-8 hours

TECHNICAL TIP Polymerization:

Then Polymerize overnight (12 hour Max) at 70-80 Degrees C
Improved Polymerization Of Acrylic Resins *All infiltration Procedures shall be run on a Rotator.
Acrylic resins (Lowicryl, LR White, LR Gold, JB4) have become For Biopsies from Muscle.Nerve/Skin Dehydration:
common embedding media for immunocytochemistry. A common 50%, 70%, 95% ETOH for 20-30 minutes each change
problem in handling and disposing of these media is that oxygen inhibits 2 x 100% ETOH for 30 minutes
their polymerization. Bubbling dry nitrogen gas through the resin mixture
before infiltrating and embedding drives off oxygen and insures Infiltration*: (Spurr/ETOH 100%)
consistent polymerization. Specimens embedded in gelatin capsules can 1 part Spurr to 2 parts ETOH 24 hours (over weekend)
be placed in a small chamber or vacuum oven which can be purged 1 TO 1 24 hours (over weekend)
with nitrogen to insure complete polymerization of blocks and avoid the 3 to 1 (Spurr to ETOH) 24 Hours
100% Spurr 24 Hours
tacky block surface and noxious, volatile vapors from incompletely cured
blocks. Polymerization:
E. Ann Ellis, Ellis EM Consulting Service, 1316 SW 61st Terrace, Then Polymerize overnight (12 hour Max) at 70-80 Degrees C
Gainesville, FL 32607. *All infiltration Procedures shall be run on a Rotator.

For the polymerization of our UV curing resins,

see our UV light sources on page 1100 and our M-Bond Kit, see Material Science section,
UV Cryo Chamber on page 678. UUUUU page 374 UUUUU

96 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874

Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec03_092-102_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 1:06 AM Page 97

Embedding Media Kits SECTION 3

 UltraBed Kit  Polyester Wax
A Newly Introduced Low Viscosity See Histology section, page 493. 
Epoxy Embedding Kit
A Modification of the Dr. Spurr’s Formula for  Quetol 651 - NSA
Biological, Material, and Mineralogical A water miscible epoxy resin used for both light and electron
Specimens microscopy. Its low viscosity permits easy infiltration and embedding,
Versatile! Easy to use! Save Time and Money and yields light-colored blocks.
with this one-step-preparation low viscosity Kushida, H. et al., (1986) Pro. 11th Int. Cong. Electron Microsc., p.
embedding kit. 2177. Kyoto
The kit consists of two components, equal 0-5˚C 14640 Kit consists of:
amount, very low viscosity, (~65cps), in 225ml Quetol 651
convenient dispenser top bottles. To prepare the Embedding Resin, just 450ml NMA
mix equal amounts of the two components. The resin readily infiltrates 450ml NSA
into specimen and polymerizes to a clear, hard block overnight at 60°C *50ml DMP-30 Kit
 Convenient – by weight just disperse equal amount of the A and
B that you need, and mix together
 Save time – Mixed resin can be used for both infiltration and
ARTICLE OF INTEREST
embedding The addition of 1% water to the epoxy resin Quetol
 Less Hazardous – All components are shipped together as Non- increases the labeling intensity of the sample. The significant
Hazardous substances decrease of the curing temperature of the epoxy resin may assist
in preservation of antigens. Water may also reduce the cross-
Kit comes with 100 ml each component A and component B
linkage of the resin allowing more antigen to be available to the
RT 14310 UltraBed Low Viscosity Kit 2x100ml antibodies. The modified Quetol resin is an option for use in
immunocytochemistry studies.
 Methyl Methacrylate/Butyl Methacrylate Refer to:
The mixture of Butyl and Methyl Methacrylate offers many advantages
over the standard GMA and HPMA embedding mediums: Andre R. Abad, (1992). Medium Temperature Epoxy Resin for
Immunocytochemistry: Quetol 651 with Water. Microsc. Res. and
 It can be UV cured in the cold with the addition of benzoin Techn. 20:274-280.
methyl ether, or heat cured by the addition of benzoyl peroxide.
 The resin can be removed from the sections with a solvent (ace-
tone) before staining.
RT 14520 Kit consists of:
 Styrene Monomer, Polyester Resin
225 ml Methyl Methacrylate kit Very low viscosity; monomeric styrene which penetrates rapidly into the
225 ml Butyl Methacrylate tissues. It is soluble in ethanol and acetone. The infiltration and
15 g Benzoyl Peroxide Paste embedding can be done by styrene alone, and there is no need to dilute
it with solvents. Polymerization can be done either by UV light (340-
 Micro-Bed™ Resin 400nm) or heat (60°C) within 2-3 days without benzoyl peroxide added;
Micro-Bed resin is a newly developed water-soluble 24 hours with 1% benzoyl peroxide added as a catalyst.
resin which is a mixture of acrylate and polyester resins. It is a very
Delamater et al., (1971) Pro. 29th Ann. Meet. EMSA, p. 488. Claitor’s
universal embedding medium and may be used for either light or
Pub. Div., Baton Rouge, La.
electron microscopy.
Kushida, H. (1962b) J. Electron Microsc., 11:128
Due to its non-crosslinking characteristics, its hydrophilic nature, and
roughness of its section surface, our Micro-Bed Resin is excellent in Kushida, H. (1961a) J. Electron Microsc., 10:16
preserving tissue structure, offers good results in immunolabeling, and
RT 14650 Kit consists of:
stands up well to conventional stains.
450ml Monomeric Styrene
In light microscopy, tissues were stained with conventional histological 100ml Methyl Ethyl Ketone (UV activator)
stains (e.g.,hematoxylin-eosin)and embedded in Micro-Bed: the results were 225ml Dibutyl Phthalate (plasticizer)
comparable with those provided on paraffin embedded tissues. Further, 225ml n-Butyl Methacrylate
polychrome silver-based and cytochemical stains (e.g.,PAS) were also 20g Benzoyl Peroxide (catalyst) Kit
feasible. In transmission electron microscopy, images as good as those
obtained with similar acrylic resins, (e.g.,Lowicryl K4M), were obtained.
Micro-Bed is supplied as a single component-ready to use pre-mixed
resin. Micro-Bed can be polymerized in either EMS embedding capsules
or gelatin capsules by either heat (55-65°C) or UV (wavelength 365nm)
light at low temperatures (-10 to 20°C) for 72 hours.
Scala C. et al.(1992). Development of a new acrylic resin ideally suited
for light and electron microscopy. Electron Microscopy. Volume 3.
EUREM 92, Granada, Spain. pg. 271
0-5˚C 14210 Micro-Bed Embedding Resin 500ml

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 97

Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec03_092-102_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 1:06 AM Page 98

SECTION 3 Embedding Media Kits

® Technovit By Kulzer — ® Technovit® 9100
The Resins and Accessories for Technovit® 9100 is an embedding medium system based
on methyl methacrylate (MMA), which hardens at low
all Methacrylate Embedding temperature. It is designed for the embedding of
Technovit® is one of the most sought after name in mineralized tissues with extensive possibilities of staining
Methacrylate embedding medias in the world due to its for light microscopy.
diversity and availability of different kits and properties Applications:
there is a media for each of your applications. Hard-cutting technique for making thin layers
The systems developed by Heraeus Kulzer in Examples: Iliac crest biopsies, smaller, spongy and
collaboration with renowned scientists and compact bone tissue specimens.
institutes to embed tissue in plastic material for Division thin section technique (division procedure in
histological studies have proven themselves in point contact technology)
practice for decades. They are successfully used Examples: Tooth/jaw areas with and without implants,
for diagnostic and research purposes in medicine, non-cemented endoprostheses with shaft bones.
veterinary medicine and botany. They are also
Combined division-thin section technique and
successfully used in cutting technology for
hard-cutting technique (target preparation)
industrial applications and biomaterials.
Examples: Boundary layer and environment assessment
The systems fulfill important requirements such as for metal implants and non-cemented endoprostheses.
embedding at low temperatures, thin and semi-thin
section techniques and optimal division and abrasion Properties: Section of stent.
properties. The sections can be easily stretched, and Technovit® 9100 Polymerization takes place under the Elastica Van Gieson
under the light microscope the stained preparations exclusion of oxygen with the help of a peroxide/amine
show excellent morphology. catalyst. Additional components such as PMMA-powder and a regulator allows for a
controlled polymerization at temperatures between –8 and –20°C, which guarantees for
The scientific and economic conditions for histological
the dispersion of the heat generated during polymerization. The polymerization time is
studies of tissues are significantly improved with
between 18 and 24 hours using a volume between 3 and 15 ml in the above temperature
Heraeus Kulzer‘s histology technology.
range. All the routine techniques such as preparation tissues, staining, immuno- and
• Simple, rational handling, as all components are enzyme-histochemistry, in-situ hybridization techniques can be performed.
compatible with one another.
Basic Solution — is composed of organic monomers, with at least one carbon-carbon
• Due to the special material properties, the double bond (C=C). The stabilizer added to this solution is for storage-stability. Hydrophilic
standard stain methods, enzyme chemistry properties are improved by the addition of a special hydrophilic generating agent.
and immunohistochemistry used in histological PMMA-Powder — is an internal filler and it is made up of PMMA-micro pellets. It is
laboratories can be used, including used to:
in-situ hybridization.
• Reduce the polymerization shrinking effect.
Why plastic? • Reduce the heat generated during the polymerization process.
In contrast to all other embedding materials used in • Improve the quality of the polymerization block.
light microscopy in histological technology, uniform Hardener 1 — is one of the components of the polymerization initiation system. It is a
thin and semi-thin sections can be made after plastic derivative of dibenzoyl peroxide, which in combination with Hardener 2, makes the
has been embedded. In the process morphological polymerization take place.
details remain excellent. The mineralized and cellular Hardener 2 — it works catalytically upon Hardener 1 to allows for a controlled
structures can be better determined in undecalcified polymerization, even at temperatures below 0°C.
specimens embedded in plastic. The mineral matrix Regulator — is composed of a reactive organic compound, which allows a controlled
and the cartilaginous and ligament tissues are very polymerization, even with large volumes of polmer, without increases in the temperature
well maintained. during the polymerization reation.
The results of enzymatic immunohistochemical studies PMMA-Granulate, EXART® — this granulate acts as an additional internal filler when
and in-situ hybridization show more sensitive and larger amounts (500–1000ml) of polymer are to be used, for example, in the case of
specific activity because all Technovit® plastics harden femur shaft with non-cemented endoprosthses. The amount of monomer (basic solution)
at low temperatures and below freezing temperatures is thereby reduced, at the same time making the polymerization easier to control.
due to the special composition of the polymerization
systems.
Technovit® 9100 consists of:
• 1000ml Basic Solution (stabilized)
• 120g PMMA-Powder
• 8 Bags @ 1g Hardener 1
• 10ml Hardener 2
• 5ml Polymerization Regulator
• 500g PMMA-Granulate, EXART*
RT 14655 Technovit® 9100 kit

*EXART – Trade mark of EXART-Apparratebau GmbH & Co. KG, D-22851 Norderstedt

98 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874

Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec03_092-102_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 1:06 AM Page 99

Embedding Media Kits SECTION 3

 Technovit®  Technovit 4000
7100 and 8100 The low shrinkage embedding medium
Embedding Technovit 400 is a fast curing, cold polymerizing, three-component
resin, which is based on a modified polyester, and it is available in the
Kits form of powder, syrup I, and syrup II. It is mixed at a ratio of 2:2:1
Technovit® Glycol (powder:syrup I:syrup II). Syrup I and Syrup II are mixed together first
Methacrylate embedding and the powder is mixed in last. The color is white opaque.
kits developed by Kulzer
in Germany are the most Properties:
convenient to use, and Technovit 4000 is distinguished by its low shrinkage when polymerizing
offers the best embedding and its perfect margin fit. Due to its excellent flow characteristics,
results. Technovit 4000 guaranteed that geometrically demanding samples are
optimally embedded. Its excellent adhesion properties with regard to
Features: metal are a guarantee of gapless embedding of all metal samples.
 Technovit® GMA kits give better results offering improved These properties are of particular importance when working with
morphology, and allows for 1 micron serial sectioning. samples that require good edge definitions.
 Technovit® 7100 GMA is less sensitive to O2 during
 Excellent margin fit
polymerization so sealing of the molds is not necessary.
 Optimum grinding, polishing properties
 The polymerization temperature never exceeds 40°C, which makes
either kit a potential choice for enzyme histochemistry. Initiation Application:
chemistry of Technovit® 8100 GMA makes polymerization at 4°C After mixing, Technovit 4000 can be used for casting for approximately
possible for improved signal during immunohistochemistry. 4 minutes and takes approximately 8 minutes to cure.
 The initiator is prepackaged, eliminating messy handling of dry Technovit® 4000 Kit consists of:
components, and by eliminating aromatic amines from the • 750g Powder
formation, the components are significantly less toxic. • 500ml Liquid I
 The consistent high quality of raw materials used to make the • 250ml Liquid II
resin allows for a permanent clear colorless block and, most
RT 14656-02 Technovit 4000, Medium kit
important, reproducible results.
 Technovit® 3040 – Mounting Medium
Technovit 3040 yellow is a fast curing methyl methacrylate-based resin,
Technovit® H7100 –GAM kit consists of:
• 500ml Glycol Methacrylate monomer whose chemical composition warrants a firm, durable bond between
• 5 x 0.6g packs Hardener I Technovit and the specimen.
• 40ml Hardener II Technovit® 3040 consists of two components – powder and liquid –
RT 14653 Technovit® H7100-GMA kit allowing simple mixing, easy adherance to the specimen, and fast curing.
Technovit® H8100 – GMA kit consists of: For fixing the mount, a high viscous consistency is required(i.e. a mixing
• 500ml Glycol Methacrylate Monomer
ratio of approximately 2-3 parts per volume powder: 1 part per volume
• 5 x 0.6g packs Hardener I
• 30ml Hardener II
liquid) has proven to be the most advantageous.
RT 14654 Technovit® H8100-GMA kit Technovit® 3040 Kit consists of:
Technovit Glycol Methacrylate 7100 Histo Techniques Set includes: 1 x 100g Technovit® 3040 powder
• Technovit Glycol Methacrylate Kit 7100 with 1 x 80ml Technovit® 3040 liquid
500 ml of GMA monomer, 5 x 1g packs of Hardener I, RT 14652 Technovit® 3040 kit
and 40 ml of Hardener II
• 100 pieces Histobloc
• 1 piece Histoform S or Q Embedding Mold
 Technovit HistoBloc
• 100 pieces Histoknife H Due to the special demand for the thinnest possible sections,
• 1 piece microtome knife holder, 17 or 22 cm polymerized Technovit® 7100 is most elastic and it is therefore
• Technovit 3040 Kit recommended to fix the embedded specimen on a universal stable
Technovit 3040, 100g powder and 80 ml liquid dosing devices
RT 14654-26 Technovit 7100 Histo Set kit mount, to insure optimum clamping and cutting.
Technovit Glycol Methacrylate 8100 Histo Techniques Set includes : To avoid a subsequent complicated removal of the specimens from the
• Technovit Glycol Methacrylate Kit 8100 with mount, an inexpensive disposable version was developed.
500 ml of GMA monomer, 5 - 0.6 g packs of Hardener I,
and 30 ml of Hardener II Features:
• 500 cover foils  Fixed easily, securely and permanently
• 100 pieces Histobloc  Clamped into all rotary microtomes without adapter
• 1 piece Histoform S or Q Embedding Mold
• 100 piece Histoknife H  Embedded in the elastic Technovit in such a way that thinnest sec-
• 1 piece microtome knife holder, 17 or 22 cm tions may be cut
• Technovit 3040 Kit  Optimally fixed using Technovit® 3040 at low cost (polymerisa-
Technovit 3040, 100g powder and 80 ml liquid dosing devices tion in 5 to 10 minutes)
RT 14654-25 Technovit 8100 Histo Set kit
 Easy to write on
 Link together for storage
Cat. # Description
14654-60 HistoBloc for “S” and “Q” 100/pk
14654-70 HistoBloc for “N” 50/pk

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 99

Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec03_092-102_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 1:06 AM Page 100

SECTION 3 Embedding Media Kits

 Technovit By Kulzer — continued
 Technovit Embedding Molds
Technovit
An important prerequisite for easy-to-cut specimens is a mold with a special profile which will
Embedding
Molds provide specimen blocks for easy application and simple cutting. This is achieved with Histoform S,
an embedding mold composed of new material with a special shape.
All essential requirements such as:
 Material-saving volume  Excellent temperature dissipation by way
 Easy-to-cut shape of refined steel bottom
 Unlimited shelf life  Accurate and easy fixing of the specimen
 Easy removal of the embedded specimens blocks byspecial grooves were achieved
because of the conical shape and the with Histoform S, in cooperation with
PTFE material renowned users.

Curing temperature measurements have confirmed that at this volume the combination of Ptfe and
refined steel will result in a considerably lower polymerization temperature.
Three types types are available: the Histoform Q and the Histoform S and the Histoform N. The
Histoform Q was developed for the embedding of larger specimens; the characteristics are identical
to Histoform S. These PTFE molds allow for easy removal of 10 plastic blocks when using the
Histobloc system.
The mold cavities measure 10mm wide x 16mm high x 6.5mm deep in th “S” and 20mm wide
x16mm high x10mm deep in the Q and in the “N” 9mm W x 18mm H x 5mm D.
Appendix for pentachrome staining in accordance with Movat Cat. # Description Qty.
14654-30 HistoForm Q each
14654-35 HistoForm S each
14654-40 HistoForm N each

 Additional Technovit General Accessories and Supplies

Cat. # Description Qty Cat. # Description Qty
14653-11 Microtome Knife Holder 17CM each 14653-16 PE – Foils 75x25mm each
14653-12 Microtome Knife Holder 22CM each 14653-17 Insert For Specimen Holder M each
14653-13 Histo Knife H 30/pack 14653-18 Specimen Holder H each
14653-14 Histo Knife H 100/pack 14653-19 Embedding Mold 25mm 3/pk
14653-15 Mounting Press each 14653-20 Insert for Embedding Form 25mm 3/pk

TECHNICAL TIP TECHNICAL TIP

Rapid Techniques for Specimen Preparation Preparation Of Embedding Mixtures
Rapid methods which facilitate the completion of fixation through It is essential to mix the components of viscous embedding
polymerization of resin blocks in a few hours. medium (Araldite + Epon replacements) very thoroughly to obtain
uniform polymerization. Inadequate mixing is one of the main
Refer to:
causes of sectioning problems with epoxy resins. The simplest
• Hayat, M.A. and Giaquinta, R. (1970). Vapor fixation prior to way to obtain good mixing is to warm the resin, the hardener,
fixation by immersion for electron microscopy. Proc. 7th Int. and the containers to be used for stirring at 60˚C. A uniform
Cong. Electron Microsc., p.391. Grenoble, Soc. Francaise mixture is obtained in a few minutes by this method and no
Microsc. Electronique, Paris. special stirring apparatus is required. The warm components also
• Johannessen, J.V. (1973). Rapid processing of kidney are easily poured from their containers for measurement. It is
biopsies for electron microscopy. Kid. Intern., 3:46 best to prepare the complete mixture just before use but if
• Rowden, G. and Lewis, M.G. (1974). Experience with a necessary it can be stored at 4˚C in a bottle with a well fitting
three-hour electron microscopy biopsy service. J. Cli. cap for several weeks, or for many months at -20˚C. During
Pathol., 27:505 infiltration of the specimens, the embedding mixture is kept at
• Bain, J.M. and Gove, D.W. (1971). Rapid preparation of plant room temperature and warmed to 60˚C.
tissues for electron microscopy. J. Microsc., 93:159 CAUTION: WHEN WORKING WITH CHEMICALS IT IS WISE TO
• Takagi, I., Sato, T. and Yamada, K. (1979). A rapid method ALWAYS WEAR GLOVES AND WORK UNDER A FUME HOOD.
for embedding fractionated samples for electron microscopy. Glauert, A.M. Epoxy Resins: An update on Their Selection and
J. Electron Microsc., 28:316 Use. Microscopy and Analysis, September 1991, pp. 15-20.
• Altman, L.G., Schneider, B.G. and Papermaster, D.S. (1984).
Rapid embedding of tissues in Lowicryl K4M for immuno-
electron microscopy. J. Histochem. Cytochem., 32:1217

100 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec03_092-102_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 1:06 AM Page 101

Embedding Media Kits SECTION 3

 Unicryl™  Casting-Potting-Encapsulting Resins
A New Universal Resin for:
 Crystal Clear™ —
• Light Microscopy Water Liquid Plastics
• Electron Microscopy The Crystal Clear™ Series of
• Immunolabeling polyurethane resins were designed for
• In-Situ Hybridization applications that require absolute clarity.
These are low viscosity resins that cure
• Histochemistry at room temperature with negligible
UNICRYL is a single component and shrinkage to a hard plastic. Cured
easy to use resin which gives products are UV resistant and are not
excellent structural preservation of brittle.
tissues without chemically Applications include potting, encapsulating, making prototype models,
interacting or crosslinking with and lenses, object duplicating etc.
them. UNICRYL is largely hydro-
CAUTION: This product is NOT for home use, for research and industrial
philic, allowing good access to
use only.
polar solutions and exhibiting low background staining or labeling from
hydrophobic materials. It also minimizes the denaturation of proteins, TECHNICAL OVERVIEW:
allowing true antigenic properties to be maintained. Pot Life Full Cure Casting Thickness
The excellent polymerization properties of UNICRYL are largely due to Crystal Clear 200
the fact that all of the components of the polymer have similar 10 min. 16 hours 1
⁄2" –3" (1.27–7.62cm)
Crystal Clear 204
molecular weights, ensuring even penetration into the tissue.
120 min. 48 hours 3 – 6 (7.62–15.24cm)
In addition, the enhanced labeling, staining and hybridizing qualities Crystal Clear 206
arise from the fact that sections are cleaved from the block face ahead 180 min. 48 hours > 6" (15.24cm)
of the knife edge, thus exposing more of the tissue components at the
Ordering: Each kit consists of 1 gallon resin A and adequate curing agent B
surface. UNICRYL is premixed and supplied as a single component. The
resin has a long shelf life when stored in the cold. It is miscible with Cat. # Description Quantity
alcohol and has a low viscosity even down to -50°C. The resin can be
RT 24200 Crystal Clear™ 200 1 gal kit
RT 24204 Crystal Clear™ 204 1 gal kit
polymerized by heat (50-60°C) or by UV irradiation at low temperatures RT 24206 Crystal Clear™ 206 1 gal kit
(-10 to 20°C).
The polymerization of the resin is an exothermic reaction. Unicryl shrinks  Acrylic Plastic Casting
approximately 10% in volume during polymerization. Ethyl alcohol, acetone Simply place your object in a mold, mix
and many other solvents may be used as a dehydrating agent. and pour Acrylic Plastic over it. In an
Complete instructions come with the kit. hour it is hard and your object is firmly
embedded in a clear, stable plastic. For
Unicryl kit consists of:
high-gloss finish, it can be polished with
250 ml Unicryl Resin
0-5˚C 14660 Unicryl Embedding Kit kit a soft cloth. Mold making and casting
can be done in two hours. Acrylic Plastic Casting is a thermosetting
acrylic-polymer plastic with excellent clarity and stabile characteristics.
The kit is available with 1 pint of resin and hardener, or 1quart of resin
TECHNICAL TIP and hardener.
The Storing Of Embedding Resin Mixtures Specific Gravity 1.17–1.20
Our experience over the years shows that the best way to store
remaining embedding resin mixtures is in disposable plastic Cat. # Description Quantity
syringes.
RT 24210-01 Acrylic Plastic Castin 1 pt Kit
RT 24210-02 Acrylic Plastic Casting 1 qt Kit
PROCEDURE: RT 24210-08 Acrylic Plastic Casting 1 gal Kit
Take a fresh “all plastic” syringe (EMS Cat. #72520-72529-
choose the appropriate size syringe depending on the volume
mixture to be stored), remove the tip cover, slowly draw in the
mixture. Remove any air space by holding the syringe with the TECHNICAL TIP
tip in the upward position pulling the plunger slowly to clear the Microwave Ovens and Embedding
resin from the tip as well as letting the air move towards the tip; Using a microwave oven of 400W, output rating at 2450 MHz,
slowly push the plunger upward until the resin appears at the cumulative short exposures with seven 15s pulses and two 30s
end of the tip; put on the tip cover. Wrap the syringe with pulses, seperated by 30s cooling intervals gives acceptable
aluminum foil, label it (name, mixture, and date) and store it in polymerization of embedding resins.
the refrigerator.
McLay, A.L.C., Anderson, J.D. and McMeekin W. (1987).
This method protects the mixture from contamination by
Microwave polymerization of epoxy resin: rapid processing
condensation, and it is also more convenient for future use.
technique in ultrastructural pathology. J. Clin. Path., 40:350

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 101
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec03_092-102_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 1:06 AM Page 102

SECTION 3 Embedding Media Kits

 Casting-Potting-Encapsulting Resins (continued)

 Silicone — Room Temperature Cured

Per the requests of our customers we are introducing a series of
room temperature cured silicones that are used in the labs.
1. Blue Silicone Rubber
Blue Silicone Rubber is extremely high tear, high tensile
strength, two components, and tin catalyzed RTV silicone
rubber. It is designed for casting polyurethane foam, polyester
and epoxy parts. It is a superior product with the following
 Extremely high tear strength advantages over the RTV silicones:  Kwik-Gard Sylgard™ 184
 Excellent chemical TYPICAL PROPERTIES The Kwik-Gard™ is specially packaged
resistance
Un-catalyzed Sylgard184 silicone that offers a quicker and
 Long pot life Compound Base Activator
easier way to apply the silicone, eliminating the
 Good dielectric properties Color White Blue messy procedure of preparing the mixture before
 Low shrinkage Viscosity (cps) 50,000–70,000 300–400 application. Its special cartridge controls the
 Excellent shelf aging Specific Gravity 1.10 .99 precise mixing ratio to ensure proper curing. The
 Insensitive to inhibition Working time (hours) 1.5 to 2.5 disposable tip mixes resin and hardener as they
 Low viscosity Cured Time (hours) 16 to 18 are dispensed. Since no air is introduced during
 Color coded catalyst Shelf Life (months) 6 mixing, the resin does not need degassing for
 Variable cure rate most applications. The mixed silicone is applied
directly to the site, reducing preparation time and
Ordering: Blue Silicone Rubber comes as a kit consisting of 1 gal (9 lb) silicone base and 1 pt material waste. Each Kwik-Gard™ cartridge
(1lb) blue catalyst. contains 37 mL of resin and hardener. The
Cat. # Description Qty dispensing tip has a dead volume of 0.75 mL.
RT 24230-B Blue Silicone Rubber Kit 1 gal Curing time for this silicone is 24hrs@25˚C,
15 min.@150˚C.
2. Clear Silicone Rubber Cat. # Description Quantity
This silicone cures at room temperature with no shrinkage and RT 24236-01 Kwik Gard™ Start Up kit each
offers a unique water clear see through rubber with excellent (Dispenser, 1 Cartridge
tear strength, chemical and heat resistance. and 5 tips)
RT 24236-02 Kwik Gard™ Refill each
TYPICAL PROPERTIES (2 cartridges and 10
Hardness Shore A............................................................40 dispensing tips)
Color .................................................................Translucent RT 24236-03 Dispensing tips 10/pack
Pot Life....................................................................60 min.
RT 24236-04 Kwik GardTM Dispenser each
Demold Time.........................................................16 hours
Curing: allow the mold to cure Specific Volume ...........................................................25.8  Sylgard™ 184
overnight (at least 16 hours) at Specific Gravity ............................................................1.07 The same as the
room temperature (77˚F/25˚C)
Mixed Viscosity ...................................................35,000cps Kwik Gard™ But
before de-molding. Do not cure
rubber where temperature is less
Die B Tear Strength ..................................................120 pli in its original
than 65˚F/18˚C. Post Curing the Tensile Strength ......................................................800 psi container. A
mold will aid in quickly attaining Shrinkage ............................................................Negligible two-part silicone
maximum physical and Mixing Ratio Wt. Or Vol.....................................100:10 pbw elastomer, ideal
performance properties. After for potting and
curing at room temperature, Cured Rubber (7 days @ 70ºF & 50% R.H.) encapsulating
expose the rubber to 80˚C for 2 Hardness, Shore A ......................................................32±4 applications.
hours and 100˚C for 2 hours. Tensile Strength (psi)............................................525 ± 25 Very low
Allow mold to cool to room Elongation (%) ......................................................300 ± 25
temperature before using dielectric constant sealing compound used in
Tear, Resistance (ppi) ...........................................120 ± 10 patch clamping and many other lab applications.
NOTE: This clear silicone will Shrinkage (%) ................................................................0.1 After cure, will withstand -55° to 200 °C. Curing
cause rubber to yellow when Specific Gravity ............................................................1.09
applying post curing. time for this silicone 24hrs@25˚C, and 15
Dielectric Strength (volts/mil) ........................................500 min.@150˚C.
Dielectric Constant @ 100Hz..........................................3.3
Dissipation Factor @ 100Hz .......................................0.019 Cat. # Description Quantity
Volume Resistivity (ohms/cm)................................1 x 1015 RT 24236-10 Sylgard™ 184 1.1 lb

Ordering: Clear silicone comes as a kit of 1gallon (9 lb) silicone A and 1 pt (.9lb) curing agent B.
Cat. # Description Quantity
RT 24234-C Clear Silicone Rubber Kit 1gal

102 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec04_103_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 1:20 AM Page 103

SECTION 4

Grids, Grid Storage Boxes,

& Related Supplies
Gilder — a reliable support specimen grid source
EMS — Square Mesh and Oval Hole
Veco — the most rigid grids available
Maxtaform — smooth edges, firm support,
and a large open area
Athene — exceptionally refined grid bars, and good
handling characteristics
Index — Alpha Numeric and Asbestos Index Grids
Synaptek™ unflexible grids, made of beryllium-copper
Beryllium Grids for TEM
Embra and Molybdenum Grids
Support Film on Grids
C-flat™ Holey Carbon Grids for cryo-TEM
QUANTIFOIL Holey Carbon Films
Graphene Films for TEM
Grid Preparation Supplies

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 103
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec04_104-115_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 1:11 AM Page 104

SECTION 4 Grids, Grid Storage Boxes, & Related Supplies

 Gilder Grids Type Cat# Packed
TECHNICAL DATA
Pitch (μm) Hole (μm) Bar (μm)
A reliable support specimen grid source. STANDARD SQUARE MESH
Features well-defined grid bars, maximum 50 mesh G50-Cu 100/vial 500 420 80
open area, and a matt/shiny side. Each grid G50-Ni 100/vial 500 420 80
is individually inspected. Newly introduced G50-Au 50/vial 500 420 80
75 mesh G75-Cu 100/vial 340 285 55
are copper grids with palladium plating. G75-Ni 100/vial 340 285 55
This plating offers better grid strength G75-Au 50/vial 340 280 60
and avoids tarnishing. 100 mesh G100-Cu 100/vial 250 205 45
G100-Ni 100/vial 250 205 45
G100-CP 100/vial 250 205 45
Standard Square Mesh G100-Au 50/vial 250 200 50
Diameter: 3.05mm, Thickness: 0.7 mil (18μm) G100-Mo 25/vial 250 205 45
Material: Copper (Cu), Nickel (Ni), Gold (Au), Copper/Palladium 150 mesh G150-Cu 100/vial 165 125 40
(Cu/Pd=CP), Molybdenum (Mo) G150-Ni 100/vial 165 125 40
G150-CP 100/vial 165 125 40
G150-Au 50/vial 165 125 40
175 mesh G175-Cu 100/vial 145 108 37
G175-Ni 100/vial 145 108 37
G175-Au 50/vial 145 108 37
200 mesh G200-Cu 100/vial 125 90 35
G200-Ni 100/vial 125 90 35
G200-CP 100/vial 125 90 35
G100 - G400 G200TH G200TT G200-Au 50/vial 125 90 35
G200-Mo 25/vial 125 90 35
[1] A thickened version of the standard, 250 mesh G250-Cu 100/vial 100 70 30
G200TH with an assymetric center. G250-Ni 100/vial 100 70 30
A mark on the rim allows for precise G250-Au 50/vial 100 70 30
orientation of the grids. [1]
200 mesh G200TH-Cu 100/vial 125 85 40
[2] A combination of thin and thick bar grids, see description at left G200TH-Ni 100/vial 125 85 40
with a mark on the rim for orientation. [2]
200 mesh G200TT-Cu 100/vial 125 95 35-25
[3] The handle is designed for ease of see description at left G200TT-Ni 100/vial 125 95 35-25
handling and is easily removed if [3]
200 mesh G200T-Cu 100/vial 125 85 40
G200T necessary. To remove the handle, just see description at left G200T-Ni 100/vial 125 85 40
bend it over on a 90-degree angle. 300 mesh G300-Cu 100/vial 83 58 25
G300-Ni 100/vial 83 58 25
Gilder Finder Grids G300-CP 100/vial 83 58 25
G300-Au 50/vial 83 58 25
Diameter: 3.05mm, Thickness: 0.7 mil (18μm)
400 mesh G400-Cu 100/vial 62 37 25
Material: Copper (Cu), Nickel (Ni), Gold (Au), Copper/Palladium G400-Ni 100/vial 62 37 25
(Cu/Pd=CP) G400-CP 100/vial 62 37 25
G400-Au 50/vial 62 37 25
GILDER FINDER GRIDS
[4]
200 mesh G200F1-Cu 100/vial 125 100 35-12
see description at left G200F1-Ni 100/vial 125 100 35-12
G200F1-CP 100/vial 125 100 35-12
G200F1-Au 50/vial 125 100 35-12
[5]
200 mesh G200F2-Cu 100/vial 125 106 25-12
see description at left G200F2-Ni 100/vial 125 106 25-12
G200F1 G200F2 G200HF3 G200F2-CP 100/vial 125 106 25-12
[4] Thick bars dividing regions into 6 thin bar areas, which are identified by a numeric system.
G200F2-Au 50/vial 125 106 25-12
[5] Thick bars dividing regions into 9 thin bar areas, which are identified by alphabetical letters
[6]
200 mesh G200HF3-Cu 25/vial 125 - -
see description at left G200HF3-Ni 25/vial 125 - -
located in the center of the grid.
[6] Each of the 322 grids squares, can be identified by reference to its unique combination of STANDARD HEXAGONAL MESH
base 2 binary number and alphabet symbol (A-T). 0 is a short rounded solid pillar and 1 is 50 mesh G50H-Cu 100/vial 500 430 70
a longer rounded solid pillar. G50H-Ni 100/vial 500 430 70
G50H-Au 50/vial 500 430 70
75 mesh G75H-Cu 100/vial 340 290 50
Standard Hexagonal Mesh G75H-Ni 100/vial 340 290 50
Diameter: 3.05mm, Thickness: 0.7 mil (18μm) G75H-Au 50/vial 340 290 50
Material: Copper (Cu), Nickel (Ni), Gold (Au) 100 mesh G100H-Cu 100/vial 250 215 35
G100H-Ni 100/vial 250 215 35
G100H-Au 50/Vial 250 205 45
200 mesh G200H-Cu 100/vial 125 100 25
G200H-Ni 100/vial 125 100 25
G200H-Au 50/vial 125 100 25
300 mesh G300H-Cu 100/vial 83 58 25
G300H-Ni 100/vial 83 58 25
G300H-Au 50/vial 83 58 25
400 mesh G400H-Cu 100/vial 62 37 25
G100H & G200H G150H; G300H & G400H G400H-Ni 100/vial 62 37 25
G400H-Au 50/vial 62 37 25

104 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec04_104-115_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 1:11 AM Page 105

Grids, Grid Storage Boxes, & Related Supplies SECTION 4

 Gilder Grids (continued) Type Cat# Packed

TECHNICAL DATA
Pitch (μm) Hole (μm) Bar (μm)
HIGH MESH VALUES
NEW High Mesh Values G1000HH-Cu 25/vial 25 ~19 ~6
There is increasing interest in the use of high mesh value TEM G1000HH
Hexagonal G1000HH-Ni 25/vial 25 ~19 ~6
specimen support grids in life science, materials sciences, Mesh G1000HH-Au 25/vial 25 ~19 ~6
semiconductor and nanotechnology. We introduce three new products G1500HH G1500HH-Cu 15/vial 16.5 ~10.5 ~6
designed to improve support for thin specimens and membranes. Hexagonal G1500HH-Ni 15/vial 16.5 ~10.5 ~6
These have a high hole/bar ratios giving good transmission values. Mesh G1500HH-Au 15/vial 16.5 ~10.5 ~6
G2000HA G2000HA-Cu 10/vial 12.5 ~6.5 ~6
Diameter: 3.05mm, Thickness: 0.7 mil (18μm)
Circular G2000HA-Ni 10/vial 12.5 ~6.5 ~6
Mesh Diameter: 2mm Mesh G2000HA-Au 10/vial 12.5 ~6.5 ~6
Material: Copper (Cu), Nickel (Ni), Gold (Au). PARALLEL BARS
G50P G50P-Cu 100/vial 500 416 84
G50P-Ni 100/vial 500 416 84
G50P-Au 50/vial 500 416 84
G50PB G50PB-Cu 100/vial 500 416 84
G50PB-Ni 100/vial 500 416 84
G50PB-Au 50/vial 500 416 84
G75P G75P-Cu 100/vial 340 270 70
G75P-Ni 100/vial 340 270 70
G75P-Au 50/vial 340 270 70
G75PB G75PB-Cu 100/vial 340 270 70
G1000HH G1500HH G2000HA G75PB-Ni 100/vial 340 270 70
Hexagonal Hexagonal Circular G75PB-Au 50/vial 340 270 70
G100P G100P-Cu 100/vial 250 185 65
Parallel Bars G100P-Ni 100/vial 250 185 65
Diameter: 3.05mm, Thickness: 0.7 mil (18μm) G100P-Au 50/vial 250 185 65
G100PB G100PB-Cu 100/vial 250 185 65
Material: Copper (Cu), Nickel (Ni), Gold (Au) G100PB-Ni 100/vial 250 185 65
G100PB-Au 50/vial 250 185 65
G150P G150P-Cu 100/vial 165 115 50
G150P-Ni 100/vial 165 115 50
G150P-Au 50/vial 165 115 50
G150PB G150PB-Cu 100/vial 165 115 50
G150PB-Ni 100/vial 165 115 50
G100P & G200P G100PB & G200PB G300P & G400P G150PB-Au 50/vial 165 115 50
G200P G200P-Cu 100/vial 125 80 45
Rectangular G200P-Ni 100/vial 125 80 45
Diameter: 3.05mm, G200P-Au 50/vial 125 80 45
Thickness: 0.7 mil G200PB G200PB-Cu 100/vial 125 80 45
(18μm) G200PB-Ni 100/vial 125 80 45
G200PB-Au 100/vial 125 80 45
Material: Copper (Cu), G300P G300P-Cu 100/vial 83 48 35
Nickel (Ni) G75/300 G100/400 G300P-Ni 100/vial 83 48 35
G300P-Au 50/vial 83 48 35
Double Grids (Oyster) G300PB G300PB-Cu 100/vial 83 48 35
These are used mostly in metallurgical applications for supporting G300PB-Ni 100/vial 83 48 35
thin metal foils. These grids have a curved securing tab which G300PB-Au 50/vial 83 48 35
folds to the curvature of the ‘sandwiched’ grid. G400P G400P-Cu 100/vial 62 22 40
G400P-Ni 100/vial 62 22 40
Diameter: 3.05mm, Thickness: 0.7 mil (18μm) G400P-Au 50/vial 62 22 40
Material: Copper (Cu), Nickel (Ni), Gold (Au), G400PB G400PB-Cu 100/vial 62 22 40
Copper/Palladium (Cu/Pd=CP), Molybdenum (Mo) G400PB-Ni 100/vial 62 22 40
Four configurations are available: G400PB-Au 50/vial 62 22 40
RECTANGULAR
G75/300 G7530-Cu 100/vial 340/83 290/58 50/25
G7530-Ni 100/vial 340/83 290/58 50/25
G100/400 G1040-Cu 100/vial 250/62 205/37 45/25
G1040-Ni 100/vial 250/62 205/37 45/25
DOUBLE-GRID (OYSTER)
GD50/50 GD50/100 GD50/50 GD50-Cu 100/vial 500/500 430/430 70/70
GD50-Ni 100/vial 500/500 430/430 70/70
GD50/100 GD5010-Cu 100/vial 500/250 430/195 70/55
GD5010-Ni 100/vial 500/250 430/195 70/55
GD100/100 GD1010-Cu 100/vial 250/250 200/200 50/50
GD1010-Ni 100/vial 250/250 200/200 50/50
GD100/200 GD1020-Cu 100/vial 250/125 200/85 50/40
GD100/100 GD100/200 GD1020-Ni 100/vial 250/125 200/85 50/40

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 105
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec04_104-115_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 1:11 AM Page 106

SECTION 4 Grids, Grid Storage Boxes, & Related Supplies

 Gilder Grids (continued) Type Cat# Packed
TECHNICAL DATA
Pitch (μm) Hole (μm) Bar (μm)
SINGLE SLOT GRIDS (OVAL HOLE)
Single Slot Grids (Oval Hole) GS2x0.5 G205-Cu 100/vial — 2000x500 —
G205-Ni 100/vial — 2000x500 —
Diameter: 3.05mm, Thickness: 50μm G205-Au 50/vial — 2000x500 —
Material: Copper (Cu), Nickel (Ni), Gold (Au), Molybdenum (Mo) GS2x1 G2010-Cu 100/vial — 2000x1000 —
G2010-Ni 100/vial — 2000x1000 —
G2010-Au 50/vial — 2000x1000 —
G2010-Mo 25/vial — 2000x1000 —
GS2/3x1 G60610-Cu 100/vial — ~606x1000 —
G60610-Ni 100/vial — ~606x1000 —
G60610-Au 50/vial — ~606x1000 —
G60610-Mo 100/vial — ~606x1000 —
GS1x0.2 G102-Cu 100/vial — 1000x200 —
GS2x0.5 GS2x1 G102-Ni 100/vial — 1000x200 —
G102-Au 50/vial — 1000x200 —
GS1.5x0.3 G153-Cu 100/vial — 1500x300 —
The two central bars provide increased G153-Ni 100/vial — 1500x300 —
support enabling thinner films of the G153-Au 50/vial — 1500x300 —
formvar/carbon type to be used. GS2x0.75 G207-Cu 100/vial — 2000x750 —
G207-Ni 100/vial — 2000x750 —
G207-Au 50/vial — 2000x750 —
GS2/3x1 GS2x1.5 G215-Cu 100/vial — 2000x150 —
G215-Ni 100/vial — 2000x150 —
G215-Au 50/vial — 2000x150 —
Single Slot Grids (Aperture Grids) SINGLE SLOT GRIDS (APERTURE GRIDS)
GA50 GA50-Cu 100/vial — 50 —
Diameter: 3.05mm, Thickness: 50μm GA50-Ni 100/vial — 50 —
Material: Copper (Cu), Nickel (Ni), Gold (Au) GA50-Au 50/vial — 50 —
GA75 GA75-Cu 100/vial — 75 —
GA75-Ni 100/vial — 75 —
GA75-Au 50/vial — 75 —
GA100 GA100-Cu 100/vial — 100 —
GA100-Ni 100/vial — 100 —
GA100-Au 50/vial — 100 —
GA150 GA150-Cu 100/vial — 150 —
GA150-Ni 100/vial — 150 —
GA75 GA100 GA150 GA150-Au 50/vial — 150 —
GA200 GA200-Cu 100/vial — 200 —
GA200-Ni 100/vial — 200 —
GA200-Au 50/vial — 200 —
GA300 GA300-Cu 100/vial — 300 —
GA300-Ni 100/vial — 300 —
GA300-Au 50/vial — 300 —
GA400 GA400-Cu 100/vial — 400 —
GA400-Ni 100/vial — 400 —
GA200 GA300 GA400 GA400-Au 50/vial — 400 —
GA500 GA500-Cu 100/vial — 500 —
GA500-Ni 100/vial — 500 —
GA500-Au 50/vial — 500 —
GA600 GA600-Cu 100/vial — 600 —
GA600-Ni 100/vial — 600 —
GA600-Au 50/vial 600
GA800 GA800-Cu 100/vial — 800 —
GA800-Ni 100/vial — 800 —
GA500 GA600 GA800 GA800-Au 50/vial — 800 —
GA1000 GA1000-Cu 100/vial — 1000 —
GA1000-Ni 100/vial — 1000 —
GA1000-Au 50/vial — 1000 —
GA1000-Mo 25/vial — 1000 —
GA1500 GA1500-Cu 100/vial — 1500 —
GA1500-Ni 100/vial — 1500 —
GA1500-Au 50/vial — 1500 —
GA2000 GA2000-Cu 100/vial — 2000 —
GA2000-Ni 100/vial — 2000 —
GA1000 GA1500 GA2000 GA2000-Au 50/vial — 2000 —

106 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec04_104-115_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 1:12 AM Page 107

Grids, Grid Storage Boxes, & Related Supplies SECTION 4

 Gilder Thin Bar Grids Type Cat# Packed

TECHNICAL DATA
Pitch (μm) Hole (μm) Bar (μm)
Thin Bar Grids have been developed using a new technology to SQUARE MESH
produce ultra-fine grids with thinner cross bars than regular grids. 200 mesh T200-Cu 100/vial 125 113 12
The result is equally firm specimen support but with 40% more 200 mesh T200-Ni 100/vial 125 113 12
open area for viewing maximum specimen surface area. 200 mesh T200-Au 25/vial 125 113 12
300 mesh T300-Cu 100/vial 83 73 10
Square Mesh 300 mesh T300-Ni 100/vial 83 73 10
Diameter: 3.05mm, Thickness: 0.8 mil 300 mesh T300-Au 25/vial 83 73 10
400 mesh T400-Cu 100/vial 62 54 8
Material: Copper (Cu), Nickel (Ni), Gold (Au)
400 mesh T400-Ni 100/vial 62 54 8
400 mesh T400-Au 25/vial 62 54 8
1000 mesh T1000-Cu 25/vial 25 19 6
1000 mesh T1000-Ni 25/vial 25 19 6
Variable TVM-Cu 100/vial Combined:150, 200, 300, 400 mesh
Mesh TVM-Ni 100/vial Same as above
HEXAGONAL MESH
T200-T400 T1000 Variable Mesh 200 mesh T200H-Cu 100/vial 125 113 12
200 mesh T200H-Ni 100/vial 125 113 12
Hexagonal Mesh 300 mesh T300H-Cu 100/vial 83 73 10
300 mesh T300H-Ni 100/vial 83 73 10
Diameter: 3.05mm, Thickness: 0.8 mil
400 mesh T400H-Cu 100/vial 62 54 8
Material: Copper (Cu), Nickel (Ni) 400 mesh T400H-Ni 100/vial 62 54 8
600 mesh T600H-Cu 100/vial 37 29 8
600 mesh T600H-Ni 100/vial 37 29 8
REVOLUTIONARY SPECIMEN SUPPORT GRIDS
In addition to our square and hexagonal mesh Gilder Thin Bar Grids, we are now able to produce
a very fine mesh that values up to 2,000 lines/inch. There is an increasing need in TEM for
support thin films, routinely carbon, as thin as 1.5 - 2.0nm.
The pitch (the distance from the center of one bar to the center of the next bar) dimension in all
T200H-T600H grids remains constant, which allows them to be used as a lower magnification calibration aid.
Type T600HH (hexagonal) and T600HS (square) represent our efforts to reduce the grid bar
NEW Revolutionary Specimen Support Grids width (only 5 microns) enabling more of the specimen to be viewed. All new types, apart from
one side being shiny, the other matte, have a large asymmetrical mark in the rim which gives
Diameter: 3.05mm, Thickness: 0.8 mil the identification of which side the specimen is on. Grids are 3.05mm overall diameter; 2.05mm
Material: Copper (Cu), Nickel (Ni) mesh area diameter.
600 mesh T601-Cu 100/vial 42 37 5
(square) T601-Ni 100/vial 42 37 5
600 mesh T601H-Cu 100/vial 42 37 5
(hexagonal) T601H-Ni 100/vial 42 37 5
1500 mesh T1500-Cu 15/vial 16.5 11.5 5
(square) T1500-Ni 15/vial 16.5 11.5 5
2000 mesh T2000-Cu 10/vial 12.5 7.5 5
(square) T2000-Ni 10/vial 12.5 7.5 5
T601 T601H

 NEW EMS Grids TECHNICAL DATA

Type Cat# Packed Pitch (μm) Hole (μm) Bar (μm) Thickness
Square Mesh and Oval Hole SQUARE MESH
Diameter: 3.05mm, Thickness: see chart 200 mesh EMS200-Cu 100/vial 125 95 35 Up to 27μm, +/-5μm
EMS200-Ni 100/vial 125 95 35 Up to 27μm, +/-5μm
Material: Copper (Cu), Nickel (Ni), Gold (Au),
EMS200-Au 50/vial 125 95 35 11μm, +/-2μm
Molybdenum (Mo)
EMS200-Mo 25/vial 125 95 35 25μm, +/-4μm
300 mesh EMS300-Cu 100/vial 83 58 25 Up to 19μm, +/-5μm
EMS300-Ni 100/vial 83 58 25 Up to 19μm, +/-5μm
EMS300-Au 50/vial 83 58 25 10μm, +/-2μm
EMS300-Mo 25/vial 83 58 25 25μm, +/-4μm
400 mesh EMS400-Cu 100/vial 62 37 25 Up to 19μm, +/-5μm
EMS400-Ni 100/vial 62 37 25 Up to 19μm, +/-5μm
200 mesh 300 mesh EMS400-Au 50/vial 62 37 25 9μm, +/-2μm
EMS400-Mo 25/vial 62 37 25 25μm, +/-4μm
OVAL HOLE
2x1 mm EMS2010-Cu 100/vial — 2000x1000 — 27μm, +/-5μm
EMS2010-Ni 100/vial — 2000x1000 — 27μm, +/-5μm
EMS2010-Au 50/vial — 2000x1000 — 27 micron
EMS2010-Mo 25/vial — 2000x1000 — 25μm, +/-4μm

400 mesh 2x1 mm

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 107
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec04_104-115_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 1:12 AM Page 108

SECTION 4 Grids, Grid Storage Boxes, & Related Supplies

 Veco Grids Type Cat# Packed
TECHNICAL DATA
Pitch (μm) Hole (μm) Bar (μm)
With a wide variety of styles available, Veco SQUARE MESH WITH CENTER REFERENCE
Grids offer superior handling characteristics. 50 mesh 0050-Cu 100/vial 500 450 50
Plus, with a 0.8 mil thickness, Veco Grids 0050-Ni 100/vial 500 450 50
are the most rigid grids available. 0050-Au 50/vial 500 450 50
75 mesh 0075-Cu 100/vial 333 283 50
0075-Ni 100/vial 333 283 50
Square Mesh with Center Reference 0075-Au 50/vial 333 283 50
100 mesh 0100-Cu 100/vial 250 200 50
Diameter: 3.05mm, Thickness: 0.8 mil 0100-Ni 100/vial 250 200 50
Material: Copper (Cu), Nickel (Ni), Gold (Au) 0100-Au 50/vial 250 200 50
150 mesh 0150-Cu 100/vial 167 117 50
0150-Ni 100/vial 167 117 50
0150-Au 50/vial 167 117 50
200 mesh 0200-Cu 100/vial 125 85 40
0200-Ni 100/vial 125 85 40
0200-Au 50/vial 125 85 40
250 mesh 0250-Cu 100/vial 100 60 40
0250-Ni 100/vial 100 60 40
300 mesh 0300-Cu 100/vial 83 45 38
Square Mesh E-200 SS-200
0300-Ni 100/vial 83 45 38
0300-Au 50/vial 83 45 38
400 mesh 0400-Cu 100/vial 63 30 33
Square Mesh Oyster Grids 0400-Ni 100/vial 63 30 33
Diameter: 3.05mm, Thickness: 0.8 mil 0400-Au 50/vial 63 30 33
E200 E200-Cu 100/vial 125 85 40
Material: Copper (Cu), Nickel (Ni) E200 E200-Ni 100/vial 125 85 40
SS 200 0200-SS 100/vial Punched from Stainless Steel
Woven 200 mesh
SQUARE MESH OYSTER GRIDS
D75 D75-Cu 100/vial 333 283 50
D75 D75-Ni 100/vial 333 283 50
D100/100B D100B-Cu 100/vial 250x 200 50x
D-75 D-100/100B 230/270 190 40/80
D100/100B D100B-Ni 100/vial 250x 200 50x
230/270 190 40/80
D100K/200 D1002D-Cu 100/vial 250x 200/ 50x
125 85 40
D100K/200 D1002D-Ni 100/vial 250x 200x 50x
125 85 40
SQUARE MESH HANDLE GRIDS
D-100K/200 100 mesh HD100-Cu 100/vial 250 200 50
HD100-Ni 100/vial 250 200 50
150 mesh HD150-Cu 100/vial 167 117 50
Square Mesh Handle Grids HD150-Ni 100/vial 167 117 50
Diameter: 3.05mm, Thickness: 0.8 mil 200 mesh HD200-Cu 100/vial 125 85 40
HD200-Ni 100/vial 125 85 40
Material: Copper (Cu), Nickel (Ni)
300 mesh HD300-Cu 100/vial 83 45 38
HD300-Ni 100/vial 83 45 38
400 mesh HD400-Cu 100/vial 63 30 33
HD400-Ni 100/vial 63 30 33
111HDspec HD111S-Cu 100/vial — 190 —
HD111S-Ni 100/vial — 190 —
100HDspec HD100S-Cu 100/vial — 200 —
HD100S-Ni 100/vial — 200 —
Square Mesh Handle Grid 111HDspec

TECHNICAL TIP
Removing a Charge from the Surface of Grids
Sometimes when you are trying to pick up sections, they won’t adhere to the
grid surface. If you don’t have time to glow discharge clean the grid surfaces, try
this little trick. Dip the grids in distilled water for a moment and wick off the excess
with filter paper. Let them dry while you are arranging your sections. Your sections
should now adhere to the grid surface. Some labs soak the grids they will use for
100HDspec the day in distilled water until they are needed. If this procedure fails, reclean your
grids with acetone or chloroform or glow discharge clean the grid surfaces.
Jeanette Killius, NEOUCOM, Rootstown, OH.

108 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec04_104-115_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 1:12 AM Page 109

Grids, Grid Storage Boxes, & Related Supplies SECTION 4

 Veco Grids (continued) Type Cat# Packed

TECHNICAL DATA
Pitch (μm) Hole (μm) Bar (μm)
HEXAGONAL MESH
Hexagonal Mesh H75 mesh H075-Cu 100/vial 333 283 50
Diameter: 3.05mm, Thickness: 0.8 mil H075-Ni 100/vial 333 283 50
Material: Copper (Cu), Nickel (Ni), Gold (Au) H100 mesh H100-Cu 100/vial 250 200 50
H100-Ni 100/vial 250 200 50
H150 mesh H150-Cu 100/vial 167 117 50
H150-Ni 100/vial 167 117 50
H200 mesh H200-Cu 100/vial 125 85 40
H200-Ni 100/vial 125 85 40
H200-Au 50/vial 125 85 40
H300 mesh H300-Cu 100/vial 83 45 38
H300-Ni 100/vial 83 45 38
Hexagonal Mesh H111K Spec H300-Au 50/vial 83 45 38
H400 mesh H400-Cu 100/vial 63 30 33
Oyster Type Hexagonal Mesh H400-Ni 100/vial 63 30 33
Diameter: 3.05mm, Thickness: 0.8 mil H111KSpec H111K-Cu 100/vial - 185 -
H111K-Ni 100/vial - 185 -
Material: Copper (Cu), Nickel (Ni), Gold (Au) OYSTER TYPE HEXAGONAL MESH
DH75/300 D753H-Cu 100/vial 333/83 293/45 50/38
D753H-Ni 100/vial 333/83 293/45 50/38
DH75 mesh D75H-Cu 100/vial 333 283 50
D75H-Ni 100/vial 333 283 50
DH100 mesh D100H-Cu 100/vial 250 200 50
D100H-Ni 100/vial 250 200 50
DH75/300 DH75-DH300 DH200 mesh D200H-Cu 100/vial 125 85 40
D200H-Ni 100/vial 125 85 40
Handle Grids Hexagonal Mesh DH300 mesh D300H-Cu 100/vial 83 45 38
D300H-Ni 100/vial 83 45 38
Diameter: 3.05mm, Thickness: 0.8 mil HANDLE GRIDS HEXAGONAL MESH
Material: Copper (Cu), Nickel (Ni), Gold (Au) 100 mesh HD100H-Cu 100/vial 250 200 50
HD100H-Ni 100/vial 250 200 50
150 mesh HD150H-Cu 100/vial 167 117 50
HD150H-Ni 100/vial 167 117 50
200 mesh HD200H-Cu 100/vial 125 85 40
HD200H-Ni 100/vial 125 85 40
300 mesh HD300H-Cu 100/vial 83 45 38
HD300H-Ni 100/vial 83 45 38
400 mesh HD400H-Cu 100/vial 63 30 33
100-400 mesh HD400H-Ni 100/vial 63 30 33
PARALLEL BAR (R)
Parallel Bar (R) R100 R100-Cu 100/vial 250 200 50
Diameter: 3.05mm, Thickness: 0.8 mil R100-Ni 100/vial 250 200 50
R150 R150-Cu 100/vial 167 117 50
Material: Copper (Cu), Nickel (Ni)
R150-Ni 100/vial 167 117 50
R200 R200-Cu 100/vial 125 85 40
R200-Ni 100/vial 125 85 40
R300 R300-Cu 100/vial 85 45 38
R300-Ni 100/vial 85 45 38
RB90 RB90-Cu 100/vial 276 92 184
RB90-Ni 100/vial 276 92 184
PARALLEL BAR HANDLE GRIDS
R100 HDR100-Cu 100/vial 250 200 50
R100-R300 RB90 HDR100-Ni 100/vial 250 200 50
R200 HDR200-Cu 100/vial 125 85 40
Parallel Bar Handle Grids HDR200-Ni 100/vial 125 85 40
Diameter: 3.05mm, Thickness: 0.8 mil R300 HDR300-Cu 100/vial 85 45 38
Material: Copper (Cu), Nickel (Ni) HDR300-Ni 100/vial 85 45 38

TECHNICAL TIP
On-Grid Enhancement
The use of nickel grids is recommended for on-grid enhancement, as
nickel is relatively insensitive to silver enhancement. Gold or copper grids
R100-R300 should not be used.

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 109
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec04_104-115_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 1:12 AM Page 110

SECTION 4 Grids, Grid Storage Boxes, & Related Supplies

 Veco Grids (continued) Type Cat# Packed
TECHNICAL DATA
Pitch (μm) Hole (μm) Bar (μm)
Parallel Bar with Divider PARALLEL BAR WITH DIVIDER
Diameter: 3.05mm, Thickness: 0.8 mil R100D R100D-Cu 100/vial 250 200 50
R100D-Ni 100/vial 250 200 50
Material: Copper (Cu), Nickel (Ni) R150D R150D-Cu 100/vial 167 117 50
R150D-Ni 100/vial 167 117 50
R200D R200D-Cu 100/vial 125 85 40
R200D-Ni 100/vial 125 85 40
R300D R300D-Cu 100/vial 85 45 38
R300D-Ni 100/vial 85 45 38
R100Aspec R100As-Cu 100/vial 250 200 50
R100As-Ni 100/vial 250 200 50
SJOSTRAND FOR SERIAL SECTIONS
R100D-R300D R100 Aspec R100/200A R12CA-Cu 100/vial 250/125 120/75 130/50
R12CA-Ni 100/vial 250/125 120/75 130/50
Sjostrand for Serial Sections PARALLEL BAR WITH DIVIDER HANDLE GRIDS
Diameter: 3.05mm, Thickness: 0.8 mil R100D HDR100D-Cu 100/vial 250 200 50
HDR100D-Ni 100/vial 250 200 50
Material: Copper (Cu), Nickel (Ni) R200D HDR200D-Cu 100/vial 125 85 40
HDR200D-Ni 100/vial 125 85 40
R300D HDR300D-Cu 100/vial 85 45 38
HDR300D-Ni 100/vial 85 45 38
SLOTTED PATTERNS
50/75 575-Cu 100/vial 500/333 450/283 50
575-Ni 100/vial 500/333 450/283 50
75/300 753-Cu 100/vial 300/83 293/43 40
R100/200A 753-Ni 100/vial 300/83 293/43 40
100/400 1040-Cu 100/vial 250/63 212/25 38
Parallel Bar with Divider Handle Grids 1040-Ni 100/vial 250/63 212/25 38
Diameter: 3.05mm, Thickness: 0.8 mil THIN AND THICK BARS
Material: Copper (Cu), Nickel (Ni) 100μK 100S-Cu 100/vial 156/132 100 56/32
100S-Ni 100/vial 156/132 100 56/32
100+ym 100YM-Cu 100/vial — 100 —
100YM-Ni 100/vial — 100 —
Slotted area
GE200 GE200-Cu 100/vial 125/145 80 45/65
Single slot:
1000x500
Slotted area
R100D-R300D GE200-Ni 100/vial 125/145 80 45/65
Single slot:
1000x500
Slotted Patterns
Diameter: 3.05mm, Thickness: 0.8 mil
Material: Copper (Cu), Nickel (Ni)
 For more Technical Tips on Grids, see pages 108, 109 

TECHNICAL TIP
Shiny Side Or Rough Side?
Retention of sections on grids during poststaining and
immunocytochemical procedures frequently is of crucial impor-tance in the
50/75-100/400 electron microscopy laboratory. Opinions differ regarding the side of grids
most suitable for permanent adhesion. The controversy is easily solved by
Thin and Thick Bars examination of the surfaces involved. Grids are manufactured with a dull or
rough side, and a shiny or smooth side. Epoxy sections exhibit a bumpy
Diameter: 3.05mm, Thickness: 0.8 mil surface when viewed in the boat. Scanning electron microscopy images of
Material: Copper (Cu), Nickel (Ni) epoxy sections without embedded material also reveal an uneven surface.
Let us imagine a grid to be a single sided piece of sandpaper and the section
to be a double sided piece of sandpaper. Sandpaper grips another piece of
sandpaper much more readily than it does a smoothly polished metal
surface. For the most secure adhesion of sections to grids SECTIONS
SHOULD BE PICKED UP ON THE ROUGH SIDE OF THE GRID.
Hildegard H. Crowley, Dept. of Biological Sciences,
University of Denver, Denver, CO. 80208
100μk 100+ym GE 200

110 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec04_104-115_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 1:12 AM Page 111

Grids, Grid Storage Boxes, & Related Supplies SECTION 4

 Veco Grids (continued) Type Cat# Packed

Hole
Dia. (μm)
SINGLE HOLE
Single Hole Single Slot Oval A600 0600-Cu 100/vial 600
Diameter: 3.05mm, Thickness: 0.8 mil Diameter: 3.05mm, Thickness: 0.8 mil 0600-Ni 100/vial 600
Material: Copper (Cu), Nickel (Ni) Material: Copper (Cu), Nickel (Ni) A800 0800-Cu 100/vial 800
0800-Ni 100/vial 800
A1000 1000-Cu 100/vial 1000
1000-Ni 100/vial 1000
A1500 1500-Cu 100/vial 1500
1500-Ni 100/vial 1500
A2000 2000-Cu 100/vial 2000
2000-Ni 100/vial 2000
SPECIAL SHAPES
Z1600 Z1600-Cu 100/vial inner:1600
A600-A2000 LO.2x1.5-L2x1.5 outer:1900
width:150
Special Shapes EA1500 EA150-Cu 100/vial 1500
Z600 Z600-Cu 100/vial inner:600
Diameter: 3.05mm, Thickness: 0.8 mil, Material: Copper (Cu) outer:900
width:150
SINGLE SLOT OVAL
L0.2x1.5 0215-Cu 100/vial 200x1500
0215-Ni 100/vial 200x1500
L2x1 2010-Cu 100/vial 2000x1000
2010-Ni 100/vial 2000x1000
L2x1.5 2015-Cu 100/vial 2000x1500
2015-Ni 100/vial 2000x1500
Z1600 EA1500 Z600 OYSTER
DL 2x1 DL2010-Cu 25/vial 2000x1000
DL2010-Ni 25/vial 2000x1000
Oyster Handle Rectangular HANDLE
Diameter: 3.05mm, Diameter: 3.05mm, Diameter: 3.05mm, HDL2x1 HD2010-Cu 100/vial 2000x1000
Thickness: 0.8 mil Thickness: 0.8 mil Thickness: 0.8 mil HD2010-Ni 100/vial 2000x1000
RECTANGULAR
Material: Copper (Cu), Material: Copper (Cu), Material: Copper (Cu),
L2x0.6 0620-Cu 100/vial 2000x600
Nickel (Ni) Nickel (Ni) Nickel (Ni)
0620-Ni 100/vial 2000x600
L0.2x1 1002-Cu 100/vial 200x1000
1002-Ni 100/vial 200x1000
L0.2x0.5 0502-Cu 100/vial 200x500
0502-Ni 100/vial 200x500

DL2X1 HDL2X1 L2.X0.6-LO.2X0.5

 TEM Specimen Supports in Molybdenum

We have extended our range of TEM grid materials to include four types, which are now available in Molybdenum. The new products are manufactured
using a process known as chemical ‘milling’ (etching) instead of the more familiar technique of ‘electroforming’ (deposition) that is used in the manufacture
of copper, nickel and gold products. Molybdenum is used principally in applications where it’s high temperature, hardness, expansion of coefficient and
corrosion resistance characteristics are considered important. The material which is used has a purity of 99.9%.
Symbol: Mo
Atomic number: 42
Melting point: 2617.0°C (2890.15°K, 4742.6°F)
Boiling point: 4612.0°C (4885.15°K, 8333.6°F) –
Density: 10.22 g/cm3

G200-Mo G100-Mo G2010-Mo G1000-Mo

200# Grid 100# Grid 2x1Grid 1000 Micron Grid
Overall Rim Rim Center Lines/ Bar Hole Overall
Cat. No. Diameter Width Mark Mark inch Pitch Width Width thickness Packed
G200-Mo 3.05mm 0.225mm Yes Yes 200 125 μm 35 μm 90 μm 25 μm 25/vial
G100-Mo 3.05mm 0.225mm Yes Yes 100 250 μm 45 μm 205 μm 25 μm 25/vial
G2010-Mo 3.05mm N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 2 x 1mm 50 μm 25/vial
G1000-Mo 3.05mm N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 1000 μm 50 μm 25/vial

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 111
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec04_104-115_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 1:12 AM Page 112

SECTION 4 Grids, Grid Storage Boxes, & Related Supplies

 Maxtaform Grids Type Cat# Packed
TECHNICAL DATA
Pitch (μm) Hole (μm) Bar (μm)
High Grade Maxtaform Grids with clean and SQUARE MESH
smooth edges, firm support, and a large open 100 mesh M100-CR 100/vial 254 213 41
area. Our copper grids are available with one M100-Ni 100/vial 254 213 41
surface coated with inert Rhodium. This 150 mesh M150-CR 100/vial 165 131 34
coating will eliminate tarnishing, give side M150-Ni 100/vial 165 131 34
identification, and reduce the bar thickness. M150-Au 100/vial 165 131 34
200 mesh M200-CR 100/vial 127 103 24
M200-Ni 100/vial 127 103 24
M200-Au 100/vial 127 103 24
Square Mesh and Oval Hole 300 mesh M300-CR 100/vial 84 61 23
Diameter: 3.05mm, Thickness: 0.75 mil M300-Ni 100/vial 84 61 23
Material: Copper/Rhodium (Cu/Rh = CR), Nickel (Ni), Gold (Au) M300-Au 100/vial 84 61 23
400 mesh M400-CR 100/vial 63 43 20
M400-Ni 100/vial 63 43 20
M400-Au 100/vial 63 43 20
OVAL HOLE
2x1 mm M2010-CR 100/vial — 2000x1000 —
M2010-Ni 100/vial — 2000x1000 —
M2010-Au 25/vial — 2000x1000 —
100–400 mesh 100–400 mesh 2x1 mm

 Maxtaform Finder Grids  Maxtaform Specialist Grids

Maxtaform grids with reference patterns are of the highest consistent quality, 3 mm diameter. These grids
with a wide choice to choose from to suit all your particular needs. fill all your special needs.
London Finder H 9, Pitch 508μ, 50 mesh
H 2, Pitch 127μ, 200 mesh H9Spec-Cu 100/vial
H9Spec-Ni 100/vial
LF200-Cu 100/vial
LF200-Ni 100/vial
LF200-Au 100/vial HF14, Pitch 127μ, 200 mesh
HF14Spec-Cu 100/vial
HF14Spec-Ni 100/vial

London Finder
H 7, Pitch 63μ, 400 mesh H 1, Pitch 127μ, 200 mesh
LF400-Cu 100/vial H1Spec-Cu 100/vial
LF400-Ni 100/vial H1Spec-Ni 100/vial
LF400-Au 100/vial

H 12 Folding,
Pitch 126μ, 200 mesh
London Finder
H12Spec-Cu 25/vial
H 15, Pitch 188μ, 135 mesh H12Spec-Ni 25/vial
LF135-Cu 100/vial
LF135-Ni 100/vial

London Honeycomb
H 6, Pitch 235μ, Honeycomb
LH200-Cu 100/vial
LH200-Ni 100/vial

H 4, Pitch 63μ, 400 mesh

H4Spec-Cu 100/vial
H4Spec-Ni 100/vial

112 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec04_104-115_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 1:13 AM Page 113

Grids, Grid Storage Boxes, & Related Supplies SECTION 4

 Athene Grids  Index Grids

EMS is pleased to now offer the Athene range of grids, renowned
for decades for the highest quality standards, exceptionally  Alpha Numeric Index Grid
refined grid bars, and good handling characteristics. By employing a rectangular
mesh the support value of the
Square Mesh grid has been increased,
Diameter: 3.05mm, Material: Copper (Cu), Nickel (Ni), Gold (Au) offering a value intermediate
between the most commonly
used grid (200 Lines/”) and
(300 Lines/”/). Each grid
rectangle is asymmetrical
having different outlines in all
four corners. This allows for
50 mesh 150 mesh 200 mesh, 300 mesh the orientation of the grid to be determined at microscopic
with center mark
levels. The index feature enables the position of each grid to
Thin Bar with be identified with reference to the letters A-O along the
Center Mark horizontal axis and the numbers 1-15 along the vertical axis.
The logo in the rim allows for precise orientation and aids in
Diameter: 3.05mm, the identification of each side. Grids are available in Copper,
Material: Copper (Cu), Copper/Palladium, Nickel, and Gold.
Nickel (Ni)
200 mesh 300 mesh 400 mesh SPECIFICATIONS:
Horizontal Axis: Vertical Axis:
Thick and Thin Bar Mesh: 200 Lines/” 250 Lines/”
with Center Mark Pitch: 125 microns 105 microns
Diameter: 3.05mm, Material: Copper (Cu) Bar Width: 20 microns 15 microns
Hole Width: 105 microns 90 microns
Overall Diameter: 3.05 mm 3.05 mm
200 mesh 300 mesh
CORNER OUTLINE WITH REFERENCE TO LOGO IN THE RIM:
Hexagonal Slotted Top Right: Right Angle
Mesh Diameter: 3.05mm, Top Left: Inverted Quadrant
Material: Copper (Cu) Bottom Right: Diagonal Line
Diameter: 3.05mm, Bottom Left: Quadrant
Material: Copper (Cu),
Nickel (Ni) G200F4-Cu Alpha/Numeric Index Grid, Copper 100/vial
100 mesh Multiple Slots G200F4-CP Alpha/Numeric Index Grid, Copper/Palladium 100/vial
TECHNICAL DATA G200F4-Ni Alpha/Numeric Index Grid, Nickel 100/vial
Type Cat# Packed Pitch (μm) Hole (μm) Bar (μm) G200F4-Au Alpha/Numeric Index Grid, Gold 50/vial
SQUARE MESH
50 mesh A50-Cu 100/vial — 450 —  Asbestos Analysis
150 mesh A150-Cu 100/vial — 150 —
200 mesh A200-Cu 100/vial — 100 27 Index Grids
A200-Ni 100/vial — 100 27 Our unique index grids for all
300 mesh A300-Cu 100/vial — 70 — of your microscopy work.
A300-Ni 100/vial — 70 — These grids are
400 mesh A400-Cu 100/vial — 45 — manufactured in the strictest
SQUARE MESH WITH CENTER MARK
accordance to meet AHERA
200 mesh AC200-Cu 100/vial — 100 27
AC200-Au 100/vial — 100 27
requirements.
THIN BAR WITH CENTER MARK SPECIFICATIONS:
200 mesh AT200-Cu 100/vial — — 10
Overall Diameter 3.05mm
AT200-Ni 100/vial — — 10
300 mesh AT300-Cu 100/vial — — 10 Mesh 200 lines/"
AT300-Ni 100/vial — — 10 Pitch 125 microns
400 mesh AT400-Cu 100/vial — — 10 Bar Width 10 microns +/- 2 microns
THICK AND THIN BAR WITH CENTER MARK Hole Width 115 microns +/- 2 microns
200 mesh ATT200-Cu 100/vial — 150 —
Index Identification Horizontal: A-J, Vertical: 1-10
300 mesh ATT200-Cu 100/vial — 75 —
HEXAGONAL MESH EMS Logo in Rim —————————
100 mesh AH100-Cu 100/vial — 240 — Asymmetrical Allows for precise repeat location
AH100-Ni 100/vial — 240 — Cut Out In Rim and aids in side differentiation
400 mesh AH400-Cu 100/vial — 240 —
SLOTTED G200EMSIND-Cu Asbestos Analysis Index Grids, Copper 100/vial
Multiple Slots AS-Cu 100/vial 350–700 G200EMSIND-Ni Asbestos Analysis Index Grids, Nickel 100/vial

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 113
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec04_104-115_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 1:13 AM Page 114

SECTION 4 Grids, Grid Storage Boxes, & Related Supplies

 SEM Finder Grids  Synaptek™ Grids
These new SEM grids are designed to aid in the identification and Very reliable under the electron beam- Synaptek® unflexible grids, made of
localization of SEM specimens when placed on standard SEM stubs. a special alloy (Berylium-Copper). Offers extreme stability for coating with
The SEMF2 allows for easy characterization and analysis of particles and support film. 4 mil thick (100μm), 3.05mm diameter, this standard 2x1mm
suspensions. oval slot grids are contamination free and reusable after cleaning.
The SEMF3 uses an alpha-numeric index, allowing up to 25 predetermined 0.5x2mm oval slots are also available.
specimens to be fixed and then located in a SEM. NUM grids: Numbered grids are in random order. Numbers may be duplicated.
DOT grids: 2 dots are marked on one side of the grid for identification.
Type SEMF1 Dots are visible to the naked eye.
Referring to the annular rim identifies NOTCH grids: A mark, stamped on one side of the grid to facilitate the
north, south, east and west. The four handling of the grids. Notch is available with NUM or DOT grids.
quadrant markers are tapered towards the GILDED grids: completely Gold-Plated grids, suitable for immunology
centre. 100 Radial sectors are identified research, autoradiography, as well as special needs.
by reference to decimal numbers in the
annular rim and alphabet letters in the
four quadrants.

Overall Diameter:....................................................................10 mm
Overall Thickness: ................................................................~50 μm
Material: ........................................................Copper, Nickel or Gold DOT NOTCH-DOT DOT
2x1mm slot 2x1mm slot 2x0.5mm slot
Type SEMF2
The larger cells are identified using
numbers from 1 – 57. Each large cell is
sub-divided into 4, making a total of 228
identifiable cells by reference to their
number and geographical location.
NOTCH-NUM NUM GILDED NOTCH-NUM
2x1mm slot 2x1mm slot 2x1mm slot

Overall Diameter:....................................................................10 mm
Overall Thickness: ................................................................~50 μm
Material: ........................................................Copper, Nickel or Gold

Type SEMF3 NOTCH NOTCH DOT DOT

25 cells are identified by reference to 2x1mm slot 0.8x1.8mm slot 1.5mm hole
their alpha-numeric position. The large
asymmetric cut-out feature in the rim Cat. No. Description Pack
S2010-DOT DOT, 2 x 1mm slot 100/vial
enables the right view to be easily
S2010-NUM NUM, 2 x 1mm slot 100/vial
obtained when placing on a SEM stub. S2010-NOTCH NOTCH, 2 x 1mm slot 100/vial
S2010-ND NOTCH-DOT, 2 x 1mm slot 100/vial
S2010-NN NOTCH-NUM, 2 x 1mm slot 100/vial
SG2010-NN GILDED NOTCH-NUM, 2 x 1mm slot,
Gold Plated 100/vial
Overall Diameter:....................................................................10 mm S2005-DOT DOT, 0.5 x 2mm slot 100/vial
Overall Thickness: ................................................................~50 μm S1808-ND NOTCH-DOT, 0.8 x 1.8mm slot 100/vial
Material: ........................................................Copper, Nickel or Gold S1020-NI Ni-NOTCH-DOT, 1 x 2mm slot, Nickel 100/vial
S1500-DOT DOT, 1.5mm hole 100/vial
80101-Cu SEMF1, Copper 10/vial S1500NI-DOT Ni-DOT, 1.5mm hole, Nickel 100/vial
80101-Ni SEMF1, Nickel 10/vial S1500MO-DOT Mo-DOT, 1.5mm hole, Molybdenum,
80101-Au SEMF1, Gold 5/vial Thickness of 75μm (3 mil) 25/vial
80102-Cu SEMF2, Copper 10/vial
80102-Ni SEMF2, Nickel 10/vial
80102-Au SEMF2, Gold 5/vial  Beryllium Grids for Transmission Electron
80103-Cu SEMF3, Copper 10/vial Microscopy
80103-Ni SEMF3, Nickel 10/vial Beryllium grids are superior to all other materials for in situ analysis in
80103-Au SEMF3, Gold 5/vial
transmission electron microscopes because for practical purposes they
give off no detectible background radiation which could interfere with the
analysis. Purity: 99.97%, Size: 3.05mm
0200-Be Beryllium Grids 200 Mesh each
 For Beryllium Planchets, see page 637 

114 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec04_104-115_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 1:13 AM Page 115

Grids, Grid Storage Boxes, & Related Supplies SECTION 4

 EMBRA Grids
Diameter: 3.05mm, Thickness: 16μm for meshed and 5-20 μm for oval hole grids Type Cat# Pack Open Area
SQUARE MESH
Material: Copper (Cu), Nickel (Ni), Gold (Au), Stainless Steel (SS), 100 mesh E100-SS 25/vial 65%
Titanium (Ti), Molybdenum (Mo), Aluminum (Al) E100-Ti 25/vial 65%
E100-Mo 25/vial 65%
EMBRA electroformed grids combine a high open area with a rigid construction which allows for E100-Al 25/vial 65%
relatively easy handling. We offer these grids in a series of hard to find materials, which are not 200 mesh E200-SS 25/vial 50%
available from other manufacturers. They are as follows: Stainless Steel (SS), Titanium (Ti), E200-Ti 25/vial 50%
Molybdenum (Mo), and Aluminum (Al) E200-Mo 25/vial 50%
E200-Al 25/vial 50%
Square Mesh 300 mesh E300-Ti 25/vial 40%
E300-Mo 25/vial 40%
E300-Al 25/vial 40%
OVAL SLOT
0.4x2mm E0420-SS 25/vial —
E0420-Ti 25/vial —
E0420-Mo 25/vial —
E0420-Al 25/vial —
100 mesh 200 mesh 300 mesh 2x1mm E2010-SS 25/vial —
E2010-Ti 25/vial —
Oval Slot E2010-Mo 25/vial —
E2010-Al 25/vial —
FINDER
100 mesh EF100-Cu 100/vial —
EF100-Ni 100/vial —
200 mesh EF200-Cu 100/vial —
EF200-Ni 100/vial —
0.4-2mm 2x1mm EF200-Au 25/vial —
300 mesh EF300-Cu 100/vial —
Finder EF300-Ni 100/vial —
Standard 3.05mm diameter grids which have one straight and one round cut out from EF300-Au 25/vial —
400 mesh EF400-Cu 100/vial —
the rim which assists in the orientation of the grid. They are available in Copper, Nickel,
EF400-Ni 100/vial —
and Gold Grids. EF400-Au 25/vial —
COORDINATOR
100 mesh EC100-Cu 100/vial —
EC100-Ni 100/vial —
200 mesh EC200-Cu 100/vial —
EC200-Ni 100/vial —
300 mesh EC300-Cu 100/vial —
100 mesh 200 mesh 300 mesh 400 mesh EC300-Ni 100/vial —
SELECTIVE GRIDS
7 Hexagon
7-Hex E7HEX-Cu 100/vial —
Coordinator 7-Hex E7HEX-Ni 100/vial —
Standard 3.05mm grids, with a handle. Freeze Fracture
They are available in copper and nickel. 75FF E75FF-Cu 100/vial —
75FF E75FF-Ni 100/vial —
Tissue
Processing
Coordinator
100 mesh 6G150 ETP150-Cu 100/vial —
Selective Grids 6G150 ETP150-Ni 100/vial —
6G200 ETP200-Cu 100/vial —
6G200 ETP200-Ni 100/vial —
Chien Grids
9G20H EC20H-Cu 100/vial —
9G20H EC20H-Ni 100/vial —

150 Mesh 200 Mesh

7 Hexagon 75 Mesh Freeze Fracture Tissue Processing Tissue Processing * Reference: Chien R, Van de Velde R, Heusser R: Simultaneous
Ultramicrotomy of multiple areas and examination of ribbons on one new
grid. Proc. 43rd Annual Meeting, Elec. Micro. Soc. Amer., G W Bailey, ed,
San Franciso Press, 460 (1985). Galey FR, Nilson SEG: A new method for
transferring sections from the liquid surface of the trough through staining
solutions to the supporting film of a grid. J. Ultrastruct. Res., 14, (1966),
405-410.

CHIEN Grids CHIEN Grids

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 115
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec04_116-133_EMS_Full Line New Modules 6/30/14 1:16 AM Page 116

SECTION 4 Grids, Grid Storage Boxes, & Related Supplies

SUPPORT FILM ON GRIDS
Support Film on grids has become
a main product line for us since
Support Film on Grids Application Guide
Which support film is best for your particular application? Are there any alternatives? What about Lacey Films?
the demand for high quality
Formvar Carbon Formvar/ Formvar/ Silicon Lacy
coated grids has increased. Substrate Application Only Only Carbon SiO SiO Film
To make your microscopy work BEST GOOD GOOD
easier and to save you a great Diffraction Studies — CHOICE — OPTION OPTION SUITABLE

deal of time we offer you a EDS (Energy Dispersive — GOOD GOOD — — SUITABLE
complete line. All of our coated Spectrometry) OPTION OPTION

grids are optically checked High Resolution Microscopy — BEST GOOD GOOD BEST SUITABLE
CHOICE OPTION OPTION CHOICE
followed by batch testing in the High Temp. Techniques/ BEST GOOD
EM. Packed in grid storage box. Heating Stage — CHOICE — — OPTION SUITABLE

All the grids below (except for the Low Magnification Microscopy GOOD GOOD BEST BEST GOOD —
OPTION OPTION CHOICE CHOICE OPTION
Beryllium Support Films) are Particulate Suspension, — BEST GOOD BEST BEST SUITABLE
available with the following Biological CHOICE OPTION CHOICE CHOICE
options: Particulate Suspension, — BEST GOOD BEST BEST SUITABLE
Non-Biological CHOICE OPTION CHOICE CHOICE
• Molybdenum grids in place
Powders, Dry — GOOD GOOD BEST GOOD —
of Au, Cu, or Ni OPTION OPTION CHOICE OPTION
• As Silicon-free GOOD GOOD BEST
Replicas, Low Temp. Techniques OPTION OPTION CHOICE — — SUITABLE
• With ultra-thin thickness
(thickness can be requested) Suspensions, Bacterial — BEST GOOD BEST BEST SUITABLE
CHOICE OPTION CHOICE CHOICE
• Extra thick thickness
Suspensions, Cell Fragment — BEST BEST BEST BEST SUITABLE
CHOICE CHOICE CHOICE CHOICE
NOTE: All of our film is
Suspensions, Viral — BEST GOOD GOOD BEST SUITABLE
laid on the shiny side of CHOICE OPTION OPTION CHOICE
the grid. Thin Sections GOOD GOOD BEST GOOD BEST SUITABLE
OPTION OPTION CHOICE OPTION CHOICE

® 1. Formvar Film Only

A thin film of pure formvar resin. The thickness range is as follows:
Standard: Approx. 10nm, Ultra-Thin (UL): 5-6nm, Thick (TH): 15-20nm, Extra Thick (ET): 25-50nm

® Formvar Square Mesh COPPER NICKEL GOLD

Standard Thickness
Cat. # Type Thickness Qty Cat. # Type Thickness Qty Cat. # Type Thickness Qty
FF100-Cu-25 25/box FF100-Ni-25 25/box FF100-Au-25 25/box
100 MESH standard 100 MESH standard 100 MESH standard
FF100-Cu-50 50/box FF100-Ni-50 50/box FF100-Au-50 50/box
FF150-Cu-25 25/box FF150-Ni-25 25/box FF150-Au-25 25/box
150 MESH standard 150 MESH standard 150 MESH standard
FF150-Cu-50 50/box FF150-Ni-50 50/box FF150-Au-50 50/box
FF200-Cu-25 25/box FF200-Ni-25 25/box FF200-Au-25 25/box
200 MESH standard 200 MESH standard 200 MESH standard
FF200-Cu-50 50/box FF200-Ni-50 50/box FF200-Au-50 50/box
FF300-Cu-25 25/box FF300-Ni-25 25/box FF300-Au-25 25/box
300 MESH standard 300 MESH standard 300 MESH standard
FF300-Cu-50 50/box FF300-Ni-50 50/box FF300-Au-50 50/box
FF400-Cu-25 25/box FF400-Ni-25 25/box FF400-Au-25 25/box
400 MESH standard 400 MESH standard 400 MESH standard
FF400-Cu-50 50/box FF400-Ni-50 50/box FF400-Au-50 50/box

NEW Thickness Ranges

Cat. # Type Thickness Qty Cat. # Type Thickness Qty Cat. # Type Thickness Qty
FF100-Cu-UL ultra-thin 50/box FF100-Ni-UL ultra-thin 50/box FF100-Au-UL ultra-thin 50/box
FF100-Cu-TH 100 MESH thick 50/box FF100-Ni-TH 100 MESH thick 50/box FF100-Au-TH 100 MESH thick 50/box
FF100-Cu-ET extra thick 50/box FF100-Ni-ET extra thick 50/box FF100-Au-ET extra thick 50/box
FF150-Cu-UL ultra-thin 50/box FF150-Ni-UL ultra-thin 50/box FF150-Au-UL ultra-thin 50/box
FF150-Cu-TH 150 MESH thick 50/box FF150-Ni-TH 150 MESH thick 50/box FF150-Au-TH 150 MESH thick 50/box
FF150-Cu-ET extra thick 50/box FF150-Ni-ET extra thick 50/box FF150-Au-ET extra thick 50/box
FF200-Cu-UL ultra-thin 50/box FF200-Ni-UL ultra-thin 50/box FF200-Au-UL ultra-thin 50/box
FF200-Cu-TH 200 MESH thick 50/box FF200-Ni-TH 200 MESH thick 50/box FF200-Au-TH 200 MESH thick 50/box
FF200-Cu-ET extra thick 50/box FF200-Ni-ET extra thick 50/box FF200-Au-ET extra thick 50/box
FF300-Cu-UL ultra-thin 50/box FF300-Ni-UL ultra-thin 50/box FF300-Au-UL ultra-thin 50/box
FF300-Cu-TH 300 MESH thick 50/box FF300-Ni-TH 300 MESH thick 50/box FF300-Au-TH 300 MESH thick 50/box
FF300-Cu-ET extra thick 50/box FF300-Ni-ET extra thick 50/box FF300-Au-ET extra thick 50/box
FF400-Cu-UL ultra-thin 50/box FF400-Ni-UL ultra-thin 50/box FF400-Au-UL ultra-thin 50/box
FF400-Cu-TH 400 MESH thick 50/box FF400-Ni-TH 400 MESH thick 50/box FF400-Au-TH 400 MESH thick 50/box
FF400-Cu-ET extra thick 50/box FF400-Ni-ET extra thick 50/box FF400-Au-ET extra thick 50/box

116 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec04_116-133_EMS_Full Line New Modules 6/30/14 1:16 AM Page 117

Grids, Grid Storage Boxes, & Related Supplies SECTION 4

SUPPORT FILM ON GRIDS

® Formvar Gilder Finder Grids COPPER NICKEL GOLD
Standard Thickness
Cat. # Type Thickness Qty Cat. # Type Thickness Qty Cat. # Type Thickness Qty
FF200F1-Cu-25 25/box FF200F1-Ni-25 25/box FF200F1-Au-25 25/box
F1 standard F1 standard F1 standard
FF200F1-Cu-50 50/box FF200F1-Ni-50 50/box FF200F1-Au-50 50/box
FF200F2-Cu-25 25/box FF200F2-Ni-25 25/box FF200F2-Au-25 25/box
F2 standard F2 standard F2 standard
FF200F2-Cu-50 50/box FF200F2-Ni-50 50/box FF200F2-Au-50 50/box

NEW Thickness Ranges

Cat. # Type Thickness Qty Cat. # Type Thickness Qty Cat. # Type Thickness Qty
FF200F1-Cu-UL ultra-thin 50/box FF200F1-Ni-UL ultra-thin 50/box FF200F1-Au-UL ultra-thin 50/box
FF200F1-Cu-TH F1 thick 50/box FF200F1-Ni-TH F1 thick 50/box FF200F1-Au-TH F1 thick 50/box
FF200F1-Cu-ET extra thick 50/box FF200F1-Ni-ET extra thick 50/box FF200F1-Au-ET extra thick 50/box
FF200F2-Cu-UL ultra-thin 50/box FF200F2-Ni-UL ultra-thin 50/box FF200F2-Au-UL ultra-thin 50/box
FF200F2-Cu-TH F2 thick 50/box FF200F2-Ni-TH F2 thick 50/box FF200F2-Au-TH F2 thick 50/box
FF200F2-Cu-ET extra thick 50/box FF200F2-Ni-ET extra thick 50/box FF200F2-Au-ET extra thick 50/box

® Formvar London Finder Grids COPPER NICKEL GOLD

Standard Thickness
Cat. # Type Thickness Qty Cat. # Type Thickness Qty Cat. # Type Thickness Qty
FFLF135-Cu-25 25/box FFLF135-Ni-25 25/box FFLF135-Au-25 25/box
LF135 standard LF135 standard LF135 standard
FFLF135-Cu-50 50/box FFLF135-Ni-50 50/box FFLF135-Au-50 50/box
FFLF200-Cu-25 25/box FFLF200-Ni-25 25/box
LF200 standard LF200 standard FFLF200-Au-25 LF200 standard 25/box
FFLF200-Cu-50 50/box FFLF200-Ni-50 50/box
FFLF400-Cu-25 25/box FFLF400-Ni-25 25/box
LF400 standard LF400 standard FFLF400-Au-25 LF400 standard 25/box
FFLF400-Cu-50 50/box FFLF400-Ni-50 50/box

NEW Thickness Ranges

Cat. # Type Thickness Qty Cat. # Type Thickness Qty Cat. # Type Thickness Qty
FFLF135-Cu-UL ultra-thin 50/box FFLF135-Ni-UL ultra-thin 50/box FFLF135-Au-UL ultra-thin 50/box
FFLF135-Cu-TH LF135 thick 50/box FFLF135-Ni-TH LF135 thick 50/box FFLF135-Au-TH LF135 thick 50/box
FFLF135-Cu-ET extra thick 50/box FFLF135-Ni-ET extra thick 50/box FFLF135-Au-ET extra thick 50/box
FFLF200-Cu-UL ultra-thin 50/box FFLF200-Ni-UL ultra-thin 50/box
FFLF200-Cu-TH LF200 thick 50/box FFLF200-Ni-TH LF200 thick 50/box
FFLF200-Cu-ET extra thick 50/box FFLF200-Ni-ET extra thick 50/box
FFLF400-Cu-UL ultra-thin 50/box FFLF400-Ni-UL ultra-thin 50/box
FFLF400-Cu-TH LF400 thick 50/box FFLF400-Ni-TH LF400 thick 50/box
FFLF400-Cu-ET extra thick 50/box FFLF400-Ni-ET extra thick 50/box

® Formvar Hexagonal Mesh COPPER NICKEL GOLD

Standard Thickness
Cat. # Type Thickness Qty Cat. # Type Thickness Qty Cat. # Type Thickness Qty
FF100H-Cu-25 25/box FF100H-Ni-25 25/box FF100H-Au-25 25/box
100 MESH standard 100 MESH standard 100 MESH standard
FF100H-Cu-50 50/box FF100H-Ni-50 50/box FF100H-Au-50 50/box
FF200H-Cu-25 25/box FF200H-Ni-25 25/box FF200H-Au-25 25/box
200 MESH standard 200 MESH standard 200 MESH standard
FF200H-Cu-50 50/box FF200H-Ni-50 50/box FF200H-Au-50 50/box
FF300H-Cu-25 25/box FF300H-Ni-25 25/box FF300H-Au-25 25/box
300 MESH standard 300 MESH standard 300 MESH standard
FF300H-Cu-50 50/box FF300H-Ni-50 50/box FF300H-Au-50 50/box
FF400H-Cu-25 25/box FF400H-Ni-25 25/box FF400H-Au-25 25/box
400 MESH standard 400 MESH standard 400 MESH standard
FF400H-Cu-50 50/box FF400H-Ni-50 50/box FF400H-Au-50 50/box

NEW Thickness Ranges

Cat. # Type Thickness Qty Cat. # Type Thickness Qty Cat. # Type Thickness Qty
FF100H-Cu-UL ultra-thin 50/box FF100H-Ni-UL ultra-thin 50/box FF100H-Au-UL ultra-thin 50/box
FF100H-Cu-TH 100 MESH thick 50/box FF100H-Ni-TH 100 MESH thick 50/box FF100H-Au-TH 100 MESH thick 50/box
FF100H-Cu-ET extra thick 50/box FF100H-Ni-ET extra thick 50/box FF100H-Au-ET extra thick 50/box
FF200H-Cu-UL ultra-thin 50/box FF200H-Ni-UL ultra-thin 50/box FF200H-Au-UL ultra-thin 50/box
FF200H-Cu-TH 200 MESH thick 50/box FF200H-Ni-TH 200 MESH thick 50/box FF200H-Au-TH 200 MESH thick 50/box
FF200H-Cu-ET extra thick 50/box FF200H-Ni-ET extra thick 50/box FF200H-Au-ET extra thick 50/box
FF300H-Cu-UL ultra-thin 50/box FF300H-Ni-UL ultra-thin 50/box FF300H-Au-UL ultra-thin 50/box
FF300H-Cu-TH 300 MESH thick 50/box FF300H-Ni-TH 300 MESH thick 50/box FF300H-Au-TH 300 MESH thick 50/box
FF300H-Cu-ET extra thick 50/box FF300H-Ni-ET extra thick 50/box FF300H-Au-ET extra thick 50/box
FF400H-Cu-UL ultra-thin 50/box FF400H-Ni-UL ultra-thin 50/box FF400H-Au-UL ultra-thin 50/box
FF400H-Cu-TH 400 MESH thick 50/box FF400H-Ni-TH 400 MESH thick 50/box FF400H-Au-TH 400 MESH thick 50/box
FF400H-Cu-ET extra thick 50/box FF400H-Ni-ET extra thick 50/box FF400H-Au-ET extra thick 50/box

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 117
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec04_116-133_EMS_Full Line New Modules 6/30/14 1:17 AM Page 118

SECTION 4 Grids, Grid Storage Boxes, & Related Supplies

SUPPORT FILM ON GRIDS
® Formvar Thin Bar Square Mesh COPPER NICKEL GOLD
Standard Thickness
Cat. # Type Thickness Qty Cat. # Type Thickness Qty Cat. # Type Thickness Qty
FFT200-Cu-25 25/box FFT200-Ni-25 25/box FFT200-Au-25 25/box
200 MESH standard 200 MESH standard 200 MESH standard
FFT200-Cu-50 50/box FFT200-Ni-50 50/box FFT200H-Au-50 50/box
FFT300-Cu-25 25/box FFT300-Ni-25 25/box FFT300-Au-25 25/box
300 MESH standard 300 MESH standard 300 MESH standard
FFT300-Cu-50 50/box FFT300-Ni-50 50/box FFT300-Au-50 50/box
FFT400-Cu-25 25/box FFT400-Ni-25 25/box FFT400-Au-25 25/box
400 MESH standard 400 MESH standard 400 MESH standard
FFT400-Cu-50 50/box FFT400-Ni-50 50/box FFT400-Au-50 50/box
FFT1000-Cu-25 standard
25/box FFT1000-Ni-25 standard
25/box FFT1000-Au-25 standard
25/box
1000 MESH 1000 MESH 1000 MESH
FFT1000-Cu-50 50/box FFT1000-Ni-50 50/box FFT1000-Au-50 50/box
NEW Thickness Ranges
Cat. # Type Thickness Qty Cat. # Type Thickness Qty Cat. # Type Thickness Qty
FFT200-Cu-UL ultra-thin 50/box FFT200-Ni-UL ultra-thin 50/box FFT200-Au-UL ultra-thin 50/box
FFT200-Cu-TH 200 MESH thick 50/box FFT200-Ni-TH 200 MESH thick 50/box FFT200-Au-TH 200 MESH thick 50/box
FFT200-Cu-ET extra thick 50/box FFT200-Ni-ET extra thick 50/box FFT200-Au-ET extra thick 50/box
FFT300-Cu-UL ultra-thin 50/box FFT300-Ni-UL ultra-thin 50/box FFT300-Au-UL ultra-thin 50/box
FFT300-Cu-TH 300 MESH thick 50/box FFT300-Ni-TH 300 MESH thick 50/box FFT300-Au-TH 300 MESH thick 50/box
FFT300-Cu-ET extra thick 50/box FFT300-Ni-ET extra thick 50/box FFT300-Au-ET extra thick 50/box
FFT400-Cu-UL ultra-thin 50/box FFT400-Ni-UL ultra-thin 50/box FFT400-Au-UL ultra-thin 50/box
FFT400-Cu-TH 400 MESH thick 50/box FFT400-Ni-TH 400 MESH thick 50/box FFT400-Au-TH 400 MESH thick 50/box
FFT400-Cu-ET extra thick 50/box FFT400-Ni-ET extra thick 50/box FFT400-Au-ET extra thick 50/box
FFT1000-Cu-UL ultra-thin 50/box FFT1000-Ni-UL ultra-thin 50/box FFT1000-Au-UL ultra-thin 50/box
FFT1000-Cu-TH 1000 MESH thick 50/box FFT1000-Ni-TH 1000 MESH thick 50/box FFT1000-Au-TH 1000 MESH thick 50/box
FFT1000-Cu-ET extra thick 50/box FFT1000-Ni-ET extra thick 50/box FFT1000-Au-ET extra thick 50/box

® Formvar Thin Bar Hexagonal Mesh COPPER NICKEL GOLD

Standard Thickness
Cat. # Type Thickness Qty Cat. # Type Thickness Qty Cat. # Type Thickness Qty
FFTH200-Cu-25 standard 25/box FFTH200-Ni-25 standard 25/box FFTH200-Au-25 standard 25/box
200 MESH 200 MESH 200 MESH
FFTH200-Cu-50 50/box FFTH200-Ni-50 50/box FFTH200-Au-50 50/box
FFTH300-Cu-25 standard 25/box FFTH300-Ni-25 standard 25/box FFTH300-Au-25 standard 25/box
300 MESH 300 MESH 300 MESH
FFTH300-Cu-50 50/box FFTH300-Ni-50 50/box FFTH300-Au-50 50/box
FFTH400-Cu-25 standard 25/box FFTH400-Ni-25 standard 25/box FFTH400-Au-25 standard 25/box
400 MESH 400 MESH 400 MESH
FFTH400-Cu-50 50/box FFTH400-Ni-50 50/box FFTH400-Au-50 50/box
FFTH600-Cu-25 standard 25/box FFTH600-Ni-25 standard 25/box FFTH600-Au-25 standard 25/box
600 MESH 600 MESH 600 MESH
FFTH600-Cu-50 50/box FFTH600-Ni-50 50/box FFTH600-Au-50 50/box

NEW Thickness Ranges

Cat. # Type Thickness Qty Cat. # Type Thickness Qty Cat. # Type Thickness Qty
FFTH200-Cu-UL ultra-thin 50/box FFTH200-Ni-UL ultra-thin 50/box FFTH200-Au-UL ultra-thin 50/box
FFTH200-Cu-TH 200 MESH thick 50/box FFTH200-Ni-TH 200 MESH thick 50/box FFTH200-Au-TH 200 MESH thick 50/box
FFTH200-Cu-ET extra thick 50/box FFTH200-Ni-ET extra thick 50/box FFTH200-Au-ET extra thick 50/box
FFTH300-Cu-UL ultra-thin 50/box FFTH300-Ni-UL ultra-thin 50/box FFTH300-Au-UL ultra-thin 50/box
FFTH300-Cu-TH 300 MESH thick 50/box FFTH300-Ni-TH 300 MESH thick 50/box FFTH300-Au-TH 300 MESH thick 50/box
FFTH300-Cu-ET extra thick 50/box FFTH300-Ni-ET extra thick 50/box FFTH300-Au-ET extra thick 50/box
FFTH400-Cu-UL ultra-thin 50/box FFTH400-Ni-UL ultra-thin 50/box FFTH400-Au-UL ultra-thin 50/box
FFTH400-Cu-TH 400 MESH thick 50/box FFTH400-Ni-TH 400 MESH thick 50/box FFTH400-Au-TH 400 MESH thick 50/box
FFTH400-Cu-ET extra thick 50/box FFTH400-Ni-ET extra thick 50/box FFTH400-Au-ET extra thick 50/box
FFTH600-Cu-UL ultra-thin 50/box FFTH600-Ni-UL ultra-thin 50/box FFTH600-Au-UL ultra-thin 50/box
FFTH600-Cu-TH 600 MESH thick 50/box FFTH600-Ni-TH 600 MESH thick 50/box FFTH600-Au-TH 600 MESH thick 50/box
FFTH600-Cu-ET extra thick 50/box FFTH600-Ni-ET extra thick 50/box FFTH600-Au-ET extra thick 50/box

® Formvar Slots COPPER NICKEL GOLD

Standard Thickness
Cat. # Type Thickness Qty Cat. # Type Thickness Qty Cat. # Type Thickness Qty
FF205-Cu-25 25/box FF205-Ni-25 25/box FF205-Au-25 25/box
2 x 0.5mm standard 2 x 0.5mm standard 2 x 0.5mm standard
FF205-Cu-50 50/box FF205-Ni-50 50/box FF205-Au-50 50/box
FF2010-Cu-25 standard 25/box FF2010-Ni-25 standard 25/box FF2010-Au-25 standard 25/box
2 x 1mm 2 x 1mm 2 x 1mm
FF2010-Cu-50 50/box FF2010-Ni-50 50/box FF2010-Au-50 50/box

NEW Thickness Ranges

Cat. # Type Thickness Qty Cat. # Type Thickness Qty Cat. # Type Thickness Qty
FF205-Cu-UL ultra-thin 50/box FF205-Ni-UL ultra-thin 50/box FF205-Au-UL ultra-thin 50/box
FF205-Cu-TH 2 x 0.5mm thick 50/box FF205-Ni-TH 2 x 0.5mm thick 50/box FF205-Au-TH 2 x 0.5mm thick 50/box
FF205-Cu-ET extra thick 50/box FF205-Ni-ET extra thick 50/box FF205-Au-ET extra thick 50/box
FF2010-Cu-UL ultra-thin 50/box FF2010-Ni-UL ultra-thin 50/box FF2010-Au-UL ultra-thin 50/box
FF2010-Cu-TH 2 x 1mm thick 50/box FF2010-Ni-TH 2 x 1mm thick 50/box FF2010-Au-TH 2 x 1mm thick 50/box
FF2010-Cu-ET extra thick 50/box FF2010-Ni-ET extra thick 50/box FF2010-Au-ET extra thick 50/box

118 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec04_116-133_EMS_Full Line New Modules 6/30/14 1:17 AM Page 119

Grids, Grid Storage Boxes, & Related Supplies SECTION 4

SUPPORT FILM ON GRIDS

® Formvar Single Hole COPPER NICKEL
Standard Thickness
Cat. # Type Thickness Qty Cat. # Type Thickness Qty
FFGA75-Cu-25 25/box FFGA75-Ni-25 25/box
75 micron standard 75 micron standard
FFGA75-Cu-50 50/box FFGA75-Ni-50 50/box
FFGA100-Cu-25 25/box FFGA100-Ni-25 25/box
100 micron standard 100 micron standard
FFGA100-Cu-50 50/box FFGA100-Ni-50 50/box
FFGA150-Cu-25 25/box FFGA150-Ni-25 25/box
150 micron standard 150 micron standard
FFGA150-Cu-50 50/box FFGA150-Ni-50 50/box
FFGA200-Cu-25 25/box FFGA200-Ni-25 25/box
200 micron standard 200 micron standard
FFGA200-Cu-50 50/box FFGA200-Ni-50 50/box
FFGA300-Cu-25 25/box FFGA300-Ni-25 25/box
300 micron standard 300 micron standard
FFGA300-Cu-50 50/box FFGA300-Ni-50 50/box
FFGA400-Cu-25 25/box FFGA400-Ni-25 25/box
400 micron standard 400 micron standard
FFGA400-Cu-50 50/box FFGA400-Ni-50 50/box
FFGA600-Cu-25 25/box FFGA600-Ni-25 25/box
600 micron standard 600 micron standard
FFGA600-Cu-50 50/box FFGA600-Ni-50 50/box
FFGA800-Cu-25 25/box FFGA800-Ni-25 25/box
800 micron standard 800 micron standard
FFGA800-Cu-50 50/box FFGA800-Ni-50 50/box
FFGA1000-Cu-25 25/box FFGA1000-Ni-25 25/box
1000 micron standard 1000 micron standard
FFGA1000-Cu-50 50/box FFGA1000-Ni-50 50/box
FFGA1500-Cu-25 25/box FFGA1500-Ni-25 25/box
1500 micron standard 1500 micron standard
FFGA1500-Cu-50 50/box FFGA1500-Ni-50 50/box

NEW Thickness Ranges

Cat. # Type Thickness Qty Cat. # Type Thickness Qty
FFGA75-Cu-UL ultra-thin 50/box FFGA75-Ni-UL ultra-thin 50/box
FFGA75-Cu-TH 75 micron thick 50/box FFGA75-Ni-TH 75 micron thick 50/box
FFGA75-Cu-ET extra thick 50/box FFGA75-Ni-ET extra thick 50/box
FFGA100-Cu-UL ultra-thin 50/box FFGA100-Ni-UL ultra-thin 50/box
FFGA100-Cu-TH 100 micron thick 50/box FFGA100-Ni-TH 100 micron thick 50/box
FFGA100-Cu-ET extra thick 50/box FFGA100-Ni-ET extra thick 50/box
FFGA150-Cu-UL ultra-thin 50/box FFGA150-Ni-UL ultra-thin 50/box
FFGA150-Cu-TH 150 micron thick 50/box FFGA150-Ni-TH 150 micron thick 50/box
FFGA150-Cu-ET extra thick 50/box FFGA150-Ni-ET extra thick 50/box
FFGA200-Cu-UL ultra-thin 50/box FFGA200-Ni-UL ultra-thin 50/box
FFGA200-Cu-TH 200 micron thick 50/box FFGA200-Ni-TH 200 micron thick 50/box
FFGA200-Cu-ET extra thick 50/box FFGA200-Ni-ET extra thick 50/box
FFGA300-Cu-UL ultra-thin 50/box FFGA300-Ni-UL ultra-thin 50/box
FFGA300-Cu-TH 300 micron thick 50/box FFGA300-Ni-TH 300 micron thick 50/box
FFGA300-Cu-ET extra thick 50/box FFGA300-Ni-ET extra thick 50/box
FFGA400-Cu-UL ultra-thin 50/box FFGA400-Ni-UL ultra-thin 50/box
FFGA400-Cu-TH 400 micron thick 50/box FFGA400-Ni-TH 400 micron thick 50/box
FFGA400-Cu-ET extra thick 50/box FFGA400-Ni-ET extra thick 50/box
FFGA600-Cu-UL ultra-thin 50/box FFGA600-Ni-UL ultra-thin 50/box
FFGA600-Cu-TH 600 micron thick 50/box FFGA600-Ni-TH 600 micron thick 50/box
FFGA600-Cu-ET extra thick 50/box FFGA600-Ni-ET extra thick 50/box
FFGA800-Cu-UL ultra-thin 50/box FFGA800-Ni-UL ultra-thin 50/box
FFGA800-Cu-TH 800 micron thick 50/box FFGA800-Ni-TH 800 micron thick 50/box
FFGA800-Cu-ET extra thick 50/box FFGA800-Ni-ET extra thick 50/box
FFGA1000-Cu-UL ultra-thin 50/box FFGA1000-Ni-UL ultra-thin 50/box
FFGA1000-Cu-TH 1000 micron thick 50/box FFGA1000-Ni-TH 1000 micron thick 50/box
FFGA1000-Cu-ET extra thick 50/box FFGA1000-Ni-ET extra thick 50/box
FFGA1500-Cu-UL ultra-thin 50/box FFGA1500-Ni-UL ultra-thin 50/box
FFGA1500-Cu-TH 1500 micron thick 50/box FFGA1500-Ni-TH 1500 micron thick 50/box
FFGA1500-Cu-ET extra thick 50/box FFGA1500-Ni-ET extra thick 50/box

ARTICLE OF INTEREST TECHNICAL TIP

A simplified method for handling EM grids is described. This new method not only offers safety How do Nickel and Copper
and identification of your samples but offers you improved handling, temporary storage, and grids react with Periodic Acid?
identification of grids bearing ultrathin sections as well as a novel method for preparing bulk samples. Periodic Acid + Ni... Ni-Periodate + H2
Refer to: Gorycki, M.(1992). A Simple Method for Handling Grids. Periodic Acid + Cu... Cu-Periodate + H2
Biotechnic & Histochemistry 67/5, 313-314. In this case you should use Gold Grids.

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 119
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec04_116-133_EMS_Full Line New Modules 6/30/14 1:17 AM Page 120

SECTION 4 Grids, Grid Storage Boxes, & Related Supplies

SUPPORT FILM ON GRIDS
 2. Carbon Film Only
A thin film of pure carbon deposited on one side of the grid. The thickness range is as follows:
Standard: Approx. 5-6nm, Ultra-Thin (UL): 3-4nm, Thick (TH): 10nm, Extra Thick (ET): 20-30nm

 Carbon Square Mesh COPPER NICKEL GOLD

Standard Thickness
Cat. # Type Thickness Qty Cat. # Type Thickness Qty Cat. # Type Thickness Qty
CF150-Cu-25 25/box CF150-Ni-25 25/box CF150-Au-25 25/box
150 MESH standard 150 MESH standard 150 MESH standard
CF150-Cu-50 50/box CF150-Ni-50 50/box CF150-Au-50 50/box
CF200-Cu-25 25/box CF200-Ni-25 25/box CF200-Au-25 25/box
200 MESH standard 200 MESH standard 200 MESH standard
CF200-Cu-50 50/box CF200-Ni-50 50/box CF200-Au-50 50/box
CF300-Cu-25 25/box CF300-Ni-25 25/box CF300-Au-25 25/box
300 MESH standard 300 MESH standard 300 MESH standard
CF300-Cu-50 50/box CF300-Ni-50 50/box CF300-Au-50 50/box
CF400-Cu-25 25/box CF400-Ni-25 25/box CF400-Au-25 25/box
400 MESH standard 400 MESH standard 400 MESH standard
CF400-Cu-50 50/box CF400-Ni-50 50/box CF400-Au-50 50/box

NEW Thickness Ranges

Cat. # Type Thickness Qty Cat. # Type Thickness Qty Cat. # Type Thickness Qty
CF150-Cu-UL ultra-thin 50/box CF150-Ni-UL ultra-thin 50/box CF150-Au-UL ultra-thin 50/box
CF150-Cu-TH 150 MESH thick 50/box CF150-Ni-TH 150 MESH thick 50/box CF150-Au-TH 150 MESH thick 50/box
CF150-Cu-ET extra thick 50/box CF150-Ni-ET extra thick 50/box CF150-Au-ET extra thick 50/box
CF200-Cu-UL ultra-thin 50/box CF200-Ni-UL ultra-thin 50/box CF200-Au-UL ultra-thin 50/box
CF200-Cu-TH 200 MESH thick 50/box CF200-Ni-TH 200 MESH thick 50/box CF200-Au-TH 200 MESH thick 50/box
CF200-Cu-ET extra thick 50/box CF200-Ni-ET extra thick 50/box CF200-Au-ET extra thick 50/box
CF300-Cu-UL ultra-thin 50/box CF300-Ni-UL ultra-thin 50/box CF300-Au-UL ultra-thin 50/box
CF300-Cu-TH 300 MESH thick 50/box CF300-Ni-TH 300 MESH thick 50/box CF300-Au-TH 300 MESH thick 50/box
CF300-Cu-ET extra thick 50/box CF300-Ni-ET extra thick 50/box CF300-Au-ET extra thick 50/box
CF400-Cu-UL ultra-thin 50/box CF400-Ni-UL ultra-thin 50/box CF400-Au-UL ultra-thin 50/box
CF400-Cu-TH 400 MESH thick 50/box CF400-Ni-TH 400 MESH thick 50/box CF400-Au-TH 400 MESH thick 50/box
CF400-Cu-ET extra thick 50/box CF400-Ni-ET extra thick 50/box CF400-Au-ET extra thick 50/box

 Carbon Gilder Finder Grids COPPER NICKEL GOLD

Standard Thickness
Cat. # Type Thickness Qty Cat. # Type Thickness Qty Cat. # Type Thickness Qty
CF200F1-Cu-25 standard 25/box CF200F1-Ni-25 standard 25/box CF200F1-Au-25 standard 25/box
F1 F1 F1
CF200F1-Cu-50 50/box CF200F1-Ni-50 50/box CF200F1-Au-50 50/box
CF200F2-Cu-25 25/box CF200F2-Ni-25 25/box CF200F2-Au-25 25/box
F2 standard F2 standard F2 standard
CF200F2-Cu-50 50/box CF200F2-Ni-50 50/box CF200F2-Au-50 50/box

NEW Thickness Ranges

Cat. # Type Thickness Qty Cat. # Type Thickness Qty Cat. # Type Thickness Qty
CF200F1-Cu-UL ultra-thin 50/box CF200F1-Ni-UL ultra-thin 50/box CF200F1-Au-UL ultra-thin 50/box
CF200F1-Cu-TH F1 thick 50/box CF200F1-Ni-TH F1 thick 50/box CF200F1-Au-TH F1 thick 50/box
CF200F1-Cu-ET extra thick 50/box CF200F1-Ni-ET extra thick 50/box CF200F1-Au-ET extra thick 50/box
CF200F2-Cu-UL ultra-thin 50/box CF200F2-Ni-UL ultra-thin 50/box CF200F2-Au-UL ultra-thin 50/box
CF200F2-Cu-TH F2 thick 50/box CF200F2-Ni-TH F2 thick 50/box CF200F2-Au-TH F2 thick 50/box
CF200F2-Cu-ET extra thick 50/box CF200F2-Ni-ET extra thick 50/box CF200F2-Au-ET extra thick 50/box

TECHNICAL TIP
The Preparation of Adhesive Coated Grids for Picking Up Carbon Film to Make Carbon Coated Grids
The following steps should be followed in the preparation of adhesive coated grids:
1. Submerge about 2" of Scotch clear tape (3M) into 10ml of 4. Take a pipette and place a drop of “grid-glue” on top of each grid.
Dichloroethane (Ethylene Dichloride); shake and discard the tape. 5. Let the grids dry.
2. The solution now becomes “grid-glue” 6. The grids are now ready to pick up the carbon foil and make the
3. Place the grids (dull side up) on a piece of filter paper (dust-free room). carbon coated grids.

 For more Technical Tips on Grids, see pages 108, 109 

120 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec04_116-133_EMS_Full Line New Modules 6/30/14 1:17 AM Page 121

Grids, Grid Storage Boxes, & Related Supplies SECTION 4

SUPPORT FILM ON GRIDS

® Carbon London Finder Grids COPPER NICKEL GOLD

Standard Thickness
Cat. # Type Thickness Qty Cat. # Type Thickness Qty Cat. # Type Thickness Qty
CFLF135-Cu-25 25/box CFLF135-Ni-25 25/box CFLF135-Au-25 25/box
LF135 standard LF135 standard LF135 standard
CFLF135-Cu-50 50/box CFLF135-Ni-50 50/box CFLF135-Au-50 50/box
CFLF200-Cu-25 25/box CFLF200-Ni-25 25/box
LF200 standard LF200 standard CFLF200-Au-25 LF200 standard 25/box
CFLF200-Cu-50 50/box CFLF200-Ni-50 50/box
CFLF400-Cu-25 25/box CFLF400-Ni-25 25/box
LF400 standard LF400 standard CFLF400-Au-25 LF400 standard 25/box
CFLF400-Cu-50 50/box CFLF400-Ni-50 50/box

NEW Thickness Ranges

Cat. # Type Thickness Qty Cat. # Type Thickness Qty Cat. # Type Thickness Qty
CFLF135-Cu-UL ultra-thin 50/box CFLF135-Ni-UL ultra-thin 50/box CFLF135-Au-UL ultra-thin 50/box
CFLF135-Cu-TH LF135 thick 50/box CFLF135-Ni-TH LF135 thick 50/box CFLF135-Au-TH LF135 thick 50/box
CFLF135-Cu-ET extra thick 50/box CFLF135-Ni-ET extra thick 50/box CFLF135-Au-ET extra thick 50/box
CFLF200-Cu-UL ultra-thin 50/box CFLF200-Ni-UL ultra-thin 50/box
CFLF200-Cu-TH LF200 thick 50/box CFLF200-Ni-TH LF200 thick 50/box
CFLF200-Cu-ET extra thick 50/box CFLF200-Ni-ET extra thick 50/box
CFLF400-Cu-UL ultra-thin 50/box CFLF400-Ni-UL ultra-thin 50/box
CFLF400-Cu-TH LF400 thick 50/box CFLF400-Ni-TH LF400 thick 50/box
CFLF400-Cu-ET extra thick 50/box CFLF400-Ni-ET extra thick 50/box

® Carbon Hexagonal Mesh COPPER NICKEL GOLD

Standard Thickness
Cat. # Type Thickness Qty Cat. # Type Thickness Qty Cat. # Type Thickness Qty
CF100H-Cu-25 25/box CF100H-Ni-25 25/box CF100H-Au-25 25/box
100 MESH standard 100 MESH standard 100 MESH standard
CF100H-Cu-50 50/box CF100H-Ni-50 50/box CF100H-Au-50 50/box
CF200H-Cu-25 25/box CF200H-Ni-25 25/box CF200H-Au-25 25/box
200 MESH standard 200 MESH standard 200 MESH standard
CF200H-Cu-50 50/box CF200H-Ni-50 50/box CF200H-Au-50 50/box
CF300H-Cu-25 25/box CF300H-Ni-25 25/box CF300H-Au-25 25/box
300 MESH standard 300 MESH standard 300 MESH standard
CF300H-Cu-50 50/box CF300H-Ni-50 50/box CF300H-Au-50 50/box
CF400H-Cu-25 25/box CF400H-Ni-25 25/box CF400H-Au-25 25/box
400 MESH standard 400 MESH standard 400 MESH standard
CF400H-Cu-50 50/box CF400H-Ni-50 50/box CF400H-Au-50 50/box

NEW Thickness Ranges

Cat. # Type Thickness Qty Cat. # Type Thickness Qty Cat. # Type Thickness Qty
CF100H-Cu-UL ultra-thin 50/box CF100H-Ni-UL ultra-thin 50/box CF100H-Au-UL ultra-thin 50/box
CF100H-Cu-TH 100 MESH thick 50/box CF100H-Ni-TH 100 MESH thick 50/box CF100H-Au-TH 100 MESH thick 50/box
CF100H-Cu-ET extra thick 50/box CF100H-Ni-ET extra thick 50/box CF100H-Au-ET extra thick 50/box
CF200H-Cu-UL ultra-thin 50/box CF200H-Ni-UL ultra-thin 50/box CF200H-Au-UL ultra-thin 50/box
CF200H-Cu-TH 200 MESH thick 50/box CF200H-Ni-TH 200 MESH thick 50/box CF200H-Au-TH 200 MESH thick 50/box
CF200H-Cu-ET extra thick 50/box CF200H-Ni-ET extra thick 50/box CF200H-Au-ET extra thick 50/box
CF300H-Cu-UL ultra-thin 50/box CF300H-Ni-UL ultra-thin 50/box CF300H-Au-UL ultra-thin 50/box
CF300H-Cu-TH 300 MESH thick 50/box CF300H-Ni-TH 300 MESH thick 50/box CF300H-Au-TH 300 MESH thick 50/box
CF300H-Cu-ET extra thick 50/box CF300H-Ni-ET extra thick 50/box CF300H-Au-ET extra thick 50/box
CF400H-Cu-UL ultra-thin 50/box CF400H-Ni-UL ultra-thin 50/box CF400H-Au-UL ultra-thin 50/box
CF400H-Cu-TH 400 MESH thick 50/box CF400H-Ni-TH 400 MESH thick 50/box CF400H-Au-TH 400 MESH thick 50/box
CF400H-Cu-ET extra thick 50/box CF400H-Ni-ET extra thick 50/box CF400H-Au-ET extra thick 50/box

Check out our Most Revolutionary Products...

Introducing DuraSIN™, revolutioning the way
samples are prepared and analyzed in the
transmission electron microscope. SEM image of a DuraSiN™ Film (taken from the back side)

DuraSiN™ Film and Mesh products are affordably-priced, durable, nonorganic, low scatter support
grids for quantitative TEM and X-ray analysis. Unlike other support films and grids, DuraSiN™ Film
and Mesh products can withstand harsh chemical and temperature environments.
For more information, see page 152-157. UUUUU
SEM image of a DuraSiN™ Mesh (taken from the back side)

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 121
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec04_116-133_EMS_Full Line New Modules 6/30/14 1:17 AM Page 122

SECTION 4 Grids, Grid Storage Boxes, & Related Supplies

SUPPORT FILM ON GRIDS
® Carbon Thin Bar Square Mesh COPPER NICKEL GOLD
Standard Thickness
Cat. # Type Thickness Qty Cat. # Type Thickness Qty Cat. # Type Thickness Qty
CFT200-Cu-25 25/box CFT200-Ni-25 25/box CFT200-Au-25 25/box
200 MESH standard 200 MESH standard 200 MESH standard
CFT200-Cu-50 50/box CFT200-Ni-50 50/box CFT200-Au-50 50/box
CFT300-Cu-25 25/box CFT300-Ni-25 25/box CFT300-Au-25 25/box
300 MESH standard 300 MESH standard 300 MESH standard
CFT300-Cu-50 50/box CFT300-Ni-50 50/box CFT300-Au-50 50/box
CFT400-Cu-25 25/box CFT400-Ni-25 25/box CFT400-Au-25 25/box
400 MESH standard 400 MESH standard 400 MESH standard
CFT400-Cu-50 50/box CFT400-Ni-50 50/box CFT400-Au-50 50/box
CFT1000-Cu-25 standard
25/box CFT1000-Ni-25 standard
25/box CFT1000-Au-25 standard
25/box
1000 MESH 1000 MESH 1000 MESH
CFT1000-Cu-50 50/box CFT1000-Ni-50 50/box CFT1000-Au-50 50/box
NEW Thickness Ranges
Cat. # Type Thickness Qty Cat. # Type Thickness Qty Cat. # Type Thickness Qty
CFT200-Cu-UL ultra-thin 50/box CFT200-Ni-UL ultra-thin 50/box CFT200-Au-UL ultra-thin 50/box
CFT200-Cu-TH 200 MESH thick 50/box CFT200-Ni-TH 200 MESH thick 50/box CFT200-Au-TH 200 MESH thick 50/box
CFT200-Cu-ET extra thick 50/box CFT200-Ni-ET extra thick 50/box CFT200-Au-ET extra thick 50/box
CFT300-Cu-UL ultra-thin 50/box CFT300-Ni-UL ultra-thin 50/box CFT300-Au-UL ultra-thin 50/box
CFT300-Cu-TH 300 MESH thick 50/box CFT300-Ni-TH 300 MESH thick 50/box CFT300-Au-TH 300 MESH thick 50/box
CFT300-Cu-ET extra thick 50/box CFT300-Ni-ET extra thick 50/box CFT300-Au-ET extra thick 50/box
CFT400-Cu-UL ultra-thin 50/box CFT400-Ni-UL ultra-thin 50/box CFT400-Au-UL ultra-thin 50/box
CFT400-Cu-TH 400 MESH thick 50/box CFT400-Ni-TH 400 MESH thick 50/box CFT400-Au-TH 400 MESH thick 50/box
CFT400-Cu-ET extra thick 50/box CFT400-Ni-ET extra thick 50/box CFT400-Au-ET extra thick 50/box
CFT1000-Cu-UL ultra-thin 50/box CFT1000-Ni-UL ultra-thin 50/box CFT1000-Au-UL ultra-thin 50/box
CFT1000-Cu-TH 1000 MESH thick 50/box CFT1000-Ni-TH 1000 MESH thick 50/box CFT1000-Au-TH 1000 MESH thick 50/box
CFT1000-Cu-ET extra thick 50/box CFT1000-Ni-ET extra thick 50/box CFT1000-Au-ET extra thick 50/box

® Carbon Thin Bar Hexagonal Mesh COPPER NICKEL GOLD

Standard Thickness
Cat. # Type Thickness Qty Cat. # Type Thickness Qty Cat. # Type Thickness Qty
CFTH200-Cu-25 standard 25/box CFTH200-Ni-25 standard 25/box CFTH200-Au-25 standard 25/box
200 MESH 200 MESH 200 MESH
CFTH200-Cu-50 50/box CFTH200-Ni-50 50/box CFTH200-Au-50 50/box
CFTH300-Cu-25 standard 25/box CFTH300-Ni-25 standard 25/box CFTH300-Au-25 standard 25/box
300 MESH 300 MESH 300 MESH
CFTH300-Cu-50 50/box CFTH300-Ni-50 50/box CFTH300-Au-50 50/box
CFTH400-Cu-25 standard 25/box CFTH400-Ni-25 standard 25/box CFTH400-Au-25 standard 25/box
400 MESH 400 MESH 400 MESH
CFTH400-Cu-50 50/box CFTH400-Ni-50 50/box CFTH400-Au-50 50/box
CFTH600-Cu-25 standard 25/box CFTH600-Ni-25 standard 25/box CFTH600-Au-25 standard 25/box
600 MESH 600 MESH 600 MESH
CFTH600-Cu-50 50/box CFTH600-Ni-50 50/box CFTH600-Au-50 50/box

NEW Thickness Ranges

Cat. # Type Thickness Qty Cat. # Type Thickness Qty Cat. # Type Thickness Qty
CFTH200-Cu-UL ultra-thin 50/box CFTH200-Ni-UL ultra-thin 50/box CFTH200-Au-UL ultra-thin 50/box
CFTH200-Cu-TH 200 MESH thick 50/box CFTH200-Ni-TH 200 MESH thick 50/box CFTH200-Au-TH 200 MESH thick 50/box
CFTH200-Cu-ET extra thick 50/box CFTH200-Ni-ET extra thick 50/box CFTH200-Au-ET extra thick 50/box
CFTH300-Cu-UL ultra-thin 50/box CFTH300-Ni-UL ultra-thin 50/box CFTH300-Au-UL ultra-thin 50/box
CFTH300-Cu-TH 300 MESH thick 50/box CFTH300-Ni-TH 300 MESH thick 50/box CFTH300-Au-TH 300 MESH thick 50/box
CFTH300-Cu-ET extra thick 50/box CFTH300-Ni-ET extra thick 50/box CFTH300-Au-ET extra thick 50/box
CFTH400-Cu-UL ultra-thin 50/box CFTH400-Ni-UL ultra-thin 50/box CFTH400-Au-UL ultra-thin 50/box
CFTH400-Cu-TH 400 MESH thick 50/box CFTH400-Ni-TH 400 MESH thick 50/box CFTH400-Au-TH 400 MESH thick 50/box
CFTH400-Cu-ET extra thick 50/box CFTH400-Ni-ET extra thick 50/box CFTH400-Au-ET extra thick 50/box
CFTH600-Cu-UL ultra-thin 50/box CFTH600-Ni-UL ultra-thin 50/box CFTH600-Au-UL ultra-thin 50/box
CFTH600-Cu-TH 600 MESH thick 50/box CFTH600-Ni-TH 600 MESH thick 50/box CFTH600-Au-TH 600 MESH thick 50/box
CFTH600-Cu-ET extra thick 50/box CFTH600-Ni-ET extra thick 50/box CFTH600-Au-ET extra thick 50/box

® Carbon Slots COPPER NICKEL GOLD

Standard Thickness
Cat. # Type Thickness Qty Cat. # Type Thickness Qty Cat. # Type Thickness Qty
CF205-Cu-25 25/box CF205-Ni-25 25/box CF205-Au-25 25/box
2 x 0.5mm standard 2 x 0.5mm standard 2 x 0.5mm standard
CF205-Cu-50 50/box CF205-Ni-50 50/box CF205-Au-50 50/box
CF2010-Cu-25 standard 25/box CF2010-Ni-25 standard 25/box CF2010-Au-25 standard 25/box
2 x 1mm 2 x 1mm 2 x 1mm
CF2010-Cu-50 50/box CF2010-Ni-50 50/box CF2010-Au-50 50/box

NEW Thickness Ranges

Cat. # Type Thickness Qty Cat. # Type Thickness Qty Cat. # Type Thickness Qty
CFT205-Cu-UL ultra-thin 50/box CFT205-Ni-UL ultra-thin 50/box CFT205-Au-UL ultra-thin 50/box
CFT205-Cu-TH 2 x 0.5mm thick 50/box CFT205-Ni-TH 2 x 0.5mm thick 50/box CFT205-Au-TH 2 x 0.5mm thick 50/box
CFT205-Cu-ET extra thick 50/box CFT205-Ni-ET extra thick 50/box CFT205-Au-ET extra thick 50/box
CFT2010-Cu-UL ultra-thin 50/box CFT2010-Ni-UL ultra-thin 50/box CFT2010-Au-UL ultra-thin 50/box
CFT2010-Cu-TH 2 x 1mm thick 50/box CFT2010-Ni-TH 2 x 1mm thick 50/box CFT2010-Au-TH 2 x 1mm thick 50/box
CFT2010-Cu-ET extra thick 50/box CFT2010-Ni-ET extra thick 50/box CFT2010-Au-ET extra thick 50/box

122 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec04_116-133_EMS_Full Line New Modules 6/30/14 1:17 AM Page 123

Grids, Grid Storage Boxes, & Related Supplies SECTION 4

SUPPORT FILM ON GRIDS

® Carbon Single Hole COPPER NICKEL
Standard Thickness
Cat. # Type Thickness Qty Cat. # Type Thickness Qty
CFGA75-Cu-25 25/box CFGA75-Ni-25 25/box
75 micron standard 75 micron standard
CFGA75-Cu-50 50/box CFGA75-Ni-50 50/box
CFGA100-Cu-25 25/box CFGA100-Ni-25 25/box
100 micron standard 100 micron standard
CFGA100-Cu-50 50/box CFGA100-Ni-50 50/box
CFGA150-Cu-25 25/box CFGA150-Ni-25 25/box
150 micron standard 150 micron standard
CFGA150-Cu-50 50/box CFGA150-Ni-50 50/box
CFGA200-Cu-25 25/box CFGA200-Ni-25 25/box
200 micron standard 200 micron standard
CFGA200-Cu-50 50/box CFGA200-Ni-50 50/box
CFGA300-Cu-25 25/box CFGA300-Ni-25 25/box
300 micron standard 300 micron standard
CFGA300-Cu-50 50/box CFGA300-Ni-50 50/box
CFGA400-Cu-25 25/box CFGA400-Ni-25 25/box
400 micron standard 400 micron standard
CFGA400-Cu-50 50/box CFGA400-Ni-50 50/box
CFGA600-Cu-25 25/box CFGA600-Ni-25 25/box
600 micron standard 600 micron standard
CFGA600-Cu-50 50/box CFGA600-Ni-50 50/box
CFGA800-Cu-25 25/box CFGA800-Ni-25 25/box
800 micron standard 800 micron standard
CFGA800-Cu-50 50/box CFGA800-Ni-50 50/box
CFGA1000-Cu-25 25/box CFGA1000-Ni-25 25/box
1000 micron standard 1000 micron standard
CFGA1000-Cu-50 50/box CFGA1000-Ni-50 50/box
CFGA1500-Cu-25 25/box CFGA1500-Ni-25 25/box
1500 micron standard 1500 micron standard
CFGA1500-Cu-50 50/box CFGA1500-Ni-50 50/box

NEW Thickness Ranges

Cat. # Type Thickness Qty Cat. # Type Thickness Qty
CFGA75-Cu-UL ultra-thin 50/box CFGA75-Ni-UL ultra-thin 50/box
CFGA75-Cu-TH 75 micron thick 50/box CFGA75-Ni-TH 75 micron thick 50/box
CFGA75-Cu-ET extra thick 50/box CFGA75-Ni-ET extra thick 50/box
CFGA100-Cu-UL ultra-thin 50/box CFGA100-Ni-UL ultra-thin 50/box
CFGA100-Cu-TH 100 micron thick 50/box CFGA100-Ni-TH 100 micron thick 50/box
CFGA100-Cu-ET extra thick 50/box CFGA100-Ni-ET extra thick 50/box
CFGA150-Cu-UL ultra-thin 50/box CFGA150-Ni-UL ultra-thin 50/box
CFGA150-Cu-TH 150 micron thick 50/box CFGA150-Ni-TH 150 micron thick 50/box
CFGA150-Cu-ET extra thick 50/box CFGA150-Ni-ET extra thick 50/box
CFGA200-Cu-UL ultra-thin 50/box CFGA200-Ni-UL ultra-thin 50/box
CFGA200-Cu-TH 200 micron thick 50/box CFGA200-Ni-TH 200 micron thick 50/box
CFGA200-Cu-ET extra thick 50/box CFGA200-Ni-ET extra thick 50/box
CFGA300-Cu-UL ultra-thin 50/box CFGA300-Ni-UL ultra-thin 50/box
CFGA300-Cu-TH 300 micron thick 50/box CFGA300-Ni-TH 300 micron thick 50/box
CFGA300-Cu-ET extra thick 50/box CFGA300-Ni-ET extra thick 50/box
CFGA400-Cu-UL ultra-thin 50/box CFGA400-Ni-UL ultra-thin 50/box
CFGA400-Cu-TH 400 micron thick 50/box CFGA400-Ni-TH 400 micron thick 50/box
CFGA400-Cu-ET extra thick 50/box CFGA400-Ni-ET extra thick 50/box
CFGA600-Cu-UL ultra-thin 50/box CFGA600-Ni-UL ultra-thin 50/box
CFGA600-Cu-TH 600 micron thick 50/box CFGA600-Ni-TH 600 micron thick 50/box
CFGA600-Cu-ET extra thick 50/box CFGA600-Ni-ET extra thick 50/box
CFGA800-Cu-UL ultra-thin 50/box CFGA800-Ni-UL ultra-thin 50/box
CFGA800-Cu-TH 800 micron thick 50/box CFGA800-Ni-TH 800 micron thick 50/box
CFGA800-Cu-ET extra thick 50/box CFGA800-Ni-ET extra thick 50/box
CFGA1000-Cu-UL ultra-thin 50/box CFGA1000-Ni-UL ultra-thin 50/box
CFGA1000-Cu-TH 1000 micron thick 50/box CFGA1000-Ni-TH 1000 micron thick 50/box
CFGA1000-Cu-ET extra thick 50/box CFGA1000-Ni-ET extra thick 50/box
CFGA1500-Cu-UL ultra-thin 50/box CFGA1500-Ni-UL ultra-thin 50/box
CFGA1500-Cu-TH 1500 micron thick 50/box CFGA1500-Ni-TH 1500 micron thick 50/box
CFGA1500-Cu-ET extra thick 50/box CFGA1500-Ni-ET extra thick 50/box

ARTICLE OF INTEREST TECHNICAL TIP

A simplified method for handling EM grids is described. This new method not only offers safety How do Nickel and Copper
and identification of your samples but offers you improved handling, temporary storage, and grids react with Periodic Acid?
identification of grids bearing ultrathin sections as well as a novel method for preparing bulk samples. Periodic Acid + Ni... Ni-Periodate + H2
Refer to: Gorycki, M.(1992). A Simple Method for Handling Grids. Periodic Acid + Cu... Cu-Periodate + H2
Biotechnic & Histochemistry 67/5, 313-314. In this case you should use Gold Grids.

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 123
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec04_116-133_EMS_Full Line New Modules 6/30/14 1:17 AM Page 124

SECTION 4 Grids, Grid Storage Boxes, & Related Supplies

SUPPORT FILM ON GRIDS
® 3. Formvar/Carbon Film
A formvar coated grid, stabilized with evaporated carbon film. This type of coating is excellent for specimen support, especially for ultra thin sections.
The thickness range is as follows:
Standard Option A: 10nm Formvar and 1nm Carbon Thick Option A (TA): 15-20nm Formvar and 1nm Carbon
Standard Option B (SB): 10nm Formvar and 3-4nm Carbon Thick Option B (TB): 15-20nm Formvar and 3-4nm Carbon
Standard Option C (SC): 10nm Formvar and 20-30nm Carbon Thick Option C (TC): 15-20nm Formvar and 20-30nm Carbon
Ultra-Thin Option A (UA): 5-6nm Formvar and 1nm Carbon Extra Thick Option A (EA): 25-50nm Formvar and 1nm Carbon
Ultra-Thin Option B (UB): 5-6nm Formvar and 3-4nm Carbon Extra Thick Option B (EB): 25-50nm Formvar and 3-4nm Carbon
Ultra-Thin Option C (UC): 5-6nm Formvar and 20-30nm Carbon Extra Thick Option C (EC): 25-50nm Formvar and 20-30nm Carbon

® Formvar/Carbon Square Mesh COPPER NICKEL GOLD

Standard Thickness
Cat. # Type Thickness Qty Cat. # Type Thickness Qty Cat. # Type Thickness Qty
FCF100-Cu-25 25/box FCF100-Ni-25 25/box FCF100-Au-25 25/box
100 MESH standard ‘A’ 100 MESH standard ‘A’ 100 MESH standard ‘A’
FCF100-Cu-50 50/box FCF100-Ni-50 50/box FCF100-Au-50 50/box
FCF150-Cu-25 25/box FCF150-Ni-25 25/box FCF150-Au-25 25/box
150 MESH standard ‘A’ 150 MESH standard ‘A’ 150 MESH standard ‘A’
FCF150-Cu-50 50/box FCF150-Ni-50 50/box FCF150-Au-50 50/box
FCF200-Cu-25 25/box FCF200-Ni-25 25/box FCF200-Au-25 25/box
200 MESH standard ‘A’ 200 MESH standard ‘A’ 200 MESH standard ‘A’
FCF200-Cu-50 50/box FCF200-Ni-50 50/box FCF200-Au-50 50/box
FCF300-Cu-25 25/box FCF300-Ni-25 25/box FCF300-Au-25 25/box
300 MESH standard ‘A’ 300 MESH standard ‘A’ 300 MESH standard ‘A’
FCF300-Cu-50 50/box FCF300-Ni-50 50/box FCF300-Au-50 50/box
FCF400-Cu-25 25/box FCF400-Ni-25 25/box FCF400-Au-25 25/box
400 MESH standard ‘A’ 400 MESH standard ‘A’ 400 MESH standard ‘A’
FCF400-Cu-50 50/box FCF400-Ni-50 50/box FCF400-Au-50 50/box

NEW Thickness Ranges

Cat. # Type Thickness Qty Cat. # Type Thickness Qty Cat. # Type Thickness Qty
FCF100-Cu-SB standard ‘B’ 50/box FCF100-Ni-SB standard ‘B’ 50/box FCF100-Au-SB standard ‘B’ 50/box
100 MESH 100 MESH 100 MESH
FCF100-Cu-SC standard ‘C’ 50/box FCF100-Ni-SC standard ‘C’ 50/box FCF100-Au-SC standard ‘C’ 50/box
FCF100-Cu-UA ultra-thin ‘A’ 50/box FCF100-Ni-UA ultra-thin ‘A’ 50/box FCF100-Au-UA ultra-thin ‘A’ 50/box
FCF100-Cu-UB ultra-thin ‘B’ 50/box FCF100-Ni-UB ultra-thin ‘B’ 50/box FCF100-Au-UB ultra-thin ‘B’ 50/box
FCF100-Cu-UC ultra-thin ‘C’ 50/box FCF100-Ni-UC ultra-thin ‘C’ 50/box FCF100-Au-UC ultra-thin ‘C’ 50/box
FCF100-Cu-TA thick ‘A’ 50/box FCF100-Ni-TA thick ‘A’ 50/box FCF100-Au-TA thick ‘A’ 50/box
FCF100-Cu-TB thick ‘B’ 50/box FCF100-Ni-TB thick ‘B’ 50/box FCF100-Au-TB thick ‘B’ 50/box
FCF100-Cu-TC thick ‘C’ 50/box FCF100-Ni-TC thick ‘C’ 50/box FCF100-Au-TC thick ‘C’ 50/box
FCF100-Cu-EA extra thick ‘A’ 50/box FCF100-Ni-EA extra thick ‘A’ 50/box FCF100-Au-EA extra thick ‘A’ 50/box
FCF100-Cu-EB extra thick ‘B’ 50/box FCF100-Ni-EB extra thick ‘B’ 50/box FCF100-Au-EB extra thick ‘B’ 50/box
FCF100-Cu-EC extra thick ‘C’ 50/box FCF100-Ni-EC extra thick ‘C’ 50/box FCF100-Au-EC extra thick ‘C’ 50/box
FCF150-Cu-SB standard ‘B’ 50/box FCF150-Ni-SB standard ‘B’ 50/box FCF150-Au-SB standard ‘B’ 50/box
150 MESH 150 MESH 150 MESH
FCF150-Cu-SC standard ‘C’ 50/box FCF150-Ni-SC standard ‘C’ 50/box FCF150-Au-SC standard ‘C’ 50/box
FCF150-Cu-UA ultra-thin ‘A’ 50/box FCF150-Ni-UA ultra-thin ‘A’ 50/box FCF150-Au-UA ultra-thin ‘A’ 50/box
FCF150-Cu-UB ultra-thin ‘B’ 50/box FCF150-Ni-UB ultra-thin ‘B’ 50/box FCF150-Au-UB ultra-thin ‘B’ 50/box
FCF150-Cu-UC ultra-thin ‘C’ 50/box FCF150-Ni-UC ultra-thin ‘C’ 50/box FCF150-Au-UC ultra-thin ‘C’ 50/box
FCF150-Cu-TA thick ‘A’ 50/box FCF150-Ni-TA thick ‘A’ 50/box FCF150-Au-TA thick ‘A’ 50/box
FCF150-Cu-TB thick ‘B’ 50/box FCF150-Ni-TB thick ‘B’ 50/box FCF150-Au-TB thick ‘B’ 50/box
FCF150-Cu-TC thick ‘C’ 50/box FCF150-Ni-TC thick ‘C’ 50/box FCF150-Au-TC thick ‘C’ 50/box
FCF150-Cu-EA extra thick ‘A’ 50/box FCF150-Ni-EA extra thick ‘A’ 50/box FCF150-Au-EA extra thick ‘A’ 50/box
FCF150-Cu-EB extra thick ‘B’ 50/box FCF150-Ni-EB extra thick ‘B’ 50/box FCF150-Au-EB extra thick ‘B’ 50/box
FCF150-Cu-EC extra thick ‘C’ 50/box FCF150-Ni-EC extra thick ‘C’ 50/box FCF150-Au-EC extra thick ‘C’ 50/box
FCF200-Cu-SB standard ‘B’ 50/box FCF200-Ni-SB standard ‘B’ 50/box FCF200-Au-SB standard ‘B’ 50/box
200 MESH 200 MESH 200 MESH
FCF200-Cu-SC standard ‘C’ 50/box FCF200-Ni-SC standard ‘C’ 50/box FCF200-Au-SC standard ‘C’ 50/box
FCF200-Cu-UA ultra-thin ‘A’ 50/box FCF200-Ni-UA ultra-thin ‘A’ 50/box FCF200-Au-UA ultra-thin ‘A’ 50/box
FCF200-Cu-UB ultra-thin ‘B’ 50/box FCF200-Ni-UB ultra-thin ‘B’ 50/box FCF200-Au-UB ultra-thin ‘B’ 50/box
FCF200-Cu-UC ultra-thin ‘C’ 50/box FCF200-Ni-UC ultra-thin ‘C’ 50/box FCF200-Au-UC ultra-thin ‘C’ 50/box
FCF200-Cu-TA thick ‘A’ 50/box FCF200-Ni-TA thick ‘A’ 50/box FCF200-Au-TA thick ‘A’ 50/box
FCF200-Cu-TB thick ‘B’ 50/box FCF200-Ni-TB thick ‘B’ 50/box FCF200-Au-TB thick ‘B’ 50/box
FCF200-Cu-TC thick ‘C’ 50/box FCF200-Ni-TC thick ‘C’ 50/box FCF200-Au-TC thick ‘C’ 50/box
FCF200-Cu-EA extra thick ‘A’ 50/box FCF200-Ni-EA extra thick ‘A’ 50/box FCF200-Au-EA extra thick ‘A’ 50/box
FCF200-Cu-EB extra thick ‘B’ 50/box FCF200-Ni-EB extra thick ‘B’ 50/box FCF200-Au-EB extra thick ‘B’ 50/box
FCF200-Cu-EC extra thick ‘C’ 50/box FCF200-Ni-EC extra thick ‘C’ 50/box FCF200-Au-EC extra thick ‘C’ 50/box
continues UUUUU

124 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec04_116-133_EMS_Full Line New Modules 6/30/14 1:17 AM Page 125

Grids, Grid Storage Boxes, & Related Supplies SECTION 4

SUPPORT FILM ON GRIDS

® Formvar/Carbon Square Mesh (continued) COPPER NICKEL GOLD

NEW Thickness Ranges (continued)

Cat. # Type Thickness Qty Cat. # Type Thickness Qty Cat. # Type Thickness Qty
FCF300-Cu-SB standard ‘B’ 50/box FCF300-Ni-SB standard ‘B’ 50/box FCF300-Au-SB standard ‘B’ 50/box
300 MESH 300 MESH 300 MESH
FCF300-Cu-SC standard ‘C’ 50/box FCF300-Ni-SC standard ‘C’ 50/box FCF300-Au-SC standard ‘C’ 50/box
FCF300-Cu-UA ultra-thin ‘A’ 50/box FCF300-Ni-UA ultra-thin ‘A’ 50/box FCF300-Au-UA ultra-thin ‘A’ 50/box
FCF300-Cu-UB ultra-thin ‘B’ 50/box FCF300-Ni-UB ultra-thin ‘B’ 50/box FCF300-Au-UB ultra-thin ‘B’ 50/box
FCF300-Cu-UC ultra-thin ‘C’ 50/box FCF300-Ni-UC ultra-thin ‘C’ 50/box FCF300-Au-UC ultra-thin ‘C’ 50/box
FCF300-Cu-TA thick ‘A’ 50/box FCF300-Ni-TA thick ‘A’ 50/box FCF300-Au-TA thick ‘A’ 50/box
FCF300-Cu-TB thick ‘B’ 50/box FCF300-Ni-TB thick ‘B’ 50/box FCF300-Au-TB thick ‘B’ 50/box
FCF300-Cu-TC thick ‘C’ 50/box FCF300-Ni-TC thick ‘C’ 50/box FCF300-Au-TC thick ‘C’ 50/box
FCF300-Cu-EA extra thick ‘A’ 50/box FCF300-Ni-EA extra thick ‘A’ 50/box FCF300-Au-EA extra thick ‘A’ 50/box
FCF300-Cu-EB extra thick ‘B’ 50/box FCF300-Ni-EB extra thick ‘B’ 50/box FCF300-Au-EB extra thick ‘B’ 50/box
FCF300-Cu-EC extra thick ‘C’ 50/box FCF300-Ni-EC extra thick ‘C’ 50/box FCF300-Au-EC extra thick ‘C’ 50/box
FCF400-Cu-SB standard ‘B’ 50/box FCF400-Ni-SB standard ‘B’ 50/box FCF400-Au-SB standard ‘B’ 50/box
400 MESH 400 MESH 400 MESH
FCF400-Cu-SC standard ‘C’ 50/box FCF400-Ni-SC standard ‘C’ 50/box FCF400-Au-SC standard ‘C’ 50/box
FCF400-Cu-UA ultra-thin ‘A’ 50/box FCF400-Ni-UA ultra-thin ‘A’ 50/box FCF400-Au-UA ultra-thin ‘A’ 50/box
FCF400-Cu-UB ultra-thin ‘B’ 50/box FCF400-Ni-UB ultra-thin ‘B’ 50/box FCF400-Au-UB ultra-thin ‘B’ 50/box
FCF400-Cu-UC ultra-thin ‘C’ 50/box FCF400-Ni-UC ultra-thin ‘C’ 50/box FCF400-Au-UC ultra-thin ‘C’ 50/box
FCF400-Cu-TA thick ‘A’ 50/box FCF400-Ni-TA thick ‘A’ 50/box FCF400-Au-TA thick ‘A’ 50/box
FCF400-Cu-TB thick ‘B’ 50/box FCF400-Ni-TB thick ‘B’ 50/box FCF400-Au-TB thick ‘B’ 50/box
FCF400-Cu-TC thick ‘C’ 50/box FCF400-Ni-TC thick ‘C’ 50/box FCF400-Au-TC thick ‘C’ 50/box
FCF400-Cu-EA extra thick ‘A’ 50/box FCF400-Ni-EA extra thick ‘A’ 50/box FCF400-Au-EA extra thick ‘A’ 50/box
FCF400-Cu-EB extra thick ‘B’ 50/box FCF400-Ni-EB extra thick ‘B’ 50/box FCF400-Au-EB extra thick ‘B’ 50/box
FCF400-Cu-EC extra thick ‘C’ 50/box FCF400-Ni-EC extra thick ‘C’ 50/box FCF400-Au-EC extra thick ‘C’ 50/box

® Formvar/Carbon Gilder Finder Grids COPPER NICKEL GOLD

Standard Thickness
Cat. # Type Thickness Qty Cat. # Type Thickness Qty Cat. # Type Thickness Qty
FCF200F1-Cu-25 25/box FCF200F1-Ni-25 25/box FCF200F1-Au-25 25/box
F1 standard ‘A’ F1 standard ‘A’ F1 standard ‘A’
FCF200F1-Cu-50 50/box FCF200F1-Ni-50 50/box FCF200F1-Au-50 50/box
FCF200F2-Cu-25 25/box FCF200F2-Ni-25 25/box FCF200F2-Au-25 25/box
F2 standard ‘A’ F2 standard ‘A’ F2 standard ‘A’
FCF200F2-Cu-50 50/box FCF200F2-Ni-50 50/box FCF200F2-Au-50 50/box

NEW Thickness Ranges

Cat. # Type Thickness Qty Cat. # Type Thickness Qty Cat. # Type Thickness Qty
FCF200F1-Cu-SB standard ‘B’ 50/box FCF200F1-Ni-SB standard ‘B’ 50/box FCF200F1-Au-SB standard ‘B’ 50/box
F1 F1 F1
FCF200F1-Cu-SC standard ‘C’ 50/box FCF200F1-Ni-SC standard ‘C’ 50/box FCF200F1-Au-SC standard ‘C’ 50/box
FCF200F1-Cu-UA ultra-thin ‘A’ 50/box FCF200F1-Ni-UA ultra-thin ‘A’ 50/box FCF200F1-Au-UA ultra-thin ‘A’ 50/box
FCF200F1-Cu-UB ultra-thin ‘B’ 50/box FCF200F1-Ni-UB ultra-thin ‘B’ 50/box FCF200F1-Au-UB ultra-thin ‘B’ 50/box
FCF200F1-Cu-UC ultra-thin ‘C’ 50/box FCF200F1-Ni-UC ultra-thin ‘C’ 50/box FCF200F1-Au-UC ultra-thin ‘C’ 50/box
FCF200F1-Cu-TA thick ‘A’ 50/box FCF200F1-Ni-TA thick ‘A’ 50/box FCF200F1-Au-TA thick ‘A’ 50/box
FCF200F1-Cu-TB thick ‘B’ 50/box FCF200F1-Ni-TB thick ‘B’ 50/box FCF200F1-Au-TB thick ‘B’ 50/box
FCF200F1-Cu-TC thick ‘C’ 50/box FCF200F1-Ni-TC thick ‘C’ 50/box FCF200F1-Au-TC thick ‘C’ 50/box
FCF200F1-Cu-EA extra thick ‘A’ 50/box FCF200F1-Ni-EA extra thick ‘A’ 50/box FCF200F1-Au-EA extra thick ‘A’ 50/box
FCF200F1-Cu-EB extra thick ‘B’ 50/box FCF200F1-Ni-EB extra thick ‘B’ 50/box FCF200F1-Au-EB extra thick ‘B’ 50/box
FCF200F1-Cu-EC extra thick ‘C’ 50/box FCF200F1-Ni-EC extra thick ‘C’ 50/box FCF200F1-Au-EC extra thick ‘C’ 50/box
FCF200F2-Cu-SB standard ‘B’ 50/box FCF200F2-Ni-SB standard ‘B’ 50/box FCF200F2-Au-SB standard ‘B’ 50/box
F2 F2 F2
FCF200F2-Cu-SC standard ‘C’ 50/box FCF200F2-Ni-SC standard ‘C’ 50/box FCF200F2-Au-SC standard ‘C’ 50/box
FCF200F2-Cu-UA ultra-thin ‘A’ 50/box FCF200F2-Ni-UA ultra-thin ‘A’ 50/box FCF200F2-Au-UA ultra-thin ‘A’ 50/box
FCF200F2-Cu-UB ultra-thin ‘B’ 50/box FCF200F2-Ni-UB ultra-thin ‘B’ 50/box FCF200F2-Au-UB ultra-thin ‘B’ 50/box
FCF200F2-Cu-UC ultra-thin ‘C’ 50/box FCF200F2-Ni-UC ultra-thin ‘C’ 50/box FCF200F2-Au-UC ultra-thin ‘C’ 50/box
FCF200F2-Cu-TA thick ‘A’ 50/box FCF200F2-Ni-TA thick ‘A’ 50/box FCF200F2-Au-TA thick ‘A’ 50/box
FCF200F2-Cu-TB thick ‘B’ 50/box FCF200F2-Ni-TB thick ‘B’ 50/box FCF200F2-Au-TB thick ‘B’ 50/box
FCF200F2-Cu-TC thick ‘C’ 50/box FCF200F2-Ni-TC thick ‘C’ 50/box FCF200F2-Au-TC thick ‘C’ 50/box
FCF200F2-Cu-EA extra thick ‘A’ 50/box FCF200F2-Ni-EA extra thick ‘A’ 50/box FCF200F2-Au-EA extra thick ‘A’ 50/box
FCF200F2-Cu-EB extra thick ‘B’ 50/box FCF200F2-Ni-EB extra thick ‘B’ 50/box FCF200F2-Au-EB extra thick ‘B’ 50/box
FCF200F2-Cu-EC extra thick ‘C’ 50/box FCF200F2-Ni-EC extra thick ‘C’ 50/box FCF200F2-Au-EC extra thick ‘C’ 50/box

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 125
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec04_116-133_EMS_Full Line New Modules 6/30/14 1:17 AM Page 126

SECTION 4 Grids, Grid Storage Boxes, & Related Supplies

SUPPORT FILM ON GRIDS
Guide to Thickness Ranges
Standard Option A: 10nm Formvar and 1nm Carbon Thick Option A (TA): 15-20nm Formvar and 1nm Carbon
Standard Option B (SB): 10nm Formvar and 3-4nm Carbon Thick Option B (TB): 15-20nm Formvar and 3-4nm Carbon
Standard Option C (SC): 10nm Formvar and 20-30nm Carbon Thick Option C (TC): 15-20nm Formvar and 20-30nm Carbon
Ultra-Thin Option A (UA): 5-6nm Formvar and 1nm Carbon Extra Thick Option A (EA): 25-50nm Formvar and 1nm Carbon
Ultra-Thin Option B (UB): 5-6nm Formvar and 3-4nm Carbon Extra Thick Option B (EB): 25-50nm Formvar and 3-4nm Carbon
Ultra-Thin Option C (UC): 5-6nm Formvar and 20-30nm Carbon Extra Thick Option C (EC): 25-50nm Formvar and 20-30nm Carbon

® Formvar/Carbon London Finder Grids COPPER NICKEL GOLD

Standard Thickness
Cat. # Type Thickness Qty Cat. # Type Thickness Qty Cat. # Type Thickness Qty
FCFLF135-Cu-25 25/box FCFLF135-Ni-25 25/box FCFLF135-Au-25 25/box
LF135 standard ‘A’ LF135 standard ‘A’ LF135 standard ‘A’
FCFLF135-Cu-50 50/box FCFLF135-Ni-50 50/box FCFLF135-Au-50 50/box
FCFLF200-Cu-25 standard ‘A’ 25/box FCFLF200-Ni-25 standard ‘A’ 25/box
LF200 LF200 FCFLF200-Au-25 LF200 standard ‘A’ 25/box
FCFLF200-Cu-50 50/box FCFLF200-Ni-50 50/box
FCFLF400-Cu-25 25/box FCFLF400-Ni-25 25/box
LF400 standard ‘A’ LF400 standard ‘A’ FCFLF400-Au-25 LF400 standard ‘A’ 25/box
FCFLF400-Cu-50 50/box FCFLF400-Ni-50 50/box

NEW Thickness Ranges

Cat. # Type Thickness Qty Cat. # Type Thickness Qty Cat. # Type Thickness Qty
FCFLF135-Cu-SB standard ‘B’ 50/box FCFLF135-Ni-SB standard ‘B’ 50/box FCFLF135-Au-SB standard ‘B’ 50/box
LF135 LF135 LF135
FCFLF135-Cu-SC standard ‘C’ 50/box FCFLF135-Ni-SC standard ‘C’ 50/box FCFLF135-Au-SC standard ‘C’ 50/box
FCFLF135-Cu-UA ultra-thin ‘A’ 50/box FCFLF135-Ni-UA ultra-thin ‘A’ 50/box FCFLF135-Au-UA ultra-thin ‘A’ 50/box
FCFLF135-Cu-UB ultra-thin ‘B’ 50/box FCFLF135-Ni-UB ultra-thin ‘B’ 50/box FCFLF135-Au-UB ultra-thin ‘B’ 50/box
FCFLF135-Cu-UC ultra-thin ‘C’ 50/box FCFLF135-Ni-UC ultra-thin ‘C’ 50/box FCFLF135-Au-UC ultra-thin ‘C’ 50/box
FCFLF135-Cu-TA thick ‘A’ 50/box FCFLF135-Ni-TA thick ‘A’ 50/box FCFLF135-Au-TA thick ‘A’ 50/box
FCFLF135-Cu-TB thick ‘B’ 50/box FCFLF135-Ni-TB thick ‘B’ 50/box FCFLF135-Au-TB thick ‘B’ 50/box
FCFLF135-Cu-TC thick ‘C’ 50/box FCFLF135-Ni-TC thick ‘C’ 50/box FCFLF135-Au-TC thick ‘C’ 50/box
FCFLF135-Cu-EA extra thick ‘A’ 50/box FCFLF135-Ni-EA extra thick ‘A’ 50/box FCFLF135-Au-EA extra thick ‘A’ 50/box
FCFLF135-Cu-EB extra thick ‘B’ 50/box FCFLF135-Ni-EB extra thick ‘B’ 50/box FCFLF135-Au-EB extra thick ‘B’ 50/box
FCFLF135-Cu-EC extra thick ‘C’ 50/box FCFLF135-Ni-EC extra thick ‘C’ 50/box FCFLF135-Au-EC extra thick ‘C’ 50/box
FCFLF200-Cu-SB standard ‘B’ 50/box FCFLF200-Ni-SB standard ‘B’ 50/box
LF200 LF200
FCFLF200-Cu-SC standard ‘C’ 50/box FCFLF200-Ni-SC standard ‘C’ 50/box
FCFLF200-Cu-UA ultra-thin ‘A’ 50/box FCFLF200-Ni-UA ultra-thin ‘A’ 50/box
FCFLF200-Cu-UB ultra-thin ‘B’ 50/box FCFLF200-Ni-UB ultra-thin ‘B’ 50/box
FCFLF200-Cu-UC ultra-thin ‘C’ 50/box FCFLF200-Ni-UC ultra-thin ‘C’ 50/box
FCFLF200-Cu-TA thick ‘A’ 50/box FCFLF200-Ni-TA thick ‘A’ 50/box
FCFLF200-Cu-TB thick ‘B’ 50/box FCFLF200-Ni-TB thick ‘B’ 50/box
FCFLF200-Cu-TC thick ‘C’ 50/box FCFLF200-Ni-TC thick ‘C’ 50/box
FCFLF200-Cu-EA extra thick ‘A’ 50/box FCFLF200-Ni-EA extra thick ‘A’ 50/box
FCFLF200-Cu-EB extra thick ‘B’ 50/box FCFLF200-Ni-EB extra thick ‘B’ 50/box
FCFLF200-Cu-EC extra thick ‘C’ 50/box FCFLF200-Ni-EC extra thick ‘C’ 50/box
FCFLF400-Cu-SB standard ‘B’ 50/box FCFLF400-Ni-SB standard ‘B’ 50/box
LF400 LF400
FCFLF400-Cu-SC standard ‘C’ 50/box FCFLF400-Ni-SC standard ‘C’ 50/box
FCFLF400-Cu-UA ultra-thin ‘A’ 50/box FCFLF400-Ni-UA ultra-thin ‘A’ 50/box
FCFLF400-Cu-UB ultra-thin ‘B’ 50/box FCFLF400-Ni-UB ultra-thin ‘B’ 50/box
FCFLF400-Cu-UC ultra-thin ‘C’ 50/box FCFLF400-Ni-UC ultra-thin ‘C’ 50/box
FCFLF400-Cu-TA thick ‘A’ 50/box FCFLF400-Ni-TA thick ‘A’ 50/box
FCFLF400-Cu-TB thick ‘B’ 50/box FCFLF400-Ni-TB thick ‘B’ 50/box
FCFLF400-Cu-TC thick ‘C’ 50/box FCFLF400-Ni-TC thick ‘C’ 50/box
FCFLF400-Cu-EA extra thick ‘A’ 50/box FCFLF400-Ni-EA extra thick ‘A’ 50/box
FCFLF400-Cu-EB extra thick ‘B’ 50/box FCFLF400-Ni-EB extra thick ‘B’ 50/box
FCFLF400-Cu-EC extra thick ‘C’ 50/box FCFLF400-Ni-EC extra thick ‘C’ 50/box

126 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec04_116-133_EMS_Full Line New Modules 6/30/14 1:18 AM Page 127

Grids, Grid Storage Boxes, & Related Supplies SECTION 4

SUPPORT FILM ON GRIDS

® Formvar/Carbon Hexagonal Mesh COPPER NICKEL GOLD

Standard Thickness
Cat. # Type Thickness Qty Cat. # Type Thickness Qty Cat. # Type Thickness Qty
FCF100H-Cu-25 25/box FCF100H-Ni-25 25/box FCF100H-Au-25 25/box
100 MESH standard ‘A’ 100 MESH standard ‘A’ 100 MESH standard ‘A’
FCF100H-Cu-50 50/box FCF100H-Ni-50 50/box FCF100H-Au-50 50/box
FCF200H-Cu-25 25/box FCF200H-Ni-25 25/box FCF200H-Au-25 25/box
200 MESH standard ‘A’ 200 MESH standard ‘A’ 200 MESH standard ‘A’
FCF200H-Cu-50 50/box FCF200H-Ni-50 50/box FCF200H-Au-50 50/box
FCF300H-Cu-25 25/box FCF300H-Ni-25 25/box FCF300H-Au-25 25/box
300 MESH standard ‘A’ 300 MESH standard ‘A’ 300 MESH standard ‘A’
FCF300H-Cu-50 50/box FCF300H-Ni-50 50/box FCF300H-Au-50 50/box
FCF400H-Cu-25 25/box FCF400H-Ni-25 25/box FCF400H-Au-25 25/box
400 MESH standard ‘A’ 400 MESH standard ‘A’ 400 MESH standard ‘A’
FCF400H-Cu-50 50/box FCF400H-Ni-50 50/box FCF400H-Au-50 50/box

NEW Thickness Ranges

Cat. # Type Thickness Qty Cat. # Type Thickness Qty Cat. # Type Thickness Qty
FCF100H-Cu-SB standard ‘B’ 50/box FCF100H-Ni-SB standard ‘B’ 50/box FCF100H-Au-SB standard ‘B’ 50/box
100 MESH 100 MESH 100 MESH
FCF100H-Cu-SC standard ‘C’ 50/box FCF100H-Ni-SC standard ‘C’ 50/box FCF100H-Au-SC standard ‘C’ 50/box
FCF100H-Cu-UA ultra-thin ‘A’ 50/box FCF100H-Ni-UA ultra-thin ‘A’ 50/box FCF100H-Au-UA ultra-thin ‘A’ 50/box
FCF100H-Cu-UB ultra-thin ‘B’ 50/box FCF100H-Ni-UB ultra-thin ‘B’ 50/box FCF100H-Au-UB ultra-thin ‘B’ 50/box
FCF100H-Cu-UC ultra-thin ‘C’ 50/box FCF100H-Ni-UC ultra-thin ‘C’ 50/box FCF100H-Au-UC ultra-thin ‘C’ 50/box
FCF100H-Cu-TA thick ‘A’ 50/box FCF100H-Ni-TA thick ‘A’ 50/box FCF100H-Au-TA thick ‘A’ 50/box
FCF100H-Cu-TB thick ‘B’ 50/box FCF100H-Ni-TB thick ‘B’ 50/box FCF100H-Au-TB thick ‘B’ 50/box
FCF100H-Cu-TC thick ‘C’ 50/box FCF100H-Ni-TC thick ‘C’ 50/box FCF100H-Au-TC thick ‘C’ 50/box
FCF100H-Cu-EA extra thick ‘A’ 50/box FCF100H-Ni-EA extra thick ‘A’ 50/box FCF100H-Au-EA extra thick ‘A’ 50/box
FCF100H-Cu-EB extra thick ‘B’ 50/box FCF100H-Ni-EB extra thick ‘B’ 50/box FCF100H-Au-EB extra thick ‘B’ 50/box
FCF100H-Cu-EC extra thick ‘C’ 50/box FCF100H-Ni-EC extra thick ‘C’ 50/box FCF100H-Au-EC extra thick ‘C’ 50/box
FCF200H-Cu-SB standard ‘B’ 50/box FCF200H-Ni-SB standard ‘B’ 50/box FCF200H-Au-SB standard ‘B’ 50/box
200 MESH 200 MESH 200 MESH
FCF200H-Cu-SC standard ‘C’ 50/box FCF200H-Ni-SC standard ‘C’ 50/box FCF200H-Au-SC standard ‘C’ 50/box
FCF200H-Cu-UA ultra-thin ‘A’ 50/box FCF200H-Ni-UA ultra-thin ‘A’ 50/box FCF200H-Au-UA ultra-thin ‘A’ 50/box
FCF200H-Cu-UB ultra-thin ‘B’ 50/box FCF200H-Ni-UB ultra-thin ‘B’ 50/box FCF200H-Au-UB ultra-thin ‘B’ 50/box
FCF200H-Cu-UC ultra-thin ‘C’ 50/box FCF200H-Ni-UC ultra-thin ‘C’ 50/box FCF200H-Au-UC ultra-thin ‘C’ 50/box
FCF200H-Cu-TA thick ‘A’ 50/box FCF200H-Ni-TA thick ‘A’ 50/box FCF200H-Au-TA thick ‘A’ 50/box
FCF200H-Cu-TB thick ‘B’ 50/box FCF200H-Ni-TB thick ‘B’ 50/box FCF200H-Au-TB thick ‘B’ 50/box
FCF200H-Cu-TC thick ‘C’ 50/box FCF200H-Ni-TC thick ‘C’ 50/box FCF200H-Au-TC thick ‘C’ 50/box
FCF200H-Cu-EA extra thick ‘A’ 50/box FCF200H-Ni-EA extra thick ‘A’ 50/box FCF200H-Au-EA extra thick ‘A’ 50/box
FCF200H-Cu-EB extra thick ‘B’ 50/box FCF200H-Ni-EB extra thick ‘B’ 50/box FCF200H-Au-EB extra thick ‘B’ 50/box
FCF200H-Cu-EC extra thick ‘C’ 50/box FCF200H-Ni-EC extra thick ‘C’ 50/box FCF200H-Au-EC extra thick ‘C’ 50/box
FCF300H-Cu-SB standard ‘B’ 50/box FCF300H-Ni-SB standard ‘B’ 50/box FCF300H-Au-SB standard ‘B’ 50/box
300 MESH 300 MESH 300 MESH
FCF300H-Cu-SC standard ‘C’ 50/box FCF300H-Ni-SC standard ‘C’ 50/box FCF300H-Au-SC standard ‘C’ 50/box
FCF300H-Cu-UA ultra-thin ‘A’ 50/box FCF300H-Ni-UA ultra-thin ‘A’ 50/box FCF300H-Au-UA ultra-thin ‘A’ 50/box
FCF300H-Cu-UB ultra-thin ‘B’ 50/box FCF300H-Ni-UB ultra-thin ‘B’ 50/box FCF300H-Au-UB ultra-thin ‘B’ 50/box
FCF300H-Cu-UC ultra-thin ‘C’ 50/box FCF300H-Ni-UC ultra-thin ‘C’ 50/box FCF300H-Au-UC ultra-thin ‘C’ 50/box
FCF300H-Cu-TA thick ‘A’ 50/box FCF300H-Ni-TA thick ‘A’ 50/box FCF300H-Au-TA thick ‘A’ 50/box
FCF300H-Cu-TB thick ‘B’ 50/box FCF300H-Ni-TB thick ‘B’ 50/box FCF300H-Au-TB thick ‘B’ 50/box
FCF300H-Cu-TC thick ‘C’ 50/box FCF300H-Ni-TC thick ‘C’ 50/box FCF300H-Au-TC thick ‘C’ 50/box
FCF300H-Cu-EA extra thick ‘A’ 50/box FCF300H-Ni-EA extra thick ‘A’ 50/box FCF300H-Au-EA extra thick ‘A’ 50/box
FCF300H-Cu-EB extra thick ‘B’ 50/box FCF300H-Ni-EB extra thick ‘B’ 50/box FCF300H-Au-EB extra thick ‘B’ 50/box
FCF300H-Cu-EC extra thick ‘C’ 50/box FCF300H-Ni-EC extra thick ‘C’ 50/box FCF300H-Au-EC extra thick ‘C’ 50/box

FCF400H-Cu-SB standard ‘B’ 50/box FCF400H-Ni-SB standard ‘B’ 50/box FCF400H-Au-SB standard ‘B’ 50/box
400 MESH 300 MESH 400 MESH
FCF400H-Cu-SC standard ‘C’ 50/box FCF400H-Ni-SC standard ‘C’ 50/box FCF400H-Au-SC standard ‘C’ 50/box
FCF400H-Cu-UA ultra-thin ‘A’ 50/box FCF400H-Ni-UA ultra-thin ‘A’ 50/box FCF400H-Au-UA ultra-thin ‘A’ 50/box
FCF400H-Cu-UB ultra-thin ‘B’ 50/box FCF400H-Ni-UB ultra-thin ‘B’ 50/box FCF400H-Au-UB ultra-thin ‘B’ 50/box
FCF400H-Cu-UC ultra-thin ‘C’ 50/box FCF400H-Ni-UC ultra-thin ‘C’ 50/box FCF400H-Au-UC ultra-thin ‘C’ 50/box
FCF400H-Cu-TA thick ‘A’ 50/box FCF400H-Ni-TA thick ‘A’ 50/box FCF400H-Au-TA thick ‘A’ 50/box
FCF400H-Cu-TB thick ‘B’ 50/box FCF400H-Ni-TB thick ‘B’ 50/box FCF400H-Au-TB thick ‘B’ 50/box
FCF400H-Cu-TC thick ‘C’ 50/box FCF400H-Ni-TC thick ‘C’ 50/box FCF400H-Au-TC thick ‘C’ 50/box
FCF400H-Cu-EA extra thick ‘A’ 50/box FCF400H-Ni-EA extra thick ‘A’ 50/box FCF400H-Au-EA extra thick ‘A’ 50/box
FCF400H-Cu-EB extra thick ‘B’ 50/box FCF400H-Ni-EB extra thick ‘B’ 50/box FCF400H-Au-EB extra thick ‘B’ 50/box
FCF400H-Cu-EC extra thick ‘C’ 50/box FCF400H-Ni-EC extra thick ‘C’ 50/box FCF400H-Au-EC extra thick ‘C’ 50/box

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 127
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec04_116-133_EMS_Full Line New Modules 6/30/14 1:18 AM Page 128

SECTION 4 Grids, Grid Storage Boxes, & Related Supplies

SUPPORT FILM ON GRIDS
® Formvar/Carbon Thin Bar Square Mesh COPPER NICKEL GOLD

Standard Thickness
Cat. # Type Thickness Qty Cat. # Type Thickness Qty Cat. # Type Thickness Qty
FCFT200-Cu-25 25/box FCFT200-Ni-25 25/box FCFT200-Au-25 25/box
200 MESH standard ‘A’ 200 MESH standard ‘A’ 200 MESH standard ‘A’
FCFT200-Cu-50 50/box FCFT200-Ni-50 50/box FCFT200-Au-50 50/box
FCFT300-Cu-25 25/box FCFT300-Ni-25 25/box FCFT300-Au-25 25/box
300 MESH standard ‘A’ 300 MESH standard ‘A’ 300 MESH standard ‘A’
FCFT300-Cu-50 50/box FCFT300-Ni-50 50/box FCFT300-Au-50 50/box
FCFT400-Cu-25 25/box FCFT400-Ni-25 25/box FCFT400-Au-25 25/box
400 MESH standard ‘A’ 400 MESH standard ‘A’ 400 MESH standard ‘A’
FCFT400-Cu-50 50/box FCFT400-Ni-50 50/box FCFT400-Au-50 50/box
FCFT1000-Cu-25 25/box FCFT1000-Ni-25 25/box FCFT1000-Au-25 25/box
1000 MESH standard ‘A’ 1000 MESH standard ‘A’ 1000 MESH standard ‘A’
FCFT1000-Cu-50 50/box FCFT1000-Ni-50 50/box FCFT1000-Au-50 50/box

NEW Thickness Ranges

Cat. # Type Thickness Qty Cat. # Type Thickness Qty Cat. # Type Thickness Qty
FCFT200-Cu-SB standard ‘B’ 50/box FCFT200-Ni-SB standard ‘B’ 50/box FCFT200-Au-SB standard ‘B’ 50/box
200 MESH 200 MESH 200 MESH
FCFT200-Cu-SC standard ‘C’ 50/box FCFT200-Ni-SC standard ‘C’ 50/box FCFT200-Au-SC standard ‘C’ 50/box
FCFT200-Cu-UA ultra-thin ‘A’ 50/box FCFT200-Ni-UA ultra-thin ‘A’ 50/box FCFT200-Au-UA ultra-thin ‘A’ 50/box
FCFT200-Cu-UB ultra-thin ‘B’ 50/box FCFT200-Ni-UB ultra-thin ‘B’ 50/box FCFT200-Au-UB ultra-thin ‘B’ 50/box
FCFT200-Cu-UC ultra-thin ‘C’ 50/box FCFT200-Ni-UC ultra-thin ‘C’ 50/box FCFT200-Au-UC ultra-thin ‘C’ 50/box
FCFT200-Cu-TA thick ‘A’ 50/box FCFT200-Ni-TA thick ‘A’ 50/box FCFT200-Au-TA thick ‘A’ 50/box
FCFT200-Cu-TB thick ‘B’ 50/box FCFT200-Ni-TB thick ‘B’ 50/box FCFT200-Au-TB thick ‘B’ 50/box
FCFT200-Cu-TC thick ‘C’ 50/box FCFT200-Ni-TC thick ‘C’ 50/box FCFT200-Au-TC thick ‘C’ 50/box
FCFT200-Cu-EA extra thick ‘A’ 50/box FCFT200-Ni-EA extra thick ‘A’ 50/box FCFT200-Au-EA extra thick ‘A’ 50/box
FCFT200-Cu-EB extra thick ‘B’ 50/box FCFT200-Ni-EB extra thick ‘B’ 50/box FCFT200-Au-EB extra thick ‘B’ 50/box
FCFT200-Cu-EC extra thick ‘C’ 50/box FCFT200-Ni-EC extra thick ‘C’ 50/box FCFT200-Au-EC extra thick ‘C’ 50/box

FCFT300-Cu-SB standard ‘B’ 50/box FCFT300-Ni-SB standard ‘B’ 50/box FCFT300-Au-SB standard ‘B’ 50/box
300 MESH 300 MESH 300 MESH
FCFT300-Cu-SC standard ‘C’ 50/box FCFT300-Ni-SC standard ‘C’ 50/box FCFT300-Au-SC standard ‘C’ 50/box
FCFT300-Cu-UA ultra-thin ‘A’ 50/box FCFT300-Ni-UA ultra-thin ‘A’ 50/box FCFT300-Au-UA ultra-thin ‘A’ 50/box
FCFT300-Cu-UB ultra-thin ‘B’ 50/box FCFT300-Ni-UB ultra-thin ‘B’ 50/box FCFT300-Au-UB ultra-thin ‘B’ 50/box
FCFT300-Cu-UC ultra-thin ‘C’ 50/box FCFT300-Ni-UC ultra-thin ‘C’ 50/box FCFT300-Au-UC ultra-thin ‘C’ 50/box
FCFT300-Cu-TA thick ‘A’ 50/box FCFT300-Ni-TA thick ‘A’ 50/box FCFT300-Au-TA thick ‘A’ 50/box
FCFT300-Cu-TB thick ‘B’ 50/box FCFT300-Ni-TB thick ‘B’ 50/box FCFT300-Au-TB thick ‘B’ 50/box
FCFT300-Cu-TC thick ‘C’ 50/box FCFT300-Ni-TC thick ‘C’ 50/box FCFT300-Au-TC thick ‘C’ 50/box
FCFT300-Cu-EA extra thick ‘A’ 50/box FCFT300-Ni-EA extra thick ‘A’ 50/box FCFT300-Au-EA extra thick ‘A’ 50/box
FCFT300-Cu-EB extra thick ‘B’ 50/box FCFT300-Ni-EB extra thick ‘B’ 50/box FCFT300-Au-EB extra thick ‘B’ 50/box
FCFT300-Cu-EC extra thick ‘C’ 50/box FCFT300-Ni-EC extra thick ‘C’ 50/box FCFT300-Au-EC extra thick ‘C’ 50/box

FCFT400-Cu-SB standard ‘B’ 50/box FCFT400-Ni-SB standard ‘B’ 50/box FCFT400-Au-SB standard ‘B’ 50/box
400 MESH 400 MESH 400 MESH
FCFT400-Cu-SC standard ‘C’ 50/box FCFT400-Ni-SC standard ‘C’ 50/box FCFT400-Au-SC standard ‘C’ 50/box
FCFT400-Cu-UA ultra-thin ‘A’ 50/box FCFT400-Ni-UA ultra-thin ‘A’ 50/box FCFT400-Au-UA ultra-thin ‘A’ 50/box
FCFT400-Cu-UB ultra-thin ‘B’ 50/box FCFT400-Ni-UB ultra-thin ‘B’ 50/box FCFT400-Au-UB ultra-thin ‘B’ 50/box
FCFT400-Cu-UC ultra-thin ‘C’ 50/box FCFT400-Ni-UC ultra-thin ‘C’ 50/box FCFT400-Au-UC ultra-thin ‘C’ 50/box
FCFT400-Cu-TA thick ‘A’ 50/box FCFT400-Ni-TA thick ‘A’ 50/box FCFT400-Au-TA thick ‘A’ 50/box
FCFT400-Cu-TB thick ‘B’ 50/box FCFT400-Ni-TB thick ‘B’ 50/box FCFT400-Au-TB thick ‘B’ 50/box
FCFT400-Cu-TC thick ‘C’ 50/box FCFT400-Ni-TC thick ‘C’ 50/box FCFT400-Au-TC thick ‘C’ 50/box
FCFT400-Cu-EA extra thick ‘A’ 50/box FCFT400-Ni-EA extra thick ‘A’ 50/box FCFT400-Au-EA extra thick ‘A’ 50/box
FCFT400-Cu-EB extra thick ‘B’ 50/box FCFT400-Ni-EB extra thick ‘B’ 50/box FCFT400-Au-EB extra thick ‘B’ 50/box
FCFT400-Cu-EC extra thick ‘C’ 50/box FCFT400-Ni-EC extra thick ‘C’ 50/box FCFT400-Au-EC extra thick ‘C’ 50/box

FCFT1000-Cu-SB standard ‘B’ 50/box FCFT1000-Ni-SB standard ‘B’ 50/box FCFT1000-Au-SB standard ‘B’ 50/box
1000 MESH 1000 MESH 1000 MESH
FCFT1000-Cu-SC standard ‘C’ 50/box FCFT1000-Ni-SC standard ‘C’ 50/box FCFT1000-Au-SC standard ‘C’ 50/box
FCFT1000-Cu-UA ultra-thin ‘A’ 50/box FCFT1000-Ni-UA ultra-thin ‘A’ 50/box FCFT1000-Au-UA ultra-thin ‘A’ 50/box
FCFT1000-Cu-UB ultra-thin ‘B’ 50/box FCFT1000-Ni-UB ultra-thin ‘B’ 50/box FCFT1000-Au-UB ultra-thin ‘B’ 50/box
FCFT1000-Cu-UC ultra-thin ‘C’ 50/box FCFT1000-Ni-UC ultra-thin ‘C’ 50/box FCFT1000-Au-UC ultra-thin ‘C’ 50/box
FCFT1000-Cu-TA thick ‘A’ 50/box FCFT1000-Ni-TA thick ‘A’ 50/box FCFT1000-Au-TA thick ‘A’ 50/box
FCFT1000-Cu-TB thick ‘B’ 50/box FCFT1000-Ni-TB thick ‘B’ 50/box FCFT1000-Au-TB thick ‘B’ 50/box
FCFT1000-Cu-TC thick ‘C’ 50/box FCFT1000-Ni-TC thick ‘C’ 50/box FCFT1000-Au-TC thick ‘C’ 50/box
FCFT1000-Cu-EA extra thick ‘A’ 50/box FCFT1000-Ni-EA extra thick ‘A’ 50/box FCFT1000-Au-EA extra thick ‘A’ 50/box
FCFT1000-Cu-EB extra thick ‘B’ 50/box FCFT1000-Ni-EB extra thick ‘B’ 50/box FCFT1000-Au-EB extra thick ‘B’ 50/box
FCFT1000-Cu-EC extra thick ‘C’ 50/box FCFT1000-Ni-EC extra thick ‘C’ 50/box FCFT1000-Au-EC extra thick ‘C’ 50/box

128 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec04_116-133_EMS_Full Line New Modules 6/30/14 1:18 AM Page 129

Grids, Grid Storage Boxes, & Related Supplies SECTION 4

SUPPORT FILM ON GRIDS

® Formvar/Carbon Thin Bar Hexagonal Mesh COPPER NICKEL GOLD

Standard Thickness
Cat. # Type Thickness Qty Cat. # Type Thickness Qty Cat. # Type Thickness Qty
FCFTH200-Cu-25 25/box FCFTH200-Ni-25 25/box FCFTH200-Au-25 25/box
200 MESH standard ‘A’ 200 MESH standard ‘A’ 200 MESH standard ‘A’
FCFTH200-Cu-50 50/box FCFTH200-Ni-50 50/box FCFTH200-Au-50 50/box
FCFTH300-Cu-25 25/box FCFTH300-Ni-25 25/box FCFTH300-Au-25 25/box
300 MESH standard ‘A’ 300 MESH standard ‘A’ 300 MESH standard ‘A’
FCFTH300-Cu-50 50/box FCFTH300-Ni-50 50/box FCFTH300-Au-50 50/box
FCFTH400-Cu-25 25/box FCFTH400-Ni-25 25/box FCFTH400-Au-25 25/box
400 MESH standard ‘A’ 400 MESH standard ‘A’ 400 MESH standard ‘A’
FCFTH400-Cu-50 50/box FCFTH400-Ni-50 50/box FCFTH400-Au-50 50/box
FCFTH600-Cu-25 25/box FCFTH600-Ni-25 25/box FCFTH600-Au-25 25/box
600 MESH standard ‘A’ 600 MESH standard ‘A’ 600 MESH standard ‘A’
FCFTH600-Cu-50 50/box FCFTH600-Ni-50 50/box FCFTH600-Au-50 50/box

NEW Thickness Ranges

Cat. # Type Thickness Qty Cat. # Type Thickness Qty Cat. # Type Thickness Qty
FCFTH200-Cu-SB standard ‘B’ 50/box FCFTH200-Ni-SB standard ‘B’ 50/box FCFTH200-Au-SB standard ‘B’ 50/box
200 MESH 200 MESH 200 MESH
FCFTH200-Cu-SC standard ‘C’ 50/box FCFTH200-Ni-SC standard ‘C’ 50/box FCFTH200-Au-SC standard ‘C’ 50/box
FCFTH200-Cu-UA ultra-thin ‘A’ 50/box FCFTH200-Ni-UA ultra-thin ‘A’ 50/box FCFTH200-Au-UA ultra-thin ‘A’ 50/box
FCFTH200-Cu-UB ultra-thin ‘B’ 50/box FCFTH200-Ni-UB ultra-thin ‘B’ 50/box FCFTH200-Au-UB ultra-thin ‘B’ 50/box
FCFTH200-Cu-UC ultra-thin ‘C’ 50/box FCFTH200-Ni-UC ultra-thin ‘C’ 50/box FCFTH200-Au-UC ultra-thin ‘C’ 50/box
FCFTH200-Cu-TA thick ‘A’ 50/box FCFTH200-Ni-TA thick ‘A’ 50/box FCFTH200-Au-TA thick ‘A’ 50/box
FCFTH200-Cu-TB thick ‘B’ 50/box FCFTH200-Ni-TB thick ‘B’ 50/box FCFTH200-Au-TB thick ‘B’ 50/box
FCFTH200-Cu-TC thick ‘C’ 50/box FCFTH200-Ni-TC thick ‘C’ 50/box FCFTH200-Au-TC thick ‘C’ 50/box
FCFTH200-Cu-EA extra thick ‘A’ 50/box FCFTH200-Ni-EA extra thick ‘A’ 50/box FCFTH200-Au-EA extra thick ‘A’ 50/box
FCFTH200-Cu-EB extra thick ‘B’ 50/box FCFTH200-Ni-EB extra thick ‘B’ 50/box FCFTH200-Au-EB extra thick ‘B’ 50/box
FCFTH200-Cu-EC extra thick ‘C’ 50/box FCFTH200-Ni-EC extra thick ‘C’ 50/box FCFTH200-Au-EC extra thick ‘C’ 50/box

FCFTH300-Cu-SB standard ‘B’ 50/box FCFTH300-Ni-SB standard ‘B’ 50/box FCFTH300-Au-SB standard ‘B’ 50/box
300 MESH 300 MESH 300 MESH
FCFTH300-Cu-SC standard ‘C’ 50/box FCFTH300-Ni-SC standard ‘C’ 50/box FCFTH300-Au-SC standard ‘C’ 50/box
FCFTH300-Cu-UA ultra-thin ‘A’ 50/box FCFTH300-Ni-UA ultra-thin ‘A’ 50/box FCFTH300-Au-UA ultra-thin ‘A’ 50/box
FCFTH300-Cu-UB ultra-thin ‘B’ 50/box FCFTH300-Ni-UB ultra-thin ‘B’ 50/box FCFTH300-Au-UB ultra-thin ‘B’ 50/box
FCFTH300-Cu-UC ultra-thin ‘C’ 50/box FCFTH300-Ni-UC ultra-thin ‘C’ 50/box FCFTH300-Au-UC ultra-thin ‘C’ 50/box
FCFTH300-Cu-TA thick ‘A’ 50/box FCFTH300-Ni-TA thick ‘A’ 50/box FCFTH300-Au-TA thick ‘A’ 50/box
FCFTH300-Cu-TB thick ‘B’ 50/box FCFTH300-Ni-TB thick ‘B’ 50/box FCFTH300-Au-TB thick ‘B’ 50/box
FCFTH300-Cu-TC thick ‘C’ 50/box FCFTH300-Ni-TC thick ‘C’ 50/box FCFTH300-Au-TC thick ‘C’ 50/box
FCFTH300-Cu-EA extra thick ‘A’ 50/box FCFTH300-Ni-EA extra thick ‘A’ 50/box FCFTH300-Au-EA extra thick ‘A’ 50/box
FCFTH300-Cu-EB extra thick ‘B’ 50/box FCFTH300-Ni-EB extra thick ‘B’ 50/box FCFTH300-Au-EB extra thick ‘B’ 50/box
FCFTH300-Cu-EC extra thick ‘C’ 50/box FCFTH300-Ni-EC extra thick ‘C’ 50/box FCFTH300-Au-EC extra thick ‘C’ 50/box

FCFTH400-Cu-SB standard ‘B’ 50/box FCFTH400-Ni-SB standard ‘B’ 50/box FCFTH400-Au-SB standard ‘B’ 50/box
400 MESH 400 MESH 400 MESH
FCFTH400-Cu-SC standard ‘C’ 50/box FCFTH400-Ni-SC standard ‘C’ 50/box FCFTH400-Au-SC standard ‘C’ 50/box
FCFTH400-Cu-UA ultra-thin ‘A’ 50/box FCFTH400-Ni-UA ultra-thin ‘A’ 50/box FCFTH400-Au-UA ultra-thin ‘A’ 50/box
FCFTH400-Cu-UB ultra-thin ‘B’ 50/box FCFTH400-Ni-UB ultra-thin ‘B’ 50/box FCFTH400-Au-UB ultra-thin ‘B’ 50/box
FCFTH400-Cu-UC ultra-thin ‘C’ 50/box FCFTH400-Ni-UC ultra-thin ‘C’ 50/box FCFTH400-Au-UC ultra-thin ‘C’ 50/box
FCFTH400-Cu-TA thick ‘A’ 50/box FCFTH400-Ni-TA thick ‘A’ 50/box FCFTH400-Au-TA thick ‘A’ 50/box
FCFTH400-Cu-TB thick ‘B’ 50/box FCFTH400-Ni-TB thick ‘B’ 50/box FCFTH400-Au-TB thick ‘B’ 50/box
FCFTH400-Cu-TC thick ‘C’ 50/box FCFTH400-Ni-TC thick ‘C’ 50/box FCFTH400-Au-TC thick ‘C’ 50/box
FCFTH400-Cu-EA extra thick ‘A’ 50/box FCFTH400-Ni-EA extra thick ‘A’ 50/box FCFTH400-Au-EA extra thick ‘A’ 50/box
FCFTH400-Cu-EB extra thick ‘B’ 50/box FCFTH400-Ni-EB extra thick ‘B’ 50/box FCFTH400-Au-EB extra thick ‘B’ 50/box
FCFTH400-Cu-EC extra thick ‘C’ 50/box FCFTH400-Ni-EC extra thick ‘C’ 50/box FCFTH400-Au-EC extra thick ‘C’ 50/box

FCFTH600-Cu-SB standard ‘B’ 50/box FCFTH600-Ni-SB standard ‘B’ 50/box FCFTH600-Au-SB standard ‘B’ 50/box
600 MESH 600 MESH 600 MESH
FCFTH600-Cu-SC standard ‘C’ 50/box FCFTH600-Ni-SC standard ‘C’ 50/box FCFTH600-Au-SC standard ‘C’ 50/box
FCFTH600-Cu-UA ultra-thin ‘A’ 50/box FCFTH600-Ni-UA ultra-thin ‘A’ 50/box FCFTH600-Au-UA ultra-thin ‘A’ 50/box
FCFTH600-Cu-UB ultra-thin ‘B’ 50/box FCFTH600-Ni-UB ultra-thin ‘B’ 50/box FCFTH600-Au-UB ultra-thin ‘B’ 50/box
FCFTH600-Cu-UC ultra-thin ‘C’ 50/box FCFTH600-Ni-UC ultra-thin ‘C’ 50/box FCFTH600-Au-UC ultra-thin ‘C’ 50/box
FCFTH600-Cu-TA thick ‘A’ 50/box FCFTH600-Ni-TA thick ‘A’ 50/box FCFTH600-Au-TA thick ‘A’ 50/box
FCFTH600-Cu-TB thick ‘B’ 50/box FCFTH600-Ni-TB thick ‘B’ 50/box FCFTH600-Au-TB thick ‘B’ 50/box
FCFTH600-Cu-TC thick ‘C’ 50/box FCFTH600-Ni-TC thick ‘C’ 50/box FCFTH600-Au-TC thick ‘C’ 50/box
FCFTH600-Cu-EA extra thick ‘A’ 50/box FCFTH600-Ni-EA extra thick ‘A’ 50/box FCFTH600-Au-EA extra thick ‘A’ 50/box
FCFTH600-Cu-EB extra thick ‘B’ 50/box FCFTH600-Ni-EB extra thick ‘B’ 50/box FCFTH600-Au-EB extra thick ‘B’ 50/box
FCFTH600-Cu-EC extra thick ‘C’ 50/box FCFTH600-Ni-EC extra thick ‘C’ 50/box FCFTH600-Au-EC extra thick ‘C’ 50/box

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 129
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec04_116-133_EMS_Full Line New Modules 6/30/14 1:18 AM Page 130

SECTION 4 Grids, Grid Storage Boxes, & Related Supplies

SUPPORT FILM ON GRIDS
® Formvar/Carbon Slots COPPER NICKEL GOLD
Standard Thickness
Cat. # Type Thickness Qty Cat. # Type Thickness Qty Cat. # Type Thickness Qty
FCF205-Cu-25 25/box FCF205-Ni-25 25/box FCF205-Au-25 25/box
2 x 0.5mm standard ‘A’ 2 x 0.5mm standard ‘A’ 2 x 0.5mm standard ‘A’
FCF205-Cu-50 50/box FCF205-Ni-50 50/box FCF205-Au-50 50/box
FCF2010-Cu-25 25/box FCF2010-Ni-25 25/box FCF2010-Au-25 25/box
2 x 1mm standard ‘A’ 2 x 1mm standard ‘A’ 2 x 1mm standard ‘A’
FCF2010-Cu-50 50/box FCF2010-Ni-50 50/box FCF2010-Au-50 50/box
NEW Thickness Ranges
Cat. # Type Thickness Qty Cat. # Type Thickness Qty Cat. # Type Thickness Qty
FCF205-Cu-SB standard ‘B’ 50/box FCF205-Ni-SB standard ‘B’ 50/box FCF205-Au-SB standard ‘B’ 50/box
2 x 0.5mm 2 x 0.5mm 2 x 0.5mm
FCF205-Cu-SC standard ‘C’ 50/box FCF205-Ni-SC standard ‘C’ 50/box FCF205-Au-SC standard ‘C’ 50/box
FCF205-Cu-UA ultra-thin ‘A’ 50/box FCF205-Ni-UA ultra-thin ‘A’ 50/box FCF205-Au-UA ultra-thin ‘A’ 50/box
FCF205-Cu-UB ultra-thin ‘B’ 50/box FCF205-Ni-UB ultra-thin ‘B’ 50/box FCF205-Au-UB ultra-thin ‘B’ 50/box
FCF205-Cu-UC ultra-thin ‘C’ 50/box FCF205-Ni-UC ultra-thin ‘C’ 50/box FCF205-Au-UC ultra-thin ‘C’ 50/box
FCF205-Cu-TA thick ‘A’ 50/box FCF205-Ni-TA thick ‘A’ 50/box FCF205-Au-TA thick ‘A’ 50/box
FCF205-Cu-TB thick ‘B’ 50/box FCF205-Ni-TB thick ‘B’ 50/box FCF205-Au-TB thick ‘B’ 50/box
FCF205-Cu-TC thick ‘C’ 50/box FCF205-Ni-TC thick ‘C’ 50/box FCF205-Au-TC thick ‘C’ 50/box
FCF205-Cu-EA extra thick ‘A’ 50/box FCF205-Ni-EA extra thick ‘A’ 50/box FCF205-Au-EA extra thick ‘A’ 50/box
FCF205-Cu-EB extra thick ‘B’ 50/box FCF205-Ni-EB extra thick ‘B’ 50/box FCF205-Au-EB extra thick ‘B’ 50/box
FCF205-Cu-EC extra thick ‘C’ 50/box FCF205-Ni-EC extra thick ‘C’ 50/box FCF205-Au-EC extra thick ‘C’ 50/box
FCF2010-Cu-SB standard ‘B’ 50/box FCF2010-Ni-SB standard ‘B’ 50/box FCF2010-Au-SB standard ‘B’ 50/box
2 x 1mm 2 x 1mm 2 x 1mm
FCF2010-Cu-SC standard ‘C’ 50/box FCF2010-Ni-SC standard ‘C’ 50/box FCF2010-Au-SC standard ‘C’ 50/box
FCF2010-Cu-UA ultra-thin ‘A’ 50/box FCF2010-Ni-UA ultra-thin ‘A’ 50/box FCF2010-Au-UA ultra-thin ‘A’ 50/box
FCF2010-Cu-UB ultra-thin ‘B’ 50/box FCF2010-Ni-UB ultra-thin ‘B’ 50/box FCF2010-Au-UB ultra-thin ‘B’ 50/box
FCF2010-Cu-UC ultra-thin ‘C’ 50/box FCF2010-Ni-UC ultra-thin ‘C’ 50/box FCF2010-Au-UC ultra-thin ‘C’ 50/box
FCF2010-Cu-TA thick ‘A’ 50/box FCF2010-Ni-TA thick ‘A’ 50/box FCF2010-Au-TA thick ‘A’ 50/box
FCF2010-Cu-TB thick ‘B’ 50/box FCF2010-Ni-TB thick ‘B’ 50/box FCF2010-Au-TB thick ‘B’ 50/box
FCF2010-Cu-TC thick ‘C’ 50/box FCF2010-Ni-TC thick ‘C’ 50/box FCF2010-Au-TC thick ‘C’ 50/box
FCF2010-Cu-EA extra thick ‘A’ 50/box FCF2010-Ni-EA extra thick ‘A’ 50/box FCF2010-Au-EA extra thick ‘A’ 50/box
FCF2010-Cu-EB extra thick ‘B’ 50/box FCF2010-Ni-EB extra thick ‘B’ 50/box FCF2010-Au-EB extra thick ‘B’ 50/box
FCF2010-Cu-EC extra thick ‘C’ 50/box FCF2010-Ni-EC extra thick ‘C’ 50/box FCF2010-Au-EC extra thick ‘C’ 50/box

® Formvar/Carbon Single Hole

COPPER NICKEL
Standard Thickness
Cat. # Type Thickness Qty Cat. # Type Thickness Qty
FCFGA75-Cu-25 25/box FCFGA75-Ni-25 25/box
75 micron standard ‘A’ 75 micron standard ‘A’
FCFGA75-Cu-50 50/box FCFGA75-Ni-50 50/box
FCFGA100-Cu-25 25/box FCFGA100-Niu-25 25/box
100 micron standard ‘A’ 100 micron standard ‘A’
FCFGA100-Cu-50 50/box FCFGA100-Ni-50 50/box
FCFGA150-Cu-25 25/box FCFGA150-Ni-25 25/box
150 micron standard ‘A’ 150 micron standard ‘A’
FCFGA150-Cu-50 50/box FCFGA150-Ni-50 50/box
FCFGA200-Cu-25 25/box FCFGA200-Ni-25 25/box
200 micron standard ‘A’ 200 micron standard ‘A’
FCFGA200-Cu-50 50/box FCFGA200-Ni-50 50/box
FCFGA300-Cu-25 25/box FCFGA300-Ni-25 25/box
300 micron standard ‘A’ 300 micron standard ‘A’
FCFGA300-Cu-50 50/box FCFGA300-Ni-50 50/box
FCFGA400-Cu-25 25/box FCFGA400-Ni-25 25/box
400 micron standard ‘A’ 400 micron standard ‘A’
FCFGA400-Cu-50 50/box FCFGA400-Ni-50 50/box
FCFGA600-Cu-25 standard ‘A’ 25/box FCFGA600-Ni-25 standard ‘A’ 25/box
600 micron 600 micron
FCFGA600-Cu-50 50/box FCFGA600-Ni-50 50/box
FCFGA800-Cu-25 standard ‘A’ 25/box FCFGA800-Ni-25 standard ‘A’ 25/box
800 micron 800 micron
FCFGA800-Cu-50 50/box FCFGA800-Ni-50 50/box
FCFGA1000-Cu-25 25/box FCFGA1000-Ni-25 25/box
1000 micron standard ‘A’ 1000 micron standard ‘A’
FCFGA1000-Cu-50 50/box FCFGA1000-Ni-50 50/box
FCFGA1500-Cu-25 25/box FCFGA1500-Ni-25 25/box
1500 micron standard ‘A’ 1500 micron standard ‘A’
FCFGA1500-Cu-50 50/box FCFGA1500-Ni-50 50/box

NEW Thickness Ranges

Cat. # Type Thickness Qty Cat. # Type Thickness Qty
FCFGA75-Cu-SB standard ‘B’ 50/box FCFGA75-Ni-SB standard ‘B’ 50/box
75 micron 75 micron
FCFGA75-Cu-SC standard ‘C’ 50/box FCFGA75-Ni-SC standard ‘C’ 50/box
FCFGA75-Cu-UA ultra-thin ‘A’ 50/box FCFGA75-Ni-UA ultra-thin ‘A’ 50/box
FCFGA75-Cu-UB ultra-thin ‘B’ 50/box FCFGA75-Ni-UB ultra-thin ‘B’ 50/box
FCFGA75-Cu-UC ultra-thin ‘C’ 50/box FCFGA75-Ni-UC ultra-thin ‘C’ 50/box
FCFGA75-Cu-TA thick ‘A’ 50/box FCFGA75-Ni-TA thick ‘A’ 50/box
FCFGA75-Cu-TB thick ‘B’ 50/box FCFGA75-Ni-TB thick ‘B’ 50/box
FCFGA75-Cu-TC thick ‘C’ 50/box FCFGA75-Ni-TC thick ‘C’ 50/box
FCFGA75-Cu-EA extra thick ‘A’ 50/box FCFGA75-Ni-EA extra thick ‘A’ 50/box
FCFGA75-Cu-EB extra thick ‘B’ 50/box FCFGA75-Ni-EB extra thick ‘B’ 50/box
FCFGA75-Cu-EC extra thick ‘C’ 50/box FCFGA75-Ni-EC extra thick ‘C’ 50/box

130 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec04_116-133_EMS_Full Line New Modules 6/30/14 1:18 AM Page 131

Grids, Grid Storage Boxes, & Related Supplies SECTION 4

SUPPORT FILM ON GRIDS

® Formvar/Carbon Single Hole (continued)

NEW Thickness Ranges (continued) COPPER NICKEL

Cat. # Type Thickness Qty Cat. # Type Thickness Qty

FCFGA100-Cu-SB standard ‘B’ 50/box FCFGA100-Ni-SB standard ‘B’ 50/box
100 micron 100 micron
FCFGA100-Cu-SC standard ‘C’ 50/box FCFGA100-Ni-SC standard ‘C’ 50/box
FCFGA100-Cu-UA ultra-thin ‘A’ 50/box FCFGA100-Ni-UA ultra-thin ‘A’ 50/box
FCFGA100-Cu-UB ultra-thin ‘B’ 50/box FCFGA100-Ni-UB ultra-thin ‘B’ 50/box
FCFGA100-Cu-UC ultra-thin ‘C’ 50/box FCFGA100-Ni-UC ultra-thin ‘C’ 50/box
FCFGA100-Cu-TA thick ‘A’ 50/box FCFGA100-Ni-TA thick ‘A’ 50/box
FCFGA100-Cu-TB thick ‘B’ 50/box FCFGA100-Ni-TB thick ‘B’ 50/box
FCFGA100-Cu-TC thick ‘C’ 50/box FCFGA100-Ni-TC thick ‘C’ 50/box
FCFGA100-Cu-EA extra thick ‘A’ 50/box FCFGA100-Ni-EA extra thick ‘A’ 50/box
FCFGA100-Cu-EB extra thick ‘B’ 50/box FCFGA100-Ni-EB extra thick ‘B’ 50/box
FCFGA100-Cu-EC extra thick ‘C’ 50/box FCFGA100-Ni-EC extra thick ‘C’ 50/box
FCFGA150-Cu-SB standard ‘B’ 50/box FCFGA150-Ni-SB standard ‘B’ 50/box
150 micron 150 micron
FCFGA150-Cu-SC standard ‘C’ 50/box FCFGA150-Ni-SC standard ‘C’ 50/box
FCFGA150-Cu-UA ultra-thin ‘A’ 50/box FCFGA150-Ni-UA ultra-thin ‘A’ 50/box
FCFGA150-Cu-UB ultra-thin ‘B’ 50/box FCFGA150-Ni-UB ultra-thin ‘B’ 50/box
FCFGA150-Cu-UC ultra-thin ‘C’ 50/box FCFGA150-Ni-UC ultra-thin ‘C’ 50/box
FCFGA150-Cu-TA thick ‘A’ 50/box FCFGA150-Ni-TA thick ‘A’ 50/box
FCFGA150-Cu-TB thick ‘B’ 50/box FCFGA150-Ni-TB thick ‘B’ 50/box
FCFGA150-Cu-TC thick ‘C’ 50/box FCFGA150-Ni-TC thick ‘C’ 50/box
FCFGA150-Cu-EA extra thick ‘A’ 50/box FCFGA150-Ni-EA extra thick ‘A’ 50/box
FCFGA150-Cu-EB extra thick ‘B’ 50/box FCFGA150-Ni-EB extra thick ‘B’ 50/box
FCFGA150-Cu-EC extra thick ‘C’ 50/box FCFGA150-Ni-EC extra thick ‘C’ 50/box
FCFGA200-Cu-SB standard ‘B’ 50/box FCFGA200-Ni-SB standard ‘B’ 50/box
200 micron 200 micron
FCFGA200-Cu-SC standard ‘C’ 50/box FCFGA200-Ni-SC standard ‘C’ 50/box
FCFGA200-Cu-UA ultra-thin ‘A’ 50/box FCFGA200-Ni-UA ultra-thin ‘A’ 50/box
FCFGA200-Cu-UB ultra-thin ‘B’ 50/box FCFGA200-Ni-UB ultra-thin ‘B’ 50/box
FCFGA200-Cu-UC ultra-thin ‘C’ 50/box FCFGA200-Ni-UC ultra-thin ‘C’ 50/box
FCFGA200-Cu-TA thick ‘A’ 50/box FCFGA200-Ni-TA thick ‘A’ 50/box
FCFGA200-Cu-TB thick ‘B’ 50/box FCFGA200-Ni-TB thick ‘B’ 50/box
FCFGA200-Cu-TC thick ‘C’ 50/box FCFGA200-Ni-TC thick ‘C’ 50/box
FCFGA200-Cu-EA extra thick ‘A’ 50/box FCFGA200-Ni-EA extra thick ‘A’ 50/box
FCFGA200-Cu-EB extra thick ‘B’ 50/box FCFGA200-Ni-EB extra thick ‘B’ 50/box
FCFGA200-Cu-EC extra thick ‘C’ 50/box FCFGA200-Ni-EC extra thick ‘C’ 50/box
FCFGA300-Cu-SB standard ‘B’ 50/box FCFGA300-Ni-SB standard ‘B’ 50/box
300 micron 300 micron
FCFGA300-Cu-SC standard ‘C’ 50/box FCFGA300-Ni-SC standard ‘C’ 50/box
FCFGA300-Cu-UA ultra-thin ‘A’ 50/box FCFGA300-Ni-UA ultra-thin ‘A’ 50/box
FCFGA300-Cu-UB ultra-thin ‘B’ 50/box FCFGA300-Ni-UB ultra-thin ‘B’ 50/box
FCFGA300-Cu-UC ultra-thin ‘C’ 50/box FCFGA300-Ni-UC ultra-thin ‘C’ 50/box
FCFGA300-Cu-TA thick ‘A’ 50/box FCFGA300-Ni-TA thick ‘A’ 50/box
FCFGA300-Cu-TB thick ‘B’ 50/box FCFGA300-Ni-TB thick ‘B’ 50/box
FCFGA300-Cu-TC thick ‘C’ 50/box FCFGA300-Ni-TC thick ‘C’ 50/box
FCFGA300-Cu-EA extra thick ‘A’ 50/box FCFGA300-Ni-EA extra thick ‘A’ 50/box
FCFGA300-Cu-EB extra thick ‘B’ 50/box FCFGA300-Ni-EB extra thick ‘B’ 50/box
FCFGA300-Cu-EC extra thick ‘C’ 50/box FCFGA300-Ni-EC extra thick ‘C’ 50/box
FCFGA400-Cu-SB standard ‘B’ 50/box FCFGA400-Ni-SB standard ‘B’ 50/box
400 micron 400 micron
FCFGA400-Cu-SC standard ‘C’ 50/box FCFGA400-Ni-SC standard ‘C’ 50/box
FCFGA400-Cu-UA ultra-thin ‘A’ 50/box FCFGA400-Ni-UA ultra-thin ‘A’ 50/box
FCFGA400-Cu-UB ultra-thin ‘B’ 50/box FCFGA400-Ni-UB ultra-thin ‘B’ 50/box
FCFGA400-Cu-UC ultra-thin ‘C’ 50/box FCFGA400-Ni-UC ultra-thin ‘C’ 50/box
FCFGA400-Cu-TA thick ‘A’ 50/box FCFGA400-Ni-TA thick ‘A’ 50/box
FCFGA400-Cu-TB thick ‘B’ 50/box FCFGA400-Ni-TB thick ‘B’ 50/box
FCFGA400-Cu-TC thick ‘C’ 50/box FCFGA400-Ni-TC thick ‘C’ 50/box
FCFGA400-Cu-EA extra thick ‘A’ 50/box FCFGA400-Ni-EA extra thick ‘A’ 50/box
FCFGA400-Cu-EB extra thick ‘B’ 50/box FCFGA400-Ni-EB extra thick ‘B’ 50/box
FCFGA400-Cu-EC extra thick ‘C’ 50/box FCFGA400-Ni-EC extra thick ‘C’ 50/box

continues UUUUU

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 131
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec04_116-133_EMS_Full Line New Modules 6/30/14 1:18 AM Page 132

SECTION 4 Grids, Grid Storage Boxes, & Related Supplies

SUPPORT FILM ON GRIDS
® Formvar/Carbon Single Hole (continued) COPPER NICKEL

NEW Thickness Ranges (continued)

Cat. # Type Thickness Qty Cat. # Type Thickness Qty
FCFGA600-Cu-SB standard ‘B’ 50/box FCFGA600-Ni-SB standard ‘B’ 50/box
600 micron 600 micron
FCFGA600-Cu-SC standard ‘C’ 50/box FCFGA600-Ni-SC standard ‘C’ 50/box
FCFGA600-Cu-UA ultra-thin ‘A’ 50/box FCFGA600-Ni-UA ultra-thin ‘A’ 50/box
FCFGA600-Cu-UB ultra-thin ‘B’ 50/box FCFGA600-Ni-UB ultra-thin ‘B’ 50/box
FCFGA600-Cu-UC ultra-thin ‘C’ 50/box FCFGA600-Ni-UC ultra-thin ‘C’ 50/box
FCFGA600-Cu-TA thick ‘A’ 50/box FCFGA600-Ni-TA thick ‘A’ 50/box
FCFGA600-Cu-TB thick ‘B’ 50/box FCFGA600-Ni-TB thick ‘B’ 50/box
FCFGA600-Cu-TC thick ‘C’ 50/box FCFGA600-Ni-TC thick ‘C’ 50/box
FCFGA600-Cu-EA extra thick ‘A’ 50/box FCFGA600-Ni-EA extra thick ‘A’ 50/box
FCFGA600-Cu-EB extra thick ‘B’ 50/box FCFGA600-Ni-EB extra thick ‘B’ 50/box
FCFGA600-Cu-EC extra thick ‘C’ 50/box FCFGA600-Ni-EC extra thick ‘C’ 50/box
FCFGA800-Cu-SB standard ‘B’ 50/box FCFGA800-Ni-SB standard ‘B’ 50/box
800 micron 800 micron
FCFGA800-Cu-SC standard ‘C’ 50/box FCFGA800-Ni-SC standard ‘C’ 50/box
FCFGA800-Cu-UA ultra-thin ‘A’ 50/box FCFGA800-Ni-UA ultra-thin ‘A’ 50/box
FCFGA800-Cu-UB ultra-thin ‘B’ 50/box FCFGA800-Ni-UB ultra-thin ‘B’ 50/box
FCFGA800-Cu-UC ultra-thin ‘C’ 50/box FCFGA800-Ni-UC ultra-thin ‘C’ 50/box
FCFGA800-Cu-TA thick ‘A’ 50/box FCFGA800-Ni-TA thick ‘A’ 50/box
FCFGA800-Cu-TB thick ‘B’ 50/box FCFGA800-Ni-TB thick ‘B’ 50/box
FCFGA800-Cu-TC thick ‘C’ 50/box FCFGA800-Ni-TC thick ‘C’ 50/box
FCFGA800-Cu-EA extra thick ‘A’ 50/box FCFGA800-Ni-EA extra thick ‘A’ 50/box
FCFGA800-Cu-EB extra thick ‘B’ 50/box FCFGA800-Ni-EB extra thick ‘B’ 50/box
FCFGA800-Cu-EC extra thick ‘C’ 50/box FCFGA800-Ni-EC extra thick ‘C’ 50/box
FCFGA1000-Cu-SB standard ‘B’ 50/box FCFGA1000-Ni-SB standard ‘B’ 50/box
1000 micron 1000 micron
FCFGA1000-Cu-SC standard ‘C’ 50/box FCFGA1000-Ni-SC standard ‘C’ 50/box
FCFGA1000-Cu-UA ultra-thin ‘A’ 50/box FCFGA1000-Ni-UA ultra-thin ‘A’ 50/box
FCFGA1000-Cu-UB ultra-thin ‘B’ 50/box FCFGA1000-Ni-UB ultra-thin ‘B’ 50/box
FCFGA1000-Cu-UC ultra-thin ‘C’ 50/box FCFGA1000-Ni-UC ultra-thin ‘C’ 50/box
FCFGA1000-Cu-TA thick ‘A’ 50/box FCFGA1000-Ni-TA thick ‘A’ 50/box
FCFGA1000-Cu-TB thick ‘B’ 50/box FCFGA1000-Ni-TB thick ‘B’ 50/box
FCFGA1000-Cu-TC thick ‘C’ 50/box FCFGA1000-Ni-TC thick ‘C’ 50/box
FCFGA1000-Cu-EA extra thick ‘A’ 50/box FCFGA1000-Ni-EA extra thick ‘A’ 50/box
FCFGA1000-Cu-EB extra thick ‘B’ 50/box FCFGA1000-Ni-EB extra thick ‘B’ 50/box
FCFGA1000-Cu-EC extra thick ‘C’ 50/box FCFGA1000-Ni-EC extra thick ‘C’ 50/box
FCFGA1500-Cu-SB standard ‘B’ 50/box FCFGA1500-Ni-SB standard ‘B’ 50/box
1500 micron 1500 micron
FCFGA1500-Cu-SC standard ‘C’ 50/box FCFGA1500-Ni-SC standard ‘C’ 50/box
FCFGA1500-Cu-UA ultra-thin ‘A’ 50/box FCFGA1500-Ni-UA ultra-thin ‘A’ 50/box
FCFGA1500-Cu-UB ultra-thin ‘B’ 50/box FCFGA1500-Ni-UB ultra-thin ‘B’ 50/box
FCFGA1500-Cu-UC ultra-thin ‘C’ 50/box FCFGA1500-Ni-UC ultra-thin ‘C’ 50/box
FCFGA1500-Cu-TA thick ‘A’ 50/box FCFGA1500-Ni-TA thick ‘A’ 50/box
FCFGA1500-Cu-TB thick ‘B’ 50/box FCFGA1500-Ni-TB thick ‘B’ 50/box
FCFGA1500-Cu-TC thick ‘C’ 50/box FCFGA1500-Ni-TC thick ‘C’ 50/box
FCFGA1500-Cu-EA extra thick ‘A’ 50/box FCFGA1500-Ni-EA extra thick ‘A’ 50/box
FCFGA1500-Cu-EB extra thick ‘B’ 50/box FCFGA1500-Ni-EB extra thick ‘B’ 50/box
FCFGA1500-Cu-EC extra thick ‘C’ 50/box FCFGA1500-Ni-EC extra thick ‘C’ 50/box

® 4. Formvar/Silicon Monoxide ® 5. Silicon Monoxide Film Only

A formvar film stabilized with a thin film of Silicon Monoxide. Silicon A thin film of pure Silicon Monoxide (15–30 nm) is deposited directly on
Monoxide produces a desirable support film because it offers low top of the grid.
background contrast and it is stable under the electron beam and it is
more hydrophilic than carbon film.

Cat. # Type Qty Cat. # Type Qty Cat. # Type Qty Cat. # Type Qty
FSF200-Cu 200 mesh 50/box FSF200-Ni 200 mesh 50/box SF200-Cu 200 mesh 50/box SF200-Ni 200 mesh 50/box
FSF300-Cu 300 mesh 50/box FSF300-Ni 300 mesh 50/box SF300-Cu 300 mesh 50/box SF300-Ni 300 mesh 50/box
FSF400-Cu 400 mesh 50/box FSF400-Ni 400 mesh 50/box SF400-Cu 400 mesh 50/box SF400-Ni 400 mesh 50/box

132 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec04_116-133_EMS_Full Line New Modules 6/30/14 1:18 AM Page 133

Grids, Grid Storage Boxes, & Related Supplies SECTION 4

SUPPORT FILM ON GRIDS

® 6. Lacey Carbon Film
This carbon coated film on a broken pattern consists of woven-mesh-like holes of different sizes and shapes. Average hole sizes are 50, 100 and 150 microns.
This type of pattern provides support but does not interfere when observing specimen sections.
Cat. # Type Thickness Qty Cat. # Type Thickness Qty Cat. # Type Thickness Qty
LC200-Cu 5/box LC200-Ni 5/box LC200-Au 5/box
200 MESH 50 micron 200 MESH 50 micron 200 MESH 50 micron
LC200-Cu-25 25/box LC200-Ni-25 25/box LC200-Au-25 25/box
LC300-Cu 5/box LC305-Ni 5/box LC300-Au 5/box
300 MESH 50 micron 300 MESH 50 micron 300 MESH 50 micron
LC325-Cu 25/box LC325-Ni 25/box LC325-Au 25/box
LC400-Cu 5/box LC400-Ni 5/box LC400-Au 5/box
400 MESH 50 micron 400 MESH 50 micron 400 MESH 50 micron
LC400-Cu-25 25/box LC400-Ni-25 25/box LC400-Au-25 25/box

NEW Thickness Ranges

Cat. # Type Thickness Qty Cat. # Type Thickness Qty Cat. # Type Thickness Qty
LC200-Cu-100 100 micron 25/box LC200-Ni-100 100 micron 25/box LC200-Au-100 100 micron 25/box
200 MESH 200 MESH 200 MESH
LC200-Cu-150 150 micron 25/box LC200-Ni-150 150 micron 25/box LC200-Au-150 150 micron 25/box
LC300-Cu-100 100 micron 25/box LC300-Ni-100 100 micron 25/box LC300-Au-100 100 micron 25/box
300 MESH 300 MESH 300 MESH
LC300-Cu-150 150 micron 25/box LC300-Ni-150 150 micron 25/box LC300-Au-150 150 micron 25/box
LC400-Cu-100 100 micron 25/box LC400-Ni-100 100 micron 25/box LC400-Au-100 100 micron 25/box
400 MESH 400 MESH 400 MESH
LC400-Cu-150 150 micron 25/box LC400-Ni-150 150 micron 25/box LC400-Au-150 150 micron 25/box

® 7. NEW Lacey Formvar with Carbon Film

This formvar and carbon coated film on a broken pattern consists of woven-mesh-like holes of different sizes and shapes. Average hole sizes are 50, 100
and 150 microns. This type of pattern provides support but does not interfere when observing specimen sections.
Cat. # Type Thickness Qty Cat. # Type Thickness Qty Cat. # Type Thickness Qty
LFC200-Cu-50 50 micron 25/bx LFC200-Ni-50 50 micron 25/bx LFC200-Au-50 50 micron 25/bx
LFC200-Cu-100 200 MESH 100 micron 25/bx LFC200-Ni-100 200 MESH 100 micron 25/bx LFC200-Au-100 200 MESH 100 micron 25/bx
LFC200-Cu-150 150 micron 25/bx LFC200-Ni-150 150 micron 25/bx LFC200-Au-150 150 micron 25/bx
LFC300-Cu-50 50 micron 25/bx LFC300-Ni-50 50 micron 25/bx LFC300-Au-50 50 micron 25/bx
LFC300-Cu-100 300 MESH 100 micron 25/bx LFC300-Ni-100 300 MESH 100 micron 25/bx LFC300-Au-100 300 MESH 100 micron 25/bx
LFC300-Cu-150 150 micron 25/bx LFC300-Ni-150 150 micron 25/bx LFC300-Au-150 150 micron 25/bx
LFC400-Cu-50 50 micron 25/bx LFC400-Ni-50 50 micron 25/bx LFC400-Au-50 50 micron 25/bx
LFC400-Cu-100 400 MESH 100 micron 25/bx LFC400-Ni-100 400 MESH 100 micron 25/bx LFC400-Au-100 400 MESH 100 micron 25/bx
LFC400-Cu-150 150 micron 25/bx LFC400-Ni-150 150 micron 25/bx LFC400-Au-150 150 micron 25/bx

® 8. Holey Carbon Film

A thin piece of carbon. The average hole sizes are 50, 100 and 150 microns.
Cat. # Type Qty Cat. # Type Qty Cat. # Type Qty
HC200-Cu 200 MESH 25/box HC200-Ni 200 MESH 25/box HC200-Au 200 MESH 25/box
HC300-Cu 300 MESH 25/box HC300-Ni 300 MESH 25/box HC300-Au 300 MESH 25/box
HC400-Cu 400 MESH 25/box HC400-Ni 400 MESH 25/box HC400-Au 400 MESH 25/box

NEW Thickness Ranges

Cat. # Type Thickness Qty Cat. # Type Thickness Qty Cat. # Type Thickness Qty
HC200-Cu-100 100 micron 25/box HC200-Ni-100 100 micron 25/box HC200-Au-100 100 micron 25/box
200 MESH 200 MESH 200 MESH
HC200-Cu-150 150 micron 25/box HC200-Ni-150 150 micron 25/box HC200-Au-150 150 micron 25/box
HC300-Cu-100 100 micron 25/box HC300-Ni-100 100 micron 25/box HC300-Au-100 100 micron 25/box
300 MESH 300 MESH 300 MESH
HC300-Cu-150 150 micron 25/box HC300-Ni-150 150 micron 25/box HC300-Au-150 150 micron 25/box
HC400-Cu-100 100 micron 25/box HC400-Ni-100 100 micron 25/box HC400-Au-100 100 micron 25/box
400 MESH 400 MESH 400 MESH
HC400-Cu-150 150 micron 25/box HC400-Ni-150 150 micron 25/box HC400-Au-150 150 micron 25/box

® 9. Beryllium Support Films

A deposition of 250 Angstroms thick Beryllium onto the 0.005" thick, 25x25mm squares of a Cu substrate. The Be can be removed by dissolving the
substrate in nitric acid (50:50). The Be film will then be removed from the acid, washed in distilled water and mounted on TEM grids. A Be support film will
reduce background interference to a minimum and it is particularly useful where analyses for C or Si are required, so that these alternative supports cannot
be used. Another advantage of the Be support is its very fine grain size which produces a very sharp ring pattern for in-situ calibration.
Cat # Description Qty
76030 Beryllium Support Film, 25x25mm each

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 133
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec04_134-150_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 2:14 AM Page 134

SECTION 4 Grids, Grid Storage Boxes, & Related Supplies

 C-flat™ Holey Carbon Grids
for Cryo-TEM
The premier holey carbon grid for
cryo-transmission electron microscopy
Overview
C-flat™ is an ultra-flat, holey carbon-coated TEM support grid for
transmission electron microscopy (TEM). Unlike competing holey carbon
films, C-flat™ is manufactured without plastics, so it is clean upon arrival
and the user has no residue to contend with.
The C-flat™ Advantage
C-flat™ leads to better data sets.
Made with patent pending technology, C-flat™ provides an ultra-flat
surface that results in better particle dispersion and more uniform ice
thickness. Patterning is done using deep-UV projection lithography,
ensuring the most accurate and consistent hole shapes and sizes down
to submicron features. The precise methods by which C-flat™ is
manufactured elminate artifacts such as excess carbon and edges
around holes.
C-flat™ is affordable
C-flat™ is available in 25, 50, and 100 packs at a per-grid price less
than competing products.
Applications
C-flat™ holey carbon grids provide the ideal specimen support to achieve
high resolution data in cryo-TEM making them an ideal choice for single
particle analysis, cryo electron tomography and automated TEM analysis.
Cryo-electron tomography (cryoET) and Single Particle Analysis
(SPA):
Numerous researchers have reported that the ultra-flat surface of C-flat™
leads to even ice thickness and uniform particle distribution within the Product Line
hole areas. This optimal particle distribution results in superior data
C-flat™ is a holey carbon film supported by a standard TEM grid. C-flat™
being collected as compared with other holey support films. 2μm hole
products are fully specified by 4 parameters: the hole diameter and pitch
sizes are standard but custom hole sizes are available so C-flat™ can
of the holey carbon film and the material type and mesh size of the TEM
accommodate the common magnifications used for quantitative TEM
grid. The following image illustrates these parameters:
analysis.
Standard Products
Automated TEM:
The breadth of applications in cryoTEM necessitate a wide range of holey
C-flat™ provides a regular array of analysis sites compatible with
carbon film patterns. And now, with the recent expansion of the product
automated data collection software such as Leginon. This compatibility,
line, a C-flat™ holey carbon film is available for almost any application.
in combination with the more uniform ice thickness and particle
Whether 600nm holes are needed for very high magnifications with ultra-
distribution reported by numerous researchers, results in more high-
high resolution cameras or large open areas are needed for larger
quality target sites per grid.
specimens, C-flat™ is the perfect holey carbon grid.
Publications using C-flat™: C-flat™ is immediately available in several standard array patterns
Does contamination buildup limit through put for automated cryoEM? , including hole diameters/hole spacings of 0.6/2, 1/1, 1/2, 1/4, 1.2/1.3,
Journal of Structural Biology, Volume 154, Issue 3, June 2006, Pages 2/1, 2/2, 2/4, 4/2, and a multihole pattern. C-flat™ is supported by your
303-311 Anchi Cheng, Denis Fellmann, James Pulokas, Clinton S. choice of a 200 mesh or 400 mesh copper TEM grid and sold in
Potter and Bridget Carragher quantities of 25, 50, or 100.
Automated cryoEM data acquisition and analysis of 284 742 particles of Thick Products
GroEL , Journal of Structural Biology, In Press, Uncorrected Proof, C-Flat™ is available in a thick option that doubles the carbon thickness
Available online 22 May 2006, Scott M. Stagg, Gabriel C. Lander, from approximately 20nm to 40nm. Thick C-flat product numbers end
James Pulokas, Denis Fellmann, Anchi Cheng, Joel D. Quispe, Satya P. in -T, catalog numbers contain “CFT”. Available in quantities of 50 and
Mallick, Radomir M. Avila, Bridget Carragher and Clinton S. Potter 100 per pack.

134 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec04_134-150_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 2:14 AM Page 135

Grids, Grid Storage Boxes, & Related Supplies SECTION 4

Cryo Preparation Using C-flat™

Product Overview Working with Viscous Samples
C-flat™ is a holey carbon support film, Generally, lowering the volume of solution on the
manufactured using a patent pending grid can help to eliminate the need for multiple
semiconductor-based technology without plastics, blots, which can damage the carbon film. As little
resists or other soft materials. As a result, the as 1μL of solution can cover a 3mm grid area if the
carbon films are flat, uniform and free of residues or pipette tip is used to spread the drop, but reducing
plastics. C-flat™ is designed to be an "out of the the volume to 1.5 or 2.0μL will help as well. Once
box" solution, and should require minimal sample the sample is on the grid, it should be blotted within
preparation. Extensive plasma cleaning is not a few minutes before further evaporation occurs. If
Frozen-Hydrated Bacteriophange Capsid needed, and could potentially thin the carbon, a Vitrobot™ is used, changing the offset from 0mm
(data acquired on CF-1.2/1.3-4C) making it too fragile for blotting or freezing. to -1 or -2mm can also help.
Plasma Preparation Hydrophilicity/Hydrophobicity
If you are using C-flat™ for the first time, it is Increasing the hydrophilicity of the carbon film will
recommended that no plasma preparation be used help a droplet spread evenly over the carbon, rather
initially. As with any carbon film, plasma than pool on the surface. The most common
preparation is sometimes necessary to make the method for achieving this is by plasma or glow
surface more hydrophilic. If your initial results discharge; recommended settings for various
dictate making the films more hydrophilic, below equipment are given. Keep in mind that C-flat™ is
are some guidelines for preparation using several manufactured without any plastics or soft materials
common systems. in the process, therefore plasma or glow discharge
Fischione Model 1020 steps are only needed to make the surface more
• 25% Oxygen/75% Argon hydrophilic, not to clean. For this reason, a lower
• Use 5 grid holder and dampening shield power and time is generally used.
• Plasma clean grids for 10-30 seconds Adding Carbon to C-flat™
Note: It is recommended that the dampening shield Many C-flat™ parts are now offered in both the
250,000 particles of GroEL in 24 hours.
be used when cleaning C-flat™ using the Fischione standard as well as a thicker carbon film, designed
Image Courtesy of Scott Stagg and Mike
Model 1020 plasma cleaner. The shield will dampen to give each lab the option to choose not only the
Pique NRAMM, The Scripps Research
Institute (data acquired on CF-2/2-4C) the effect of the plasma, reducing the erosion rate of most appropriate hole geometry and size, but also
the carbon while allowing the film to become more the ideal carbon thickness for their application. In
Articles hydrophilic. addition, carbon can be added to C-flat™ either to
thicken the existing hole pattern, or as a thin
An improved holey carbon film for Gatan Solarus™ continuous overlay across the hole pattern. Overlays
cryo-electron microscopy. Quispe J, • 25% Oxygen/75% Argon are often used when particles have a strong affinity
Damiano J, Mick SE, Nackashi DP, • Place grids on a support (e.g. glass slide) towards the carbon material.
Fellmann D, Ajero TG, Carragher B, • Set slide in the bottom of the chamber
Potter CS, (2007). Microscopy and • Set RF power to 25 watts Keeping the Carbon Intact
microanalysis, 13(5), 365-371. • Plasma clean grids for 10-20 seconds C-flat™ is designed to be an “out of the box”
solution. Extensive sample preparation steps are
Improving the technique of vitreous Glow Discharge generally not required, and often carbon that is torn
cryo-sectioning for cryo-electron These systems vary widely depending on the or broken is a sign of plasma cleaning that is too
tomography: electrostatic charging for manufacturer. Typically, keep the glow from the long and/or at too high a power setting. Please refer
section attachment and implementation of plasma dim and the clean time approximately 10-30 to the suggestions on plasma cleaner settings, as
an anti-contamination glove box. seconds. well as on working with viscous samples.
Pierson J, Fernández JJ, Bos E, Amini S,
Gnaegi H, Vos M, Bel B, Adolfsen F,
Plunge Freezing
Recommended settings for plunge freezing with the
Carrascosa JL, Peters PJ., J Struct Biol.
Vitrobot™
2010 Feb;169(2): 219-25. Epub 2009
• Temperature: 4°C
Oct 12.
• Humidity: 100% (can vary between 90–100%)  Plunging Tweezers for
• Blot Time: 3-5 seconds the CP3 (CryoplungeTM3)
• Volume on Grid: 3μL (can vary) Custom tweezers specifically made to fit the Gatan
• Drain Time: 0 seconds CryoplungeTM an instrument used in the preparation
• Offset: 0 for regular samples, –1 for viscous of frozen hydrated specimens for cryoEM.
When using the Vitrobot™, it is recommended that
the filter paper be changed regularly (generally CP3690 Plunging Tweezers each
after freezing 4-5 grids or 10 minutes, whichever
comes first.) The filter paper can become saturated
in the high humidity environment of the chamber.

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 135
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec04_134-150_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 7/2/14 2:08 AM Page 136

SECTION 4 Grids, Grid Storage Boxes, & Related Supplies

Cryo Preparation using C-flat™  C-flat™ Holey Carbon Grids for cryo-TEM (continued)
(continued)
1500x (45°) 3000x 10,000x 20,000x
Publications using C-flat™:
Near-atomic resolution using electron cryomicroscopy and
single-particle reconstruction. Proceedings of the National CF-MH-2C
Academy of Sciences, Volume 105, Number 6, pp. 1867- CF-MH-4C
1872, 2008. X. Zhang, E. Settembre, C. Xu, P. R. Multi-Hole
& Space
Dormitzer, R. Bellamy, S. C. Harrison, and N. Grigorieff
Preparation of macromolecular complexes for cryo-electron
microscopy. Nature Protocols, Volume 2, pp. 3239 - 3246, CF-1/1-2C
2007. R. A. Grassucci, D. J. Taylor, and J. Frank
CF-1/1-4C
Segrosome structure revealed by a complex of ParR with 1.0μm hole
centromere DNA. Nature, Volume 450, pp. 1268-1271, 1.0μm space
2007. M. A. Schumacher, T. C. Glover, A. J. Brzoska, S.
O. Jensen, T. D. Dunham, R. A. Skurray and N. Firth
Automation of random canonical tilt and orthogonal tilt CF-1.2/1.3-2C
data collection using feature-based correlation. Journal of CF-1.2/1.3-4C
Structural Biology, Volume 159, Issue 3, pp. 335-346, 1.2μm hole
1.3μm space
September 2007. C. Yoshioka, J. Pulokas, D. Fellmann, C.
S. Potter, R. A. Milligan and B. Carragher
Automated cryoEM data acquisition and analysis of 284 CF-2/0.5-2C
742 particles of GroEL. Journal of Structural Biology, CF-2/0.5-4C
Volume 155, Issue 3, pp. 470-481, September 2006. S. 2.0 μm hole
M. Stagg, G. C. Lander, J. Pulokas, D.s Fellmann, A. 0.5 μm space
Cheng, J. D. Quispe, S. P. Mallick, R. M. Avila, B.
Carragher and C. S. Potter
CF-2/1-2C
Does contamination buildup limit throughput for automated
CF-2/1-4C
cryoEM? Journal of Structural Biology, Volume 154, Issue 2.0μm hole
3, pp. 303-311, June 2006. A. Cheng, D. Fellmann, J. 1.0μm space
Pulokas, C. S. Potter and B. Carragher
C-flat™ is a trademark of Protochips, Inc. All rights reserved
CF-2/2-2C
CF-2/2-4C
2.0μm hole
C-flat™ Customization 2.0μm space

We realize that each customer has unique needs since

specimens vary greatly in composition and size. To meet
the diverse and demanding needs of the cryoTEM CF-2/4-2C
community, C-flat™ can be customized to meet a user's CF-2/4-4C
2.00μm hole
specific requirements. For example, C-flat™ can be 2.0μm space
manufactured on other grid types such as Gold grids,
100x400 mesh grids, or London Finder grids. The size,
shape and spacing of the holes perforating the carbon film CF-4/1-2c
can also be customized. For examples, those using
CF-4/1-4C
electron tomography techniques might desire a larger hole 4.0 μm hole
size to allow for increased tilt angles; those using very 1.0 μm space
high magnifications might find a smaller hole size
desirable; 2D crystallographers might prefer a a sparse
hole pattern to take advantage of the clean and ultra flat CF-4/2-2C
surface of C-flat™; and based upon the specimen CF-4/2-4C
preparation and imaging protocols, grid metals other than 4.0μm hole
copper might be required. 2.0μm space

C-flat™ can be customized to meet all of these needs.

C-flat™ mounted on a stub using carbon tape and imaged
Please contact EMS with any custom C-flat™ requests. with a Field Emission Scanning Electron Microscope
We will be glad to provide you with a quote for specialized
C-flat™ grids. Requests for customized parts can be
made directly to EMS via e-mail to sgkcck@aol.com

136 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec04_134-150_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 2:14 AM Page 137

Grids, Grid Storage Boxes, & Related Supplies SECTION 4

 C-flat™ Holey Carbon Grids for cryo-TEM (continued)


Ordering Information: C-Flat™ is now available in the standard version and a new thick version
that doubles the carbon thickness from approximately 20nm to 40nm.

Product Code Cat. # Standard Cat. # Thick Hole Size Hole Spacing TEM Mesh TEM Grid Qty.
CF-1.2/1.3-2C CF213-25 — 1.2 μm 1.3 μm 200 Cu 25/pk.
CF213-50 CFT213-50 1.2 μm 1.3 μm 200 Cu 50/pk.
CF213-100 CFT213-100 1.2 μm 1.3 μm 200 Cu 100/pk.
CF-1.2/1.3-4C CF413-25 — 1.2 μm 1.3 μm 400 Cu 25/pk.
CF413-50 CFT413-50 1.2 μm 1.3 μm 400 Cu 50/pk.
CF413-100 CFT413-100 1.2 μm 1.3 μm 400 Cu 100/pk.
CF-2/0.5-2c CF205-25 — 2.0 μm 0.5 μm 200 Cu 25/pk
CF205-50 CFT205-50 2.0 μm 0.5 μm 200 Cu 50/pk
CF205-100 CFT205-100 2.0 μm 0.5 μm 200 Cu 100/pk
CF-2/0.5-4C CF405-25 — 2.0 μm 0.5 μm 400 Cu 25/pk
CF405-50 CFT405-50 2.0 μm 0.5 μm 400 Cu 50/pk
CF405-100 CFT405-100 2.0 μm 0.5 μm 400 Cu 100/pk
CF-2/1-2C CF212-25 — 2.0 μm 1.0 μm 200 Cu 25/pk.
CF212-50 CFT212-50 2.0 μm 1.0 μm 200 Cu 50/pk.
CF212-100 CFT212-100 2.0 μm 1.0 μm 200 Cu 100/pk.
CF-2/1-4C CF412-25 — 2.0 μm 1.0 μm 400 Cu 25/pk.
CF412-50 CFT412-50 2.0 μm 1.0 μm 400 Cu 50/pk.
CF412-100 CFT412-100 2.0 μm 1.0 μm 400 Cu 100/pk.
CF-2/2-2C CF-222C-25 — 2.0 μm 2.0 μm 200 Cu 25/pk.
CF-222C-50 CFT-222C-50 2.0 μm 2.0 μm 200 Cu 50/pk.
CF-222C-100 CFT-222C-100 2.0 μm 2.0 μm 200 Cu 100/pk.
CF-2/2-4C CF-224C-25 — 2.0 μm 2.0 μm 400 Cu 25/pk.
CF-224C-50 CFT-224C-50 2.0 μm 2.0 μm 400 Cu 50/pk.
CF-224C-100 CFT-224C-100 2.0 μm 2.0 μm 400 Cu 100/pk.
CF-2/4-2C CF242-25 — 2.0 μm 4.0 μm 200 Cu 25/pk.
CF242-50 CFT242-50 2.0 μm 4.0 μm 200 Cu 50/pk.
CF242-100 CFT242-100 2.0 μm 4.0 μm 200 Cu 100/pk.
CF-2/4-4C CF442-25 — 2.0 μm 4.0 μm 400 Cu 25/pk.
CF442-50 CFT442-50 2.0 μm 4.0 μm 400 Cu 50/pk.
CF442-100 CFT442-100 2.0 μm 4.0 μm 400 Cu 100/pk.
CF-4/1-2C CF241-25 — 4.0 μm 1.0 μm 200 Cu 25/pk
CF241-50 CFT241-50 4.0 μm 1.0 μm 200 Cu 50/pk
CF241-100 CFT241-100 4.0 μm 1.0 μm 200 Cu 100/pk
CF-4/1-4C CF441-25 — 4.0 μm 1.0 μm 400 Cu 25/pk
CF441-50 CFT441-50 4.0 μm 1.0 μm 400 Cu 50/pk
CF441-100 CFT441-100 4.0 μm 1.0 μm 400 Cu 100/pk
CF-4/2-2C CF422-25 — 4.0 μm 2.0 μm 200 Cu 25/pk.
CF422-50 CFT422-50 4.0 μm 2.0 μm 200 Cu 50/pk.
CF422-100 CFT422-100 4.0 μm 2.0 μm 200 Cu 100/pk.
CF-4/2-4C CF424-25 — 4.0 μm 2.0 μm 400 Cu 25/pk.
CF424-50 CFT424-50 4.0 μm 2.0 μm 400 Cu 50/pk.
CF424-100 CFT424-100 4.0 μm 2.0 μm 400 Cu 100/pk.
CF-MH-2C CF2MH-25 — Multihole* — 200 Cu 25/pk.
CF2MH-50 CFT2MH-50 Multihole* — 200 Cu 50/pk.
CF2MH-100 CFT2MH-100 Multihole* — 200 Cu 100/pk.
CF-MH-4C CF4MH-25 — Multihole* — 400 Cu 25/pk.
CF4MH-50 CFT4MH-50 Multihole* — 400 Cu 50/pk.
CF4MH-100 CFT4MH-100 Multihole* — 400 Cu 100/pk
CF-1/1-2C CF21-25 — 1.0 μm 1.0 μm 200 Cu 25/pk.
CF21-50 CFT21-50 1.0 μm 1.0 μm 200 Cu 50/pk.
CF21-100 CFT21-100 1.0 μm 1.0 μm 200 Cu 100/pk.
CF-1/1-4C CF41-25 — 1.0 μm 1.0 μm 400 Cu 25/pk.
CF41-50 CFT41-50 1.0 μm 1.0 μm 400 Cu 50/pk.
CF41-100 CFT41-100 1.0 μm 1.0 μm 400 Cu 100/pk.
* The Multihole device has a staggered pattern of six features consisting of three circle patterns of 1 micron, 1.4 micron and 2 micron diameter and three ellipse patterns of 1x4 microns, 1.4 x 5.6 microns and 2x8 microns.

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 137
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec04_134-150_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 2:15 AM Page 138

SECTION 4 Grids, Grid Storage Boxes, & Related Supplies

QUANTIFOIL® — Holey Carbon Films
QUANTIFOIL® is a perforated support foil with  QUANTIFOIL® with QUANTIFOIL® R 1.2/1.3
pre-defined hole size, shape and arrangement. It A foil with ~1.2 μm circluar
has advantages in electron microscopy (EM) or
Circular Holes
holes and a spacing of ~2.5 μm
low-energy electron point source (LEEPS) QUANTIFOIL® with circular holes is used in between the holes. This type is
microscopy when compared with conventional cryoelectron tomographic reconstruction. The used at magnifications around
holey film. roundness of the holes is advantageous with 50.000x.
QUANTIFOIL® is offered with circular and respect to the formation of an ice layer of
constant thickness. The whole size chosen  QUANTIFOIL® with
square, orthogonal arranged holes. Films with
different hole sizes and bar widths are available. depends on the magnification used, and on Square Holes
whether or not one wishes to include support film
Carbon is the standard material that makes the QUANTIFOIL® with square holes and relatively
foil. in the image. Assessment of the image quality is
narrow bars can be used in EM to support a thin
easier when foil is included in the picture,
QUANTIFOIL® is a superior quality of holey carbon film, which by itself is too fragile to span a
because the power spectrum of a foil is stronger
carbon film, which facilitates the use of grid square.
than that of unsupported ice.
automation in TEM. (e.g. The National Resource Alternatively, this holey film can directly support
for Automated Molecular Microscopy, at the QUANTIFOIL® R 3.5/1 an object that is larger than the holes.
Scripps Research Institute, has developed a QUANTIFOIL® R 3.5/1 may be
system, called Leginon, for automatically preferred over foils with smaller QUANTIFOIL® S 7/2
acquiring images from a transmission electron holes if the carbon film should QUANTIFOIL® S 7/2 constitutes
microscope). be outside the frame of the an optimum between a
image. This option can be desirable in the case maximum of open area on the
The surface properties of QUANTIFOIL® holey one hand, and mechanical
carbon support film, especially the wetting of extended objects, such as filamentous objects,
for example. stability on the other hand.
properties, may have to be adapted according to
one’s particular requirements. Untreated aging QUANTIFOIL® R 1/4  QUANTIFOIL® with
QUANTIFOIL® tends to be hydrophobic. QUANTIFOIL R 1/4 may be
®
Different Hole Shapes
Hydrophillicity of the foil can be achieved by glow preferred over R 1.2/1.3, when
discharging in residual air or by metal coating. an increased tolerance with
QUANTIFOIL® Multi A
QUANTIFOIL® Multi A is a holey
QUANTIFOIL® in low-energy electron point respect to the position of beam,
film, which consists of various
source (LEEPS) microscopy. QUANTIFOIL® with a and a larger beam diameter are desired, such as
in the case of automated image acquisition. pattern hole sizes, shapes and
regular pattern is required in order to be able to
arrangements is repeated. In
distinguish an object, which is spanned over a QUANTIFOIL® R 0.6/1 addition to round holes, the pattern includes
hole. An object cannot be discriminated from the Hole size is 0.6μ. Space between holes is 1μ. ovalshaped ones, which appear round at high tilt
support in the case of conventional holey support Center to center is 1.6μ (hole size may be as angles (~70°). The diameters of the round holes
film. (H.W. Fink & C. Schonenberger, University large as 1μ). are about 1, 1.4 and 2μ, and the bar widths
of Basel, used QUANTIFOIL® for the
measurement of electrical current through DNA QUANTIFOIL® R 5/20 range from 0.5 to 4μ. The oval holes in the foil
have a dimension of 8 x 2μ and 4 x 1μ.
molecules.) Hole size is 5μ. Space btween holes is 20μ.
The foil is ~12 nm thick and mounted on either Center to center is 25μ  QUANTIFOIL® with
copper, nickel or gold grids with either square or QUANTIFOIL R 2/4 ® Hexagonal Geometry
round holes of different sizes. QUANTIFOIL® R 2/4 may be This type of QUANTIFOIL® is meant for slot grids.
Holey films with 2μ round holes are used at preferred over R 2/2, when an It was especially designed for supporting serial
magnifications between 30,000x and 40,000x. increased tolerance with respect thin sections. It offers an optimum between
to the position of beam, and a mechanical stability on the one hand and
QUANTIFOIL® is generally delivered as a carbon
larger beam diameter are desired, such as in the backgroundfree area on the other hand. The foil
foil; it can be reinforced with plastic film. The
case of automated image acquisition. is thin enough to allow those parts of the sections
standard thickness for the carbon foil is 12 nm;
other thicknesses between 10 and 25 nm can be QUANTIFOIL® R 2/2 that lie on the bars to be interpreted. In this way,
made upon request. Holey films with 2 μm circular the information in the sections can be interpreted
holes are used at magnifications to the maximum.
QUANTIFOIL® is supplied with 200 mesh copper,
nickel or gold grids. Other meshes are also between 30.000x and 40.000x. QUANTIFOIL® Hex 15
available upon request as a special order. All QUANTIFOIL R 2/1 ® A foil with hole size of 26 μm
special orders are available in quantities of a QUANTIFOIL R 2/1 has more
® (diameter of inscribed circle)
minimum of 100 grids or multiples of 100. open area than R 2/2. It is used and a repeating distance of 41
when focusing is carried out on μm, the side length of the holes
the edge of a hole burnt in the and the bar width are 15 μm.
ice in a neighboring hole instead of on the foil
adjacent to the hole.

138 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec04_134-150_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 2:15 AM Page 139

Grids, Grid Storage Boxes, & Related Supplies SECTION 4

 QUANTIFOIL® Holey Carbon Grids for cryo-TEM (continued)

Ordering Information
Hole Shape Grid Type Hole Size Period Cat. # 200 Mesh Cat. # 300 Mesh Cat. # 400 Mesh Qty.
Q225CR-35 Q325CR-35 Q425CR-35 50/pk
R 3.5/1 Copper 3.5μm 4.5μm
Q250CR-35 Q350CR-35 Q450CR-35 100/pk
Q225NR-35 Q325NR-35 Q425NR-35 50/pk
Nickel 3.5μm 4.5μm
Q250NR-35 Q350NR-35 Q450NR-35 100/pk
Q225AR-35 Q325AR-35 Q425AR-35 50/pk
Gold 3.5μm 4.5μm
Q250AR-35 Q350AR-35 Q450AR-35 100/pk
Q225CR-14 Q325CR-14 Q425CR-14 50/pk
R 1/4 Copper 1μm 5μm
Q250CR-14 Q350CR-14 Q450CR-14 100/pk
Q225NR-14 Q325NR-14 Q425NR-14 50/pk
Nickel 1μm 5μm
Q250NR-14 Q350NR-14 Q450NR-14 100/pk
Q225AR-14 Q325AR-14 Q425AR-14 50/pk
Gold 1μm 5μm
Q250AR-14 Q350AR-14 Q450AR-14 100/pk
Q225CR-06 Q325CR-06 Q425CR-06 50/pk
R 0.6/1 Copper 0.6μm 1.6μm
Q250CR-06 Q350CR-06 Q450CR-06 100/pk
Q225NR-06 Q325NR-06 Q425NR-06 50/pk
Nickel 0.6μm 1.6μm
Q250NR-06 Q350NR-06 Q450NR-06 100/pk
Q225AR-06 Q325AR-06 Q425AR-06 50/pk
Gold 0.6μm 1.6μm
Q250AR-06 Q350AR-06 Q450AR-06 100/pk
Q225CR-520 Q325CR-520 Q425CR-520 50/pk
R 5/20 Copper 5μm 25μm
Q250CR-520 Q350CR-520 Q450CR-520 100/pk
Q225NR-520 Q325NR-520 Q425NR-520 50/pk
Nickel 5μm 25μm
Q250NR-520 Q350NR-520 Q450NR-520 100/pk
Q225AR-520 Q325AR-520 Q425AR-520 50/pk
Gold 5μm 25μm
Q250AR-520 Q350AR-520 Q450AR-520 100/pk
R 2/4 Q225CR-4 Q325CR4 Q425CR4 25/pk
Copper 2μm 6μm Q250CR-4 Q350CR4 Q450CR4 50/pk
Q2100CR-4 Q3100CR4 Q4100CR4 100/pk
Q225NR-4 Q325NR4 Q425NR4 25/pk
Nickel 2μm 6μm Q250NR-4 Q350NR4 Q450NR4 50/pk
Q2100NR-4 Q3100NR4 Q4100NR4 100/pk
Q225AR-4 Q325AR4 Q425AR4 25/pk
Gold 2μm 6μm Q250AR-4 Q350AR4 Q450AR4 50/pk
Q2100AR-4 Q3100AR4 Q4100AR4 100/pk
R 2/2 Q225CR2 Q325CR2 Q425CR2 25/pk
Copper 2μm 4μm Q250CR2 Q350CR2 Q450CR2 50/pk
Q2100CR2 Q3100CR2 Q4100CR2 100/pk
Q225NR2 Q325NR2 Q425NR2 25/pk
Nickel 2μm 4μm Q250NR2 Q350NR2 Q450NR2 50/pk
Q2100NR2 Q3100NR2 Q4100NR2 100/pk
Q225AR2 Q325AR2 Q425AR2 25/pk
Gold 2μm 4μm Q250AR2 Q350AR2 Q450AR2 50/pk
Q2100AR2 Q3100AR2 Q4100AR2 100/pk
R 2/1 Q225CR1 Q325CR1 Q425CR1 25/pk
Copper 2μm 3μm Q250CR1 Q350CR1 Q450CR1 50/pk
Q2100CR1 Q3100CR1 Q4100CR1 100/pk
Q225NR1 Q325NR1 Q425NR1 25/pk
Nickel 2μm 3μm Q250NR1 Q350NR1 Q450NR1 50/pk
Q2100NR1 Q3100NR1 Q4100NR1 100/pk
Q225AR1 Q325AR1 Q425AR1 25/pk
Gold 2μm 3μm Q250AR1 Q350AR1 Q450AR1 50/pk
Q2100AR1 Q3100AR1 Q4100AR1 100/pk
R 1.2/1.3 Q225CR1.3 Q325CR1.3 Q425CR1.3 25/pk
Copper ~1.2μm ~2.5μm Q250CR1.3 Q350CR1.3 Q450CR1.3 50/pk
Q2100CR1.3 Q3100CR1.3 Q4100CR1.3 100/pk
Q225NR1.3 Q325NR1.3 Q425NR1.3 25/pk
Nickel ~1.2μm ~2.5μm Q250NR1.3 Q350NR1.3 Q450NR1.3 50/pk
Q2100NR1.3 Q3100NR1.3 Q4100NR1.3 100/pk
S 7/2 Q225CS7 Q325CS7 Q425CS7 25/pk
Copper 7 x 7μm 9μm Q250CS7 Q350CS7 Q450CS7 50/pk
Q2100CS7 Q3100CS7 Q4100CS7 100/pk
Q225NS7 Q325NS7 Q425NS7 25/pk
Nickel 7 x 7μm 9μm Q250NS7 Q350NS7 Q450NS7 50/pk
Q2100NS7 Q3100NS7 Q4100NS7 100/pk
Q225AS7 Q325AS7 Q425AS7 25/pk
Gold 7 x 7μm 9μm Q250AS7 Q350AS7 Q450AS7 50/pk
Q2100AS7 Q3100AS7 Q4100AS7 100/pk
Multi A Q225CMA Q325CMA Q425CMA 25/pk
Copper — — Q250CMA Q350CMA Q450CMA 50/pk
Q2100CMA Q3100CMA Q4100CMA 100/pk
Q225NMA Q325NMA Q425NMA 25/pk
Nickel — — Q250jNMA Q350NMA Q450NMA 50/pk
Q2100NMA Q3100NMA Q4100NMA 100/pk

Hole Shape Grid Type Hole Size Description Cat. # Pack

0.5 x 2mm Q225CR-HEX 50/pk
HEX 15 Copper 2 6μm
slot grids Q250CR-HEX 100/pk

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 139
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec04_134-150_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 2:15 AM Page 140

SECTION 4 Grids, Grid Storage Boxes, & Related Supplies

New AN D ® Graphene Support Films for TEM

Exclusive Synthesis
the substrate-free gas-phase method
Overview
Graphene is a single atomic layer of carbon
Graphene is a single atomic layer of atoms tightly packed in a two-dimensional
carbon atoms tightly packed in a two- honeycomb lattice. The novel material has
dimensional honeycomb lattice. generated great interest throughout the scientific
This novel material is atomically thin, and technological community because of its
remarkable properties and numerous potential
chemically inert, consists of light atoms,
applications. However, obtaining pure and highly
and possesses a highly ordered ordered graphene has been a challenge. Small
structure. Graphene is electrically quantities of ultrahigh-quality graphene have been
and thermally conductive, and is the isolated through an unwieldy and time-consuming
strongest material ever measured. process involving the mechanical exfoliation of
highly oriented pyrolytic graphite. Alternative
These remarkable properties make
methods require substrates or graphite to create
graphene the ideal support film for atomically-thin sheets, and these techniques
electron microscopy. involve multiple steps, expensive substrates, or A typical TEM image of graphene sheets freely
non-ambient conditions. Furthermore, the sheets suspended on a lacey carbon TEM grid.
produced by these alternative methods exhibit
defects, disorder, and oxygen functionalities
that have a detrimental effect on the
properties of graphene.
The substrate-free gas-phase method is the
first and only process that can synthesize
ultrahigh-quality graphene in a single step,
without the use of substrates or graphite [1].
Graphene sheets are created through the
delivery of liquid alcohol droplets directly
into atmospheric-pressure microwave-
generated plasmas. Extensive
characterization of the synthesized 0.14 nm
graphene has proven that the sheets are
oxygen-free and exhibit a highly ordered
structure [2]. The graphene produced by
this unique method can immediately be An atomic-resolution image of a clean and
utilized for graphene applications. structurally perfect graphene sheet synthesized
by the substrate-free gas-phase method.
Individual carbon atoms appear white in the
image.

Elemental analysis by FT-IR

reveals that the synthesized
graphene sheets are free of
detrimental oxygen
functionalities. The FT-IR
spectrum of synthesized
graphene is similar to that of
highly oriented pyrolytic
graphite (HOPG).

140 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec04_134-150_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 2:15 AM Page 141

Grids, Grid Storage Boxes, & Related Supplies SECTION 4

® Graphene Support Films for TEM (continued)

Application
Direct imaging of soft and hard
nanomaterials
The interfaces between soft and hard
nanomaterials have been the subject of extensive
research.
Nanoparticles coated with molecular layers have
been shown to self-assemble into novel structures
that could potentially be used in electronics,
sensors, and photonics. Self-assembly is
influenced by the nature of molecular coatings
and thus more detailed characterization of these
soft materials is needed.
However, imaging surface molecules and their
interfaces with nanoparticles at the atomic scale
is a significant challenge. The transmission A low-magnification image of a (1) gold An atomic-resolution image of a 10 nm gold
electron microscope (TEM) imaging of nanoparticle 10 nm in diameter on a (2) nanoparticle and its surrounding citrate capping
functionalized nanoparticles has been attempted. transparent synthesized graphene support film, agent on a synthesized graphene support film.
(3) the vacuum, and (4) a lacey carbon support.
However, it has not been possible to observe
molecular surface layers and their interfaces with We offer ultrahigh-quality graphene that is Orering Information
nanoparticles at the atomic level. Modern produced through the substrate-free gas-phase
aberration-corrected TEMs can produce atomic- Graphene products come available in five
method[1]. The graphene created by this
resolution images of soft and hard nanomaterials. different ways, allowing you to choose which is
technique possesses a highly ordered structure
However, conventional TEM support films (e.g. best for you
that is composed of 99% carbon by mass (1%
ultrathin amorphous carbon) limit the capabilities hydrogen)[2]. This graphene was used to directly a) As a solution of 0.1 mg Graphene in 1 ml of
of these advanced microscopes because they image gold nanoparticles and their organic Ethanol. A homogeneous solution will take less
contribute to overall electron scattering and surface molecules in both conventional and than 30 seconds to create by sonicating the
diminish the contrast of low-atomic number atomic-resolution TEMs at a level that greatly Graphene-solvent mixture. One is able to coat
specimens. The TEM imaging of the interfaces surpasses any current TEM support film[3]. their own grids using this solution.
between soft and hard nanomaterials therefore b) As Graphene-enhanced lacey carbon TEM
Our graphene provides an invisible, crystalline
requires better support films that have a lower grids. 200 and 300 mesh. These grids are
background that enables the unrivaled TEM
dynamical interference with an imaging object [3]. created by coating our existing lacey carbon grids
characterization of organic and inorganic
Graphene is the ideal TEM support film. The nanomaterials. with graphene. Through a unique drop method,
material possesses a highly ordered structure and solution is dispersed onto the Lacey Carbon Grid.
References:
is atomically thin, chemically inert, structurally c) As dry, synthesized Graphene powder, 1 mg.
stable, and electrically and thermally conductive. [1] Dato et al., “Substrate-Free Gas-Phase
The ultrahigh-quality graphene produced by the Synthesis of Graphene Sheets”, Nano Letters 8, EMS # Description Quantity
2012–2016 (2008). GF1200 0.1 mg Graphene in each
substrate-free gas-phase method [1, 2] has
1 ml of Ethanol
enabled the unsurpassed TEM imaging of organic [2] Dato et al., “Clean and highly ordered GF1201 Graphene-Enhanced Lacey each
molecules and the interfaces between soft and graphene synthesized in the gas phase”, Carbon TEM Grid 200 # Cu
hard nanomaterials. The pure and highly-ordered Chemical Communications, 6095–6097, (2009). GF1202 Graphene-Enhanced Lacey each
sheets were used as a near-invisible support film Carbon TEM Grid 200 # Ni
[3] Lee et al., “Direct Imaging of Soft-Hard GF1203 Graphene-Enhanced Lacey each
to directly image the atoms in a gold nanoparticle
Interfaces Carbon TEM Grid 300 # Cu
and its surrounding citrate coating [3]. The results
showed that the synthesized graphene can be Enabled by Graphene”, Nano Letters 9, GF1204 Graphene-Enhanced Lacey each
3365–3369 (2009). Carbon TEM Grid 300 # Ni
used to directly observe nanoparticles
GF1205 Synthesized Graphene each
functionalized with a diverse range of molecular Powder, 1 mg
coatings, such as proteins and DNA

OTHER POTENTIAL APPLICATIONS:

biodevices • single molecule gas detection • graphene nanoribbons
integrated circuits • transparent conducting electrodes • ultracapacitors

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 141
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec04_134-150_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 2:15 AM Page 142

SECTION 4 Grids, Grid Storage Boxes, & Related Supplies

GRID PREPARATION SUPPLIES AND ACCESSORIES
 Pinholes  TEM-Specimen
These pinholes are prepared from pure copper foil, 3mm in diameter, 25 Grid Box – SB50
microns thick. They possess very high roundness and edge retention. This newly designed TEM grid
Blackened on one surface. Mounted in black anodized aluminum discs. storage box, for routine handling
Mounted in a recessed hole in an anodized holder, 16 mm in diameter. and long term storage of 50
standard size TEM grids. This
Applications new ergonomic design
 Spatial filtering incorporates several features that
 Controlling the diameter overcome the disadvantages
3mm Foil 16mm
of light beams Mount associated with storage boxes of
 Creating point the more conventional ‘sliding
light sources cover’ design. This new box has
 Image analysis 2mm 0.15mm a unique number on the face and
 Etc. on one end.
Features
Hole Range Tolerance
101-500μm +/- 2μm
 The blue arrow at the 12:00 o’clock position indicates the park
25-100μm +/- 1μm position for the cover when not it is not in use. This is a firm grip
1-25μm +/- 0.5μm ‘click’ position and it cannot be moved accidentally thus
preventing spillage.
PH-C1 Pin Hole 0.001mm (1μm) diameter each
 The clear cover can be rotated smoothly through 360 degrees once
PH-C2 Pin Hole 0.002mm (2μm) diameter each the slight initial resistance of the park position has been overcome
PH-C5 Pin Hole 0.005mm (5μm) diameter each exposing a maximum of 2 or 3 diamond shaped slots at any one time.
PH-10 Pin Hole 0.01mm (10μm) diameter each  The 50 diamond shaped slots have an alphanumeric referencing
PH-C25 Pin Hole 0.025mm (25μm) diameter each system. Each box is supplied with an index record card for additional
PH-C50 Pin Hole 0.05mm (50μm) diameter each information.
PH-100 Pin Hole 0.1mm (100μm) diameter each  The material the bases are made from have been chosen due to
PH-C250 Pin Hole 0.25mm (250μm) diameter each their anti-static properties. The clear cover has self-lubricating
PH-C1000 Pin Hole 1.0mm (1000μm) diameter each properties, which reduces friction, enabling the cover to move
freely while remaining in close contact with the face of the base.
 Grid Storage Box, 50 Capacity  The storage boxes are designed to be stacked, the base locating
precisely over the face of another box.
Storage for 50 grids in deep
diamond-shaped wells. All Specifications:
wells are identified. The base Size ....................................................75mm (L) x 65mm(W) x 6.5mm(D)
is resistant to organics and
Weight.......................................................................................22 grams
reactions can be carried out
on grid-mounted samples in Materials: Base:......................ABS-PHAT (Acrylonitrile Butadiene Styrene
the wells. Complete with grid + Anti-Static Additive)
recording card. Measures: Cover: ......................................................CAB (Cellulose Acetal Butyrate)
3"(L) x 19⁄16"(W) x 5⁄16"(H) 71150
(77x40x8mm) 71135-01 SB50 Grid Storage Box each
71135-12 SB50 Grid Storage Box 12/bx
71150 Grid Storage Box, 50 Capacity each 71136-01 SB50N Grid Storage Box with Unique Number each
71152 Grid Storage Box, 50 Capacity 1 dozen 71136-12 SB50N Grid Storage Box with Unique Number 12/bx

 Grid Storage Box, 100 Capacity  Grid Storage Box, 100 Capacity
100 grids can be stored in A newly designed grid storage
identified diamond-shaped box similiar to the original LKB
wells for daily handling or box. Made from a special
long-term storage. Complete plastic that minimizes static.
with grid recording card. Complete with grid recording
Measures: 35⁄16”(L) x 25⁄16 (W) x card.
9
⁄32”(H) (85x58x7mm) Measures:
8cm(L) x 5cm(W) x7mm(T)
71140 71155

71140 Grid Storage Box, 100 Capacity each 71155 Grid Storage Box, 100 Capacity each
71142 Grid Storage Box, 100 Capacity 1 dozen 71156 Grid Storage Box, 100 Capacity 1 dozen

142 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec04_134-150_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 2:15 AM Page 143

Grids, Grid Storage Boxes, & Related Supplies SECTION 4

GRID PREPARATION SUPPLIES AND ACCESSORIES

 Multipurpose Electron Microscope Specimen Box –
MEM Grid Box
A newly designed Grid Box with safety, ease and convenience in mind – this multipurpose
electron microscope specimen grid box is one of the most desirable boxes on the market.
• Eliminates the chances of tweezers insertion damaging the grids – The ‘tweezers
slot’ and ‘grid slot’ are in a separate location. The tweezers are only able to grip
the edge of the grid enabling it to be picked up
• Grids stored no longer jump out of the box while you remove the cover – Between
the body of the box and the sliding lid, there is a separate plastic cover, which
allows for only four slots being exposed at a time
• The Grid Record Card is stored safely by insertion along the reverse side of the box
• MEM-96 – will able to store up to 96 grids
• MEM-32 – will able to store up to 32 grids with 8 Blocks
• Measures: 81mm L x 54mm W x 6mm thick

1. Pick up a grid
Removes the problem of inserting the tweezers too deep or
damaging the tissues. The tweezers slot and grid hole connect.
The tweezers insertion slot grips the edge of the grid, so does not
damage the tissues and membrane.
2. Move Plastic sheet
Prevents grids from jumping out of the grid hole and mixing
together. Between the body of the box and lid, there is a plastic
cover piece so that when you pick up the grid, only four grid
1. Record card is stored 2. When moving lid and plastic
holes are exposed at once; the others remain covered by the
underneath the box cover pieces only four holes are
plastic cover piece and lid. exposed at once
Safeguards against loss of samples, or information of stored
samples becoming separated.
3. Record Card
Three different components (semi-thin section, thin section,
3. The tweezers insertion 4. Slot grids should best be gripped
block) and record card are all stored in one box (MEM-32 grid-8 slot grips the grid edge by curved tweezers. Mesh grids can
block). You can find everything and store all of your samples in be gripped by straight or curved
one box. tweezers.

Cat. # Description Qty.

71164-01 MEM-96 Grid Storage Box Each 5. MEM-96grid contain 96 grids (left) 6. Small semi-thin
MEM-32 grid-8 block contain 32 section can be stored
71164-10 MEM-96 Grid Storage Box 10/pk.
grids and 8 blocks (middle). by sliding into the
71165-01 MEM-32 Grid Storage Box Each block cavity (right).
71165-10 MEM-32 Grid Storage Box 10/pk.

 Numbered Grid Storage Box, 100 Capacity

The standard 100 capacity grid storage box with a unique number printed on the face and on
one end.
Advantages
 Eliminates the placement of the specimen grid in the wrong box.
 Easy retrieval of grid box from storage.
 Complete with grid recording card.
71137 Numbered Grid Storage Box, 100 Capacity each
71138 Numbered Grid Storage Box, 100 Capacity 10/lot
71139 Numbered Grid Storage Box, 100 Capacity 100/lot

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 143
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec04_134-150_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 2:16 AM Page 144

SECTION 4 Grids, Grid Storage Boxes, & Related Supplies

GRID PREPARATION SUPPLIES AND ACCESSORIES
 THE ORIGINAL LKB Grid Storage Box
For years, The LKB Grid Storage Box is the one that everyone is looking for. Now it is available again from EMS.
The box is made from ABS (a copolymer of Acrylonitrile, Butadien and Styrene) which will not tolerate temperatures
above 70˚C, while the lid is made of Polymethacrylate (Flexiglas, Perspex), which should not be exposed to
temperatures above 45˚C. Neither the box or the lid will resist organic solvents. The box consists of 100 diamond
shaped holes for storing up to 100 EM grids, either 3.05mm or 2.3mm in diameter. The box measures 3"
(75mm)(L) x 21⁄8"(55mm)(W) x 1⁄4"(7mm)(H) and it comes complete with 10 index cards.
71147-01 LKB 100-Grid Storage Box each
71147-12 LKB 100-Grid Storage Box 10/pk

 EMS 50 and EMS 100 Capacity Inexpensive Grid Storage Boxes

The EMS50 and EMS100 TEM Grid Storage Boxes are used for the storage
of TEM grids for routine grid handling, transport and long term TEM grid
storage for standard grids that are 3.05mm in diameter.
The box has a simple number/letter combination printed on the side of the
body. Dimensions for both boxes are: 3"(75mm) x 21⁄8"(55mm) x 1⁄4"(6.5mm)
and they are anti static treated.
71146-01 EMS 50 Grid Box each 71146-02
71146-01
71146-02 EMS 100 Grid Box each

 Dial-A-Grid  BEEM® Dial-A-Grid

Storage Modules and Block Storage
A two tone color coded plastic box
with insert which has 24 letter-
Modules
The same as Dial-A-Grid Module
labeled crossed slots, where the
but with two additional cavities for
grids can be stored. A rotating
block storage.
protection plate covers the slots
and allows for exposure of one grid
at a time.
Measures: 21⁄3”(L)x13⁄4”(W)x1⁄2”(H)
(57x45x12.5mm)
71148-01 71149-01
71148-01 BEEM® Dial-A-Grid Storage Box each 71149-01 BEEM® Dial-A-Grid & Block Storage each
71148-05 BEEM® Dial-A-Grid Storage Box 50/pk 71149-05 BEEM® Dial-A-Grid & Block Storage 50/pk
71148-10 BEEM® Dial-A-Grid Storage Box 100/pk 71149-10 BEEM® Dial-A-Grid & Block Storage 100/pk
Beem® Is A Registered Trademark of Better Equipment For Electron Microscopy, Inc. Beem® Is A Registered Trademark of Better Equipment For Electron Microscopy, Inc.

 EMS Dial-Grid-N-Block-Storage
24 slots labeled with letters from A-X where the grids can be stored and rotated for easy access as well
as 3 additional cavities for block storage. Available with and without a unique identification number.
71158-01 EMS Dial-Grid-N-Block Storage each
71158-05 EMS Dial-Grid-N-Block Storage 50/pk
71158-10 EMS Dial-Grid-N-Block Storage 100/pk
71158-15 EMS Dial-Grid-N-Block Storage/With Number each
71158-20 EMS Dial-Grid-N-Block Storage/With Number 50/pk
71158-25 EMS Dial-Grid-N-Block Storage/With Number 100/pk 71158-01

 Grid Transporting Box

This unique Box allows for the storage and transportation of grids without any worry of them moving
around or being damaged. The Plate is made from Silicone and has 54 individual compartments
10mm in size. Each compartment can hold 3 grids and the grids can be easily picked up from the
Silicone surface.
71173-01 Grid Transporting Box each

144 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec04_134-150_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 2:16 AM Page 145

Grids, Grid Storage Boxes, & Related Supplies SECTION 4

GRID PREPARATION SUPPLIES AND ACCESSORIES

 Cryogenic Grid Storage Box
This specimen grid box is a tool for storing or transferring cryogenic TEM specimen grids.
 Four diamond shaped slots
 Non-static cover held in place by stainless steel screw, which is tapped in the center of the box.
 Box fits the FEI Vitrobot™, Gatan 626™, Gatan 3500™.
Available with lid or without lid.
71166-10 Cryo Grid Box, Round, w/Lid each
71166-20 Cryo Grid Box, Square, w/Lid each
71166-30 Cryo Grid Box, Round, wo/Lid each

 Cryogenic Grid Box Handling Tool

This tool has one end which is threaded and fits into the center hole of the Cryogenic Grid Storage Box
(where the screw goes in to secure the lid) for moving the box in and out of the cryogenic chamber.
71165-50 Cryogenic Grid Box Handling Tool each

 Grid Mats
White silicone rubber mats, with numbered compartments. Good for organizing grids. They will not slide or
jump between compartments. Also ideal for staining grids. Easy to pick up grids without damaging forcep
tips. Mats are available for square and round petri dishes, (100mm diameter, 115mm high).
71160 Square Grid Mat each
71162 Square Grid Mat 1 dozen
71170 Round Grid Mat each
71172 Round Grid Mat 1 dozen

 EMS Domino Rack

The EMS Domino rack is “U” shaped and made from an aircraft alloy sheetstock with serial perforations;
thermally bonded spaceage copolymer; 5mm diameter holes, 28 holes per rack. The formvar film cast on
the rack will stretch across a series of smooth edged holes forming a flat, wrinkle free film that is ready
for grid mounting.
The Domino Rack allows the sections within the slot to dry flat and wrinkle free; it reduces the film and
section contamination to negligible levels. The size of the rack is 54mm (L) x 17.5mm(H) x 25.5mm
(W) Moran, D.T., and Rowley, J.C., (1987). “Biological Specimen Preparation for Correlative Light and
Electron Microscopy in Biology: Microscopy and Methods, ed. M.A. Hayat. Academic Press, New York./
pg 1-22
70620 EMS Domino Rack each
70621 EMS Domino Rack 10/lot

 Grid Staining Matrix System

This unique staining device allows you to stain up to 25 grids at one time or as little as one The Matrix
system has a simply alpha-numeric identification system. The unit is not solvent or chemically resistant
to acids so all stains should be aqueous based only.
The system requires very little stain and you may use different vessels for each stain.
The amount of Volume of stain required is as follows:
21–25 grids 11ml 11–15 grids 7ml 01–05 grids 3ml Each system includes the following:
16–20 grids 9ml 06–10 grids 5ml • Matrix Body
• 2 each of the Staining Vessels
71179-01 Grid Staining Matrix System Kit each
71179-05 Matrix Body with handle and cover each
(Red and Blue)
71179-06 Staining Vessels, 1 red and 1 blue 2/pk
71179-07 Staining Vessel, blue each
71179-08 Staining Vessel, red each

ARTICLE OF INTEREST
A simplified method for handling EM grids is described. This new method not only offers safety and identification of your samples but offers you improved
handling, temporary storage, and identification of grids bearing ultrathin sections as well as a novel method for preparing bulk samples.
Refer to: Gorycki, M.(1992). A Simple Method for Handling Grids. Biotechnic & Histochemistry 67/5, 313-314.

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 145
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec04_134-150_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 2:16 AM Page 146

SECTION 4 Grids, Grid Storage Boxes, & Related Supplies

GRID PREPARATION SUPPLIES AND ACCESSORIES

TECHNICAL TIP  Five-Slide Gripper

A Fool-proof Method for Mounting Serial  The Five-Slide Gripper
Sections on Single Hole Grids accommodates five microscope
I did serial sectioning for years on large single hole grids using a very simple slides in one staining procedure.
technique that made the potential problems of film thickness, wrinkles and  Fits most coplin and round-open
section loss very minor. I was not the original developer of the method and do not staining jars.
remember who originally gave it to me. It goes as follows:  No need to remove slides for drying.
1) Have your machine shop cut some thin pieces of Plexiglas into the size of  Made from a special material which is resistant to all chemicals
glass slides. At one end, drill about a dozen holes, roughly 5mm in diameter, in and solvents which are used in staining.
an area about the size of a formvar film cast on glass slides. These slides will  Withstands drying temperatures up to 80°C
serve as your template for holding your films.
2) Cast the formvar films onto glass slides using your normal method. Usually a 71410-06 Five-Slide Gripper 6/pk
good silver film, not gray, will work fine I routinely used 0.2% formvar in
dichloroethane when casting by immersing the slide into the solution in a small  For Mica Sheets & Glass Slides,
jar, etc. We now use a film caster that lets us hold the slide in the dichloroethane See pages 284–285 & 314–323 
vapors after lowering the formvar solution level This method tends to give you
thinner films consistently so the correct solution percentage and timing would  Film Casting Device
have to be redetermined.
An all glass apparatus. It casts uniformly
3) Float the film off the glass slide and pick it up with the Plexiglas slide so the thin films of parlodion, formvar, or
film covers the holes. Then draw the water out of the holes by pressing the
butvar directly onto 1x3 microscope
plastic slide down onto filter paper, or using small pieces of filter paper and
slides. The film casting solution can be
capillary action to draw the water out of individual holes. The films should hold
used repeatedly. A built-in fine-
nicely over the holes in the slide. Store slides until needed.
pressure-release valve helps control the
4) Next, cut your sections using a block diameter that is fairly similar to the size
speed of drainage. The thickness of the
of the slit in the grid. Pick up the sections on UNCOATED grids by gently lowering
the grid to the surface of the knife boat. I put the dull side down on the premise film is controlled by the concentration of
that the rough surface would grab the film better during step 6. The surface the film solution and the rate of the
tension of the water will hold the sections in the grid opening. Transfer the grid to drainage. The unit requires 100mls of
a droplet water until you have finished sectioning. Do invert grid. It important the film casting solution to start.
of grid (shiny side) stay dry so that the grid will float on all subsequent solutions. The unit comes complete with:
5) Transfer the grid + sections + water droplet to a drop of stain. A small amount
 500 ml capacity flask with built-in valves; Air-in and Air-out.
of water will be transferred but this will not interfere with staining. If you are
concerned about the dilution effect, increase your staining time slightly. Allow the  Film casting Cylinder with Cover.
section to stain, then wash by transferring through a series of droplets of clean  75 cc Atomizer.
water. Continue to if desired and wash the same way. Never let the grid dry. 71305-01 Complete Film Casting Device each
There is minimum problem with stain precipitation if you use very clean water 71305-04 500 ml Flask Replacement each
and transfer the grid through a sufficient number of water droplets (6-12 71305-06 Film Casting Cylinder Replacement each
recommended). 60804 Atomizer Replacement each
6) The final step is to transfer the grid to a film suspended over the hole in a
Plexiglas slide and let it dry down. The sections will now be stuck to the film with
For Film Casting Solutions, see pages 30, 46 
NO wrinkles and minimum breakage. When ready to view, just punch out around
the grid with the tip of your forceps, grab the grid and insert into the microscope.
 All Glass Nebulizer
Believe me....the sections will still be there at the end!
An all glass unit for the simple production of microdroplets. An object is held
vertically in front of the nebulizer outlet and by squeez-ing the atomizer a
I found that as long as the sections cover a substantial portion of the open area of
fine spray is created. The nebulizer set comes with an All Glass Nebulizer
the grid, carbon coating was not essential. I used to do 50-100 grids worth of
serial sections without loosing any. The films on the plastic slides would hold for bulb and Atomizer.
months so I could make a lot and store until needed.

Previously Published in: Sherman, D.M. (1998) A Full-proof Method for Mounting Serial
Sections on Single Hole Grids. MSA Technologist’s Forum Newsletter 16:2

 Plexiglas Microscope Slides

A Fool-Proof method for the mounting of serial sections
on Single Hole Grids 1
70505-01 Nebulizer Set set
These plexiglass slides are 3x1”(75-25mm) and 1 mm thick. They 70505-05 Nebulizer Set 5 sets
prevent wrinkling and section loss while mounting sections on the grid 70506-01 Nebulizer Only each
70506-05 Nebulizer Only 5/pk
The procedure is simple
60804 Atomizer each
71891-10 Plexiglass Microscope Slides 5/pk

146 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec04_134-150_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 2:16 AM Page 147

Grids, Grid Storage Boxes, & Related Supplies SECTION 4

GRID PREPARATION SUPPLIES AND ACCESSORIES

 Perfect Loop
Using this PERFECT LOOP, you can place
your thin sections, cut on the ultramicrotome,
easily on the grid mesh without creases.
The Perfect Loop allows you to pick up sections consistently without causing any
damage to the sections. It is the only loop that is currently available where the 1. Center the LOOP above 2. Slowly lower the LOOP over the
the sections sections and touch the water.
outside diameter of the loop is the same as the grid and the inside diameter is
slightly larger than the observation area of the electron microscope. The
thickness is about 40 microns. Due to the fact that the loop and the grid are of
the same diameter they are attracted to one another when in water and attach
together through the surface tension of the water. Even if the section touches the
inside of the grid during blotting the touching area is minor and, therefore, the
section is not damaged. When the grid is removed from the loop the section
remains in place without fail. The area equals the observation field (about 2mm 3. Gently lift up the LOOP with the 4. Lower the LOOP onto a grid
diameter) of the electron microscope; thus pieces can be fully observed. sections in a droplet of water and lift up again.

 Perfect Loop for Ultra thin sections

70944 Set of Handle & Loop set
70945 Loop only each 5. The grid holds to the LOOP by 6. Lower the LOOP to the filter
70946 Loop only 5/each surface tension. paper to remove water.
70948 Handle only each

 Perfect Loop for Light Microscopy (large sections)

The outside diameter of the loop is 7mm.
70940 LM Set of Handle & Loop set
70941 LM Loop only each
70942 LM Loop only 5/each 7. For coated grids, touch with 8. Separate the grid from the
70943 LM Loop Handle each filter paper to remove water. LOOP with an eyelash.

 Grid-Stick Kit
A helpful device for multi grid staining. If the instructions are followed carefully you can say
good-bye to precipitate and dirt. The Grid Stick is made from a thin, but rigid alloy that does
not react with commonly used organic solvents or stains. The stick itself measures 4mm
wide, 75mm long and has a slot along its center with small undercut notches on one side to
make grid removal simple. A small area on the top of each stick is reserved for identification.
The Grid Stick is coated with a specially-formulated pressure-sensitive adhesive. This
adhesive is resistant to solvents used in conventional staining methods (e.g., water, alcohol,
ethanol) and aggressively holds the grids in place during staining, emulsion coating, carbon
coating, shadow casting, serial section collection, etc., yet will not remain on the grid once
it is removed from the stick. During staining the grids are held in the same plane as the
solution flow, minimizing the risk of breaking the formvar film and, or collecting surface
debris. Grids may be stored, handled, and examined with minimal effort. For example, if
your grids are on SynapTek Grid Sticks you can simply place the stick on the stage of a
phase microscope, identify the material (you will see outlines of large cells), and determine
its condition (i.e., holes in material, dirt on grids) in only a few seconds without disturbing a
single grid. In short, you will find that the SynapTek Grid Stick is simple, easy to use, and
most importantly, highly reliable.
71175 Grid-Stick Kit each
SynapTek Grid-Stick consists of:
 5 coated Grid Sticks  10 Staining Pipettes (modified) Replacement Components:
 2 flow-limiting Plugs and Bulbs  Instructions 71176 Grid-Stick, uncoated 10/pk
71177 Staining Pipettes with 2 plugs 20/pk
71178 Grid-Stick Glue (For recoating GridStick) 5ml

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 147
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec04_134-150_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 2:16 AM Page 148

SECTION 4 Grids, Grid Storage Boxes, & Related Supplies

GRID PREPARATION SUPPLIES AND ACCESSORIES
 Hot Pen – Wax Pen; A Tool for Separating Sections or Cauterizing
Powered by AA batteries. This pen helps to flatten and separate tissue sections and reduces compression in
thin sections. Available in two models: Wax Pen 1 is powered by one AA battery; Wax Pen 2 is powered by two
AA batteries. Both pens are using the same tip. Replacement tip (Cat. #72679-RT) is a straight one.
72678
Replacement tip (Cat. #72679-03) is a set of three different configurations: Straight, Hook, and ‘U’ Shaped Tips.
Cat # Description Length with Tip w/o Cap w/Cap Diameter Pack
72678 Wax Pen 1 (A) 61⁄2" 63⁄4" 3
⁄4", 18mm each
72679 Wax Pen 2 (B) 81⁄4" 83⁄4" 3
⁄4", 18mm each
72679-RT Replacement Tip each
72679-03 Replacement Tips Set of Three Variable Tips
72679

 Grid Coating Pen For TEM; Coat Quick “G”

The Coat-Quick “G” pen improves the adherance of tissue sections onto the grids. With a touch of the pen to the grid,
a thin layer of coating is applied to the grid. Drying takes place in approximately 1-2 minutes at room temperature.
After it has dried the grid is ready for tissue mounting. The pen is also used in pretreating grids prior to mounting
supporting films such as formvar and carbon; it minimizes dislodging, widening, or breaking of the support film.
70624 Grid Coating Pen each

 Micro-Test Staining Dish

This staining dish is made from clear glass and has 10 cells in 2 rows of 5 each. Each cell is 2mm deep and
holds 0.15ml of solution. Very useful in specimen preparation, EM staining, and Boerner-Jones-Lukens
microfluocculation test. Measurements: 108 X 57mm (41⁄4” x 21⁄4”).
71564 Micro-Test/Staining Dish each

 3-Well Glass Slide – Micro Spot Plate

Pyrex brand Micro Spot Plate is ideal for microchemical applications. With three concave depressions. Cavities
measure 7⁄8" O.D. x 1⁄4" Deep (22 x 7mm). Plate overall measures 33⁄8"(L) x13⁄8"(W) (85 x 34mm)
Catalog # Pack
71561-01 3-Well Slide each
71561-06 3-Well Slide 6/pk

 White Porcelain Plate

12 cavities on a white porcelain plate. Used for staining and color reactions.
They measure: 45⁄8"(L)x31⁄2"(W) (118x90mm). Cavity depth: 1⁄4" (6.4mm).
71562-01 White Porcelain Plate each
71562-06 White Porcelain Plate 6/pk

 Glazed Porcelain Plate

Our economical glazed porcelain plate is made from high purity raw material, uniform in quality and resistant to acids and
alkalis. It can withstand sudden temperature changes without cracks, explosion or deformation. Under normal conditions,
the glazed plate can sustain a temperature of up to 1050˚ C. Available in two models: 1. 6 well with overall
measurements of 31⁄4"(L) x 21⁄8"(W) x 3⁄8" thick, and 2. 12 wells with overall measurements of 41⁄2" (L) x 31⁄2" (W) x 1⁄2" thick.
Cat. # Description Well Measures Pack
71575-06 6-Well 20mm Dia x 5mm Deep each
71575-12 12-Well 20mm Dia x 5mm Deep each

 12 Cavities Spot Plate, Polypropylene

Very similar to the white porcelain plate, this PP plate comprises 12 cavities of approximately 1ml capacity and
is economically priced. This plate is very high quality, unbreakable as well as autoclavable.
71572-01 12-cavities Spot Plate, Polypropylene each
71572-10 12-cavities Spot Plate, Polypropylene 10/cs

148 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec04_134-150_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 2:16 AM Page 149

Grids, Grid Storage Boxes, & Related Supplies SECTION 4

GRID PREPARATION SUPPLIES AND ACCESSORIES

 3-Cavities Spot Plates, LDPE
These spot plates have three depressions 21mm diameter x 7mm deep. The tray is 28mm x 85mm. Made
from low density polyethylene and will withstand temperatures up to 80˚ C.
71574-05 3-cavities Spot Plate, Polypropylene 5/pk
71574-40 3-cavities Spot Plate, Polypropylene 40/cs

 Pyrex® Plate
A 9 cavity Pyrex pressed plate which offers a clear view for observation by transmitted light. The plate measures:
4"(L)x33⁄8"(W) (100x85mm). The cavity is 1⁄4" (6.4mm) deep with a 7⁄8" (22mm) opening.
71563-01 Pyrex Plate each
71563-06 Pyrex Plate 6/pk

 Silicone Staining Pad

Made from white silicone, a non-reactive material. Pad has 40 cells in 5 rows of 8
each. Each cell is half-sphere shaped with an opening of 6mm dia. and 5mm deep.
A few drops of staining solution is added to the wells and grids are then immersed
and retrieved as per staining procedure. A watch-glass plate comes with each dish to reduce oxygen and
evaporation. Measures: 5"(L)x3"(W)x 1⁄2"(T) (127x76x13mm)
71565 Silicone Staining Pad each

 Syracuse Watch Glass

A clear watch glass which measures 65mm(OD)x50mm(ID)x 10mm(Deep). The glass is grooved and has a
recessed bottom which allows for stacking and prevents scratching. It is ideal for staining and specimen
preparation.
71570-01 Syracuse Watch Glass each
71570-06 Syracuse Watch Glass 6/pk

 The EMS Staining Plate

The EMS Staining plate for Electron Microscopy was each well. The wells allow
developed by Dr. Miguel Berrios, at SUNY at Stony incubation of a grid in 12-
Brook, Dept of Pharmacological Sciences, School of 60 microliters of solution
Medicine, New York. without reagent loss due to adsorption or cross
The chemical etching process, antibody incubations contamination, even when the plate is tilted up at
and final staining with heavy metal salts of each grid 70°. Due to the shape of the well, the flat surface of
is performed in the small cone-shaped wells on the the grids never come into contact with the walls of
EMS staining plate. the well, both facilitating sample staining and grid
The EMS Staining Plate for electron microscopy post- recovery.
embedding staining and immunohistochemistry offers
several advantages over all other commercially Plates made from silicone offer  For a complete line
available staining devices. The base plate is a solid two advantages: of Staining Dishes
piece of chemical-resistant silicone 127.5mm long,  Resistant to all chemicals and solvents and Jars,
85.5mm wide, 11.5mm thick with 96 cone-shaped  During manipulation of the grids in the well there See Histology section,
wells organized (like the microtitration plate) in is no risk of damaging the fine points of the
parallel rows of eight, using the lid of a 96-well tweezer. pages 518–526 
Falcon 3072 Microtest™ III Plate as a cover. The Reference: Berrios, Miguel; (1991), A Staining Plate
base has two notches to serve for orientation and a For Electron Microscopy. 48: 90-92.
1.5mm X 4.4mm deep lip where the cover rests.
71568 EMS Staining Plate each
Each well is an inverted cone 7mm in diameter and
2mm deep. Grids either float or rest at the bottom of

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 149
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec04_134-150_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 2:16 AM Page 150

SECTION 4 Grids, Grid Storage Boxes, & Related Supplies

GRID PREPARATION SUPPLIES AND ACCESSORIES
 Vacuum
Pick-Up
System
Handle delicate miniature
objects without scratching,
breaking or pinching. The
system avoids
contamination of parts and
performs functions that
tweezers does such as
sorting, picking up,
holding, carrying, and
trans-ferring. As well it is
an alter-native way for
handling cover slips
without the use of forceps.

Features:  Pen Vac™

 Picks up grids faster and easier than  Good suction (produces 14" Hg Pen-Vac™ is a new improved way to handle small, flat
tweezers – vacuum and an air flow of 125 cubic surface objects. Beside the electronics assembly industry,
WARNING: Never use this device on inches/minute); Can pick up jewelers, model builders etc. Pen-Vac is ideal for EM work
coated grids. aluminum stubs. as well. It can be used to handle grids, pick up stubs, align
 Can be used as a tool to pick up membranes, work with glass slides, cover slips and much
 Quiet operation.
glass slides, cover slips, wafers, thin more. Holds up to one minute.
 Eliminates all tweezer damage
to grids. film samples, etc.
Features:
 Lifts up to 50 grams.
Double-insulated (115–120V, 60Hz, 2-wire). Light weight, completely assembled and  Totally self-contained vacuum.
ready for immediate operation as soon as the proper tip is selected and installed.
 Light-weight, less than one ounce.
Vacuum is created at the tip by placing the finger over the control hole on the anodized
aluminum vacuum pen. To break the vacuum, just remove your finger from the hole. The  Fits in your pocket like a pen.
vacuum generator measures 41⁄2" (H) x 23⁄4" diameter (114 x 70mm), and it has an  Brushed aluminum body.
adjustable vacuum pressure control from 1" Hg to 15" Hg.  Optional storage compartment for vacuum tips and
cups.
 No power supply needed.
Vacuum Pick-up System complete set: Vacuum Generator, Aluminum Vacuum Pen,
 Available in various sizes.
Five Vacuum Tips, Set of eight Rubber Vacuum Cups (size ranging: 5⁄8", 9⁄16", 1⁄2", 7⁄16", 3⁄8",
5
⁄16", 1⁄4" and 3⁄16"), an In-Line Filter, and 4 ft (122cm) of Vacuum Tubing.  Interchangeable vacuum probes.
Cat. # Description Pen-Vac™ comes with:
71894 Vacuum Pick-Up System, 115V/60Hz each  A variety of Vacuum Probes, complete with a vacuum
71895 Vacuum Pick-Up System, 220V/60Hz each cup attached and it is available with plastic or alu-
71896 Vacuum Generator only, 115V/60Hz each minum hubs. Straight and angled to suit your applica-
71897 Vacuum Generator only, 220V/60Hz each tions. The stainless steel needle portion of the probes
71894-01 Vacuum Pick-Up Pen only each are one-half inch long.
71904-02 In-line Vacuum Filter each
 Vacuum Cups come in a wide range of materials. We
offer the Static Dissipative and the Conductive Cups
Replacement Stainless Steel Probe Tips (1.5" Long) and Rubber Suction Cups: that provide ESD protection for electrostatic discharge
O.D. I.D. of sensitive components. Cups comes in three sizes:
Cat. # Description (in) (mm) (in) (mm) 1
⁄8" (3.17mm); 1⁄4" (6.35mm); and 3⁄8" (9.52mm).
71898 15 gauge Probe Tip .071 1.8 .052 1.3
Set consists of:
71899 16 gauge Probe Tip .065 1.7 .045 1.1
71900 21 gauge Probe Tip .032 0.8 .020 0.5 One Pen with 6 Probes and Cups. (6 Probes: 3 angled, 1⁄8”, 1⁄4”,
71901 22 gauge Probe Tip .028 0.7 .016 0.4 3
⁄8” and 3 straight 1⁄8”, 1⁄4”, 3⁄8”)
71902 23 gauge Probe Tip .025 0.6 .013 0.3
71914 Complete Pen-Vac System set
71903 9
⁄16" (14.27mm) Vacuum Suction Cup each
71915 Same as 71914 with Deluxe Case set
71904 7
⁄16" (11.12mm) Vacuum Suction Cup each
71905 3
⁄8" (9.53mm) Vacuum Suction Cup each Probes and Cups:
71906 5
⁄16" (7.94mm) Vacuum Suction Cup each 71916 1
⁄8” Straight and Bent, Small 2/pk
71907 1
⁄4" (6.35mm) Vacuum Suction Cup each 71917 1
⁄4” Straight and Bent, Medium 2/pk
71908 3
⁄16" (4.76mm) Vacuum Suction Cup each 71918 3
⁄8” Straight and Bent, Large 2/pk
71909 Set of 8 Rubber Cups (5⁄8", 9⁄16", 1⁄2", 7⁄16", 3⁄8", 5⁄16", 1⁄4", and 3⁄16") 8/set

150 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec05_151_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 2:47 AM Page 151

SECTION 5

Silicon Nitride Mesh

& Films
DuraSiN™ Film and Mesh for TEM
DuraSiN™ Customization
Pyrolytic Graphite

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 151
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec05_152-158_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 2:20 AM Page 152

SECTION 5 Silicon Nitride Mesh & Films

® DuraSiN™ Film and Mesh for TEM

DuraSiN™ Film and Mesh products T Designed to aid microscopists and micro- T Robust to glow discharge high energy plas-
have revolutionized the way samples analysts in TEM and multi-analysis work ma cleaning
are prepared for and analyzed in the T Fully customizable frame & window dimen- T Robust to solvents, bases, acids & high
transmission electron microscope. sions, hole patterns and membrane thickness temperatures (up to 1000 °C)
T Affordable T Large viewing area free of grid bars
Applications T Ultra-flat T Compatible with integrated functionality
Quantitative Analysis of
Carbon-Containing Specimens Introduction
• Photoresists
DuraSiN™ Film and Mesh products are affordably-priced, durable, nonorganic, low scatter support
• Polymers
• Foods grids for quantitative TEM and X-ray analysis. DuraSiN™ products are made of a thin, high quality, low-
• Oils stress silicon nitride membrane supported around its perimeter by a rigid silicon substrate.
• Dyes Unlike other support films and grids, DuraSiN™ Film and Mesh products can withstand harsh chemical
and temperature environments. For example, DuraSiN™ Film or Mesh products could be used as a
Particle Analysis
• Powders substrate onto which nanowires could be directly grown from a strong acidic solution. Once the
• Aerosols nanowires are grown, the specimen is immediately ready for imaging and analysis in the TEM. With
• Nanoparticles direct deposition, no longer will you have to prepare a sample on one substrate only to then have to
• Airborne particles transfer it to a support grid for imaging.

Chemical Reactions
Overview
• Catalysis DuraSiN™ Film and Mesh products are affordably-priced, durable, non-organic, low scatter support
• Active sites grids for quantitative TEM and X-ray analysis. When seeking the highest possible resolution, DuraSiN™
Film and Mesh products provide the ideal platform for imaging and analysis.
Chemical Deposition and Growth
• Nanowires DuraSiN™ Film
• Carbon Nanotubes
• Colloids The DuraSiN™ Film support grids are composed of two
• Self-assembled monolayers materials. The area for specimen observation is fabricated
from chemically robust, low-stress, planar silicon nitride
New Material Discovery films and this area is supported by a rigid silicon frame
• Multianalysis where the frame thickness available for these products
• High Temperature ranges from 200 - 600 microns. The DuraSiN™ Film
• Acidic/Basic Sample Prep support grids provide a cost-effective and durable SEM image of a DuraSiN™ Film
platform for sample preparation, cleaning, imaging and (taken from the back side)
analysis.
Perfect for the analysis of colloids, powders, aerosols and polymers. The DuraSiN™ Film provides
durable, non-organic, low scatter substrates for quantitative TEM and X-ray analysis at affordable
prices. DuraSiN™ Film substrates are fabricated from high quality, low-stress silicon nitride and
supported on a rigid silicon substrate. DuraSiN™ Film products are robust to most cleaning procedures,
including acetone, alcohol and oxygen plasma/UV ozone. Products are available in sizes ranging from
standard TEM (2.65mm diameter) to greater than 10mm for x-ray applications.

SEMICONDUCTORS MEDICAL SCIENCE DuraSiN™ Mesh

DuraSiN™ Mesh support grids are also fabricated from
chemically robust, low-stress, planar silicon nitride films and
are supported by a rigid silicon frame. However, DuraSiN™
Mesh has a regular array of small, dense holes fabricated
across the observation area thereby providing truly
electronbeam transparent regions for specimen imaging and
analysis. DuraSiN™ Mesh support substrates offer the unique
combination of an inorganic support film and regions SEM image of a DuraSiN™ Mesh
completely transparent to an electron beam. (taken from the back side)
CHEMISTRY NEW MATERIALS These two features provide the microscopist and micro-analyst with unparalleled capability for imaging
and analysis. Like other holey or lacey support films, DuraSiN™ Mesh support substrates provide
regions completely unobstructed by the support film. However, the fact that the DuraSiN™ Mesh is
made from inorganic silicon nitride provides the ability to thoroughly clean (e.g. with an aggressive
oxygen plasma) a specimen already fixed to the support substrate and to assure that the imaging and
analysis is done only upon on the specimen rather than unintended contamination. For example, when
analyzing carbon nanotubes, DuraSiN™ provides a clean, carbon-free support to isolate the specimen
from carbon contamination.

152 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec05_152-158_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 2:20 AM Page 153

Silicon Nitride Mesh & Films SECTION 5

® DuraSiN™ Film and Mesh for TEM (continued) Top 10 Reasons

to Use DuraSiN™ Film
Features & Advantages and Mesh Products
DuraSiN™ Films and Mesh products are
chemically and mechanically robust support films 1. DuraSiN™ products are affordable
for X-ray and TEM microscopy and they are Since they are sold in sold in single grid
available at more affordable prices than any other quantities and in multi-grid packs, customers
product in their class. DuraSiN™ offers can try several different products at an
unparalleled advantages over the traditional affordable cost to optimize sample
preparation and imaging conditions
carbon-based support grids. If your research
involves materials that are grown or deposited in 2. DuraSiN™ products allow multiple
harsh environments, DuraSiN™ may be the microscopy techniques to be performed on
the same specimen
perfect support film for you. Capable of
The mechanical stability of DuraSiN™
withstanding virtually any acid, base or solvent, products allow direct deposition and growth
DuraSiN™ allows the deposition or growth of of specimens and are strong enough to allow
colloids, fibers, nanoparticles, powders, polymers AFM directly on the membrane giving
or wires directly onto the support film itself. Its microscopists the ability to analyze both
temperature stability up to 1000 ˚C even allows internal structure and surface detail in the
direct deposition using standard physical and exact same viewing area
vapor deposition techniques common in the Nanowire STEM image on DuraSIN™ Mesh 3. DuraSiN™ products are robust to solvents,
semiconductor industry, including CVD, at 35,000x. Image courtesy of Mike Salmon, bases and acids
sputtering, e-beam and resistive evaporation. NCSU AIF Samples grown under strong acidic or basic
With direct deposition or growth onto DuraSiN™, conditions can be grown, deposited or
any ambiguity introduced from sample transfer to synthesized directly onto a DuraSiN™ Film or
a less robust support film is eliminated. The Mesh
temperature stability of DuraSiN™ also allows the 4. DuraSiN™ products can withstand high
observation of dynamic processes when several temperatures (up to 1000°C)
samples are removed for analysis at various Samples grown or deposited directly onto
times in the deposition, growth or anneal DuraSiN™ can be annealed or cured at
process. elevated temperatures while mounted to a
support grid
The mechanical stability of DuraSiN™ offers a 5. DuraSiN™ products are robust to glow
support film that is ideal for multi-analysis, in discharge high energy plasma cleaning
particular, TEM or X-ray and AFM. DuraSiN™ Film Glow discharge can be used to modify the
and Mesh products are not only robust enough to surface of DuraSiN™ products and high
allow direct deposition and growth, but are also Nanowire STEM image on DuraSIN™ Mesh energy plasmas can be used to aggressively
strong enough to allow AFM directly on the at 1,000,000x. Image courtesy of Mike Salmon, remove any organic residuals from the
NCSU AIF sample preparation process
membrane, giving microscopists the ability to
analyze both internal structure and surface detail 6. DuraSiN™ has an ultra-flat surface
in the exact same viewing area. In addition, DuraSiN™ is available in both continuous films Reduce both specimen preparation time and
and patterned meshes, in a variety of shapes and imaging artifacts introduced by other non-
DuraSiN™’s mechanical strength offers wide area
planar support grids
membranes without the need for underlying grid sizes, many customizable. DuraSiN™ Mesh is the
only support available with hole sizes down to 1 7. DuraSiN™ provides a large viewing area
bars eliminating the unwanted roughness,
free of grid bars
contamination or obstruction of other support micron in diameter, allowing the observation of
Examine specimens through large tilt angles
grids. the shortest fibers or wires. It is the highest without losing data from grid bars
quality, most affordable product in its class.
Where cleanliness is a concern, particularly for 8. DuraSiN™ can be produced with extended
compositional analysis using EDAX, etc., functionality integrated onto the support film
DuraSiN™ can be vigorously cleaned using In-situ characterization is possible with advanced
features such as integrated electrodes
processes previously not possible with carbon-
based supports. DuraSiN™ can be cleaned in 9. DuraSiN™ Mesh products provide a regular
sulfuric acid to remove organics, as well as glow- array of micron-scale holes
The regular array of micron-scale holes
discharge and high-energy oxygen plasma. Using
available only with DuraSiN™ Mesh enables the
these techniques, a pristine, carbon-free surface highest resolution possible for nanowires,
can be obtained for subsequent specimen carbon nanotubes, fibers, powders and colloids
deposition or growth and analysis.
10. DuraSiN™ can be manufactured with fully
customizable frame & window dimensions,
hole patterns and membrane thickness
The DuraSiN™ product family offers the
maximum flexibility to meet specific customer
needs

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 153
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec05_152-158_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 2:20 AM Page 154

SECTION 5 Silicon Nitride Mesh & Films

Applications ® DuraSiN™ Film and Mesh for TEM (continued)
DuraSiN™ Film and Mesh products
are robust over extreme DuraSiN™ Film specimens when combining microscopy
temperatures and in harsh chemical techniques. A specimen can be deposited or
environments making them an grown directly on DuraSiN™ Films and then a
ideal choice for many applications single specimen can be analyzed with TEM,
STEM, AFM and X-ray. Depending upon the
NEW – Tissue Culture DuraSiN™ window thickness and AFM stylus
-- DuraSiN is compatible with standard tissue force, some users have even been able to AFM
culture techniques, sterilization procedures, their specimen directly on the membrane itself.
and surface modification chemistries.
NEW – Solid State Nanopores Product Line
-- DuraSiN film products are ideal substrates DuraSiN™ Film products are specifically designed Based upon low-Z, inert silicon nitride, the
for molecule translocation studies using to give TEM/STEM and X-ray microscopists a DuraSiN™ Film and Mesh products are specifically
solid state nanopores. Through various support film that can withstand virtually any designed to give TEM/STEM and X-ray
methods, nanopores can be applied to the environment needed to grow or deposit a microscopists a support film that can withstand
30 or 50 nm silicon nitride film for the specimen. If your specimen requires exposure to virtually any environment needed to grow, deposit
quantitative analysis of DNA and other high temperatures, acids, bases and/or solvents, and/or image a specimen. DuraSiN™ Film and
macromolecules. consider growing them directly on DuraSiN™ Film Mesh products are ideal if your specimen
Quantitative Analysis of Carbon - samples will not need to be transferred to requires exposure to high temperatures, acids,
Containing Specimens another support for imaging and the presence of bases and/or solvents. If your samples are grown
-- DuraSiN™ Film and Mesh provide a carbon- imaging artifacts introduced by specimen in these conditions, consider synthesizing them
free support allowing more accurate preparation can be virtually eliminated. Self- directly on support films to prevent transferring to
compositional analysis of carbon-containing assembled monolayers can be formed on a another support for imaging.
compounds DuraSiN™ Film membrane for subsequent
attachment of nanoparticles. DuraSiN™ Film products are fully specified by 4
-- The continuous, ultra-planar surface of parameters: window size, frame thickness, film
DuraSiN™ Film is ideal for the deposition of Perfect for the analysis of colloids, powders, thickness and frame size. DuraSiN™ Mesh
polymers allowing the nanostructure of aerosols and polymers. The DuraSiN™ Film products require two additional parameters: hole
ordered polymer layers to be quantified products provide a durable, non-organic, low size and center-center hole pitch. There are
scatter substrate for TEM and X-ray analysis at several standard and immediately available
Chemical Deposition and Growth
affordable prices. Sandwich them together and DuraSiN™ products specifically designed for TEM
-- Surface modification of DuraSiN™ Film or form a closed environment for wet cell
Mesh silicon nitride membranes allows and X-ray applications as outlined below. Of
applications. Our films are even robust enough to course given their mechanical durability and
attachment and analysis of target materials allow multianalysis, including AFM and TEM using robustness to temperature and chemicals, all of
-- Liquid samples can be dried on and the same grid. the DuraSiN™ products make ideal substrates for
supported by DuraSiN™ Film
DuraSiN™ Mesh performing and then correlating the results from
-- The large, regular array of holes for imaging multiple microscopy techniques all on the same
on DuraSiN™ Mesh provides numerous specimen.
electron-transparent analysis sites
Nanoparticle Analysis DuraSiN™ Film for TEM
-- Fine powders can be deposited and Description DTF-05523 DTF-1523 DTF-2523
imaged over the electron-transparent holes Film Thickness 50nm 100nm 200nm
of DuraSiN™ Mesh Window Area 0.5mm 0.5mm 0.5mm
Frame Diameter 2.65mm 2.65mm 2.65mm
-- Atomized nanoparticles can be deposited
Frame Thickness 300μm 300μm 300μm
and imaged at near-atomic resolution on
continuous DuraSiN™ Film DuraSiN™ Mesh products are a completely novel DuraSiN™ Film for X-ray
Chemical Reactions product, offering all the advantages of the Film Description DX-2513
-- The impact of particle size & separation products but with the benefit of having Film Thickness 200nm
completely electron transparent regions (holes) in Window Area 2.5mm
can be quantified with DuraSiN™
the film. Holes are available in a variety of Frame Diameter 5mm
-- Oxidation and reduction reactions can be shapes and sizes, down to even submicron Frame Thickness 300μm
observed in-situ or ex-situ with DuraSiN™ features. DuraSiN™ Mesh for TEM
Film and Mesh
DuraSiN™ support films are ideal for Description DTM-25231
New Material Discovery multianalysis of samples, including fibers, Film Thickness 200nm
-- Multiple analysis techniques (e.g. TEM, colloids, nanowires and powders. The rigid Window Area 0.5mm
STEM, XRAY, SEM, XPS, AES and AFM) Frame Diameter 2.65mm
silicon frame provides an area for AFM analysis,
can all be performed on the same Frame Thickness 300μm
just microns from the transparent window Hole Size 2μm
specimen when it is supported by regions for TEM,STEM and X-ray. Remove the Hole Pitch 12μm
DuraSiN™ Film or Mesh experimental ambiguity of analyzing different

154 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec05_152-158_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 2:20 AM Page 155

Silicon Nitride Mesh & Films SECTION 5

® DuraSiN™ Film and Mesh for TEM (continued)

Customization Product Comparisons

We realize that each customer has unique needs. Because specimens vary DuraSiN™ vs. copper, molybdenum, formvar and carbon TEM grids
greatly in composition and size, and because DuraSiN™ finds use in DuraSiN™ silicon nitride membranes are the “high-tech” alternative to standard
numerous analytical and imaging techniques, there is no “ideal” product metal TEM grids. Using the tools and techniques of semiconductor manufacturing,
shape and size. To meet the diverse and demanding needs of the research DuraSiN™ is created as a silicon nitride membrane supported by a silicon frame.
community, DuraSiN™ Film and Mesh products were designed to facilitate Samples deposited on to the membrane can be imaged using TEM, X-ray, STEM,
customization and meet a user’s specific requirements. For example, X-ray SEM and other techniques. Compared to standard TEM grids, DuraSiN™ offers the
microscopists may be interested in DuraSiN™ products with a larger window user several advantages. DuraSiN™ membranes are extremely thin – from 200nm
area and with a thicker silicon nitride membrane. Users with microscopes down to 50nm and thinner. DuraSiN™ products are extremely planar. DuraSiN™
that have a unique sample support fixturing may be interested in DuraSiN™ products are resistant to acids, bases, solvents, and plasma cleaning.
products with a larger frame diameter. Finally, for the most demanding
DuraSiN™ products can withstand a wide temperature range. These
applications, ultra-thin silicon nitride membranes (<50nm) may be required.
attributes are critical in a variety of applications. The planarity and strength
DuraSiN™ products can be customized to target a specific silicon nitride of the silicon nitride membrane allows the user to perform multi-analysis (i.e.
membrane thickness, silicon frame thickness, window area, and/or frame the use of several complementary microscopy and analytical techniques on
area. Most custom dimensional changes can be accommodated in only 3- the same sample, for example AFM/TEM or SEM/ TEM). DuraSiNTM silicon
4 weeks, and most other custom requests can be completed within 4-6 nitride membranes also allow imaging of wet samples via SEM/TEM/XRM by
weeks. Please note that customized products may be more expensive, and placing the sample between two membranes (this configuration is commonly
minimum quantities may apply. known as a “wet cell”). Since silicon nitride can withstand acids, bases,
While almost any parameter defining the structure of DuraSiN™ products solvents and high temperatures, DuraSiN™ membrane supports can be used
can be customized, there are ranges for these parameters that generally to image a wide variety of reactions on the membrane surface in-situ. In
need to be considered: short, DuraSiN™ allows the user to obtain high-quality images in ways that
are impossible with standard TEM grids.
Description DuraSiN™ DuraSiN™ DuraSiN™
Film for TEM Mesh for TEM Film for X-ray DuraSiN™ vs. competing silicon nitride TEM grids
Film Thickness 30nm - 200nm 30nm - 200nm 100nm - 200nm DuraSiN™ silicon nitride membranes have properties similar to competing
Window Area 0.2mm - 0.7mm 0.2mm - 0.7mm 0.5mm - 10mm silicon nitride sample supports. They are offered in standard form factors,
Frame Diameter 2.65mm 2.65mm 2.65mm - 15mm are based on low-stress silicon nitride membrane technology, and have
Frame Thickness 200μm - 600μm 200μm - 600μm 200μm - 600μm
similar chemical resistance/temperature properties. DuraSiN™, however,
Hole Size N/A >0.8μm N/A
Hole Pitch N/A depends on hole N/A
offers customers two key differences.
size and shape DuraSiN™ is available through EMS in quantities as small as a single grid – this
enables users to sample a variety of grids at reasonable cost without the
Membrane Thickness constraint of large minimum orders. More importantly, the availability of
Standard DuraSiN™ products are available with 50nm, 100nm, and 200nm singlegrid packs allows customers to quickly and inexpensively determine which
silicon nitride membrane thickness. Custom membranes can be product is ideal for their particular application.
manufactured with silicon nitride film thickness ranging from 20nm up to DuraSiN™ products also offer the customer the highest level of
several microns thick. Typically, very thin windows (<50nm) are compatible customization. Frame size, window size, and nitride thickness can all be
with small window area while thicker windows can be used with any window adjusted to meet specific research needs using a set of proprietary
area, including large area windows. It should be noted that extremely thin manufacturing techniques. Moreover, since DuraSiN™ is designed and
windows must be handled very carefully due to their fragile nature. manufactured in the United States, we can provide customization of all
Window Area products faster than the competition, whose products are manufactured
Standard DuraSiN™ products have square windows are available with edge elsewhere. This flexibility and rapid response makes DuraSiN™ the ideal
length ranging from 500um to 5mm. Custom window areas can be choice for silicon nitride membrane supports.
manufactured with window area ranging from um to mm. The maximum
DuraSiN ™
Formvar/
window area is a function of the membrane thickness, and larger windows Silicon Nitride Copper Molybdenum Carbon Coated
can produced from thicker nitride. Very small windows can also be Property Support Films TEM Grids TEM Grids TEM Grids
manufactured, but, due to process constraints, these small windows may Enables AFM and TEM on
the same region of specimen    
exhibit a larger window size variation among samples, for example 50um Robust to glow discharge &
+/- 20um. Rectangular windows (sometimes known as “slot grids”) with high energy plasma cleaning    
custom dimensions can also be produced. Robust to solvents, bases
and acids    
Robust to high temperatures
Frame Diameter (up to 1000 ˚C)    
Standard DuraSiN products have frame diameter ranging from 2.65mm
™ Ultra-flat    
to 10mm. Custom frame diameters can be manufactured with frame Capable of integrated
functionality directly on    
diameter ranging from 2.65mm to 10mm. Typically, larger window areas support film
require a larger frame diameter. The minimum frame diameter than can be Sold in single grid quantities    
Fully customizable frame
produced is the TEM size (2.65mm), presently offered through EMS along and window dimension,
with 5mm and 10mm frame sizes. However, any size between 2.65mm hole patterns and    
membrane thickness
and 15mm can be custom ordered.

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 155
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec05_152-158_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 2:20 AM Page 156

SECTION 5 Silicon Nitride Mesh & Films

® DuraSiN™ Film and Mesh for TEM (continued)

Technical Data
Surface Roughness
Surface roughness AFM data for 100nm thick DuraSiN™ films is shown
below. The data was acquired from a 5μm scan across the surface. The
average surface roughness in the boxed area (ignoring the dust particle to
the left) is 3.39 angstroms. Although some variation is expected from
device to device, DuraSiNTM 100 and 200nm films typically have an
average surface roughness in the 3.0-angstrom range.
DuraSiN™ products with 50nm films typically have a slightly larger average
roughness than the 100nm and 200nm films. As determined by AFM, the
50nm DuraSiN™ films typically exhibit average surface roughness of about
1.2nm.

Surface Flatness
Flatness is a measure of how warped or bowed the surface is. As
measured though a 20X DI microscope objective, the images do not
demonstrate any measurable deformations. The regions around the 2-
micron holes are completely flat, without any lip or curl around the edge of
the hole allowing specimens to lay flat across the holes. The image of the
film also does not show any deformations. As a reference, the pieces of
dust viewable in the image stands out because of the difference in surface
height with respect to the film.

Solvent and Acid Robustness

DuraSiN™ Films and Meshes are robust to most solvent and acid
treatments, and can be cleaned with virtually any process required by your SURFACE ROUGHNESS DuraSiN™ (100nm thick) AFM data
specimen preparation protocol. Solvents such as methanol, ethanol and
acetone have no effect on the film. Acids, including sulfuric and nitric, also
do not affect the film. Other common cleaning procedures such as the J.T.
Baker solution and RCA cleaning are also acceptable.
Plasma and Glow Discharge Robustness
DuraSiN™ Film and Mesh products are made from silicon nitride and are
extremely robust to glow discharge cleaning and high-energy oxygen
plasma. This is particularly useful when there is a need to completely
remove organic residues that could either affect the image quality or EDAX
measurements. The products have been exposed to high-energy, 300W
oxygen plasma systems typically used for removing up to microns of
photoresist in the semiconductor industry, and no etching was observed in
spectroscopic thickness measurements. In addition, no degradation was
observed when inspected through a high-power optical microscope.
Electron Transparency
Monte Carlo simulations on models of 100nm thick DuraSiN™ films, under
the presence of a 120 and 200keV electron beam and probe size of 1 SURFACE FLATNESS DuraSiN™ Mesh image taken through
angstrom show almost zero electron scattering even after 10,000 a DI 20x objective, white light source
trajectories are simulated. With standard available thicknesses from 50nm
to 200nm and because of the amorphous structure of the film, atomic- for 30 minutes in concentrated sulfuric acid will generally remove organics
scale resolution has been obtained with DuraSiN™ products, depending on and dust particles. Sometimes a final treatment in oxygen plasma or glow
the exact specimens under evaluation. discharge is also applied.

Chemical Robustness Temperature Robustness

The only acids which might adversely affect the films are 49% hydrofluoric DuraSiN™ has been tested to temperatures near 500 ˚C in ambient, and
acid when exposed for several minutes, or phosphoric acid when heated near 800 ˚C in vacuum. No degradation, warping or bowing was observed
to temperatures greater than 150 ˚C. The need for these chemicals at using a 20X DI microscope objective. DuraSiN™ is expected to be stable at
these conditions is generally quite rare. temperatures up to 1000 ˚C, which make the grids well suited for high
temperature deposition steps.
Because the films are in the nanometer thickness range, it is also not
recommended that the grids be exposed to an ultrasonic bath. Cleaning

156 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec05_152-158_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 2:20 AM Page 157

Silicon Nitride Mesh & Films SECTION 5

® DuraSiN™ Film and Mesh for TEM (continued)

Technical Data (continued)

ELECTRON TRANSPARENCY ELECTRON TRANSPARENCY

120keV electron beam, 100nm DuraSiN™ Film 200keV electron beam, 100nm DuraSiN™ Film

Ordering Information
Available in packs of 5 and 10.
DuraSiN™ Film for TEM
Catalog Number DTF-05523 DTF-1523 DTF-2523 DTF-03523 DTF-050523 DTF-030523
Film Thickness 50nm 100nm 200nm 30nm 50nm 30nm
Window Area 0.5mm 0.5mm 0.5mm 0.5mm 0.05mm 0.05mm
Frame Diameter 2.65mm 2.65mm 2.65mm ~3mm ~3mm ~3mm
Frame Thickness 300μm 300μm 300μm 300μm 300μm 300μm

DuraSiN™ Film for X-ray DuraSiN™ Mesh for TEM

Catalog Number DX-2513 Catalog Number DTM-25231
Film Thickness 200nm Film Thickness 200nm
Window Area 2.5mm Window Area 0.5mm
Frame Diameter 5mm Frame Diameter 2.65mm
Frame Thickness 300μm Frame Thickness 300μm
Hole Size 2μm
Hole Pitch 12μm

Check out our Newest and Most Revolutionary Products...

Introducing QuantomiX Wet SEM, a technological breakthrough.
Electron Microscopy Sciences and Quantomix have joined forces here in The United States to
market and sell the breakthrough solutions of Quantomix’s proprietary WETSEM™ Technology.
This technology enables scanning electron microscopes (SEM) to image and analyze wet samples
such as cells, tissue biopsies, foods and ink, in their native environment.
For more information, see page 650-664 or visit
our website at www.emsdiasum.com

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 157
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec05_152-158_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 2:20 AM Page 158

SECTION 5 Silicon Nitride Mesh & Films

® PYROID® Pyrolytic Graphite Product Line — Vitreous Carbon Substrate

Our PYROID® pyrolytic graphite is a Physical Properties of PYROID® Pyrolytic Graphite

very light weight, 5’9’s pure, solid Property Direction* Metric Units English Units
crystal composition, with no granular Density ----- 2.22 g/cc 1.37 lb/ft3
components, extremely smooth Flexual Strength
surface, capable of withstanding Room Temperature a 840 kg/cm2 12,000 psi
cryogenic temperatures as well as 2750°C a 3,500 kg/cm2 50,000 psi
Compressive Strength
temperatures in excess of 3000°C Room Temperature a 1,050 kg/cm2 15,00 psi
The material is extremely anisotropic, c 1,750 kg/cm2 25,000 psi
meaning it conducts heat and Shear Strength
electricity in the a-b plane like cooper Room Temperature a 70 kg/cm2 1, 000psi
but acts like a ceramic in the normal Coefficient Thermal Expansion
Room Temperature a .60 x 10-6 cm/cm°C 1.0 x 10-6 in/in°F
direction. In an annealed state, the 2200°C a .68 x 10-6 cm/cm°C 1.2 x 10-6 in/in°F
thermal and conduction properties Room Temperature c 6.8 x 10-6 cm/cm°C 12.0 x 10-6 in/in°F
increase up to four to eight times that 2200°C c 8.0 x 10-6 cm/cm°C 14.7 x 10-6 in/in°F
of aluminum and cooper respectively. Thermal Conductivity
The material has zero porosity making Room Temperature a 345 W/m°K 200 BTU/(hr ft2)(°F/ft)
1650°C a 114 W/m°K 66 BTU/(hr ft2)(°F/ft)
it extremely stable and exhibits no Room Temperature c 1.73 W/m°K 1.00 BTU/(hr ft2)(°F/ft)
outgassing. It is ideal for use in 3000°F c 1.30 W/m°K 0.75 BTU/(hr ft2)(°F/ft)
corrosive environments including acids Electric Resistivity
and chlorine, and is highly transparent Room Temperature a 500 μΩcm
to organic samples and electrons, for 1650°C a 200 μΩcm
analytical work, such as x-ray Room Temperature c 0.6 Ωcm
investigation, metallurgical, crystal 1650°C c 0.22 Ωcm
growth, medical imaging technology Scleroscope Hardness a 103 103
c 68 68
etc. Oxidation Threshold 650°C 1200°F
Pyroid® is trade mark name of MINTEQ Permeability Helium Leak Tight at
10 – 6 mmHg

® Pyrolytic Graphite Stripper Film

Smooth pyrolytic graphite stripper film is used in radiation sources,
nuclear particle high energy density research, and medical diagnostic
imaging instruments
Pyrolytic graphite film offers major customer benefits relative to
alternative materials such as amorphous carbon film or polycrystalline
graphite films.

Pyrolytic graphite film is:

T Stable at high temperature and vacuum.
T Easy to flex due to inherent higher flexural modulus.
T Erodes very slowly.
Resulting in:
T Higher strength than alternative materials.
T Last 5 times longer than alternative materials.

PYROID® Pyrolytic Film

Thickness/Real Size Conversion
Thickness, in. Wt/sq in. Thickness, μm Wt/sq cm
0.0002 0.0065 g 5 1.0 mg
0.0004 0.0129 g 10 2.0 mg
Ordering:
EMS # Film Size, in. (mm) Thickness, μm Pack
76040-05 0.75 x 0.75 (19 x 19) 5 each
76040-10 0.75 x 0.75 (19 x 19) 10 each
76041-05 1.0 x 1.0 (25.4 x 25.4) 5 each
76041-10 1.0 x 1.0 (25.4 x 25.4) 10 each
We can custom make foils up to 1.5 inch wide and 3 inches long from
5μm and up thicknesses.

158 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec06_159_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 2:48 AM Page 159

SECTION 6

Calibration Standards,
Specimens, and Aids
Color Calibration System for Optical
Microscopy
Low Magnification Calibration Standards
for SEM and LM
SEM Calibration Specimens
Resolution and Gray Level Test Specimens
Back-Scattered Electron and EDS
Calibration Specimens for TEM and STEM
MAG*I*CAL®
Diffraction Standards
Measuring Aids
Tip Check and Nioprobe for SPM
Magnification References SPM, AFM, SEM
SPM Calibrator

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 159
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec06_160-163_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec06 6/30/14 2:21 AM Page 160

SECTION 6 Calibration Standards, Specimens, & Aids

 Datacolor ChromaCal™
Color Calibration System
for Optical Microscopy
A Calibration Standard for Brightfield Images
The Datacolor ChromaCal™ system is an innovative new solution that enables
researchers, scientists and technicians to establish and preserve the color
integrity of their digital transmitted, brightfield microscopy images.
Datacolor ChromaCal™ integrates three components to establish a color profile
for the microscopy system:
• Proprietary software
• Color calibration microscope slide
• Computer monitor calibration device
Together, the Datacolor ChromaCal™ system establishes a color profile for the
microscopy system and applies that profile to your specimen images to ensure
consistent and reliable color representation. The outcome is improved
comparability of images and enhanced communication and collaboration for
better decision making.
Key Features
 Standardizes color reproduction in digital brightfield images
 Delivers consistent, reliable basis for evaluation, communication, quan-
tification, documentation and publication
 Performs image and monitor calibration for consistency throughout the
imaging process
 Compatible with most microscopes, scientific cameras and acquisition
software
Datacolor ChromaCal™
easily integrates into your
See how it works... microscopy workflow.
Learn how to do it... Simply acquire your
We’ve added video content specimen images and an
to our website to help you image of the calibration
get to know our latest slide. Launch the Datacolor ChromaCal™ software, select the calibration image
products even better!
and apply the calibration to any or all of your specimen images. All original
Stop by and see what it’s images are preserved, and "ChromaCal-ibrated" images are saved separately.
all about.

Before CHROMACAL After CHROMACAL

160 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec06_160-163_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec06 6/30/14 2:22 AM Page 161

Calibration Standards, Specimens, & Aids SECTION 6

The Datacolor ChromaCal™ color calibration system for optical microscopy

provides a color profile foundation from which images can be more easily
compared and analyzed. Working with your existing microscope and imaging Align Calibration Matrix
system, the calibration system fits easily into the imaging workflow - simply
acquire an image of the calibration slide (required, and available separately)
and using the proprietary software, apply the calibration to your specimen
images. Your original files are preserved, and a complete audit trail is saved
in the metadata of the calibrated images. Better consistency. Higher
confidence. Color integrity for better decision making.
Includes both the image calibration software (a license to install on one
workstation) as well as the monitor calibration set (a license to install on
three workstations). Additional workstation installations can be purchased
and activated directly through the software.

Datacolor ChromaCal™
Single Calibration
Calibration Slide for
Brightfield Microscopy

The Datacolor ChromaCal™ brightfield calibration slide is a unique, Batch Calibration

precision-engineered tool that is used in conjunction with the Datacolor
ChromaCal™ brightfield microscopy calibration system and your microscope
to establish a baseline color profile that is unique to your imaging session.
The process is simple - acquire your specimen images and an image of the Applications*
calibration slide. Using the proprietary Datacolor ChromaCal™ software just
Datacolor ChromaCal™ is suitable for any specialty that utilizes
click to apply the color profile to your specimen images for a standardized
brightfield images:
approach to seeing colors.
Agriculture/Botany Histology
The Datacolor ChromaCal™ Color Calibration Slide is designed exclusively
for use with the Datacolor ChromaCal™ Color Calibration System for Optical Biology Material Science
Microscopy. Bone Metabolism Neuroscience
Cytology Pathology
Each Datacolor ChromaCal™ slide is uniquely identified and corresponds to
Dermatology Veterinary
a specific color measurement file associated with the proprietary Datacolor
ChromaCal™ chip at the center of the slide. The measurement file contains Forensics and others
information that is utilized by the Datacolor ChromaCal™ Color Calibration Hematology
System when calibrating brightfield images. *Datacolor ChromaCal™ is not intended for clinical diagnostic use in the U.S.

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 161
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec06_160-163_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec06 7/10/14 10:43 AM Page 162

SECTION 6 Calibration Standards, Specimens, & Aids

Before CHROMACAL After CHROMACAL  Datacolor ChromaCal™ (continued)
Located on the Datacolor ChromaCal™
chip are the following:
• Protective plastic slide holder
• Color calibration slide
• Color calibration slide on microscope
stage
• Alignment pattern on slide Color calibration slide on
• Small grid microscope stage
• Large grid
• One larger color matrix consisting of 20
color circles in a 4 x 5 configuration.
This matrix is generally intended for
magnifications up to 40X.
• One smaller color matrix consisting of
20 color circles in a 4 x 5 configuration.
This matrix is generally intended for
magnifications above 40X up to 100X.
Alignment pattern on slide
• Numerous location lines pointing to a
circle surrounding both color matrices.
These are meant to assist in locating the
color matrices.
• In the upper left-hand corner of the chip
there is a 4 x 4 micrometer grid
consisting of 250μ divisions. Within the
lower right-hand division is a 10 x10
sub-grid with 25μ divisions. This
micrometer grid is unrelated to the color Large grid
calibration system but is provided as an
additional value-add.
The Datacolor ChromaCal™ slide is not
suitable for use with oil immersion
objectives. The Datacolor ChromaCal™
slide should be handled with care.
The Datacolor ChromaCal™ brightfield
calibration slide is sold separately, and is
required for the Datacolor ChromaCal™
Color Calibration System. Small grid

162 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec06_160-163_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec06 6/30/14 2:22 AM Page 163

Calibration Standards, Specimens, & Aids SECTION 6

Datacolor ChromaCal™ FREQUENTLY ASKED
Monitor Calibration Set QUESTIONS
The Datacolor ChromaCal™ monitor
calibration set uses a precision color Q1. Are there any microscope
sensor to ensure a consistent and requirements or restrictions?
A1. Your microscope should be configured for
standardized color profile on any computer
transmitted light illumination of the
display. With monitor calibration, your
specimen. Datacolor CHROMACAL works
images will look the same on the display
independently from the microscope hardware
by your microscope, at an analysis
and can be used with any manufacturer’s
workstation, on your laptop, and on a
microscope system.
colleague's display whether down the hall
or across the ocean. In contrast, just look Q2. Does Datacolor CHROMACAL work with
at the variability between televisions on any camera?
display in an appliance store. A2. A scientific grade camera is recommended
for image acquisition. Most consumer-grade
Includes monitor calibration sensor, Monitor Calibration Sensor in use
cameras are intended for landscape and
software and license to install on three portrait imaging. Also, pixel sizes in a scientific
workstations. Additional workstation grade camera are optimized for microscope
installations can be purchased and level resolutions. Datacolor CHROMACAL
activated directly through the software. requires raw TIFF images for calibration.

Process Q3. Is white balancing sufficient to

standardize the color of my images?
A3. Although white balancing is a necessary step
Koehler White Capture Calibrate Communicate in calibrating color, it is not sufficient.
Alignment Balance Images Images Results
Datacolor CHROMACAL utilizes a standardized
color matrix to establish and apply a color
Good microscopy practices are essential to achieving quality images. Here are a few things to profile to white balanced images. With these
remember. These steps won't guarantee perfect images, but they reduce the number of variables to capabilities, color can be standardized
address in downstream image analysis. throughout your lab, and among your facilities.
Always be certain to clean the microscope of dust and oils as these can create artifacts and Q4. Do I have to use a calibrated display?
aberrations. A4. To achieve a consistent viewing and
Establish Koehler illumination as a matter of routine - this practice sets an illumination baseline for communication experience, it is highly
consistency and reproducibility. recommended to calibrate all of the monitors
that are used to display your specimen
Use a scientific-grade camera (CCD or CMOS), not a consumer camera, for imaging. Scientific images.
cameras are designed for sensitivity and the magnifications employed by microscopes.
Q5. Can I use Datacolor CHROMACAL on more
Always white balance the camera. Simply move to a region of the slide where no specimen is located than one microscope or monitor?
(e.g. white background) and choose white balance in the camera software, imaging software or even A5. The Datacolor CHROMACAL monitor calibration
by pressing a white balance button on the camera head itself, if present. set provides three workstation installations,
so you may want to calibrate the monitor at
System Requirements your microscope, at your analysis workstation
• Windows XP 32/64, Win 7 32/64, Win 8 • Unaltered TIFF or JPEG images acquired with and at your desk. Monitor calibration sets are
32/64 or Max OSX (10.6 or higher) scientific-grade camera also available separately, and they also
• USB Connection • For maximum workflow efficiency, internet include 3 installation licenses. The Datacolor
• Monitor resolution 1024x768 or greater connection required CHROMACAL application software can only be
• 16-bit video card (24-bit recommended) installed on one computer, and additional
• 128MB of available RAM; 100MB of available licenses are available through the software.
hard disk space The Datacolor CHROMACAL calibration slide is
highly portable and can be used on any
Ordering Information microscope.
10-1010 Datacolor ChromaCal™ Color Calibration System* each Q6. Does Datacolor CHROMACAL alter my
10-2010 Datacolor ChromaCal™ Color Calibration Slide each
original image file?
10-3010 Datacolor ChromaCal™ Monitor Calibration Set** each
A6. No, your original image file is preserved.
*System includes: All calibration adjustments are made to a
• Image calibration software (with license to install on one workstation) duplicate copy of your original image file.
• Monitor calibration software and sensor (with license to install on three workstations) This copy is saved using the naming
**Set includes:
convention "[original file name] ChromaCal-
• Monitor calibration software and sensor (with license to install on three workstations)
calibrated" added to the file name.

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 163
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec06_164-174_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec06 6/30/14 2:28 AM Page 164

SECTION 6 Calibration Standards, Specimens, & Aids

 Low Magnification Calibration  SEM Calibration Specimens
Standards Available for SEM and LM Magnification Calibration
 Silicon Test Specimen  Chessy; Test Specimen
This Test Specimen is made of a 5mmx5mm A precise SEM test specimen for most all calibration applications.
square of single crystal silicon. It is photo-
The Structure Applications
etched and the squares repeat every 10μm. There are more than 1.6
The dividing lines are 1.9μm wide. A broader Imaging
million gold squares of 1μ
etching line is written every 500μm, which is  Calibration of SEM magnification in all
size on silicon forming a 4-
useful in light microscopy. This is an excellent ranges between 20x and 50,000x.
fold checkerboard pattern in
test specimen for comparing magnification and  Check of equal scaling in X and Y.
an area of 5 mm square. The
assessing any distortion in the image field. It is smallest metric checkerboard  Check of orthogonality and distortion.
ideally useful in the context of automated has a size of 10 x 10μ. Such  Resolution test at high magnification
counting systems to check for unsuspected checkerboards form larger on the edges of the gold squares.
distortions. Where critical measurements must metric checkerboards of 100 Motorized Stages
be made the sample can be mounted directly x 100μ - These again form (especially for use with ESCOSY)
onto the calibration specimen so that an internal calibration is obtained on checkerboards of 1 mm  Measurement of reproducibility
the micro-graph. square. Finally, such 1mm using stored positions.
79502-01 Silicon Test Specimen, Unmounted each squares are arranged in the  Calibration of stage orthogonality.
79502-10 Silicon Test Specimen, Unmounted 10/pk same manner covering a  Calibration of readings in X and Y.
79502-12 Silicon Test Specimen on 12.5mm Pin Stub each field of 5 mm square.  Measurement of absolute position-
79502-20 Silicon Test Specimen for Incident LM each ing accuracy.
The edges of the empty
79502-30 Calibration Certificate each
corners in 0.1 and 1 mm Experimental Electron
checkerboards are Lithography (use with attachment
 Particle-Size Standards additionally marked. The ELPHY or PROXY-WRITER)
surrounding frame is 10μ  Generation of metric writing fields
See page 167 for a complete listing 
wide and has an outer side between 10μ and 5mm square via
length of 5.04 mm. The mark recognition and alignment.
ARTICLE OF INTEREST pattern was directly written  Measurement of SEM distortion at
by e-beam lithography using any magnification via mark recogni-
It would be very convenient if the SEM could be inspected
the new ZBA 31/32 from tion on different places.
while in operation, with the image of the vacuum chamber
visible on the SEM TV screen. JENOPTIK.  Check of defocusing in outer areas.
Refer to: R. Eckert,.(1992) Inspecting the SEM Chamber with a
Charged Polystyrene Mirror. Scanning Vol. 14, 73-75
79503-01 Chessy Test Specimen each

 Resolution and Gray Level Test Specimens

SEM resolution is tested in terms of a combination of criteria, namely resolved gaps and the number of gray levels in the image. This is to ensure that the
resolution has not been distorted by using the contrast to maximize visibility of edges. High resolution images ideally should show fine detail together with a
lack of noise evidenced by a good range of gray levels.

1. High Resolution Gold on 2. Very High Resolution Gold

Carbon Test (<2nn - 30nm) on Carbon Test
For resolution test of SE and BSE imaging and For very high resolution performance testing
also for chemical mapping in high-resolution this specimen has a smaller gold particle
systems such as an Auger scanning size ranging from 2 nm to 30 nm as
instrument. Each test specimen has a square compared to the high resolution test above.
grid pattern with large crystals in the center Ideal for testing at instrument
of each square, and very fine crystals at the magnifications of 50,000x and above.
edges of each grid. Thus medium and high 79510 79511
resolution gap tests are performed on the
same specimen. Meantime, the larger crystals show facets which allow an
assessment of the gray level reproduction available at high resolution. Gold
particle range from 5nm to 150 nm approximately.
79510-01 High Resolution Au-C Test on 12.5mm Pin Stub each 79511-01 Very High Resolution Au-C Test on 12.5mm Pin Stub each
79510-02 High Resolution Au-C Test on JEOL Stub each 79511-02 Very High Resolution Au-C Test on JEOL Stub each
79510-03 High Resolution Au-C Test on ISI Stub each 79511-03 Very High Resolution Au-C Test on ISI Stub each
79510-04 High Resolution Au-C Test on Hitachi Stub each 79511-04 Very High Resolution Au-C Test on Hitachi Stub each
79510-05 High Resolution Au-C Test on Carbon Planchet each 79511-05 Very High Resolution Au-C Test on Carbon Planchet each

164 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec06_164-174_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec06 6/30/14 2:30 AM Page 165

Calibration Standards, Specimens, & Aids SECTION 6

 Resolution and Gray Level Test Specimens (continued)  Reference Samples for Back-Scattered
3. Ultra High Resolution Gold
Electron Detection Systems
(<1 nm - 20 nm) on Carbon Test
With gold particles ranging from <1 nm
 Reference Standards
to 20 nm, this test is suitable for ultra high When equipped with a back-scattered electron
resolution SEM tests such as field emission detector, an electron microscope has the
electron source. capability to produce images in which the
A magnification of at least 80,000x is contrast is controlled by differences in atomic
required for this test. number across the specimen. Three reference
samples are now available for testing the
79512 differences of atomic number. Each of the reference samples consists of two
high purity elements that have an atomic number difference of 1. They are in
79512-01 Ultra High Resolution Au-C Test on 12.5mm Pin Stub each
79512-02 Ultra High Resolution Au-C Test on JEOL Stub each form of a wire of the low Z element embedded in a matrix of the high Z
79512-03 Ultra High Resolution Au-C Test on ISI Stub each element. The samples are mounted onto 5mm diameter blocks.
79512-04 Ultra High Resolution Au-C Test on Hitachi Stub each
79520-01 BSE Reference, Nickel(Z=28)/Copper (Z=29) each
79512-05 Ultra High Resolution Au-C Test on Carbon Planchet each
79520-02 BSE Reference, Palladium (Z=46)/Silver (z=47) each
79520-03 BSE Reference, Platinum (Z=78)/Gold (Z=79) each
These gold on carbon calibration specimens have been specially
produced to enable the ultra hig-resolution capabilities of the current
generation of high performance scanning electron microscopes to be  Duplex Specimen
assessed. In particular, the series 79512- sample with its ultra small An alternative and very sensitive
gold particle size (<1nm - 20nm) is designed for use with SEM 's test is by means of an alloy with
equipped with field emission guns. two major Copper/Zinc phases
Until experience has been gained, these specimens should be used in separated by an atomic number
conjunction with the standard gold on carbon specimen, 79510- difference of 0.1. The light phase
series. Many of the instructions given on the 79510- technical leaflet illustrated in the micrograph has a
apply also to these ultra high-resolution test specimens, but it should mean atomic number of 29.47 and the dark phase a mean atomic
be noted that the instrumental magnification required to resolve the number of 29.37.
smaller particles, would be higher. 79521-01 Duplex Reference Specimen each

 X-Checker™
4. Medium Resolution -
The X-Checker was the first
Aluminum-Tungsten Dendrites
The various spacings created by the and remains the only
dendritic structure complete calibration aid for
give the gap test, and SEM/EDS Systems. When
the topographical arrangement of the time is short but you want
dendrites leads to the gray level test. The to know how well your
specimen is non-magnetic, vacuum clean. It system is performing you need the X-Checker. Each X-Checker comes
is most useful for working in the probe size with the following:
range of 25 to 75 nm. Supplied 79514  Manganese to measure full width at half max detector resolution
unmounted.  Aluminum and copper to perform spectral calibration.
79514-01 SEM Aluminum-Tungsten Dendrites Test each
 Carbon to monitor calibration at the low end of the spectra
for thin window detectors.
5. Tin On Carbon You also get two grid sizes for checking the accuracy of your image
Tin on Carbon is an alternate test specimen analysis software and an easy test for monitoring the amount of vacuum
for medium resolution, and for the daily pump oil contamination on your detector window.
basic checking of your instrument perform-  The X-Checker™ BN comes with boron nitride for those who need a
ance.This specimen consists of a dispersion more sensitive monitor of low end performance on thin window
of tin spheres, within the size range 10 - 40 and windowless detectors.
nm, on a carbon substrate. Ideal for  The X-Checker™ Extra is the ultimate performance monitor for the
astigmatism correction, it is also latest state of the art X-ray detectors. In addition to the standard
recommended for use in SEM’s employed in features and boron nitride, there is a fluorine source to test resolu-
the semi-conductor industry where the usual gold on carbon specimen tion at the fluorine K-alpha peak (industry standard for measuring
cannot be used because of the risk of gold poisoning. low end resolution). As well it comes with a beryllium grid for the
ultimate test of detector performance.
79515-01 Tin-C Test Specimen on 12.5mm Pin Stub each
79515-02 Tin-C Test Specimen on JEOL Stub each 80058-ST X-Checker™, Standard each
79515-03 Tin-C Test Specimen on ISI Stub each 80058-BN X-Checker™, With Boron Nitride each
79515-04 Tin-C Test Specimen on Hitachi Stub each 80058-EX X-Checker™, Extra each

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 165
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec06_164-174_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec06 6/30/14 2:31 AM Page 166

SECTION 6 Calibration Standards, Specimens, & Aids

 Calibration Specimens for TEM & STEM  Holey Carbon Film:
For measuring and correcting astigma-tism and
Magnification Calibration
for evaluating the resolution of the transmission
 Fine Mesh Grids electron microscope. A thin film of carbon has
These fine mesh grids are carefully checked. been treated to obtain numerous round holes of
They are suitable for the low magnification various sizes. On a 3.05mm copper grid.
range of a TEM. Available as a sandwich in a
folding 3.05mm mesh grid, or in a square 80010 Holey Carbon Film 1grid/vial
mesh 25mm.
 Evaporated Platinum/Iridium
Evaporated Pt/Ir on Holey carbon film. Holey
79525-01 1000 mesh on Sandwich Grid, 3.05mm dia., Copper each
79525-02 2000 mesh on Sandwich Grid, 3.05mm dia.,Copper each carbon film support provides holes for ease of
79526-10 1000 mesh, 25mm x 25mm, Nickel each focus and astigmatism correction. The dots of
79526-20 2000 mesh, 25mm x 25mm, Nickel each evaporated Pt/Ir provide dense particles for
resolution checks through the particle seperation
 Grating Replicas: Parallel test.
and Crossed Lines
Shadowcast carbon replicas of diffraction 80020 Evaporated Platinum/Iridium 1grid/vial
parallel line gratings with spacing of
462.9nm, 2160 lines per millimeter onto  Polystyrene Latex
3.05mm grid. The same ruling 2160 Uniform polystyrene latex (size 0.312μm) is
lines/mm, cross at 90° to one another give Parallel Lines suspended on a Formvar/Carbon grid and is
additional accuracy to magnification checks useful for checking magnification and calibration.
and aid in checking distortion. Ideal for
calibration electron-optical magnification up to
the x80000/ 100000 range.
80030 Polystyrene Latex each
80050 Grating Replica, Parallel Lined each
80051 Grating Replica, Crossed Lined each  Combined Test Specimen
Crossed Lines A holey carbon film is shadowed with gold and
 Line Grating Replicas graphitized carbon particles are deposited on a
3.05mm grid. These particles viewed over the
with Latex Spheres holes may be used for assessment of factors
The latex sphere is 0.261 microns and limiting the microscope performance.
the grating replica is 2160 lines/mm.
The evaporated gold forms small polycrystalline
This calibration aid allows you to double islands and within these islands lattice fringes can be resolved. Also use
check the accuracy of magnification this specimen for the measurement of contamination rates in the EM by
cali-bration. noting the deposition rate of carbon within the holes found in the gold film.
80055 Grating Replica on Latex Spheres each 80043 Combined Test Specimen each

The addition of Latex Spheres to the Grating Replica provides a double  Gold Shadowed Latex
check of the accuracy of magnification calibration. It is particularly
These latex particles have a diameter of 0.204μm
useful at higher magnifications where only a few squares of the replica
pattern can be photographed together. and are shadowed with a coating of gold. Measure
Note: The latex particles in this specimen have a diameter of 0.261 the finest migrated gold particles in the shadow to
micron. determine the resolution of the STEM. Gold
To use both the Replica and Latex Spheres shadowed latex on formvar/carbon film, mounted on
for Magnification Calibration: a copper grid, 3.04mm diameter.
(1) Calculate the magnification using the diffraction grating replica 80040 Gold Shadowed Latex 1 grid/vial
pattern by the following formula:
Magnification = Distance in mm between limiting lines x 2,160
Number of spaces between limiting lines
 Catalase Crystals
Catalase crystals are mounted on a grid (3.05mm)
(2) Calculate the magnification by measuring the magnified image of and negatively stained. They display very clear
the 0.262 micron diameter latex spheres, applying the following lattice plane spacings of approx. 8.75nm and
formula: 6.85nm. Ideal for high magnification calibration. J.
Magnification = Diameter (mm) x 3831.4 Ultrastructure Res.24, 454., 1968

(Measure as many latex spheres as possible and calculate the average

diameter. Ignore any latex spheres which are distorted.) 80014 Catalase Crystals 1 grid/vial

166 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec06_164-174_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec06 6/30/14 2:31 AM Page 167

Calibration Standards, Specimens, & Aids SECTION 6

® Particle-Size Standards ® Lattice Plane Specimens
Particle-size stand-
ards are certified for
mean diameter and
are trace-able to the
National Bureau of 80035 80036
Standards (NBS). Our
line of stand-ards in
the submicrometer
size range is called 80037 80038
Nanosphere Size Since crystal lattice plane spacings is accurately known from X-ray
Standards™, and measurements, they provide a good test of microscope stability and a
Monosized Polymer calibration of magnification in the upper range of magnification of the
Microspheres. instrument.
T Nanosphere Size 1) Plane Spacing 0.9nm and 0.45nm - Asbestos Crocidolite
Standards are The 0.9nm spacing (020) will be found along the axis of the crocidolite
highly uniform fibers. The 0.45nm spacing appears at an angle of about 60°, in suitable
polystyrene crystal orientations. Because of the hazard of asbestos, this sample is
spheres calibrat- sandwiched between formvar and carbon films, than mounted onto a
ed in billionths of 3.05mm grid.
a meter
80035 Crocidolite Crystals each
(nanometer) with
NBS traceable methodology. 2) Plane Spacing 0.56nm - Potassium Chloroplatinate
T Nanosphere Size Standards are used in the calibration of electron 80036 Potassium Chloroplatinate Crystals each
microscopes, aerosol and liquid particle studies, chromatography 3) Plane Spacing 0.34nm - Graphitised Carbon Black
columns, and laser light scattering studies. The 20 to 1000 nm
range is suitable for checking the size of bacteria, viruses, ribo- 80037 Graphitised Carbon Black Crystals each
somes and sub-cellular components. Nanosphere Size Standards 4) Plane Spacing 0.204nm, 0.143nm and 0.102nm - Oriented
are packaged as aqueous suspensions in dropper-tipped bottles. Single Crystal Gold Foil
Specific gravity :1.05g/ml These gold foils are mounted on gold grids, a valuable tool to check
Refractive index of 1.59 @ 589nm (23°C). resolution, image quality, magnification and instrument stability.
80038 Oriented Gold Crystals each
Nanosphere Size Standards Ordering Information:
Cat.# Nominal Certified Size Uniformity Solids
Diameter Mean Dia. Std. Dev.&C.V Content ® Gold Particle on Carbon Film
70881 20nm 19nm+/-1.5nm NA 1% This high resolution TEM test
70883 50nm 50nm+/-2.0nm NA 1% specimen is an arrangement of
70885 100nm 102nm+/-3.0nm 7.6nm (7.5%) 1% finely-dispersed thin gold particles
70886 200nm 204nm+/-3.1nm 3.1nm (1.5%) 1% on carbon film. As with gold foil,
70887 300nm 304nm+/-6.0nm 4.5nm (1.5%) 1% image quality, magnification, and
70888 400nm 404nm+/-4.0nm 5.9nm (1.5%) 1% instrument stability are readily
70889 500nm 486nm+/-5.0nm 5.4nm (1.1%) 1%
assessed; however, for the determination of resolution capabilities this
70890 600nm 600nm+/-5.0nm 6.6nm (1.1%) 1%
70891 700nm 701nm+/-6.0nm 9.0nm (1.3%) 1%
gold particle specimen is superior since it offers a choice of crystalline
70892 800nm 802nm+/-6.0nm 9.6nm (1.2%) 1% orientation on static or low tilt stages. In addition, the thickness of the
70893 900nm 895nm+/-8.0nm 9.1nm (1.0%) 1% crystalline material is easily calculated from the projected shape of the
gold crystal. The background noise arising from structure in the support
T Monosized Polymer Microspheres are the most uniform spheres film helps with determinations of the operating transfer function.
available. For the highest level of measurement accuracy in the 1
80041 Gold Particles on Carbon Film each
to 40 micron size, this series of size standards is recommended.
Microsphere Size Standards Ordering Information: ® TEM Checker™
Cat.# Nominal Certified Size Uniformity Solids TEM analysts also need to
Diameter Mean Dia. Std. Dev.&C.V Content monitor the performance of their
70894 1.0μm 0.993+/-0.021μm 0.010mm (1.0%) 1.00% x-ray detectors. The TEM
70895 2.0μm 2.013+/-0.025μm 0.022mm (1.1%) 0.5% Checker contains 5 manganese
70896 3.0μm 3.063+/-0.027μm 0.03mm (1.0%) 0.5% disks in a standard grid storage
70897 5.0μm 4.991+/-0.035μm 0.06mm (1.2%) 0.3% box. Each disk is 3 mm in diameter and fits into the sample holder. The
70898 10.0μm 9.975+/-0.061μm 0.09mm (0.9%) 0.2%
discs are not transparent to the beam but will give you a strong
manganese peak to check the resolution of your EDS detector.
80059 TEM Checker™ each

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 167
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec06_164-174_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec06 6/30/14 2:32 AM Page 168

SECTION 6 Calibration Standards, Specimens, & Aids

® MAGICAL™ - TEM Calibration Standard ® Diffraction Standards
MAG*I*CAL is the world’s smallest ruler and have been inducted into
® Camera Length
the Guinness Book of World Records,
A genius standard to perform the three major calibrations of a TEM: The nominal value of the effective camera
length of an EM operating in the selected area
T Image Magnification Calibration mode is not sufficiently accurate for any
T Camera constant Calibration for Indexing calculations of lattice spacing. The actual value
Diffraction Patterns of camera length must be calibrated as the
T Image/Diffraction Pattern Rotation same accelerating voltage and objective lens 80044
Calibration (crystal relation features) setting by reference to a known substance with
well defined diffraction spacings. The normal
specimens are evaporated films on a 3.05mm
grid of aluminum or thallous chloride. The very
small crystalline size yields ring patterns
suitable for calibration purposes.
80044 Evaporated Aluminum Film each
80045 Evaporated Thallous Chloride each 80045

® Image Rotation
When changing from a selected area image of
a specimen to a diffraction pattern, the
strength of the intermediate lens is changed,
producing an image rotation between the
image and the diffraction pattern. The amount
of this rotation can be measured by 80046
photographing a crystal whose shape gives a
clear indication of orientation. A molybdenum oxide crystal is very
suitable for this purpose. Evaporated on a 3.05mm grid.
80046 Molybdenum Oxide each

® Ultrastructure Size
Calculator
A slide-guide-calculator used to determine the
real-life size of a structure from a micrograph-
in micrometer, nanometer or angstrom units.
It computes the real-life dimension/mm at
MAGNIFICATION CALIBRATION STANDARD FOR TEM magnifications from 1,000 to 100,000 by
Layer Thickness Values Surface —
)( introducing a multiplication factor of x2 or x1⁄2.
MAG*I*CAL™ consists of an ion milled cross section of a silicon single The magnification range can be extended.
crystal consisting of a series of atomically flat layers of Si and SiGe, Waterproof card, printed in English, German
which have been grown epitaxially by MBE (molecular beam epitaxy). and French.
74804
When the calibration structure is viewed in a TEM, it appears as a series
of light and dark layers where the layer thicknesses are accurately 74804 each
known. The calibrated thickness measurements of these light (silicon)
and dark (SiGe) layers are based on careful TEM measurements of the ® Photomicrograph Scale Marker
<111> lattice spacing of silicon, which is visible on the calibration A slide-ruler used to
sample itself, and are supported by x-ray diffraction measurements. The apply scale marks to
layer spacing are designed so that the sample can be used to calibrate photomicrographs.
the entire magnification range in a TEM, from 1,000X to 1,000,000X. As There are four scale
the sample is also a single crystal of silicon, the calibrations requiring lines for producing
electron diffraction information such as the camera constant and scale marks of 10
image/diffraction pattern rotation can also be performed easily and microns, 1 micron,
unambiguously. One single calibration sample can therefore be used to 0.1 micron (100nm) and 10nm. The scale marker is also used in
provide all three of the major TEM instrument calibration at all measuring the real life size of an object in a micrograph. It is made
magnifications and all camera lengths. from a clear flexible plastic and it is protected by an enclosed pouch.
For a complete reference and technical information on Instructions are included. Printed in English, German, and French.
MAG*I*CAL™, see our interactive website. 74802 each
80069 MAG*I*CAL ®
each

168 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec06_164-174_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec06 6/30/14 2:32 AM Page 169

Calibration Standards, Specimens, & Aids SECTION 6

® Calibration Tools for Atomic Force or Scanning Probe Microscopy (AFM/SPM)
The Tipcheck device is used for examining the shaft of the The Nioprobe device is used to determine the shape at the
tip probe or for determining the tip breakage etc. very apex of the tip probe for microscopy measurements.
® 1. TIP CHECK: ® 2. Nioprobe
The Problem The Problem
Imaging a new sample in an AFM, it may be difficult to know whether one The physical probe used in AFM imaging is not ideally sharp. As a
has obtained an accurate representation of the surface. Even in the case that consequence, an AFM image does not reflect the true sample topography
a fairly clear idea of expected feature topography exists, an independent impartially, but rather represents the interaction of the tip with the sample
means of assessing the influence of the probe tip on the image is desirable. surface. There is no avoiding this imperfection, which sets real limits on
Consider the following: what may be validly inferred from an AFM image.
T A broken or misshapen probe tip results in inaccurate rendering of Whether one is engaged in detailed, quantitative metrology or is simply
samples. Extra time from an already busy schedule can be consumed using AFM images as an interpretive aid, it is imperative be able to assess
in further clarification work that wouldn’t have been needed these limits. The key here is to possess a reliable estimate of the
otherwise. Worse, if the tip damage goes undetected, the true sharpness of the tip apex. Reverse imaging of the probe is the most
topographical nature of your samples may inadvertently go unnoticed. convenient means of obtaining the effective radius of the probe. For this
T Using microscopy techniques such as SEM to look for breakage in tips purpose, the ideal characterization sample would consist of small, stiff,
is neither convenient nor economical enough to be done routinely. spiked features.
A simple, convenient means to prescreen all of one’s AFM tips is certainly The Practical Answer is NioProbe (NP)
desirable! You and your team can thereby save time and effort, and avoid
Consider the following advantages of NioProbe
frustration. Fortunately, there is a simple and effective means to
T Tiny peaks densely populate the surface structure of the NioProbe
prescreen your tips, and assess used tips as well. film. This makes the film very suitable for the small piezo
The Answer is TipCheck (TC) movement’s characteristic of precision AFM work.
TipCheck exploits reverse imaging to provide a fast and simple way to T Feature peaks exhibits imaging radii of less than 5 nm, as sharp as
assess new and used tips without the need for SEM inspection. TipCheck anything else available. This permits one to obtain the accurate apex
helps you to categorize your tips on the spectrum at right, and permits radius desired for medium-to small-scale work (such as biomolecular
qualitative comparisons between tips. imaging).
The microstructure of the TipCheck film is ideal for the detection of tip T The random orientation of the NioProbe features is suitable for
morphology in the vicinity of the tip apex. The AFM images shown here applying blind tip reconstruction methods.
were obtained by imaging a TipCheck surface with (left) a broken tip and T The sample is resistant to the duress of contact mode scanning.
(right) a reasonably good tip.
T The film is supplied on a silicon chip, ready to be placed in your AFM.
The film is supplied on a chip of silicon, ready to be placed in your AFM. Instructions are provided to allow easy determination of the apex
Instructions are provided with examples of images to aid you getting radius. If stored in a clean, dry place, the sample can provide years of
started with your own sample library. service.
80130-Ti AFM/SPM TipCheck Calibration each 80130-NB AFM/SPM NioProbe Calibration each

Fig. 1: This image of a Fig. 2: An image acquired Fig. 3: Another image Fig. 4: Another example of Fig. 5: If the tip becomes FIg. 6: This image was
TipCheck surface was by a used, somewhat worn acquired by a tip duller an image acquired by a broken or severely worn, acquired with a defective
acquired with an unbroken, tip. Topographical features than ideal. The tops of new, unbroken tip. the features will appear tip. The doubled features
sharp, silicon nitride are still produced features are beginning to very globular or flattened. throughout the scan
contact mode tip. Note the reasonably well but are not look rounded. Compared As an initially new tip suggest that tip apex may
smooth planar sides of the quite as sharp. The lateral the lateral force image to becomes wrong with use, be notched, resulting in
features, the well-defined force map has changed in that of Fig. 1. the image quality will unwanted artifacts in
edges & peaks, and the appearance. There is no gradually degrade to this images.
good correspondence evidence of tip breakage. stage from that of Fig. 4.
between the topographical
image (top) and the lateral
force map (bottom).

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 169
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec06_164-174_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec06 6/30/14 2:32 AM Page 170

SECTION 6 Calibration Standards, Specimens, & Aids

® Magnification Reference Standards – SPM, AFM, SEM Calibration Standards
EMS offers a series of calibration standards with
one and two dimension calibrated patterns. The
standards come in two grid spacings – 300
nanometers and 700 nanometers. These
standards are created utilizing holographic
interference of a particular laser frequency. They
are typically accurate to <1% across the entire
surface of the standard.
Background
EMS MXS "CE" and "BE" series SEM magnification
reference gratings and grids set new standards for
White area material: Tungsten. This structure has been proven under a wide
sub-micron accuracy and ease-of-use. Designed
Black area material: Tungsten or other metal. varitey of beam conditions, from 30kV to sub
to meet the requirements for a reasonable cost,
12 kV.
accurate sub-micron reference standard, "CE" Materials: The calibration specimen consists
Series Reference Standards can be tailored to of a silicon chip with a thin (100nm) thick Dimensions: 300nm or 700nm nominal (exact
meet a variety of needs. polymer layer containing the pattern and a thin dimension will be provided with sample).
• They are ideal for student practice and tungsten film over-coating the entire surface. Measurements are made from leading edge to
instruction, testing new ideas or applications, or The tungsten film varies from 20nm to 60nm in leading edge, etc. Width of individual bars and
other uses where you need a good quality thicknenss, depending on the particular model. spaces is not calibrated.
standard but do not want to put an expensive
sample at risk. for easy insertion in your SEM. Mounting one of these values. Both the fabrication process
• Exceptional accuracy, repeatability, and these calibration standards is striaghtforward. The determines the actual dimension and by a second,
uniformity are assured since each individual front surface of the sample and the silicon independent measurement after the calibration
standard is an original or master produced substrate are conductive. Experience indicates that artifact is manufactured.
directly from a holographic interference pattern. there is, in general, no need to make a special The expected accuracy of the holographic
These reference standards are remarkably durable effort to ground the front surface. The use of technique used in the manufacturing process is
under typical operating conditions. The surface conductive silver or carbon-loaded paint, ±0.1%. Unfortunately, subsequent processing
contamination behavior is also very good. There conductive epoxies, conductive tape, etc. have all steps degarde this initial accuracy, leading to the
are no better sub-micron reference standard been used to successfully mount "CE" Series 3-sigma accuracy of 3% for the finished product.
available in this price range. standards. The second, independent measurement technique
One test site indicated that on a scale of 1 to 5 With EMS’s MXS "CE" and "BE" Series has an expected 3-sigma accuracy of 1% or
with respect to ease of use, contrast/brightnes, Reference Standards, you can: better. Our experience is that the two
durability, and accuracy, "CE" series reference T Quickly check dimensional measurements by measurement techniques applied to a particular
standards earn a 4.7 out of 5 average in mounting one on your specimen stage; artifact will agree with each other within 0.5mm.
comparison to other available standards. T Perform periodic calibration and perfor- It is important to remember that the certified
Comments from various other test sites mance checks of your microscope; dimension in an MXS "CE" and "BE" Series
included "very good contrast/brightness levels T Obtain high magnification, sub-micron scale Reference Standard is not just at one unique
at all voltages used," "easy to use," and "could dimensional accuracy for the first time; position on the artifact, but is known at all
become my secondary standard of choice." T Accurately determine dimensions from locations on the standard.
Application 0.3μm to 30μm all with one calibration arti- Durability and Charging Effects
EMS's MXS "CE" series reference standards facts; EMS MXS "CE" and "BE" Series Reference
provide a calibrated dimension of either 300 nm or T Analyze your images for pincushion distor- Standards have been tested and evaluated over a
700 nm nominal length. ("BE" series available only tion, small-scale vibration, or small magnetic broad range of operating conditions, from those
300 nm) field distortions. found in a tungsten filament system to the highest
T The larger dimension provides accurate, The accuracy of the "CE" Series Reference resolution FEG system. These standards have been
multiple period measurement from about Standards, allows the microscopist to use them as found remarkably durable during use, with no
5000X to over 45,000X, while a secondary standard. Their accuracy and beam-induced distortion in the calibrated pattern
uniformity make it easy to obtain and document after as much as one-half hour of imaging time at
T The smaller dimension is useful from about
traceability of measurements without placing an 50,000X and 20 KV. Charging is minimal to non-
10,000X to over 100,000X.
expensive, hard to obtain, difficult to use primary existent, though edge-effect can be seen under
Throughout this magnification range, these some conditions. The high contrast and
standards provide excellent image contrast, an calibration standard at risk of contamination or
damage. brightness, which can be obtained using these
enormous useful calibration area, and a 3-sigma reference standards guarantees good
accuracy of at worst 3%, with typical values Certification and Accuracy contamination tolerance.
around 1%. MXS "CE" Series Reference Standards provide a
MXS "CE" and "BE" series reference standards are calibrated dimension of either 300 nm or 700 nm
available as unmounted 3 mm x 4 mm pieces to nominal length. The actual dimension of the
be mounted by the microscopist, or pre-mounted artifact as delivered will generally not be exactly

170 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec06_164-174_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec06 6/30/14 2:32 AM Page 171

Calibration Standards, Specimens, & Aids SECTION 6

® Magnification Reference Standards – SPM, AFM, SEM Calibration Standards (continued)
® 1. MXS 301CE Cleaning for "CE" Series important. To assist in this process, an instruction
Cleaning is possible using dry air or other clean sheet is provided with each standard. This sheet
and MXS 701CE gases, high purity distilled or deionized water, and provides several example images which can be used
The calibrated dimension is the spatial period of a series soft brushes. Rubbing with soft tissues, or any to determine if the image of the sample is correct.
of parallel ribs running across the surface of the sample. other firm physical contact, or the use of Once a proper focus and stigmation are obtained,
The significant height of the ribs (>100 nm) provides solvents, such as acetone or alcohol will the image can be shifted to an appropriate area and
excellent image contrast. The top surface of the rib damage the surface of the reference standard. the desired measurements made.
structures is somewhat rounded rather than completely The full screen image provided by an EMS
flat. The edges of the ribs are readily discernible, with ® 3. MXS 301BE calibration sample provides a unique advantage.
over 75% of the 3 mm by 4 mm sample area exhibiting The calibrated dimension is the spatial period of Most calibration standards really verify accuracy of
an edge location variation, which is less. alternating lines of Titanium and Silicon. The use of one portion of the image, while the entire screen is
Use and Imaging two different elements provides excellent image part of the measurement tool. With an image that
The exceptionally clean and uniform pattern provided in contrast, and the titanium layer thickness is kept to fills the screen, you can quickly diagnose all types
an MXS 301CE or MXS 701CE standard displays few 20 nm to control edge distortion effects in the SEM of image distortions, including problems due to
imperfections, which can be used as focusing and image. These physical characteristics make the vibrations, external fields, etc. A common problem
stigmation aids. For this reason, care in setting up the edges sharp and readily discernable. The calibrated is distortion caused by missadjusted CRT's or
image before measurement is important. To assist in pattern covers the entire sample, providing over scanners in which the magnification in one part of
the setup process, an instruction sheet is provided with 1,000,000 measurement sites. Because the pattern the image is different from another part of the
each standard. This sheet provides several example is a direct recording of a laser-generated interference image. Such problems are easily found and
images, which can be used to determine if the image of pattern which has been transferred into the 20 nm corrected using these calibration samples.
the sample is correctly set up. Expecially with the MXS thick Titanium film, these calibration samples are the Cleaning for "BE" Series
301CE and MXS 701CE line-space pattern standards, most accurate available.
Titanium on Silicon produces a very durable
obtaining the proper stigmation is crucial since improper Imaging and Applications calibration pattern. The calibration standard can be
stigmation is not readily apparent when imaging a The exceptionally clean and uniform pattern provided cleaned using common solvents such as acetone
pattern of straight line. Once a proper focus and in an EMS MXS "BE" series calibration standard or alcohol, detergents, deionized water, etc. Gentle
sigmation are obtained, the image can be shifted to an displays few imperfections which can be used as physical rubbing with soft tissues, brushes, etc.,
appropriate area and the desired measurements made. focusing and stigmation aids. For this reason, care in should not damage the sample. In extreme cases,
cleaning by oxygen plasma may be possible.
® 2. MXS 702CE setting up the image before measurement is

The calibrated dimension is the spatial period of a

series of a 2-dimensional grid spread across the Specifications
surface of the sample. This grid consists of a series
of cylindrical posts rising from the surface of the Product Data 301CE & 701CE 702CE 301BE**
sample. The significant height of the ribs (>100 nm) Substrate Silicon Wafer Silicon Wafer Silicon Wafer
provides excellent image contrast. The top surface of Top Surface 60 nm Tungsten Film 60 nm Tungsten Film Ti pattern on Si
these posts is somewhat rounded rather than flat and Physical Size 3mm x 4mm x 0.5mm 3mm x 4mm x 0.5mm 3mm x 4mm x 0.5mm
there are also slight departures from a perfect circle Accuracy ± 3% ± 3% ± 1%
Nominal Dimensions (x) (x, y) (x)
in the shape of some posts. Measurement techniques
300nm for 301CE — 300nm for 301BE
must be used which take these characteristics into
700nm for 701CE 700nm for 702CE
account. The center-to-center distance of any pair is
Availability mounted or unmounted* mounted or unmounted* mounted or unmounted*
the most accurate measurements.
*The cost for mounted samples using standard aluminum pin type stubs (EMS #75200). Please call us for addi-
Use and Imaging tional expense.
The exceptionally clean and uniform pattern provided in **MXS-301BE Calibration sheet provided with standard contains actual dimensions to 3 significant figures. NPL
an MXS "CE" series 2-dimensional calibration standard tracability is also available with an additional cost.
displays few large scale imperfections which can be
used as focusing and stigmation aids. For this reason,
taking care in setting up the image before measurement
Ordering Information
is important. To assist in this process, an instruction Application Product Pattern Nominal Material Mounting Catalog #
sheet is provided with each standard. This sheet Pitch
provides several example images which can be used to SEM 701CE Parallel 700 nm W-Coated unmounted 80110-71
determine if the image of the sample is correctly set up. Ridges Photoresist on Si mounted 80110-71M
SEM 301CE Parallel 300 nm W-Coated unmounted 80110-31
The characteristics of the MXS 702CE standards
Ridges Photoresist on Si mounted 80110-31M
make it easier to image than the 1-dimensional
SEM 702CE Array of 700 nm W-Coated unmounted 80110-72
standards. The 2-dimensional grid facilitates setting Posts Photoresist on Si mounted 80110-72M
the stigmation of the image properly. Once proper AFM, SEM, 301BE Parallel 300 nm Ti Lines on Si unmounted 80111-31
TOF-SIMS,
focus and sigmation are obtained, the image can be Auger, etc. Ridgse mounted 80111-31M
shifted to an appropriate area and the desired
measurements made.Since the pattern covers the
entire sample area, it is possible to make over Special Services (Needs to be added to the standard price)
1,000,000 measurements utilizing the standard SS-301 301BE Certification each
without using the same area twice. SS-SEM Mount Certified Specimen for SEM each

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 171
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec06_164-174_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec06 6/30/14 2:32 AM Page 172

SECTION 6 Calibration Standards, Specimens, & Aids

® SPM Calibration Specimens
Overall Benefits: ® Model PT
T Easier testing of your SPM. Phase Imaging Test Specimen (verify
T Improved accuracy of critical dimension measurements. TappingMode™ phase contrast and
T Accuracy: 0.5% (1 std. dev.). resolution).
Features: Phase Imaging is a sharp probe, which is
T Holographic fabrication - assures high accuracy and precision. brought into proximity with the specimen
T Pattern height > 100nm - provide excellent image contrast. surface. The probe is oscillated vertically
near its mechanical resonance fre-quency.
T Uniform coverage of entire chip - save time (can image anywhere).
As the probe lightly taps the surface, the
Description: amplitude of oscillation is reduced and the
Nominal calibrated dimensions: 300 or 700nm. AFM uses this change in amplitude in order to track the surface topography. In
Calibration certificate: supplied with each sample, stating the dimension to the addition to its amplitude, the probe motion can be characterized by its phase
nearest 1nm. relative to a driving oscillator. The phase signal changes when the probe
Pattern types: 1- or 2-Dimensional. The calibrated dimension is the same for encounters regions of different composition. Phase shifts are registered as
both axes for the 2-D standard. bright and dark regions in phase images, comparable to the way height
Feature geometry: changes are indicated in height images.
-parallel ridges (1-D, 300 or 700nm) Phase images often show extraordinary contrast for many composite surfaces
-cylindrical posts (2-D 300nm) of technological and scientific interest. These include contamination deposits,
-diamond-shaped posts (2-D 700nm) discontinuous (i.e. defective) thin films, devices built of composite materials
Physical Size: 3 mm x 4 mm x 0.5mm (e.g. magnetic recording heads), and cross-sectional specimens of composite
Substrate: Silicon wafer materials. Both inorganic and organic materials can be examined. We have
Top Surface: Tungsten film found that phase imaging is more convenient and gentler than other methods,
The 1-D standards can be scanned using any AFM mode, including contact mode. which are based on contact mode operation. It routinely achieves lateral
The 2-D standards can be scanned using modes such as Tapping Mode™, resolution of 10 nm.
intermittent contact, and non-contact. ® Models 300-2D, 300-1D, 700-2D and 700-1D
All mounted on 15 mm steel disk.
® Model 150-1D
Accurate measurements of sub 0.5
micron features are increasingly
important as nanotechnology develops
and as conventional microfabricated
structures (semiconductors, magnetic
data storage devices, optical data discs)
shrinking. The model 150-1D with a
nominal period (pitch) of 150nm, one
dimensional, fabricated on a transparent
Model 150-1D substrate (Aluminum lines on glass) is 300-1D 300-2D
the new tool to support this work. Parallel Ridges, Pitch 288 Array of Posts, Pitch 297
W-coated Photoresist on Si Al bumps on Si
Use contact or TappingMode Use contact or TappingMode
® Model 750-HD
High Durability Calibration
Reference Specimen for
AFM and STM
Each specimen is supplied with a
calibration certificate.
Can be used for AFM, STM and SEM.
Has been used successfully in a hot
water AFM.

Model 750-HD 700-1D 700-2D

Parallel Ridges, Pitch 700 Array of Posts, Pitch 700
W-coated Photoresist on Si W-coated Photoresist on Si
Nominal pattern dimensions: ....................................Pitch 750 nm use contact or TappingMode use TappingMode
Height 100 nm References:
Nominal specimen dimensions: ..........................6.35 m diameter, 1. Pereira, D.E.D. & Claudio-da-Silva, Jr., E. "Improvement of AFM as an analytical Instrument
for Residual Lignin Characterization" in: Proceedings International Symposium on Wood and
0.3 mm thick Pulping Chemistry, Helsinki, Finland, June 1995.
Composition: ..................................................................Solid Nickel 2. Pereria, D.E.D, Chernoff, D., Claudio-da-Silva, Jr. E., & Cemuner, B.J., "The use of AFM to
investigate the delignification process: Part I –AFM performance by differentiating pulping pro-
cesses", to be published.

172 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec06_164-174_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec06 6/30/14 2:32 AM Page 173

Calibration Standards, Specimens, & Aids SECTION 6

 SPM Calibration Specimens (continued)
AFM Tapping Mode
Scan
SEM High Magnification
The following image was captured
with a magnification setting of 100kX
 Model 150-2D — Very High Reference and Traceable and accelerating voltage 10 kV
Standard for Resolution Calibration AFM, SEM, Auger, and FIB
1 kV
General Purpose – High Precision
A precision, holographic pattern provides accurate calibration in the horizontal plane
for very high resolution, nanometer-scale measurements.
Period: 144 nm pitch, two-dimensional array. Accurate to ± 1 nm. Refer to
calibration certificate for actual pitch. 5 kV
Surface: Aluminum bumps on Silicon, 4x3 mm die. Bump height (about 90 nm) and
width (about 75 nm) are not calibrated.
For SEM, an independent analytical lab has tested this specimen in a FE-SEM (field
emission scanning electron microscope). They found that the pattern was very
uniform and the specimen was easy to image. No significant charging was observed 10 kV
in the voltage range 1-20 kV.
Usability: the calibrated pattern covers the entire chip. There is sufficient usable
area to make tens of thousands of measurements without reusing any areas altered
or contaminated by previous scans.

 MODEL 150-2D: 20 kV
This Calibration Reference specimen comes with a non-traceable, manufacturer’s
certificate. These state the average period, based on batch measurements.
 MODEL 150-2DUTC:
This traceable, Certified Standard is a select grade. Each standard is individually
measured in comparison with a similar specimen calibrated at PTB. (PTB, SEM Medium
Physikalisch-Technischen Bundesanstald, is the German counterpart of NIST). The Magnification
uncertainty of single pitch value is typically ±1,4 nm (95% confidence interval). Multi- At 5 kX, the individual bumps were
pitch measurements provide the usual square-root of N improvement in precision. The bump height is about still well resolved. Large fields of
90 nm. This specimen is view show how few defects are
Easy to use
not recommended as a present. The most common
We recommend Model 150-2D because of its unique characteristics which make it
height reference because it defects are single missing bumps
especially easy to use. The specimen is durable and it allows you can scan in contact
is not easy for the standard or a single extra bump inserted
mode, offering you faster calibration and measurements. This is the only high resolution
AFM probes to reach the between lattice positions. Two
2D calibration specimen we have seen that offers the following characteristics:
substrate level between the vacancies are present in the image
 2-dimensional array for simultaneous calibration of X and Y axes. pumps. shown here.
 Pitch <500 nm.
 Array of pumps mean the image contrast is high even when the probe tip is
slightly dull.
20 kV
 High contrast in contact mode scans.
 The pattern covers the entire die so that you don’t have to hunt for the scan area.

Ordering Information:
ASM Model# EMS Part# ASM Model# EMS Part# Ordering for Calibrator only:
150-1D 80125-1D Unmounted 301CE 80110-31 Unmounted Available in the following ways: unmounted,
80125-1D-AFM AFM 80110-31-Pin SEM pin 15mm steel disk (for AFM), SEM pin stub, or any
80125-1D-Pin SEM pin 700-1D 80122-1D Unmounted other type of SEM stub.
80125-1D-X Choose mount 700-2D 80122-2D Unmounted ASM Model# EMS Part#
300-1D 80123-1D Unmounted 80122-2D-AFM AFM
80125-2D Unmounted
80123-1D-Pin SEM pin 701CE 80110-71 Unmounted 150-2D
80125-2D-Pin SEM Pin
80123-1D-AFM AFM 80110-71-Pin SEM pin 80125-2D-AFM AFM
80123-1D-X Choose the mount 702CE 80110-72 Unmounted 80125-2D-X Choose mount
300-2D 80123-2D Unmounted 80110-72-Pin SEM pin 80126-2D Unmounted
80123-2D-Pin SEM pin 150-2DUTC
750-HD 80124-HD Unmounted 80126-2D-Pin SEM Pin
80123-2D-AFM AFM PT 80124-PT 80126-2D-AFM AFM
80123-2D-X Choose the mount
0126-2D-X Choose mount
301BE 80111-31 Unmounted
80111-31-Pin SEM pin

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 173
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec06_164-174_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec06 6/30/14 2:32 AM Page 174

SECTION 6 Calibration Standards, Specimens, & Aids

 Very High Resolution Calibration Reference and Traceable Standard
for AFM, SEM, Auger, and FIB
For General Purpose and Metrology Microscopes
A precision pattern providing accurate calibration in the horizontal Easy to find Patterned area
plane for very high resolution, nanometer-scale measurements. The patterned area is easy to
Period: 70 nm pitch, one-dimensional array. Accurate to +/- 0.25 find. The three rectangles shown Die and location of pattern
nm. Refer to calibration certificate for actual pitch. in the sketch below are visible in within die:
reflected light, with either the
Surface: Silicon Oxide ridges on Silicon, 4x3 mm die. Ridge height
unaided eye or an optical
(about 35 nm) and width (about 35 nm) are not calibrated.
microscope. In a low
For AFM, use in contact, intermittent contact (TappingMode™) and magnification SEM image, the
other modes with image sizes from 100 to 3000 nm. Available contrast is reversed. The central
unmounted or mounted on steel disks. rectangle, which is the grating
For SEM, this specimen works well at a wide range of accelerating pattern, is relatively bright. The
voltages (1 kV to 20 kV have been tested) and calibrates images grating lines are parallel to the
from 25 kX to 1000 kX. Normally supplied unmounted. Can be long side of the rectangle, as
mounted on a stub of your choice. suggested by the high
Usability: The calibrated pattern covers a 1.2x0.5 mm area. There is magnification SEM image.
sufficient usable area to make thousands of measurements without
reusing any areas altered or contaminated by previous scans. Low magnification SEM image: SEM High Magnification Image

 Model 70-1D.
This Calibration Reference specimen comes with a non-traceable,
manufacturer’s certificate. This states the average period, based on
batch measurements.

 Model 70-1DUTC.
This Traceable, Certified Standard is measured in comparison with a
standard calibrated at PTB. (PTB, Physikalisch-Technischen Magnification= 200 kX
Voltage= 5 kV.
Bundesanstalt, is the German counterpart of NIST. The standard is
“NIST-Traceable” by virtue of the mutual recognition agreement
between NIST and PTB.) The uncertainty of single pitch values is Ordering for the Very High Calibration and Traceable
typically +/- 0.5 nm (95% confidence interval). Multi-pitch Standard:
measurements provide the usual square-root of N improvement in Available in the following ways: unmounted, 15mm steel disk (for AFM),
precision. SEM pin stub, or any other type of SEM stub.
Cat.# Description Qty
AFM Tapping Mode Scan 80127-1D Calibration Standard, Model 70-1D each
Unmounted
80127-1DC Calibration Standard, Model 70-1D each
with Cert, Unmounted
80127-1D-PIN Same as 80127-1D but mounted each
on Pin Stub
80127-1DC-PIN Same as 80127-1DC but Mounted each
on Pin Stub
80127-1D-AFM Same as 80127-1D but mounted each
on Steel Disk for AFM
80127-1DC-AFM Same as 80127-1D but mounted on each
Steel Disk for AFM
80127-1D-X Same as 80127-1D, Choose Mount each
80127-1DC-X Same as 80127-1D Choose Mount each
The ridge height is about 35 nm. This specimen is not
recommended as a height reference because the standard AFM
probes may not always reach the substrate level between the ridges.
Nevertheless, the image contrast is high, even when the probe tip is
slightly dull. You can scan in contact mode, which means you can
calibrate and measure faster.

174 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec07_175_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 7/2/14 1:56 PM Page 175

SECTION 7

Microscope Accessories
Apertures and Aperture Cleaning
Recoating TEM Viewing Screens
Standard Loop Filaments
Lanthanum Hexaboride LaB6Cathodes
Denka LaB6 Cathodes
Applied Physics Lanthanum and Cerium
Hexaboride CeB6 Cathodes
Pt and "PTFE" Crucibles
Apezion Vacuum Greases and
Diffusion Pump Oils

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 175
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec07_176-190_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 2:36 AM Page 176

SECTION 7 Microscope Accessories

® Self Cleaning Gold Foil Ordering information: Gold (Au); Platinum (Pt); Molybdenum (Mo)
Disc Apertures
Advanced techniques of thin metal film 2mm O.D. x 0.24mm thick: 4mm O.D. x 0.165mm thick: ISI
application permits the apertures to retain a Philips, Cameca
clean hole edge during prolonged beam Nominal Cat. # Cat. # Cat. # Nominal Cat. # Cat. # Cat.#
Hole Size Gold Platinum Molybdenum Hole Size Gold Platinum Molybdenum
exposure. Ultra-thin, half-micron design
10 microns - 40010-Pt 40010-Mo 10 microns – 45010-Pt 45010-Mo
discourages contaminant accumulation and 20 microns - 40020-Pt 40020-Mo 20 microns – 45020-Pt 45020-Mo
stabilizes astigmatic conditions to provide 30 microns - 40030-Pt 40030-Mo 30 microns – 45030-Pt 45030-Mo
longer life. Conventional mechanical cleaning 50 microns - 40050-Pt 40050-Mo 50 microns – 45050-Pt 45050-Mo
involving costly down-time is no longer 100 microns - 40100-Pt 40100-Mo 70 microns – 45070-Pt 45070-Mo
necessary. Because the foil is ultra thin , 150 microns - 40150-Pt 40150-Mo 100 microns – 45100-Pt 45100-Mo
care must be taken when handling the gold
foil apertures.
2mm O.D. x 0.53mm thick: 6mm O.D. x .24mm thick: JEOL
Gold foil aperture tolerances vary
as follows: Cambridge, Siemens, JEOL, Cameca
Nominal Cat. # Cat. # Cat.# Nominal Cat. # Cat. # Cat.#
T Nominal hole size from 1 to 60 micron: Hole Size Gold Platinum Molybdenum Hole Size Gold Platinum Molybdenum
+/-1micron 5 microns 42005-Au 42005-Pt 42005-Mo 10 microns – 46010-Pt 46010-Mo
T Nominal hole size 70 micron and up: 10 microns 42010-Au 42010-Pt 42010-Mo 20 microns – 46020-Pt 46020-Mo
+/-10% 15 microns 42015-Au 42015-Pt 42015-Mo 30 microns – 46030-Pt 46030-Mo
20 microns 42020-Au 42020-Pt 42020-Mo 50 microns – 46050-Pt 46050-Mo
30 microns 42030-Au 42030-Pt 42030-Mo 100 microns – 46100-Pt 46100-Mo
® Platinum and 40 microns 42040-Au 42040-Pt 42040-Mo
Molybdenum Discs, 50 microns 42050-Au 42050-Pt 42050-Mo
6.35mm O.D. x 0.06mm thick: ETEC
70 microns 42070-Au 42070-Pt 42070-Mo
Drilled Apertures 100 microns 42100-Au 42100-Pt 42100-Mo
Platinum apertures are easily cleaned by Nominal Cat. # Cat. # Cat.#
either an aperture flamer or over a bunsen Hole Size Gold Platinum Molybdenum
3mm O.D. x 0.12mm thick:
burner in the open air. We maintain a wide 10 microns – 47030-Pt 47030-Mo
Zeiss, Nanolab, Novascan 50 microns – 47050-Pt 47050-Mo
variety of Platinum Drilled Apertures in stock Nominal Cat. # Cat. # Cat.# 100 microns – 47100-Pt 47100-Mo
with different configurations suiting all of Hole Size Gold Platinum Molybdenum 150 microns – 47150-Pt 47150-Mo
your needs. 10 microns 43010-Au 43010-Pt 43010-Mo 200 microns – 47200-Pt 47200-Mo
Platinum Apertures size tolerances 20 microns 43020-Au 43020-Pt 43020-Mo
vary as follows: 30 microns 43030-Au 43030-Pt 43030-Mo
50 microns 43050-Au 43050-Pt 43050-Mo 6.35mm O.D. x 0.14mm thick:
T Nominal hole diameter: +/- 1 micron 60 microns 43060-Au 43060-Pt 43060-Mo ETEC Spray Aperture
T Disc diameter: +/- 10 microns 70 microns 43070-Au 43070-Pt 43070-Mo Nominal Cat. # Cat. # Cat.#
T Disc thickness: +/- 10 microns 100 microns 43100-Au 43100-Pt 43100-Mo Hole Size Gold Platinum Molybdenum
150 microns 43150-Au 43150-Pt 43150-Mo 500 microns – 47500-PtS 47500-MoS
200 microns 43200-Au 43200-Pt 43200-Mo 1000 microns – 471000-PtS 471000-MoS
300 microns 43300-Au 43300-Pt 43300-Mo

3mm O.D. x 0.24mm thick: 12.7mm O.D. x 0.25mm thick: Cambridge,

Philips, ARM, AEI, Cambridge Camscan Spray Aperture
Nominal Cat. # Cat. # Cat.# Nominal Cat. # Cat. # Cat.#
Hole Size Gold Platinum Molybdenum Hole Size Gold Platinum Molybdenum
5 microns 44005-Au 44005-Pt 44005-Mo 500 microns – 48500-PtS 48500-MoS
10 microns 44010-Au 44010-Pt 44010-Mo 1000 microns – 481000-PtS 481000-MoS
15 microns 44015-Au 44015-Pt 44015-Mo
20 microns 44020-Au 44020-Pt 44020-Mo * All hole sizes not listed are available upon special request.
25 microns 44025-Au 44025-Pt 44025-Mo
Gold Foil Aperture: 30 microns 44030-Au 44030-Pt 44030-Mo
40 microns 44040-Au 44040-Pt 44040-Mo
50 microns 44050-Au 44050-Pt 44050-Mo
60 microns 44060-Au 44060-Pt 44060-Mo
70 microns 44070-Au 44070-Pt 44070-Mo
100 microns 44100-Au 44100-Pt 44100-Mo
150 microns 44150-Au 44150-Pt 44150-Mo
200 microns 44200-Au 44200-Pt 44200-Mo
300 microns 44300-Au 44300-Pt 44300-Mo
400 microns 44400-Au 44400-Pt 44400-Mo

176 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec07_176-190_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 2:36 AM Page 177

Microscope Accessories SECTION 7

® Wehnelt Apertures ® Aperture Flamer
Made from 0.004” tantalum foil. Replaceable tantalum apertures For holding aperture discs or strips while flaming. Small
for some microscopes (Amray and Philips). They improve the discs can be flamed in the 3⁄16” diameter cup made from 6
performance of the electron gun. mil platinum foil with a 1⁄32” diameter hole in the bottom to
induce a good flow of air. The cup is attached by a 30 mil
platinum wire to a heat resistant handle. The aperture can
be hung from the hook for flaming.
40001 Aperture Flamer each
For holding 1⁄4” to 1⁄2” diameter aperture discs while
flaming. The flat pan is made from 6 mil platinum foil
49020-Ta Wehnelt Aperture, 200μm Hole each
with a 1⁄32” diameter hole in the bottom to induce
49030-Ta Wehnelt Aperture, 300μm Hole each adequate air flow. A 30 mil platinum wire attaches the
49040-Ta Wehnelt Aperture, 400μm Hole each pan to a heat resistant handle.
49050-Ta Wehnelt Aperture, 500μm Hole each 40002 Aperture Flamer each
49075-Ta Wehnelt Aperture, 750μm Hole each
49100-Ta Wehnelt Aperture, 1000μm Hole each
® Metal Boats
® Strip For disc aperture cleaning,
Apertures: vacuum evaporation.
All the following multi- Thickness: 0.05mm
hole strip aperture are (0.002”) Overall length:
made from Platinum-Iridium (95:5) and are standard in our line. 75mm (3”) Trough
Measures: 12mm (1.2”)
® HITACHI Strip Apertures long x 5mm (3⁄16”) wide x
Measures: 41.0 x 4.0 x 0.10mm – 4 holes 1mm deep
49211-01 Hole Sizes: 10-10-20-70μm each 73810 Molybdenum Boat 5/pk
49211-02 Hole Sizes: 30-20-20-70μm each 73812 Platinum Boat 1/pk
49211-03 Hole Sizes: 70-70-50-50μm each 73814 Tantalum Boat 5/pk
49211-04 Hole Sizes: 30-50-70-100μm each For Our Complete Line of Metal Wires,
49211-05 Hole Sizes: 10-50-100-200μm each
See page 967 UUUUU
Measures: 45.0 x 4.0 x 0.10mm – 4 holes
49212-01 Hole Sizes: 20-20-30-30μm each ® Molybdenum Boat for Strip Apertures
49212-02 Hole Sizes: 30-70-100-200μm each
Thickness: 0.05mm (0.002”) Overall Length: 75mm
49212-03 Hole Sizes: 10-30-50-70μm each
Trough Measures: 50mm (L) x 5mm (W) x 1mm (D)
® JEOL Strip Apertures
Measures: 9.0 x 2.35 x 0.10mm – 3 holes
49210-01 Holes Sizes: 10-30-80μm each
49210-02 Hole Sizes: 10-20-100μm each
49210-03 Hole Sizes: 30-50-150μm each
49210-02 Hole Sizes: 100-200-300μm each
® Other Strip Apertures
73818 Long Molybdenum Boat 5/pk
Measures 10.0 x 2.5 x 0.10mm – 3 holes
49213-01 Hole Sizes: 20-60-100μm each ® Tantalum Boats
Measures 31.0 x 5.0 x 0.10mm – 4 holes See Evaporation Supplies page 966-968 UUUUU
49214-01 Hole Sizes: 20-30-30-50μm each
Note: These are our standard strip apertures. For all other strip apertures or any
custom made ones please inquire.

® Metal Foils
For aperture cleaning, vacuum evaporation.
73820 Molybdenum foil, 0.002” thick, (0.05mm); ® Tungsten Boat
6x6”(15.2 x 15.2 cm) each
73822 Tantalum Foil, 0.003” thick, (0.075mm); Thickness: 0.05mm (0.002”) Overall Length: 32mm (11⁄4”) Trough
6x6" each measures: 12mm (1⁄2”) long x 5mm (3⁄16”) wide x 1mm deep.
For All Other Evaporation Supplies And Accessories, 73816 Tungsten Boat 5/pk
See pages 966-970 UUUUU
For our complete line of Tungsten Boats
see Evaporation Supplies pages 966-967 UUUUU

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 177
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec07_176-190_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 2:37 AM Page 178

SECTION 7 Microscope Accessories

® Recoating T.E.M. Viewing Screens; Phosphor Coatings
A proprietary process where 1 to 2 micron particles of phosphor are deposited on the screen and produce the highest
possible resolution. Because of our high quality, our coated viewing screens are now being supplied to many of the TEM
manufactures in the market, including JEOL, Phillips, Zeiss, Hitachi, Topcon, and Siemens.

Viewing Screen Surfaces 2000 X

Service Information:
For custom markings, please furnish us with your
specifications.
Phillips:
Cat. No. Description
2300 Main Large (200, 300, 400, CM series)
2310 Small Focusing (all series)
2320 Alignment
2330 New Main Large (300, 301, 400, 420, CM)
Zeiss:
Cat. No. Description
2340 EM9 Large & Small Combination
2350 EM10 Large
Typical factory-produced coating of a Surface of a GRANT recoated screen 2360 EM10 Small
major electron microscope manufacturer
2370 EM109 Large
2380 EM109 Small
Features of the Service 2390 EM902 Large
2400 EM902 Small
T Calibrated Screen for T Fiber Optic Plates T SEM Kikuchi Screens 2410 EM912 Large
Asbestos Analysis T CCTV Detectors T SEM Kikuchi Screens
(AHERA) T Digital Detectors T Image Intensifier
JEOL:
Cat. No. Description
T TEM Viewing Screens T RHEED System Screens Screens 2420 T7, T8
2430 100B, 100C, 100CX, 100S, 200CX Outer
2440 LInner Rectangle
Why Recoat? 2450 1200, 2000-4000 Series, Large
Viewing screens are easily damaged by the electron beam, 2460 1200, 2000-4000 Series, Small
especially at high accelerating voltages where knock-on 2470 New JEOL 100C, 100CX, 200CX Inner Rectangle
damage can be severe. For optimum viewing, fluorescent (main Screen) with Factory Film Format Marks
screens should be recoated regularly because coating & Calibration
efficiency decreases with prolonged electron irradiation. Hitachi:
Burning may be evident, but also, the inefficient state of the Cat. No. Description
coating may go unnoticed due to the gradual damage that 2480 HS9, HU11, H600 Inner Main, Final all
occurs with use. 2490 All Crescent/Outer
2500 H7000 Inner, H8000 Inner Main
2510 H7000 Outer, H8000 Outer
Recoating Process: 2520 Focusing
Recoating usually takes 3 to 5 days and involves: Siemens:
Cat. No. Description
T stripping off the old phosphors.
2530 Final IA, 102, Central Field
T polishing and cleaning the surface. 2540 Intermediate
T applying a new phosphor coating. 2550 Focusing, Button, Penny
T deposition of film format marks (factory standard) 2560 Outer, Crescent, Outer Field
custom markings, such as asbestos analysis circles Topcon:
(additional charge, ranging from 130.00, dependent Cat. No. Description
on your specifications). 2570 Large Viewing
2580 Focusing
Special Services: RCA
For those customers whom do not have a spare screen and Cat. No. Description
2600 Viewing
can not afford any down time we do offer a special weekend
express service(by prior arrangement). Briefly, your screen AEI
must be received by us on Friday, and we will ship it back to Cat. No. Description
you on Monday for Tuesday delivery. For this service, an 2610 Not Glass
additional 25% will be applied to the recoating price.
* All other screens that are not listed are available upon request.

178 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec07_176-190_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 5/17/15 3:03 PM Page 179

Microscope Accessories SECTION 7

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 179
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec07_176-190_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 5/17/15 3:03 PM Page 180

SECTION 7 Microscope Accessories

180 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec07_176-190_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 5/17/15 3:03 PM Page 181

Microscope Accessories SECTION 7

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 181
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec07_176-190_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 5/17/15 3:04 PM Page 182

SECTION 7 Microscope Accessories

182 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec07_176-190_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 5/17/15 3:04 PM Page 183

Microscope Accessories SECTION 7

Hexaboride crystals are grown and purified in an inert gas atmosphere to specified
crystal orientations.

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 183
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec07_176-190_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 5/17/15 3:04 PM Page 184

SECTION 7 Microscope Accessories

184 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec07_176-190_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 5/17/15 3:04 PM Page 185

Microscope Accessories SECTION 7

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 185
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec07_176-190_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 2:38 AM Page 186

SECTION 7 Microscope Accessories

® Apiezon Greases
Apiezon Greases are unique products, designed for use in
high vacuum work
T Excellent lubricants.
T High purity, low vapor pressure - non-contamination in analysis.
T The working temperature range of each grease is dependent on
the grade that is used.
T Easily applied, easily cleaned off.
T Silicone free. This benefits scientific users because the risk of sample
contamination and consequently the risk of interference in analytical
techniques such as infra-red or mass spectrometry, etc. is avoided.
T Approved by NASA and NATO

® Apiezon AP100 Grease

Silicone-free ultra high vacuum lubricating grease

® Apiezon Grease, Type AP101

Type 101 is an excellent general purpose, hydrocarbon grease, which is
intended for a variety of industrial and scientific applications.
T Anti-Seize Properties: The AP 101 contains PTFE which confers
superior anti-seize properties providing long lasting lubrication and
Apiezon AP100 Grease is a silicone-free vacuum grease and lubricant. ensuring smooth operation of stop cocks and taps. The value of AP
Containing PTFE, AP100 exhibits extremely high levels of lubricity and has 101 anti-seize properties are not limited to laboratory or glassware
been shown to provide eight times the level of lubrication offered by use, but are equally effective when used on metal equipment
standard, petroleumbased lubricating greases. which may be subject to seizure or corrosion.
Apiezon AP100 is designed for use at ambient temperatures (generally T Non silicone Grease: Being hydrocarbon based AP 101 does not
between 10 to 30°C / 50 to 86°F). If you are looking for a grease capable suffer from the problems of “creep” or “carry over” which is tradi-
of performing at higher temperatures, Apiezon AP101 or Apiezon H Grease tionally associated with silicone greases. It reduces sample con-
may be more appropriate. tamination and the risk of interference in analytical techniques
such as infra-red and mass spectrometry.
Benefits of Apiezon AP100 Grease T Wide temperature range: It can be used over a very wide range of
T Has anti-seize properties, making it an effective protector and temperatures, possessing its optimum consistency over the -15 to
lubricant in ultra-high vacuums +150°C temperature range, but is usable down to -40°C and, for
T Exhibits extremely high levels of lubricity limited periods, up to +180°C.
T Demonstrates an extremely low vapour pressure of 7 x 10-11 Torr at T Solvent resistant: Both PTFE and the lithium stearate gel base in
20°C AP 101 are insoluble in most solvents. They ensure that AP 101
T Recommended for use at ambient temperatures shows resistance to water, alcohols, ketones and esters. In addi-
T Does not suffer from contamination problems associated with sili- tion AP 101 resists attack from aqueous acid and alkali solutions,
cone based greases such as “creep” or “carry over” alcoholic alkali solutions and corrosive gases.
T Easy to clean and remove using hot water and an aqueous glass- T Under vacuum: AP 101 exhibits good vacuum properties, down to
ware detergent, hydrocarbon or chlorinated solvents 10-4 torr.
T Easily remove AP 101 by wiping it with a soft cloth. Any residues of
grease can be washed away with an aqueous glassware detergent.
Applications of Apiezon AP100 Grease
The unique properties of Apiezon AP100 lubricating vacuum grease mean it 60706-01 Apiezon Grease AP 101 50 g
is frequently used to protect stepping motors and gearboxes from corrosion 60706-40 Apiezon Grease AP 101 4 kg
and abrasion, particularly when they are subjected to high load conditions.
AP100 is also used to prevent seizure in stopcocks, taps and small metal
fastenings. ® Apiezon Grease; Type L
Grease L is a petroleum hydrocarbon grease, containing no additives. Very
The creep resistance of Apiezon AP100 benefits scientific and low vapor pressure (@20°C of 8x10-11 torr), high vacuum grade. Type L is
semiconductor users alike. AP100 helps to increase the accuracy of widely used in the stationary phase of gas liquid chromatography, and may
analytical techniques and improve yields in semiconductor manufacture by be used on all ground joints in a vacuum system (not for stopcocks). Its
contamination avoidance. solubility is as follows: in Ethanol at 20°C-0.003%; 60°C-0.005%; 100°C-
In addition, AP100 is used for surface coating applications where silicone 0.011%; 150°C-0.011%. Grease L softens and melts at about 47°C and
contamination can lead to poor surface adhesion and incomplete coating it is not recommended for joints where temperatures exceed more than
defects 30°C in use. Grease T is recommended for these higher temperatures.
60709 Apiezon AP100 Grease L 100g tube 60702 Apiezon Grease L 25g tube

186 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec07_176-190_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 2:38 AM Page 187

Microscope Accessories SECTION 7

® Apiezon Greases (continued) Vapor Pressure of Types L,M,N, and AP100
Greases over working temperature range

® Apiezon Grease; Type M

Similar to grease type L, but it contains more wax. Grease M has an
estimated vapor pressure @ 20°C of 2x10-9 torr, higher than Type L. Type
M is recommended for applications where a grease of moderately low
vapor pressure is required; such as for sealing ground joints on the
backing side of oil diffusion pumps.
60700 Apiezon Grease M 25g tube

® Apiezon Grease, Type N

Similar to Type L and Type M, but Type N grease has a special additive
which gives it a tenacious, rubbery consistency and provides an extra
cushioning effect which absorbs vibrations in equipment, making N grease
invaluable in fragile glass to glass joints, like burette taps, which Vapor Pressure of Type H Grease over working
continually risk fracture. Grease N is widely recognized and recommended temperature range
as the cryogenic vacuum grease of choice
60701 Apiezon Grease N 25g tube

® Apiezon Grease, Type H

Type H grease is designed for high temperatures (-10 to +240°C) in a
wide range of applications in both science and industry. With good
“friction”, grease H is ideal for use with laboratory glassware, but
combined with properties of high thermal conductivity, it is the perfect
choice for the electronics and space industries where heat sink media
require adhesion.
Grease H is a filled hydrocarbon which exhibits excellent thermal
conductivity, and strong absorption properties. The capability to absorb
greasy or chemical impurities on metal and glass surfaces is a value “tool” Vapor Pressure of Type 101 Grease over working
temperature range
required by electronic industries.
60703 Apiezon Grease, Type H 25g tube

® Apiezon Grease; Type T

Type T is designed for lubricating glass taps and for general purposes. Has
a melting point of 125°C and has an estimated vapor pressure @ 20°C of
5x10-9 torr. Although type T is useful at higher temperatures, it can also be
used at ambient temperatures.
60704 Apiezon Grease T 25g tube

Complete List of Vacuum Grease Properties

Typical Property AP101 AP100 Type H Type L Type M Type N Type T
Main Areas of Application General Lubricating High Temp High Vacuum General Vacuum Cryogenic Medium Temp
Typical Working °C -40–180 10–30 -10–240 10–30 10–30 -269–30 10–120
Temperature Range °F -40–365 50–86 14–464 50–86 50–86 -452–86 50–248
Dropping Point — °C >200 42–52 42–52 40–60 42–52 112–137
doesn't melt
ASTM.D 566-02 (IP 132/96) °F >392 108–126 108–126 104–140 108–126 233–278
Vapor Pressure @ 20°C / 68°F, Torr <1.0 x 10-5 7.0 x 10-11 1.7 x 10-9 7.0 x 10-11 1.7 x 10-9 6.0 x 10-10 4.6 x 10-9
Relative Density @ 20°C / 68°F 0.981 1.042 0.918 0.896 0.894 0.911 0.912
Resistant to Radiation *N/R *N/R *N/R Yes Yes *N/R *N/R
Lubricity 4 Ball Test 450 450 250 150 140 150 N/A
ASTM.D 2596 (IP 239/97), kg
Outgassing Characteristics TML N/A <1% <1% <1% N/A <1% N/A
ASTM.E 595-93(2003)e1 CVCM N/A <0.1% <0.1% <0.1% N/A <0.1% N/A
Viscosity of Molten @ 50°C/122°F N/A N/A N/A 766 413 N/A N/A
Grease, cSt @ 100°C/212°F N/A N/A N/A 62.3 29.8 N/A N/A
Coefficient of Expansion
0.00066 N/A N/A 0.00076 0.00075 0.00072 0.00073
per °C over 20-30°C
Thermal Conductivity, @ 20°C N/A N/A N/A 0.216 0.194 0.194 N/A
w/m °C @ -269°C N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 0.095 N/A
Specific Heat @ 25°C, J/g N/A N/A 1.7 N/A N/A N/A N/A
Electrical Strength, V/mil (0."001) N/A N/A N/A 730 850 820 730
Volume Resistivity, Ω cm N/A N/A N/A 1.2 x 1016 2.6 x 1016 2.0 x 1016 2.3 x 1012
Permittivity N/A N/A N/A 2.3 2.1 2.3 2.3
Loss Tangent N/A N/A N/A <0.0001 <0.0001 <0.0001 <0.0001

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 187
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec07_176-190_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 2:38 AM Page 188

SECTION 7 Microscope Accessories

® Apiezon Greases (continued) ® Apiezon Vacuum Sealing, Mounting,
and Etching Waxes
® Apiezon PFPE 501 Grease
High temperature lubricating vacuum grease, inert ® Apiezon Q Compound
Apiezon Q Compound is an effective temporary
vacuum sealant that is used as a short term solution
in situations which do not allow for the immediate
dismantling of a system for repair.
Why Use Apiezon Q Compound?
T Temporary vacuum sealant
EMS is happy to announce the release of a brand new revolutionary grease T Versatile product suitable for a
specifically for high temperature applications. PFPE 501 is a chemically multitude of uses
inert, high temperature and extreme pressure lubricant. With an upper T Excellent waterproof medium
operating temperature of 250°C and vapor pressure of 1.3 x 10-12 at 25°C, T Easy to use and to remove
it is robust, versatile and can be used for sealing and lubricating under the T 10 year shelf life
most extreme operating conditions. This includes environments where
aggressive chemicals and strong oxidising agents are regularly used. ® Apiezon Wax W
The Apiezon range of waxes features three products including the popular
Why Use Apiezon PFPE 501 Benefits of Apiezon PFPE Apiezon Wax W, also known as ‘Black Wax’. All three waxes in the Apiezon
Grease? 501 Grease range can be used as permanent or semi-permanent vacuum sealants or
T PFPE based T Extended equipment life mounting media. Apiezon Wax W is also a perfect etch resist.
T High temperature lubricant T High temperature lubricant Why Use Apiezon Waxes?
T For oxygen rich environments T Reduced equipment downtime T Versatile products suitable for T First-rate vapor pressure
T Ultra high vacuum T Lower service costs a multitude of uses characteristics
T Chemically inert T Life-time lubrication T Etch resist (Wax W only) T Excellent waterproof media
T Extreme pressure T Guaranteed Apiezon quality T High purity combined with T Easy to use and to remove
T Wide temperature range T Expert technical support powerful “gettering” & clean T 10 year shelf life
meltdown properties
Typical Properties Apiezon Waxes and Q Compound Applications
NLGI No. 2 Apiezon Wax W........Hard Vacuum Sealing/ Mounting Wax, Etch Resist
Penetration P60 280 Apiezon Wax W100 .......................Medium Hardness Vacuum Sealant/
Typical Working Temperature Range °C -15 to 250 ........................................................................................Mounting Wax
°F 5 to 482 Apiezon Wax W40........................Soft Vacuum Sealant/ Mounting Wax
Vapor Pressure @ 25°C / 77°F, Torr <1.3 x 10-12 Apiezon Q Compound ................................Vacuum Sealing Compound
Relative Density @ 25°C/77°F 2.003
4 Ball Wear Scar (mm) ASTM D2266 (40kg) 0.94 Waxes and Q Compound Properties
Outgassing Characteristics TML <1% Typical Property Wax W Wax W100 Wax W40 Q Comp.
ASTM.E 595-90 CVCM <0.1% Approximate °C 80–90 50–60 40–50 40–50
Evaporation 24hrs @ 100°C / 212°F 0.02 Softening Point °F 176 –194 122–140 104–122 104–122
Oil Separation 24hrs @ 100°C / 212°F 2.10 Estimated Vapor Pressure 4.5 x 10-9 4.5 x 10-9 6 x 10-8 1 x 10-4
Low Temperature Torque, g/cm 25°C / 77°F Starting 162.3 @ 20°C / 68°F, torr
25°C / 77°F Running 64.4 Temperature for °C 130 110 90 Ambient
Application °F 266 230 194
Vapor Pressure of PFPE 501 Grease over working temperature range Working Temperature °C -10–75 -10–45 -10–35 -10–30
Range °F 14–168 14–113 14–95 14–86
Water Permeability 0.8 x 10-8 1.6 x 10-8 1.6 x 10-8 N/A
g/cm/hr/mm Hg @ 25°C
Pack 1 Kg block 250g tin 250g tin 1 Kg
25 x 20g sticks N/A N/A N/A
Thermal/Electrical Properties
Thermal Conductivity °C 0.189 0.170 0.177 N/A
@ 20°C, w/m
Specific Heat @ 25°C, J/g 1.8 2.7 2.9 N/A
Loss Tangent 0.015 0.016 0.015 N/A
Permittivity 2.8 2.7 2.9 N/A
Volume Resistivity, Ω cm 6.31 x 10-15 1.64 x 10-15 5.06 x 10-15 N/A

Cat. # Description Qty.

60710 Apiezon Wax W 500 g
60711 Apiezon Wax W100 250 g
Cat. # Description Qty. 60712 Apiezon Wax W40 250 g
60708 Apiezon PFPE 501 Grease 100 g Tube 60713 Apiezon Q Compound 1 kg

188 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec07_176-190_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 2:38 AM Page 189

Microscope Accessories SECTION 7

® TorrLube® Vacuum Oil and Lubricant ® Dow Corning® Vacuum Grease
TorrLube® vacuum lubricants are manufactured to perform
better than any other vacuum grease or oil available.
T TorrLube® has no non-metal solids, e.g. silicone ball filters
T TorrLube® has high thermal conductivity to minimize temperature
difference between surface exposed to heat flux and heat sink surface
T TorrLube® is extremely stable up to 350°C
T TorrLube is 500 cSt oil at 40°C. TorrLube® has high viscosity so that
no fluid flows out between the solid surfaces.
A silicone lubricant for glass-to-glass joints and glass-to-rubber connections. It
TorrLube® Oil is an extremely pure PFPE is resistant to most chemicals and it is inert and heat stable.
(Perfluoropolyalkether) blend which is thoroughly 60705 Dow Corning Grease 150g tube
distilled and then filtered through a submicron
screen. TorrLube® Oil has the ability to withstand
thermal expansion and contraction as well as ® Invoil Oils (formerly known as Apiezon Oils)
chemical and mechanical stress, while still Consists of esters or specially selected hydrocarbon fractions.
maintaining consistent viscosity. These They were developed for vapor-diffusion pump fluids:
properties make TorrLube® the ideal lubricant for
bearings, automated slides, and screws that T High purity, very low pressure, very stable.
have a tendency to gall or cold weld while working under extreme conditions. T Pressures lower than 10-7 torr obtainable
TorrLube® Extreme Grease is white, odorless, nonflammable, and chemically T No need for cold trap.
inert products based on TorrLube® Oil and the most advanced PTFE thickener T Good pumping speed.
available. It does not contain Sodium or Iron. TorrLube® Extreme Grease T No corrosive deposits or vapors.
remains stable and will not break down under mechanical stress and lose its
ability to hold TorrLube® Oil. TorrLube® Extreme Grease helps prevent sticking,
Physical Properties of Invoil Oils Type B Type BW Type C
jumping, and mechanical noise, securing smooth, controlled movement. Vapor Pressure, torr @20°C 10-6 10-6 10-7
TorrLube in 1cc syringe – Each syringe contains 1 cc of TorrLube lubricant ®
Boiling Point,°C @ 1 torr 220 225 225
with a #22 gauge blunt needle attached for close application. This size is ideal Flash Point (open cup)°F 470 480 510
for use in small research units and for maintenance and service tool kits. Pour Point (ASTM) °F 15 10 5
Density, g/ml @ 20°C 0.872 0.882 0.875
Syringes are packaged in a clean room environment and the needles are @ 40°C 0.859 0.869 0.863
sealed to prevent contaminant or leakage. Viscosity, kinematic,cS @ 20°C 142 361 283
@ 50°C 49.3 98.1 90
Physical Properties of Torrlube® Extreme Grease @ 100°C 7.0 10.1 10.6
Properties............................................................................Typical Values Coefficient of Expansion 0.00073 0.00070 0.00069
NLGI Grade..............................................................................................2 per °C over 20-30°C (ASTM)
Viscosity (base oil), cSt @ 40°C (104°F)..............................................500 Thermal Conductivity Btu/in 0.91 0.89 0.96
Vapor Pressure, torr ....................................................................1 x 10-9
Density, g/ml @23°C (74°F) ................................................................1.9 ® Invoil Oil B
Volatility Loss (22 hrs @260°C), % ......................................................<1 Good for small or large vapor diffusion pumps. Good pumping speed
Appearance ..........................................................................White grease and high backing pressure. If a cold trap is used, oil B can obtain a
higher vacuum than oil C does.
60750-01 TorrLube® 1cc Syringe each
60750-20 TorrLube® 2 oz Cartridge each 60720 Apiezon Oil B 500ml

® TorrLube® Oil ® Invoil Oil BW

A water-white oil with a higher pumping speed than oil B, although all
A set of two small bottles, each containing 60cc of TorrLube® lubricant. Every other characteristics are similiar to B. Because it has an extremely high
bottle comes with a sealed cap. A luer lock cap and a #22 gauge blunt needle purity it is suitable for use in the evacuation of mass spectrometers.
are provided for closed application. The bottle set is appropriate for larger
manufacturing units and production fabs. Each twin pack of TorrLube® 60cc 60722 Apiezon Oil BW 500ml
bottles is sealed to prevent leakage and contamination.
Physical Properties of TorrLube® Oil ® Invoil Oil C
Obtains the highest vacuum pressure (10-7 torr) of all of the oils without
Properties............................................................................Typical Values
the need of a cold trap.
Viscosity (base oil), cSt @ 40°C (104°F)..............................................500
Vapor Pressure, torr......................................................................1 x 10-9 60724 Apiezon Oil C 500ml
Density, g/ml @23°C (74°F) ................................................................1.9
Volatility Loss (22 hrs @260°C), % ......................................................<1
Appearance ..........................................................................Clear Liquid For all other Oils and Greases see Vacuum Pumps,
Accessories and Supplies, page 965 UUUUU
60752-01 TorrLube® Oil,1x 60cc Bottle each
60752-02 TorrLube® Oil, 2x 60cc Set each

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 189
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec07_176-190_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 2:38 AM Page 190

SECTION 7 Microscope Accessories

® Santovac® 5 ® Platinum Crucibles
A Polymethyl Ether, designed for an ultra high Platinum has excellent resistance to chemical attack by
vacuum range: 10-10 torr. acids and fusion mixtures. This is what has made platinum
an essential tool in chemical analysis; flux fusions which
Ultra low vapor pressure results in low ultimate pressures; are widely used on a routine basis for the preparation of
there is no need for a cold trap and it is suitable for samples for x-ray fluorescence etc.
diffusion pumps. Santovac 5 may discolor with use but it All crucibles are made from platinum with an approximate
will maintain its physical properties. weight in grams and an approximate in millimeter with a
tolerance of ± 5% .
Typical Physical Properties of Santovac® 5 Lids are sold separately and in single units.
Vapor Pressure, @ 25°C 4 x 10-10 torr
Boiling Point,@ 0.5 torr 275°C
Density, @ 25°C 1.198
Viscosity, cS @ 27°C 1000
@ 38°C 363
@ 99°C 13.1
@ 149°C 4.5 Crucible Lid Capacity C A D Base Standard Lid
@ 260°C 1.2 Cat. # Cat. # ml mm mm mm Thickness Weight Weight Qty
Flash Point (open cup) 288°C 66500-1 66501-1 1 13 12.0 7.2 ---- 2 0.56 each
Pour Point 5 °C 66500-3 66501-3 3 19 17.0 10.0 ---- 5 1.30 each
Autogeneous Ignition Temp. 590° C 66500-5 66501-5 5 22 20.5 12.0 ---- 7 1.50 each
66504-2 66505-2 10 29 26.0 15.5 0.25 8.5 2.8 each
Refractive Index, nD25 1.6306
66504-3 66505-3 10 24 29.0 17.5 0.25 8.0 3.6 each
66504-4 66505-4 15 33 29.0 17.5 0.25 11.5 3.6 each
66504-5 66505-5 15 27 32.0 19.5 0.25 13.0 4.5 each
66504-6 66505-6 20 36 32.5 18.0 0.30 18.0 4.5 each
66504-7 66505-7 20 31 37.0 22.5 0.25 17.0 6.0 each
66504-8 66505-8 25 34 41.0 25.0 0.30 25.0 7.2 each
66504-9 66505-9 25 39 35.0 21.0 0.30 19.0 5.2 each
66504-10 66505-10 30 41 37.5 22.5 0.30 24.0 6.0 each
66504-11 66505-11 35 36 43.5 26.5 0.30 26.0 8.0 each
66504-12 66505-12 35 43 39.0 23.5 0.30 29.0 6.0 each
66504-13 66505-13 40 46 41.5 25.0 0.30 31.0 7.2 each
66504-14 66505-14 50 41 49.0 30.0 0.36 39.0 10.0 each
66504-15 66505-15 50 49 44.0 26.5 0.38 42.0 8.0 each

® PTFE Crucibles
Manufactured from pure PTFE, chemically inert and
usable to 280°C
Cat. # Vol., Ht, mm OD, mm Qty
66509-5 5 16 27 each
66509-25 25 26 44 each
66509-75 75 41 56 each
66509-100 100 45 60 each

*The information on this chart does not consitute a warranty ® Crucible Tongs and Tweezers
of any kind, express or implied.
These tweezers are meant to be used with
precious metal crucibles.
66510
60730 Santovac 5 100ml
60732 Santovac 5 500ml

For all other Oils and Greases see

Vacuum Pumps, Accessories and
Supplies, page 965 UUUUU
66511

Cat. # Description Length Pt Weight Qty

66510 Bowed Stainless Steel Tongs with Platinum Tip 200 mm 1.25 g each
66511 Stainless Steel Tweezers with Platinum Tip 130 mm 1.40 g each

190 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec08_191_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 2:48 AM Page 191

SECTION 8

Omniprobe Accessories
& Consumables
Nanomanipulation Probe Tips
Lift-Out Grids
TEM Holders
Thinning

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 191
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec08_192-194_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec08 6/30/14 2:39 AM Page 192

SECTION 8 Omniprobe Accessories & Consumables

This section is dedicated to the accessories and consumables from the Omniprobe family of Nanomanipulation Systems,
including: AutoProbe™ 200, AutoProbe™ AutoProbe™ 250, 300, Short-Cut™, OmniGIS™ and SST™ 400-1

 Probe Tips  Xtreme Access Short-Cut™ Probe Tips

Custom tip designed from tungsten. Tip radius is < 0.5μm with 6˚ taper
 Tungsten/Nickel Probe Tips angle for maximum lifetime service. [Compatible with Short-Cut™ system
Custom tip designed with a nickel tube shank and tungsten tip. Tip for direct conversion to TEM grid]
radius is 0.5μm with 13˚ taper angle for maximum lifetime service.
75960-06 XA Short Cut Tungsten Probe Tip 10/bx

 Xtreme Access Compatible

75960-01 Tungsten/Nickel Probe Tip 10/bx  XA Probe Point
Holder
 Tungsten Probe Tips Xtreme Access Probe Tip Holder
Custom tip designed from tungsten. Tip radius is 0.5μm with 13˚ taper for use with 1⁄2" tungsten probe
angle for maximum lifetime service. tip, #75960-04 and #75960-06.
Comes with a storage vessel.

75961-10 XA Probe Point Holder each

75960-02 All Tungsten Probe Tip 10/bx
 AP250 Probe
 In-Situ Probe Tips Tip Holder
AutoProbe™ 250 probe tip holder uses
Custom tungsten tip with a stainless steel shank, for use with
the tungsten probe tip 75960-05.
AutoProbe™ 300, in-situ probe tip exchange systems and Short-Cut™.
Compatible with the Short-Cut™ for
Tip radius is 0.5μm with 8 –10˚ taper angle.
direct conversion to TEM Grid.
[This tip is also Short-Cut™ compatible] Comes with a storage vial and handl
75961-05 AP250 Probe Tip Holder each

 XA Short-Cut™ Probe Tips

Custom tip designed from tungsten. Tip radius is < 0.5μm with 6˚ taper
75960-03 in-Situ Probe Tip 20/bx angle for maximum lifetime service. [Compatible with Short-Cut™ system
for direct conversion to a TEM grid]
 Xtreme Access 1⁄2" Tungsten Probe Tips 75960-06 AP250 Tungsten Probe Tip 10/bx
Custom tip designed from tungsten. Tip radius is < 0.5μm with 13˚
taper angle for maximum lifetime service.  End Effector
Type 3 (Straight)
Straight End Effector for Xtreme
Access probe shaft. Available in two
versions: Copper (Cu) and
75960-04 XA ½” Tungsten Probe Tip 10/bx Molybdenum (Mo)

75981-Cu Cu Straight End Effector Type 3 12/bx

 Autoprobe 250 Tungsten Probe Tips
Custom tip designed from tungsten. Tip radius is < 0.5μm with 6˚ taper
angle for maximum lifetime service. [Compatible with Short-Cut™ system
for direct conversion to TEM grid]

75960-05 AP250 Tungsten Probe Tip 10/bx

192 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec08_192-194_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec08 6/30/14 2:40 AM Page 193

Omniprobe Accessories & Consumables SECTION 8

 Omni Grids
 Copper Lift-Out Grids  Copper 3-Post Lift-Out
Custom copper lift-out grids specifically Grids, Side Access
designed for in-situ lift-out. These grids include 3 post copper lift-out grids, similar to 75964-
multiple indexed mounting locations with both 01, in design but 35 micron thick with 1 edge
vertical bars and “V” shaped attachment surfaces. 3mm diameter. lower for easy access. Packaged in glass vials
75964-01 Copper Lift-Out Grids 100/vial 75964-07 Copper 3-Post Lift-Out Grids, Side Access 100/vial

 Molybdenum Lift-Out Grids  Copper 3-Post Lift-Out

Custom molybdenum lift-out grids specifically Grids, Shallow Downset
designed for in-situ lift-out. These grids include 3 post copper lift-out grids specifically designed
multiple indexed mounting locations with both for in-situ lift-out. These grids include multiple
vertical bars and “V” shaped attachment indexed mounting locations with both vertical
surfaces. 3mm diameter. bar and "V" shaped attachment surfaces. These grids have a shallower
75964-02 Molybdenum Lift-Out Grids 25/vial downset and slightly wider center post than 75964-01. Packaged in
glass vials.
 Beryllium Haft-Ring Grids
75964-08 Copper 3-Post Lift-Out Grids, Shallow Downset 100/box
Custom beryllium haft ring grids. 3mm diameter.
 Copper 5-Post Lift-Out Grids
75964-03 Beryllium Haft Ring Grids 10/pk 5 post copper lift-out grids specifically designed
for in-situ lift-out. These grids include multiple
 Copper 5-Post Lift-Out Grids
indexed mounting locations, all with vertical bar
Custom copper 5-post lift-out grids specially attachment surfaces. Now with lower profile sides for easier access to
designed for in-situ lift-out. These grids include outermost posts. 3mm dia. Packaged in glass vials.
multiple indexed mounting locations, all with
75964-09 Copper 5-Post Lift-Out Grids 100/box
vertical bars attachment surfaces. Now with lower profile sides for easier
access to utermost posts. 3mm diameter.
 Copper 4-Post Lift-Out Grids
75964-04 Copper 5-Post Lift-Out Grids 100/vial
4 post copper lift-out grids specifically designed
 Copper 4-Post Lift-Out Grids for in-situ lift-out. These grids include multiple
Custom copper 4-post lift-out grids specially indexed mounting locations, two with vertical
designed for in-situ lift-out. These grids include bar attachment surfaces and two with "V"
multiple indexed mounting locations, two with shaped alighment surfaces. Sides have lower profile for easier access to
vertical bars attachment surfaces and two with outermost posts. 3mm dia. Packaged in plastic vials.
“V” shaped alignment surfaces. Sides have lower profile for easier 75964-10 Copper 4-Post Lift-Out Grids 100/box
access to outermost posts. 3mm diameter.
75964-05 Copper 4-Post Lift-Out Grids 100/vial  Omni Grid
Storage Box
 Molybdenum 4-Post Storage box for 100 standard or
Lift-Out Grids haft grids—3 mm diameter –
Custom Molybdenum 4-post lift-out grids TEM grids. Box comes complete
specially designed for in-situ lift-out. These with base, lid and clips.
grids include multiple indexed mounting
locations, two with vertical bars attachment surfaces and two with “V”
75965-01 Grid Storage Box each
shaped alignment surfaces. Sides have lower profile for easier access to
outermost posts. 3mm diameter.
75964-06 Mo 4-Post Lift-Out Grids 25/vial

Omniprobe TEM Grid Comparison Chart

Number of Thickness (Nominal) Nominal Post
Part Number Posts Material Microns Downset Microns Unique Feature
75964-01 3 Copper 30 10 —
75964-02 3 Molybdenum 30 10 Top Downset only
75964-03 0 Beryllium 25 N/A Half Ring
75964-04 5 Copper 40 10 5th Post is E
75964-05 4 Copper 30 10 —
75964-06 4 Molybdenum 30 10 Top DS Only
75964-07 3 Copper 30 5 Side Access
75964-08 3 Copper 30 5 —
75964-09 5 Copper 35 5 5th Post is “E”
75964-10 4 Copper 30 5 —

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 193
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec08_192-194_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec08 6/30/14 2:40 AM Page 194

SECTION 8 Omniprobe Accessories & Consumables

 Grid & Sample Holders  Short-Cut™ Coupons
 TEM Grid Dual Holders
Post Base TEM Grid Holder. Available in two versions:  Frontside Thinning, 45˚
stainless steel (SS—very slightly magnetic), can affect Frontside Thinning, 45˚, TEM sample grid
imaging in UHS mode; and aluminum (Al-non-magnetic). coupon designed specially for use in the
Short post – standard is 1⁄8" (3.2mm) diameter x 0.15" (4mm) length. Short-Cut™ tool. The center portion is a
75968-SS EM, Grid Dual Holder, SS each standard 3 mm grid into which the sample
75968-Al TEM, Grid Dual Holder, Al each loaded needle is swaged and cut 45˚. Available in two versions: One is
made from pure copper and the other is molybdenum coated copper.
 TEM Grid & Sample Holders 75974-Cu Frontside Thinning Copper, 45˚ 20/pk
TEM grid holder with stations for 2 TEM grids 75974-Mo Frontside Thinning Mo/Cu, 45˚ 20/pk
and 2 sample stubs. Available in
two versions: stainless steel (SS – very  Backside Thinning, 45˚
slightly magnetic), and aluminum (Al-non-
Backside Thinning, 45˚, TEM sample grid
magnetic). Long post – standard is 1⁄8"
coupon designed specially for use in the
(3.2mm) diameter x 0.32" (8.1mm) length. Comes with 2 sample stubs.
Short-Cut™ tool. The center portion is a
75969-SS TEM Grid & Sample Holder, SS each standard 3 mm grid into which the sample
75969-Al TEM Grid & Sample Holder, Al each loaded needle is swaged and cut 45˚. Available in two versions: One
made from pure copper and the Other is molybdenum coated copper.
 Single Stub & Two TEM Grids Holders 75975-Cu Backside Thinning Copper, 45˚ 20/pk
This station is meant for 2 TEM grids and 1 sample 75975-Mo Backside Thinning Mo/Cu, 45˚ 20/pk
Pin Stub. Available in two versions: Stainless Steel
(SS – very slightly magnetic), and Aluminum (Al –  Frontside Thinning, 26.5˚
non-magnetic). Long post – standard is 1⁄8" (3.2mm)
Frontside Thinning, 26.5˚, TEM sample grid
diameter x 0.32” (8.1mm) length. Comes with an
coupon designed specially for use in the Short-
aluminum sample stub.
Cut™ tool. The center portion is a standard 3
mm grid into which the sample loaded needle
75971-SS TEM Grid & Sample Holder, SS each is swaged and cut 26.5˚. Available in two versions: One made from pure
75971-Al TEM Grid & Sample Holder, Al each
copper and the other is molybdenum coated copper.
75976-Cu Frontside Thinning Copper, 26.5˚ 20/pk
 Single TEM Grid Holders & Holder Base 75976-Mo Frontside Thinning Mo/Cu, 26.5˚ 20/pk
Single TEM Grid Holder is made from aluminum
with steel spring, holds one 3 mm TEM grid by
the spring loaded vise, and has a raised edge
 Backside Thinning, 26.5˚
which protects the sample from accidental Backside Thinning, 26.5˚, TEM sample grid
damage. The holder has a 1⁄8" (3.2 mm) diameter coupon designed specially for use in the
x 0.32" pin (8.1 mm) length pin. It fits most Short-Cut™ tool. The center portion is a
standard pin stub holders.The Sample Holder standard 3 mm grid into which the sample
Base securely holds the Single TEM Grid Holder loaded needle is swaged and cut 26.5˚.
above, under a stereomicroscope and permits Available in two versions: One made from pure copper
viewing from two angles without changing focus. and the other is molybdenum coated copper.
75977-Cu Backside Thinning Copper, 26.5˚ 20/pk
75970-01 Single TEM Grid Holder each 75977-Mo Backside Thinning Mo/Cu, 26.5˚ 20/pk
75970-50 Single TEM Grid Holder Base each

Turn Your SEM into a 3D Measurement Device

MeX 3d Surface Metrology With The SEM
MeX is a stand alone software package that turns any SEM
with digital imaging into a true surface metrology device.
Using stereoscopic images the software automatically retrieves 3D information and
presents a highly accurate, robust and dense 3D dataset which is then used to perform traceable
metrology examination. The results are obtained irrespective of the SEM magnification providing
metrology at macro and micro levels.
For more information, see pages 670–675. 
194 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec09_195_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 3:41 AM Page 195

SECTION 9

Microanalysis Elements
Standards
MAC Reference Standards
for X-ray Microanalysis
MAC X-ray Microanalysis for TEM
Compound, Pure Metal, NBS,
and BAS Standards
MAC Reference Materials
for Auger Electron Microscopy
MAC Standards for X-ray Fluorescence
Spectroscopy
SEM PSEM Performance Standards
Repolishing Services

Jade Fe SeF2 InAs Ir MgO FeS2 Y Sn

Pt Al2O3 Co Zr Sb Au Ortho Ni Nb
BaF2 HgTe Wollas Cu Mo LaB6 PbTe Ti Zn
Rh CeAl2 Bi V GaP Pd Hf Cr Ge
Ag Ta Mn Se Cd W

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 195
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec09_196-204_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 3:37 AM Page 196

SECTION 9 Microanalysis Element Standards

 MAC — Reference Standards for X-Ray Microanalysis
We have approximately 200 standard materials to choose from. All of our standards  Individual Standards
are suitable for electron-beam energy dispersive or wavelength dispersive X-ray
Supplied in 2, 3, and 5mm diameter. Also Grains of
microanalysis systems. All of our standards are polished to a 0.25 micron diamond
standard materials are available and they measure
finish and carbon coated. They are supplied with fully authenticated certificates of
approximately 2mmx2mm in size.
analyses and a location map for standard identification. A Faraday Cup, for accurate
specimen current measurements, is available as an optional extra on all mounts. Singles Grains
The standards are available in different sizes of brass holders: Aluminum 80074-Al 80075-Al each
 25mm or 32mm diameter, containing up to 60 standards of your choice. Gold 80074-Au 80075-Au each
Arsenic 80074-As 80075-As each
 Carousels, 13mm diameter blocks(to fit pin stubs), and single Silver 80074-Ag 80075-Ag each
standards of 5mm, 3mm, 2mm diameter, are also available. Bismuth 80074-Bi 80075-Bi each
 Specials can be “tailor-made” to suit individual needs and specific stage configurations. Beryllium 80074-Be 800754-Be each
Boron 80074-B 80075-B each
 Customized Multi-Element Standards Cadmium 80074-Cd 80075-Cd each
Carbon 80074-C 80075-C each
(your choice from our list of compound, pure metal, NBS, or BAS Standards, etc.).
Chromium 80074-Cr 80075-Cr each
Pure metals and compounds mounted in brass blocks Copper 80074-Cu 80075-Cu each
Cat.# Description Pack Cat.# Description Pack Cobalt 80074-Co 80075-Co each
Iron 80074-Fe 80075-Fe each
80070-05 Block of 5 Standards 5/set 80070-30 Block of 30 Standards 30/set
Gadolinium 80074-Gd 80075-Gd each
80070-10 Block of 10 Standards 10/set 80070-35 Block of 35 Standards 35/set
Germanium 80074-Ge 80075-Ge each
80070-15 Block of 15 Standards 15/set 80070-40 Block of 40 Standards 40/set
Hafnium 80074-Hf 80075-Hf each
80070-20 Block of 20 Standards 20/set 80070-45 Block of 45 Standards 45/set Iridium 80074-Ir 80075-Ir each
80070-25 Block of 25 Standards 25/set 80070-50 Block of 50 Standards 50/set Manganese 80074-Mn 80075-Mn each
Please note: Please indicate the block size when ordering: 25mm or 32mm diameter. Magnesium 80074-Mg 80075-Mg each
Molybdenum 80074-Mo 80075-Mo each
Carousel configuration is supplied at an extra cost of to the above prices. Please note that for Niobium 80074-Nb 80075-Nb each
this configuration there is a maximum of 25 standards permitted. Nickel 80074-Ni 80075-Ni each
Osmium 80074-Os 80075-Os each
80062 Faraday Cup each
Palladium 80074-Pd 80075-Pd each
Platinum 80074-Pt 80075-Pt each
 NBS Standards Rhenium 80074-Re 80075-Re each
NBS Glass SRM 481 NBS Glass NBS Standard SRM 1872 Ruthenium 80074-Ru 80075-Ru each
Au/Ag Set of 6 Standards, SRM 482 Au/Cu Set of 6 Set of 3 glasses K-453, Rhodium 80074-Rh 80075-Rh each
Silicon 80074-Si 80075-Si each
comprises 4 alloys and 2 Standards, comprises 4 K491, K968.
Scandium 80074-Sc 80075-Sc each
pure metals. alloys and 2 pure metals. Selenium 80074-Se 80075-Se each
80076-01 NBS Standard 80076-02 NBS Standard 80076-03 NBS Standard Antimony 80074-Sb 80075-Sb each
SRM 481 Set 6/set SRM 482 Set 6/set SRM 1872 Set 3/set Tin 80074-Sn 80074-Sn each
Tantalum 80074-Ta 80074-Ta each
Tellurium 80074-Te 80075-Te each
 Universal Set Thallium 80074-Tl 80075-Tl each
A set of 42 standards for general Energy Dispersive Analysis, mounted in 25mm or 32mm Titanium 80074-Ti 80075-Ti each
diameter brass stub. Vanadium 80074-V 80075-V each
Tungsten 80074-W 80075-W each
Ag Al2O3 Au BaF2 Bi CaSiO3 Cd CeAl2 Co Yttrium 80074-Y 80075-Y each
Zinc 80074-Zn 80075-Zn each
Cr Cu Fe FeS2 GaP Ge Hf HgTe InAs Zirconium 80074-Zr 80075-Zr each
Ir KAlSi3O8 LaB6 MgO Mn Mo NaAlSi3O8 Nb Ni Cast Iron 80074-BAS 80075-BAS each
PbTe Pd Pt Rh Sb Se Sn SrF2 Ta Highly Alloyed 80074-BAS 80075-BAS each
High Carbon 80074-BAS 80075-BAS each
Ti V W Y Zn Zr Ferro-Chrome
Austenitic 80074-BAS 80075-BAS each
Cat # Description Pack Cr 19%, Ni 12%, Mo 3% 80074-NBS each
80071-25 Universal Set w/25mm Dia. Block set Cambridge Brass 80074-NBS each
80071-32 Universal Set w/32mm Dia. Block set Soda-Lime- 80074-NBS each
80062 Faraday Cup each Silica Glass
High Silicon Steel 80074-NBS each
 Biological Set Stainless Steel 80074-NBS each
A set of 18 standards, a Faraday Cup included. Mounted in 25mm or 32mm dia. brass block. SRM 160b 80075-NBS each
SRM 478 80075-NBS each
Al BaF2 BaSO4 Bi BN C CaCO3 CaSO4 FeS2 SRM 710 80075-NBS each
SRM 80075-NBS each
InP KBr KCl MgO NaCl Se SiO2 Ti V AISI 316 80075-NBS each
Cat.# Description Pack All compound, BAS standards, Austenitic Steels,
80072-25 Biological Set w/25mm Dia. Block set and NBS standards are available as single standards
80072-32 Biological Set w/32mm Dia. Block set or grains.

196 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec09_196-204_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 3:37 AM Page 197

Microanalysis Element Standards SECTION 9

 MAC — Reference Standards for X-Ray Microanalysis (continued)
 Special Holders
 Type 3
 Type 1
JXA 733 Standard Holder in brass; holds up to
JSM 35 Standard Holder in brass, holds
12 standards of your choice.
up to 21 standards of your choice.

80073-01 21 Standards for JSM 35 set 80073-03 12 Standards for JXA 733 set

 Type 2  Type 4
JEOL 100CX Standard Holder in brass for JEOL Temscan bulk Standard Holder
use in the STEM mode. Holds up to 7 made from plastic; holds 3-5 standards,
standards of your choice. fitted in a JEOL BR1 holder.
80073-02 7 Standards for JEOL 100CX set 80073-04 3-5 Standard for JEOL Temscan set

 MAC: X-Ray Microanalysis Reference Standards for Transmission Electron Microscopy

We offer an extensive range of fully authenticated compounds and single  Thin Foils for S.T.E.M.
element standards for the calibration of energy disperse X-ray detectors We have a selection of 25 high purity thin foils, 0.1mm thick, 3mm
that are used in conjunction with transmission electron microscopes. diameter to fit into TEM grid holders for use in the STEM mode. They
The standards available at present are: are polished to a 3 micron diamond finish, and come in a variety of
 Any selection from Thin Film compound standards pure metals:
 Universal Set of 25 compound standards Thin Foils for S.T.E.M.:
 Rare Earth Set
Aluminum Cadmium Cobalt Copper Gold
 Thin Foil Standards Set for S.T.E.M.
Hafnium Indium Iron Magnesium Molybdenum
 Thin Film Standards
These standards are supplied as fine powders that are dispersed onto Nickel Niobium Palladium Platinum Rhodium
holey-carbon films and are selected from the range of certified natural Silver Tantalum Tin Titanium Tungsten
and synthetic compounds already in use by us to prepare bulk analysis
standards. Vanadium Yttrium Zinc Zirconium AISI 316 S/S
The holey-carbon films are supported by a 3.05mm copper grid (400
mesh). However, for analysis under critical conditions, we can supply 80082-25 Thin Foil Standards for S.T.E.M. 25/set
alternative grid materials, such as beryllium or carbon composite. If
requested, we can disperse the standards onto uncoated grids.  Rare Earth Set
Universal Set of Thin Film Standards: This set consists of 14 rare earth compounds dispersed onto holey
carbon films (3.05mm, 400# copper grid).
Ag2Te BaSO4 Be3Al2Si6O18 Bi2Se3 CaMoO4
Rare Earth Set:
CaWO4 CdTe CeAl2 Cu2S FeCr2O4
LaF3 CeAl2 PrF3 NdF3 SmF3 EuF3 GdF3
GaAs Gd3Ga5O12 HgTe InP InSb
TbF3 DyF3 HoF3 ErF3 TmF3 YbF3 LuF3
KAlSi3O8 LaB6 Li2Ta2O6 (Mg,Fe)2SiO4 Na3AlF6
Pb-Ge glass SrTiO3 TlBr ZnS ZrSiO4 80086-14 Rare Earth Set 14/set

80080-25 Thin Film Universal Set 25/set Special Ordering Information:

Thin Film Standards of your choice (from list) onto a 3.05mm Please supply the following information when ordering:
diameter copper grid. 1) Make and model of instrument in which standards are to be used.
Cat # Description Pack 2) Specify quantity and standard materials required.
80080-01 1 Thin Film Standard each
3) Outer diameter of block or individual required.
80080-05 5 Thin Film Standards 5/set
80080-10 10 Thin Film Standards 10/set 4) Inner diameter where appropriate.
80080-15 15 Thin Film Standards 15/set 5) Thickness of block (5mm normally supplied).
80080-20 20 Thin Film Standards 20/set 6) Whether a Faraday Cup is required.
80080-30 30 Thin Film Standards 30/set 7) Any limitation of the x- and y- movements of the stage.
80080-40 40 Thin Film Standards 40/set
8) List of element Standards.
80080-50 50 Thin Film Standards 50/set
Note: For grid materials, other than copper, pricing is on request and delivery may be delayed. Delivery is normally 2-3 weeks.

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 197
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec09_196-204_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 3:37 AM Page 198

SECTION 9 Microanalysis Element Standards

Compound Standards
Formulae Name Formulae Name Formulae Name Formulae Name
AgCl Silver (I) Chloride ErF3 Erbium Fluoride Mg2Sn Magnesium Tin Alloy TaN Tantalum Nitride
Ag2S Silver Sulphide Eu2O3 Europium (III) Oxide MgAl2O4 Spinel TaSi2 Tantalum Silicide
Ag2Te3 Silver Telluride EuF3 Europium Fluoride MgF2 Magnesium Fluoride TbF3 Terbium Fluoride
Al,Cu,Mg Dural Fe2O3 Hematite MgO Periclase TbSi2 Terbium Silicate
Al,Mg,Si Fe2P Iron Phosphide MnF2 Manganese Fluoride TeO2 Tellurite
AlSb Aluminium Antimodide Fe3C Iron Carbide MnTiO3 Manganese Titanate Th Thorium Ree-Glass
Al,Si FeO Ferrous Oxide MoO3 Molybdenum (V1) Oxide ThO2 Thorium Oxide
Al2O3 Aluminium Oxide FeS Synthetic Trolite MoS2 Molybdenum (IV) Sulfide TiC (325 mesh) 98% Titanium Carbide
AlF3 Aluminium Fluoride FeSi2 Iron Silicide Na3AlF6 Cryolite TiC (solid) 99.5% Titanium Carbide
AlF3 Aluminium Fluoride anhydrous Ga2Se3 Gallium Selenide NaCl Sodium Chloride TiN Titanium Nitride 99.5%
AlN Aluminium Nitride GaAs Gallium Arsenide NaF Sodium Fluoride TiO Titanium Monoxide
B2O3 Boron Trioxide GaN Gallium (III) Nitride Nb2O5 Niobium Oxide TiO2 Titanium (IV) Oxide
B4C Boron Carbide GaP Gallium Phosphide Nd2O3 Neodymium Oxide TiSi2 Titanium (IV) Sulfide
Ba Barium REE Glass GaS Gallium Sulphide Nd Neodymium 12mm pcs 99.9% TlBr Thallium Bromide
BaF2 Barium Fluoride GaSb Gallium Antimonide NdF3 Neodymium Fluoride TlI Thallium Iodide
BaTiO3 Barium Titanate Gd2O3 Gadolinium (III) Oxide NiAs Nickel Arsenide Tm Thulium Ingot 99.9%
Bi2Se3 Bismuth Selenide Gd3Ga5O12 Gadolinium Gallium Garnet NiO Nickel Oxide TmSi2 Thulium Silicide
Bi2Te3 Bismuth Telluride GdF3 Gadolinium Fluoride Ni2Si Nickel Silicide U Uranium REE-Glass
BN Boron Nitride HfO2 Hafnium Oxide NiSO4 Nickel Sulphate UO2 Uranium Oxide
CaMoO4 Calcium Molybdate HgS Mercury Sulphide (black) NiP Nickel Phosphide VC Vanadium Carbide
CaWO4 Calcium Tungstate HgS Mercury Sulphide (Red) PbF2 Lead Fluoride V2O5 Vanadium (V) Oxide
CdS Cadmium Sulphide HgTe Mercury Telluride PbO Lead Oxide WC Tungsten Carbide
CdSe Cadmium Selenide HoF3 Holmium Fluoride PbS Lead Sulphide WSi2 Tungsten Silicide
CdTe Cadmium Telluride In2Se3 Indium Selenide PbS Galena WTi W 95%; Ti 5%;
CeAl2 Cerium Alumate In2Te3 Indium Telluride PbSe Lead Selenide Y2O3 Yttrium Oxide
CeF2 Cerium (III) Fluoride InAs Indium Arsenide PbTe Lead Telluride Y3Al5O12 Yttrium Aluminium Garnet
CeO2 Cerium (IV) Oxide InP Indium Phosphide Pr Praseodymium REE Glass YbF3 Ytterbium Fluoride
Co3O4 Cobalt (II,III) Oxide InS Indium Sulphide PrF3 Praseodymium Fluoride ZnS Zinc Sulphide
COSi2 Cobalt Silicide InSb Indium Antimonide Rb Rubidium REE Glass ZnSe Zinc Selenide
Cr3C Chromium Carbide K Potassium REE Glass RbBr Rubidium Bromide ZnTe Zinc Telluride
CrN Chromium (III) Nitride KBr Potassium Bromide RbI Rubidium Iodide Zrb2 Zirconium Boride
Cr2O3 Chromium Oxide KCl Potassium Chloride Sb2S3 Antimony (III) Sulfide ZrC Zirconium Carbide
Cs Caesium REE Glass La Lanthanum REE Glass Si3N4 Silicon Nitride (Powder)
CsBr Caesium Bromide La2O3 Lanthanum (III) Oxide SiC Silicon Carbide ZrN Zirconium Nitride
CsI Caesium Iodide LaB6 Lanthanum Hexaboride SiO2 Silicon Oxide ZrO2 Zirconium Oxide
CsNO Caesium...... LaF3 Lanthanum Fluoride Sm2O3 Samarium Oxide ZrO2 Zirconium Oxide Yttria
CuI Copper Iodide (Powder) Li2Nb2O6 Lithium Niobate SmF3 Samarium Fluoride Slab 99.5%
CuO Copper Oxide Li2Ta2O6 Lithium Tantalate SnO2 Tin Oxide ZrO2 Zirconium Oxide
CuS Copper Sulphide LiF Lithium Fluoride Sr Strontium REE Glass Tablets 99.995%
CuSO4 Copper Sulphate LuF3 Lutetium Fluoride SrF2 Strontium Fluoride REE Free Glass Blank
DyF3 Dysprosium Fluoride LuSi2 Lutetium Silicide SrTiO3 Strontium Titanate
Er Erbium REE Glass Mg,Al,Mn,Zn Magnesium Alloy Ta2O5 Tantalum Oxide

Pure Standards
Formulae Name Formulae Name Formulae Name Formulae Name
Ag Silver Fe Iron Os Osmium Ta Tantalum
Al Aluminium Gd Gadolinium Pb Lead (very soft material) Te Tellurium
As Arsenic Ge Germanium Pd Palladium Ti Titanium
Au Gold Hf Hafnium Pt Platinum Tl Thallium (very soft material)
B Boron In Indium (very soft material) Re Rhenium Tm Thulium
Be Beryllium Ir Iridium Rh Rhodium V Vanadium
Bi Bismuth La Lanthanum Ru Ruthenium W Tungsten
C Carbon Mg Magnesium Sb Antimony Y Yttrium
Cd Cadmium Mn Manganese Sc Scandium Zn Zinc
Co Cobalt Mo Molybdenum Se Selenium Zr Zirconium
Cr Chromium Nb Niobium Si Silicon
Cu Copper Ni Nickel Sn Tin

Natural Mineral Standards

Formulae Name Formulae Name Formulae Name Formulae Name
NaAlSi3O8 Albite BaTiS3O9 Benitoite Ca(Mg,Fe)Si2O6 Diopside (Mg.Fe)2SiO4 Olivine
Fe3Al2Si3O12 Almandine Garnet Be3Al2Si6O18 Beryl CaMg(CO3)2 Dolomite KAlSi3O8 Orthoclase
Ca3Fe2(SiO4)3 Andradite CaCO3 Calcite CaF2 Fluorite FeS2 Pyrite
CaSO4 Anhydrite SrSO4 Celestine Mg2SiO4 Forsterite MnSiO3 Rhodonite
Ca5(PO4)3(F,Cl,OH) Apatite BaAl2Si2O8 Celsian Mn3Al2Si3O12 Garnet Spessartine CaTiSiO5 Sphene
(Ca,Mg,Fe)2(SiAl)2O6 Augite FeCr2O4 Chromite NaAlSi2O6 Jadeite Zn2SiO4 Willemite
Cu3(CO3)2(OH)2 Azurite Cu2O Cuprite Al2SiO5 Kyanite CaSiO3 Wollastonite
BaSO4 Baryte (Cumbria) Cu2S Chalcocite Fe3O4 Magnetite ZrSiO4 Zircon
BaSO4 Baryte (Shropshire) CuFeS2 Chalcopyrite Cu2CO3(OH)2 Malachite

198 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec09_196-204_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 3:37 AM Page 199

Microanalysis Element Standards SECTION 9

Natural Minerals B.C.S. Stainless Steel Spectroscopic Standards
Formulae Name Formulae Name Notes
CaAl2Si2O8 Anorthite Powder S.S. No. 62 Austenitic B.S. 970 En 58D
K(Mg,Fe)3AlSi3O10(OH)2 Biotite Powder S.S. No. 63 Austenitic B.S. 970 En 58A & 58E
PbCrO4 Crocoite Powder S.S. No. 72 Ferritic -
PbS Galena S.S. No. 461 Austenitic -
Ca2,(Mg,Fe,Al)5(Al,Si)8O22(OH)2 Hornblende (Amphibole) S.S. No. 464 Austenitic -
FeTiO3 Ilmenite Powder S.S. No. 465 Austenitic -
SiTiAlFeMgCaNaKO Kaersutite (KK1-15 S.S. No. 466 Austenitic -
AlSi2O6 Pollucite S.S.-CRM No. 474 - B.S. 970, type 317
S.S. No. 495/1 13% Manganese steel Containing Ni & Cr
B.C.S. No. 204/4 High Carbon
Natural Minerals (No Certificate of Analysis) Ferro-Chromium -
Formulae Name BCS No. 179/2 High-Tensile Brass -
CaAl2Si2O8 Anorthite BCS/SS-CRM No 470 Ferritic Stainless Steel -
(Mn,Ca)SiO3 Bustamite BCS/SS-CRM No 355 Tin Ore Sn 31.42% MBH#206A355
SnO2 Cassiterite (Tin Oxide)
SrSO4 Celestine Assorted Standards
CuFeS2 Chalcopyrite
Formulae Name Notes
FeCr2O4 Chromite
CoAsS Cobaltite ISO 3585 Borosilicate 3.3 glass Duran glass
Chrome Diopside AISI 316 Stainless Steel EN58J Wire.
FeTiO3 Ilmenite AISI 304L Stainless Steel From Advent (1mm wire)
KalSi3O6 Microcline Glass No 1360-3 - -
NiS Millerite (Nickle Sulphide) B.S.153 AISI Grade 430 F Stainless Steel
(Ce,La,Th NdY)PO4 Monazite B.S. 154 Stainless Steel 430FR (High Silicon)
(Ce,La,Th)PO4 Monazite Powder
KAl2(AlSi3O10) Muscovite M.B.H. Standards
SiO2 Obsidian
ZnS Sphalerite Formulae Name Notes
LiAlSi2O6 Spodumene (Lithium Aluminium Silicate) 27X14386 Ni; Cr; Co; Mo Cast. =
Na4AlBe(Si4O12)Cl Tugtupite 11X S/1-CR1 Corr.Resist Cast Iron Chill cast.
Sb2O3 Valentinite (Antimony Oxide) 210X11775 Ni; Co; Cr; Al; Ti Cast. =
212NN50.01 Ni Rem; Cu 30%; BNF.
NIST/NBS Standards Sn 10%; Fe 4%.
31XWSB1 Silicon Brass Cast. =
Formulae Name Notes 59XG77J1 Al; Zn; Mg; Cu Cast. =
SRM 101g Cr 18%; Ni 10% AISI 304L Stainless Steel 81XPA12.5 Sb 12.6%; Pb 87.4% =
SRM C1287 High Alloy Steel AISI 310 Mod. ACI HK 111X12670 Cr 19.31%; W 10.1% Cobalt/Tungsten Cast.
SRM 160b Cr 19%; Ni 12%; Mo 3% AISI 316 Stainless Steel 204JC Fluorspar Swedish Inst for
SRM 121d Cr 17%; Ni 11%; Ti 0.3% AISI 321 Stainless Steel Metals Res.
SRM 343a Cr 16%; Ni 2% AISI 431 Stainless Steel 206ABL5 Uranium Ore. U 7.09% Canada Centre for Mineral
SRM 361 - AISI 4340 Steel and Energy Technology
SRM 132b - AISI M-2 Tool Steel 206A355 Tin Ore. Sn 31.42% BCS-CRM No. 355
SRM 478 Cu 73%; Zn 27% Cartridge Brass 13MBS89 Martensitic Stainless Steel AISI 410
SRM 481 Au/Ag Set of 6 Gold-Silver wires 13MBS91E Martensitic Stainless Steel AISI 430
SRM 482 Au/Cu Set of 6 Gold-Copper wires 13MBS186A High Alloy Stainless Steel INVAR 36
SRM 710 Soda-Lime-Silica glass - 14XHS1 High Speed Steel Tool steel T-1
SRM 1872 Set of three glasses K-453; K-491; K-968 (37MBS314B) Copper Alloy CDA 314, CDA 360,
SRM 1134 High Silicon Steel - (37MBS360A) CDA 630
SRM 1160 Ni-80% Mo-4% Fe-14% Electronic & Magnetic alloy (37MBS630
SRM 1276a Cu 67.5%; Ni 30.8% CDA 715 14HYT2/2 Steel =
SRM C2400 High Alloy Steel ACI 17/4 PH Ref 0683 Bronze (85c,5Sn,5Pb,5Zn) =
SRM 872 Phosphor Bronze B2 CDA 544 C13X170020 Austentic Stainless Steel =
SRM 179 High Silicon Steel - C55XG02D60 Aluminium/Silicon/Copper Chippings
SRM 480 W 78.5% Mo 21.5% Tungsten 20% Molybdenum Alloy (55XG900J5) Aluminium/Silicon/Copper Cast
(55XG26H5)
(55XG04H8)
BAS EURO Standards (55XG04H6)
Formulae Name Notes 43XZ2 Zinc/Aluminium/Copper Cast
481-1 Cast Iron - 55XG900JB Aluminium/Silicon/Copper Cast
281-1 Cr 18.7%; Ni 9.3% Highly alloyed steel 58XG40H9 Aluminium/Zinc Cast
553-1 High Carbon Fe-Cr B.C.S. No. 204/4 FCr-3-1 = =
14M B.S. 190 High Manganese
Stainless Steel
13X 18001 Austenitic Stainless Steel Cast
(65XMGA5) Manganese/Aluminium/ Cast
(65X MGA1) Zinc
(65XMGA3)
54X G231 H4 = =

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 199
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec09_196-204_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 3:37 AM Page 200

SECTION 9 Microanalysis Element Standards

 MAC – Reference Materials for Auger Electron Microscopy
MAC has developed multi-element blocks of reference materials suitable for the
compilation of a reference library of Auger sensitivity factors when used with the
Auger Electron Microscope (AES).

Auger Electron: one of the electrons ejected from an atom as a result of the
internal conversion of its own X-ray in the auger effect. Auger Effect: a process
in which an atom singly ionized by emitting one electron with energy in the X-ray
range instead of emitting the usual X-ray photon on recovery undergoes a
transition in which a second electron is emitted.
A carefully selected range of elements or compounds will enable the Contamination
surface analyst to compile a valuable reference library of spectra for those After the removal of Atmospheric contamination from the reference
materials of specific interest to his field of study. AES is of particular value materials using a rastered argon ion gun, no evidence of cross-con-
in the investigation of the surface chemistry of electronic materials. A set tamination by the Wood’s Metal was found above a detection limit of
of 33 relevant reference materials is designed for this purpose. 1 atomic weight %.
A Faraday Cup, for the accurate measurement of specimen current, is WARNING: The block of reference materials should not be baked prior to
available as an option on all reference blocks. analysis. Wood’s Metal melts at about 70ºC and also, because of its high
Multi-element blocks containing up to 50 reference materials can be made vapor pressure, cadmium vapor would be liberated into the specimen
to suit the configuration of the most instruments but, the actual number of chamber.
materials and the shape and size of the reference block is determined by A comprehensive library of spectra could be used to establish the relative
the physical limitations imposed by the specimen holder and chamber. The contribution of various elements in an unknown sample by the application
reference material each has an exposed area about 2 square mm. of a peak stripping routine.
Each block of reference material is made from AISI 304 grade austenitic
For those AES instruments equipped with a solid state energy dispersive X-
stainless steel, set with elements and compounds of your choice and
ray detector, a multi-element block of reference materials will enable the
polished to a 1⁄4 micron diamond finish. All blocks are supplied with
analyst to calibrate the E.D. system. (The problem associated with the
certificates of analysis and a map showing the locations of the reference
charging of any electrically insulating materials must be taken into
materials.The design of the reference blocks for AES is based upon that
consideration before attempting this calibration). This ability to analyze an
used for the production of our already established range of electron probes
unknown sample using the E.D. system to gain prior knowledge of the
X-ray microanalysis (EPMA) standard blocks. For surface analysis in ultra-
elemental composition will ensure that the correct peak positions are set
high vacuum (UHV) environments, the design of the AES blocks has three
before depth profiling by AES.
significant differences over the EPMA blocks:
Acknowledgment: The investigation was carried out on a JEOL-10S by Dr.
 For EPMA, the reference standards are set into drilled brass
blocks. However, for UHV, the brass would outgas, so non-mag- M.D. Hill of British Telecom Research Laboratories, Martlesham Heath,
netic stainless steel is used for the AES reference blocks. Suffolk.
 There is no coating of electrically conductive carbon on the AES Ordering Information
blocks. For EPMA, this coating is needed to neutralize any electron
beam induced charge. Please supply the following information when ordering:
 EPMA standards are mounted using epoxy resin, which would 1) Make and model of instrument in which the reference materials
rapidly outgas under UHV conditions. The AES reference blocks are to be used.
are set with Wood’s Fusible Metal. This is an alloy of bismuth, 2) Specify quantity and reference materials required.
lead, tin, and cadmium. 3) Dimensions of the block (with drawing is preferred).
Wood’s Metal, being electrically conductive, also serves as an electrical 4) Whether a Faraday Cup is required.
connection between the reference material and the stainless steel block 5) Any limitation of the X and Y movements of the stage.
thereby dissipating any electrical charge. However, some of the reference
materials are electrical insulators, so there must be charge neutralized  A. Multi Element Block
using a high specimen tilt angle or a lower primary beam accelerating Cat.# Description Pack
potential. 80095-05 5 Standards Set
The results of using Wood’s Fusible Metal as a mounting compound as 80095-10 10 Standards Set
follows: 80095-15 15 Standards Set
80095-20 20 Standards Set
Out Gassing 80095-25 25 Standards Set
The chamber base pressure immediately prior to block admission 80095-30 30 Standards Set
was 6.4x10-10 bar. After 24 hours, the chamber pressure was 80095-35 35 Standards Set
8.0x10-10 bar. This is the pressure that would be expected for a 80095-40 40 Standards Set
typical sample. Thus, the Wood’s Metal is acceptable as a mount- 80095-45 45 Standards Set
ing compound for the blocks of reference materials. 80095-50 50 Standards Set
80062 Faraday Cup Set
Electron Beam Damage
80095-481 SRM 481 Au/Ag Set of 6 Standards Set
No appreciable electron beam induced damage of the Wood’s 80095-482 SRM 482 Au/Cu Set of 6 Standards Set
Metal was noted despite prolonged exposure to a beam of 10kV 80095-483 SRM 483 Fe-Si
and 0.3 micro Amps. 80095-1872 SRM 1872 Set of 3 glasses Set

200 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec09_196-204_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 3:37 AM Page 201

Microanalysis Element Standards SECTION 9

 B. Electronics Materials Set:  G. Biological Block:
The set is comprised of 33 materials: The set is comprised of 18 materials with Faraday cup:
Ag GaP Bi2Te3 Si Ag2Te Zn GaAs Ni KBr BN Al CaCO3 FeS2 BaSO4 C SiO2 CaSO4 Se
W ZnS InP FeS2 Sn B Pt PbTe Cu Bi NaCl KCl Ti InP MgO KBr V BaF2
CaF2 LiF BN InSb Mg2Sn SiO2 CdS Al2O3 Sb Faraday Cup
C MgO Zr NaCl Pd Cr 80095-BIO25 18 Biological Materials, 25mm Dia. Set
80095-BIO32 18 Biological Materials, 32mm Dia. Set
80095-ELE Electronic Set of 33 Materials Set
 H. 42 Standard Universal Block:
 C. Mineral Block Set The block is comprised of 42 materials:
The set is comprised of 27 minerals:
Jade Fe SeF2 InAs Ir MgO FeS2 Y Sn
Beryl Be3Al2Si6O18 Anhydrite CaSO4
Pt Al2O3 Co Zr Sb Au Ortho Ni Nb
Cryolite Na3AlF6 Titanium Monoxide TiO
BaF2 HgTe Wollas Cu Mo LaB6 PbTe Ti Zn
Albite NaAlSi3O8 Rhodonite MnSiO3
Magnesium Oxide MgO Garnet Spessastine Mn3Al2Si3O12 Rh CeAl2 Bi V GaP Pd Hf Cr Ge
Fosterite Mg2SiO4 Ferric Oxide Fe2O3 Ag Ta Mn Se Cd W
Olivine (MgFe)2SiO4 Almandine Garnet Fe3Al2Si3O12
80095-U25 42 Standard Universal, 25mm Dia Block Set
Kyanite Al2O3SiO2 Pyrite FeS2 80095-U32 42 Standard Universal, 32mm Dia Block Set
Orthoclase KalSi3O8 Willemite Zn2SiO4
Calcite CaCO3 Celestine SrSO4  I/ 45 Standard + Faraday Cup Universal Block
Fluorite CaF2 Zircon ZrSiO4 The block is comprised of 45 materials and Faraday Cup:
Diopside Ca(Mg,Fe)Si2O6 Baryte BaSO4
B V GaP Pd Hf BN Cr Ge Ag
Augite (Ca,Mg,Fe)2(Si,Al)2O Benitoite BaTiSi3O9
Wollastomite CaSiO3 Apatite Ca5(PO4)3(F,Cl,OH) Ta C Mn Se Cd W Jade Fe SrF2
Gadolinium Gallium Garnet Gd3Ga5O12 Faraday Cup InAs Ir MgO FeS2 Y Sn Pt Al2O3 Co
Zr Sb Au Ortho Ni Nb BaF2 HgTe Wollas
80095-MINA Mineral Block, 25 mm Diameter Set
80095-MINB Mineral Block, 32 mm Diameter Set Cu Mo LaB6 PbTe Ti Zn Rh CeAl2 Bi
Faraday Cup
 D. Rare Earth (REE-Glass) Block:
The set is comprised of 15 standards, 25mm diameter block: 80095-UF25 45 Standard + FC, 25mm Dia Block Set
80095-UF32 45 Standard + FC, 32mm Dia Block Set
Y Pr Dy Er Ce Eu Ho Tm La
Sm Gd Yb Nd Tb Lu  J. 37 Standard + Faraday Cup
The block is comprised of 37 materials and a faraday cup.
80095-REG 15 Rare Earth Ree-Glass Block Set
B Cr GaP InAs Au C Mn SrF2 Sn
 E. Rare Earth Block:
The set is comprised of 18 standards: PbTe MgO Fe Zr Sb Bi Albite FeS2 Nb
BaF2 C Si Co Mo Hf Al2O3 Ortho Ni
LaB6 NdF3 TbF3 ErF3 LaF3 SmF3 TbSi2 Tm CeAl2
Pd Ta Wollas Cu Ag W Ti Zn Cd
EuF3 DyF3 TmSi2 PrF3 GdF3 HoF3 YbF3 LuF3 LuSi2
Pt Faraday Cup
80095-RE25 18 Rare Earth, 25mm Dia. Block Set
80095-RE32 18 Rare Earth, 32mm Dia. Block Set 80070-37 37 Standard and FC Dia Block Set 25mm each
80070-37A 37 Standard and FC Dia Block Set 32mm each
 F. Semi-Conductor Block:
The set is comprised of 21 materials:
 K. 55 Standard+ Faraday Cup
The block is comprised of 55 standards and a faraday cup
B Si Cu2S Ge InSb C CaF2 ZnS Ag2S
HgTe Mg2Sn FeSi2 GaP CdS PbTe Al2siO5 FeS2 GaAs BEI Si3N4 Cr GaP Pd Hf Bi B SiO2
InP Bi2Se3 Bi2Te3 Mn Ge Ag Ta BN Ortho Fe Se Cd
PbTe C KBr Fe3C SrF2 InAs W Albite CaF2
80095-SC25 21 Semi-Conductor Materials 25mm Dia. each
80095-SC32 21 Semi-Conductor Materials 32mm Dia. each
FeS2 Y Sn Re NaCl Woll Co Zr Sb
Ir MgO Sc Ni Nb BaF2 Pt Al2O3 Ti
Cu Mo LaB6 Au Si V Zn Rh CeO2
HgTe Faraday Cup

80070-55 55 Standard and FC Dia Block Set 32mm each

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 201
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec09_196-204_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 3:37 AM Page 202

SECTION 9 Microanalysis Element Standards

 MAC — Standards for X-Ray Fluorescence Spectroscopy
These standards are supplied as 11⁄4” (33mm) diameter pressed pellets or metal foils, and
are prepared from selected high purity elements and compounds to ensure interference
free-spectra. They are suitable for use by experienced spectroscopists as well as staff
training. Each of the pressed pellets is supported by a thin-walled aluminum cup which is
protected from damage during handling and minimizes the risk of touching the standard
materials (some of which are harmful). The precious metal foils are approximately 0.125mm
thick and are stretched across plastic supports. Standards are available for 60 elements.

 Universal Set of 20 Elements

Na Mg Al Si P
S Cl Ca Ti Cr
Mn Fe Ni Cu Zn
Nb Sn Ba W Pb

80090-20 X-Ray Fluorescence Universal Set 20/set  Any Selection from the following table:
80093-(element*) X-Ray Fluorescence Single Standard each
 Rare Earth Set of 10 Elements *Replace “element” by Single Standard when ordering (for instance 80093-Sn, 80093-Ag etc.)

La Ce Pr Nd Sm
Eu Gd Dy Ho Yb
80091-10 X-Ray Fluorescence Rare Earth Set 10/set

 Precious Metal Set of 5 Elements

Rh Pd Ag Pt Au

80092-05 X-Ray Fluorescence

Precious Metal Set 5/set

 Sample Storage Box

A sample storage box that holds either 10 or 20 of 11⁄4”
diameter discs. It is designed to store the element discs
securely; therefore, avoiding any contact with some of the
dangerous elements.
80063-10 Storage Box for 10 Discs each
80063-20 Storage Box for 20 Discs each

 Backscattered Electron Detector Calibration and SEM Performance Standards

 Backscattered Electron Detector  Electron Backscatter Particle Analysis
Calibration Standard Standard
30mm x 5mm Carbon Block In 13mm Aluminum pin stub
Checks Detector and SEM certified standards for system
Performance. calibration. Diamond polished to
Certified Standards For System 0.25um surface finish. Carbon
Calibration. Coated.
Contains: This standard allows user to go
 Standards to check across all grey areas.
1 Atomic number resolution.
 Faraday Cup to set
probe current.
 Duplex Brass to check 0.1
Atomic number resolution

80070-BED BED Calibration Standard each 80070-EBP EBP Calibration Standard each

202 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec09_196-204_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 7/2/14 2:30 AM Page 203

Microanalysis Element Standards SECTION 9

 Geological/Silicate Material Standards Block
Geological/Silicate Mineral Standards Block Layout
— — And Glass ZrSIO4 — —
— MgO C3Glass Apatite Jadeite TiO2
— BaSO4 Co CaSIO4 Fe2O3 Orthoclase
Rb Glass V FeS2 NaCl CaF2 Peridot
— Rhodonite Kyanite ZnS SrSO4 Ni
— Cr2O3 Akmandine Cu Diopside Al2O3

80086-28 Geological/Silicate Material Block each

 Sulphide Minerals/Oxide Heavy Metals Standards Block

Sulphide Minerals/Oxide Heavy Metals Standards Block Layout
— — — W Zircon Beam Locate —
— Ag2Te PbS Au CuFeS2 Th Glass
InAs Fe Co Cu Ni Rh
Ma Bi FeS2 Se SnO2 ZnS
— Ir CdS Mo HgS Pd
Nb Pt Ta InSb U Glass
— — And. Glass - - -

80086-30 Sulphide Minerals/Oxide Heavy Metals Standards Block each

 Quality Control Testing Standards Quality Control Test Set A

A new product that allows the user of the Scanning Electron Microscope to check
the performance of their instrument to make sure that it is working within the
manufacturer’s specification.
A useful tool to all Scanning Electron Microscope users such as Researchers,
Technologists, Quality Assurance Departments, and SEM. users with Energy
Dispersive or Wavelength Dispersive X-ray systems fitted, because it enables them
to readily assess the state of their instrument.
1. STANDARDS — Co (Cobalt) is compulsory for checking Energy Dispersive
analyzers. The customer can choose any other five from our lists, with the
exception of the SRM 481, SRM 482 and SRM 1872. (see pages 198-199) for
complete list)
2. DUPLEX BRASS — Used for checking the contrast efficiency of Back Scattered
detectors and it is capable of detecting two major copper/zinc phases of 0.1 atomic
number difference.
80150-25 Quality Control Test Set A set
3. FARADAY CAGE — A Faraday cage is used for measuring the current of the
beam at the specimen plane. The beam of electrons is focused inside the hole by
increasing the magnification so that when the hole fills the screen all the electrons Quality Control Test Set B
are trapped and a true measure of current is achieved. The Hole size in FC
aperture — 150 microns.
4. S168T — Is a sample of gold crystals on a carbon background which is useful
for checking the performance of the SEM under high-resolution conditions i.e. finer
than a 10 micron probe.
5. S1930 — Silicon test specimen with squares of periodicity 9.9 micrometers
lines about 1.9 micrometers wide which has formed by electron beam lithography -
used for magnification calibration and assessing image distribution.
All items 1 through 5 above (QCT A) can be mounted on a block 25mm diameter x
5mm thick
A larger version of the above is available with the following additions:
(a) S168U Gold on Carbon used for low KV resolution check.
(b) 1000 mesh and a 2000 mesh grid for magnification calibration of Scanning
Electron Microscope.
This larger (QCT B) version is mounted on a brass block 32mm diameter x 5mm
thick. 80150-32 Quality Control Test Set B set

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 203
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec09_196-204_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 3:38 AM Page 204

SECTION 9 Microanalysis Element Standards

 Standard Test Specimen  SEM Sample
The STANDARD TEST SPECIMEN keeps the Scanning Electron Microscope Holder
up to peak operating conditions. It is available in three models. Custom Made to Your
Choice!
The Sample Holder is perfect for
keeping all important SEM
test specimens together. All
specimens can be individually
and easily removed at any time for
use.
The brass sample holder is 50mm
diameter x 8mm thick and comes
in MAC’s standards presentation
box.

1. Three formats: Metallurgical

Biological
Geological
2. 32mm Diameter Brass Block consisting of 6 standards. One being
Cobalt the remainder is the customer’s choice.(see pages 198-199 for list)
3. Faraday cage.
4. B.S.D. Duplex Brass Reference Standard at No. Difference 0.1.
5. Resolution Grid either High or Medium.
6. Test Specimen for Magnification Calibration.
7. Certificate Booklet. It accommodates the following:
80154-00 Standard Test Specimen set 1. A 25mm or 32mm Diameter x 5mm Thick Brass Block containing
your Analytical Standards, or other smaller sizes if required.
2. Duplex Brass Single Standard
Used for checking the contrast efficiency.
 MAC — Repolishing Service 3. Ni/Cu B.S.D. Single Standard.
Every care has been taken with the production of your 4. Faraday Cage
For measuring the current of the beam at the specimen plane.
standards. Some materials (i.e. water soluble) can
5. E.D. Test Standards
deteriorate rapidly if moisture is present. The materials Three standards of your choice for E.D. test set up of calibration
used most readily can become contaminated over time. It center.
is recommended that the standards are returned to us for 6. Magnification Calibration Standard
Used for magnification calibration and assessing image distortion.
repolishing and refurbishment every two years.
7. Resolution Standards
Please call for pricing on our High and Low resolution standards for checking the performance of the
refurbishment service. S.E.M. under high resolution conditions.
80155-00 SEM Custom Sample Holder

204 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec10_205_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 3:52 AM Page 205

SECTION 10

Mailers and Shippers

Laboratory and Diagnostic Mailing Systems

Including:
Histopathology Mailers
Drug Test Kit Mailers
Mini Mailers
Vial Shippers
Insulated Shippers
Medical Transporters
and more...

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 205
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec10_206-212_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 3:44 AM Page 206

SECTION 10 Mailers & Shippers

THERMOSAFE® MAILING SYSTEMS ®
Tegrant Corporation, ThermoSafe Brands

® Diagnostic Specimen
Mailing Systems
These ready-to-use combination/triple packaging kits, have been
tested and certified for transport of diagnostic shipments as defined
by the applicable regulations, in compliance with IATA Packaging
Instruction 650, US, Postal Service and DOT regulations.
Each kit includes: approved 10 ml specimen tubes; leak-resistant
foam shippers that secure and protect 95kPa-certified specimen
tubes; absorbent material—sufficient to absorb complete
contents of approved primary receptacles filed with blood; Model 473 Model 472
waterproof tape; leak-proof pressure-lock poly bag; corrugated outer dimensions: 55⁄8" x 4" x 2" outer dimensions: 101⁄2" x 55⁄8" x 3"
shipping carton; UN3373 Biological Substance label and step-by-
step instruction sheet.
Cat. # Model Holds Includes Qty
61510-73 473 3 x 10 ml tubes Tubes, EPS mailer & lid, absorbent material, water proof tape, Corrugated 3 set
61510-72 472 8 x10 ml tubes shipping carton, press-lock poly bag, UN3373 label & instruction sheet 5 set

® Replacement Parts for Model 473 & 472: ® Accessories for Model 473 & 472:
Pack includes: tubes, absorbent material, waterproof tape, press-lock poly
Cat. # Description Qty bag, 200-lb corrugated shipping carton, and instructions
61510-76 For Model 473: Model 476 EPS 3/pk
mailer – 3 tube specimen mailer foam Cat. # Description Qty
61510-70 For Model 472: Model 470 EPS 10/pk 61510-74T For model 473: Model 474T accessory pack 3 sets
mailer – 8 tube specimen mailer foam 61510-71T For model 472: Model 471T accessory pack 5 sets

® Flexible Mailers (Without Tubes)

Complies fully with US Postal Service, DOT and IATA regulations for transport of clinical and
diagnostic specimens (UN3373) by air or ground; Domestic Mail Manual Part 8.6; Title 49 CFR,
Part 173, 199; and IATA Packing Instruction 650. Includes all required secondary and outer
packaging components. Users provide only leak-proof specimen containers (primary
receptacles), such as tubes, vials, cups, etc. Accommodates any size and quantity of specimen
containers that fit inside the flexible secondary envelope with required absorbent material.
Maximum capacity is 300 ml or less.

Corrugated Absorbent Bottle Wrap

Cat. # Model Carton I.D. Plastic Envelope Sheets 6" x 24” Qty
61512-70 570 4" x 4" x 91⁄2" 1 – printed with international biohazard 2 – 71⁄2" x 45⁄8" 240ml capacity 1 5/pk
51⁄4" x 8¾" I.D., 6" x 93⁄8" O.D./95 pKa (14psi)
61512-75 575* N/A 95 kPa Plastic Bag, 25/case 4 Bay 6¾" x 478", 50/cs 25/case Case
*Accessories kit for Model 570 & 571

CytoSep™ Family
The CytoSep™ Family is a series of Cytology
Funnel sample chambers specially designed to
concentrate cells into thin layer preparation.
These Cytology Funnels are disposable and manufactured to use with numerous
major models, such as Shandon Cytospin™ 4 Cytocentrifuge, the Sakura Cyto-
Tek™ Cytocentrifuge, the Hettich Cyto-System. They are safer than reusable
sample chambers and lower your risk of contamination to pathologic samples.

For more information, see pages 548–549 UUUUU

206 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec10_206-212_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 3:44 AM Page 207

Mailers & Shippers SECTION 10

®
Tegrant Corporation, ThermoSafe Brands THERMOSAFE® MAILING SYSTEMS
® LabMailer – ThermoSafe®
Maximum breakage protection for known non-hazadous blood, serum, ® Drug Test Kit Mailer
tissue, and other specimens. Accommodates VacuTainer® Microtainer® and
other collection/transport tubes. Available in multi-tube, slide, and All in one, easy to use drug
tube/slide combinations Lightweight polystyrene foam construction saves test mailing system that
postage. Reusable and recyclable. (® is trademark of Becton Dickenson). meets postal and courier
service regulations for non-
hazardous clinical
® Histopathology Mailer specimens.
This versatile combination mailer carries 10 vials, 2 slides packets, or 5
vials and 1 slide packet. Suitable use with Model 365 mailing sleeve

Kit consists of:

T 90 ml Specimen Bottle,
Screw Top Cap and Temperature Indication Label 13⁄4" dis. X3"
T Pad of Absorbent Material 4" x 23⁄4"
T Press-Lock Plastic Bag:, 57⁄8" x 93⁄8"
T Model 601, I.D. 6" x 3” x 21⁄2"; O.D. 7” x 4” x 31⁄2", 1⁄2" Wall
T Model 602, I.D. 6" x 3" x 21⁄2"; O.D. 7” x 4” x 31⁄2", 1⁄2" Wall
T Security Seal: 7" long x 1" wide

Cat. # Description Qty Cat. # Description Qty

61513-94 Model 394 Histopathology Mailer 10/pk 61514-00 Model 600 Drug Test Kit Mailer 10/pk

® Other Mailers and Accessories

61515-62 61515-39 61515-64

61515-09 61515-56 61515-69 61515-07

Holds Tube/Slide Specifications Tube Capacity Mailing Qty/

Cat. # Model Tubes Slides Tube Volume Tube Dimensions, mm Dimensions Sleeves Pk
61515-56 356 1 N/A 3, 5, 7,10 ml Dia:10.25 – 16; Length:75-103 110 x 16 mm 357 10/pk
61515-62 362 2 2 5, 7,10 ml Dia:10.25 – 16; Length:75-103 107 x 16 mm 363 10/pk
61515-64 364 3 N/A 3, 5, 7,10 ml Dia:10.25 – 16; Length:75-103 105 x 17 mm 365 10/pk
61515-07 407 4 8 7,10 ml Dia:16; Length:75-100 110 x 19 mm 408 10/pk
61515-39 339 5 N/A 3, 5 ml Dia:10.25 – 13; Length:75-103 105 x 13 mm 365 & 340 10/pk
61515-09 409 5 N/A 7,10,15, 25 ml Dia: 16; Length:75-150 170 x 16 mm 410 10/pk
61515-41 341 8 8 5, 7,10 ml Dia:10.25 – 16; Length:75-103 113 x 18 mm 342 10/pk
61515-69 369 N/A 10 N/A N/A N/A 370 10/pk

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 207
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec10_206-212_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 7/2/14 1:58 AM Page 208

SECTION 10 Mailers & Shippers

THERMOSAFE® MAILING SYSTEMS ®
Tegrant Corporation, ThermoSafe Brands

® Mailing Sleeves ® Aluminum Cans and Can Shippers

Sturdy 18-point white paperboard sleeves increase the cost-effectiveness Accommodates the most
of foam mailers. Reverse tuck closures enable foam mailers to withstand widely used laboratory
multiple trips. collection tubes, vials, and
bottles. Helps to prevent
breakage during handling and
shipment. Seamless
construction with lined screw-
cap to prevent leakage.
61516-42 completely autoclavable. EPS
foam mailers and mailing 61517-36
sleeves available.
61517-35
Can Ordering:
Can Recommended Qty/
61516-40 Cat. # Model Dimensions EPS Mailer Pk
61517-35 435 13⁄4" dia. 373 12/pk
Cat. # Model Fit Foam Mailer Qty / Pk X 4" H
61516-57 357 356 10/pk 61517-36 436 21⁄2" dia. 353 5/pk
61516-63 363 362 10/pk X 6" H
61516-40 340 364, 339, 394 10/pk
61516-65 365 364, 339, 394 10/pk EPS Foam Mailer Ordering:
61516-08 408 407 10/pk Cavity Outer Qty/
61516-10 410 409 10/pk Cat. # Model Measures Measures Pk
61516-42 342 341 10/pk 61518-73 373 2" dia. x 51⁄2" 61⁄4" x 31⁄4" x 31⁄16" - 10/pk
61516-70 370 369 10/pk 61518-53 353 23⁄4" dia. X 7" 4"x 4" x 81⁄2" 10/pk

® Vial Shippers
This unique array of shipping system protects frozen and refrigerated shipping vials. These ready-to- use
kits include everything to keep temperature sensitive goods in top condition. Just load your product, add
U-tek phase change material pack, and close the shipper.
T Shippers (Models 480-413 and 480-490) also include U-tek® and reusable polyethylene platform
T Shippers (Models 413-C24 & 490-C24) also include flexible polyurethane foam cushion

61519-24

Dimensions
Cat. # Model Holds Includes Inner L x W x H Outer L x W x H Qty / Pk
61519-13 480-413 12 of 28 mm Vials EPS container & lid, 24oz, U-tek phase change material, 8" x 6" x 7" 11" x 9" x 10" 2/pk
61519-90 480-490 48 of 28 mm vials reusable polyethylene platform & corrugated shipping carton 12”x101⁄4" x 51⁄2" 147⁄8" x 131⁄4" x 81⁄4" 2/pk
61519-24 413-C24 24 of 16 – 20mm vials EPS container and lid, corrugated shipping 8" x 6" x 7" 11" x 9" x 10" 2/pk
61519-48 490-C24 48 of 16 – 20mm vials carton and 24-hole flexible foam insert 12" x 101⁄4" x51⁄2" 147⁄8" x 131⁄4" x 81⁄4" 2/pk

Magnifying Lights: Green-Lite™

EMS is proud to introduce the next
generation of Magnifying Lights

Equipped with next generation, surface mount LEDs, these innovative designs
create the new standard for illuminated magnifiers. Your investment in new
technology quickly pays for itself through energy savings.
Made in the USA.

For more information, see page 890 UUUUU

208 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec10_206-212_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 7/2/14 1:59 AM Page 209

Mailers & Shippers SECTION 10

®
Tegrant Corporation, ThermoSafe Brands THERMOSAFE® MAILING SYSTEMS
® Mini Mailers for Temperature Sensitive Shipment
T Compact protection for temperature sensitive refrigerants
shipments, ideal for serums, tissues, and T Insulating, thick wall polystyrene foam
reagents construction
T Accommodate tubes, vials, ampoules, small T Walls on model 440 are 1" thick; walls on
bottles, and tissue flasks with space for model 312 are 11⁄2" thick.
Dimensions
Cat. # Model Inner Outer Wall Thickness Qty / Pk
61520-40 440 57⁄8" x 43⁄8" x 3" 8" x 6" x 51⁄4" 1” 12/pk
61520-12 312* 61⁄2" dia x 4" High 91⁄2' x 91⁄2" x 67⁄8" 11⁄2" 4/pk
*Model 312 is in corrugated carton.

® Mini Mailer/U-tek® Economy Packs

Cat. # Model Kit Includes Qty.
61521-43 443 Model 440 Mini Mailer and Model 432 U-tek® refrigerant packs -23˚C (-10˚F) 6/pk
61521-44 444 Model 440 Mini Mailer and Model 429 U-tek® refrigerant packs -1˚C (+30˚F) 6/pk

® More Mini Mailers and Accessories

T Maximum breakage protection for non-hazardous laboratory T Lightweight polystyrene foam construction saves postage
specimens. Ideal for biological, environmental, research and T Reusable and recyclable
development, public health, industries hygiene, and veterinary use T Standard mailing sleeves available
T Accommodate tubes, vials, bottles, petri dishes and cans

61522-05 61522-35 61522-34

Cat. # Model Holds Cavity Dimensions Mailing Sleeve Qty.

61522-34 334 Cans, screw cap vials, tube, swabs, air filter cartridges 8" x 21⁄4" x 11⁄2" 392 10/pk
61522-35 335 Specimen tubes, vials, swabs 57⁄8" x 11⁄2" x 11⁄2" 336 10/pk
61522-02 402 Tubes, vials, cans, bottles. Can be used with Poly-Pad Foam cushion, 4” x 3 ½” x 3 ¼” 372 10/pk
to keep containers from shifting
61522-00 400 1 or 2 standard petri dished 4" x 11⁄2" x 4" N/A 10/pk
61522-04 404 10 standard petri dishes 61⁄4" x 33⁄4" x4" 403 12/pk
61522-01 601 Bottles, cans, vials, cups. Can be fitted with foam insert to hold small kit components 6" x 3" x 2 ½” 602 10/pk
61522-05 605 100 ml sample containers, 4oz urine cup 33⁄4" x 21⁄4' x 11⁄2" 606 12/pk
61522-95 395 2 oz Boston round bottle 31⁄4" x 2" dia. 396 10/pk
Mailing Sleeves:
Cat. # Model Description Qty Cat. # Model Description Qty.
61523-92 392 Mailing Sleeve for Model 334 10/pk 61523-06 606 Mailing Sleeve for Model 605 12/pk
61523-36 336 Mailing Sleeve for Model 335 10/pk 61523-42 442 Mailing Sleeve for Model 440 12/pk
61523-72 372 Mailing Sleeve for Model 402 10/pk 61523-41 441 Poly-Pad for Model 440 12/pk
61523-03 403 Mailing Sleeve for Model 404 12/pk 61523-96 396 Mailing Sleeve for Model 395 10/pk
61523-02 602 Corrugated Carton for Model 601 10/pk

® 5-Bay Specimen Transport Bag

5-bay 95kPa specimen transport bag includes absorbent material each pocket, enough to absorb 15ml of urine or
10ml of blood. This multi layer polyethylene 95 kPa bag is IATA certified, marked with bioharzard symbol and detailed
closing procedures.

Cat. # Description Qty

61525-50 Model VIAL650: 9 x 93⁄8" O.D. tubes; 83⁄ x 11⁄2" I.D. each pocket 20/pk

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 209
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec10_206-212_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 7/2/14 1:59 AM Page 210

SECTION 10 Mailers & Shippers

THERMOSAFE® MAILING SYSTEMS ®
Tegrant Corporation, ThermoSafe Brands

® 95 kPa Transport Bag

Specimen transport bags are liquid tight and tamper evident. The patented adhesive closure and
continuous seal meet or exceed standards of all major air carriers and DOT. Polyethylene
construction and adhesive closure provides added security during handling by personnel.

Cat. # Model Description Qty

61525-51 951 Inside dimensions 6 x 93⁄8" 25/pk
61525-52 952 Inside dimensions 9 x 12" 25/pk
61525-53 953 Inside dimensions 9 x 16" 25/pk
61525-54 954 Inside dimensions 131⁄4" x 177⁄8" 10/pk

® Nylon Carrier – ThermoSafe®

Rugged lightweight totes ideal for transport of diagnostic and clinical specimens, even for field works. Washsble, weather resistant
nylon shell with thick-walled polystyrene foam insulation. Adjustable nylon carrying straps; for hand or shoulder carrying. Exterior
may be printed with your facility name or company logo (by your own). Five models with capacities from 0.17 to 1.6 cu.ft.
Volume Wall Empty Exterior
Cat. # Model Cu. ft. Thick Dimensions L x W x H Closure Weight Interior Color Qty
61528-78 478 0.17 21⁄4" 61⁄2 x 53⁄4 x 73⁄4" 115⁄8" x101⁄2" x 125⁄8" Zipper 2.0 lb Polys-tyrene Blue each
61528-54 454 0.82 11⁄2" 171⁄4 x 101⁄4 x 8" 201⁄4 x133⁄8 x 11" Velcro® 3.0 lb Nylon Red each
61528-55 455 0.96 2” 12 x 12 x 111⁄2" 16 x 16 x 151⁄2" Bayonet Style Clip 3.5 lb Nylon Red each
61528-58 458 1.0 11⁄2" 171⁄2" x 101⁄8" x 105⁄8" 201⁄4" x 131⁄4" x 133⁄4" Velcro® 3.0 lb Nylon Red each
61528-59 459 1.6 11⁄2" 17 x 97⁄8" x 161⁄2" 203⁄8 x 131⁄4 x 191⁄2' Bayonet Style Clip 4.5 lb Nylon Red each

® Infectious Shippers – ThermoSafe®

T Meet US Dept of Transportation (DOT) ® Infectious Shipper – Model 630
and IATA requirement for transport- ThermoSafe shippers include EPS foam container, flexible foam insert,
ing infectious substances (UN2814 clear plastic press-lock bag, secondary packaging and absorbent material
and UN 2900) for full capacity of blood, corrugated carton, and packaging instructions.
T 4 Models – Accommodate shipments
from 4-60 6 tubes/vials ® Dry Ice Overpack – Model 670
T Pre-assembled packaging includes Substance Shippers protect frozen samples for over four days. The EPS
everything needed for shipping infec- foam container and lid accommodates either Model 630 or Model 660B
tious agents in accordance with DOT shipper plus 25 pounds of dry ice. Foam insert holds in place while dry
Regulation 49CFR Parts 171 to 178 ice sublimates. Includes one Class 9 Miscellaneous Dangerous Goods 61535-30
and IATA Packaging Instructions 602. label (for dry ice) and shipping carton (Dry ice NOT included)
Note: Compliance with UN/DOT
regulations governing shipments of ® Infectious Shipper –
infectious substances in these approved Model INF3000
shippers is contingent on the use of all Infectious shippers include pressure vessel
supplied components. The shipper is with stop-lock lid, compartmentalized bubble
ultimately responsible for determining the pouch, 50 ml absorbent sheet, corrugate
suitability of packaging for use with outer carton with required markings,
contents. Consult appropriate regulations. 61535-10 shipper’s declarations and easy-to-follow
instructions. 61535-70
“infecon” is a Trademark of Com-Pac
International, Inc.
Vessel Internal Outer Measures Additional
Cat. # Model Dimensions Cushioning Capacity LxWxH Features Qty
61535-30 630 Aluminum can, Foam insert Four 16 x100 51⁄2" x 51⁄2" x 111⁄4" Includes 4 x 10ml 2/pk
3 x 6" mm tubes blood collection tubes
61535-60B 660B Aluminum can, Absorbent material, . Six 16 x 100 51⁄2" x 51⁄2" x 111⁄4" Flexible pressure vessel 2/pk
3 x 6" flexible pressure mm tubes max. accepts various size tubes
vessel & bubble wrap volume 60ml
61535-70 670 N/A EPS Insulated Overpack for Models 14"x14"x145⁄8" Foam insert holds 2/pk
Shipper 630 & 660B up to 25 lbs of dry
ice in place
61535-05 INF2000 0.5 L transparent Compartmentalized Six tubes 4" x 4" x 63⁄4" Liquid-tight container withstands 2/pk
container bubble pouch up to 95kPa pressure
61535-10 INF 3000 1.0L transparent Compartmentalized Up to 50 Ml 61⁄4" x 61⁄4" x 71⁄2" Liquid tight container withstands 2/pk
container bubble pouch up to 95kPa pressure;
vessel is autoclavable for re-use

210 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec10_206-212_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 3:44 AM Page 211

Mailers & Shippers SECTION 10

®
Tegrant Corporation, ThermoSafe Brands THERMOSAFE® MAILING SYSTEMS
® U-tek® - Ice-Packets ® U-tek® -Blue-Ice
Cushion fragile shipments, won’t Superior protection for shipping temperature sensitive materials. Maintains
dilute ice baths or damage samples. critical temperatures of serums, test samples, live or frozen tissues, organs
They remain frozen longer than and pharmaceutical for extended periods. Laminated, metalized film
regular ice without the melting exterior provides radiant heat barrier and resists punctures. U-Tek® -50°C /
mess. -58°F ultra low, high-tech phase change formula is ideal for products
T May be refrozen and reuse, which require extreme cold but may not tolerance dry ice or CO2. Eliminate
withstands pressure of 60 lb dry ice hazmat hassles.
per square inch for 5 minutes
or longer
T Refrigerant contains neutral pH
distilled deionized water and
proprietary materials certified 61533-06
by the US Food and Drug
Administration as food grade
chemicals; -1˚C / +30˚F-

Dimension
Cat. # Model Formula Weight LxWxH Qty
61530-29 429 -1˚C (+30˚F) 8 oz 6" x 8" x 3⁄4" 6/pk
61530-12 412 -1˚C (+30˚F) 12 oz 63⁄4" x 4" x 1” 6/pk
61530-96 596 -1˚C (+30˚F) 16 oz 61⁄2" x 61⁄2" x 7⁄8" 4/pk
61530-14 414 -1˚C (+30˚F) 24 oz 71⁄2" x 61⁄2" x 1" 4/pk
61533-05 61531-32 432 -23˚C (-10˚F) 8 oz 6" x 4" x 3⁄4" 6/pk
61531-18 418 -23˚C (-10˚F) 12 oz 63⁄4" x 4" x 1" 6/pk
61531-97 597 -23˚C (-10˚F) 16 oz 61⁄2" x 61⁄2" x 7⁄8" 4/pk
Cat. # Model Style Description Qty 61531-20 420 -23˚C (-10˚F) 24oz 71⁄2" x 61⁄2" x 1" 4/pk
61533-05 405 Mat 1 –16" x 2 ft sheet 1/pk 61532-60 760 -50˚C (-58˚F) 24 oz 61⁄2" x 61⁄2" x 1" 4/pk
61533-06 406J Single Individual Packet 100/pk 61532-61 761 -50˚C (-58˚F) 32 oz 93⁄8" x 73⁄4" x 1" 4/pk

® Insulated Shipper – ThermoSafe®

®
Tegrant Corporation, ThermoSafe Brands

These shippers and containers offer the ideal solution for the safe storage and delivery of most
refrigerated or frozen materials, including pharmaceuticals, laboratory specimens, serum and vaccines,
human organs, culture packs, and nuclear and isotope materials.
When shipping dry ice or utilizing dry ice as a refrigerant, these shippers provide excellent dry ice
sublimation – average dry ice usage in 11⁄2" thick wall units is 5 lbs for the first 24 hours; 3 – 4 lbs
thereafter.

61536-41

Dimensions L x W x H
Cat. # Model # Construction Inner Outer Wall Thickness Qty/pk
61536-11 411 Foam Box only 8" x 57⁄8" x 7” 11" x 9" x 10" 11⁄2" 2/pk
61536-41 413* Foam & Carton 8" x 57⁄8" x 7” 11" x 9" x 10” 11⁄2" 2/pk
61536-19 319 Foam Box only 8" x 57⁄8" x 87⁄8" 11" x 9" x 117⁄8" 11⁄2" 2/pk
61536-21 321* Foam & Carton 8" x 57⁄8" x 87⁄8" 11" x 9" x 117⁄8" 11⁄2" 2/pk
61536-16 316 Foam Box only 8" x 6" x 41⁄4" 11" x 9" x 71⁄4" 11⁄2" 2/pk
61536-18 318* Foam & Carton 8" x 6" x 41⁄4" 11" x 9" x 71⁄4" 11⁄2" 2/pk
61536-46 446 Foam Box only 10" x 10"x 7" 14" x 14" x 10" 13⁄4" 1/pk
61536-48 448* Foam &Carton 10" x 10"x 7" 14" x 14" x 10" 13⁄4" 1/pk
61536-89 489 Foam Box only 113⁄4" x 10” x 5" 15” x 131⁄4" x 9 x 16" 11⁄2" 1/pk
61536-90 490* Foam & Carton 113⁄4" x 10” x 5" 15” x 131⁄4" x 9 x 16" 11⁄2" 1/pk
61536-12 612 Foam Box only 121⁄2" x 121⁄2" x 9" 151⁄2" x 151⁄2" x 12" 11⁄2" 1/pk
61536-13 613* Foam & Carton 121⁄2" x 121⁄2" x 9" 151⁄2" x 151⁄2" x 12" 11⁄2" 1/pk
61536-14 614 Foam Box only 121⁄2" x 121⁄2" x 12" 151⁄2" x 151⁄2" x 15" 11⁄2" 1/pk
61536-15 615* Foam & Carton 121⁄2" x 121⁄2" x 12" 151⁄2" x 151⁄2" x 15" 11⁄2" 1/pk
61536-31 313* Foam & Carton 41⁄2" Dia x 71⁄2"H 71⁄4" x 71⁄4" x 9" 11⁄2" 2/pk
*These foam box sets suit for shipping by UPS or other carriers.

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 211
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec10_206-212_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 3:45 AM Page 212

SECTION 10 Mailers & Shippers

THERMOSAFE® MAILING SYSTEMS ®
Tegrant Corporation, ThermoSafe Brands

® Medical Transporters – ThermoSafe®

Insulated expanded polypropylene medical transporter is ideal for on-site
collection, storage, and transport of temperature sensitive specimens, 61537-30
medications, medical devices and organs.
T Durable nylon clad transporter
T Stain and impact resistant expanded polyethylene container
T Lightweight – ergonomic design
T Extra space for crushed ice and refrigerant gel pack
T Washable, weather-resistant.

Model 931, 932

Includes removable, rigid,
thermoformed tray—ideal for
washing and reusing; prevents Model 930
leaking inside and out of For operating rooms storage and
transport unit, reinforced blood bank transport, provides
durability. Adjustable, durable temperature control for packed red
carrying strap for shoulder blood cells and other temperature
transport. sensitive specimens
61537-31
T Qualified by ISC labs for
Model 932: also features a comfortable sturdy hand strap. temporary storage and transport
of packed red blood cells with
Model 931: 0.3 cu. ft volume and 3⁄8" wall thickness three 32oz Polar Pack Rigid
Bottle refrigerant and two 16oz
Model 932: 0.53 cu. ft. volume and 3⁄8" wall thickness
Polar Pack refrigerant.
T Maintains up to 8 packed red
Model 960 blood cell units at 1˚C – 6˚C
For mobile blood while in storage for 6 hours or
collection, cools and more and between 1˚C – 10˚C
stores whole blood while in transit for up to 24 hours.
units and other T Including operating instruction
temperature sensitive and test data for storage of
materials packed cells.
T Volume: 0.95 cu.ft. and 1” wall
T Qualified by ISC
thickness
labs for temporary
storage and
transport of both Model 640, 641
platelet (20˚C – 61537-60 Inner partition divides unit and separates specimens. 61537-40
24˚C for up to 8 Features built-in lid compartments for U-tek
hours) and non-platelet production (1˚C – 10˚C for up to 24 hours) refrigerant packs. Adjustable nylon carrying strap for
whole blood with crushed wet ice. hand or shoulder. Model 641 includes a vial foam
T Includes operating instructions and test data for cooling platelet insert that holds twenty four 5–15ml vials and one
and non-platelet production blood. model 418 U-tek®
T Volume: 1.60 cu. ft. and 1" wall thickness
Volume is 0.30 cu. ft. with 1⁄4" wall thickness. 61537-41

Dimensions L x W x H
Cat. # Model # Blood Unit Capacity Inside Outside Empty Weight Qty
61537-31 931 N/A 6” x 9” x 91⁄2" 6 ½” x 91⁄4" x 101⁄4" 2 lbs 1/pk
61537-40 640 N/A 101⁄4" x 71⁄4" x 8” 103⁄4" x 73⁄4" x 81⁄2" 1 lb 1/pk
61537-41 641 N/A 101⁄4" x 71⁄4" x 8” 103⁄4" x 73⁄4" x 81⁄2" 1 lb 1/pk
61537-32 932 N/A 8 ⁄4" x 11 x 9 ⁄2"
3 1
91⁄8” x 121⁄4" x 101⁄4" 2 lbs 1/pk
61537-30 930 8 153⁄4" x 103⁄4" x 123⁄4" 173⁄4" x 123⁄4" x 133⁄4" 7.1 lbs 1/pk
61537-LN 930LINER Replacement liner for Model 930 — 1/pk
61537-60 960 16 153⁄4" x 103⁄4" x 223⁄4" 173⁄4" x 123⁄4" x 243⁄4" 12.2 lbs 1/pk
61538 960Dolly — — — 4 lbs 1/pk

212 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec11_213_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 3:53 AM Page 213

SECTION 11

Specimen Preparation and

Embedding Supplies
General Supplies
Beakers and Bottles
Vials, Racks, Holders, and Lyophilization Containers
Plastic, Pasteboard, and Cocoon Boxes
Sample Storage Sets, Membrane Boxes, and Gel-Pak®
Embedding Capsules and Holders
Biopsy Pads, Cloth, Lens Tissues, Towels
Scribers, Slide Coating, and Release Agents
Molds, Chucks, and Holders
Weighing Boats, Canoes, Dishes, and Paper
Glass Knife Making Supplies
Laboratory Gloves
Ultramicrotomy Aid Tools
Cell Culture, Petri, Permanox Dishes, and Seals
Tissue Grinders
Lab-Tek® Chamber Slide Products
Wells, Plates, Covers, Tissue Culture Inserts
Mica Sheets and Disks
ACLAR®–Fluoropolymer Films
Pipettes and Pipette Fillers
Razor Blades, Scapels, and Saws
Tissue Matrices and Sampling Tools
Microscope Slides, Cover Glasses, and Coverslips,
Accessories
Microscope Slide Storage Boxes, Trays, Holders,
and Mailers
Microarrays and Hybridization
Filtration, Filters, Syringes, and Hypodermic Needles,
Swabs
Gel Electrophoresis and X-ray Autography

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 213
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec11_214-233_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 4:20 AM Page 214

SECTION 11 Specimen Preparation and Embedding Supplies

GENERAL SUPPLIES
Handle Your Ampoules Safely...  Aluminum Foil
Heavy duty foil, packed in a
 Break-Safe™ convenient box. Can be self
Ampoule Opener cut to any length you desire.
Comes 12” width, 500 ft.
EMS Introduces
long each roll.
Break-Safe™ allowing you to
safely open up to 3
ampoules at one time
Box style design allows one handed 60400 Aluminum Foil each
opening of up to 3 ampoules at a
time. Gently pressing down on the
lid snaps ampule necks clean while keeping them contained within the
 Apron;
device and away from fingers. After removing ampoule contents, simply Disposable
turn the device upside down over a trash receptacle to safely discard
A plastic, full length, bib-type
ampoules and tops.
apron. Handy protection in a
Features: compact envelope. Smooth
 4 inserts allow opening of 1ml, 2ml, 5ml and 10 ml ampoules finish, size 28” x 46”. (71cm
 Open ampoules easily and safely x 117cm; 11⁄4 mil thick)
 Transparency allows unobstructed viewing of ampoule contents
at all times 60900 Apron 100/bx
 Copolyester plastic construction has broad chemical resistance
 Atomizer
60607 Break-Safe™ Ampoule Opener each
Rubber Bulb
A natural rubber bulb with
 Ampoule Breaker; 4” tubing on one end. Used
Soft Silicone for dusting surfaces which
Reusable – Made should not be wiped. A
from soft silicone. two-way valve is inserted into one end to prevent suck back and a rubber
It offers a simple nozzle prevents scratches on the surface that have to be cleaned. This
way to break pre-scored glass device also reduces the need for freon dusters.
ampoules safely. Accommodates TYPE A TYPE B
5, 7, and 10 ml size ampoules.
Reduces injury and spillage. Capacity 75cc 45cc
Center Diameter 53mm 52mm
60600 Ampoule Breaker; Soft Silicone each Length without valve and tube 105mm 62mm
Base Diameter – 35mm
 Ampoule Cracker™
The Ampoule Cracker™ is a 60804 Atomizer Type A each
60806 Atomizer Type B each
disposable plastic fracture and
safety collar, which is specially
designed to aid in the breaking  Easy Duster
open of pre-scored glass EMS is pleased to release
ampoules. Simply slip the Ampoule this small hand held device
Cracker™ over the top at the pre- which easily blows clean air
scored portion, snap it, and discard when the Duster is
both the ampoule top and the squeezed eliminating the need for dusting rags, brushes and even Duster
safety collar to prevent cross compressed gas cans.
contamination.
60805 Easy Duster each
Cat # Description Pack
Ampoule Cracker
60605-04
for Ampoule Size 1 – 4 ml 500/pk
 Cutemol Cream;
60605-10 Ampoule Cracker Protective Hand Cream
for Ampoule Size 5 – 10 ml 500/pk Contains five skin softening compounds, plus allantion to
60605-20 Ampoule Cracker relieve dry, fissuring, peeling, chapped, or irritated skin.
for Ampoule Size 10 – 20 ml 500/pk
70550 Cutemol Cream 50g

214 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec11_214-233_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 4:21 AM Page 215

Specimen Preparation and Embedding Supplies SECTION 11

GENERAL SUPPLIES
 Brush; Red Sable  Camel Hair Brushes
Extremely soft and pliable. Perfect for the manipulation of pre-viously Useful for dusting and cleaning
fixed, dehy-drated specimens into embedding capsules or molds. embedding center, balances, and
sensitive instruments. Camel hair is
mounted on wooden handle with
metal ferrule. Available with three
styles:
 Round, camel hair portion has
full body and slightly pointed
tip. Brush size 3⁄4" diameter x
11⁄2" long. Overall length is 9".
 Paint brush style 1, camel hair
portion is 1" long x 1" wide.
Overall 6" long.
 Paint brush style 2, camel hair
portion is 11⁄4" long x 2" wide.
Overall 81⁄4" long.
3 2 1 O 2/0 3/0 4/0 5/0
Cat. # Description Pack
66100-50 Brush, Red Sable, Size #5/0 each 65575-01 Camel Hair Round Brush each
66100-30 Brush, Red Sable, Size #3/0 each 65576-01 Camel Hair Paint Brush, Style 1 each
66100-20 Brush, Red Sable, Size #2/0 each 65577-01 Camel Hair Paint Brush, Style 2 each
66100-00 Brush, Red Sable, Size #0 each
66100-01 Brush, Red Sable, Size #1 each
66100-02 Brush, Red Sable, Size #2 each  Scratch Brushes with Metal Ferrules
66100-03 Brush, Red Sable, Size #3 each
66105* Brush, Red Sable, Set of 3 set
*Set of 3 sizes: #2/0 (fine point), #1 (small), and #3 (medium)

 Stirring Rods
Available in two versions: pure
PTFE solid rod with tapered end
and pure PTFE with bendable
steel core. The version with steel
core can be bent into a
permanent shape. Rods are inert
and will not scratch,
use up to 280°C.

Cat # Rod Length Rod OD, mm Qty

PTFE with Steel Core Rods
66200-10 100 mm (4") 6 each
66200-15 150 mm (6") 6 each These pen shaped handles are available in four different types. They are
66200-20 200 mm (8") 6 each
offered with metal ferrules for improved durability. Used for fine
66200-25 250 mm (10") 6 each
66200-30 300 mm (12") 6 each
deburring, polishing, as well as rust removal and the cleaning and
66200-35 350 mm (14") 6 each removal of deposited wax.
66200-40 400 mm (16") 6 each The overall length is 41⁄4" long, and the brush is 1⁄8" wide.
Solid PTFE Rods Refills are available and are packaged 12/box.
66201-10 100 mm (4") 8 each Cat.# Cat.#
66201-15 150 mm (6") 8 each Brush Complete for
66201-20 200 mm (8") 8 each Material Brush Pack Refill Pack
66201-25 250 mm (10") 8 each Steel Ferrules Brush 65582-01 each 65582-R1 12/pk
66201-30 300 mm (12") 8 each Nylon Ferrules Brush 65582-03 each 65582-R3 12/pk
Fiberglass Brush 65582-05 each 65582-R5 12/pk
Brass Brush 65582-07 each 65582-R7 12/pk

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 215
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec11_214-233_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 4:21 AM Page 216

SECTION 11 Specimen Preparation and Embedding Supplies

GENERAL SUPPLIES
 Notebooks, PolyPaper®  Tissue
PolyPaper® is a Trademark of Nalgene® for a special spunbonded polyethylene “paper” designed Adhesive
for exceptional strength and resistance to moisture and chemicals. Records written or printed on Permabond 910.
PolyPaper® are virtually indestructible. PolyPaper® outperforms conventional papers, even with
special coatings. It is unaffected by fresh or salt water. The non-absorbent, lint-free material Contains cyanoacrylate ester.
resists mildew, tearing, fraying, curling, aging and discoloration. Chemical spills rinse off easily. Immediate bonding of
PolyPaper® accepts any writing device. You can even write on it with No. 2 pencil under water. biological specimens. It is not
water soluble. Used for
 Laboratory Notebooks mounting specimens for
Vibratome sectioning.
Valuable notes and data are permanently secured
RT 72590 Tissue Adhesive 1oz
in these hand cover, case-bound books –
important for documenting research.
 Quick Bond
 Thick polyethylene cover, uncoated PolyPaper® pages An ultra fast, room temperature curing adhesive; a
 Waterproof, and extremely chemical resistant cyanoacrylate monomer. It bonds with virtually no
 50 sheets are numbered and printed with a fine green 1⁄4", shrinkage to almost any non porous surface except
grid or horizontal 3 lines per inch fluorocarbons. Comes in a convenient dispensing
 Pages include spaces for dates and signatures of workers tube, 2g each.
and witnesses, for securing patent protection, measures:
91⁄4" x 111⁄4" (235 x286mm)
 Other pages include instructions for keeping research records, table of contents, and
the page for issuing the notebook
Cat. # Mfr. # Cover Color Qty
38020-10 6300-1000 Lab Notebook, Black each
38020-20 6300-2000 Lab Notebook, Blue each

 Spiral Field Notebook

Coated PolyPaper® pages – Blue
polyethylene cover
 Flexible yet durable cover, with sheets
permanently bound with spiral binding
 Chemical and moisture resistance ideal for
fieldwork RT 72588 Quick Bond 5/pk
 Pages are printed on both sizes with a fine
green 1⁄4" grid and numbered 1 through 96
 Title and table of contents pages. Each page has space for date and signatures of
 Mascot® Instant Adhesive
workers and witnesses to research records
 Page measures 9" x 111⁄4" (229 x 286 mm)

Cat. # Mfr. # Description Qty

38021-10 6303-1000 Field Notebook each

 Laboratory Paper Notebooks

Paper pages – Water Resistant Cover
 These notebooks feature permanently bound A gel type, no-drip formula that fills the gaps and is
pages with grid lines ideal for use on vertical surfaces. A high
 Acid free pages with spaces for dates, title, performance, extended range cyanoacrylate
project number, book number, and witness adhesive that bonds metals, most plastics, rubber,
signatures ceramics, and glass, in seconds. It is optically
 Each Notebook contains periodic and conver- transparent and sets in about 30 seconds depending
sion tables in the back upon the objects being joints. Pack 0.1 oz (3g) per
 Admissible as court evidence when used as dispensing tube.
prescribed by law RT 72587-01 Mascot® Instant Adhesive 3g
 Page measures: 81⁄2" x 11" (216 x 279 mm)
Cat. # Description Qty For all other Adhesives and
38025-10 Laboratory Notebook, 100 pages each Mountants, See Chemicals Section,
38025-20 Laboratory Notebook, 200 pages each pages 9-21 

216 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec11_214-233_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 4:21 AM Page 217

Specimen Preparation and Embedding Supplies SECTION 11

 Tri-Corn Beakers; Plastic, Disposable
Three dripless pouring spouts. Resistant to most chemicals.Autoclavable —The beakers can withstand
temperatures up to 121°C. Metric graduations.
Size Graduations Height Diameter
Cat.# ml ml mm mm Pack
60968 50ml 5ml 55mm 44mm 100/pk
60970 100ml 10ml 73mm 53mm 100/pk
60972 250ml 10ml 90mm 72mm 100/pk
60974 400ml 20ml 110mm 80mm 100/pk
60976 800ml 50ml 134mm 107mm 100/pk
60978 1000ml 50ml 147mm 112mm 100/pk

 Beakers Staccup; Plastic, Disposable

 Resistant to most chemicals.  Anti-drip ridge.
 Frosted marking area.  Heavy gauge polypropylene.
 Customary and metric graduations.  Suitable for parafilm cover.

60950 Staccup 120cc 25/pk

60952 Staccup 120cc 100/pk
60960 Staccup 500cc 25/pk
60962 Staccup 500cc 100/pk

 Tri-Corn Beaker Caps

The caps are available for all Tri-Corn beakers. The caps are wax impregnated, have lift-tabs, and
may be written on for sample identification.
60969 Cap for 50ml Beaker 500/pk
60971 Cap for 100ml Beaker 500/pk
60973 Cap for 250ml Beaker 500/pk
60975 Cap for 400ml Beaker 500/pk
60977 Cap for 800ml Beaker 250/pk
60979 Cap for 1000ml Beaker 250/pk

 Discups™; Disposable Paper Beakers

With environmental awareness in mind these disposable paper beakers create less waste and is as
economical as plastic.
 Graduated in English and Metric units  Very economical.
(1⁄2 oz. or 10cc increments).  Most popular size: 4 oz. (120 ml)
 Made from unwaxed, plain finished paper.

60954-10 Discups™, 120cc 100/pk

60954-20 Polystyrene Lids 100/pk

 Beakers PTFE® Catalog # Capacity Inside Measures mm

Is statically molded from Beaker Cover ml Height Diameter
virgin PTFE and machine 60936 60936-C 1 18 10
finished to give a smooth 60938 60938-C 5 26 17
surface for ease of cleaning 60940 60940-C 10 33 21
and to eliminate 60941 60941-C 25 47 28
60942 60942-C 50 58 38
contamination. Supplied
60944 60944-C 100 70 48
with a pouring spout and 60946 60946-C 250 95 60
they are virtually immune to 60947 60947-C 400 106 73
chemical attack. Working 60948 60948-C 500 125 73
temperature range is from 60949-06 60949-06C 600 127 80
cryogenic to 260ºC (500ºF). 60949-10 60949-10C 1000 155 92
Ideal for use in wafer 60949-20 60949-20C 2000 200 114
etching.

Cat. No. Description Qty.

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 217
Fax (215)
XXXXX 412-8450 orDispenser
Measure-Matic™ 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
each
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec11_214-233_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 4:21 AM Page 218

SECTION 11 Specimen Preparation and Embedding Supplies

 Thermotech™ PTFE Beakers  Bio-Pure™ Sure-Footed
This product features a unique combination of a Beakers
pure PTFE Body with a specially formulated 100% Biodegradable
stabilized PTFE-Carbon base as a single molding
to give the following:  Sure-Footed - Innovative outer beaker base
 A totally inert pure PTFE inner surface ensures stability with small volumes of
liquid.
 Heatable to 270°C without distortion
 Biodegradable - Made from the same
 Improved heat transfer
environmentally conscious Bio-PET as our
All PTFE Beaker caps can be used for same- Bio-Pure reservoirs.
sized Thermotech™ PTFE Beakers.
 Thermally Insulating - Air void allows
beakers to hold liquid temperatures 30%
longer than standard polypropylene beakers
 Unique Pipet Rest - Diametrically opposed
grooves act as a pipet rest when not in use

Alternate Uses:
 The thermal retentive characteristics of the Sure-Footed
Beaker allow it to be used as a small bucket for ice/dry ice.
 Allow beaker to sink in a water bath by piercing or melting a
ventilation hole in the beaker rim.
 Beakers may be covered or piggybacked to increase thermal
insulation.
Cat # Description Size ml Qty
68553 Sure-Footed Beaker 250 ml 50/pk

EMS # Description Qty

60930-10 Thermotech, 100ml,
74mm H x 56mmOD
each
 Glass Microbeakers
60930-25 Thermotech, 250ml, each For the processing of micro-samples and for visual
94mm H x 75mmOD or microscopic examination, staining, fixation,
60930-40 Thermotech, 400ml, each infiltration, liquid evaporation, bacterial growth,
112mm H x 85mmOD weighing, etc...

 Beaker-Store;
Cat.# Size (ml) Dia x Hgt (mm) Pack
Instrument Store 60980 1ml 12mm x 13mm 100/bx
For the first time 60982 2.5ml 21mm x 13mm 100/bx
EMS introduces a 60984 5ml 25mm x 19mm 100/bx
60986 7.5ml 25mm x 25mm 100/bx
unique beaker
with a silicone
bottom that allows  Microbeaker Holder
you to store all of Brushed aluminum rack holds six 12mm O.D. microbeakers in unique, stepped “see-through” holes
your tweezers and for illuminated and microscopic observation of samples.
tools in cleaning
solution and never
damage the tips.
Instruments may be placed in the beaker with the
tips only immersed in distilled water and or
cleaning solution. This allows the instruments to
be kept clean and safe and ready to use . The
Silicone bottom prevents the tips of the
instruments from being damaged and the top of
the beaker is compartmentalized and segmented Cat # Description Qty
allowing for each tool to be kept separate. 72645 For 12mm OD. Beakers each
72645-10 For 22mm & 25mm OD. Beakers each
The beaker measures 10 cm in diameter and it is
8 cm in height.
Safety Bulb, See page 292 
Cat. # Description Qty.
68113-05 Beaker Store each Bulbs; Rubber, See page 292 

218 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec11_214-233_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 4:21 AM Page 219

Specimen Preparation and Embedding Supplies SECTION 11

 Glass Sample Bottles With Plastic Snap Cap  Volume Labeled
For collecting and exhibiting a wide variety of specimens in the lab or field. Narrow Mouth
Caps snap over a special sealing ring to form an effective barrier to moisture, Wash Bottles
making these bottles especially suitable for hydroscopic materials.
The volume (in millimeter) of each
Note: The following sizes are also available: 30, 40, 48, 60, 90, 120,and 180 ml. Please call for polyethylene wash bottle is silk screened
prices and availability.
in highly visible and chemical resistant ink.
All have one piece polypropylene cap and
nozzle assemblies. 4/pack.

64172 500 ml (16oz) 28mm Cap 4/pk

64173 1000 ml (32oz) 38mm Cap 4/pk

 Wash Bottles; Permanently Labeled

Permanently Labeled/Color-Coded Wash Bottles. These safe wash bottles,
which are permanently labeled and color-coded, eliminate the risk of
Cat.# ml Dia. x Ht, mm Cap Size Pack dispensing the wrong liquid by mistake. All of these wide-mouth (easy
64250 4 23 x 27 22 mm 144/pk transfer liquid) polyethylene bottles have polyalomer caps and a fine-tip-
64252 8 22 x 39 22 mm 144/pk nozzle that may be cut back for heavier flow.
64254 12 22 x 51 22 mm 144/pk
64256 16 30 x 40 30 mm 144/pk Capacity is 16 oz (500ml), low density polyethylene.
64258 24 30 x 52 30 mm 144/pk
64260 32 30 x 63 30 mm 144/pk

 Replacement Snap Caps for the above bottles:

Cat.# Description Pack
64251-22 Natural Polyethylene Snap Cap Size 22 mm 200/pk
64257-30 Natural Polyethylene Snap Cap Size 30 mm 200/pk

 Sample Bottles,
PVC Transparent
These lightweight transparent 64150 Acetone Wash Bottle each
PVC sample bottles come with 64151 Acetonitrile Wash Bottle each
snap-on tight-fitting caps and 64153 Dichloromethane* Wash Bottle each
they offer excellent clarity, 64154 Ethanol Wash Bottle each
64155 Ethyl Acetate Wash Bottle each
durability, and good chemical
64157 Isopropyl Alcohol Wash Bottle each
resistance. 64158 Methanol Wash Bottle each
Maximum temperature -20°C (- 64159 MEK Wash Bottle each
4°F) to 80°C (176°F). 64161 Soap Wash Bottle each
Cat.# Capacity (ml) Neck Opening, (mm) Height (mm) Pack 64162 Toluene* Wash Bottle each
64264-03 30 25 48 50/pk 64165 Water Wash Bottle each
64264-05 50 36 60 50/pk Group of Six - Variety includes: Acetone, Methanol, Water, Iso-propyl
64264-10 100 34 75 50/pk Alcohol, Ethanol and Toluene*
64167 Group of Six - Variety 6/pk
 Fluid Dispenser *Short term storage only
Bottles
These ESD safe polyethylene  Dispensing
solvent dispensers are Bottles
available in three standard Made from low-density polyethylene
sizes. These dispensers have with a dropper closure and captive
neither a stopper nor a cap to cap. The tip has a 0.003" (0.76mm)
remove. Just touch the opening. The bottles are supplied
dispensing dish with a brush capped in shrink-wrapped packs
cloth or applicator and solvent is brought to the surface instantly as of ten.
needed. Stainless steel valves seal contents in bottle until used. The fluid
pumps into the dish and it does not drip back into the bottle, keeping Cat.# ml Dia. X Ht, mm Pack
stored liquids uncontaminated. Surface resistivity of 10E7 to 10E9 64290 30 31 x 115 10/pk
64292 60 39 x 128 10/pk
Catalog # Description Qty/Box
64294 150 50 x 144 10/pk
64299-01 Fluid Dispenser, 120 ml each
64295 250 59 x 176 10/pk
64299-02 Fluid Dispenser, 180 ml each
64296 500 74 x196 10/pk
64299-03 Fluid Dispenser, 240 ml each

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 219
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec11_214-233_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 4:21 AM Page 220

SECTION 11 Specimen Preparation and Embedding Supplies

® Measure-Matic™ Dispenser ® Autoclavable Carboys
Makes repeated measuring and pouring easy! Ideal for storing and dispensing
T Adjustable for volumes from 5ml to 25ml large batches of double-distilled
T Just squeeze and check the fluid level water, buffers and salts
T Dust cover included T Excellent chemical resistance
T Large handles assist in transport
To use: Cup and closure are
T Molded-in bung accepts easy-to-use
Adjust the dispensing cup to made of rugged polypropylene spigot
the desired volume, then polypropylene
squeeze the 500ml (16 oz) T 83mm polypropylene buttress screw
reservoir bottle. cap includes a built-in silicone gasket
Reservoir bottle is for positive seal
The desired volume of liquid
will flow through the tube made of squeezable T Steam autoclavable 121° C (250° F)
and into the cup. low-density • Rugged polypropylene construction
Excess liquid will flow back polyethylene T Spigot can be operated with one hand
into the reservoir bottle. FDA grade polypropylene compliant with 21CFR177.1520 for direct
contact with food and beverages
USP Class VI Certified
Note: When autoclaving, do not engage cap threads.
Cat. # Description Qty.
Cat. # Description Qty. 64299-13 10 liters (2.5 gallons) with spigot each
64299-08 Measure-Matic™ Dispenser each 64299-14 20 liters (5.0 gallons) with spigot each
64299-15 10 liters (2.5 gallons) without spigot each
® Acid Pump/Reagent Dispenser 64299-16
64299-17
20 liters (5.0 gallons) without spigot
Replacement spigot for 64299-13
each

Dispense dangerous liquids safely and easily — no pouring! and 64299-14 each
Fits many different containers, including: 2.5 liter, 4 liter, 5 pint (80 fl. oz),
1/2-gallon, 1-gallon
T Reduces spills and potential for breakage and injury
® Carboy with Handle and
T Two adapters included for short neck bottles. Screw Cap
Large bottle (pictured) not included. Gasketed closure for leakproof
shipping and storage
Includes:
Dispenser Body: Light pressure on the T Smooth interior surfaces facilitate
Threads directly to bottles relief valve button on top complete drainage
with GPS No. 38-430 or of the dispenser quickly T Knurled cap creates a positive grip for
38-400 threads stops the flow of liquid. secure tightening
Outlet Tube: Rapid but light finger tip T Smooth exterior accepts adhesive labels
A short length of 3/8" squeezes on the small and can be marked with most indelible
diameter polyethylene tube bottle will start fluid markers
is supplied for the outlet. dispensing from the T Rugged polyethylene resists acids and alkalis
Polyethylene Tubing: short tube. Capacity: ..............................................................20 liters (5 US gal)
1/4" O.D. included. Cut to Diameter: ....................................................................28cm (10.90")
required length and insert Height: ......................................................................49.8cm (19.6")
into the underside of the Cap: ........................................................................................83mm
dispenser body.

Cat. # Description Qty. Cat. # Description Qty.

64299-12 Acid Pump/Reagent Dispenser each 64299-26 Carboy with Handle and Screw Cap each

® Bellows Dropping Bottle (LDPE)

A low density polyethylene (LDPE) bottle supplied with a removable bellow-type dropping pipette. The pipettes are
graduated for nominal indication of amount of liquid being drawn. Bellows-shaped bulb makes for easy use and
provides excellent drop formation.
Cat.# ml Dia. X Ht, mm Cap Size Pack
64298-02 60 38 x 86 18 mm 10/pk
64298-04 125 48 x 108 24 mm 10/pk
64298-08 250 60 x 136 24 mm 10/pk

220 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec11_214-233_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 4:21 AM Page 221

Specimen Preparation and Embedding Supplies SECTION 11

® Narrow Mouth Ground Glass Stoppered Bottles

New designed Ground Glass Stoppered Bottles feature a no-drip pour lip for clean pouring of contents.
The most preferred container for storage of prepared chemicals, and stock solutions. Octagon-shaped
ground glass stopper is included. The borosilicate ‘400’ glass offers a high degree of protection from
leaching and the amber ‘500’ glass gives extra protection to light-sensitive contents.
Capacity Dia.xHgt. (mm) Stopper Clear Glass Amber Glass
ml (w/stopper on) Size Cat# Cat# Pack
250 72 x 145 19/26 64202-C 64202-A 4/pk
500 88 x 175 24/29 64204-C 64204-A 4/pk
1000 110 x 215 29/32 64206-C – 2/pk
2000 135 x 265 29/32 64207-C – each
5000 175 x 320 45/40 64209-C – each

® Mounting Media/Canada Balsam Bottles

Ideal for applying mounting media. The bottle comes with a glass applicator rod and glass cap. Cap is
ground to the shoulder of the bottle to form a seal. Made from soda lime glass. 100 ml capacity.
Cat.# Description Pack
64211-01 Balsam Bottle, 100 ml each
64211-06 Balsam Bottle, 100 ml 6/pk

® Barnes Dropping Bottles

The lower portion of the rubber bulb forms a tightly fitted stopper. Wheaton “400” borosilicate glass
(meets USP Type I standards).
Average drop size is 46μl.
Bottle measures: 35 mm dia. x 103 mm high; 30 ml capacity.
The bottles can be autoclaved with either dry heat or chemicals.
The bulb and the pipette can be autoclaved in gas only.
Cat.# Description Pack
64215-01 Barnes Dropping Bottle 6/pk
64215-50 Replacement Bulb Only 10/pk
64215-55 Replacement Bulb and Pipette 10/pk

® All Glass Dropping Bottles

These bottles deliver stains and indicator solutions drop by drop from a projecting drip tip on the side of
the stopper. A partial turn of the ground glass stopper will seal the bottle.
Size Measurements
Cat.# Type (ml) Dia. x Hgt. (mm) Pack
64220-05 Clear 50 45 x 95 4/pk
64220-10 Clear 100 56 x 120 4/pk

® Alcohol Burner
with Ground
Glass Cap
This burner offers a low heat
flame, which is well suited for
microscopy purposes. For use
with isopropyl and denatured
ethyl alcohol. The unit is
supplied with a ground glass
® Embryo Dishes
stopper. Made from soda lime glass. Size: 100 ml; measures: 75 mm
dia. x 100 mm high. These dishes are molded from clear glass and come with a glass lid for
the viewing or staining of free-floating specimens.
Cat.# Description Pack
64213-01 Alcohol Burner, 100 ml each Cat.# Description Pack
64213-25 Replacement Wick, 6” long 25/pk 70543-30 Embryo Dish, 30 mm Dia. x 12 mm Deep each
64213-10 Replacement Cork Stopper 10/pk 70543-45 Embryo Dish, 45 mm Dia. x 12 mm Deep each

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 221
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec11_214-233_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 4:22 AM Page 222

SECTION 11 Specimen Preparation and Embedding Supplies

® Media/Lab Bottles ® Clear Glass
Clear bottles are Wheaton ‘400’ borosilicate glass.
Graduated bottles have a large opening, no-drip
Low alkali content helps to prevent changes
pour lip and sloping shoulders to facilitate pouring
in pH and maintain purity of contents. Comes with
and cleaning. These bottles are widely used for
Ptfe-lined cap. Autoclavable.
mixing and storage of culture media, fixation and
dehydrating materials. Bottles show approximate ® Amber Glass
volume graduations, and have large frosted writing Amber bottles are manufactured from Wheaton ‘500’
area. borosilicate glass to protect light-sensitive samples.
Cat.# Dia. x Hgt. (mm) Screw
Clear Amber Capacity Cap on Cap off Cap Size Pack
64210-C 64210-A 125ml 55x123 55x119 33-430 6/pk
64212-C 64212-A 250ml 67x152 67x148 33-430 6/pk
64214-C ----- 500ml 88x192 88x188 33-430 6/pk
64216-C* ----- 1000ml 103x235 103x231 38-430 4/pk

® Square, Wide Mouth Bottles

These bottles are made from high density polyethylene. They are supplied with push-in seals and easy-
to-grip screw caps which have a toggle for tamper evident wire attachment. They are leak-proof for
both solids and liquids and are very space efficient. They are supplied pre-capped in shrink-wrap.
Capacity Measurements (mm)
Cat.# (oz.) (ml) Hgt Width Neck Pack
64246-10 0.8 25 50 30 20 10/pk
64246-15 1.6 50 71 36 24 10/pk
64246-20 3.3 100 87 49 36 10/pk
64246-25 8.0 250 111 59 36 10/pk
64246-30 16.0 500 135 76 50 6/pk
64246-35 32.0 1000 176 99 60 6/pk
64246-40 64.0 2000 211 135 60 6/pk

® Square Bottles - Polypropylene

Square polypropylene bottles with screw polypropylene closures. Repeatedly autoclavable and resistant to
acids, alcohols and bases. Mouths are wider than conventional narrow mouth bottles. The square shape saves
shelf space and the translucent color provides visual liquid level. Useful temperature is between 0ºC and 135ºC
(32º and 275ºF). Molded-in graduations and drip-proof spout for easier measuring and dispensing.
NOTE: remove closure or completely disengage threads before autoclaving. Ideal for buffers, cell culture solutions storage.
Cat. # Capacity Cap Size Pack Cat. # Capacity Cap Size Pack
64245-01 1oz (30ml) 20mm 12/pk 64245-08 8oz (250ml) 38mm-430 12/pk
64245-02 2oz (60ml) 20mm 12/pk 64245-16 15oz (500ml) 38mm-430 12/pk
64245-04 4oz (125ml) 38mm-430 12/pk 64245-32 32oz (1000ml) 38mm-430 6/pk

® Polystyrene Containers; Poly-Containers

Lightweight, air-tight containers with snap-on polyethylene caps. They have less resistance to breakage
than polyethylene but they are transparent and are ideal when used as a specimen container, storage
vessel, or a block holder. Maximum temperature: 70ºC.
Cat. # Capacity ID x Ht, mm Pack Cat. # Capacity ID x Ht, mm Pack
64248-10 3 dram (11 ml) 19 x 48 10/pk 64248-35 15 dram (55.5 ml) 32 x 64 10/pk
64248-15 5 dram (18.5 ml) 22 x 48 10/pk 64248-40 20 dram (74 ml) 38 x 64 10/pk
64248-20 7 dram (25.9 ml) 26 x 51 10/pk 64248-45 30 dram (111 ml) 45 x 76 10/pk
64248-25 10 dram (37 ml) 27 x 50 10/pk 64248-50 40 dram (148 ml) 45 x 102 10/pk
64248-30 13 dram (48 ml) 30 x 56 10/pk

® Chemical Containers
Relied on to transport dust samples from the moon
T Ideal for small quantities of liquids or solids T Screw caps feature a leakproof inner seal
T Made of injection-molded polyethylene T Easy to clean
Cat. # Capacity (cc) Height (mm) O.D. (mm) Pack
64299-40 5 22 33 6/pk
64299-41 10 22 54 6/pk
64299-42 30 32 65 6/pk
64299-43 90 52 69 6/pk
64299-44 120 52 84 6/pk
64299-45 180 52 114 6/pk

222 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec11_214-233_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 4:22 AM Page 223

Specimen Preparation and Embedding Supplies SECTION 11

 Polyethylene Vials; Poly-Vials  Vial Holder
Sample vials with a Machined from solid
captive snap closure; aluminum, holds 5
flat bottom cylindrical shell vials. It is ideal
vials with a friction-fit, for handling cold or
flip-top closure which hot samples for
can not be lost. These prolonged periods of
vials are unbreakable time out of the refrigerator or oven. Comes complete with a handle.
and can withstand Measurements: 43⁄4”x11⁄4”x3⁄4”
temperatures up to
72640 Shell Vial Holder each
90°C. The wall
thickness is approx.
1mm and these vials are ideal for use as a specimen container for the  2. Amber 203
storage of small samples, or as embedding capsules. (Borosilicate) Glass
These amber glass vials offer protection
Cat.# Vial Capacity Dia x Hgt. Pack from light sensitive materials. Vials
72621-10 Poly-Vial, 1ml 9x32mm 10/pk come with polyethylene plug style
72621-12 Poly-Vial, 1ml 9x32mm 100/pk needle closure (not attached), Titeseal®.
72621-20 Poly-Vial, 2.5ml 12x32mm 10/pk
72621-22 Poly-Vial, 2.5ml 12x32mm 100/pk Cat.# Capacity O.D. x Hgt Pack
72621-30 Poly-Vial, 5ml 15x50mm 10/pk 72629-02 2 ml 8 x 43mm 200/pk
72621-32 Poly-Vial, 5ml 15x50mm 100/pk 72629-04 4 ml 15 x 44mm 200/pk
72621-36 Poly-Vial, 8ml 17x56mm 10/pk
72621-38 Poly-Vial, 8ml 17x56mm 100/pk  3. Wheaton 15x45mm Shell Vials
72621-40 Poly-Vial, 10ml 22x32mm 10/pk
These vials are for use with
72621-42 Poly-Vial, 10ml 22x32mm 100/pk
72621-60 Poly-Vial, 25ml 24x72mm 10/pk
auto-samplers that require
72621-62 Poly-Vial, 25ml 24x72mm 100/pk 15x45mm vials. The vials are
72621-90 Poly-Vial, 50ml 30x74mm 10/pk available in either clear or
72621-92 Poly-Vial, 50ml 30x74mm 100/pk amber glass or in natural
polypropylene, without 15mm
snap plug cap.

Cat.# Volume, Material Cap Size Dia x Hgt Pack

72627-4C 4.0mL, Clear Glass 15mm 15x45mm 100/pk
72627-4A 4.0mL, Amber Glass 15mm 15x45mm 100/pk
72627-4P 4.0mL, Polypropylene 15mm 15x45mm 100/pk
72627-3P* 3.0mL, Polypropylene 15mm 15x45mm 100/pk
72627-50 LDPE Conical
Snap Plug Cap, Natural 15mm 100/pk
*Conical interior for maximum sample recovery

 Vial Rack

 Shell Vials, Glass

 1. Clear Glass, Plain Top
These vials are optically clear with straight-sides. Made from Type1, N-
51A borosilicate glass. Fixation, dehydration, and infiltration procedures
can be done in the same vial. The larger size vials can be used as an
embedding media mixture container or for sample storage. The vials
come with polyethylene open bottom snap-caps, Titeseal®, which are
packed separately. Except the 4- dram size vial which comes without a This rugged polypropylene rack holds 48 vials, size 1 dram (15x45mm);
closure. We recommend the use of our cork stoppers. or 4 ml tissue culture vials; or 2ml serum vials in 4x12 configuration
Catalog # Capacity O.D. x Hgt Pack with alpha-numeric indexing. The rack is constructed from chemically
72630-05 ⁄2 dr. (1.8ml)
1
12 x 35mm 144/pk resistant, autoclavable (121°C for 20 minutes) polypropylene and
72631-10 1 dr. (3.7ml) 15 x 45mm 144/pk features corner posts to assure stability when stacking empty.
72631-20 2 dr. (7.4ml) 19 x 51mm 144/pk
72631-30 3 dr. (11.1ml) 19 x 65mm 144/pk Dimensions: 33⁄4” x 105⁄8” x11⁄8” (94x266x28mm)
72631-40* 4 dr. (14.8ml) 21 x 70mm 144/pk 72641-01 Rack for 1 dram Shell Vial each
72631-70 7 dr. (25.9ml) 29 x 65mm 144/pk 72641-05 Rack for 1 dram Shell Vial 5/cs
72628-50 Cork to fit 4 dram Vial (11⁄4"H x 57⁄64"Dia.) 144/pk
* Cap is not available Use cork stopper (#72628-50, 100/pk)

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 223
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec11_214-233_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 4:22 AM Page 224

SECTION 11 Specimen Preparation and Embedding Supplies

 Liquid Scintillation Vials  Scintillation Vial Racks
 1. Glass Vials
Wheaton “180”® low
potassium borosilicate
glass (meets ASTM
Type I Class A and USP
Type I standards). Vials
are packed in individual
cells in trays of 100.
Vials are in trays are
shrunk-wrapped in plastic, 5 trays to a case. Screw caps size 22-400 is
made from Urea with Poly-seal cone liner. Caps are packed separately
in polyethylene bags of 100. Vial measures 28mm diameter x 57mm
 (1) White Polypropylene Rack
height (with cap off), and 61mm height (with cap on). Size 20 ml. The rack measures: 123⁄4" x 63⁄4" x 13⁄8" High (32 x 17 x 3.5cm), and it
has 50 cavities, 1.1" (28mm) diameter x .75” (20mm) deep. The
 2. High cavities have a center drain hole 1⁄2" (13mm) in diameter. The racks
Density are stackable when not in use and are steam autoclavable at 250°F
Polyethylene (121°C).
(HDPE) Vials
Opaque, high-density
polyethylene vials are
economically priced.
They are 20ml in
capacity and they
measure 27mm
diameter x 61mm height (with cap). The screw caps are 22-400 and
they are made from polypropylene with a foam- polyethylene liner. The
vials and caps are packaged the same way as glass vials.

 3. Polyethylene
 (2) Rack with Handle
Terephthalate
(PET) Rugged and stackable. They hold 24 scintillation vials (30mm diameter).
For optimal performance There is a handle on both ends for carrying. Autoclavable.
in the laboratory, PET Measures: 113⁄4" x 5" x 33⁄4" High (298 x 127 x 95mm).
plastic vials provide a
combination of features
previously unavailable in
a counting vial. Safe
disposal is accomplished by incineration. No harmful gas is generated
(only CO2 and H2O are created). These vials are lightweight, virtually
unbreakable and they have the clarity of glass. PET vials also offer low
permeability to solvents and minimal background count. These vials
hold 20 mls of fluid and they measure 27mm diameter, 61mm height
(with cap on. The screw caps are 22-400 and are made from
polypropylene with a foamed polyethylene liner. The vials and the caps
are packaged separately.
 (3) 100-Place Scintillation Vial Rack
Ordering: Welded polypropylene rack holds 100 standard 20 ml scintillation vials.
Cat. # Description Pack The rack is autoclavable and resists both nitric and hydrochloric acids.
72632 20 ml Glass Scintillation Vial 100/pk The hole measures 11⁄16" diameter. Dimensions: 141⁄2"(L) x 15"(W) x
72632-PE 20 ml HDPE Scintillation Vial 100/pk 21⁄2"(H)
72632-PT 20 ml PET Scintillation Vial 100/pk
Ordering: welded
72634 20 ml Glass Scintillation Vial 500/pk
72634-PE 20 ml HDPE Scintillation Vial 500/pk Cat.# Description Pack
72634-PT 20 ml PET Scintillation Vial 500/pk 72635 50-Place Scintillation Vial Rack, White each
72636 50-Place Scintillation Vial Rack, White 5/pk
72637 24-Place Scintillation Vial Rack w/Handle each
Cryo-Lok Vials, See page 680-681  72638 24-Place Scintillation Vial Rack w/Handle 5/pk
72639 100-Place Scintillation Vial Rack, welded each

224 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec11_214-233_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 4:22 AM Page 225

Specimen Preparation and Embedding Supplies SECTION 11

 Peti-Vial – Scintillation  Multi-Vials – Scintillation
Vial Vials
Peti-Vials are made from a special grade Multi-vials are excellent multipurpose
of polypropylene, which produces a containers. They are primarily used for liquid
product of optimum clarity. It’s unique scintillation counting, beta-gamma counting,
design offers users a leak-proof fit with and sample storage. They are made from a
only one-half of a turn of the cap. new type of polypropylene, which assures
superior visibility. They come with white
FEATURES:
polyethylene caps and are perfect and
 Compatible with all major liquid convenient for easy marking.
scintillation counting system
 Dimple bottoms to facilitate filter FEATURES INCLUDE:
paper counting  Nominal volume of 5ml
 Nominal Volume of 7ml  High density white polyethylene snap
 Ideal for Sample storage cap
 Vials are autoclavable  Alternate white plug cap
Ordering:
Cat.# Description Pack
72657 Peti-Vial and Caps 250/Tray
72656 Peti-Vial and Caps, Bulk 1000/cs
72656-50 Caps for Peti-Vials 1000/cs
72659 Multi-Vials and Snap Caps 200/Tray
72658 Multi-Vials and Snap Caps 1000/cs
72658-50 Snap Cap for Multi-Vials 1000/cs

 Tooled Neck Vials

These vials are made from Type 1, Class B borosilicate glass. Their tooled necks ensure accurate fit
with “snap-in” closures. They are ideal for storage of specimens and sample blocks. The 1 and 2 dram
sizes come with an open-bottom closure and all of the other sizes come with a closed bottom, two-
piece closure. Closures are packed separately.
Cat.# Capacity Dia.xHgt. (mm) Package
72646-01 1 dr (3.7ml) 15 x 45 144/pk
72646-02 2 dr (7.4ml) 19 x 48 144/pk
72646-03 3 dr (11.1ml) 21 x 50 144/pk
72646-04 4 dr (14.8ml) 25 x 52 144/pk
72646-05 5 dr (18.5ml) 27 x 55 144/pk
72646-07 7 dr (25.9ml) 29 x 65 144/pk

 V-Vials®; Clear With Screw Cap

These vials are made from Wheaton-33 low extractable borosilicate glass and they safeguard against
any change of product pH caused by alkali, which can be extracted from ordinary glass. Wheaton V-
Vials are exceptionally sturdy vials with a conical interior bottom. Their special features insure
maximum security and economy in handling, storing and shipping of costly micro and semi-micro
samples.
V-Vials are ideal for: Micro Mixing, Homogenization, Centrifugation, Concentration, Extraction,
Derivatization, Radiosynthesis, Hybridization, Anaerobic Reactions, and Catalytic Hydrogenation.
All components can be autoclaved. They come packed 12 vials in a hinged lid storage box. Graduated;
clear; screw cap has solid top and Ptfe-faced white (styrene butadiene) rubber liner.
Size Dia x Hgt mm Screw
Cat.# ml (with cap off) Cap Size Pack
72647-01 0.3 13 x 32 13-425 12/pk
72647-02 1.0 13 x 41 13-425 12/pk
72647-05 2.0 20 x 41 20-400 12/pk
72647-07 3.0 20 x 47 20-400 12/pk
72647-08 5.0 20 x 62 20-400 12/pk

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 225
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec11_214-233_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 4:22 AM Page 226

SECTION 11 Specimen Preparation and Embedding Supplies

 Lyophilization Containers – Serum Vials/Bottles
These are the choice containers for Lyophilization.
There are three majors factors for successful Lyophillization:
Heat Transfer, Sealability, and Water Vapor Transmission Barrier.
 Heat Transfer– a Wheaton Glass serum vial, as opposed to glass
serum bottles, plastic serum bottles, and other containers has a
very consistent thin wall and bottom. This attribute of a Wheaton
glass serum vials allow the heating phase of the lyophilization  Cap and Stopper
process to take place rapidly and effectively for use with Vacule®
 Sealability – Wheaton glass serum vials feature a “blowback”
feature in neck and bottom. This allows for a 2 or 3 legged
lyophilization stopper to be securely and evenly seated in the
mouth of the vial during the lyophilization process. An uneven
stopper may results in water vapor entering back into the vial
once stored. Additionally, these serum vials come in standard
crimp finish sizes, for compatibility with various standard alu- EMS # Description Qty/case
minum seals and crimping tools. Accessories for 4 ml Vacule® Vials
 Water vapor Transmission Barrier – Wheaton glass serum vials 60304-40 Red Stoppers 100/pk
are made from premium, low extractable, borosilicate glass, 60304-41 Lyophylization Stoppers, Two Prong 100/pk
which offers a superiorbarrier to water vapors. The vials are 60304-42 Caps, Solid Top, Rubber Liner, 15-425 200/pk
available in either clear and amber for UV light transmission 60304-43 Caps, Open Top, No Liner, 15-425 200/pk
applications. Accessories for 5 and 10 ml Vacule® Vials
 Autoclavable – These vials can be autoclaved, by dry heat, by
chemical, by gas, or by radiation. 60304-50 Red stoppers 100/pk
60304-51 Lyophilization Stoppers, Two Prong 100/pk
60304-55 Caps, Solid Top, No Liner, 22-350 500/pk
 Serum Tubing Vials – Clear
Manufactured from Wheaton “200” low
extractable borosilicate glass tubing to hold  Serum Bottles - Clear
uniform wall thickness. Glass meets ASTM Manufactured from Wheaton “400” borosilicate
Type I, Class A and USP Type I standards. molded glass (meets USP Type I standards)

Mouth
Size ID x OD Dia x Hgt Qty/
EMS # ml mm mm case
60300-02 2 7 x 13 15 x 32 144/pk EMS # Size Mouth ID x OD Dia x Hgt Qty/
60300-03 3 7 x 13 17 x 38 144/pk ml mm mm case
60300-05 5 13 x 20 22 x 40 144/pk 60306-02 2 7 x 13 17.5 x 34 288/pk
60300-10 10 13 x 20 24 x 50 144/pk 60306-05 5 13 x 20 23 x 47 288/pk
60300-20 20 13 x 20 30.5 x 58 120/pk 60306-10 10 13 x 20 25 x 54 288/pk
60306-20 20 13 x 20 32 x 58 288/pk
Serum Tubing Vials – Amber 60306-30 30 13 x 20 37 x 63 288/pk
Manufactured from Wheaton “320” borosilicate 60306-50 50 13 x 20 43 x 73 288/pk
glass (meets ASTM Type I, Class B and USP 60306-100 100 13 x 20 52 x 95 144/pk
Type I Standards)

Mouth
 Serum Bottles - Amber
Size ID x OD Dia x Hgt Qty/ Manufactured from Wheaton “500”
EMS # ml mm mm case borosilicate molded glass (meets USP
60302-02 2 7 x 13 15 x 32 144/pk Type I standards)
60302-05 5 13 x 20 22 x 40 144/pk
60302-10 10 13 x 20 24 x 50 144/pk

 Threaded Tubing Vials – Size Mouth ID x OD Dia x Hgt Qty/

Vacule® EMS # ml mm mm case
Heavy wall construction, designed for 60308-05 5 13 x 20 23 x 47 288/pk
lyophilization and freeze-drying. Manufactured 60308-10 10 13 x 20 25 x 54 288/pk
60308-20 20 13 x 20 32 x 58 288/pk
from Wheaton 33® low extractable borosilicate
60308-30 30 13 x 20 37 x 63 288/pk
glass (meets ASTM Type I Class and USP Type I Standards). 60308-50 50 13 x 20 43 x 73 288/pk
Size Thread Mouth ID x OD Dia x Hgt Qty/ 60308-100 100 13 x 20 52 x 95 144/pk
EMS # ml Size mm mm case
60304-04 4 15-425 9 x 13 17 x 43 200/pk
60304-05 5 22-350 13 x 20 22 x 45 200/pk
60304-10 10 22-350 13 x 20 22 x 60 200/pk

226 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec11_214-233_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 4:22 AM Page 227

Specimen Preparation and Embedding Supplies SECTION 11

 Lyophilization Seals  De-Crimpier Pliers

and Stoppers Made from stainless steel
offers one tool for both
Unlined Aluminum Seals
sizes: 13mm and 20mm
 Center Disc Tear Out serum vial de-crimpier.
The center disc tears out, exposing the top of An inexpensive and easy
the stopper to the syringe. Natural in color. way to remove the seal
EMS # Fit Mouth ID x OD, mm Qty from the serum vial,
60320-07 7 x 13 100/pk simply secure the seal
60320-13 13 x 20 100/pk
between the jaws, squeeze the handle and twist the seal.
 Flip-Cap, Center Tear Plastic coated handle offers comfort and ease of use.
Easy-to-use. Push upward on plastic button EMS # Description Qty
to access stopper or septum. No sharp metal 62180-01 De-Crimpier for Sizes 8 & 13 mm each
edges. Removal of the Flip Cap Button can 62180-02 De-Crimpier for Sizes 8 & 30 mm each
be accomplished with one hand, freeing the 62180-03 De-Crimpier for Sizes 11 & 20 mm each
other for the syringe. 62180-04 De-Crimpier for Sizes 13 & 20 mm each
EMS # Fit Mouth ID x OD, mm Qty
60321-07 7 x 13 100/pk  Wheaton
60321-13 13 x 20 100/pk
M-T Vial File®
 Complete Tear Off This filing system offers a
Seal can be completely removed and clean, compact, and convenient
contents poured from the bottle. alternative for the storage of
EMS # Fit Mouth ID x OD, mm Qty biological samples. A clear
60322-07 7 x 13 100/pk polystyrene case, with hinged
60322-13 13 x 20 100/pk lid, alpha-numerical index, and
 Lyophilization Stoppers individual partitions. Foam
Manufactured from the highest quality raw materials inserts are provided as well
and they offer extra protection
 Two Leg Lyophillization Stoppers for the vials.
EMS # Fit Mouth ID x OD, mm Qty
60326-07 7 x 13, Gray chlorobutyl/50 100/pk
60326-13 13 x 20, Gray holobutyl/50 100/pk
60326-14 13 x 20,Gray chlorobutyl/50 100/pk
 Three Leg Lyophillization Stoppers
EMS # Fit Mouth ID x OD, mm Qty
60327-13 13 x 20 Gray chlorobutyl/50 100/pk
60327-14 13 x 20 Gray chlorobutyl/50 100/pk
 M-T/40: stores up to 40 vials of 16mm diameter x 50mm height
Thin Flange
 M-T/60: stores up to 60 vials of 13mm diameter x 50mm height
 Lined Aluminum Seals Dimensions: 63⁄4”(L)x33⁄4”(W)x21⁄2”(H) (190x95x62mm).
These seals are ideal for filling or retrieving
contents with a syringe and as closures for 60990-40 M-T/40 Vial File each
60990-46 M-T/40 Vial File 6/cs
many instrumentation applications. These
60990-60 M-T/60 Vial File each
seals have a center disc tear-out, seal lined
60990-66 M-T/60 Vial File 6/cs
with PTFE – Faced natural red rubber.
EMS # Fit Mouth OD mm / Color Qty  Mini-File®
60330-13N 13, Natural 100/pk
60330-20N 20, Natural 100/pk This mini filing system offers
the convenience for
 EZ Crimper™ transporting, displaying and
An adjustable stopper allows the user to determine the tightness of storing sample vials. This
the seal while ensuring consistent crimping. The jaws are tapered to
reusable, clear plastic storage
allow for the crimping of the vials in the racks. Ergonomic, PVC grip
tray has ten 16mm x 16mm x
and spring assembly reduces hand fatigue.
50mm cells for storage sample
EMS # Description Qty
vials and V-Vials. The file
For Standard Seals
comes with a hinged lid that
60334-13 Attaches 13mm Seals each seals securely with a snap-lock
60334-20 Attaches 20 mm Seals each fit offering protection against spills while also allowing easy access.
For Flip Cap Seals They can be stacked in a horizontal position and they require minimal
60335-13 Attaches 13mm Flip Top Seals each space. Files are supplied empty.
60335-20 Attaches 20mm Flip Top Seals each
Cat.# Description Pack
60998-05 Mini-File®, Clear Plastic 5/pk

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 227
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec11_214-233_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 4:23 AM Page 228

SECTION 11 Specimen Preparation and Embedding Supplies

® Sample Vials; Clear and Amber
Multi purpose glass sample vials. Specifically suited for research studies. These vials come with ptfe lined caps and are packaged separately. The
These sample vials are economically priced and conveniently packaged in vials can be sterilized and stored at low temperatures.
two shrink-wrapped packs of 100 vials.

Clear: Manufactured from Wheaton-33R a low extractable borosilicate glass which protects against
changes in the pH and maintains sample integrity.
Size Dia. x Hgt. (mm) Screw
Cat.# ml (with cap off) Cap Size Pack
60992-01* 1.8 12x35 8-425 200/pk
60992-02* 2 12x38 8-425 200/pk
60992-04** 4 15x48 13-425 200/pk
60992-08 8 17x63 15-425 200/pk
60992-12 12 19x68 15-425 200/pk
60992-16 16 21x73 18-400 200/pk
60992-24 24 23x88 20-144 200/pk

Amber: Manufactured from Wheaton “320” borosilicate glass and protects light-sensitive samples.
Size Dia. x Hgt. (mm) Screw
Cat.# ml (with cap off) Cap Size Pack
60993-01* 1.8 12x35 8-425 200/pk
60993-02* 2 12x38 8-425 200/pk
60993-04** 4 15x48 13-425 200/pk
60993-08 8 17x63 15-425 200/pk
* Fits M-T/60 Vial File ** Fits M-T/40 Vial File

® Vial Caddy – ® Sample Vials

23mm In Mini-File®;
Heavy-duty vial caddy Clear
protects up to 48 of the Comes ten vials packed in a
popular 23mm diameter clean plastic thermoformed
glass vials. Machined from a Mini-File and offers
solid block of 1.25" HDPE convenience in transporting,
sheet offering complete displaying and storing. The
protection during storage vials are made from Wheaton-
and transport. The caddy is 33R a low extractable
supplied with a snug fitting cover and non-skid feet. It is white in color. borosilicate glass. The vials are supplied with a white (styrene-butadiene)
Cat.# Description Pack rubber lined cap and both the vials and the caps can be autoclaved.
72642 48-Place Scintillation Vial Caddy with Cover each Size Dia. x Hgt. (mm) Screw
Cat.# ml (with cap on) Cap Size Pack
60996-02 2 12x37 8-425 10/pk
60996-04 4 15x48 13-425 10/pk

® EZFlip™ Conical EzFlip™ Conical Centrifuge tubes offers a safer alternative to screw cap
tubes. A patented closure system improves ergonomics and versatility. An
Centrifuge Tubes improved tube and cap design increases mechanical strength to
(Patented*) withstand aggressive centrifugal forces. The 15 ml tube's maximum
T Leak-proof — Hinged, flip-cap design. relative centrifugal force (RCF) is 8,500 x g, and the 50ml tube's
maximum RCF is 9,500 x g.
T One handed opening and closing.
T Good chemical resistance — Tubes are graduated and feature a writing area. All EZFlip™ tubes are
low protein binding. available in rack or bag of 50, case of 500.
T 15 ml and 50 ml — Sterile.
T Freezer/Refrigerator capability.
Ordering:
T Clarified polypropylene — Size, mm Qty / Qty /
good visibility of contents. EMS # NUNC # Description Dia x L Pack Case
T Easily maintain aseptic conditions. 63030-25 362695 PP, 15 ml EZFlip™ Conical Centrifuge Tube, Rack 17 x120 50 ------
T Compatible with all major centrifuges 63030-5C 362695 PP, 15 ml EZFlip™ Conical Centrifuge Tube, Rack 17 x120 ----- 500
and rotors. 63031-25 362697 PP, 50 ml EZFlip™ Conical Centrifuge Tube, Rack 30 x115 25 ------
63031-5C 362697 PP, 50 ml EZFlip™ Conical Centrifuge Tube, Rack 17 x120 ----- 500

228 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec11_214-233_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 4:23 AM Page 229

Specimen Preparation and Embedding Supplies SECTION 11

® Transport /Sample Collection Vials and Tubes
® 1. Transport Vials
Transport Vials are ideal for sample collection and storage. Made from virgin polypropylene, they are
available in three sizes and sterile as well as non-sterile. Graduations provide convenient and accurate
references. 5 ml and 10 ml sizes are supplied with white screw cap, 50 ml are supplied with blue
cap, that has a molded-in sealing ring for a leak-proof fit.
FEATURES INCLUDE:
T Conical tubes with freestanding skirts T Tubes are autoclavable T Write-on area on side

® 2. Transport Tubes
Transport Tubes and ideal for rapid sample collection when a plug cap is needed. Made from virgin
polypropylene (PP) or polystyrene (PS). The tubes work well in Olympus automated testing equipment.
The tube volume is 12 ml and the plug caps are available in yellow with either a hollow top (HT) or
hollow bottom (HB)
Ordering:
Cat. # Description Pack
63034-05 5 ml Transport Vials with white caps 4x250/pk
63035-05 5 ml Transport Vials with white caps, sterile 20x25/pk
63034-10 10 ml Transport Vials with white caps 4x250/pk
63035-10 10 ml Transport Vials with white caps, sterile 20x25/pk
63034-50 50 ml Transport Vials with blue caps 500/pk
63035-50 50 ml Transport Vials with white caps, sterile 20x25/pk
63036-PS 12 ml PS Conical Bottom w/skirt Tube, no cap 1000/pk
63036-PP 12 ml PP Conical Bottom w/skirt Tube, no cap 1000/pk
63037-PS 12 ml PS Flat Bottom Tube, no cap 1000/pk
63037-PP 12 ml PP Conical Bottom Tube, no cap 1000/pk
63040-HT Hollow Top Plug Cap, yellow 1000/pk
63040-HB Hollow Bottom Plug Cap, yellow 1000/pk

® Sticky Stand
Sticky Stand is a unique adhesive platform for temporarily securing micro-tubes, vials, cuvettes, and
many other kinds of laboratory vessels. To use, simply press down on the vial(s) and contact between
the bottom of a tube or vial and the adhesive bed is sufficient for establishing support. A twist or pull
releases the vessel from the adhesive bed, without leaving any adhesive residue.
The adhesive bed is fabricated in a heat-resistant plastic tray and it can be rejuvenated by placing it in
a conventional oven for one hour (Preheated to approx. 190°C or 375°F). For safety, always place the
Sticky Stand in a containment tray during reheating.
The polyolefin adhesive and polyester tray are resistant to most organic solvents and caustic agents.
Sticky Stand can be used under either low or high humidity conditions as well as in cold or warm
environments (from 4 to 40°C). 72644-5R Sticky Stand( Regular, 5”x7”) each
Once adhesion is established, it is maintained even at much lower temperatures, -20°C. 72644-5S Sticky Stand (Super Sticky, 5”x7”) each
The adhesive bed is approximately 0.5” thick, and it is available in either regular or high adhesive
strength. Regular strength is often preferred for room temperature uses. High strength is preferred for
low temperature uses.

® Smooth Rack™
SmoothRack™ is an improvement over the old fashioned 3-tier-wire-racks:
T When using SmoothRack, tubes will never slip into an adjacent position
The SmoothRack is versatile and it accommodates a wide range of tubes: 10 to 16 mm diameter.
T A drainage hole right on each tube position
T Holds 72 tubes, available in Blue or White
T Made from autoclavable polypropylene
T Made in USA – Patent pending
T Dimensions: 9.5” (L) x 5" (W) x 2.6" (H)
64640-W SmoothRack™, color White each
64640-B SmoothRack™, color Blue each

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 229
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec11_214-233_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 4:23 AM Page 230

SECTION 11 Specimen Preparation and Embedding Supplies

 Plastic Boxes - Multi-Use
EMS Plastic Boxes are in demand!
Whatever your storage needs, there’s an EMS Plastic Box that’s perfect for you. Molded from polystyrene for optimum clarity and rigidity. They come in a
variety of shapes, styles, and sizes.

 1. Square  2. Rectangular Boxes:

Boxes: Finally – the right shape for all those long and narrow items. Friction-
They have two fitting lids or hinged-lids with snap locks available on a wide selection of
equal dimensions boxes depths and sizes.
for length and
width. The
"squares" are
available in a
variety of sizes in
both friction- 64306
fitting lids and
hinged-lids with
snap locks.

64318-05
Inside Dimensions
Catalog (inches, 1"=25.4mm)
64310 Number L W H Lid (H) Base (H) Pack
Style: Friction-Fitting Lids
Inside Dimensions 64318-05 111⁄16 3
⁄4 5
⁄8 - - 25
Catalog (inches, 1"=25.4mm) 64318-07 25⁄16 3
⁄4 3
⁄4 - - 25
Number L W H Lid (H) Base (H) Pack 64318-09 33⁄16 29⁄16 11⁄4 - - 25
Style: Friction – Fitting Lids 64318-12 33⁄16 613⁄16 15⁄8 - - 10
64306 25
⁄32 25
⁄32 5
⁄8 - - 50 64318-14 41⁄4 11⁄2 1 - - 10
64307 111⁄16 111⁄16 9
⁄16 - - 10 64318-16 5 51⁄4 15⁄16 - - 10
64308 21⁄2 21⁄2 7
⁄8 - - 10 64318-18 51⁄2 2 1 - - 10
64309 2 2 3
⁄4 - - 10 Style: Hinged - Snap-lock Lids
Style: Hinged-Lid, Snap-Lock 64319 21⁄8 15⁄8 5
⁄8 1
⁄8 1
⁄2 25
64310 1 1 5
⁄8 1
⁄8 1
⁄2 10 64320 27⁄8 2 9
⁄16 ⁄16
1 1
⁄2 10
64312 2 2 11⁄8 1
⁄8 1 10 64321 31⁄2 29⁄16 1 1
⁄2 1
⁄2 10
64313 29⁄16 29⁄16 23⁄16 1
⁄4 115⁄16 10 64322 6 4 11⁄4 1
⁄4 1 1
64314 31⁄16 31⁄16 1 1
⁄4 3
⁄4 10 64323 73⁄8 429⁄32 11⁄2 1
⁄4 11⁄4 1
64315 49⁄16 49⁄16 11⁄4 1
⁄4 1 10 64324 81⁄8 61⁄4 13⁄16 1
⁄4 15
⁄16 1

 3. Round Boxes:  4. Plastic

Super for storing many items that Matchboxes:
just don’t seem to fit in square or Especially designed for
rectangular boxes. Supplied with storing little pieces that
friction-fitting lids. constantly are misplaced.
Ideal for specimen blocks,
apertures etc.

Inside Dimensions
Catalog (inches, 1"=25.4mm)
Number L Dia. H Lid (H) Base (H) Pack Inside Dimensions
Style: Friction-Fitting Lids Catalog (inches) 1"=25.4mm
64330 - 13⁄8 3
⁄8 - - 25 Number L W H Pack
64331 - 15⁄8 1
⁄2 - - 10 64334 2 11⁄4 1
⁄2 10
64332 - 21⁄2 7
⁄8 - - 10 64335 15⁄8 7
⁄8 3
⁄8 10

230 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec11_214-233_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 4:23 AM Page 231

Specimen Preparation and Embedding Supplies SECTION 11

® 5. Partitioned
Boxes:
Available Hinged Snap Lock
Lids or Sliding Lids
Organizing singular or groups
of items in individual
compartments. Stored items
stay separately and are
readily visible at all times.
Extra-thick wall construction permits containment of heavy objects;
protects delicate items.

® 6. Tray Box and Tray Sets:

A compact, solid fiberboard Tray Box makes instituting a plastic
box/sample storage system more convenient and efficient. To form a
Tray Set, use plastic boxes for specimen storage, and then organize
boxes within the fiberboard Tray Box. These sets eliminates
misplacement or inadvertent sample loss, and allows for rapid retrieval
of specimens. The tray boxes are available with or without
accompanying plastic boxes.
No. Ordering Tray Box only
Catalog Com- Compartment
Catalog # L (in.) W (in) H (in) Pack
Number O.D., inch part- Size, inch
64348-05 91⁄2 91⁄2 3
⁄4 5
L W H ment L W H Pack
64348-10 91⁄2 91⁄2 3
⁄4 10
Style: Hinged – Lid, Snap – Lock
64339-08 45⁄8 3 11⁄8 8 11⁄16 11⁄4 1 each
64339-06 45⁄8 3 11⁄8 6 15⁄16 13⁄8 1 each Ordering Tray Set, (Tray Box and Plastic Boxes):
64339-04 45⁄8 3 11⁄8 4 15⁄16 21⁄8 1 each Catalog Includes Plastic Box Boxes/
64340 57⁄8 31⁄2 15⁄16 5 11⁄16 3 11⁄8 each Number (Cat. #)* Set Arrangement
64341 7 33⁄4 11⁄4 12 111⁄16 11⁄16 11⁄8 each 64350-01 64306 100 10 x 10
64342 81⁄4 41⁄2 13⁄8 18 11⁄4 11⁄4 13⁄16 each 64350-02 64318-05 50 5 x 10
64343 11 63⁄4 13⁄4 18 15⁄8 115⁄16 19⁄16 each 64350-03 64318-07 30 3 x 10
64344 10 7 113⁄16 36 11⁄2 11⁄16 19⁄16 each 64350-04 64307 25 5x5
64345 131⁄8 9 25⁄16 12 2 43⁄16 21⁄16 each 64350-05 64309 16 4x4
64346 131⁄8 9 25⁄16 24 2 2 21⁄16 each 64350-06 64310 56 8x7
Style: Slide – Cover 64350-07 64319 20 4x5
64337 103⁄4 87⁄8 113⁄16 24 111⁄16 2 19⁄16 each 64350-08 64320 12 3x4
64338-07 31⁄4 3 1
⁄2 7 11⁄4 27⁄32 3
⁄8 each 64350-09 64334 24 4x6
64338-18 73⁄4 33⁄4 7
⁄8 18 13⁄16 13⁄16 19
⁄32 each 64350-10 64335 40 5x8
Note: 1" = 25.4mm
* See previous page for these plastic boxes.

64338-18 64338-07

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 231
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec11_214-233_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 4:23 AM Page 232

SECTION 11 Specimen Preparation and Embedding Supplies

® Pasteboard Sliding-Boxes
Constructed from white pasteboard; match box style and rectangular in
Electron Microscopy Sciences is shape. Available in different sizes to meet all of your needs. It is ideal
proud to announce the introduction for the storage of specimen blocks and many small items.

of the highest quality line of

Microscopes
in the market place today.
With all of our research
and comparing all of the
Microscope manufacturers Cat # Tray Interior Box Exterior Qty
in the market place we 64326-01 21⁄8 x 11⁄8 x 5⁄8" 21⁄4" x11⁄4" x 3⁄4"
found these to offer the (54 x 28 x 16mm) (77 x 32 x 19 mm) 72/pk
best quality and price and 64326-02 2 x 11⁄4 x 7⁄16" 21⁄8" x 17⁄16" x 1⁄2"
they are 100% made (51 x 32 x 11mm) (53 x 37 x 15) 72/pk
AMERICAN!!!!!! 64326-03 25⁄16 x15⁄16 x 13⁄16" 21⁄2" x11⁄2" x 1"
(59 x 34 x 22mm) (63 x 38 x 25mm) 72/pk
Our Microscopes
64326-04 21⁄2" x 11⁄2" x 5⁄8" 25⁄8"x111⁄16" x 3⁄4"
incorporate advanced
(63 x38 x 15mm) 66 x 44 x 18mm) 72/pk
technology into a durable,
64326-05 29⁄16" x 19⁄16" x 1" 23⁄4" x 13⁄4" x 11⁄8"
cost effective solution for (65 x 40 x 25mm) (70 x 45 x 28mm) 72/pk
your microscope. All of the 64326-06 3 x 13⁄4" x 3⁄4" 31⁄8" x 17⁄8" x 7⁄8"
Microscopes that we are (76 x 43 x 18mm) (78 x 48 x 20mm) 72/pk
offering have: 64326-10 27⁄8 x 17⁄8 x 1⁄8 3" x 2" x 11⁄4"
T A Modern frame with (72x47x28mm) (75x51x30mm) 72/pk
enhanced stability 64326-11 31⁄8 x 21⁄16" x 11⁄4" 31⁄4" x 21⁄4" x 13⁄8"
for image (80 x 53 x 31mm) (82 x 57 x 34mm) 72/pk
documentation 64326-12 31⁄4" x 2 x 7⁄8 33⁄8" x 21⁄8" x 1"
(82 x 51 x 22mm) (85 x 54 x 25mm) 72/pk
T An Ergonomic single hand stage/focus control to
64326-13 31⁄16"x25⁄16"x11⁄8 31⁄2" x 21⁄2"x 11⁄4"
minimize fatigue
(87 x 58 x 28mm) (90 x 63 x 30mm) 72/pk
T A Robust stainless steel/brass focus mechanism 64326-15 31⁄2" x 23⁄8 x 13⁄8 31⁄2" x 21⁄2" x11⁄2"
endures high use (88 x 60 x 34mm) (90 x 65 x 38mm) 72/pk
T Brilliant images resolved with superb optics
T A Versatile performance - multiple techniques ® Micro-Partition
available, including polarization with First Order
(Full Wave/Red) Retardation Plate, phase contrast, Boxes
dark field and more Made from white recyclable
board. Has a partition insert
and removable lid. Ideal for filing
small samples

No. of Compartmnts
Cat. # Inside Dimensions and size Qty
64328-06 111⁄16 x 11⁄8 x 17⁄16" 6, (13 x 13mm) 36/pk
64328-12 21⁄4 x 111⁄16 x 17⁄16" 12, (13 x 13 mm) 36/pk
64328-24 31⁄8 x 21⁄4 x 17⁄16" 24, (13 x 13 mm) 36/pk

® Tin Can —
Specimen Tin Boxes
A round seamless tin with a friction
For more information, fit lid. Low form, flat bottoms. White
see pages 854–869 UUUUU label on lid. These boxes are ideal
for specimen or small item storage.

EMS # Dia x H, in. (mm) Capacity Qty

61020-01 11⁄2 x 1⁄2 (38 x 13) 1
⁄2 oz (15 ml) 144/pk
61020-02 2 x 5⁄8 (51 x 16) 1 oz (30 ml) 72/pk
61020-03 23⁄8 x 3⁄4 (60 x 19) 2 oz (60 ml) 72/pk
61020-04 31⁄8 x 15⁄16 (79 x 24) 4oz (120 ml) 36/pk

232 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec11_214-233_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 4:24 AM Page 233

Specimen Preparation and Embedding Supplies SECTION 11

® Cocoon Box — A Smart Box
THE REVOLUTIONARY WAY FOR MAILING
AND STORING SAMPLES
T Boxes - Made from polypropylene, envelope shape, available with or
without an inner frame. These boxes are the safest way for mailing or stor-
ing fragile samples. They are impact and shock resistant. With a living-
hinge, opaque-clear, reusable and recyclable. The boxes are available in
many sizes and styles to fit your needs. Closing Clips and Security Seals
are also available as an option.

T Vials — are made from polystyrene and

they are tough and crystal clear and come 4. BE8 and BE8A
with a friction lid. Cocoon Boxes are also BE8 comes with an inner frame.
available to accept these vials for safe
storing and/or mailing valuable samples. BE8A - The-Envelope-Mailer - comes
without the inner frame.

Ordering: Catalog Outside Dimensions Inside dimensions

1. BE3, BE3A, BE3B, and BE3D Number inch (mm) inch (mm) Quantity
Box BE3 comes with inner frame to form a cocoon; BE3A is without an 64300-8 3.70x2.56x0.55 2.44x1.22x0.39 10/pk
inner frame offering more room inside of the box; BE3B comes with 8 (94x65x14) (62x31x10)
64300-8A 3.70x2.56x0.55 2.48x1.22x0.39 10/pk
round cavities, each 0.94"x0.62"H (24x16mm) for storing Vials DB20;
94x65x14) (64x31x10)
BE3D comes with 6 round cavities each 1.29îx0.62îH (33x16mm) for
storing vials DDB30 5. BE9, BE9A, and BE9B
Catalog Outside Dimensions Inside dimensions BE9 comes with single inner frame. BE9A
Number inch (mm) inch (mm) Quantity comes with two compartments and BE9B
64300-3 5.31x3.89x0.70 4.01x2.55x0.59 10/pk comes with 4 compartments.
(135x99x18) (102x65x15)
64300-3A 5.31x3.89x0.70 4.33x2.79x0.59 10/pk
(135x99x18) (110x71x15)
64300-3B 5.31x3.89x0.70 4.33x2.79x0.59 10/pk Catalog Outside Dimensions Inside dimensions
(135x99x18) (110x71x15) Number inch (mm) inch (mm) Quantity
64300-3D 5.31x3.89x0.70 4.33x2.79x0.59 10/pk 64300-9 8.26x3.93x0.70 2x 7.80x1.26x0.59 10/pk
(135x99x18) (110x71x15) (210x100x18) (180x32x15)
64300-9A 8.26x3.93x0.70 2x 7.80x1.26x0.59 10/pk
2. BE4, BE4A and BE4B (210x100x18) (180x32x15)
Box BE4 comes with an inner frame to form a cocoon; BE4A is without 64300-9B 8.26x3.93x0.70 4x 3.42x1.26x0.59 10/pk
an inner frame for more room inside of the box; BE4B comes with 6 (210x100x18) (87x32x15)
round cavities, each 0.94"x0.47"H (24x12mm) for storing vials DB10
6. Vials DB10, DB20, and DB30:
Catalog Outside Dimensions Inside dimensions Vial DB10 is designed for the Cocoon Box
Number inch (mm) inch (mm) Quantity BE4B (64300-4B); Vial DB20 is designed for
64300-4 4.49x3.70x0.55 3.26x2.36x0.35 10/pk the cocoon Box BE3B (64300-3B); and Vial
(114x94x14) (83x60x9) DB30 is designed for the Cocoon Box BE3D
64300-4A 4.49x3.70x0.55 3.50x2.91x0.35 10/pk
(64300-3D).
(114x94x14) (89x74x10)
64300-4B 4.49x3.70x0.55 3.50x2.91x0.35 10/pk Catalog Outside Dimensions Inside dimensions
(114x94x14) (89x74x10) Number inch (mm) inch (mm) Quantity
64302-10 0.94 x 0.47 0.748 x 0.295 12/pk
(24x12) (19x7.5)
3. BE6 64302-20 0.94 x 0.62 .708 x 0.511 12/pk
Large size with an inner frame. The (24x16) (18x13)
yellow box (BE6Y) is accepted by the 64302-30 1.29 x0.62 1.102 x 0.62 12/pk
US Postal service AS-IS. No need for (33x16) (28x13)
envelopes or other containers. This box
is also available in clear (BE6C). 7. Locking Clips
Used to secure the cocoon boxes.
Catalog Outside Dimensions Inside dimensions Clips snap together to keep cocoon
Number inch (mm) inch (mm) Quantity boxes securely lock.
64300-6Y 9.64x6.69x0.70 8.26x5.31x0.59 10/pk
(245x170x18) (210x135x15)
100 clips per box.
64300-6C 9.64x6.69x0.70 8.26x5.31x0.59 10/pk Catalog Description Quantity
(245x170x18) (210x135x15) 64301-10 Locking Clips 100/pk

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 233
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec11_234-249_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 4:34 AM Page 234

SECTION 11 Specimen Preparation and Embedding Supplies

® Vacutainer® Storage Boxes
We now have two Sample Storage Boxes to accommodate our VACUTAINER® Tubes. Made from
durable cardboard, medical laboratories, forensic laboratories, and hospitals will find these boxes
extremely convenient for storing filled vials. These boxes are suitable for incubators, refrigerators,
deep-freeze, and controlled atmosphere applications.
VACUTAINER® is a Registered Trademark of Becton Dickinson & Co.
Model 68-16-112 holds tubes from Model 200-19-117 holds 200 tubes up to
10.25 to 16mm O.D. x 63 to 112mmL 19mm O.D. x up to 117mmL
Cat. # Description Pack Cat. # Description Pack
64286 Vautainer® Storage Box, 68 Tubes each 64287 Vacutainer® Storage Box, 200 Tubes each

® Sample Storage Sets

Compact space savers offered in a variety of sizes. Ideal for the storage of ® 3. Snap Cap Shell Vial Series
liquids, powders, small specimens, etc.... Each set includes a partitioned Poly-plug, Knurled snap-caps are friction
box, vials with caps, labels, reference chart, and an exterior card holder fitted with glass shell vial, straight sided, and
and card. Alpha-numerical indexing system allows quick identification and a flat bottom.
location of stored items.

T Shell vial size 3 dram (10.4ml), 12mm x 114mm;

Tray size 13"(L) x 31⁄2"(W) x 5"(H), arrangement 5 x 20
64276 Sample Storage Set SCSV3 100 vials/set
T Shell vial size 4 dram (15.20ml), 25mm x 52mm;
Tray size 101⁄2"(L) x 51⁄2"(W) x 21⁄2"(H), arrangement 5 x 10
64277 Sample Storage Set SCSV4 50 vials/set
T Shell vial size 7 dram (36.6ml), 29mm x 65mm;
Tray size 13"(L) x 63⁄4"(L) x 3"(H), arrangement 5 x 10
64278 Sample Storage Set SCSV7 50 vials/set
For vial sizes of 10 and 12 dram please call us for prices and availability.

® 4. Square Bottle Series

® 1. Screw Cap Vial Series A large size storage set. It comes with
Threaded glass vials with plastic lined caps. square clear glass bottles (1-ounce capacity)
and black screw caps with plastic linings.

T Bottle size 1 oz (29 ml), arrangement 5 x 10;

Tray size 123⁄4"(L) x 61⁄2"(W) x 33⁄4"(H)
T Vial size 1 dram (3.8ml), 15mmx45mm, arrangement: 5x20;
64281 Sample Storage Set SB1 50 bottles/set
Tray size 13”(L)x 31⁄2”(W) x 21⁄4”(H)
T Bottle size 2 oz (78 ml), arrangement 4 x 8;
64265 Sample Storage Set SCV1 100 vials/set
Tray size 12"(L) x 6"(W) x 31⁄2"(H)
T Vial size 2 dram (7.6ml), 17mmx60mm, arrangement; 5x20 64282 Sample Storage Set SB2 32 bottles/set
Tray size 111⁄4”(L)x41⁄4”(W)x23⁄4”(H)
T Bottle size 4 oz (116 ml), arrangement 3 x 7;
64266 Sample Storage Set SCV2 75 vials/set Tray size 121⁄2"(L) x 51⁄2"(W) x 41⁄2"(H)
64283 Sample Storage Set SB4 21 bottles/set
® 2. Poly-Seal Screw Cap Series
T Bottle size 1⁄4oz (7.5ml), 23 x 23 x 55mm, arrangement 5 x 10;
The same as our screw cap series, but with Tray size 91⁄2" x 5" x 31⁄2" (241.3x127x63.5mm)
Poly-seal caps and a cone shaped
polyethylene liner. 64280 Sample Storage Set SB 0.25 50 bottles/set

® 5. Cork Stopper Vial Set

Most economical, straight-sided, flat bottom,
T Vial size 4 dram (15.2ml), 21mm x 70mm;
glass shell vial with high quality cork closures.
Tray size 91⁄4"(L) x 43⁄4"(W) x 31⁄4"(H), arrangement 5 x 10
Ideally suited for storing small parts, geological
64270 Sample Storage Set PSSC4 50 vials/set specimens, soil and many other types of
T Vial size 8 dram (26.6ml), 25mm x 95mm; samples.
Tray size 101⁄2"(L) x 51⁄2"(W) x 41⁄2"(H); arrangement 5 x 10 T Vial size 3 dr (10.4ml), 12 mm dia x 114 mm H, arrangement 5x20.
64271 Sample Storage Set PSSC8 50 vials/set Tray size 111⁄2" x 3” x 5” (292.1x76.2x127mm)
64269 Sample Storage Set SK-3 100 vials/set

234 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec11_234-249_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 4:34 AM Page 235

Specimen Preparation and Embedding Supplies SECTION 11

® Membrane Boxes
Our unique membrane storage boxes for the transfer, storage and shipping of many
delicate items. Available in 5 different shapes and sizes these plastic containers, with a
double elastic membrane on the top and bottom, offer security for all of your sensitive
items. Once your item is placed in the box the elastic membrane conforms around the
enclosed object and protects it from any movement.

Round Membrane Boxes

Cat. # O.D, mm I.D, mm C D Qty
64304-20 82 54 20 40 each
64304-30 82 54 9 17 each

Overall Dimensions Maximum Useful Area Dimensions Capacity

Cat. # L, mm W, mm D, mm L, mm W, mm D, mm Weight Qty
Rectangular Boxes
64304-27 250 200 212 162 18 — — each
64304-28 250 200 204 154 40 — — each
64304-29 100 50 67 20 20 — — each
64304-36 100 50 16 67 17 9 8g each
64304-38 100 75 16 67 42 9 19g each
64304-39 100 75 25 62 37 18 31g each
64304-40 125 75 25 87 37 18 44gg each
64304-41 150 75 25 112 37 18 56g each
64304-42 150 125 25 112 87 18 132g each
64304-43 150 125 50 112 79 20 246g each
64304-44 250 200 100 188 138 60 1557g each
64304-45 250 200 200 157 3371g each
64304-46 300 150 16 267 117 9 211g each
64304-51 100 50 50 54 17 12 — each
This box has no stackable feet.
64304-52 150 100 25 92 92 9 — each
64304-53 300 75 25 262 37 18 — each
64304-54 150 100 75 104 54 59 — each
64304-55 300 150 25 267 117 19 — each
64304-56 300 150 75 246 96 60 — each
64304-57 175 100 25 137 62 18 — each
64304-58 175 100 50 129 54 40 — each
64304-59 200 150 50 154 104 40 — each
Square Boxes
64304-10 38 38 18 31 31 9 10g 12/pk
64304-11 100 100 16 67 67 9 30g each
64304-12 100 100 25 62 62 18 52g each
64304-13 100 100 50 54 54 40 88g each
64304-14 125 125 16 92 92 9 57g each
64304-15 125 125 25 87 87 18 102g each
64304-16 125 125 50 79 79 40 187g each
64304-17 150 150 100 88 88 80 465g each
64304-18 125 125 75 92 92 60 — each
64304-19 150 150 25 112 112 18 — each
64304-21 150 150 75 104 104 60 — each
64304-22 100 100 75 — — — — each
64304-23 175 175 25 137 137 18 — each
64304-24 175 175 50 129 129 40 — each
64304-25 200 200 25 162 162 18 — each
64304-26 200 200 50 154 154 40 — each
64304-50 150 150 50 104 104 40 324g each

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 235
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec11_234-249_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 4:34 AM Page 236

SECTION 11 Specimen Preparation and Embedding Supplies

® Gel-Pak® Storage/Carrier Box
Patented gel technology – the innovative
solutions for storage and carrying delicate
materials
The traditional Gel-Box, Gel-Tray® and Gel-Slide Carriers
are perfect for applications where devices are manually
offloaded by tweezers or by hand.
T Gel-Box (AD Series) - Hinged plastic boxes coated
with Gel in the bottom.
T Gel-Tray® (BD Series) - A removable 2" plastic tray
coated with Gel and contained inside a hinged
plastic box.
T Gel-Slide (CD series) - A removable 2"glass slide
coated with Gel and contained inside a hinged
plastic box.

(Gel-Pak® is A Division of Delphon Industries)

® GEL-BOX (AD Carrier Boxes) ® GEL-TRAY® (BD Series) And GEL-SLIDE

Gel-Box AD Series Carriers owe their unique device-holding capabilities to a (CD Series)
proprietary GEL coating applied directly to the bottom of a hinged box. Same as the Gel-Box, the Gel-Tray and Gel-Slide products are intended for
Devices are held once contact is made with the GEL surface and will stay in manual applications in which the devices are loaded and unloaded using
place, even if the carrier is tilted or jarred. The carriers are designed for tweezers or by fingers. The Gel-Pak BD and CD series of pocketless trays
manual off-loading with tweezers or by hand. GEL-PAK AD series are ideal for are both configured as a 2" carrier stored in a protective plastic hinged box.
handling devices where no direct contact with the top of the device is The Gel coating is applied directly to the surface of the plastic tray (BD
important. Series) or glass slide (CD Series).
The GEL-BOX Carriers may also be used for bare die handling, such as GaAs, These products offer the same functionality as the Gel-Box, however the
PETs, laser diodes, and beam-lead devices where the die size is small (less plastic tray or glass slide can be easily removed from the box allowing for
than 1mm) and tweezers or other specialized techniques are used for off- convenient handling when loading or unloading fixtures are being used.
handling. The Gel-Slide (coated glass slides) is designed for higher temperature
FEATURES: applications such as bonding and reflow where a plastic tray will not work.
T No need for custom-molded containers for each device size. The CD slide has a temperature capability up to 220˚C. The CD glass slides
T Ideal for handling subassemblies, hybrid models and are also ideal for backside inspection due to their optical clarity.
packaged devices. Both the Gel-Tray and Gel-Slide products are available in the standard
T Available in Transparent, Conductive and Anti-Static retention levels (X0, X4, X5, and X8) to accommodate variations in device
carriers in multiple sizes. size, weight, and surface roughness.
T Retention Level available: x0, x1, x2, x3, x4, x5, and x8 (the higher
the number the more retention capability) The protective 2" hinged boxes are available in transparent styrene (T),
We offer standard retention level X4. Other retention levels are conductive black (C) and antistatic (AS) materials. The boxes, trays, and
available with the order of 100 or more, and at least two weeks slides may be customized with a print pattern (grid) or company logo.
for delivery. Standard available Prints can be viewed at Gel-Tray/Gel-Slide Print options

Cat # Description - Overall Box size Qty Cat # Description Qty

64900-x4 1"x1"x 1⁄4" Transparent Hinged Box 50/pk 64900-10 2" x 2" Conductive BD Tray in Antistatic Hinged Box 50/pk
64901-x3 2" x 2" x 0.25" Antistatic Gel-Box 50/pk 64900-11 2" x 2" Conductive BD Tray in Conductive Base/ 50/pk
64901-x4 2"x2"x1⁄4" Conductive Hinged Box 50/pk Antistatic Lid Hinged Box
64902-x4 2"x2"x1⁄4" Anti-Static Top & Conductive Hinged Box 50/pk 64900-12 2" x 2" Conductive BD Tray in Conductive Base/ 50/pk
64903-x4 2"x2"x1⁄4" Anti-Static Hinged Box 50/pk Transparent Lid Hinged Box
64904-x4 2"x3"x3⁄8" Conductive Hinged Box 50/pk 64900-13 2" x 2" Conductive BD Tray in Conductive Hinged Box 50/pk
64905-x4 2"x3"x3⁄8" Anti-Static & Conductive Hinged Box 50/pk 64900-14 2" x 2" Conductive BD Tray in Transparent Hinged Box 50/pk
64906-x4 3.5"x4.5"x0.5" Conductive Hinged Box 50/pk 64900-15 2" x 2" Conductive BD Tray in “High Clearance” 50/pk
64908-X3 4.5" x 3.5" x 0.875" Conductive Base/Antistatic Lid Gel-Box 50/pk Antistatic Hinged Box
64907-x4 3.5"x4.5"x7/8" Transparent Hinged Box 50/pk 64900-16 2" x 2" Transparent BD Tray in Antistatic Hinged Box 50/pk
64908-x4 3.5"x4.5”x7/8" Conductive Hinged Box 50/pk 64900-17 2" x 2" Transparent BD Tray in Conductive Base/ 50/pk
64909-x4 2.5"x3.5"x0.5" Anti Static Top & Conductive Hinged Box 50/pk Antistatic Lid Hinged Box
64910-x3 6" x 4" x 0.5" Conductive Gel-Box 50/pk 64900-18 2" x 2" Transparent BD Tray in Conductive Hinged Box 50/pk
64911-x3 6" x 4" x 0.5" Transparent Gel-Box 50/pk 64900-19 2" x 2" Transparent BD Tray in Transparent Hinged Box 50/pk
64912-x3 7" x 5" x 1" Conductive Base/Antistatic Lid Gel-Box 50/pk 64900-20 2" x 2" Glass Slide in Transparent Hinged Box 50/pk
64913-x3 7" x 5" x 1" Conductive Gel-Box 50/pk 64900-21 2" x 2" Glass Slide in Conductive Hinged Box 50/pk
64914-x3 7.75" x 3.5" x 1" Conductive Gel-Box 50/pk 64900-22 2" x 2" Glass Slide in Antistatic Hinged Box 50/pk
64915-x3 9.937" x 3.5" x 0.625" Transparent Gel-Box 50/pk 64900-23 2" x 2" Glass Slide in MAG-40 Cassette 50/pk

236 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec11_234-249_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 4:34 AM Page 237

Specimen Preparation and Embedding Supplies SECTION 11

® The EMS Single and Multi Wafer ® Tissue Mounting Stub
Containers
EMS is proud to introduce our complete line of carriers for either storage
and or shipping of a variety of sizes of wafers (Any material) from 1"-6"
in diameter.
The Containers are made from polypropylene and they prevent all types
of damage and contamination to the wafer during shipping and even
storage. Each of the containers are packed in 1000 class clean room
and bag. The set includes the Container , the cover and the spring
There is as well a single container that will accommodate a variety of Machined from aluminum rods with one end tapered to 4.8mm in
sizes from 4-6" by simply adjusting the silicone supports in the box. diameter. The specimen can be oriented and mounted to the tip with
These boxes are transparent in color and are made from Anti- glue and it is ready for sectioning. The body size is “00” and it
Electrostatic Polycarbonate . measures 11mm long.
For the Multi Wafer containers they have a storage capacity of 25 wafers 70145-05 Aluminum Tissue Mounting Stub 50/pk
maximum and they come complete with the Base and the cover. 70145-10 Aluminum Tissue Mounting Stub 100/pk

® BEEM® Capsules; Embedding,

Size 00, 8mm I.D.
Polyethylene embedding capsules with 1x1mm face at the tip of a
truncated pyramid, each with a hinged cap.

64917-46

70000 BEEM® Embedding Capsule 100/pk

70010 BEEM® Embedding Capsule 500/pk
70020 BEEM® Embedding Capsule 1000/pk
BEEM® Is A Registered Trademark of Better Equipment For Electron Microscopy, Inc.
64918-3
64917-1
® BEEM® Embedding Capsules Size 3 (small)
These capsules, made from polyethylene, produce blocks with a 5.6mm
O.D. and a pyramid tip. Comes complete with a hinged cap.

Cat. # Description Measurements Qty.

64917-1 Single Wafer Container 1" (25mm) 33mm x 10mm 6/pack
64917-2 Single Wafer Container 2" (50mm) 60mm x 11mm 6/pack
64917-25 Single Wafer Container 2.5" (63mm) 75mm x 11mm 6/pack
64917-3 Single Wafer Container 3" (75mm) 84mm x 11mm 6/pack
64917-4 Single Wafer Container 4" (100mm) 110mm x 11mm 6/pack
64917-6 Single Wafer Container 6" (150mm) 160mm x 11mm 6/pack
64917-46 Single Wafer Container 4-6" 170mm x 170mm 6/pack
69911-01 BEEM® Capsule Size 3 100/pk
(100-150mm), x 20mm
69911-05 BEEM® Capsule Size 3 500/pk
64918-2 Multi Wafer Container 2" (50mm) – 3/pack
69911-10 BEEM® Capsule Size 3 1000/pk
64918-3 Multi Wafer Container 3" (75mm) – 3/pack
64918-4 Multi Wafer Container 4" (100mm) – 3/pack BEEM® Is A Registered Trademark of Better Equipment For Electron Microscopy, Inc.

® BEEM® Dial-A-Grid-Grid Holder

® BEEM® Dial-A-Grid and Block Holder
See Grid Section, page 144 UUUUU

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 237
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec11_234-249_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 4:35 AM Page 238

SECTION 11 Specimen Preparation and Embedding Supplies

® BEEM® Embedding Capsules; Special Shapes ® Multi Task BEEM
Capsule Holder:
This Multi-Task BEEM
Capsule Holder is an
innovative holder
designed to hold size
“00” BEEM capsule
during resin
polymerization.
This holder is also a
perfect tool when
embedding and
polymerizing resin by
microwave, especially
when the embedment
needs to be performed
Available in two specially shaped capsules which are designed to under water. The direct
overcome commonly encountered embedding problems; such as, small or contact of the
thin elongated specimens and powder samples. These capsules are also microwave energy to the
good for centrifuging precipitated matters and allows for less trimming. resin inside the microwave is usually causes the resin to heat to quick
T The bottle neck capsule produces a 7.9mm OD block with a and that leads to micro bubbles forming inside the resin block and this
hemihyperpoloid (rather than faced) tip. causes unknown damage to the tissues. To help eliminate this problem,
T The conical capsule produces a 7.9mm OD block with a conical the resin capsule should be immersed in the water bath during
(rather than faced) tip. microwave irradiation of the resin. This ‘indirect contact’ of microwave
energy to the resin will help the embedding block polymerize nicely and
69912-01 BEEM® Capsule Bottle Neck Tip 100/pk
homogeneously and also avoids the overheating of the tissue.
69912-05 BEEM® Capsule Bottle Neck Tip 500/pk
69912-10 BEEM® Capsule Bottle Neck Tip 1000/pk Mold is machined from polyethylene block, comes in two parts: bottom
69913-01 BEEM® Capsule Conical Tip 100/pk part which holds the BEEM capsule, and the second part which is placed
69913-05 BEEM® Capsule Conical Tip 500/pk on top and is securd by two plastic screws to ensure the BEEM capsules
69913-10 BEEM® Capsule Conical Tip 1000/pk are in place and capsule lid will not pop out during under water
BEEM® Is A Registered Trademark of Better Equipment For Electron Microscopy, Inc. polymerization or microwave irradiation.

® Embedding Capsules; Flat Accompanies is microwave transparent tray, which holds water and
capsule holder for microwave processing.
Added to our extensive line of embedding capsules is our flat bottomed
capsules, which are made from polyethylene, and are 8mm (just like the Measures: 1-1/8” (L) x 3" (W) x 2” (H), accommodates 24 capsules.
standard 00 capsules) in diameter. You can order either the Multi-Task Capsule Holder only, or the set
which includes one Capsule Holder and one Tray.

70021 Flat Bottom Embedding Capsules 500/pk

® Embedding
Capsule
Holder
Fabricated from poly-
ethylene. It accomm- 70023-01 Multi Task BEEM Capsule Holder, each
odates 15 embedding 70023-10 Multi Task BEEM Capsule Holder Set each
capsules size “00”. The 97082 Microwave Transparent Tray, 10/pack each
whole capsule is exposed to allow for even heat and/or UV light
distribution during polymerization. Sturdy, long lasting, and stackable.
Beem Flat Embedding Molds, See page 252 UUUUU
Measures: 5"(L)x3"(W) (127mmx76mm).
70022-01 EMS Capsule Holder each
70022-04 EMS Capsule Holder 4/pk
70022-06 EMS Capsule Holder 6/pk
70022-12 EMS Capsule Holder 1 doz.

238 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec11_234-249_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 4:35 AM Page 239

Specimen Preparation and Embedding Supplies SECTION 11

® BEEM® Capsule Holders
These holders are used to hold capsules upright during the resin embedding stage. The cavities
(22) allow for illumination from the bottom of the holder for specimen orientation. Available in two
sizes: one holds size “00”, conical, and bottle neck capsules; the other holds size #3 capsules.
Measures 5-1⁄2” (L )x 4” (W) x 7⁄8” (H) 138 x 100 x 12m
69916-01 BEEM® Capsule Holder size “00” each
69916-06 BEEM® Capsule Holder size “00” 6/pk
69916-12 BEEM® Capsule Holder size “00” 12/pk
69917-01-3 BEEM® Capsule Holder size 3 each
69917-06-3 BEEM® Capsule Holder size 3 6/pak
69917-12-3 BEEM® Capsule Holder size 3 12/pk
BEEM® Is A Registered Trademark of Better Equipment For Electron Microscopy, Inc.

® The Opaque BEEM® Capsule Holder

If microwaving or UV polymerizing of your embedding media these opaque Beem capsule holders
are perfect. Made from Polypropylene. All embedding capsules size 00 and 3 fit it.

69915-01 BEEM® Capsule “00” Holder, Clear each

69915-06 BEEM® Capsule “00” Holder, Clear 6/pk
69915-12 BEEM® Capsule “00” Holder, Clear 12/pk
69915-03-3 BEEM® Capsule “3” Holder, Clear each
69915-06-3 BEEM® Capsule “3” Holder, Clear 6/pk
69915-12-3 BEEM® Capsule “3” Holder, Clear 12/pk
BEEM® Is A Registered Trademark of Better Equipment For Electron Microscopy, Inc.

® Capsules; Gelatin
Natural, hard gelatin capsules. To be used as an embedding mold for water miscible resins, or
resins which need to be cured by transmitted light. Gelatin capsules dissolve or disintegrate within
5 minutes when immersed in a 0.5% HCl solution at 36-38°C, within 2 minutes in water at 37°C
or in artificial gastric juice.
Overall Length Body Diameter Volume
Cat.# Size Inches (mm) Inches (mm) (ml) Pack
70101 000 1.029 26.14 0.376 9.55 1.37 1000
70100 00 .917 23.30 0.322 8.18 0.95 1000
70110 0 .835 21.20 0.289 7.34 0.68 1000
70103 2 .688 17.50 0.239 6.07 0.37 1000
70104 3 .610 15.50 0.219 5.56 0.30 1000
70105 4 .547 13.90 0.199 5.05 0.21 1000

® Large Gelatin Capsules

Our large size gelatin capsules are ideal for storing either delicate or small items. It is also
suitable for use as an embedding mold for paraffin or paraplast. The capsules come complete
with a locking ring. A variety of sizes are available.
Length Diameter Volume
Cat.# Size (mm) (mm) (oz.) Pack
70114 13 24 13 1
⁄8 50
70115 12 33 13 1
⁄4 50
70116 11 38 19 1
⁄2 50
70117 10 52 22 1 50
70118 07 66 22 11⁄2 50

® Gelatin Capsule Holder

Made from durable polyethylene. It accommodates 15 gelatin capsules
size “00”. The whole capsule is exposed to allow for even heat and/or
UV light distribution during polymerization. Measures: 5"(L) x 3"(W)
(127mm x 76mm).
70120-01 Gelatin Capsule Holder each
70120-04 Gelatin Capsule Holder 4/pk
70120-06 Gelatin Capsule Holder 6/pk

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 239
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec11_234-249_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 4:35 AM Page 240

SECTION 11 Specimen Preparation and Embedding Supplies

® BEEM® Capsule Press ® EMS EM5 Embedding Molds
Designed to facilitate the removal of blocks from Introducing the EM5 - an innovative new
the capsule without any damage to the block tip. design based on the widely used Ø8 mm
PLEASE NOTE: FOR BEEM capsule size #3, an size embedding mold. The unique two
adapter is included. part design allows for easy removal of
resin blocks, as well as incorporating
many other advantages over currently
available embedding products.
T Separate base and tube sections
that clip together to form the familiar
capsule shape. 2 part - Ø8mm body with 2mm cylindrical cone cap
T Care should be taken that each
component is free of debris before
attaching together, to ensure a
proper seal.
T Easy removal of resin blocks
achieved by simply pulling the mold
Cat. # Description Qty.
apart by hand.
69920-00 BEEM® Capsule Press each
T The mold can produce blocks up to
BEEM® Is A Registered Trademark of Better Equipment For
Electron Microscopy, Inc. 20mm in length, however shorter
EM5-8B/PP 5 Block Ø8mm body.
blocks (˜14mm) allow for easier Material: Polypropylene
® BEEM Block Storage
®
removal. No razor blades or capsule
A two tone color coded plastic box with insert, presses are required.
which allows for the storage of up to 10 blocks in T The detachable cap section allows
the numbered cavities. for easier access and manipulation
of a specimen.
Measures: 21⁄3”(L)x13⁄4”(W)x1⁄2”(H) 57x45x12.5mm
T For more accurate specimen
alignment a small amount of resin
can be cured or partially cured
before clipping to the body and EM5-8C-C/PP 5 Block 2mm cylindrical cone cap.
completing the resin block. When Material: Polypropylene
fully cured they form strong
homogeneous blocks.
T Each mold can be clipped to other
molds, allowing for the creation of
trays of desired size. For volatile
resins, another cap section can be
clipped on to the top of the mold,
creating an air tight seal.
Cat. # Description Qty. T Each cavity is numbered 1 < 5,
69922-01 BEEM® Block Storage each whilst the end support stands have
69922-05 BEEM® Block Storage 50/pk designated areas for writing
69922-10 BEEM® Block Storage 100/pk indexing numbers or comments. Multiple array
BEEM® Is A Registered Trademark of Better Equipment For
Electron Microscopy, Inc. Cat. # Description Qty.
69934-10 EM5-8B-PE 5 Block Embedding Mold-8mm Body 25/Pack
® Capsule Block Storage 69934-20 EM5-8C-C/PE 5 Block Embedding Mold-2mm Cylindrical Cone Cap 10/Pack
Stores 15 capsule blocks in numbered cavities. 69934-30 5 Block Embedding Mold-2 Part- 8mm Body with 2mm Cylindrical Cap 10/PAck

® Plastic Flat Embedding Mold

T Injected molded polyethylene.
T Resistant to most embedding materials.
T Easy peeled-off the blocks.
Mold fits perfectly inside the cocoon box BE8 (64300-
8); See Cocoon Box section.
When the mold and the box BE8 are used together, the set allows for the use of oxygen-
prohibited embedding materials (Ie: LR White) to be polymerized in a flat orientation.
These molds are reusable. Each cavity measures 12mm(L) x 5mm(W) x 3.5mm Deep.
Cat. # Description Qty. Overall mold measures: 94 x 56 x 14mm.
69923-01 Capsule Block Storage Box ea Cat. # Description Qty.
69923-05 Capsule Block Storage Box 50/pk 70905-01 EMS Molded Flat Embedding Mold ea
69923-10 Capsule Block Storage Box 100/pk 70905-12 EMS Molded Flat Embedding Mold 12/pk

240 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec11_234-249_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 4:36 AM Page 241

Specimen Preparation and Embedding Supplies SECTION 11

® Easy-Molds™
Made from polyethylene, designed for convenience of use and offers better embedment.
This tray-and-mold in one unit offers a unique specimen block that no other mold can.
FEATURES: (SEE ILLUSTRATIONS AT THE RIGHT)
1. Trays-and-molds are self standing — There is no need for a holding tray.
2. Easy Orientation of Specimens — The tip of each mold is only 0.3mm thick and is
designed to be transparent. This facilitates the orientation of your specimen prior to
polymerization.
3. They form a Universal Block — Many microscopists have to embed large specimens. 1
The Easy Mold tip forms a flat block face which is wide enough for large specimens. This
wide surface helps to prevent air bubbles being trapped around the specimen during
polymerization. In addition, a positive guide form on the block offers an accurate position
for clamping.
4. Free Airflow for Even Polymerization — Easy Mold trays raise the molds away from
the surface of the oven, allowing air of a constant temperature to circulate freely and
evenly around the specimen tip during the hardening process.
5. Sealing of Capsules — If you are using Acrylate or other volatile embedding mediums
2 3
(LR White, GMA, HPMA), the molds can be sealed by placing another Easy Mold on the
top, and by applying a little pressure you can seal the capsule completely.
6. Easy to Remove the Polymerized Block — Due to the softness of the bottom of the
mold, to release the block simply push the bottom of the mold with your thumb and your
block will just pop out. There is no need for razor blades or a Capsule Press!
7. Convenient Storage and Identification of Sectioned Blocks — Each cavity on the
Easy Mold is numbered, and data can be written on the trays. Used Easy Molds can be
4
used for the storage of blocks which have already been sectioned, and filed away by
stacking one tray on top of another. There is no need for block storage boxes.

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS:
Each tray contains 2x10 block molds and measures 87x66mm. They are available in two sizes:
T Size 5.6mm diameter, which corresponds to gelatin and BEEM* capsules size 3,
and forms a block face of 1.6mm. 5
T Size 8mm diameter, which corresponds to gelatin and BEEM* capsule size “00”
and forms a block face of 3mm.
69930-05 Easy Mold, Size 3 5 Trays
69930-25 Easy Mold, Size 3 25 Trays
69930-50 Easy Mold, Size 3 50 Trays
69931-05 Easy Mold, Size “00” 5 Trays
69931-25 Easy Mold, Size “00” 25 Trays
69931-50 Easy Mold, Size “00” 50 Trays 6 7

Tough-Tags® on a Roll
Perfectly sized to fit microcentrifuge tubes
and other containers in the laboratory
Compatible – Tough-Tags are pre-cut, peel-off labels that accept
any marking instrument.

Convenient – Dispensing box assists in labeling individual tubes

used in small experiments.
For more information, see page 1133 UUUUU
Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 241
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec11_234-249_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 4:36 AM Page 242

SECTION 11 Specimen Preparation and Embedding Supplies

® BEEM® Specimen Block Storage System 2000®
T Are your bench-tops and drawers crowded with petri dishes and pillboxes full of various
sized specimen blocks?
T Have you been spent hours to look for a block for re-sectioning?
T Do you wish you could neatly catalog, file and store all of those blocks in one
convenient place?
If you answer yes to any of those questions, now you can organize and safely store all of your
specimen blocks with the newly introduced BEEM® Specimen Storage System 2000®
The system consists of four newly designed Blocklock® storage modules (#69956, #69957,
#69958, #69959) and a Covered Mounting Panel (#69950) that fits in a standard "D-Type" 3-ring
binder (optional) – A 1-inch binder will accommodate two Covered Mounting Panels, and 1.5-inch
binder accommodates three Panels.
Each Blocklock module has an adhesive backing which when exposed permits it to be
permanently mounted on any grease-free surface.
All Blocklocks can be inserted in a Plastic Protective Box (EMS #69956-B & 69958-B, #69957-B,
and 69959-B) or, by utilizing the adhesive feature, mounted in combination with other Blocklock
modules on the BEEM® mounting panel (EMS #66950). This new Storage System 2000 permits ® BEEM® Flat Embedding Molds
blocks size "00", size "3", and BEEM® flat embedment to be indexed, combined under one cover See page 252 UUUUU
along with any associated data sheets, and stored upright in 3-ring binders, on the shelf, at your
reach for ready reference. BEEM® Is A Registered Trademark of Better Equipment For Electron
Microscopy, Inc.
This system is infinitely expandable to high or low volume block storage. The choice is yours.

® 1. Capsule Blocklock Storage Modules

incorporate an innovation that allows blocks to snap into cavities specially
designed to retain them so they cannot be inadvertently dislodged. Number
and letter identify each cavity. Available with three configurations:
T Model 2006 measures 27⁄8"L x 2"W x1⁄4"H (74 x 50 x 8mm); accom-
modates 12 size "00" blocks
T Model 2007 measures 45⁄8"L x 31⁄2"W x 5⁄16"H (117 x 90 x 8mm),
accommodates 40 size "00" blocks.
T Model 2008 measures 27⁄8"L x 2"W x1⁄4"H (74 x 50 x 6mm), accom-
modates 20 size "3" capsule blocks. 69958-B & 69958 69959-B & 69959

® 2. BEEM® Blocklock Storage Modules Model 2009

is the same features as Capsule Blocklocks. Measures 27⁄8"L x 2"W x1⁄4"H
(74 x 50 x 8mm), accommodates 20 BEEM flat blocks. (BEEM flat
embedding mold, EMS #70904-01
NOTE: Do to the rectangular shape of a BEEM flat embedment; it must be inserted into the cavi-
ty in a Blocklock module #69959 as follows: Introduce the front of the block at a slight angle
into the rear of the cavity and gently push it forward until it nests in the recess.

® 3. BEEM® Blocklock Storage Boxes 69957-B & 69957

Heavy-duty, two tone plastic boxes are supplied with indexed, translucent
labels, which can be applied to the top or bottom of the box. 69956-B & 69956
T Box #69906-B and #69908-B are the same size and are two-tone
blue/clear. Overall measurement: 3"(L) x 21⁄8"(W) x1⁄2"(H) (78 x 54 x 69960-10
13mm).
T Box #69957-B is two-tone blue/clear. Overall measurement: 43⁄4"(L)
x 33⁄4"(W) x1⁄2"(H) (120 x 94 x 13mm) Ordering: Note: Blocklocks and their Storage Boxes are sold separately.
T Box #69959-B is two-tone black/clear. Overall measurements are Description BEEM EMS # Pack
the same as #69956-B and #69958-B Mounting Panel with Clear Cover 2010 69950 each
Blocklock, Size "00", 12 Positions 2006 69956 each
® 4. BEEM® Mounting Panel Blocklock Storage Box for #69956 2006B 69956-B each
with clear cover is designed to accept both Blocklock Storage Modules and Blocklock, Size "00", 40 Positions 2007 69957 each
BEEM original Dial-A-Grid (EMS #71148) and Block Storage Modules (EMS Blocklock Storage Box for #69957 2007B 69957-B each
#69922), which can be attached to the panel using double sided adhesive Blocklock, Size "3", 20 Positions 2008 69958 each
tape. Grid storage boxes from other manufacturers may be attached this Blocklock Storage Box for #69958 2008B 69958-B each
way also if they do not exceed 3⁄8" in height. Blocklock Flat embedment, 20 positions 2009 69959 each
Blocklock Storage Box for #69959 2009B 69959-B each
The panel inside measures: 105⁄8"(L) x 71⁄2"(W) x3⁄8"(H) (270 x 190 x 12mm). "D-Type" 3-Ring Binder, 1inch 69960-10 each
The overall measurement is 113⁄8"(L) x 83⁄4"(W) x 9⁄16"(H) (290 x 225 x 22mm) "D-Type" 3-Ring Binder, 1.5 inch 69960-15 each

242 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec11_234-249_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 4:36 AM Page 243

Specimen Preparation and Embedding Supplies SECTION 11

® Microporous Specimen Capsules ® Critical Point Drier Accessories:
These capsules measure 12mm in diameter and are 11mm high. They ® 1. TEM Grid
are available in three different pore sizes: 30, 78, 120-200 microns. Holder
Machined from solid
steel; has a stainless
steel mesh on the
top and the bottom.
Featuring the most
advanced design
which assures no
damage to the grids during processing. These holders are Brass-Nickel
plated, very sturdy, and withstand all critical conditions. Holds 12 grids
in numbered slots. Dimensions: 24mm(D)x24mm(H)
70192-01 Grid Holder each
70187-10 Microporous Specimen Capsules, 78 microns 50/pk
70187-11 Microporous Specimen Capsules, 78 microns 100/pk ® 2. Coverslip
70187-20 Microporous Specimen Capsules, 30 microns 50/pk
Holder
70187-21 Microporous Specimen Capsules, 30 microns 100/pk Brass/Nickel plated.
Coverslips can be
® Specimen Basket; Stainless Steel stacked with spacers
Both the top and the bottom are made from a stainless steel mesh, (up to 15 coverslips
which offers good fluid circulation. Has a male and a female threading with a thickness up to
for a secure closure. 2mm) with samples
Measures: 12mm(ID)x13mm(H) (1⁄2”x1⁄2”) placed on top of each
coverslip. Fluids freely exchange between coverslips. Both spacers and
weights come with the unit. The upper part of the holder is grooved to
accept tweezers.
Available in two configurations:
T Coverslip Holder 1: for 9 to 13 mm diameter coverslips; accommo-
dates 10 coverslips. Dimensions: 16mm(D)x24mm(H).
T Coverslip Holder 2: for 16 to 22 mm diameter coverslips; accom-
modates 10 coverslips. Dimensions: 24mm(D)x25mm(H).
70193-01 Coverslip Holder 1 each
70193-02 Coverslip Holder 2 each
70190-01 Specimen Basket each
70190-06 Specimen Basket 6/pk
® 3. Specimen Holders
Machined from solid steel, brass/nickel plated; incorporates a stainless
® Specimen/ Cleaning Basket steel mesh top and bottom to allow for fluid exchange.
This basket is brass with a stainless steel mesh attached to both ends;
the mesh opening is 300μm. (The inside diameter is 12.5mm, 15mm T 12 Specimen holder: comes with two sections; each section holds
height. (16mm ODx17mmH). To use, simply screw both halves together 6 specimens into 6 cavities, each cavity measuring 7.5mm
and you can keep small specimens for long periods of time during the (D)x6mm(H). The overall unit measures: 24mm(D) x 24mm(H).
process of fixing, dehydration or even critical point drying. It can also be T 24 Specimen holder: comes with two sections; each section holds
used to hold small parts for ultrasonic cleaning. 12 specimens into 12 cavities, each cavity measuring 4.5mm(D) x
6mm(H). The overall unit measures: 24mm(D) x 28mm(H).
T 4 Specimen holder: comes with one section which holds 4 or multi-
ples of or large samples 4-9mm(D)x16mm(H) cavities. The overall
unit measures: 24mm(D)x28mm(H).

70190-21 Specimen/Cleaning Basket each

70190-26 Specimen/Cleaning Basket 6/pk

70194-12 12 Specimen Holder each

70194-24 24 Specimen Holder each
70194-04 4 Specimen Holder each

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 243
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec11_234-249_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 4:36 AM Page 244

SECTION 11 Specimen Preparation and Embedding Supplies

® Stainless Steel Baskets with ® Biopsy Foam
Multiple Compartments Pads
EMS has introduced and is now available a variety of Stainless steel A cellular polyester blue
baskets with lids and multiple compartments for critical point Drying. foam that has uniform air
These baskets are either 15mm in diameter or 23mm. pockets throughout the
pad for optimal fluid flow.
It prevents either small or
fragmented tissue
specimens from being
lost.
To Use: Place small
samples or specimen fragments between the two pads and place the
specimen in a cassette or capsule.
Cat. No Foam Pad Size Use With Pack
Cat. # Description Pack 62325-01 25mm Diameter 29mm Capsules 1000/pk
70194-26 Tissue basket with Lid 62325-04 35mm Diameter 38mm Capsules 1000/pk
15mm(D) x 10mm (h) each 62325-06 25mmx32mm 1x11⁄4”Cassettes 1000/pk
70194-27 Tissue Basket with Lid

70194-28
23mm(d) x 18mm (h)
4 Compartment Tissue Basket with Lid
each
® Biopsy Bags
15mm(d) x 10mm (h) each T Made from nylon
70194-29 4 Compartment Tissue Basket with Lid cloth, 0.2mm mesh
23mm(d) x 18mm (h) each diameter. All seams
are heat-sealed.
T Allows for unrestrict-
® Stainless Steel ed fluid movement
Tissue Capsules around the tissue.
T Reduces the loss of
T A secure positive snap-on
small biopsy speci-
cover.
mens.
T Perforated on the top and bot- T Reduces cross con-
tom for easy fluid circulation. tamination and pressure artifacts by using sponges.
T Can be partitioned for up to 4 Cat.# Bag Measures Qty
sections. 62324-35 Nylon Biopsy Bag 35 x 50mm 100/pk
The separator is not included. 62324-75 Nylon Biopsy Bag 45 x 74mm 100/pk
62324-98 Nylon Biopsy Bag 98 x 75mm 100/pk
Measurements: 37mm(I.D.)x6mm(deep) (17⁄16”x3⁄16”)
62320-01 SS Tissue Capsule each
62320-06 SS Tissue Capsule 6/pk ® Paper Biopsy Bags
62320-20 Tissue Capsule Separator 2/pk

® Plastic
Tissue
Capsules
T Molded from
polyethylene; resis-
tant to all processing Due to the amazing demand from of our customers, EMS is
chemicals, including re-introducing the original Paper Biopsy Bags. These bags are made
Zenker’s fixative. T Perforated on the top and from porous paper which provides maximum tissue safety during
T A three compartment divider bottom for better circulation processing. The bags permit proper fluid exchange and drainage.
which is removable for speci- of the fluid. To Use: Simply introduce the specimen into the bag and fold its end,
mens up to 35mm. T Snap-on hinged cover. enclosing the cassette or capsule – you are now ready to process as
T A weighted end floats the They measure: 35mm(I.D.) x usual.
capsule in a upright position 35mm(I.D.) x 10mm(deep) (13⁄8x5⁄16)
to conserve space. Bag measurement: Overall 13⁄4" W x 3" L (45 x 75 mm),
62322-12 Plastic Tissue Capsules 12/pk
Inside Seam: 13⁄8" W (35 mm)
Cat. # Description Qty
62326-01 Paper Biopsy Bags 100/pk.
62326-05 Paper Biopsy Bags 500/pk.

244 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec11_234-249_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 4:36 AM Page 245

Specimen Preparation and Embedding Supplies SECTION 11

® Cloth; Lint Free, ® Lens Tissue –
Twill Jean EMS (Ross)
A twill jean cotton wipe made EMS (Ross) Lens tissue
from 100% cotton fiber that is does not lint or scratch and
woven in an extremely tight it is free from mineral or
construction. The extractable vegetable filler.
trace elements are effectively
reduced in the cleaning process
which removes impurities in the 71700 Lens Tissue, 41⁄2” x 5” 1000 sheets/box
cotton as well as any starches
or binders used in the ® Towel;
manufacturing process. Disposable
FEATURES: A large size towel
T Highly absorbent T Acid resistant and solvent (13.3”x23”) suitable for
compatible many uses around the lab.
T Excellent wipeability
T Low metallic ion content High absorbency and
T Thermal stability; good for
strong, even when wet.
high heat applications T Low static generation
72610 Towel; Disposable 45 towels/box
71750 Lint Free Cloth 9"x9" 100/pk
71752 Lint Free Cloth 9"x9" 300/pk
71753 Lint Free Cloth 12"x12" 150/pk Coated Grids, See Grid Section pages 116-133 UUUUU
Colloidal Compounds, See Chemicals and Scanning
® Cheese Cloth sections, pages 12-16 & 640-645 UUUUU
Cotton woven cloth in the
pattern of 44x36 (44 Graphite Conductive Adhesives, See Chemicals and
lines/inch horizontally and 36 Scanning sections, pages 12-16 & 640-645 UUUUU
lines/inch vertically) which Cutter; Paper Cutter, See Photography Section
makes it suitable for cleaning pages 728-729 UUUUU
and polishing. Supplied in 60
yard rolls (continuous) 36” in Desiccators and Desiccants, See pages 1064-1071 UUUUU
width; This configuration Derma-Plus Skin Protection, See page 1106 UUUUU
allows you to cut out the
exact length you desire. Tapes for making glass knife trufs,
See page 257 UUUUU
71748-00 Cheese Cloth box
Desiccator Cabinet; Low Temperature,
See Equipment Section pages 1065 UUUUU
® EMS Lens
Tissue Desiccator Cabinet 1, See Equipment Section
EMS Lens Tissue is the page 1065 UUUUU
world’s finest optical tissue. Desiccator Cabinet 2, See Equipment Section,
It’s extremely soft and pages 1065 UUUUU
virtually lint-free. Safe for
any optical surface such as Auto Desiccator Cabinet, See Equipment Section
camera lenses, microscopes, pages 1064-1065 UUUUU
telescopes, and eye glasses. For Our Line of Mini Scribers, See Tweezers Section
Each tissue is perforated for pages 837-839 UUUUU
easy removal from the
booklet. Diamond Tip Scribers, See pages 838-839 UUUUU
Tissue size: 4” x 6”, Desiccant Canister; Reusable, See Equipment Section
50 sheets/bk page 1071 UUUUU
71712-01 EMS Booklet Lens Tissue 50/bk Diamond Knife Cleaning Kit For a complete
71712-10 EMS Booklet Lens Tissue 10 bk/lot description, See Cleaning Section page 944 UUUUU

Cloths & Wipes, A Complete Line, EMS Diamond Knife Wash: For a complete description
See Cleaning section, pages 950-951 UUUUU see Cleaning Section page 944 UUUUU
Cleanser: Alcohol Packets, Triton -X-100 - Diamond Knife Soaking Solution
See Cleaning Section, page 940 UUUUU (0.08% solution): For a complete description,
Cleaning Solutions, See Cleaning Section, See Cleaning Section page 944 UUUUU
pages 940-941 UUUUU

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 245
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec11_234-249_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 4:36 AM Page 246

SECTION 11 Specimen Preparation and Embedding Supplies

ProScope Mobile, the world's first handheld ® Disposable
digital microscope, is now portable. Bibulous Paper
T Highly absorbent white
The Wireless ProScope, fiber paper
T Lint and dust free
ProScope HR and ProScope HR2 T Recommended for dry-
ing microscope slides
Digital Handheld Microscopes and other small lab
glass items
Wireless offers new practical applications, which include:
T Size: 4 x 6"
• Field scientists can examine specimens on site without
destroying them in transit to the lab Cat. # Description Qty.
70086-01 Disposable Bibulous Paper Book, each 50/pk.
• Doctors can show patients live images and add them into 70086-10 Disposable Bibulous Paper Book, 10 each 50/pk.
practice management apps and software
• Teachers can simultaneously show images to a classroom ® Thirsty Stix
of students using iPads Sterile - Disposable –
• Crime scene investigators can send images from the iPhone Absorbent filter paper sticks –
to a colleague in the lab or to a collaborative agency great for absorbing, cleaning,
and lubricating.
T Highly absorbent
T Adhesive, residue free
T Extremely low lint content
T Ideally to be used with the
microtome to remove excess
water from the boat
T Multiple uses
T Excellent to remove excess
water or solution from tubes
and plates
T Size: 6" long x 0.20" thick

ProScope
Applications
T Law Enforcement
T Science Education
T Quality Inspections
Cat. # Description Qty.
70996 Thirsty Stix 250/pk.

® All Glass Nebulizer

An all glass unit for the simple production of microdroplets. An object is
held vertically in front of the nebulizer outlet and by squeezing the
atomizer a fine spray is created. The nebulizer set comes with an All
Glass Nebulizer bulb and Atomizer.

Designed and developed for law enforce-

ment, the ProScope Stand will steadily hold
the ProScope in a wide variety of positions.
Perfect for law enforcement, industrial
inspection, and biology when working at
high magnification.

70505-01 Nebulizer Set Set

For more information, 70505-05
70506-01
Nebulizer Set
Nebulizer Only
5 Sets
each
see pages 870–877 UUUUU 70506-05
60804
Nebulizer Only
Atomizer
5/pk.
each

246 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec11_234-249_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 4:37 AM Page 247

Specimen Preparation and Embedding Supplies SECTION 11

® Dip Miser, ® Cleaner and Remover
for 3" x 1" This All Natural Cleaner Removes
Slide Coating, What Soap & Water Can’t
10ml Capacity
XENIT contains more than five high-
Slide coating cup with stand performance ingredients such as Citrus
and cleaning brush. Glass cup 66, an all natural, highly refined extract
is Pyrex and is designed to of citrus fruit. XENIT is specially
conserve expensive formulated to break down the complex
autoradiographic emulsion molecules found in sticky materials.
when coating glass slides. With this unique character, XENIT may
Needs only 1⁄4 the volume of be used to quickly remove labels,
solution previously required. decals, and adhesive from glass, wood,
Single piece holder permits vinyl and metals. XENIT removes
immersion in a water bath chewing gum from carpet and upholstery. It cleans permanent marker,
and provides a stable darkroom stand crayon, and lipstick from walls, woodwork, and counter tops. XENIT also
to prevent spills, and faster remove shoe scuffs and heel marks from vinyl and wood flooring, and
temperature adjustment of the grease and dirt from carpet, fabrics and upholstery. It even removes dried
emulsion.
latex paint.
70510 Set each
70520 Dip Miser Cup Replacement, each ® XENIT Degreaser
70530 Dip Miser Cleaning Brush, LOA 6", 1 doz XENIT Degreaser is a powerful, non-flammable solvent cleaner that quickly
1
⁄2" diameter x 21⁄4" brush, removes grease, oil, carbon deposits, gums, varnish, and dirt from metal
Nylon turned tuff surfaces. It is fast drying and evaporates completely and leaves no residue.
® XENIT Foaming Cleaner
® Liquid Release This is the fast, easy way to remove dirt, grime, and food stains, pen ink,
Agent soda pop, soap scum. Cleaned surface dry quickly and leave no marks.

A hydrosoluble ® XENIT Citrus Cleaner/Remover

mold-release XENIT all natural citrus cleaner is the fast, easy way to remove sticky stuff,
agent for use stains and gunk. XENIT removes greasy, grimy soils that soap and water
in the flat embedding of micro- can’t. Cleans most surfaces in seconds. It cleans crayons, dry latex paint,
organisms, and as a replacement gum, heel mark, ink, permanent markers, lipstick, shoe polish, sticker, tape,
for the PTFE coating of glass tar and sap.
slides to produce a smoother, Cat. # Description Qty.
even surface. The reference 60810-20 XENIT Foaming Cleaner 13 oz.
below describes the selection 60810-30 XENIT Citrus Cleaner/Remover 10 oz.
and precisely oriented sectioning
of single cells by light ® Glass Cleaner – Invisible Glass
microscopy, prior to examination Specially formulated, Invisible Glass quickly and easily
by EM. Reymond, O.L. & Picket-Heaps, J.D., (1983) J. Microscopy, removes dust, dirt, oil, grease, fingerprints, smoke film,
130, 179. haze and more from glass surfaces, such as windows,
70880 Liquid Release Agent 100ml mirrors, computer screens, display cabinets, and
photocopiers. Invisible Glass contains no water and soaps,
surfactants or foams so it will leave no residue that will
® PTFE-like Spray/Mold either streak or haze.
Release Spray
A PTFE-like, TFE release agent, dry, lubricant.
No discernible transfer, no migration, no build-
up. Contains: Isopropanol, Poly-TFE, 1,1-
60811-01 Invisible Glass 19 oz.
Dichlorofluoroethane and Carbon Dioxide.
Contains no silicones, CFCs or Methyl
Chloroform. Its working temperature is up to
140°F.

72619 PTFE-Like Spray 15 oz.

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 247
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec11_234-249_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 4:37 AM Page 248

SECTION 11 Specimen Preparation and Embedding Supplies

 Diamond Tip Scribers/Scribers  EMS Engraving Tool
Sturdy scribers are in wide use throughout the laboratory. It leaves a permanent Permanently be able to mark all of your important
marking on virtually any surface, including metal, glass, or plastic. Each Scriber tools and samples. The Engraver comes with a Battery
features a hexagonal aluminum pencil shaped body, mill finish, natural diamond Pack and is operated on two “AA” Batteries
tip and protective cap. Different styles are available to fit all of your needs.
Our EMS Engraver Engraves Test Tubes, Bottles, Racks,
Keys etc as well as anything made from glass, metal,
stone as well as bone . Engravings are permanent and
will not disappear in the presence of chemicals and
 A. Straight Head: solvents. The Engraver is 7" in Height (17.8cm)
Overall length 6”, Shank Length 1⁄8”, Handle 1⁄4” x 51⁄2”, 60° tip finish. We offer a Stand for the EMS Engraver that is made
70030 Straight Tip Scriber each from polypropylene and it measures (3½ x 33⁄8").
70031 Straight Tip Scriber 6/lot Cat. # Description Qty.
72096-01 EMS Engraver Kit
72096-02 EMS Engraver Tool Stand Kit

 The Glascribe® Pen

 B. Angled Head: The Glascribe® Pen, with retractable
Overall Length 61⁄2”, Shank 1⁄16” Dia. x 1⁄4” Long, Handle 1⁄8” x 6” Long, 75° tungsten carbide tip, lets you inscribe
tip finish. on glass, ceramics, and plastic. The
70032 Angle Tip Scriber each pen has a pocket clip, so it is always
70033 Angle Tip Scriber 6/lot handy when needed.

Cat. # Description Qty.

72151 Glascribe® Pen each

 Tungsten Point Lab Pen

 C. Retractable Scriber:
This is a high quality chrome pen that features appearance as well as Permanently mark Glass Slides
utility. The diamond is mounted in a stainless steel tip and refills are and all glass labware
available. The tip is finished at a 60˚ angle. These unique EMS pens have a sharp tungsten
70036 Retractable Scriber each carbide tip which is able to etch glass, ceramic,
70037 Retractable Scriber Refill each and even plastic The tip retracts for safe
storage and it measures 9.8mm in diameter
 High Precision Fine Diamond Scriber and the pen is 137mm long.
This diamond scriber is the ultimate scribing instrument offering the most Cat. # Description Qty.
precision for the most delicate applications. It is available in straight or 41148 Tungsten-Point Lab Pen each
bent configurations.

APPLICATIONS INCLUDE:  Rotary Diamond

Micro-Engraver Pen
 Fine scribing under the  Precision scribing and An amazing tool that may be used to
microscope - for silicon repairing - for thin film
mark samples, engrave tools,
wafers and glass coverslips circuits and microcircuits, etc.
indicate a sample area for
finding in the SEM, deburring
and so much more.
Easy to handle and control, this micro engraver is ideal for detailed
engraving on almost any surface--wood, metal, ceramic, glass and more!
The micro engraver features a contoured grip for comfort and control and a
These diamond mountings are 0.8mm diameter with a reduced shank precision-ground stainless steel bit with a diamond point tip. This diamond-
size of 0.5mm or 0.25mm diameter, which holds the diamond stylus. The tipped ballpoint micro engraver is also as small as a pen, so it easily fits in
natural diamond has a 60º included angle and a 0.12mm tip radius. The your pocket or purse for easy transport.
integrated 6.35mm anodized hexagonal (non-rolling) aluminum handle  Contoured grip for comfort and control
has a positive finger grip in the form of grooves for easy control and non-
 Pen-type design fits in a shirt pocket or purse and goes anywhere
slippage. Each diamond scriber is packaged in a protective plastic tube.
 Precision-ground stainless steel bit with diamond point tip
Cat. # Configuration and Shank Size  Requires two AAA batteries, included
62107-ST Straight Mounting, 0.5mm diameter Measures: 6¼“ Product Weight 1.86 lbs.
62107-BT Bent Mounting, 0.5mm diameter
62108-ST Straight Mounting, 0.25mm diameter Cat. # Description Qty.
62108-BT Bent Mounting, 0.25mm diameter 50465-15 Rotary Diamond Micro-Engraver Pen each

248 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec11_234-249_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 7/2/14 3:47 AM Page 249

Specimen Preparation and Embedding Supplies SECTION 11

® High Precision Diamond Scribing Tools
A newly designed diamond scribing tool set containing eight precision natural diamond scribes in
various sizes and configurations. This set is perfect for precision work in microscopy.
The set consists of eight diamond tips, 3 mm in diameter and are mounted in interchangeable tool
cones and an MT-1 tool handle. The tool and handle are all housed in a hardwood instrument case.
Individual scribers can be purchased separately.

62105-S1 62105-S2 62105-SE 62105-HS

62105-B1 62105-B2 62105-BE 62105-HC

62105-S1 Straight tip, .02” (.50mm) dia. by . 06” (1.5mm) tip length each
62105-B1 Bent tip, .02” (.50mm) dia. by .60” (1.5mm) tip length each
62105-S2 Straight tip, .01” (.25mm) dia. by .06” (1.5mm) tip length each
62105-B2 Bent tip, .01” (.25mm) dia. by .06” (1.5mm) tip length each
62105-SE Straight extended tip, .02” (.5mm) dia. by .2”(5.0mm) tip length. Good for tight areas each
62105-BE Bent extended tip, .02” (.5mm) dia. by .2” (5.0mm) tip length. Good for hard to reach areas each
62105-HS Straight, heavy duty tip, .03” (.8mm) dia. by .12” (3.1mm) tip length each
62105-HC Bent, heavy duty tip, .03” (.8mm) dia. by .12” (3.1mm) tip length each
62090-00 MT-1 Tool Handle, 4.75” (112mm) long, gold anodized each
62105-00 High Precision Diamond Scribing Tools, (8 tools & handle) set

® Precision Pin Vise Handle and Diamond Stylus

This high precision pin vise handle is machined from the finest material, non-
rolling gold-anodized aluminum, which makes it lightweight and versatile. It
comes complete with a precision drawbar for positive collets chuck clamping.
It features an 8mm (0.31”) hexagonal barrel dimension by 100mm (4”) long
(overall length is 115mm fully assembled)and it has a knurled finger-grip for
positive precision control for handling and tool manipulation.
The vice is supplied with a standard collet chuck opening of 2mm (0.78”)
diameter and will hold a selection of our specially designed tools - and collets
adapter 0.8mm (0.003”) for diamond stylus chucking.

Cat. # Description
62140-00 Precision Pin Vise & Collets each
62140-50 Diamond Stylus, 0.5mm each
62140-25 Diamond Stylus, 0.25mm each 62140-02 62140-03 62140-04

Following are Diamond Scribing Tools, with a 0.80mm (0.003”) diameter

mounting shank, for use with above Precision Pin Vise and Collets:
62140-05 62140-06 62140-07
Cat. # Description and Configuration
62140-02 Bent tip scriber, 0.010” (0.25mm) Diameter. 1.5mm tip length each
62140-03 Straight extended tip scriber, 0.020” (0.50mm) diameter by 0.200”(5.0mm) tip length. This tool is a must for reaching into and in
between high density components. each
62140-04 Bent extender tip scriber, 0.020” (0.50mm)) diameter by 0.200” (5mm) tip length. Use for tight places each
62140-05 Straight tip scriber 0.020” (0.50mm) diameter by 0.60” (1.5mm) tip length. each
62140-06 Bent tip scriber, 0.020” (0.50mm) diameter by 0.60” (1.5mm) tip length each
62140-07 Straight tip scriber, 0.010” (0.25mm) by 0.60” (1.5mm) tip length each
62140-60 Set of 6 Diamond Scribing Tools and Pin Vise set

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 249
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec11_250-270_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 4:45 AM Page 250

SECTION 11 Specimen Preparation and Embedding Supplies

® BUTLER Block Trimmer ® 3. Molding Cup Tray
A precision made device to aid in hand trimming
resin tissue blocks to the desired shape for
ultramicrotomy. The knurled knife guide swivels to
help the trimming blade to cut the sides of the
block. May be utilized with any stereomicroscope
with epi-illumination. The trimmer is supplied with a
standard chuck to accommodate the block size 00.
(Stain Technology, Vol. 49, No 4: pp. 129-132, 1974)
69945-01 BUTLER Block Trimming each

® Ultramicrotomy Chucks
These polyethylene trays are ideal for casting specimen blocks embedded
with JB-4 or equivalents and are used with our block holders and chucks
shown above.

Catalog # Molding Cup Size Cavities Pack

70176-10 6 x 12 x 5mm 20 each
Precision machined from aluminum. These special chucks are made to 70176-15 12 x 16 x 5mm 20 each
accommodate small specimen blocks, which have been polymerized in 70176-20 6 x 8 x 5mm Hexagon 9 3/pk
Eppendorf tubes. In addition, we also have chucks that hold all sizes of flat 70176-25 2 x 15 x 5mm 9 3/pk
embedding blocks (fitting all Leica and RMC instruments) ,and chucks for 70176-30 13 x 19 x 5mm 9 3/pk
LKB instruments.
69990 Flat embedding Chuck each ® Polyethylene Molds – Individual
69991 LKB Chuck each Molded from polyethylene, three
69992 Eppendorf Chuck for RMC each popular sizes are available to meet
69993 Eppendorf Chuck for LEICA each
your needs. These Individual Molds
can be used with EBH2 Block
® Chucks, Block Holders and Molding Cup Holders, #70175-50, 70175-60,
Trays or with colored stubs 70175-70.
® 1. Aluminum Chucks Aluminum Embedding Tray is available
with 6-position to hold these Individual
Mold during polymerization. Comes with anodized blue and natural color.
Suitable for JB-4®, JB-4-Plus®, Immuno-Bed, LR White, LR Gold® or Paraffin
embedding.
70174-10
70174-14 70174-20 70177-12 Individual Mold, 12 x 8 mm 100/pack
Catalog # Description Pack 70177-16 Individual Mold, 16 x 8 mm 100/pack
70174-10 ABH-JB Chuck for Hacker, A/O Reichert Rotary and 70177-19 Individual Mold, 19 x13 mm 100/pack
Autocut, JB-4 and JB-4A, LKB Ultratomes and 70178-04 Embedding Tray, Aluminum, 4/pack
Shandon Hypercut. Stem measures: 11 x 11 mm each (2 Blue & 2 Natural colors)
70174-14 ABH-LKB Huxley Chuck. Stem measures: 11 x 25 mm
70174-20 ABH-JBA Chuck: with three point recessed block ® Chien Silicone
holder attachment for LKB Histo-Range and Reichert
Super-Cut in addition to microtones using ABH-JB
Universal-Mold
A two-directional mold that allows for single
chucks (70174-20). Stem measures: 11 x 11 mm each
embedded spec-imens to be sectioned both
laterally and transversely. Tissues to be
® 2. EBH-2 Block Holder
embedded are accurately trimmed and placed
Molded from hard plastic. EMS# 70175- so that both sides of the tissue are against
50, 6m thick is shown to the right. both edges of the cavity tip.
T Easy to store block holders attached
Chien, K., et al. (1985) Proc. Ann. EMSA
to Aluminum chucks (ABH)
Meeting 43, 460.
T Frosted surface for easy marking.
T Large center hole prevents bubble
formation. 70140 Chien Silicone Mold each
70141 Chien Silicone Mold 10/lot

70175-40 4mm Thin Embedding Stubs 100/pack

70175-50 6mm Thick Embedding Stubs (shown above) 50/pack
70175-60 10mm Thick Embedding Stubs, Mixed Colors 100/pack

250 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec11_250-270_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 4:45 AM Page 251

Specimen Preparation and Embedding Supplies SECTION 11

® Capsule Molds
Our molds are made from the strongest possible silicone rubber providing extremely high tear
resistance. They are all reusable and produce embedding blocks of numerous shapes and sizes with
a wide variety of tips. We also offer a mold which produces blocks to be used for
re-embedding. Choose the one that best suits your embedding needs!
70150 Capsule Molds Type A: 10 cavities, 8mm diameter body,
5mm diameter tip, 11mm height, tapered tip each
70160 Capsule Molds Type B: 12 cavities, 8mm diameter body,
5mm diameter tip 16mm height, tapered tip each
70161 Capsule Molds Type C: 12 cavities cylindrical shapes,
8mm diameter 16mm height, flat tip each

® The Embedding Capsule Substitute

This 24 cavity mold produces a block similar to the embedding capsule block but with the following
advantages:
T Resin polymerizes better in silicone rubber than in polypropylene or polyethylene-
the rubber heats more evenly and retains the heat better than in plastic.
T It is easier to see inside the well when centering the specimen in the tip.
T It is easier to remove the block from the well. There is no need for razor
blades or press devices.
T The finished blocks have finer tips so when you trim deeper into the block the face doesn’t
increase in size rapidly; therefore, constant retrimming is not necessary.

70165 Embedding Capsule Substitute each

70165: Block Shape

® The Mold for Long Tissues

This mold accommodates longer pieces of tissues (muscle, skin biopsies, and many plant specimens)
ADVANTAGES:
T Easy to embed long specimens and orient them properly. The tissues lie flat
in the well; therefore, no horizontal trimming is needed.
T It is ideal for any specimen that needs immediate sectioning (e.g. cell mono-
layer).
T 24 cavities

70166 The Mold for Long Tissues each

70166: Block Shape

® The Cell Culture Mold

This mold is designed primarily for embedding cell culture specimens grown either directly on the bottom
of a dish or on the filter when cross sections of the cells are needed:
(a) Cells grown on petri dishes are cut into strips just before the propylene oxide
dehydration step; when Propylene Oxide is added, the strips lift right off the
bottom.
(b) When the strips are ready for embedment, they are rolled on an applicator stick into a wad and gently
lowered into the well (the strips should not float).
ADVANTAGES:
T Many cells can be examined in cross section T Easy detection of a strip of cells
T There is no need for trimming — sectioning T The label is placed on the round part so as
can begin immediately not to interfere with the specimen.
T The curved side makes the tip very strong in T 24 cavities.
spite of its thinness 70167: Block Shape

70167 The Cell Culture Mold each

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 251
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec11_250-270_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 4:45 AM Page 252

SECTION 11 Specimen Preparation and Embedding Supplies

® Chang Monolayer Molds
Designed by Dr. J.P. Chang for the embedding of a monolayer of cells. This specially
designed mold has proven useful in the processing of frozen sections, ascite cells, fresh
imprints, as well as blood and marrow smears. J. of Ultrastructural Res., 37,370 (1971).
70910 Chang Mold 12 cavities, 20x10x1mm each
70920 Chang Mold 9 cavities, 20x20x1mm each

® Flat Embedding Molds

® Single Tapered Ends
A clear silicone rubber with very high tear strength. It can be reused more times than the conventional silicone
molds. It is resistant to most epoxy resins and its clear base allows positioning of the specimen lighted from beneath.
70900 Standard flat embedding mold, 21 numbered cavities
measures: 14mm(L)x5mm(W)x4mm(D). (Clear silicone) each
70901 Same as #70900, but each of the 21 numbered cavities
measures:14mm(L)x5mm(W)x6mm(D). (Clear silicone) each
70902 Same as #70900, but each of the 21 numbered cavities
measures: 14mm(L)x5mm(W)x3mm(D). (Clear silicone) each

® Small Flat Embedding Mold

Made from clear silicone, the overall measurements are 1.65” x 3” with 12 cavities. Each cavity measures
0.427”(L) x 0.25”(W) x 0.156”Deep (10mmL x 6mmW x 4mm Deep). This mold produces 12 embedding
blocks with tapered ends.
70903 Small Flat Embedding Mold each 70903

® Double Tapered Ends

A standard flat embedding mold where both ends are tapered. This enables you to embed specimens in
both ends of each casting. Made from clear silicone, 21 numbered cavities, each cavity measuring:
14mm(L)x4mm(W)x4mm(D).
70870 Double Tapered Ends Mold each

® Triple Tapered Ends

A new design with 10 triple numbered, tapered tip cavities to save you time and handling. Holds firmly in a
chuck during trimming or sectioning. Made from white silicone, each cavity measures 8mm from tip to 70875
center, 5mm deep.
70875 Triple Tapered Ends Mold each

® BEEM* Flat Embedding Molds

Molded from polyethylene. The critical surfaces of the mold are transparent, facilitating accurate specimen
orientation through bottom illumination. Molds are reusable and each mold is supplied with a protective box.
The cavity measures: 12mm(L) x 5mm(W) x 3mm(D) Overall mold measures: 52mm(L) x 40mm(W) x
5mm(H) Storage box measures: 21⁄3”(L) x 13⁄4”(W) x 1⁄2”(H) (57 x 45 x 12.5mm)
70904-01 BEEM* Flat Embedding Mold ea
70904-12 BEEM* Flat Embedding Mold 12/pk
*Beem Is A Registered Trademark of Better Equipment For Electron Microscopy, Inc. 70904-01

® Flat Embedding with Convenient Box

70900-CB
No more stickiness with new storage box
Most resins are not a problem to flat embed when in combination with the cocoon box. The system withstands
temperatures up to 70 Degrees C, and flat embedding of many resins is made easier.
70900-CB 4mm Flat Embedding Mold w/Cocoon Box set
70901-CB 6mm Flat Embedding Mold w/Cocoon Box set
70900-CB 4mm Flat Embedding Mold w/Cocoon Box set
70870-CB Double End Flat Embedding Mold w/Cocoon Box set

TECHNICAL TIP Method for Slide Embedding Cat. # 70170

252 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec11_250-270_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 4:46 AM Page 253

Specimen Preparation and Embedding Supplies SECTION 11

® PTFE Embedding ® Tissue Culture Monolayer Embedding Mold:
Mold Thompson Embedding Mold
Machined from PTFE block. This
This invention is a mold used for embedding
mold offers flat embedding for
mammalian cells in monolayer culture in
most resins, including LR White®,
preparation of sectioning for light or electron
LR Gold®, JB-4, Immuno-Bed
microscopy. Tissue culture monolayer
and Lowicryl®. This PTFE Flat
embedding molds eliminate the need for
Embedding Mold can be used for
traditional Beem capsules. The improved molds
both UV/low temperature and thermal cure, and may be used as a
can be used to transfer the majority of cells
substitution for the silicone molds. The individual cavities are pre shaped to
from the entire surface of a cover slip to avoid
reduce block trimming.
losses of large amounts of cellular information
For curing anaerobic material, we recommend using Aclar® film, cut-to-size occurring only randomly. In addition, other
of the mold and lower on top of the mold after you “just over-fill” the problems such as surface blemishes caused by
cavities with embedding resin. Due to the flexibility of the PTFE, you just air entrapment associated with Beem capsules
bent the mold to pop out the cured resin blocks. After all the cast blocks are eliminated. Each mold comes with
have been removed, reinsert the mold to its holder to re-shape the mold. references and an instruction sheet.
The mold holder is machined from aluminum and anodized black.
Mold with 18 cavities, each cavity measures 5mm W x 14mmL x 4mm Deep
ADVANTAGES:
1. The mold yields several individual blocks of resin from a single
Overall mold measures: 5 ½" x 3" x ¼" (140x50x8mm) slip-cover.
Mold is available as a set (includes one PTFE mold and one aluminum holder). 2. The resin blocks fit directly into a chuck for flat specimens.
3. The embedded surfaces are free from blemishes caused by
70143 PTFE Flat Embedding Mold, set each entrapped air.
70143-R PTFE Flat Embedding Mold only each 4. The mold uses a minimum amount of resin.
70924 Thompson Mold each
® Stepped Microtome Embedding Mold 70925 Thompson Mold 4/lot
EMS Embedding Mold is a new mold
designed with Michael J. Dykstra Ph.D.
from North Carolina State University ® Slide Duplicating
Department of Veterinary Medicine. This Molds
Mold produces blocks of the best Uses a 1x3” glass slide as a base,
dimension to be held securely by and duplicates the slide using the
Reichert/Leica Ultracut stepped resin of your choice. Tissue sections
microtome chucks. There are 24 cavities are embedded against the flat glass
and the depth of each cavity is 4mm surface. This duplicated resin slide
which will prevent breakage of the blocks can be studied under the Light
during razor blade trimming. Microscope, then cut, remounted,
resectioned, and studied under the
Mold Measurements: 33⁄8" x 3" (85 x 77mm)
EM. A three cavity mold, each cavity
Cavity Measurements: 15mm x 7mm x 4mm deep measuring: 1”(W)x3”(L)x3⁄32”(D).
References & Instructions come with
70907 Embedding Mold-Dykstra each
each mold.
Slide with Cover Slip Duplicating
® Plastic Flat Mold
Embedding The same design as 70170 but with
Mold the addition of three round cavities
T Injected molded which are 17mm in diameter and
polyethylene. 1mm deep.
T Resistant to most
70170 Slide Duplicating Mold each
embedding materials.
70172 Slide Duplicating w/Cover Slip Mold each
T Easy peeled-off the blocks.
Mold fits perfectly inside the cocoon box BE8 (64300-8); See Cocoon Box
section.
Cover Slips, See pages 324-327 and 568-571 UUUUU
When the mold and the box BE8 are used together, the set allows for the
use of oxygen-prohibited embedding materials (Ie: LR White) to be
polymerized in a flat orientation. These molds are reusable. Each cavity
measures 12mm(L) x 5mm(W) x 3.5mm Deep. Overall mold measures: 94 x
56 x 14mm.
Cat. # Description Qty.
70905-01 EMS Molded Flat Embedding Mold ea
70905-12 EMS Molded Flat Embedding Mold 12/pk

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 253
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec11_250-270_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 4:46 AM Page 254

SECTION 11 Specimen Preparation and Embedding Supplies

® Plastic Weighing Boats; ”Anti-Static“ ® Aluminum Weighing Dish

They are utilized to weigh liquid or solid samples. Anti-static. Recessed
Inexpensive, disposable aluminum foil dishes with crimped sides, flat
corners facilitate controlled pour-off. Square shape, contour bottom.
smooth bottoms, and a finger tab handle on the rim. They may be used
70040 Micro Boat 13⁄4” x 3⁄8”H 500/pk for routine weighing and moisture testing, as well as an embedding
70041 Medium Boat 35⁄16”x3⁄4”H 500/pk mold.
70042 Large Boat 51⁄2”x7⁄8”H 500/pk
T Small Dish measures:
2” dia.x 1⁄2" deep (43 x 12mm)
T Medium Dish measures:
21⁄2” dia.x 19⁄32" deep (57 x 16mm)
T Large Dish measures:
3" dia.x 19⁄32" deep (70 x 16mm)
T Tall Dish measures:
4.2oz, 215⁄16" Dia x 17⁄8" Deep (75mm x 47mmDeep)

Catalog # Description Qty

70048-01 Small Aluminum Dish 100/pk
70048-10 Small Aluminum Dish 1000/cs
70050-01 Medium Aluminum Dish 100/pk
70050-10 Medium Aluminum Dish 1000/cs
® Plastic Weighing Canoes; ”Anti-Static“ 70051-01 Tall Aluminum Dish 100/pk
70051-10 Tall Aluminum Dish 1,000/cs
Flexible dishes for handling liquids or solids. Ideal for controlled pour-off. 70052-01 Large Aluminum Dish 100/pk
These Anti-Static Canoes with contoured sides provide a convenient 70052-10 Large Aluminum Dish 1000/cs
non-slip gripping surface. As well, they allow for more accurate 70053-01 Large, Smooth Aluminum Dish 100/pk
weighing and reading of a sample. The canoe shape enables pouring of 70053-10 Large, Smooth Aluminum Dish 1000/cs
weighed samples.
Dimensions: ® Glassine
• Small Canoe: 13⁄8”x17⁄8”x1⁄2” deep • Medium Canoe: 27⁄8”x43⁄4”x11⁄4” deep Weighing
• Large Canoe : 37⁄8”x65⁄8”x11⁄8”deep Paper
70043-10 Small Canoe 500/pk Our glassine weighing
70043-20 Medium Canoe 500/pk
paper is moisture-resistant
70043-30 Large Canoe 500/pk
and non-absorbent.
® Glassine Weighing Dish
Weighing samples is made easier with these newly
70080 Glassine Paper size 3” x 3” 500/pk
introduced Glassine Weighing Boats:
70081 Glassine Paper size 4” x 4” 500/pk
T No Static Build-Up – Glassine is free 70082 Glassine Paper size 6” x 6” 500/pk
of static electricity that plagues dis-
posable plastic weighing dishes. Aluminum Foil Squares
T Contaminant Free – Pure glassine is
Aluminum Foil Squares interleaved
an ultra-clean paper product
for easy separation.
T Preformed 3.5" diameter Dish–con-
venient to use T Weigh samples quickly and
T Color contrast – Chocolate-colored economically
glassine reveals every particle of T Cap labware for storage or autoclav-
material ing
T Dish measures: 3.50" Dia x 0.5" T Available in a variety of sizes
Depth (87.5 x 13mm) Catalog # Description Qty/Box
70056-04 Aluminum Foil 4 x 4”x 0.001” Thick 500/box
Cat. # Description Qty. 70056-06 Aluminum Foil 6 x 6”x 0.001” Thick 500/box
70084-01 Glassine Weighing Dish 150/pk. 70056-08 Aluminum Foil 8 x 8”x 0.0015” Thick 500/box
70084-CS Glassine Weighing Dish 24pks/case 70056-12 Aluminum Foil 12 x 12”x 0.0015” Thick 500/box

254 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec11_250-270_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 4:46 AM Page 255

Specimen Preparation and Embedding Supplies SECTION 11

® Foil Rolls ® Glass Knife Making Pliers
These foil rolls which are designed to work
with out Mini BinTM Foil Dispenser and offer
minimal waste.
Custom sized pieces of foil can easily be
created for covering small surfaces such as
beakers, flasks, tubes, and Petri dish. Ideal
for autoclaving, freezing, incubating,
protecting lab ware, lining, sealing and
general storage. Available in two sizes . These pliers are specially designed with its jaws ground to a special shape
70058 Foil Roll 102mm (4”) x 152.4m each for ease of preparation when making glass knives.
70059 Foil Roll 153mm (6”) x 152.4m each
62190-01 Glass Knife Making Pliers each

® Mini Bin™ Foil Dispenser ® Diamond Glass Cutter

This Mini Bin Foil Dispenser allows you to
safely cut foil to any size and it is a great
alternative to wasteful giant-sized foil rolls and
expensive precut foil squares. Compact to fit in
limited work space areas and easy to
transport. Safe to use – load the foil roll, press
the cover to activate the safety blade and cut to the desired length. For use Metal parts are made from nickel-plated brass, set into a maple handle.
with 102 mm or 153 mm (4 or 6 inch) foil rolls (sold separately- see The rack can be used to crack single or double strength glass.
below).The dispenser measures 19 x 10 x 12 mm. 70038 Diamond Glass Cutter each
The unit has a non-slip base, has a safe - unique cutter guard with a safety
blade and it is compact – for limited spaced work areas . It is able to hold ® Glass Knife Scoring Jig
102 mm or 153 mm (4 or 6 inch) foil rolls The unique – foam strip prevents These set of jigs assist
the foil from retracting back into the unit. in the production of
70057 Mini Bin TM Foil dispenser each making glass knives
by hand.
® Triangular Tungsten T-square jig: when the
Carbide Knife edge of this jig is
These Knives will fit most any ultramicrotomes placed against the
and take the place of using glass knives. edge of the glass knife strip the subsequent score will be 26 mm or 1"
Perfect for trimming blocks, block facing, long. After breaking, the square of the glass can be scored at a 45 degree
and for sectioning hard samples. The quality angle by using the other jig.
does compare to glass knives and these blades 62192-02 Glass Knife Scoring Jig 2/set
can be resharpened if desired.
Tape to make Glass Knife Boat, see page 257 UUUUU

SPECIFICATIONS:
® Glass Knife Strips
Cutting edge length: .....................................................38” (9.6 mm) ® Ultramicrotomy and
Blade height:..............................................................1.0” (25.4 mm)
Blade thickness: ...........................................................38” (9.6 mm)
Histology Glass Strips
Cutting angle: ..............................................................................40° Specially selected glass strips for
Material: ............................100% high grade, solid Tungsten Carbide making glass knives. Its hardness
Section thickness: ........................................................2-15 microns produces a durable and sharp
edge suitable for thick, semi thin,
Cat. # Description Qty. or ultrathin sections.
71019-10 Triangular Tungsten Carbide Knife each
Ultramicrotomy Grade:
71012 Size 6.4mm x 25mm x 400mm 30 strips/pk
71013 Size 8mm x 25mm x 400mm 24 strips/pk
71014 Size 10mm x 25mm x 400mm 18 strips/pk
71015 Size 12mm x 50mm x 100mm 16 strips/pk
Histology Grade:
71016 Size 6.4mm x 25mm x 400mm 30 strips/pk
71017 Size 8mm x 25mm x 400mm 24 strips/pk
71018 Size 10mm x 25mm x 400mm 18 strips/pk

Glass Knife Makers, see page 596 UUUUU

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 255
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
 EMS_Full Line 2014_sec11_250-270_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 4:46 AM Page 256

SECTION 11 Specimen Preparation and Embedding Supplies

 EMS Ultra-Microtome Aid  Dental Wax Sheets
Made from hard plastic (Delrin) We supply dental wax sheets. Pink
with a beautifully machined wax: a hard and thick wax sheet that
finish to handle many of your is ideal for mincing and cutting
instruments that need to be at tissues. Approximately 31 to 35
your fingertips during sheets per pound. Each wax sheet
sectioning. measures: 53⁄4" x 27⁄8" x 1⁄16" thick
This EMS Ultra-microtome Aid
 is a safe place to rest your 72660 Pink Wax 1lb/bx
diamond knife, diamond 72670 Pink Wax 5lb/bx
trimming tool, tweezers, hair
curl or eye lash, diamond knife  Hot Pen – Wax Pen; A Tool for Separating
cleaning rods, perfect-loop for picking up sections. Sections or Cauterizing
Note: This unit is not a safe device to store your sectioning knives, such as Powered by AA batteries. This pen
diamond or glass knives, after you’re done the sectioning. helps to flatten and separate tissue
sections and reduces compression
70612 EMS Ultramicrotome Aid each
in thin sections.
Available in two models: Wax Pen 1 72678
 Finger Cots; Latex—Powder Free is powered by one AA battery; Wax
Inexpensive, expandable finger cots. Seamless. Protective dexterity Pen 2 is powered by two AA
without covering the entire hand. Powderless, non-rolled. 31⁄2mil (0.0030”), batteries.
23⁄4” (40mm)L. Both pens are using the same tip.
Replacement tip (Cat. #72679-RT)
is a straight one. Replacement tip 72679
(Cat. #72679-03) is a set of three different configurations: Straight, Hook,
and ‘U’ Shaped Tips.
Length with
Cat # Description Tip w/o Cap w/Cap Diameter Pack
72678 Wax Pen 1 (A) 61⁄2" 63⁄4" 3
⁄4", 18mm each
72679 Wax Pen 2 (B) 8 ⁄4"
1
8 ⁄4"
3 3
⁄4", 18mm each
71130 Latex Finger Cots Small 1 gross/pk 72679-RT Replacement Tip each
71131 Latex Finger Cots Medium 1 gross/pk 72679-03 Replacement Tips Set of Three Variable Tips
71132 Latex Finger Cots Large 1 gross/pk

 Portable Heat Pen;

 EMS Diamond Soldering Iron
Knife Wash This portable heat pen is able to heat up
to 700°C and automatically recharges
every time it is placed back into its
recharging stand. It will last
approximately 40 minutes on a full
This new concept of washing the charge. Tip length 1”. It is useful for the
Diamond knives using magnetic sealing of wax onto glass knife boats
stirring action (with special stirring and small soldering jobs around the lab.
bar) gives you a fast, clean and safe method to remove particles that are The set includes the heat pen and
left on the knives edge after sectioning. recharging stand.
Since most of the EM labs already have stirring plates, the Diamond Knife
Wash has been designed for use with your existing unit, saving you the
need to purchase an extra one. It is universal and can be used for all type 72677-10 Portable Heat Pen Set each
and brands of Diamond Knives, including the Diatome Histo Knife. 72677-50 Replacement Fine Tip each
72677-51 Replacement Heavy Tip each
Warning: Never use on a hot plate. If used on a combination Stirrer/Hot
Plate, make sure the heat is off.
 Nail Polish; Clear
70605 Diamond Knife Wash each
Used for sealing the boats made from
tape to the glass knives.
TECHNICAL TIP 72180 Nail Polish ⁄2oz
1

When using wax to make trufs for glass knives, the wax sheet
should be at room temperature or slightly above (70-80°F). Simply cut
desired strip, form a truf to the knife, and melt the edges with a heat pen
for a water seal.

256 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec11_250-270_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 4:46 AM Page 257

Specimen Preparation and Embedding Supplies SECTION 11

® Absorbent ® Hair Curl
Paper Points Made from human hair;
Machine rolled paper with a good for removing
tapered end which offers good sections, and cleaning
water absorbency, and assists the diamond knife.
you in the removal of surplus
water from the knife boat, on
the block face, and from the 71180 Hair Curl each
grids.
Available in two assortment sizes: (The bigger the number the larger the point.)
® Eyelash Manipulator;
A Traditional EM Tool
T Selection 1: contains 200 assorted points sizes 15, 20, 25, 30, 35 and 40.
For direct manipulation of sections and small tissue samples this tool is
T Selection 2: contains 200 assorted points sizes 45, 50, 55, 60, 70, and 80.
perfect for any occasion. May be used during ultramicrotomy to carefully
tease sections that are in the Diamond Knife boat. The Eyelash comes on a
71011-01 Paper Points, Selection 1 200/bx
Sable Brush handle made from the highest quality wood.
71011-02 Paper Points, Selection 2 200/bx
These Eyelashes may be cleaned and sterilized with alcohol and a tissue.
® Glass Knife Boats
These disposable plastic boats
which easily attach to the
triangular glass knife making a 71182 Eyelash Manipulator each
trough. To use: Simply slip the
boat on the glass knife back For More Ultra Microtomy Tools,
and seal with either hot melted wax or nail polish. see pages 255-256, 700-716 UUUUU
Available in three sizes: To fit 6.4mm, 8.0mm and 10.0mm triangular
glass knives. ® Flat Emery Sticks
Cat. No. Grit Pack
71007 6.4 mm Glass Knife Boat 50/pk
71008 6.4 mm Glass Knife Boat 100/pk 62119-04 4/0 12/pk
71008-10 10.0mm Glass Knife Boat 100/pk 62119-03 3/0 12/pk
62119-02 2/0 12/pk
62119-01
® Glass Knife Boat; Emery paper which is glued to a wooden handle.
62119-10
1/0
1
12/pk
12/pk
Quick Boat 11” long x 3⁄4” wide (279x19.1mm). Very useful 62119-20 2 12/pk
These boats are made from for filing excess resin of sample block tips. Grit 62119-30 3 12/pk
aluminum and are anodized size ranges from number 4/0 (finest) to 3 62119-40 4 12/pk
black. They come complete (coarsest).
with a set screw on one side.
The area where the glass knife ® Filing/Polishing Stick and Strips
will be attached, is cut to fit to A plastic handle, 101⁄2”
the width of the knife and is (267mm) long, holds
cushioned by silicone rubber to strips of emery paper
ensure a tight seal and no leakage. or cloth 11”x1” (279x
25.4mm). Strips are
easily replaced.
71009-60 Quick Boat, for 6.0mm Knife each
71009-64 Quick Boat, for 6.4mm Knife each Comes complete with
71009-80 Quick Boat for 8.0mm Knife each 2 strips/set (grit 120
71009-10 Quick Boat for 10.0 mm Knife each and 240).
Cat. No Description Pack
62118-02 Filing and Polishing Stick And Strips set
® Glass Knife Box 62118-12 Emery Refills in 12 Assorted Grits set
Has a soft silicone base, anti-
slip pads underneath, and a Emery Paper, see page 830 UUUUU
clear plastic, hinged dust
coverfor storing glass knives. ® Silver Tape
Holds 10 6.4mm glass knives. Color Tapes, also see
Measures: Photography and Tape
61⁄8"(L)x29⁄32"(W)x11⁄2(H) Sections, page 738 UUUUU
(115mm x 58mm x 37mm).
Silver coated polyester tape, 3⁄8”
width, 72 yards long, 3” core; good
71010 Glass Knife Box each for making glass knife boats.
77700 Silver Tape each

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 257
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec11_250-270_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 4:46 AM Page 258

SECTION 11 Specimen Preparation and Embedding Supplies

 Cotton Gloves  Gloves; Lint Free,  Lightweight Cotton
Clean-room Inspector Gloves

These well tailored, high quality gloves are made Finest quality, stretch nylon, one size fits all. These gloves are un-hemmed and lint-free. They
from 100% cotton. They offer softness and Cat. # Size Qty. are tailored cotton gloves which are ideal for
comfort. A perfect choice for handling photographs. 71090 Mens 6 pair/pk inspection jobs. These gloves are available in
Cat. # Size Qty. 71092 Womens 6 pair/pk one-size fits all for either men or women.
71118-01 Small 6prs/pk
Cat. # Size Qty.
71118-03 Medium 6prs/pk
71119-01 Women 12/pk
71118-05 Large 6prs/pk
71119-05 Men 12/pk

 Gloves; Latex Exam Gloves With Aloe Vera and Vitamin E

Made from 100% natural latex with the addition of Product specification
Aloe Vera and Vitamin E, offering the softness, Mean Tensile
tactile sensitivity and skin protection. Economical Strength: Before aging 24Mpa
ambidextrous style, beaded cuff, and are After aging 20Mpa
Elongation: Before aging 750% min.
chemically resistant to acids, alcohols, ketones and
After aging 700% min.
alkalis. Packed in a convenient dispenser box, Thickness Finger 0.15mm ± 0.01mm
100/box. Non-sterile. Available either with Palm 0.14mm ± 0.01mm
powdered (biologically cornstarch dusting, ~ Cuff 0.11mm ± 0.01mm Latex Conform®
2mg/glove) or powder-free gloves.

Cat. # Size Qty. Cat. # Size Qty. Cat. # Size Qty.

Light Powdered Latex Gloves Powder-Free Latex Gloves Powder-Free Latex Gloves
71110-01 Small 100/bx 71114-01 Small 100/bx with Aloe-Vera and Vitamin E
71110-20 Small 10bxs /cs 71114-20 Small 10bxs/cs 71114-50 Small 100/bx
71111-01 Medium 100/bx 71115-01 Medium 100/bx 71114-51 Small 10bxs/cs
71111-20 Medium 10bxs/cs 71115-20 Medium 10bxs/cs 71115-50 Medium 100/bx
71112-01 Large 100/bx 71116-01 Large 100/bx 71115-51 Medium 10bxs/cs
71112-20 Large 10bxs/cs 71116-20 Large 10bxs/cs 71116-50 Large 100/bx
71116-51 Large 10bxs/cs Latex Powder Free

 Nitrile Exam Textured Gloves

Powder-Free Green Gloves with Aloe Vera
Made from 100% synthetic nitrile, contains no latex. It is an extremely tough glove yet gentle on the hand.
It offers superior textile strength and they are puncture resistant when compared to other similar thickness
of latex or vinyl gloves. There are no natural rubber protein allergens as is present in natural latex rubber
gloves. With the addition of Aloe Vera, the powder-free gloves will provide the user with superior comfort,
excellent flexibility and dexterity. Textured gloves provide a positive grip on wet and or dry surfaces. The
nitrile compound provides a broad range of hand protection against accidental chemical splashes.

Product specification
Type: Nitrile exam gloves – non-sterile - Textured Cat. # Size Qty. Cat. # Size Qty.
Color: Blue (w/o Aloe Vera), Green (with Aloe Vera) Powder-Free Nitrile Gloves Powder-Free Nitrile Gloves with Aloe-Vera
Mean Tensile 71106-20 Small 100/bx 71107-20 Small 100/bx
Strength: Before aging 24Mpa 71106-21 Small 10bxs/cs 71107-21 Small 10bxs /cs
After aging 20Mpa 71106-30 Medium 100/bx 71107-30 Medium 100/bx
Elongation: Before aging 740% min. 71106-31 Medium 10bxs/cs 71107-31 Medium 10bxs/cs
After aging 730% min. 71106-40 Large 100/bx 71107-40 Large 100/bx
Thickness Finger 0.21mm ± 0.03mm 71106-41 Large 10bxs/cs 71107-41 Large 10bxs/cs
Palm 0.14mm ± 0.03mm 71106-50 X-Large 100/bx 71107-50 X-Large 10bxs/cs
Cuff 0.11mm ± 0.03mm 71106-51 X-Large 10bxs/cs 71107-51 X-Large 100/bx

258 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec11_250-270_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 4:47 AM Page 259

Specimen Preparation and Embedding Supplies SECTION 11

 Vinyl Exam White Gloves SAFETY TIP
Made from synthetic polyvinyl chloride,
The standard latex surgical gloves do not
powder-free, ambidextrous, medical grade offer adequate skin protection when handling
non-sterile gloves, Seamless, chemical glutaraldehyde. Nitrile or Neoprene gloves provide
resistant and excellent sensitivity, these vinyl the protection that is needed. However, dexterity
gloves offer a unique balance of softness is inhibited with these gloves. Therefore, double-
flexibility and strength. gloving with latex gloves is recommended for
delicate work.
Product specification Cat. # Size Qty.
Raewyn Eager, Dept. of Zoology, Auckland
Type: Vinyl exam gloves – non-sterile – 71108-10 Small 100/bx
University. EM News.
Ring Roll Bead Cuffs 71108-12 Small 10bxs /cs
71108-20 Medium 100/bx
Newsletter of the New Zealand Society for
Color: White
Mean Tensile 71108-22 Medium 10bxs/cs Electron Microscopy. No. 24, Dec. 1992
Strength: 9Mpa 71108-30 Large 100/bx
Elongation: 740% min. 71108-32 Large 10bxs/cs
Thickness Finger 0.10mm ± 0.01mm 71108-40 X-Large 100/bx
Palm 0.10mm ± 0.01mm 71108-42 X-Large 10bxs/cs SAFETY TIP
Overall Length, mm: 235 (Small & Medium),
In the past several years there has been
245 (Large & x-Large)
documentation in the medical literature of
numerous cases of latex allergy in medical and
 Cut-Resistant Gloves; other laboratory personnel. Many people are
experiencing itchy hands, shortness of breath or
Safeknit™ other signs of allergic reactions when they use
The comfortable choice when choosing a latex gloves in their laboratory work. Some people
high performance cut resistant glove. are changing to powder free gloves with some
Safeknit is a blend of abrasion-resistant relief; however, other people get relief only after
Spectra® fiber and other synthetics. The mix changing to another type of glove.
of these fibers form a rugged cut resistant E. Ann Ellis, Ellis EM Consulting Service,
barrier that offers the histologist sensitivity 1316 SW 61st Terrace, Gainesville, FL. 32607
for manipulation but with extreme comfort
and productivity.

NOTE: These gloves are neither puncture proof nor water resistant. They should not be used to protect against intentional For Skin Protection, see Dermaplus
cutting. Avoid use near moving blades. For applications which are related to fluids where a water resistant glove is required,
we recommend either double gloving or using Nitrile Gloves, (Cat # 71106-71109 or 71068.) Safety Section page 1106 

71066-06 Medium Duty Safeknit™ Glove Size 6 each For our complete line of
71066-07 Medium Duty Safeknit™ Glove Size 7 each Protective Gloves and Supplies,
71066-08 Medium Duty Safeknit™ Glove Size 8 each
71066-09 Medium Duty Safeknit™ Glove Size 9 each
See pages 948-949 
71066-10 Medium Duty Safeknit™ Glove Size 10 each
71066-11 Medium Duty Safeknit™Glove Size 11 each

 Finger Cots; Latex—  Gloves Dispenser

Powder Free  Easy to mount with
keyholes, tape
Inexpensive, expandable finger cots.
 Accepts most brands
Seamless. Protective dexterity
of gloves
without covering the entire hand.
 Available either top loading
Powderless, non-rolled. 31⁄2mil
or side loading
(0.0030"), 23⁄4" (40mm)L.
 Color white and clear front

EMS # Description, (L x W x H)
64365-01 Single Gloves Dispenser, 11.5” x 4.75” x 5.25” each
64365-02 Double Gloves Dispenser, 11.50” x 4.75” x 10.25” each
64365-03 Triple Gloves Dispenser, 11.5” x 4.75” x 15.25” each

Marking Pens, See Specimen Preparation,

pages 310-311 
Fro-Marker - A pen for use with frozen sections See
71130 Latex Finger Cots Small 1 gross/pk Specimen Preparation, page 309 
71131 Latex Finger Cots Medium 1 gross/pk Para-Marker - A pen for use with paraffin sections
71132 Latex Finger Cots Large 1 gross/pk See Specimen Preparation, page 309 

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 259
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec11_250-270_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 4:47 AM Page 260

SECTION 11 Specimen Preparation and Embedding Supplies

® Perfect Loop
Using this PERFECT LOOP, you can place
your thin sections, cut on the ultramicrotome,
easily on the grid mesh without creases.
Perfect Loop for Ultra thin sections
70944 Set of Handle & Loop set
70945 Loop only each
70946 Loop only 5/each
70948 Handle only each 1. Centre the LOOP above the
sections 2. Slowly lower the LOOP over
the sections and touch the
water.

Perfect Loop for Light Microscopy (large sections).

The outside diameter of the loop is 7mm.
70940 LM Set of Handle & Loop set
70941 LM Loop only each
70942 LM Loop only 5/each
70943 LM Loop Handle each
3. Gently lift up the LOOP with
the sections in a droplet of
water.
4. Lower the LOOP onto a grid
and lift up again.
TECHNICAL TIP
The Perfect Loop For Section Pick Up
The Perfect Loop (EMS cat # 70944) allows you to pick up sections
consistently without causing any damage to the sections. It is the only loop
that is currently available where the outside diameter of the loop is the same
as the grid and the inside diameter is slightly larger than the observation area
of the electron microscope. The thickness is about 40 microns. Due to the
fact that the loop and the grid are of the same diameter they are attracted to
one another when in water and attach together through the surface tension of
the water. Even if the section touches the inside of the grid during blotting Lower the LOOP to the filter
the touching area is minor and, therefore, the section is not damaged. When
the grid is removed from the loop the section remains in place without fail.
5. The grid holds to the LOOP
by surface tension. 6. paper to remove water.

The area equals the observation field (about 2mm diameter) of the electron
microscope; thus pieces can be fully observed.

® Deluxe Perfect Loop

As in our standard Perfect Loop this device
allows you to pick up sections with ease. This
set utilizes the Perfect Handle complete with
protective collar (#70616-HD).
For coated grids, touch with Separate the grid from the
7. filter paper to remove water. 8. LOOP with an eyelash.

70939 Deluxe Perfect Loop Set Set

70616-HD Perfect Handle Only each

® Perfect Scale
Made from Nickel alloy, 3mm in length with 1⁄10 mm divisions. The Scale fits the Perfect
Handle(70616-HD). The Perfect Scale comes complete with one scale and a handle.

70617-10 Perfect Scale Set each

70617-20 Perfect Scale Only each
70616-HD Perfect Handle Only each

260 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec11_250-270_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 4:47 AM Page 261

Specimen Preparation and Embedding Supplies SECTION 11

® Parafilm M ® DuraSeal Cling
and Dispenser It Clings - Film can cling to itself
Laboratory film used to prevent and glass vessels.
evaporation, contamination and Heat Resistant - Softens
hydration. Seals labware quickly at 100°C.
and efficiently. Used in EM for
drop staining and to pick up thin Strong - Film can streth
films when coating grids. 300-400% before breaking
or tearing.
70990 4”x250’, 1” core each
70991 2"x250', 1" core each Tight Sealing - Forms and air
70992 Cutter dispenser each tight barrier when stretched
across openings.
® ABS Parafilm® Dispenser 70994-07 DuraSeal Cling for Test Tubes, 1" x 150' Rol
Unique design for maximum safety 70994-08 DuraSeal Cling, 2" x 500' Roll
70994-09 DuraSeal Cling, 4" x 500' Roll
Store, dispense, and cut Parafilm®, tape, 70994-10 DuraSeal Cling, 5" x 150' Roll
labels, and Tough-Tags®.
ABS plastic dispenser designed with a safety ® Peel n’ Seal
razor that slides and cuts with no danger to
your fingers. Dispenser holds one or two 2- Pre-Cut, Breathable and Non-
inch rolls, or one 4-inch roll. They measure Breathable Sealing Membranes for
120x156x171mm ( WxHXD) Flasks
Breathable - A breathable option is available
Parafilm is a registered trademark of for cell culture applications
American Can Company.
Non-Breathable - A non-breathable option
70993-01 Parafilm Dispenser Blue each is available for general sealing applications
70993-02 Parafilm Dispenser Green each
70993-03 Parafilm Dispenser Red each Sterile - All membranes have been gamma irradiated to remove cyto-
70993-04 Replacement Blades for Dispenser 5/Pack toxins and other contaminants
Protects - Liquid-tight membranes keep solutions safe from outside
® DuraSeal™ contamination during storage
A Durable Heat- Proven - Non-breathable Peel-n-Seal is made from our Titer-Tops
Resistant, Solvent-Proof material and breathable Peel-n-Seal is made from our Breathe-Easier
Laboratory Stretch Film material; both are trusted and proven throughout the life science
Heat-Resistant And industry
Microwave Compatible - Temperature Ranges
Withstands temperatures up Breathable: -20ºC to 80ºC/Non-Breathable: -40ºC to 100ºC
to 100ºC (boiling water) Peel-n-Seal Utilizes: Breathe-Easier and Titer-Tops
Chemically Resistant - Resists Cat. No. Description Flask Size Qty
essentially all solvents and Breathe-Easier
caustic agents 77578-10 Breathable Peel-n-Seal,
Tear Resistant - Film can stretch 500-800% before breaking or 1.50" (38.1mm) dia. 250ml 50/pack
77578-20 Breathable Peel-n-Seal,
tearing
1.63" (41.4mm) dia. 500ml 50/pack
Clings - Film can cling to itself following stretching 77578-30 Breathable Peel-n-Seal, 2.13"
(54.1mm) dia. 1,000ml 50/pack
Tight Sealing - Forms an airtight barrier
Titer-Tops
Permeability Information: 77578-40 Non-Breathable Peel-n-Seal,
Oxygen: 125cc/100in2/24 hrs at 23°C 1.50"(38.1mm) dia. 250ml 50/pack
Carbon Dioxide: 1300cc/100in2/24 hrs at 23°C 77578-50 Non-Breathable Peel-n-Seal,
Water Vapor: 1.0g/100in2/24 hrs at 38°C and 90% R.H. 1.63"(41.4mm) dia. 500ml 50/pack
77578-60 Non-Breathable Peel-n-Seal,
70994-01 DuraSeal 1"x150ft each 2.13"(54.1mm) dia. 1,000ml 50/pack
70994-02 DuraSeal 2"x500ft each
70994-04 DuraSeal 4"x250ft each
70994-05 DuraSeal 4"x500ft each
70994-06 DuraSeal 5"x150ft each
70994-20 DuraSeal Dispenser each

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 261
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec11_250-270_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 4:47 AM Page 262

SECTION 11 Specimen Preparation and Embedding Supplies

® SecurTainer™ I Tamper Evident Specimen EMS Click-Leak-Proof Container
Containers WE’VE ADDED A CLICK AND REMOVED THE LEAK.
Container made of
Our new EMSClick container
polypropylene -
was designed to eliminate
Closure made of
leakage that occurs during
polyethylene
specimen transport. The
This shatter resistant, container produces an audible
especially designed for “clicking” sound when the
collection, transport and leak-proof seal has been
specimen storage. properly engaged, assuring
T Unique integrated leak resistant seal accurate closure and specimen
T High clarity to allow specimen to be viewed without opening integrity during transport.
T The magenta lids are ribbed for easy opening Say Goodbye to Messy Clean-Ups and Unnecessary Exposure
T Container are stackable with straight side format. T 100% virgin medical grade plastic(HDPE) provides consistent
T SecurTainer™ I is a unique tamper evident to ensure no alter vial to vial performance
allow. (SecurTainer™ can be used without using the tamper T Audible proof of closure confirms engagement of leak-proof seal
evident locking mechanism)
T Cap designed to enhance seal during positive and negative pres-
T For color coding purpose, use CapInsert (Cat. #68106-series) sure differentials
Both containers and caps are manufactured without the use of T Rounded knurls on cap offer an easy gripping surface for users
plasticizers or mold release agents. All material used are free from latex.
T Vial "ears" prevent cap from backing off during rough transport
All containers are 95kpa compliant. Non sterile, container and caps are
T Independently tested to perform with a 0% leak rate under
packaged separately in bag of 100.
requirements detailed in:
EMS # Description Qty United Nations Model Regulations Packing Instruction 620/650
64236-02 SecurTainer I, Size 20ml 500/pk
64236-04 SecurTainer I, Size 40 ml 500/pk
U.S. Department of Transportation's Title 49 Code of Federal
64236-06 SecurTainer I, Size 60 ml 500/pk Regulations, §173.196
64236-09 SecurTainer I, Size 90 ml 400/pk International Civil Aviation Organization (ICAO) Packaging
64236-12 SecurTainer I, Size 120 ml 300/pk Instruction 620/650

® SecurTainer™ II Tamper Evident Specimen International Air Transport Association (IATA) Packaging
Instruction 620/650
Containers
International Safe Transit Association (ISTA) Random Vibration
This model uses a Under Low Pressure Test
different tamper evident
concept compared to The Vials are 20 ml in capacity and they measure 3.04 CM in Diameter
the SecurTainer I above. and are 4.43 cm in height.
No locking tab to push Cat. No Description Qty.
up is necessary when 64233-08 EMSClick Container, 20 ml 100/Pack
the tamper evident is 64233-09 EMSClick Container 800/Case
used. Simply screw the
cap on the container ® FlexTainer™
and the tamper evident Containers
sealing ring is automatically locking in place. When unscrewed, the ring Made of polypropylene
is detached from the cap. All other features are the same as SecurTainer
I. This is a space-saving
expandable accordion-style jug
EMS # Description Qty with flattens down for easy
64237-02 SecurTainer I, Size 20ml 500/pk
transport and storage.
64237-04 SecurTainer I, Size 40 ml 500/pk
64237-06 SecurTainer I, Size 60 ml 500/pk Great ideal for storing and
64237-09 SecurTainer I, Size 90 ml 400/pk carrying numerous types of fluids, it is suitable for any laboratory. Made
64237-12 SecurTainer I, Size 120 ml 300/pk of high strength polyethylene, it features comfortable carry grip and
CapInsert: available with colors: screw-on cap with on/off spout. It is available in many sizes up to 8
liters. Come with individually wrapped.
EMS # CapInsert™ Color Qty
61806-B CapInsert, Color Blue 100/pk Cat. # Description Qty
61806-L CapInsert, Color Lilac 100/pk 64228-13 Flex-Tainer™, 3 L 12/pk
61806-R CapInsert, Color Red 100/pk 64228-43 Flex-Tainer™, 3 L 48/pk
61806-Y CapInsert, Color Yellow 100/pk 64228-15 Flex-Tainer™, 5 L 12/pk
61806-W CapInsert, Color White 100/pk 64228-45 Flex-Tainer™, 5 L 48/pk
61806-AS CapInsert, Assorted Colors 100/pk 64228-18 Flex-Tainer™, 8 L 12/pk
64228-48 Flex-Tainer™, 8 L 36/pk

262 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec11_250-270_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 4:47 AM Page 263

Specimen Preparation and Embedding Supplies SECTION 11

® PetriStickers™ High-Contrast
Stickers for Labeling PetriStickers™
Petri Dishes Quick Reference - Petristickers
Easy to Use - Label Petri dishes correspond to wells on a microplate
quickly, neatly, and reliably. for fast colony identification
Temperature Resistant – Labels High Contrast - Colored grid allows
remain firmly intact in temperatures from colonies to stand out from the Petri
4ºC to 42°C dish background
Convenient – Instantly form an imprint Updated Design - Rectangular shape Alpha numeric sticker
Petri dish for quick reference, then mimics well plate layout
leaves ample space above and
remove if you wish below grid for writing on the dish
Ideally Sized - PetriStickers™ are 3" Two Layouts - Reference wells
or 76 mm diameter. numerically (1-96) or alpha
numerically (A1-H12)
70630-32 32 - Square Grid 36/pk. Ideally Sized - PetriStickers are 2.8”
70630-50 50 - Squre Grid 36/pk. x 1.75” or 71mm x 44.5mm, to fit
70630-70 70 - Square Grids 36/pk. 1-96 layout assigns a
most common Petri dishes
70630-100 100 - Square Grids 36/pk. number to each well
70631-06 6 - Sector Pie 36/pk.
70631-08 8 - Sector Pie 36/pk. Cat. No. Description Qty.
70631-12 12 - Sector Pie 36/pk. 70556-14 96-Well layout, 1-96 36/pk
70631-16 16 - Sector Pie 36/pk. 70556-18 96-Well layout, A1-H12 36/pk

® PetriSEAL™ and ContainerSEAL™ Petri Dish Support N Seal

Ideal sealing Tapes for Petri Dishes, Microplates, Lids, Caps Vertically Oriented Support Structure for Sealing Petri Dishes
and other Lab Items.
Provides An Extra Hand - Support N
Conformity – Stretches, conforms and seals the irregular perimeter
Seal provides a stabilizing vertical
of microplates or Petri dishes
slot in which the Petri dish and lid
Waterproof & Chemical Resistant – Tapes and adhesive resist most are held closely together while
solvents and caustic agents allowing rotation as a sealing tape is
Temperature Resistant – Seal remains flexible in moderate freezer applied around the dish
temperatures and withstands intermittent exposure to 100°C
Any Tape Any Time - Compatible with most sealing tapes including:
NEW ContainerSEAL XL™ Breathe Easy Breathable Strips, PetriSeal, DuraSeal and Parafilm®
Enjoy all the benefits of PetriSEAL and ContainerSEAL in a new wider
Stable - A wide base and non-slip feet ensure that Support N Seal
format. Container SEAL XL makes it easier to seal large containers
and bottles and to cover wider gaps ensuring a tight seal. remains in place while in use
Universal - Fits Petri dishes up to 100mm in diameter and 15mm high
(including lid)
Cat. No. Description Qty.
70556-12 Petri Dish Support N Seal each

Petri-Sleeve™
Seal-To-Size Polytubing for
Petri Dish Storage
Cut-To-Size - Petri-Sleeve™ can be
70500-B PetriSEAL, Blue 0.50 x 108 Roll
sized to accomodate any number of
70500-C PetriSEAL, Clear 0.50 x 108 Roll Petri dishes
70500-R PetriSEAL, Red 0.50 x 108 Roll Minimize Waste - Each length of sleeve can be sized to prevent baggy
70500-Y PetriSEAL, Yellow 0.50 x 108 Roll packaging and prevent excess waste
70500-W PetriSEAL, White 0.50 x 108 Roll
70501-R ContainerSEAL, Red 0.75 x 108 Roll Separate Storage - Petri dishes pretreated prior to use can be stored
70501-W ContainerSEAL, White 0.75 x 108 Roll labeled and stored in separate sleeves to prevent contamination
70501-Y ContainerSEAL, Yellow 0.75 x 108 Roll Labeled Stacks - 3” white squares every 6” allow for easy, highcontrast
70502-R ContainerSEAl XL Red 1" x 108' Roll
70502-W ContainerSEAl XL White 1" x 108' Roll
labeling
70502-Y ContainerSEAl XL Yellow 1" x 108' Roll Versatile - 7” diameter easily fits a wide variety of popular dish sizes, as
well as microplates
Cat. No. Description Qty.
60412-10 Petri-Sleeve™ each

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 263
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec11_250-270_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 4:47 AM Page 264

SECTION 11 Specimen Preparation and Embedding Supplies

® Petri Orienter ® Petri Dish
and Stand Dividers™
For Working Comfortably Adhesive Dividing
with Solid State Media Wells for Cell Growth
Flexible – Grow multiple cell
The Petri Dish Stand types in one dish OR grow
Prevent Fatigue – 30 angle creates similar cell types and apply
a more comfortable work surface for different treatments
streaking, transferring, and counting.
Save Space – One dish does
Unique Design – Rear slot accepts the job of many on the
all PetriOrienters to create a custom benchtop, at the microscope
layout. and in the incubator
The Petri Orienter Save Media – Smaller growth areas means less media needed to grow
Accuracy – Quickly create a
cells
consistent area of reference on your
petri dish. Sterile – Gamma irradiated to ensure sterility
Clarity – Sharp characters and lines 70632-20 Petri Dish Dividers 6-Sector Pie 15/pack
allow for fast and easy position 70632-30 Petri Dish Dividers 8-Sector Pie 15/pack
recognition. ® Contact Plate
Flexible – PetriOrienters are available in several layouts of grids or pie
Made of polystyrene
sectors to accommodate colonies of any size.
These dishes are free from optical
70498-01 PetriDish Stand 88mm diameter each
70498-02 PetriDish Stand 100mm diameter each
distortion. The dish has 16 of 10 x 10
70498-03 PetriOrienter, 32-square grid Pack mm square grids, which is marked
70498-04 PetriOrienter, 50-square grid Pack numerically in one direction and
70498-05 PetriOrienter, 70-square grid Pack alphabetically in the other. The model 70692-20 is designed with a
70498-06 PetriOrienter, 100-square grid Pack convex bottom to save on culture medium. Dishes are packaged 20 per
70498-07 PetriOrienter, 6-sector pie Pack sleeve and are radiation sterile.
70498-08 PetriOrienter, 8-sector pie Pack
70498-09 PetriOrienter, 12-sector pie Pack EMS # Description Vol. Qty
70498-10 PetriOrienter, 16-sector pie Pack 70692-10 Contact Plate, 60x15mm 20 ml 500/pk
70692-20 Contact Plate, convex bottom, 60x15mm 15 ml 500/pk

® Petri Dishes —Sterile Petri Dishes

Made of polystyrene
Our Petri Dishes are available in a variety of shapes and sizes for use in routine
procedures and with automated equipment. Economical, optical clarity, dishes are
precision-molded from biomedical grade polystyrene so cultures are clearly visible
without distortion. Dishes are packaged 20 each in sturdy polyethylene sleeves.
These dishes are not recommended for tissue culture application, due to non
treated by “corona effect”.
EMS # Model Description (actual Dimension) Vol Qty
70678-10 D210-7 Dish 90x20mm – Commonly referred to as a 100x20mm dish. For unimpaired observation of specimen 500 ml 100/pk
growth with raised straight ridge around top for stable stacking
70678-20 D210-7WL Dish 90x20mm – Commonly referred to as a 100x20mm dish. This dish has three venting ribs into the 100 ml 500/pk
underside of the lid to prevent condensation build-up
70678-30 D210-8 Dish 90x25mm – Commonly referred to as a 100x25mm dish. Accommodates deeper fills for longer 125 ml 500/pk
culture periods. Used for fungal cultures, plant propagation. This dish has three venting ribs into the
underside of the lid to prevent condensation built-up
70678-40 D210-8R Dish 90x25mm – Commonly referred to as a 100x25mm dish. Similar to D210-8 but with no-vented lid 125 ml 500/pk
having a raised straight ridge around top for stable stacking.
70678-50 D210-13 Dish 55x13mm – Commonly referred to as a 60x15mm dish. For use whenever a small quantity of culture 28 ml 500/pk
is desirable. For unimpaired observation of specimen growth with raised straight ridge around top for stable
stacking. Dish has three venting ribs on the edge of the dish to prevent condensation built-up.
70678-60 D210-14 Dish 50x8mm – Commonly referred to as a 60x9mm dish. Box type dish, for classroom studies, culturing 12 ml 500/pk
of mycobacteria aerosol testing, membrane filter and immunodiffusion techniques. Tight lid prevents
sample dehydration.
70678-70 D210-15 Dish 35x10mm – Commonly referred to as a 35x10mm dish. Selected for small quantities culture media. 9 ml 500/pk
For unimpaired observation of specimen growth with raised straight ridge around top for stable stacking.
This dish has three venting ribs into the underside of the lid to prevent condensation build-up.

264 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec11_250-270_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 4:47 AM Page 265

Specimen Preparation and Embedding Supplies SECTION 11

® Square Petri Dish ® Embryo Dishes
Made of polystyrene – Radiation sterile These dishes are molded from clear glass and come with a glass lid for
the viewing or staining of free-floating specimens.
This dish commonly referred to as a
100 x 15 mm dish. Free from optical
distortion and sterile, these dishes are
ideal for phase typing, susceptibility
testing, plate counts, and probe assays.
The square Petri dish with grid is consists of 36 of 13 x 13 mm squares,
each 13 mm grid is marked numerically in one direction and
alphabetically in the other. This dish has four venting ribs into the
underside of the lid to prevent condensation build-up.
Cat. # Description Qty
70691 Square Petri Dish with Grid, 10/sleeve 100/pk
70691-CS Square Petri Dish with Grid, 500/cs 500/pk Cat. # Description Pack
70690 Square Petri Dish, Plain, 20/sleeve 100/pk 70543-30 Embryo Dish, 30 mm Dia. x 12 mm Deep each
70690-CS Square Petri Dish, Plain, 500/cs 500/pk 70543-45 Embryo Dish, 45 mm Dia. x 12 mm Deep each

® Bacterial Cell ® Petri Dish; Analyslide

Spreader Slide measures 3”(L) x 2”(W) x 1/16”(H), chamber is 3mm deep. The
Made of high impact polystyrene analyslide is like a petri dish on a slide. Use it as an examination and
storage container for 47mm filters. Its rectangular base fits any
No flame sterilization needed.
microscope stage; an inner cover ring offers airtight security for the
Designed for easy spreading of
samples and it does not interfere with viewing.It is also ideal for drying
cells onto the surface of an agar plate. Supplied sterile in individually packs.
coated grids and absorbing water from grids that are supporting
Total length of handle: 176 mm, width of spreader: 36mm. Color green
sections.
EMS # Description Qty
62452 Bacterial Cell Spreader 100/pk

® Dissecting Dish
A silicone pad placed inside a
150mm x 20mm deep plastic
petri dish. The mat can be
removed, washed, and returned
to the dish for reuse. The pins
come in 10 different coded colors. 70650 Analyslide 100/pk
An optional Pyrex Glass Petri dish is available for use when sterilization
is needed ® Petri Dishes;
70540 Dissecting Dish w/Plastic Dish each Open with
70540-50 Dissecting Dish w/Pyrex® Dish each
One Hand
® PYREX® brand, Culture, Petri Dish A 50x9mm petri dish
These flat, clear dishes will design that is easily
withstand repeated sterilization opened with one hand,
(wet or dry). The edges are beaded yet closes to a tight seal
to provide greater mechanical by its unique double
strength. The bead also provides a rim. Specimen samples
means to equally space the are preserved until you are ready to analyze them. Humidity remains
sidewalls of the bottom and cover, locked in. When loaded with a 47mm absorbent pad, it is ideal for
thereby reducing the capillary action of condensed moisture on the slides. drying coated grids, removing water from grids that are supporting
They are not effected chemically or thermally by any of the methods sections.
commonly employed in laboratories where sterilization is a major factor in Available with or without absorbent pads. The dishes are sterilized by
routine or in specialized work. The covered dish is not airtight. Gamma Irradiation.
The tops are marked in blue enamel and the bottoms are marked in 70660 Without Absorbent pads 100/pk
white enamel to make sorting easier. Bottoms also have a triangular, 70662 With Absorbent pads 100/pk
enamel reference point for serial dilutions. 70664 Absorbent pad kit:
(1000 pads, 47mm, and dispenser) Kit
Size, Approx.
Cat # Description mm Dia x Hgt, mm Qty
70648-10 Complete Petri Dish 60x15 58x15 12/pk
70648-14 Complete Petri Dish 100x15 98x15 12/pk
70648-18 Complete Petri Dish 150x20 148x20 12/pk

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 265
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec11_250-270_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 7/7/14 9:46 AM Page 266

SECTION 11 Specimen Preparation and Embedding Supplies

 Petri Dishes;  Cover Glass
Disposable Bottom Sterile
Our petri dishes are Culture Dish
available in a variety of EMS introduces the High Quality
sizes and shapes for use Thin Glass Bottom Sterile
in routine procedures and Culture Dishes, meeting your
automatic equipment. research requirements.
Manufactured from
Polystyrene, with excellent
IDEAL FOR:
optical clarity. The dishes  Fluorescence microscopy
are sterile and each lot is  Confocal (laser)
tested to assure uniform microscopy
quality and sterility.  High resolution image
analysis
70680 100x15mm Standard Round 100/pk
70682 100x15mm Bi-Petri 100/pk  Cell culture
70684 100x15mm Tri-Petri 100/pk  Electrophysiology
70686 100x15mm Quad-Petri 100/pk A new series of sterile,
70690 110x15mm Square 100/pk optical quality, glass bottom
dishes which provide
 Specialized Dishes exceptional imaging quality
for many applications
 35x10mm Untreated Polystyrene Dish requiring the use of inverted
35x10mm dish for the culture of cells in suspension; radiation microscopes. Conventional
sterilized. plastic or glass petri dishes
70340 35x10mm Suspension Dish 100/pk and chambers limit the use Figure 1
70342 35x10mm Suspension Dish 500/pk of the inverted microscope
for many applications
because the thick plastic or
glass bottom requires a long
working distance objective
available only in lower
magnifications. Moreover,
plastic dishes cannot be
used for DIC or any
polarization microscopes due
 60x15mm Permanox Dish to their inherent
Figure 2
Permanox is a strong, biologically inert material, resistant to birefringence. EMS New
nonchlorinated hydrocarbons, acetone, and many other EM reagents. Glass Bottom Dishes eliminates these problems, making them ideal for
Our EMbed-812 and other embedding resins can be used to embed applications such as: patch clamp recordings where fluorescent-tagged
cells in these dishes with excellent results. Permanox has not been (GFP) receptors can be identified for selective study; and many other
shown to be autofluorescent, and has a low oxygen solubility which fluorescent microscopy applications, which require low background
makes it suitable for experiments performed under anoxic scattering of light and reduce intrinsic "auto" fluorescence that occurs
conditions.The dishes have high optical quality that provide excellent when using standard plastic dishes. Furthermore, the glass bottom is
and consistent viewing where microscopic examination is required. designed flush with the whole base of the dish, therefore allowing direct
70350 60x15mm Permanox Dish 40/pk contact between the entire glass surface and the warming stage. This
70353 60x15mm Permanox Dish 100/pk eliminates any air gaps that may otherwise exist between the glass dish
70356 60x15mm Permanox Dish 500/pk and the warming stage and hence optimize heat-transfer, allowing
homogeneous heating and cooling of the glass bottom.
 Dissecting Pan FEATURES:
and Mat  Non-cytotoxic, non-pyrogenic and sterile until opened.
This dissecting pan is made  Dish diameters: 35 and 50 mm, with internal glass well diame-
from aluminum, which is rust ter of 12, 22, 30 and 40 mm.
free and easy to clean. It comes  Available sterile either individually packed in a medical-style
with a removable reusable vinyl blister or in sleeves of 20 dishes.
pad, which accepts dissecting  Each dish has a flat (0.17mm thick) optical quality glass bottom.
as well as push-pins to hold  Production is carried on in a Class 10,000 clean room, certified
down your specimen during under EN46001, EN 46002, ISO9001 and ISO 9002.
dissecting. The pad measures  All dishes are gamma irradiated (EN 552) and sterile.
131⁄8” x 93⁄8” x 2¼” thick  A typical dish is shown in Fig. 1
63313 Dissecting Pan & Vinyl Mat each

266 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec11_250-270_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 4:48 AM Page 267

Specimen Preparation and Embedding Supplies SECTION 11

 Cover Glass Bottom Sterile Culture Dish (continued)
OPTICAL PROPERTIES SOME APPLICATIONS
 Wide optical range of transmission – UV,  Cell Biology: STEM  Protein Chemistry:  Molecular
IV and IR (300 nm to 2500 nm) Figure 2. Cell Research, Cell Green fluorescent Biology:
 Flat (0.17 mm thick) optical quality glass growth cycle moni- protein identifica- Phenotyping and
bottom provides the following advantages: toring, cell culture. tion of Histotags, other complex
a. use of a much shorter working dis- etc. Genetic Research.
tance immersion objective.
b. larger numerical aperture (NA) 1. Clear Dishes
objectives. Dish Size Glass Well Individual Blister Pack Bulk pack in Sleeve
c. higher magnification (up to 100x). Dia x H Dia. 20/pk 120/cs 20/Sleeve 200/cs
35x10 mm 12 mm 70670-02 70670-12 70670-52 70670-62
35x10 mm 22 mm 70671-02 70671-12 70671-52 70671-62
MICROSCOPY, IMAGING 50x7 mm 30 mm 70673-02 70673-12 70673-52 70673-62
AND SPECTROSCOPY 50x7 mm 40 mm 70674-02 70674-12 70674-52 70674-62
 Confocal (laser) microscopy. 2. Black Dishes — to black out light for fluorescence microscopy
 Two-/multi Photon Confocal Microscopy.
 DIC and Polarization Microscopy. Dish Size Glass Well Individual Blister Pack Bulk pack in Sleeve
Dia x H Dia. 20/pk 120/cs 20/Sleeve 200/cs
 High-resolution Imaging System.
35x10 mm 12 mm 70666-02 70666-12 70666-52 70666-62
 Infrared imaging (e.g., brain slide 35x10 mm 22 mm 70667-02 70667-12 70667-52 70667-62
recordings). 50x7 mm 30 mm 70668-02 70668-12 70668-52 70668-62
50x7 mm 40 mm 70669-02 70669-12 70669-52 70669-62

3. Willco-dishTM Kit-Dishes Components Assembly Device:

The WillCo-dish®KIT ("KIT") dishes, of which we 1. Dish (Polystyrene or polycarbonate surrounds Note: The 2 part aluminum ASSEMBLY DEVICE
have four (4) types in polystyrene (PS) and all four and -lids, clean room molded, 500 units each). comes separate, because you need to purchase it
in both "transparent -" as well as in "black 2. Pressure sensitive Double Sided [Medical] only once per type, in a life time.
walled" dishes, we designed to offer Scientists Adhesive rings, FDA approved (500 units). This Again, using an ASSEMBLY DEVICE with the KIT-
the opportunity, to use any chosen "material - as DSA-Adhesive reaches its maximum bonding dishes makes assembling these fine dishes "easy,
well as different thicknesses", for the bottom of a quality after 4 hours, at room temperature. accurate and safe", also saving a lot of time and
"WillCo® dish". funds. The (glass) bottom of the WillCo-dish® KIT
3. Glass coverslips: German glass, 0.17 mm. -
As a standard, we offer our (German glass) # 1.5 coverslips (500 units). Other thicknesess dishes is always flush with the warming-stage and
Borosilicate cover slips, in Thickness: # 1.0 (130- available on request. flat, a requirement for High Quality Imaging.
160 micron), as well as # 1.5 (160-190 micron). 4. One pair of tweezers, to protect fingers from These features ensure even distribution of the
The WillCo-dish® KIT Glass Bottom dishes are these thin, razor-sharp glass coverslips. temperature inside the dish, as well as great
composed of several components, each of the 5. Optional: Round, anodized, aluminum imaging results.
highest quality of their kind. Below please find a “Assembly Devices” for a quick, accurate and We are sure you will very much appreciate
summery and description of these components.. safe positioning and assembly of the glass working with the EMS WillCo-dish® KIT "Do-It-
coverslip and the adhesive ring. Yourself" Glass Bottom dishes
Ordering Information
Catalog #1 70665-01 70665-03 70665-05 70665-07 70665-09 70665-11 70665-13 70665-15
Number #1.5 70665-02 70665-04 70665-06 70665-08 70665-10 70665-12 70665-14 70665-16
Bottom Glass Glass Glass Glass Glass Glass Glass Glass
Size(mm) 35x10 35x10 50x7 50x7 35x10 35x10 50x7 50x7
Aperture 12mm Glass 22mm Glass 30mm Glass 40mm 12mm Glass 22mm Glass 30mm Glass 40mm
Volume(ml) 400 1000 1500 4000 400 1000 1500 4000
Vents Yes Yes No No Yes Yes No No
Glass Thickness #1(0.13-0.16mm) #1(0.13-0.16mm) #1(0.13-0.16mm) #1(0.13-0.16mm) #1(0.13-0.16mm) #1(0.13-0.16mm) #1(0.13-0.16mm) #1(0.13-0.16mm)
#1.5(0.16-0.19mm) #1.5(0.16-0.19mm) #1.5(0.16-0.19mm) #1.5(0.16-0.19mm) #1.5(0.16-0.19mm) #1.5(0.16-0.19mm) #1.5(0.16-0.19mm) #1.5(0.16-0.19mm)
Dish, Glass, Dish, Glass, Dish, Glass, Dish, Glass, Dish, Glass, Dish, Glass, Dish, Glass, Dish, Glass,
Packed
Adhesive Rings Adhesive Rings Adhesive Rings Adhesive Rings Adhesive Rings Adhesive Rings Adhesive Rings Adhesive Rings
Case 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500
Color Transparent Transparent Transparent Transparent Black Black Black Black
Material Polystyrene Polystyrene Polystyrene Polystyrene Polystyrene Polystyrene Polystyrene Polystyrene

Catalog Number 70665-20 70665-21 70655-22 70665-22

Size (mm) 50x20 50x20 60x20 60x20
Aperture 12mm Glass Diameter 22mm Glass Diameter 30mm Glass Diameter 40mm Glass Diameter
Packed 2 Parts Glass and Adhesive 2 Parts Glass and Adhesive 2 Parts Glass and Adhesive 2 Parts Glass and Adhesive
Case Each Each Each Each
Material Aluminum Aluminum Aluminum Aluminum

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 267
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec11_250-270_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 4:48 AM Page 268

SECTION 11 Specimen Preparation and Embedding Supplies

 Cellattice™ - Micro-Ruled Plastic Cell
Culture Surfaces
Purposes:
Measure the Same Cell: Cell cycle, axon growth
and differentiation Direct Cell Count: Proliferation
and cytotoxicity without removing attached cells
Introduction
Cellattice™ micro-ruled Plastic Cell Culture
Surfaces consists of a cell culture surface with
microscopic identification and measurement
markers. It is manufactured with high optical
quality plastic suitable for phase contrast and
other standard cell-based assay measurement
techniques. Cell cultures on the Cellatice™ are
identifiable within 25 micrometers.
The built-in markers on the Cellattice allow direct
measurement of cell growth and movement
without image acquisition. Same cell or cell
clusters can be measured throughout the time
course of the experiment, even after each
incubation period.
Cellatice™ can be used to monitor morphology,
cell movement and differentiation at the individual
cell level. Cell proliferation is measured directly
with multiple reading.

 Cellattice™ Coverslips and Slides

BENEFITS:
 Measure axon growth directly without image acquisition and image analysis
 Count Cells after attachment
 Measure cell proliferation directly with multiple readings without detaching
 Monitor same cell or cell cluster for morphology, cell movement and differentia-
tion
Catalog # Size Thickness Grid Area Pack
63570-15 15 x 15 mm 0.12 – 0.16 mm 10 x 10 mm 50
63571-25 25 mm Dia 0.12 – 0.16 mm 10 x 10 mm 50
63572-75 75 x 25 mm 0.76 x 0.78 mm 10 x 10 mm 50
Slide 4 Quadrants)

 EMS Immunofluorescence Chamber

A two well incubation chamber for use in immunocytochemistry (by
Miguel Berrios, SUNY Stony Brook). Also available in a one well version.
This chamber accepts regular microscope slides or coverslips and is
assembled without any bonding substrates. Antibody incubation and
washing are done in the chamber wells. It is then taken apart before microscopic examination. It
is a proven solution to contamination spills, non-specific fluorescent signals, and sample dehydration
in indirect immunofluorescence assays.
Overall measurement: 41⁄2"(L) x 2"(W) x 7⁄16"(T) (113 x 51 x 12mm). Cavity: 3⁄4" (dia.) x 1⁄4"(D) (20mm x 6mm).
ADVANTAGES:
 Very reliable and will accept a variety of  Drastically reduces non-specific backgrounds.
samples and antibody washing conditions.  Elimination of contamination.
70330 Immunofluorescence Chamber, 2 well each
70331 Immunofluorescence Chamber, 1 well each

268 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec11_250-270_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 4:48 AM Page 269

Specimen Preparation and Embedding Supplies SECTION 11

® Tissue Processing Well; Netwell™
A modular and disposable system which can be used for
the following procedures:
T Handling and processing of tissue slices.
T In immunocytochemical staining.
T In 3-dimensional tissue culture.
T In explant tissue culture.

Home made devices are no longer necessary. These tissue processing wells are ready to fill all of
your needs with the added convenience of being able to process up to 12 tissue specimens at
one time (with one unit) .

® Netwell™ Inserts
The Netwell™ is a polystyrene insert fitted with a polyester mesh bottom for use in 6 and 12-well
plates. Available in two mesh sizes and two diameters; the Netwells provide ultimate flexibility in
retaining fragile tissues during processing and staining.

® Netwell™ Carrier Kit

A set of carrier plates and handles for moving the Netwells in and out of the 6 or 12-well plates.
The handle can be attached or detached to the plate at any time.

® Netwell™ Reagent Tray

Thermo-formed polystyrene. Holds 150ml of reagent solution. Netwells are transferred to the
reagent tray by the Carrier kit, where fixing and staining is performed. Reagent trays are available
in white for colorimetric reaction contrast, and in black for better visibility of tissue sections.
APPLICATIONS
T The polyester mesh acts as a tissue carrier and strainer for immunocytochemical
staining and biological and histological fixation. It avoids the risk of losing valuable
samples associated with paint-brush transfer.
T For 3-D tissue culture, the sterile Netwell provides efficient media permeation
and support to cultures grown in gels.
T As well, Sterile Netwells allow for easy processing of tissue explants and
microcarrier-grown cells.
Ordering Information:
Catalog # Dia. Mesh Size Sterile Units/cs
64710-00 15 mm 74 μm Yes 48/cs
64711-00 15 mm 500 μm Yes 48/cs
64712-00 24 mm 74 μm Yes 48/cs
64713-00 24 mm 500 μm Yes 48/cs

Netwell Accessories:
Catalog # Description Units/cs
64730-00 Netwell Reagent Tray, Black 200/cs
64730-10 Netwell Reagent Tray, Black 10/cs
64732-00 Netwell Reagent Tray, White 200/cs
64732-10 Netwell Reagent Tray, White 10/cs
64735-00 Netwell Carrier Kit, 15 mm 8/cs
64735-01 Netwell Carrier Kit, 15 mm 1/cs
64736-00 Netwell Carrier Kit, 24 mm 8/cs
64736-01 Netwell Carrier Kit, 24 mm 1/cs

For your convenience, the NetWell™ sets are available ready to use.
The set consists of:
T 6 Netwells of 24mm diameter or 12 Netwells of 15mm diameter
T Two Reagent Trays, one black and one white
T One Carrier Kit: one carrier plate and one handle
Cat. # Netwell™ Dia. Netwell™ Mesh Pack
64740-00 15mm, Sterile 74μm set
64742-00 15mm, Sterile 500μm set
64743-00 24mm, Sterile 74μm set
64745-00 24mm, Sterile 500μm set

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 269
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec11_250-270_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 4:48 AM Page 270

SECTION 11 Specimen Preparation and Embedding Supplies

® MeshWell Plates; Section Processing and ® Falcon™ Cell Strainers
Immunocytochemical Trays These nylon
meshed devices
These plates are made from polypropylene provide more
and the bottom of each of the wells is an uniform cell
ETFE monofilament screening fabric with a suspensions, and
500μm (0.0197î) opening. These are a perfect tool
MeshWell Plates are available with 6, 12, for separating
and 24 well configurations, and they fit into cells from either clumps or primary tissues. There is no longer a need to
the 6, 12 and 24 Costar/Corning Cell fabricate filters from gauze, cotton, paper or fabric. Cell strainers are
Culture Clusters listed above for processing compatible with 50ml conical tubes (#64760 or #64762). The strainers
tissue slices, otherwise, these MeshWell are available in 35, 40, 70 and 100 micron sizes. The 35 micron mesh
Plates are also able to process tissue slices comes in a non-sterile configuration and it is an integral part of the 6ml
with Reagent Trays (64730 - 64732). tube cap that can be used to collect the dissociated sample for
MeshWell Plates come with one Plate and downstream processing in instruments. Ideal for: dissociating clumped
two Reagent Trays, one Black and one cells in separation for cell counting or sub-culture, separating
white. For your conveniece we offer a Meshwell Plate set which includes enzymatically dissociated cells from undigested tissue for the initiation of
one Meshwell and one cluster plate. primary cell growing, tissue processing such as fixation, dehydration, and
staining. Each strainer is individually wrapped and gamma sterilized,
except for the 35-micron mesh which comes with a 6ml tube and is
packed 25/sleeve.
Ordering:
Cat. # Description Quantity Catalog # Mesh size Sterile Fit Tube Units/cs
64700-06 MeshWell Plate, 6-Well each 64750-00 35 μm No 6 ml 500/case
64700-12 MeshWell Plate, 12-Well each 64750-25 35 μm No 6 ml 25/case
64700-24 MeshWell Plate, 24-Well each 64751-00 40 μm Yes 50 ml 50/case
64702-06 MeshWell Plate, 6-Well w/Cluster set 64751-10 40 μm Yes 50 ml 10/case
64702-12 MeshWell Plate, 12-Well w/Cluster set 64752-00 70 μm Yes 50 ml 50/case
64702-24 MeshWell Plate, 24-Well w/Cluster set 64752-10 70 μm Yes 50 ml 10/case
64730-10 Reagent Tray, Black 10/pk 64753-00 100 μm Yes 50 ml 50/case
64732-10 Reagent Tray, White 10/pk 64753-10 100 μm Yes 50 ml 10/case

® Costar® Brand Cell Culture Clusters

Tissue culture plates are designed and treated for a wide Clusters are commonly used in the
range of applications. following applications:
T Maintenance of T In vitro toxicology
Plates are made from optically clear, medical grade stock cultures T Drug binding
polystyrene with flat bottoms of uniform thickness, allowing T Cell cloning studies
for distortion-free observation and microscopic T Hybridoma fusions T Virus isolation
examination. Alphanumeric coordinates are placed on the T Scale up culture T Viral plaque assay
same focal plane as cell growthófor easy referencing of T Clone expansion T Transformation
well position. T 3H-Thymidine T Carcinogenicity
These plates are also for use with our NetWells and our MeshWell Plates (see Tissue Processing Well; T 51Cr Release testing
NetWells, and MeshWell Plates listed above.) assay T Mutagenicity
T MTT assays testing
Ordering:
Well Well Well Growth Total Well Working Corning Catalog
Format Dia, mm Area, ml Volume Volume Packaging Costar No Number Quantity
6 35 9.5 17 ml 5 ml 5/bag 3506 64705-05 100/pk
6 35 9.5 17 ml 5 ml 1/bag 3516 64705-01 50/pk
12 22.6 4 7 ml 3 ml 5/bag 3512 64706-05 100/pk
12 22.6 4 7 ml 3 ml 1/bag 3513 64706-01 50/pk
24 16 2 3.4 ml 2 ml 5/bag 3527 64707-05 100/pk
24 16 2 3.4 ml 2 ml 1/tray 3526 64707-01 50/pk

® Zerostat Anti-Static Gun

This device operates on a piezoelectric effect to emit positive (trigger squeeze) and negative (trigger
release) charges to neutralize static on virtually any surface. The gun remits no radioactivity and it
does not require electricity or batteries. The unit measures 4 x 6".
60610 Zerostat Anti-Static Gun each

270 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec11_271-283_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 4:59 AM Page 271

Specimen Preparation and Embedding Supplies SECTION 11

 FLOWMI™  Tissue Grinders
Cell Strainers Wheaton Tissue Grinders enable primary cells to be prepared from
(40μm Porosity) excised tissues, as well as sub-cellular components from harvested cell
packs. Tissue grinders are used to extract DNA, RNA and proteins for
Disposible Cell Strainers
blot or other procedures. They are also used to enhance recovery of
for P1000 pipette tips other cell products. Capacities on the grinders range from 0.1 ml to 55
(40 microns) ml. There are many grinders to suit your needs.
These unique cell strainers  Tapered Tissue Grinders are ideal for connective tissue including
provide quick and efficient filtering heart, muscle, and lung. These glass-on-glass grinders feature a
of small volume samples (up to long taper design that minimizes grinding efficiency.
1000μl) prior to FLOW or FACS  Potter-Elvehjem Tissue Grinder incorporates a serrated pestle
Analysis.** FLOWMI is compatible design to disperse homogenate into the mortar cylinder.
with most 1000μl tips including Standard unit with PTFE pestles are well suited for soft tissue,
Fisherbrand Sure-One, VWR such as brain and liver.
brand, Axygen, Nichiryo,  Tenbroeck Tissue Grinders have a hollow handle that allows pack-
Eppendorf, and more. Flowmi™ ing with ice, making them suitable for tissues such as liver,
strainers are sterile and packaged intestines and heart.
in re-sealable, zip-style bag.  Dounce Tissue Grinders are supplied with two types of pestles: a
Product sterility can be loose-fitting pestle for sample reduction and a second, tighter
maintained when opened and re-sealed in a laminar flow hood. pestle for complete homogenization. The ball-shaped pestles
Compact, covered tray holds 50 Flowmi™ strainers oriented for direct leave cell nuclei intact in soft tissue.
press and fit attachment to the pipette tip  The Wheaton Micro Tissue Grinder Kit offers a complete selec-
tion of micro tissue grinders.
 Preserve volume when filtering small samples All Wheaton tissue grinders are manufactured from Wheaton 33 low
 Decrease the potential for clogging of FLOW or FACS* instru- extractable borosilicate glass that conforms to USP Type 1 and ASTM E-
ments by effectively filtering cellular debris 438 Type 1, Class A requirements. Replacement parts can be
 Tray features a sliding cover for purchased separately.
easy, one handed use
 Patent pending.
 Dounce Tissue Grinder
* FACS is a registered trademark of  Ideal for soft tissue
Becton-Dickinson Corporation  Provide with loose and tight pestle
** FLOWMI is recommended for use with
 Wheaton 33 low extractable
samples having a maximum borosilicate glass
concentration of 2MM cells/ml.  Autoclavable.
This grinder designed to retain a high
Cat No. Description Qty. percentage of cell nuclei and mitochondria
64709-60 Flowmi™ Cell Strainers 50/pk in soft tissues from cell cultures. When use,
the pestle ball is encircled in liquid, which is
avoid heat buildup by reducing friction. This
grinder is ideal for enzyme studies. The initial grinding is performed
using the “loose” pestle. The grinding process is completed using the
“tight” pestle.. This grinder is used by moving the pestle up and down,
and work best with cell suspensions or very soft tissues. The mortar has
a large reservoir and pouring lip and is supplied with “loose” and “tight”
pestles.
Tight Pestle “A” Specification: 0.0010 – 0.0030” (0.025 – 0.076 mm)
Loose Pestle “B” Specification: 0.0035 – 0.0055” (0.089 – 0.14 mm)

Mortar, OD x Overall
Cat. # Size, mL Length, mm Length Qty/cs
64790-01 1 11 x 48 125 2/pk
64790-07 7 13 x 82 175 2/pk
64790-15 15 22 x 94 210 2/pk
64790-40 40 32 x 140 285 2/pk

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 271
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec11_271-283_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 4:59 AM Page 272

SECTION 11 Specimen Preparation and Embedding Supplies

 Tissue Grinders (continued)
®  Potter-Elvehjem
 Dounce Dura Grind Tissue Grinder
Tissue Grinder
With Radial Serrations
 Rugged alternative to glass Dounce
Tissue Grinder All features are similar to the series
 Precision machined from No.316 stain- 64792-series, with additional:
less steel  Radial serrated PTFE pestle
 Mortar and Pestle provided as a This grinder has a serrated PTFE
matched set pestle that disperses homogenate into the mortar cylinder more
 Not autoclavable. efficiently. Depth of the serration is 0.20” to 0.25” (0.1 to 0.15 mm).
®
Wheaton Dura-Grind Stainless Steel Dounce Tissue Grinder provides a Mortar, OD x Overall
rugged alternative to glass Dounce tissue grinders. Smooth pestle action Cat. # Size, mL Length, mm Length Qty/cs
requires less effort than glass tissue grinders. This unit is precision 64795-02 2 11 x 45 203 2/pk
machined of No. 316 stainless steel to the tolerance of 0.0005 in. 64795-05 5 13 x 66 219 2/pk
64795-10 10 16 x 74 219 2/pk
(0.013mm). The mortar has flat bottom allowing it to stand upright.
64795-15 15 19 x 94 219 2/pk
Single pestle and mortar are supplied as a matched set; they are NOT 64795-30 30 24 x 118 266 2/pk
autoclavable. Weight 2 lb (0.9 kg) 64795-55 55 30 x 130 266 2/pk
Mortar, OD x Overall  Replacement Parts:
Cat. # Size, mL Length, mm Length Qty/cs
64791-07 7 35 x 114 171 1/pk Cat # Cat #
Mortar only Size Qty Pestle only Size Qty
64791-15 15 35 x 114 171 1/pk 64792-70 2 ml 2 64795-80 2 ml 2/pk
64791-40 40 44 x 114 171 1/pk 64792-71 5 ml 2 64795-81 5 ml 2/pk
64792-72 10 ml 2 64795-82 10 ml 2/pk
 Potter-Elvehjem Tissue 64792-73 15 ml 2 64795-83 15 ml 2/pk
Grinder 64792-74 30 ml 2 64795-84 30 ml 2/pk
64792-75 55 ml 2 64795-85 55 ml 2/pk
 Ideal for tissue homogenates
 Use with power homogenization
 Potter-Elvehjem
 Parts interchangeable ®

 PTFE pestle
Safe-Grind Tissue
 Autoclavable Grinder
These grinder are precisely constructed with All features as the same as 64792-
completely interchangeable parts to allow easier cleaning or replacement series, with the addition:
of damaged mortars. They are designed for use in preparation of tissue  Exterior plastic coated glass
homogenates and other similar applications. The PTFE pestle is for soft mortar provide greater safety
tissues such as brain or liver. The stainless steel rod is 0.25” (6.3mm) Wheaton Safe-grind plastic coated
diameter. The grinding chamber clearance is 0.004” to 0.006’ (0.1 to tissue grinders afford an added measure of safety over uncoated glass
0.15mm). This unit is autoclavable and can be used for power tissue grinders. The heavy plastic coating protects the mortar from
homogenization as with overhead stirrer. However, we strongly becoming scratched or checked, and assures you of sure grip. The
recommend the use of safety-coated tissue grinder (64793-series) for transparent coating allows an unobstructed view of the homogenate
added safety. This unit is manufactured from Wheaton 33 low during grinding. The grinders are fully autoclavable.
extractable borosilicate glass that conforms to USP Type 1 and ASTM E- Mortar, OD x Overall
438 Type 1, Class A requirements. Cat. # Size, mL Length, mm Length Qty/cs
64793-02 2 11 x 45 203 2/pk
Mortar, OD x Overall
Cat. # Size, mL Length, mm Length Qty/cs 64793-05 5 13 x 66 219 2/pk
64792-02 2 11 x 45 203 2/pk 64793-10 10 16 x 74 219 2/pk
64792-05 5 13 x 66 219 2/pk 64793-15 15 19 x 94 219 2/pk
64792-10 10 16 x 74 219 2/pk 64793-30 30 24 x 118 266 2/pk
64792-15 15 19 x 94 219 2/pk 64793-55 55 30 x 130 266 2/pk
64792-30 30 24 x 118 266 2/pk  Potter-Elvehjam Tissue Grinder Replacement Parts
64792-55 55 30 x 130 266 2/pk Cat # Cat #
 Potter-Elvehjam Tissue Grinder Replacement Parts Mortar only Size Qty Pestle only Size Qty
64793-70 2 ml 2 64792-80 2m 2/pk
Cat # Cat #
Mortar only Size Qty Pestle only Size Qty 64793-71 5 ml 2 64792-81 5 ml 2/pk
64792-70 2 ml 2 64792-80 2 ml 2/pk 64793-72 10 ml 2 64792-82 10 ml 2/pk
64792-71 5 ml 2 64792-81 5 ml 2/pk 64793-73 15 ml 2 64792-83 15 ml 2/pk
64792-72 10 ml 2 64792-82 10 ml 2/pk 64793-74 30 ml 2 64792-84 30 ml 2/pk
64792-73 15 ml 2 64792-83 15 ml 2/pk 64793-75 55 ml 2 64792-85 55 m 2/pk
64792-74 30 ml 2 64792-84 30 ml 2/pk
64792-75 55 ml 2 64792-85 55 ml 2/pk

272 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec11_271-283_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 4:59 AM Page 273

Specimen Preparation and Embedding Supplies SECTION 11

 Tissue Grinders (continued)
 Tapered Tissue Grinder
 Potter-Elvehjem Micro
With Stainless Steel Rod Pestle
Tissue Grinder
 Made from Wheaton 33 low  PTFE pestle with stainless steel rod firs
extractable borosilicate glass power homogenizer
 Micro size for extremely precise  Homogenizes soft tissue such as brain
work  Mortar made from Wheaton 333 low
 Reservoir and pouring lip are extractable borosilicate glass
incorporated into the design  Interchangeable components
 Autoclavable  Autoclavable
Similar to the all glass Potter-Elvehjem style, but micro size is for This unit is the same as the 64796-series, but with a PTFE pestle for
extremely precise work. This unit is designed for delicate hand soft tissues. The stainless steel rod is 0.25” (6.3 mm) diameter and is
operation. Clearance between pestle and tube is 0.004” to 0.006” (0.1 suit for use with Wheaton Overhead Stirrer.
– 015 mm)
Mortar, OD x Overall
Mortar, OD x Overall Cat. # Size, mL Length, mm Length Qty/cs
Cat. # Size, mL Length, mm Length Qty/cs
64794-01 0.1 4 x 65 110 2/pk 64797-01 1 11 x 49 130 1/pk
64797-03 3 11 x 86 220 1/pk
64797-05 5 13 x 93 220 1/pk
 Replacement Parts 64797-15 15 18 x 114 240 1/pk
Cat # Description Qty  Tapered Tissue Grinder Replacement Parts:
64794-70 0.1 ml size Pestle only 2/pk
Cat # Cat #
64794-80 0.1 ml size Mortar only 2/pk Mortar only Size Qty Pestle only Size Qty
64797-70 1 ml 2 64797-80 1 ml 2/pk
 Tapered Tissue Grinder 64797-71 3 ml 2 64797-81 3 ml 2/pk
 Homogenizes connective tissue 64797-72 5 ml 2 64797-82 5 ml 2/pk
including heart, muscle and lung 64797-73 15 ml 2 64797-83 15 m 2/pk
 Made from Wheaton 33 low extractable
borosilicate glass  Micro Tissue
 Interchangeable components takes the Grinder Kit
hassle out of matching parts  Complete kit includes 7 micro
 Autoclavable tissue grinders
This is new design grinder with longer tapered  Made from Wheaton 33 low
surface on both the mortar and pestle, offering grinding more efficient extractable borosilicate glass
and less time require. The conical surface allows initial size reduction  Replacement parts available
followed by passage through the cylindrical section for the final separately
homogenization step.  Autoclavable
When the pestle is “bottomed” within the mortar, the clearance is This complete selection of Wheaton
uniform 0.004” to 0.006” (0.1 to 0.15 mm) Micro Tissue Grinders is conveniently packed in a lightweight protective
The components are interchangeable. Therefore no need keep parts carrying case. The 0.5 ml micro tissue grinder with screw cap can be
matched during cleaning. The ground glass surface on both the mortar used for tissue grinding as well as for additional procedures. This
and pestle are capable of homogenizing connective tissue such as heart, particular tissue grinder mortar can be safely joined with another
®
muscle and lung, as well as skin and plant tissue. threaded glass component if needed, using the Wheaton Connection .
The Kit is packed in high-density polyethylene case with foam inserts.
Mortar, OD x Overall
Cat. # Size, mL Length, mm Length Qty/cs Cat. # Description Qty/Case
64796-01 1 11 x 49 130 1/pk 64800 Complete Kit each
64796-03 3 11 x 86 220 1/pk
64796-05 5 13 x 93 220 1/pk
64796-15 15 18 x 114 240 1/pk  Replacement Parts
Cat. # Description Qty/Kit Qty/Case
64798-01 1 ml Tenbroeck Tissue Grinder 1 2/pk
 Replacement Parts: 64802-05 0.5 ml Tissue Grinder, 1 2/pk
Cat # Cat # GPI 13-425 cap
Mortar only Size Qty Pestle only Size Qty 64790-01 1 ml Dounce Tissue Grinder 1 2/pk
64796-70 1 ml 2 64796-80 1 ml 2/pk 64794-01 0.1 ml Tissue Grinder 1 2/pk
64796-71 3 ml 2 64796-81 3 ml 2/pk 64799-02 0.2 ml Tissue Grinder 1 2/pk
64796-72 5 ml 2 64796-82 5m 2/pk 64792-02 2 ml Potter-Elvehjem Tissue Grinder 1 2/pk
64796-73 15 ml 2 64796-83 15 ml 2/pk 64797-01 1 ml Tapered Tissue Grinder 1 1 ml

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 273
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec11_271-283_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 4:59 AM Page 274

SECTION 11 Specimen Preparation and Embedding Supplies

 Tissue Grinders (continued)
 Tenbroeck  Disposable Micro
Tissue Grinder Tissue Grinder
 Ideal for grinding liver, heart, and  Eliminates cross contamination
intestine tissue  Useful for radioactive samples
 Made from Wheaton 33  Small grinder area for high
borosilicate glass sample recovery
 Hollow pestle can be pack with ice  Made from Wheaton 33 low
 Pour lip on mortar – Autoclavable extractable borosilicate glas
All glass Tenbroeck tissue grinders are precision made, interchangeable  Autocalvable
pestles and tubes, no need to keep to keep component matched, also The disposable micro tissue grinder allows for homogenized tissue micro
offer easier replacement of damaged parts. The clearance between samples without cross contamination. This unit is especially useful for
pestle and tube is 0.0035 to 0.0065” (0.09 – 0.16 mm)While this radioactive samples. No washing is needed; just disposed the set after use.
grinder is designed for hand operation, it can be slow speed motor- Mortar Size: 10 x 44 mm. Pestle Size: 7 mm sphere
driven by inserting a rubber stopper (side 00) and metal rod into pestle. Mortar, OD x Overall
This unit also features an expanded reservoir and pouring lip. Cat. # Size, mL Length, mm Length Qty/cs
64803-07 0.75 8 x 44 88 25/pk
Mortar, OD x Overall
Cat. # Size, mL
64798-01 1
Length, mm
11 x 48
Length
140
Qty/cs
2/pk
 Overhead Stirrer
64798-02 2 11 x 50 140 2/pk  Allow for power homogenization or
64798-07 7 16 x 82 190 2/pk mixing
64798-15 15 22 x 94 250 2/pk  Speed control capable of RPM / Torque
64798-40 40 32 x 140 320 2/pk combinations
 Use only with tissue grinders with stain-
 Micro Tissue Grinder less steel rods
with PTFE Spacer  Keyless chuck accepts shaft size to 7.9
 PTF spacer aligns the pestle and mm
reduces aero soling of the product  One year warranty
 Made from Wheaton 33 low The Wheaton overhead stirrer is a compact
extractable borosilicate glass unit with solid state speed control capable of
 Autoclavable providing RPM/torque combinations for most laboratory operation such
This unit consists of finely ground glass pestle and tube. The mortar and as homogenizing or mixing. This Over Head Mixer should be attached
pestle come as matched set. only to Tissue Grinders with PTFE pestles and with stainless steel rods.
Unit and motor are mounted in a housing with epoxy finish and is
Mortar, OD x Overall provided with 6” aluminum rod and clamp for attachment to support
Cat. # Size, mL Length, mm Length Qty/cs stand. Keyless chuck accepts shaft sizes up to 5/16” (7.9 mm). Support
64799-02 0.2 7 x 33 115 2/pk
stand is not included. One year warranty.
 Micro Tissue Grinder Specifications:
Speed Range: ....................................300 – 5,000 RPM (Under load)
with Cap Electrical:..............................................120 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 50 watts
 With PTFE pestle and screw cap Dimensions:................................41⁄2" x 5" x 12" (11.5 x 13 x 30 cm)
 Made from Wheaton 33 low Weight:..........................................................................6 lbs (2.7 kg)
extractable borosilicate glass
 Autoclavable Cat. # Description Qty
This unit features a screw threaded neck 64806-10 Overhead Stirrer Complete Unit each
®
for use with Wheaton connection . The 13-425 cap has an open top
and PTFE faced silicone rubber liner. The clearance between pestle and  Accessories:
mortar is 0.002 – 0.006” (0.05 – 0.15 mm). Cat. # Description Qty
64806-50 Swivel blade paddle for stirring liquid in vessels each
Mortar, OD x Overall with side entry port or for vessels with narrow
Cat. # Size, mL Length, mm Length Qty/cs openings. Shaft 1⁄4" x 12” (6.3 x 305mm),
64802-05 0.5 13 x 37 115 2/pk Blade: 1⁄2" x 2” (12.7x50.8mmm)
64806-51 Stainless steel Extension Rod, 1⁄4 “x 6” each
(6.3 x 153mm). For use with extension
 Replacement Parts: sleeve for lengthening Paddles.
Cat # Description Qty/cs 64806-52 Stainless steel Extension Rod, 1⁄4" x 12” each
64802-70 Extra Mortar and Cap 10/pk
(6.3 x 305mm). For use with Extension
64802-80 Extra Pestle 2/pk
Sleeve for lengthening Paddles.
64806-53 Stainless steel Extension Sleeve for 1⁄4" each
(6.3mm) diameter Rods, with set screws.
For use in lengthening Paddles.

274 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec11_271-283_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 4:59 AM Page 275

Specimen Preparation and Embedding Supplies SECTION 11

® Lab-Tek® Chamber Slide™ System:
Lab-Tek® Chamber Slide™,
Lab-Tek® II Chamber Slide™
and Lab-Tek® II CC2™
Chamber Slide™ Products
The growth of various cell types on plastic, soda lime glass and
borosilicate coverglass were examined. The surfaces were either
unmodified, coated with poly-lysine, or stably surface modified with
non-biological reagents as described by Kleinfield, et al. (1988). All
substrates were assembled into Lab-Tek® and Lab-Tek®II Chamber
Slide™ products.

Lab-Tek® Chamber Slide Specifications: Lab-Tek® II Chamber Slide Specifications:

Well Visible Working Well Visible Working
Growth Size Area Volume Growth Size Area Volume
Surface (cm2) (cm2) (ml) Surface (cm2) (cm2) (ml)
1 Chamber, Glass/Permanox 9.4 9.4 2.5-4.5 1 Chamber, Glass, CC2 10.0 8.6 4.0-5.0
2 Chamber, Glass/Permanox 4.2 4.2 1.2-2.0 2 Chamber, Glass, CC2 4.2 4.0 2.0-2.5
4 Chamber, Glass/Permanox 1.8 1.8 0.5-0.9 4 Chamber, Glass, CC2 2.4 1.7 1.0-1.3
8 Chamber, Glass/Permanox 0.8 0.8 0.2-0.4 8 Chamber, Glass, CC2 1.2 0.7 0.5-0.6
16 Chamber, Glass 0.4 0.4 0.1-0.2
Flaskette, Glass 10.0 10.0 2.5-5.0

Product Features Lab-Tek® Lab-Tek® II Lab-Tek® II CC2

Configurations 1, 2, 4, 8, 16 well, flask style 1, 2, 4, 8 well 1, 2, 4, 8 well
Media Proprietary cell culture Proprietary cell culture Proprietary cell culture
chamber material grade polystyrene (PS) grade polystyrene (PS) grade polystyrene (PS)
Slide materials Soda lime glass Soda lime glass Soda lime glass
Permanox® plastic
Polystyrene plastic
Cover Clear polystyrene, no handle, Clear polystyrene, with handle Clear polystyrene, with handle
facilitates microscopic viewing for aseptic manipulations for aseptic manipulations
Sealant Non-toxic medical grade silicone Biocompatible acrylic adhesive Biocompatible acrylic adhesive
• Remains on slide • Remains with media chamber • Remains with media chamber
after detachment after detachment after detachment
Reagent ʻIsolatorʼ Created by removable Created by Created by
silicone gasket hydrophobic border hydrophobic border
Chamber separation No separation tool required Requires separation tools Requires separation tools
Growth Surface For adherent cell culture For adherent cell culture For adherent cell culture
Glass slides RS treated glass slide chemically modified surface thatʼs
• 6-stage high purity water wash Proprietary wash optimal for fastidious cells
Mimics a poly-lysine coated.
Permanox® plastic
• Cell culture treated

Polystyrene
• Cell culture treated
Biological testing BHK-21, Hep-2 cells BHK-21, Hep-2 cells Primary chick brain neurons, Hep-2 cells
Leak tested Yes Yes Yes
Slide background
fluorescence Glass: Minimal fluorescence Glass: Glass:
Permanox®: Minimal fluorescence • No endogenous fluorescence • No endogenous fluorescence
Polystyrene: Autofluorescence
at <485nm
Coverslip
compatibility Yes, following gasket removal Yes Yes
Writing surface “Sand-blasted” frosted end Super Frost® white printed end SuperFrost® blue printed end

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 275
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec11_271-283_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 4:59 AM Page 276

SECTION 11 Specimen Preparation and Embedding Supplies

® Lab-Tek® Chamber Slide™ System
T Developed for microscopy of in situ cell culture.
T DCells grow on a standard microscope slide.
T DMedia chamber can be removed when culturing is complete.
T DUseful for viral and mycoplasma testing, chromosome
studies toxicity tests and immunocytology.
T DPermanox® plastic and glass do not interfere with
fluorescent labels.
Permanox® is a special molding resin, which meets the growing
requirements of most anchorage dependent cells; also excellent
chemical resistance allows for cell fixation and the staining of organic
solvents for EM and other techniques. Low oxygen permeation makes
Permanox® ideal for anoxic cell growth.
Chamber slides combine a media-containing chambered super-
structure with a standard soda lime glass slide or Permanox® plastic
slide, sealing the two together with a biologically inert silicone gasket.
After cells are grown, the chamber and gasket are easily removed. The ® Lab-Tek® II Chamber
slide may then be fixed, stained, cover slipped, and filed with the usual Slide System
convenience. These slides, once fixed and stained, can be embedded T Sterile, Chamber Slide™ products have
using our Slide Duplicating Mold (Cat. 70170). removable, polystyrene media cham-
Lab-Tek® Chamber Slide™ System all come packed in a sterile sealed ber of 1, 2, 4, and 8-well configuration
tray, 8 units per tray, 2 trays per pack and 12 trays per case. T Low fluorescent glass microscope
slide (25 x 75 x 1.2 mm) with rounded corners
® Lab-Tek® Glass Chamber Slide™ T Biocompatible adhesive
NNI # Cat.# Description Pack T Polystyrene cover
177372 70381 LT Glass Slide 1 Chamber 2 trays T Inert hydrophobic well border printed on slide
177372 70384 LT Glass Slide 1 Chamber 6 trays
177372 70387 LT Glass Slide 1 Chamber 12 trays T SuperFrost printed area
177380 70391 LT Glass Slide 2 Chamber 2 trays Lab-Tek® II Chamber Slide™ products offer optimal surface for excellent
177380 70394 LT Glass Slide 2 Chamber 6 trays attachment and growth of cells, easily distinguished by the blue mark.
177380 70397 LT Glass Slide 2 Chamber 12 trays This design allows for the removal of the media chamber and adhesive
177399 70401 LT Glass Slide 4 Chamber 2 trays from the slide, using a separation device. The blue hydrophobic border
177399 70404 LT Glass Slide 4 Chamber 6 trays is raised slightly and isolates the individual wells, and prevents cross
177399 70407 LT Glass Slide 4 Chamber 12 trays contamination. The slide can be coversliped.
177402 70411 LT Glass Slide 8 Chamber 2 trays
Lab-Tek® II CC2™ Chamber Slide™ products are the newest addition to
177402 70414 LT Glass Slide 8 Chamber 6 trays
177402 70415 LT Glass Slide 8 Chamber 12 trays our Lab-Tek® II Chamber Slide™ family.
CC2 shares several similarities with the original Lab-Tek® II Chamber
® Lab-Tek® Permanox® Chamber Slide™ Slide, however, it’s pronounced difference is that the glass growth
NNI # Cat.# Description Pack surface has been chemically modified. This modification provides an
177410 70380 LT Permanox Slide 1 Chamber 2 trays optimal surface for growing fastidious cells such as primary neurons or
177410 70383 LT Permanox Slide 1 Chamber 6 trays poorly adherent cell lines. CC2 also are non-auto fluorescent making
177410 70386 LT Permanox Slide 1 Chamber 12 trays them ideal for fluorescent applications such as FISH (Fluorescent in situ
177429 70390 LT Permanox Slide 2 Chamber 2 trays Hybridization). The growth surface remains stable without refrigeration.
177429 70393 LT Permanox Slide 2 Chamber 6 trays Lab-Tek® II and Lab-Tek II CC2™ Chamber Slide™ Systems all come
177429 70396 LT Permanox Slide 2 Chamber 12 trays
packed in a sterile sealed tray. 8 units per tray, 2 trays per pack and 12
177437 70400 LT Permanox Slide 4 Chamber 2 trays
177437 70403 LT Permanox Slide 4 Chamber 6 trays trays per case.
177437 70406 LT Permanox Slide 4 Chamber 12 trays
177445 70410 LT Permanox Slide 8 Chamber 2 trays ® Lab-Tek® II Chamber Slide™
177445 70413 LT Permanox Slide 8 Chamber 6 trays NNI # Cat.# Description Pack
177445 70416 LT Permanox Slide 8 Chamber 12 trays 154453 70379-12 Lab-Tek® II 1 Chamber 2 trays
154453 70379-14 Lab-Tek® II 1 Chamber 6 trays
® Lab-Tek® Flaskettes and 16-Well 154453 70379-16 Lab-Tek® II 1 Chamber 12 trays
NNI # Cat.# Description Pack 154461 70379-22 Lab-Tek® II 2 Chamber 2 trays
177453 70417 Lab Tek™ Flaskette, glass 2 trays 154461 70379-24 Lab-Tek® II 2 Chamber 6 trays
177453 70418 Lab Tek™ Flaskette, glass 6 trays 154461 70379-26 Lab-Tek® II 2 Chamber 12 trays
177453 70419 Lab Tek™ Flaskette, glass 12 trays 154526 70379-42 Lab-Tek® II 4 Chamber 2 trays
178599 70420 Lab Tek™ Flaskette, glass 2 trays 154526 70379-44 Lab-Tek® II 4 Chamber 6 trays
178599 70421 Lab Tek™ Flaskette, glass 6 trays 154526 70379-46 Lab-Tek® II 4 Chamber 12 trays
178599 70422 Lab Tek™ Flaskette, glass 12 trays 154534 70379-82 Lab-Tek® II 8 Chamber 2 trays
171080 70423 16-Well Coverglass 22x74mm 2 oz 154534 70379-84 Lab-Tek® II 8 Chamber 6 trays
154534 70379-86 Lab-Tek® II 8 Chamber 12 trays

276 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec11_271-283_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 4:59 AM Page 277

Specimen Preparation and Embedding Supplies SECTION 11

® Lab-Tek® II CC2™ Chamber Slide™ Chambered Coverglass System Specifications:

NNI # Cat.# Description Pack
154739 70360-12 Lab-Tek® II CC2 1 Chamber 2 trays Lab-Tek® Lab-Tek® II
154739 70360-14 Lab-Tek® II CC2 1 Chamber 6 trays Well Working Well Working
154739 70360-16 Lab-Tek® II CC2 1 Chamber 12 trays Size Volume Size Volume
154852 70360-22 Lab-Tek® II CC2 2 Chamber 2 trays Configuration (cm2) (ml) (cm2) (ml)
154852 70360-24 Lab-Tek® II CC2 2 Chamber 6 trays 1 chamber 9.4 2.5-4.5 10.0 4.0-5.0
154852 70360-26 Lab-Tek® II CC2 2 Chamber 12 trays 2 chamber 4.2 1.2-2.0 4.9 2.0-2.5
154917 70360-42 Lab-Tek® II CC2 4 Chamber 2 trays
4 chamber 1.8 0.5-0.9 2.4 1.0-1.3
154917 70360-44 Lab-Tek® II CC2 4 Chamber 6 trays
154917 70360-46 Lab-Tek® II CC2 4 Chamber 12 trays
8 chamber 0.8 0.2-0.4 1.2 0.5-0.6
154941 70360-82 Lab-Tek® II CC2 8 Chamber 2 trays
154941 70360-84 Lab-Tek® II CC2 8 Chamber 6 trays
® Lab-Tek Chamber Coverglass™
154941 70360-86 Lab-Tek® II CC2 8 Chamber 12 trays NNI # Cat # Description Pack
155361 70378-11 LT Coverglass 1 Chamber 2 trays
® Lab-Tek® Chambered Coverglass System 155361 70378-12 LT Coverglass 1 Chamber 12 trays
Lab-Tek® and Lab-Tek® II Chambered Coverglass products are intended 155380 70378-21 LT Coverglass 2 Chamber 2 trays
155380 70378-22 LT Coverglass 2 Chamber 12 trays
for high magnification examination of living cells using an inverted
155383 70378-41 LT Coverglass 4 Chamber 2 trays
microscope. The growth surface of the Lab-Tek Chambered Coverglass 155383 70378-42 LT Coverglass 4 Chamber 12 trays
products are #1 Borosilicate Coverglass from American origin. The Lab- 155411 70378-81 LT Coverglass 8 Chamber 2 trays
Tek® II Chambered Coverglass products are #1.5 Borosilicate 155411 70378-82 LT Coverglass 8 Chamber 12 trays
Coverglass of German origin. The thin glass growth surface allows
optimal optical clarity when viewing living cells with high resolution of
an inverted microscope. The media chambers are available in 1, 2, 4,
and 8 well formats and cannot be removed from the coverglass surface.
The Chambered Coverglass is provided sterile and ready to use.
Feature Lab-Tek® Lab-Tek® II
Configuration 1, 2, 4 & 8 well 1, 2, 4 & 8 well
Media Proprietary cell culture Proprietary cell culture
Chamber grade polystyrene grade polystyrene
Material (PS): non-removable (PS): non-removable
Coverglass Borosilicate Glass: Borosilicate Glass:
Materials American origin, #1 German origin, #1.5
(0.13 -0.17 mm) (0.16-0.19 mm)
Cover Clear polystyrene, Clear polystyrene,
no handle, facilitates with handle facilitates
stacking stacking for aseptic
manipulations ® Lab-Tek® II Chamber Coverglass™ For Inverted
Sealant Non-toxic medical Non-toxic medical Microscope
grade silicone grade silicone NNI # Cat # Description Pack
Growth For adherent cell For adherent cell 155360 70377-11 LT II Coverglass 1 Chamber 2 trays
Surface culture: Good growth culture: Good growth 155360 70377-12 LT II Coverglass 1 Chamber 12 trays
with fastidious cells, with fastidious cells, 155379 70377-21 LT II Coverglass 2 Chamber 2 trays
e.g., Neurons e.g., Neurons 155379 70377-22 LT II Coverglass 2 Chamber 12 trays
Biological BHK-21, BHK-21, 155382 70377-41 LT II Coverglass 4 Chamber 2 trays
Testing Hep-2 cells Hep-2 cells 155382 70377-42 LT II Coverglass 4 Chamber 12 trays
Leak Tested Yes Yes 155409 70377-81 LT II Coverglass 8 Chamber 2 trays
Background Glass: Minimal Glass: Minimal 155409 70377-82 LT II Coverglass 8 Chamber 12 trays
Fluorescence fluorescence fluorescence
Writing Surface None None
Packaging 8/tray, 16/pack, 96/case 8/tray, 16/pack, 96/case

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 277
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec11_271-283_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 5:00 AM Page 278

SECTION 11 Specimen Preparation and Embedding Supplies

® MicroWell® Plates
MicroWell Plates are used in a broad spectrum of applications, including cloning experiments,
sample incubations, and in tissue culture based analytical systems. Our MicroWell Plates have
excellent cell attachment. All styles are designed to be stackable and are radiation sterilized.
® 10μl Well Plates
They are Terasaki format plates measuring 56x82mm and having 60 or 72 wells. Wells are
shaped like inverted truncated cones, each with a working volume of 10ml. The well surface is
Nunclon® treated for good cell attachment. Lids incorporate a stacking feature and are tight-
fitting, which reduces evaporation.
® 96 Well Plates
These plates measure 86x128mm and come in either flat or round bottom wells. Vented lids
allow for gas exchange and have condensation rings to control evaporation and retain 70436-R1 96-Well, Round, Without Lid 10/pk
condensate. Lids are keyed so they cannot be accidently reversed. Plates have alpha-numeric 70436-R5 96-Well, Round, Without Lid 50/cs
markings on its two edges. In addition, flat bottom plates have individual well coordinates beside 70436-F1 96-Well, Flat, Without Lid 10/pk
each well for easy well identification when using an inverted microscope. Plates also have raised 70436-F5 96-Well, Flat, Without Lid 50/cs
70436-L1 Lid for 96-Well 10/pk
well rims to provide proper attachment of adhesive sealing film.
70436-L5 Lid for 96-Well 50/cs
70436-ST Sealing Tape (80x134mm) 200/bx
70437-R1 96-Well, Round, With Lid 10/pk
70437-R5 96-Well, Round, With Lid 50/cs
# of Wells Well Shape Volume Well Culture Area cm2 Unit per Sleeve/cs 70437-F1 96-Well, Flat, With Lid 10/pk
70437-F5 96-Well, Flat, With Lid 50/cs
96 Round 0.3ml 0.36 1/50 70438-10 60-Well, Conical, With Lid 10/pk
96 Flat 0.4ml 0.328 1/50 70438-15 60-Well, Conical, With Lid 150/cs
60 Conical 10μl 0.013 10/150 70439-10 72-Well, Conical, With Lid 10/pk
72 Conical 10μl 0.013 10/150 70439-15 72-Well, Conical, With Lid 150/pk

® Cover Slips;
TECHNICAL TIP
Thermanox®;
Permanox plastic is nonfluorescent and may be
TMX Coverslips used with most fluorescent labels. Permanox has
NUNC™ Brand Thernanox®, or TMX better chemical resistance to fixation and staining
coverslips are made from a polymer solvents than polystyrene. An aqueous based
(in the polyolefin family) that is mounting medium must be used when cover slipping
highly resistant to most chemicals. to prevent warping.
Thermanox® plastic is resistant to
alcohols, aldehydes, hydrocarbons,
dilute acids (<10%) and dilute
alkalis (<2%). TMX has limited TECHNICAL TIP
resistance to chlorinated hydro-carbons, however, it is not resistant to concentrated acids or bases. A simple method to determine which side of
Thermanox® plastic is a flexible, trans-parent polymer that can be sectioned using a microtome and is able to the coverslip is treated is the "droplet" test. A drop
withstand high temp-eratures (temperature range –70ºC to +150ºC). Thermanox® Coverslips are culture of water or culture medium will spread on the
treated on one side for enhanced cell attachment and growth. The treated side is packaged face up toward hydrophilic, treated side. - If the droplet forms a bead,
then the side of the coverslip is not treated. – If the
the label.
droplet spreads evenly over the coverslip, the side is
Cat. # Description NNI # Pack treated.
FEATURES: 72274-01 Size 10.5x22 mm 174934 100/pk
T Flat and remain flat 72274-05 Size 10.5x22 mm 174934 500/pk
T 0.2mm (No. 2) thickness 72270 Size 22x60 mm 174942 100/pk
T Resistant to commonly 72271 Size 22x60 mm 174942 500/pk
used solvents 72272 Size 24x30 mm 150067 100/pk
72273 Size 24x30 mm 150067 500/pk
T Safe and easy to handle 72280 13 mm Round 174950 100/pk
T Auto fluorescent in the 72281 13 mm Round 174950 500/pk
range 380 to 545 nm 72275-01 15mm Round 174969 100/pk
T Thernanox® cover slips can 72275-05 15 mm Round 174969 500/pk
72282
be autoclaved at 20 min-
72283
22 mm Round
22 mm Round
174977
174977
100/pk
500/pk
® Press-to-Seal
utes steam, 20 minutes dry Chamber and Well,
72285 25 mm Round 174985 100/pk
at 120°C 72286 25 mm Round 174985 500/pk see pages 354-355 >>>>>
Thermanox® is Nalge/Nunc product.

278 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec11_271-283_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 5:00 AM Page 279

Specimen Preparation and Embedding Supplies SECTION 11

 Multidishes Nunclon™ Surface
 Useful in all areas of cell culture  Nunclon™Δ certified
including scale-up and cloning  Multidish 6 is available coated with
 Raised well rims to lower risk of Poly-D-Lysine or Collagen
cross contamination
 Excellent optical quality

Details:
 Nunc Multidishes
Polystyrene. With Lid Polystyrene. With Lid. Sterile
Cat.# 70425 70440 70442 70428 70444 70441 70443 70425 70448 70449 70427 70450
70426 70440-100 70442-75 70428-85 70444-20 70441-20 70443-100 70426 70448-75 70449-85 70450-85
NUNC # 176740 167063 140675 140685 152035 152034 167064 150628 142475 142485 150687 152640
Specifications N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Number of Wells 4 4 6 6 6 6 8 12 24 24 48 48
Surface Nunclon® Nunclon® Nunclon® Nunclon® Poly-D- Collagen I, — — — — — —
Delta Delta Delta Delta Lysine Rat Tail
Bottom Shape Flat Flat Flat Flat Flat Flat Flat Flat Flat Flat Flat Flat
Sterile + + + + – – + + + + + +
Suggested working 1 5 3 3 3 3 3 2 1.0 1.0 0.5 0.5
volume, ml/well
Culture area, 1.9 21.8 9.6 9.6 9.6 9.6 10.5 3.5 1.8 1.8 1.1 1.1
cm2/Well
External dimensions, 66 x 66 128 x 86 128 x 86 128 x 86 128 x 86 128 x 86 128 x 86 128 x 86 128 x 86 128 x 86 128 x 86 128 x 86
mm
Unit per 4/120 10/100 1/75 5/85 5/20 5/20 10/100 1/75 1/75 5/85 1/75 5/85
package/case

 Optical Bottom Microwell® Plates

The NUNC™ Coverglass Optical Bottom 96- and 384- Well Plates have the same
quality design of existing NUNC well products, plus an optically clear polystyrene
plate bottom. This clear base permits microscopic viewing and reading of well
content from the top, bottom or both.
The plate’s upper structure is offered in black (for fluorometric detection) or white
(for luminescence detection).
 1. 96 Well Optical Bottom Plates Polystyrene/Coverglass
Sterile. External dimensions 128 x 86 mm.

FEATURES:
 White or black upper structure  CC2™ surface modification closely
with #1.5 borosilicate coverglass mimics Poly-D-Lysine and it
 Minimum light scatter and low superior for attachment and
autofluorescence growth of fastidious cells
 Optical clarity for viewing well  Non-treated plates are optimized Plate total height ............................................................14.9 mm
contents for fluorescence H2 Vertical distance from inside well bottom
 Flat bottom well geometry for  Sterile for cell culture to resting plane..........................................................2.5 mm
plate reader access  Working range: 50 – 200 μl/well H3 Inside depth of well ................................................12.2 mm
 Footprint compatible with H4 Coverglass thickness ..............................................0.19 mm
standard equipment and H5 Height of flange ........................................................6.2 mm
automated systems D1 Well diameter ............................................................6.5 mm

Cat. # 64815-05 64815-10 64815-15 64815-20

NUNC # 164 588 164 590 265 300 160 376
Surface Cell culture Cell culture Non-treated CC2
Color Black White Black Black
Suggested working Vol., μl 400 400 400 400
Sterile Yes Yes No Yes
With Lid Yes Yes No Yes
Units per pack/case 6/30 6/30 5/30 6/30

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 279
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec11_271-283_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 5:00 AM Page 280

SECTION 11 Specimen Preparation and Embedding Supplies

 Optical Bottom Microwell® Plates (continued)
 2. 96 Well Optical Bottom Plate – Polymer Base
External dimension: 128 x 86 mm
 White or black upper structure with Polymer bottom combines the optical clarity of virgin
crystalline polystyrene with optimal surface for a wide range of HTS applications
 Optical clarity for viewing well contents
 Footprint compatible with standard equipment and
automated systems
 Flat bottom well geometry for plate reader access
 Cell culture, poly-D-Lysine or Collagen I surfaces
for cell-based array
 Non-treated plates are optimized
for scintillation counting
 Working ranges: 50 –200 μl/well
Plate total height ..................................14.9 mm
H2 Vertical distance from inside
well bottom to resting plane..........2.55 mm
H3 Inside depth of well ......................12.2 mm
H4 Polystyrene film ..................................0.25
H5 Height of flange ..............................6.2 mm
Well diameter ........................................6.5 mm
Cat. # 64810-05 64810-15 64810-16 64810-17 64810-18 64810-19 64811-10 64811-05
NUNC # 165 306 165 305 152 036 152 040 152 028 152037 265 301 265 302
Surface Cell culture Cell culture Collagen I Collagen I Poly-D-Lysine Poly-D-Lysine Non-treated Non-treated
Color White Black Black White White Black Black White
Total Vol. μl/well 400 400 400 400 400 400 400 400
Sterile Yes Yes No No No No No No
With Lid Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No
Unit/pack/case 10/30 10/30 5/20 5/20 5/20 5/20 10/30 10/30

 3. 384 Well® Optical Bottom Plates – Polymer Base

FEATURES:
 White or black upper structure with opti-  Cell Culture, Collagen I or Poly-D-Lysine
cal clear polystyrene bottom surfaces for cell-based arrays
 Can be read from top or bottom  Non-treated surface for homogeneous
 Rounded square wells eliminate wicking assays
 Optimized for scintillation counting  Working range: 10 – 100 μl/well

Plate total height ..............................................................................................................14.4mm

H2 Vertical distance from inside well bottom to resting plane ..........................................2.7mm
H3 Inside depth of well ..................................................................................................11.6mm
H4 Vertical distance from external well bottom to resting plane ......................................2.5mm
H5 Height of flange ..........................................................................................................2.7mm
H7 Bottom Thickness ......................................................................................................0.3mm
D1 Well diameter, top..............................................................................................3.7 x 3.7mm
D2 Well distance bottom ........................................................................................2.9 x 2.9mm
F1 Depth of flange............................................................................................................1.8mm

Ordering: External plate dimension 128 x 86 mm

Cat. # NNI # Surface Color μl/well Sterile With lid Unit/pack/cs
64810-25 142762* Cell Culture White 120 Yes Yes 10/30
64810-35 142761* Cell Culture Black 120 Yes Yes 10/30
64810-40 164730* Cell Culture Black 120 Yes No 10/30
64810-50 152032 Collagen I White 120 No Yes 5/20
64810-52 152041 Collagen I Black 120 No Yes 5/20
64810-54 152029 Poly-D-Lysine Black 120 No Yes 5/20
64810-56 152033 Poly-D-Lysine White 120 No Yes 5/20
64811-15 242763 Non-treated White 120 No No 10/30
64811-20 242764 Non-treated Black 120 No No 10/30* Certified

280 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec11_271-283_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 5:00 AM Page 281

Specimen Preparation and Embedding Supplies SECTION 11

® Well Orienter, Stand and Pad ® Adjustable Well Plate Stand
For Easy Pipetting A Convenient, Adjustable-Angle Stand for Pipetting
and Identification T Achieves accurate
of Samples in pipetting by allowing the
flexibility to adjust the
Microplates angle of the microplate
T Convenient knob easily
adjusts the angle (45° max.
tilt) required to fully view
every well
T Compact design takes up
little bench-top space mea-
suring only 6" L x 41⁄2" W x Adjustable Well Plate Stand shown
The Well Orienter 21⁄2" H with a 96-well Color Orienter (sold
T Convenient visual aid for pipetting and identification of samples T Durable acrylic material will separately).
in microplates last for years if properly
T Sharp, alpha-numeric characters compatible with 96-, 48- cared for
or 24-well microplates Cat. # Description Qty.
T No more cross-referencing headaches! 70493-01 Adjustable Well Plate Stand Each
The Well Plate Stand
T View samples at a comfortable 30° angle and pipette without ® Silver Bioguard Anti-Microbial Mats
strain Neutralize & Protect
T The neoprene pad and rubber feet prevents slippage of the — Nanoscale Silver
plate and stand particles bind with
The Well Pad proteins to neutralize
T A convenient note pad that corresponds to the layout of a 99.9% of common
96-, 48- or 24-well plate microbes
T Keep accurate records of samples in a microplate
Better Results —
T Adhere sheets into a notebook to create a quick reference guide Ensure consistant
sample reproduction
Cat. # Description Qty. and results by
70490-10 96 - Well Orienter 4/pk. significantly minimizing workspace contamination
70490-11 48 - Well Orienter 4/pk.
70490-12 24 - Well Orienter 4/pk. Reliable — Silver is used extensively in medical applications where
70490-20 Well Plate Stand Each microbial contamination is a concern
70490-30 96 - Well Pad (7" x 5") 50/pad Use Anywhere — Mats are less than 1mm thick and are backed with
70490-31 48 - Well Pad (7" x 5") 50/pad
an anti-skid coating making them perfect for the benchtop or culture
70490-32 24 - Well Pad (7" x 5") 50/pad
hood

® 96-Well & 384-Well Color Orienters Cat. #

77519-1
Description
Silver Bioguard Mat, 10" x 8"
Qty.
each
T Bright colors make it easy to T Ideal for use with The Pipetter 77519-2 Silver Bioguard Mat, 15" x 10" each
distinguish between columns Guide for efficient and stress- 77519-3 Silver Bioguard Mat, 24" x 20" each
and rows free identification of rows and 77519-4 Silver Bioguard Mat, 30" x 22" each
T Fits most standard flat and columns
round bottom 96-well and ® Well Orienter Stickers
384-well plates
T Permanently label multiple microplates
T Wells are clearly marked with its corresponding row number and
column letter for quick cross-referencing
T Scored paper backing makes aligning quick and easy

Cat. # Description Qty.

70490-18 96 - well Vertical Orientation 2/pk.
70490-17 96 - well Horizontal Orientation 2/pk.
70490-16 384 - well Vertical Orientation 2/pk.
70490-15 384 - well Horizontal Orientation 2/pk.
The markings of each filled well are easily readable.
Cat. # Description Qty.
70490-14 96 - well Orienter Sticker 50/pk.

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 281
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec11_271-283_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 5:00 AM Page 282

SECTION 11 Specimen Preparation and Embedding Supplies

® Sealing Films ® Breathable Tube Membranes
Pre-Cut-Adhesive Films For Microplate Sealing Needs Micro-permeable Membranes for Microtubes
Sterile – Gamma irradiation ensures that sealing films are free of cytotoxins. T Ideal for cell growth and T Easy-to-use finger tab for
freeze drying. quick liner removal.
Prevent Contamination – Films eliminate well-to-well contamination, microbial T Permits consistent gas T Pre-cut to fit a variety of pop-
and viral exhange. ular tube sizes.
contamination, evaporation (excluding breathable membranes) and sample
T Easy microtube cap closure. T Sterile and free of cytotoxins.
spillage.
T Will not bind in centrifuge
Ideally Sized and Designed – 6" x 3.25" rectangles fit all microplates. Two rotors.
scored end-tabs make film positioning and removal hassle-free.
Thermal Stability – Designed to withstand a wide temperature range.
Easy Specimen Retrieval – Pierceable sealing films facilitate easy removal of
samples with a pipet tip.

1 2

1. Remove the paper liner and adhere the membrane to the tube
opening.
2. Remove the top protective layer to expose the breathable membrane
70537-10 Breathe-EASY Membranes 100/pk
70537-20 Breathe-EASIER Membranes 100/pk

® Titer-Tops
Breathe-Easier membranes permit rapid, consistent gas exchange of Oxygen, CO2 and Water Vapor for Titer-Tops prevents sample
uniform cell growth.
evaporation, well to well
contamination, external
® Breathe-Easy® ® AluminaSeal™ contamination and sample
An Adhesive, Gas-Permeable, Cell Pre-Cut Adhesive Foil Sealing Film spillage. Titer-Tops are made
from 4.4 mil polyethylene film
Culture Membrane Film Type AluminaSeal™
with an FDA approved non
Ideal Use Cold Storage
Film Type Breathe-Easy* cytotoxic acrylic adhesive. Each pre-cut rectangular sheet is 6”x3.25”
Temp. Range -80°C to 110°C
Ideal Use Cell Culture with a paper liner. The center section of the liner measures 5”x3.25”
Thickness 2.7 mil (0.0027 in.)
Temp. Range -80°C to 100°C and once it is peeled off it leaves two hand-grip extension tabs on the
Material Aluminum
Thickness 1 mil (0.001 in.) two ends. These tabs allow for easy application of the Titer-Top to the
Gas-Permeable No
Material Polyurethane
UV Transparent No plate. Titer-Tops are chemically resistant and thermally stable. The
Gas-Permeable Yes
UV Transparent To 300nm acrylic adhesive is waterproof, solvent resistant, and compatible with all
70534-10 AluminaSeal 100/pk plastic microtiter plates.
70536-10 Breathe-Easy 100/pk
Titer-Tops will stay in place even when exposed to 100% humidity and
® HotSeal temperatures ranging from -40°C to 100°C. They are easily pierced
® Breathe-EASIER™ PCR Sealing Film with a micropipette tip to provide access to sample wells. Titer-Tops
A Rapid Gas Transmissable Sealing Film Type HotSeal™ are gamma sterile.
Membrane for Cell Growth. Breathe- Ideal Use PCR 70538-05 Titer-Tops, 6”x3.25” 50/pk
Easier membranes permit rapid, Temp. Range -40°C to 125°C 70538-10 Titer-Tops, 6”x3.25” 100/pk
consistent gas exchange of Oxygen, Thickness 2.3 mil (0.0023 in.)
CO2 and Water Vapor for uniform cell Material Polyester
growth. Gas-Permeable No ® Microplate
UV Transparent No Brayer
Film Type Breathe-Easier™
Uniformly seal your films to
Ideal Use Cell Culture 70534-20 HotSeal 100/pk
Temp. Range -20°C to 80°C
microplates with this 4” Brayer.
Thickness 5.5 mil (0.0055 in.) It’s perfect for all your sealing
Material Non-woven rayon films.
Gas-Permeable Yes
UV Transparent No
70534-40 Microplate Brayer Each
70536-20 Breathe-EASIER 100/pk

282 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec11_271-283_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 7/2/14 2:45 AM Page 283

Specimen Preparation and Embedding Supplies SECTION 11

® CC Inserts — Cell Culture Inserts
® Polycarbonate membranes
T Easy cultivation of most cell types
without matrix coating
Typical applications for the TCI are:
T Treated for cell culture
T Inserts with 0.02 μm membrane T Epithelial polarization T Electron microscopy
have maximum clarity for studies T Toxicity testing
microscopy, and are non-auto-flu- T Chemotaxix studies T Modeling of in-vivo
orescent and highly porous
T Co-culture experiments barriers.
T Polycarbonate membranes in larg- T Transport studies
er pore sizes are adaptable to
many uses in cell culture, includ-
ing transport studies, toxicity tests,
chemotaxis studies and electron
microscopy
T Both membrane types are Nunc CC Inserts
trans¬parent when wet and suit- Polycarbonate membranes - Sterile. Pre-packed in multidishes.
able for phase contrast and
Nomarski Optic Systems Cat. # Pore size, For use Pore density, Porosity % Culture area, Suggested Units per
μm with Nunc pores/cm² cm² working pack/case
® Polycarbonate membrane product volume, ml
inserts pre-packed in 72296-16 0.4 Multidish 24 <0.85 x 108 <6.8% 0.47 0.5 12/48
multidishes 72296-17 3 Multidish 24 <1.7 x 106 <7.7% 0.47 0.5 12/48
T For multidishes 6, 12, 24 72296-18 8 Multidish 24 <0.85 x 105 <2.7% 0.47 0.5 12/48
T Treated and tested for cell attach- 72296-19 0.4 Multidish 12 <0.85 x 108 <6.8% 1.13 1.1 12/48
ment 72296-20 3 Multidish 12 <1.7 x 106 <7.7% 1.13 1.1 12/48
72296-21 8 Multidish 12 <0.85 x 105 <2.7% 1.13 1.1 12/48
T Easy cultivation of most cell types
without matrix coating All Nunc CC Inserts: Suggested working volume, ml =
In addition to normal well working volume.
T Used in a varity of applications,
including transport studies, toxicity Nunc CC Inserts
tests, chemotaxis studies and Polycarbonate membranes - Sterile. Pre-packed in multidishes.
electron microscopy
Cat. # Pore size, For use Pore density, Porosity % Culture area, Suggested Units per
T Non-toxic μm with Nunc pores/cm² cm² working pack/case
T Packed in sterile Nunclon™ treated product volume, ml
multidishes 72296-22 0.4 Multidish 6 <0.85 x 108 <6.8% 3.14 1.5 6/24
T Packed in resealable bags 72296-23 3 Multidish 6 <1.7 x 106 <7.7% 3.14 1.5 6/24
T Non-pyrogenic 72296-24 8 Multidish 6 <0.85 x 105 <2.7% 3.14 1.5 6/24
72296-25 0.4 Multidish 6 <0.85 x 108 <6.8% 4.1 1.75 6/24
T Tabs for better grip/handling
72296-26 3 Multidish 6 <1.7 x 106 <7.7% 4.1 1.75 6/24
72296-27 8 Multidish 6 <0.85 x 105 <2.7% 4.1 1.75 6/24
All Nunc CC Inserts: Suggested working volume, ml =

Culture Flasks Special Culture Flasks made from borosilicate glass and PTFE
For all applications where gentle stirring is EMS # Capacity Neck S/Arm Flask Ht Body Ø Qty
required, such as biological suspensions and Unit complete with Vessel, Rotor & two PTFE Side Arm Caps
micro-carrier cell cultures. 66220-02 250 ml GL 45 GL 32 150 mm 100 mm each
66220-05 500 ml DL 45 GL 32 190 mm 100 mm each
The unique stirring action uses a flexible
66220-10 1000 ml DL 45 GL 32 230 mm 115 mm each
PTFE shaft driven through a fully encapsulated Flask only – no Rotor, no Side Arm Caps
rare-earth magnet to give even and complete 66221-02 250 ml GL 45 GL 32 150 mm 100 mm each
mixing throughout the liquid. The height of the 66221-05 500 ml DL 45 GL 32 190 mm 100 mm each
shaft is adjustable. Contact materials are PTFE 66221-10 1000 ml DL 45 GL 32 230 mm 115 mm each
and borosilicate glass only. The glass vessel has Rotor only (the Rotor can be used with any ISO GL 45 reagent bottle
two side-arms with PTFE caps and the base is 66222-02 250 ml GL 45 ----- ----- ----- each
intended to aid mixing. Recommended for use up 66222-05 500 ml DL 45 ----- ------ ----- each
to 120 rpm max. 66222-10 1000 ml DL 45 ----- ----- ----- each

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 283
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec11_284-293_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 5:48 AM Page 284

SECTION 11 Specimen Preparation and Embedding Supplies

 Mica Sheets and Disks
The Highest Quality (V-1 or V-2) for AFM 1. V i-1: Clear. – Hard, of uniform color, nearly flat, free of all stains,
foreign inclusion, cracks, and other similar defects.
Applications to the Medium Quality (V4 to V-6) for
Replication, Thin Film Deposition 2. V-2: Clear and slightly stained. – Hard of uniform color, nearly flat
and may contain slight crystallographic discoloration, and very slight air
Introduction inclusions and not more than one fourth of the usable area.
EMS Mica Sheets offer a clean surface for E.M. applications, carbon 3. V-3: Fair stained. – Hard, of uniform color, may contain slight waves,
filming and particle spraying, as well as for AFM applications. slight crystallographic discoloration, and slight air inclusions and not
There are two types of mica: muscovite and phlogopite. Generally, one more than one-haft of the usable area.
differs from the other by color (Muscovite is Ruby, Green or White; 4. V-4: Good Stained. – Hard, of uniform color, may contain medium
Phlogopite is Amber, Yellow, or Silver) The maximum operating waves slight crystallographic discoloration, and medium air inclusion in
temperature for Muscovite is about 500 – 600˚C and for Phlogopite is not more than two-third of the usable area.
about 800 – 900˚C.
5. V-5: Stained A Quality. – Hard, may contain medium air inclusions,
Our line consists of High Quality Muscovite Mica. This mica peels off very uniformly distributed in the usable area; slight green vegetable stains,
thin up to 0.0001" uniform layers, exposing "virgin" mica upon splitting. medium waviness, and heavy waves if specified.
Characteristics: 6. V-6: Stained B Quality. – Hard, may contain heavy air inclusions and
Muscovite, potash type mica, sometimes known as granitic mica, is the heavy waves, medium green vegetable stains, slight black and red dots
best of all micas in dielectric strength, perfection of cleavage, and (mineral), and clay stain.
transparency. 7. V-7: Heavy stained. – Hard, and may contain heavy air inclusions
It has the following chemical formula: H2KAl3(SiO4)3. and waves, slight light black and red dots (mineral) medium cloudy
stains, clay stains and green stains (vegetable). Soft, buckles, ridges,
Chemical composition: and sand blast acceptable if specified.
Silica ..............................................45.5% 8. V-7A: Densely Stained. – Hard and soft. May contain heavy waves
Alumina ..........................................37.5% and air inclusions, cloudy stains. High black and red dots (mineral).
Potash ............................................12.0% Medium black and red stained (mineral), buckles, and ridges. Also
green stain (vegetable type), clay stains, herringbones, and sand blast.
Water ...............................................5.0%
9. V-8: Black dotted. – Hard, may contain medium waves, heavy air
It has a vitreous luster and is colorless to gray, brown, pale green, violet, inclusions, cloudy stains, light black and red dots (mineral), and green
dark olive green, or rose red. It may be transparent to translucent. It has stains (vegetable).
strong double refraction and is optically negative. It loses water of
constitution at 600˚C and is practically non-magnetic. It exhibits 10. V-9: Black spotted. – Hard, may contain medium waves, heavy air
pleochrism, which is the property of varying in color when viewed from inclusions, cloudy stains, light black and red dots (mineral), and green
different angles. stains (vegetable type), slight black stains (mineral), and sand blast.

RUBY muscovite is harder than green and has a pale brownish red color in 11. V-10: Black Stained. – Hard, may contain medium waves, heavy air
thin sheets (0.020") or ruby red in thick plates (0.4"). Ruby mica can be inclusions, cloudy stains, light black and red dots (mineral), green
split easily into films of 0.001" or thinner because it has such excellent stains (vegetable type), and sand blast, medium black stains (mineral),
cleavage. In other colors, this thinness can be obtained but at a slight red stains (mineral), and clay stains.
considerable risk of cracking. 12. 10A: Densely Black and Red Stained. – Hard and may contain
heavy waves, air inclusions, cloudy stains, light black and red dots
Quality Determination: (mineral), red stains (mineral), black and red stains (mineral), green
The quality of muscovite mica is verbal determination by visual quality stains (vegetable type), and sand blast, very dense black and red
classification ASTM (D351-57T) from the best V-1 to the worst is V-10A. stains (mineral), and slight clay stains. Soft if specified

Physical Properties:
Hardness: Moh’s scale: 2.8 – 3.2 Optic Axial Angle 50º – 75º Apparent Electric Strength
Shore’s Test 80 – 150 Coefficient of Expansion Perpendicular (0.001-0.003" thick) 120 – 200 kV/mm
Specific Gravity, g/cm3 2.6 – 3.2 per ˚C to cleavage plane Permittivity @ 15ºC (60ºF) 6–7
Tensile Strength, kg/cm2 ~ 1750 9 x10-4 – 36 x10-4 Power Factor (loss Tangent)
Compression Strength, kg/cm2 1900 – 2850 Calcining Temperature 700 – 800ºC @15ºC 0.0001 – 0.0004
Refractive Index (air=1) 1.56 – 1.60/61 Thermal Conductivity, Volume Resistively
gm.cal/sec/cm2/ºC/cm ~0.0013 @25ºC (77ºF), Ohm.cm 4x10-15 – 2x10-17
Dielectric Strength
(Perpendicular to Acid Reaction Affected by HF
@20˚C in volt/mil 3,000 – 6,000
cleavage plane)
Max. Thermal Resistance 625ºC (1,157ºF) Water of Constitution, % 4–5
Modulus of Elasticity, Moisture Absorption Very low
kgf/cm2x10-3 1400 – 2100

284 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec11_284-293_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 5:48 AM Page 285

Specimen Preparation and Embedding Supplies SECTION 11

 Mica Sheets and Disks (continued)  Metal Specimen Discs for use
with the Atomic Force Microscope
Applications:
In general, for those whom are using mica for the making of carbon
support films, thin films coatings research, and some AFM studies
where HOPG are used to taking place, the mica V-4 or V-5 is
These are high quality metal discs with smooth edges and flat surfaces
recommended. (Mica must always use freshly cleaved surfaces).
for use in Atomic force Microscopy.
For AFM and SPM calibration, V- Cat. # Description Qty
1 or V-2 is recommended. 75010-10 10 mm Specimen Metal Discs for AFM 50/pk
However, we believe that it is 75010-12 12 mm Specimen Metal Discs for AFM 50/pk
important that you know what 75010-15 15 mm Specimen Metal Discs for AFM 50/pk
75010-20 20 mm Specimen Metal Discs for AFM 50/pk
kind of mica is being used in
your lab. The information on the
mica is given above should be
used to make your choice. 76800
Here at EMS we try to stock a
variety of sizes with different
thicknesses and classifications
of quality for convenience.
76802
Ordering Information:
Muscovite Mica V-1 Quality:
Cat.# Mica Size Quality Thickness (mm) Pack
71855-01 50 x 75mm V-1 0.15 – 0.21 each 76804
71855-05 25 x 75 mm V-1 0.26 – 0.31 each
71855-10 25 x 25 mm V-1 0.15 – 0.21 10/pk
71855-11 25 x 25 mm V-1 0.26 – 0.31 10/pk
71855-15 15 x 15 mm V-1 0.15 – 0.21 10/pk
71856-01 9.5 mm Diameter V-1 0.15 – 0.21 each
71856-02 12 mm Diameter V-1 0.15 – 0.21 10/pk  Specimen Mount Tweezers
71856-03 15 mm Diameter V-1 0.15 – 0.21 10/pk
71856-04 20 mm Diameter V-1 0.15 – 0.21 10/pk Dumont Specimen Mount Tweezers, the finest tweezers available.
Muscovite Mica V2 Quality: Choose the one that best suits your needs.
Cat.# Mica Size Quality Thickness (mm) Pack Polished Dumoxel Antimagnetic Steel
71857-01 50 x 75mm V-2 0.15 – 0.21 each
Cat. # Description Qty.
71857-05 25 x 75 mm V-2 0.26 – 0.31 each
71857-10 25 x 25 mm V-2 0.15 – 0.21 10/pk 76800 Specimen Mount Tweezers 2E1⁄2 (0=12.7mm) each
71857-11 25 x 25 mm V-2 0.26 – 0.31 each 76802 Specimen Mount Tweezers 2E1⁄4 (0=6.4mm) each
71857-15 15 x 15 mm V-2 0.15 – 0.21 10/pk 76804 Specimen Mount Tweezers 2E1⁄8 (0=3.2mm) each
71858-01 9.5 mm Diameter V-2 0.15 – 0.21 each
Muscovite Mica V4 Quality:
Cat.# Mica Size Quality Thickness (mm) Pack
71853-01 50mm x 75 mm V-4 0.26 – 0.31 10/pk
71853-05 25mm x 75mm V-4 0.26 – 0.31 10/pk
71853-10 25mm x 25mm V-4 0.15 – 0.21 10/pk
71853-11 25mm x 25mm V--4 0.26 – 0.31 10/pk
71853-15 15mm x 15mm V-4 0.15 – 0.21 10/pk
71854-01 9.5mm Diameter V-4 0.15 – 0.21 10/pk  SEM Mount Forceps
71854-15 12.7mm Diameter V-4 0.15 – 0.21 10/pk
Muscovite Mica V5 Quality: Made from stainless steel with a serrated handle and a guide pin. The
tip is bent at a 45 degree and formed into a ring, which has a diameter
Cat.# Mica Size Quality Thickness (mm) Pack of 10mm when fully closed. 150mm long.
71850-01 50mm x 75 mm V-5 0.15 – 0.21 10/pk
71851-05 25mm x 75mm V-5 0.26 – 0.31 10/pk 76805 SEM Mount Forceps each
71850-10 25mm x 25mm V-5 0.15 – 0.21 10/pk
71850-11 25mm x 25mm V-5 0.26 – 0.31 10/pk
71850-15 15mm x 15mm V-5 0.15 – 0.21 10/pk
71852-01 9.5mm Diameter V-5 0.15 – 0.21 10/pk

For the storing of Specimen Discs, see Gel Pak, page 236.

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 285
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec11_284-293_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 5/17/15 9:18 PM Page 286

SECTION 11 Specimen Preparation and Embedding Supplies

® ACLAR®–Fluoropolymer Films

286 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
 EMS_Full Line 2014_sec11_284-293_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 5:49 AM Page 287

Specimen Preparation and Embedding Supplies SECTION 11

® Disc (Tab) Punches
Produces discs (tabs) from sheet materials. Ticket punching type. Comes with adjustable side
gauge for centering hole, 2” maximum reach. Weight 10 oz., 61⁄2” long. Useful for punching
adhesive tabs for specimen mounts, or producing circle cover slips from ACLAR® films (EMS
#50425 or #50426) for growing cells. Maximum thickness for punching is up to 67-mil (1.7
mm). Disc size available: 5⁄16”, 3⁄8”, 1⁄2” and 1”. Complete unit includes one punch handle and one
punching die.

e 77850-08 Punch, 5⁄16” (7.94 mm) Circle each

77850-09 Punch, 3⁄8” (9.54 mm) Circle each
77850-12 Punch, 1⁄2” (12.7 mm) Circle each
77850-25 Punch, 1” (25.4 mm) Circle each

® Pasteur Capillary Pipette, Reusable ® Disposable Glass Tubes

T Straight or bent tip T Borosilicate glass T 1.5 to 2 mm orifice T Borosilicate glass
T Reusable T Body outside diameter is 8mm T Round bottom
Catalog Body Length Tip Length T Plain top
Type Number Inches (mm) Inches (mm) Pack T Labeling area in five pastel colors
Straight Tip: 70930-04 4 (102) 4 (102) 288/pk T Handy fused-in color patches, accept any type
70930-03 5 (127) 3 (77) 288/pk of ink or pencil
e 70930-02 6 (152) 2 (50) 288/pk
Bent Tip: 70931-04 4 (102) 4 (102) 144/pk
70931-03 5 (127) 3 (77) 144/pk
70931-02 6 (152) 2 (50) 144/pk

® Pasteur Pipettes,
Disposable
Good for handling infectious materials, inoculating culture media and routine sampling. Available
in either Borosilicate or Flint glass, with an outside body diameter of 7 mm.
5
Catalog Body Length Tip Length
Type Number Inches (mm) Inches (mm) Pack
3
Borosilicate Glass: 70950-12 3.5 (89) 2.25 (57) 250/pk
1
70950-15 4 (102) 5 (127) 250/pk
4 Flint Glass: 70950-52 3.5 (89) 2.25 (57) 250/pk
70950-55 4 (102) 5 (127) 250/pk
2 Cat. # Label Area Color Pack
Tube Size 12mmODx75mmL
2
® OXFORD® Benchmate® 64635-W White 1000/pk
64635-Y Yellow 1000/pk
2 Pipetters 64635-G Green 1000/pk
® UV Stable Adjustable Pipetters 64635-O Orange 1000/pk
8 64635-B Blue 1000/pk
T Entire pipetter is autoclavable – no need Tube Size 13mm ODx100mmL
9 to recalibrate after autoclaving. 64636-W White 1000/pk
64636-Y Yellow 1000/pk
T Highly resistant to chemical reagents. 64636-G Green 1000/pk
T Barrel is designed to minimized dead air space for increased pipetter accuracy. 64636-O Orange 1000/pk
T The lightweight, slender, design reduces operator fatigue. 64636-B Blue 1000/pk
Tube Size 16mm ODx100mmL
Adjustable 64637-W White 1000/pk
k 64637-Y Yellow 1000/pk
Cat. # Volume Range Increments Accuracy Reproducibility (CV)
k 64637-G Green 1000/pk
72430-02 0.2μl – 2.0μl 0.001μl ±0.024μl - ±0.06μl ≤ 9.0 – ≤ 2.0%
k 64637-O Orange 1000/pk
72430-04 0.5μl – 10μl 0.01μl ±0.05μl - ±0.1μl ≤ 5.0 – ≤ 0.50%
64637-B Blue 1000/pk
72430-06 2μl – 20μl 0.1μl ±0.16μl - ±0.4μl ≤ 3.0 – ≤ 0.5% Tube Size 16mm ODx125mmL (FLINT GLASS ONLY)
72430-08 10μl – 100μl 0.1μl ±0.5μl - ±1.0μl ≤ 1.0 – ≤ 0.4% 64638-W White 1000/pk
72430-10 20μl – 200μl 1.0μl ±0.6μl - ±2.0μl ≤ 1.0 – ≤ 0.3% 64638-O Orange 1000/pk
72430-12 100μl – 1000μl 1.0μl ±2.0μl - ±8.0μl ≤ 0.5 – ≤ 0.3% 64638-B Blue 1000/pk
8) 72430-14 1000μl – 5000μl 10.0μl ±10.0μl - ±50.0μl ≤ 0.5 – ≤ 0.3%
72430-16 1ml – 10ml 0.05μl ±30.0μl - ±50.0μl ≤ 0.5 – ≤ 0.2%

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 287
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec11_284-293_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 7/2/14 2:46 AM Page 288

SECTION 11 Specimen Preparation and Embedding Supplies

 Pipette Tips–KENDALL Treated Pipette Tips
Low Binding Polymer Technology
A manufacturing process that binds a perfluorooctyl polymer to polypropylene resin–resulting in an exposed trifluoro-methyl surface.
Precision and accuracy are increasingly important in molecular biology labs. A pipetter can be 99% accurate and precise, but the tip can com-promise
performance by retaining or binding a sample. KENDALL’s low binding tips ensure accuracy and precision by bonding a proprietary polymer to the resin.
 Reduces the surface energy of liquid and repels any substance.  Autoclaving will not compromise performance.
 Not detectable/Non-reactive.  Available in convenient hinged racked package.
 Extracted only by a fluorinated solvent.  Tips and racks are fully autoclavable.

Low
 A. P2/P10 Ultra Micro Tip – Cat. #
72440-01
Description
0.1 -10μl P2-Micro
Packaging
1000/bag - Bulk
Sterile
No
Retention
No
Natural 72440-02 0.1 -10μl P2-Micro 10 Racks/case No Yes
(96Tips /Rack)
72440-03 0.1 -10μl P2-Micro 10 Racks/case Yes Yes
(96Tips /Rack)
72440-04 0.1 -10μl P2-Micro 10 Racks/case Yes Yes
(96Tips /QuickRack)
 Universal fit for ultra-micro pipetters. 72441-01 0.1 -10μl P2-Micro 2 Racks of 96 No No
 Graduation marks at 2μl and 5μl. per Case
72441-02 0.1 -10μl P2-Micro 2 Racks of 96 Yes No
 Available with and without low binding surface. per Case
 Available in QuickRack 72441-03 0.1 -10μl P2-Micro 2 Racks of 96 Yes No
per Case /QuickRack

 B. 0.5 -10μl Crystal/Eppendorf Tips – Natural

Cat. # Description Packaging Sterile Low Retention
72442-01 0.1 -10μl Crystal/Eppendorf 1000/bag-Bulk No No
72442-02 0.1 -10μl Crystal/Eppendorf 10 Racks/case
(96Tips /Rack) No Yes
72442-03 0.1 -10μl Crystal/Eppendorf 10 Racks/case
(96Tips /Rack) Yes Yes

 C. 1 – 200μl Universal Tips

 Universal fit for research-grade pipetters.
 Yellow tips non-graduated, not-treated.
 Natural tips feature reference marks at 10μl, 50μl, and 100μ.
 Natural tips feature low binding surface (bulk not treated).
 Available bulk, racked, racked sterile, EcoStack racks and QuickRack tip reloading system.

Low
Cat. # Description Packaging Sterile Retention
NATURAL TIPS
72443-01 5 - 200μl Universal Reference 1000/bag - Bulk No No 300 μl Universal Tip
72443-02 5 - 200μl Universal Reference 10 Racks/case (96Tips/Rack) No Yes
72443-03 5 - 200μl Universal Reference 10 Racks/case (96Tips/Rack) Yes Yes
72443-04 5 - 200μl Universal Reference 10 Racks/case (96Tips/EcoRack) Yes Yes
72443-05 5 - 200μl Universal Reference 10 Racks/case (96Tips/QuickRack) No Yes
72444-01 5 - 300μl Universal 1000/bag - Bulk No No 1000 μl Universal Tip
72444-02 5 - 300μl Universal 10 Racks/case (96Tips/Rack) No Yes
72444-03 5 - 300μl Universal 10 Racks/case (96Tips/Rack) Yes Yes
72445-01 101 - 1000μl Universal 1000/bag - Bulk No No
72445-02 101 - 1000μl Universal 10 Racks/case (96Tips/Rack) No Yes
72445-03 101 - 1000μl Universal 10 Racks/case (96Tips/Rack) Yes Yes
YELLOW TIPS
72446-01 5 - 200μl Universal 1000/bag - Bulk No No
72446-02 5 - 200μl Universal 10 Racks/case (96Tips /Rack) No No
72446-03 5 - 200μl Universal 10 Racks/case (96Tips /Rack) Yes No
72446-04 5 - 200μl Universal 10 Racks/case (96Tips/EcoRack) Yes No
72446-05 5 - 200μl Universal 10 Racks/case (96Tips/QuickRack) No No

288 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec11_284-293_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 5:49 AM Page 289

Specimen Preparation and Embedding Supplies SECTION 11

® D. Gel Loading Tips
T 3 different outside dimensions (OD’s)
• 0.57mm OD for loading protein gels (SDS Page gels). A white rack. 500-200 μl Gel Round Tip
• 0.37mm OD for 0.4mm thick polyacrylamide sequencing gels. A yellow rack.
• 0.17mm OD for 0.2mm thick sequencing gels. A blue rack.
T 83mm length (200μl tips) or 45mm length (10μl tips) for access to bottom of narrow vessels.
T 5μl graduation for volume QuickCheck. 5-200 μl Gel Flat Tip (0.4 mm)
T Universal fit for most research-grade pipetters.
T 200μl and 10μl tips.
Low
Cat. # Description Packaging Sterile Retention 5-200 μl Gel Flat Tip (0.2 mm)
72447-01 5 – 200μl Gel Round 960/bag - Bulk No No
72447-02 5 – 200μl Gel Round 1 Racks of 192 Tips No No
72447-03 5 – 200μl Gel Round 1 Racks of 192 Tips Yes No
72448-01 5 – 200μl Gel Flat 0.4mm 1 Racks of 192 Tips No No
72448-02 5 – 200μl Gel Flat 0.4mm 1 Racks of 192 Tips Yes No 1-10 μl Gel Round
72449-01 5 – 200μl Gel Flat 0.2mm 1 Racks of 192 per Case No No
72449-02 5 – 200μl Gel Flat 0.2mm 1 Racks of 192 per Case Yes No
72450-01 1 – 10μl Gel Round 1 Racks of 192 per Case No No
72450-02 1 – 10μl Gel Round 1 Racks of 192 per Case Yes No
72451-01 1 – 10μl Gel Flat 0.4mm 1 Racks of 192 per Case No No
72451-02 1 – 10μl Gel Flat 0.4mm 1 Racks of 192 per Case Yes No
72452-01 1 – 10μl Gel Flat 0.2mm 1 Racks of 192 per Case No No
72452-02 1 – 10μl Gel Flat 0.2mm 1 Racks of 192 per Case Yes No

® E. Filter Pipette Tips (Barrier Tips)

WHY KENDALL FILTER PIPETTE TIPS?
T Certified Rnase / Dnaee-Free, Human DNA-Free, and PCR Inhibitor-Free.
T Low Binding Surface reduces DNA and Protection retention.
T Liquid and aerosol barrier prevent pipetter contamination.
T A universal Fit on most research-grade pipetters
T CellPack keeps tips straight for multi-channel pipetters.

FILTER MATERIAL
T High-density polyethylene (Naturally hydrophobic)

TYPES OF MEMBRANES
T Aerosol Barrier: Prevents aerosol contamination
T Self-sealing Barrier (contains cellulose): Prevents aerosol and liquid contamination.
Cellulose can contaminate samples.
T Liquid Barrier: Prevents aerosol and liquid contamination. Will not contaminate samples.

Cat. # Description Packaging Sterile Low Retention

72460-01 5 – 30μl Filter Tip, Natural 96 / Rack Yes Yes
72460-10 5 – 30μl Filter Tip, Natural 96 / Rack; 10 racks / case Yes Yes
72460-02 5 – 200μl Filter Tip, Natural 96 / Rack Yes Yes
72460-20 5 – 200μl Filter Tip, Natural 96 / Rack; 10 racks / case Yes Yes
72460-03 .5 – 10μl Filter Tip, Natural 96 / Rack Yes Yes
72460-30 .5 – 10μl Filter Tip, Natural 96 / Rack; 10 racks / case Yes Yes
72460-04 .1 – 10μl Filter Tip, Natural 96 / Rack Yes Yes
72460-40 .1 – 10μl Filter Tip, Natural 96 / Rack; 10 racks / case Yes Yes
72460-05 1 – 100μl Filter Tip, Natural 96 / Rack Yes Yes
72460-50 1 – 100μl Filter Tip, Natural 96 / Rack; 10 racks / case Yes Yes
72460-06 5 – 250μl Filter Tip, Natural 96 / Rack Yes Yes
72460-60 5 – 250μl Filter Tip, Natural 96 / Rack; 10 racks / case Yes Yes
72460-07 101–1000μl Filter Tip, Natural 96 / Rack Yes Yes
72460-70 101–1000μl Filter Tip, Natural 96 / Rack; 10 racks / case Yes Yes

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 289
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec11_284-293_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 5:49 AM Page 290

SECTION 11 Specimen Preparation and Embedding Supplies

® Polyethylene Disposable Pipettes – The Value Choice – ISI-9001

THESE DISPOSABLE TRANSFER PIPETS:
T Sterile and non-sterile T Attached bulb avoids cross-contamination T Can be frozen in liquid nitrogen
T Low-affinity surface T One step biohazard disposable

® General Purpose Transfer ® Special Purpose Transfer Pipets -

Pipet
These pipets are good for blood Padl-Pet®
banking, reagent handling, viscous These pipets are ideal for chemical sampling or transferring,
liquid sampling and transferring, etc. smear blood sample onto slides, mix and spread reagent,
slide tests, etc. Available in bulk pack and non-sterile only
The non-sterile pipets are bulk packed;
the sterile are individually packed.
Product Catalog Number
Description 70963-18 70963-19 70963-20
Length, cm 13.1 13.1 12.4
Stem Dia, mm 3.8 3.8 3.6
Overall Cap. ml 1.0 1.0 0.8
Bulb Draw, ml 0.2 0.2 0.2
Drops/ml --- --- ---
1 2 3 4 5 6 Quantity/pk 500 500 500
Drop Size 25μl 30μl 50μl
Product Catalog Number for non Sterile Pipets
Description 70960-1 70960-2 70960-3 70960-4 70960-5 70960-6 18 19 20
Length, cm 15.6 15.7 8.7 12.9 15.4 13.7
Stem Dia, mm 7.9 6.1 4.8 6.6 6.6 6.1
Overall Cap. ml 7.7 8.0 1.7 4.0 5.0 9.3 ® Narrow Stem Pipets - Sedi-Pet®
Bulb Draw, ml 3.2 4.6 0.9 1.9 1.9 4.8 These Micro-tip pipets are ideal for loading gels, DNA sample
Drops/ml 20 20 25 25 23 ---- removal, protein assays, lipids extractions, drop-wise
Quantity/pk 500 400 500 400 500 250 additions to culture plates, using 2 ml auto sampler vials,
70960-1S 70960-2S 70960-3S 70960-4S 70960-5S 70960-6S remove or disperse small volumes etc.
Catalog Number for Sterile Pipets

® Graduated Transfer Product Catalog Number, Non-Sterile

Description 70966-12 70967-13 70967-14
Pipets Length, cm 14.7 14.7 10.4
These pipets are ideal for clinical
Stem Dia, mm 4.6 6.1 3.0
applications, blood banking, remove, Overall Cap. ml 5.8 8.7 1.5
disperse small volume, transfer in and Bulb Draw, ml 3.3 4.8 1.0
out of multi well plates, reagent Drops/ml 55 45 50
handing, pH meter maintenance, etc. Quantity/pk 400 400 400
70966-12S 70967-13S 70967-14S
The non-sterile pipets are bulk packed;
Catalog Number, Sterile
the sterile are individually packed 12 13 14

® Narrow Stem Pipets - Sedi-Pet®

These pipets are ideal for Technique control such as loading
gel, PCR workDNA sample removal, protein assays, lipid
extractions, atomic absorption spectroscopy-reagent prep,
reaction chamber, storage ampoule, portable aliquoting, etc.
7 8 9 10 11 Available in bulk pack non-sterile, and sterile
individually packed.
Product Catalog Number for Non-Sterile Pipets
Description 70962-7 70962-8 70962-9 70962-10 70962-11 Product Catalog Number, Non-Sterile
Length, cm 14.0 15.5 15.5 15.2 11.6 Description 70964-21 70964-22 70964-23
Stem Dia, mm 4.7 4.6 7.9 7.1 3.0 Length, cm 6.4 8.5 15.5
Overall Cap. ml 3.9 5.8 7.5 4.8 1.5 Stem Dia, mm 2.5 2.5 2.5
Bulb Draw, ml 2.2 3.4 3.2 1.8 0.8 Overall Cap. ml 1.2 4.0 4.6
Drops/ml 25 25 20 24 21 Bulb Draw, ml 0.9 3.0 3.3
Quantity/pk 500 500 500 500 500 Drops/ml 25 25 25
Graduated 1 ml 1 ml 3 ml 2 ml 0.3 ml Quantity/pk 400 500 500
70962-7S 70962-8S 70962-9S 70962-10S 70962-11S N/A 70964-22S 70964-23S
Catalog Number for Sterile Pipets Catalog Number, Sterile
21 22 23

290 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec11_284-293_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 5:49 AM Page 291

Specimen Preparation and Embedding Supplies SECTION 11

® Extra Long Transfer Pipets
These transfer pipets are ideal for sub- 27
culturing, harvesting, sampling 15, 50, 100
ml tubes and flask; remove supernatant and 26
media from cell cultures; wash cells; post Product Catalog Number for Non-Sterile
centrifugation to remove cell layers; layer in Description 70968-26 70968-27
columns / transfers in columns, loading gels; Length, cm 22.5 30.0
field testing; blood culture bottle, etc. Stem Dia, mm 5.0 8.6 34
Overall Cap. ml 6.0 23.0
These pipets come bulk packed and they are Bulb Draw, ml 2.3 7.3
non-sterile. Drops/ml 25 20 33
Quantity/pk 400 100
70968-26S 70968-27S 32
Catalog Number for Sterile
® Pipets with Exact Volumes
These pipets offer the exact volume of liquid just one squeeze to the bulb. Quick and economical for 31
disposable pipets, without the need of expensive pipetting devices. These pipets come non-sterile.
30
Product Catalog Number (Non-sterile)
Description 70969-28 70969-29 70969-30 70969-31 70969-32 70969-33 70969-34
Length, cm 10.10 7.95 8.30 7.49 6.48 5.92 5.28 29
Stem Dia, mm 3.0 3.0 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.3 2.0
Disperse Vol. 250μl 150μl 100μl 80μl 60μl 40μl 20μl 28
Quantity/pack 500 500 500 500 500 500 500

® Quick Release ® Transfer Pipette;

Pipette Filler Polypropylene
This pipetting device provides an easy, It works as a syringe. Inex-pensive and
precise way of filling and releasing Disposable. Good for liquid transfering tasks.
liquid. By rotating the knurled thumb Each pipette has calibration markings from 0
wheel the liquid is drawn up or to 12ml in 0.2ml increments. Tubing may be
dispensed. The soft elastic chuck has attached to the tip to suit your application, and
a threaded collar that secures the tips may also be cut to facilitate aspiration and
plastic or glass pipette to the device. delivery of fluids of varying viscosities.
Sizes are color coded. Fits standard or
disposable pipettes and diposable Useful for:
serological tooled-mouthpiece pipettes as per ASTM Standard T Flushing lines in chemistry systems T Delivers oil to machinery parts
E714-80.
T Aspiration of fluids T Liquid delivery
70956* Quick Release Pipette Filler, 0.2ml, Yellow each
Available in two configurations:
70957 Quick Release Pipette Filler, 2ml, Blue each
70958 Quick Release Pipette Filler, 10ml, Green each T Straight Tip T Curved Tip
70959 Quick Release Pipette Filler, 25ml, Red each 70986-00 Transfer Pipette, 12ml, Straight Tip 50/bx each
*Note: the 70956 is not supplied with quick release valve,
due to the small volume. 70986-20 Transfer Pipette, 12ml, Curved Tip 50/bx each

® Disposable Pipettes – Catalog # 70953-1 70953-2 70953-5 70953-10 70953-25 70953-50

Size, ml 1 2 5 10 25 50
Sterile Suction Adapter No No Yes No Yes Yes
Crystal Grade polystyrene is used for
Adapter Diameter, mm 4.8 5.0 8.0 7.4 7.9 7.5
consistency in manufacture and maximum Overall Length, mm 279 (10.9") 279 (10.9") 298 (11.7") 302 (11.9") 349 (13.7”) 341 (13.6")
clarity, with easy to read crisp black printed Graduation, ml 0.01 0.01 0.1 0.1 0.2 1.0
graduations enabling the pipettes to be used Type Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard
accurately to ±1%. Sterile by gamma Packaging Single Wrap Single Wrap Single Wrap Single Wrap Single Wrap Single Wrap
irradiation. These Pipettes fit all Quick Release Quantity 100 100 50 50 25 50
Pipette Fillers.
Catalog # 70954-1 70954-2 70954-5 70954-5S 70954-10 70954-10S
These pipettes are Size, ml 1 2 5 5 10 10
tested for Suction Adapter No No Yes No Yes No
pyrogenicity, and Adapter Diameter, mm 4.8 4.8 8.0 7.4 7.4 8.0
have pyrogen levels Overall Length, mm 279 (10.9") 279 (10.9") 298 (11.7") 226 (8.9") 302 (11.9") 232 (9.1")
of less than 0.25 Graduation, ml 0.01 0.01 0.1 0.1 0.1 .02
EU/ml. Type Standard Standard Standard Sortie Standard Sortie
Packaging Bulk Bulk Bulk Single Wrap Bulk Single Wrap
Quantity 25 50 25 50 25 50

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 291
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec11_284-293_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 5:49 AM Page 292

SECTION 11 Specimen Preparation and Embedding Supplies

® Graduated Cat. # Capacity Sub Divisions Quantity
GRADUATED PIPETTES
Measuring and 70951-01 1 ml 0.1 ml 6
Volumetric Pipettes 70951-02 2 ml 0.1 ml 6
Made from translucent polypropylene. 70951-05 5 ml 0.1 ml 6
70951-10 10 ml 0.1 ml 6
Resistant to breakage. Blue
VOLUMETRIC PIPETTES
graduations, ring mark and inscriptions. 70952-01 1 ml 0.1 ml 6
Ideal for fluoro and silicate chemistry 70952-02 2 ml 0.1 ml 6
used. Recommended cleaning with 70952-05 5 ml 0.1ml 3
mild alkaline detergent up to 60°C. 70952-10 10 ml 0.1 ml 3
NOTE: Exposure to temperatures above 60°C 70952-25 25 ml --- 3
may cause volume changes. 70952-50 50 ml --- 3

® Repetitive Syringe Dispenser

Syringe dispenser offers a fast and accu-rate way of dispen-sing multiple doses of a set-volume. The
vol-ume delivered is deter-mined by the volume-selector-dial and the size of the syringe chosen. A chart
comes with the unit to help you to choose the size of syringe, volume, and the number of dispenses. The
set dispenses 21 different volumes up to 58 times without refilling, with an accuracy of +/- 1.5% or
better depending on the size of the syringe. All syringes are autoclavable, except 60ml size.

Technical Data: These tests (below) are based on water at a temperature of 25°C.
Syringes Volume Accuracy Reproducibility
0.6 ml 10-50μl +/-1.5% <1.5% - <1.0% Ordering Information:
1.5 ml 25-125μl +/-1.2% <1.0% - <0.8% 72480 A set of one Dispenser and one each of
6.0 ml 100-500μl +/-0.8% <0.8% - <0.4% 0.6ml, 1.5ml and 6.0ml Syringes
15.0 ml 250-1250μl +/-0.6% <0.6% - <0.3% Repetitive Syringe Dispenser Set each
60.0 ml 1000-5000μl +/-1.0% <1.0% - <0.5% 72482 0.6ml Syringe with tips 100/bx
Dispensing Volumes: 72483 1.5ml Syringe with tips 100/bx
Max 72484 6.0ml Syringe with tips 100/bx
Volume Adj’t Syringe Size Number of
72485 15ml Syringe with tips 50/bx
Number 0.6ml 1.5ml 6.0ml 15.0ml 60.0ml Dispenses
72486 60ml Syringe with adapter 50/bx
1 10μl 25μl 100μl 250μl 1000μl 58 72487 Syringe Adapter, 60ml each
2 20μl 50μl 200μl 500μl 2000μl 28 72488 Syringe with Spacer for use with
3 30μl 75μl 300μl 750μl 3000μl 18 Microtiter Plates, 1.5ml 100/pk
4 40μl 100μl 400μl 1000μl 4000μl 13 72489 Syringe Assortment Pack,
5 50μl 125μl 500μl 1250μl 5000μl 10 20 each of 0.6, 1.5, 6.0, 15 and 60ml 100/pk

® Rubber Bulbs; ® Rota-Filler

Natural Rubber 3000™
For use with #70950 series of glass The ideal pipette filler.
pipettes, 30mm length, 1ml capacity. Adjustable – Patent-
pending, five position
adjustable nozzle for
maximum pipetting
70980 Rubber Bulb 24/pk control. Adjust nozzle to
0, 5, 10, 15 or 20º
® Safety Bulb
Rubber pipette filler. Natural rubber Ergonomic – Curved,
bulb allows safe, manual control of ergonomic grip for all-
filling or discharging toxic liquids day comfort
through a pipette by finger pressure Versatile – Use the
(thus avoiding mouth contact). adjustable speed dial or
Guaranteed to be consistently gravity mode
flexible. LCD Display – Easy to
read, displays speed settings, mode and battery level
70955-01 RotaFiller 3000 each
70955-02 RF3000 Replacement Filters 5/pk
70982 Safety Bulb each
70984 Safety Bulb 4/lot

292 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec11_284-293_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 5:49 AM Page 293

Specimen Preparation and Embedding Supplies SECTION 11

® Pipetter Guide – Electron Microscopy Sciences

Sliding Guide
Announces their State of the Art
T Easily align a Pipetter with
microplate wells using our
Sliding Guide Scientific Equipment
T The Sliding Guide is clearly
marked with row letters for
fast and easy orientation
Repair Center
T Reduce eyestrain
T Adjust the guide height to
accommodate flat or v-
bottom microplate or PCR
plates
(70494-30 shown) with a 96-Well Color. Orienter
T Compatible with multi- (70491-11) for added pipetting ease
channel or single-channel
pipetters
Cat. # Description Dimension Qty.
70494-30 Single Place Sliding Guide 7 1⁄4" x 4" x 2" Each
70494-40 Double Wide Sliding Guide 13 1⁄4" x 4" x 2" Each

® Pipette Support, Polystyrene No equipment is too small or impossible to either

This support is an efficient pipette rest and has an off-center support for Repair, Refurbish, or Upgrade!
short pipettes, syringes, etc. Measurement: 280mm(L) x 215mm(W) x
38mm(H).
Our facility is equipped to handle the following Manufacturers:

T Balzers/Baltech T Leica
T Denton T Reichert-Jung
T Edwards T LKB
T Emitech T RMC-Boeckeler
T Emscope T And Many More…
T Bio-Rad
Our unique service allows us to come to you, or you
send the equipment to us, depending on the level of
Repair/Refurbishment needed.

Equipment such as:

70988 Pipette Support each T Vacuum Systems T Tissue Processors
T Microtomes T Lynx
® Angled
T Ultramicrotomes T Freeze Fracture
Bottle Rest
Compatibility – Ideal for use T Tissue Slicers Instruments
with a variety of pipets and T Vibratomes T High Pressure
pipetters, both manual and Freezers/Slammers/
electronic.
T Ovens
T Baths Propane Jet Freezers
Comfort – Reduces arm and
T Shakers T And Much More…
wrist strain allowing pipetting at a
comfortable 45° angle.
Ideally Sized – Unique design For more information on any of our services,
accommodates 200ml, 500ml a comprehensive quote, please call, write,
and 1L square and round bottles. or e-mail us today.
70989-01 Angled Bottle Rest each

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 293
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec11_294-311_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 6:01 AM Page 294

SECTION 11 Specimen Preparation and Embedding Supplies

 Dissecting Tools and Instruments
 The Meyco Diamond Dissecting Scalpel Blade
We are aware that in order to achieve the finest results in your work, you
continually have to search for the highest quality instruments. The quality that will
allow you to meet the high demands of your respected field.
Here at ELECTRON MICROSCOPY SCIENCES we are dedicated to these needs. With this
dedication in mind we have entered into an exclusive arrangement with our sister company,
DIATOME Ltd., that enables us to offer you their experience in diamond instrument manufacturing.
For many years DIATOME has been the leading manufacturer-“The Innovators” in diamond
instruments for a variety of applications including, but not limited to; ULTRAMICROTOMY, FIBER
OPTICS, AND EYE SURGERY.
DIATOME has now begun to manufacture for us diamond knives for microsurgery, dissection, and
its related applications. The knives are of the same quality that DIATOME customers have become
accustomed.
Distinctive designs combined with DIATOME’S expertise in diamond technology and manufacturing
assures you the best quality knife and being able to use it for many years.
 Freehand Diamond Knife
Characteristics and Specifications:
 Our ultra-sharp blade cuts with minimum  The knife is corrosion free and is com-
pressure, without tearing or damaging the pletely resistant to saline solutions. M / Angled M-M / Mini Angled
specimen and reduces the risk of speci-  It can be sterilized in an autoclave up to
men distortion. 200°C.
 Our UNIQUE PRESSURE MECHANISM  Special tray for sterilization is available
allows blade actuation with one hand  If your diamond is damaged or broken, we
 The handle is made of titanium and is can resharpen it or replace it and guarantee
coated by high vacuum with titanium that the repaired knife will be of the same
nitride to harden the surface. standards of perfection as the original.
L / Lancet M-L / Mini Lancet
The following cutting forms are available:
1) Type M; angled; .50mm thickness 6) Type M-DL; mini-double-lancet; .20
72024 Diamond Dissecting each thickness
Knife, Type M 72029 Diamond Dissecting each
72024-R Resharpening, Type M each Knife, Type M-DL
72024-L Replacement Blade, Type M each 72029-R Resharpening, Type M-DL each
2) Type M-M; mini-angled; .20 thickness 72029-L Replacement Blade, Type M-DL each

For extremely fine work. 7) Type DS; Tri-facet; .50mm thickness

DL / Double-Lancet M-DL / Mini Double Lancet
72025 Diamond Dissecting each 72030 Diamond Dissecting each
Knife, Type M-M Blade, Type DS
72025-R Resharpening, Type M-M each 72030-R Resharpening, Type DS each
72025-L Replacement Blade, Type M-M each 72030-L Replacement Blade, Type DS each

3) Type L; lancet; .50 thickness 8) Type M-DS; mini-tri-facet; .20mm

thickness
72026 Diamond Dissecting Knife, Type L each
72026-R Resharpening, Type L each 72031 Diamond Dissecting each
72026-L Replacement Blade, Type L each Blade, Type M-DS
72031-R Resharpening, Type M-DS each DS / Tri-Facet M-DS / Mini-Tri-Facet
4) Type M-L; mini-lancet; .20 thickness 72031-L Replacement Blade, Type M-DS each
For extremely fine work 9) Type R; round; .30mm thickness
72027 Diamond Dissecting each 72032 Diamond Dissecting each
Knife, Type M-L Blade, Type-R
72027-R Resharpening, Type M-L each
72027-L Replacement Blade, Type M-L each 10) Type HR-S; half-round; .20mm
thickness
5) Type DL; double-lancet; .50mm thickness
72033 Diamond Dissecting Blade, each
72028 Diamond Dissecting each Type HR-S R / Round HR-S / Half Round
Knife, Type DL
72028-R Resharpening, Type DL each
72028-L Replacement Blade, Type DL each

294 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec11_294-311_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 6:01 AM Page 295

Specimen Preparation and Embedding Supplies SECTION 11

 Dissecting Kit, 8 pieces, Stainless Steel
Kit includes:
1 41⁄2" Dissecting forceps with 1 41⁄2" Dissecting forceps 1 41⁄2" Dissecting scissors,
curved and serrated tips straight and serrated tips sharp, straight points
1 Curved dissecting needle 1 Dissecting scalpel, 6” long, 1 Plastic ruler 6", 1⁄16" div.,
1 Glass pipette with rubber bulb 11⁄2" cutting edge. millimeter and centimeter.
72950 Dissecting Kit set

 Large Dissecting Kit

Kit includes:
12 Scalpel Blades #11 with 41⁄2” Iris Scissors Jaws Forceps
#3 Handle 51⁄2” Dissecting Scissors 51⁄2” Straight Blunt tip Serrated
6” (15mm) Clear Ruler Suture Hook Jaws Forceps
6” long Light Small Probe, Blunt Set of Dissecting Needle, one 2 mm Diameter Stainless Steel
51⁄2” Kelly Hemostat, Straight Straight and one Bent Punch
61⁄4” Kelly Hemostat, Straight 41⁄2” Straight Fine Point Serrated Large Wood Handle Spatula
72951-15 Large Dissecting Kit set

 Dissecting Kit for Botany

Kit includes:
Dissecting teasing needle Dissecting forceps 4.5” curved Glass dropper
angular with metal chuck fine point with guide-pin Replacement dissecting needle
brass-chromed Dissecting forceps medium point straight, 6/pk
Dissecting teasing needle 4.5" with guide-pin Replacement dissecting needle
straight with metal chuck Dissecting Iris scissors 4.5" angular, 6/pk
brass-chromed Dissecting scalpel handle #3 Vinyl storage, zippered case
Ruler 6" No. 10 scalpel blade, 10 pcs with liner.
72951-20 Dissecting Kit for Botany set

 Anatomy Dissecting Kit 1

Kit includes:
Cartilage knife 2" blade Iris dissecting scissors, 4.5" Dissecting mall probe chrome,
Dissecting scalpel 1.5"L blade Dissecting scissor, 4.5", 6"
Narrow blade scalpel 1.5"L blade sharp/blunt points Ruler 6" plastic, metric/English
Dissecting forceps 4.5" with Dissecting teasing needle, markings
guide pin, medium points straight, metal chuck Dissecting chain & hook chrome
Dissecting forceps 4.5" with Dissecting teasing needle, Dissecting blow pipe, 6"
guide pin, curved, fine points. angular, metal chuck Double folded, vinyl storage case
72951-25 Anatomy Dissecting Kit set

 Anatomy Dissecting Kit 2

Kit includes:
Cartilage knife 2" blade Iris dissecting scissors, 4.5" Probe and hook, chrome
Dissecting scalpel handle #4 Dissecting teasing needle, Ruler 6" plastic, metric/
Dissecting scalpel handle #3 straight, metal chuck English markings
Scalpel blade #10, 1 piece Dissecting teasing needle, Dissecting chain & hook chrome
Scalpel blade #24, 1 piece angular, metal chuck Dissecting blow pipe, 6"
Dissecting scissor, 5.5", Dissecting forceps 4.5" with Double folded, vinyl
sharp/blunt points guide pin, fine points. storage case
Dissecting forceps 5"
72951-30 Anatomy Dissecting Kit 2 set

 Biology Dissecting Kit

Kit includes:
Dissecting mall probe, chrome, 6" Dissecting forceps, 4.5", chrome plated
Dissecting teasing needle, straight with metal chuck Glass dropper
Dissecting teasing needle, angular with metal chuck Ruler 6", plastic, metric/English markings
Dissecting scissors, 4.5" Single folded vinyl storage case
Dissecting scalpel
72951-35 Biology Dissecting Kit set

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 295
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec11_294-311_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 6:01 AM Page 296

SECTION 11 Specimen Preparation and Embedding Supplies

® Razor Blades:
All types of razor blades are used extensively in the laboratory. We offer the widest assortment of blades at the lowest possible prices!

® A. Injector Type
For Vibratome sectioning. Bulk packed or in a handy dispenser.
Uncoated Carbon Steel, 0.13” thick, 11⁄2” long, 5⁄16” wide.
71940 71940 Injector Type 500/bx
T Same as #71940, but Stainless Steel PTFE Coated, .010” thick, packed 20 blades
in a dispenser.
71990 Injector Blade in a Dispenser box
71991 Injector Blade in a Dispenser 10/lot

71990

® B. Single Edge, Gem Scientific

Carbon Steel, .009” thick, 11⁄2” x 3⁄4” size, packed 10 blades in a dispenser.
71950 Single Edge, GEM, Dispenser box
71951 Single Edge, GEM, Dispenser 12/lot

71950

® C. Single Edge, Carbon Steel, Regular Type, .009” thick

11⁄2” x 3⁄4” size, packed 100 blades in a drawer box.
71960 Single Edge Carbon Steel box
71961 Single Edge Carbon Steel 10/lot

71960 NEW: These blades come in a washed version (unwrapped) in a clamshell which
reduces the amount of foreign material on the blade. Clean room classified.
71960-WA Single Edge Carbon Steel, Washed Version, in Clamshell 115/pk
71961-WA Single Edge Carbon Steel, Washed Version, in Clamshell 115/pk
T Same as #71960, but PAL Extra-Keen Carbon Steel Blue blade offering long-lasting edge.
71974 Single Edge, PAL Extra Keen 100/pk
71975 Single Edge, PAL Extra Keen 10/lot
71974 T Same as #71960, but GEM Extra Keen type, Carbon Steel, packed 100 blades
in a drawer box.
71962 Single Edge, GEM Extra Keen box
71963 Single Edge, GEM Extra Keen 10/lot

NEW: These blades come in a washed version (unwrapped) in a clamshell which

reduces the amount of foreign material on the blade. Bulk Packed.
71962-WA Single Edge, PAL Extra Keen, Washed Version, Bulkl 240/pk
71963-WA Single Edge, PAL Extra Keen, Washed Version, Bulk 240/pk
T Same as #71960, but heavy duty blade, .012” thick, Carbon Steel, packed 100 blades
in a drawer box.
71964 Single Edge, Heavy Duty box
71965 Single Edge, Heavy Duty 10/lot

® D. Single Edge, Gem PTFE Coated

T Stainless Steel, Extra Keen, measures same as #71960. Packed 100 blades in a drawer box.
71970 Single Edge, GEM PTFE Coated box
71971 Single Edge, GEM PTFE Coated 10/lot

NEW: These blades come in a washed version (unwrapped) in a clamshell which

reduces the amount of foreign material on the blade. Clean room classified.
71970-WA Single Edge, GEM PTFE Coated, Washed Version, in Clamshell 115/pk
71971-WA Single Edge, GEM PTFE Coated, Washed Version, in Clamshell 115/pk
T Same as #71970, GEM Uncoated. Stainless Steel, Extra Keen. Packed 100 blades
in a drawer box.
71972 Single Edge, GEM Uncoated box
71973 Single Edge, GEM Uncoated 10/lot

296 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec11_294-311_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 6:02 AM Page 297

Specimen Preparation and Embedding Supplies SECTION 11

® E. Single Edge, Extra Long
T Sharp edge with better handling.
T Stainless Steel, .009” thick, 21⁄4”x1⁄2” size, packed 250 blades in a removable slide box.
71980 Single Edge Extra Long box
71981 Single Edge Extra Long 5/lot 71980
T Same as #71980, but super strong and super sharp. Made by SOLINGEN Carbon Steel,
highest quality of stainless steel available. Packed 100 blades in a box.
71930 Solingen Long Blades box
71931 Solingen Long Blades 5/lot

® F. Double Edge, Personna 71930

Stainless steel; PTFE coated. PERSONNA brand .004” thick, wrapped individually, 250 blades in a box.
72000 Double Edge Coated Blade box
72001 Double Edge Coated Blade 10/lot

NEW: These blades come in a washed version (unwrapped) in a clamshell which

reduces the amount of foreign material on the blade. Clean room classified.
72000-WA Double Edge Coated Blade, Washed Version 250/pk 72000
72001-WA Double Edge Coated Blade, Washed Version 250/pk
71998 Double Edge Non-Coated Blade box

® G. Double Edge Razor Blades

FEATHER® Brand
Made from carbon steel. Feather® blades are well known to have super sharp edges. Easily breaks
in half for use with any tissue slicing machine, or break smaller portions for use as a micro-
scalpel with our Blade Breaker & Holder. (Catalog numbers 72005-20, 72005-24).
Blades are available in packages of 10 blades per box or 500 blades per box. 72002
Measurements: Width: 21.95mm (0.865”) x Length: 42.96mm (1.69”)
Thickness: 0.10mm (0.004”)
72002-01 Feather Double Edge Blade 10/bx
72002-10 Feather Double Edge Blade 500/bx

® H. Double Edge Razor Blade Platinum Coated

Made from stainless steel, coated with Platinum. Super-sharp-edges. Measures: 42.96 mm
(1.69”) L x 21.95 mm (0.865”) W x 0.10 mm (0.004”) Thickness.
72003-01 Platinum Coated Double Edge Blade 100/bx
72003-10 Platinum Coated Double Edge Blade 10 bxs/lot
72003

® I. Single Edge Razor Blade for Clean Rooms

These blades (and dispenser springs) are degreased in order to minimize particulates and
residual grinding oils on the blades. The blades are made from surgical stainless steel
(significantly more durable then carbon steel) with a steel back that produces less particulate
than the aluminum back type. Packed 10 blades per dispenser, 200 dispensers per case. The
blade (including steel back) measures 39 mm x 19 mm x 0.23 mm thick (11⁄2” x 3⁄4” x 0.009”).
71952-01 Blade for Clean Rm., 10/Disp. each
71952-10 Blade for Clean Rm., 10/Disp. 10/pk

® J. Breakable Double Edge Razor Blades

Breakable double edge razor blades made from carbon steel. The blades break easily and
cleanly. Rectangular shape, square ends. Measures 43mm(L) x 22.2mm (W) x 0.10mm (T).
Packaged 100 blades in a box.
72004 Breakable Double Edge Blades box

® K. WecPrep Blades
Single edge, carbon steel razor blades which are long and very stable. Used for mincing
and all other specimen preparation work.
Blade Width: 2.25” (57.15mm); Blade Thickness: .011” (.279mm)
71933-50 WecPrep Blades 50/pk

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 297
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec11_294-311_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 6:02 AM Page 298

SECTION 11 Specimen Preparation and Embedding Supplies

 L. Gem 3 Facet Aluminum Back  Feather™ Scalpel Blades Selection
SE Safety Dispenser
Sharp edge with better handling. Stainless Steel, .009" thick, 2¼"x½"
 1. Scalpel Handle with Blade; Disposable
size, packed 100 blades in a Dispenser. These blades offer precision, Made by Feather. Sterile, stainless steel disposable scalpels with a handle.
sharpness and safety and come in a dispenser which offers you safety They are packed in aluminum foil, and are available in a variety of sizes.

Dispenser Options
 Gem Scientific Blade  Safety Dispenser pushes Cat.# Description Qty/Box
 3 Facet Blade blades out backing first for 72042-10 DisposableScalpel Set #10 20/bx
safety 72042-11 Disposable Scalpel Set #11 20/bx
 Aluminum Back
 On board used blade storage 72042-12 Disposable Scalpel Set #12 20/bx
 Uncoated 72042-15 Disposable Scalpel Set #15 20/bx
72042-20 Disposable Scalpel Set #20 20/bx
71967 Gem 3 Facet Aluminum Back 72042-21 Disposable Scalpel Set #21 20/bx
SE Safety Dispenser each 72042-22 Disposable Scalpel Set #22 20/bx
71967-CS Gem 3 Facet Aluminum Back 72042-23 Disposable Scalpel Set #23 20/bx
SE Safety Dispenser 5/lot 72042-24 Disposable Scalpel Set #24 20/bx

 M. Razor  2. Scalpel Blades/Feather

Sterile, stainless steel surgical scalpel blades, wrapped individually.
Blade in
Dispenser and
Used Blade
Storage Box in
One
These GEM single edge
carbon steel razor blades
(0.009” thick) are in a
compact, safe, pop-up
blade dispenser and used
blade storage all in one unit.
 Safe, easy to remove blade when needed
 Secure used blade storage in rear of unit
24 23 22 21 20 15 12 11 10
 Clear see through cover reveals remaining blades
 Push button dispenses blades Cat.# Description Qty/Box
 100 blades in dispenser 72044-10 Sterile Scalpel Blades #10 100/bx
72044-11 Sterile Scalpel Blades #11 100/bx
71955-01 Razor Blade in Dispenser/Used Storage Box in One each 72044-12 Sterile Scalpel Blades #12 100/bx
72044-15 Sterile Scalpel Blades #15 100/bx
72044-20 Sterile Scalpel Blades #20 100/bx
72044-21 Sterile Scalpel Blades #21 100/bx
72044-22 Sterile Scalpel Blades #22 100/bx
72044-23 Sterile Scalpel Blades #23 100/bx
72044-24 Sterile Scalpel Blades #24 100/bx

298 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec11_294-311_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 6:02 AM Page 299

Specimen Preparation and Embedding Supplies SECTION 11

 3. Feather; Sterile MicroScalpels;  Disposable Mini Scalpel - Sterile
Stainless Steel
Feather® Disposable Mini Scalpels are made from heat-treated
 Micro precision, ultra sharp,  Disposable. stainless steel. The blades are smaller than standard blades, come with
points.  Available in 3 angle styles: 15, chemical resistant, slender plastic handle. Handle is 53⁄4" (145mm) long.
 Sure-grip aluminum or plastic 30 and 45°. Available in three popular styles: #11, #14 and #15, and packaged in a
handle-color coded for easy  Comes in a carbonate plastic
sterile pouch, 20 per box. ISO 14001 compliant, ISO 9001 certified and
angle identification. case.
ISO13485 certified.
 Sterilized by gamma irradiation.

Cat. # Description Qty.

72041-11 Disposable Scalpel, Mini, #11 20/pk.
72041-14 Disposable Scalpel, Mini, #14 20/pk.
72041-15 Disposable Scalpel, Mini, #15 20/pk.

Blade  Feather® Safeshield™

Cat.# Description Thickness Qty
72045-15 Feather Micro Scalpel, 15°, Al Handle 0.1mm 5/bx Disposable Scalpel – Sterile
72045-30 Feather Micro Scalpel, 30°, Al Handle 0.1mm 5/bx Made from heat-treated stainless steel, these scalpels are excellent for
72045-45 Feather Micro Scalpel, 45°, Al Handle 0.1mm 5/bx delicate precise procedures. They fit the hand comfortably and are
72046-15 Feather Micro Scalpel, 15°, Plastic Handle 0.1mm 5/bx
designed with safety in mind. They reduce injury and transmitted
72046-30 Feather Micro Scalpel, 30°, Plastic Handle 0.1mm 5/bx
72046-45 Feather Micro Scalpel, 45°, Plastic Handle 0.1mm 5/bx
disease from contaminated blades. They feature a clear protective,
retractable shield and have a color coded button on the protective shield
which assists with blade size identification.
 4. Scalpel Handles/Feather
Individually packaged, 10 per box.
 Handle #3; 100mm long, flat with corrugated grip. For use with
scalpel blades #10, #11, #12 and #15.
 Handle #4; 105mm long, flat with corrugated grip. For use with
scalpel blades #20, #21, #22, #23, and #24.
 Handle #7; 140mm long, slender, contoured with corrugations.
For use with scalpel blades #10, #11, #12, and #15

#7: 72040-07

#4: 72040-04

#3: 72040-03

Cat. # Description Qty.

72040-03 Scalpel Handle #3 each
72040-04 Scalpel Handle #4 each
72040-07 Scalpel Handle #7 each

 5. Microsurgical Knife - Premier Edge™

Cat. # Description Qty.
Made from tool steel wire. Sharpened to microsurgical quality. The 72043-10 Feather® Safeshield™ Blade #10 10/pk.
knife-edges are available in three different configurations: 45, 30 and 72043-11 Feather® Safeshield™ Blade #11 10/pk.
15 degrees angle. The handle is plastic and they come sterile and in a 72043-14 Feather® Safeshield™ Blade #14 10/pk.
blister pack individually, 6 blister packs to a box. 72043-15 Feather® Safeshield™ Blade #15 10/pk.
72043-15C Feather® Safeshield™ Blade #15C 10/pk.
72043-20 Feather® Safeshield™ Blade #20 10/pk.
72043-21 Feather® Safeshield™ Blade #21 10/pk.
72043-22 Feather® Safeshield™ Blade #22 10/pk.
72043-23 Feather® Safeshield™ Blade #23 10/pk.
72043-24 Feather® Safeshield™ Blade #24 10/pk.
72043-25 Feather® Safeshield™ Blade #25 10/pk.
Cat.# Description Blade Thickness Qty
72047-15 Microsurgical Knife, 15° 0.11–0.19mm 6/bx
72047-30 Microsurgical Knife, 30° 0.11–0.19mm 6/bx
72047-45 Microsurgical Knife, 45° 0.11–0.19mm 6/bx

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 299
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec11_294-311_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 6:02 AM Page 300

SECTION 11 Specimen Preparation and Embedding Supplies

 BD* Carbon Steel Scalpel Blade 60  Disposable Scalpel Sets
Made from surgical carbon High quality carbon steel is mounted on plastic handle, individually foil
steel, size 60 with convex wrapped and sterilized by gamma irradiation. Packed 10 each /box. They
cutting edge. The most are exceptionally strong and relatively uniformity sharp, ideal for routine
useful in histology labs. laboratory dissecting, tissue mincing and where you do not need high
These scalpel blades are 23⁄8" (6cm) long and ribbed for extra rigidity. cost blades
They are non-sterile and are wrapped individually. Bard-Parker brand.
Cat. # Description Qty
72050-10 #60 Scalpel Blade (BD #371340) 150/cs 72052-10 Scalpel Handle Set #10 10/pk
72052-11 Scalpel Handle Set #11 10/pk
 BD* Disposable Blade Knife Handles 72052-15 Scalpel Handle Set #15 10/pk
72052-20 Scalpel Handle Set #20 10/pk
72052-22 Scalpel Handle Set #22 10/pk

 The EMS
Hobby Blade
and Handle
Hobby blades are used in a
wide range of applications
These strong, molded plastic handles provide a secure palm-fitting grip due to the simple but precise
for postmortem work, trimming light plaster casts, and similar forceful cutting tip. These 0.021" carbon steel blades fit most standard handles.
cutting. Handle size #6 and #8 Bard-Parker* brand. Handles are sold They are precision ground for sharpness and durability.
separately from the interchangeable listed above. The Handles are made from aluminum Construction for durability and
Use blade sizes 10, 11, 12, 15 for handle size 5. Use blade sizes 20, they have a 4 jaw check which holds the blade securely
21, 22, 23 for handle size 6. Use blade size 60 for handle size 8 Blades are packaged 100 per box, 10 boxes per case.
Cat.# Size/Length Pack
Cat. # Description Qty
72040-05 #5/ 413⁄16" (12.4cm) each 71982 Hobby Time Blades 100/Box
72040-06 #6/ 53⁄16" (13.1cm) each 71982-CS Hobby Time Blades 10 Bx/Case
72040-08 #8/ 59⁄32" (13.4cm) each 71982-HD Hobby Time Handle each

 Graduated Scalpel Handle #3  Scalpel Blade

Remover
This device is designed for safe
and easy removal of used
This #3 scalpel handle comes with metric graduations. disposable blades from any size
72040-30 #3 Graduated Scalpel Handle each or type of scalpel handle. It
improves safety and hygiene by
 Scalpel Handles the elimination of direct hand-
Made from carbon steel for the blades below. blade contact. Depending on the
size, it can store 150-300 used blades.
Cat. # Description Qty
72051-3 Scalpel Handle #3 1/pk 72070 Scalpel Blade Remover each
72051-4 Scalpel Handle #4 1/pk 72071 Scalpel Blade Remover 5/pk

 Scalpel Blades
Premiere® Blades are made
from carbon steel,
individually foil wrapped and
gamma radiation sterilized.
They are exceptionally
strong and relatively
uniformity sharp, ideal for
routine laboratory dissecting,
tissue mincing and where
you do not need high cost
blades.
Cat. # Description Qty Cat. # Description Qty
72049-10 Premiere® Blade #10 100/pk 72049-21 Premiere® Blade #21 100/pk
72049-11 Premiere® Blade #11 100/pk 72049-22 Premiere® Blade #22 100/pk
72049-12 Premiere® Blade #12 100/pk 72049-23 Premiere® Blade #23 100/pk
72049-15 Premiere® Blade #15 100/pk 72049-24 Premiere® Blade #24 100/pk
72049-20 Premiere® Blade #20 100/pk 72049-25 Premiere® Blade #25 100/pk

300 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec11_294-311_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 6:02 AM Page 301

Specimen Preparation and Embedding Supplies SECTION 11

 Trimaide; Safety Aid
A razor blade
holder for
trimming blocks.
Holds all types of
razors. It gives you a better hold on the
blade while you trim your blocks. The blade slides sideways in the holder allowing use of the
entire edge. IT PROTECTS FINGERS!!!
72550 each
72560 1 dozen

 Sapphire Knife
A unique high-precision knife for use with all Vibratomes and Tissue Sectioners, as well as our
Oscillating Tissue Slicers, EMS 4000 and EMS 5000.
Our Sapphire Knife offers smooth, consistent and thinner sections than are usually obtainable
with stainless steel blades. The blade allows for sectioning as thin as 10 microns. Offering many
years of cutting surface, the durability of our sapphire knife far outlasts other comparable blades
on the market.
Specifications:
Material: Synthetic Single Crystal Sapphire Size: 1.5” x 0.4” x .03”
93060 Sapphire Blade/Knife each

 Classic Guillotine
 Hand-honed stainless steel blades decapitate rats, mice and
other small animals instantly, with one stroke.
 Can be completely washed without disassembly.
 Reversible handle allows for right- or left-handed operation.
 Opening is 1.75" along each side.
 Base can be mounted to a bench or board.

Cat. No. Description Qty.

93251 Classic Guillotine each

 Nemi Guillotine
 Manufactured with the highest-quality materials
 Replacement blades available for all models
 Can be used with optional mounting plates
 Cost effective
Cat. No. Description Qty.
93252 Rats & Mice, 2" opening along side each
93253 Rats & Mice, 4" opening along side each
93254 Larger Subjects, 6" opening along side each
93255 Replacement Blade only,
6" opening along side each
93256 Replacement Blade only, For Rats & Mice For Larger Subjexts
2" opening along side each
93257 Replacement Blade only,
4" opening along side each

 The EMS Tissue Chopper

The TC-1 Tissue Chopper is designed to facilitate the cutting of 100-1000 micron thick brain tissue
slices for use in recording experiments. The chopper includes a guillotine arm with adjustments to
assure blade alignment. The brain sample is moved in respect to the arm with a stage whose position
can be read with 2 to 3 micron precision on a digital micrometer scale. The stage is made with a
removable "PTFE" surface plate to facilitate cleaning.
93100 TC-1 Tissue Chopper each
93102 TC-1 Tissue Chopper with electronic digital micrometer each
93110 Replacement "PTFE" Plate each

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 301
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec11_294-311_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 6:03 AM Page 302

SECTION 11 Specimen Preparation and Embedding Supplies

® Saw; Jewelers
Swiss-made; A fully adjustable frame with a depth of 21⁄4" (57mm) that permits the tightening
of the blade as well as using broken blades. Comes with 12 blades. size 3/0
72010 Jewelers Saw Frame with 12 Blades each
For your reference, the following is the Chart of Sizes of the jewelers saw blades. Each blade has
an overall length of 51⁄4" (133mm)
Thickness Width Teeth per
Size inch mm inch mm inch cm
8/0 .006 0.15 .013 0.33 84 33
7/0 .007 0.18 .014 0.36 84 33
6/0 .007 0.18 .014 0.36 76 30
5/0 .008 0.20 .016 0.41 66 26
4/0 .009 0.23 .017 0.43 64 25
3/0 .010 0.25 .019 0.48 57 22
2/0 .010 0.25 .021 0.53 53 21
1/0 .011 0.28 .023 0.58 51 20
1 .012 0.30 .025 0.64 47 19
2 .013 0.33 .027 0.69 44 17
3 .014 0.36 .029 0.74 40 16
4 .015 0.38 .031 0.79 37 15
5 .016 0.41 .033 0.84 35 14
6 .017 0.43 .037 0.94 33 13
8 .020 0.51 .045 1.14 28 11
10 .024 0.61 .053 1.35 24 10
12 .024 0.61 .065 1.65 20 8

72020-04 Saw blades, size 4/0 1 dz

72020-03 Saw blades, size 3/0 1 dz
72020-02 Saw blades, size 2/0 1 dz
72020-01 Saw blades, size 1/0 1 dz
72020-10 Saw blades, size 1 1 dz
All other sizes listed above are available upon request. 12 10 8 6 5 4 1 1/0 2/0 3/0 4/0 5/0 6/0 7/0 8/0

Slicers; Oscillating Tissue See Equipment section, pages 990-997 UUUUU

® Spiral Saw Blades Diameter

Swiss made saw blades. Cuts in Cat. # Size (in) (mm) Quantity
any direction. Used for cutting 72015-02 2/0 .0204 .52 12/pk
72015-01 1/0 .0220 .56 12/pk
rubber, plastics, wax, plaster, and
72015-10 1 .0240 .61 12/pk
similar materials. 72015-20 2 .0276 .70 12/pk

® Diamond Wire ® Adjustable Saw

SuperLok™ Diamond Wire Frame
starts with tensile core wire. A Swiss made saw frame
This wire is specially drawn to lightweight and perfectly
Diamond Wire Technology balanced. Its ergonomic
specifications. It is heat- wooden handle reduces
treated, stretched, and has a fatigue and provides greater
tensile strength in excess of 400,000 pounds. The diamond wire has an dexterity. Patented blade-lock design eases blade insertion and
added electro copper sheath in which the diamonds, from 20 to 120 maintains perfect alignment which eliminates wobble and reduces blade
microns in size are impregnated. An additional overstrike is applied to loss during use. It measures 21⁄4 (70mm) deep and accepts saw blades
provide greater bonding to the core. Diamond wire technology uses up to 1.2mm diameter and 130mm long.
electronic measuring equipment to guarantee consistency in diamond
This Saw Frame may be used ideally with the Diamond Wire and Spiral
impregnation. The wire has an average diameter of 0.008" (0.20mm).
Saw Blades shown below.
The wire is cut to 6" (150mm) in length.
Cat. # Description Quantity
This diamond wire may be used with the Saw Frame #72009 shown above. 72009 Deluxe Saw Frame each
Cat. # Description Quantity
72009-10 Diamond Wire 10/pk

302 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec11_294-311_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 6:03 AM Page 303

Specimen Preparation and Embedding Supplies SECTION 11

® Matrices
® Tissue Matrices; (TM)
The Tissue Matrix is designed to aid the basic research scientist in the free-hand dissection of a wide variety of
different tissues and repeatedly slice fresh tissue at intervals as small as 1mm. The TM’s are constructed from
high grade aluminum to allow for rapid temperature equilibration, ease of cleaning or sterilization and
withstand the rigors of daily use.
Features:
T Channels at 1mm intervals T Removable end caps Tissue & Rodent Matrices
T Channel width is .3mm T Available in 3 basic configurations
Applications:
Biochemical Pharmacology: The reproducible removal of small regions for biochemical analysis, such
as the determination of drug and metabolite concentrations.Individual tissues may be either dissected
or micropunched from slices formed.
Anatomy: Precise blocking of tissue prior to microtome sectioning.
Physiology: Reproducible blocking prior to vibratome sectioning enzymatic dispersion.
Overall Measurements: 90mm(L) x 36mm(W) x 37mm(H)
Cat. # Cavity Size, Tissue Shape
69010 TM 10mmx10mm Rectangular
69011 TM 15mmx15mm Rectangular
69012 TM 20mmx20mm Rectangular
69013 TM 25mmx25mm Rectangular
69014 TM 10mm Diameter V-Shaped Block
69015 TM 4mm diameter Spherical
69016 TM 6mm diameter Spherical

® Rodent Brain Matrices; (RBM)

RBM are designed for similar purposes as the above TM but only for rodent brains. It allows the investigator to
slice either coronal (perpendicular to center line) or sagittal (parallel to center line) sections through the brain
at intervals as small as 1mm. All RBM’s are identical and durable to insure reproducible sections in the day-to-
day, year-to-year, or on a between laboratory basis.
Applications:
Biochemical Pharmacology: The reproducible removal of small brain regions (i.e. discrete terminal fields or
nuclei) for biochemical analysis, such as the determination of neurotransmitter and metabolite concentrations.
Individual brain areas may be either dissected or micropunched from the slices formed.
Anatomy: Precise blocking of the brain prior to microtome sectioning.
Neurophysiology: Reproducible blocking of the brain prior to vibratome sectioning.
Technical Data:
The RBM’s are constructed from high grade zinc to allow for rapid temperature equilibration, easy cleaning,
and sterilization. The matrices are designed to accommodate the brains of rodents placed ventral side up.
The channels are precisely cut at 1mm intervals and 0.3mm wide.
Overall Measurements: 2.75”x2.75”x1.5”H

Cat. # Description* Cat. # Description*

69020 RBM, Gerbil, 70g, Coronal each 69040-C RBM Adult Rabbit, Coronal each
69021 RBM, Gerbil, 70g, Sagittal each 69040-S RBM Adult Rabbit, Sagital each
69022 RBM, Mouse, 30g, Coronal each 69041-C RBM Rat Pup, 30g, Coronal each
69023 RBM, Mouse, 30g, Sagittal each 69041-S RBM Rat Pup, 30g, Sagital each
69024 RBM, Rat, 125g-185g, Coronal each 69042-C RBM Hamster, 100g, Coronal each Optional Sizes: Tissue dissection
69025 RBM, Rat, 125g-185g, Sagittal each 69042-S RBM Hamster, 100g, Sagital each matrices are available in any type or size
69026 RBM, Rat, 200g-400g, Dorsal-Ventral each 69046-C RBM Monkey, Adult Rhesus, Coronal on request (i.e. heart, kidney, lung, liver,
69026-C RBM Adult Rat, 200g-400g, Coronal each (40 Slots @ 2mm) each eye...). Please inquire for further
69026-S RBM Adult Rat, 200g-400g, Sagital each 69047-C RBM Adult Dog, Coronal (40 Slots @ 2mm)each information and pricing.
69027-C RBM Adult Guinea Pig, 350g, Coronal each 69048-C RBM Adult Cat, Coronal (35 Slots @ 2mm) each
69027-S RBM Adult Guinea Pig, 350g, Sagital each 69049 RBM Cat Heart Matrix, Adult, 2mm Slices each Optional matrices available: Turkey
69029-C RBM Adult Ferret, Coronal each 69050-C RBM Rat Heart Matrix, Adult, 1mm Slices each Brain Matrix, Chicken Brain Matrix,
69029-S RBM Adult Ferret, Sagital each 69051-C RBM Rabbit Heart Matrix, Adult, Canary Brain matrix, Rabbit Heart Matrix,
2mm Slices each Rat Heart Matrix.
*Common animal name, animal weight, slice orientation

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 303
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec11_294-311_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 7/2/14 2:49 AM Page 304

SECTION 11 Specimen Preparation and Embedding Supplies

® Stainless Steel Brain & Heart Matrices with 0.5mm Thick Slices
When your rodent brain, heart, and other similar organs need to be sliced
as thin as possible, these new stainless steel matrices with 0.5mm
channel, you can manually achieved these slices - coronal or sagital - with
ease.
T Made of high-quality stainless steel T Accurate sectioning
T They can repeatedly use, cleaning, T Easy cleaning and
autoclave and frozen easy handling.
T Produce fine slices
Dimensions (mm)
Cat. # Product A B C D E Cavity Depth
69090-C Mouse Coronal (40-75g) 3.18 11.1 8.73 19.1 12.2 7.4
69090-S Mouse Sagital (40 – 75g) 3.18 11.1 8.73 19.1 12.2 7.4
69091-C Small Rat Coronal (175 – 300g) 4.76 15.9 12.7 36.6 23.8 7.61
69091-S Small Rat Sagital (175 – 300g) 4.76 15.9 12.7 36.6 23.8 7.61
69092-C Large Rat Coronal (300 – 600g) 4.76 19.8 14.7 36.6 24.7 10.91
69092-S Large Rat Sagital (300 – 600g) 4.76 19.8 14.7 36.6 24.7 10.91
69095-H Mouse Heart 8.3 12.1 — — — 4.8
69096-H Rat Heart 12.7 19.8 — — — 9.6

® Acrylic Matrices
T Highly polished T Reproducible 1 mm segments
T Precision machined T Cost saving
T Precise blocking of the brain
Low cost acrylic matrices are precisely machined and highly polished to
ensure reproducible results. These matrices allow the investigator to slice
either coronal (perpendicular to center line) or sagittal (parallel to center
line) sections through the brain at 1 mm intervals.
Dimensions (mm)
Cat. # Product A B C D E Cavity Depth
69080-C Mouse Coronal (40-75g) 3.18 11.1 8.73 19.1 12.2 7.4
69080-S Mouse Sagital (40 – 75g) 3.18 11.1 8.73 19.1 12.2 7.4
69081-C Small Rat Coronal (175 – 300g) 4.76 15.9 12.7 36.6 23.8 7.61
69081-S Small Rat Sagital (175 – 300g) 4.76 15.9 12.7 36.6 23.8 7.61
69083-C Large Rat Coronal (300 – 600g) 4.76 19.8 14.7 36.6 24.7 10.91
69083-S Large Rat Sagital (300 – 600g) 4.76 19.8 14.7 36.6 24.7 10.91

® Brain Blocker One™

A Perfect Cryosectioning Method — Brain Blocker One™
with these features:
T Easily reproducible alignment in atlas planes
T Section one or multiple brains with each knife pass
T Time saving in Tissue sectioning
T Time saving in Microscope analysis
Brain Blocker One is a set of gel blocks, left and right half, with an internal Multi-blocks can be frozen and mounted on the same pedestal together.
cavity cast originally an actual mouse brain. Drop a fresh or fixed brain in to Each pass of the cryostat knife, produces the same thickness sections,
displace the liquid in the one half cavity, add another half on top and the same orientation from every brain are mounted on that pedestal. Up to 24
brain is now fully encased, as if it had been embedded. The brain cavity is brains can be sectioned with each pass of the knife using the whole body
in sterotaxic orientation, top surface of the gel parallel to skull flat. The gel cryostat and Macro Tape Transfer system.
expands slowly with hydration, and the cavity accommodates different brain Gels will come in packages of 12 pairs, slightly dehydrated. Soak in water,
sizes simply by the length of the presoak time, 1 to 4 hours for fresh adult saline, or buffer to fit the brains.
brain, less for fixed or young brain, more for aged brain.
The entire block can be frozen and sectioned. The cryostat pedestal need 69100 Brain Blocker One™ Mouse Brain 12/pk
never be readjusted from parallel to the blade plane of motion, and every 69102 Brain Blocker One™ Rat Brain 12/pk
brain will come out sectioned in the same plane as the atlas. Brain Blocker One™ is trade mark of McCormick

® Brain Matrix Razor Blades:

These razor blades are specifically made to work and fit all of our Brain Matrices. They measure
118mmx19mmx.2286mm(4.65x.75x.0089”). They are packed 25 blades in a box.
70933-70 Brain Matrix Blades 25/pk

304 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec11_294-311_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 6:03 AM Page 305

Specimen Preparation and Embedding Supplies SECTION 11

® Sampling Tools — Harris Micro-Punch™ and Harris Uni-Cores™
The Harris Micro-Punch™ and Uni-Cores are designed to serve research scientists
with a dissection tool for small pre-defined regions of the tissue or the specimen.
Applications
T Forensic — Punch cut, retrieve, store and preferentially eject cored samples
from source materials such as paper, gels, cloth, leaves, paint chip, films, etc.
T Electrophysiology — Punch dissection of discrete regions prior to acute dis-
sociation for patch recording Using 2.0mm Uni-core to punch
out ink sample
T Biomedical Pharmacology — Punch removal of discrete brain regions for
analysis of neurotransmitters and metabolite changes in response to different
pharmacological agents.
T Anatomy — Punch out small brain regions for analysis of neurotransmitter
concentrations of mRNA levels or for subsequent use in electron microscopy.
T Others — Positioning samples inside the quartz pyrolysis gel tubes, or on
FTIR diamond cell sample stages.
1.25 Uni-Core placing sample in
Operating pyrolysis gas chromatography tube

For most forensic samples, position source of materials (i.e. blood cards, paint chips, paper, leaves, gels, etc.) on the
self-healing cutting mat. Remove the protective cover cap from the punch. Firmly grip the punch. The tip is then posi-
tioned at a right angle above the target area – DO NOT DEPRESS THE PLUNGER. The tip is pushed downward into the
source material until it makes contact with the cutting mat. Lift the Harris Micro-Punch™ away from the source material
with the cored sample stored in the cutting tip.
For most biology samples – Typically tissue to be punched is first sliced into 1-2mm thick sections. (Our Tissue and Brain
Matrices are specially designed for this purpose,). The section to be punched is then placed on a saline-soaked filter Using Uni-Core to position sample
paper disc (EMS #70662 – Petri dish with absorbent paper) on an ice-cold dissection plate (EMS #62536-01 – Cold inside quartz pyrolysis tube
Plate) Then follow the above procedure.
Sample Storage And Ejection
After coring, the sample is temporarily stored in the hollow cutting tip ready for the preferred ejection. The Harris
MicroPunch™ can be rested on its side without loss of sample from the hollow tip. To eject sample, position tip over
target area and depress plunger.
Cleaning
Using Uni-Core 2.0mm sampling
Clean the tip between each sample extraction by coring blank filter paper, rinsing with ethanol or spraying with blood card
compressed air to remove dried artifacts. Rinse mat with ethanol after each sample extraction.

® A. Harris Micro-Punch
The tips and plungers are made from high-grade 440c stainless steel. Tips are heat-treated to a Rockwell hardness of
Rc-58 and then individually sharpened to a razor edge for a long cutting life. Tips are replaceable and available in sizes
0.50, 1.0, 1.20, 2.0, and 3.0 mm. The barrel and knob screw assembly are constructed from injected molded, high-tech,
lubricated plastic to eliminate sticking. Length: 140mm (5 ½”). Sterilization temperature up to 180°C (360°F)
Using Uni-Core 2.0 ejecting dried
Ordering: blood sample into vial

Cat. # Description Qty

69034-05 Harris Micro-Punch, 0.5mm each
69034-10 Harris Micro-Punch, 1.0mm each
69034-12 Harris Micro-Punch, 1.2mm each
69034-20 Harris Micro-Punch, 2.0mm each
69034-30 Harris Micro-Punch, 3.0mm each

Cat. # Description Qty

1.25 Uni-Core ejecting sample
69035-05 Replacement Tip, 0.5mm each on diamond cell sample stage
69035-10 Replacement Tip, 1.0mm each
69035-12 Replacement Tip, 1.2mm each
69035-20 Replacement Tip, 2.0mm each
69035-30 Replacement Tip, 3.0mm each
69035-06 Replacement 0.5mm Plunger each
69035-07 Replacement 1.0mm Plunger each
69035-08S Replacement 1.2mm Plunger each
69035-08 Replacement 2.0mm Plunger each
69035-09 Replacement 3.0mm Plunger each Uni-Core 2.0mm ejecting blood
card sample

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 305
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec11_294-311_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 6:04 AM Page 306

SECTION 11 Specimen Preparation and Embedding Supplies

® Sampling Tools — Harris Micro-Punch™ and
Harris Uni-Cores™ (continued)
Specifications And Ordering Info
Tip for Plastic Harris Micro-Punch®
Size mm HMP I.D. mm/in. Shaft O.D. Tip Shaft Shaft Edge Lumen Lumen Edge Qty.
Cat # +/- Length +/- 0.060 mm/in. Length Length Wall Wall Length (Void) Vol. Angle
0.06 mm/in. /0.0024 mm/in. mm/in. mm/in. mm/in. mm/in. ml/c.i.
69034-05 0.50 142.04 0.500/ 3.20/ 16.8/ 5.50/ 1.30/ 0.0010/ 5.400/ 1.060/ 15° each
/5.93 0.020 0.128 0.672 0.22 0.052 .00004 0.216 0.00007
69034-10 1.00 142.04 1.000/ 3.20/ 16.8/ 5.50/ 1.10/ 0.0010/ 6.680/ 5.243/ 19° each
/5.93 0.040 0.128 0.672 0.22 0.044 .00004 0.267 0.00034
69034-12 1.20 142.04 1.200/ 3.20/ 16.8/ 5.50/ 1.05/ 0.0010/ 5.740/ 6.488/ 23° each
/5.93 0.048 0.128 0.672 0.22 0.042 .00004 0.230 0.00042
69034-20 2.00 142.04 2.000/ 3.20/ 16.8/ 5.50/ 0.65/ 0.0010/ 5.880/ 1846/ 14° each
/5.93 0.080 0.128 0.672 0.22 0.026 .00004 0.235 0.00118
69034-30 3.00 142.04 3.000/ 3.20/ 16.8/ 5.50/ 0.62/ 0.0010/ 7.090/ 50.09/ 11° each
/5.93 0.120 0.128 0.672 0.22 0.024 .00004 0.284 0.00321

® B. Deluxe Aluminium Harris Micro-Punch®

Aluminum barrel is Swiss-style machined from high grade 6061 light weight,
seamless, aluminium tubing and anodized to form a protective, chemically
resistant long lasting surface for easy handling.
Specifications And Ordering Info
Tip for Aluminium Harris Micro-Punch®

Size mm HMP I.D. mm/in. Shaft O.D. Tip Shaft Shaft Edge Lumen Lumen Edge Qty.
Cat # +/- Length +/- 0.060 mm/in. Length Length Wall Wall Length (Void) Vol. Angle
0.06 mm/in. /0.0024 mm/in. mm/in. mm/in. mm/in. mm/in. ml/c.i.
69033-05 141.63 0.500/ 3.20/ 16.8/ 5.50/ 1.30/ 0.0010/ 4.760/ 0.934/ 15° each
0.50
/5.573 0.020 0.128 0.672 0.22 0.052 .00004 0.191 0.00006
69033-10 141.63 1.000/ 3.20/ 16.8/ 5.50/ 1.10/ 0.0010/ 5.740/ 4.506/ 19° each
1.00
/5.573 0.040 0.128 0.672 0.22 0.044 .00004 0.230 0.00028
69033-12 141.63 1.200/ 3.20/ 16.8/ 5.50/ 1.05/ 0.0010/ 5.210/ 5.889/ 23° each
1.20
/5.573 0.048 0.128 0.672 0.22 0.042 .00004 0.208 0.00038
69033-20 141.63 2.000/ 3.20/ 16.8/ 5.50/ 0.65/ 0.0010/ 4.830/ 15.16/ 14° each
2.00
/5.573 0.080 0.128 0.672 0.22 0.026 .00004 0.193 0.00097
69033-30 141.63 3.000/ 3.20/ 16.8/ 5.50/ 0.62/ 0.0010/ 5.930/ 41.89/ 11° each
3.00
/5.573 0.120 0.128 0.672 0.22 0.024 .00004 0.237 0.00268

® C. Harris Uni-Cores
See Miltex Punches for possible replacement of Harris Uni-Cores
The Harris Uni-Core™ is a disposable multi-purpose sampling tool for soft substrates. They are made from
polypropylene, including a hollow body with built-in tool steel razor sharp cutting tip, with a plunger for the
expelling of the punched sample. Uni-Core comes individually wrapped and sterilized by ethylene oxide. Uni-
Core can also be reusable by rinsing the tip with ethanol after each use and autoclaving for 20 minutes at
250°F/15 psi.

Ordering:
Cat. # Description Qty Cat. # Description Qty Cat. # Description Qty
69036-035 Harris Uni-Core™, Size 0.35mm each 69036-25 Harris Uni-Core™, Size 2.5mm each 69036-80 Harris Uni-Core™, Size 8.0mm each
69036-05 Harris Uni-Core™, Size 0.5mm each 69036-30 Harris Uni-Core™, Size 3.0mm each 69036-90 Harris Uni-Core™, Size 9.0mm each
69036-07 Harris Uni-Core™, Size 0.75mm each 69036-35 Harris Uni-Core™, Size 3.5mm each 69036-100 Harris Uni-Core™, Size 10.0mm each
69036-10 Harris Uni-Core™, Size 1.0mm each 69036-40 Harris Uni-Core™, Size 4.0mm each 69036-110 Harris Uni-Core™, Size 11.0mm each
69036-12 Harris Uni-Core™, Size 1.2mm each 69036-50 Harris Uni-Core™, Size 5.0mm each 69036-120 Harris Uni-Core™, Size 12.0mm each
69036-15 Harris Uni-Core™, Size 1.5mm each 69036-60 Harris Uni-Core™, Size 6.0mm each
69036-20 Harris Uni-Core™, Size 2.0mm each 69036-70 Harris Uni-Core™, Size 7.0mm each

306 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec11_294-311_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 7/2/14 2:32 AM Page 307

Specimen Preparation and Embedding Supplies SECTION 11

 Sampling Tools — Harris Micro-Punch™  Accu-Punch
and Harris Uni-Cores™ (continued) The only disposable
punch made in the
 D. Cutting Mats USA!
These cutting mats are inert,
Sterile, Disposable Skin
self-healing and can be
Biopsy Punches.
sterilized with ethanol. Available
sizes 6 x 8" and 21⁄2 x 3" Available in 14 different
sizes as well as
assortment packs.
 Always Sharp, Always Sterile  Available in Dispenser boxes
Cat. # Description Qty
69037 Cutting Mat, Size 6 x 8" each
 Ergonomic Design of 25 or 50 pieces
69037-23 Cutting Mat, Size 21⁄2 x 3" each  Ribbed for Maximum Control
Cat. # Description Qty.
 E. Harris 69038-01 Accu-Punch 1 mm 25/Pack
e-CoreTM 69038-01-50 Accu-Punch 1mm 50/Pack
69038-15 Accu-Punch 1.5 mm 25/Pack
Cuts, retrieves and 69038-15-50 Accu-Punch 1.5mm 50/Pack
stores cored 69038-02 Accu-Punch 2.0mm 25/Pack
samples in one 69038-02-50 Accu-Punch 2.0mm 50/Pack
operation 69038-25 Accu-Punch 2.5mm 25/Pack
69038-25-50 Accu-Punch 2.5mm 50/Pack
The Harris e-Core is an electric coring device created to bridge the gap 69038-03 Accu-Punch 3.0mm 25/Pack
between the lower cost, manual Harris Micro-Punch and Harris Uni-Core 69038-03-50 Accu-Punch 3.0mm 50/Pack
and the automated bench top punching platforms. The ergonomic “joy 69038-35 Accu-Punch 3.5mm 25/Pack
stick” grip and the e-Core’s simple operation provide comfort and 69038-35-50 Accu-Punch 3.5mm 50/Pack
efficiency, integrating smoothly into all levels of laboratory sample 69038-04 Accu-Punch 4.0mm 25/Pack
69038-04-50 Accu-Punch 4.0mm 50/Pack
throughput. The user has complete management of the disc recovery 69038-45 Accu-Punch 4.5mm 25/Pack
process, the coring speed and disc delivery. 69038-45-50 Accu-Punch 4.5mm 50/Pack
The Harris e-Core, like the Harris Micro-Punch and Harris Uni-Core, 69038-05 Accu-Punch 5.0mm 25/Pack
continues to offer the same unique combination of patented 69038-05-50 Accu-Punch 5.0mm 50/Pack
simultaneous sampling features: coring, retrieving and storing in a single 69038-06 Accu-Punch 6.0mm 25/Pack
69038-06-50 Accu-Punch 6.0mm 50/Pack
operation, but with dramatically increased processing times. 69038-07 Accu-Punch 7.0mm 25/Pack
The Harris e-Core has been designed to utilize dedicated replaceable 69038-07-50 Accu-Punch 7.0mm 50/Pack
Harris Micro-Punch Tips which thread to the Harris e-Core drive shaft. 69038-08 Accu-Punch 8.0mm 25/Pack
69038-08-50 Accu-Punch 8.0mm 50/Pack
69038-10 Accu-Punch 10.0mm 25/Pack
The e-Core kits contain: 69038-10-50 Accu-Punch 10.0mm 50/Pack
1. One Harris e-Core with 69038-12 Accu-Punch 12.0mm 25/Pack
tip and cover cap in 69038-12-50 Accu-Punch 12.0mm 50/Pack
69038-AS Assorted Pack one of each size 14/Pack
place.
2. Two extra Harris Micro-
Punch tips of same size. Paper Cutter, See Print Trimmer, Photography Section,
3. Optional cord wrist strap. page 728-729 
4. Multi-plug set includes Cryo Gloves, See Cryo Supplies Section, page 679 
Europe (EU), United Grids: See Grid Collection, pages 104-133 
Kingdom (UK), Australia EMS Domino Rack, See Grid Section, page 145 
(AUST) and North
Grid Mats, See Grid Section, page 145 
America (NA) adapters.
5. Power supply. Grid Storage Boxes, See Grid Section, pages 142-144 
6. 6 x 8” Harris Cutting Mat. Grease; Vacuum Grease, See Apiezon Grease, Microscope
7. Harris e-Core Carrying Case. Accessories, pages 186-188 
8. User Guide. Immunofluoresence Chamber, See page 268 
Permanox Chamber Slides, See pages 275-278 
69039-12 Harris e-Core kit, 1.2mm Tip, 0.8mm Plunger (O.D.) each Immersion Oils, See Chemicals, page 49 
Low Lint Wipes; Tissues, See Cleaning section,
page 950-951 
Kimwipes, See Cleaning section, page 950 
Lint Free Cloth, See Cleaning section, page 950 

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 307
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec11_294-311_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 6:04 AM Page 308

SECTION 11 Specimen Preparation and Embedding Supplies

 Brain Punch Kit
For Microdissection of Frozen Brain Sections
The kit is available in 2 different sets: Complete with either 3 punches or 5
come complete with spring loaded nylon expellers, and a convenient
handle, facilitates the "Palkovits Punch" technique of dissecting out specific
brain nuclei for neurochemistry.
The nuclei are punched from frozen brain sections on glass slides, and The
expelled into the reagents. The spring-loaded expellers avoid risk of specimen
contamination that might be caused by expelling with breath. must be adjusted to
the correct plane of section,
Each punch has an electro polished sharp end for smooth cuts and minimal taking preliminary sections to check
tissue adhesion. Punch sizes are 0.25, 0.50, 0.75, 1.0, 1.25, 1.50, 1.75 the angle, and then the critical sections from
and 2.00 (±5%, slight variation due to electro polish etching to sharpen). The the desired region are collected.
smaller tubes are reinforced by an outer layer of concentric tubing except at
the tip. Thick (~200 micron) are taken and placed on the prechilled glass slides.
The frozen slices will lie on the frozen glass without adhering, so care must
Replacement punches available individually. be taken not to spill them. When the slide is full, press a finger against the
Applications: bottom of the slide to cause the tissue to partially thaw into contact with the
The Brain Punch Kit is a set of electropolished and sharpened punches for the slide, and refreeze promptly in the cryostat.
Palkovit’s punch technique. Note that the smaller punches are reinforced, as
Remove the slides from the cryostat and place on a cold plate or petri dish
these can tend to bend under the force of the punching action. The set
chilled with dry ice. Select the punch needed, position the tip over the area to
includes a handle and 5 sizes of punches. Sizes are shown in the table below.
be removed, and press down. The dot of tissue, whose volume can be
Each punch consists of the stainless steel punch column, the holder body, and
calculated, will pull away from glass slide and stay in the punch. Press the
a button which operates a spring loaded expeller to force the micro dot of
spring loaded button on top of each punch to expel the tissue into the
tissue from the punch.
collection media.
Select the punch to be used and install it in the handle so that the black
body holder on the punch is flush with the lower surface of the handle. Cat. # Description Qty.
Tighten the locking screw. If the punch body holder extends below the 57401 Brain Punch Set, 0.25 to 1.25mm 5/set
handles bottom surface, the action of the expeller may be blocked. Check 57402 Brain Punch Set, 1.50 to 2.00mm 3/set
that the expeller end can be seen when the button is pressed, and then 57391 Punch, 0.25 mm each
proceed. 57393 Punch, 0.50 mm each
57395 Punch, 0.75 mm each
Method: 57397 Punch, 1.00 mm each
To prevent deterioration of the proteins, the tissue must be kept frozen as 57399 Punch, 1.25 mm each
much as possible. The brain or other tissue to be punched is dissected from 57403 Punch, 1.50mm each
the anesthetized animal and dropped into liquid nitrogen. The frozen 57404 Punch, 1.75mm each
specimen is mounted on a sectioning pedestal, placed in a cryostat, and 57405 Punch, 2.00mm each
allowed to equilibrate to the cryostat temperature. At this time, glass slides 57400 Handle Only each
for collection of the sections are also placed in the cryostat to equilibrate to
the temperature.

 Sterile Disposable Biopsy Punch

A possible replacement for the Harris Uni-Cores™. The Miltex® Biopsy Punch with Plunger is a single-use,
disposable multi-purpose sampling tool for soft substrates. The plastic exterior is ribbed for comfort and control.
The stainless steel cutting tip is seamless and razor sharp to avoid tearing or pulling of the sample. The plunger
easily expels the specimen from the barrel. These sterilized punches come in color-coded blister packs with a 5-
year shelf life. In addition to the color-coding, the size is also clearly marked on each punch.
These tools are perfect for tissue processing or forensic applications. For applications where contamination is not
an issue, the Miltex® Biopsy Punch with Plunger is reusable after cleaning. To clean the cutting edge, rinse with
ethanol or spray with compressed air to remove any contaminants.

Cat. # Description Qty. Cat. # Description Qty.

69031-01 Miltex® Biopsy Punch w/ Plunger, 1.0mm, Fuchsia each 69031-04 Miltex® Biopsy Punch w/Plunger, 3.0mm, Pink each
69031-15 25/pk 69031-45 25/pk
69031-02 Miltex® Biopsy Punch w/Plunger, 1.5mm, Yellow each 69031-05 Miltex® Biopsy Punch w/ Plunger, 4.0mm, Blue each
69031-25 25/pk 69031-55 25/pk
69031-03 Miltex® Biopsy Punch w/ Plunger, 2.0mm, Brown each
69031-35 25/pk

308 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec11_294-311_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 6:04 AM Page 309

Specimen Preparation and Embedding Supplies SECTION 11

® Aqua-Hold ® Para-Marker
Pap Pen A wide tipped pen, designed for use with paraffin sections. The pen
The Aqua-Hold Pap Pen provides a sticky membrane to the glass slide which not only prevents
draws a liquid repellent paraffin sections from falling off but also keeps the sections flat on the
barrier around a section of slide.
tissue. Used like a paint
pen, you just draw a well
on a slide. The barrier
creates the proper surface tension to hold aqueous solutions such as
costly antibody and other valuable specimens. After application, the
barrier material is insoluble in alcohol and acetone but can be removed
after staining with xylene. Each pen holds 13ml of long-lasting material,
making hundreds of wells. Red tint distinguishes the well drawing on the
slide to easily view.
71311 Aqua-Hold Pen each
71313-20 Para-Marker each

® Liquid Blocker-Super PAP PEN ® Tissue Capture Pen

The Newest Staining Guard Pen

With one swift application of the EMS Tissue Capture Pen, you are able
to change your plain glass slide into a coated one.
New and improved... The Super PAP PEN outperforms the original PAP Pen. The EMS Tissue Capture Pen is a coating pen with a wide point (18mm)
The Super PAP PEN may be used at temperatures as high as 120ºF. (The old for fixing various tissue sections (paraffin embedded, frozen and formalin
style PAP PEN worked only up to 90ºF). WIth this high temperature feature, sections, etc.) The unique pen is unaffected by heat up to 120ºC so it
one can now use the Super PAP PEN to per-form the peroxidase method, offers secure and firm adhesion of the tissue section. It may be used in
ABC method, and Fluorescent antibodies method with satisfactory results. Microwave staining, immunostaining, in situ etc….
71310 Super PAP PEN, Large each One application is all that is needed, and after it is applied, allow to dry for
71312 Super PAP PEN, Small each 1-2 minutes. The EMS Tissue Capture may be used in conjunction with our
Pap-Pen (71310) and will allow for easy placement of adherent as well as
non-adherent cells on a glass slide. Immunostaining/ISH can be performed
by applying a few drops of tissue suspension or liquid media onto the glass
TECHNICAL TIP slide which is circled by the Pap-Pen, and then your section can be placed.
71314-10 EMS Tissue Capture Pen each

® Fro-Marker
A wide tipped pen designed for use with frozen sections. The pen
provides a sticky membrane which when applied to the slide and onto
which the section is placed it eliminates the section from falling off,

moving, or wrinkling on the slide during immunostaining procedures.

The membrane is stable up to 110°C and is suitable for vigorous
applications such as in-situ hybridization.
71313-10 Fro-Marker each

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 309
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec11_294-311_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 6:04 AM Page 310

SECTION 11 Specimen Preparation and Embedding Supplies

® Solvent-Resistant Pens & Teeny Writers ® Manomark™ Pen
Solvent Resistant Pens feature
an ultra-permanent ink.
T Resistant to xylene, alcohol, acetone and formalin
T Ideal for histology and cytology
T Markings will not run on embedding cassettes
or frosted/painted slides and labware, even after
repeated washes and solution treatments
T Remove markings with acetic acid, an
ethanol/xylene mixture or paraffin. Testing advised
before use
Teeny Writers are perfect general use lab markers.
T The Twin-Tip Teeny Writer has a fine tip and an ultra
fine tip
T The original Teeny Writer has an extra fine tip
T Both are ideal for writing on Tough-Tags and Tough- Writes on all plastic, glass, metal, wool, paper and cloth, including
Spots PTFE, fluoropolymer resins. With its precision seal valve the pens life is
T Use for labeling samples stored at room temperature preserved and as well it allows for a smooth flow of ink even if it’s left
and not exposed to chemicals and/or caustic agents uncapped. Once dry, the solvent base ink is temperature resistant from
0ºC to 155ºC (32ºF – 310ºF)> Markings are insoluble in water or
The Twin-Tip Too laboratory marking pen provides a
Twin-Tip hydrocarbons, resist many solvents, and are easily removed with
new option for all writing needs. It is the best of both worlds.
Teeny Writer alcohol.
It is resistant to most mild laboratory chemicals and gives
the flexibility of a twin tip pen for fine tip writing on small tubes 72127-AS Manomark Pen Assorted
and labels. Keep it close by utilizing the included handy pocket clip. (4 black, 2 red, 2 green, 2 blue, 2 orange) 12/pk
72127-B1 Manomark, Black only each
Testing is recommended. 72127-B12 Manomark, Black only 12/pk

Cat. # Description Color Tip (Millimeters) Qty. ® Wet Surface Pen

62053-B Solvent Resistant Black Extra Fine (0.6) each
62053-R Solvent Resistant Red Extra Fine (0.6) each
62054-B Twin-Tip Black Fine/Ultra Fine (0.7/0.3) each
62052-B Teeny Writer Black Extra Fine (0.4) each

Mounting Medium: BioMeda, see pages 11, 513 UUUUU

BioMount, see pages 11, 512 UUUUU
Cytoseal, see page 515 UUUUU
Depex, see pages 18, 515 UUUUU
DPX, see pages 18, 515 UUUUU
Eukitt, see pages 18, 515 UUUUU
Entellan, see pages 18, 515 UUUUU
Fluoromount-G, see pages 18 UUUUU
Permount, see pages 21, 516 UUUUU
Quickbond; see page 9 UUUUU This unusual pen will write clearly on wet surfaces, such as marking slots
ShurMount, see page 517 UUUUU on wet Southern, Northern, and Western blots Use it for marking
alignment dots on blotting filters placed over agar plates containing
UV Mount, see page 21, 517 UUUUU
bacterial colonies or phage plaques. Mark lanes on wet plots prior to
Mount Quick, water base, see pages 21, 516 UUUUU
cutting the filter into strips to be incubated separately with different
Mount Quick, solvent base; see pages 21, 516 UUUUU
antisera or probes. It can be used to correct or write on wet labels that
Mini Centrifuge, See Equipment Section page 107 UUUUU were kept in a water bath, in liquid nitrogen or in a freezer at 0 degrees.
Micro Sample Tubes, See Equipment Section page 1073 UUUUU The Wet Surface Pen is extremely useful for marking filters during
Micro Sample Tube Holder, racks processing under water-based buffers. The pen can, of course, also can
See Equipment Section pages 1074 UUUUU
be used to write on dry paper as a standard ball pen.
Mixer Vortex - Genie,
See Equipment Section pages 1086-1093 UUUUU 72128 Wet Surface Pen, Black each
Stirrer/Hot Plate Combination,
See Equipment Section pages 1074-1080 UUUUU

310 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec11_294-311_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 6:04 AM Page 311

Specimen Preparation and Embedding Supplies SECTION 11

® WRITE-ON™ Marker Pens
These pens are made from specially formulated ink and are to be used on anterior surfaces
as well as sides of histology cassettes. The ink will dry almost instantly and withstands
temperatures up to 195°C and is resistant to solvents.
72106-01 Write-On™ Marker Pen, Red each
72106-10 Write-On™ Marker Pen, Red 10/pk

® Marker Pen; Markal Sharpie

Smear resistant, water-resistant, fast-drying no. 15 fine line. Usable on glass, porcelain,
metals, and plastics.
72110 Black Felt Tip each
72120 Black Felt Tip box/12
72130 Red Felt Tip each
72140 Red Felt Tip box/12

® Slide Markers - SHUR/Mark™

A perfect marker designed to mark glass slides and cassettes with priming action; comes
with a replaceable felt tip.
T Quick drying; will not smudge or T Consistent ink flow with effortless
smear. writing.
T Chemically resistant; especially to alco- T Replaceable priming tip, which elimi-
hol, xylene and many other solvents. nates clogged and/or worn out tips.

TO USE: Simply depress the tip until the tip is saturated with ink.
72100-01 Shur/Mark Black each
72100-12 Shur/Mark Black 12/pk
72102-01 Shur/Mark Red each
72102-12 Shur/Mark Red 12/pk
72104-12 Shur/Mark Replacement Tips 12/pk

® High Opacity – Paint Markers

Constructed aluminum barrel, actuating ball and hard felt tips, these markers permanently
cover nearly any surface. Weatherproof. Resistant to alcohol and acetone. Contain xylene.
Markers are available in black, red and white with bullet tips. Except model 130, it writes
like a pen with white ink for marking on dark surfaces, including carbon tabs, which is use
in SEM specimen mounting purpose.
Cat. # Description Pack
72167-R1 Small Marker, Red each
72167-R2 Large Marker, Red each
72168-W1 Pen-like Marker, White each
72168-W2 Large Marker, White each
72168-B1 Small Marker, Black each For our complete line of Light Boxes,
72169-B2 Large Marker, Black each See Photography section, pages 742-743

® StatMark Pen
Permanent ink in an ultrafine tip is ideal for labeling microscope slides and cassettes.
StatMark Pens are made of rigid nylon that allow for precise hand marking on glass slides
as well as on most tissue embedding cassettes. This quick drying ink is highly resistant to
aqueous based stains, alcohols, xylene and xylene substitutes. StatMark Pens do not dry
out easily and last twice as long as many of the leading 'laboratory' pens.
Cat. # Description Pack
72109-01 StatMark Pen each
72109-12 StatMark Pen 12/box

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 311
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec11_312-327_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 6:13 AM Page 312

SECTION 11 Specimen Preparation and Embedding Supplies

® Tissue-Tek® SmartWrite Color Slide Printer
On-Demand Color Slide Printing is what you get with this unit
Features and Benefits
T High resolution color printing - reduces need for managing multiple color slide inventory, lowering costs
T On-demand slide printing - streamlines workflow and reduces specimen identification errors
T Small footprint - fits perfectly on a microtome work station or next to a cytology slide processor
T Prints directly onto slides - eliminates errors from hand writing and label application
T Scannable 2D and 1D bar code, alphanumeric and graphic printing capabilities —
optimizes flexibility for now and in the future
T Optional SmartWrite™ Software - provides configurable label design and is
interfaceable to LIS systems
T Print resistant to Xylene, alcohol, histology reagents, stains, heat, and
chemicals*. Ensures reliable identification of slides now and in the future
Applications
T On demand slide printing - color or black labels printed directly onto slides

Specifications
Electrical Holder Light Proper loading
Power AC100–240VAC, 50/60 Hz, 60 watts Diagnostic Self diagnosis, error messages and codes
Environmental Function
Operational 10 - 40 degrees C (50 - 105 F)
Ambient Temp. Functional
Printing Technology Thermal transfer
Operational 30 - 85% (non-condensing)
Relative Humidity Print Speed Up to 9 slides/minute (monochrome)
Up to 5 slides/minute (solid colors)
Storage -10 - 60 degrees C (14 - 140 F) Up to 4 slides/minute (blended colors)
Ambient Temp.
Print Resolution 300 dpi
Storage 10 - 85% (non-condensing)
Relative Humidity Ink Type Resin thermal transfer

Physical Ribbon Types CMYK: 1000 prints; Black: 5000 prints

Height 8.6" (218.4mm) Printable Colors Multiple solid colors;
Width 7.08" (179.8mm) others available via software

Depth 12.58" (319.5mm) Slide Types 3" x 1" standard or positive charged,
smooth surface white frosted end,
Weight 16.8 lbs. (7.62 kg) clipped corners
User Interface Slide Capacity 100 slides - Blue Slide Holder
Power Button One power switch with LED indicator,
located on the upper right side of the Output Tray Capacity 15 slides
contol panel on the front of the instrument Construction Steel frame with powder-coated
Slide Feed Button One button with LED indicator located on steel and plastic covers
the upper right side of the contol panel on Data Interface USB 2.0
the front of the instrument beneath the Printer Drivers Windows™ XP/Vista/7
power button
Warranty One year parts and labor
Lid Open Button One button located on the upper left side
Applications
Standard Accessories of the instrument
On demand slide printing — color or black labels printed directly
One Operating Manual Blue Slide Illuminates blue slide holder indicating onto slides
One Quickstart Guide
One Printer Driver
One Blue Slide Holder Ordering Information
One Black Print Cartridge
Cat. # Description Qty.
One Color Print Cartridge
65455 Slide Printer each
One Print Head Cleaning Pen
65456 Scanner With Stand each
One USB Cable
65457 SmartWrite Software each
One Power Cord
65458 PC with touchstone, mouse and keyboard each
One Power Converter
65459 Slide Holder, Blue each
Optional Accessories
65455-BL Print Cartridge, Black 6/case
2D Bar Code Scanner with Stand
65455-CO Print Cartridge, Color 6/case
Tissue-Tek® SmartWrite™
Software
Touch Screen PC
Blue Slide Holder one
Black Print Cartridge 6/case * CAUTION: Contact with the Tissue-Tek® SmartWrite™ color printed label while wet with organic solvents will result in loss of printed information
Color Print Cartridge 6/case

312 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec11_312-327_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 6:13 AM Page 313

Specimen Preparation and Embedding Supplies SECTION 11

Electron Microscopy Sciences
® Optional Accessories for Tissue Tek SmartWrite™ Announces their State of the Art
Shuttle® Computer X50V2 PLUS Touch Screen PC
Specifications
Scientific Equipment
RAM 1GB PC3-10600 1333MHZ
DDR3 SODIMM NON-ECC
Power 40W Power Adapter. I
nput: 100- 240V AC
Repair Center
Hard Drive 250GB SATA 5400 RPM LCD Panel 15.6" 16:9 Wide Panel,
8MB 2.5" 1366 x 768 pixels
OS Windows® 7 Home Premium 32 BIT. Touch Screen Single Touch
Includes: Windows®7 Home Web Cam 1.3M Pixel
Premium 32 BIT Recovery DVD
MIC Electret Condenser Microphone
Form Factor All-in-one PC
Left Side Power-on button,
Net Weight 3.6kg Stylus pen port,
Dimension (W) 15.4" x (H) 12.8" x (D) 1.4" USB port x 2,
Processor Intel® Atom™ D510 DC-input for power supply
Dual Core CPU (1,66 GHz). Right Side 4 in 1 Card reader,
CPU on board USB port x 2, Headphone,
Memory 2 Slot (Supports up to 4 GB Mic, LAN port
DDRII, Max 2 x 2GB) Back Panel D-sub port x 1,
Serial port x 2 (optional), No equipment is too small or impossible to either
Chipset NM10
VGA Intel® GMA 3150 with a
Parallel port x 1 (optional), Repair, Refurbish, or Upgrade!
Kensington lock
powerful 400MHz core.
Dynamic Video Memory Audio IDT92HD81 2 Channel High, Our facility is equipped to handle the
Technology (DVMT) 4.0. 2W x 2 Stereo speaker
following Manufacturers:
Intel® ClearVideo Technology Accessories Quick Guide x 1,
Ethernet JMC261 IEEE 802.3u 65W Power Adapter x 1, T Balzers/Baltech T Leica
100Base-T specification power cord x 1, Driver CD x 1
T Denton T Reichert-Jung
compliant. 10MB/s,100MB/s. Wireless LAN IEEE 802.11b/g/n
Support Wake-On-LAN function Card Reader 4 in 1 Card Reader (support T Edwards T LKB
Storage Interface SD/MMC/MS/MS-pro) T Emitech T RMC-Boeckeler
Support 2.5" Hard Drive Software Shuttle Control AP
T Emscope T And Many
DataLogic® Gryphon™ GD4430-HCK1 2D Barcode Scanner T Bio-Rad More…
Specifications
Our unique service allows us to come to
Decoding Capabilities Reading Performance
1D Linear Codes Autodiscriminates Image Capture Graphic Formats: BMP, JPEG,
you, or you send the equipment to us,
all standard 1D codes including TIFF; Greyscale: 256, 16, 2 depending on the level of
GS1,DataBar™ linear codes Image Sensor Wide VGA: 752 x 480 pixels
Repair/Refurbishment needed.
2D Aztec Code; China Han Xin Code; Light Source Aiming 650 nm VLD
Data Matrix; MaxiCode; QR Code
Motion Tolerance 25 IPS Equipment such as:
Electrical
Print Contrast 25% Ratio (Min.)
Current Operating (Typical)160 mA @ 5 VDC; T Vacuum Systems T Lynx
Standby/Idle (Typical): 65 mA @ 5 VDC Reading Angle +/- 40°; Roll (Tilt): 180°;
Input Voltage 4.2 - 5.25 VDC Pitch Skew (Yaw): +/- 40° T Microtomes T Freeze Fracture
Reading Ranges Reading Beeper (Adjustable Tone); T Ultramicrotomes Instruments
Typical Depth Minimum distance determined
of Field by symbol length and scan angle.
Indicators Datalogic ‘Green Spot’ Good
T Tissue Slicers T High Pressure
Read Feedback; Good Read LED
Printing resolution, contrast,
Resolution (Max.) 1D Linear: 0.102 mm/4 mils; T Vibratomes Freezers/
and ambient light dependent. Slammers/
Code 39 5 mils: 4.0 to 19.0 cm / 1.6 to 7.5 in
Data Matrix: 0.178 mm/7 mils; T Ovens
Code 39 10 mils: 1.0 to 30.0 cm / 0.4 to 11.8 in PDF417: 0.102 mm/4 mils Propane Jet
Data Matrix 10 mils: 2.0 to 16.0 cm / 0.8 to 6.3 in Special T Baths
Freezers
Data Matrix 15 mils: 0 to 23.6 cm /0 to 9.3 in
T Shakers
EAN-13 13 mils: 1.5 to 40.0 cm / 0.6 to 15.7 in Disinfectant-Ready enclosures treated with anti-
T And Much More…
PDF417 10 mils: 0.5 to 22.0 cm / 0.2 to 8.6 in microbial additives; Highly visible 4-Dot aimer with T Tissue Processors
QR Code 10 mils: 3.0 to 12.5 cm / 1.2 to 4.9 in center cross for targeted scanning

For more information on any of

our services, a comprehensive
quote, please call, write,
or e-mail us today.

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 313
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec11_312-327_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 6:13 AM Page 314

SECTION 11 Specimen Preparation and Embedding Supplies

® Microscope Glass Slides -Esco
Our microscope glass slides are manufactured by Esco - Erie Scientific Co,
where reliability and quality are recognized to be the best.
T Made from the highest quality glass sheets; white glass.
T The dimensions of the slides have been standardized to millimeters
according to the U.S. Government Specifications.
T They are packed with care to assure cleanliness.
T The glass is fully annealed to minimize chipping.
Our microscope glass slides are precleaned and are made from clear-white
glass. They are individually inspected and free from moisture, dirt, and film.
All of our slides are flat, uniform and durable. They are packed 72 slides/bx
and cellophane wrapped. Physical Properties:
Glass Density: ....................................................................2.4024g/cm3
Softening Point: ............................................................................724ºC
Microscope Slide Specifications: Soda Lime Glass Annealing Point:............................................................................545ºC
Strain Point: ..................................................................................511ºC
Chemical Makeup Green (%) White (%)
Dispersion Value (Nu Value): ..............................................................64
Silicon Dioxide 72.2 72.15 Dimensional Variance: ..............................................................±1.5000
Sodium Oxide 14.5 14.25 Thermal Expansion: ..........................................(0 -300ºC) 8.36x106/ ºC
Calcium Oxide 6.5 6.25 Dielectric Constant:..................................@20ºC (68ºF) (1MHz):ET =6.7
Magnesium Oxide 4.4 4.1
Young’s Modulus: ..............................................E = 10,000,000 lbs/sq"
Aluminum Oxide 1.5 1.12
Potassium Oxide 0.3 1.15 Torsion Modulus: ................................................G = 4,000,000 lbs/sq"
Sulfur Trioxide 0.3 0.3 Poisson’s Ratio: ..........................................................................μ = 0.2
Iron Oxide 0.1 0.3 Luminous Transmittance: ............................................@ 0.040: 91.8%
Titanium Oxide 0.05 0.05 Refractive Index: ................................1.517 @ 546.07 nm wavelengths

® 1. Microscope Slide, Plain End

Cat.# Thickness Size,mm Pack
71880-01 1.2 mm 25x75 Gross
71880-10 1.2 mm 25x75 10 Gross
71880-20 1.2 mm 25x75 20 Gross

® 2. Microscope Slide, Frosted End

These slides have 3⁄4” sandblasted frosting on one end which allows for easy marking.
Cat.# Thickness Size,mm Pack
71870-01 1.2 mm 25x75 Gross
71870-10 1.2 mm 25x75 10 Gross
71870-20 1.2 mm 25x75 20 Gross

® 3. Microscope Slide, SUPERFROST® End

With a superfrosted end. These slides have one side which is frosted with a brilliant white opaque
coating that will take and retain all pen markings. They offer superior readability and they are
permanent.
Cat.# Thickness Size,mm Pack
71867-01 1 mm 25x75 Gross
71867-10 1 mm 25x75 10 Gross
71868-01 1.2 mm 25x75 Gross
71868-10 1.2 mm 25x75 10 Gross

® 4. Microscope Slide, SUPERFROST® PLUS - Adhesion Slide

These Superfrost Plus(+) glass slides are made by a new process offering the following features:
T They place a permanent positive charge in the microscope slide.
T They electrostatically attract frozen tissue sections and cytology preparations, binding them
to the slide.
T They form a bridge so that covalent bonds develop between formalin fixed sections and the glass.
T Tissue sections and cytological preparations adhere better to the Plus glass slides without
the need for special adhesives or protein coatings.
continued UUUUU

314 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec11_312-327_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 6:13 AM Page 315

Specimen Preparation and Embedding Supplies SECTION 11

® Microscope Glass Slides -Esco (continued)
® 4. Microscope Slide, SUPERFROST PLUS - Adhesion Slide (continued)
®

BENEFITS:
T Plus glass puts an end to background staining.
T It eliminates blue or red background staining which is often encountered in hematoxylin
and eosin staining of tissue sections mounted on albuminized glass.
T No brown background staining occurs when immuno-peroxidase or in situ DNA procedures
are performed on our Plus glass. A higher degree of enzyme digestion can be performed
on plus glass without the loss of tissue sections.
T Cytological preparations placed on Plus glass resist cell loss during enzyme digestion,
DNA denaturation and RNA hybridization.
T Plus glass improves tissue adherence in microwave staining.
T Chromic acid washes are redundant for molecular hybridization because the slides are RNAse-free.
T Plus slides are Color coded to help keep track of specimens during processing as well as filing.
The slides measure: 25x75 mm, 1 mm thick.
71869-10 Superfrost Plus Slide, White 1 gross 71869-31 Superfrost Plus Slide, Green 10 gross
71869-11 Superfrost Plus Slide, White 10 gross 71869-40 Superfrost Plus Slide, Pink 1 gross
71869-20 Superfrost Plus Slide, Blue 1 gross 71869-41 Superfrost Plus Slide, Pink 10 gross
71869-21 Superfrost Plus Slide, Blue 10 gross 71869-50 Superfrost Plus Slide, Yellow 1 gross
71869-30 Superfrost Plus Slide, Green 1 gross 71869-51 Superfrost Plus Slide, Yellow 10 gross

® 5. Superfrost® Plus Gold Slides

These slides are specially designed for the application of fresh or formalin fixed frozen tissue.
They are inherently tissue binding so there is no need to add sprays or adhesives to the slides.
FEATURES:
T Securely attach frozen breast, brain, skin and other normally difficult to bond tissue sec-
tions to the slide.
T Ideal when special stains, immunocytochemical and in situ DNA hybridization techniques
are applied on fresh and fixed frozen tissue.
T Assist tissue adherence during immunocytochemical analysis of estrogen and progesterone
receptors in fresh frozen breast tissue.
T They are compatible with both toluidine blue and hematoxylin and eosin rapid frozen section stains.
71864-01 Superfrost Plus Gold Slide 25 bx
71864-10 Superfrost Plus Gold Slide 10 cs

® 6. Colormark™ Plus Glass Slide

Specimen Slide identification is VITAL. Automated etched slide labeling instruments ensure specimen
slide integrity but are difficult to read on ordinary slides. To clearly read diamond scribed slide labels
against any surface, you need the only slide designed to be used with your automated slide labeling
instrument. You need COLORMARK slides.These brightly printed slides greatly improve etched labeling
visibility and offer all the advantages of Superfrost® slides. A bright contrasting color has been printed
on the back of the Superfrost end so that patient or specimen information etched through the painted
end on the front is clearly visible. Colormark Plus slides are adhesive coated therefore ensuring the
adhesion of the section to the slide during staining procedures.
63400-10 White Frosted End Front, Black frosted End Back 1 gross
63400-11 White Frosted End Front, Black frosted End Back 10 gross
63400-20 Blue Frosted End Front, Blue Frosted End Back 1 gross
63400-21 Blue Frosted End Front, Blue Frosted End Back 10 gross
63400-30 Green Frosted End Front, Green Frosted End Back 1 gross
63400-31 Green Frosted End Front, Green Frosted End Back 10 gross
63400-40 Pink Frosted End Front, Red Frosted End Back 1 gross
63400-41 Pink Frosted End Front, Red Frosted End Back 10 gross
63400-50 Yellow Frosted End Front, Red Frosted End Back 1 gross
63400-51 Yellow Frosted End Front, Red Frosted End Back 10 gross
63400-60 Lavender Frosted End Front, Black Frosted End Back 1 gross
63400-61 Lavender Frosted End Front, Black Frosted End Back 10 gross

continued UUUUU

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 315
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec11_312-327_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 6:13 AM Page 316

SECTION 11 Specimen Preparation and Embedding Supplies

® Microscope Glass Slides -Esco (continued)
® 7. Control Slides
Use our Histology Control Slides and you will always know for sure which specimen is the Patients
and which is the Control.
T Patient and Control tissue samples on the T Proof of correct staining procedures.
same slide. T Easy and permanent identification of
T Positive identification of control and patient slides.
samples. Available in two configurations: Style #329+
T Utmost adhesion of samples to slide with 3⁄4 inch of frosted area; style 334+
throughout staining procedure. with 1 inch frosted area.
63448-10 Control Slide 329+ 144/pk
63448-20 Control Slide 334+ 144/pk

® 8. Special Glass Slides:

® A. Cytology Slide: 1x3” (25x75mm), 1mm Thick
T Superfrost letters VCE and lines on the same side as the Superfrost end.
71874-01 Cyto-Slide Letters VCE & Lines 1 gross
71874-10 Cyto-Slide Letters VCE & Lines 10 gross
T Superfrost letters VC and lines on the same side as the Superfrost end.
71875-01 Cyto-Slide Letters VC & Lines 1 gross
71875-10 Cyto-Slide Letters VC & Lines 10 gross
T Dakin - A fully frosted sandblasted surface on the same side as the Superfrosted end.
71876-01 Dakin - Fully Frosted Slide 1 gross
71876-10 Dakin - Fully Frosted Slide 10 gross
® B. Round Corner Microslides: This item is discontinued. Please see SuperFrost™
Clipped Corner Slide, #s 71882-01 and 71882-10 below.

® C. Concavity Slides Polished spherical depression. Useful for tissue cultures.

Measurements:
Glass Slide Size: ..........................................................................................26mm x 76mm
Concavity Diameter: ..........................................................................................15 - 18 mm
Depth of Well: ................................................................................................0.5 - 0.8 mm

Cat.# Thickness No. Wells Pack

71878-01 1.4-1.6mm 1 12/pk
71878-03 1.4-1.6mm 2 12/pk
71878-04 1.4-1.6mm 3 12/pk
71878-05 1.95-2.35mm 1 12/pk
71878-06 1.95-2.35mm 2 12/pk
71878-07 3.12-3.22mm 1 12/pk
71878-08 3.12-3.22mm 2 12/pk

® D. Slides with Etched Rings

Useful for Fluorescent Antibody Examination. The size of the slide is 3”x1”, approximately 1 mm
thick, with an etched frosted end. Pre-cleaned. Packed 72/bx.
71879-10 Two Etched 10mm Circle Slide 1 gross
71879-11 Two Etched 10mm Circle Slide 10 gross
71879-15 Two Etched 15mm Circle Slide 1 gross
71879-16 Two Etched 15mm Circle Slide 10 gross

® 9. SuperFrost™ Clipped Corner Slide

Designed specially for the Sysmex SP-100 slide prep unit and recommended for the Diagnostics.
The 45 degree clipped corner slide offers exceptional cleanliness and resistance to sticking. The
tight tolerances for the length and width help to reduce accumulation of glass chips within the
instrument. The pre-cleaned slide is 25 x 75mm and approximately 1 mm thick.
Ideal for technicians, who routinely prepare large number of slides.
Cat.# Description Qty
71882-01 SuperFrost™Clipped Corner Slide 1 gross
71882-10 SuperFrost™Clipped Corner Slide 10 gross

316 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec11_312-327_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 6:14 AM Page 317

Specimen Preparation and Embedding Supplies SECTION 11

® Microscope Slide – Gold Seal® ® Large Glass Slides
In our line of slides we proudly introduce GOLD
SEAL® microscope slides for your convenience.
GOLDSEAL® slides are made from pure white glass
(soda-lime) and at accurately cut sizes. To
preserve the highest quality from manufacturer to
ultimate user, all GOLD SEAL® slides are
hermetically sealed in our Moisture-Barrier™
system, providing a dry-slide environments during
shipment and storage.
UltraStick™ (adhesion coating: APTES, 3-
Aminopropyl Triethoxysilane)– Adhesion coated
micro slides- one of the best from GOLD SEAL®-
are ideal for histological and cytological
applications demanding superior specimen-to-slide
adhesion. The enhanced silane coating eliminates
tedious procedures and special additives to your In addition to our comprehensive collection of glass slides
water bath. Procedures such as manufactured by ESCO we now carry large glass slides
immunoperoxidase, in situ DNA hybridization, which are available in 75x38mm and 75x51mm. These
enzyme digestion and frozen tissue processing will slides are precleaned, individually selected and are
benefit from the amplified adhesion characteristics suitable for large specimen sections such as, brain tissue.
of this product. Overall cost savings and assured 71860-01 75x38mm Glass Slide, 1mm Thick 1 gross/pk
quality of your prepared specimen will be 71862-01 75x51mm Glass Slide, 1.2mm Thick 1 gross/pk
recognized with UltraStick™ from Gold Seal®
Cat.# Gold Seal Description Pack
Plain Slides
® Quartz Microscope Slides
63710-05 3010 3 x 1", 1 mm Thick 1 gross
63710-25 3010 3 x 1", 1 mm Thick 25 gross
63711-05 3048 3 x 1", 1.2 mm Thick 1 gross
63711-25 3048 3 x 1", 1.2 mm Thick 25 gross
63712-05 3010-P 3 x 1", 1mm Thick – Cytologentics processing 1 gross
63712-25 3010-P 3 x 1", 1mm Thick – Cytologentics processing 25 gross
Patented Moistur-Barrier™ enclosing 5 gross inner packages
63718-05 3054 25 x 75mm, 1mm Thick, Plain 5 gross
63718-25 3054 25 x 75mm, 1mm Thick, Plain 25 gross
63719-05 3055 25 x 75mm, 1mm Thick, White Rite-On™ Frost 5 gross
63719-25 3055 25 x 75mm, 1mm Thick, White Rite-On™ Frost 25 gross
Rite-On™ Frosted Slides with brilliant white epoxy ink
There are many applications that require slides that have
63720-05 3051 3 x 1", 1mm Thick, Frosted One End, One Side 1 gross
63720-25 3051 3 x 1", 1mm Thick, Frosted One End, One Side 25 gross absolute UV transparency and high temperature
63721-05 3050 25 x 75mm, 1mm Thick, Frosted One End, One Side 1 gross properties. EMS now is introducing the highest quality,
63721-25 3050 25 x 75mm, 1mm Thick, Frosted One End, One Side 25 gross clear fused quartz microscope slides to meet all of these
63722-05 3050-P 25 x 75mm, 1mm Thick, Frosted End, One Side, requirements.
Cytogentics Processing 1 gross T The window of highest transparency to UV is
63722-25 3050-P 25 x 75mm, 1mm Thick, Frosted End, One Side,
between o.15μ to 5μ.
Cytogentics Processing 25 gross
63723-05 3049 3 x 1", 1.2mm Thick, Frosted One End, One Side 1 gross T Typical flatness measured 2" to 4" bands per inch.
63723-25 3049 3 x 1", 1.2mm Thick, Frosted One End, One Side 25 gross T Soften point is about 1250ºC (2282ºF).
UltraFrost™ Frosted Slides, white epoxy ink frosted one end, one side T Standard microscope slide thickness is 1mm.
63728-05 3063 25 x 75mm, 1mm Thick, Frosted one End with Gold Seal Logo 1 gross Cat.# Description Pack
63728-25 3063 25 x 75mm, 1mm Thick, Frosted one End with Gold Seal Logo25 gross 72250-01 Slide, 1” x 1” (25 x 25 mm) each
63729-05 3064 25 x 75mm, 1mm Thick, Frosted one End with 72250-02 Slide, 2” x 1” (50 x 25 mm) each
Pre-Print Patient Information Label and Gold Seal® Logo 1 gross 72250-03 Slide, 3” x 1” (75 x 25 mm) each
63729-25 3064 25 x 75mm, 1mm Thick, Frosted one End with 72250-04 Slide, 2” x 3” (50 x 76 mm) each
Pre-Print Patient Information Label and Gold Seal® Logo 25 gross 72250-05 Slide, 10mm x 10 mm each
Fluorescent Antibody Slides
These slides have all of the same properties of the ones
63732-05 3032 3 x 1", 1.2mm Thick with Two 10mm diameter circles,
Frosted one Side, one End with White Epoxy Ink, including Circles 1 gross above with the only difference is these are 0.5mm thick:
63732-02 3032 3 x 1", 1.2mm Thick with Two 10mm diameter circles, 72250-06 1” x 1” (25x25mm) each
Frosted one Side, one End with White Epoxy Ink, including Circles25 gross 72250-07 1” x 2” (25 x 50mm) each
UltraStick™/UltraFrost™ Adhesion Slides on frosted one end, one side with epoxy ink 72250-08 1” x 3” ( 25x76mm) each
63734-01 3039 25 x 75mm, 1mm Thick, Surface Coated with APTES for Adhesion 1 gross For Quartz Coverslips, see page 325 UUUUU
63734-10 3039 25 x 75mm, 1mm Thick, Surface Coated with APTES for Adhesion 10 gross

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 317
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec11_312-327_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 6:14 AM Page 318

SECTION 11 Specimen Preparation and Embedding Supplies

® Excell™ Adhesion Slides ® Adhesion Slide – TruBond™
Adhesive slides with proven performance under high
temperature and pH conditions
These adhesive, including the hydrophilic TruBond™ 360, slides
work well with automatic IHC applications. EMS is confident that
the quality of these slides will exceed your expectations. For
problems with tissue loss try our TruBond™ 380.
Available colors: White, Blue, Green and Yellow.

TruBond™ 380 TruBond™ 360 TruBond™ 200 TruView™ Fine

The Excell slide was developed with superior High Clarity, Low High Clarity, Low High Clarity, Low High Clarity, Low
Glass Type
Fluorescence White Fluorescence White Fluorescence White Fluorescence White
adhesion and wettabiliy properties, and has
been shown to perform very well in most Surface Wettability Hydrophilic Hydrophilic Hydrophobic Hydrophilic
applications. Adhesion Very Strong Strong Strong Good
T Excell Adhesion Surface for Heat
™
Edge Treatment Ground Corner Ground Corner Ground Corner Ground Corner
Induced Epitope Retrieval – Excell™ was For Manual IHC Yes Yes Yes No
developed for use in the HIER methods that
require high pH antigen retrieval solutions, For Automatic IHC Yes Yes Yes No
including EDTA. Formalin fixed paraffin For Fluorescence Yes Yes Yes Yes
embedded tissue demonstrated more con- Recommended T HIER processes when T All IHC applications T All IHC applications T All standard
sistent attachment when performing these Applications tissue type require procedures
procedures on the Excell™ surface. T HIER pH 6 & pH 9 T Routine histology
extra strong adhesion protocols
T Automated Staining – Excell™ has a uni- T Epitope enhancement
form hydrophilic surface that works extreme- & DNA probe T Routine histology
ly well with automated staining equipment. procedures T Frozen section
T Cell Culture – Excell™ surface technology T Autopsy & brain
conditions the surface to enhance the sectioning
attachment of anchorage dependent cell
lines, including many fastidious lines, such TruBond™ is packaged 100 slides per box, 10 boxes to a case.
as primary neuronal cells. Attachment and
proliferation is increased so cells achieve a Cat# Description Color Qty Cat# Description Color Qty
confluent monolayer sooner 63700-W1 TruBond™ 380 White 10/bx 63702-W1 TruBond™ 200 White 10/bx
T Plastic – Excell™ works well for both Epon 63700-W10 1000/cs 63702-W10 1000/cs
and Methyl Methacrylate sections. Its uni- 63700-B1 TruBond™ 380 Blue 10/bx 63702-B1 TruBond™ 200 Blue 10/bx
formly hydrophilic surface allows the sec- 63700-B10 1000/cs 63702-B10 1000/cs
tions to spread well during initial attachment. 63700-G1 TruBond™ 380 Green 10/bx 63702-G1 TruBond™ 200 Green 10/bx
Section adherence is maintained throughout 63700-G10 1000/cs 63702-G10 1000/cs
lengthy staining procedure. 63700-Y1 TruBond™ 380 Yellow 10/bx 63702-Y1 TruBond™ 200 Yellow 10/bx
63700-Y10 1000/cs 63702-Y10 1000/cs
T Laser Capture Microdissection – Excell™
63701-W1 TruBond™ 360 White 10/bx 63703-W1 TruView™ Fine White 10/bx
gives you the advantage of excellent tissue
63701-W10 1000/cs 63703-W10 1000/cs
adherence of all tissue types, yet it easily
63701-B1 TruBond™ 360 Blue 10/bx 63703-B1 TruView™ Fine Blue 10/bx
releases those area of interest identified for 63701-B10 1000/cs 63703-B10 1000/cs
Laser Capture Microdissection. 63701-G1 TruBond™ 360 Green 10/bx 63703-G1 TruView™ Fine Green 10/bx
63701-G10 1000/cs 63703-G10 1000/cs
Cat.# Description Qty 63701-Y1 TruBond™ 360 Yellow 10/bx 63703-Y1 TruView™ Fine Yellow 10/bx
64370-01 Excell™ Adhesion Slide 144/pk 63701-Y10 1000/cs 63703-Y10 1000/cs

® Retriever Tissue Slides

Retriever Tissue Slides are high adhesive glass microscope slides for General Properties
paraffin-embedded tissue section, including tissue arrays. The slides T Retriever Tissue Slides are made T Autoclavable
were designed and optimized for the EMS Antigen Retriever (62700 from soda lime glass T Supplied in plastic boxes of 72
series) to preserve the section attachment and tissue morphology during T Dimensions approximately 76 x pieces (call for carton price, 20
heat-induced epitope recovery in Retriever in pH6 (Low), pH9 (High), or 26mm, Thickness 1.0mm. boxes in a carton)
Universal Retriever buffer. T 90° ground edges T Carry recommended best before
Slides can also be successfully used in any other epitope-recovery T Colored or white marking area date and batch number for com-
technology (autoclave, microwave, proteolitic) and show superior 20mm, at one end, on one side prehensive information and trace-
performance over positively charged or polylysine-coated slides, T Pre-cleaned, ready for use ability
especially in high pH buffers and recovery buffers containing EDTA.
Cat.# Description Qty For more information on the Retriever,
71880-50 Retriever Tissue Slides 72/pk see pages 612-613 UUUUU

318 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec11_312-327_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 6:14 AM Page 319

Specimen Preparation and Embedding Supplies SECTION 11

® Poly-L-Lysine Coated
and Silane Treated ® Borosilicate Capillary
Microscope Slide Micro Glass Slide
Our premium glass slides with a frosted Made from Corning® 7740
end are now available pre-coated with borosilicate,low expansion,
either Poly-L-Lysine or Silane type I glass.
(aminoalkysilane). These slides improve Micro glass slides are precision rectangular glass capillary tubes for
the adhesion of tissues to the slide. use in microscopic viewing of liquid samples. Capillary action
63410-01 Poly-L-Lysine Coated Slides 72/bx instantly collects the sample and the thin glass walls minimize
63410-02 Poly-L-Lysine Coated Slides 144/bx evaporation. The design of these cells eliminates the needs for cover
63411-01 Silane Coated Slides 72/bx glass and the hanging drop method. These micro glass slides can
63411-02 Silane Coated Slides 144/bx withstand heat up to 500°C. Samples can be retained for future
reference by sealing or cementing open ends. Micro glass slide are
TECHNICAL TIP packaged in plastic vials.
Poly-L-Lysine Coating Of Slides I.D. tolerance ± 10%, Wall tolerance ± 20%
Poly-L-Lysine with a molecular weight greater than 150,000 (150,000- TECHNICAL — CORNING® GLASS 7740
300,000) should be used. To make a stock solution: Take 0.1% Poly-L-
Common Names – Borosilicate, Low Expansion, Type I Glass.
Lysine in distilled water and store it in a dispensing vial and freeze it at
-20°C. A drop (10-15ml) is dispersed at the end of a clean glass slide Standards – Type I, Glass A Properties:
and smeared along its length with the end of another clean glass slide in Borosilicate conforming to federal Coeff. Of Exp. ..........32.5 x 10-7 cm/cm/°C
specification DD-G-54lb and ASTM Strain Point ......................................510 °C
the same way as blood film. Make sure that the film of Poly-L-Lysine is
E-438. Also meets the U.S. Anneal Point......................................560 °C
thin enough for interference colors to be seen as it is being smeared. The Pharmacopedia specs for Type I Soften Point ......................................821 °C
slide is ready to use within minutes of drying. Borosilicate Glass. Density........................................2.23 g/cm2
If the Poly-L-Lysine is properly applied, it will not affect immunostaining, but Composition: % Approximate Youngs Mod ....................6.4 x 103 Kg/mm
2

it may cause precipitation in some silver impregnation methods. Therefore, SiO2 ............................................80.6 Refract Index ............1.74 @ Sodium D Line
It should be avoided if immunogold-silver methods are to be used. B2O3 ..............................................10 Temp Limits ..........490°C (Extreme service)
Na2O ............................................4.0 ..............................230°C (Normal Service)
Al2O3 ............................................2.3 Max. Thermal Shock ........................160 °C
® Polysine™ Microscope Misc. Traces ................................0.1
Adhesion Slide Dimensions
ID. mm Wall Length
The permanent bio-adhesive Cat. # Path x Width Thickness mm Qty.
material on our Polysine™ slide Standard Micro Glass Slides
attracts frozen and paraffin 63820-05 0.02 x 0.2 0.020 50 30/vial
embedded sections, centrifuge 63820-10 0.02 x 0.2 0.020 100 30/vial
preparation and cytology smears. 63821-05 0.03 x 0.3 0.025 50 33/vial
63821-10 0.03 x 0.3 0.025 100 33/vial
Cat.# Description Qty 63822-05 0.04 x 0.4 0.030 50 36/vial
63412-01 Polysine™ Adhesion Slide 72/bx 63822-10 0.04 x 0.4 0.030 100 36/vial
63412-02 Polysine™ Adhesion Slide 2x72/bx 63823-05 0.05 x 0.5 0.040 50 44/vial
63823-10 0.05 x 0.5 0.040 100 44/vial
® Permanox™ and 63824-05 0.10 x 1.0 0.090 50 40/vial
Polystyrene 63824-10 0.10 x 1.0 0.090 100 40/vial
63825-05 0.20 x 2.0 0.150 50 36/vial
Microscope Slides 63825-10 0.20 x 2.0 0.150 100 36/vial
Permanox™ is a strong, biologically 63826-05 0.30 x 3.0 0.300 50 31/vial
inert material resistant to non- 63826-10 0.30 x 3.0 0.300 100 31/vial
chlorinated hydrocarbons, acetone, and 63827-05 0.40 x 4.0 0.400 50 28/vial
other EM reagents. Permanox™ slides 63827-10 0.40 x 4.0 0.400 100 28/vial
allow you to do cell fixation and staining 63828-10 0.50 x 5.0 0.300 100 14/vial
on the slide; they can be cut with 63829-10 0.60 x 6.0 0.400 100 12/vial
63830-10 0.70 x 7.0 0.460 100 9/vial
scissors. Permanox™ has not been
63831-10 0.80 x 8.0 0.540 100 7/vial
shown to be autofluorescent. All of the 63832-10 0.90 x 9.0 0.600 100 6/vial
microscope slides are 1” x 3”. 63833-10 1.00 x 10.0 0.670 100 4/vial
NOTE: Long exposure to solvents will cause the 63840-05 0.05 x 1.0 0.030 50 50/vial
slide to warp. Xylene and Toluene based mounting 63840-10 0.05 x 1.0 0.030 100 50/vial
media should be avoided. Glycerol, gelatin, and 63841-05 0.10 x 2.0 0.100 50 45/vial
other aqueous based media are recommended. 63841-10 0.10 x 2.0 0.100 100 45/vial
63842-05 0.20 x 4.0 0.150 50 36/vial
63842-10 0.20 x 4.0 0.150 100 36/vial
71885 Permanox™ Microscope Slide 20/pk 63843-05 0.30 x 6.0 0.300 50 24/vial
71886 Permanox™ Microscope Slide 100/pk 63843-10 0.30 x 6.0 0.300 100 24/vial
71888 Polystyrene Microscope Slide 20/pk 63844-05 0.40 x 8.0 0.400 50 18/vial
71889 Polystyrene Microscope Slide 100/pk 63844-10 0.40 x 8.0 0.400 100 18/vial

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 319
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec11_312-327_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 5/17/15 9:57 PM Page 320

SECTION 11 Specimen Preparation and Embedding Supplies

EMS is proud to introduce...
® BrightSlide™ D and BrightSlide™ DB

320 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec11_312-327_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 5/17/15 9:58 PM Page 321

Specimen Preparation and Embedding Supplies SECTION 11

® BrightSlide™ D and BrightSlide™ DB (continued)

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 321
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec11_312-327_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 7/7/14 6:06 PM Page 322

SECTION 11 Specimen Preparation and Embedding Supplies

® Microscope Slide-Wells ® Gridded
Disposable Liquid-Holding Wells Microscope
Slides
These 3 x 1” slides have
an indexed grid on the
reverse side of the frosted
end. The ink is resistant
to stains and common
laboratory solvents. Each
square grid fills one low-
powered-field
Convenient Pre-cut, twin adhesive well stickers (1cm diameter) firmly (approximately 100X
adhere to microscope slides. Examine specimens with or without cover magnification). These slides make it easy to locate an organism or cell
slips. Available in depths of 0.25mm and 0.50mm. every time. There are 64 squares in total. The slides are available with
Multiple Applications Examine or count tissue culture cells, yeast, coatings of Poly-L-Lysine or Silane, or they can be purchased plain
bacteria and other microorganisms. Piggy-back with Microscope Slide- (uncoated). Packaged 72 slides/box.
Grids to facilitate counting and sizing. The grid measures 2 mm square-16mm total. Numbers 1-8 and alpha A-H.
Versatile - Compatible with different styles of microscopes (conventional,
inverted or dissecting).
® 1. Gridded Microscope Slides without hydrophobic coating.
Chemically Inert - Made from polyester with an acrylic adhesive. 63405-01 Grid Slides, Uncoated 72/pk
Microscope Slide-Wells are inert and stable under most laboratory conditions. 63405-02 Grid Slides, Uncoated 144/pk
63406-01 Grid Slides, Poly-L-Lysine 72/pk
70366-12 Slide Wells, 0.25mm thick 25/pk 63406-02 Grid Slides, Poly-L-Lysine 144/pk
70366-13 Slide Wells, 0.50mm thick 25/pk 63407-01 Grid Slides, Silane 72/pk
63407-02 Grid Slides, Silane 144/pk
® Microscope Slide-Grids ® 2. Gridded Microscope Slides with hydrophobic coating.
Disposable Adhesive Grids 63408-01 Grid Slides, Round well 72/pk
63409-02 Grid Slides, Square well 72/pk

® Lovins Micro-Slide Field Finder

Convenient - Easy-to adhere stickers having side-by-side twin grids

(20mm x 20mm each with 1mm line spacing) for microscope slides. Count
or measure cells and estimate the size or length of microscopic or semi-
micro objects
Versatile - Compatible with different styles of microscopes (conventional,
Marking a microscope slide to identify a particular field of interest for
inverted or dissecting). Virtually all cells and specimens placed on top of
future reference has always been a difficult problem for many
Slide-Grids can be counted and/or sized.
microscopists.
Dry Or Wet - Use with dry specimens or suspended specimens such as
The Field Finder has a precision rectangular-coordinate grid pattern, which
cells held in buffer under cover slips. Separate cover slips can be placed is accurately positioned on a special microscope slide. The slide has been
over each Slide-Grid. carefully edge ground to provide straight edges and square corners to
Chemically Inert - Made from polyester with an acrylic adhesive. Slide- ensure repeatable results
Grids are inert and stable under most laboratory conditions. Lovins Micros-Slide Field Finder helps you to index points of interest on a
microscope slide the same way you find them on a road map. A standard
70366-14 Slide Grids, 20mm x 20mm 40/pk 75 x 25mm glass slide has a photo etched grid pattern of 1mm squares,
subdivided into 0.1 mm intervals. Each square is marked with a letter and
a number. You center the detail in the field of the microscope, replace the
specimen slide with the field finder, and read the coordinates. Note
reading on slide, and you can find that detail immediately by reversing
procedure.
The pattern is imaged in vacuum deposited chrome for durability.
Cat.# Slide Size Qty
72266-01 Micro-Slide Field Finder, 75 x 25 mm each

322 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec11_312-327_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 6:14 AM Page 323

Specimen Preparation and Embedding Supplies SECTION 11

® PTFE Printed Slides

PTFE Printed Slides, are extremely hydrophobic, acetone proof, chemical
resistant and autoclavable. They are perfect for controlling cross-
63414-13 63414-10 63415-12
contamination in staining, immunolabeling and immunofluorescence tests.
All printed slides are precleaned. The well surface is 100% wettable, which
enhances cell attachment and increases its spreading capabilities within
the well. These slides minimize the use of expensive purified antigens 63415-32 63415-08 63415-15
and antibodies. The slides measure 3x1” (76x26x1mm).
EMS Printed Slides are manufactured to order offering maximum shelf life.
The shelf life of PTFE Printed Slides range from 18 months to two years.
However, it is recommended that all glass slides (Printed or Un-printed) be 63416-08 63416-15 63417-13
used in a timely manner to avoid glass “weathering”, (slides becoming cloudy
or hazy even with proper storage. All of our Printed Slides are autoclavable
and have a frosted end. They are intended for one time use only.
63417-15 63418-11 63419-08
All EMS printed slides are printed with White PTFE other colors are available upon request.

FEATURES:
T Super Hydrophobic Mask
63419-10 63419-12 63419-14
T Clean, Wettable Wells
T A Bioadhesive Surface Treatment to Enhance Cell and Tissue Attachment
Cat.# Number of Well Well Size Pack
63419-VIR 63420-05 63420-08
63414-13 1 Ring 13 mm Dia. 72/pk
63414-10 1 Square 10.7x10.7mm 72/pk
63415-12 1 Round 12 mm Dia. 72/pk
63415-32 1 Oval 24.4x16.7mm 72/pk
63415-08 1 Round 8 mm Dia. 72/pk 63420-11 63421-07 63421-10
63415-15 1 Round 15 mm Dia. 72/pk
63416-08 2 Round 8 mm Dia. 72/pk
63416-15 2 Round 15 mm Dia. 72/pk
63417-13 2 Ring 13 mm Dia. 72/pk 63421-11 63423-05 63423-08
63417-15 2 Square 15x15mm 72/pk
63418-11 3 Ring 11.28mm Dia. 72/pk
63419-08 3 Round 8 mm Dia. 72/pk
63419-10 3 Round 10 mm Dia. 72/pk 63422-11 63424-06
63422-06
63419-12 3 Round 12 mm Dia. 72/pk
63419-14 3 Round 14 mm Dia. 72/pk
63419-VIR 3 Round TGH VIROLOGY 72/pk
63420-05 4 Round 5 mm Dia. 72/pk
63420-08 4 Round 8 mm Dia. 72/pk 63425-05 63429-04 63430-04
63420-11 4 Ring 11.43 mm Dia. 72/pk
63421-07 5 Round 7 mm Dia. 72/pk
63421-10 5 Round 10 mm Dia. 72/pk
63421-11 Etched 5 Round 11.43 mm Dia. 72/pk 63434-02
63423-05 6 Round 5 mm Dia. 72/pk
63423-08 6 Round 8 mm Dia. 72/pk
63422-06 8 Round 6 mm Dia. 72/pk
63422-11 8 Round 11 mm Dia. 72/pk TECHNICAL TIP
63424-06 10 Round 6 mm Dia. 72/pk Our PTFE Printed slides may be used for all types of Cell Culture work
63425-05 12 Round 5 mm Dia. 72/pk and they may be sterilized by UV light, Autoclave as well as ETOH. These
63429-04 21 Round 4 mm Dia. 72/pk unique slides can be coverslipped with the addition of a little more mounting
63430-04 24 Round 4 mm Dia. 72/pk media then a plain slide would use.
63434-02 30 Round 2 mm Dia. 72/pk

® Macro/Latex Agglutination
Cat.# Glass Size Configuration Well/Ring Size Pack
63450-31 4” x 3” 3 Ring, yellow 26.4 mm 25/pk
63450-32 4.25”x2” 3 Ring, white 26.4 mm 25/pk 63450-32
63450-31 63453-61
63453-61 4.4”x2.1” 6, white oval 17.4mm x26mm 25/pk
63453-63 4.215”x2” 6 white oval 17.4mmx26mm 25/pk
63456-15 4.331”x2.165” 10 Ring white 15 mm 25/pk
63459-15
63459-15 4.75”x3.5” 15 Ring white 15 mm 25/pk
63460-15 3”x2”x1.2mm 15 Well 11.28mm (Etched) 25/pk 63453-63 63456-15
63460-15

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 323
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec11_312-327_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 6:15 AM Page 324

SECTION 11 Specimen Preparation and Embedding Supplies

® Cover Glass – GOLD SEAL® ® Micro Cover
GOLD SEAL® cover glass is made from pre-selected, pre-cleaned Glasses
silicate glass. It is available in various shapes and thicknesses and Manufactured from clear
is packaged with desiccants in a lint free box. Both cover glass cases white, borosilicate glass.
and slide boxes convert to convenient slide storage files. They offer super clarity, are
Standard perfectly flat, and corrosion
Cat.# GoldSeal Sizes Thickness Pcs/oz Pack resistant. All cover glasses are
No. 0 Thickness uniform in size and thickness.
63750-01 3206 22x22 mm #0 (.085-.12 mm) 208 1 oz.
63750-10 3206 22x22 mm #0 (.085-.12 mm) 208 10x1oz.
63751-01 3223 24 x 60mm #0 (.085-.12 mm) 78 1 oz.
63751-10 3223 24 x 60mm #0 (.085-.12 mm) 78 10x1oz
No. 1 Thickness
63756-01 3305 18 x 18mm #1 (.13-.17 mm) 233 1 oz.
63756-10 3305 18 x 18mm #1 (.13-.17 mm) 233 10x1oz.
63757-01 3306 22 x 22mm #1 (.13-.17 mm) 156 1 oz.
63757-10 3306 22 x 22mm #1 (.13-.17 mm) 156 10x1oz. Standard
63758-01 3307 25 x 25mm #1 (.13-.17 mm) 124 1 oz. Cat. # Sizes Thickness Pieces/oz Pack
63758-10 3307 25 x 25mm #1 (.13-.17 mm) 124 10x1oz. No. 0 Thickness — Squares
63760-01 3312 12 x 24mm #1 (.13-.17 mm) 256 1 oz. 72198-10 22x22 mm #0 (.08-.13 mm) 208 1 oz.
63760-10 3312 12 x 24mm #1 (.13-.17 mm) 256 10x1oz. 72198-11 22x22 mm #0 (.08-.13 mm) 208 10 oz.
63762-01 3315 22 x 35mm #1 (.13-.17 mm) 100 1 oz. 72198-20 22x40 mm #0 (.08-.13 mm) 116 1 oz.
63762-10 3315 22 x 35mm #1 (.13-.17 mm) 100 10x1oz. 72198-21 22x40 mm #0 (.08-.13 mm) 116 10 oz.
63765-01 3318 22 x 60mm #1 (.13-.17 mm) 58 1 oz.
63765-10 3318 22 x 60mm #1 (.13-.17 mm) 58 10x1oz. No. 1 Thickness — Squares
63766-01 3319 24 x 30mm #1 (.13-.17 mm) 108 1 oz. 72200-10 22x22 mm #1 (.13-.17 mm) 156 1 oz.
63766-10 3319 24x 30mm #1 (.13-.17 mm) 108 10x1oz. 72200-11 22x22 mm #1 (.13-.17 mm) 156 10 oz.
63768-01 3321 24 x 40mm #1 (.13-.17 mm) 80 1 oz. 72200-20 22x30 mm #1 (.13-.17 mm) 116 1 oz.
63768-10 3321 24 x 40mm #1 (.13-.17 mm) 80 10x1oz. 72200-21 22x30 mm #1 (.13-.17 mm) 116 10 oz.
63769-01 3322 24 x 50mm #1 (.13-.17 mm) 67 1 oz. 72200-30 22x40 mm #1 (.13-.17 mm) 87 1 oz.
63769-10 3322 24 x 50mm #1 (.13-.17 mm) 67 10x1oz. 72200-31 22x40 mm #1 (.13-.17 mm) 87 10 oz.
63770-01 3323 24 x 60mm #1 (.13-.17 mm) 54 1 oz. 72200-40 22x50 mm #1 (.13-.17 mm) 70 1 oz.
63770-10 3323 24 x 60mm #1 (.13-.17 mm) 54 10x1oz 72200-41 22x50 mm #1 (.13-.17 mm) 70 10 oz.
63771-01 3327 35 x 50mm #1 (.13-.17 mm) 41 1 oz. No. 11⁄2 Thickness — Squares
63771-10 3327 35 x 50mm #1 (.13-.17 mm) 41 10x1oz 72204-01 22x22 mm #1½ (.16-.19 mm) 138 1 oz.
63772-01 3328 35 x 60mm #1 (.13-.17 mm) 37 1 oz. 72204-10 22x22 mm #1½ (.16-.19 mm) 138 10 oz.
63772-10 3328 35 x 60mm #1 (.13-.17 mm) 37 10x1oz 72204-02 22x30 mm #1½ (.16-.19 mm) 102 1 oz.
63773-01 3329 43 x 50mm #1 (.13-.17 mm) 35 1 oz. 72204-20 22x30 mm #1½ (.16-.19 mm) 102 10 oz.
63773-10 3329 43 x 50mm #1 (.13-.17 mm) 35 10x1oz 72204-03 22x40 mm #1½ (.16-.19 mm) 76 1 oz.
63774-01 3334 48 x 60mm #1 (.13-.17 mm) 26 1 oz. 72204-30 22x40 mm #1½ (.16-.19 mm) 76 10 oz.
63774-10 3334 48 x 60mm #1 (.13-.17 mm) 26 10x1oz 72204-04 22x50 mm #1½ (.16-.19 mm) 61 1 oz.
63780-01 3350 13mm Dia. #1 (.13-.17 mm) 575 1 oz. 72204-40 22x50 mm #1½ (.16-.19 mm) 61 10 oz.
63780-10 3350 13mm Dia. #1 (.13-.17 mm) 575 10x1oz No. 2 Thickness — Squares
63781-01 3351 16mm Dia. #1 (.13-.17 mm) 376 1 oz.
72210-10 22x22 mm #2 (.17-.25 mm ) 116 1 oz.
63781-10 3351 16mm Dia. #1 (.13-.17 mm) 376 10x1oz
72210-11 22x22 mm #2 (.17-.25 mm ) 116 10 oz.
63782-01 3346 19mm Dia. #1 (.13-.17 mm) 276 1 oz.
72210-20 22x40 mm #2 (.17-.25 mm ) 64 1 oz.
63782-10 3346 19mm Dia. #1 (.13-.17 mm) 276 10x1oz
72210-21 22x40 mm #2 (.17-.25 mm ) 64 10 oz.
No. 11⁄2 Thickness
63786-01 3400 22 x 22mm #1½ (.16-.19 mm) 138 1 oz. ® Square and Rectangular Cover Glass
63786-10 3400 22 x 22mm #1½ (.16-.19 mm) 138 10x1oz
63787-01 3405 18 x 18mm #1½ (.16-.19 mm) 202 1 oz. T #1 thickness (0.13 to 0.16mm)
63787-10 3405 18 x 18mm #1½ (.16-.19 mm) 202 10x1oz T Packed one ounce (28 g) per case
63790-01 3419 24 x 30mm #1½ (.16-.19 mm) 94 1 oz. T Clear white borosilicate glass.
63790-10 3419 24 x 30mm #1½ (.16-.19 mm) 94 10x1oz
63791-01 3421 24 x 40mm #1½ (.16-.19 mm) 70 1 oz. Cat. # Size Thickness Pieces/oz Pack
63791-10 3421 24 x 40mm #1½ (.16-.19 mm) 70 10x1oz 72190-09* 9x9 mm #1 (.13-.17 mm) 765 1 oz.
63792-01 3422 24 x 50mm #1½ (.16-.19 mm) 58 1 oz. 72190-22* 9x22 mm #1 (.13-.17 mm) 435 1 oz.
63792-10 3422 24 x 50mm #1½ (.16-.19 mm) 58 10x1oz 72190-35* 9x35 mm #1 (.13-.17 mm) 260 1 oz.
63793-01 3423 24 x 60mm #1½ (.16-.19 mm) 47 1 oz. 72190-50* 9x50 mm #1 (.13-.17 mm) 175 1 oz.
63793-10 3423 24 x 60mm #1½ (.16-.19 mm) 47 10x1oz 72191-22* 10.5x22 mm #1 (.13-.17 mm) 335 1 oz.
72191-35* 10.5x35 mm #1 (.13-.17 mm) 215 1 oz.
72191-50* 10.5x50 mm #1 (.13-.17 mm) 150 1 oz.
72192-54* 13x54 mm #1 (.13-.17 mm) 120 1 oz.
Slide warmer, see pages 604-605 UUUUU 72192-50 24x50 mm #1 (.13-.17 mm) 65 1 oz.
For the handling of glass slides, see pen vac; 72192-75* 25x75 mm #1 (.13-.17 mm) 40 1 oz.
grid section page 150 UUUUU * For use with Bellco Leighton Tissue Culture Tubes.

324 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec11_312-327_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 6:15 AM Page 325

Specimen Preparation and Embedding Supplies SECTION 11

® Circular Cover Glass ® Quartz Microscope Slides and Coverslips
Cat. # Diameter Thickness Pieces/oz Pack
There are many
No. 1 Thickness
applications that require
72231-01 12 mm #1 (.13-.17 mm) 692 1 oz.
72231-10 12 mm #1 (.13-.17 mm) 692 10 oz.
slides and coverslips that
72228-01 15 mm #1 (.13-.17 mm) 443 1 oz. have absolute UV
72228-10 15 mm #1 (.13-.17 mm) 443 10 oz. transparency, and high
72229-01 18 mm #1 (.13-.17 mm) 308 1 oz. temperature properties.
72229-10 18 mm #1 (.13-.17 mm) 308 10 oz. EMS now is introducing
72221-01 22 mm #1 (.13-.17 mm) 206 1 oz. the highest quality, clear
72221-10 22 mm #1 (.13-.17 mm) 206 10 oz. fused quartz microscope slides and coverslips to meet all of these
72223-01 25 mm #1 (.13-.17 mm) 159 1 oz.
requirements.
72223-10 25 mm #1 (.13-.17 mm) 159 10oz.
No. 11⁄2 Thickness T The window of highest transparency to UV is between 0.15μ to 5μ.
72230-01 12 mm #1½ (.16-.19 mm) 597 1 oz. T Typical flatness measured 2 to 4” bands per inch.
72230-10 12 mm #1½ (.16-.19 mm) 597 10 oz. T Soften point is about 1250°C (2282°F).
72222-01 18 mm #1½ (.16-.19 mm) 266 1 oz. T Standard microscope slide thickness is 1 mm.
72222-10 18 mm #1½ (.16-.19 mm) 266 10 oz. T Standard coverslip thickness is 0.2 mm.
72224-01 22 mm #1½ (.16-.19 mm) 178 1 oz.
72224-10 22 mm #1½ (.16-.19 mm) 178 10 oz. Quartz Microscope Slides
72225-01 25 mm #1½ (.16-.19 mm) 137 1 oz.
72225-10 25 mm #1½ (.16-.19 mm) 137 10 oz. Cat.# Description Pack
72250-01 Slide, 1” x 1” (25 x 25 mm) each
No. 2 Thickness 72250-02 Slide, 2” x 1” (50 x 25 mm) each
72226-01 12mm #2 (.17-.25 mm ) 502 1 oz. 72250-03 Slide, 3” x 1” (75 x 25 mm) each
72226-10 12mm #2 (.17-.25 mm ) 502 10 oz. 72250-04 Slide, 2” x 3” (50 x 76 mm) each
72227-01 15mm #2 (.17-.25 mm ) 321 1 oz. 72250-05 Slide, 10mm x 10 mm each
72227-10 15mm #2 (.17-.25 mm ) 321 10 oz.
These slides have all of the same properties of the ones above with the
® Round Cover Slips only difference is these are 0.5mm thick:
(Bellco Brand) 72250-06 1” x 1” (25x25mm) each
72250-07 1” x 2” (25 x 50mm) each
T #1 Thickness (0.13 to 0.16mm)
72250-08 1” x 3” ( 25x76mm) each
T Packed 1 oz (28g) per case
Quartz Coverslips
Cat. # Diameter Thickness Pieces/oz Pack
Cat.# Description Pack
72195-05 5 mm #1 (.13 - .16 mm) 1100 1 oz
72255-02 Round 1” (25 mm) dia. each
72195-12 12 mm #1 (.13 - .16 mm) 650 1 oz
72256-02 Square 1” x 1” (25 x 25 mm) each
72195-15 15 mm #1 (.13 - .16 mm) 378 1 oz
72256-03 Round, 18mm (0.71”) x 0.2mm Thick (#2) each
72195-25 25 mm #1 (.13 - .16 mm) 160 1 oz
72256-04 Round, 25.4mm (1”) x 0.2mm Thick (#2) each
72256-05 Round, 33.02mm (13.0”) x 0.2mm thick (#2) each
® Round Cover Slips, German Glass 72256-06 Round, 25mm (0.984”) x 0.15-0.18mm thick (#1) each
T For neural cell cultures 72256-07 Square, 25.4mm (1”) x 0.2mm thick (#2) thick each
72256-08 Square, 25.4mm (1”) x 0.15-0.18mm thick (#1) each
T Shown to be more effective with hard to attach cells 72256-09 Square, 25mm (0.984”) x 0.075-0.125mm thick (#0) each
T #1 thickness (0.13 to 0.16mm)
T Packed 1 oz (28g) per case.
® Superslip®
Cat. # Diameter Thickness Pieces/oz Pack Micro Glasses
72196-12 12 mm #1 (0.13 to 0.16mm) 650 1 oz
72196-15 15 mm #1 (0.13 to 0.16mm) 378 1 oz Finally, your automated coverslipper
72196-25 25 mm #1 (0.13 to 0.16mm) 160 1 oz has the right coverslip to allow it to
run smoothly.
These “Superslip®” coverslips are
® Round Cover Slips – German Glass designed to work in automatic
These coverglass which are made from German glass can be used for coverslip machines and humid
growing and culturing cells that normally have poor adhesion to plastic environments without sticking or
or regular glass surfaces. The 5mm size will fit inside the 96 well plates jamming up in the middle of a run.
and still have enough room to pick up from the bottom of the well with These new superslips combine specialized production procedures with
forceps. The 8 mm size fits inside the 24 well plates. Available with our unique moisture-resistant packaging which brings you superior
#1.5 (0.16 – 0.19 mm) thickness. Packaged in convenience size: 100 coverslips.
per box
72236-40 Superslip, 24x40mm, #1 1 oz
Cat.# Description Qty 72236-41 Superslip, 24x40mm, #1 10x1 oz
72296-05 5 mm Round Coverglass, #1.5 Thickness 100/bx 72236-50 Superslip, 24x50mm, #1 1 oz
72296-08 8 mm Round Coverglass, #1.5 Thickness 100/bx 72236-51 Superslip, 24x50mm, #1 10x1 oz
72236-60 Superslip, 24x60mm, #1 1 oz
72236-61 Superslip, 24x60mm, #1 10x1 oz

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 325
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec11_312-327_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 6:15 AM Page 326

SECTION 11 Specimen Preparation and Embedding Supplies

 Cover Slips;
TECHNICAL TIP
Thermanox®;
Permanox plastic is nonfluorescent and may be
TMX Coverslips used with most fluorescent labels. Permanox has
NUNC™ Brand Thernanox , or TMX
®
better chemical resistance to fixation and staining
coverslips are made from a polymer solvents than polystyrene. An aqueous based mounting
(in the polyolefin family) that is medium must be used when cover slipping to prevent
highly resistant to most chemicals. warping.
Thermanox® plastic is resistant to
alcohols, aldehydes, hydrocarbons,
dilute acids (<10%) and dilute
alkalis (<2%). TMX has limited resistance to chlorinated hydro-carbons, however, it is not resistant to
TECHNICAL TIP
concentrated acids or bases. Thermanox® plastic is a flexible, trans-parent polymer that can be sectioned A simple method to determine which side of the
using a microtome and is able to withstand high temp-eratures (temperature range –70ºC to +150ºC). coverslip is treated is the "droplet" test. A drop of
Thermanox® Coverslips are culture treated on one side for enhanced cell attachment and growth. The treated water or culture medium will spread on the hydrophilic,
side is packaged face up toward the label. treated side. - If the droplet forms a bead, then the
side of the coverslip is not treated. – If the droplet
FEATURES: spreads evenly over the coverslip, the side is treated.
 Flat and remain flat  Auto fluorescent in the range 380 to 545 nm
 0.2mm (No. 2) thickness  Thernanox® cover slips can be autoclaved at
 Resistant to commonly used solvents 20 minutes steam, 20 minutes dry at 120°C
 Safe and easy to handle
Cat. # Description NNI # Pack
72274-01 Size 10.5x22 mm 174934 100/pk
72274-05 Size 10.5x22 mm 174934 500/pk
72270 Size 22x60 mm 174942 100/pk
72271 Size 22x60 mm 174942 500/pk
72272 Size 24x30 mm 150067 100/pk
72273 Size 24x30 mm 150067 500/pk
72280 13 mm Round 174950 100/pk
72281 13 mm Round 174950 500/pk
72275-01 15mm Round 174969 100/pk  Plastic Cover Slips
72275-05 15 mm Round 174969 500/pk
72282 22 mm Round 174977 100/pk Unbreakable .007” (1.57mm) flexible cellulose
72283 22 mm Round 174977 500/pk acetate, square 22x22mm. Trusal, L., Baker C., &
72285 25 mm Round 174985 100/pk Guzman, A., Stain. Tech., 54,2 pg. 77.
72286 25 mm Round 174985 500/pk
72260 Plastic Cover Slip 100/bx
Thermanox® is Nalge/Nunc product.

 Disposable Rinzl Plastic Micro Slides

 Made from optical clear vinyl with a refractive  Will not break, scratch or cut fingers.
index of glass.
 Ideal for wet mount, urines, etc.  Not auto-fluorescent.
 Economical, they can be used and discarded.  Thickness 0.0180 to 0.022" or 0.46
 Available standard size 3 x 1" and to 0.56mm.
packaged 144 per box.
71890-12 Rinzl Plastic Micro Slides (A) 12/bx
71890-01 Rinzl Plastic Micro Slides (B) 144/bx
71890-10 Rinzl Plastic Micro Slides (B) 10x144/bx

 Rinzl Plastic Coverslips

 Made from clear vinyl plastic.  Refractive index of glass.
 Unbreakable, will not scratch or cut fingers.  Economical and half the price of glass.
 Used in Biological and Medical labs, etc.  Not autofluorescent.
 Thickness 0.01" or 0.28mm.
Cat.# Description Pack
72261-18 Rinzl Plastic Coverslips, Size 18 x 18mm 100/pk
72261-19 Rinzl Plastic Coverslips, Size 18 x 18mm 1000/pk
72261-22 Rinzl Plastic Coverslips, Size 22 x 22mm 100/pk
72261-23 Rinzl Plastic Coverslips, Size 22 x 22mm 1000/pk
72261-40 Rinzl Plastic Coverslips, Size 22 x 40mm 1000/pk
72261-50 Rinzl Plastic Coverslips, Size 24 x 50mm 1000/pk
72261-60 Rinzl Plastic Coverslips, Size 24 x 60mm 1000/pk
72261-100 Rinzl Plastic Coverslips, Size 24 x 100mm 1000/pk

326 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec11_312-327_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 6:15 AM Page 327

Specimen Preparation and Embedding Supplies SECTION 11

 Photoetched Coverslips
These coverslips are made from pure white glass and photo
etched on the surface for a permanent gridded pattern.
 Using No. 2 (.17 -.24mm) thickness cover slips.
 Grid contains 520 alphanumeric coded squares, each
square 600 x 600μm (0.6mm x 0.6mm). Numbered 1–200.
 Used to facilitate mounting of micromaniputated cells or
chromosome spreads. 72264-18 72264-23 72265-25
Reference: Lin, Lin-Fang and Frank H. Riddle, 1981. Cat.# Coverslip Size Pack Cat.# Coverslip Size Pack
Photoengraving of Cover Slips and Slides to Facilitate Mounting of 72264-18 18 x 18 mm 25/pk 72265-25 25 mm Diameter 25/pk
Micromanipulated Cells or Chromosome Spreads, Exp. Res. 72264-23 23 x 23 mm 25/pk 72265-50 25 mm Photo-Etched
134:485-488 72265-12 12 mm Diameter 25/pk German Glass 25/pk

 Correlative Microscopy Coverslips®  Calibration Scale Sets

EMS introduces a simple coverslip with a grid image that allows cells to All of the PS-XO series of Calibration Slides is Green Float Glass, Bright
grow and later be analyzed under brightfield or fluorescence microscopy Chrome Image
before being further processed and sectioned for EM or other analysis. 1. PS300-XO
These unique coverslips do all that. High definition 300mm scale in 0.1mm
divisions with extended 0.5mm, 1.0mm and
Applications 5.0mm lines to allow calibrations in those
Light Microscopy, Fluorescence, Scanning Electron Microscopy (SEM), increments too. Series of dots and crosses, at
Transmission Electron Microscopy (TEM), High-Pressure Cryofixation 10mm intervals, included for calibrations
Features where these shapes are preferred. Supplied in
 Reticle film has been thor-  Excellent transparency polished wooden case.
oughly tested with cell culture  Does not deform at tempera- Features
 Good growth of cell culture tures (positive 100C and nega- 300mm high definition scale in 0.1mm
(equivalent to conventional tive liquid N2)
divisions with additional dot and cross series at
media)  Rigid, does not float in the
10mm centers
 Good adhesion to the substrate middle of culture
without cell polylysine  Easy to handle and cut with a 2. PS150-XO
 Resistant to normal chemicals knife or micro-punch High definition 150mm scale in 0.1mm
used in electron microscopy  Simple sterilisation using alco- divisions with extended 0.5mm, 1.0mm and
 No oxygen retention, compati- hol or UV 5.0mm lines to allow calibrations in those increments too. Series of dots
ble resin LR White  Detaches easily from resin and crosses, at 10mm intervals, included for calibrations where these
 Good optical quality in bright- after polymerisation shapes are preferred. Supplied in polished wooden case
field & UV fluorescence  Low cost
Features
150mm high definition scale in 0.1mm divisions with additional dot and
cross series at 10mm centers
3. PS100-XO
High definition 100mm scale in 0.1mm divisions with extended 0.5mm,
1.0mm and 5.0mm lines to allow calibrations in those increments too.
Series of dots and crosses, at 10mm intervals, included for calibrations
where these shapes are preferred. Supplied in polished wooden case.
66108-01 10x10 grids of 66108-02 20x20 grid of 66108-03 10x10 grids of
0.1mm squares at 5 0.5mm squares. Indexed 1mm squares. Each square Features
positions. Indexed 1-10 1-20 along top, A-T down individually indexed 0-99 100mm high definition scale in 0.1mm divisions with additional dot and
along top, A-J down side side and centre cross
cross series at 10mm centers
Specifications
Cat. # Squares Surface square unit size Avg. cells/sq. unit* Ordering Information
66108-01 100 5x1mm 0.01mm2 2-3 68073-PS300 PS300-XO Combination Scale 330x30x6mm each
66108-02 200 100mm 0.5mm2 20-25 68073-PS300-UK Same as above with UKAS Certification of Calibration,
66108-03 100 100mm 1mm2 40-50 10 Points measured on Scale each
*(eg HeLa Cell) 68073-PS150 PS150-XO Combination Scale 180x30x6mm each
68073-PS150-UK Same as above with UKAS Certification of Calibration,
All of the coverslips are produced on a polyester based film, 0.18mm thick, 10 Points measured on Scale each
22 x 22mm, 25/box. All other grid sizes and film sizes are available upon 68073-PS100 PS100-XO Combination Scale 130x30x6mm each
68073-PS100-UK Same as above with UKAS Certification of Calibration,
special order.
10 Points measured on Scale each
Ordering Information
66108-01 10x10 grid of 0.1mm squares at 5 positions 25/pk
66108-02 20x20 grid of 0.5mm squares 25/pk
66108-03 10x10 grid of 1mm squares 25/pk

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 327
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec11_328-335_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 6:35 AM Page 328

SECTION 11 Specimen Preparation and Embedding Supplies

 Microscope Slide  View-Pack™
Dispenser Microscope Slide
Molded from attractive gray ABA plastic. This Holder With 3-Ring
dispenser provides a method of releasing Binder
clean, dust free 1”x3” slides, one at a time. For the orderly visual display and safe
Comes with a clear molded plastic cover to transport of microscope slides. This
allow for visual checking of unused slides. loose-leaf binder has ten vinyl View-
Measurements: 43⁄8”x47⁄8”x51⁄2”. Pack™ pages (hold 160 slides). Each
Holds approximately 72 slides. page holds 16 slides 3x1” (75x25mm) in
71300 Glass Slide Dispenser each individual pockets with a white back and
clear front. A flap in the center keeps slides from falling out. Simply fold
 Levered Micro Slide the page at the center crease to retrieve slides. The 81⁄2” x 101⁄2”
(22x27cm) View-Pack pages comes with a standard 9”x12” (23x30cm) 3-
Dispenser ring binder.
 Holds a full box of 72 slides.
71544-01 View-Pack With 3-Ring Binder each
 Get a clean, fingerprint-free slide 71544-50 Refill View-Pack 10/pk
every time
 Avoid breakage
 Loading is simple
 Slide Stand
Made from stainless steel.
 Made from stainless steel and has
suction cup feet to keep the unit in Stand consists of four
place. rails, which supports
Measures 3”(L)x5”(W)x4”(H) (8x13x10cm) various microscope slides
almost vertically.
71298-01 Levered Slide Dispenser each Accommodates 68, 3x1"
slides
 Slide Holder
71533-01 Slide Stand, 455x100mm (18x4") each
Block
Made from solid high density
polypropylene blocks with 13  Compact
slanted channels (on a 10˚ Glass Slide
angle), 1⁄16"(1.5mm) (W) x 3⁄8" Storage Box;
(9mm) (D). It is made to hold The Mini Box
3x1" (75x25mm) slides during
Made from rigid polystyrene,
cleaning, draining excess
with a removable lid. This 25
immersion oil, and even drying. They are white in color and are chemically
capacity slide box measures only 3.625" (92mm)(L) X 3.25"(83mm)(W) X
resistant. Available in 40 or 90 capacity (vertically held).
1.25"(32mm) (H) .The box is available in either white, red, or blue.
71532-40 40-Slide Holder Block,
4"(W)x12"(L)(10x30.5cm) each 71455-W 25-Compact Slide Box, White each
71532-90 90-Slider Holder Block, 71455-B 25-Compact Slide Box, Blue each
7"(W)x12"(L)(18x30.5cm) each 71455-R 25-Compact Slide Box, Red each

 Secured Hinge Microscope Slide Boxes

Made from durable polystyrene (with heavy walls). This material is unaffected by humidity and is thoroughly
insect proof. Each box is secured with a rust-resistant nickel-plated clasp and hinge pin. The cork lining
prevents damage to the stored slides. To ensure proper slide identification, each slot is numbered to
correspond to the slide inventory sheet on the inside cover of the box. To save space the boxes are
stackable. Each box stores up to 100 3x1" or 25x75mm microscope slides. Available in 5 color coded
boxes making the boxes easy to identify Each box measures: 210x162x33mm (8¼ x 6½ x 1¼")
71470-W Hinged 100 Slide Box, White each
71471-W Hinged 100 Slide Box, White 10/pk
71470-B Hinged 100 Slide Box, Blue each
71471-B Hinged 100 Slide Box, Blue 10/pk
71470-G Hinged 100 Slide Box, Green each
71471-G Hinged 100 Slide Box, Green 10/pk
71470-R Hinged 100 Slide Box, Red each
71471-R Hinged 100 Slide Box, Red 10/pk
71470-Y Hinged 100 Slide Box, Yellow each
71471-Y Hinged 100 Slide Box, Yellow 10/pk

328 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec11_328-335_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 6:35 AM Page 329

Specimen Preparation and Embedding Supplies SECTION 11

 Molded (Living Hinge) Microscope Slide Boxes
Molded one-piece polypropylene construction with an integral living hinge. Numbering in the base
corresponds to the printed index in the covers for slide identification purpose.
Boxes are designed to be stackable to save space. The tensioned clasp insures a secure closure.
Available in 25 or 100 capacity. Fits 1 x 3" (25.4x75mm) microscope slides.

Outside Dimensions
Cat. Description L x W x H" (mm) Pack
71472 Molded 100-Slide Box 83⁄4"x63⁄4"x11⁄2" each
71473 Molded 100-Slide Box (220x175x38mm) 10/pk

 Carolina™ Blue Box

Molded from blue high-impact styrene, the Carolina™ Blue Box is manufactured to our exacting
specifications. Compared to conventional wooden boxes, the Carolina™ Blue Box is smaller in size, lighter
in weight, and held to closer dimensional tolerances. The 75x25mm (3x1") slides fit the slots and will not
slip out once in place. A shoulder on each box excludes dust and identities the top of the box. The boxes
are available in two sizes: 31⁄4" x 41⁄4" x 13⁄16" (for 25 slides) and 31⁄4" x 21⁄4" x 13⁄16" (for 12 slides).
71482-01 Carolina Blue Box, 12-Slide each
71482-10 Carolina Blue Box, 12-Slide 10/pk
71483-01 Carolina Blue Box, 25-Slide each
71483-10 Carolina Blue Box, 25-Slide 10/pk

 Large Glass Slide Storage Box

These storage boxes are available in
two sizes.
1. 100-Slide Capacity:
Durable, wood frame, covered with
heavy black embossed paper. The
hinges and latches are Nickel plated.
A numbered plastic insert provides
spacing for the handling of the slides.
The box accommodates 100 of 3x2”
slides. The box measures 93⁄4” (L)x
 100-Capacity Slide Box 21⁄4” (H) (24.7x19.7x5.7cm).
Same construction as (#71470), but with a slip-on cover; gray in color. The 71480-01 100 Slide Box,
box neasures: 9"x71⁄4"x11⁄4" (230x185x32). 3x2” Slides each
71480-10 100 Slide Box, 3x2” Slides 10/pk
71474 Slip-on Cover 100-Slide Box each
71475 Slip-on Cover 100-Slide Box 10/lot 2. 25 Slide Capacity:
Made from wood with numbered partitions which correspond to the index
 50-Capacity Slide Box card. Very durable and has a detachable lid. The box accommodates 25
Same construction as (#71470), but with a slip on cover; stackable and of 3x2” slides. The box measures: 97⁄8"x35⁄8"x25⁄8" (174x92x67mm).
gray in color. The box measures: 9"x33⁄4"x11⁄4" (230x95x32mm)
71481-01 25 Slide Box, 3x2” Slides each
71462 Slip-on Cover 50-Slide Box each 71481-10 25 Slide Box, 3x2” Slides 10/pk
71463 Slip-on Cover 50-Slide Box 10/lot
 Large Slide Microscope
 Compact 25 Slide Box Slide Boxes
Same characteristics as (#71470), but with a slip-on cover; Holds 25 1x3”
Specially designed for the 3 x 2 slides
slides. The box measures 11⁄4”(H) x 31⁄2”(W) x 51⁄2” (L).
71460 Slip-on Cover 25-Slide Box 2/pk This reinforced ABS material is rugged and
71461 Slip-on Cover 25-Slide Box 10pks/lot (20 bxs) designed not only for storage but transport of
slides as well.
 Grooved slots hold individual slides in place
 A soft cork liner ensures that slides will not slip
 Identification card, lining and grooved slots are numbered
 Stackable . The box measures 208mm (L) x 175mm (h) x 60mm.
They have a capacity of 100 slides and they are blue in color
Cat No. Description W x H x D, mm Color Qty.
41149 100 Place Tall Slide Box 208 x 175 x 60 Blue each

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 329
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec11_328-335_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 6:35 AM Page 330

SECTION 11 Specimen Preparation and Embedding Supplies

® True North™ Slide Box ® Color Microscope Slide Boxes
These purple unique boxes
which are made from durable
polycarbonate and rugged
stainless steel will protect
your slides in ultra-low
temperatures (as low as -80
O C). These boxes provide for
safe storage and transport of
25x75mm and 1x3” Slides.
With temperature sensitive
foam lining and grooved slide
slots which separate the slides
there is always protection for slide
contact.
For easy slide retrieval,
identification sheet, lining, and
grooved slots are numbered. These boxes are stackable and
autoclavable. They measure 208x175x34mm.
Cat. # Description Qty
71485-01 True North™ Slide Box each

® mBox® in Microarray Slide Handling

Using mBox – microarray handling without removing slides!

Molded from one piece (lid and bottom) polypropylene these slide boxes
are able to accommodate either 25 or 100 standard 3x1" (75x25mm)
slides. The attached lid is held securely by a closed latch lock. Stacking
feet maximize the stability when boxes are stacked up one atop the
other. The boxes have a cork liner to protect the stored slides. Comes
complete with a numbered slide index card. These boxes are available
in blue, red or white.
25-Slide Box measures: 51⁄2" x 31⁄2" x 11⁄4" (140x90x32mm)
100-Slide Box measures: 81⁄4" x 65⁄8" x 11⁄4" (210x170x32mm)
71458-W 25-Slide Box, White each
71458-B 25-Slide Box, Blue each
71458-R 25-Slide Box, Red each
71459-W 100-Slide Box, White each
T Immerse 20 slides in liquid during blocking, denaturating, and 71459-B 100-Slide Box, Blue each
post-arraying. 71459-R 100-Slide Box, Red each
T It separates and prevents slide damage during shipping and pro-
cessing. ® Clear Lid 100 Slide Box
T Optimally designed rack spacing for easy slide removal.
This 100-Slide Storage box has a
T Fits standard microtiter plate formats for centrifuging.
clear lid enabling lab personnel to
T Manufactured to prevent slide contamination. read the contents listed on the
T A convenient removable handle available. enclosed index without opening
the box. Made of Black ABS
Technical plastic with metal clasp hinge and
T Material: Polypropylene cork lining. Numbered slots
T Maximum continuous use temperature: 220°F (104°C) correspond to the paper index.
T Melting point: 334°F (168°C) Stackable.
T mBox withstand boiling water without softening Outside dimension: 8¼"L x 7"W
T Measures 5” L x 31⁄2” W x 11⁄2” H (127mm x 89mm x 38mm) x 1¼"H (210 x 180 x 32mm)

Cat. Description Qty

EMS # Description Qty 71477-01 Clear Lid 100 Slide Box 1/pk
72188-01 The mBox each 71477-10 Clear Lid 100 Slide Box 10/pk

330 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec11_328-335_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 6:36 AM Page 331

Specimen Preparation and Embedding Supplies SECTION 11

 9/4-Slide Tray
Heavy-duty cardboard
construction with cloth
hinged flaps to form a single
compartment slide holder of
various sizes horizontally.
Holds 9 3x1” slides or 4
3x2” slides. The tray
measures 235 x 78mm
(91⁄4" x 31⁄8")  Microscope Slide Tray
Cat. # Description Qty White, thermo-formed Polystyrene. Holds 20 of 1”x3” standard slides in
71497-01 9/4-Slide Tray each a horizontal position. A white background makes it easy to distinguish
71497-12 9/4-Slide Tray 12/pk
dyes and stains. The tray features a thumb cut to simplify the removal
 Slide Tray Box of slides. Measures: 71⁄2”x131⁄2” (17x34cm).
Black cloth covered 71500 Microscope Slide Tray 6/pk
cardboard box 9/4-Slide
Tray (#71497).  Slide Tray
The box has a fall-front and Cabinet
drop on lid. Supplied The outside is made from
complete with (6) 9-Slide white polypropylene, the tray
Trays. Overall rails are polystyrene, and the
measurements of the box : vertical sliding door is clear
265 x112 x 68mm acrylic; this 240-slide
(101⁄2" x 43⁄8" x 2 5⁄8") capacity cabinet holds twelve
microscope slide trays
Cat. # Description Qty (#71500) horizontally, and it
71496 Slide Tray Box each is dust free. Measurements:
73⁄4”x14”x71⁄2” high (17x36x16cm).

 Pop-Up Slide 71504 Slide Tray Cabinet each

Holder- 20 or
30 Capacity  Microscope Slide Tray
Holds 20 and 30 of 1x3" This durable, ABS hard
slides in a numbered plastic slide tray will hold up
compartment. The to 20 standard microscope
compartments are slides 75 x 25 mm (3x1”).
recessed so the specimen Ivory color consists of two
cannot be touched when rows, each with securely
the cover is closed. holds 10 slides. Each
Measurements: numbered cavity has thumb
8"(W)x131⁄2"(L)x 11⁄32"(H). cut and raise notches for
easy to remove the slide. Stackable. Measures: 11 7/8”L x 7 ¾”W x
½”H (300x195x12mm)
Cat. Description Qty
71503-01 Hard Plastic Microscope Slide Tray 1/pk
71503-10 Hard Plastic Microscope Slide Tray 10/pk
71520 Pop-Up Slide Holder, 20-Place each
71521 Pop-Up Slide Holder, 20-Place 10/pk
71522 Pop-Up Slide Holder, 30-Place each  12-Slide
71522-10 Pop-Up Slide Holder, 30-Place 10/pk Holder
White thermo-formed
polystyrene. It keeps
microscope slides
seperated. Ideal for use
where slide preparation or
staining is performed.
Measurements:
33⁄8”x7”x3⁄4” (H) (86x178x19mm)
71530 12-Slide Holder 6/pk

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 331
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec11_328-335_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 7/8/14 9:21 AM Page 332

SECTION 11 Specimen Preparation and Embedding Supplies

 Microscope Slide Folder  5-Slide Mailer – Open Top
Made from heat resistant injection molded plastic Made from polypropylene,
rigid, strong and durable
The Slide Folder™ will hold up to twenty standard microscope slides 75 x with convenient flip-tops,
25mm (3x1") and is made of two parts: a base holding the slides horizontally snap-on lids. When they
offering numbered space for easy identification, and transparent doors which stand in their upright
can either cover the slides or be swung behind the SlideFolder™ for space position, they can be used
conservation while using the tray. The base is available in 5 different colors, as staining containers, with
offering color-coding for each job. Each slide location is identified with a a minimal amount of
number from 1 to 20. Removal of the slides is made easy by simply pressing solution being used. (Note:
on one end, which will lift the other end up. The two transparent hinged they are not leak-proof).
covers offer a full view of each stored slide, even bar codes can be read Available in 2 models. Model
without removing of the slide. All units are stackable and will resist 1 needs 14 ml of solution to
temperatures between –80°C and +100°C. They are not autoclavable. stain five slides up to the
Measures 7¾ x 11¾”. frosted area; Model 2 needs
12 ml of staining solutio.).
Model 1 measures 31⁄2"L x
11⁄4" W x 3⁄4" (87x30x22mm).
Model 2 measures 31⁄4"L x 13⁄16"W x 5⁄8" (82x30x17mm). Packaged 25
mailers per pack, 200 per case.
71548-01 5-Slide Container, Model 1 25/pk
71548-08 5-Slide Container, Model 1 200/cs
71549-01 5-Slide Container, Model 2 25/pk
71549-08 5-Slide Container, Model 2 200/cs

Cat # Slide Folder Color Pack

71502-B1 Blue Each  LockMailer™ - Microscope Slide Jar
71502-B10 Blue 10/pk This is tamperproof multi purpose container for mailing, staining or storing
71502-G1 Green Each microscope slides.
71502-G10 Green 10/pk
71502-GR1 Gray Each Constructed of extra strong and opaque clear polypropylene, and high
71502-GR10 Gray 10/pk density polyethylene leakproof tamper evident screw cap (The LockMailer
71502-W1 White Each can also be used without the tamper evident feature by not used the lock
71502-W10 White 10/pk tab), it will hold up to 4 standard 3 x 1” or 25 x 75mm slides vertically.
71502-Y1 Yellow Each Inside chambers are slotted to keep slides safely separated. For color
71502-Y10 Yellow 10/pk coding purposes, use Capinsert™ (#61805-series) that may be inserted
71502-10 Assorted Colors 10/pk on top of closure.
This LockMailer™ can be used as small staining vessel. This unit is
 5-Slide Container designed for maximum stability on a bench top with liquid volume only 14
Holds 5 slides; no contact with ml. Each standard volume of one slide is 2 ml, therefore when you want to
one another. Ideal for Air stain 4 slides in this vessel you need only 6 ml of staining solution.
Conveyor Transport System.
Dimensions: 35 x87mm H (13⁄8” x 37⁄16”H). Packaging: 100 per pack.
Measures: 3"(L)x5⁄8"(W)x11⁄4"(H)
(51mmx16mmx32mm)

71550 5 Slide Container 25/pk

 Plastic Slide
Mailers
Economical and EMS # Description
reusable. These 71406-10 LockMailer™ Microscope Slide Jar
polyethylene mailers Color coded CapInsert™ is available for the LockMailer™
have a sturdy resealable
clasp. The top of the EMS # Description
mailer is clearly labeled 61806-W CapInsert™, White, 100/pk
61806-B CapInsert™, Blue, 100/pk
and slide labeling is visible through the plastic cover.
61806-R CapInsert™, Red, 100/pk
71551-25 Plastic Double Slide Mailer 25/pk 61806-L CapInsert™, Lilac, 100/pk
61806-Y CapInsert™, Yellow, 100/pk
61806-AS CapInsert™, Assorted Colors, 100/pk

332 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec11_328-335_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 6:36 AM Page 333

Specimen Preparation and Embedding Supplies SECTION 11

Five Slide Gripper, See Grids section, page 146 >>>>>

® The UniMailer™
Following many suggestions made to us from
our customers in the labs–The UniMailer™ is a
truly versatile new model mailer which can
easily be used for handling and shipping one
or as many slides as needed with one type of
mailer.
Made from high impact polystyrene, the
UniMailer™ is a one-slide tray. Not only do
they fit snugly on top of each other but they
are also secured by an innovative locking
mechanism. You may also want to insert a
tamperproof tie or attach an ID label. Each tray allows for the placing of slide in a horizontal position for
full visibility. Slides can be easily inserted or removed. As well UniMailer™ can also be used to provide
safe storage for those valuable slides you want to protect.
It accommodates 25 x 75 mm (1” x 3”) slides with or without cover glass. The mailer measures 89 mm
x 29 mm x 6 mm (31⁄2” x 11⁄8” x 3⁄4”).
Identification can be made on three sides or on top. The mailer is available in many popular pastel
colors for easy identification. Packaging: 50 per box, 200 per case.
Cat. # Description Pack
71537-B UniMailer™, Blue 50/pk.
71537-G UniMailer™, Green 50/pk.
71537-P UniMailer™, Pink 50/pk.
71537-W UniMailer™, White 50/pk.
71537-Y UniMailer™, Yellow 50/pk.

® Cyto-Tek® Slide Mailer

Sakura Finetek - Designed for safe transport or mailing of up to two glass slide 1x3". Unbreakable
plastic container with flip top cap fits through mail system.

Cat. No. Tissue-Tek Description Pack

62625-10 4310 Cyto-Tek® Slide Mailer 100/cs

® Solid Cardboard Slide Mailers

® 1-Slide Mailer
Made from 0.050” (1.29 mm) solid cardboard, measures 33⁄4” x 15⁄8” when folded. The mailer holds one
3” x 1” glass slide with or without cover glass and has a thumb groove for easy removal. A special cut
corner identifies the top of the mailer.
Cat. # Description Pack
71539-01 Single Slide Mailer 100/pk.
71539-10 Single Slide Mailer 1,000/pk.

® 2-Slide Mailer
Made from .085” (2.17 mm) chipboard and measures 3” x 41⁄4” when folded. This mailer is unprinted
on both sides which provides warnings for medical specimens and as well as address. Each mailer
conforms to U.S. Postal regulations regarding minimum size for First Class.
Cat. # Description Pack
71540 2-Slide Mailer 25/pk.
71540-CS 2-Slide Mailer 1,000/pk.

® 4-Slide Mailer
The same construction as 2-slide mailer above, but holds 4 of 3x1" slide.
Cat. # Description Pack
71541 4-Slide Mailer - Cardboard 20/pk
71541-CS 4-Slide Mailer - Carboard 200/case

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 333
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec11_328-335_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 6:36 AM Page 334

SECTION 11 Specimen Preparation and Embedding Supplies

® The SlideFile™
The most convenient, organized and versatile way of storing 3” x 1” (75 x 25 mm) microscope slides
vertically. This impact resistant SlideFile™ Storage System can hold up to 400 slide per unit in just 1720
cm3 (105 cu. in.) and are stackable for space saving.
Each SlideFile System includes a slide box and two removable trays. A transparent hinged cover makes
it easy to see at a glance the content of the box.
Features:
T SlideFile™ System is a removable tray inside the storage box having 100 numbered slots. All
slides are stored vertically for easy insertion and removal.
T In the upright position, one is able to read bar codes without having to remove the slide from
the box.
T For space saving purposes, you can double the amount of slides simply by storing two slides
side-by-side per slot. And for maximum storage space–long-term storage–simply remove the
SlideFile Tray and line up 400 slides in three rows.
T Six drain holes incorporated into the tray ensure complete emptying of the liquid when using
the slide holder for drying purposes.
T Two index cards numbered from 1 to 100 are included to allow for slide recording titles.
Dimensions: 86 mm x 248 mm x 83 mm high (33⁄8” x 93⁄4” x 31⁄4” high)
The SlideFile™ System is available in five colors: White, Blue, Green, Pink and Yellow
Cat.# Description Pack Cat.# Description Pack
71450-01 SlideFile System, White each 71452-10 SlideFile System, Green 10/pk.
71450-10 SlideFile System, White 10/pk. 71453-01 SlideFile System, Pink each
71451-01 SlideFile System, Blue each 71453-10 SlideFile System, Pink 10/pk.
71451-10 SlideFile System, Blue 10/pk. 71454-01 SlideFile System, Yellow each
71452-01 SlideFile System, Green each 71454-10 SlideFile System, Yellow 10/pk.

® SlideFile™ Jr. – Storage System

Similar to the SlideFile™, the junior model can hold up to 200 slides per unit in just 860cm3 (53 cu. in.),
and it is stackable to save space. Each SlideFile™ Jr. includes a slide box and a removable tray. A tinted
hinged cover makes the contents of the box easy to see at a glance.
Removable tray inside the storage box having 50 individual numbered slots. All slides are stored upright
for easy insertion and removal as well as reading the bar codes without removing the slides.
To save space , you can double the amount of the slides simply by storing 2 slides per slot. And for
maximum storage space, simply remove the tray and line up 200 slides in 3 rows for long term storage.
This system is not autoclavable. The system measures: 82mm x 140mm x 86mm(H). (31⁄4" x 51⁄2" x 33⁄8"H)

Cat.# SlideFile™ Jr. Color Qty Cat.# SlideFile™ Jr. Color Qty
71448-B1 Blue each 71448-W1 White each
71448-B10 Blue 10/pk 71448-W10 White 10/pk
71448-G1 Green each 71448-Y1 Yellow each
71448-G10 Green 10/pk 71448-Y10 Yellow 10/pk
71448-P1 Pink each
71448-P10 Pink 10/pk

® Drain Rack™
Made from high impact polystyrene.
This rugged tray used as a drain rack can hold up to
200 microscope slides in 100 individual numbered
slots. All sides are stored upright for easy insertion ® DrainRack Jr.
and removal. A unique feature with the DrainRack™ is Made from high impact polystyrene
the ability to read bar codes without having to remove
This model is similar to the DrainRack™ above
the slides from the rack. For space saving purposes,
but can hold up to 100 microscope slides in
you can double the amount of slides simply by storing
50 individual numbered slots. The rack is
2 slides per slot, giving you a capacity of 200 slides
autoclavable. Dimensions: 75mm x 125mm x
per tray instead of 100. The racks are not autoclavable.
25mm H (3" x 5" 1" H)
They measure: 75mm x 231mm x 25mm H (3" x 9" x 1" H) Cat.# DrainRack™ Color Qty
Cat.# DrainRack™ Color Qty Cat.# DrainRack™ Color Qty 71445-B Blue 10/pk
71446-B Blue 10/pk 71446-W White 10/pk 71445-G Green 10/pk
71446-G Green 10/pk 71446-Y Yellow 10/pk 71445-P Pink 10/pk
71446-P Pink 10/pk 71445-W White 10/pk
71445-Y Yellow 10/pk

334 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec11_328-335_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 6:36 AM Page 335

Specimen Preparation and Embedding Supplies SECTION 11

 Slide Tray Racks
& Aluminum Slide Trays
Stainless Steel slide tray racks that accept aluminum slide trays. The
rack allows air to circulate over the slides and both sizes of racks
hold up to 100 slides. The aluminum slide trays have elevated ridges
to separate 76 x 26mm slides and finger holes for easy removal.
Ideal for drying fresh mounts. THE Aluminum slide trays are available
in two configurations: 10 slide position and 20 slide position.

71506-10 Aluminum Slide Tray, 10-Slide – 13"L x 4" W (330 x 100mm). Accommodates 10 slides each
71506-20 Aluminum Slide Tray, 20-Slide – 13"L x 71⁄2" W (330 x 190mm). Accommodates 20 slides each
71508-10 Stainless Steel Slide Tray Rack for 10-Slide Tray Accommodate 10 Aluminum Slide Tray,10-Slide -
13"L x 83⁄8"W x 41⁄2"H (330 x 212 x 112mm) each
71508-20 Stainless Steel Slide Tray Rack for 20-Slide Tray Accommodate 5 Aluminum Slide Tray,20-Slide -
13"L x 73⁄4"W x 41⁄2"H (330 x 197 x 112mm) each

 Slide Tray for 100 Slides

Made from tough, resilient ASB plastic which offers long life. Holds 100-standard 1 x 3" slides
positioned vertically for easy insertion in pre-numbered grooves allowing for simple identification and
retrieval. Dimensions: 141⁄4"L x 1⁄4"W x 33⁄4"H (360 x 38 x 100mm).
A cover which is optional is made from clear polystyrene offering full visibility and it protects the slides
from dirt and dust when they are not in the drawer.
71510-01 100-Slide Tray, Vertical each
71510-10 100-Slide Tray, Vertical 10/pk
71511-01 100-Slide Tray Cover each
71511-10 100- Slide Tray Cover 10/pk

Slide Warmers, See Histology Section pages 604-605  71510-10

For all of our Slide Storage and Filing Cabinets, See pages 607-610 

 Specimen Mailers  Histology

1. Single Mailing Container, These Containers
fiberboard screw cap mailing cases  Designed for the storage
meet all US Postal Regulations in and transport of histolo-
mailing biological specimens. It also gy specimens in fixa-
meets IATA regulations regarding tives.
shipments of infectious substances.  Made from durable
They are constructed of heavy duty polypropylene (except
fiberboard and have crimped metal rims 8L size, which is made
and seamed metal bottoms. The metal of polyethylene)
screw caps are autoclavable and offer a  Leak-proof self-seal
secure closure. caps
Available in several sizes: All of the containers (except
61003 SM2, size 13⁄4"ID x 7"L 12/pk the 5ml size) have graduated markings on three sides. 2L to 8L sizes are
61004 SM3, size 21⁄4"IDx 51⁄2"L 12/pk supplied with snap-top lids and carrying handles, and has no graduations.

2. Double Mailing Container

The set consists of an inner Cat.# Visibility Inside Height x Top I.D. Size Pack
aluminum screw cap container and 64233-10 Semi-Clear 2" x 1⁄2" (50 x 13mm) 5ml 500/pk
64233-11 Semi-Clear 11⁄2" x 11⁄8" (40 x 28mm) 20ml 200/pk
an outer fiberboard screw cap
64233-12 Semi-Clear 11⁄2" x 15⁄8" (40 x 42mm) 40ml 200/pk
mailing tube. This double type unit 64233-14 Semi-Clear 21⁄4" x 15⁄8" (55 x 42mm) 60ml 100/pk
is required by US Postal for mailing 64233-16 Semi-Clear 27⁄8" x 15⁄8" (75 x 42mm) 90ml 400/pk
of etiologic agents or biohazard 64233-17 Semi-Clear 3" x 115⁄16" (75 x 48mm) 120ml 300/pk
specimens. Each aluminum 64233-18 Opaque 21⁄4" x 31⁄2" (55 x 88mm) 250ml 100/pk
container is autoclavable and the 64233-20 Opaque 4" x 31⁄2" (110 x 88mm) 500ml 100/pk
cap is lined to prevent leakage. 64233-22 Opaque 51⁄4" x 41⁄4" (135 x 110mm) 1000ml 100/pk
64233-24 White 43⁄4" x 71⁄4" (120 x 184mm) 2000ml 20/pk
61011 DM2, tube size 13⁄4" x 7" Alum. can size 11⁄2" x 63⁄8" 12/pk 64233-26 White 71⁄2" x 81⁄8" (190 x 126mm) 5000ml 10/pk
61015 DM4, tube size 23⁄4"x 61⁄4" Alum. can size 21⁄2" x 6" 12/pk 64233-28 White 93⁄4" x 9" (245 x 230mm) 8000ml 10/pk

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 335
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec11_336-361_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 6:58 AM Page 336

SECTION 11 Specimen Preparation and Embedding Supplies

® Quality Products for Microarray/Hybridization Systems

® A. LifterSlip™ Premium Printed Coverglass ® B. mSeries LifterSlip™
LifterSlip™ offers a simple solution Features:
to the problem of hybridization T 1 mm thick.
nonuniformity. An innovative raised T Uniform disposal
edge design provides separation of hybridization
and allows for even dispersal solution.
hybridization solution between the T Reduced hybridiza-
DNA chip and coverslip. tion fluid volume
LifterSlips™ allow for increased variations.
data quality by eliminating gradients T Superior flatness –
caused by floating standard substrate does not
coverslips on hybridization solution flex or bow.
under the pre-positioned coverslips. T Precision cut
Capillary attraction ensures that LifterSlip™ stays in place. edges.
Depending on size and design configuration LifterSlip™ can hold a range T Superior surface
of volumes. quality.
LifterSlip™ is #2 thickness (0.20-0.22 mm) and the bar height is 0.04- T Consistent flatness.
0.06 mm.
Solving the problem of hybridization non-uniformity
Approx.
Bar Width Approx. Size Pieces mSeries LifterSlip™ are manufactured from 1mm thick glass specially
Catalog No. (mm) Volume (mm) per oz. drawn for flatness and superior surface quality. The 1mm thickness has
72184-18 .75 7.55μL 18 x 18 160
increased stiffness that reduces variation in hybridization fluid volume.
72184-22 .75 11.46μL 22 x 22 107 Precise ink printing provides an innovative raised edge design for
72184-25 .75 13.02μL 22 x 25 94 consistent dispersal and easy injection of hybridization solution under the
72184-30 .75 15.63μL 22 x 30 78 pre-positioned lifterslip.
72184-40 .75 20.84μL 22 x 40 59
72184-44 .75 22.90μL 22 x 44 53
Size Approx.
72184-50 .75 75μL 22 x 50 47
Catalog No. (mm) Volume Pieces / Box
72184-60 .75 31.25μL 22 x 60 39
72185-24 .75 13.72μL 24 x 24 90 72181-25 22 x 25 20 μl 50/pk
72185-60 .75 34.30μL 24 x 60 36 72181-22 22 x 22 17 μl 50/pk
72185-62 .75 35.07μL 24 x 60 37 72181-40 22 x 40 29 μl 50/pk
72186-25 .75 14.93μL 25 x 25 83 72181-50 22 x 50 36 μl 50/pk
72186-35 .75 20.90μL 25 x 35 59 72181-60 22 x 60 45 μl 50/pk
72186-36 .75 21.50μL 25 x 36 58 72182-30 24 x 30 24 μl 50/pk
72186-40 .75 23.89μL 25 x 40 52 72182-45 24 x 45 33 μl 50/pk
72186-42 .75 25.08μL 25 x 42 49 72182-60 24 x 60 47 μl 50/pk
72186-44 .75 26.27μL 25 x 44 47 72183-25 25 x 25 23 μl 50/pk
72186-54 .75 32.25μL 25 x 54 38 72183-60 25 x 60 55 μl 50/pk
72186-60 .75 35.83μL 25 x 60 35 72183-75 25 x 75 68 μl 50/pk

® mBox® in Microarray Slide Handling

Using mBox – microarray handling without removing slides!
T Immerse 20 slides in liquid during blocking, denaturating, and post-arraying.
T It separates and prevents slide damage during shipping and processing.
T Optimally designed rack spacing for easy slide removal.
T Fits standard microtiter plate formats for centrifuging.
T Manufactured to prevent slide contamination.
T A convenient removable handle available.
Technical
T Material: Polypropylene T mBox withstand boiling water without
T Maximum continuous use temperature: softening
220°F (104°C) T Measures 5” L x 31⁄2” W x 11⁄2” H (127mm
T Melting point: 334°F (168°C) x 89mm x 38mm)

72188-01 The mBox® each

336 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec11_336-361_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 6:58 AM Page 337

Specimen Preparation and Embedding Supplies SECTION 11

® Premium Substrate for Microarray™
Premium substrates for microarray™ is used on a standard microscope slide 1 x 3”, selective glass.
All of the following slides are pre-packaged in a secure, no-contact mBox™, then vacuum-sealed
in a foil barrier bag prior to shipping. Each package contains 20 slides.
® 1. UltraClean™ Glass Slide ® 5. Aminopropylsilane Coated
A premium substrate ready to coat with your chemistry. Substrates
UltraClean™ substrate provides users with a pristine glass surface which can SuperChip™ Aminopropylsilane coated
be used in any coating process compatible with glass such as silanization and substrates are designed for microarrays
polylysine. Manufactured from the highest quality low fluorescence glass. fabricated with the PCR products as probes.
UltraClean substrates are manufactured in a precise and controlled process Manufactured from the highest quality, low
incorporating HEPA filtration. This ensures a clean and consistent surface fluorescence glass, SuperChip features a
for optimum performance in microarray applications. consistent, superior surface coating to provide
a uniform DNA immobilizing surface. The result is the slide that binds an
Options: optimal amount of probe while minimizing nonspecific binding of labeled
T Slides are available with ES – Enhanced Surface Treatment. ES targets assuring high density of reactive groups and eliminating virtually all
Surface treatments produce a smaller, more uniform spot size surface artifacts. These SuperChip substrates are compatible with
without having to change your protocol commercial microarray spotting and detection system.
T Bar Coding – Ability to print all standard bar code formats
The SuperChip cleaning and coating process is tightly controlled in a HEPA
Glass Specifications: filtered environment. Quality control includes contact angle and background
T Flatness is <10μ variation over T Soda-lime silicate glass fluorescence measurement of representative samples.
a 76mm diagonal interval T 0.98 – 1.02 mm thickness Glass Specifications:
T 60/40 scratch-dig surface T Edges: plain cut T Edges: plain cut T Flatness is <10μm variable
quality T Maximum edge chip: 0.05 mm T 60/40 scratch-dig surface across a diagonal
T Standard size: 25.10 x 75.36 T Coating: none of 21mm x 75mm slide
quality
±0.38 mm
T Printable area: 20 x 70 mm T Contact angle: 40° ± 5° T Thickness: 1.00 ±0.02 mm
T Thickness: 1.00 ±0.02 mm
T Standard size: 25.10 x 75.36 T Maximum edge chip: 0.5 mm
EMS # Description Qty ±0.38 mm T Coating: Aminopropylenesilane
63472-UC UltraClean Slide 20/bx T Thickness: 1.00 – 0.02 mm T Printable area: 20 x 70 mm
63472-BC UltraClean Slide with Barcode 20/bx
63472-ES UltraClean Slide with ES Coating 20/bx EMS # Description Qty
63475-AP Aminopropylsilane (APS) Slide 20/bx
® 2. Aldehyde Silane Coated Substrates 63475-BC Aminopropylsilane (APS) Slide, Barcode 20/bx
Offers a uniform coating of aldehydes for attaching amine-modified DNA 63475-ES Aminopropylsilane (APS) Slide, ES 20/bx
EMS # Description Qty
63476-AS Aldehyde / Silane Slide 20/bx ® 6. Gold Coated Substrates
63476-ES Aldehyde / Silane Slide, ES Glass 20/bx BioGold® substrates offer a high level of microaray performance through
63476-EB Aldehyde/Silane Slide, ES /Barcode 20/bx the use of a specialized thin-filmed gold coating. This specialized gold
coating improves the adhesion of biological active cells to the substrate
® 3. Epoxy Silane Coated Substrate while its background reflective properties provide significant optical
A uniform coating of epoxide groups for attaching amine modified DNA advantages for the detection of each cell’s unique light-wave signature.
with an amine end. This is a vapor-coating process on UltraClean™
slides, which yields a uniform surface free from impurities (as a Glass Specifications:
conventional liquid dip processes) T Glass Type: Soda Lime White T Gold Purity: 99.999%
EMS # Description Qty Glass T Coating Application: Vapor
63477-AS Epoxy / Silane Slide 20/bx T (Dimensions: 2.992” ±0.005”) Deposition
63477-ES Epoxy / Silane Slide, ES Glass 20/bx x (0.984” ±0.040”) x 1mm T Thickness of Coating: 1200 Å
Thick ±20%
® 4. Poly-L-Lysine Coated Substrates T Edges: Plain Cut T Reflective properties: 83%
Using premium select, low fluorescence glass with a consistent uniform
coating of poly-L-lysine these slides yield a dense layer of amine groups EMS # Description Qty
for initial ionic attachment of the negatively charged phosphate groups in 63479-AS Gold-Coated Substrates 20/bx
the DNA backbone. The DNA can subsequently be attached covalently to
the slide by either baking or by UV irradiation. Our aging and packaging
techniques ensure a product with a shelf life in excess of 6 months. Each
lot is tested for background uniformity prior to shipping. The slides arrive
ready for spotting – no pre-washing required.
EMS # Description Qty
63478-AS Poly-L-Lysine Slide 20/bx
63478-EB Poly-L-Lysine Slide, ES /Barcode 20/bx

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 337
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec11_336-361_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 6:58 AM Page 338

SECTION 11 Specimen Preparation and Embedding Supplies

® NUNC™ MaxiSorp™ 96 Well Plates
NUNC MaxiSorp plates have been the certified* ELISA plate industry standard for years.
This same surface now sets a new standard for protein multiplexing.
T Hydrophilic MaxiSorp™ surface binds antibodies, protein and biomolecules.
T Flat bottom, solid polystyrene plates.
T Excellent for chemiluminescent, fluorescent and luminescent arrays.
T Standard plate footprint is compatible with exiting readers.

ORDERING:
Catalog # 63494-CL 63494-BK 63494-WH
NUNC # 439454 437111 436110
Plate Material Polystyrene Polystyrene Polystyrene
Color Clear Black White
Key Applications Protein & antibody Protein & antibody Protein & antibody
multiplexing, multiplexing, multiplexing
chemiluminescence fluorescence luminescence
Method of attachment Hydrophilic Hydrophilic Hydrophilic
Unit per Package/case 5/60 10/80 10/80
*Certified for absorption of IgG; CV of <5% between wells; all results are ±10% from the mean and back-
ground of all well ±0.005 absorbance units from the mean

® NUNC™ 4-Well Slide ® NUNC

Processing Dish 384-Well
T Holds four 25 x 75 mm slides. Plate
T Sterile. T Natural polypropylene.
T Clear polystyrene dish and lid. T Non-sterile.
T Without lid.

ORDERING:
ORDERING: Catalog # 63498-LV 63498-ST 63498-DW
Catalog # 63496 NUNC # 267 459 264573 269390
NUNC # 267061 Description Low Volume Standard Deep Well
Material Polystyrene Max Volume, μl/well 58 120 252
Color Clear Working Volume, μl/well 2 - 35 10 – 100 5 - 240
Unit per pack / case 10/100 Unit per Pack/Case 25/100 20/120 5/60

® Pronto™ Epoxide Slide ® Pronto™ Universal Slide

Spotting Solution Spotting Solution
The Microarray spotting solution is optimized for printing The Microarray spotting solution is optimized for printing
short oligonucleotides (~30 mers) providing excellent both long oligonucleotides (>50 mers) and cDNA
spot morphology, extremely low background, and providing excellent spot morphology, extremely low
minimal evaporation when used in conjunction with background, and minimal evaporation when used in
above Epoxide Slides (#63477-series). Higher density conjunction with Aminopropylsilane Slides (#63475-
arrays can be printed due to the smaller spot size achieved using the series). The hygroscopic formulation minimizes evaporation to < 5% after
spotting solution four hours of exposure allowing more arrays to be printed from the same
EMS # Description Qty source plate during extended printing runs.
63500-25 Pronto™ Spotting Solution 250 ml EMS # Description Qty
Pronto is a Trade Mark of Corning 63501-25 Pronto™ Spotting Solution 250 ml
Pronto is Trade Mark of Corning

338 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec11_336-361_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 6:58 AM Page 339

Specimen Preparation and Embedding Supplies SECTION 11

MICROARRAYING

® ONCYTE® Film Slides

Nitrocellulose-coated (NC) slides for protein microarrays, cell lysate arrays, tissue printing and other applications
ONCYTE® is a three-dimensional microarray comprised of a combination of nitrocellulose polymer and proprietary
chemistry that provides increased protein affinity and binding. It is also provides enhanced fluorescent
chemiluminescent, radiographic, colormetric and visual signal compared to glass or other coated glass surfaces.
We provide nitrocellulose-coated products that include anything from standards 25 mm x 75 mm glass microscope slides to
SBS microtiter plate substrates in standard and custom formats. Nitrocellulose film excels in various applications including:
T Protein Microarrays T Immuno-arrays T Analyte Microarrays
T Cell Lysate Arrays T Antibody Arrays T Tissue Printing
Our nitrocellulose film surfaces are manufactured and quality tested to the most exacting standards. To provide an optimal balance between binding capacity
and fluorescence sensitivity, we offer two variants of nitrocellulose coatings.
• The ONCYTE® AVID™ nitrocellulose-coated substrates are for applications that require the highest possible protein binding affinity and capacity. Therefore
AVID™ slides are characterized by unparalleled protein binding capacity and affinity, making them ideal for colometric and infrared applications that
require extremely high levels of binding.
• The ONCYTE® NOVA™ nitrocellulose-coated substrates are recommended for applications that require the greatest fluorescent sensitivity but can accept
reduced binding capacity. Therefore NOVA™ slides extremely low background fluorescence and an elegant, clean surface make them the most sensitive
slides available for fluorescence –dependent arrays.
We offer two distinct nitrocellulose film coatings:
ONCYTE® AVID™ for applications that require the highest possible binding capacity and affinity
ONCYTE™ NOVA™ for applications that require the greatest fluorescence sensitivity

Ordering: ONCYTE® Film Slides

EMS # Dimensions Description Qty.

ONCYTE® AVID™
3
70335-50A 1 – 20 x 51 mm NC pad per slide; 20
Frosted End Glass 25 x 75 x 1 mm
ONCYTE® NOVA™
70335-50N 1 – 20 x 51 mm NC pad per slide; 20
Frosted End Glass 25 x 75 x 1 mm
ONCYTE® AVID™
70335-51A 1 – 20 x 60 mm NC pad per slide; 20
Plain Glass 25 x 75 x 1 mm
ONCYTE® NOVA™
70335-51N 1 – 20 x 60 mm NC pad per slide; 20
Plain Glass 25 x 75 x 1 mm
ONCYTE® AVID™
70335-52A 1 – 21 x 71 mm NC pad per slide; 20
Pad placement ± 0.3 mm; Glass 25 x 75 x 1 mm
ONCYTE® NOVA™
70335-52N 1 – 21 x 71 mm NC pad per slide; 20
Pad placement ± 0.3 mm; Glass 25 x 75 x 1 mm
ONCYTE® AVID™
70335-53A 2 – 20 x 20 mm NC pad per slide; 20
Frosted End Glass Slide 25 x 75 x 1 mm
ONCYTE® NOVA™
70335-53N 2 – 20 x 20 mm NC pad per slide; 20
Frosted End Glass Slide 25 x 75 x 1 mm
ONCYTE® AVID™
70335-54A 8 – 6 x 6 mm NC pad per slide; 20
9 6
Frosted End Glass Slide 25 x 75 x 1 mm
ONCYTE® NOVA™
70335-54N 8 – 6 x 6 mm NC pad per slide; 20
Frosted End Glass Slide 25 x 75 x 1 mm

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 339
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec11_336-361_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 6:58 AM Page 340

SECTION 11 Specimen Preparation and Embedding Supplies

MICROARRAYING
Ordering: ONCYTE® Film Slides (cont.)
EMS # Dimensions Description Qty.

ONCYTE® AVID™
70335-55A 12 – 6 x 6 mm NC pad per slide; 20
Frosted End Glass Slide 25 x 75 x 1 mm
ONCYTE® NOVA™
70335-55N 12 – 6 x 6 mm NC pad per slide; 20
Frosted End Glass Slide 25 x 75 x 1 mm
ONCYTE® AVID™
70335-56A 16 – 6 x 6 mm NC pad per slide; 20
Plain Glass Slide 25 x 75 x 1 mm
ONCYTE® NOVA™
70335-56N 16 – 6 x 6 mm NC pad per slide; 20
Plain Glass Slide 25 x 75 x 1 mm
ONCYTE® AVID™
70335-57A 16 – 6.5 x 6.5 mm NC pad per slide; 20
Plain Glass Slide 25 x 75 x 1 mm
ONCYTE® NOVA™
70335-57N 16 – 6.5 x 6.5 mm NC pad per slide; 20
Plain Glass Slide 25 x 75 x 1 mm
ONCYTE® AVID™
70335-58A 64 – 2.5 x 2.5 mm NC pad per slide; 20
Plain Glass Slide 25 x 75 x 1 mm
ONCYTE® NOVA™
70335-58N 64 – 2.5 x 2.5 mm NC pad per slide; 20
Plain Glass Slide 25 x 75 x 1 mm
ONCYTE® AVID™
70335-59A 1 – 15 x 69 mm NC pad per slide; 20
Plain Glass Slide 25 x 75 x 1 mm
ONCYTE® NOVA™
70335-59N 1 – 15 x 69 mm NC pad per slide; 20
Plain Glass Slide 25 x 75 x 1 mm
ONCYTE® AVID™
70335-60A 2 – 15 x 32 mm NC pad per slide; 20
Plain Glass Slide 25 x 75 x 1 mm
ONCYTE® NOVA™
70335-60N 2 – 15 x 32 mm NC pad per slide; 20
Plain Glass Slide 25 x 75 x 1 mm
ONCYTE® AVID™
70335-61A 4 – 15 x 15 mm NC pad per slide; 20
Plain Glass Slide 25 x 75 x 1 mm
ONCYTE® NOVA™
70335-61N 4 – 15 x 15 mm NC pad per slide; 20
Plain Glass Slide 25 x 75 x 1 mm
ONCYTE® AVID™
70335-62A 8 – 6 x 15 mm NC pad per slide; 20
Plain Glass Slide 25 x 75 x 1 mm
ONCYTE® NOVA™
70335-62N 8 – 6 x 15 mm NC pad per slide; 20
Plain Glass Slide 25 x 75 x 1 mm
ONCYTE® AVID™
70335-63A 8 – 6 x 20 mm NC pad per slide; 20
Plain Glass Slide 25 x 75 x 1 mm
ONCYTE® NOVA™
70335-63N 8 – 6 x 20 mm NC pad per slide; 20
Plain Glass Slide 25 x 75 x 1 mm

340 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec11_336-361_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 7/8/14 9:26 AM Page 341

Specimen Preparation and Embedding Supplies SECTION 11

MICROARRAYING
Ordering: ONCYTE® Film Slides (cont.)
EMS # Dimensions Description Qty.

ONCYTE® for SBS Compliant Microtiter Plates with Glass Substistute

ONCYTE® AVID™
70335-70A 96 NC Round Pads 6 mm diameter each
for SBS Microtiter Plate with Glass Substrate

ONCYTE® NOVA™
70335-70N 96 NC Round Pads 6 mm diameter each
for SBS Microtiter Plate with Glass Substrate

ONCYTE® AVID™
70335-71A 96 NC Square Pads 6 x 6 mm each
for SBS Microtiter Plate with Glass Substrate

ONCYTE® NOVA™
70335-71N 96 NC Square Pads 6 x 6 mm each
for SBS Microtiter Plate with Glass Substrate

ONCYTE® AVID™
70335-72A 384 NC Square Pads 2.5 x 2.5 mm each
for SBS Microtiter Plate with Glass Substrate

ONCYTE® NOVA™
70335-72N 384 NC Square Pads 2.5 x 2.5 mm each
for SBS Microtiter Plate with Glass Substrate

ONCYTE® for SBS Compliant Microtiter Plates

70335-BF1 ONCYTE® Barcode 20 x 2.5 mm; Code 128 Format Each

70335-BF2 ONCYTE® Barcode 20 x 7 mm; Code 128 Format Each

70335-BF3 ONCYTE® Barcode 22 x 14mm; CODABAR Format Each

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 341
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec11_336-361_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 6:59 AM Page 342

SECTION 11 Specimen Preparation and Embedding Supplies

MICROARRAYING
® ONCYTE® Film Wells
Film Well™: Slide based low volume, removable chambers for protein binding.
A combination of our SecureSeal™ chambers and ONCYTE® nitrocellulose film coated slides that provide an easily
removable, low volume chamber and the protein binding benefits of a nitrocellulose coating.
ONCYTE® is a 3-dimensional microarray substrate bound to a standard 25mm x 75mm glass slide. A combination
of nitrocellulose polymer and proprietary chemistry maximize protein binding and stability. The film is compatible
with virtually all detection systems, including fluorescent, chemiluminescent, radiographic and colorimetric.
Please refer to the SecureSeal™ chambers (pages 350–352) and ONCYTE® Film Slides (pages 339–341) for ordering information.

How to Use ONCYTE® Film-Wells/Film-Slides User Protocol:

• Specimens may be applied to a Film-Slide by any conventional method Instructions for Immunohistochemical Staining
including centrifugation, cryostat mounting, tissue printing pipetting, 1. Apply specimen to Film area (see side A).
and array depositors. 2. Air dry
• Film-Slides provide superior specimen adherence, out performing 3. Fix specimens using appropriate fixative for the antigen studied.
silane and protein treated glass slides. Commonly recommended fixatives are:
A. Paraformaldehyde: 4% in phosphate buffered saline (PBS).
• Soluble analyte ay be bound to Film-slides by air drying, UV 0.05M magnesium chloride, 0.3% Tween-20, pH 7.4. Fix at 4 C.
crosslinking, baking or microwaving. Film-slides are autoclavable. Fixation time may vary according to specimen thickness and
• Specimens may be chemically fixed using aqueous fixatives or specific antigen.
compatible alcohols. B. Zamboni’s: Nature 216:174-175, 1967.
• Film-slides are ideally suited for use in most cytochemistry assay 4. Wash with three changes of PBS containing Tween-20 (0.1%)
protocols including ICC, ISH, ISPCR and HTS. pH 7.5 (TPBS).
5. Block non-specific binding of primary antibody: -
• Film-slides are chemically resistant to reagents typically used in most
peroxidase based detection:
assays for cell analysis including 50% formamide.
incubate specimens for 15 minutes with 0.3% hydrogen peroxide
• Film-slides are not recommended for use with acetone, ethanol & prepared in de-ionized water.
methanol. Isopropanol and butanol are common substitutes. alkaline phosphatase based detection:
• Bi-directional access to specimen by reagents may reduce incubation incubate specimens 15 minutes at room temperature in TPBS
times and reagent concentrations. containing 1% normal serum from the species in which
the secondary antibody is made.
• Film-slides are compatible with a variety of counterstains includng
Mayer’s hematoxylin, nuclear fast red and light green SF. Gill’s 6. Blot excess serum from specimens.
hematoxylin is recomended (0.05% HCl may be used to de-stain). Eoin 7. Incubate specimens for 30 minutes with primary antibody
(0.5%, diluted in isopropanol). In some cases counterstains may bind diluted in TPBS containing 1% serum.
to the film, this usually does not interfere with the microscopic 8. Wash Film-slides with 3 changes of TPBS.
examination of specimens. 9. Incubate with secondary antibody diluted in TPBS containing
1% normal serum.
• Film-Slides are made transparent for microscopic and imaging
10. Repeat Step 8.
applications by xylenes or immersion oil with a refractive index of
1.515. For aqueous mounting Vectashield (Vector Labs), Slow Fade & Note: remaining steps refer to alkaline phosphatase based detection.
Slow Fade Light (Molecular Probes, Inc.) are recommended. 11. Incubate specimens in alkaline phosphatase labeled reagent.
12. Repeat Step 8.
• Permanent sections may be made by coverslip mounting specimens
13. Equilibrate specimens for 2 minutes in 0.1M TRIS pH 9.5.
using non-aqueous media after dehydration through alcohol or by air
14. Incubate in substrate or solution 20-30 minutes.
drying.
15. Rinse with tap water.
16. Counterstain if desired (see side A).
17. Air dry or dehydrate through isopropyl alcohol series.
18. Clear with 3 changes of xylenes.
19. Coverslip using non-aqueous mounting medium.

References:
High-Definition Cell Analysis In Situ Using Microporous Films. Cel Vision 2:499-509, 1995.
Cytometrically Coherent Transfer of Receptor Proteins on Microporous Membranes. BioTechniques 20:641-650. 1991.
ONCYTE® Film-Slides & Film-Wells are Intended for Laboratory Use Only
ONCYTE® is a registred trademark of Grace Bio-Labs, Inc.

342 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec11_336-361_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 6:59 AM Page 343

Specimen Preparation and Embedding Supplies SECTION 11

MICROARRAYING
® ProPlate™ Multi-Array Slide System
Integration of microplate and biochip technologies
ProPlate™ Integrates microscope slide based array technology with
automated microtiter plate processing. Up to 64 individual arrays can be
assayed per slide. Four slide fit into a tray, producing a modular plate
with a standard microtiter plate footprint and well spacing allowing
automated robotic processing of up to 256 arrays.
T Up to 64 leak-proof wells on any slide surface without the use of adhesive
T Microtiter plate well spacing facilitates use with multichannel pipettes
T 7 x 7 mm square well are ideal for high content arrays
T 5 – 350 μl well volumes accommodate small reagent and large wash volumes
T Available in Chip Chip™ compatible formats.

Ordering: ProPlate™ Multi-Array Slide System

EMS # Description Qty.

ONCYTE® for SBS Compliant Microtiter Plates

63484-01 1 Well ProPlate Tray set / 3 – 16.5 x 70 mm Well,
Stainless Steel Spring Clips, Tray, Cover, 10 Seal Strips and 1 Seal Strip applicator Each
63484-02 2 Well ProPlate Tray set / 3 – 16.5 x 34 mm, 2 Well Modules,
Stainless Steel Spring Clips, Tray, Cover, 10 Seal Strips and 1 Seal Strip applicator Each
63484-03 3 Well ProPlate Tray set / 3 – 18 x 20 mm, 3 Well Modules,
Stainless Steel Spring Clips, Tray, Cover, 10 Seal Strips and 1 Seal Strip applicator Each
63484-04 4 Well ProPlate Tray set / 3 – 16 x 16 mm, 4 Well Modules,
Stainless Steel Spring Clips, Tray, Cover, 10 Seal Strips and 1 Seal Strip applicator Each
63484-05 8 Well ProPlate Tray set / 3 – 7 x 16 mm, 8 Well Slide Modules,
Stainless Steel Spring Clips, Tray, Cover, 10 Seal Strips and 1 Seal Strip applicator Each
63484-06 16 Well ProPlate Tray set / 3 – 6 mm Diameter, 16 Well Slide Modules,
Stainless Steel Spring Clips, Tray, Cover, 10 Seal Strips and 1 Seal Strip applicator Each
63484-07 16 Well ProPlate Tray set / 3 – 7 x 7 mm, 16 Well,
Stainless Steel Spring Clips, Tray, Cover, 10 Seal Strips and 1 Seal Strip applicator Each
63484-08 64 Well ProPlate Tray set / 3 – 3.5 x 3.5 mm, 64 Well Slide Modules,
Stainless Steel Spring Clips, Tray, Cover, 10 Seal Strips and 1 Seal Strip applicator Each
63484-09 1 Well ProPlate Tray set / 4 – 16.5 x 70 mm Well Modules,
Delrin Snap Clips, Tray, Cover, 10 Seal Strips and 1 Seal Strip applicator Each
63484-10 2 Well ProPlate Tray set / 4 – 16.5 x 34 mm, 2 Well Modules,
Delrin Snap Clips, Tray, Cover, 10 Seal Strips and 1 Seal Strip applicator Each
63484-11 3 Well ProPlate Tray set / 4 – 18 x 20 mm, 3 Well Modules,
Delrin Snap Clips, Tray, Cover, 10 Seal Strips and 1 Seal Strip applicator Each
63484-12 4 Well ProPlate Tray set / 4 – 16 x 16 mm, 4 Well Modules,
Delrin Snap Clips, Tray, Cover, 10 Seal Strips and 1 Seal Strip applicator Each
63484-13 8 Well ProPlate Tray set / 4 – 7 x 16 mm, 8 Well Slide Modules,
Delrin Snap Clips, Tray, Cover, 10 Seal Strips and 1 Seal Strip applicator Each
63484-14 16 Well ProPlate Tray set / 4 – 6 mm Diameter, 16 Well Slide Modules,
Delrin Snap Clips, Tray, Cover, 10 Seal Strips and 1 Seal Strip applicator Each
63484-15 16 Well ProPlate Tray set / 4 – 7 x 7 mm, 16 Well Slide Modules,
Delrin Snap Clips, Tray, Cover, 10 Seal Strips and 1 Seal Strip applicator Each
63484-16 64 Well ProPlate Tray set / 4 – 3.5 x 3.5 mm, 64 Well Slide Modules,
Delrin Snap Clips, Tray, Cover, 10 Seal Strips and 1 Seal Strip applicator Each

Ordering Information for ProPlate™ Multi-Array Slide System continued on next page >>>>>

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 343
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec11_336-361_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 6:59 AM Page 344

SECTION 11 Specimen Preparation and Embedding Supplies

MICROARRAYING
Ordering: ProPlate™ Multi-Array Slide System (cont.)
EMS # Dimensions Description Qty. EMS # Dimensions Description Qty.

1 Well ProPlate 1 Well ProPlate

Module Slide Module/
63484-21 only/16.5 x 70 10 63484-31 16.5 x 70 mm 2
mm Well, Well, Delrin
without Clips Snap Clips

2 Well ProPlate 2 Well ProPlate

Module only/ Slide Module/
63484-22 16.5 x 34mm, 10 63484-32 16.5 x 34 mm, 2
2 Well, 2 Well, Delrin
without Clips Snap Clips

3 Well ProPlate 3 Well ProPlate

Module only/ 18 Slide Module/
63484-23 x 20 mm, 10 63484-33 18 x 20 mm, 2
3 Well, 3 Well, Delrin
without Clips Snap Clips

4 Well ProPlate 4 Well ProPlate

Module only/ 16 Slide Module/
63484-24 x 16 mm, 10 63484-34 16 x 16 mm, 2
4 Well, 4 Well, Delrin
without Clips Snap Clips

8 Well ProPlate 8 Well ProPlate

Module only/ Slide Module/
63484-25 7 x 16mm, 10 63484-35 7 x 16 mm, 2
8 Well, 8 Well, Delrin
without Clips Snap Clips

16 Well ProPlate 16 Well ProPlate

Module only/ Slide Module/
6 mm 6 mm
63484-26 10 63484-36 2
Diameter, 16 Diameter, 16
Well, Well, Delrin
without Clips Snap Clips

16 Well ProPlate 16 Well ProPlate

Module only/ Slide Module/
63484-27 7 x 7 mm, 16 10 63484-37 7 x 7 mm, 16 2
Well, without Well, Delrin
Clips Snap Clips

64 Well ProPlate 64 Well ProPlate

Module only/ Slide Module/
63484-28 3.5 x 3.5 mm, 10 63484-38 3.5 x 3.5 mm, 2
64 Well, 64 Well, Delrin
without Clips Snap Clips

Ordering Information for ProPlate™ Multi-Array Slide System continued on next page >>>>>

344 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec11_336-361_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 7/8/14 9:28 AM Page 345

Specimen Preparation and Embedding Supplies SECTION 11

MICROARRAYING
Ordering: ProPlate™ Multi-Array Slide System (cont.)
EMS # Dimensions Description Qty. EMS # Dimensions Description Qty.

1 Well ProPlate 8 Well ProPlate

Slide Module/16.5 Slide Module/7 x
63484-41 x 70 mm Well, 2 63484-45 16 mm, 8 Well, 2
Stainless Steel Stainless Steel
Clips Clips

2 Well ProPlate 16 Well ProPlate

Slide Module/16.5 Slide Module/
63484-42 x 34 mm, 2 Well, 2 63484-46 6 mm Diameter, 2
Stainless Steel 16 Well, Stainless
Clips Steel Clips

3 Well ProPlate 16 Well ProPlate

Slide Module/18 x Slide Module/
63484-43 20 mm, 3 Well, 2 63484-47 7 x 7 mm, 16 2
Stainless Steel Well, Stainless
Clips Steel Clips

4 Well ProPlate 64 Well ProPlate

Slide Module/16 x Slide Module/
63484-44 16 mm, 4 Well, 2 63484-48 3.5 x 3.5 mm, 2
Stainless Steel 64 Well, Stainless
Clips Steel Clips

Silicone Gasket Only

EMS # Description Qty.
63484-51 1 Well ProPlate Silicone Gasket only / 16.5 x 70 mm Well 10
63484-52 2 Well ProPlate Silicone Gasket only / 16.5 x 24 mm, 2 Well 10
63484-53 3 Well ProPlate Silicone Gasket only / 16 x 20 mm, 3 Well 10
63484-54 4 Well ProPlate Silicone Gasket only / 16 x 16 mm, 4 Well 10
63484-55 8 Well ProPlate Silicone Gasket only / 7 x 16 mm, 8 Well 10
63484-56 16 Well ProPlate Silicone Gasket only / 6 mm Diameter, 16 Well 10
63484-57 16 Well ProPlate Silicone Gasket only / 7 x 7 mm, 16 Well 10
63484-58 64 Well ProPlate Silicone Gasket only / 3.5 x 3.5 mm, 64 Well 10
Accessories
EMS # Description Qty.

63484-80 Seal Strips (50) and Seal Strip Applicator 50

63484-81 ProPlate Delrin, Non-Numbered Snap Clips 20

63484-82 ProPlate Stainless Steel Spring Clips 20

63484-83 ProPlate Tray and Cover for Snap Clip Modules Holds 4 Slide Modules each
63484-84 ProPlate Tray and Cover for Spring Clip Modules Holds 3 Slide Modules each

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 345
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec11_336-361_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 7/8/14 9:32 AM Page 346

SECTION 11 Specimen Preparation and Embedding Supplies

MICROARRAYING
 ProPlate Microtiter Plate (MP)
Patented ProPlate™ technology for high throughput robotic processing of microarrays
Grace BioLabs developed bottomless SBS compliant microtiter plate Key product features include:
superstructures for use with robotic processors. TheSuperstructures come in  Guaranteed flat SBS compliant
a permanently affixed well format – the ProPlate MP™, or a removable well microtiter plate format which
format – the FlexPlate MP™. enables robotic processing of assays
 Water-tight seal between super-
The ProPlate MP™ SBS compliant microtiter plate features a SecureSeal™ structure and substrate
Plus adhesive bonding system applied to a bottomless 96-round well, black,  Compatible with glass or plastic substrates.
polystyrene microtiter plate. Simply peel off the protective polyliner and apply  Available in 96 round or square or 384 square well format
large format array for automated processing.  Available as a complete microtiter plate with microcellulose film
The proprietary adhesive forms a water-tight seal between a microarray coated substrate, uncoated substrate or as an adhesive superstruc-
substrate and the bottomless microtiter plate. Grace Bio Labs offers plate with ture alone.
SBS standard spacing in both 96-well (shown) and 384-well formats.  Plates are available with SBS standard spacing in both 96-well and
384-well formats.

Ordering: ProPlate Microtiter Plates

EMS # Description Qty.

SBS Compliant Adhesive and Non-Adhesive Microtiter Plates

63485-01 96 Square Well ProPlate / Adhesive SBS Microtiter Plate / Black Polystyrene Each
63485-02 96 Round Well ProPlate / Adhesive SBS Microtiter Plate / Black Polystyrene Each
63485-05 364 Square Well ProPlate / Adhesive SBS Microtiter Plate / Black Polystyrene Each
63485-10 96 Square Well FlexWell / 7.25 x 7.25 mm / 9 mm Center to Center Well Spacing /
4.5 mm Depth / 110 x 75 mm OD / Clear Silicone / Adhesive One Slide Each
63485-11 96 Square Well FlexWell / 7.25 x 7.25 mm / 9 mm Center to Center Well Spacing /
4.5 mm Depth / 110 x 75 mm OD / Clear Silicone / Adhesive One Slide / Black Polystyrene Frame Each
SBS Compliant Microtiter Plates with ONCYTE® Nitrocellulose Caoted Substrates
63485-20 ONCYTE AVID® 96 NC Round Pads / 6 mm Diameter for SBS Microtiter Plate / Glass Substrate Each
63485-21 ONCYTE AVID® 96 NC Square Pads / 6 x 6 mm for SBS Microtiter Plate / Glass Substrate Each
63485-22 ONCYTE AVID® 96 NC Round Pads / 6 mm Diameter for SBS Microtiter Plate / Plastic Substrate Each
63485-23 ONCYTE AVID® 384 NC Square Pads / 2.5 x 2.5 mm for SBS Microtiter Plate / Glass Substrate Each
63485-24 ONCYTE NOVA® 96 NC Round Pads / 6 mm Diameter for SBS Microtiter Plate / Glass Substrate Each
63485-25 ONCYTE NOVA® 96 NC Square Pads / 6 x 6 mm for SBS Microtiter Plate / Glass Substrate Each
63485-26 ONCYTE NOVA® 96 NC Round Pads / 6 mm Diameter for SBS Microtiter Plate / Plastic Substrate Each
63485-27 ONCYTE NOVA® 384 NC Square Pads / 2.5 x 2.5 mm for SBS Microtiter Plate / Glass Substrate Each

 Chambers for Microarrays  HybriWell™ Hybridization System

(See pages 351-352
Versatile Hybridization Chambers for Genomic and Proteomic Arrays
 Seals securely to a microscope slide surface in seconds
 Versatile sizes and styles  Access ports in the chamber surface allow the addition of reagents
 Ideal for high throughput screening of genomic and protein arrays  Ports are easily sealed using seal tabs provided with each order
on microscope slides  Sealed chambers are water tight
 Designed to minimize reagent volume, eliminate evaporation and  The disposable chamber removes cleanly and easily even after
promote reagent mixing for uniform hybridization heating.
 Materials are nuclease free and temperature rersistant  SecureSeal™ Hybridization Chambers
(See pages 348-350 for ordering)
 HybriSlip™ Hybridization Coverslips  Gasketed chambers provide optimum surface volume fluid
(See page 355 for ordering) dynamics for hybridization assays.
 Specially selected hydrophobic plastic covers do not bind  Designed to minimize friction especially when active mixing is
probes to surfaces like glass coverslips employed during assay
 HybriSlips™ are lighter weight than glass, minimizing friction  Partially filled chambers may be sealed and rotated continu-
and facilitating uniform reagent distribution ously for superior mixing
 HybriSlips™ are ready-to-use without pretreatment  FlexWell™
 Working surfaces are protected with clean release liners to (See page 347 for ordering)
prevent contaminations
 Silicone gasket forms wells on slides using clean release
 HybriSlips™ remain flat and will not curl, even at high temper-
adhesive to isolate up to 16 specimens per slide
atures
 Slides fit into a reusable slide tray organizing wells into the
Note: HybriWell™ and SecureSeal™ are recommended for most protein and nucleic acid footprint of a SMS compliant micrototer plate
assays. If you are using CY5® or Alexa Fluor® 647 direct-labeled DNA probes, please refer to our
 Gasket may be sealed for mixing and to prevent evaporation.
new “fluorescent friendly” chambers for DNA microarrays or see page 323 for details.
Available 8-wells and 16-wells.

346 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec11_336-361_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 7/8/14 9:32 AM Page 347

Specimen Preparation and Embedding Supplies SECTION 11

MICROARRAYING
 FlexWell™ Removable Incubation Chambers
for Microarrays Using ONCYTE® Slides
 Silicone FlexWell™ forms well on slides using a clean release adhesive to isolate up to 16
specimens per slide
 Slides and FlexWell™ fit into a reusable slide tray organizing wells into the footprint of a
SBS compliant microtiter plate
 Gasket may be sealed for mixing and to prevent evaporation
 Available in eight-well and 16-well formats

Ordering: FlexWell™ Removable Incubation Chambers

EMS # Dimensions Description Qty.

FlexWell 8 – 6.5 x 6.5 mm Wells /

63485-50 3.2mm Depth / 25 x 75 mm OD Clear Silicone 10
Adhesive one Side

FlexWell 16 – 6.5 x 6.5 mm Wells /

63485-51 3.2mm Depth / 25 x 75 mm OD Clear Silicone 10
Adhesive one Side

FlexWell 64 – 3.5 x 3.5 mm Wells /

63485-52 1.8mm Depth / 25 x 75 mm OD Clear Silicone 10
Adhesive one Side

63485-53 Seal Strips 24 mm x 77 mm Seal Area 50

4 Slide Tray Holds up to 4 Slides /

63485-54 each
Tray Measures 75.9 x 127.6 mm OD

FlexPlate 96 Square Well / 7.25 x 7.25 mm /

63485-55 9 mm Center-to-Center Well Spacing / 4 mm Depth / 5
110 x 75 mm OD / Clear Silicone / Adhesive on Side

FlexPlate 96 Square Well / 7.25 x 7.25 mm / 9 mm Center-to-

63485-56 Center Well Spacing / 4 mm Depth / 110 x 75 mm OD / Clear each
Silicone / Adhesive on Side/ Black Polystyrene Frame

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 347
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec11_336-361_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 7/8/14 9:32 AM Page 348

SECTION 11 Specimen Preparation and Embedding Supplies

HYBRIDIZATION AND INCUBATION
 SecureSeal™ Hybridization Chambers
SecureSeal™ hybridization chambers provide optimum surface
RNASE
to volume fluid dynamics FREE
SecureSeal™ adhesive chambers form peel-and-stick enclosures to isolate specimens affixed to
glass microscope slides. RNase free, gasketed chambers provide optimum surface-to-volume
fluid dynamics for hybridization assays on large or multiple specimens and genomic arrays on
glass slides or film coated slides.
FEATURES:
 Design minimize friction, pro-  SecureSeal™ adhesive bonds
motes reagent mixing, and chambers to glass in seconds
facilitates uniform hybridization. and removes cleanly and easily
 Sealable access ports (1.5mm) even after heating.
in the chamber surface allow  SecureSeals™ are ideally
for the addition and removal of suited for protocols utilizing
reactants. autoradiographic, fluorescent
 Adhesive seal tabs create leak- or cheminescent end points.
proof chambers that are tem-  Polycarbonate HybriSlip used,
perature resistant 0.25mm thick

Ordering: SecureSeal™ Hybridization Chambers

EMS # Dimensions Description Qty.

Hybridization Chamber, 1 – 13mm Dia x 0.6mm Depth /

70333-10 50
22mm x 25mm OD / 1.5mm Dia Ports with 120 Port Seals

Hybridization Chamber, 1 – 20mm Dia x 0.6mm Depth /

70333-30 40
22mm x 25mm OD / 1.5mm Dia Ports with 120 Port Seals

Hybridization Chamber, 1 – 20mm Dia x 0.9mm Depth /

70333-32 40
22mm x 25mm OD / 1.5mm Dia Ports with 120 Port Seals

Hybridization Chamber, 1 – 20mm Dia x 1.7mm Depth /

70333-34 40
22mm x 25mm OD / 1.5mm Dia Ports with 120 Port Seals

Hybridization Chamber, 1 – 20mm Dia x 2.5mm Depth /

70333-36 40
22mm x 25mm OD / 1.5mm Dia Port with 120 Port Seals

Hybridization Chamber, 8 – 9mm Dia x 0.6mm Depth /

70333-40 20
26mm x 51mm OD / 1.5mm Dia Ports with 120 Port Seals

Hybridization Chamber, 8 – 9mm Dia x 0.9mm Depth /

70333-42 26mm x 51mm OD / 1.5mm Dia Port with 120 Port Seals
20

Hybridization Chamber, 8 – 9mm Dia x 1.7mm Depth /

70333-44 20
26mm x 51mm OD / 1.5mm Dia Ports with 120 Port Seals

Hybridization Chamber, 8 – 9mm Dia x 2.5mm Depth /

70333-46 20
26mm x 51mm OD / 1.5mm Dia Ports with 120 Port Seals

348 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec11_336-361_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 6:59 AM Page 349

Specimen Preparation and Embedding Supplies SECTION 11

HYBRIDIZATION AND INCUBATION
Ordering: SecureSeal™ Hybridization Chambers (cont.)
EMS # Dimensions Description Qty.

Hybridization Chamber,
70333-20 1 – 22mm x 22mm x 0.6mm Depth ID / 25mm x 25mm OD / 50
1.5mm Dia Ports with 120 Port Seals

Hybridization Chamber,
70333-22 1 – 22mm x 40mm x 0.6mm Depth ID / 25mm x 44mm OD / 50
1.5mm Dia Ports with 120 Port Seals

Hybridization Chamber,
70333-27 1 – 22mm x 60mm x 0.6mm Depth ID / 25mm x 65mm OD / 50
1.5mm Dia Ports with 120 Port Seals

Hybridization Chamber,
70333-37 1 – 22mm x 53mm x 0.6mm Depth ID / 26mm x 57mm OD / 25
1.5mm Dia Ports with 120 Port Seals

Hybridization Chamber,
70333-47 1 – 21mm x 60mm x 0.6mm Depth ID / 25mm x 65mm OD / 25
1.5mm Dia Ports with 120 Port Seals

Hybridization Chamber,
70333-58 1 – 21.5mm x 71.5mm x 0.6mm Depth ID / 25.5mm x 75.5mm 25
OD / 1.5mm Dia Ports with 120 Port Seals

Hybridization Chamber,
70333-50 1 – 45mm x 45mm x 0.6mm Depth ID / 51mm x 51mm OD / 20
1.5mm Dia Ports with 120 Port Seals

Hybridization Chamber,
70333-62 2 – 21mm x 21mm x 0.6mm Depth ID / 25mm x 51mm OD / 25
1.5mm Dia Ports with 120 Port Seals

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 349
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec11_336-361_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 7:00 AM Page 350

SECTION 11 Specimen Preparation and Embedding Supplies

HYBRIDIZATION AND INCUBATION
Ordering: SecureSeal™ Hybridization Chambers (cont.)
EMS # Dimensions Description Qty.

Hybridization Chamber,
70333-66 2 – 21.5mm x 34.5mm x 0.6mm Depth ID / 25mm x 75mm OD / 25
1.5mm Dia Ports with 120 Port Seals

Hybridization Chamber,
70333-70 3 – 20mm x 21mm x 0.6mm Depth ID / 25mm x 75mm OD / 25
1.5mm Dia Ports with 120 Port Seals

Hybridization Chamber,
70333-74 6 – 9.8mm x 20mm x 0.6mm Depth ID / 25mm x 75mm OD / 25
1.5mm Dia Ports with 120 Port Seals

Hybridization Chamber,
70333-76 6 – 9.8mm x 20mm x 0.9mm Depth ID / 25mm x 75mm OD / 25
1.5mm Dia Ports with 120 Port Seals

Hybridization Chamber,
70333-82 8 – 7mm x 7mm x 0.6mm Depth ID / 26mm x 43mm OD / 25
1.5mm Dia Ports with 120 Port Seals

Hybridization Chamber,
70333-83 8 – 7mm x 7mm x 0.9mm Depth ID / 26mm x 43mm OD / 25
1.5mm Dia Ports with 120 Port Seals

Hybridization Chamber,
70333-86 16 – 7mm x 7mm x 0.9mm Depth ID / 26mm x 43mm OD / 25
1.5mm Dia Ports with 120 Port Seals

70328-00 Adhesive Port Seal Tabs/ 7.62mm Diameter 200

SHEET MATERIAL
EMS # Description Sheet size Thick Qty
70333-01 Double sided Secureseal Adhesive 7.25” x 10” 0.12mm Thick each
70333-02 Double sided Secureseal Adhesive 7.25” x 10” 0.24mm Thick each
70333-03 Double sided Secureseal Adhesive 7.25” x 10” 0.36mm Thick each
70333-04 Double sided Secureseal Adhesive 7.25” x 10” 0.48mm Thick each

350 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec11_336-361_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 7:00 AM Page 351

Specimen Preparation and Embedding Supplies SECTION 11

HYBRIDIZATION AND INCUBATION
 HybriWell™ Sealing System Ordering: HybriWell™ Sealing System
HybriWell Sealing Chambers System EMS # Dimensions Description Qty.
seals securely to a microscope slide
surface in seconds – for most protein Secure-Seal Adhesive Chamber,
and nucleic acid assays 1 - 13mm Dia x 0.15mm Depth /
70328-01 Approx. 18 μl Vol / 25mm x 28mm OD 100
/ 1.5mm Dia port, 200 port seals
included

Secure-Seal Adhesive Chamber,

1 -20mm Dia x 0.15mm Depth /
70328-03 Approx. 30 μl Vol / 25mm x 30mm OD 100
/ 1.5mm Dia port, 200 port seals
included

Secure-Seal Adhesive Chamber,

1- 19mm x 32mm x 0.15mm Depth /
70328-05 Approx. 30 - 50 μl Vol / 26mm x 100
43mm OD / 1.5mm Dia port, 200 port
seals included
FEATURES:
 Enclose a single or
RNASE Secure-Seal Adhesive Chamber, 1 -
21.6mm x 21.6mm x 0.15mm Depth /
multiple specimens in a FREE 70328-08 Approx. 30 - 50 μl Vol / 25.5mm x
30mm OD / 1.5mm Dia port, 200 port
100
small reagent volume
seas included
 Access ports in the
chamber surface allow for the addition or Secure-Seal Adhesive Chamber, 1 -
removal of reactants 22mm x 30mm x 0.15mm Depth /
 Ports are easily sealed using Adhesive Seal 70328-09 Approx. 40 - 70 μl Vol / 25.5mm x 100
Tabs (provided) to prevent reagent 39mm OD / 1.5mm Dia port, 200 port
evaporation. seals included
 Sealed chambers are watertight and ideally Secure-Seal Adhesive Chamber, 1 -
suited for water-bath incubations. 21mm x 40mm x 0.15mm Depth /
 RNase free, hydrophobic surfaces will not 70328-10 Approx. 50 - 100 μl Vol / 25mm x 100
trap or bind probes. 50mm OD / 3.2mm Dia port, 200 port
 Disposable chamber remove cleanly and seals included
easily even after heating. Secure-Seal Adhesive Chamber, 1 -
 Come with Non-Adhesive Peeling Tab 22mm x 40mm x 0.25mm Depth /
70328-12 Approx. 180 - 200 μl Vol / 25.5mm x 100
50mm OD / 1.5mm Dia port, 200 port
1. Peel off seals included
liner Secure-Seal Adhesive Chamber, 1 -
22mm x 60mm x 0.25mm Depth /
70328-13 Approx. 280 - 330 μl Vol / 25mm x 100
69mm OD / 1.5mm Dia port, 200 port
2. Enclose seals included
Specimen
Secure-Seal Adhesive Chamber, 1-
22mm x 65mm x 0.25mm Depth /
3. Fill 70328-14 Approx. 310 - 425 μl Vol / 25mm x 100
75mm OD / 3.2mm Dia port, 200 port
seals included

4. Seal
Secure-Seal Adhesive Chamber, 1 -
45mm x 45mm x 0.15mm Depth /
70328-15 Approx. 150 - 300 μl Vol / 52mm x 100
56mm OD / 1.5mm Dia port, 200 port
seals included
5. Remove

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 351
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec11_336-361_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 7:00 AM Page 352

SECTION 11 Specimen Preparation and Embedding Supplies

HYBRIDIZATION AND INCUBATION
Ordering: HybriWell™ Sealing System (cont.)
EMS # Dimensions Description Qty.

Secure-Seal Adhesive Chamber, 1 -60mm x 21mm x 0.25mm

70328-17 Depth / Approx. 275 - 320 μl Vol / 25mm x 70mm OD / 100
3.2mm Dia port, 200 port seals included

Secure-Seal Adhesive Chamber,

70328-19 1- 60mm x 21mm x 0.15mm Depth / Approx. 275 - 320 μl Vol / 100
25mm x 75mm OD / 3.2mm Dia port, 200 port seals included

Secure-Seal Adhesive Chamber,

3 - 20mm x 21mm x 0.15mm Depth / Approx. 100 μl Vol per
70328-30 100
chbr/ 25mm x 75mm OD / 1.5mm Dia port, 200 port seals
included

CodSecure-Seal Adhesive Chamber,

70328-35 6 - 9.8mm x 20mm x 0.25mm Depth / Approx. 50 μl Vol per chbr/ 100
25mm x 70mm OD / 1.5mm Dia port, 200 port seals included

® HybriWell™ Fluorescent Friendly Chambers for Sensitive DNA Microarrays

These new microarray chambers are designed specially for compatibility with Cy5® or Alexa Fluor 647 direct labeled DNA probes for hybridization assays.
These chambers as well as the original HybriWells may also be used with all other fluorochrome labeled probes.
Each package included illustrated instructions for use, applicator and 200 adhesive port seals. (Additional seal tabs are sold separately m, Cat #70328-00)

Ordering: Fluorescent Friendly Chambers for Sensitive DNA Microarrays

EMS # Dimensions Description Qty.

Fluor Friendly Adhesive Chamber, 1 -22mm x 22mm x 0.25mm

70328-50 Depth / Approx. 30 - 50μl Vol / 25.5mm x 30mm OD / 100
1.5mm Dia port, 200 port seals included

Fluor Friendly Adhesive Chamber, 1 -22mm x 22mm x 0.12mm

70328-51 Depth / Approx. 15 - 25μl Vol / 25.5mm x 30mm OD / 100
1.5mm Dia port, 200 port seals included

Fluor Friendly Adhesive Chamber, 1 -22mm x 40mm x 0.25mm

70328-52 Depth / Approx. 180 - 200μl Vol / 25.5mm x 50mm OD / 100
1.5mm Dia port, 200 port seals included

Fluor Friendly Adhesive Chamber, 1 -22mm x 40mm x 0.12mm

70328-53 Depth / Approx. 90 - 100μl Vol / 25.5mm x 50mm OD / 100
1.5mm Dia port, 200 port seals included

Fluor Friendly Adhesive Chamber, 1 -22mm x 60mm x 0.25mm

70328-54 Depth / Approx. 280 - 330μl Vol / 25mm x 69mm OD / 100
1.5mm Dia port, 200 port seals included

Fluor Friendly Adhesive Chamber, 1 -22mm x 60mm x 0.12mm

70328-55 Depth / Approx. 140 - 165μl Vol / 25mm x 69mm OD / 100
1.5mm Dia port, 200 port seals included

Fluor Friendly Adhesive Chamber, 1 -21mm x 40mm x 0.12mm

70328-56 Depth / Approx. 50 - 100μl Vol / 25mm x 50mm OD / 100
3.2mm Dia port, 200 port seals included

352 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec11_336-361_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 7:00 AM Page 353

Specimen Preparation and Embedding Supplies SECTION 11

HYBRIDIZATION AND INCUBATION
 CoverWell™ Incubation Chambers
CoverWell™ incubation reusable chambers –
exceptionally secure seals during incubations

FEATURES: RNASE
 CoverWell™ incubation
chambers are reusable,
FREE
easy to apply incubation chambers
that attach without the use of adhesive Ordering: CoverWell™ Incubation Chambers
 Microwavable for permeabilization and EMS # Dimensions Description Qty.
retrieval steps. (J. Histotechnology
18:115-117, 1995) Incubation Chamber , 1 - 13 mm Dia x
 Preserve kinetic (non-capillary) fluid dynamics 70324-02 0.2 mm Depth ID / 22 x 25 mm OD / 25
for better reagent mixing and lower Approximately Volume 20μl
backgrounds. (CellVision 2:165-169, 1995)
Incubation Chamber , 1 - 13 mm Dia x
 Eliminate precipitate deposits on specimens by 70324-05 0.5 mm Depth ID / 22 x 25 mm OD / 50
incubating slides and specimens upside down Approximately Volume 50μl
during enzymatic color precipitation reaction.
 Provides an exceptionally secure seal during Incubation Chamber, 1 - 22 mm x 40mm
submerged water bath and/or high 70324-20 x 0.2 mm Depth ID / 25 x 44 mm OD / 25
temperature incubations. Approximately Volume 200μl
 RNase and DNase free Incubator Chamber, 1 - 22 mm x 40 mm
 Hydrophobic 70324-50 x 0.5 mm Depth ID / 25 x 44 mm OD / 50
 Easy removed – reusable Approximately Volume 500μl
 Adheres to wet or dry surfaces 70325-01 Water Bath Holder 1
70325-05 Water Bath Holder 5

 FastWells™ Ordering: FastWells™

FastWell™ stickable, stackable, EMS # Dimensions Description Qty.
sealable, peelable and
reusealble reagent barriers! 1 – 9mm Dia x
70325-50 1.0mm Depth / 50
FEATURES: 18mm x 18mm OD
 Sticky, flexible silicone gaskets
form hydrophobic reagent barriers around specimens without messy
1 – 20mm Dia x
adhesives or special slides
70325-52 1.0mm Depth / 50
 FasrWells may be stacked to increase depth and volume 25mm x 25mm OD
 They remain sealed during agitated washing steps
 They can be washed, autoclaved and reused
 FastWell™ can also be sealed to form incubation chambers using 1 – 32mm x 19mm x
flexible HybriSlip™ Covers 70325-54 1.0mm Depth / 50
25.5mm x 44mm OD

 CoverWell™ Modular Hybridization System

An assortment of flexible, press-to-seal gasket and coverslip enclosures which
can be quickly assembled and disassembled for the specialized challenges of
Adhesive/Depth Perfusion #70334-C Screen 70334-D Imaging -
hybridizing and imaging thick and free- floating specimens. 70334-A & 70334-E #70334-B
All steps - from permeabilizing to image analysis are made easy and trouble free
Catalog Interior Exterior
with chambers you assembles from modular components.
Number Diameter Depth Length Width Height Pack
For neural explants, plant or animal specimens of any texture and thickness. 70334-A 13 0.6 25 22 0.6 25/pk
Build up to three chambers on one microscope slide. Ideally suited for overnight 70334-B 13 0.7 22 22 0.8 25/pk
70334-C 13 0.7 25 22 0.8 25/pk
hybridizations and agitated washing steps. The screen is made from polyester
70334-D 13 0.7 25 22 1.6 25/pk
and is 1.6mm square. 70334-E 13 1.3 25 22 1.3 25/pk
70334-05 Assortment pack of 5 each of A, B, C, D, & 10 of E

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 353
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec11_336-361_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 7:00 AM Page 354

SECTION 11 Specimen Preparation and Embedding Supplies

HYBRIDIZATION AND INCUBATION
 Press-to-Seal Silicone
Isolators Ordering: Press-to-Seal Silicone Isolators
EMS # Well Dimensions, mm Wells size
Isolate specimens using press-to-seal
Silicone(S)/ Silicone(S)/ Adhesive(A)/ per Qty. (mm)
silicone isolators with removable Depth Length/Width/Diam
Silicone(S) Adhesive(A)/ Adhesive(A)/ Slide
hydrophobic barriers
70336-01 70336-31 70336-61 0.5 1 25 13

70336-02 70336-32 70336-62 1.0 1 25 13

70336-03 70336-33 70336-63 2.0 1 25 13

70336-04 70336-34 70336-64 2.5 1 25 13

70336-05 70336-40 70336-70 0.5 1 25 20

70336-10 70336-42 70336-72 1.0 1 25 20

70336-20 70336-44 70336-74 2.0 1 25 20

Silicone isolators allow
researchers to isolate R NASE 70336-25 70336-46 70336-76 2.5 1 25 20
specimens using
removable hydrophobic
FREE 70337-05 70337-40 70337-70 0.5 1 25 32
barriers. They may be used to isolate cells
grown in culture dishes or separate multiple 70337-10 70337-42 70337-72 1.0 1 25 32
specimens affixed to microscope slides.
70337-20 70337-44 70337-74 2.0 1 25 32
FEATURES:
70337-25 70337-46 70337-76 2.5 1 25 32
 Silicone isolators are available in
silicone thickness 0.5 to 2.5 mm 70339-05 70339-40 70339-70 0.5 8 25 9
 Isolators are pre-cut into gaskets or as
sheet materials with and without 70339-10 70339-42 70339-72 1.0 8 25 9
SecureSeal™ clean release adhesive on
one or both surfaces. 70339-20 70339-44 70339-74 2.0 8 25 9
 Isolators remain sealed to smooth
surfaces during washing steps. 70339-25 70339-46 70339-76 2.5 8 25 9
 Non-adhesive isolators are autoclavable
and reusable. 70344-05 70344-38 70344-68 0.5 12 25 45
 Closed chambers may be formed using
flexible RNase free, HybriSlip™ covers. 70344-10 70344-39 70344-69 1.0 12 25 45

Ordering: Isolators are available without 70344-20 70344-40 70344-70 2.0 12 25 45

coverslips, and packaged 25 per pack. They
are available with either: 70345-05 70345-38 70345-68 0.5 24 25 2

 Silicone (S) / Silicone (S) – press-to-seal 70345-10 70345-39 70345-69 1.0 24 25 2

silicone gasket only, no adhesive
 Silicone (S) / Adhesive (A) – press-to- 70345-20 70345-40 70345-70 2.0 24 25 2
seal silicone on one side and adhesive
on the other side. 70346-05 70346-40 70346-70 0.5 8 25 7x7
 Adhesive (A) / Adhesive (A) – press-to-
seal adhesive on both sides. 70346-10 70346-42 70346-72 1.0 8 25 7x7
To fulfill your needs, we also offer the
SHEETS MATERIAL they will serve to your 70346-20 70346-44 70346-74 2.0 8 25 7x7
own design chambers
70347-05 70347-40 70347-70 0.5 8 25 7x7

70347-10 70347-42 70347-72 1.0 8 25 7x7

70347-20 70347-44 70347-74 2.0 8 25 7x7

354 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec11_336-361_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 7/8/14 9:41 AM Page 355

Specimen Preparation and Embedding Supplies SECTION 11

HYBRIDIZATION AND INCUBATION

 Press-to-Seal Silicone Isolators (continued)

Ordering: Press-to-Seal Silicone Isolators
Well Wells/ Size
EMS # (S)/(S) EMS # (S)/(A) EMS # (A)/(A) Depth Dimensions Slide Qty. (mm)

70348-05 70348-40 70348-70 0.5 16 25 7x7

70348-10 70348-42 70348-72 1.0 16 25 7x7

70348-20 70348-44 70348-74 2.0 16 25 7x7

SHEET MATERIAL
70338-05 70338-40 70338-70 0.5 Red Silicone Sheet 13x15 cm — 5
70338-10 70338-42 70338-72 0.8 Red Silicone Sheet 13x15 cm — 5
70338-20 70338-44 70338-74 1.6 Red Silicone Sheet 13x15 cm — 5
70338-25 70338-46 70338-76 2.4 Red Silicone Sheet 13x15 cm — 5
73338-29 — 70338-79 0.25 Clear Silicone Sheet 13x15 cm — 5
70338-30 — — 0.5 Clear Silicone Sheet 13x15 cm — 5
70338-31 — — 0.8 Clear Silicone Sheet 13x15 cm — 5
70338-32 70338-52 — 1.6 Clear Silicone Sheet 13x15 cm — 5

 HybriSlips™
Hybrislips™ - ideally suited for in situ hybridization, in situ PCR and FEATURES:
hybridization to genomic arrays on glass slides.  RNase and DNase free
HybriSlips are flexible, thin (0.25mm) covers that minimize fluid friction and facilitate
™  Hydrophobic
uniform reagent distribution. RNase free, hydrophobic covers will not trap or bind probes  Disposable
to their surfaces like coverglass. Product is ready-to-use without pretreatment. Working  Will not chip or break
surfaces are protected with clean release liners to prevent RNase contamination.
Hybrislips™ remain flat and will not curl, even at high temperatures.  Clear – stay flat

Ordering: HybriSlips™
EMS # Dimensions Description Qty. EMS # Dimensions Description Qty.

HybriSlip HybriSlip
70329-22 Size 22mm x 22mm x 100 70329-40 Size 22mm x 40mm x 100
0.25mm Thickness 0.25mm Thickness
HybriSlip HybriSlip
70329-22C Size 22mm x 22mm x 1000 70329-40C Size 22mm x 40mm x 1000
0.25mm Thickness 0.25mm Thickness
HybriSlip HybriSlip
70329-24 Size 24mm x 40mm x 100 70329-45 Size 45mm x 50mm x 100
0.25mm Thickness 0.25mm Thickness
HybriSlip HybriSlip
70329-24C Size 24mm x 40mm x 1000 70329-45C Size 45mm x 50mm x 1000
0.25mm Thickness 0.25mm Thickness
HybriSlip HybriSlip
70329-25 Size 25mm x 25mm x 100 70329-60 Size 22mm x 60mm x 100
0.25mm Thickness 0.25mm Thickness
HybriSlip HybriSlip
70329-25C Size 25mm x 25mm x 1000 70329-60C Size 22mm x 60mm x 1000
0.25mm Thickness 0.25mm Thickness
HybriSlip HybriSlip
70329-30 Size 24mm x 30mm x 100 70329-62 Size 24mm x 60mm x 100
0.25mm Thickness 0.25mm Thickness
HybriSlip HybriSlip
70329-30C Size 24mm x 30mm x 1000 70329-62C Size 24mm x 60mm x 1000
0.25mm Thickness 0.25mm Thickness

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 355
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec11_336-361_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 7:00 AM Page 356

SECTION 11 Specimen Preparation and Embedding Supplies

IMAGING AND MICROSCOPY

 CoverWell™ Perfusion Chambers

Ordering: CoverWell™ Perfusion Chambers

Appx.
EMS # Dimensions Description Vol. μl Qty.
1 - 20 mm ID x 0.6 mm Depth /
70326-10 180 40
25 mm x 25mm OD / 1.5mm Dia Port
1 – 20 mm ID x 0.9 mm Depth /
70326-12 300 40
25 mm x 25mm OD / 1.5mm Dia Port
1 – 20 mm ID x 1.7 mm Depth /
70326-14 520 20
25 mm x 25mm OD / 1.5mm Dia Port
CoverWell Perfusion
1 – 20 mm ID x 2.5 mm Depth /
Chambers allows up to 16 70326-16 750 20
25 mm x 25mm OD / 1.5mm Dia Port
different specimens on one
coverglass
1 – 22mm x 22mm x 0.6mm Depth /
“Press-to-Seal” covers form water- 70326-20 200 40
25mm x 25mm OD / 1.5mm Dia Port
tight, multiwall cell incubation or
cytochemistry chamber when pressed
to coverslips or microscope slides. 1 – 19mm x 32mm x 0.6mm Depth /
70326-22 350 40
Reagents can be quickly added and 26mm x 43mm OD / 1.5mm Dia Port
removed through dual access ports 1 – 19mm x 32mm x 0.9mm Depth /
70326-24 550 40
(1.5mm Dia) without disturbing or 26mm x 43mm OD / 1.5mm Dia Port
cross-contaminating specimens in 1 – 19mm x 32mm x 1.7mm Depth /
adjacent wells. 70326-26 1000 20
26mm x 43mm OD / 1.5mm Dia Port
FEATURES: 1 – 19mm x 32mm x 2.5mm Depth /
70326-28 1550 20
 Chambers are removable 26mm x 43mm OD / 1.5mm Dia Port
for permanent mounting 3 – 3mm x 32mm x 0.6mm Depth /
of specimens 70326-30 75 40
26mm x 43mm OD / 1.5mm Dia Port
 CoverWell™ chambers are made
from medical grade silicone 3 – 3mm x 32mm x 0.9mm Depth /
70326-32 120 40
bonded to clear, UV transparent 26mm x 43mm OD / 1.5mm Dia Port
plastic 3 – 3mm x 32mm x 1.7mm Depth /
70326-34 200 20
 Available in multiple designs 26mm x 43mm OD / 1.5mm Dia Port
allowing up to sixteen different
3 – 3mm x 32mm x 2.5mm Depth /
specimens or analytical test on 70326-36 300 20
26mm x 43mm OD / 1.5mm Dia Port
one coverglass.
 Ideal for cell imaging on upright 4 – 6.35mm x 19mm x 0.6mm Depth /
70326-40 70 40
or inverted microscopes. 26mm x 43mm OD / 1.5mm Dia Port
4 – 6.35mm x 19mm x 0.9mm Depth /
70326-42 110 40
26mm x 43mm OD / 1.5mm Dia Port
4 – 6.35mm x 19mm x 1.7mm Depth /
70326-44 200 20
26mm x 43mm OD / 1.5mm Dia Port
4 – 6.35mm x 19mm x 2.5mm Depth /
70326-46 300 20
26mm x 43mm OD / 1.5mm Dia Port
8 – 9mm Dia x 0.6mm Depth /
70326-50 35 20
26mm x 51mm OD / 1.5mm Dia Port
8 – 9mm Dia x 0.9mm Depth /
70326-52 60 20
26mm x 51mm OD / 1.5mm Dia Port
8 – 9mm Dia x 1.7mm Depth /
70326-54 100 10
26mm x 51mm OD / 1.5mm Dia Port
8 – 9mm Dia x 2.5mm Depth /
70326-56 150 10
26mm x 51mm OD / 1.5mm Dia Port

356 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec11_336-361_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 7:01 AM Page 357

Specimen Preparation and Embedding Supplies SECTION 11

IMAGING AND MICROSCOPY

® Imaging Spacers Ordering: Imaging Spacers

Confine specimens without
EMS # Dimensions Description Qty.
compression with SecureSeal™
imaging spacers
Imaging Spacer,
70327-8S 1 – 9mm Dia ID x 0.12mm Depth 100
/ 18mm x 18mm OD

Imaging Spacer,
70327-13S 1 – 13mm Dia ID x 0.12mm 100
Depth / 25mm x 25mm OD

Imaging Spacer,
70327-20S 1 – 20mm Dia ID x 0.12mm Depth 100
SecureSeal™ imaging spacers are ultra / 25mm x 25mm OD
thin adhesive spacers which peel and
stick to coverglass or microscope slides
to confine specimens without the need Imaging Spacer,
70327-9S 8 – 9mm Dia ID x 0.12mm Depth 100
for compression.
/ 25mm x 51mm OD

® CoverWell™ Imaging Ordering: CoverWell™ Imaging Chambers

Chambers Appx.
EMS # Dimensions Description Vol. μl Qty.
Designed to stabilize and
support thick and free-floating Silicone Imaging Chambers
specimens for confocal 1 – 20mm Dia x 0.6mm Depth /
microscopy and imaging 70327-05 180 40
25mm x 25mm OD
applications.
1 – 20mm Dia x 0.9mm Depth /
70327-10 300 40
25mm x 25mm OD
1 – 20mm Dia x 1.7mm Depth /
70327-20 520 20
25mm x 25mm OD
1 – 20mm Dia x 2.5mm Depth /
70327-25 750 20
25mm x 25mm OD

1 – 28mm Dia x 0.26mm Depth /

70327-04 180 25
45mm x 45mm OD
Reusable press-to-seal silicone cham-
ber forms removable enclosure for Silicone Imaging Chambers with Adhesive on One Side
repeat staining or specimen reposition-
ing. Polycarbonate CoverSlip 1 – 20mm Dia x 0.8mm Depth /
70327-08 180 40
25mm x 25mm OD / Adhesive
1 – 20mm Dia x 1.3mm Depth /
70327-13 300 40
25mm x 25mm OD / Adhesive
1 – 20mm Dia x 2.3mm Depth /
70327-23 520 20
25mm x 25mm OD / Adhesive
1 – 20mm Dia x 2.8mm Depth /
70327-28 750 20
25mm x 25mm OD / Adhesive

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 357
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec11_336-361_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 7/8/14 9:45 AM Page 358

SECTION 11 Specimen Preparation and Embedding Supplies

CELL CULTURE
® CultureWell™ Chambered Coverglass
With removable chambered coverglass – ideal for cell culture and fluorescence imaging applications.
The 2 x 8, 16 chambered coverglass is like a chambered slide with the imaging advantages of a removable coverglass
substructure. It is designed with standard 96 well plate volumes and well spacing. The non-cytotoxic silicone well gasket
forms a leak-proof seal between the polystyrene upper structure and the coverglass. CultureWell™ Chambered
Coverglass is shipped sterile and ready to use.
KEY PRODUCT T The growth surface is No. 1.5 German borosilicate T Silicone well gasket remains attached to coverglass
DIMENSIONS INCLUDE: coverglass. after separation, allowing wells to be used as
T Inert, non-cytotoxic silicone permits complete reagent reservoirs
• Coverslip gasket thickness
edge-to-edge growth of cells. T Gasket well design is ideally suited for small volume
is 0.5 mm
T Well spacing allows use of multi-channel pipettes incubations, in-situ hybridization and immunostaining
• Interior diameter of each for ease and speed of handling T Black well gasket reduces light scatter, enhancing
well is approx. 6 mm T Cell growth characteristics are optimal due to the use fluorescence applications. The gasket can easily be
• Volume per gasket well of inert silicone materials and manufacturing process. removed from the coverglass for mounting
(upper structure removed) is T Quality test for non-leakage, cell growth and cover- T Frosted microscope slides are provided for mounting
approx. 9 μl glass removal to ensure consistent results
• Volume per well with the
upper structure is 250 μl CultureWell™ Removeable
Chambered Coverglass/ 16-Well/
70459-08 8/pk
#1.5 Coverglass/ Sterile /
Removable Tool Included

® CultureWell™ Coverglass
Optimal for high resolution microscopy
Chambered coverglass products consists of removable / reusable non-cytotoxic silicone gaskets secured to 24 mm x 50
mm, #1.5 German covergalss. They may be placed in sterile culture plates or 100 mm diameter culture dishes.
T The thin flat coverglass is the optimal platform for T Gaskets are removable for high resolution imaging
high resolution microscopy and high- sensitivity, T Gasket may be re-sterilized and reused
quantitative, fluorescent imaging T Leak-proof design eliminates well-to-well cross
T Gaskets stabilize coverglass and provide convenient contamination
handling using conventional microscope slide hold- T Well spacing facilitates liquid handling utilizing
ers and accessories multichannel pipettes and robotic dispensers
EMS # Dimensions Description Qty.

CultureWell™ Chambered Coverglass. 2 – 15mm

70460-2R1 20
Dia x 1mm Depth / 250-400μl / #1.5 Coverglass / Sterile

CultureWell™ Chambered Coverglass. 2 – 15mm

70460-2R2 20
Dia x 1.5mm Depth / 300-500μl / #1.5 Coverglass / Sterile

EMS # Dimensions Description Qty. EMS # Dimensions Description Qty.

CultureWell™ Chambered
CultureWell™ Chambered
Coverglass. 3 – 9.5mm x
Coverglass. 50 – 3mm x
70460-3S 9.5mm x 1mm Depth / 20 70460-50R 20
1mm Depth / 3-10μl /
300-500μl /
#1.5 Coverglass / Sterile
#1.5 Coverglass / Sterile

CultureWell™ Chambered CultureWell™ Chambered

Coverglass. 4 – 9mm x Coverglass. 8 – 6mm x
70460-4R 20 70460-8R 20
1mm Depth / 50-100μl / 1mm Depth /15-30μl /
#1.5 Coverglass / Sterile #1.5 Coverglass / Sterile

358 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec11_336-361_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 7:01 AM Page 359

Specimen Preparation and Embedding Supplies SECTION 11

CELL CULTURE
 CultureWell™ Chambered Coverglass Inserts
Each CultureWell™ insert is comprised of four chambered coverglass assembled in a disposable frame which is
placed in a standard 86 mm x 128 mm culture plate. All are sterile and ready to use.
The stabilizing insert design and accessory hardware allow fragile coverglass to be easily integrated into protocols for
high throughput handling of microscope slides and SBS compliant microtiter plates.

Ordering: CultureWell™ Chambered Coverglass Inserts

EMS # Dimensions Description Qty.

Chambered Coverglass Inserts,

70461-2R1 4 x 2 6mm Dia x 1mm Depth Per Tray / 10
300 – 500μl / #1.5 Coverglass / Sterile

Chambered Coverglass Inserts,

70461-2R2 4 x 2 6mm Dia x 1.5mm Depth Per Tray / 10
300 – 500μl / #1.5 Coverglass / Sterile

Chambered Coverglass Inserts,

70461-3S 4 x 3 9.5mm x 9.5mm x 1mm Depth Per Tray / 10
300 - 500μl / #1.5 Coverglass / Sterile

Chambered Coverglass Inserts,

70461-4R 4 x 4 9mm Dia x 1mm Depth Per Tray / 10
50 - 100μl / #1.5 Coverglass / Sterile

Chambered Coverglass Inserts,

70461-50R 4 x 50 3mm Dia x 1mm Depth Per Tray / 10
3 - 10μl / #1.5 Coverglass / Sterile

Chambered Coverglass Inserts,

70461-8R 4 x 8 6mm Dia x 1mm Depth Per Tray / 10
15 - 30μl / #1.5 Coverglass / Sterile

 SecureSlip™ Cell Culture  Silicone backing peels off easily for  Eliminates coverglass overlapping during
Coverglass conventional mounting on microscope culture. Handle SecureSlips™ with
slides forceps by the silicone backing to avoid
Convenient, secure coverglass that will not  During culture, cells may be imaged damage to glass or cells
move during cultivation without interference from the optical  Easily identify “cell side” of coverglass
grade silicone
The coverglass is
affixed to a thin Ordering: SecureSlip™ Cell Culture Coverglass
microscopically
EMS # Dimensions Description Qty.
transparent
silicone base SecureSlip™
which secure to Silicone Supported
culture vessels by Coverglass /
an electrostatic 70462-12 15 – 12 mm x 75
charge, not an adhesive, to prevent movement during 12mm Coverglass
cultivation. / #1.5 Thickness /
Sterile
The silicone also acts as a hydrophobic barrier to isolate
liquid reagents on glass. Individual coverglass with silicone
backing can be adhered to a petri dish or plate. These can SecureSlip™
be easily removed one at a time from the dish during Silicone Supported
Coverglass /
culture. Once removed, coverglass can be affixed to a
70462-14 15 – 12 mm Diameter 75
microscope slide by means of the tacky silicone backing Coverglass /
for routine processing, or placed cell side down onto a #1.5 Thickness /
drop of reagent using the silicone backing as a cover to Sterile
prevent evaporation.

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 359
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec11_336-361_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 7:01 AM Page 360

SECTION 11 Specimen Preparation and Embedding Supplies

CELL CULTURE
 MultiSlip™ Cell Culture Coverglass Inserts
Sterile, ready-to-use MultiSlip™ for culture of cells where pretreatment with a biological
coating of glass surface is required.
MultiSlip™ insert with 8 (18mm x 18mm) or 15 (12mm x 12mm) number 1.5 thickness German coverglass per
insert are sterile and ready to use in conventional 86mm x 128mm culture plates.
Staining and washing procedures may be performed with MultiSlip™ inserts in the plate, or silicone backed
coverglass may be removed individually and affixed to glass microscope slides. Alternatively, inserts may be easily
removed for batch processing in glass staining dishes.
MultiSlips™ are ideally suited for the culture of cells where pretreatment of glass surfaces with a biological coating is
required. Simply add sterile solution to the plate incubates and aspirate. Coating is applied evenly to one side of the
glass only, with no over-lapping, handling with forceps.

Ordering: MultiSlip™ Cell Culture Coverglass Inserts

EMS # Dimensions Description Qty.

MultiSlip™ Coverglass Inserts /

70463-12 15 – 12mm x 12mm Silicone Supported Coverglass Per Tray / 10
#1.5 Thickness Coverglass / Sterile

MultiSlip™ Coverglass Inserts /

70463-18 8 – 18mm x 18mm Silicone Supported Coverglass Per Tray / 10
#1.5 Thickness Coverglass / Sterile

 CultureWell™ Accessories
Reusable CultureWell™ gaskets from CultureWell™ Chambered Coverglass and CultureWell™ Chamber Coverglass Inserts are available bulk packaged.
 Gaskets are ideal for forming wells on glass microscope slides or in polystyrene dishes
 Gaskets are non-sterile and may be sterilized by autoclaving, UV or alcohol.
EMS # Dimensions Description Qty.

CultureWell™ Gasket. 2 – 15mm Dia x 1mm Depth /

70465-2R1 10
250-400μl / Gasket only / Non-Sterile

CultureWell™ Gasket. 2 – 15mm Dia x 1.5mm Depth /

70465-2R2 10
300-500μl / Gasket only / Non-Sterile

EMS # Dimensions Description Qty. EMS # Dimensions Description Qty.

CultureWell™ Gasket. CultureWell™ Gasket.

3 – 9.5mm x 9.5mm x 8 – 6mm x 1mm Depth /
70465-3S 10 70465-8R 10
1mm Depth / 300-500μl / 15 - 30μl / Gasket only /
Gasket only / Non-Sterile Non-Sterile

CultureWell™ Gasket. CultureWell™ Gasket.

4 – 9mm Dia x 1mm 50 – 3mm x 1mm Depth /
70465-4R 10 70465-50R 10
Depth / 50-100μl / 3-10μl / Gasket only /
Gasket only / Non-Sterile Non-Sterile

EMS # Description Qty. EMS # Description Qty.

70466-10 86mm x 128mm Polystyrene Culture Plate, Sterile 10 70466-40 Reusable Silicone Well Dividers
70466-20 Stainless Steel Handle for Inserts 5 2 - 18mm x 18mm Wells, 2.0mm Depth, Sterile 4
70466-30 24mm x 50mm, #1.5 Thickness German Coverglass 100

360 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec11_336-361_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 7:01 AM Page 361

Specimen Preparation and Embedding Supplies SECTION 11

PROTEIN CRYSTALLIZATION
CREATIVE TOOLS FOR THE STUDY OF CELLS
 ProCrystal™ Protein Crystallization Covers
Hanging drop microtiter plate seals with unmatched drop formation and segregation and no
noticeable x-ray diffraction
ProCrystal™ covers are designed for high throughput protein x-ray crystallography to generate atomic resolution structures
of protein molecules1. They fit SBS compliant microtiter plates and are TTP Mosquito®*compatible. They packed dust-free,
ready-to-use in packs of 5 with either pre-cut or uncut seals.
The seals sit directly over the microplate crystallization wells. The seals are validated to be incorruptible and materials will
not ingress into samples. They are available in either an individual well pre-cut format so that one can easily remove crystals
using a forceps from individual wells without affecting neighboring wells or uncut format.
The plate seals are UV compatible with the highest optical quality available. They are exceptionally hydrophobic which
maintains drop footprint and segregation even with the use of MPD, Glycerol or detergents.
FEATURES:
 Two Formats: - Individually cut & single sheet un-cut seals References:
 TTP LabTech Mosquito®* compatible 1. Newby, et. al. A General Protocol
 Ready-to-use, dust-free for the Crystallization of Membrane
 UV Compatible Proteins for X-ray Structural
 No noticeable X-ray diffraction Investigation. Nature Protocols, Vol. 4,
 Accommodates up to 3 protein drops per well 619—637 (April 1, 2009)

Ordering: ProCrystal™ Protein Crystallization Covers

EMS # Dimensions Description Qty.

70470-10 PCC Uncut Paper Liner 45232 5

70470-20 PCC Uncut Plastic Liner 45233 5

70470-60 PCC Cut Paper Liner 45236 5

70470-70 PCC Cut Plastic Liner 45237 5

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 361
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec11_362-368_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 7:23 AM Page 362

SECTION 11 Specimen Preparation and Embedding Supplies

 Laboratory Filtration - Plastic Corning™ Brand
 For Tissue culture and HPLC applications  Choice of membranes, variety of sizes
Membrane choices include: Regenerated Cellulose (RC), Polyethersulfone (PES), Surfactant-free
Cellulose Acetate (SFCA), Nylon (NY), and PTFE Fluorocarbon Resin (PTFE)
Excellent chemical resistance, low protein binding, and the best DMSO compatibility.
TECHNICAL NOTE: TYPICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Filter RC PES SFCA NY PTFE
Medium Regenerated Cellulose Polethylsulfone, Sterile Surfactant-free cellulose Nylon, HPLC Fluorocarbon resin HPLC
HPLC certified & sterile acetate, Sterile certified and Sterile certified & Non sterile
Applications Tissue culture &HPLC. Tissue culture. Tissue culture. Lowest protein Tissue culture and HPLC. HPLC. Most aggressive
Compatible with DMSO. High throughput/flow rate. binding. Choose 0.2μm pore Low extractable, naturally solvents.Choose 0.2μm pore
Extra chemical compatibility Choose 0.2μm pore size for size for sterile filtration and ultra hydrophilic. Choose 0.2μm size for sterile filtration and
& low protein binding. sterile filtration and ultra cleaning. 0.45μm for particle pore size for sterile filtration ultra cleaning. 0.4μm for
Choose 0.2μm pore size cleaning. 0.45μm for particle removal and clarification; and and ultra cleaning. 0.4μm particle removal and
for sterile filtration and ultra removal and clarification 0.8μm for coarse particle for particle removal and clarification
cleaning; 0.45μm for particle removal clarification
removal and clarification
Diameter 4mm 15mm 25mm 26mm 26mm 25mm 4mm 5mm 25mm 50mm
Filter area 0.07cm2 1.7cm2 4.8cm2 5.3cm2 5.3cm2 4.8cm2 0.07cm2 1.7cm2 4.8cm2 1.7cm2
Pore Size 0.2μm, 0.45μm 0.2μm 20.2μm, 0.45μm, 0.8μm 0.2μm, 0.45μm 0.2μm, 0.45μm
Hold-up Vol. 5μl 10μl 150μl 100μl 100μl 150μl 5μl 10μl 100μl 500μl
Housing Polypropylene Acrylic Acrylic Polypropylene Polypropylene
Temp. Limit 127ºC (260.6ºF) 50ºC (127ºF) 50ºC (127ºF) 127ºC (260.6ºF) 127ºC (260.6ºF)
Pressure Limit 87psi 87psi 87psi 87psi 87psi 87psi 87psi 87psi 87psi 58psi
Connections Inlet female locking luer Inlet female locking luer Inlet female locking luer Inlet female locking luer Inlet female locking luer
Outlet male slip luer Outlet male slip luer Outlet male slip luer Outlet male slip luer Outlet male slip luer

 Syringe Filters
Syringe filters with high burst strength for assured performance. Manufactured to ISO 9002 and GMP
standard and 100% integrity tested.
Syringe filter sizes include 4, 15, 25, or 26mm diameter to handle volumes ranging from 0.5 to 100 ml.
The 50mm diameter PTFE syringe filter are ideal for protecting the vacuum line and pump. These
disposable filter units are ideal for tissue culture media, buffer solution, stain solution, biological fluids,
and most other aqueous solutions and reagents that are used daily in the EM lab.
Pore size and membrane type are printed on every syringe and the filters are certified non-cytotoxic and
non-pyrogenic. Sterile syringe filters are individually blister-wrapped in cases of 50.Non sterile syringe
filter are packaged in cases of 50. The 50mm PTFE syringe filter is supplied in a case of 12.
1. Filter units with polypropylene housing.
Catalog Number Membrane Diameter Pore Size Pack
67000 RC 4mm 0.2μm 50/pk
67002 RC 15mm 0.2μm 50/pk
67002-25 RC 25mm 0.2μm 50/pk
67018 NY 25mm 0.2μm 50/pk
67019 NY 25mm 0.45μm 50/pk
67022-50* PTFE 50mm 0.2μm 12/pk
67025-25 PTFE 25mm 0.45μm 50/pk
*Not HPLC certified, but is sterile.

2. Filter with acrylic housing:

Catalog Number Membrane Diameter Pore Size Pack
67004 PES 26mm 0.2μm 50/pk
67005 SFCA 26mm 0.2μm 50/pk
67006 SFCA 26mm 0.45μm 50/pk
67007 SFCA 26mm 0.8μm 50/pk
67008* SFCA-PF 26mm 0.2μm 50/pk
*Surfactant Free Cellulose Acetate with Pre-filter

362 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec11_362-368_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 7:23 AM Page 363

Specimen Preparation and Embedding Supplies SECTION 11

® Disposable Sterile Vacuum Filter Units

® 2. Plastic 115 ml Filter Unit 60 mm Membrane
Diameter
These filter units have a low
center of gravity and wide base
for stability. They have a separate
pour spout to remove filtered
sample which minimizes
contamination. Individually
packaged, sterile, certified non-
pyrogenic
EMS # Membrane Volume, ml Pore Size μm Pack
67044-22 CA 115 0.22 24/pk
67044-45 CA 115 0.45 24/pk

® 3. Complete Units: All filter units are packaged 12

per case
Catalog Number Pore Size Membrane
150ml Funnel/ 150ml Receiver with 50mm diameter membrane
Vacuum filtration units fit standard threaded bottle tops. Designed for 67045-11 0.22μm PES (Yellow)
use on glass or polystyrene media bottles. The unit includes membrane 67045-12 0.22μm CA (Orange)
filter, glass fiber pre-filter, and graduated funnel of clear polystyrene 67045-13 0.45μm CA (Orange)
with polyethylene neck adapter. Attaches to most popular 33 and 250ml Funnel/250ml Receiver with 50mm diameter membrane
45mm diameter bottle’s necks with standard GPI threads. Systems are 67046-11 0.2μm CN (Blue)
individually packed, gamma irradiation sterilized and certified non- 67046-12 0.22μm CA (Orange)
67046-13 0.45μm CA (Orange)
pyrogenic. Comes with tubing adapter that fits most vacuum hoses.
67046-14 0.2μm NY (Red)
Units are color coded by membrane type (CA: Orange; NYL: Red; CN: 67046-15 0.22μm PES (Yellow)
Blue; and PES: Yellow). 500ml Funnel/500ml Receiver with 70mm diameter membrane
Choice of membrane media: Cellulose acetate (CA), for low protein binding. 67047-11 0.2μm CN (Blue)
Nylon (NYL), for low extractable. Cellulose Nitrate (CN), for general-purpose 67047-12 0.22μm CA (Orange)
67047-13 0.45μm CA (Orange)
filtration. Or polyethersulfone (PES), for fast flow rates and low protein
67047-14 0.2μm NY (Red)
binding. Membranes come in 0.20, 0.22 or 0.45μm pore sizes. All four- 67047-15 0.22μm PES (Yellow)
type membranes are detergent-free, tissue culture compatible, and heat- 1000ml Funnel/1000ml Receiver with 90mm diameter membrane
sealed to the support grid to maximize flow rate, reduce foaming and 67048-12 0.2μm CN (Blue)
protein denaturization. Ideal for filtration of tissue culture media, biological 67048-13 0.2μm NY (Red)
fluids, fixation buffers etc. (not for parenteral use.) 67048-14 0.45μm CA (Orange)
67048-15 0.22μm CA (Orange)
® 1. Plastic 150 ml Tube Top Filter 67048-16 0.22μm PES (Yellow)
50 mm Membrane Diameter
These tubes minimize
unnecessary transfer by filtering ® 4.Disposable Sterile Collecting Bottles
Disposable polystyrene
directly into the centrifuge tube.
bottles for the storage of
Each case comes with two
media, buffers and other
centrifuge tube stands. The
aqueous solutions. Easy
polypropylene tube is supplied
grip sides facilitate
with an individually wrapped
handling. Plug seal cap
cap for storage. Individually
provides an airtight seal
packaged, sterile, certified
and helps minimize the
non-pyrogenic.
risk of contamination.
Sterile, certified non-pyrogenic. Neck size 45mm.
Graduation
Funnel Size/ Pore Size Catalog # Range/Interval Pack
EMS # Membrane Tube Size, ml μm Pack
64244-01 25 to 150ml/25ml 24/pk
67043-22 CA 150/50 0.22 12/pk
67043-45 CA 150/50 0.45 12/pk 64244-02 50 to 250ml/25ml 24/pk
64244-05 100 to 500ml/50ml 24/pk
64244-10 100 to 1000ml50ml 24/pk
® Tri-Seal Specimen Container,
see page 537 UUUUU

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 363
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec11_362-368_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 7/8/14 9:48 AM Page 364

SECTION 11 Specimen Preparation and Embedding Supplies

® Disposable Sterile Vacuum Filter Units ® Syringe Filters, for use in Immunolabeling
(continued)

® 5. Bottle-Top Unit only

Available in 33mm and 45mm neck sizes. Connector neck with unique
polyethylene gasket ensures a positive seal between filtration unit and
collecting bottle. Funnel has tubing adapter that fits most vacuum
hoses. Units come individually packaged and are pre-sterilized by
gamma irradiation, certified non-pyrogenic. Pre-filters included.
Choice of membrane media is same as above.

Cellulose Acetate membrane with 4mm diameter Polypropylene housing

with 7mm2 filter area. This 1ml syringe filter is very useful in
sterilization of micro/immunological reagents, enzymes, antibodies and
immunolabeling. Non-sterile, bulk pack: 100/pkg, 400/case,
Catalog Pore Size Membrane Diameter
autoclavable. Filter pore size is 0.2μm.
Number
67015 Immunolabeling Syringe Filter 100/pk
150ml Funnel, packaged 48 per case 67016 Immunolabeling Syringe Filter 400/cs
67050-51 0.22μm CA (Orange) 33mm
67050-52 0.22μm CA (Orange) 45mm ® Fiberglass Pre-filters
67050-54 0.22μm PES (Yellow) 33mm Fiberglass pre-filters for use in Bottle Top and Vacuum Filtration
67050-55 0.22μm PES (Yellow) 45mm
Systems above.
67050-56 0.45μm CA (Orange) 33mm
67050-57 0.45μm CA (Orange) 45mm Recommended filter size
500ml Funnel, packaged 12 per case dependant on apparatus
67051-51 0.20μm NY (Red) 45mm used. The Pre-Filters are
67051-52 0.22μm CA (Orange) 33mm available in two sizes:
67051-53 0.22μm CA (Orange) 45mm 50mm and 70mm
67051-56 0.22μm PES (Yellow) 33mm diameters. Packaged:
67051-57 0.22μm PES (Yellow) 45mm 12/pk, 96/case
67051-58 0.45μm CA (Orange) 33mm
67051-59 0.45μm CA (Orange) 45mm
1000ml Funnel, packaged 12 per case EMS # Description Pack
67052-52 0.22μm CA (Orange) 45mm 67070-50 50mm, for use with 150ml & 250 ml Filter Funnels 96/pk
67052-54 0.22μm PES (Yellow) 45mm 67070-70 70mm, for use with 500ml Filter Funnels 96/pk

® Centrifugal Filter Devices – Costar™ Brand

Filter samples in microcentrifuges
Choice of cellulose or nylon membrane
For volume up to 500 μl
Spin-X* centrifuge tube filters utilize centrifugation for the filtering of small volumes. The unit consists
of a polypropylene filter insert and a centrifuge tube. It handles volumes up to 500μl. They have a
cellulose acetate membrane for aqueous solutions which is ideal for the removal of bacteria, particles,
and cells from media. They are also effective for DNA removal from agarose or acrylamide gels.
Spin-X LC units have a nylon membrane for applications such as HPLC sample preparation. Both have
retained volume of <5μl, and withstand relative centrifugal force (RFC) to 16,000xG
Tube Size Pore Size Sterile Catalog# Case
Spin-X - Cellulose Acetate
2.0ml 0.22μm Yes 67030-60 96/cs
No 67030-61 100/cs
0.45μm Yes 67030-62 96/cs
No 67030-63 100/cs
Spin-XLC - Nylon
2.0ml 0.22μm No 67031-69 200/cs
0.45μm No 67031-70 200/cs

364 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec11_362-368_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 7:23 AM Page 365

Specimen Preparation and Embedding Supplies SECTION 11

® Plastic Syringes; Disposable
® 1. Syringes Without Needles – Rubber Piston
These high quality disposable rubber piston syringes offer substantial savings. A lubricated synthetic
rubber piston allows for a smooth draw while a positive stop prevents accidental pull out. Bold
graduations are easily read and resist wipe-off. Syringes are ETO gas sterilized, latex and pyrogen free.
All syringes are packaged in individual sterile strip packs.
Cat. # Size and Description Pack
72508 2.5 ml, Luer Slip Centric 100/pk
72509 5 ml, Luer Slip Centric 100/pk
72510 10 ml, Luer Slip Eccentric 100/pk
72512 20 ml, Luer Slip Eccentric 100/pk
72513-LS 30 ml, Luer Slip Eccentric 50/pk
72513-LL 30 ml, Luer Lock Centric 50/pk
® 2. Syringes With Mounted Needles – Rubber Piston
Cat. # Size x Needle Gauge x length Pack
72515 1 ml x 25G x 5⁄8", Tuberculin 100/pk
72517 5 ml x 21G x 11⁄2", Luer Lock Centric 100/pk
72518 10mlx 21G x 11⁄2", Luer Lock, Centric 100/pk
® 3. All Plastic Syringes Without Needles
These syringes are latex free; contain no rubber, no silicone oil or styrene. They are the choice for any
situation needing an inert, hypoallergenic syringe. Because of their purity, they are indicated for IVF,
embryo transfer, chromatography and many laboratory procedures. Manufactured only from laboratory
grade polypropylene and polyethylene, these unique plastic syringes have a positive safety stop to
prevent accidental spills. These syringes are individually sterile strip packed.
® Caps for Syringes
Cat. # Size and Description Pack One size fits-all syringe caps that can be used
72520 1 ml, Tuberculin* 100/pk
with either a luer slip or luer locking syringe tip.
72522 5 ml, Luer Slip Centric 100/pk
72524 10 ml, Luer Slip Eccentric 100/pk
These tips make the syringes suitable for usage
72526 20 ml, Luer Slip Eccentric 100/pk as embedding media storage vessels.
72528 30 ml, Luer Slip Eccentric 50/pk 72500-05 Caps for Syringes 500/pk
72529 50 ml, Luer Slip Eccentric 30/pk 72500-10 Caps for Syringes 1000/pk
72529-A 50ml, Luer Slip, Eccentric, Amber 30/pk

® Hypodermic Needles
These sterile-disposable regular wall hypodermic needles with a plastic translucent hub are individually
wrapped and color-coded.
Cat. # Needle Gauge and Length Pack
72530 Hypodermic Needle, 18G x 1" 100/pk
72532 Hypodermic Needle, 19G x 1" 100/pk
72534 Hypodermic Needle, 20G x 1" 100/pk
72536 Hypodermic Needle, 21G x 1" 100/pk
72538 Hypodermic Needle, 22G x 1" 100/pk

® Puritan® - Wood Products

® 1. Wooden Sticks – Tongue Depressors
These sticks are made from closed-grain Northern White Birch. This selective wood provides a smooth,
splinter-free finish with good tensile strength. In addition to medical uses, these sticks are ideal for
spreading ointments and salves, stirring and mixing etc.
Cat. # Descriptions Pack
72320 Wooden Sticks, 51⁄2" x5⁄8 500/pk
72322 Wooden Sticks, 41⁄2" x3⁄8" 1000/pk

® 2. Wooden Applicators Sticks, Orange Sticks

Manufactured from closed-grain Northern White Birch these sticks are ideal for use in specimen
transfer, as a mixing rod, and for general laboratory applications.
Orange Sticks are 7 inches long and 5⁄32" diameter, choice of beveled ends.
Cat. # Descriptions Pack
72300 Applicator Stick, 6" x 1⁄12" 1000/pk
72303 Applicator Stick, 12" x1⁄8" 500/pk
72304-10 Double Bevel Both ends Orange Stick 100/pk
72304-30 One Single Bevel, one Double Bevel End Orange Stick 100/pk

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 365
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec11_362-368_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 7:23 AM Page 366

SECTION 11 Specimen Preparation and Embedding Supplies

® 3. Cotton Tipped Applicators
T Medical Quality: The cotton is carded, spun, and applied in an ISO 9002
Registered facility to assure you consistent quality.
Handy Vial Packs: 3" (8cm) wooden shaft, small-tipped applicators come pre-
packed in a plastic-capped vial, a handy way to keep a supply of swabs
available anytime on the bench top. Packed 100 per vial
Cat. # Descriptions Pack
72310 Cotton Tipped Applicator, Wooden Shaft,
Single End, 6" x 1⁄12", Regular Tip. Non Sterile 100/pk
72310-10 Same as above 10x100/pk
72310-S Same as 72310 but Sterile 10x100/pk
72307 Handy Vial Pack, 100/vial 10Vials/pk

T Industrial Cleaning Applicators:

6" Cotton Tipped Applicators,
Choose from different cotton
tipped sizes. Tips are specially
processed to resist tears and
pulls and leave your cleaning
environment virtually lint-free.
Available with a wooden shaft
or a polypropylene shaft.

Cat. # Descriptions Pack

Double Tips. Tapered Tip 3⁄16" Dia. Tapering to 1⁄32"Dia. ® Wooden Picks
72308 x5⁄8:"L, Regular Tip 3⁄16"W x5⁄8"L. Wooden Shaft 100/pk
They are round and double tapered; used for
72308-05 Same as above 5x100/pk
72309 Large Tip 15⁄64" Dia. x 11⁄16"L. Wooden Shaft 5x100/pk cleaning pole pieces and parts of the EM. Also
Anti-Static, Lint-Free. Regular Tip 15⁄64" Dia. used for orienting the specimen during the
72306 x 11⁄16"L. Polypropylene Shaft. 10x100/pk embedding stage.
72340 Wooden Picks 100/bx
® 4. Foam Tipped Applicators
Tips are made from shred-resistant, 100% urethane foam with 100PPI porosity. Except where wood
is noted, all shafts are polypropylene.
Newly introduced PurSwab Popule, which is filled with 91% isopropyl alcohol and 9% deionized
water. Simply squeeze the handle to break the patented seal and allow liquid to flow to the foam
head.
Cat. # Descriptions Pack
72317 Foam Tipped Applicator, Wooden Shaft. Tip 5⁄8"Dia x 1"L 50/pk
72314 5" Shaft, Rectangular Foam Tip 11⁄16"W x 7⁄8"L, Polypropylene Shaft 50/pk
72315 6" Shaft Arrow End Tip 5⁄8"Dia x 7⁄8"L 50/pk
72312 6"Wooden Shaft, Tip 3⁄8"Dia x 13⁄16"L. Foam-over-Cotton Tip 50/pk
72330 Popule, 41⁄2" Self-Saturating Foam Swab with 91% Isopropanol in DI Water 50/pk

® 5. Chemical Resistant Applicators

The tips on these applicators are specially designed to withstand many of the chemicals and solutions
commonly use in labs and clean rooms. Tips are resistant to deterioration – they won’t swell or break apart.
Cat. # Descriptions Pack
72325 6" Wooden Shaft, Foam over-Cotton. Tip 3⁄16"Dia x 15⁄16" L 50/pk
72326 6" Polypropylene Shaft, Foam-over-Cotton Tip 3⁄8"Dia x 15⁄16" L 50/pk

® 6. Antistatic Foam Tipped Applicators

Choose from swabs that feature an antistatic foam head – or swabs with completely static-free
construction. Static-dissipative swabs attract dirt and dust for easy cleaning, while reducing and
dissipating static electricity. Antistatic properties will not decay over time. Swabs meet all industry
standards and requirements, including ASTM-D257 and Federal test method 4046, standard #101C.
Cat. # Descriptions Pack
72316 6" Wooden Shaft, Anti-Static Foam-over-Cotton. Tip 3⁄8"Dia x 13⁄16"L 50/pk
72318 6" Polypropylene Shaft, Anti-Static, Foam-over-Cotton Tip 3⁄16"Dia x 15⁄16"L 50/pk

366 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec11_362-368_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 7:23 AM Page 367

Specimen Preparation and Embedding Supplies SECTION 11

® Gel, Electrophoresis, Chemilluminescence, and Autography
® Synergel™ Base
A B ® RadTape™ and
Pairs
Improving Agarose 3700
RadTape Plus™
Gel Performance 1300 An easy way to identify
autograms – radiological &
T Superior Sieving – 622 chemilluminescence
Better sieving than 527
agarose alone, 1 gr 404
T Versatile – phosphorescent,
Synergel = 2 gr 309
non-radioactive adhesive labels
agarose 240 that may be cut to the specific
T High Resolution – 160
size and shape needed for each
123
Synergel / Agarose individual membrane, dried gel
gels exhibit improved or microarray
(A) 1.5% Synergel and
spatial separation and 0.7% agarose (SeaKem LE) T Fast and Easy – marking sys-
tighter banding for (B) 4% NuSieve Agarose (FMC) tem is great for documentation and archiving and ideal for
DNA fragments of 50- chemilluminescence and radiological autography (patented)
2000bp
T Use an ordinary pen to mark the label using the investigator’s
T Easy To Use – Mix, boil own codes and symbols
and pour!
T Simply peel the custom label from its backing and affix it to
T No Background Fluorescence – The superior optical clarity per- the membrane, gel or microarray
mits high quality photo-documentation
T Permanent - exposes a negative image of the markings
T Increased Load Capacity – Accommodates greater quantities of directly
DNA reducing band tailing and smearing
T RadTape Plus is finer grained and waterproofed
68500-10 Synergel - Agarose Additive 100g
68520-10 RadTape; 4 x 6" sheet 10/pack
® Gel Handler™ 68520-20 RadTape Plus; 4 x 6" sheet 10/pack
Flexible UV Transparent Sheets for Handling Gels,
Visualizing and Photo Documentation ® Glow Writer™
Fine-Point
Phosphorescent Marking
Pen for Laboratory
Autography
Glow Writer is a
phosphorescent pen for
marking chemiluminescent and
isotope-labeled substrates for
X-ray film autography. The
unique marker delivers a phosphor-containing ink through a fine point
porous nib. Before exposure to X-ray film, the phosphorescent writing is
excited by room light. The pen utilizes a phosphor ink having an
optimum concentration of phosphor and a relatively short afterglow half-
life (approximately 2-3 minutes) has been selected so that upon
exposure to X-ray film, autographic exposures of almost any duration will
T Ideally sized at 8.5” x 11” (216mm x 279mm)
be easily readable on the film. The fine point nib is easily replaceable if it
T Thin sheet easily slides beneath a gel dries out.
T Flexible sheets eliminates air bubbles
68551-01 Glow Writer Pen each
T Protects the surface of transilluminators from cuts & 68551-RT Glow Writer Replacement Nibs 4/pack
scratches
T Polyolefin composition allows acid washing and autoclaving
without a chemical reaction
T Optical densities for the 5 mil thick sheets at 254 and
300nm emission wavelengths of the transilluminator are
0.14 and 0.04 respectively

68510-10 Gel Handler - 5 mil thick 10/pack

68510-20 Gel Handler - 10 mil thick 5/pack

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 367
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec11_362-368_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 7:23 AM Page 368

SECTION 11 Specimen Preparation and Embedding Supplies

® Gel, Electrophoresis, Chemilluminescence, and Autography (continued)

® FlowMesh™ ® Gel Drying

A Permeable Frames™
Support Mesh for Gel Drying Frames allow
Gels and researchers to quickly and
Membranes easily dry gels between two
sheets of cellophane without
Protects - Place the use of expensive
FlowMesh above or below heat/vacuum gel dryers. The
a gel or filter to protect 24 x 24cm frames allow for
from tearing, bending or drying of larger format gels,
folding while the 14 x 14cm frames
Sturdy - Supports gels are ideal for mini gels and
during incubation with other smaller formats.
nucleic acid probes, Each kit includes
antibody probes, equilibration buffers, stain, destain solutions, etc. T 2 open frames,
Versatile - Use as a permeable spacer for stacking as well as for T 2 solid back plates,
staining and destaining procedures T 12 side clips and
Access - Both sides of a container or plastic bag are assured of constant T 50 sheets of pre-cut cellophane
solution access, which improves the uniformity of hybridizations and
binding assays. 68510-14 14 x 14cm Gel Frame Kit*
68510-24 24 x 24cm Gel Frame Kit*
Convenient - FlowMesh is re-usable and easily cut to size
68511-14 14 x 14cm Cellophane 50/pack
68505-20 FlowMesh Sheet - 8.50” x 11.00” / 20/pack 68511-24 24 x 24cm Cellophane 50/pack
216mm x 279mm

® Autoradiography
® Fluorescent Ruler Set
Ruler Kit Phosphorescent, Non-
No more guesswork – Radioactive Metric Rulers
Accurately measure the for Radiographs
mobility of electrophoretic
markers and ethidium The Autoradiography Ruler Set
bromide-DNA complexes (ARS) is an orientation and
during electrophoresis measurement device that
exposes metric ruler markings
Thin - At 7mm wide they
directly onto X-ray film
require only a single lane
of an agarose gel Ideal- Utilizes a specially
formulated phosphorescent dye compound and a unique emission filter
Fluorescent ink markings
which serves as an ideal non-radioactive substitute for ink markings
are sharp and photograph
well under UV light Easy- Make easy electrophoretic mobility calculations
(300nm & 350nm) Re-usable- The phosphorescent emission of each ruler can be
Rulers are made of a flexible, UV-clear plastic so only the fluorescent regenerated indefinitely and can be reused any number of times
markings will show under UV light High Resolution - Produces a high resolution image that is unaffected by
68552-04 (2) 10cm & (2) 20cm 4/pack intensifying screens or pre-flashed film
68550-04 20cm length rulers 4/pack

® Rapid Coomassie Stain

Fast - Complete in 30-60 minutes
Easy - Destaining is not necessary
Highly Sensitive - Detects as little as 30ng of protein
Quality - Bands are sharper than those stained with
conventional Coomassie Blue
Versatile - Gels can be restained with Silver

68511-25 Rapid Coomassie Stain, 100ml Each

368 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec12_369_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 9:04 AM Page 369

SECTION 12

Materials Science
& Metrology
Cold and Hot Mounting Media, & Accessories
Adhesives and Mountants
Replicating Films and Membrane Boxes
Polishing Supplies
Sample Grinding and Sectioning
Micro & Mini-tools
Probes, Scribers, Pin Vise, Cleavers, Sharpeners
Instrumentation, including:
Micro-Manipulators, Micro Drilling Systems,
and Disc Punch
Grinder, Otolith Polishing, and Micro Polisher
Spark Cutter and Accessories
Rotary Disc and UltraSonic Cutters
Electropolisher and Electrolytic Jet Thinning
Diamond Wheel Saws
Wire Saws
Dimpler for TEM Preparation
Tripod Polishers for SEM TEM Preparation
Lapping and Polishing Machines and Fixtures
Rail Polisher, Twin Jet Electropolishing System
and UniDisc
Plasma Cleaning and Etching and Ion Beam Sputter
Crystal Orientation
Diamond Band Saw
Micro Cleaving
and more...

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 369
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec12_370-383_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 7:50 AM Page 370

SECTION 12 Materials Science & Metrology

® Mounting and Embedding Media:
EMS introduces a selective range of embedding and mounting medium on the market for both HOT MOUNTING
and COLD MOUNTING - for literally all kinds of material specimens.
For a complete line of all of our Embedding Media Kits see pages 92-102.

® 1. Hot Mounting
When preparation requirements include less expensive, uniform size and shape, and short
processing times, hot mounting (hot compression mounting) is ideal.
Hot mounting takes place under pressure in a mounting press, where the specimen is placed in a 1210
cylinder together with the appropriate mounting resin. A temperature of up to 200˚ C, and a
pressure of up to 50kN are then applied during the embedding of the specimen. There are two
types of hot mounting processes: thermoplastic resins and thermo-setting resins.
T Thermoplastic Resins melt when heated, offering the opportunity of repeating the process
with the same specimen if the result is not satisfactory the first time. Thermoplastic
resins harden during a chemical reaction with or without pressure. That means high
pressure is not necessary during heating and cooling. This process is good when mount-
ing fragile specimens.
T Thermo-setting Resins cure at elevated temperatures under pressure. Thermo-setting
resins cannot be re-melted after mounting. 1212 1214

Hot Compression Mounting Resins Selection Guide

Resin Recommended Use Specific Properties Comments Resin Color
Gray Resin Electropolishing Electrically conductive Acrylic resin with iron filler Gray
Electrically conductive mounts Very low shrinkage Thermoplastic powder
Clear Resin Glass clear mounts Translucent Transparent acrylic resin Clear
Porous samples Medium Shrinkage Thermoplastic
Surface electrical insulator for Gray Resin
Green Resin High Edge retention needed Low shrinkage Diallyl phthalate with glass fiber filler Green
Planeness Low removal rate Thermosetting
Very Hard Mount Granular

Ordering Hot Mount Resins:

Cat # Descriptions Pkg. Size
1210 Gray Resin - Thermoplastic 1 kg
1212 Clear Resin - Thermoplastic 1 kg
1214 Green Resin - Thermosetting 1 kg

For our pressure chamber see page 372 UUUUU

® 2. Cold Mounting
Cold mounting or embedding is when a resin is mixed with a hardener (or accelerator) to provide the
mounting compound, and then the polymerization process take place to form the block. In some
cases, this process gives-off heat. However this heat generation can be controlled by the use of ice or
cool air blow setting. Cold mounting compounds are preferred for specimens that are sensitive to the
heat or pressure, which applies during the hot mounting process. There are three types of cold
mounting:
1. Epoxy Systems - Epoxies have the lowest shrinkage of all cold mounting resins. The curing time is
relatively long, but the adhesion to most materials is excellent. They are also used for vacuum
impregnation. The hardened epoxy is duroplastic and not affected by moderate heat or chemicals.
2. Acrylic System - Acrylics are easy to use resins with short curing times and negligible shrinkage.
They consist of self-polymerizing components that harden with the addition of catalyst. Hardened
acrylic is thermoplastic and resistant to most chemicals.
3. Polyester Systems - Polyester belongs to the catalyzed system, like acrylics. Curing times are
relatively short and the hardened specimen is duroplastic.
1232
continued UUUUU

Electron Microscopy Sciences offers a full range of equipment used in materials preparation for a variety of technological
fields. Electron microscopy, metallography, wafer lapping and polishing, failure analysis, crystal orientation, plasma
processing, MEMS and many other applications are facilitated by our equipment. Please contact us or see our
comprehensive website, which includes our complete line.

370 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec12_370-383_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 7:50 AM Page 371

Materials Science & Metrology SECTION 12

Cold Mounting and Embedding Resins Selection Guide
Resin Recommended Use Specific Properties Curing Time Recommended Mounting Cup
EpoFix Vacuum impregnation Transparent Epoxy 8 hours at room Disposable
Porous & complicated specimens Negligible curing heat temperature Mold Cups (50480-10)
Mineralogical specimens Low viscosity
Practically no shrinkage
Excellent wetting and adhesion
Peak temperature 43ºC
UniMount Vacuum impregnation Transparent Epoxy 11⁄2 - 2 hours at 70-80ºC Disposable Mold Cups (50480-10)
Porous specimens Low viscosity 4 hours at 40-60ºC
Mineralogical specimens Excellent penetration to cracks & pores
Need more time to manipulating No shrinkage
specimen Peak temperature 130ºC
AcryMount Routine work Translucent Acrylic 9 – 10 minutes at room Disposable Mold Cups (50480-10)
Single or small series of specimens temperature Silicone Molds
PolyMount Large series of uncomplicated specimens Transparent Polyester 45 minutes at room Disposable Mold Cups (50480-10)
Used for specimens are not sensitive to Low viscosity temperature Silicone Molds
heat. Due to shrinkage, it’s recommended for
specimens without holes or cavities.
PolyAcryMount Edge retention Polyester/Acrylic 25 – 18 minutes Disposable Mold Cups (50480-10)
Planeness Mineral filler Silicone Molds
Complicated specimens White
Peak temperature 114°C
Excellent hardness
Practically no shrinkage
Epoxy-Dye For use with EpoFix and Unimount Fluorescent dye for use in microscopy N/A N/A
to make cracks and pores visible.
Special filters for microscopy
Acrylic-Dye For use with Acrylmount For color-coding specimens N/A N/A
Color include blue, red & yellow

1) All peak temperatures stated is a 30mm mount cured at room temperature of 23˚C

Ordering Cold Mount Resins: ® Mounting Cups for Cold

(a) Epoxy Systems Mounting/Embedding
Cat. # Description and Packaging Disposable
1232 EpoFix - Kit with 1L liquid resin; 130 ml hardening liquid kit Mold Cup
1234 UniMount - Kit with 500 ml liquid resin;
200ml hardening liquid kit
Polyethylene, one
1245 Epoxy-Dye 20g part molds. Closed
1234
one end. Red
(b) Acrylic Systems Cat. # Diameter Pkg.
Catalog # Description and Packaging 50480-10 11⁄8" 50/pk
1256 AcrylMount - Kit with 500g resin powder; 50480-15 11⁄4" 50/pk
225ml hardening liquid kit 50480-20 11⁄2" 50/pk
1265 Acrylic-Dye, 180ml (60ml each yellow, red, blue) 60ml x 3
(c) Polyester Systems Silicone Mold
Catalog # Description and Packaging 1256 Flexible Silicone
1270 PolyMount - Kit with 500 ml liquid resin; Rubber, Closed
15 ml hardening liquid kit bottom; red
(d) Polyester/Acrylic Systems Cat. # Diameter Pkg.
Catalog # Description and Packaging 51012-25 25mm 5/pk
1276 PolyAcryMount - 870gm resin powder, 51012-30 30mm 5/pk
500ml hardening liquid kit 51012-40 40mm 5/pk
1270
Cold Embedding Molds
Phenolic
These 2 part molds may be used for all cold
Ring Mold
embedding epoxies. Comes with a detached
cap for easy removal. The molds come in 3 Impregnated
different sizes to accommodate all of the phenolic
samples you may have. The molds are made from HDPE and we Cat. # Diameter Pkg.
recommend the use of mold release spray (cat #71619) prior to use. 50483-15 1
⁄4" 10/pk
1276
50481-20 Cold Embedding Molds 1” 10/pk 50483-20 11⁄2" 10/pk
50481-21 Cold Embedding Molds 1 ½ “ 10/pk
50481-22 Cold Embedding Molds 1 ¼ “ 10/pk

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 371
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec12_370-383_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 7:50 AM Page 372

SECTION 12 Materials Science & Metrology

® Hot & Cold Mounting/Embedding Accessories
Catalog # Description Qty.
50486-00 6mm height metal spring clip to hold or position a small specimen upright. 100/pk
50487-25 PlastiClips - Plastic clip used to support up to 5 small, thin specimens. 25/pk
(May not be suitable with Acrylic Resins),
50488-10 Mold Release - Mold release agent to be used with mounting press. 16 oz can
72619 Mold Release - Mold release agent to be used with cold mounting mold. 15 oz can
50494-25 Thermo Conductive Paste - For better heat transfer between
heating/cooling unit and cylinder in hot mounting press. 25g

50486-00
® Silicone Rubber Molds, Reusable 50487-25

These reusable molds for cold embedding are made from sturdy, flexible, white silicone, ® Pressure Chamber
and are easily removed without the need for release agents. Much smoother than rubber
This chamber is designed in
molds, enabling easy identification of samples in clear resins. They hold their shape to
conjunction with our cold molded
produce consistent, reliable round embedding.
acrylic and epoxy media. After
Round Silicone Rubber Molds, Reusable encapsulating the sample, they are
1" high, 3/4" internal depth. placed inside the chamber. By
applying between 30 to 40 PSI
Cat. # Description Qty.
during the cure time, the mounting
50484-10 1" (25.4mm) dia. 10/pk
50484-12 1-1/4" (31.75mm) dia. 10/pk compound is compressed down
50484-14 1-1/2" (38.1mm) dia. 10/pk and around the sample, forcing air up to the surface. This
50484-16 2" (50.8mm) dia. 5/pk process helps eliminate shrinkage and increase clarity and edge
retention. Comes with an air hose. As an option an air pump
Rectangular Silicone Rubber Molds, Reusable
1" high, 3/4" internal depth. tank is available. This Air Pump is designed for hand pumping
pressure. The chamber inside measures 6” deep x 6” diameter.
Cat. # Description Qty.
50484-17 2-1/4 x 1" 5/pk 50465-10 Pressure Chamber each
50484-18 3 x 2" each 50465-20 Air Pump each

® For More Embedding Molds & Supplies ® Mounting Medium: Eukitt, DPX, Entellan, Permount,
See Specimen Preparation section, pages 237-243 etc, See pages 9-21, 514-519 UUUUU
® Tripour Beakers and all other embedding supplies, ® Technovit - GMA Embedding Kits
See page 217 UUUUU see page 98-100 UUUUU
® Staccups: 100ml, 500ml, See page 217 UUUUU
® Disposable Syringes: 1 ml, 5ml 10ml, 20ml, 30ml, ® For More Embedding Materials, see Embedding
Media Kits, pages 92-102 UUUUU
50ml, See page 365 UUUUU
® Wooden Stirring Rods, See pages 365-366 UUUUU ® For Mold Release Spray, see Specimen preparation
section, pages 247 UUUUU

® Adhesives and Mountants

® Crystalbond™/Wafer-Mount™
A temporary adhesive. These wash away adhesives are used as a temporary bond for holding delicate crystals, metallurgical specimens, glass components,
and ceramic substrates for dicing, slicing, drilling and polishing. These materials adhere readily to metals, glass, ceramic and then can be washed after
machining away using various solvents.
APPLICATIONS:
T Machining or slicing single crystal metal specimens. T Holding beam leads in IC devices for pull-off tests.
T Grinding and polishing sapphire, ceramic, optical garnets, ferrites, T Dicing and slicing alumina and beryllia substrates for IC and micro-
and LCD glass. electronic production.
T Dicing and slicing germanium and silicon wafers in semiconductor T Dicing subminiature chip capacitors and microwave IC substrates.
production.
Crystalbond™ Properties and Ordering:
Type 509 555 590
Description Thermo polymer* Thermo polymer Thermo polymer*
Form 7
⁄8” Dia. x 7” stick 1
⁄2” x 1” x 7” stick 5
⁄8” x 11⁄4” x 71⁄2” stick
Softening 160°F (71°C) 125°F (52°C) 257°F (125°C)
Flow Point 250°F (121°C) 130°F (54°C) 302°F (150°C)
Viscosity at Flow Point 6,000 cps 500 cps 9,000 cps
Color Clear/Amber White Brown
Solvent Acetone or 509-S Stripper Water Methanol or 590-S Stripper
*Thermoplastic polymer

372 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec12_370-383_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 7:50 AM Page 373

Materials Science & Metrology SECTION 12

® QuickStick™ 135
Temporary Mounting Wax
T Acetone Soluble - Ideal for high purity
work
T Low Melting Point - Flows at 135˚ C
T Crystal Clear - Good for applications
utilizing transmitted light.
This temporary mounting wax is used in a variety of applications to
bond samples during a processing application. After processing, the
mounting wax is washed away in acetone leaving no residue.
® Crystalbond™ 509: offers excellent adhesion to metals, glass,
and ceramic. This material is the best for precise high purity work since TYPICAL APPLICATIONS INCLUDE:
it leaves no residue after dissolving and does not clog the diamond T Single Microscopy Sample T Wire Sawing
wheel as compared to conventional waxes. Each stick weighs about 90 Preparation. T Grinding and Polishing
grams. T Single Crystal Mounting T Ultrasonic Cutting
50400-01 Crystalbond 509, Clear Stick each T Metallurgical Applications
50400-05 Crystalbond 509 Clear Stick 5/pk SPECIFICATIONS:
50400-50 Crystalbond 509 Amber Stick each Thermoplastic polymer. Softening point is 71˚ C (160˚F). Flow point is
50400-S1 Crystal Bond 509 Stripper 1 qt 135˚ C (275˚ F). Viscosity at flow point is 6,000cps. The color is crystal
50400-S2 Crystal Bond 509 Stripper 1 gal
clear and it dissolves in acetone. QuickStick™ comes 20 sticks/tray and
it weighs approximately 350 grams. Each stick measures 3"(L) x 1⁄4" (W)
® Crystalbond™ 555: the same as 509 but used in applications
x 1⁄4"(H) (76mm x 6mm x 6mm)
where it is desirable to have a temporary bond which is water soluble.
Each stick weighs about 90 grams. 50419-20 Quick-Stick™ 135 20/pk

50401-01
50401-10
Crystalbond 555
Crystalbond 555
each
10/pk
® Mounting Wax 100
MWM100 Black Wax is designed for use as a
® Crystalbond™ 590: the same as 509 but offers maximum masking material in jet polishing applications.
adhesion to subminiature parts. Each stick weighs about 225 grams. As it is chemically inert, it is resistant to etching
50402-01 Crystalbond 590 each solutions such as hydrofluoric acid, perchloric
50402-02 Crystalbond 590 2/pk acid and acetic acid. While it is resistant to many acids, it can be easily
50402-S Stripper 100 g removed with hydrocarbon or chlorinated solvents. 100 Gram/Pkg (5 - 20
gram sticks).Moderate Hardness and a Melting Point of 100˚ C.
® Wafer-Mount™ 559: is available in sheet form 10”x10”
Dilutent: Hydrocarbon or Chlorinated solvents
(254x254mm). To use, remove the paper backing exposing the
adhesive layer. The substrate is positioned on the film and pressed 50390-100 Mounting Wax 100 100 Grams
down firmly so that it adheres to the plastic film. No heating is required.
The wafer mounted on the plastic film can then be held down using a
® Mounting Wax 80
vacuum manifold or mechanical means for dicing or scribing. After MWH080 is an amber colored wax, which is
dicing or scribing, the parts can be separated from the wafer-mount translucent in thin films. High hardness makes
559 film by washing in acetone or MEK. Ideal for holding down silicon it ideal for sawing, ultrasonic cutting and
wafers, alumina, or glass substrates for scribing. lapping & polishing operations. Best suited to
vitreous materials, polished metal surfaces, semiconductors and
50403-02 Wafer-Mount 559 2/pk
piezoelectric materials with large contacted areas. Chemical resistant. 100
50403-10 Wafer-Mount 559 10/pk
Gram/Pkg of 4 sticks .5" x .5" x 7" long (12.5 x 12.5 x 175mm). Hard
hardness with a Melting Point of 80˚C.
® Wafer-Mount™ 562: a dry temporary adhesive film, 0.003”
Dilutent: Ethanol and Acetone
thick, which can be easily cut to size with either a razor or scissor. This
mount permits pre-placement of the adhesive film exactly where the 50390-80 Mounting Wax 80 100 Grams
user wants it. It melts at 195-210°F. After application it can be
® Mounting Wax 70
dissolved rapidly in trichloroethylene or toluene. This material is
particularly useful in applications where a pre-formed adhesive film is MWM070 is a quartz type sticky, orange colored
wax (translucent in thin films) used to hold
needed to assure uniform bonding and flatness or in bonding stacks of
crystals or other materials while they are being
substrates such as LCD glass slides for slicing. Sheet size 8”x10”.
sliced, lapped or polished. Moderate hardness
50404-10 Wafer-Mount 562 10/pk and strength make it useful for bonding small samples in diamond wheel
50404-20 Wafer-Mount 562 20/pk
sawing and wire sawing operations. Widely used for holding semiconductors,
optical materials, ceramics and metals with medium to large contact areas.
For a complete line of Silicon Nitride Mesh and Film, Chemical resistant. 100 Gram /Pkg of 29 sticks, .25" dia x 4" long (6mm dia
see pages 152-157 UUUUU x 100mm). Moderate Hardness and a Melting Point of 70˚C.
Dilutent: Warm soapy water
50390-70 Mounting Wax 70 100 Grams

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 373
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec12_370-383_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 7:50 AM Page 374

SECTION 12 Materials Science & Metrology

 Mounting Wax 52  Loctite Adhesives
MWS052 is a tan colored wax, which is Loctite 409™ Super Bonder®
translucent on thin films. Softness makes it For a general-purpose gel adhesive,
most useful with abrasive slurry cutting of clear, gap fills 0.010”; surface
materials. Best suited to non-porous surfaces such as glass or polished insensitive Ethyl, tensile shear strength
metal with a reasonably large area. Easily soluble in a variety of solvents. 3,200 psi, and temperature range
113 Grams/1 Stick, 1" x 1" x 7.5" long (25 x 25 x 190 mm). –65°F to 180°F. Cure speed: fixture -
Soft Hardness and a Melting Point of 52˚C. 75 seconds, full - 24 hours.
Dilutent: Perchloroethylene Loctite 454™ Prism®
For use with porous surfaces, clear,
50390-52 Mounting Wax 52 1/pk gap fills 0.010”, surface insensitive
Ethyl, gel type, tensile shear strength
 Wax Stripper 3200 psi, temperature range –65°F to 180°F. Cure speed: fixture – 15
seconds, full - 24 hours.
WaxStrip™ is an environmentally safe
powder compound prepared primarily Loctite 4861™ Prism®
For use with flexible surfaces, clear, gap fill 0.008”, surface flexible Alkyl,
for the removal of mounting waxes in
viscosity 4,000 cP, tensile shear strength 2465 psi, temperature range
semiconductor processing.
–65°F to 212°F. Cure speed: fixture – 25 seconds, full – 24 hours.
WaxStrip™ is compatible for use on
silicon, glass, iron, aluminum, zinc, Loctite 349™ Impruv®
For bond glass/metal, appearance: clear/straw, cure type: UV, viscosity:
brass, copper, magnesium
9,500cP, shore hardness: D70, temperature range: –65°F to 266°F
and other materials. 1lb/bottle.
Loctite 4011™ Prism®
50392-01 Wax Stripper each Designed for the assembly of difficult-to-bond materials, such as wood,
paper, leather and fabric. Suitable for use in the assembly of disposable
 M-Bond System medical devices. The product provides rapid bonding of a wide range of
The M-Bond system includes M-Bond 43-B, M-bond 600 and M-Bond materials, including metals, plastic and elastomers. Cure speed: 2 to 20
610. These adhesives are high-performance epoxy resins, which are seconds depending on the material.
formulated especially for bonding strain gages and special-purpose
Chemical type: Ethyl cyanoacrylate, transparent, colorless to straw
sensors. When properly cured, these adhesives are useful in
colored fluid. One part required no mixing. Low-viscosity (100 cP). Cure
temperatures ranging from -452°F to +350° F (-269°C to+ 175°C)
by humidity, and temperature range –65°F to 180°F
with M-Bond 43-B, and to +700°F (+370°C) for short periods with M-
bond 600 and 610. In common with other organic materials, oxidation
RT 72570-09 Loctite Super Bonder 409 3 g Tube
RT 72571-54 Loctite Prism 454 Adhesive 3 g Tube
and sublimation effects at elevated temperatures limit life. M-Bond 43B RT 72572-61 Loctite Prism 4861 Adhesive 20 g
is particularly recommended for transducer applications up to+250°F RT 72582-01 Loctite 349 Impruv Adhesive 50 ml
(+120°C) and M-Bond 610 for transducers up to +450°F (+230°C) RT 72573-11 Loctite Prism 4011 Adhesive 20 g
Shelf Life and Post Life: At room temperature, M-Bond 600 has a
Loctite 404 Quick Set Tissue Adhesive
useful storage life of approximately three months, while M-Bond 43-B This adhesive is perfect for those applications where a
and M-Bond 610 will last about nine months. quick-curing adhesive is needed. Comes in an applicator-
Once opened and mixed, M-Bond 600 and 610 have room temperature tipped bottle, 0.33 oz. (10ml).
pot lives of two weeks and six weeks, respectively. Since M-Bond 43B is RT 12687-01 Loctite 404 Quick Set Tissue Adhesive 10ml
supplied already mixed, its pot life is about the same as its shelf life when
kept in a tightly closed container. These periods of adhesive usefulness Loctite™ 460 Adhesive
can often be doubled by refrigeration at +30° to +40°F (0 to +5°C). Never Our LoctiteTM 460 is a quick curing low viscosity glue that
open a refrigerated bottle until it has reached room temperature. can be used for mounting samples to any substrate (glass,
Curing Time: metal and/or plastic). It is soluble in acetone. Comes in an
M-Bond 43B is about 2 hours at +375°F (+190°C) applicator-tipped plastic bottle — 20 g.
M-Bond 600 is about 3.5 hours at +350°F (170°C) RT 12646-08 LoctiteTM 460 Adhesive each
M-Bond 610 is about 3 hours at 375°F (190°C) ® ®
Loctite Fixmaster Poxy Pak™,
RT 50410-10 M-Bond 43B (4x25 ml) Kit Fast Cure Epoxy
RT 50410-20 M-Bond 600 (4 x 10 ml A and 4 x 15 ml B) Kit This fast cure, general purpose epoxy bonds virtually any
RT 50410-30 M-Bond 610 (4 x 15 ml A and 4 x 10 ml B) Kit material. It will also fill or seal cracks and rebuild worn
and Catalyst)
surfaces. Comes in a 1 oz. syringe with a built-in plunger
for easy dispensing without equipment. Working time is
 MikrostikTM Adhesive, Non-Conductive approximately 4 minutes. Includes nozzle and mixing stick.
Fast drying, ultrathin clear adhesive suitable for mounting small particles This unique adhesive may be made electrically conductive
which can be submerged in other adhesives. It can be diluted with with the addition of any conductive powder (Silver, Carbon
methyl ethyl ketone. Quick-drying. Comes in a bottle with an applicator etc.)
brush. 14 ml. RT 12646-09 Loctite® Fixmaster® Poxy Pak™,
RT 12646-01 MikrostikTM Adhesive, Non-Conductive 14ml Fast Cure Epoxy each

374 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec12_370-383_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 7:51 AM Page 375

Materials Science & Metrology SECTION 12

® Cargille Meltmounts ® Replication Materials
T Instant thermal mountants that require
“no-oven-time”. ® Cellulose
T 100% Usable; contains no solvents. Acetate
T Reversible, thermally, for particle
retrieval or re-orientation Films
T Soluble in toluene for special This acetate film
techniques or clean-up. softens in acetone
T Fluid at 65°C, a temperature chosen and can be used for
because it makes permanent mount and Melt Mount is also available in a Quick-Stick™
duplicating purposes. Acetate film which is wet with
protects the majority of specimens from form which can be used to make permanent
thermal changes. acetone can then be applied to a surface which has
microscope slide mounts quickly. These Melt
T PCB-Free. been wet with acetone. It is easily removed away from
Mount sticks can be applied to a slide on a
T Direct replacement for old mountant the object when dry. Acetate films come in 35μm
hotplate. As soon as the specimen and
mediums (Canada Balsam, Aroclor thicknesses.
coverglass are positioned and the slide is
5442, Naphrax...) 50420-30 Acetate Film 35μm,
cooled you have a permanent prepared slide
Cargille Meltmount™ (optical quality) is a that can be reversed by reheating, if you 10x15cm Sheet 20/pk
series of mounting media which are should wish to retrieve a particular particle.
specifically formulated for use in microscope Each Quick-Stick™ weighs approximately 2⁄3 ® Triaphan
slide mounting and in other optical coupling oz. (18g).
applications.
Films
An acetobutyrate
1. Meltmount™ 1.539 film, 100μm thick,
Has a refractive index (nD @25°C) of 1.539 and an Abbe V dispersion of 45. suitable for
Its optically similar to Canada Balsam and therefore ideal for mounting many biological replicating rough
specimens but without the long drying time of Canada Balsam. surfaces. It is soluble in methylene chloride (plastisolve)
RT 17994-10 Meltmount 1.539 1 oz. or acetone.
RT 17994-11 Meltmount 1.539 Quick-Stick™ each
50421-10 Triaphan, 100μm,
2. Meltmount™ for Chrysotile Asbestos 15x15cm Sheet 20/pk
It has dispersion characteristics making it appropriate for mounting chrysotile asbestos.
17994-20 Meltmount for Chrysotile 1 oz.
® Collodion (Parlodion), 2%
RT

3. Meltmount™ 1.582 in Amyl Acetate

It has a refractive index nD @25°C) of 1.582 and an Abbe V dispersion of 33.
Its optical clarity makes it the preferred choice for minimum visible absorption. Highly purified nitrocellulose
(parlodion strip) in glass distilled
RT 17994-30 Meltmount 1.582 1 oz.
amyl acetate. Useful for forming
RT 17994-31 Meltmount 1.582 Quick-Stick™ each
a negative replica to very fine
4. Meltmount™ 1.605 detail. Two types are available: Our sterile formula
It has a refractive index (nD @25°C) of 1.605 and an Abbe V dispersion of 30, making it
which is filtered down to 0.45 micron and our non-
appropriate for mounting Asbestiform Tremolite, Anthophyllite, and Actinolite.
sterile formula.
RT 17994-40 Meltmount 1.605 1 oz.
RT 17994-41 Meltmount 1.605 Quick-Stick™ each RT 12620-00 Non-Filter 2% Collodion
in Amyl Acetate 100 ml
5. Meltmount™ 1.662 RT 12620-10 Sterile 2% Collodion
It has a refractive index (nD @25°C) of 1.662 and an Abbe V dispersion of 26, optically in Amyl Acetate (Ultra-Pure) 100 ml
similar to Aroclor 5442 but is PCB-free. RT 12620-30 Non-filter 2% Collodion
in Amyl Acetate 30 ml
RT 17994-50 Meltmount 1.662 1 oz.
RT 12620-34 Non-filter 2% Collodion
RT 17994-51 Meltmount 1.662 Quick-Stick™ each
in Amyl Acetate 4x30 ml
6. Meltmount™ 1.680 RT 12620-50 Sterile 2% Collodion
It has a refractive index (nD @25°C) of 1.680 and an Abbe V dispersion of 25, making it in Amyl Acetate (Ultra-Pure) 30 ml
appropriate for mounting Amosite and Crocidolite asbestos. RT 12620-55 Sterile 2% Collodion
RT 17994-60 Meltmount 1.680 1 oz. in Amyl Acetate (Ultra-Pure) 4x30 ml
RT 17994-61 Meltmount 1.680 Quick-Stick™ each

7. Meltmount™ 1.704
It has a refractive index (nD @25°C) of 1.704 and an Abbe V dispersion of 24, similar to Naphrax.
RT 17994-70 Meltmount 1.704 1 oz.
RT 17994-71 Meltmount 1.704 Quick-Stick™ each

For a complete line of Adhesives and Mountants,

See Chemicals section, pages 9-21 UUUUU

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 375
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec12_370-383_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 7:51 AM Page 376

SECTION 12 Materials Science & Metrology

® Membrane Boxes
Our unique membrane storage boxes for the transfer, storage and shipping of many
delicate items. Available in 5 different shapes and sizes these plastic containers, with a
double elastic membrane on the top and bottom, offer security for all of your sensitive
items. Once your item is placed in the box the elastic membrane conforms around the
enclosed object and protects it from any movement.

Round Membrane Boxes

Cat. # O.D, mm I.D, mm C D Qty
64304-20 82 54 20 40 each
64304-30 82 54 9 17 each

Overall Dimensions Maximum Useful Area Dimensions Capacity

Cat. # L, mm W, mm D, mm L, mm W, mm D, mm Weight Qty
Rectangular Boxes
64304-27 250 200 212 162 18 — — each
64304-28 250 200 204 154 40 — — each
64304-29 100 50 67 20 20 — — each
64304-36 100 50 16 67 17 9 8g each
64304-38 100 75 16 67 42 9 19g each
64304-39 100 75 25 62 37 18 31g each
64304-40 125 75 25 87 37 18 44gg each
64304-41 150 75 25 112 37 18 56g each
64304-42 150 125 25 112 87 18 132g each
64304-43 150 125 50 112 79 20 246g each
64304-44 250 200 100 188 138 60 1557g each
64304-45 250 200 200 157 3371g each
64304-46 300 150 16 267 117 9 211g each
64304-51 100 50 50 54 17 12 — each
This box has no stackable feet.
64304-52 150 100 25 92 92 9 — each
64304-53 300 75 25 262 37 18 — each
64304-54 150 100 75 104 54 59 — each
64304-55 300 150 25 267 117 19 — each
64304-56 300 150 75 246 96 60 — each
64304-57 175 100 25 137 62 18 — each
64304-58 175 100 50 129 54 40 — each
64304-59 200 150 50 154 104 40 — each
Square Boxes
64304-10 38 38 18 31 31 9 10g 12/pk
64304-11 100 100 16 67 67 9 30g each
64304-12 100 100 25 62 62 18 52g each
64304-13 100 100 50 54 54 40 88g each
64304-14 125 125 16 92 92 9 57g each
64304-15 125 125 25 87 87 18 102g each
64304-16 125 125 50 79 79 40 187g each
64304-17 150 150 100 88 88 80 465g each
64304-18 125 125 75 92 92 60 — each
64304-19 150 150 25 112 112 18 — each
64304-21 150 150 75 104 104 60 — each
64304-22 100 100 75 — — — — each
64304-23 175 175 25 137 137 18 — each
64304-24 175 175 50 129 129 40 — each
64304-25 200 200 25 162 162 18 — each
64304-26 200 200 50 154 154 40 — each
64304-50 150 150 50 104 104 40 324g each

376 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec12_370-383_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 7:51 AM Page 377

Materials Science & Metrology SECTION 12

® Gel-Pak® Storage/Carrier Box

Patented gel technology – the innovative
solutions for storage and carrying delicate
materials
The traditional Gel-Box, Gel-Tray® and Gel-Slide Carriers
are perfect for applications where devices are manually
offloaded by tweezers or by hand.
T Gel-Box (AD Series) - Hinged plastic boxes coated
with Gel in the bottom.
T Gel-Tray® (BD Series) - A removable 2" plastic tray
coated with Gel and contained inside a hinged
plastic box.
T Gel-Slide (CD series) - A removable 2"glass slide
coated with Gel and contained inside a hinged
plastic box.

(Gel-Pak® is A Division of Delphon Industries)

® GEL-BOX (AD Carrier Boxes) ® GEL-TRAY® (BD Series) And GEL-SLIDE

Gel-Box AD Series Carriers owe their unique device-holding capabilities to a (CD Series)
proprietary GEL coating applied directly to the bottom of a hinged box. Same as the Gel-Box, the Gel-Tray and Gel-Slide products are intended for
Devices are held once contact is made with the GEL surface and will stay in manual applications in which the devices are loaded and unloaded using
place, even if the carrier is tilted or jarred. The carriers are designed for tweezers or by fingers. The Gel-Pak BD and CD series of pocketless trays
manual off-loading with tweezers or by hand. GEL-PAK AD series are ideal for are both configured as a 2" carrier stored in a protective plastic hinged box.
handling devices where no direct contact with the top of the device is The Gel coating is applied directly to the surface of the plastic tray (BD
important. Series) or glass slide (CD Series).
The GEL-BOX Carriers may also be used for bare die handling, such as GaAs, These products offer the same functionality as the Gel-Box, however the
PETs, laser diodes, and beam-lead devices where the die size is small (less plastic tray or glass slide can be easily removed from the box allowing for
than 1mm) and tweezers or other specialized techniques are used for off- convenient handling when loading or unloading fixtures are being used.
handling. The Gel-Slide (coated glass slides) is designed for higher temperature
FEATURES: applications such as bonding and reflow where a plastic tray will not work.
T No need for custom-molded containers for each device size. The CD slide has a temperature capability up to 220˚C. The CD glass slides
T Ideal for handling subassemblies, hybrid models and are also ideal for backside inspection due to their optical clarity.
packaged devices. Both the Gel-Tray and Gel-Slide products are available in the standard
T Available in Transparent, Conductive and Anti-Static retention levels (X0, X4, X5, and X8) to accommodate variations in device
carriers in multiple sizes. size, weight, and surface roughness.
T Retention Level available: x0, x1, x2, x3, x4, x5, and x8 (the higher
the number the more retention capability) The protective 2" hinged boxes are available in transparent styrene (T),
We offer standard retention level X4. Other retention levels are conductive black (C) and antistatic (AS) materials. The boxes, trays, and
available with the order of 100 or more, and at least two weeks slides may be customized with a print pattern (grid) or company logo.
for delivery. Standard available Prints can be viewed at Gel-Tray/Gel-Slide Print options

Cat # Description - Overall Box size Qty Cat # Description Qty

64900-x4 1"x1"x 1⁄4" Transparent Hinged Box 50/pk 64900-10 2" x 2" Conductive BD Tray in Antistatic Hinged Box 50/pk
64901-x3 2" x 2" x 0.25" Antistatic Gel-Box 50/pk 64900-11 2" x 2" Conductive BD Tray in Conductive Base/ 50/pk
64901-x4 2"x2"x1⁄4" Conductive Hinged Box 50/pk Antistatic Lid Hinged Box
64902-x4 2"x2"x1⁄4" Anti-Static Top & Conductive Hinged Box 50/pk 64900-12 2" x 2" Conductive BD Tray in Conductive Base/ 50/pk
64903-x4 2"x2"x1⁄4" Anti-Static Hinged Box 50/pk Transparent Lid Hinged Box
64904-x4 2"x3"x3⁄8" Conductive Hinged Box 50/pk 64900-13 2" x 2" Conductive BD Tray in Conductive Hinged Box 50/pk
64905-x4 2"x3"x3⁄8" Anti-Static & Conductive Hinged Box 50/pk 64900-14 2" x 2" Conductive BD Tray in Transparent Hinged Box 50/pk
64906-x4 3.5"x4.5"x0.5" Conductive Hinged Box 50/pk 64900-15 2" x 2" Conductive BD Tray in “High Clearance” 50/pk
64908-X3 4.5" x 3.5" x 0.875" Conductive Base/Antistatic Lid Gel-Box 50/pk Antistatic Hinged Box
64907-x4 3.5"x4.5"x7/8" Transparent Hinged Box 50/pk 64900-16 2" x 2" Transparent BD Tray in Antistatic Hinged Box 50/pk
64908-x4 3.5"x4.5”x7/8" Conductive Hinged Box 50/pk 64900-17 2" x 2" Transparent BD Tray in Conductive Base/ 50/pk
64909-x4 2.5"x3.5"x0.5" Anti Static Top & Conductive Hinged Box 50/pk Antistatic Lid Hinged Box
64910-x3 6" x 4" x 0.5" Conductive Gel-Box 50/pk 64900-18 2" x 2" Transparent BD Tray in Conductive Hinged Box 50/pk
64911-x3 6" x 4" x 0.5" Transparent Gel-Box 50/pk 64900-19 2" x 2" Transparent BD Tray in Transparent Hinged Box 50/pk
64912-x3 7" x 5" x 1" Conductive Base/Antistatic Lid Gel-Box 50/pk 64900-20 2" x 2" Glass Slide in Transparent Hinged Box 50/pk
64913-x3 7" x 5" x 1" Conductive Gel-Box 50/pk 64900-21 2" x 2" Glass Slide in Conductive Hinged Box 50/pk
64914-x3 7.75" x 3.5" x 1" Conductive Gel-Box 50/pk 64900-22 2" x 2" Glass Slide in Antistatic Hinged Box 50/pk
64915-x3 9.937" x 3.5" x 0.625" Transparent Gel-Box 50/pk 64900-23 2" x 2" Glass Slide in MAG-40 Cassette 50/pk

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 377
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec12_370-383_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 7:51 AM Page 378

SECTION 12 Materials Science & Metrology

® Polishing Cloths ® Glenco***
We offer a wide range of polishing cloths which are ideally suited for This flocked cloth is made by binding a rayon
the preparation of metallographic specimens and other materials flock to a woven cotton backing; it is the most
needing an extremely fine finish. They are available in a Pressure popular in our line. It is excellent for Final
Sensitive Adhesive (PSA) as well as Plain Backing (PB); with 21⁄2" polishing when used in conjunction with
diameter hole on the center or No Hole (N/H). diamond or alumina polishing compounds.
Cat. # Description Pack
50318-05 Glenco, 8" x N/H, PSA 5/pk
50318-15 Glenco, 8"x 21⁄2", PSA 5/pk

® Spec-Cloth***
A long napped rayon flock with a plastic
barrier. This is a finer version of our Glenco
cloth especially designed for superior final
polishing. For best results, use with our
diamond polishing compound.
Cat. # Description Pack
50320-05 Spec-Cloth, 8" x N/H, PSA 5/pk
50320-15 Spec-Cloth, 8"x 21⁄2", PSA 5/pk
® Billiard***
100% virgin wool sheared pile.
Recommended for intermediate and final ® Silk**
polishing steps. 100% pure woven silk for intermediate,
final, or skid polishing on friable materials.
Cat. # Description Pack
50300-10 Billiard, 10" x N/H, PB 5/pk
Cat. # Description Pack
50300-08 Billiard, 8" x N/H, PSA 5/pk
50312-05 Silk, 10" x N/H, PB 5/pk
® KemPad*
A non-woven textile cloth which is both ® Final B*
This cloth has been especially designed for
oil and water resistant. Recommended
long life. Made from a rayon flock on a cotton
for intermediate and final polishing with
canvas backing. It is recommended for all final
diamond abrasive compounds. Excellent
polishing.
flatness.
Cat. # Description Pack Cat. # Description Pack
50310-05 Kempad, 8" x N/H, PSA 5/pk 50334-05 Final B, 8" x N/H, PSA 5/pk
50310-15 Kempad, 8"x 21⁄2", PSA 5/pk 50334-15 Final B, 8"x 21⁄2", PSA 5/pk

® Glendur* ® Diamond
A fine stainless steel mesh on an aluminum
foil polyethylene backing. Extremely durable Lapping Film
material and, excellent removable rate A selective diamond particle
when used with a diamond compound in resin bonded to a uniform 3-mil
the 45 to 60 micron range. Recommended polyester film backing.
for coarse and intermediate polishing. Excellent for polishing samples
with differing hardness. Ideal for the preparation of cross sections for
Cat. # Description Pack
SEM/TEM analysis. Comes in 8” and 12” discs with a plain back (P/B) or
50332-05 Glendur, 8" x N/H, PSA
5/pk
pressure sensitive adhesive back (PSA).
® Nylon Diamond Lapping Film
A durable napless nylon weave. It provides 8”xN/H 8”xN/H 12”xN/H 12”xN/H
excellent intermediate polishing on most Micron P/B PSA P/B PSA Pack
materials 0.1 50350-01 50351-01 50354-01 50355-01 Each
0.25 50350-03 50351-03 50354-03 50355-03 Each
0.5 50350-05 50351-05 50354-05 50355-05 Each
Cat. # Description Pack
1 50350-10 50351-10 50354-10 50355-10 Each
50314-05 Nylon, 8" x N/H, PSA 5/pk
3 50350-15 50351-15 50354-15 50355-15 Each
50314-15 Nylon, 8"x 21⁄2", PSA 5/pk
6 50350-20 50351-20 50354-20 50355-20 Each
9 50350-25 50351-25 50354-25 50355-25 Each
* Available with PSA backing only
15 50350-30 50351-30 50354-30 50355-30 Each
** Avaliable with Plain backing only
30 50350-35 50351-35 50354-35 50355-35 Each
*** Avaliable with PSA and or Plain backing

378 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec12_370-383_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 7:51 AM Page 379

Materials Science & Metrology SECTION 12

® Final Finishing Film ® Polishing Materials

® True Blue Film ™
® Alumina Powder:
True Blue™ film is produced
with a proprietary process EMS's Alumina Powders are
combining a unique mixture of accurately controlled for all
abrasive particle sizes and specs and particle size
shapes that are bonded to a
distribution, assuring you the
film backing which enable the film to produce finer surfaces than are
best polishing results. The
commonly found in similarly graded micron films. True Blue™ film is
typically used after the 1micron diamond lapping film step and provides following micron sizes are
a flat, nearly scratch-free surface. available: 0.05, 0.3, and 1.0.
® Final Green™ Film
Final Green™ film is produced
using a unique process, which TYPICAL APPLICATIONS ARE:
is different from any other type
T Precision Optics T Ferrite Components
of abrasive film. This process
produces a film that is capable T Silicon Wafers T Electro-Optical Crystals
of removing even the finest T Acrylic lenses T Gem Stones
scratches at the final stage of polishing. Final Green™ film is typically T Metallographic Sections
used after True Blue™ film and produces an ideal sample surface for
Type DX Alumina Powder is specially treated to reduce the number
analysis.
of agglomerates (group of particles in each grade of manufactured
All films are 8” diameter, and available with either plain back (P/B) or alumina). The result is fast polishing and improved quality of the
pressure sensitive adhesive (PSA) finished products.
Final Finishing Film Type N Alumina Powder is recommended when these improvements
8” x P/B 8” x PSA Qty are not necessary.
True Blue™ Film
Cat. # Description Size
50336-PB 50336-PSA each 50360-01 Type N, Alumina Powder, 0.05μm 1 lb
Final Green™ Film 50360-05 Type N, Alumina Powder, 0.3μm 1 lb
50360-10 Type N, Alumina Powder, 1.0μm 1 lb
50338-PB 50338-PSA each 50361-01 Type DX, Alumina Powder, 0.05μm 1 lb
50361-05 Type DX, Alumina Powder, 0.3μm 1 lb
® Aluminum Oxide 50361-10 Type DX, Alumina Powder, 1.0μm 1 lb
Abrasive Film Discs
Alumina is widely used in sample ® Diamond Powder
grinding and polishing. Our Aluminum Made from synthetic diamond.
Oxide Abrasive film with a PSA back or a Cat. # Description Qty
plain back are ready to use in all sample 50375-01 Diamond Powder, 0.1μm 10 carats
polishing applications. 50375-02 Diamond Powder, 0.25μm 10 carats
50375-05 Diamond Powder, 0.5μm 10 carats
8” Diameter 8” Diameter 50375-1 Diamond Powder, 1μm 10 carats
Micron/Color Plain Back PSA Back Qty 50375-3 Diamond Powder, 3μm 10 carats
0.05 - Pale Yellow 50357-05 50358-05 25/pk 50375-6 Diamond Powder, 6μm 10 carats
0.3 - White 50357-03 50358-03 25/pk 50375-9 Diamond Powder, 9μm 10 carats
1 - Purple 50357-1 50358-1 25/pk 50375-15 Diamond Powder, 15μm 10 carats
3 - Mauve 50357-3 50358-3 25/pk 50375-30 Diamond Powder, 30μm 10 carats
5 - Gray 50357-5 50358-5 25/pk 50375-45 Diamond Powder, 45μm 10 carats
9 - Blue 50357-9 50358-9 25/pk
12 - Yellow Green 50357-12 50358-12 25/pk
20 - Tan 50357-20 50358-20 25/pk ® Silcon Carbide Powder SiC
30 - Green 50357-30 50358-30 25/pk
Dark gray 98% SiC. Hardness, Moh’s scale 9.0; Knoop Scale 2500.
® Silicon Carbide Abrasive Film Discs Crystallography: hexagonal – alpha and beta phase.
8” Diameter 8” Diameter Cat. # Description Qty
Micron Plain Back PSA Back Qty 50260-8 Silicon Carbide Powder, 8μm 1lb
1 50257-1 50258-1 25/pk 50260-10 Silicon Carbide Powder, 10μm 1lb
3 50257-3 50258-3 25/pk 50260-14 Silicon Carbide Powder, 14μm 1lb
5 50257-5 50258-5 25/pk 50260-18 Silicon Carbide Powder, 18μm 1lb
9 50257-9 50258-9 25/pk 50260-23 Silicon Carbide Powder, 23μm 1lb
15 50257-15 50258-15 25/pk 50260-35 Silicon Carbide Powder, 35μm 1lb
30 50257-30 50258-30 25/pk 50260-42 Silicon Carbide Powder, 42μm 1lb
60 50257-60 50258-60 25/pk 50260-50 Silicon Carbide Powder, 50μm 1lb

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 379
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec12_370-383_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 7:51 AM Page 380

SECTION 12 Materials Science & Metrology

® Boron Carbide Powder (B4C) ® Colloidal Alumina
Boron Carbide is one of the hardest materials known, ranking third As an acidic dispersion, Colloidal
behind diamond and cubic boron nitride. Alumina is a chemical-mechanical
T Extreme hardness, (Knoop action, that provides superior
100g: 2900-3580 kg/mm2) surfaces on germanium, silicon,
T Good chemical resistance gallium arsenide, zinc sulphide,
T Good nuclear properties fluorides, sapphire, ferrite’s and
T Low density (2.52 g/cm2) silicon carbide. Low scatter finishes
Due to the hardness, boron can be obtained on pure metals
carbide powder is used as an such as nickel, tungsten, copper,
abrasive in polishing and lapping applications. beryllium, steel and aluminum.
Epoxy resin materials and plastics have also been successfully polished
Cat. # Description Qty with this versatile colloidal dispersion.
50510-08 Boron Carbide Powder, 8μm 1 lb Properties: pH: 3 - 3.5; solids: 20%; viscosity: thixotropic.
50510-10 Boron Carbide Powder, 10μm 1 lb
50510-14 Boron Carbide Powder, 14μm 1 lb Application: Depending upon the application, Colloidal Alumina can be
50510-18 Boron Carbide Powder, 18μm 1 lb used full strength or diluted. Dilution up to 1:1 or higher with deionized
50510-23 Boron Carbide Powder, 23μm 1 lb water is recommended. Polyurethane and short nap cloths are
50510-35 Boron Carbide Powder, 35μm 1 lb recommended. However, most commonly used laps and pads are
50510-42 Boron Carbide Powder, 42μm 1 lb compatible with colloidal alumina.
50510-50 Boron Carbide Powder, 50μm 1 lb
50365-05 Colloidal Alumina 1 pt
50365-06 Colloidal Alumina 1 gal
® Aluminum Oxide Powder - Al2O3
These are abrasive powders that are prepared from aluminum oxide,
offering excellent coarse and intermediate polishing, with fast results. ® Colloidal Silica
Cat. # Description Size This non-crystallizing Colloidal Silica is made to be user friendly. It
50362-03 Aluminum Oxide Powder, 3.0μm 1 lb eliminates the problems that are caused by drying or freezing that are
50362-05 Aluminum Oxide Powder, 5.0μm 1 lb associated with other colloidal silica products which are used for
50362-09 Aluminum Oxide Powder, 9.0μm 1 lb chemical/mechanical polishing.
50362-15 Aluminum Oxide Powder, 15.0μm 1 lb
Colloidal silica is a first choice silica dispersion for optimizing polishing
results such as silicon, fused quartz, fused silica, lithium niobate, YAZ,
® Alumina Slurry GGG, alexandrite, sapphire and many others.
These suspensions are water-based and contain no Properties: pH: 9.6 - 9.9; Particle size : 20-60 nm; Solids:
additives, which may interfere with polishing or 40%;Viscosity: 20-40 cp.
contaminate the sample. All slurries are very stable
and alumina is evenly dispersed. Excellent for the Application: Colloidal silica can be used full strength or diluted.
finest finishes Dilution to 1:1 or higher with deionized water is recommended.
Polyurethane and short nap cloths can be used.
Cat. # Description Size
50368-10 Alumina Slurry, 0.05μm 6 oz 50366-05 Colloidal Silica 1 pt
50368-20 Alumia Slurry, 0.3μm 6 oz 50366-06 Colloidal Silica 1 gal
50368-30 Alumina Slurry, 1.0μm 6 oz

Check out our New and Exclusive Products...

Introducing Graphene, the ideal suport film
for electron microscopy.
Graphene is a single atomic layer of carbon atoms tightly packed in a two-
dimensional honeycomb lattice. This novel material is atomically thin,
chemically inert, consists of light atoms, and possesses a highly ordered
structure. Graphene is electrically and thermally conductive, and is the
strongest material ever measured.
For more information, see pages 140-141 UUUUU

380 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec12_370-383_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 7:51 AM Page 381

Materials Science & Metrology SECTION 12

® Diamond Compounds
With great experience, technical knowledge, and modern facilities, we are able to
manufacture superior diamond compounds and provide reliable service to every one.
Glennel® diamond products are specially formulated to help you prepare surfaces that are
usually difficult to polish and require precision finish. To satisfy today's demand the
diamond compounds must be complex with near perfect tolerances as is ours.
Types of Diamond:
We use three basic types of diamonds: natural monocrystalline, synthetic monocrystalline, and synthetic polycrystalline. Typical sizes rangiefrom 1/10μm to
60μm
MONOCRYSTALLINE diamonds provide a cost effective means for good stock removal and finish. The natural form has a blocky shape with a smooth surface.
Synthetic diamonds have a slightly irregular shape with multiple edges. Precision grading and high quality standards guarantee consistent shape and size. This
consistency and unique shape make this a popular diamond for many production-lapping applications.
POLYCRYSTALLINE diamonds are recommended for microscopy, materialography, and where surface finish is extremely critical. We use the highest
quality polycrystalline diamonds, Dupont Mypolex(r). It has a uniform blocky shape with a rough surface. Precision micro fractures built into
each particle provide uniform and consistent fracturing under stress.

Ultra-Precision Grading and Shaping of all Micron Sizes Ordering: All Diamond Pastes are available as a
standard in 5 g size dispensing tube UB or UC and
UBS or UCS. 18 g sizes are available upon
request.
Formulation Type:
Monocrystalline Polycrystalline
UB........ Water & Oil .............UBS
Virgin Natural – Monocrystalline Synthetic – Monocrystalline Synthetic – Polycrystalline UC........ Oil ............UCS
OS........ Oil ............OSS
® 1. Diamond Paste
UB - Water/Oil Soluble (Monocrystalline)
Glennel® UB Formulation is excellent for most applications where a diamond compound is desired. It Cat. # Paste Diamond Compond Size
is soluble in either water or oil and works with all common extenders. UB compound is recommended 50370-10 0.1μm UB 5g
for polishing laboratory specimens and lapping of materials such as carbide, ceramic, sapphire, 50370-20 0.25μm UB 5g
composites, ferrite, and silicon. 50370-30 0.5μm UB 5g
50370-40 1.0μm UB 5g
Glennel® UC Formulation is an oil soluble compound recommended for finishing wire dies, molds, 50370-50 3.0μm UB 5g
cold heading dies, and general shop applications where diamond compounds are required. UC 50370-60 6.0μm UB 5g
provides fast cutting action and superior finish. Meant to be used with our Formula C extender for 50370-70 9.0μm UB 5g
maximum efficiency. 50370-80 15.0μm UB 5g
Glennel® OS Formulation is an oil soluble compound designed for lapping large areas of hard
material. Use alone or with an extender it cleans up easily, provides aggressive stock removal and an UC- Oil Soluble (Monocrystalline)
50371-10 0.1μm UC 5g
outstanding finish.
50371-20 0.25μm UC 5g
50371-30 0.5μm UC 5g
Micron Micron Approx. Mesh 50371-40 1.0μm UC 5g
Recommended for Use Size Size Range Equivalent 50371-50 3.0μm UC 5g
Finest finishes for work of the highest 0.1 0 - 0.2 240,000 50371-60 6.0μm UC 5g
precision. Used for optical, metallographic, 0.25 0 - 0.5 100,000 50371-70 9.0μm UC 5g
ferrite, laser rod, and semiconductor 0.5 0-1 60,000 50371-80 15.0μm UC 5g
finishing. 1 0-2 14,000
2 1-3 11,000 UBS - Water/Oil Soluble (Polycrystalline)
Final finish for most applications: molds, 3 2-4 8,000 50370-11 0.1μm UBS 5g
dies, general flat lapping. Preparatory 6 4-8 3,000 50370-21 0.25μm UBS 5g
lapping. Intermediate finish to achieve 9 8 - 12 1,800 50370-31 0.5μm UBS 5g
dimensions. 15 12 - 22 1,200 50370-41 1.0μm UBS 5g
30 22 - 36 600 50370-51 3.0μm UBS 5g
Fast stock removal and roughing on 45 36 - 54 325 50370-61 6.0μm UBS 5g
hardest materials 60 54 - 80 230/235 50370-71 9.0μm UBS 5g
Mesh - 170/230 50370-81 15.0μm UBS 5g
50370-91 30.0μm UBS 5g

UCS- Oil Soluble (Polycrystalline)

50371-11 Please see 50370

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 381
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec12_370-383_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 7:52 AM Page 382

SECTION 12 Materials Science & Metrology

® Diamond Compounds (continued)
2. Diamond Suspension T Formula B is a universal lapping vehicle, compatible with both
Glennel® Diamond Suspension water and oil soluble compounds. It is ideal in an environment
assures a consistent, uniform where materials change constantly. This very versatile formula-
tion allows you to change materials and compounds and still
viscosity and dispersion of
provides excellent lubricity and cutting action.
diamond without any shaking
or stirring. The proprietary 50376-01 Glenoil Lube 16 oz
formulation guarantees that the 50376-05 Formula C Lube 16 oz
particles will stay suspended 50376-10 Formula B Lube 16 oz
indefinitely. It is ideal for
automatic polishers and ® Water Soluble Coolant
applications that require Use with a dilution 25:1 with water to cool saw blade or belt during cutting.
changing operators. 50378-01 Water Soluble Coolant 1 qt
A versatile, water based suspension designed for most production
applications. This special formulation provides: ® SiC Dressing Stick
T Excellent lubrication T Maximum cutting action Made from silicon carbide. Use for cutting blade dressing.
T Uniform fast lapping action T Compatible with all 50379-01 SiC Dressing Stick 1 stick
common extenders.
Ordering: All Diamond Suspensions are packed in 400g bottles and ® Premium Pregrinding Wet or Dry
have Medium Concentration prepared with Premium Polycrystalline
Diamond in either Propylene Glycol (Oil based) or Water based formulas
Abrasive Papers (Discs)
We offer the finest wet or dry abrasive
Diamond Particle Size Oil Based Water Based
Cat. # Cat. # discs for sample preparation with the
0.01μm (240,000 mesh) 50372-10 50372-11 following features:
0.25μm (100,000 mesh) 50372-20 50372-21 T Premium Resin Bonding System
0.5μm (60,000 mesh) 50372-30 50372-31 for longer wear rates as well as
1.0μm (14,000 mesh) 50372-40 50372-41 for wet or dry operation.
3.0μm (8,000 mesh) 50372-60 50372-61
T Special adhesive on PSA*
6.0μm (3,000 mesh) 50372-70 50372-71
9.0μm (100,000 mesh) 50372-80 50372-81
backed discs that eliminates the need to transfer to plates.
15.0μm (1,200 mesh) 50372-90 50372-91 T Uniform mineral size.
T Pull tabs on all PSA backed discs for easy use.
3. Diamond Spray T Large labels for easy product identification.
Glennel® Diamond Aerosol Spray provides * PSA: Pressure Sensitive Adhesive
unsurpassed cutting action and finish. The Available in 9 different grit sizes, ranging from coarse to fine, on plain
inverted nozzle provides safe and easy back or water resistant pressure sensitive adhesive back.
access for difficult to reach areas while
Available in 8” diameter discs as a standard, and 12” discs available
ensuring that every diamond particle is
upon request.
used. Special formulations allow the carrier
to evaporate quickly, leaving a very uniform 8” (203mm) Silicon Carbide Discs (SCD), Wet or Dry Plain Back
dispersion of diamond. This is especially 50250-01 8” SCD, Plain Back, 60 Grit 25/Bx
useful when an operation requires a dry 50250-03 8” SCD, Plain Back, 120 Grit 25/bx
polishing cloth. 50250-04 8” SCD, Plain Back, 180 Grit 25/bx
50250-05 8” SCD, Plain Back, 240 Grit 25/bx
Ordering: Our Diamond Spray is available in 5 oz cans. 50250-06 8” SCD, Plain Back, 320 Grit 25/bx
Diamond Particle Size Polycrystalline 50250-07 8” SCD, Plain Back, 400 Grit 25/bx
Cat. # 50250-08 8” SCD, Plain Back, 600 Grit 25/bx
0.25μm (100.000 mesh) 50374-06 50250-09 8” SCD, Plain Back, 800 Grit 25/bx
1.0μm (14,000 mesh) 50374-11 50250-10 8” SCD, Plain Back, 1200 Grit 25/bx
3.0μm (8,000 mesh) 50374-16
6.0μm (3,000 mesh) 50374-21 8” (203mm) Silicon Carbide Discs(SCD), Wet or Dry PSA Back
9.0μm (1,800 mesh) 50374-26 50255-01 8” SCD, PSA Back, 60 Grit 25/bx
15.0μm (1,200 mesh) 50374-31 50255-03 8” SCD, PSA Back, 120 Grit 25/bx
50255-04 8” SCD, PSA Back, 180 Grit 25/bx
4. Lapping Solutions 50255-05 8” SCD, PSA Back, 240 Grit 25/bx
T Glenoil Lube - Lapping vehicle is the ideal lap oil for all Glennel® 50255-06 8” SCD, PSA Back, 320 Grit 25/bx
UB Compounds and Diamond Sprays. It assures continued sepa- 50255-07 8” SCD, PSA Back, 400 Grit 25/bx
ration of diamond particles and constant removal of lap debris. 50255-08 8” SCD, PSA Back, 600 Grit 25/bx
50255-09 8” SCD, PSA Back, 800 Grit 25/bx
T Formula C is made especially for oil soluble compounds, such as 50255-10 8” SCD, PSA Back, 1200 Grit 25/bx
Glennel® UC and US listed above. This penetrating formula is spe-
cially designed to enhance cutting action and leave a superior finish

382 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec12_370-383_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 7:52 AM Page 383

Materials Science & Metrology SECTION 12

® Diamond Discs
Dialok (Diamond Discs consists of a flat, stainless steel backing with sharp, blocky diamond
particles electroformed onto the disc. The special hard nickel alloy that is used in Dialok is bonded
rigidly and it locks the diamond particles in the disc thus providing fast cutting of all hard materials.
The sharp particles cut cleanly with no edge rounding. The discs are supplied with pressure
sensitive adhesive backing (PSA).
8” (203mm) (PSA) xN/H; Full Coat
50345-06 6 micron each 50345-30 30 micron each
50345-09 9 micron each 50345-45 45 micron (280 mesh) each
50345-15 15 micron each 50345-75 75 micron (220 mesh) each

® Sectioning:
® Premium Abrasive Cut-off Wheels for Sectioning
Aluminum Oxide and Silicon Carbide Abrasive Cut-Off Wheels are offered for long life, and are
affordably priced for various sectioning requirements. All wheels are 9" (228.6mm) diameter
,0.062”(1.6mm) thick; 11⁄4” (31mm) arbor.
9” Diameter Cut-off Wheel
Cat. # Description/ Application Abrasive Packed
50209-05 Hard Steel Rc 60+ Al2O3 5/bx
50209-10 Medium Steel Rc 45-60 Al2O3 5/bx
50209-15 Soft Steel Rc 30-45 Al2O3 5/bx
50209-20 Hard Non-Ferrous, Titanium SiC 5/bx
50209-25 Med Non-Ferrous, Titanium SiC 5/bx
50209-30 Soft Non-Ferrous, Titanium SiC 5/bx
For General Purpose, 5” Diameter Cut-Off Wheel
(Silicon/Carbide) is the most common disc.
50205-10 5” General Purpose Cut-Off Wheel 10/pk

® Precision Diamond Wafering Blades

(Precision Diamond Cut-Off Wheels)
These bonded blades are constructed of an inner metal core and an outer rim, this rim is bonded
with diamond particles. These blades come in high and low concentrations of diamond particles, to
handle various sectioning requirements:
T High Concentration (H/C) for general laboratory use, either low or high saw’s speed.
T Low concentration (L/C) for sectioning hard and brittle materials, such as ceramics,
silicon, glass, minerals.
Diamond Diamond
Diamond Diamond Cat. # Diameter Thickness Size Concentration Packed
Cat. # Diameter Thickness Size Concentration Packed 50267-FH4 4” 0.020” Fine High each
50265-FH3 3” 0.006” Fine High each 50267-MH4 4” 0.020” Medium High each
50265-MH3 3” 0.006” Medium High each 50267-CH4 4” 0.020” Coarse High each
50265-ML3 3” 0.006” Medium Low each 50265-MH5 5” 0.015” Medium High each
50266-MH3 3” 0.010” Medium High each 50265-CH5 5” 0.015” Coarse High each
50265-FH4 4” 0.012” Fine High each 50265-CL5 5” 0.015” Coarse Low each
50265-MH4 4” 0.012” Medium High each 50265-CH6 6” 0.020” Coarse High each
50265-CH4 4” 0.012” Coarse High each 50265-CL6 6” 0.020” Coarse Low each
50265-CL4 4” 0.012” Coarse Low each 50265-MH7 7” 0.020” Medium High each
50266-FH4 4” 0.015” Fine High each 50265-CH7 7” 0.020” Coarse High each
50266-MH4 4” 0.015” Medium High each 50266-CH7 7” 0.029” Coarse High each
50266-CH4 4” 0.015” Coarse High each 50266-CL7 7” 0.029” Coarse Low each

® Diamond Wafering Blade ® Water Soluble Coolant

Cat. # Diameter Thickness Packed Use with a dilution 25:1 with water to cool saw blade or belt during cutting.
50265-04 4" .14" W,.20"D each
50265-05 5" .14" W,.20"D each 50378-01 Water Soluble Coolant 1 qt
50265-06 6" .14" W,.20"D each
50265-07
50266-04
7"
4"
.25" W, .276"D
.20" W, .20"D
each
each
® SiC Dressing Stick
50266-05 5" .20" W,.20"D each Made from silicon carbide. Use for cutting blade dressing.
50266-06 6" .20" W, .276"D each 50379-01 SiC Dressing Stick 1 stick
50266-07 7" .32" W, .276"D each
50267-06 6" .32" W, .276"D each

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 383
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec12_384-391_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 8:00 AM Page 384

SECTION 12 Materials Science & Metrology

® Tools
® Mini-Tools; Micro-Tools
These tools are designed for anyone who is engaged in
microscope work, miniature applications as well as
specimen manipulation. Micro-Tools are the smallest
known precision tools available for the laboratory and
micro electronics industry. Micro-Tools are available in 32
different tip configurations with interchangeable handles.
Micro-Tool consists of a threaded handle (MT1), and an
interchangeable threaded base with tool tip. Tip material is
hardened tool steel unless otherwise noted.
Ordering: Please specify Tip Size when ordering.

Tip Availability
.025mm .120mm .25mm .50mm
Cat.# Description (.001”) (.005”) (.010”) (.020”)
62091-01 Micro Needle Yes Yes Yes Yes
62091-02 Micro Graver - - Yes Yes
62091-03 Micro Chisel Yes Yes Yes Yes
62091-04 Micro Spade Yes Yes Yes Yes
62091-05 Micro Fork - - Yes Yes
62091-06 Micro Mirror - - - Yes MT110 mirror
62091-07 Micro Scale - - - Yes
62091-08 Micro Knife 20° Yes Yes Yes Yes
62091-09 Micro Knife 45° Yes Yes Yes Yes
62091-10 Micro Mirror - - - Yes
62091-11 Micro Probe 90° - - Yes Yes
62091-12 Micro Probe 45° - - Yes Yes
62091-13 Micro Graver Yes Yes Yes Yes
62091-14 Micro Brush - - - Yes
62091-15 Micro Diamond - - Yes Yes
62091-16 Micro Spatula - - - Yes
62091-17 Micro Manipulator - - - Yes
62091-18 Micro Hook 90° - - Yes Yes
62091-19 Micro Burnisher - - - Yes
62091-20 Micro Hook 180° - - - Yes
62091-21 Micro Scraper Yes Yes Yes Yes
62091-22 Micro Saw - - - Yes MT118 hook
62091-23 Micro Scale - - - Yes 90 degrees
62091-24 Micro Needle Yes Yes Yes Yes
62091-25 Ultra Micro Needle - Yes Yes Yes
62091-26 Ultra Micro Needle - Yes Yes Yes
62091-27 Ultra Micro Needle - Yes Yes Yes
62091-28 Micro Carbide Scribe Yes Yes Yes Yes
62091-29 Micro Diamond File - - Yes Yes
(round)
62091-30 Micro Diamond File - - - Yes
(triangle)
62091-31 Micro Loop - - - Yes
62091-32 Micro Hook - - - Yes

62090-00 Micro-Tool Handle MT1 each

For more Micro-Tools, See Tweezers Section pages 837-845 UUUUU

384 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec12_384-391_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 8:00 AM Page 385

Materials Science & Metrology SECTION 12

® Tools:
® Standard Micro-Tool Set - Assorted Sets
® A. Special Lab Set 6X
A special Minitool Laboratory set 6X contains all 32 standard micro-tools
(0.5mm (0.020”) nominal diameter) as well as other sizes (0.25mm or
0.12mm nominal diameters), 6 interchangeable MT-1 handles and one tool
sharpening stone. Each set comes with a hand-milled finished case made
from solid walnut. For safety and convenience, micro-tools are placed into
individual PTFE bushings in a pivoted tool rack, which automatically swings
into position when the lid is opened and retracts when closed. Six tool
handles are rested in milled cavities.
62092-05 Micro-Tool Lab Set 6X, 0.5mm set
Select your own Micro-Tool Set
All standard micro-tools (0.50mm nominal diameter) as well as other sizes,
0.25mm or 0.12mm, can be selectively ordered to make up a set of your
choice. Simply select the tools you desire, add the alderwood case (if the
number of tools are equal or less than 8 tools) or solid walnut case (if the
number of tools are more than 8 and up to 32).
If you chose the 0.25mm diameter, tools will be shipped in a special single
tool container along with a storage case and handle.
® B. Standard Micro-Tool Sets (Tool size 0.5mm diameter)

Micro-Needle Probe Set Micro-Cutting Tool Set

This set contains : This set contains:
Tool #1 Micro-needle, long Tool #11 Micro-needle, 90 degree Tool #2 Micro-graver, 3 sided Tool #3 Micro-chisel
Tool #12 Micro-needle, 45 degree Tool #18 Micro-hook, 90 degree Tool #4 Micro-spade Tool #8 Micro-knife, 20 degree
Tool #20 Micro-hook, 180 degree Tool #24 Micro-needle, short Tool #9 Micro Knife Tool #13 Micro-graver, oval
Tool #25 Ultra micro-needle, straight Tool #15 Micro-diamond-scriber Tool #21 Micro-scraper, triangular Tool #28 Micro-scriber, carbide
MT-1 Micro-tool handle MT-case Micro-tool storage case MT-1 Micro-tool Handle MT-case Micro-tool storage case
62093-01 Micro-Needle Probe Set set 62093-02 Micro-Cutting Tool Set set

Microscopist’s Set Placement & Manipulating Set

This set contains: This set contains:
Tool #1 Micro-needle, long Tool #3 Micro-chisel Tool # 5 Micro-fork Tool #7 Micro-scale, 10mm
Tool #8 Micro-knife, 20 degree Tool #15 Micro-diamond-scriber Tool #12 Micro-prober, 45-degree Tool #14 Micro-brush
Tool #16 Micro-spatula, flexible Tool #18 Micro-hook, 90 degree Tool #16 Micro-spatula Tool #17 Micro-manipulator
Tool #23 Micro-scale, Tool #25 Ultra-micro-needle, straight Tool #18 Micro-hook, 90-degree Tool #26 Ultra-micro-needle,
2-sided: metric & inch MT-1 Micro-tool handle 30 degree bent
MT-1 Micro-tool handle MT-case Micro-tool storage case MT-case Micro-tool storage case
62093-03 Microscopist’s Tool Set set 62093-04 Placement & Manipulating Tool Set set

® Hardwood Tool Case Only

A solid walnut hand-milled finished case. Designed to store 32 tools
and 6 handles.
62092-CS Hardwood 32-Tool Case only each

® Alderwood Tool Case Only

Designed to hold 8 or less micro-tools and one MT handle.
62093-CS Alderwood 8 -Tool Case only each

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 385
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec12_384-391_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 8:00 AM Page 386

SECTION 12 Materials Science & Metrology

® Tools:
® Stainless Steel Micro Tools
All tools are forged from the finest quality stainless steel and are
precision hand ground, lapped, and polished. These tools are well 62096-01
suited for most applications in the field of microscopic science which
demands the ultimate in precision miniature tools. Each tool may be 62096-06
ordered separately or in a set consisting of all 8 tools with mounted
tips, one MT handle and one alderwood storage case.

62096-02

62096-07
62096-03

62096-04

62096-00
62096-05
62096-08

62096-00 Complete Tool Set (8 Tools, Handle, Case) Case Tools are 0.02" (0.5mm) set
62096-01 Micro Needle, straight Tapered from .5mm to a sharp tip each
62096-02 Micro-Needle, bent 45 degree Bent section is 0.5mm long, sharp tip each
62096-03 Micro-Needle, bent 90 degree Bent section is 0.5mm long, sharp tip each
62096-04 Micro Knife, 20 degree Slanted design, 1.3mm cutting edge each
62096-05 Micro-Chisel 0.5mm cutting width, sharp edge each
62096-06 Micro-Hook. Guarded type, anti-snag guard, 0.3mm. ID, 1mm OD including clasp each
62096-07 Micro Mirror. Polished stainless steel, 4.7mm diameter, 0.5mm stainless steel handle each
62096-08 Micro-Ruler. Precision etched stainless steel with 0.5mm handle. Available in Metric or English each

® Carbide Micro Cutting Tools

These unique micro cutting tools are made using the latest grinding and polishing technology producing the
highest quality tool on the market today. Tools are available in solid carbide with the following tip sizes: 0.5mm
(.020”), 0.25mm (0.010”) and 0.12mm (.005”) diameter. Tool Handles are inter-changeable in tool handle
MT1. Each of the tool tips and handle can be ordered separately or in sets. Standard sets come with hardwood
instrument cases and include the eight tool tips listed and one handle MT1.

Ordering:
TIP SIZES
Description 0.12mm 0.25mm 0.5mm 1mm Qty.
Micro-Needle 62094-01-12 62094-01-25 62094-01-50 62094-01-100 each
Micro-Graver, 3-sided 62094-02-12 62094-02-25 62094-02-50 62094-02-100 each
Micro-Chisel 62094-03-12 62094-03-25 62094-03-50 62094-03-100 each
Micro-Spade 62094-04-12 62094-04-25 62094-04-50 62094-04-100 each
Micro-Knife 20° 62094-08-12 62094-08-25 62094-08-50 62094-08-100 each
Micro-Knife 45° 62094-09-12 62094-09-25 62094-09-50 62094-09-100 each
Micro-Graver Oval 62094-13-12 62094-13-25 62094-13-50 62094-13-100 each
Micro-Scraper 62094-21-12 62094-21-25 62094-21-50 62094-21-100 each

® Tool Handle Mt-79

Stainless Steel Micro-Tool Handle,
Made from stainless steel, 120mm 62096-HD Instrument Handle, MT- 79 each
long, for use with above tools.

386 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec12_384-391_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 8:00 AM Page 387

Materials Science & Metrology SECTION 12

® Tools:
® Assorted Carbide Tool Sets ® Mini -Tool Set
Each set comes with a MT-1 Handle, ® 1. Mini Tool Set A
instrument case, and 8 tips listed above. 5 piece set includes scriber, chisel, knife, triangular scraper and oval
62095-12 Carbide Micro-Tool set graver - each razor sharp. Hexagonal anodized aluminum handles,
Set 0.12mm 140mm (5.5”) long. Hardened tool steel tips, 1.5mm (1⁄16”) diameter, are
62095-25 Carbide Micro-Tool set easily sharpened or pointed. Comes with a protective plastic case.
Set 0.25mm
62095-50 Carbide Micro-Tool set
Set 0.5mm
The following tip sizes .025mm (.001”) and
1.0mm (.040”) are available in a set only.
62095-02 Carbide Micro-Tool set
Set .025mm
62095-10 Carbide Micro-Tool set
Set 1.0mm
62097-10 Mini Tool Set A set
Note: The Carbide tool size 0.025mm is very fragile. The set contains only 7 tools (no tool #2)
62097-11 Replacement Scriber 3/pk
and these tools need to be stored only in the individual protection tubes – no storage box)
62097-12 Replacement Chisel 3/pk
62097-13
® Needle Probe Set 62097-14
Replacement Knife
Replacement Triangular Scraper
3/pk
3/pk
Set consists of one lightweight precision handle and four 62097-15 Replacement Oval Graver 3/pk
interchangeable tools. Can be used for manipulating micro samples,
scribing, spring assembly, and probing. The handle is finely balanced, ® 2. Mini Tool Set B
non-rolling gold anodized with split collet and a knurled lock nut. The Contains eight tool tips with
length is 120mm (4.7”). Precision forged and ground tools are integrated, color-coded handles
hardened and nickel plated tool steel with sharp tips. which are light-weight, non
rolling and well balanced. Overall
tool length is approximately
127mm (5”). Tip size is 0.8mm
(.030”). Tip material is hardened
tool steel, nickel plated.
Set contains: Straight
62130-00 Needle Probe Set set
62130-01 Replacement Probe #1 each Micro-Prober, 30° Micro-Prober,
62130-02 Replacement Probe #2 each 90° Micro-Prober, Micro-Chisel,
62130-03 Replacement Probe #3 each Micro-Knife, Micro-Graver, Micro-Diamond Scriber
62130-04 Replacement Probe #4 each and, Micro-Measuring Scale.
62130-HD Probe Handle each 62097-20 Mini Tool Set B set
® Miniature Measuring Scales
These unit measuring scales may be used directly under a microscope or ® 3. Mini Tool Set C
magnifier for quick measuring of small specimens, parts, grooves, slots, Consists of three different tools: Straight Scriber with sharp tip, Sharp
line widths, holes, chambers, etc. Precision fabricated from stainless Triangular Scraper, Bent Prober with sharp tip - all with integrated
steel, the scales are welded to bendable stainless steel shafts and hexagonal aluminum handles. Tip material is hardened steel, nickel
mounted in color coded, non-rolling handles. Each scale is individually plated. Tip size is 0.8mm by 25mm long. Overall length of tools is
packed in a plastic tube. Overall length of the scale is 83mm (31⁄4”), approximately 140mm (5.5”)
including handle.

1. Scale #1: Calibrated to 0.1mm, 5mm total measurement 62097-30 Minitool Set C set
62135-01 Mini Scale #1 each
2. Scale #2: Calibrated to 0.005”, 0.2 inch total measurement For Our Entire Selection of Micro Tweezers, Forceps
62135-02 Mini Scale #2 each and Tools, See Tweezer section, pages 813-819 UUUUU
3. Scale #3: Calibrated to 0.1mm, 10mm total measurement
62135-03 Mini Scale #3 each

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 387
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec12_384-391_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 8:00 AM Page 388

SECTION 12 Materials Science & Metrology

 Diamond Tip Scribers/Scribers  EMS Engraving Tool
Sturdy scribers are in wide use throughout the laboratory. It leaves a permanent Permanently be able to mark all of your important
marking on virtually any surface, including metal, glass, or plastic. Each Scriber tools and samples. The Engraver comes with a Battery
features a hexagonal aluminum pencil shaped body, mill finish, natural diamond Pack and is operated on two “AA” Batteries
tip and protective cap. Different styles are available to fit all of your needs.
Our EMS Engraver Engraves Test Tubes, Bottles, Racks,
Keys etc as well as anything made from glass, metal,
stone as well as bone . Engravings are permanent and
will not disappear in the presence of chemicals and
 A. Straight Head: solvents. The Engraver is 7" in Height (17.8cm)
Overall length 6”, Shank Length 1⁄8”, Handle 1⁄4” x 51⁄2”, 60° tip finish. We offer a Stand for the EMS Engraver that is made
70030 Straight Tip Scriber each from polypropylene and it measures (3½ x 33⁄8").
70031 Straight Tip Scriber 6/lot Cat. # Description Qty.
72096-01 EMS Engraver Kit
72096-02 EMS Engraver Tool Stand Kit

 The Glascribe® Pen

 B. Angled Head: The Glascribe® Pen, with retractable
Overall Length 61⁄2”, Shank 1⁄16” Dia. x 1⁄4” Long, Handle 1⁄8” x 6” Long, 75° tungsten carbide tip, lets you inscribe
tip finish. on glass, ceramics, and plastic. The
70032 Angle Tip Scriber each pen has a pocket clip, so it is always
70033 Angle Tip Scriber 6/lot handy when needed.

Cat. # Description Qty.

72151 Glascribe® Pen each

 Tungsten Point Lab Pen

 C. Retractable Scriber:
This is a high quality chrome pen that features appearance as well as Permanently mark Glass Slides and
utility. The diamond is mounted in a stainless steel tip and refills are all glass labware
available. The tip is finished at a 60˚ angle. These unique EMS pens have a sharp tungsten
70036 Retractable Scriber each carbide tip which is able to etch glass, ceramic,
70037 Retractable Scriber Refill each and even plastic The tip retracts for safe
storage and it measures 9.8mm in diameter
 High Precision Fine Diamond Scriber and the pen is 137mm long.
This diamond scriber is the ultimate scribing instrument offering the most Cat. # Description Qty.
precision for the most delicate applications. It is available in straight or 41148 Tungsten-Point Lab Pen each
bent configurations.

APPLICATIONS INCLUDE:  Rotary Diamond

Micro-Engraver Pen
 Fine scribing under the  Precision scribing and An amazing tool that may be used to
microscope - for silicon repairing - for thin film
mark samples, engrave tools,
wafers and glass coverslips circuits and microcircuits, etc.
indicate a sample area for
finding in the SEM, deburring
and so much more.
Easy to handle and control, this micro engraver is ideal for detailed
engraving on almost any surface--wood, metal, ceramic, glass and more!
The micro engraver features a contoured grip for comfort and control and a
These diamond mountings are 0.8mm diameter with a reduced shank precision-ground stainless steel bit with a diamond point tip. This diamond-
size of 0.5mm or 0.25mm diameter, which holds the diamond stylus. The tipped ballpoint micro engraver is also as small as a pen, so it easily fits in
natural diamond has a 60º included angle and a 0.12mm tip radius. The your pocket or purse for easy transport.
integrated 6.35mm anodized hexagonal (non-rolling) aluminum handle  Contoured grip for comfort and control
has a positive finger grip in the form of grooves for easy control and non-
 Pen-type design fits in a shirt pocket or purse and goes anywhere
slippage. Each diamond scriber is packaged in a protective plastic tube.
 Precision-ground stainless steel bit with diamond point tip
Cat. # Configuration and Shank Size  Requires two AAA batteries, included
62107-ST Straight Mounting, 0.5mm diameter Measures: 6¼“ Product Weight 1.86 lbs.
62107-BT Bent Mounting, 0.5mm diameter
62108-ST Straight Mounting, 0.25mm diameter Cat. # Description Qty.
62108-BT Bent Mounting, 0.25mm diameter 50465-15 Rotary Diamond Micro-Engraver Pen each

388 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec12_384-391_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 8:00 AM Page 389

Materials Science & Metrology SECTION 12

® High Precision Diamond Scribing Tools
A newly designed diamond scribing tool set containing eight precision natural diamond scribes in
various sizes and configurations. This set is perfect for precision work in microscopy.
The set consists of eight diamond tips, 3 mm in diameter and are mounted in interchangeable tool
cones and an MT-1 tool handle. The tool and handle are all housed in a hardwood instrument case.
Individual scribers can be purchased separately.

62105-S1 62105-S2 62105-SE 62105-HS

62105-B1 62105-B2 62105-BE 62105-HC

62105-S1 Straight tip, .02” (.50mm) dia. by . 06” (1.5mm) tip length each
62105-B1 Bent tip, .02” (.50mm) dia. by .60” (1.5mm) tip length each
62105-S2 Straight tip, .01” (.25mm) dia. by .06” (1.5mm) tip length each
62105-B2 Bent tip, .01” (.25mm) dia. by .06” (1.5mm) tip length each
62105-SE Straight extended tip, .02” (.5mm) dia. by .2”(5.0mm) tip length. Good for tight areas each
62105-BE Bent extended tip, .02” (.5mm) dia. by .2” (5.0mm) tip length. Good for hard to reach areas each
62105-HS Straight, heavy duty tip, .03” (.8mm) dia. by .12” (3.1mm) tip length each
62105-HC Bent, heavy duty tip, .03” (.8mm) dia. by .12” (3.1mm) tip length each
62090-00 MT-1 Tool Handle, 4.75” (112mm) long, gold anodized each
62105-00 High Precision Diamond Scribing Tools, (8 tools & handle) set

® Precision Pin Vise Handle and Diamond Stylus

This high precision pin vise handle is machined from the finest material, non-
rolling gold-anodized aluminum, which makes it lightweight and versatile. It
comes complete with a precision drawbar for positive collets chuck clamping.
It features an 8mm (0.31”) hexagonal barrel dimension by 100mm (4”) long
(overall length is 115mm fully assembled)and it has a knurled finger-grip for
positive precision control for handling and tool manipulation.
The vice is supplied with a standard collet chuck opening of 2mm (0.78”)
diameter and will hold a selection of our specially designed tools - and collets
adapter 0.8mm (0.003”) for diamond stylus chucking.

Cat. # Description
62140-00 Precision Pin Vise & Collets each
62140-50 Diamond Stylus, 0.5mm each
62140-25 Diamond Stylus, 0.25mm each 62140-02 62140-03 62140-04

Following are Diamond Scribing Tools, with a 0.80mm (0.003”) diameter

mounting shank, for use with above Precision Pin Vise and Collets:
62140-05 62140-06 62140-07
Cat. # Description and Configuration
62140-02 Bent tip scriber, 0.010” (0.25mm) Diameter. 1.5mm tip length each
62140-03 Straight extended tip scriber, 0.020” (0.50mm) diameter by 0.200”(5.0mm) tip length. This tool is a must for reaching into and in
between high density components. each
62140-04 Bent extender tip scriber, 0.020” (0.50mm)) diameter by 0.200” (5mm) tip length. Use for tight places each
62140-05 Straight tip scriber 0.020” (0.50mm) diameter by 0.60” (1.5mm) tip length. each
62140-06 Bent tip scriber, 0.020” (0.50mm) diameter by 0.60” (1.5mm) tip length each
62140-07 Straight tip scriber, 0.010” (0.25mm) by 0.60” (1.5mm) tip length each
62140-60 Set of 6 Diamond Scribing Tools and Pin Vise set

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 389
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec12_384-391_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 8:01 AM Page 390

SECTION 12 Materials Science & Metrology

® Tools:
For our Complete line of tools, See our Tool Section,
pages 756-852. >>>>>

® Micro Sieve Set

This micro-sieve set consists of
a stack of four interchangeable
screen-holding sections, a
catch pan, and a friction-fit
cover. The entire unit is molded
® Micro Ruler: Extended Reach from polypropylene. All of the
FEATURES: parts of the set are very easy to
T Precision etched, non-glare ruler made from surgical stainless take apart for changing the
steel, only 3 mm wide. The ruler is calibrated in 0.1 mm mesh insert or for cleaning.
graduations, 10 mm total range. Complete with the unit are
T Stainless steel handle 230 mm long. Balanced and angled for phosphor-bronzed mesh inserts
the ultimate in flexibility able to reach into areas which are in the following sizes: 25, 35, 45, 60, 80, 120, 170, and 230 mesh.
impossible for other measuring devices. The holding sections are 2” (51mm) IDx6” (152mm)H.
T Available with or without a stainless steel autoclave case. 50110-00 Micro Sieve Set set
Total weight of the ruler is 26 g.
Replacement Mesh Inserts
T Applications include microscopy, chemistry and anywhere
precise measurement in clean and very confined areas A set of 8 phosphor-bronzed screen inserts in the following sizes: 25,
are of critical importance. 35, 45, 60, 80, 120, 170, and 230 mesh.
Cat. # Description Pack 50111-00 Replacement Mesh Inserts 8/set
62136-ER Ext. Reach Micro Ruler only each
62136-ERC Ext. Reach Micro Ruler w/ Case each
Vernier Caliper, Dial Types See Tweezers and Tools
® Micro Mirror - Extended Reach section, page 829 UUUUU
Tweezers, pages 756-852. UUUUU
Wafer Tweezers, pages 770-771. UUUUU
Demagnitizer See Tweezers, Tools and Gadgets,
page 846. UUUUU
Caliper, Vernier See Tweezers, Tools and Gadgets,
It is of similar construction with the page 829. UUUUU
Micro-Ruler (above), but comes with a For the Handling of Wafers, Please refer to page 150
2.5x magnify Mirror - made from polished for our Pen-Vac and Vacuum Pickup System. UUUUU
stainless steel, 4.8 mm diameter. Overall length is 230mm
Tools for MicroSamples, Manipulation, Measurement,
Autoclavable Case is available as an option. & Crystallography, see pages 840-843. UUUUU
Cat # Description Pack
62136-M Extended Reach Mirror each
62136-MC Extended Mirror With Case each

® Adjustable Saw Frame

A Swiss made saw frame lightweight and perfectly balanced. Its
ergonomic wooden handle reduces fatigue and provides greater
dexterity. Patented blade-lock design eases blade insertion and
maintains perfect alignment which eliminates wobble and reduces blade
loss during use. It measures 21⁄4 (70mm) deep and accepts saw blades
up to 1.2mm diameter and 130mm long.
This Saw Frame may be used ideally with the Diamond Wire and Spiral
Saw Blades listed on page 302.
Cat. # Description Qty.
72009 Deluxe Saw Frame each
72009-10 Diamond Wire 10/pk

390 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec12_384-391_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 8:01 AM Page 391

Materials Science & Metrology SECTION 12

® Tools:
® Arkansas ® Precision Stainless
Sharpening Steel Tubing
Stones EMS’s new special precision stainless steel
These stones are natural tubing has been developed to be used as a
with close density oil-tones, support and connector ferrules for optical
and excellent qualities that fiber. Other applications include wire feeding,
make them the stone miniature sensor shielding, fluid mechanics,
unequaled for sharpening and miniature tool holding and fine
tools such as gravers, knives, etc. Comes in a cedar wood box and they instrument work.
are available in two types: translucent (extra fine); and hard (fine). Hole sizes are as small as 100μm (0.0039”) –
Catalog # Description 300:1 length to hole diameter ratio. Hole sizes
62082-00 Arkansas Sharpening Stone, Translucent, are available from 100μm to 1200μm.
Size 4" x 2"x1⁄2" (102 x 51 x12.7mm) each Standard outside diameter is 1.46mm
62082-10 Arkansas Sharpening Stone, Hard (Fine), (0.058”), standard length is 300mm (1.2”)
Size 6" x 2"x1⁄2" (152 x 51 x12.7mm) each
TOLERANCES:
® Diamond Sharpening Stone Outside Diameter: ± 0.02mm
This patented process of Hole Diameter: ± 0.01μm
heat treatment which bonds Length: ±0.1mm
the highest quality industrial
Eccentricity Inside to Outside Diameter, within
grade diamond particles in a
0.01μm Concentricity Funnel to Bore Diameter
stainless alloy to a precision
less than 0.02mm Funnel Angle is 45 degree.
matched metal substrate,
has been imitated, but has never come close to being duplicated. Our The following are available in Single Funnel (SF)
stone which is set on a walnut pedestal with a cover is available in 3 and Double Funnel (DF), 1/pk
grades: F- fine grit (600); M - medium grit (270), and C - coarse grit Ordering Information:
(180). Stone size is 2”x6” (51mmx152mm)
62082-50 Diamond Stone, Fine Grit each Cat. SF Cat. DF Bore Size Qty.
62082-51 Diamond Stone, Medium Grit each 62170-10 62171-10 100μm each
62170-13 62171-13 130μm each
® Optical Fiber Cleaving Tools 62170-14 62171-14 140μm each
62170-15 62171-15 150μm each
62082-52 Diamond Stone, Coarse Grit each 62170-16 62171-16 160μm each
62170-18 62171-18 180μm each
62170-20 62171-20 200μm each
62170-30 62171-30 300μm each
62170-40 62171-40 400μm each
62170-50 62171-50 500μm each
These precision hand held tools can be used for scoring and cleaving all
62170-60 62171-60 600μm each
types of optical fibers. 62170-70 62171-70 700μm each
® 1. Carbide Cleaver Tool 62170-80 62171-80 800μm each
Made from a solid carbide rod. It has two angled sides which intersects 62170-90 62171-90 900μm each
into a very sharp cutting edge of about 4mm (0.160”) in length. The third 62170-100 62171-100 1000μm each
angle is lapped on the very tip to prevent breakage. The carbide shank is 62170-110 62171-110 1100μm each
62170-120 62171-120 1200μm each
mounted into a non-rolling hexagon shaped anodized aluminum holder.
The carbide part is 2.0mm dia x 10.0mm long. Overall: 120mm long
® 2. Retractable Diamond Cleaver Tool
A ground and polished natural diamond which has a v90 degree
included angle with a relief angle of 30 degrees. The cleaver is retained
in a quality metal pen like casing with a pocket clasp. The diamond part Electron Microscopy Sciences offers a full range of
is 1.5mm wide x 3.0mm long. The overall length is 133mm. equipment used in materials preparation for a variety
® 3. Retractable Sapphire Cleaver Tool of technological fields. Electron microscopy,
Ground and polished natural sapphire wedge with a 60 degree included metallography, wafer lapping and polishing, failure
angle. The cleaver is retained in a quality metal pen like casing with analysis, crystal orientation, plasma processing, MEMS
pocket clasp. The sapphire part is 2.0mm wide x 3.0mm long. The and many other applications are facilitated by
overall length is 133mm our equipment. Please contact us or see our
62165-CC Carbide Cleaver Tool each comprehensive website, which includes our
62165-DC Diamond Cleaver Tool each complete line.
62165-SC Sapphire Cleaver Tool each

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 391
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec12_392-411_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 8:56 AM Page 392

SECTION 12 Materials Science & Metrology

INSTRUMENTATION
® Professional Manual Micro ® Micro-Mill®
Manipulator FX-117 Grinder
This three axis micro- For fast, high-speed
manipulator provides safe and grinding of small
efficient positioning of samples from 20 to
microtools. 50mm (3⁄4” to 2”). The
All three vernier readings are unit comes with a
graduated in 0.1mm stainless steel or hard-
increments. The X-axis, which faced blade which
holds the tool clamp with rotates at speeds up to
microtool, has an additional 12,000 rpm and will
fine movement with 0.001mm successfully grind
graduations. bauxite, bone, ceramics,
The FX117 employs rack and coal, Devorda’s alloy,
pinion drive, V-shaped guide ways and cross bearings, so movement is fertilizer, filter paper, fly
precise and repeatable. Contact parts are milled from hardened steel for ash, frozen tissue,
optimum performance and long life. Design employs in-line control glass, grain, kaolinites,
knobs clustered within a 8cm area in a single vertical plane resulting in leaves, limestone,
quick and precise hand manipulation. muscle tissue,
The stand , the FX117-01 has a dovetail adapter and mounting post. pharmaceuticals,
The optional adapter FX115-03 (Microtool holder) can also be used. pigment blends,
Specifications: plastics, rocks, roots, seeds, slags, soil, teeth, wood, etc. The grinding
Movements: X axis fine 10mm travel 0.01mm graduations chamber measures 21⁄8”dia.x1”deep (54x25mm). Its overall dimensions are
X axis 37mm travel 0.10mm graduations 51⁄2”x7”x11”(H) (14x18x28cm). It comes with a 6 FT. (1.8m) 3-wire cord
Y axis 20mm travel 0.10mm graduations and grounded plug. Power: 115V, 60Hz or 220V, 60Hz.
Z axis 25mm travel 0.10mm graduations
Weight: 1.8 lbs (6.1 lbs with stand) FEATURES:
Dimensions: H 140mm (220mm with stand) T The grinder operates only when the cover is latched and in
W 100mm (145mm with stand) place. This provides safety and prevents sample loss.
D 60mm (165mm with stand) T The temperature of the grinding chamber can be maintained by
62100-15 Micro Manipulator FX-117 w/Stand each means of built-in heat exchangers. 1⁄4” (6.4mm) tubing connec-
tions on the cover and housing accept tubes for circulating
water, methanol/dry ice liquid, or liquid nitrogen.
® Disc Punch T The cover, grinding assembly, and milling blade head are
The EMS 310 Disc Punch is designed to removable for easy cleaning.
prepare ductile metals and soft materials for T The aluminum housing has an epoxy finish and non-skid rubber
TEM without mechanical distortion. Its solid feet.
construction and high tolerance design allows T The control panel has an overload protection reset button and a
a maximum force to be used with difficult pilot light.
materials while maintaining specimen quality. T The 1/5 horsepower (150 watts) motor develops a torque of 30-
A specimen alignment tool is included which ounce-inches (2.2 Kg-cm) at 12,000 rpm.
guarantees maximum specimen yield and
precise specimen location. After the disc is punched it is automatically Ordering Information:
selected from the die and collected in an easily removable tray. Micro-Mill® 1, with stainless steel blade, 0-5 minutes electrical timer
FEATURES: with an ON position for continuous operation.
Micro-Mill® 2, with hard, stellate faced blade, with a momentary hold-
T Preparation of TEM samples without distortion down switch.
T Alignment fixture included for maximum yield and precise 50100-01 Micro-Mill® Grinder 1, 115 V each
specimen location 50100-02 Micro-Mill® Grinder 1, 220 V each
T Solid construction for long term use without loss of precision 50101-01 Micro-Mill® Grinder 2, 115 V each
T Dimensions: 8”(W) x 8”(H) x 2.5”(D); Weight: 5 lb. Disc size: 3.0mm 50101-02 Micro-Mill® Grinder 2, 220 V each
50104-01 Replacement Stainless Steel Blade each
50125-10 Disc Punch Set set
50104-04 Replacement Stellate-Faced Blade each
Replacement parts and products that are available for Disc Punch:
50125-50 Specimen Holder Base each
50125-51 Specimen Holder each
50125-52 Knurled Screw (to hold specimen
holder to holder base) each
50125-54 Specimen Tray each

392 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec12_392-411_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 8:56 AM Page 393

Materials Science & Metrology SECTION 12

INSTRUMENTATION
® Microdrilling Systems
® 1. The Model L Microdrilling Machine
The Model L machine represents a new approach to efficient, low cost precision microdrilling. The L
model employs standard spiral HSS micro-drills from 0.03mm to 0.50mm (0.0012” to 0.020”) and
solid carbide micro-drills from 0.10mm to 0.50mm (0.0039” to 0.020”) diameter (and larger). These
drills can be used for work on most metals and plastics.
The drill has a carbide faced interchangeable V-baring frame in which the drill is held. A precision set-
screw-type-pulley and an endless belt, together with the inclined drive motor design assure positive
return of the drill to the “up” position.
Employing the V-bearing principle, the drill acts as its own spindle but will run much truer than in other
holding devices such as collets or chucks. Micro-dial with a zero setting friction clutch provides
0.0075mm (0.0003”) incremental feed. A returnable in-feed plunger is gently pressed for each
increment set on the dial.
The Model L is available with optional equipment such as x-y positioning tables, vacuum chucks etc.
T Positioning Table, Model MD 025 travels 25mm and 50mm in x, y.
Supplied with 2 micrometers in mm or inches
T Vacuum chuck, Model MDC 040 assures positive holding
and accurate repeated placement of glass substrates by mean of 3 locating pins.
Specification:
Machine Housing and Base: Special alloy casting, table-balanced ground
Machine Column: 28.6mm dia (11⁄8”) x 279mm (11”) hardened & ground
Drive Motor: 24 VAC precision servo type
Speed Control: Variable 0 – 3500rpm, solid state (in machine base)
Power requirement: 115/230 VAC 45-400 Hz
Vee Bearing Mount: Two in-line vee-construction, frame with carbide bearing, interchangeable
Drill Advancement: Micro-dial and contact plunger, hand controlled
Drill In feed: Smallest increment 0.0075mm (0.0003”)
Total Drill Stroke: 5mm (0.197”)
Drive Belt: Special cast urethane, endless
Drill Drive Pulley: Drill drive pulley #2000-36
Overall Dimensions: 305mm x457mm x 339mm (12” x 18” x 13”)
Shipping Weight: 11 kg (25 lbs) domestic, 13.5 kg (30 lbs) foreign.
62088-L Model L Micro Drilling Machine each 62088-55 Vee-Bearing for L Model each
62088-50 X-Y Portioning Table, MD 025 each 62088-56 Drive Belt Replacement for L Model each
62088-54 Vacuum Chuck, MDC 040 each 62088-57 Drive Pulley for 1-254 Drill Bits each

® 2. Micro Drill Bits – Series 1-254

A newly introduced sub-micron Grade spiral HSS Micro Drills – contains 9.5% cobalt for excellent cutting and minimum
wear - designed for drilling very small holes with excellent chip removal properties, and for use with the Model L Drill Press
above. These Drill Bits are available in small sizes of 0.03mm (30μm = 0.0012”) diameter
up to 0.50mm (500μm = 0.020”) diameter, in increments of 0.01mm (10 μm = 0.004”)
Specifications: 1mm (0.040”) diameter shanks
25mm (1.0”) overall length
+/- 0.0005 (0.0002”) shank & tip diameter tolerances
All catalog numbers are for each.
Cat. # Dia, mm/” Cat. # Dia, mm/” Cat. # Dia, mm/” Cat. # Dia, mm/” Cat. # Dia, mm/”
62089-06 0.06/0.0024 62089-36 0.36/0.0144 62089-22 0.22/0.0088 62089-05 0.05/0.0020 62089-35 0.35/0.0140
62089-09 0.09/0.0036 62089-39 0.39/0.0156 62089-25 0.25/0.0100 62089-08 0.08/0.0032 62089-38 0.38/0.0152
62089-12 0.12/0.0048 62089-42 0.42/0.0168 62089-28 0.28/0.0112 62089-11 0.11/0.0044 62089-41 0.41/0.0164
62089-15 0.15/0.0060 62089-45 0.45/0.0180 62089-31 0.31/0.0124 62089-14 0.14/0.0056 62089-44 0.44/0.0176
62089-18 0.18/0.0072 62089-48 0.48/0.0192 62089-34 0.34/0.0136 62089-17 0.17/0.0068 62089-47 0.47/0.0188
62089-21 0.21/0.0084 62089-07 0.07/0.0028 62089-37 0.37/0.0148 62089-20 0.20/0.0080 62089-50 0.50/0.0200
62089-24 0.24/0.0096 62089-10 0.10/0.0040 62089-40 0.40/0.0160 62089-23 0.23/0.0092
62089-27 0.27/0.0108 62089-13 0.11/0.0052 62089-43 0.43/0.0172 62089-26 0.26/0.0104
62089-30 0.30/0.0120 62089-16 0.16/0.0064 62089-46 0.46/0.0184 62089-29 0.29/0.0116
62089-33 0.33/0.0132 62089-19 0.19/0.0076 62089-49 0.49/0.0196 62089-32 0.32/0.0128

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 393
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec12_392-411_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 8:56 AM Page 394

SECTION 12 Materials Science & Metrology

INSTRUMENTATION
® MultiLap™ Fish Otolith Polishing ® Micropol Model Mc 2
Tool - Model 195 Specimen Grinder/Polisher
In many materials preparation MicroPol™ is compact, versatile,
laboratories the need for high electrically controlled, precise mechanical
specimen throughput and precision specimen grinder/polisher, designed for
made specimen preparation tools is a planar grinding, thinning and polishing of
difficult bottleneck to correct. The specimen in the fields of nanotechnology,
Model 195 MultiLap™ is designed to semiconductors, and materials science.
grind and polish multiple specimens The parameters of polishing (speed, load
with precise control over each time, etc) can be matched according to
individual specimen. The fixture the properties of the specimen. High
incorporates up to 6 separate pistons which are used for holding the quality samples are prepared with
specimen during preparation and controlling the amount of material to minimal efforts by the operator.
be removed. The piston assemblies allow for specimens of up to 1”
diameter to be polished in 10-micron increments. The specimen FEATURES
mounts also provide a means for viewing the specimen in transmitted T Rugged, corrosion proof construction
light, enhancing detection of features that require a light transparent T Variable speed control for precision polishing
specimen. Wear resistant Delrin plastic legs provide support and are T Quick change bayonet mount bowls
very gentle on many types of abrasive films and media. Overall, the T Maximum sample size is about 10-15mm in diameter
Model 195 is a versatile and precise instrument for performing any T Timer for automatic operation
precision lapping processes and is an excellent addition to any T 2 precision TEM sample holders included
specimen preparation lab.
T Extremely light load for fragile TEM samples
FEATURES: Application
T Tungsten carbide base resists wear and maintains sample planarity. While the MicroPol™ MC 2 is well suited for metallographic polishing, it
T Wide base ensures stability thereby minimizing sample damage has been specially designed for precision TEM polishing applications. Two
and edge rounding. specially designed TEM holders are provided with each unit that makes it
T Wear ring is replaceable, on some fixtures, which extends the ideal for the preparation of both planar and dimpled samples, respectively.
life of the fixture. Operation
T Can be mounted in the Model 920 Lapping & Polishing Machine MicroPol polishes by the action of an arm that moves the specimen
for semi-automatic processing. along a semi-random geometric pattern gently pressing it to the bottom
T Micrometer depth control allows precise control over sample of a bowl containing suitable abrasive material. The abrasive material
thickness. can be grinding paper or suspensions of polishing compound deposited
T Precisely crafted stainless steel construction ensures long life on polishing cloth.
and high precision. Specifications
Mains voltage:............................................................100 – 240 VAC
Model 195 - 6 Position MultiLap™ Fixture includes: Temperature range: ..........................................................+5 – 35°C
1 x 6 Position MultiLap Base, (#50168-01) Frequency: ......................................................................50 – 60 Hz
6 x Piston Assembly, (#50168-02) Power consumption:..................................................85 W maximum
6 x Sample Holder Ring Mounts (#50168-03) Moving speed of the arm:....................................30 – 60 scans/min,
6 x Delrin Feet (#50168-04) ....................................................................electronically adjustable
Timing: ....................................1s – 60 min, electronically adjustable
50168-95 6-Position MultiLap Fixture, Model 195 each Load: ..............................................0 – 5 N, mechanically adjustable
Moved mass:............................................................150 g maximum
® Spare Parts and Accessories Dimensions:......................................................251 x 220 x 181 mm
Catalog Number Description Pack
50168-02 Piston Assembly each
® Consumables Necessary for Operation of
50168-10 6-Position Alignment Fixture each
50168-03 Sample Holder Ring Mounts each MicroPol™ Polisher:
50168-04 Delrin Foot for Model 195 each T Abrasive papers (in about 300-800 grit sizes),
T Polishing cloth (e.g. PELLON type),
T Abrasive diamond paste or abrasive suspensions
(diamond, Al2O3, SiC) in grain sizes of 1 and 10 mm for
polishing,
T Transparent thermoplastic wax solidifying below 135°C for
fixing the specimen to the steel stub of specimen holder
(e.g. mounting wax, dental wax, or similar).

50174-MC2 Micro Pol™ MC 2 Grinder/Polisher Main Unit each

394 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec12_392-411_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 8:57 AM Page 395

Materials Science & Metrology SECTION 12

INSTRUMENTATION
® Micropol Model Mc 2 Specimen Grinder/Polisher (continued)
Locking of the bowl on the bayonet lock.
(Locking direction indicated by arrow)

Loading piece knob

shaft
tightening adjusting
screw screw
polishing arm
housing

bowl scale for polishing

thickness control
Loading piece

interface part Section showing the sample holder rod and the correct
position of the sample
docking
hole

Specimen holder “C” Specimen holder “E”

Accessories shipped with the equipment:

Specimen Holders MC-TDS
MC-PBC Polishing Bowl "C" MC-LPC Loading piece
(including steel rods) Thickness Measuring Unit

Flat plastic bowl: plastic

disc coated with Cu foil
on both sides; 4 pcs

MC-SHC Specimen holder “C”

MC-PBE Polishing Bowl "E"

Spherical bowls for dimpling, 1 pc each;

MC-SHE Specimen holder “E”

Starting Kit of Consumables

Plastic Lining Empty Bowl Contains all the consumables necessary for operation of MicroPol™
Polisher:
• Abrasive papers small discs cut in the size of the polishing bowls
(in 320 and 800 grit sizes) – 2 pcs each,
• Polishing cloth (PELLON type) small disc cut in the size of the polishing
bowls – 2 pcs,
• Samples of abrasive diamond pastes in grain sizes of 1 and 10m for
polishing – 1 sample each.
Cu Lining Al Lining • Sample piece of thermoplastic wax

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 395
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec12_392-411_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 8:57 AM Page 396

SECTION 12 Materials Science & Metrology

INSTRUMENTATION
® Spark Cutter – Model EE4 (Electroerosion)
Please Note: This version replaces the old version (Model TLSC2 Spark Cutter, #55100-SC2) which is no longer available.

The EE 4 Spark Cutter (Electroerosion Unit) is designed for drilling holes, slots and discs of virtually any profile
in hard meals. The cutting speed will, of course, vary depending on the sample size and material. As an
example, a hole can be drilled in titanium sheet of 0.3 mm thick in about 20 – 60 minutes depending on the
surface quality required.
Application
Because of the basic operating principle of the Spark Cutter, it is advised that the device can onlybe used for
high-conductivity materials (with the exception of aluminum). The work piece holder accessory can hold 5
mm wide metal bands. Work piece of different size require modification of the holder.
Operation
Operation of the device is based on an electrochemical process. The drilling tool and work-piece are connected to the power supply: the positive pole to the
work-piece, and the drill through an electromagnetic coil to the negative pole. By switching on the power supply, electric current flows through the circuit
consisting of the work-piece, the electromagnetic coil and the drill. When the electric current exceeds a certain limit, the magnetic field of the coil lifts up the
drill and the current is cut off. The drill is then forced back to the work-piece by a spring in the head unit, and the cycle starts again. The drilling is effected
by the electrochemical process taking place at the moment that the electric circuit is stopped.
Specifications System Configuration
Power Supply Unit Power Supply Unit
Power input ....................................100 – 120 VAC, 50/60 Hz 1 A, or
Head Unit including drilling tool in diameter of 3 mm
........................................................220 – 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 0.5A
Power output ............................approx. 1.5 – 20 VDC, 2 A (average) Option
Dimensions ......................................................100 x 170 x 235 mm Drill tool of 1 mm in diameter.
Head Unit
Power input ..............................approx. 1.5 – 20 VDC, 2 A(average) Cat. # Description Qty
Dimensions ......................................................140 x 260 x 290 mm 55110-EE4 Spark Cutter, Model EE 4 each
55110-H4 Drill Tool for 1mm Dia each

® MicroSaw – Model MS 3
A Circular Diamond Saw for Precision Cutting under Stereo Microscope
Please Note: This version replaces the old version (MS 2, #55150-MS2) which is no longer available.

Application
MicroSaw is a small, versatile diamond wheel saw, to be mounted under a standard laboratory microscope.
The precision offered by such an optical alignment makes MicroSaw ideal for cutting and sectioning required
during the TEM specimen preparation. The compact design and easy operation, MicroSaw allows the user cut
almost any solid material with precisely and reproducibly prior to thinning for TEM. Thin ceramic,
semiconductor material, hard metals can be further sectioned with 0.01mm accuracy!
Operation
The Model MS 3 MicroSaw is driven by an electric motor through a helical transmission. The 12 V DC is provided by the power supply subunit. The speed at
which the wheel turns is continuously adjustable. Adjustment of the specimen position, arm contact point, arm tension and the down-stop control
mechanism is possible. Two adjustment screws at the bottom of the instrument allow positioning of the stand, and leveling the MicroSaw underneath of the
stereomicroscopy for precision sectioning.
Specifications System Configuration
Power input............................................................................12 VDC Switching power supply 100 – 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz
Power consumption ..................................................................15 W
MIcroSaw Model MS 3 comes with 1 diamond wheel (#55150-10)
Dimensions ........................................................260 x 150 x 80 mm
Diamond wheel............................type AC32 63/50, 50mm diameter, Cat. # Description Qty
0.15mm thick 55150-MS3 MicroSaw, Model MS 3 each
Max. sample size ........................................................~10 x 10 mm 55150-10 Replacement diamond wheel each
Min. slice thickness ....................................................~100 microns

396 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec12_392-411_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 8:57 AM Page 397

Materials Science & Metrology SECTION 12

INSTRUMENTATION
® MicroHeat – Model MH 2 ® Ti Disc Embedding Ring for
Thermoplastic gluing under stereo microscope TEM Sample Preparation
The most difficult step of cross-sectional thinning is the mechanical
T Heat stabilized T Small T Ideal for thermoplastic gluing
preparation of the sample, i.e. cutting a cross section and then
Application
embedding it into an appropriately designed ring.
MicroHeat is a heat-
stabilizes, combined with We know offer a convenient, specially designed embedding ring for
power supply, designed cross-sectional samples, shown schematically in Figure 1.
for embedding samples
and for thermoplastic
gluing under stereooptical
microscope. The
MicroHeat was developed
to make the embedding
procedure easier.
Because of MicroHeat is
small dimensions, it is Using this ring, embedding cross sections is greatly simplified, since the
can be easily placed on the specimen table of the sterooptical samples do not need to be glued together prior to embedding. In order
microscope, and with the help of the microscope, the gluing faults can to fix the sample(s) in the ring it is deformed mechanically by an
be avoided, this result is very important in case of sample requiring appropriate tool at the two points marked by the arrows. This
bubble-free sticking (e.g. cross section samples for EM). deformation will both hold the sample in the ring and press both sample
With all of these features, MicroHeat is useful in the fields of material pieces together before gluing.
research, geology, semiconductors and optical industry for investigation Ti disc is also offered for embedding bulk samples of brittle material for
of multilayer system, semiconductors and high Tc superconductors, plan-view TEM investigations. The rings come in 5 sizes-0.6, 0.8 1.0,
diamond, composite materials, ceramics, glasses, rocks and minerals. 1.2, 1.3 mm.
Operation 55110-TIR Ti Disc Embedding Rings 5/pk
Model MH 2 is relatively simple to operate. The temperature of the hot
plate can be adjusted continuously in a wide range and is kept constant ® XTEM TEM Sample Preparation Kit
by the built-in electronic. A control circuit maintains the temperature of
EMS offers this kit specifically for the preparation of cross-sectional TEM
the heated surface within ±5°C. The temperature of the heated surface
(XTEM) specimens.
usually reaches the preset temperature within 1 – 3 minutes. However,
it is recommended that to use the hot plate at least 5 minutes after the For the study of interfaces (such as semiconductor devices, thin film layers,
unit was on. etc.) by transmission electron microscope (TEM) it is critical to use TEM
samples of ultimate quality (perfectly embedded, mechanically pretreated
Specifications
and ion milled ones). EMS offers a complete technology and product range
Power input..................................................................12V DC, 1.2 A for preparing cross-sectional samples of these quality including specially
Power consumption ..................................................................14 W designed mechanical sample preparation tools and embedding ring. The
Temperature range ..........................................................50 - 180°C
EMS-XTEMprep Preparation Kit offers all the tools and materials that help to
Dimensions ........................................................100 x 100 x 30 mm
prepare high-quality cross-sectional TEM specimens:
System Configuration THE KIT INCLUDES:
Main power supply 100 – 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz T Microsaw sectioning tool T Special purpose mechanical
MicroHeat unit. T Micropol grinder and polisher tools (HSS) for embedding
Cat. # Description Qty T Microheat embedding tool T LEIT-C conductive carbon
55110-MH2 MicroHeat, Model MH 2 each T Embedding rings (“Ti disc”) – cement
5 of each size T Thermoplastic transparent glue
T Ion beam resistant glue T Diamond paste
® HSS Tool Kit
The mechanical sample preparation prior to thinning requires custom Ordering Information:
made mechanical hand tools. Containing six handy, reliable pieces, this 50110-XTEM XTEM Preparation Kit kit
kit has been designed on the basis of practical experience of many Each Item May be ordered separately as well:
users. Some of the tools are suitable for adjusting the sample pieces 55150-MS3 MicroSaw MS3 each
into the Ti discs, others for removing the excess glue and cutting, or 55110-MH2 MicroHeat MH2 each
50174-MC2 MicroPol MC2 each
adjusting the seat plate of the sample holder.
55110-TIR TI Embedding Rings 5/pk
55110-HSS Tool Kit each 55110-HSS Mechanical Tool Kit kit
55110-AT1 Ion Beam Resistant Glue each
12667 Leit C Plast Adhesive each
55110-MW Transparent Glut each
50370-40 Diamond Paste 1 Micron each

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 397
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec12_392-411_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 8:57 AM Page 398

SECTION 12 Materials Science & Metrology

INSTRUMENTATION
® Rotary Disc Cutter ® UltraSonic Cutter -
– Model 360 Model 380
Model 360 Rotary Disc Cutter is a The UltraCut™ 380 Ultrasonic Cutter is a
precision instrument, which is specialized cutting instrument which utilizes
designed to precisely align and cut abrasive powders and high speed, vibratory
discs or drill holes from a wide range motion to cut discs, holes, cylinder, squares
of materials using either a tube and others shapes from hard, brittle materials.
shaped brass tool with an abrasive The high speed motion is developed using an
slurry or a diamond tipped tool. The ultrasonic transducer oscillating at 26kH.
Model 360’s rotating tool is Boron carbide slurry is applied to the sample
continually lowered into the specimen and the tool is lowered onto the specimen.
using an easily adjustable The particles under the vibrating tool impact
counterbalancing weight. The most the sample and erode the material in the shape of the tool.
common application for the instrument is to cut 2.3mm and 3.0mm discs for
TEM, although discs as small as 1.25mm and as large as 50mm have been cut. For complete information on this model, see our
interactive web site @ www.emsdiasum.com
The model 360 includes everything necessary to operate the unit.

Model 36001 Alignment Microscope

If very precise alignment is required, it is recommended to use the Model 36001 Alignment Microscope. Three locating pins on the
Alignment Microscope correspond to the three locating pins on the sample stage of the SoniCut™ 380 to ensure precise positioning.

Ordering:
Ordering:
55180-380 UltraSonic Cutter – Model 380 each
55170-360 Rotary Disc Cutter – Model 360 each
Parts that are included with the Model 380
Parts that are included with the Model 360 55172-01 Alignment Microscope, Model 36001 each
55180-12 Metric Tool Kit (9 sizes: 2 – 10mm) each
55172-94 Metric Tool Kit (9 sizes: 2.3 – 9mm), #36094 each
55180-1 Specimen Mounting Plate each
55172-95 English Tool Kit (6 sizes:1⁄8-7⁄16”), #36095 each
55180-2 Magnetic Plate Assembly each
55170-1 Magnetic Base each
55180-3 Magnetic Slurry Ring each
55170-2 Magnetic Plate each
55180-4 3
⁄8” Open End Box Wrench each
55170-3 Magnetic Slurry Ring each
55180-5 Spare Lamp each
55170-4 Specimen Mounting Plate, magnetic each
55180-6 0.5A SB Fuse (spare) for 220 volt each
55170-5 1” Work Table each
55180-7 1A SB Fuse (spare) for 115 volt each
55170-6 2” Work Table each
55180-8 Copper Flat Washer (10 spares) each
55170-7 Plastic Splash Guard each
55180-9 Syringe each
55170-8 Bottle (x2) each
55180-10 23μm Boron Carbide Powder, 25g each
55170-9 Graphite Mounting Plate 0.87” x 0.87” (x4) each
55180-11 14μm Boron Carbide Powder, 25g each
55170-10 Graphite Mounting Plate 1.87” x 1.87” (x4) each
55170-11 Aluminum Mounting Plate 1.5” x 1.0” (x2) each Accessories (option)
55170-12 Aluminum Mounting Plate 2.0” x 2.0” (x2) each 55182-01 Cross Sectioning Kit - Includes all accessories each
55170-13 Hex Wrench Set each needed for creating XTEM stacks for dimpling
55170-14 14μ Silicon Carbide Powder, 50 g each and ion milling
55170-15 14μ Boron Carbide Powder, 25 g each Consumables
16550-100 Glycerin, 100ml each 55183-1 2.0mm ID Cutting Tool, Stainless Steel each
55170-16 Wrench, Open End, 0.5” Opening each 55183-2 2.3mm ID Cutting Tool, Stainless Steel each
55170-17 Wrench, Open End, 0.75” Opening each 55183-3 3.0mm ID Cutting Tool, Stainless Steel each
Accessories 55183-4 4.0mm ID Cutting Tool, Stainless Steel each
55183-5 5.0mm ID Cutting Tool, Stainless Steel each
55172-01 Microscope Alignment Assembly, Model 36001
55183-6 6.0mm ID Cutting Tool, Stainless Steel each
Consumables 55183-8 8.0mm ID Cutting Tool, Stainless Steel each
Metric Tools English Tool Diamond Tools 55183-9 9.0mm ID Cutting Tool, Stainless Steel each
Cat. # Metric ID* Cat. #English ID* Cat. # Diamond ID* Pkg. 55183-10 10.0mm ID Cutting Tool, Stainless Steel each
55173-03 3.0mm 55174-01 1
⁄8” 55175-02 2.3mm each 55183-? Special Size up to 20mm ID Cutting Tool each
55173-04 4.0mm 55174-02 3
⁄16” 55175-03 3.0mm each 55183-50 2mm x 3mm Cutting Tool Stainless Steel each
55173-05 5.0mm 55174-03 1
⁄4” *OD is 2mm larger than ID each 55183-51 4mm x 5mm Cutting Tool Stainless Steel each
55173-06 6.0mm 55174-04 5
⁄16” each 55183-XX Special size up to 10x10mm Square Cutting Tool, each
55173-07 7.0mm 55174-05 3
⁄8” each Stainless Steel
55173-08 8.0mm 55174-06 7
⁄16” each 55183-55 Specimen Mount each
55173-09 9.0mm *OD is ⁄ ” larger than ID
1
16
each 55183-56 Magnet Mounting Plate Assembly each
55173-10 10.0mm each 55183-57 Lamp each
55173-15 15.0mm each 55183-58 0.5A SB Fuse (220 volt unit) each
55173-20 20.0mm each 55183-59 1A SB Fuse (115 volt unit) each
55173-25 25.0mm each 55183-61C Copper Flat Washer for use between tool/horn each
55173-30 30.0mm each 55183-61 Syringe each
*OD is 1mm larger than ID

398 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec12_392-411_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 7/9/14 12:40 PM Page 399

Materials Science & Metrology SECTION 12

INSTRUMENTATION
® Single Ordering Information
Vertical Jet ® Model 550DE – Electrolytic Jet Thinning
Instrument
Electropolisher
55190-550DE Electrolytic Jet Thinning– Model 550DE each
– Model 550D
Parts included with Model 550DE:
The model 550D single
Vertical Jet Electropolisher is Cat. # Description Pkg.
55192-02 Head Assembly, Electrolytic, Model 55002 each
designed to perform 55190-1 Electronic Power Supply each
dislocation free thinning of 55190-2 Jet Nozzle, Stainless Steel, 1mm hole each
materials for subsequent analysis in a Transmission Electron Microscope. 55190-3 Diaphragm Holder Assembly each
This extremely versatile instrument can be used to thin materials and 55190-4 Diaphragms, 0.0015” thick for 3mm Samples (x25) each
alloys electrolytically with corrosive electrolytes; or to thin non-metals and 55190-5 Splash Shield Assembly, with Magnifier each
55190-6 3mm Stainless Steel Pedestal Assembly each
semiconductors such as gallium or arsenide, chemically, using nitric 55190-7 Pyrex Jar, 6” diameter (reservoir for electrolyte) each
hydrofluoric or bromide-methanol solutions. A new non-acid electrolyte 55190-8 Nalgene Tub (for cooling with dry ice) each
has been developed to thin such materials as YBa2Cu3Ox high Tc 55190-9 Specimen Screen (used when not using diaphragm) each
superconductors, gold and other traditionally difficult materials. Its high 55190-10 Allen Wrench Set each
sensitivity is capable of routinely detecting perforations less than 10μm in
® Model 550DC – Chemical Jet Thinning Instrument
diameter and its smooth polishing action yields large usable thin areas.
The model 550DC includes everything necessary to operate.
For complete information on this model, see our interactive web site @
55190-550DC Chemical Jet Thinning– Model 550DC each
www.emsdiasum.com
Parts that are included with this Model 550DC
Accessories 55192-03 Head Assembly, Electrolytic, Model 55003 each
Model 55001 Automatic Timer and Rinser (optional) 55190-1 Electronic Power Supply each
The Model 55001 consists of a reservoir that mounts on top of the Model 55190-52 PVC Pedestal Assembly each
55190-53 PVC Jet Nozzle, 1.5mm Hole each
550D head assembly and an electronics box that can be placed on top of 55190-5 Splash Shield Assembly, with Magnifier each
the Model 550D electronics. The Model 55001 offers 3 basic functions: 55190-56 Mylar Discs for holding Sample with Wax (x100) each
It measures elapsed time in minutes and seconds using an LED digital 55190-57 6” Dia Poly Propylene Jar (Reservoir for Acid) each
55190-58 Polyethylene Cover for 6” Jar each
display and stops automatically when the system triggers off.
Accessories
A predetermined amount of time can be set to automatically shut off the
55192-01 Automatic Timer and Riser, Model 55001 each
system. This is particularly useful for thinning to a specific depth in a sample.
55192-02 Electrolytic Thinning Head Assembly, Model 55002 each
The rinsing system can be used in either automatic or manual mode. In 55192-03 Chemical Thinning Head Assembly, Model 55003 each
automatic mode, the sample will be rinsed with water or alcohol immediately 55192-96 Electrolytic Conversion Kit (to Convert a Chemical each
after the system triggers off. The manual mode can be used if additional Thinning System to Electrolytic), Model 55096
55192-97 Chemical Conversion Kit (to Convert an Electrolytic each
rinsing is desired. Thinning System to Chemical), Model 55097
Model 55095 2.3 mm Electrolytic Conversion Kit (optional) 55192-11 Jet Nozzle, Stainless Steel, 1.0mm Hole each
55192-12 Jet Nozzle, Stainless Steel, 1.5mm Hole each
This kit is used to convert the Model 550D chemical unit into an electrolytic 55192-13 Jet Nozzle, Stainless Steel, 3.0mm Hole each
unit using 2.3mm specimens. Conversion time is less than 30 minutes. 55192-21 Jet Nozzle, PVC, 1.0mm Hole each
Model 55096 3.0mm Electrolytic Conversion Kit (optional) 55192-22 Jet Nozzle, PVC, 1.5mm Hole each
55192-23 Jet Nozzle, PVC, 3.0mm Hole each
This kit is used to convert the Model 550D chemical unit into an electrolytic 55192-32 PVC Holding Cap, 2.3mm Diameter Hole each
unit using 3.0mm specimens. Conversion time is less than 30 minutes. 55192-33 PVC Holding Cap, 3.0mm Diameter Hole each
55192-42 Pedestal Assembly, Stainless Steel, 2.3mm each
Model 55097 Chemical Conversion Kit (optional) (for use #55192-32, Holding Cap)
This kit is used to convert the Model 550D electrolytic unit into a chemical 55192-43 Pedestal Assembly, Stainless Steel, 3.0mm each
unit. Conversion time is less than 30 minutes. (for use #33192-33, Holding Cap)
55192-52 Pedestal Assembly, Stainless Steel w/Pt Tip, 2.3mm each
Specifications: (for use #55192-32, Holding Cap)
Dimensions 55192-53 Pedestal Assembly, Stainless Steel w/Pt Tip, 3.0mm each
Electronics: ......................................................10" W x 6" H x 7" D (for use #33192-33, Holding Cap)
55192-63 Pedestal Assembly, PVC, 3.0mm each
Head Assembly: ................................................7" W x 11" H x 6" D 55192-65 Pedestal Assembly, PVC, Large Sample Holder each
Timer: ................................................................7" W x 4" H x 6" D (Holding sample up to 16mm diameter)
Rinser: ................................................................3" W x 4" H x 3" D 55192-70 Pedestal Assembly, PTFE each
Net Weight
Consumables
Electronics: ..........................................................................12 Lbs.
Head Assembly: ......................................................................3 Lbs. 55193-2 Diaphragms, 0.0015” thick for 2.3mm Samples(x25) each
Timer: ....................................................................................2 Lbs. 55193-3 Diaphragms, 0.0015” thick for 3.0mm samples (x25) each
55193-4 Mylar Discs for Holding Sample with Wax, (x100) each
Rinser: ......................................................................................1 Lb. 55193-5 PVC Plates for Holding Sample with Wax (used on each
Power Supply Output: ............................................300V DC, 150Ma #55192-65 Pedestal)
Electrical Input: ..............................................95-120 VAC 50/60 Hz 55193-6 ‘O’ Ring Replacement Kit each
....................................................................200-240 VAC 50/60 Hz

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 399
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec12_392-411_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 8:57 AM Page 400

SECTION 12 Materials Science & Metrology

INSTRUMENTATION
® Low Speed Diamond Wheel Saw – Ordering
Model 650 55200-650 Low Speed Diamond Wheel Saw – Model 650 each
Parts included with the Model 650:
55202-01 Model 65001-Single Axis Goniometer each
(includes sample mount plate #55200-11)
55202-03 Double Clamp Holder, Model 65003 each
55200-2 Diamond Wheel (4” Diameter) each
55200-3 Abrasive Wheel (Aluminum Oxide, 4” Diameter) each
55200-4 Abrasive Wheel (Silicone Carbide, 3” Diameter) each
50378-01 Water Soluble Coolant, 1 qt each
55200-6 Silicon Carbide Dressing Stick each
55210-ST Mounting Wax Sample each
55200-8 Cutting Weight, 200g each
55200-9 Cutting Weight, 100g (mounted on unit) each
55200-10 Allen Wrench Set, 1/16 – 3/16 each
55200-11 Specimen Mounting Plate Kit #1 each
55200-12 Plastic Splash Guard each
55200-13 2.40” Support Collars (x 2) each
55200-14 1.87” Support Collars (x 2) each
55200-15 1.37” Support Collars ( x 2) each
55200-16 ‘O’ Ring, 1.484 ID x 1.762 OD x .139 thick (x2) each
55200-17 Spacer, wheel, .75” (mounted on unit) each
55200-18 Lock, Work Table (mounted on unit) each
55200-19 Lock, Blade Holder (mounted on unit) each
The Model 650 Low Speed Diamond Wheel Saw is a compact,
multipurpose, precision saw designed to cut a wide variety of materials ® Model 650HC Low Speed Diamond Wheel Saw
with minimal substrate damage. Its low speed makes it possible to cut For Use in Hot Cell
fragile materials that would otherwise fracture and soft materials that
would load the diamond wheel on a higher speed saw. A variety of Ordering
sample holders provides a means for mounting any shape sample while 55200-HC Low Speed Diamond Wheel Saw – Model 650HC each
the goniometer adaptability simplifies cutting oriented crystals. (Includes everything necessary to operate)

For complete information on this model, see our interactive web site @ Parts included with Model 650HC
www.emsdiasum.com 55202-44 Gear Drive Belt, Model 65044 – Option each
(Does not include covers to provide better access to instrument; use gear and chain drives to
Special Features replace O-ring drive belts; includes additional changes to simplify remote operation)
Accessories
T Belt drive system eliminates gear breakage which is common
55202-04 Petrographic Sample Holder, Model 65004 each
with less reliable fiber gear driven designs. 50180-05 2-Axis Goniometer, Model 65005 each
T Coolant reservoir is lowered and easily removed by opening an 55202-11 x-Ray Track Mount for Model 65005, Model 65011 each
access door located on the front panel. 55202-06 Vise Holder, Model 65006 each
T Both coarse and fine sample position adjustments allow rapid 55202-07 Right Angle Holder, Model 65007 each
and accurate sample positioning. 55202-08 Ball Joint Holder, Model 65008 each
55202-12 Dressing Stick Holder, Model 65012 each
T Polyethylene coolant reservoir enables the use of both water
soluble and oil based coolants. Accessories (continued)
T Automatic termination of the cutting process is controlled by an 55202-14 Sample Rotation System, Model 65014 each
electromechanical downstop which minimizes supervision. 55202-16 Ball Joint Work Arm Model 65016 each
55202-17 Bone Chuck Holder, Model 65017 each
T Cutting arm pivots on a set of precision bearings rather than on
(for holding irregular parts)
the micrometer shaft which ensures accurate and repeatable
sample positioning. 55202-18 Right Angle Bone Chuck Holder, Model 65018 each
T Multiple diamond wheels can be used to gang slice materials up (for holding irregular shape parts)
to 2" in length. 55202-19 Adjustable Right Angle Bone Chuck Holder, each
T Utilizes a high torque 1/15 HP DC motor to provide sufficient Model 65019 (for holding irregular parts)
55202-40 Alignment Microscope, Model 65040 each
power for difficult materials. 55202-99 Starter Kit, Model 65099, Kit includes: each
T The 3 standard sample holders allow mounting of virtually any One 3”x.006” & one 4” x.12” diamond wheel, one
shape sample. 4”x.015” Al2O3 wheel, one 3”x.010” SiC wheel, 1.87”
T 2-Axis Goniometer can be transferred from an x-ray track for & 1.37” support collars, 1qt of coolant, 4 dressing
cutting precisely oriented crystals. sticks, 2 spare drive belts & mounting wax
55203-01 Support Table (table saw attachment) each
T It's small size and simple operation make it ideal for glove box
or hot cell adaption.

400 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec12_392-411_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 9:59 AM Page 401

Materials Science & Metrology SECTION 12

INSTRUMENTATION
All Cutting Weights, see page 423 (50155-01 - 50155-10) UUUUU
® The Model 660
Low Speed ® Diamond Band Saw - Model 865
Diamond Constructed from a high impact
Wheel Saw polymer, the lightweight Model 865
The Model 660 is designed to Diamond Band Saw is designed for
be a multipurpose precision medium precision, with efficient
saw using diamond wheels up cutting of hard and brittle materials.
to 7" in diameter. It's low However, the saw is rugged enough
speed allows it to cut all to cut through materials such as soft
materials traditionally cut with a metals and polymers as well.
high speed diamond wheel while also cutting very fragile and soft Samples can be safely hand fed into
materials with minimal subsurface damage. A variety of sample holders the blade with or without the
provides a means to mount any shape sample while goniometer standard specimen guide. The
adaptability simplifies the cutting of orienting crystals. diamond plated steel core blades are
designed to last long under normal
Special Features conditions. Easy blade access and
T An internal optic sensor and belt drive system eliminate broken replacement make occasional saw maintenance extremely simple.
gears and sample damage by terminating the cutting process Coolant is contained in a reservoir at the base of the saw.
when wheel rotation is impeded.
T Coolant reservoir is lowered and easily removed by opening an FEATURES:
access door located on the front panel. Both coarse and fine T Small, lab bench size.
sample position adjustments allow rapid and accurate sample T Quick adjustable blade guide keeps the blade tracking properly.
positioning.
T Rugged, corrosion-proof construction.
T Polyethylene coolant reservoir enables the use of both water sol-
uble and oil based coolants. T Powerful motor cuts fast, won’t bog down under load.
T Automatic termination of the cutting process is controlled by an T Minimum coolant splash for clean cutting.
electromechanical downstop which minimizes supervision. T Easy access coolant tray for fast and easy clean up.
T Cutting arm pivots on a set of precision bearings rather than on T Large table for cutting bulk samples.
the micrometer shaft which ensures accurate and repeatable T Sample guide for straight, flat surfaces.
sample positioning. T Economically priced.
T Multiple diamond wheels can be used to gang slice materials up
to 2" in length. Specifications:
T Sturdy aluminum casting provides durability in the lab and stabil- Dimension: 12” (W) x 14”(D) x 18”(H)
ity during specimen preparation Weight: 15 lbs
For complete information on this model, see our interactive website @ Maximum Sample Dia: 3.25” (82.55mm)
www.emsdiasum.com Cutting Table Dimensions: 12”(W) x 13”(D)
Standard Blade Thickness: 0.022”
50180-60 Model 660 Diamond Wheel Saw each
Electrical: 115VAC 50/60Hz
50180-01 Single Axis Goniometer Model 66001 each
50180-04 Petrographic Sample Holder Model 66004 each Ordering
50180-05 2-Axis Goniometer, Model 65005 each
Model 865 (115VAC only) includes:
50180-06 Vise Holder Model 66006 each
50180-07 Right Angle Holder 66007 each
1 x Diamond Band Saw Blade (#50182-01)
50180-08 Ball Joint Holder 66008 each 3 x Blade Guide (#50182-08)
50180-11 Model 66011 Track Mount (for 3.625"-4"H) each
50182-65 Model 865 Diamond Band Saw each
50180-12 Dressing Stick Holder #66012 each
50180-13 Reservoir Adapter Model 66103 each
50181-01 Arbor Bearing each ® Spare Parts and accessories
50181-02 Motor each Description Cat.# Qty.
50181-03 Drive Belt(1 Required) each Diamond Band Saw Blade 50182-01 each
50181-04 Drive Belt(2 Required) each Top Friction Belt 50182-05 each
50181-05 Drive Belt each Bottom Friction Belt 50182-06 each
50181-06 Arbor spacer (1.00") each Blade Guide 50182-08 each
50181-07 Arbor spacer (0.125") each Lower Adjustment Screw 50182-10 each
50181-08 Arbor spacer (0.5") each Locking Nuts 50182-11 each
50181-09 Arbor spacer (1.5") each Plastic Arm 50182-14 each
50181-10 Support Collars (2.4") each Lower Shaft Assembly 50182-15 each
50181-11 Support Collars (1.87") each Lower Drive Wheel 50182-16 each
50181-12 Support Collars (1.37") each Upper Drive Wheel 50182-17 each
50181-13 Arbor End Screw each Lower Drive Wheel Bushing Assembly 50182-18 each
50181-14 Mounting Block Kit each Water Coolant, 1qt (dilute 25:1 w/ water) 50378-01 each
50181-20 Coolant Resevoir each SiC Dressing Stick (for blade dressing) 50379-01 each

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 401
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec12_392-411_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 9:59 AM Page 402

SECTION 12 Materials Science & Metrology

INSTRUMENTATION
® UltraSlice Precision Slicing Machine
Advanced slicing for most component sizes & shapes

Ultimate Versatility –
the ULTRASLICE platform provides:
T Work-holding and machine variables to enable most cutting jobs.
T Long-cuts and dicing modes also possible
T Motorized table provides unattended operation
T Provides ‘end of the line’ capability for manufacturers / labs
already with larger production units
T Intuitive and easy to use
Developed to facilitate precision sectioning applications in Industry and
Research, ULTRASLICE Precision Saw provides the user with a unique
combination of features:
Versatile Sample Holding Vise for ULTRASLICE, Cat No. 3575.1
The system may be readily converted to handle sample cutting A vise attachment that mounts onto the
requirements of most shapes, sizes, and applications – e.g. transverse ULTRASLICE saw by means of a standard set of
and longitudinal slicing, right through to dicing. dowels and two mounting screws.
Cutting Accuracy The Vise Attachment holds a large variety of
The use of precision lead screws on all sample feed mechanisms mean sample types and sizes.
that cuts can be positioned accurately. The inbuilt ‘Z-spindle’ provides
the ability to set the blade height ‘on the fly’. Lamp, Cat No. 1301.A
Reproducible Results A Convenient incandescent lamp for illuminating
All-metal construction and an accurately the work area.
calibrated and damped spindle movement • 60W Max bulb
assures low transmission of vibration to the • Illuminates Work area
workpiece. This gives reproducibility of • Gooseneck for control of illumination area
performance for cutting materials of widely
varying mechanical properties; from the
hardest steels and non-metallics down to
delicate crystal materials.
Specifications
Power Requirements......................................110 - 240V, 50 / 60 Hz
Versatile Controls Spindle Speed ....................................Fully variable up to 6,000 rpm
ULTRASLICE has the power and range of blade
Spindle Size ....................................................0.5 inches (12.7 mm)
speeds to achieve higher cutting rates when Standard Stages..................Motorized Y, lead screw-fed X (indexing)
necessary. ..............................................................and Z-spindle (blade height)
The system features an integral coolant Cutting Modes ................................................Preset Constant Speed
recirculation system which extends blade life Footprint ....25 inches (wide) x 18 inches (high) x 25 inches (length)
and clears cutting debris to improve cutting Unit Weight ................................................................110 lbs (45 kg)
rate and surface quality. Ordering Information
ULTRASLICE can handle sample cutting requirements of all shapes, Cat. No. Description Qty
sizes and applications. Samples may be presented to the blade with 8560.3 ULTRASLICE Diamond Saw - 110V-240V each
table attachments (X, Y, W, and Z direction accessories). System package includes: Saw Base Unit, 6000rpm max spindle speed (with
The system accepts a wide range of O.D. diamond and abrasive blades tachometer, ammeter), 3582.2 X Stage for traveling table, Y axis motorized
traveling table (with automatic cut-out), Z-spindle Stage, Recirculating Coolant
for standard cutting, and is readily adaptable to accept
System & Splash Guard, One 4" diamond blade (7412.1), Pair 2" dia. flanges
(cheek plates)
6004.1 Theta Stage each
3541.8 Table Mounting Plate,
with Quick Release interface each
3575.1 Vise (for samples up to 2" dia.) each
1301.5 Lamp each
Standard Blades for a wide range of sample types:
7412.1 4 inch o.d., 0.5 inch arbor, 0.012” inches
(over diamond) thickness –
premium metalbond blade each
7312.1 3 inch o.d., 0.5 inch arbor, 0.012” inches
(over diamond) thickness –
premium metalbond blade each

402 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec12_392-411_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 9:59 AM Page 403

Materials Science & Metrology SECTION 12

INSTRUMENTATION
® UltraSlice Compact
Versatile Precision Saw for small workspaces
& small budgets
For the user who wants all the functionality and unique control of cutting
parameters offered by a high end saw, while working on a tight budget
or with limited lab space, ULTRASLICE Compact provides the answer.
The system features an integral coolant recirculation system which
extends blade life and clears cutting debris to improve cutting rate and
surface quality.
Work is fed into the blade by several different methods, by use of table
attachments.
A wide range of workholders can be held by the saw. This method
allows the workpiece to be mounted rapidly and conveniently without the
need for mounting waxes or cements.
Vise Compact
A fully splashguard enclosure is provided which may be opened to allow
attach- Table with
front panel access or be completely swung away from the cutting area. Substrate
ment,
For Industrial and research operations, ULTRASLICE Compact saw offers Cat No. holder
an unparalleled combination of cut quality, accuracy, versatility, and 3575.2
affordability.
Product Highlights
Versatility Lamp, Cat No. 1301.A
The system may be readily converted to handle sample cutting A Convenient incandescent lamp for illuminating
requirements of most shapes, sizes and applications. the work area.
Cutting Accuracy • 60W Max bulb
The use of precision lead screws on all sample feeds means cuts may • Illuminates Work area
be positioned accurately • Gooseneck for control of illumination area
Long Cuts & Dicing
The large work-table andl layout of the machine allows for long cuts to
be achieved - perfect for failure analysis, and QA applications such as
Automatic Cut-out Switch Assembly
longitudinal sectioning of components. Sectioned workpieces may be an
Cat No. 3632.1
end in themselves, or the starting point for lapping and polishing
Allows for unatteded machine operation
Most Blade Types
The system accepts a wide range of O.D. diamond and abrasive blades
for standard cutting, and is readily adaptable to accept special 'dicing'
blades for the smallest kerf.

Ordering Information
Cat. No. Description Qty
8520.3 ULTRASLICE Compact each
System package includes: Saw Base Unit (2000 max rpm spindle speed),
3582.C X Stage for traveling table, Y axis motorized traveling table,
Recirculating Coolant System & Splash Guard, One 4" diamond blade
(7412.1), Pair 2" dia. flanges (cheek plates), 100-240V Operation.
3518.4 Substrate Holder -- table mount each
3575.2 Vise -- table mount each
1301.5 Lamp each
3632.1 Automatic Cut-out Switch and Assembly,
for unattended operation each

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 403
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec12_392-411_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 9:59 AM Page 404

SECTION 12 Materials Science & Metrology

INSTRUMENTATION

® UltraSlice Precision Macrotome ® UltraTrim

Precise sectioning of Diamond Saw
hard tissue & other A refreshing idea for
materials sample preparation
ULTRASLICE Macrotome ULTRATRIM is a low cost,
precision diamond saw, is entry-level, precision sawing
a quiet, direct drive machine for producing rapid cross-
design for smooth, sections for microscopy and QC checks.
chatter free slicing system
The saw includes a straightforward coolant reservoir, the saw blade dips
for important and fragile
into the reservoir for effective cooling and lubrication of the sawing
industrial, biological and
process. An intelligently designed
related specimens.
manually fed cutting table, makes slicing
The system suits Fish & fast and easy. The saw has a fully
Game applications, such variable spindle speed and a small
as Otolith and Statolith footprint.
samples. Specimens can be oriented to ensure a flat surface is parallel
to the desired section plane such as sagittal, frontal or transverse. Product Highlights
T Accepts 4 inch o.d. blades, with
MACROTOME can also be used in many other industrial applications
standard 0.5 inch spindle
where the best price/perfomance ratio is required.
T Quiet, powerful motor with speed
The wheel (spindle) rotation is variable speed, control
to allow for optimized cut quality .An easy T Manual Table-fed cutting
access coolant reservoir, allows for quick for fast, convenient sam-
efficient coolant changes. ple prep
Product Highlights T Convenient reservoir for
blade coolant and lubri-
T Suits Low Budgets cation
T Z-Spindle T Economical
T Manual Crank Table Feed, with motor option
T For otoliths and related specimens
T Fish & Game

Ordering Information Ordering Information

Cat. No. Description Qty Cat. No. Description Qty
8550.1 ULTRASLICE Macrotome Saw each 8505.1 ULTRATRIM Saw with 0.5 inch arbor spindle,
8555.1 Table Autofeed each 0.25 hp motor, integral coolant reservoir,
3541.8 Table Mounting Plate, manual table feed, one 4" o.d. blade,
with Quick Release interface each 110V operation only each
3575.1 Vise (for samples up to 2" dia.) each 8505.2 ULTRATRIM Saw with 0.5 inch arbor spindle,
1301.5 Lamp each 0.25 hp motor, integral coolant reservoir,
Standard Blades for a wide range of sample types: manual table feed, one 4" o.d. blade,
7412.1 4 inch o.d., 0.5 inch arbor, 0.012” inches 220 - 240V operation each
(over diamond) thickness – 7412-1 Spare 4” diameter blade, 0.012” thick each
premium metalbond blade each 7312-1 Spare 3” diameter blade, 0.012” thick each
7312.1 3 inch o.d., 0.5 inch arbor, 0.012” inches
(over diamond) thickness –
premium metalbond blade each

404 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec12_392-411_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 9:59 AM Page 405

Materials Science & Metrology SECTION 12

INSTRUMENTATION
® Wire Saw – Model 810
The Model 810 – Wire Saw offers the gentlest mechanical method for cutting virtually any material using either a diamond
impregnated wire blade or a plain wire plate with abrasive slurry. In addition to traditional mechanical cutting, the saw can also be
used as a string saw to cut water soluble crystals. It is most useful for cutting fragile crystals, substrates with delicate layers or any
material that would be damaged when using diamond wheel saw. Very brittle materials will cut the fastest, but even soft materials
can be cut since there is not the problem of loading the blade that is inherent with diamond or abrasive wheels. The Wire Saw has
sample holders available to hold virtually any shape sample including a goniometer to simplify the cutting of oriented crystals.
For complete information on this model, see our interactive web site @ www.emsdiasum.com

Special Features
T Self contained recirculating system requires only a few cc's of slurry Ordering:
which makes it economical to use diamond slurries and minimizes
clean up when cutting toxic materials. 55210-810 Wire Saw – Model 810 each
T Wire tension gauge simplifies the process of selecting the proper ten- Parts included with the Model 810
sion for each diameter wire. 55202-01 Model 65001-Single Axis Goniometer each
T Easy to replace continuous loop wire blade. 55202-03 Double Clamp Holder, Model 65003 each
T Micrometer cross-feed mechanism provides precise sample position- 55210-2 Aluminum Mounting Plate (x2) each
55210-3 Aluminum Mounting Plate (x2) each
ing.
55210-4 Graphite Mounting Plate (x4) each
T Automatic termination of the cutting process is controlled by an elec- 55210-5 Graphite Mounting Plate (x4) each
tromechanical downstop which minimizes supervision. 55210-51 Mounting Wax Sample Kit each
T All sample holders can be rotated 360° and are interchangeable with 55210-6 Work Arm Assembly each
the Model 650 Low Speed Diamond Wheel Saw. 55210-8 Micrometer Head, 25mm Travel each
55210-9 Micrometer Adapter, metric each
T 2-Axis Goniometer can be transferred directly from an x-ray or optical 55210-90 Bottles with Closing Spout (x2) each
track for cutting oriented crystals. 55213-10 Stainless Steel Wire Blades, 0.005” Dia (10/pk) each
T Compact size and simple operation makes it ideal for use in glove 55214-10 Stainless Steel Wire Blades, 0.010” Dia (10/pk) each
boxes, fume hoods and hot cells. 55216-05 Diamond Impregnated Wire Blades, 0.010” (5/pk) each
50260-14 14μm Silicon Carbide Powder, 50g each
T Integrated recirculating system makes it ideal for cutting water solu-
50510-14 14μm Boron Carbide Powder, 25g each
ble crystals. 16550-100 Glycerin, 100ml each
T Counterbalanced arm allows for fine adjustments in cutting pressures. 55210-17 Drip Glue each
55210-18 Funnel each
55202-01 55202-03 55210-19 Drip Pan each
Accessories
55202-04 Petrographic Sample Holder, Model 65004 each
50180-05 2-Axis Goniometer, Model 65005 each
55202-11 x-Ray Track Mount for Model 65005, Model 65011 each
55202-06 Vise Holder, Model 65006 each
55202-07 Right Angle Holder, Model 65007 each
55202-17 Bone Chuck Holder, Model 65017 each
(for holding irregular parts)
55202-04 55202-06 55202-18 Right Angle Bone Chuck Holder, Model 65018 each
(for holding irregular shape parts)
55202-19 Adjustable Right Angle Bone Chuck Holder, each
Model 65019 (for holding irregular parts)
Consumables
55213-10 0.005” Dia, Stainless Steel Wire Blades, 10/pk each
55213-50 0.005” Dia, Stainless Steel Wire Blades, 50/pk each
55213-100 0.005” Dia, Stainless Steel Wire Blades, 100/pk each
55214-10 0.010” Dia, Stainless Steel Wire Blade, 10/pk each
55214-50 0.010” Dia, Stainless Steel Wire Blades, 50/pk each
55202-07
55214-100 0.010” Dia, Stainless Steel Wire Blades, 100/pk each
55215-10 0.015” Dia, Stainless Stee Wire Blades, 10/pk each
55215-50 0.015” Dia, Stainless Steel Wire Blades, 50/pk each
55215-100 0.015” Dia, Stainless Steel Wire Blades, 100/pk each
55216-5 0.010” Dia, Diamond Wire Blades, 5/pk each
55216-25 0.010” Dia, Diamond Wire Blades, 25/pk each
55215-100 0.010” Dia, Diamond Wire Blades, 100/pk each
55217-5 0.015” Dia, Diamond Wire Blades, 5/pk each
55202-17
55217-25 0.015” Dia, Diamond Wire Blades, 25/pk each
55217-100 0.015” Dia, Diamond Wire Blades, 100/pk each

55202-11

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 405
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec12_392-411_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 10:00 AM Page 406

SECTION 12 Materials Science & Metrology

INSTRUMENTATION
® Wire Saw – Model 850
The Wire Saw 850 offers the gentlest mechanical method for cutting
virtually any material using either a diamond impregnated wire blades or a
plain wire blade with abrasive slurry. In addition to traditional mechanical
cutting, the saw can also be used as a string saw to cut water soluble
crystals. It is most useful for cutting fragile crystals, substrate with delicate
layers of any materials that would be damaged when using diamond wheel
saw. Very brittle materials will cut the fastest, but even soft materials can
be cut since there is not the problem of loading the blade that is inherent
with diamond or abrasive wheels. The Wire Saw has sample holders
available to hold virtually any shape sample including a goniomewter to
simplify the cutting of oriented crystals
Specifications
Operation
Dimensions (850 only): ..............................28" W x 18" H x 9" D
When used as an Abrasive Slurry Wire Saw the Model 850 offers the Dimensions (850 with reservoir): ..............28" W x 18" H x 14" D
most gentle mechanical method for cutting a material. A sample is Dimensions (pump only): ............................11" W x 5" H x 10" D
mounted to a sample holder and attached to a work table on the base of Net Weight (Model 850): ..................................................19 Lbs.
the saw. An appropriate load is applied by adjusting the counterbalancing Net Weight (Model 850 220V): ..........................................24 Lbs.
weight and the mechanical downstop is set. The sample is then positioned Net Weight (Model 85030): ..............................................17 Lbs.
in any starting position relative to the wire blade and then a micrometer is Wire Speed: ..................................................................1200 SFM
used for precise sample positioning. With the wire rotating, the arm is Wire Types/Diameters
gently lowered until the wire blade touches the sample. Abrasive slurry is Stainless Steel: .............................................005”, .010”, & .015”
applied by hand from a drip bottle or automatically with the Model 85030 Diamond: ...................................................................010” & .015”
Abrasive Recirculating System. The cutting is accomplished by directing Max Sample Diameters: ............................................................3”
the abrasive slurry to the point of contact between the moving wire blade Motor: ..................................................................1/25 HP AC/DC
and the sample. The excess slurry will drain off the contoured base of the Cross Feed Range (max): ....2” total (1” coarse + 1” micrometer)
Micrometer Feed: ............................0 - 1.000”, .001 increments
saw into a reservoir. Cutting will continue until the mechanical downstop is
................................................or 0 - 25mm, 0.01 mm increments
reached. Electrical Input: ..........................................90-120 VAC 50/60 Hz
When used as a Diamond Wire Saw the Model 850 uses a diamond ..................................................................200-240 VAC 50/60 Hz
impregnated wire blade and a water coolant in place of the abrasive slurry. Ordering
Diamond wire cutting is used for cutting hard materials or when
55220-850 Wire Saw – Model 850 each
contamination from an abrasive slurry is undesirable.
Parts included with the Model 850 Wire Saw
When used as a string saw the Model 850 can cut water soluble crystals
55222-15 Work Table, Model 85015 (includes 1” & 2” work each
such as sodium chloride, by having a water soaked wick rub against a tables, mounting blocks, graphite plates,
standard wire blade. The water is carried on the wire blade to the sample splash cover)
and cuts by dissolving its way through the crystal. 55222-22 Metric Cross Feed Stage, Model 85022M (An English each
micrometer can be substituted)
Special Features 55222-50 Abrasive Slurry Recirculating System, Model 85050 each
T Variable speed abrasive slurry pump and reservoir with mixing (Includes slurry pump, slurry container & slurry mixer)
motor keeps abrasive in suspension and ensures that fresh 55213-10 Stainless Steel Wire Blades, 0.005”, 10/pk each
abrasive is constantly applied to the cutting area. 55214-10 Stainless Steel Wire Blades, 0.010”, 10/pk each
55216-05 Diamond Impregnated Wire Blades, 0.01”, 5/pk each
T Easy to replace continuous loop wire blade. 55210-51 Mounting Wax Sample Kit each
T Micrometer cross-feed mechanism provides precise sample 55220-10 Plastic Bottles, 125ml (x2) each
positioning. 50260-14S 14μm Silicon Carbide Powder, 250g each
50510-14 14μm Boron Carbide Powder, 125g each
T 2 or 3-Axis Goniometers can be transferred directly from an x-
16550 Glycerin, 2x450ml each
ray or optical track for cutting oriented crystals. 55220-11 Hex Wrench Set each
T Counterbalanced arm allows for fine adjustments in cutting Accessories
pressures.
55222-40 Alignment Microscope, Model 85040 each
T Optional microscope provides a capability for precise sample 55222-14 Vise Sample Holder Worktable, Model 85014 each
alignment. 55222-16 Indexing Sample Holder Workable, Model 85016 each
50176-60 3-Axis Goniometer, Model 260 each
For complete information on this model, see our interactive web site @ 50176-50 2-Axis Goniometer, Model 250 each
www.emsdiasum.com 55222-09 Mounting System for Model 250 Goniometer, each
(includes: Model 85011 Goniometer mount, Model
85013 Worktable, and Splash Guard)
50176-51 Model 25002, x-Ray Track Mount for Model 250 each
50176-52 Model 25005, x-Ray Track Mount for Model 250 each
55222-21 Cross-Feed, Model 85021 each
55222-24 Angular Goniometer Mount, Model 85024 each

406 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec12_392-411_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 10:00 AM Page 407

Materials Science & Metrology SECTION 12

INSTRUMENTATION
® Dimpler – Model D 500i
The Model D500i Dimpler has become an indispensable tool for TEM specimen preparation. The
dimpling technique, which is applicable to a myriad of material types, yields a higher quality
specimen with a broader, near electron transparent area which reduces ion milling times. The
Model D500i automates the dimpling technique so that the most demanding specimen can be
dimpled to < 10 microns routinely and repeatedly. Real time measurement of tool height,
specimen thickness, and tool run out allow the user to precisely control the dimpling process. With
the proper tooling and parameter adjustment, the dimpling technique with the D500i can be
completed with ease.
For complete information on this model, see our interactive web site @ www.emsdiasum.com

Specifications Ordering:
Tolerances 50170-500i Dimpler – Model D500i each
Z Offset: Accuracy: ..................................1 micron Parts included with the Model D500i
Range: ..............................2000 microns 50170-01 Quick Release Platen Assembly each
Z Termination Accuracy: Tools 1i/3i: ......................< +/- 1 micron 50170-03 Slurry Ring each
Tools 2i/4i: ....................< +/- 2 microns 50170-04 MEP Centering Stand (for use with magnetic base) each
Tool Force: Range: ..............................1 - 200 grams 50170-05 Standard Specimen Platen Assembly each
........................................1 gram steps 50170-06 Sapphire Flat (x2), size 3⁄4" Dia. x 0.53mm each
Balance: Sensitivity: ..................................1 gram 50170-07 Specimen Mounting Jig Assembly each
Range: ....................................50 grams 50170-08 Tool 1i Flatting each
Tool Speed: ......................................100 - 600 RPM 50170-09 Tool 2iM Flat Polishing each
50170-10 Tool 2iT Flat Polishing each
Specimen Platen Speed: ..................................................10 RPM
50170-11 Tool 3i Dimpling each
Tool Shaft: ......................................0.5 micron TIR 50170-12 Tool 4iM Dimple Polishing each
Tools: Tools 1i/2i: ....................+/- 1 micron TIR 50170-13 Tool 4iT Dimpling Polishing each
Tools 3i/4i: ....................+/- 2 micron TIR 50170-14 3μm Diamond Suspension, 2 oz each
Platen Surface: ..................................< 0.5 micron TIR 50170-15 1μm Diamond Suspension – Poly, 2 oz each
Dimensions: Length: ......................................68.6 cm 50170-16 Lapping Vehicle, 4 oz each
Width: ........................................35.6 cm 50419-20 Mounting Wax, QuickStick135 each
Height: ..........................................33 cm 50170-17 Specimen Vise (for X-sectional prep with PTFE jaws) each
Weight: ..........................................32 kg 50170-18 Shim Control Lapping Fixture each
50170-19 Knob Thumb Screw each
Electrical: ....................................120 VAC / 60 Hz
50170-20 Allen Wrench Set (1/16 – 3/16) each
......................................240 VAC / 60 Hz
Accessories
50172-01 Standard Specimen Platen Assembly each
50172-02 Quick Release Platen Assembly each
(used with one of four bases listed below)
50172-03 Fixed Base (for standard tools) each
50172-04 Magnetic Base (for standard tool) each
50172-05 Fixed Base for Large Area Tools each
50172-06 Magnetic Base for Large Area Tools each
50172-07 MEP Centering Stand (for use w/magnetic base) each
50172-08 MicroSaw – includes diamond cutting wheel and each
support collar assembly
Consumables
50170-06 Sapphire Flat each
50170-08 Tool 1i Flat each
50170-09 Tool 2iM Flat Polishing each
50170-10 Tool 2iT Flat Polishing each
50170-11 Tool 3i Dimpling each
50170-12 Tool 4iM Dimple Polishing each
50170-13 Tool 4iT Dimple Polishing each
50173-08 Tool 3i Dimpling Cooper each
50173-09 Tool 1iD - 15μm Diamond Flatting each
50173-10 Tool 1iD - 9μm Diamond Flatting each
50173-11 Tool 1iD - 6μm Diamond Flatting each
50173-12 Tool 1iD - 3μm Diamond Flatting each
50173-13 Tool 3iD - 3μm Diamond Flatting each
50173-14 Tool 3iD - 1μm Diamond Flatting each
50173-15 Tool 3iD – 0.25μm Diamond Flatting each
Place this item in the same place with Tri-Pod Polisher 50115-series

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 407
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec12_392-411_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 10:00 AM Page 408

SECTION 12 Materials Science & Metrology

INSTRUMENTATION
® Model 590 Tripod Polisher-TEM/SEM
Sample Preparation
A Tripod Polisher was designed by scientists at IBM, which is used to
prepare accurately micro sizes of TEM and SEM samples. For TEM
samples, the Tripod Polisher has been used successfully to limit ion milling
times to less than 15 minutes, and in some cases, has eliminated the
need for ion milling. It can be used to prepare both plan-view and cross-
sections from a variety of sample materials, such as ceramics, composites,
metals and, geological specimens.
ADVANTAGES:
T Limited ion milling require- T The same sample can be
ments reduce preferential studied with both SEM and
thinning, radiation damage, TEM.
and heating of the sample. T Reduces sample preparation.
T No strong chemicals are used T Samples can be prepared for
to prepare the specimen. TEM without ion milling.
® Tripod Polisher® Accessories:
The Tripod Polisher® Base (#50116-05): holds the micrometer and
has two captive screws that hold the L-Brackets or the Parallel Polishing
Mount in position when polishing the samples.
The Precision Locking Micrometers (#50116-10): have special
larger diameter locking rings for easy locking and are graduated in one
50115-series
micron increments with 13mm travel. Non-coating Micrometers also
available, but not recommended. The Microscope Stand (#50116-55): is used to hold Model 590
The Delrin Feet (#50116-15): are applied to the tip of each Tripod Polisher(r) with sample facing up for viewing under a microscope
micrometer and are designed to protect the micrometer as well as the or serve to protect the sample.
lapping from damage when polishing TEM samples The Heater Block (#50116-50): is designed to hold any of the L-
The Plain L-Brackets (#50116-20): Can be used in place of the Brackets while they are being heated on a hot plate prior to mounting
other ‘L’ bracket to polish the edge of the samples to the area of sample melted wax. This provides a slow, uniform temperature
interest prior to polishing the wedge. gradient, which minimizes thermal shock.
The Screw Clamp L-Bracket (#50116-25): can be used with the The Pyrex Insert for Wedge Polishing (#50116-60): is used with
Pyrex Insert for Wedge Polishing (#50116-60), the SEM Stub (#50116- the Screw Clamp and Slotted L-Bracket for mounting sample for the
65) or the Wedge Polishing Mount (#50116-61). It can be used for TEM
polishing the edge of the sample to the area of interest for SEM The Wedge Polishing Mount (#50116-61): includes a Wedge
evaluation or for preparation to do the final wedge polishing for TEM. Polishing Clamp (#50116-62) and 5 of Pyrex Wedge Polishing Rod
The Slotted L-Bracket (#50116-30): is used in exactly the same way (#50116-63). This holder is used for TEM Wedge Polishing and provides
as the Screw Clamp L-Bracket. The difference is the method of a small sample mounting area allowing for maximum adjustment range of
clamping. With the Screw Clamp L-Bracket, the Pyrex Insert, SEM Stub the sample.
is held with two setscrews. With the Slotted L-Bracket they are held The Pyrex Wedge Polishing Rod (#50116-63): is a replacement part
with a form fix clamp that is tightened with a single screw. The Inserts used with the model #50116-35 Wedge Polishing Mount.
are held tightly with a good thermal contact for mounting samples when
The Pyrex Wedge Polishing Stub (#50116-64): is mounted to a
the L-Bracket is heated on a hot plate. When examining the mounted
Pyrex Insert (#50116-60) to produce a similar effect as is accomplished
sample under a microscope it can be lit from the bottom as well as the
with the model #50116-61.
side.
The SEM Stub (#50116-65): is used for mounting samples for SEM and
X-Section L-Bracket (#50116-31): is used to mechanically clamp a
can be transferred directly to the SEM or to the special holder for use in mil.
sample (such as an IC Package) on the side of an L-Bracket for optimal
SEM cross sectioning. The Glass Leveling Slide (#50116-70): is used for leveling the 3
micrometer’s feet or 2 of the feet and the sample.
The Parallel Polishing Mount (#50116-35): is mounted in the center
of the Tripod Polisher(r) Base in place of the L-Bracket and is used for The Tool Kit: contains 2 hex drivers (#50116-71 & #50116-72) and
parallel polishing by adjusting the 3 micrometer feet. torque handle for use with the Model 590 Tripod Polisher® in addition to
wrench (#50116-73) for micrometer repair.
The Planarizing Tool (#50116-40): is used to lap the three delrin feet
to be coplanar in preparation for preparing samples with Parallel
Polishing Mount.

408 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec12_392-411_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 10:00 AM Page 409

Materials Science & Metrology SECTION 12

INSTRUMENTATION
Ordering Information:
Parts Included with various Wedge Tripod Polisher®+

Part Description Catalog Model Model Model 590TS

Number 590TEM 590SEM (SEM+TEM) 50116-05 50116-15
Tripod Polisher Base 50116-05 Included Included Included
Precision Micrometer 50116-10 Included x 3 Included x 2 Included x 3 50116-20 50116-25
Delrin Micrometer Feet 50116-15 Included x 3 Included x 2 Included x 3
Plain L Bracket 50116-20 Included ----------- Included
Screw Clamp L Bracket 50116-25 ----------- Included Included
Slotted L Bracket 50116-30 Included ----------- Included
Cross Section L Bracket 50116-31 Optional Optional Optional 50116-36
50116-30 50116-35
Parallel Polishing Mount (plastic) 50116-35 Optional Optional Optional 50116-31
Parallel Polishing Mount (S. Steel) 50116-36 Optional Optional Optional
Planarizing Tool 50116-40 Optional Optional Optional
Support Collars 50116-45 ----------- ----------- -----------
Heater Block 50116-50 Included ----------- Included
Microscope Stand 50116-55 Included Included Included
Pyrex Insert - Large 50116-60 Included ----------- Included 50116-40 50116-45 50116-50 50116-55
Wedge Polishing Mount 50116-61 Optional Optional Optional
Wedge Polishing Clamp 50116-62 Included ------------ Included
Pyrex Wedge Polishing Rod 50116-63 Included x 4 ------------ Included x 4
Pyrex Wedge Polishing Stub 50116-64 Included ------------ Included
SEM Stub 50116-65 ----------- Included x 4 Included x 4
Glass Leveling Slide 50116-70 Included Included Included
50116-60 50116-61 50116-62
Catalog# Description Pack
50115-10 Tripod Polisher Model 590 TEM Set
50115-20 Tripod Polisher Model 590 SEM Set
50115-30 Tripod Polisher Model 590TS (SEM+TEM) Set
50116-70
50116-63 50116-64 50116-65
® Accessories for Tripod Polishers
® 1. Ion Mill Stage, Model 59001
The Ion Mill Stage is designed to accept the special SEM stub used with the Tripod Polisher. The SEM stub is mounted to the Ion Mill Stage and
the samples are briefly ion milled in order to remove fine scratches, polishing debris and to give the surface topography prior to SEM analysis.
50118-01 Ion Mill Stage, Model 59001 each

® Starter Kit: 50118-01

This starter kit is designed to provide all of the necessary supplies needed for sample preparation in use with the Tripod Polishers.
Cat.# Description
50118-05 Kit includes: Set of Diamond Lapping Film (1 each of 0.5, 1, 3, 6, 15, and 30 back); Multitex Polishing Cloth;
8” Glass Plate; 0.05μm Colloidal Silica; Mounting Wax; Squeegee; Slotted TEM Grids, Sample Cleaner;
Cotton Swab 50/pk); Petri Dish, Filter Paper, Tweezers set, and Scotch Pad each

Check out our Most Revolutionary Products...

Introducing DuraSIN™, revolutioning the way
samples are prepared and analyzed in the
transmission electron microscope. SEM image of a DuraSiN™ Film (taken from the back side)

DuraSiN™ Film and Mesh products are affordably-priced, durable, nonorganic, low scatter support
grids for quantitative TEM and X-ray analysis. Unlike other support films and grids, DuraSiN™ Film
and Mesh products can withstand harsh chemical and temperature environments.
For more information, see page 152-157. UUUUU
SEM image of a DuraSiN™ Mesh (taken from the back side)

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 409
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec12_392-411_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 10:00 AM Page 410

SECTION 12 Materials Science & Metrology

INSTRUMENTATION
® ASAP-1 IPS Digital Selected Area Preparation System
Product Highlights
T Suits all sizes of die - package, wafer T Patented Floating Head provides a true
and board-level polishing action -- yields polishing quality
T Real Time Video Monitor with system & high survivability
parameter T Intuitive menus provide a powerful,
T Touchscreen control with physical joystick easy to use, system
& controls T USB Flash Driveinterface for
T Rigidized Table Assembly and closed-loop, preparation recipe storage
high-torque, motor control enhances the T Short set-up and process times
machining of tough and hard materials T Accurate die-tilt adjustment
T X, Y and Z axes all have deep sub-micron ‘on the fly’
accuracy T Bench-top & Quiet in Operation
T Accurately decaps, then thins substrate
and polishes
Since product launch, ASAP-1® hardware has become the standard piece Improved System Controls
of preparation equipment that engineers involved in disciplines such as The dedicated machine-vision
failure analysis, yield enhancement, radiation testing, and competitive monitor provides an 'always on'
analysis have come to rely on for backside preparation. ULTRA TEC has realtime view of the part, overlaid
produced leading solutions for backside preparation since 1999. With with current system coordinates and
over 300 ASAP-1 units installed in Semiconductor industry labs parameter. Now you can see the
throughout the world, we are proud to introduce the ASAP-1® IPS. part as it is being processed!
Enabling The Next Generation Of Failure Analysis A touchscreen interface, a physical
Ever since the inception of the ASAP-1 Project, ULTRA TEC’s goal has joystick and encoders -- alongside a The Touchscreen offers a powerful
been to offer both user-friendly and sample-friendly tools. The ASAP-1® suite of intuitive software and user interface - enhanced by physical
analog systems offer elegant, intuitive controls which have enabled all hardware features -- empowers the controls
labs to achieve quality results for subsequent analysis with Photon FA technician & engineering
emission microscopes, laser/ thermal stimulus microscopes and FIB’s. professional for the next generation
The user-friendly intutive nature of the analog units has been carried of failure analysis.
forward, and expanded with ASAP-1® IPS.
Digital Control... Specifications
Done Right! Z-Vertical Direction Precision: 0.04 microns (40 nanometers)
ASAP-1® IPS offers deep sub-micron Table Precision (X& Y Travel): 0.2 microns (200 nanometers)
control on X, Y and Z axes, making Table Travel Amplitude: 100mm x 100mm
it 'hands-down' the most accurate
Polishing Method: Patented ASAP-1 Float-down head, with Z-lock,
system ever seen in the market. enhanced with electronic sensors and tool patterns
Much More Than A Mill Video: Real-time machine vision with 6.5 inch video monitor.
ASAP-1® IPS enhances the market- External Video Output (NTSC)
IPS real time monitor shows X, Y & Z
leading attributes of our legacy Programming Input Method: Touchscreen with joystick and 3 phys-
Positions, speeds feeds & tool
products with the latest digital diameter ical rotary encoders
technology. It is now possible to Machine Vision: Real-time Video of overlaid with stage and process
grind substrates thinner, polish variables.
flatter and de-process even more Tilt Control: Computer-aided 2-circle tilt control, ULTRACOLLIMATOR
accurately. ASAP-1® IPS introduces Measurement (option)
a suite of features that automate Force Control: 1000grams (max) with 1 gram precision. Overall
many aspects of the process – from accuracy +/- 10 grams
analyzing the part to be processed, Recipe Load & Save: USB Port, for removable flash drive (up to 2Gb)
to writing intuitive programmable Z Position Touch-off Method Mechanical Positioning with Force-feed-
recipes, to reading in-situ end-stop back (option) sensors.
indicators that ensure each Machine vision, laser scan, & X & Y Position: LASER Targeting
important sample is prepared illumination provide feedback of Power Consumption: 300 Watts Maximum in use
correctly. The patented 'float down' system parameters Power Requirements: Universal: 100-120VAC; 200-240VAC
polishing head design is retained, Footprint: 19 inches (480mm) Width x 25 inches (635 mm) Depth x
and enhanced with the use of force feedback. to achieve the quality of 22 Inches (560mm) Height
final polish demanded by customers for backside microscopy, Laser
scan, FIB and SIL.

410 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec12_392-411_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 10:00 AM Page 411

Materials Science & Metrology SECTION 12

INSTRUMENTATION
® ASAP-1 IPS Digital Selected Area Preparation System (continued)
Accessories Particulate Vacuum Pump
Wax-In Plate T Used with ASAP-1® IPS
Holds difficult packages T Providesthe safest working conditions,
particularly when dry grinding encap-
The Wax-in plate allows for packages with sulants and electronic components
long vertical leads ("dead bug") or those with T Quiet and Efficient
'difficult' or non-standard shapes to be held in T HEPA filter
position for Selected Area Preparation. T Allows best viewing in machine vision
T Works with paraffin wax or similar adhesives mode
T Holds dead-bug type packages T Driven by ASAP-1® IPS Software
XYBOVE Ordering Information
Re-application Tool Cat No. Description Qty
Re-mounting station for Xybove final 6760.1 ASAP-1® IPS with Optical Control each
polishing tips. The XYBOVE Re-Application DIGITAL Selected Area Preparation System, 100-240V, 50/60Hz. Includes: X-Y
Tool makes replacing XYBOVE Tips table, tool spindle drive with deep sub-micron micron Z-resolution, compound
straightforward and rapid -- especially on sine tilt-table, touchscreen programming unit, ULTRACOLLIMATOR optical
smaller 1mm and 2mm diameter tools. alignment, integrated real-time machine vision, 6.5 inch lcd monitor, set of
2mm and 3mm tools.
T Make Replacement XYBOVE Tips when required 6760.2 ASAP-1® IPS each
T Save on buying new tools DIGITAL Selected Area Preparation System, 100-240V, 50/60Hz. Includes: X-Y
T Fast and Convenient to use, especially on small diameter tools table, tool spindle drive with deep sub-micron micron Z-resolution,tilt-table,
touchscreen programming unit, integrated real-time machine vision, 6.5 inch
Flip-over Workholder lcd monitor, set of 2mm and 3mm tools.
Allows optical alignment of non- 6715.1 High torque Motor (upgrade) each
3X Torque motor. Suits aggressive material requirements such as removal of
optically-accessible parts thick heat-sinks, removal of metals.
Re-mounting station for Xybove final 6389.1 Force Feedback Module each
System upgrade to add force feedback software for preparing delicate
polishing tips. The XYBOVE Re-Application
samples and dice for exhibiting in-package curvature.
Tool makes replacing XYBOVE Tips
straightforward and rapid -- especially on 3D Upgrade Modules
smaller 1mm and 2mm diameter tools. 6394.1 Curvature Correction each
Adds sample curvature definition – Suits decapsulation, thinning, and
ASAP-1 Standard polishing of packaged dice showing warpage or non-flat conditions.
Mounting Plate Independent X & Y Axis Correction, AUTOCURVE Mode. Also adds Stage
AUTOTILT function
Standard Mounting Plate for ASAP-1 6366.1 Thermal Relaxation Stage each
systems. Mounts on to the system with Adds thermal relaxation capability for warped die. Peltier-based heating plate
four corner dowel holes and screw holes with 1C accuracy. Hot Plate mode for convenient sample mount/demount.
for even stronger mounting, if required. Includes stage, cable, two custom mounting plates with nylon retention
Includes flat, ground and lapped anodized screws
aluminum surfaces, with a center optical Characterization Modules
alignment for use with the 6368.1 End-Point Module each
ULTRACOLLIMATOR. Tapped holes are High impedance / small capacitance based -- Hardware and Software
include for mechanical mounting with Upgrade to add end-pointing for enhancement of decap, deprocessing,
wafer clamps or similar. and polishing.
Accessories
ASAP-1 Repeat Positioning 6373.1 Wax-in Mounting Plate each
Holders 6316.1 XYBOVE Re-Application Tool. each
Holders that work with the Standard Supplied with 3 sheets of Xybove and tools for manufacture of 1mm, 2mm,
Mounting Plate for ASAP-1 systems. 3mm and 5mm Xybove tips.
Repeat Holders -- namely the Corner 6388.1 Flip-over Sample Holder each
Allows for ULTRACOLLIMATOR alignment of packages and samples that have
Square and the Small wax-in holder --
no access for ‘opposite-side’ alignment.
allow for many of the same part to be 6371.1 Standard Mounting Plate for ASAP-1 each
sequentially processed, without the need 6386.1 Repeat part Corner Square each
for re-centering or recalibration of the 6327.1 Small Wax-in Mounting Plate each
ASAP-1® system. 6780.1 Particulate Vacuum Pump for ASAP-1® IPS each
Supplied with collection hose hardware -- 110V only
6780.2 Particulate Vacuum Pump for ASAP-1® IPS each
Supplied with collection hose hardware for -- 220 to 240V only

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 411
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec12_412-430_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 3:48 PM Page 412

SECTION 12 Materials Science & Metrology

INSTRUMENTATION
Model 900 - Grinding and Polishing Machine
This light weight, bench top Grinding/Polishing model is ideal for surface preparation of small
metallographic specimens. It is adjustable in speed from 0 to 1725 RPM, and has 1/3 HP and
it is fully grounded. The coolant is applied to the wheel through an adjustable flow control
goose-neck spout.The unit comes complete with a removable rubber splash guard for cleaning
and a compression fitting for an easy connection into the existing coolant supply. Measures:
13” x 15.25 x 9.5” (H); Weight 35 lb. 110 volt, 60Hz

Model 900 Includes: Aluminum lapping plate, Lapping plate removal wrench, Metal splash
guard, Metal holding band (for plain back paper) and Rubber splash guard
50120-10 Model 900 each
50120-20 Model 900CE (converted to comply with CE) each
Accessories and Spare Parts
50120-40 Manual Work Arm for the Model 900 (must be factory installed) each
50120-50 8” Aluminum Lapping Plate each
50120-51 8” Glass Lapping Plate (used with plain back lapping film) each
50120-60 Metal Holding Band each
50120-61 Rubber Splash Guard each
50120-62 Metal Splash Guard each
50120-70 Motor Controller, 110 VAC each
50120-72 Motor Controller, 220 VAC each

® Model 910 - Lapping and Polishing Machine

This model 910 is specially designed to provide all of the features required to obtain
outstanding results using the EMS Polisher. The Polisher is designed for SEM cross sectioning
and also for TEM wedge polishing preparation. For instance, TEM wedge polishing requires
that the polishing wheel rotates at a constant speed with high torque at a very low rpm. This
combination of features is not found in standard grinders. Our model 910 provides all of the
requirements that a Tripod Polisher needs. This includes the use of diamond lapping films and
either colloidal silica or colloidal alumina suspensions. Plain backed diamond lapping film
adhered to a glass plate by surface tension, and is easily removed for storage and re-use.
Model 910 is also designed for ease of cleaning and disposal of abrasive debris.
FEATURES: Specifications:
T Variable speed from 8 - 600 RPM Dimensions: 21” x 13” x 11”
T Solid, cast aluminum construction Net weight: 60 lb (27kg)
T Low speed, high torque rotation Motor: 1/20 HP
(makes it ideal for Tripod Polishing) Wheel Diameter: 8” Electron Microscopy Sciences offers a
T Vibration free, quiet operation Electrical: 90-120VAC; 5-/60Hz or 200- full range of equipment used in
T Stylish, tabletop design 240 VAC, 50/60Hz
materials preparation for a variety of
Model 910 includes: Water and slurry delivery system, Aluminum lapping plate (includes O-ring technological fields. Electron
#50122-30 for metal holding band), Metal holding band (for holding abrasive papers and polishing cloth, microscopy, metallography, wafer
#50122-31), Glass plate, Dust cover, Hex wrench set
lapping and polishing, failure analysis,
50122-10 Lapping and Polishing Model 910 each
crystal orientation, plasma processing,
Accessories and Spare Parts MEMS and many other applications are
50122-14 Workstation Post facilitated by our equipment. Please
50122-15 8” Dia Glass Plate (must mounted to 50122-16, each
which is included with the Model 910)
contact us or see our comprehensive
50122-16 8” Dia Aluminum Lapping Plate each website, which includes our
50122-17 8” Dia Cast Iron Lapping Plate each complete line.
50122-18 8” Dia Cast Iron Lapping Plate, Concentric Grooves each
50122-19 8” Dia Cast Iron Lapping Plate, Spiral Grooves each
50122-24 8” Dia Cast Iron Lapping Plate, Radical Grooves each
50122-25 Cast Iron Conditioning Ring (for use with cast iron plate only) each
50122-26 8” Dia Copper Composite Lapping Plate each
50122-27 Diamond Conditioning Ring (for use with copper composite plate only) each
50122-40 Manual Yoke, Left side (includes post #01-02262-01) each
50122-41 Manual Yoke, right side (include post #01-02262-01) each
50122-42 Lapping Plate Flatness measuring kit (includes: each
granite leveling plate and flatness gauge #02-02134-01)

412 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec12_412-430_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 3:48 PM Page 413

Materials Science & Metrology SECTION 12

INSTRUMENTATION
® Model 920 - Lapping and Polishing Machine
The model 920 is the first in a new generation of multi-purpose lapping machines
designed for accurately lapping and polishing a wide range of materials. The 920
can be used as a standard metallurgical grinder/polisher utilizing abrasive papers,
abrasive films, diamond discs, polishing cloths, etc., or it can be used as a high
precision free abrasive lapping machine for flat polishing of optical and
semiconductor materials.
When used as a free abrasive lapping machine, the 920 can accommodate most
of our Lapping Fixtures for precise sample orientation and maximum flatness. The
precision fixtures and the self turning lap ensure samples of the highest quality. In
addition to flat lapping, we offer 2 fixtures for polishing oriented crystals. The
crystals can be oriented and subsequently polished while maintaining their
orientation.
The Model 920 is also available with two optional workstations. These
independently controlled workstations rotate polishing fixtures automatically,
thereby simplifying the polishing process and minimizing operator supervision. The
920 is ideal for high precision polishing in both R & D and production
environments. Accessories and Spare Parts
FEATURES: 550124-50 Standard yoke assembly,
left side, used with Model 92012L each
T Variable Speed, 10 - 600 RPM 50124-51 Standard Motorized post Assembly, Left Side each
T Solid, Cast Aluminum Construction 50124-52 Standard yoke assembly,
right side, used with Model 92012R each
T Quick exchange of worn-out disc
50124-53 Standard drive motor post assembly, right side each
T Optional workstations for semi-automatic polishing 50124-54 Yoke sweep mechanism,
T Stylish, Tabletop design with motor drive, left side each
T Vibration free, quiet operation 50124-55 Yoke sweep mechanism,
with motor drive, right side each
Model 920 includes: Model 920 is pre-wired for two workstation accessories and includes 50124-56 Digital RPM meter each
a water and a slurry deliver system. The aluminum plate #50122-16 (include 50122-30 O- 50122-42 Lapping plate flatness measuring kit each
ring for metal holding band). Metal holding band #50122-31 (for holding abrasive papers and 50124-14 Tri-holder specimen mount each
(for metallographic mounts up to 38mm diameter
polishing cloths). Glass plate #50122-15 (for use with abrasive film). Dust cover
50124-15 Quad-holder specimen mount each
50124-20R Lapping and Polishing Machine Model 920 each (for metallographic mounts 25-32mm diameter
Model 920L includes: Model 920 Lapping and Polishing Machine, Standard Motorized Yoke 50122-15 Glass Lapping plate, 8” each
50122-16 Aluminum lapping plate, 8” each
Assembly, Right Side (Model 92034L), Drive Motor Assembly, Right Side (Model 92012R)
50122-17 Cast iron lapping plate, 8” each
50124-20L Lapping and Polishing Machine Model 920L each 50122-18 Cast iron lapping plate, concentric grooves, 8” each
Model 920LR includes: Model 920 Lapping and Polishing Machine, Standard Motorized 50122-19 Cast iron lapping plate, spiral grooves, 8” each
50122-25 Cast iron conditioning ring each
Yoke Assembly, Left Side, (Model 92034L), Drive Motor Assembly, Left Side (Model 92012L),
(for use with cast iron lapping plates only)
Standard Motorized Yoke Assembly, Right Side, (Model 92034R), Drive Motor Assembly, 50122-26 Copper composite lapping plate, 8” each
Right Side, (Model 92012R) 50122-27 Diamond conditioning ring each
50124-20LR Lapping and Polishing Machine Model 920LR each (for use with copper composite lapping plate only)

Check out our New and Exclusive Products...

Introducing Graphene, the ideal suport film
for electron microscopy.
Graphene is a single atomic layer of carbon atoms tightly packed in a two-
dimensional honeycomb lattice. This novel material is atomically thin,
chemically inert, consists of light atoms, and possesses a highly ordered
structure. Graphene is electrically and thermally conductive, and is the
strongest material ever measured.
For more information, see pages 140–141 UUUUU

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 413
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec12_412-430_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 7/9/14 1:03 AM Page 414

SECTION 12 Materials Science & Metrology

INSTRUMENTATION
® MULTIPOL Precision Lapping & Polishing Machines
Product Highlights
T Versatility – all polishing methods can be T All lapping and polishing techniques can be
used including, abrasive, diamond, slurry, accommodated
CMP and etch polishing T Tight control of all process variables allows
T Optical quality polishing superior performance on most materials
T Easy to clean -All parts which could cause T Bench-top and quiet in operation
cause contamination can be easily detached.
This means downtime is minimized.
MULTIPOL 8 and 10 are versatile lapping and polishing systems capable Specifications
of preparing the most demanding specimens required by Research and
Spindle Speed ................................................................0 to 90 rpm
Industry. Primarily designed for failure analysis, research and pilot-scale
Sweep Stroke ................................................Variable +/- 8 degrees
production applications, they allow for many methods of sample holding Footprint ........................................................21 inches (53cm) wide
- producing a high versatility which is extended by the availability of a ..................................................................x 18 inches (46cm) deep
range of accessories and polishing plates. ......................................................................x 8 Inches (20cm) high
Optical Standards of finish can be achieved with the use of the system’s Unit Weight ................................................................40 kg (100 lbs)
reciprocating sweep mechanism. This control allows maintenance of Electrical ....................................................110 to 240V, 50 to 60 Hz
surface parallelism and flatness. Sample loading is fully variable, as are
the sweep and rotation speeds. Ordering Information
All parts that come into contact with polishing media are produced from Cat No. Description Qty
either stainless steel or heavy duty plastic and are quickly detachable for 6108.1 MULTIPOL 8 each
6110.1 MULTIPOL 10 each
ease of cleaning and avoiding cross contamination. A spindle lock allows
plates to be changed conveniently. Accessories
6166.2 Precision Polishing Jig Kit
The fully-controllable reciprocating arm mechanism allows maintenance for maximum 2 inch diameter samples each
of plate flatness. This means that samples of the highest optical 6166.3 Precision Polishing Jig Kit
standards of flatness for maximum 3 inch diameter samples each
and parallelism may 6166.4 Precision Polishing Jig Kit
be prepared. for maximum 4 inch diameter samples each
6158.1 Recirculating slurry pump each
The exceptional 6230.1 Slurry containment tray each
degree of control Precision jig
which is available for mounted on
all preparation autocollimator for
parameters means the production of
extremely parallel
that MULTIPOL's may
sided samples
be configured for
hard, soft, and friable
materials, and suits
preparations of
expensive and unique
research materials.

Lapping and Polishing Plates

Cat No. Diameter Surface Application Qty.
6191.8 8 inch
Cast Iron scrolled Initial lapping with loose abrasives, polishing very hard materials each
6191.1 10 inch
6193.8 8 inch
Copper-faced scrolled Polishing hard materials each
6193.1 10 inch
6195.8 8 inch
Solder-faced scrolled Polishing medium-hard materials each
6195.1 10 inch
6197.8 8 inch
Cast-iron plain Preparing brittle and very small samples each
6197.1 10 inch
6199.8 8 inch
Stainless steel plain General purpose, covered with films, cloths, papers and pads each
6199.1 10 inch
6206.8 8 inch Polishing with slurries, used in CMP processes with colloidal silica
Polyurethane-faced plain each
6206.1 10 inch and alumina suspensions

414 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec12_412-430_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 3:48 PM Page 415

Materials Science & Metrology SECTION 12

INSTRUMENTATION

® ULTRAPOL End & Edge Polisher

Flat and angled preparation of optical and electronic
components
Product Highlights
T Fully Angle adjustable Quick Release Interface allow for fast and
repeatable mounting and demounting.
T Holders available for most components
T Fast process times
T Low run-out lap for flat optical polishes

ULTRAPOL End & Edge Polisher has been designed to provide accurate
lapping and polishing for most research and industrial applications.
Key to the high quality performance of the unit is the calibration of the
polishing base and the advanced angular control provided by the
polishing head.
Built-in features such as tachometer, process end-indicator, timer, and
head oscillation provide assurance the finest surface production. Specifications
The specific workholder for an application is held firmly and repeatably Angular accuracy ..........................................................0.1 degrees
Angular Range ........................................................0 to 12 degrees
with the system’s quick release interface. Standard holders are available
Footprint ......................................................22 inches (55 cm) wide
for most applications, including: ..................................................................x 12 inches (30 cm) deep
Capillary / glass ferrule polishing ..................................................................x 19 Inches (48 cm) high
Planar Waveguide polishing System Weight ............................................................27 kg (60 lbs)
Bare fiber polishing - flat and angle polishing
Integrated optics Ordering Information
Die Cross-sectioning Cat No. Description Qty
SEM and TEM sample preparation 6390.1 ULTRAPOL End & Edge Polishing System each
IC Wafer and package-level backside preparation Configured for 100-220/240V. Includes advanced base unit with timer,
Encapsulated mount polishing tachometer, solenoid coolant system, speed control and process-end
indicator. Micropositioner head includes, advanced angular control, low
inertial mass loading system with auxiliary weight kit, oscillation control,
Custom workholders can also be designed to your specific needs. 1 micron Z-control and "Quick Release" workholder mounting system.
ULTRAPOL End & Edge Polisher uses 8 inch diameter diamond lapping Accessories
films which are easily changed for maximized output. 2239.1 8” (200mm) anodized lapping plate
1301.5 Lamp
1503.1 Disc Holding Band
Workholders
4079.1 Thin plate edge polishing holder – each
holds plates up to 2.5cm long
4079.2 Thin plate edge polishing holder – each
holds plates up to 5cm long
2707.1 Bare fiber holder (with 125 micron each
replaceable ferrule) – 1 position
2707.4 Bare fiber holder (with 125 micron each
replaceable ferrule) – 4 positions
2745.1 Bare fiber holder – holds 5-8 fibers – each
for fibers > 400 micron
(specify fiber size when ordering)
3552.1 Saddle Clamp – each
holds endoscopes, glass rods etc
3547.1 V-clamp – each
holds large fiber bundles and rods
(16mm to 34mm diameter)
2727.1 Capillary / glass ferrule workholder each
(1.25 to 2.5mm diameter) – 12 positions
2726.1 Capillary setting stand – works with 2727.1 each
2024.1 Encapsulated mount workholer – each
(holds mounts 0.5 to 1.5 inch diameter)
4065.1 Single die edge x-section / SEM Stub holder each

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 415
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec12_412-430_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 3:51 PM Page 416

SECTION 12 Materials Science & Metrology

INSTRUMENTATION
® ULTRAPOL Basic Manual Polisher ® UltraPol Manual
Manual polishing tools remain
Polishing Station
important to the lab needing For quick, simple hand lapping
good delayering and/or cross- applications, the manual lapping
sectioning results on a very station has a smooth 8” glass
tight budget. ULTRA TEC is surface to support precision
proud to be associated with lapping films. The fluid
the polishing experts at containment tray underneath the
Accelerated Analysis, and to plate collects water run-off from the lapping surface for later disposal,
offer their advanced manual keeping the polishing process area clean and contained. A Plexiglas lid
tools for use with our protects the lapping surface when not in use and is an ideal, safe place
ULTRAPOL Basic polisher. to store lapping films flat. The manual station is ideal for short hand
polishing processes and includes the glass plate and protective cover.
Product Highlights
Cat No. Description Qty
T Works with all 8" (200mm) surfaces 1201.1 ULTRAPOL Manual Polishing Station each
T Small footprint includes fluid containment tray and 8 inch (203mm) aluminum polishing
T Speed Control and high torque motor surface. Can be used with films, pads or glass surfaces.
1228.1 Plexiglass Lid for ULTRAPOL
T Coolant speed control
Manual Polishing Systems each
Keeps films, fluids and sufaces safe and maintains moisture overnight

® Ultratool Manual Polishing Tool

ULTRATOOL was designed for manual polishing of fibers, either
supported (connectorized) or nonsupported (bare fibers), The tool uses
various replaceable modules which are available for all types of
connectors -- if needed, custom modules can be designed and
manufactured by ULTRA TEC.
UPF101 Accelerated Analysis UPF201 Accelerated Analysis Key to ULTRATOOL's performance is a height adjust feature that is
Manual Cross Section Fixture Manual Parallel Polish Fixture controlled by a fine pitch micrometer screw thread.
Flat, PC & APC polishes can be performed on all standard connector
Disc Holding Band types. Another common use is bare-fiber polishing applications (flat and
Our Disc Holding band works with angled). ULTRATOOL is capable of holding bare fibers of the full size
ULTRAPOL 8" machines and many range and many other materials such as small wafer sections (for planar
other 8" machines on the market. It or edge polishes).
holds down the lapping film or
surface and can also stop splash.

Cat No. Description Qty

1209.1 ULTRAPOL Basic Polisher each
Configured for 100-220/240V operation. 0-500 RPM.
Includes 8 inch (200mm) polishing system with speed control
and solenoid-controlled coolant system
UPF101 Accelerated Analysis Cat No. Description Qty
Manual Cross Section Fixture each 1101.6 ULTRATOOLKIT each
Includes 5 aluminum and 5 stainless steel sample mounts package includes 1101.1 tool in carrying case with: 8x spare wear stops,
UPF201 Accelerated Analysis 4 connector inserts (for ST, FC, SC and LC), locking tool, 1 oz bottle of
Manual Parallel Polish Fixture each ULTRAPOL B suspension each
Includes alignment mirror and 3 parallel polish sample mounts. 2240.1 Glass lapping plate, for manual polishing each
1503.1 Disc Holding Band each 1101.1 ULTRATOOL spare manual tool each
2239.1 ULTRAPOL Spare 8 " (200mm)
anodized aluminum plate each

416 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec12_412-430_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 3:49 PM Page 417

Materials Science & Metrology SECTION 12

INSTRUMENTATION
® FIBERTEC Mass Production Fiber Polisher
Product Highlights
T LCD screen for storing up to nine different polishing recipes and process information
T Platen torque remains fixed even when speed is varied
T Air and water are kept separated inside of housing to ensure safe operation
T Adjustable weight allows for proper polishing force
T Anti-vibration feet allow for precise leveling - more concistent results

ULTRA TEC is proud to introduce a new mass-production connector polisher. FIBERTEC can polish between
10 and 24 connectors at a time.
Drawing on ULTRA TEC's unique legacy and in-depth knowledge of the fiber polishing process, the new
FIBERTEC offers market-leading features that make polishing simple and productive for the operator. The
system's LCD screen makes process control and great connector polishing results easier than ever to
achieve. Pressure and platen speed are controlled for ultimate consistency and performance.

Recipe and process conditions can be saved Ordering Information

Cat No. Description Qty
9812.1 FIBERTEC Polisher (110V version) each
Industry-standard polishes Includes advanced programmable fiber connector polishing system
are readily achieved due to with 5 resilient polishing platens.
a robust design and system 9812.2 FIBERTEC Polisher (220-240V version) each
build along with using the Includes advanced programmable fiber connector polishing system
latest techniques. with 5 resilient polishing platens.

System has a handy

station for resting
connector
holder during
film changes

Cat No. Description Qty

Connector Holders
9804.1 ST Holder (12 positions) each
9805.1 SC Holder (12 positions) each
9805.16 SC Holder (16 positions) each
9805.8 SC APC Holder (12 positions) each
Specifications 9814.1 FC Holder (12 positions) each
Footprint ......................................................220mm Wide x 420mm 9814.8 FC APC Holder (10 positions) each
Net Weight ................................................................................26Kg 9815.1 LC Holder (16 positions) each
Power ....................................110VAC 60Hz or 220VAC 50Hz - 85w 9815.1L2 LC2 Holder (16 positions) each
Air comsumption ................................................3 kgf/cm (squared) 9813.1 MU Holder (18 positions) each
9815.8 LC APC Holder (12 positions) each
Polishing Disk OD ..........112mm (accepts 5 inch dia. polishing film)
Polishing Plate Speed ................................................30 – 300 RPM
Timer ....................................................................1 to 999 seconds

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 417
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec12_412-430_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 3:49 PM Page 418

SECTION 12 Materials Science & Metrology

INSTRUMENTATION
® UT.Minipol.1 Polisher Single Position Fiber ® NANOpol Bare Fiber
Polisher Beveling System
Fiber polisher for
small volume NANOpol offers the fiber
terminations optic communications
industry the ability to
Product Highlights produce accurate polished
T Retro-polishing - Bring bevels on bare optical fibers.
already-installed con- Angular control is achieved
nectors up to current with the advanced
industry requirements positioning features of the
T Wide range of holders integral micropositioned
T Low Cost machinery polishing head.
solution
Designed for the price-
conscious university and
UT.MINIPOL.1 provides research environments,
many of the features of larger polishing units in a small benchtop NANOpol uses a 4 inch
package—perfect for users with small production batches, or operating diameter polishing lap –
with a limited budget. a size specially chosen for
Versatility improved flatness/run-out
All connector types may be prepared by the system, including SC, FC, and low consumables costs.
ST, D4, SMA, bare fibers, PC, and Flat polishes are all accommodated
by simple changes of the lap and/or the workholder.
Unique Features Ordering Information
A factory-set reciprocating arm movement rides the rotating lap Cat No. Description Qty
producing high performance. This produces quality results at a low 8801.BF NANOpol Fiber Polishing Machine each
price. Includes: NANOPOL Base unit with 4" o.d lapping plate, Fiber Polishing
Micropostitioner Produces bevels and flat polishes. Power: 110 V / 60Hz
Scope Of Use and 220 to 240V, 50 Hz
UT.MINIPOL.1 allows for use as a retropolishing machine or as a quick
factory-use system whether used singly, or in tandem with other units. Accessories
1851.01 Lensing Module Add-on BF Ball Tip each
Accessories 1851.07 Lensing Module Add-on BF Single Flat Tip each
The system can be powered by 110 or 220 VAC converter or by a 8010.01 4" Aluminum Carrier Plate each
standard 12V battery. A wide variety of Workholders are available for 8010.02 4" Resilient Carrier Plate each
8010.03 Weight Kit each
extending the use of the system at any time.
1535.01 Quick-Release Mount each
Tools And Consumables 2358.01 Ferrule Forming Lap each
ULTRA TEC stocks a wide range of Polishing Films, Papers, Pads and 8010.05 Ferrule Clearing Wire each
4444.04 4" Bare-fiber Polishing Film Package each
accessories for all polishing applications.
QR Holders
2703.1 SMA 905 ,One Position Connector Holder each
Specifications 2703.6 SMA 906,One Position Connector Holder each
Lap Diameter ............................................................4inch (100mm) 2707.XXX Bare fiber holder, One Position - each
Specify O.D. of Stripped Fiber
Weight: ........................................................................2.2kg (5 lbs.)
Power Supply: ............................................................12V Converter
Timer: ....................................................................10-120 Seconds

Ordering Information
Cat No. Description Qty
8801.1 UT.Minipol.1 Polisher each
Accessories
4026.1 220VAC Adapter
6594.1 Hard Surface Disc
6593.1 Resilient Surface Disc
4030.1 Carrying Case
4027.1 Battery and Charger

418 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec12_412-430_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 3:49 PM Page 419

Materials Science & Metrology SECTION 12

INSTRUMENTATION
® ULTRAPOL Fiber Lensing Machine
The world’s first dedicated mechanical fiber lensing
system
Product Highlights
T Unsurpassed concentricity – singlemode compatible
T Fiber lens shapes of many types and angles
T Advanced angle control ensures optimum success rate
T Uses 5 inch lapping film – low consumable costs

ULTRAPOL Sculpted end polisher offers the fiber optic communications

industry the ability to produce accurate end profiles on bare optical
fibers.
Improved design of fiber holding, and all processing characteristics,
provide concentricity of a couple of microns. This means that accurate
bisecting of a singlemode (9micron) fiber core can be achieved.
Full angular control is achieved with the advanced positioning features of
the integral micropositioned polishing head. This makes possible the
production of the fiber lens shapes shown below.
The system uses a 5 inch diameter polishing lap – a size specially
chosen for improved flatness/run-out and lower consumables costs.

Sculpted End Examples

Ordering Information
Cat No. Description Qty
6380.1 ULTRAPOL Fiber Lensing Machine each
Includes: ULTRAPOL Base unit with 5" o.d lapping plate, Fiber Lensing
Large included- Small included- Chisel/ Micropostitioner, with feed through spindle. Produces sculpted ends on optical
angle tapers angle tapers screwdriver tips fibers – examples: cone tips, chisel / screwdriver tips, bevels. Power: 110 V /
60Hz and 220 to 240V, 50 Hz
4026.1 5” (12.5 cm) spare polishing plate each
1871.1 Set of 3, 125 micron replaceable ferrules each
1325.1 Sapphire cleaving tool each
1812.1 125 micron fiber spindle module each
1814.1 140 micron fiber spindle module each
Bevels Flat Ends 1804.1 400 micron fiber spindle module each
1860.1 600 micron fiber spindle module each
M.5438.1 30 micron diamond, 5 inch,
Specifications plain-backed film (15 pcs) each
M.5436.1 15 micron diamond, 5 inch,
Produces sculpted ends on optical fibers – plain-backed film (15 pcs) each
examples: cone tips, chisel/screwdriver tips, bevels M.5437.1 6 micron diamond, 5 inch,
Angular accuracy ............................................................0.1 degrees plain-backed film (15 pcs) each
Included angle range ............................................20 to 180 degrees M.5433.1 3 micron diamond, 5 inch,
Footprint ......................................................22 inches (55 cm) wide plain-backed film (15 pcs) each
..................................................................x 12 inches (30 cm) deep M.5432.1 1 micron diamond, 5 inch,
..................................................................x 19 Inches (48 cm) high plain-backed film (15 pcs) each
Unit Weight ..................................................................27 kg (60 lbs) M.5450.1 ULTRAFILM B, 5 inch,
Voltage ....................................110 V / 60Hz and 220 to 240V, 50 Hz plain-backed film (100 pcs) each

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 419
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec12_412-430_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 3:49 PM Page 420

SECTION 12 Materials Science & Metrology

INSTRUMENTATION
® Lapping and Polishing Fixtures
The Electron Microscopy Sciences Precision Lapping and Polishing Fixtures are designed to accurately produce polished parallel, tapered or critically
oriented samples with minimal sub-surface damage. A series of specialized fixtures has been developed for lapping and polishing samples up to 6” in
diameter, TEM samples and oriented crystals. In addition to size and shape, the fixtures differ in the type of thickness control techniques they employ. The
Lapping and Polishing Fixtures are designed to be used either by hand or with a lapping machine (Model 920 above). Sample Mounting Fixtures are also
designed to be used in conjunction with these fixtures to ensure that the sample is mounted parallel to the mounting block and that a thin, uniform layer of
wax exists between the mounting block and the sample.

® Micrometer Controlled Fixtures

The micrometer method of thickness control employs a dial with 25 micron or finer graduations, that is adjusted relative to the outside support ring to set the
amount of material to be removed. To set the dial, the sample is initially zeroed against the lapping plate and then the dial is adjusted to create a gap between
the outside support ring and the center slide. This gap corresponds to the amount of material to be removed and gradually decreases, as the sample is lapped
or polished, until the final thickness is reached. The load on the sample is varied by adding weights or finger pressure the top of the fixture. Due to the ease
of adjustment a micrometer controlled fixture is generally used when desired sample thickness will vary from sample to sample.

FEATURES:
T Tungsten carbide base resists wear and maintains sample planarity.
T Wide base ensures stability thereby minimizing sample damage and
edge rounding
T Wear ring is replaceable, on some fixtures, which extends the life
of the fixture.
T Can be mounted in the Model 920 Lapping & Polishing Machine for
semi-automatic processing
T Micrometer depth control allows precise control over sample thickness.
T Precisely crafted stainless steel construction ensures long life and
high precision.

® Model 145 Lapping and Polishing Fixture

This model accommodates up to a 1⁄2” sample mount, which is held in place
using a threaded draw rod and locating pin. This small, lightweight fixture is
ideal for hand lapping or polishing of samples less than 1⁄2” in diameter.
Comes with replaceable feet.

® Model 150 Lapping and Polishing Fixture

This model accommodates sample mounts up to 1” in diameter for both
parallel and tapered samples. Angled blocks up to 45° are available and are
simply mounted in place of standard parallel mounts when tapered sections
are desired. The mounting blocks from this fixture are directly transferable ® Model 155DV Lapping and Polishing Fixture
from any cutting saw. The Model 150 is for general-purpose fixture and is This model is identical to the model 155 in all aspects, however, this model
capable of lapping and polishing multiple small or large samples up to 1” in can be used to adapt an option of Vacuum (155V) or a Digital indicator
diameter. (155D). The Model 155V has the ability to mount specimen up to 2”
diameter using vacuum. The Model 155D has a digital indicator allowing
® Model 151 Counter-Balanced Lapping and Polishing
1micron resolution during the lapping and polishing process. You can
Fixture
purchase this model with both options (Model 155DV).
This model is identical to the model 150 except that the center slide is
completely counter-balanced which enables the user to precisely vary the ® Model 155L
sample load. The model 151 is ideal when lapping or polishing very delicate The Model 155L (Previously Model 154) is ideal when lapping or polishing
materials, where only a minimal sample load can be tolerated. very delicate materials, where only a minimal sample load can be tolerated.
The 155L uses counter-balance springs to reduce specimen load. The
® Model 155 Lapping and Polishing Fixture
fixture is capable of lapping and polishing multiple small samples or larger
This model works the same as the Model 150, but accommodates sample samples up to 2" in diameter.
mounts up to 2” in diameter. A streamlined design reduces the overall
fixture weight, which makes it ideal for lapping either by hand or on a ® Model 155E
lapping machine. This model also has replaceable tungsten carbide feet. Please see Model 147.

To order parts and accessories, see next page... >>>>>

420 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec12_412-430_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 3:49 PM Page 421

Materials Science & Metrology SECTION 12

INSTRUMENTATION

® Lapping and Polishing Fixtures (continued)

® Standard Lapping Fixture Ordering
Base Piston Thickness Max. Sample Size Sample Special
Cat. # Model Height Dia. Weight Control Dia. Hgt Mounting Features
50150-45 145 2.5” 1.5” 50g Micrometer 0.5” 0.4” Wax
50150-50 150 4.5” 2.7” 300g Micrometer 1.0” 0.5” Wax
50150-50L 150L 4.5” 2.7” Zero Micrometer 1.0” 0.5” Wax Low Force
50150-50MC 150MC 4.5” 2.7” 300g Micrometer 1.0” 0.5” Wax
50150-55 155 5.5” 3.5” 350g Micrometer 2.0” 0.32” Wax
50150-55D 155D 5.5” 3.5” 350g Digital 2.0” 0.32” Wax
50150-55E 155E (153) 5.5” 3.5” 350g Micrometer 2.0” 0.32” Wax Edge Polish
50150-55L 155L (154) 5.5” 3.5” Zero Micrometer 2.0” 0.32” Wax Low Forge
50150-55V 155V 6.75” 3.5” 350g Micrometer 2.0” 0.32” Vacuum
50150-55DV 155DV 6.75” 3.5” 350g Digital 2.0” 0.32” Vacuum & Wax
50150-55DL 155DL 5.5” 3.5” Zero Digital 2.0” 0.32” Wax Low Forge
50150-55LMD 155LMD 5.5: 3.5” Zero Micrometer 1.0” 0.50” Magnetic& Wax Low Forge
50150-47 147 5.5” 4” 355g Micrometer 2.625” 0.40” Wax
50150-47D 147D 5.5” 4” 355g Digital 2.625” 0.40” Wax
50150-47E 147E 5.5” 4” 355g Micrometer 2.625” 0.40” Wax Edge Polish
50150-47V 147V 6.75” 4” 355g Micrometer 2.625” 0.40” Vacuum
50150-47DV 147DV 6.75” 4” 355g Digital 2.625” 0.40” Vacuum & Wax
50150-47ED 147ED 5.5” 4” 355g Digital 2.625” 0.40” Wax Edge Polish

® Accessories and Spare Parts ® Angled Mounting Blocks for Lapping

for Lapping and Polishing Fixtures & Polishing Fixtures
Fixture All are 1" (25mm) Diameter Stainless Steel Mounting Blocks.
Cat. # Model Used Description Pack
50151-00 155 Vacuum Mounting Kit for Vacuum Cat. # Fixture Model Used on Angle Pack
Mounting Specimens, Kit includes: 50153-01 150, 151, 155 0.25° Angle each
Vacuum Assembly #50151- 01 & Draw 50153-02 150, 151, 155 0.5° Angle each
Rod, Knob Assembly #50151-02 each 50153-03 150, 151, 155 1° Angle each
See Mounting Lock Series Vacuum Mounting Block (1 required for 50153-04 150, 151, 155 2° Angle each
50153 to order #50151-00) NOTE: Vacuum Mounting 50153-05 150, 151, 155 3° Angle each
Blocks are not included with #50151-00 50153-06 150, 151, 155 4° Angle each
and require a custom pattern specified 50153-07 150, 151, 155 5° Angle each
by the customer each 50153-20 150, 151, 155 10° Angle each
50151-05 155, 155D, 155V Replace wear Ring, Stainless Steel with 50153-21 150, 151, 155 20° Angle each
Tungsten Carbide Feet each 50153-22 150, 151, 155 30° Angle each
50151-06 155D Micrometer Dual Extension each 50153-23 150, 151, 155 45° Angle each
50151-07 155D Base Extension Adapter each 50153-24 150, 151, 155 60° Angle each
50153-25 150, 151, 155 Angle each
® Weight for Use with Lapping ® Vacuum Mounting Blocks - Vacuum Plates
and Polishing Fixtures for use with #50151-00
Cat.# Description Pack Cat.# Fixture Model Description Pack
50155-01 Cutting Weight, 7.5g each 50151-10 155D, 155V, 155DV 2.125” (54.0mm) Diameter Mounting Block, each
50155-02 Cutting Weight, 15g each Blank for Vacuum Pattern*. Stainless Steel
50155-03 Cutting Weight, 20g each 50151-11 155D, 155V, 155DV 2.186” (55.5mm) Diameter Mounting Block, each
50155-04 Cutting Weight, 40g each Blank for Vacuum Pattern*
50155-05 Cutting Weight, 100g each 50151-12 155D, 155V 2.125” (54.0mm) Diameter Mounting Block; each
50155-06 Cutting Weight, 150g each 2” (50mm) Diameter Vacuum Pattern
50155-07 Cutting Weight, 200g each * Blank Vacuum Plates can be machined into specific patterns depending upon customer requirements. An extra charge
50155-08 Cutting Weight, 300g each for this requirement is $120.00 will be added to the Vacuum Plate cost.
50155-09 Cutting Weight, 400g each
50155-10 Cutting Weight, 600g each ® Vertical Mounting Blocks - Use for Edge Polishing
Cat.# Fixture Model Description Pack
® Flat Mounting Blocks 50154-01 155D 2” (50.0mm) Diameter Mounting Block, Vertically each
(Stainless Steel) for Lapping Mounted Samples; Star Pattern, 4-Position.
& Polishing Fixtures Stainless Steel
50154-02 155D 2” (50.0mm) Diameter Mounting Block, Vertically each
Fixture
Mounted Samples; Star Pattern, Reversible, 6-position
Cat. # Model Used on Description Pack (Max.20mm Specimen Length), Stainless Steel
50152-01 150, 151, 155 0.75” (19mm) Diameter each 50154-03 155D 2” (50.0mm) Diameter Mounting Block, Vertically each
50152-02 150, 151, 155 1” (25mm) Diameter each Mounted Samples; Star Pattern, Reversible, 6-position
50152-03 150, 151, 155 11⁄4” (31.75mm) Diameter each for 12mm Diameter Rod or 10mm Cube (Max. 20mm
50152-04 155 11⁄2” (38mm) Diameter each Specimen Length), Stainless Steel
50152-05 155 2” (50mm) Diameter each

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 421
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec12_412-430_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 3:49 PM Page 422

SECTION 12 Materials Science & Metrology

INSTRUMENTATION
® Sample Mounting Fixtures
The proper mounting of samples is a critical step in the lapping and polishing process. It is imperative that the sample is firmly mounted parallel to the
sample mount surface to ensure accurate results. Typically, samples are mounted using a low melting point wax (such as EMS #50400-01, Crystal Bond
509...) Sample Mounting Fixtures are designed to both monitor the temperature of the wax and to provide a uniform mounting pressure.
Operation:
When using low melting point wax, the mounting block is first heated on a hot plate then a thin layer of wax is melted evenly on it. The sample is placed on the
mounting block, an appropriate size pressure plate is placed on the sample and they are placed together on the base of the mounting fixture. A spring-loaded rod is
then positioned in the center of an indent in the pressure plate while setting the pressure with the height adjustment of the arm. The whole assembly is then placed on
a hot plate until the correct temperature is reached and maintained for a short while to ensure a uniform layer of wax cooling tray to facilitate the hardening of the wax.
® Model 110 Sample Mount
This model is designed to mount samples up to 2” in diameter and is supplied with 6 Pressure Plates ranging in
size from 1⁄2” to 2” diameter. The unit is also supplied with a set of tongs to lift the fixture when hot. The model
110 is the most basic model and is ideal for routine sample mounting in laboratories.
® Model 125 Cooling Tray
This model is intended to be used with a Hot Plate (see page 1076, EMS Cat. #72350) and is designed to
handle a sample mount, which can slide directly from the hot plate onto the cooling tray platform without being
lifted. The Cooling Tray consists of a large anodized aluminum plate with cooling fins that are designed to
facilitate the rapid and uniform cooling of the Sample Mounting Fixture.

® Sample Mounting Kit

Cat.# Description Pack
To facilitate all of your work, we offer the Sample Mounting Kit, which includes the necessary 50160-10 Model 110 Sample Mount each
equipment to establish a basic sample mounting for your lab. This kit includes: 50160-25 Model 125 Cooling Tray each
1 each Model 110 Sample Mount 72350 Stirrer/Hot Plate each
1 each Model 420 Hot/Stir Plate (EMS Cat. #72350) 50400-05 Crystal Bond 509, 5 Sticks each
1 each Model 125 Cooling Tray and 1 package of Mounting Wax (Crystal Bond 509, Cat #50400-05). 50160-00 Sample Mounting Kit each

® Chemical Polishing Fixture - ® The Quick Jig

Model 160 A Universal Mounting Fixture
The polishing of semiconductor materials often
requires the use of harsh chemicals such as The Universal Sample Mounting Fixture
bromine or hydroflouric acid solutions that would is a versatile spring-loaded fixture for
corrode the stainless steel from which most of the securing samples with pressure during
EMS fixtures are constructed. A special fixture for mounting using adhesives, waxes, and
satisfying this requirement has been developed. epoxies. The fixture can be used at
The Model l60 is made of PTFE and is designed to hold crystal wafers up room temperature or on a hot plate for
to 21⁄8” diameter while they are being polished with very corrosive heat curable epoxies or faster drying of
chemicals. The sample is held in place by vacuum and the sample is conductive paint. A scale on the
polished by rubbing the exposed sample against a suitable polishing cloth pressure rod allows the user to apply
soaked with the chemical solution. The Model 160 is ideal for damage free reproducible pressure, from very light to heavy. Two interchangeable trays
polishing of semiconductor materials with harsh chemicals and has been accommodate six different sized disk sample mounts (1/2”,3/4”,1”,1-1/4”,
used extensively for polishing GaAs with bromine-methanol solutions. 1-1/2”, and 2” diameters) and five angled SEM pin stubs (0°, 45°, 52°,
70°, and 90°). The angled SEM pin stubs are held with screws on the
SPECIAL FEATURES: angled surface so that the sample lies horizontally and the pressure applied
T PTFE construction provides suitable level of chemical resistance. vertically normal to the sample’s surface. The 70° angle is useful for pre-
T Vacuum mounting method ensures simple and uniform sample tilted EBSD sample holders and the 52° angle is useful for FIB holders.
mounting. The PTFE tip contacting the sample is compliant and easily cleaned if any
T Allows polishing of samples up to 21⁄8” diameter adhesive inadvertently comes in contact with it. The fixture adapts to a
T Suitable for bromine-methanol polishing of GaAs. large range in sample height.
Cat. # Description Qty. Cat. # Description Qty.
50164-60 Chemical Polishing Fixture - Model 160 each 50160-05 Universal Mounting Jig each

® Model 180 Stackable Lapping Trays Hand Lapping Tray

This model consists of a replaceable 12” square glass lapping plate mounted into a cast aluminum tray. The tray is
designed to serve as a secure surface for the glass plate while polishing with abrasive slurries, abrasive paper or
abrasive films. The area under the glass plate acts as a reservoir to contain the used slurry or fluids.
Cat.# Description Pack
50162-80 Model 180 Hand Lapping Tray each
50162-85 Replacement Glass Bowl 12x12”, 1⁄4” Thick each

422 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec12_412-430_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 3:49 PM Page 423

Materials Science & Metrology SECTION 12

INSTRUMENTATION
® Rail Polisher
FEATURES
T Low friction rails allow for a smooth glide of the fixture.
T Non-contact footing reduces abrasive film wear.
T Magnetic specimen mounts allow rapid and easy removal of
specimens for viewing.
T Peek-thru aperture in the magnetic specimens mounts allow for
transmitted light viewing.
T Variable loading is optional by adding weights or finger pressure
to the top of the fixture.
T Micrometer depth control allows precise control over specimen
thickness.
T Precisely crafted stainless steel construction ensures long life
and high precision.
This newly introduced Lapping and Polishing Fixture, which is designed
to accurately produce polished parallel, tapered or critically oriented
samples with minimal sub-surface damage.
Derived from the Model 195 MultiLap™ Polishing Tool, the Rail Polisher center slide. This gap corresponds to the amount of material to be
version exhibits significant difference from the mode l195 MultiLap. The removed and gradually decreases, as the sample is lapped or polished,
employment of the rail guide system allows for precision hand polishing until the final thickness is reached. Due to the ease of adjustment, a
of delicate specimens, which may be damaged on rotary polishing micrometer controlled fixture is generally used when desired sample
machines. Additionally, the rail guide system employs a non-contacting thickness will vary from sample to sample.
base, reducing wear on many types of abrasive films and media. The
Fixture Versatility:
Rail polisher incorporates up to 3 separate pistons, which are used for
holding the specimen during preparation and controlling the amount of EMS offers many different fixtures, which are suited for multiple
material to be removed. Specimens up to 1” in diameter can be polished applications. For example there are small fixtures such as the model
with controlled material removal for rapid viewing of the specimen in the 145 used in processing TEM and SEM specimens. Larger specimens
light microscope. Also the magnetic mounts have a circular aperture, such as wafers or optical devices can be processed using the model
150 or 155 lapping & polishing fixtures. Specific applications such as
which provide means for viewing the specimen in transmitted light.
edge polishing can also be accommodated with special mounting blocks
Overall, the Rail Polisher is a versatile instrument for performing any or special fixtures such as the models 147E or 155E. Additional options
controlled material removal process in the laboratory. are available for most fixtures such as vacuum mounting and higher
resolution thickness control by means of a digital indicator.
The Rail Polisher is available in either a one channel or a three
channel model.
Sample Mounting Fixtures are available with One Piston, Two Pistons
or Three Pistons.
Ordering
50010-11 Single Channel with 1 Piston Fixture each
50010-12 Single Channel with 2 Pistons Fixture each
Micrometer Controlled Accuracy 50010-13 Single Channel with 3 Pistons Fixture each
50010-31 Triple Channel with 1 Piston Fixture each
The micrometer method of thickness control employs a dial with 10Ìm
50010-32 Triple Channel with 2 Pistons Fixture each
graduations that is adjusted relative to the outside support ring to set the 50010-33 Triple Channel with 3 pistons Fixture each
amount of material to be removed. To set the dial, the sample is initially
Abrasive and Cloth for use with Rail Polisher
zeroed against the flat surface of the rail system and then the dial is
adjusted to create a gap between the outside support ring and the 50020-05 Al2O3 Rail Linear Abrasive Sheet, 0.05μm 25/pk
50020-1 Al2O3 Rail Linear Abrasive Sheet, 0.1μm 25/pk
50020-3 Al2O3 Rail Linear Abrasive Sheet, 0.3μm 25/pk
50020-10 Al2O3 Rail Linear Abrasive Sheet, 1.0μm 25/pk
Electron Microscopy Sciences offers a full range of 50020-30 Al2O3 Rail Linear Abrasive Sheet, 3.0μm 25/pk
equipment used in materials preparation for a variety of 50020-50 Al2O3 Rail Linear Abrasive Sheet, 5.0μm 25/pk
50021-10 Rayon Fine Polishing Cloth Rail Linear 10/pk
technological fields. Electron microscopy, metallography,
wafer lapping and polishing, failure analysis, crystal
orientation, plasma processing, MEMS and many other
applications are facilitated by our equipment. Please contact
us or see our comprehensive website, which includes our
complete line.

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 423
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec12_412-430_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 3:49 PM Page 424

SECTION 12 Materials Science & Metrology

INSTRUMENTATION
® Unidisc MK2 – Model 508
The Unidisc is designed to
produce 3mm diameter
discs for electropolishing,
and subsequent TEM
examination, from sample
strips.
Sample strips are fed into
the side of the Unidisc.
® Twin Jet Electropolishing System Model When the handle is pulled,
the strip is trapped
MS-501B (METALTHIN Mk4) between two rigid metal die
The METALTHIN Twin-Jet Electropolisher was originally developed for faces. The punch then
producing high quality thin foils from radioactive materials. It is robust, pierces the tightly held
compact, economical and easy to use. sheet and ejects the disc
The electrolyte tank, sample holder, thinning cell and tank base stand into the collection tray.
are machined from solid PVC to provide maximum resistance to Deformation is confined to
corrosive electrolytes. The Cell parts are held together by stainless steel a much localized shear
screws so that the Cell is easy to disassemble. The system incorporates zone at the edges of the
the accumulated experience of many years of use in Universities, disc away from the central
Industrial and Nuclear Research Centers and comprises a Thinning Cell region which is later
and Control/Power Supply plus the optional Unipump and Dewar Flask. thinned using either the
twin jet electropolisher or the single jet electropolisher. The punch and
New Features die are replaceable items made from hardened tool steel.
Thinning current control: During the thinning process, small changes in
The standard model produces 3mm discs for TEM from sheet/foil
electrical resistivity are caused by variations in the temperature of the
samples with minimum distortion.
electrolyte and by the thinning process itself. the CONTROL CURRENT
facility automatically maintains the current that is initially set by the Optional models produce discs from 1mm to 6mm in diameter.
operator. This avoids the need to constantly monitor and adjust the Examples of the use of these includes the production of 1mm discs of
setting. highly radioactive materials which are pressed into holes punched in
non-radioactive 3 mm discs and the composite disc thinned. This
The range of cell resistances to which automatic control of the thinning
reduces the radiation dose to the personnel involved. The larger disc
current can be applied are those that apply to the majority of electrolytes.
specimens are used in SEM.
If the conditions are outside the range of automatic control, the control
current switch will flash to shwo that manual control is required. Ordering information
T The external case has greatly increased strength and resistance T The standard Unidisc Mk2 is used for making 3mm disc from
to corrosive electrolytes. samples 0.004 to 0.006” (0.10 to 0.15mm) thick i.e. the optimum
T The electrical and instrumentation leads plug into the rear of the for electro polishing.
power supply to protect the connections from accidental contact T If the thickness of the sample is outside the 0.004 to 0.006: range,
with the electrolyte. the same punch is used but the die has to be changed because a
T The push switches are arranged in a single line on the front of different clearance between the punch and the die is required to
the power supply. make good flat discs without any flash around the edges.
T The push switches are fitted with flexible transparent covers to T Discs can be made from materials up to and including 1mm thick
protect them from accidental contact with the electrolyte. stainless steel. To order non-standard 3mm die quote: the
source material and thickness.
T The voltage and thinning current are displayed digitally.
T Punch and die sets and/or individual punches and dies can be
supplied to produce discs in the range of 1 to 6mm in diameter.
For complete information of this unit, please visit our web site: To obtain advice on the feasibility of your project quote: the
www.emsdiasum.com diameter of the disc required, the thickness and type of the
Ordering source material.
55220-501B Twin Jet Electropolisher – Model 501B each 55230-08 UniDisc Disc Punch Model MS508 each
55232-1 1mm Disc Die Set each
Suggested Accessories 55232-2 2mm Disc Die Set each
55222-32 UniPump Cryogenic Pump each 55231-2P Replacement Standard Punch (3mm) each
55222-40 Dewar Flask Optional Accessories each 55321-2D Replacement Standard Die (3mm) each
55222-06 Graduated Grinding Jig each
55230-08 UniDisc 3mm Disc Punch each

424 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec12_412-430_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 3:50 PM Page 425

Materials Science & Metrology SECTION 12

INSTRUMENTATION
® Plasma Cleaner – Model PC2000
The PC2000 is designed to simultaneously clean TEM specimens and
specimen stages, which minimizes, and in many cases, eliminates
contamination of the specimen being analyzed. The specimen holder
and specimen are subjected to reactive gas plasma prior to electron
microscope analysis
It has been well documented that low energy plasmas can be used to
reactively etch or remove organic materials found on the surface of
inorganic materials. This technology has been used by the industrial
community to clean semiconductor wafers and optical materials for
many years. A related technique is now being implemented in the field
of electron microscopy, where specimens can become contaminated
during the preparation process or from other sources. Current
instruments use tightly focused, intense beams that create carbon
deposits on the specimen surface due to organic contamination.
The specimen and the specimen stage are subjected to reactive gas
plasma which efficiently removes a wide range of contaminants from
critical surfaces. The procedure may be carried out prior to inserting the
specimen and specimen stage into the EM by either mounting the Ordering
specimen holder in the supplied port or by inserting the entire sample or 55300 Plasma Cleaner- Model PC 2000 each
sample assembly through the hinged upper port and into the 8"
Spare Parts and Accessories for PC 2000
diameter x 4" high chamber. The system can be used with any side
entry TEM holders, top entry TEM holders or with any sample that will fit 55300-1 Specimen Stage Adapter for JEOL side entry holders each
inside the large, easily accessible chamber. (for 100CX)
55300-2 Specimen Stage adapter for JEOL side entry holders each
FEATURES (1210,1220,1230,2010,2010F, 3010, 3000F & 4010)
55300-3 Specimen Stage Adapter for Philips, side entry holder each
T Suitable for all side entry and top entry TEM holders. Large
55300-4 Specimen Stage Adapter for Zeiss, side entry holders each
chamber also accommodates specimens up to 7" diameter and
55300-5 Specimen Stage Adapter for Hitachi, side entry holders each
3" high for cleaning tweezers, specimen mounts, etc.
55300-6 Specimen Stage Adapter for LEO, side entry holders each
T Digital LCD displays, indicate forward power in watts, reflected 55300-7 Specimen Stage Adapter for Topcon, side entry holders each
power, DC bias and vacuum level. 55300-8 Specimen Stage Adapter, Blank for customer applications each
T Compatible with Argon, Oxygen, CF4, and other gas mixtures. 55300-20 Specimen Stage Adapter for Hitachi, top entry holders each
T System comes standard with 3 ports which allow simultaneous 55300-21 Specimen Stage Adapter for VG, top entry holders each
cleaning of multiple holders or insertion of analytical tools into 55300-22 Specimen Stage Adapter for other top entry holders each
the plasma chamber. 55300-30 Vacuum Storage Container for JEOL, side entry holders (100X) each
55300-31 Vacuum Storage Container for JEOL, side entry holders each
T Power level can be optimized for each specimen type and gas (1210, 1220, 1230, 2010, 2010F, 3010, 3000F, 40100)
species to maximize cleaning rate without risk of etching the 55300-32 Vacuum Storage Container for Philips, side entry holders each
specimen stage or the chamber. 55300-33 Vacuum Storage Container for Zeiss, side entry holders each
T Viewport allows easy monitoring of the process. 55300-34 Vacuum Storage Container for Hitachi, side entry holders each
T Safety interlocked controls simplify operation - ideal for 55300-35 Vacuum Storage Container for LEO, side entry holders each
multi-user environments. 55300-36 Vacuum Storage Container for Topcon, side entry holders each
55300-40 Port Plug for JEOL Specimen Stage Adapter (100X) each
55300-41 Port Plug for JEOL Specimen Stage Adapter each
For complete information on this model, see our interactive web site (1210, 1220, 1230, 2010, 2010F, 3010, 3000F, 40100)
@www.emsdiasum.com 55300-42 Port Plug for Philips Specimen Stage Adapter each
55300-43 Port Plug for Zeiss Specimen Stage Adapter each
55300-44 Port Plug for Hitachi Specimen Stage Adapter each
55300-45 Port Plug for LEO Specimen Stage Adapter each
55300-46 Port Plug for Topcon Specimen Stage Adapter each
55300-50 Chamber Gasket (2 required per unit), each each
55300-51 Vacuum Pumping Station, 4 Station each

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 425
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec12_412-430_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 3:50 PM Page 426

SECTION 12 Materials Science & Metrology

INSTRUMENTATION

® Plasma Etcher – Model PE 2000 ® Reactive Ion Etcher – Model RIE 2000
The PE 2000 RF Plasma Etcher is specifically designed for reactive gas The RIE 2000 Reactive Ion Etcher is specifically designed for anisotropic
plasma etching and surface treatments. The unit is capable of 150 watts etching of microelectronic devices. This R&D sized instrument is designed
RF forward power at 13.56 MHz and up to four gas processing. The to simulate the operation of larger production instruments in process
system is ideal for R&D applications where single sample processing is development and pilot production applications. The RIE 2000 is a turbo
needed and total control of each process parameter is necessary. pumped system capable of reaching a base pressure of 10-6 torr. This low
Processes such as photoresist strips, BPSG removal, oxide and nitride base pressure provides a clean etch environment and highly anisotropic
layer etch, surface treatment of plastics and plasma cleaning are typical etch without undercutting by eliminating residual species within the
applications. Samples up to 6" diameter as well as irregular shaped chamber prior to starting the etch process. Wafers up to 6" diameter as
substrates can be accommodated in the 200mm diameter vacuum well as irregular shaped substrates can be accommodated in the 200mm
chamber. A fully manual control system coupled with digital readouts diameter vacuum chamber. A fully manual control system coupled with
and integral matching network with switching type power generator offer digital readouts on the RIE 2000 offer a wide range of experimental etch
a wide range of experimental etch parameters parameters, and is not limited by routine, automated processing ranges.

FEATURES FEATURES
T High etch rates at moderate power levels of 100 watts forward T Manual controls make it possible to process in a wide range of
power - 200 Å/minute for oxide and 500Å/minute for nitride. vacuum pressure levels using an unlimited combination of
reactive species.
T Stainless steel gas system with three-position feed provides
maximum etch uniformity and the best possible utilization of the T A stainless steel gas system with integral over the sample
reactive species. Includes a separate vent to atmosphere line. shower gas ring provides maximum etch uniformity and the best
possible utilization of the reactive species.
T Gas lines, fittings and stage assembly are all stainless steel
construction and designed for corrosive applications – A Fomblin T High etch rates at moderate power levels of 100 watts forward
charged corrosive series rotary vane pump is included. power can be achieved - greater than 200 Å/minute for oxide
and 500Å/minute for nitride.
T Safety interlocks prevent mis-operation thereby protecting the
T System is supplied with two manual gas channels, but up to four
user and the system.
mass flow channels can be added.
T Manual controls, with digital readouts, make it possible to
T Gas lines, fittings, and stage assembly are all stainless steel
process in a range of vacuum pressure levels using an unlimited
construction and designed for corrosive applications. Ceramic bear-
combination of reactive species including oxygen, fluorine and ing turbo molecular pump and corrosive series rotary vane pump
chlorine both are minimal maintenance, long life vacuum components.
T System is supplied with two manual gas channels, but up to four T Safety interlocks prevent miss-operation thereby protecting the
mass flow channels can be added. user and the system.
Ordering
For complete information on this model, see our interactive web site
55320 Reactive Ion Etcher- Model RIE 2000 each
@www.emsdiasum.com
Spare Parts and Accessories for RIE 2000
Ordering 55320-01 Quartz Chamber, 8” OD x 5” High each
55310 Plasma Etcher- Model PE 2000 each 55320-02 RF Shield for Quartz Chamber each
55320-03 Stainless Steel Chamber with View-Port each
Spare Parts and Accessories for PE 2000
55320-04 Oil-Free Diaphragm Pump to Back Turbo Pump each
55312-03 Stainless Steel Chamber with Viewport each (in place of rotary vane pump)
55310-2 Chamber Gasket (2 required per unit) each 55320-05 Mass Flow Controller, One Channel each
55320-06 Mass Flow Controller, Two Channel each
55320-07 Mass Flow Controller, Four Channel each
55320-08 Cold Cathode Gauge for accurate reading of base each
pressure (requires stainless steel chamber 55320-03)

426 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec12_412-430_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 3:50 PM Page 427

Materials Science & Metrology SECTION 12

INSTRUMENTATION
® Ion Beam Sputter Deposition and Etching System Model IBS/e
The Model IBS/e is a high vacuum thin film deposition system designed to precisely deposit
sub-nanometer grain, conductive coatings onto specimens prior to examination in the electron
microscope. Thin, conductive films are deposited onto specimens to prevent charging effects
and to enhance contrast. Thin films are deposited using two ion beam sources directed at a
target material, eliminating radiation or heating effects common with other coating techniques.
Extremely thin, continuous metal or carbon films are deposited without risking damage to
delicate features present on the specimen. Virtually any target material can be used for ion
beam deposition with precise control over the deposition thickness. An optional third ion source
allows specialized ion beam etching techniques to be employed. The ability to deposit
amorphous, continuous films makes the IBS/e system ideal for high resolution electron
microscopy techniques.
Applications Film Thickness Monitor
Specimens examined in high resolution electron microscopes utilizing field emission electron Monitoring the film thickness precisely is done with a
sources demand fine grain, ultra-thin conductive coatings for image capture and specimen quartz crystal thickness monitor (QCTM). The QTCM will
analysis. Low voltage SEM specimens must frequently be coated with a conducting film to precisely monitor and repeatably terminate the
reduce charging and enhance contrast in images. Ultra-thin films on specimens for examination sputtering process at preset film thickness or present
by both AFM and STM are sometimes needed to decrease surface resistivity, bind small time, whichever occurs first.
particles to a substrate, and reduce distortion from tip/specimen interaction. All of these
Targets
techniques require uniform thin films to be deposited on the specimens of interest without heat
Four different target materials are selectable for
or radiation. Standard coating techniques such as DC diode, vacuum evaporation, and other
deposition without breaking vacuum. Each target can be
thermally driven methods are incapable of handling these requirements. The IBS/e is capable of
rotated into the sputter position simply by rotating a
precisely depositing thin films without exposing specimens to damaging photon flux. Additional
thumbwheel. The ability of the IBS/e to produce oxide
applications include producing SEM samples for “channeling contrast”, Electron Back Scatter
free coatings without liquid nitrogen trapping allow
Diffraction (EBSD) Patterns, Orientation Imaging Microscope (OIM) and multilayer deposition for
refractory metals such as chromium, tungsten, and
research and development applications. Reactive etching and deposition can be achieved by
tantalum to be deposited without problems. For
introducing reactive gas such as oxygen or nitrogen through an optional micro-mixing valve.
complete information of this product, please visit our
Ion Sources web site @ www.emsdiasum.com
The IBS/e ion sources are specifically designed for simple operation and fast servicing. Both
Specifications
sources are directed at a target material which is sputtered with ejection energies of < 40 eV
onto the specimen. Operating at 10 kV, the ion sources produce a beam flux of 15mA/cm2 to Vacuum System
produce a uniform distribution over the entire specimen. Ion beam current is displayed digitally Roughing Pump: ........................................40 I/m N2
Turbo Pump: ............................................250 I/s/ N2
for quick evaluation of the operating conditions. The sources are easily dismounted through the
Base Pressure: ............................................10-7 torr
vacuum chamber door. 24 hour factory Quick Exchange Service is available for the anode Operating Pressure: ....x 10-5 torr (10 to 15 minutes)
assemblies. Vacuum Gauge: ....................................Cold cathode
An etching ion source is optional for nano-matching samples prior to sputter deposition. Ion Sources
Etching improves image contrast on highly polished cross section SEM samples and can Beam Energy: ....................................2.5kV to 10 kV
expose interesting aspects of various types of biological samples. Beam Flux: ..............................................15mA/cm2
IRT Stage
Specimen Stage Control Tilt Range - Deposition Mode: ................0 to +/- 99°
The Independent Rotate and Tilt Stage (IRT) drives specimens under the sputtered material with Tilt Range - Etch Mode: ........................0 to +/- 99°
a wide range of parameters. Both the tilt and rotate axes are independently controlled to Tilt Range - With Large Area Stage: ......0 to +/- 17 °
uniformly coat specimens. The IRT allows directional or rotary shadowing at fixed angles as Specimen Stage: ................2" Standard; 4" Optional
well as variable speed controls for both tilt and rotation. The variable tilt angle rate improves Tilt Angle Rate: ............................................Variable
uniformity by decreasing the tilt rate as the tilt angle increases. Specimens can be parked at Rotational Speed: ..................................0 to 40 RPM
180° to shield them during target oxide removal. Gas
Source Gas: ..................................Ar, 99.999% pure
The standard specimen stage can accommodate 2" wafers as well as SEM mounts and TEM Pressure: ......................................2 sccm @ 5-7 PSI
specimens. Using the Large Area Stage (LAS) accommodates specimen wafers up to 4" Vent Gas: ................................................N2 @ 5 PSI
diameter for ion beam sputter deposition. Power/Utilities
110 VAC / 15 A ..........................................50/60 Hz
High Vacuum System 220 VAC / 7.5 A ..........................................50/60 Hz
The Model IBS/e creates a clean, hydrocarbon free, high vacuum automatically using a
turbomolecular pump. Vacuum level is displayed digitally using a cold cathode high vacuum
gauge. The system reaches a base pressure of 10-7 torr within minutes, allowing oxide-free See Ordering Information on the
metal films to be deposited with the need for liquid nitrogen trapping. next page...

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 427
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec12_412-430_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 3:50 PM Page 428

SECTION 12 Materials Science & Metrology

INSTRUMENTATION
® Ion Beam Sputter Deposition and Etching
System Model IBS/e (continued) ® Model 250 - 2-Axis
Goniometer
Ordering The Model 250 2-Axis Goniometer is
used to hold crystals in the process of
Please specify VOLTAGE option when ordering (120 or 240 VAC)
determining crystallographic orientation
55330 Ion Beam Sputter Deposition and Etching System each using either Laue back reflection or
Model IBS/e
optical orientation techniques. A crystal
Spare Parts and Accessories for IBS/e can be rotated 360 degrees adjustment
55332-01 Etching Ion Source (mounted in IBS/e when each while held in the plane, which is
purchased) adjustable ±30° with respect to the
55332-02 Replacement Source Anode Assembly each goniometer mounting surface. There is
55332-03 Large Area Stage, 4” (1000mm) each Model 250 mounted on
55332-Ar Ar Regulator each 0.2° vernier on the 360° adjustment, model 25002
55332-N2 N2 Regulator each and 0.1° vernier on the ±30° adjustment.
Specimen Carriers The goniometer combines rugged stainless steel construction with ease
and accuracy of adjustment. After orientation, the model 250 can be
55332-10 Standard, 1.25” diameter platform carrier each
55332-11 Standard, 2” diameter platform carrier each mounted on the following equipment for subsequent processing:
55332-12 ⁄8” diameter pin, 1.25” diameter
1
each T Oriented Crystal Lapping T Low Speed Diamond Wheel
55332-13 4 position, 10mm stub diameter, 1.25” diameter each Fixture Saw
55332-14 3 position, 12mm stub diameter, 1.25” diameter each
55332-15 Stub for Hitachi FESEM Specimen Mount each
T Electrolytic Polishing T Acid Saw
55332-16 Flat Pinch Specimen Carrier, 1.25” diameter each Instrument T Wire Saw
55331-17 TEM 3mm Grid Specimen Carrier, 1.25” diameter each Dimensions:
Targets Model 250: 2”W x 2”D x 1.5”H (50 x 50 x 37.5mm)
55332-30 Potassium Bromide Scintillator (for beam observation) each ® Accessories
55332-31 2
Gold, 0.008” foil each
55332-32 Platinum, 0.020” foil, (1” x 0.0106) each ® Model 25002 - Track Mount
55332-33 2
Palladium, 0.020” foil each The Model 25002 Track Mount is designed to fit either 2.19” or 1.99”
55332-34 2
Gold/Palladium, 0,020” foil each
55332-35 Carbon, 0.125” each
wide tracks. It has a horizontal adjustment perpendicular to the x-ray or
55332-36 Tantalum, 0.125” each optical beam and a fixed height of 3.625” from the track to the center
55332-37 Tungsten, 0.125” each of the mounted Model 250 Goniometer.
55332-38 Chromium, 0.125” each
55332-39 Iridium, 0.020” each
Dimensions: Model 25002: 2.75”W x 3”D x 4.5”H (70 x 76 x 14mm)
55332-40 Silver, 0.020 foil each ® Model 25005 - Track Mount
2

55332-41 Nickel, 0.125” each

2
Not recommended for high resolution imaging. All others suggested for magnification < 200kX The Model 25005 Track Mount is identical to the Model 25002 except
it has a fixed height of 34” from the track to the center of the mounted
Retrofit Options
Model 250 Goniometer
55332-50 Quartz Crystal Thickness Monitor each
55332-51 SI 08 Ion Source (SI08 Ion Source retrofits to a second each Dimensions: Model 25005: 2.75”W x 3”D x 5”H (70 x 76 x 127mm)
sputtering or etching port. Needle Valve, connecting
Ar tube and SHV high voltage cable included) ® Model 66005 - 2-Axis Goniometer
55332-52 SI O8 Ion Source Mating Flange each The Model 66005 is a 2-axis goniometer used for orienting and cutting
55332-53 E IRT Stage for IBS/e each
single crystals. It can be mounted on an x-ray track for orientation using
55332-54 E IRT Stage Controller for IBS/e each
the Model 66011 Track Mount and then transferred to the Model 660
Spare Parts
for cutting. With the sample mounted to the goniometer, the vertical
55330-01 SI O8 Source Spare Pack (6 sets). Includes: 6 qty. each axis can be rotated 360˚ within 0.2˚ while the horizontal axis can be
Front Cathodes / 6 qty. Rear Cathodes / 36 qty. rotated +⁄-50˚ from the 0.2˚ vernier on the arm.
Calibrated Ceramic Insulators
55330-02 Front Shield for SI O8 Ion Source each Dimensions: 2” (W) x 2” (D) x 2.5” (H)
55330-03 Rear Shield for SI O8 Ion Source each
55330-04 Anode for SI O8 Ion Source each ® Model 66011 -
55330-05 HV Conductor for SI O8 Ion Source each Track Mount
55330-06 Rear Cathode for SI O8 Ion Source each The Model 66011 Track Mount is
55330-07 Front Cathode for SI O8 Ion Source each designed to mount the Model 66005
55330-08 IBS Chamber /eIRT O-ring Set each 2-Axis Goniometer onto a 1.99” or
55330-09 SI O8 Source Alignment Tool each
2.19” wide x-ray or optical track for
55330-10 Calibrated Ceramic Insulator (6 qty.) each
55330-11 RP Mist Eliminator Cartridge each crystal orientation.
55330-12 High Voltage Cable (for model IBS TM200) each Dimensions: 3.25”(W) x 3”(D) x 5”(H)
55330-13 Target Blanks (Al) each
Model 66005 shown mounted on
Model 66011 Track Mount

428 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec12_412-430_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 3:50 PM Page 429

Materials Science & Metrology SECTION 12

INSTRUMENTATION
® Model 260 - ® Model 25015 - Lapping
3-Axis and Polishing Fixture
Goniometer The Model 25015 is designed to
complement the Model 250 2-Axis
The Model 260 3-Axis Goniometer and is used to lap or polish
Goniometer is constructed of oriented crystals either by hand or on a
hard-anodized aluminum and rotating polishing wheel. The Model 250
is used to hold crystals in the Goniometer can be mounted on an x-ray
process of determining track for orientation and then transferred
crystallographic orientation directly into the Model 25015 for lapping or
using either Laue back polishing. The Model 250 can also be
reflection or optical orientation techniques. (See EMS Model 210 Optical transferred to an EMS saw prior to using the Model 25010. The Model
Orientation Instrument). The integral track mount is designed to fit a 2.19” 25015 utilizes a counterbalanced center slide to completely offset the
wide or narrower x-ray or optical track. There is +/-25˚ of rotation in two weight of the center slide and the goniometer and is capable of lapping
of the axes and a full 360° of rotation in the other. The Model 260 is or polishing oriented crystals within 0.25˚.
designed so that a 2” diameter crystal mounted on the goniometer with a
1
⁄2” high mounting block is 3.625 inches above the track. The P/N 50176-
61 riser can be used to raise the Model 260 by 1 inch when working with ® The Model
smaller crystals. The Model 260 can also be mounted on the following 210 - Optical
EMS equipment for subsequent processing: Orientation
T Model 850 Wire Saw Instrument
Dimensions: 3.5” W x 3.5” D x 3.25” H The Model 210 Optical
Orientation Instrument is
® Model 265 - used to determine the orientation of a crystal or to align a crystal so that
3-Axis Goniometer specifically oriented surfaces can be cut or polished. The Model 210
The Model 265 is a larger version uses a laser beam that is reflected off a cleaved or preferentially etched
of the Model 260 and is mounted crystal surface back onto a target that is perpendicular to the laser
on a 7” square flat base, which can beam. Optical orientation is an orientation technique that can be used as
be adapted for a wide range of an alternative to more hazardous and expensive x-ray techniques.
applications. There is +⁄-25˚ of
rotation in two of the axes and a full Ordering Crystal Orientation Equipment and Accessories
Description Cat. #
360˚ of rotation in the other. The
Model 250 - 2-axis Goniometer (include mounting blocks
Model 265 is ideal for the and orientation software) 50176-50
orientation and cutting of large crystals Model 25002 - Track Mount (for 3.625” height) 50176-51
and can easily be adapted to existing equipment. Model 25005 - Track Mount (for 4” height) 50176-52
Dimensions: 7” (W) x 7”(D) x 5”(H) Model 25015 - Lapping & Polishing fixtures (used to hold
Model 250 for Polishing) 50176-53
® Model 170 - Multi-Axis Lapping Fixture Model 260 - 3-axis Goniometer
1” Riser for Model 260
50176-60
50176-61
The Model 170 was designed in Model 265 - 3-axis Goniometer 50176-65
collaboration with Lawrence Model 66005 - 2-axis Goniometer (used on Model 660) 50180-05
Livermore National Laboratory and Model 66011 - Track Mount (for 3.625” to 4” height)
Max Planck Institute for the used to hold the Model 66005 50180-11
precision orientation and lapping or Model 170 - Multi-axis Lapping Fixture (used to polish
more than one sample) 50176-70
polishing of single crystals. This
Model 17011 - Track Mount (for 3.625” height used on Model 170) 50176-71
design is based on the work of Model 210 - Optical Orientation Instrument (includes laser
Mader et al at MPI and is capable of w/o Goniometer or Track Mount) 50176-10
applying a controlled force to Spare PartsDescription
delicate samples. The advantage of Set Screw A for Model 260 50177-10
the Model 170 is that it can be Set Screw B for Model 260 50177-11
mounted directly on an x-ray track Set Screw C for Model 260 50177-12
for Laue back reflection. Precision of Set Screw D for Model 260 50177-13
0.1˚ in orientation can be obtained Brass Plug for Model 260 50177-20
by double exposure with 180˚ Adapter to hold Model 260 onto Model 660 Saw 50177-25
Adapter to hold Model 250 onto Model 66007 (see Model 660 Saw) 50177-26
rotation of the fixture in the optional
1” Stainless Steel Mounting Block (for use with Model 250, 66005) 50177-50
x-ray track mount. 0.75” Stainless Steel Mounting Block (for use with Model 250, 66005) 50177-51
0.5” Stainless Steel Mounting Block (for use with Model 250, 66005) 50177-52
0.37” Stainless Steel Mounting Block (for use with Model 250, 66005) 50177-53

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 429
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec12_412-430_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 3:50 PM Page 430

SECTION 12 Materials Science & Metrology

Ordering
50130-20 Model 520 MicroCleave™ Complete Kit

Complete Kit includes:

Product # Description Qty
50130-50 Model 150MC Lapping Fixture each
50130-51 #5201 Grid Bending Jig with Cover each
50130-52 Engraved Mounting Block for 150MC 3/pk
50130-53 PTFE Block, 1x1x0.50” 5/pk
50130-54 Post-it Block each
50130-55 Lantern Slide each
50162.80 Model 180 Lapping Tray each
MicroCleave™ Kit - Model 520 50162-81 Angle Guide for Model 180 each
The MicroCleave™ technique is a relatively simple and inexpensive 50130-56 Silicone Mat each
method of producing superior cross sectional TEM specimens. For 70030 Coarse Scribe each
62107-ST Micro Scribe 15/pk
speed in preparation, it is unsurpassed. 50130-59 Tab Grid (100/pk) 5/pk
One limitation of the technique is that it does require the substrate material 71700 Lens-Tissue each
to be cleaved or fractured. For this reason, it has been applied almost 50130-60 Transparent Ruler 5/pk
exclusively to semiconductor materials. Recently, the technique has been 60968 Tri-pour Beaker with Lid, 50ml, 10/pk each
extended to other substrates, such as glass, silicon carbide, quartz, 50130-61 Petri Dish with Mounted Slide each
50130-62 Petri Dish with lids 5/pk
sapphire, and other hard materials. It is particularly well suited for rapidly 71140 100-position Grid Storage Box 5/pk
examining coatings and thin films very soon after they are deposited. 50130-63 Silver Epoxy each
66100-20 Red Sable Brush, Size 2/0 each
50130-64 Mixing Tray (Aluminum Dish), 10/pk each
72350 Hot/Stirrer Plate each
50160-25 Cooling Tray each
72703-D Tweezers #5, 45 Degree Bent 5/pk
50419-20 Quick Stick - Mounting Wax each
50130-66 Lint-Free Cloth, size 4 x 4”, 10/pk each
50350-35 Diamond Lapping Film, 30 micron each
50130-67 Squeegee each

50130-21 Model 520-B - Basic MicroCleave™ Kit

Basic Kit includes:

Product # Description Qty
50130-50 Lapping Fixture, Model 150MC each
50130-51 #5201 Grid Bending Jig with Cover each
An X-ray mirror consisting of 45 layers Multiple Quantum Well structure grown 50130-52 Engraved Mounting Block for 150MC 3/pk
of alternating Mo/Amorphous Si (7.0 by MBE showing the thickness terraces 50130-53 PTFE Block 5/pk
nm period) on Si substance. Image possible with a MicroCleave™ sample. 50130-54 Post-it Block each
courtesy of John McCaffrey – National Courtesy of Scott Walk – Materials
50162-80 Model 180 Lapping Tray each
Research Council of Canada Directorate WPAFB. (Now with PPG
Industries)
50130-61 Petri Dish with Mounted Slide each
50162-81 Angle Guide for Model 180 each
FEATURES:
T Relatively simple and inexpensive method for the preparation of
TEM cross sections, where specific information is not required. References:
T Ideal when sample availability is limited as it requires very little
starting material. 1. Ultramicroscopy, 38 (1991) 149, John P. McCaffrey.
T While originally designed for semiconductors, the technique has 2. TEM Samples of semiconductors Prepared by a Small-Angle
been applied to glass, silicon carbide, quartz, sapphire, and Cleavage Technique, J.P. McAffrey, Materials Research Society, Vol.
other brittle materials. 254 (1992).
T No ion milling is required. Therefore, no amorphization, no heat- 3. Microscopy Research and Technique, 24 91993) 180, j. p. McCaffrey.
ing effects, no ion implantation, and no preferential sputtering.
T The MicroCleave™ sample is ideally suited for rapid crystallo- 4. A simplified Method for Modifying TEM Copper Grids for Use with
graphic orientation and determination in the TEM Small Angle Cleavage Technique, Microscopy Today (96-4) (1996,
T The MicroCleave™ technique is fast and typically requires Scott D. Walck.
preparation times of less than 1 hour. This makes it particularly 5. The Small Angle Cleavage Technique: An Update, Scott D. Walck and
well suited for rapid examination of coatings and thin films John McCaffrey. Materials Research Society, Vol. 480 (1997).
shortly after deposition.

430 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec13_431_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 4:40 PM Page 431

SECTION 13

Silicon Wafer Cleaving Systems,

Tools, & General Supplies
Cleaving System
Adhesives
Membrane and Gel Boxes
Hand-held Micro & Mini Tools
Wafer Tweezers

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 431
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec13_432-444_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 5:08 PM Page 432

SECTION 13 Silicon Wafer Cleaving Systems, Tools, & General Supplies

Meet the LatticeAx™

the small, accurate,
fast, low-cost
cleaving solution,
suitable for any lab.

® LatticeAx™ Cleaving System

Overview Fast – 5 Minute Process Applications
The LatticeAx™ is a precision cleaver that fits in the palm of your • Quick targeting with variable zoom • Site specific cross-section for SEM
hand. In an amazingly small footprint (4" cube, 100mm³), the patent- • Digitally displayed real-time analysis
pending "Ax" and process are designed to assist the user to cleave imaging • Target localization prior to FIB or broad
site specific targets, as well as wafers, strips, or pieces to precisely ion beam
10-μm Targeting Accuracy*
sized samples with localized targets. One of the smallest, most • Downsize samples for SEM with height
efficient silicon wafer cleaving tools in the world, the LatticeAx™ is • Advanced vision package with
restriction
sure to revolutionize your workflow. 5-μm resolution*
• Cleaving to create uniform samples
• 1688 x 1248 UXGA CCD Camera for other analysis tools with non-wafer
The LatticeAx™ features and process optimizes the very basic
and dedicated SW* scale stages
elements of the manual cleaving technique and overcomes manual
cleaving disadvantages, such as lack of accuracy and repeatability. Robust – Simple • Vertical, mirror image cleaving for
This machine-assisted hybrid cleaving tool bridges the gap between Operation By Any User photonics analysis
manual scribing and fully automated cleaving. It increases success • All components are integrated on Setup Requirements
rate by any user while keeping costs down. It takes little training and a single platform
• Flat, stable surface to support the
users will be “cleaving in minutes and experts in a day.” • All movements controlled via X,Y LatticeAx™ at least 18" x 24" or
stage, Rotation table and 41cm x 61cm surface space
microscope coarse and fine focus*
See how it works... • Power for the vacuum pump (110V or
* specific to the new LatticeAx™ 300
Learn how to do it... 220V depending on local requirements)
Versatile – wide range of • Computer running Windows 7 or XP
We’ve added video content
to our website to help you sample size, substrate type with mouse, keyboard, monitor, video
get to know our latest and top layers cable to the monitor
products even better!
• Si-GaAs-Sapphire • Polyimide Options
Stop by and see what it’s • The Wafer Cleaving Station • Wafer
all about. • Cu • Passivation
• Resist • Films Cleaving Kit • Marker-Scriber Kit
• Lattice Scriber • CleanBreak Pliers
432 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec13_432-444_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 5:08 PM Page 433

Silicon Wafer Cleaving Systems, Tools, & General Supplies SECTION 13

LatticeAx™ 110 LatticeAx™ 220
Every user can cleave samples with wide The LatticeAx™ 220 is the most popular cleaving
variation of size, thickness and materials at high tool delivering 20-μm cleaving accuracy.
quality within 2 minutes. The LatticeAx™ 220 combines the patent pending
By using the Patent Pending LatticeAx™ base LatticeAx™ base with a digital microscope and
platform, every user can cleave samples with real-time image acquisition and display software
wide variation in size, thickness and materials at (SW) to achieve a cleaving accuracy of 20-μm
high quality within 2 minutes. It uses precision and high quality cross-section surface in <5
knobs to produce fine, reproducible surface minutes by any user. The LatticeAx™ 220 accepts
indentation followed by slow, controlled cleaving. samples with a wide range size, thickness and
The indenter is controlled by a stage with 5-μm material.
steps. Combine this tool with your own optical The standard configuration includes 1 each:
microscope to improve cleaving accuracy.
• LatticeAx™ 110 precision cleaving tool
• LA Diamond Indenter – used for indenting the
sample surface, pre-installed on the LatticeAx™
• USB digital microscope including: Specifications
Magnification adjustable, 10-90x <50 micron accuracy at 40x camera
Interface USB 2.0 magnification
Software with measurement and calibration 25 microns achievable at 90x camera
features (Windows XP, Windows 7 required) magnification
• A robust stand:
13" x 17" heavy duty work surface
The standard configuration includes 1 each: Industrial vertical and horizontal poles and
• LatticeAx™ 110 precision wafer cleaving tool boom for mounting and operating the USB
Digital Microscope
• LA Diamond Indenter – used for indenting the
sample surface, pre-installed on the LatticeAx™ • V-115A or V-220A Vacuum pump (115V) or
(220V) for securing wafer sample during
• V-115A or V-220A Vacuum pump (115V) or indentation (hose included)
(220V) for securing wafer sample during
indentation (hose included) • LatticeAx™ transport case

• LatticeAx™ transport case • Manual and installation instructions

• Manual and installation instructions Computer and display not included

The Process
Using the LatticeAx™, wafer cleaving is accomplished in three basicsteps that compliment existing skill sets used in wafer analysis.
It’s simple. Just SET... INDENT... CLEAVE... RESULT

Select target under high magnification A precision control knob coupled with Cleaving position consists of a set Cleave is always
(up to 80x) and use micrometer to a sharp indenter tip results in fine cleaving pin and a cleaving bar used clean and precise.
position the indenter tip. indentation at the edge of the sample. to apply uniform pressure to achieve a
controlled cleave.

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 433
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec13_432-444_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 5:09 PM Page 434

SECTION 13 Silicon Wafer Cleaving Systems, Tools, & General Supplies

® LatticeAx™ Cleaving System (continued)
LatticeAx™ 300
LatticeAx™ 300 is Electron Microscopy Sciences' highest performance cleaving solution. It integrates
vision package with 5-μm optical resolution and precise control of all axes for accurate positioning.
LatticeAx™ 300 delivers a cleaving accuracy of 10-μm in <5 min. The patent pending LatticeAx™ base is
integrated with a complete vision package that includes a monocular microscope with 5-μm optical
resolution, color CCD camera and real-time image acquisition and display SW, as well as, X-Y-R stage
and industrial stand and poles. This dedicated cleaving workstation is used to survey, align, indent,
cleave, and inspect any sample by any user.
Features
The LatticeAx™ 300, a fully integrated cleaving solution. Using precision knobs and following a set of
instructions, it allows every user to create fine, reproducible surface indentation followed by slow,
controlled sample cleaving of a wide variety of semiconductor materials.
The LatticeAx™ 300 system consists of:
• A vision package, a monocular microscope, color CCD camera with image display software, coarse
focusing mount, fine focus, and fiber optic ring lighting. The result, 5-μm optical imaging resolution
and variable zoom digitally displayed in real-time.
• A robust setup integrated into a single platform to support the vision package: 13" x 17” heavy duty
worksurface, industrial pole and boom, X-Y-R sample positioning stage.
This solution offers a dedicated station to survey that any user can use to align, indent, cleave, and
inspect samples with cleaving accuracy of 10 micron and throughput of <5 minutes/cross-section.

LatticeAx™ 300 Process

SET
• X-Y-R sample positioning stage to support sample positioning
• Complete high accuracy vision system with SW to survey and select the AOI
• Integrated micrometer with 5-μm steps enables the user to accurately move and position the LatticeAx™
Results indenter tip over the selected target or cleaving line
INDENT
• The LatticeAx™ diamond indenter indentation: L: 1mm (from leading edge), W: 10-μm, D: several microns
(user adjustable)
• A control knob allows the user to move the indenter in Z and control the depth of the indentation based on the
sample type
• Indentation step occurs under high magnification
CLEAVE
• Cleaving step taken place under high magnification
• 3-point cleaving process – 2 teeth coming from the top (on the cleaving bar) and one tip under the sample
• Back wall line indicates the indentation positioning such that the force will be equal on both sides
• Constant force cleaving bar creates uniform force. Slow cleave is an option.
Site-Specific Cleaving of Etched TSVs • The cleaving bar can be moved in Z by holding on the bar or using a control knob
Cross section of SEMATECH 5x50 micron TSVs. Specifications
A single tool (LatticeAx) process was used to simply Cleaving accuracy: +/-10-μm from selected target Cleaving cycle time: 5 minutes
cleave through the etched vias and the image in the Cleaving accuracy is based on the indentation Actual indentation and cleaving steps take <1 minute.
SEM without any other preparation. accuracy relative to the target (cleaving line). The remaining time is predicted for sample survey,
The LatticeAx™ integrates all the tools to allow the target identification and line drawings as needed.
user to control the indentation location based on a This time can fluctuate based on user familiarity with
viewed target. the target and the target type, size and location.
Sample size Vision system
Minimum Sample size: Monocular spec Matching Pixel Size
Use the Ax for the full set-indent-cleave Prime lens: 6.5X Zoom (microns)
– minimum sample size 9mm width Adaptor: 1.0x Low mag: 5.08
For <9mm, use the Ax to survey the Working Distance (mm): 92 High mag: 10.55
target and create the fine indentation, System mag Depth of Field
while cleaving manually off the LatticeAx™ Low mag: 0.70 Low mag: 0.95
Maximum sample size: ½ of 12” wafer High mag: 4.50 High mag: 0.10
Larger samples can be attempted but N.A. Objective Color CCD Camera Spec
Cleaving Accurately Flip Chip Copper Bumps
more complicated to handle Low mag: 0.023 Color USB 2.0 ultra-small
A multi-tool process was used to prepare cross
Thickness of sample: ‘out of the package’ High mag: 0.071 CCD camera, 1/1.8",
sections of copper bumps. The LatticeAx was used
die to a fully processed sample (not Resolve limit (UM) UXGA, 1620x1236, 15
to cleave close to a specific row of copper bumps for
including package material) Low mag: 14.50 FPS, 28X28X42 mm
quick, final broad argon ion beam milling.
High mag: 4.70

434 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec13_432-444_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 5:09 PM Page 435

Silicon Wafer Cleaving Systems, Tools, & General Supplies SECTION 13

Accessories The Wafer Cleaving

Station
Wafer Cleaving Kit
The Wafer Cleaving Station
The complete tool set to get from includes a large cleaving mat,
wafer to cleanly cleaved pieces. scribes for marking and scribing,
This is a critical step to getting the pliers for cleaving, and rulers,
best cross-sections. The kit everything in the Wafer Cleaving
includes wafer mat, scribers for Kit. In addition, the Lattice Scriber,
marking and scribing, pliers for customized with an 8 point
cleaving, rulers and instructions. diamond tip that scribes well at
Includes: any angle and an extra set of CleanBreak pliers is included with spare set
Diamond Scriber - Pen style, optimal for top down scribe of jaws so that a clean cleave is always possible. This package includes:
Diamond Scriber - Straight tip, optimal for top down precise marking • Wafer Cleaving Kit
and/or scribing • Lattice Scriber: Ultimate scriber for semiconductor samples
Diamond Scriber - 30-degree tip, optimal for top down precise marking • CleanBreak Pliers: Wafer-cleaving pliers
and/or scribing
CleanBreak Pliers - 6" wafer cleaving pliers. Simple and clean way to LatticeAx™ Options
cleave (post scribe) wafers to strips and smaller pieces. 3/4" jaw, opening. Package
Large Cutting Mat - Wafer cutting mat, self healing, double-sided, green Two spare custom diamond knives
and black, 18" x 24" for the LatticeAx. The LatticeAx
Small Ruler Mat - Self healing, small wafer piece ruler mat, doublesided, knife is replaced by the user and
green and black, 3½" x 5½" comes with allen wrenches and
Note: Always remember to use safety glasses when cleaving the wafer. installation instructions. This
package includes:
LatticeAx™ Diamond Indenter LatticeAx Diamond Indenter: Two spare diamond
Custom diamond indenter for the LatticeAx. knives
The LatticeAx indenter is easily replaced by Wafer Cleaving Kit The complete tool set to get from
the user and comes with screws, allen wafer to cleanly cleaved pieces. This is a critical step to
wrench and installation instructions. getting the best crosssections. The kit includes wafer
Polished end for improved positioning. mat, scribes for marking and scribing, pliers for
Marker-Scriber Kit cleaving, rulers and instructions.
Diamond scribers for marking fine marks Diamond Scriber - Pen style, optimal for top down scribe
and scribing the wafer surface. These Diamond Scriber - Straight tip, optimal for top down precise marking
diamond scribers also serve as and/or scribing
replacements for those purchased in the Diamond Scriber - 30 degree tip, optimal for top down precise marking
starter kit. Three diamond scribers are and/or scribing
included: L-Square - 24"x 8.5", phenolic, non-warping, ruler acts as guide for
• Pen-style diamond scriber macro cleaving up to 300mm wafers without damaging the top surface of
• Fine scriber for precise marking and/or the cleaving station
scribing CleanBreak Pliers - 6" wafer-cleaving pliers. Simple and clean way to
cleave (post scribe) wafers to strips and smaller pieces. 3/4" jaw
• Fine scriber with 30-degree tip for precise
Large Cutting Mat - Wafer-cutting mat, self healing, double sided, green
marking and/or scribing
and black, 18 x 24"
Lattice Scriber Small Ruler Mat - Self healing, Small wafer piece ruler mat, double
This is the best scriber you'll ever find for sided, green and black, 3.5 x 5.5"
scribing semiconductor wafers. This custom
scriber has an eight point truncated
diamond tip that can be used for both toe Ordering Information
and heel scribing held by robust 4" long pin
Cat No. Description Qty.
vise handle.
7640 LatticeAx™ 110 Cleaving System each
CleanBreak Pliers 7641 LatticeAx™ 220 Cleaving System each
CleanBreak 6" wafer cleaving pliers. Simple 7650 LatticeAx™ 300 (115V) Cleaving System each
7651 LatticeAx™ 300 (220V) Cleaving System each
and clean way to cleave (post scribe) wafers
7642 Wafer Cleaving Kit each
and wafer strips and smaller pieces. 3/4" 7643 Diamond Indenter each
jaw, opening. Comes with one set of 7644 Marker-Scriber Kit each
replaceable jaws to maintain the best 7645 Lattice Scriber each
cleaving performance. 7646 CleanBreak Pliers each
7648 Wafer Cleaving Station each
7649 LatticeAx™ Options Package each

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 435
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec13_432-444_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 5:09 PM Page 436

SECTION 13 Silicon Wafer Cleaving Systems, Tools, & General Supplies

 General Supplies for Cleaving
 Brush; Red Sable
Extremely soft and pliable. Perfect for the manipulation of pre-viously fixed,
dehy-drated specimens into embedding capsules or molds.

66100-00 Brush, Red Sable, Size #0 each

66100-01 Brush, Red Sable, Size #1 each

 EMS Tweezers Style 122

Fine, bent, serrated tips. Length: 6" (150mm)

 Pen Vac™
Pen-Vac™ is a new improved way to handle small, flat surface objects. Besides
78357-122 EMS 122 each
the electronics assembly industry, Pen-Vac is ideal for EM work as well. It can be
used to handle grids, pick up stubs, align membranes, work with glass slides,
 Dumont Diamond Tweezers cover slips and much more. Holds up to one minute.
Dumont Stainless Steel tweezers coated with an extremely fine diamond dust  Lifts up to 50 grams.  Optional storage compartment
on the inside tips. They are essential in applications where a tight grip is  Totally self-contained vacuum. for vacuum tips and cups.
necessary. They are also available with an improved locking system. They  Light-weight, less than 1 ounce.  No power supply needed.
are 51⁄2"(150mm) long. They may not be suitable for use with EM grids.  Fits in your pocket like a pen.  Available in various sizes.
 Brushed aluminum body.  Interchangeable vacuum probes.
Pen-Vac™ comes with:
 Fine Points Diamond Tweezers  A variety of Vacuum Probes, complete with a vacuum cup attached
and it is available with plastic or aluminum hubs. Straight and
78100 Tip measures 0.25 x 0.25mm each
angled to suit your applications. The stainless steel needle portion
of the probes are one-half inch long.
 Vacuum Cups come in a wide range of materials. We offer the
Static Dissipative and the Conductive Cups that provide ESD protec-
tion for electrostatic discharge of sensitive components. Cups
 Medium Points: comes in three sizes: 1⁄8" (3.17mm); 1⁄4" (6.35mm); and 3⁄8" (9.52mm).
78106 Tip measures 0.50 x 0.50 mm each Set consists of:
One Pen with 6 Probes and Cups. (6 Probes: 3 angled, 1⁄8”, 1⁄4”, 3⁄8” and 3
straight 1⁄8”, 1⁄4”, 3⁄8”)
 Dust-Off Plus Model
71914 Complete Pen-Vac System set
(DPSA) 71915 Same as 71914 with Deluxe Case set
Contains: Formula S (Difluoroethane) -
Probes and Cups:
100% safe for the ozone. It comes
71916 1
⁄8” Straight and Bent, Small 2/pk
with a patented 360° Vector Valve. 71917 1
⁄4” Straight and Bent, Medium 2/pk
The multi-directional valve is used for 71918 3
⁄8” Straight and Bent, Large 2/pk
easy blasting in hard to reach areas.
The valve can be removed from the  Mini-Cleaner
can anytime without any loss of gas.
Its new concentrated formula will give you 57% more blasts per ounce,
Vacuum System
17% more blasts per can. A powerful, lightweight, and compact cleaning
The kit consists of a 8 oz. can and a Vector Valve nozzle. Refill is 8 oz system. Instead of blowing dust around with a
freon duster, this high performance vacuum
can, 12 cans/case.
collects dust efficiently and removes it from
70840 Dust-Off DPSA Kit each delicate areas. The mini-cleaner comes with a crevice tool, 2 dusting brushes
70834 Vector Valve Nozzle Only each and 2 filters, weighs 8 oz. and provides 115 volts of cleaning power.
70843 Dust-Off Plus Refill, DPSR each 71910 Vacuum Kit each
70844 Dust-Off Plus Refill, DPSR 12/cs 71912 Additional Filters 5/pk

436 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec13_432-444_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 5:09 PM Page 437

Silicon Wafer Cleaving Systems, Tools, & General Supplies SECTION 13

® Adhesives and Mountants for Cleaving
® Crystalbond™/Wafer-Mount™
A temporary adhesive. These wash away adhesives are used as a temporary bond for holding delicate crystals, metallurgical specimens, glass components,
and ceramic substrates for dicing, slicing, drilling and polishing. These materials adhere readily to metals, glass, ceramic and then can be washed after
machining away using various solvents.

APPLICATIONS:
T Machining or slicing single crystal metal specimens. T Holding beam leads in IC devices for pull-off tests.
T Grinding and polishing sapphire, ceramic, optical garnets, ferrites, T Dicing and slicing alumina and beryllia substrates for IC and
and LCD glass. microelectronic production.
T Dicing and slicing germanium and silicon wafers in semiconductor T Dicing subminiature chip capacitors and microwave IC substrates.
production.

Crystalbond 590 555 509 Wafer-Mount™ 559 562

® Crystalbond™ 509: offers excellent adhesion to metals, glass, ® Wafer-Mount™ 559: is available in sheet form 10”x10”
(254x254mm). To use, remove the paper backing exposing the
and ceramic. This material is the best for precise high purity work since
adhesive layer. The substrate is positioned on the film and pressed
it leaves no residue after dissolving and does not clog the diamond
down firmly so that it adheres to the plastic film. No heating is required.
wheel as compared to conventional waxes. Each stick weighs about 90
The wafer mounted on the plastic film can then be held down using a
grams.
vacuum manifold or mechanical means for dicing or scribing. After
50400-01 Crystalbond 509, Clear Stick each
dicing or scribing, the parts can be separated from the wafer-mount
50400-05 Crystalbond 509 Clear Stick 5/pk
50400-50 Crystalbond 509 Amber Stick each
559 film by washing in acetone or MEK. Ideal for holding down silicon
50400-S1 Crystal Bond 509 Stripper 1 qt wafers, alumina, or glass substrates for scribing.
50400-S2 Crystal Bond 509 Stripper 1 gal 50403-02 Wafer-Mount 559 2/pk
50403-10 Wafer-Mount 559 10/pk
® Crystalbond™ 555: the same as 509 but used in applications
where it is desirable to have a temporary bond which is water soluble. ® Wafer-Mount™ 562: a dry temporary adhesive film, 0.003”
Each stick weighs about 90 grams. thick, which can be easily cut to size with either a razor or scissor. This
50401-01 Crystalbond 555 each mount permits pre-placement of the adhesive film exactly where the
50401-10 Crystalbond 555 10/pk user wants it. It melts at 195-210°F. After application it can be
dissolved rapidly in trichloroethylene or toluene. This material is
® Crystalbond™ 590: the same as 509 but offers maximum particularly useful in applications where a pre-formed adhesive film is
adhesion to subminiature parts. Each stick weighs about 225 grams. needed to assure uniform bonding and flatness or in bonding stacks of
50402-01 Crystalbond 590 each substrates such as LCD glass slides for slicing. Sheet size 8”x10”.
50402-02 Crystalbond 590 2/pk
50404-10 Wafer-Mount 562 10/pk
50402-S Stripper 100 g
50404-20 Wafer-Mount 562 20/pk

Crystalbond™ & Wafer-Mount™ Properties:

Type 509 555 590 559 562
Description Thermo polymer* Thermo polymer Thermo polymer* Plastic —
Form 7
⁄8” Dia. x 7” stick 1
⁄2” x 1” x 7” stick 5
⁄8” x 11⁄4” x 71⁄2” stick .005"x10"x10" Sheet .003"x8"x10" Sheet
Softening 160°F (71°C) 125°F (52°C) 257°F (125°C) N/A N/A
Flow Point 250°F (121°C) 130°F (54°C) 302°F (150°C) N/A 200°F (93°C)
Viscosity at Flow Point 6,000 cps 500 cps 9,000 cps N/A N/A
Color Clear/Amber White Brown Clear White
Solvent Acetone or Water Methanol or Acetone or Trichloroethylene or
509-S Stripper 590-S Stripper MEK Toluene
*Thermoplastic polymer

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 437
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec13_432-444_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 5:09 PM Page 438

SECTION 13 Silicon Wafer Cleaving Systems, Tools, & General Supplies

 Microtools
 High Precision Diamond Scribing Tools  Micro Ruler — Extended Reach

A newly designed diamond

scribing tool set containing eight
precision natural diamond
scribes in various sizes and
configurations. This set is perfect  Precision etched, non-glare ruler made from surgical stainless
for precision work in microscopy. steel, only 3 mm wide. The ruler is calibrated in 0.1 mm
The set consists of eight diamond graduations, 10 mm total range.
tips, 3 mm in diameter and are  Stainless steel handle 230 mm long. Balanced and angled for
mounted in interchangeable tool the ultimate in flexibility able to reach into areas which are
cones and an MT-1 tool handle. impossible for other measuring devices.
The tool and handle are all  Available with or without a stainless steel autoclave case.
housed in a hardwood instrument Total weight of the ruler is 26 g.
case. Individual scribers can be purchased separately.  Applications include microscopy, chemistry and anywhere
precise measurement in clean and very confined areas
Cat. # Description Pack are of critical importance.
62105-S1 Straight tip, .02” (.50mm) dia. by .06” (1.5mm) tip length each
Cat. # Description Pack
62105-B1 Bent tip, .02” (.50mm) dia. by .06” (1.5mm) tip length each
62136-ER Ext. Reach Micro Ruler only each
62105-S2 Straight tip, .01” (.25mm) dia. by .06” (1.5mm) tip length each
62136-ERC Ext. Reach Micro Ruler w/ Case each
62105-B2 Bent tip, .01” (.25mm) dia. by .06” (1.5mm) tip length each
62105-SE Straight extended tip, .02” (.5mm) dia.
by .2”(5.0mm) tip length. Good for tight areas. each
 Micro Mirror — Extended Reach
62105-BE Bent extended tip, .02” (.5mm) dia. It is of similar
by .2” (5.0mm) tip length. Good for hard to reach areas. each construction with
62105-HS Straight, heavy duty tip, .03” (.8mm) dia. the Micro-Ruler (above), but comes with a
by .12” (3.1mm) tip length each 2.5x magnify Mirror - made from polished
62105-HC Bent, heavy duty tip, .03” (.8mm) dia. stainless steel, 4.8 mm diameter. Overall length is
by .12” (3.1mm) tip length each
230mm. Autoclavable Case is available as an option.
62090-00 MT-1 Tool Handle, 4.75” (112mm) long, gold anodized each
62105-00 High Precision Diamond Scribing Tools, complete set each Cat # Description Pack
62136-M Extended Reach Mirror each
 High Precision Fine Diamond Scriber 62136-MC Extended Mirror With Case each

This diamond scriber is the ultimate scribing instrument offering the  Hardened Steel Deburring Tool Set
most precision for the most delicate applications. It is available in
straight or bent configurations.
APPLICATIONS INCLUDE:
 Fine scribing under the microscope - for silicon wafers
and glass coverslips
Made from hardened steel, this tool has three razor sharp cutting edges
 Precision scribing and repairing - for thin film circuits
and microcircuits, etc. ranging from a very sharp point to one that is approximately 10mm in
length. These nickel plated triangular tools are mounted in red and
These diamond mountings are 0.8mm diameter with a reduced shank black plastic handles. Tool length is 30mm by 2.1mm across
size of 0.5mm or 0.25mm diameter, which holds the diamond stylus. The (1.2”x.08”). The overall length of the tool is 154mm (5.7”). 2 tools/set.
natural diamond has a 60º included angle and a 0.12mm tip radius. The
integrated 6.35mm anodized hexagonal (non-rolling) aluminum handle 62161-SD Hardened Steel Deburring Tool Set set
has a positive finger grip in the form of grooves for easy control and non-
slippage. Each diamond scriber is packaged in a protective plastic tube.  Sapphire Burnishing/Deburring Tool

This tool will out-perform any stone for the fine burnishing of soft or
hard materials such as; miniature pivots, shafts, and pins that are made
from hard steel, carbide and even ceramic.
Cat. # Configuration and Shank Size This precisely ground sapphire blade is 1.5mm x 2.3mm, 14mm long
62107-ST Straight Mounting, 0.5mm diameter
(0.06 x 0.09 x .56”). It is permanently mounted in a hexagonal gold
62107-BT Bent Mounting, 0.5mm diameter
62108-ST Straight Mounting, 0.25mm diameter anodized aluminum handle. Total length is 120mm (4.75”).
62108-BT Bent Mounting, 0.25mm diameter 62160-00 Sapphire Burnishing/Deburring Tool each

438 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec13_432-444_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 7/9/14 12:49 PM Page 439

Silicon Wafer Cleaving Systems, Tools, & General Supplies SECTION 13

 Omni Grids
 Copper Lift-Out Grids  Copper 3-Post Lift-Out
Custom copper lift-out grids specifically Grids, Side Access
designed for in-situ lift-out. These grids include 3 post copper lift-out grids, similar to 75964-
multiple indexed mounting locations with both 01, in design but 35 micron thick with 1 edge
vertical bars and “V” shaped attachment surfaces. 3mm diameter. lower for easy access. Packaged in glass vials
75964-01 Copper Lift-Out Grids 100/vial 75964-07 Copper 3-Post Lift-Out Grids, Side Access 100/vial

 Molybdenum Lift-Out Grids  Copper 3-Post Lift-Out

Custom molybdenum lift-out grids specifically Grids, Shallow Downset
designed for in-situ lift-out. These grids include 3 post copper lift-out grids specifically designed
multiple indexed mounting locations with both for in-situ lift-out. These grids include multiple
vertical bars and “V” shaped attachment indexed mounting locations with both vertical
surfaces. 3mm diameter. bar and "V" shaped attachment surfaces. These grids have a shallower
75964-02 Molybdenum Lift-Out Grids 25/vial downset and slightly wider center post than 75964-01. Packaged in
glass vials.
 Beryllium Haft-Ring Grids
75964-08 Copper 3-Post Lift-Out Grids, Shallow Downset 100/box
Custom beryllium haft ring grids. 3mm diameter.
 Copper 5-Post Lift-Out Grids
75964-03 Beryllium Haft Ring Grids 10/pk 5 post copper lift-out grids specifically designed
for in-situ lift-out. These grids include multiple
 Copper 5-Post Lift-Out Grids
indexed mounting locations, all with vertical bar
Custom copper 5-post lift-out grids specially attachment surfaces. Now with lower profile sides for easier access to
designed for in-situ lift-out. These grids include outermost posts. 3mm dia. Packaged in glass vials.
multiple indexed mounting locations, all with
75964-09 Copper 5-Post Lift-Out Grids 100/box
vertical bars attachment surfaces. Now with lower profile sides for easier
access to utermost posts. 3mm diameter.
 Copper 4-Post Lift-Out Grids
75964-04 Copper 5-Post Lift-Out Grids 100/vial
4 post copper lift-out grids specifically designed
 Copper 4-Post Lift-Out Grids for in-situ lift-out. These grids include multiple
Custom copper 4-post lift-out grids specially indexed mounting locations, two with vertical
designed for in-situ lift-out. These grids include bar attachment surfaces and two with "V"
multiple indexed mounting locations, two with shaped alighment surfaces. Sides have lower profile for easier access to
vertical bars attachment surfaces and two with outermost posts. 3mm dia. Packaged in plastic vials.
“V” shaped alignment surfaces. Sides have lower profile for easier 75964-10 Copper 4-Post Lift-Out Grids 100/box
access to outermost posts. 3mm diameter.
75964-05 Copper 4-Post Lift-Out Grids 100/vial  Omni Grid
Storage Box
 Molybdenum 4-Post Storage box for 100 standard or
Lift-Out Grids haft grids—3 mm diameter –
Custom Molybdenum 4-post lift-out grids TEM grids. Box comes complete
specially designed for in-situ lift-out. These with base, lid and clips.
grids include multiple indexed mounting
locations, two with vertical bars attachment surfaces and two with “V”
75965-01 Grid Storage Box each
shaped alignment surfaces. Sides have lower profile for easier access to
outermost posts. 3mm diameter.
75964-06 Mo 4-Post Lift-Out Grids 25/vial

Omniprobe TEM Grid Comparison Chart

Number of Thickness (Nominal) Nominal Post
Part Number Posts Material Microns Downset Microns Unique Feature
75964-01 3 Copper 30 10 —
75964-02 3 Molybdenum 30 10 Top Downset only
75964-03 0 Beryllium 25 N/A Half Ring
75964-04 5 Copper 40 10 5th Post is E
75964-05 4 Copper 30 10 —
75964-06 4 Molybdenum 30 10 Top DS Only
75964-07 3 Copper 30 5 Side Access
75964-08 3 Copper 30 5 —
75964-09 5 Copper 35 5 5th Post is “E”
75964-10 4 Copper 30 5 —

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 439
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec13_432-444_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 5:10 PM Page 440

SECTION 13 Silicon Wafer Cleaving Systems, Tools, & General Supplies

® Membrane Boxes
Our unique membrane storage boxes for the transfer, storage and shipping of many
delicate items. Available in 5 different shapes and sizes these plastic containers, with a
double elastic membrane on the top and bottom, offer security for all of your sensitive
items. Once your item is placed in the box the elastic membrane conforms around the
enclosed object and protects it from any movement.

Round Membrane Boxes

Cat. # O.D, mm I.D, mm C D Qty
64304-20 82 54 20 40 each
64304-30 82 54 9 17 each

Overall Dimensions Maximum Useful Area Dimensions Capacity

Cat. # L, mm W, mm D, mm L, mm W, mm D, mm Weight Qty
Rectangular Boxes
64304-27 250 200 212 162 18 — — each
64304-28 250 200 204 154 40 — — each
64304-29 100 50 67 20 20 — — each
64304-36 100 50 16 67 17 9 8g each
64304-38 100 75 16 67 42 9 19g each
64304-39 100 75 25 62 37 18 31g each
64304-40 125 75 25 87 37 18 44gg each
64304-41 150 75 25 112 37 18 56g each
64304-42 150 125 25 112 87 18 132g each
64304-43 150 125 50 112 79 20 246g each
64304-44 250 200 100 188 138 60 1557g each
64304-45 250 200 200 157 3371g each
64304-46 300 150 16 267 117 9 211g each
64304-51 100 50 50 54 17 12 — each
This box has no stackable feet.
64304-52 150 100 25 92 92 9 — each
64304-53 300 75 25 262 37 18 — each
64304-54 150 100 75 104 54 59 — each
64304-55 300 150 25 267 117 19 — each
64304-56 300 150 75 246 96 60 — each
64304-57 175 100 25 137 62 18 — each
64304-58 175 100 50 129 54 40 — each
64304-59 200 150 50 154 104 40 — each
Square Boxes
64304-10 38 38 18 31 31 9 10g 12/pk
64304-11 100 100 16 67 67 9 30g each
64304-12 100 100 25 62 62 18 52g each
64304-13 100 100 50 54 54 40 88g each
64304-14 125 125 16 92 92 9 57g each
64304-15 125 125 25 87 87 18 102g each
64304-16 125 125 50 79 79 40 187g each
64304-17 150 150 100 88 88 80 465g each
64304-18 125 125 75 92 92 60 — each
64304-19 150 150 25 112 112 18 — each
64304-21 150 150 75 104 104 60 — each
64304-22 100 100 75 — — — — each
64304-23 175 175 25 137 137 18 — each
64304-24 175 175 50 129 129 40 — each
64304-25 200 200 25 162 162 18 — each
64304-26 200 200 50 154 154 40 — each
64304-50 150 150 50 104 104 40 324g each

440 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec13_432-444_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 5:10 PM Page 441

Silicon Wafer Cleaving Systems, Tools, & General Supplies SECTION 13

® Gel-Pak® Storage/Carrier Box
Patented gel technology – the innovative
solutions for storage and carrying delicate
materials
The traditional Gel-Box, Gel-Tray® and Gel-Slide Carriers
are perfect for applications where devices are manually
offloaded by tweezers or by hand.
T Gel-Box (AD Series) - Hinged plastic boxes coated
with Gel in the bottom.
T Gel-Tray® (BD Series) - A removable 2" plastic tray
coated with Gel and contained inside a hinged
plastic box.
T Gel-Slide (CD series) - A removable 2"glass slide
coated with Gel and contained inside a hinged
plastic box.

(Gel-Pak® is A Division of Delphon Industries)

® GEL-BOX (AD Carrier Boxes) ® GEL-TRAY® (BD Series) And GEL-SLIDE

Gel-Box AD Series Carriers owe their unique device-holding capabilities to a (CD Series)
proprietary GEL coating applied directly to the bottom of a hinged box. Same as the Gel-Box, the Gel-Tray and Gel-Slide products are intended for
Devices are held once contact is made with the GEL surface and will stay in manual applications in which the devices are loaded and unloaded using
place, even if the carrier is tilted or jarred. The carriers are designed for tweezers or by fingers. The Gel-Pak BD and CD series of pocketless trays
manual off-loading with tweezers or by hand. GEL-PAK AD series are ideal for are both configured as a 2" carrier stored in a protective plastic hinged box.
handling devices where no direct contact with the top of the device is The Gel coating is applied directly to the surface of the plastic tray (BD
important. Series) or glass slide (CD Series).
The GEL-BOX Carriers may also be used for bare die handling, such as GaAs, These products offer the same functionality as the Gel-Box, however the
PETs, laser diodes, and beam-lead devices where the die size is small (less plastic tray or glass slide can be easily removed from the box allowing for
than 1mm) and tweezers or other specialized techniques are used for off- convenient handling when loading or unloading fixtures are being used.
handling. The Gel-Slide (coated glass slides) is designed for higher temperature
FEATURES: applications such as bonding and reflow where a plastic tray will not work.
T No need for custom-molded containers for each device size. The CD slide has a temperature capability up to 220˚C. The CD glass slides
T Ideal for handling subassemblies, hybrid models and are also ideal for backside inspection due to their optical clarity.
packaged devices. Both the Gel-Tray and Gel-Slide products are available in the standard
T Available in Transparent, Conductive and Anti-Static retention levels (X0, X4, X5, and X8) to accommodate variations in device
carriers in multiple sizes. size, weight, and surface roughness.
T Retention Level available: x0, x1, x2, x3, x4, x5, and x8 (the higher
the number the more retention capability) The protective 2" hinged boxes are available in transparent styrene (T),
We offer standard retention level X4. Other retention levels are conductive black (C) and antistatic (AS) materials. The boxes, trays, and
available with the order of 100 or more, and at least two weeks slides may be customized with a print pattern (grid) or company logo.
for delivery. Standard available Prints can be viewed at Gel-Tray/Gel-Slide Print options

Cat # Description - Overall Box size Qty Cat # Description Qty

64900-x4 1"x1"x 1⁄4" Transparent Hinged Box 50/pk 64900-10 2" x 2" Conductive BD Tray in Antistatic Hinged Box 50/pk
64901-x3 2" x 2" x 0.25" Antistatic Gel-Box 50/pk 64900-11 2" x 2" Conductive BD Tray in Conductive Base/ 50/pk
64901-x4 2"x2"x1⁄4" Conductive Hinged Box 50/pk Antistatic Lid Hinged Box
64902-x4 2"x2"x1⁄4" Anti-Static Top & Conductive Hinged Box 50/pk 64900-12 2" x 2" Conductive BD Tray in Conductive Base/ 50/pk
64903-x4 2"x2"x1⁄4" Anti-Static Hinged Box 50/pk Transparent Lid Hinged Box
64904-x4 2"x3"x3⁄8" Conductive Hinged Box 50/pk 64900-13 2" x 2" Conductive BD Tray in Conductive Hinged Box 50/pk
64905-x4 2"x3"x3⁄8" Anti-Static & Conductive Hinged Box 50/pk 64900-14 2" x 2" Conductive BD Tray in Transparent Hinged Box 50/pk
64906-x4 3.5"x4.5"x0.5" Conductive Hinged Box 50/pk 64900-15 2" x 2" Conductive BD Tray in “High Clearance” 50/pk
64908-X3 4.5" x 3.5" x 0.875" Conductive Base/Antistatic Lid Gel-Box 50/pk Antistatic Hinged Box
64907-x4 3.5"x4.5"x7/8" Transparent Hinged Box 50/pk 64900-16 2" x 2" Transparent BD Tray in Antistatic Hinged Box 50/pk
64908-x4 3.5"x4.5”x7/8" Conductive Hinged Box 50/pk 64900-17 2" x 2" Transparent BD Tray in Conductive Base/ 50/pk
64909-x4 2.5"x3.5"x0.5" Anti Static Top & Conductive Hinged Box 50/pk Antistatic Lid Hinged Box
64910-x3 6" x 4" x 0.5" Conductive Gel-Box 50/pk 64900-18 2" x 2" Transparent BD Tray in Conductive Hinged Box 50/pk
64911-x3 6" x 4" x 0.5" Transparent Gel-Box 50/pk 64900-19 2" x 2" Transparent BD Tray in Transparent Hinged Box 50/pk
64912-x3 7" x 5" x 1" Conductive Base/Antistatic Lid Gel-Box 50/pk 64900-20 2" x 2" Glass Slide in Transparent Hinged Box 50/pk
64913-x3 7" x 5" x 1" Conductive Gel-Box 50/pk 64900-21 2" x 2" Glass Slide in Conductive Hinged Box 50/pk
64914-x3 7.75" x 3.5" x 1" Conductive Gel-Box 50/pk 64900-22 2" x 2" Glass Slide in Antistatic Hinged Box 50/pk
64915-x3 9.937" x 3.5" x 0.625" Transparent Gel-Box 50/pk 64900-23 2" x 2" Glass Slide in MAG-40 Cassette 50/pk

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 441
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec13_432-444_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 5:10 PM Page 442

SECTION 13 Silicon Wafer Cleaving Systems, Tools, & General Supplies

 EMS Wafer Tweezers
These tweezers are especially designed for the handling of delicate and fragile silicon wafers, scintillation discs, glass slides,
coverslips etc. Made from antimagnetic/anti acid steel with a very smooth surface and a non-glare finish.

 Style 2W
A: 6.5mm (0.25"); B: 5.0mm (0.20"); C: 2.5mm (0.10"); D: 4.0mm (0.15")
78410-2W EMS 2W each

 Style 2WFCPR
Tips are made of PEEK/CF30.These tips offer gently holding wafers.
Replacement tips are available. A: 0.25” (6.6mm); B: 0.41” (2.0mm);
C: 0.08” (2.0mm); D: 0.14” (3.5mm); E: 0.18” (4.5mm)
78410-2WFC EMS 2WFCPR each
78410-2WFR Replacement tips set set

 Style 35B
A: 12.0mm (0.47"); B: 13.0mm (0.51"); D: 2.5mm (0.10")
78411-35B EMS 35B each

 Style 35S
A: 29.0mm (1.14"); B: 5.5mm (0.20"); D: 3.0mm (0.12")
78411-35S EMS 35S each

 Style 37S
A: 7.8mm (0.3"); B: 6.0mm (0.24"); E: 6.0mm (0.24")
78411-37S EMS 37S each

 Style 38FG
A: 9.5mm (0.37"); B: 11.0mm (0.34"); D: 4.0mm (0.15"); E: 2.5mm
(0.10")
78411-38FG EMS 38FG each

 Style 3 WF
A: 9.5mm (0.37"); B: 10.0mm (0.39"); C: 2.5mm (0.10"); D: 4.0mm
(0.15"); E: 2.5mm (0.10")
78411-3WF EMS 3WF each

 Style 39S2
A: 6.5mm (0.25"); B: 8.5mm (0.33"); D: 5.5mm (0.20"); E: 2.4mm (0.09")
78412-39S2 EMS 39S2 each

 Style 39S3
A: 9.5mm (0.37"); B: 8.5mm (0.23"); D: 5.5mm (0.20"); E: 2.4mm (0.09")
78412-39S3 EMS 39S3 each

 Style 41W
A: 28.0mm (1.1"); B: 12.0mm (0.47"); D: 5.0mm (0.20"); E: 5.0mm (0.2")
78414-41W EMS 41W each

442 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec13_432-444_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 5:10 PM Page 443

Silicon Wafer Cleaving Systems, Tools, & General Supplies SECTION 13

 EMS Wafer Tweezers (continued)

 Style 43 WFG
A: 9.5mm (0.37"); B: 8.5mm (0.33"); D: 3.5mm (0.14"); E: 2.5mm (0.10")
78414-43WFG EMS 43WFG each

 Style 44 WF
A: 12.0mm (0.47"); B: 8.5mm (0.33"); D: 3.5mm (0.14"); E: 2.5mm
(0.10")
78414-44WF EMS 44WF each

 Style 4 WF
A: 12.0mm (0.47"); B: 9.0mm (0.33"); D: 4.0mm (0.15"); E: 2.5mm
(0.10")
78414-4WF EMS 4WF each

 Style 4WFCPR
Tips are made of PEEK/CF30 - These tips offer gently holding wafers.
Replacement tips are available. A: 0.46” (12mm); B: 0.41” (2.0mm);
C: 0.08” (2.0mm); D: 0.14” (3.5mm); E: 0.18” (4.5mm)
78414-4WFC EMS 4WFCPR each
78414-4WFR Replacement Tips set set

 Style 48 WF
A: 28.0mm (1.1"); B: 9.0mm (0.35"); D: 4.0m (0.15"); E: 2.5mm (0.10")
78414-48WF EMS 48WF each

 Style 8WF
A: 28.5mm (1.12"); B: 12.0mm (0.47"); C: 2.2mm (0.08"); D: 3.5mm
(0.14"); E: 2.5mm (0.10")
78420-8WF EMS 8WF each

 Style 8WNY
A: 65.0mm (2.55"); B: 19.0mm (0.75"); C: 1.3mm (0.05"); D: 2.0mm
(0.08")
78422-8WNY EMS 8WNY each

 Style 600M - Bent

A: 20.0mm (0.79"); B: 11.0mm (0.43"); E: 2.3mm (0.09")
78425-600M EMS 600M each

 Style 96 – Self-Closing
A: 14.5mm (0.57"); B: 10.5mm (0.41"); C: 9.0mm (0.35")
78426-96 EMS 96 each

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 443
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec13_432-444_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 5:10 PM Page 444

SECTION 13 Silicon Wafer Cleaving Systems, Tools, & General Supplies

 Rubis Wafer Tweezers
Made from SA steel with serrated handles. These tweezers are specially
designed to handle different fragile and delicate materials of gallium or
silicon wafers. They have a smooth polished non-glare surface with a satin
finish. The tweezers have stopping pins turned up on lateral edges and
graduated lower paddles prevent the wafer from slipping. The tweezers are
also available in Peek material. Peek: An ESD Safe, 105Ω x cm. Soft,
conductive fiber, with heat resistance up to 250°C (short exposure
300°C). (Not compatible with nitric and sulfuric acids.)

 Style 2LB/4
No teeth. Length: 128mm (5"). B =12.5mm (1⁄2"), C = 8mm (1⁄3"),
D = 3mm (1⁄8"), E = 2mm (1⁄12"), F = 4mm (1⁄6"), M = 9mm (1⁄3"),
N = 2mm (1⁄12"), R = 48mm (13⁄4"), S = 42mm (12⁄3")
78220-01 Wafer Tweezers, Style 2LB/4 each

 Style 39S-4
4 teeth, lower part perforated. Length: 128mm (5"). B =12.5mm (1⁄2"),
C = 10mm (1⁄3"), E = 2mm (1⁄12"), F = 6mm (1⁄4"), M = 9mm (1⁄3"),
N = 1.5mm (1⁄16"), R = 48mm (13⁄4"), S = 4mm (12⁄3")
78225-01 Wafer Tweezers, Style 39s each

 Style 41LB-2
2 teeth. Flat lower paddle. Length: 128mm (5"). B = 6mm (1⁄4"),
C = 7.0mm (1⁄4"), E = 2mm (1⁄12"), F = 3mm (1⁄8"), M = 9mm (1⁄3"),
N = 1.5mm (1⁄16"), R = 52mm (2"), S = 42mm (12⁄3")
78226-01 Wafer Tweezers, Style 4 each

 Style 41LB-5
5 teeth. Flat lower paddle. Length: 132mm (51⁄4"), B =16mm (5⁄8"),
C = 9mm (1⁄3"), E = 2mm (1⁄12"), F = 3mm (1⁄8"), M = 11mm (1⁄2"),
N = 2mm (1⁄12"), R = 52mm (2"), S = 42mm (12⁄3")
78229-01 Wafer Tweezers, Style 41LB-5 each

 Style 42LB6
6 teeth. Step up lower paddle. Length: 130mm (51⁄8"), B = 19.5mm (3⁄4"),
C = 8mm (1⁄2"), D = 3mm (1⁄8"), E = 3mm (1⁄8"), F = 4mm (1⁄6"),
M = 11mm (1⁄2"), N = 2mm (1⁄12"), R = 52mm (2"), S = 42mm (12⁄3")
78237-01 Wafer Tweezers, Style 42LB 6 each

 Style 43LB-8-Peek
Clean-room compatible. Length: 138mm (51⁄2"). B = 27mm (11⁄16"),
C = 21mm (3⁄4"), D = 4mm (1⁄6"), E = 6mm (1⁄4"), F = 5mm (1⁄5"),
M = 11mm (1⁄2"), N = 1.5mm (1⁄16"), R = 61mm (21⁄3"), S = 35mm (12⁄3")
78239-01 Wafer Tweezers, Style 43LB-8 Peek each

 Style 43LB-4-Peek
Clean-room compatible. Length: 138mm (51⁄2"). B = 13mm (11⁄16"),
C = 21mm (3⁄4"), D = 4mm (1⁄6"), E = 6mm (1⁄4"), F = 5mm (1⁄5"),
M = 11mm (1⁄2"), N = 1.5mm (1⁄16"), R = 61mm (21⁄3"), S = 35mm (13⁄8")
78240-01 Wafer Tweezers, Style 43LB-4 Peek each

 Style 43LB-10
10 teeth. Flat lower paddle with opening controller.
Length: 190mm (71⁄2"). B = 33.5mm (2"), C = 20mm (3⁄4"),
D = 7mm (1⁄4"), E = 2mm (1⁄12"), F = 3mm (1⁄8"), M = 13mm (1⁄2"),
N = 2mm (1⁄12"), R = 77mm (3"), S = 42mm (12⁄3")
78241-01 Wafer Tweezers, Style 43LB-10 each

444 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec14_445_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 4:09 PM Page 445

SECTION 14

Histology and Light Microscopy

Reagents for Fixing, Dehydrating, Clearing
and Staining
Embedding Media
Aldehyde Control Systems
Tools and Gadgets for Histology Preparation
Adhesives and Mounting Media
Staining Apparatus
General Supplies
Brushes, Boards, Trays, Gloves, Markers, and
Containers
Tissue Embedding and Processing Cassettes
Cryo-Embedding
Cytology Funnel Sample Chambers
Embedding Supplies, Capsules, Molds, and Markers
Microscope Slides, Cover Glasses, and Coverslips,
Accessories
Microscope Slide Storage Boxes, Trays, Holders,
and Mailers
Microtome Blades, Holders and Supplies
Tissue-Tek® Tissue Processor and Embedding
System
Microtome and Microtome/Cryostat
Cytocentrifuge
Tissue Stainer and Embedding Center
Cryostat Section Preparation Aids
Paraffin Embedding and Section Mounting
Slide Warmers and Ovens / Incubators
Pathscan IV Digital Histology Slide Scanner
Slide, Cassette, and Tissue Block Storage

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 445
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec14_446-465_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 5:16 PM Page 446

SECTION 14 Histology and Light Microscopy

FIXING, CLEARING, AND DEHYDRATING CHEMICALS
 Acetate Buffer  Ethyl Alcohol, Anhydrous*
RT 11482-42 Acetate Buffer, 0.2M, pH 4.2 500 ml (Ethanol) - 200 Proof
RT 11482-50 Acetate Buffer, 0.2M, pH 5.0 500 ml CH3CH2OH F.W. 46.07 CAS # 64-17-5
RT 11482-56 Acetate Buffer, 0.2M, pH 5.6 500 ml
Specifications:
 Acetic Acid, Glacial, Reagent A.C.S Specific Gravity ....................................................................<0.7942
Purity ....................................................................................>99.9%
C2H4O2 F.W. 60.05 CAS 64-19-7 Acidity ................................................................................<0.002%
Assay min 99.7% Water (Karl Fisher) ..................................................................<0.1%
Non-Volatile Matter ..........................................................<0.0025%
RT 10040 Acetic Acid, Glacial 500 ml RT 15055 450 ml
RT 10041 Acetic Acid, Glacial 2.5 L RT 15056 4 x 450 ml
 Acetic Acid, Aqueous Solution 15058 1 liter
RT

*Tax has already been paid.

Prepared from acetic acid glacial with de-ionized water
 Alkaline Alcohol
RT 10042-02 Acetic Acid, 0.2% (v/v) Solution 500 ml
10042-05 Acetic Acid, 0.5% (v/v) Solution 500 ml RT 10380 10% NH4OH in 85.5% Alcohol 500 ml
RT
10042-10 Acetic Acid, 1.0% (v/v) Solution 500 ml
RT 10381 1.6% NaCl in 80% Alcohol 500 ml
RT
10042-50 Acetic Acid, 5.0% (v/v) Solution 500 ml
RT 10382 0.2% KOH in 80% Alcohol 500 ml
RT

 Acetone, Reagent, A.C.S.  Ammonium Hydroxide, 28% Reagent, A.C.S.

NH4OH FW. 35.05 CAS #1336-21-6 Specific Gravity: 0.91
CH3COCH3 F.W. 58.08 CAS #67-64-1
Assay ..................................................................................28-30%
A.C.S. Specifications:
Assay ..............................................................................Min. 99.5% Specifications:
Aldehyde (as HCHO) ..............................................................0.002% Residue After Ignition ............................................................0.002%
Density (G/ml) at 25°C ..................................................Max. 0.7857 Carbon Dioxide ......................................................................0.002%
Titratable Acid ............................................................0.0003 meq/g. Chloride ................................................................................0.5 ppm
Titratable Base............................................................0.0006 meq/g. Phosphate................................................................................2 ppm
Isopropyl Alcohol ....................................................................0.05% Sulfate ....................................................................................2 ppm
Heavy Metals ........................................................................0.5 ppm
Methanol (CH3OH)....................................................................0.05%
Iron ......................................................................................0.2 ppm
Residue after Evaporation ......................................................0.001% RT 10600 450 ml
Solubilty in water ............................................................To Pass test RT 10601 4 x 450 ml
Substances Reducing Permanganate ............................To Pass Test
Water ........................................................................................0.5%  Amphibian Ringer Solution
RT 10000 1 qt. (946 ml) Ingredients: NaCl; KCl; CaCl2.6H2O and Distilled water.
RT 10010 4 x 1 qt.
RT 11762-05 Amphibian Ringer Solution 500ml
RT 10012 250 ml
RT 11762-10 Amphibian Ringer Solution 1L
RT 10014 4 x 250 ml

 Acetone: Alcohol, 1:1 & Buffered Acetone  B-5 Fixative

RT 10017 Acetone: Alcohol, 1:1 500 ml
For lymph nodes.
RT 10018 Buffered Acetone Fixative 500 ml RT 64122-05 B-5 Fixative 500 ml
RT 64122-06 B-5 Fixative 1 lt
 Acid Alcohols RT 64122-10 B-5 Fixative 4 lt
An acidified alcohol solution for the differentiation of regressive stains.
 Borate Buffer see Buffers on next page.
RT 26071-01 Acid Alcohol, 0.5% HCl in 70% Alcohol 1L
RT
RT
26071-04
26072-01
Acid Alcohol, 0.5% HCl in 70% Alcohol
Acid Alcohol, 1% HCl in 70% Alcohol
4x1L
1L
 Bouin’s Solution
RT 26072-04 Acid Alcohol, 1% HCl in 70% Alcohol 4x1L Bouin’s solution can be used as a fixation and a staining fluid. Bouin’s
RT 26073-01 Acid Alcohol, 1% HCl in 95% Alcohol 1L fixative is excellent for use on biopsy specimens of the gastrointestinal
RT 26073-04 Acid Alcohol, 1% HCl in 95% Alcohol 4x1L tract. Tissue from the endocrine system are well fixed and many
antibodies react well with tissue fixed in Bouin’s. Bouin’s solution may
 Alcohol be used as a routine fixative or a staining solution, but should not be
used as a preservative for tissue. Tissue cannot be held in Bouin’s
 Ethyl Alcohol, Specially Denatured solution for extended periods. The maximum fixation time in this solution
should be less than 48 hours and should be transferred to alcohol.
C2H5OH F.W. 46.07 CAS #64-17-5 Packaged in leak-proof histo-containers, prefilled and ready-to-use.
Blended 95% Ethanol and 5% Methanol Formulated with Picric Acid saturated aqueous solution 75%, Formalin (40%
Suitable for all routine histology/cytology preparations. aqueous formaldehyde) 25% and Glacial Acetic acid 5% in de-ionized water
Specifications: RT
15990-01 Bouin’s Fluid 1L
Evaporation Residue ........................................................5ppm max. RT
15990-04 Bouin’s Fluid 4L
Water ........................................................................................0.1% Bouin’s Fluid in Pre-filled cups:
Filtered SDA-3A. ........................................................................95% RT
15990-10 Bouin’s Fluid 50 x 10 ml/cs
RT RT
15050 1 qt (946 ml) 15990-20 Bouin’s Fluid 50 x 20 ml/cs
RT RT
15051 4 x 1 qt 15990-30 Bouin’s Fluid 20 x 30 ml/cs

446 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec14_446-465_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 5:16 PM Page 447

Histology and Light Microscopy SECTION 14

FIXING, CLEARING, AND DEHYDRATING CHEMICALS
All of our ready-to-use buffers are... The buffer is a vehicle for the fixative and requires certain properties:
...Conveniently packaged. a.) To maintain constant pH during the time of the b.) The ionic constitution to prevent the extraction of
...Prepared fresh for each order. fixation. The pH of the fixative in EM is adjusted cellular components, or the deposition of
...Economical and time-saving. using the buffer system chosen; e.g. range 6.5-8.0. precipitates of fixative chemicals.

Desired pH should be specified when ordering.

 Acetate Buffer  EDTA Buffer pH 8.5 (10x)
RT 11482-42 Acetate Buffer, 0.2M, pH 4.2 500 ml This buffer is intended for heat-induced antigen retriever on formalin-fixed
RT 11482-50 Acetate Buffer, 0.2M, pH 5.0 500 ml paraffin-embedded (FFPE) tissue sections prior to application of antibodies.
RT 11482-56 Acetate Buffer, 0.2M, pH 5.6 500 ml Cat. # Description Qty.
2-8˚C 64142-09 EDTA Buffer pH 8.5 100 ml
 Antibody Diluent 2-8˚C 62142-10 EDTA Buffer pH 8.50 1000 ml
Buffer for diluting your primary and secondary antibodies, especially if See more information, see page 616 
they were stored for a while, even at -20 in glycerol, or in refrigerator.
4-8°C 62713 Antibody Diluent 50 ml  HRP-Conjugate Dilutent
4-8°C 62714 Antibody Diluent 125 ml
4-8°C 62715 Antibody Diluent 500 ml Specifically designed for preparing solution of your HRP-conjugate used
4-8°C 62713-01 Antibody Diluent for Frozen Sections 50 ml as the detection reagent. It is the Antibody-dilutent buffer with additional
4-8°C 62714-01 Antibody Diluent for Frozen Sections 125 ml component for stabilizing your HRP-conjugate. Allows you to further
4-8°C 62715-01 Antibody Diluent for Frozen Sections 500 ml standardize the assay preparing ready-to-use conjugate solutions in
advance and store them in refrigerator without loss of activity.
See more information, see page 615 
Cat. # Description Qty.
62716 HRP Conjugate Dilutent 50 ml
 Antibody Dilution Buffer with
4-8°C
4-8°C 62717 HRP Conjugate Dilutent 125ml
Immunoglobulin- Free BSA 4-8°C 62718 HRP Conjugate Dilutent 500 ml
This ready-to-use Antibody Dilution Buffer is designed for the dilution of
antibodies in all immunoassays, including immunofluorescence, IHC,  ImmunoHistoZyme™, Ready-to-Use
ELISA, WB. This buffer contains immunoglobulin free BSA and does not ImmunoHistoZyme is used for proteolytic digestion of formalin-fixed
contain phosphate, sodium azide, or mercury preservatives. It can be paraffin-embedded (FFPE) tissue sections prior to application of antibodies.
used for the dilution of all antibodies, including peroxidase, and
antibodies to phophoproteins. However, it is not suitable for dilution of Cat. # Description Qty.
antibodies to S100 proteins. This buffer contains green food color. 2-8˚C 64142-13 ImmunoHistoZyme 15 ml
 Reagent Supplied: Ready to use buffer 2-8˚C 62142-14 ImmunoHistoZyme 100 ml
 Application: Dilute antibodies, primary or secondary as recom-
See more information, see page 616 
mended in the protocol by the manufacturer of these products.
 Storage: 2 – 8°C. Diluted antibodies can be stored at 2 – 8C for
several weeks, depending upon the stability of antibodies.  Michel’s Buffer
RT 18041-05 Michel’s Buffer 500 ml
2–8˚C 25886-01 Antibody Dilution Buffer, free BSA 100 ml RT 18041-10 Michel’s Buffer 1L
2–8˚C 25886-05 Antibody Dilution Buffer, free BSA 500 ml

 Borate Buffer  Millonig’s Phosphate Buffer

RT 11455-78 Borate Buffer, pH 7.8 500 ml Millonig (1964); Karlsson and Schultz (1965)
RT 11455-82 Borate Buffer, pH 8.2 500 ml Ingredients: Sodium Phosphate, monobasic (NaH2PO4•xH2O);
RT 11455-90 Borate Buffer, pH 9.0 500 ml
Sodium Phosphate, dibasic (Na2HPO4•xH2O); 0.5% Sodium Chloride (NaCl)
 Citrate Buffer 0.2M Shipping Conditions: Ambient Temperature
Maximum shelf life after receipt: 1 month
Buffer of Citric Acid and Sodium Citrate
The pH of this buffer is 7.4 (0.1M); the osmolarity is 440 mosmols, so
0-5˚C 11492-04 Citrate Buffer 0.2M, pH 4.0 1L this buffer is hypertonic to most body fluids. Millonig recommended to
0-5˚C 11492-06 Citrate Buffer 0.2M, pH 6.0 1L
use this buffer for the fixation of very hydrated tissues with osmium
 Citrate Buffer pH 6.0 (10x) tetroxide. For marine organisms, a higher concentration of sodium
chloride (3%) is recommended. We supply it in a double strength (0.2M),
This buffer is intended for heat-induced antigen retriever on formalin-fixed
pH 7.4. Dilution is needed before use.
paraffin-embedded (FFPE) tissue sections prior to application of antibodies.
Cat. # Description Qty. 0-5˚C 11582-05 Millonig’s Phosphate Buffer 0.2M 500ml
2-8˚C 64142-07 Citrate Buffer pH 6.0 100 ml 0-5˚C 11582-10 Millonig’s Phosphate Buffer 0.2M 1L
2-8˚C 62142-08 Citrate Buffer pH 6.0 1000 ml

See more information, see page 618 

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 447
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec14_446-465_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 5:16 PM Page 448

SECTION 14 Histology and Light Microscopy

FIXING, CLEARING, AND DEHYDRATING CHEMICALS
 Pepsin Reagent, Ready To Use  R-UNIVERSAL Epitope Recovery Buffer
Description: Pepsin is used for proteolytic digestion of formalin-fixed (10x stock)
paraffin-embedded (FFPE) tissue sections prior to application of Properties: Clear, non-toxic solution.
antibodies. In IHC most commonly used fixative like formalin mask tissue Presentation: R-Universal Buffer is supplied as 10x concentrate. For
antigens (cellular, membrane and nuclear) by cross-linking process, this epitope recovery dilute 1 part of stock with 9 parts of deionized water.
results in poor or no staining in IHC. Pepsin digestion of FFPE tissue Application: For epitope recovery dilute 1 part of stock with 9 parts of
section improves accessibility of antibodies to tissue antigens. deionized water.
Storage: 2–8˚C. DO NOT FREEZE Stability and Storage: The preparation is stable for 1 year when stored
Intended Use: Use as antigen retriever for some antibodies in IHC. unopened at +4˚C. Every lot is issued with a certificate indicating the expiry
Please refer to primary antibody protocol for IHC. date. After opening, store at +4˚C in the refrigerator and use within 6 months.
Reagent: Ready-to-use Pepsin reagent available in 2 sizes: Certification: Each lot is certified for compliance to specifications. The
15 and 100 ml product is produced under DIN EN ISO 9001: 2008 Quality Management
Cat. # Description Qty. system for the products in Immunoassay Development and
2–8˚C 64142-05 Pepsin Reagent 15 ml Measurement, Products for Bioanalytics and lmmunoassays.
2–8˚C 62142-06 Pepsin Reagent 100 ml Cat. # Description Qty.
0-4˚C 62719-10 R-UNIVERSAL Epitope Recovery Buffer (10x stock) 125 ml
 Phosphate Buffer, 0.1M 0-4˚C 62719-20 R-UNIVERSAL Epitope Recovery Buffer (10x stock) 500 ml
Prepared from Sodium Phosphate Monobasic Hydrate and Sodium Phosphate
See more information, see page 614 
Dibasic Heptahydrate Non-Sterile. Meant for research purposes only.
0-5˚C
0-5˚C
19340-60
19340-65
Phosphate Buffer, pH 6.0
Phosphate Buffer, pH 6.5
1L
1L
 Section Block
0-5˚C 19340-70 Phosphate Buffer, pH 7.0 1L A new class of blocking solutions based on chemically modified and
0-5˚C 19340-72 Phosphate Buffer, pH 7.2 1L fragmented ultra-pure casein. Effectively reduces unwanted binding of
primary antibody and conjugates you use to charged surface of the slide
 Phosphate Buffer Saline (PBS) and tissue section. Greatly reduces non-specific binding while preserving
PBS is commonly used in biochemistry. It is a salty solution containing the specific reaction, by saturating potential non-specific protein-protein
calcium chloride, sodium phosphate and potassium phosphate. PBS is interactions. Moreover, in contrast to BSA-based, IgGm casein or serum
isotonic and non-toxic to cells. 1X PBS final concentration is 0.137M -based blocking solutions there is no interaction of specific antibody and
NaCl, 0.01M Na2HPO4, 0.0027M KCl and pH 7.4. blocking protein itself. or oth Is not comparable to other commercially
available or home-made blocking solutions. Recommended for research
0-5˚C 19342-10 Phosphate Buffered Saline, 10X 1L
0-5˚C 19242-40 Phosphate Buffered Saline, 10X 1 gal and diagnostic pathology, especially for retrieved sections and polyclonal
0-5˚C 19343-10 Phosphate Buffered Saline, 2X 1L antibodies..
0-5˚C 19343-40 Phosphate Buffered Saline, 2X 1 gal Cat. # Description Qty.
0-5˚C 19344-10 Phosphate Buffered Saline, 1X 1L 62710 Section Block 50 ml
0-5˚C 19344-20 Phosphate Buffered Saline, 1X 1 gal 62711 Section Block 125 ml
62712 Section Block 500 ml
 Pronase Reagent, Ready To Use
Description: Pronase is used for proteolytic digestion of formalin-fixed  Sodium Cacodylate Buffer
paraffin-embedded (FFPE) tissue sections prior to application of Prepared from Sodium Cacodylate Trihydrate (F.W. 214.02).
antibodies. In IHC most commonly used fixative like formalin mask tissue 0-5˚C 11650 Sodium Cacodylate Buffer, 0.2M, pH 7.4 225 ml
antigens (cellular, membrane and nuclear) by cross-linking process, this 0-5˚C 11652 Sodium Cacodylate Buffer, 0.2M, pH 7.4 500 ml
results in poor or no staining in IHC. Pronase digestion of FFPE tissue 0-5˚C 11653 Sodium Cacodylate Buffer, 0.2M, pH 7.4 1L
section improves accessibility of antibodies to tissue antigens. 0-5˚C 11654 Sodium Cacodylate Buffer, 0.4M, pH 7.2 500 ml
Storage: 2–8˚C. DO NOT FREEZE 0-5˚C 11655 Sodium Cacodylate Buffer, 0.4M, pH 7.2 1L
Intended Use: Use as antigen retriever for some antibodies in IHC.
Please refer to primary antibody protocol for IHC.  Sorensen’s Phosphate Buffer
Reagent: Ready-to-use Pronase reagent available in 2 sizes: 15 and 100 ml. A phosphate buffered mixed salts, prepared from sodium phosphate
monobasic and sodium phosphate dibasic.
2–8˚C 64142-03 Pronase Reagent 15 ml
2–8˚C 62142-04 Pronase Reagent 100 ml 0-5˚C 11600-10 Sorensen’s Phosphate Buffer, 0.2M, pH 7.2 1L
0-5˚C 11600-40 Sorensen’s Phosphate Buffer, 0.2M, pH 7.2 4L
0-5˚C 11601-10 Sorensen’s Phosphate Buffer, 0.2M, pH 7.4 1L
0-5˚C 11601-40 Sorensen’s Phosphate Buffer, 0.2M, pH 7.4 4L

448 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec14_446-465_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 5:16 PM Page 449

Histology and Light Microscopy SECTION 14

FIXING, CLEARING, AND DEHYDRATING CHEMICALS
 Sym-Collidine Buffer Kit  Trypsin Reagent
2,4,6-Trimethylpyridine Description: Trypsin is used for proteolytic digestion of formalin-fixed
N:C(CH3)CH:C(CH3)CH:CCH3 paraffin-embedded (FFPE) tissue sections prior to application of antibodies.
CAS #108-75-8 F.W. 121.18 In IHC most commonly used fixative like formalin; mask tissue antigens
(cellular, membrane and nuclear) by cross-linking process, this results in
Bennett & Luft., Biophys & Biochem. Cytol., 6,113 (1959).
poor or no staining in IHC. Trypsin digestion improves immunoreactivity of
A very stable buffer, used with Osmium tetroxide; provides excellent
some antigens in FFPE tissue sections. For cytokeratin clone AE3 and
fixation, better stability and buffering capacity. The pH can be adjusted by
AE1/AE3, this enzyme works much better than boiling the tissue with
varying the amount of hydrochloric acid in the final volume of 200ml.
citrate buffer.
Preparation Instructions: Pour 9ml of 2N HCl; add 5.34ml of Sym-Collidine,
Storage: 2–8˚C. DO NOT FREEZE
mix well and add distilled water up to 200ml for a pH 7.4 solution.
Intended Use: Use as antigen retriever for some antibodies in IHC.
Set consists of:
Please refer to primary antibody protocol for IHC.
1 amp 5.34ml Sym Collidine
Reagent: This enzyme is supplied as concentrated form along with
1 amp 9.0ml of 2N HCl
buffer. The kit comes in 2 sizes. Small: Reagent B (Buffer) is 15 ml and
RT 11500 Sym-Collidine Buffer Kit One set
the Reagent E (Enzyme) is 2 ml
RT 11510 Sym-Collidine Buffer Kit Box/5 sets
Large: Reagent B (Buffer) is 100 ml and the Reagent E (Enzyme) is 10 ml
Cat. # Description Qty.
 Tris (Hydroxymethyl) Aminomethane 2–8˚C 64142-01 Trypsin Kit Small Kit
Maleate Buffer 2–8˚C 62142-02 Trypsin Kit Large Kit
RT 11730 250 ml
RT 11740 500 ml
 Universal Immunoassay Buffer™, 10X
Immunoassay buffer is used as a 1X in all immunoassays
 Tris Buffer, 0.2M pH 8.0 (immunofluorescence, IHC, ELISA, WB etc.) as a washing buffer and it
0-5˚C 11730-05 Tris Buffer 250ml can be used as a dilution buffer for antibodies; however it does not
0-5˚C 11730-06 Tris Buffer 500ml
contain any carrier proteins. This buffer also does not contain any
phosphate, sodium azide or mercury as preservatives and can be used
 Tris Buffered Saline pH 7.4 for dilution of all antibodies, including peroxidase, antibodies to
0-5˚C 11730-08 Tris Buffered Saline 250ml phosphoproteins. It is not suitable for dilution of antibodies to S100
0-5˚C 11730-09 Tris Buffered Saline 500ml proteins.
 Reagent Supplied: 10X Buffer
 Tris-HCL 1M Buffer pH 6-8  Application: Dilute this 10X buffer 10 times with DI water. (90 ml
0-5˚C 11730-12 Tris-HCL Buffer 1M 250ml water + 10 ml this buffer – mixed well). Wash 3-5 times with
0-5˚C 11730-15 Tris-HCL Buffer 1M 500ml this buffer in between the steps of your immunoassay protocol.
RT 25880-01 Universal Immunoassay Buffer, 10X 100 ml
 Tris HCL Buffer pH 7.2-9.0 RT 25880-10 Universal Immunoassay Buffer, 10X 1L
11730-20 Tris-HCL Buffer 250ml
 Universal Antibody Dilution Buffer™
0-5˚C
0-5˚C 11730-25 Tris-HCL Buffer 500ml
This ready-to-use Universal Antibody Dilution Buffer is designed for
 Tris Buffer pH 10.0 (10x) dilution of antibodies in all immunoassays, including
Description: This buffer is intended for heat-induced antigen retriever immunofluorescence, IHC, ELISA, WB. This buffer does not contain any
on formalin-fixed paraffin-embedded (FFPE) tissue sections prior to mammalian proteins, phosphate, sodium azide, or mercury preservatives
application of antibodies. In IHC most commonly used fixative like and can be used for dilution of all antibodies, including peroxidase, and
formalin mask tissue antigens (cellular, membrane and nuclear) by antibodies to phophoproteins. However, it is not suitable for dilution of
cross-linking process, this results in poor or no staining in IHC. The use antibodies to S100 proteins,
of this buffer on FFPE tissue section improves accessibility of antibodies  Application: Dilute antibodies, primary or secondary as recom-
to tissue antigens. mended in the protocol by the manufacturer of these products.
Storage: 2–8˚C. DO NOT FREEZE  Storage: 2 – 8°C. Diluted antibodies can be stored at 2 – 8C for
Intended Use: 1X buffer solution is intended for heat-induced antigen several weeks, depending upon the stability of antibodies.
retriever in IHC. Please refer to primary antibody protocol. 2–8˚C 25885-01 Universal Antibody Dilution Buffer 100 ml
Reagent: 10 X, pH 10 antigen retriever solution. 2–8˚C 25885-05 Universal Antibody Dilution Buffer 500 ml
Preparation of Working Solution: Dilute this 10X buffer as needed
(e.g. 90 ml of deionized or distilled water + 10 ml of this buffer), mix
well, 1X buffer can be stored at 2-8ºC
Cat. # Description Qty.
2–8˚C 64142-11 Tris Buffer pH 10.0 100 ml
2–8˚C 62142-12 Tris Buffer pH 10.0 1000 ml

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 449
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec14_446-465_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 5:17 PM Page 450

SECTION 14 Histology and Light Microscopy

FIXING, CLEARING, AND DEHYDRATING CHEMICALS
 n-Butyl Alcohol, Reagent, A.C.S.  RDO Rapid
(Butanol)
CH3CH2CH2CH2OH F.W. 74.12 CAS # 71-36-3 Decalcifier
Specific Gravity: 0.81 RDO and RDO Gold were
Assay ......................................................................................99.4% developed with the basic
Residue after evaporation ......................................................0.005% premise of making your work
Titratable acid ..............................................................0.0008meq/g routine quicker and easier
Butyl Ether ................................................................................0.2% without sacrificing the quality
Water ........................................................................................0.1% and integrity of your samples.
RT 11920 450 ml
RDO and RDO Gold are
RT 11921 4 x 450 ml
remarkably effective
 Carnoy’s Fixatives multipurpose decacifiers that
Stock solution can be tailored to suit your
specific lab routine.
RT 64130-05 Carnoy’s Fluid 500 ml
RT 64130-50 Carnoy’s Fluid Without Chloroform 500 ml Both RDO and RDO Gold: Both RDO and RDO Gold are:
 Cedar Wood Oil  Offer crisp nuclear staining  Far superior to other decalcifiers
CAS #8000-27-9 Refractive Index @ 20°C 1.504+/-.002
and definition  Great cellular differentiation
 Give distinguishable chromatin  Safe – non-toxic – non-
For clearing.
 Show great surface corrosive
12420 100 ml
 Dilutable
RT
decalcification
 Chloroform, Reagent, A.C.S.  Safe enough to be disposed  Microwavable
CHCl3 FW 119.38 CAS #67-66-3 down to lab sink to drain  Superb staining quality
How is RDO Gold different  Biodegradable
A.C.S. Specifications: from the original RDO
Color (APHA) ..................................................................................10  Translucent
 RDO Gold is designated for
Density @ 25°C..............................................................1.471-1.476  Available in wide mouth liter
those biopsies which contain
Residue after Evaporation ......................................................0.001% bottle
minimal amounts of calcium
Acetone & Aldehyde (about 0.00%). ..............................To Pass Test References:
 No filtration is required with 1/ Gayle Callis et al. “Decalcification of Bone:
Acid & Chloride ..............................................................To Pass Test RDO Gold Literature Review and Practical Study of
Free Chlorine (Cl). ..........................................................To Pass Test Various Decalcifying Agents, Methods, and
Lead (Pb) ............................................................................0.05ppm  RDO Gold gives stellar
Their Effects on Bone Histology”. The J. of
Subs. darkened by H2SO4 ..............................................To Pass Test morphological representation Histology, Vol. 21, No. 1, March 1998.
Suitability for Dithizone Test...........................................To Pass Test of bone biopsies
2/ Sherley A. Powell, HT (ASCP) HTL. “Method
RT 12540 450 ml  There is no folding of tissues to Facilitate Sectioning Incompletely Decalcified
RT 12541 4 x 450 ml with RDO Gold Bone”. Mercer University, School of Medicine.
 RDO Gold is clear and Microtime Georgia, State Newsletter.
 Chromic Acid, Reagent, Crystals, A.C.S. non-precipitate 3/ Becky Scholes, HTL, MT (ASCP).:Bone
Marrow Biopsies”. H.I.S.T.O. Iowa State
CrO3 FW 99.99 CAS #1333-82-0 Newsletter.
A.C.S. Specifications:
Chloride (Cl)...................0.005% Iron, Aluminum, Barium. .0.03% Cat.# Description Qty.
RT 64143-01 RDO Decalcifier 1L
Insoluble Matter ..............0.01% Sulfate (SO4) ...................0.05%
RT 64143-06 RDO Decalcifier 6 x 1 L/cs
Nitrate (NO3) ...................0.05% Assay ................................98% RT 64143-40 RDO Decalcifier 1 gal
Sodium (Na) .....................0.2% RT 64143-44 RDO Decalcifier 4 x 1 gal/cs
RT 12555 100g RT 64144-01 RDO - Gold Decalcifier 1L
RT 64144-06 RDO - Gold Decalcifier 6 x 1 L/cs
 Chromic Acid 4% Aqueous Solution RT 64144-40 RDO - Gold Decalcifier 1 gal
RT
RT 12557 Chromic Acid 4% Aqueous Solution 500 ml 64144-44 RDO - Gold Decalcifier 4 x 1 gal/cs
RT 12558 Chromic Acid 5% Aqueous Solution 500 ml
 Decalcifier
 Clearing Solvent Xylene Substitutes  Ready-to-use.  Protects cellular structure.
This clearing solvent offers Histology and Cytology laboratories a safer  For hard specimens.  For use with human and animal
alternative to xylene.  Minimal interference with calcified tissue, bone, cartilage
 Contains no xylene or toluene.  For use in manual and subsequent staining. and other hard specimens.
 No citrus odor. automated systems. RT 64147-01 Decalcifier 1L
RT 64147-06 Decalcifier 6x1L
RT 64129-10 Clearing Solvent 1 gal RT 64147-10 Decalcifier 10 L

Conjugates, Light Microscopy,

see pages 72-90 

450 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec14_446-465_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 5:17 PM Page 451

Histology and Light Microscopy SECTION 14

FIXING, CLEARING, AND DEHYDRATING CHEMICALS
Techniques for RDO Rapid Decalcifier  Fast Frozen Fix
Prepared fixative – This is one step quick fix for
Animal Tissue Techniques frozen sectioned tissue. Fixes tissue to slide to
allow for staining procedures. Apply to most
Fourth edition
tissue types.
Gretchen L. Humason
Decalcification
RT 15280-01 Fast Frozen Fix™ 100 ml
RT 15280-05 Fast Frozen Fix™ 500 ml
Calcium deposits may be so heavily concentrated in the tissue that
they may interfere with sectioning and result in torn sections and
nicks on the knife edge. If deposits are sparse, overnight soakings  Fast Frozen Stain Kit
of blocked tissue in water will soften the deposits sufficiently for
sectioning. Heavy deposits may be removed by any of several A rapid method to stain frozen tissue for permanent use. This kit
methods, but do not leave tissue in any fluid longer than necessary. includes a unique Fast Frozen Fix that is alcohol based, and will not
If any doubt arises about the completion of decalcification, interfere with immunohistochemical procedures and suitable for Laser
check for calcium by the following method: Capture Microdisecction (LCM). Kit consists of: 100 ml Fast Fix (15280-
01), 100 ml Eosin Y 0,5% Solution (15285-02), 100 ml Gill Hematoxylin
To 5ml of the solution containing the tissue add 1ml of 5% sodium
#3 (15285-03), 100 ml Scott’s Bluing Solution (#15285-04) and one
or ammonium oxalate. Allow to stand for 5 minutes. If precipitate
forms, decalcification is not complete. A clear solution indicates it 100 ml CitraMount® Medium (#18005)
is complete. Sticking needles in the tissue to check hardness is a RT 15285-00 Fast Frozen Stain Kit 100 ml
sloppy technique that can damage cells.
An excellent decalcifying fluid, RDO can be purchased by the  Ferric Ammonium Sulfate
gallon. After using RDO for several years, I recommend it as RT 15505-40 Ferric Ammonium Sulfate, 4% Aqueous 500 ml
superior to other solutions. Its rapidity of action is remarkable and RT 15505-50 Ferric Ammonium Sulfate, 5% Aqueous 500 ml
the quality of staining and histological detail following its use is
excellent. Old bones cut down to one centimeter in thickness, if  Ferric Chloride, Hexahydrate,
possible, require a six hour treatment: small and young pieces,
only one to two hours. Teeth will require overnight and up to Reagent, A.C.S.
eighteen to twenty four hours. Do not over decalcify; this detracts FeCl3.6H2O F.W. 270.30 CAS #13478-10-9
from the staining quality. Decalcifying may be followed by a brief Assay ..............................................................................97.0-102%
washing in water but this is not necessary. Fixation and Insoluble Matters. ....................................................................0.01%
decalcification may be combined in a mixture of one part undiluted Nitrate (about 0.001%) ..................................................To Pass Test
formalin with nine parts RDO. Phosphorous Compound ........................................................0.01%
Sulfate ..................................................................................0.01%
Manufacturers Note: Arsenic ..................................................................................0.002%
The combination of RDO and formalin is discourage, but should Copper ..................................................................................0.003%
always be done under a fume hood to ensure the removal of Zinc ......................................................................................0.003%
potentially harmful vapors Always follow the suggested directions References for use:
for use.
Membrane stains
• Gasic, G., Berwick et al (1963). Hale stain for sialic acid containing mucins. J. Cell Biol., 19:223

 Deionized Water, Reagent Grade A.C.S. • Gasic, G., Berwick, et al (1968). Positive and Negative colloidal iron as cell surface
electron stains. Lab. Invest., 18:63
H2O F.W. 18.02 CAS #7732-18-5 • Blanquet, P.R. and Loiez, A. (1974). Colloidal iron used at pHs lower than 1 as electron
stain for surface proteins. J. Histochem. Cytochem., 22:368
EMS Reagent Grade Water is typically prepared at 18 megohm/cm
• Matukafs, V.J., Panner et al (1967). Studies on ultrastructural identification and
specific resistance using a reverse osmosis, mixed deionization, distribution of protein-polysaccharides in cartilage matrix. J. Cell Biol., 32:365
activated filtration and final filtration at 0.2 microns. • Benedetti, E.L. and Emmelot, P. (1967). Studies on plasma membranes IV. The
Color (APHA) ............................................................................<+/-5 Ultrastructural localization and content of sialic acid in plasma membranes isolated from
rat liver and hepatoma. J. Cell Sci., 2:499
Bacteriological purity ..........................................................0 CFUs/L
• Rowley, J.R. (1971). Resolution of channels in the exine by translocation of colloidal iron.
Residue after evaporation ......................................................10ppm Pro. 29th Ann. EMSA Meet., p.352. Claitor’s Pub. Division, Baton Rouge, LA
Coliform................................................................................negative • Nicolson, G.L. (1973). Anionic sites of human erythrocyte membranes.I. Effects of
trypsin, phospholipase C, and pH on the topography of bound positively charged colloidal
RT 22800-01 Deionized Water 1 gal particles. J. Cell Biol., 57:373
RT 22800-05 Deionized Water 5 gal
• Hendy, R. (1971). Electron microscopy of lipofucsin pigment stained by the Schmorl and
Fontana technique. Histochemie, 26:311.
RT 15510 500 g

 Ferric Chloride 10%, Aqueous Solution

RT 15512-02 Ferric Chloride 2% Aqueous 500 ml
RT 15512-10 Ferric Chloride 10% Aqueous 500 ml

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 451
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec14_446-465_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 5:17 PM Page 452

SECTION 14 Histology and Light Microscopy

FIXING, CLEARING, AND DEHYDRATING CHEMICALS
 Fixatives
 B-5 Fixative  CytoPrep Fixative
For lymph nodes. CytoPrep Fixative forms a clear protective coating over specimens
RT 64122-05 B-5 Fixative 500 ml while fixing cells. It is ideal for cytological smears and it dries within
RT 64122-06 B-5 Fixative 1 lt 4 to 6 minutes. Good for safe storage and transportation of slides.
RT 64122-10 B-5 Fixative 4 lt It is water soluble and contains no chlorofluorocarbons. Comes in
a 4 oz. spray can.
 Bouin’s Solution
RT 64145-01 CytoPrep Fixative 4 oz.
Bouin’s solution can be used as a fixation and a staining fluid. Bouin’s RT 64145-12 CytoPrep Fixative 12 x 4 oz.
fixative is excellent for use on biopsy specimens of the gastrointestinal
tract. Tissue from the endocrine system are well fixed and many  Davidson’s Fixative (Hartmann’s/
antibodies react well with tissue fixed in Bouin’s. Bouin’s solution may Davidson’s Fixative)
be used as a routine fixative or a staining solution, but should not be This is rapid fixative. Results with good nuclear detail and minimal
used as a preservative for tissue. Tissue cannot be held in Bouin’s formalin pigment. Hatmann’s (Davidson’s) Fixative is useful for
solution for extended periods. The maximum fixation time in this solution preparing tumors, bone marrow, gynecologic specimen, fatty breast,
should be less than 48 hours and should be transferred to alcohol. medical biopsies. Fixation of small specimen is rapid. Exposure to the
Packaged in leak-proof histo-containers, prefilled and ready-to-use. fixative should be limited to 24 hours (tissue may then be transferred to
Formulated with Picric Acid saturated aqueous solution 75%, neutral buffered formalin or 70% alcohol for storage).
Formalin (40% aqueous formaldehyde) 25% and Glacial Acetic Based on the volume of 1125 ml solution, there is 2 part Formalin (35-
acid 5% in de-ionized water 39%), 3 part Ethanol, 1 part Glacial Acetic acid, and 3 part of tap water.
RT 15990-01 Bouin’s Fluid 1L RT 64133-10 Hartmann’s (Davidson’s Fixative) 1L
RT 15990-04 Bouin’s Fluid 4L RT 64133-14 Hartmann’s (Davidson’s Fixative) 4L
Bouin’s Fluid in Pre-filled cups:
RT 15990-10 Bouin’s Fluid 50 x 10 ml/cs  Modified Davidson’s Fixative
RT 15990-20 Bouin’s Fluid 50 x 20 ml/cs
RT 15990-30 Bouin’s Fluid 20 x 30 ml/cs (14% Ethyl Alcohol, Denatured, 37.5% Formalin 37-39%, 6.25% Glacial
Acetic Acid, and D.I. Water)
 Brasil Fixative RT 64133-50 Modified Davidson's Fixative 1L
Ethanol, Picric Acid, Formalin, Acetic Acid, Glacial  Dietrich’s Fixative
This fixative is most popular when glycogen is the target. The solution is Ethanol, formalin, glacial acetic acid, distilled water
similar to Bouins Solution (alcoholic) offering quick hardening and good
RT 15958-10 Dietrich’s Fixative 10x10ml
staining with acid dyes. RT 15958-20 Dietrich’s Fixative 100 ml

RT 15995-10 Brasil Fixative 10x10ml

 Fast Frozen Fix
RT 15995-20 Brasil Fixative 100 ml Prepared fixative – This is one step quick fix for frozen sectioned tissue.
Fixes tissue to slide to allow for staining procedures. Apply to most
 Carnoy’s Fixatives tissue types.
Stock solution RT 15280-01 Fast Frozen Fix™ 100 ml
RT 15280-05 Fast Frozen Fix™ 500 ml
RT 64130-05 Carnoy’s Fluid 500 ml
64130-50 Carnoy’s Fluid Without Chloroform 500 ml
 Fixative/Decalcifier
RT

 Carson’s Phosphate Buffered Formalin  A solution that fixes and decalcifies in one step.
Millonig’s phosphate buffered formalin as modified by Carson, Martin  Prevents loss of cellular structure.
and Lynn, by using 4% formalin in 0.1M sodium phosphate monobasic  Enhances hematoxylin staining.
with sodium hydroxide to pH 7.2 RT 64148-01 Fixative/Decalcifier 1L
RT
RT 64148-06 Fixative/Decalcifier 6x1L
15732-05 Carson’s Phosphate Buffered Formalin 500 ml
RT
15732-10 Carson’s Phosphate Buffered Formalin 1L
 Formalde-Fresh Low Odor Solution;
 Carson’s Phosphate Buffered Histology Grade
A specially formulated odor-mask which neutralizes the formalin odor
Paraformaldehyde without affecting subsequent tissue processing, handling, or staining.
For some tissues, the use of formalin (contains 10 – 15% Methanol) is Low odor, ready-to-use 10% formalin solution. May be used as a fixative
not suitable, we offer the alternative formaldehyde (prepared from or preservative of specimens. Its shelf life is 24 months.
paraformaldehyde – contains no methanol) for your convenience. RT 15678-01 Formalde-Fresh 4L
RT 15733-05 Carson’s Phosphate Buffered Paraformaldehyde 500 ml RT 15678-04 Formalde-Fresh 4x4L
RT 15733-10 Carson’s Phosphate Buffered Paraformaldehyde 1L

452 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec14_446-465_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 5:17 PM Page 453

Histology and Light Microscopy SECTION 14

FIXING, CLEARING, AND DEHYDRATING CHEMICALS
 Fixatives (continued)  Paraformaldehyde, Prepared Fixatives
 Buffered Formalde-Fresh, Low-Odor
In addition to our complete line of Formaldehyde solutions
10% Formalin Solution we have now added to the line.
Low odor, prepared w/v, pH 6.9 to 7.1 at 25°C. 10% formalin
in Phosphate buffer according to the A.F.I.P. Manual of Histology. Paraformaldehyde 0.5% in 0.1M phosphate buffer pH7.4
This solution allows for long-term storage of tissue specimens. 0-5˚C 15951-10 Paraformaldehyde, 0.5% each in 0.1M Phosphate Buffer 10x10ml
0-5˚C 15951-15 Paraformaldehyde, 0.5% each in 0.1M Phosphate Buffer 500 ml
RT 15741-01 Low-Odor Formalin 10% Buffered 4L
RT 15741-04 Low-Odor Formalin 10% Buffered 4x4L
Paraformaldehyde 1% Aqueous
 Formalin, Neutral, Buffered RT
RT
15953-10
15953-15
Paraformaldehyde, 1% each Aqueous
Paraformaldehyde, 1% each Aqueous
10x10ml
500 ml
10% w/v in Acetate Buffer
Buffered with Sodium Acetate in accordance with the A.F.I.P. Manual Paraformaldehyde 1% in 0.1M Phosphate Buffer pH, 7.4
of Histology. pH 6.0 to ph 7.1 at 20°C. Filtered and ready-to-use. 0-5˚C 15952-10 Paraformaldehyde, 1.0% each in 0.1M Phosphate Buffer 10x10ml
0-5˚C 15952-15 Paraformaldehyde, 1.0% each in 0.1M Phosphate Buffer 500 ml
RT 15738-01 Formalin 10% Buffered in Acetate 1L
RT 15738-04 Formalin 10% Buffered in Acetate 4L Paraformaldehyde 1% Glut 2% in 0.1M Phosphate buffer,
pH 7.4
 Formalin, Neutral, Buffered 0-5˚C 15949-30 Paraformaldehyde 1 % Glutaraldehyde 2% in 0.1M 10x10ml
Phosphate Buffer
10% w/v in Phosphate Buffer 0-5˚C 15949-35 Paraformaldehyde 1 % Glutaraldehyde 2% in 0.1M 500 ml
Buffered with phosphate in accordance with the A.F.I.P. Manual Phosphate Buffer
of Histology. pH 6.9 to 7.1 at 25°C. Filtered and ready-to-use.
RT 15740 Formalin 10% Buffered in Phosphate 450 ml Paraformaldehyde 3% Glutaraldehyde 0.35% in 0.1M
RT 15740-01 Formalin 10% Buffered in Phosphate 1L Sodium Cacodylate, pH 7.4
RT 15740-04 Formalin 10% Buffered in Phosphate 4L 0-5˚C 15949-50 Paraformaldehyde 3 % Glutaraldehyde 0.35% in 0.1M 10x10ml
Sodium Cacodylate Buffer
 Formalin 1% Non Buffered 0-5˚C 15949-60 Paraformaldehyde 3 % Glutaraldehyde 0.35% in 0.1M 500 ml
RT 15734-01 Formalin 1% Non-Buffered 1L Sodium Cacodylate Buffer
RT 15734-04 Formalin 1% Non-Buffered 4L
Paraformaldehyde 4% and Glutaraldehyde 1% in Phosphate
 Formalin 2%, Non-Buffered 0-5˚C
Buffer, pH 7.0
15949-70 Paraformaldehyde 4 % Glutaraldehyde 1% in 0.1M 10x10ml
RT 15735-01 Formalin 2% Non-Buffered 1L Phosphate Buffer
RT 15735-04 Formalin 2% Non-Buffered 4L 0-5˚C 15949-80 Paraformaldehyde 4 % Glutaraldehyde 1% in 0.1M 500 ml
Phosphate Buffer
 Formalin 3%, Non-Buffered
RT 15735-10 Formalin 3% Non-Buffered 1L Paraformaldehyde 4% in 0.1M Sodium Cacodylate, pH7.4
RT 15735-20 Formalin 3% Non-Buffered 4L
0-5˚C 15952-10S Paraformaldehyde 4 % in 0.1M Sodium Cacodylate Buffer 10x10ml
0-5˚C 15952-15S Paraformaldehyde 4 % in 0.1M Sodium Cacodylate Buffer 500 ml

 Formalin 4%, Non-Buffered Paraformaldehyde 4% in 0 .1M Phosphate Buffer, pH 7.4

RT 15735-30 Formalin 4% Non-Buffered 1L 0-5˚C 15735-10S Paraformaldehyde 4% in 0 .1M Phosphate Buffer 10x10ml
RT 15735-40 Formalin 4% Non-Buffered 4L 0-5˚C 15735-20S Paraformaldehyde 4% in 0 .1M Phosphate Buffer 500 ml

Paraformaldehyde 4% in 0 .2M Phosphate Buffer, pH 7.4

 Formalin 5%, Non-Buffered 0-5˚C 15735-30S Paraformaldehyde 4% in 0 .2M Phosphate Buffer 10x10ml
RT 15735-50 Formalin 5% Non-Buffered 1L 0-5˚C 15735-40S Paraformaldehyde 4% in 0 .2M Phosphate Buffer 500 ml
RT 15735-60 Formalin 5% Non-Buffered 4L
Paraformaldehyde 4% in 0 .1M Phosphate Buffer, pH 7.2
0-5˚C 15735-50S Paraformaldehyde 4% in 0 .1M Phosphate Buffer 10x10ml
 TissuePrep Buffered 10% Formalin 0-5˚C 15735-60S Paraformaldehyde 4% in 0 .1M Phosphate Buffer 500 ml
Prefilled with 10% formalin Cat# 15740. Ready-to-use in pre-filled cups.
Paraformaldehyde 4% in 0 .2M Phosphate Buffer, pH 7.2
Labeled in accordance to OSHA requirements, which gives you 0-5˚C 15735-70 Paraformaldehyde 4% in 0 .2M Phosphate Buffer 10x10ml
immediate information regarding handling and first aid procedures. Pre- 0-5˚C 15735-80 Paraformaldehyde 4% in 0 .2M Phosphate Buffer 500 ml
measured in wide-mouth, leak-proof, opaque polypropylene containers
which limits your exposure to formaldehyde and saves you time. Paraformaldehyde 4% in 0 .1M Phosphate
BufferSaline, pH7.4
Cat.# Cup Size Filled Pack/cs 0-5˚C 15735-85 Paraformaldehyde 4% in 0 .1M Phosphate Buffer Saline 10x10ml
RT 15742-10 15 ml 10 ml 50/cs 0-5˚C 15735-90 Paraformaldehyde 4% in 0 .1M Phosphate Buffer Saline 500 ml
RT 15742-20 30 ml 20 ml 50/cs
RT 15742-30 60 ml 30 ml 20/cs Paraformaldehyde 4% in 0 .2M Phosphate Buffer Saline, pH
RT 15742-60 120 ml 60 ml 20/cs 7.4
0-5˚C 15735-95 Paraformaldehyde 4% in 0 .2M Phosphate Buffer 10x10ml
0-5˚C 15735-100 Paraformaldehyde 4% in 0 .2M Phosphate Buffer 500 ml

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 453
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec14_446-465_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 5:17 PM Page 454

SECTION 14 Histology and Light Microscopy

FIXING, CLEARING, AND DEHYDRATING CHEMICALS
® Fixatives (continued)
® Formaraldehyde (Formalin) ® Formaldehyde Aqueous Solution, 16%
(Paraformaldehyde Aqueous Solution)
® Formaldehyde, Reagent, A.C.S.
HCHO F.W. 30.03 CAS #50-00-0 EM Grade
Specific Gravity ......................................1.09 Paraformaldehyde - methanol free solution.
A.C.S. Specifications: A more efficient and rapid penetrant fixative
used in combination with Glutaraldehyde and
Assay ......................................35.5 to 38.0% Acrolein fixatives. Easy to break, prescored,
Residue after ignition ........................0.005% 10ml ampoules sealed under inert gas, or
Color (A.P.H.A.) ..........................................10 100ml bottles.
Sulfate (SO4) ......................................0.002%
Heavy Metal (as Pb) ..............................5ppm
16% Aqueous Solution
RT 15700 10 ml 20% Aqueous Solution
Titrate Acid ................................0.006 meq/g RT 15710 10 x 10 ml RT 15713 10 x 10 ml
Chloride (Cl) ..........................................5ppm RT 15710-S 100 ml RT 15713-S 100 ml
Iron (Fe) ................................................5ppm RT 15711 10 box/lot
RT 15680 450 ml 10% Aqueous Solution 32% Aqueous Solution
RT 15712 10 x 10 ml RT 15714 10 x 10 ml
RT 15681 4 x 450 ml
RT 15712-S 100 ml RT 15714-S 100 ml
RT 15682 1 qt (946 ml)
® Formaldehyde, 37%, Microfiltered In addition to our complete line of Formaldehyde solutions
METHANOL

HCHO
(Formalin Microfiltered)
F.W. 30.03 CAS# 50-00-0
shown above we have now added to the line.
Since the DOT (Department of Transportation) has changed the definition of what a non dangerous
FREE
Microfiltered with a 0.45 micron membrane; solution of formaldehyde is to under 10%, we are now offering an 8% and a 4% solution. This will
suitable as an EM fixative when a methanol
allow us to ship overnight as well as overseas without any hazardous charges saving our
free solution is not necessary.
RT 15686 10 x 10 ml customers a good deal of money.
The quality of our 8% and 4% aqueous Paraformaldehyde solution is as good as all of the other
concentrations that we offer.
® Formaldehyde
4% Aqueous Solution 8% Aqueous Solution
(Karnovsky’s Fixatives) RT 157-4 10 x 10 ml RT 157-8 10 x 10 ml
RT 157-4-100 100 ml RT 157-8-100 100 ml
RT 15720 kit
RT 15730 box of 5 kits
® Perfusion Wash and Perfusion Fixative Ready to use
® Formaldehyde/Zinc Fixative For all of the best results we offer ready to use Perfusion washes and fixatives which
Prepared: Ready-to-use. are recommended by the NeuroScience Association. All of our solutions are ready made
T Preserves fine nuclear details. and are of the highest quality.
T Good for immunostaining. We have three groups of solutions Perfusion Fixative (1224SK):
T Contains no mercury. commercially available. Paraformaldehye 4%/Sucrose 4%
T Can be used with automated tissue processors. Group I : Perfusion wash and Fixative in Phosphate Buffer 0.2M pH 7.2
T Works well with standard and special stains Technical Grade. To be used Group III: Perfusion wash and Fixative
because zinc is a stain enhancing mordant. for Standard stains: Superior Reagent Grade.For
Perfusion Wash (1220SK): the best results use this group.
RT 15675-01 Formaldehyde/Zinc Fixative 1L Phosphate Buffered Saline 01.M This is Sodium Cacodylate based
RT 15675-04 Formaldehyde/Zinc Fixative 4L Phosphate Buffer pH 7.2-7.4 for NSA’S Disintegrative
Degeneration Stain
Perfusion Fixative (1221SK): 10%
Phosphate Buffered Formaldehyde Perfusion Wash (1222SK): 0.8%
® Ampule Breaker NaCl/0.4% Dextrose/0.8% Sucrose/
Group II: Perfusion wash and Fixative 0.023% CaCl2/Sodium Cacodylate
® Ampule Cracker Reagent Grade. To be used for 0.034%
Standard and ImmunoHistochemistry
® Breaksafe Stains. Perfusion Fixative (1223SK): 4%
Paraformaldehyde/4% Sucrose/
See page 214, 1104 UUUUU Perfusion Wash (1219SK): 1.4% Sodium Cacodylate
Phosphate Buffered Saline 0.1M
Phosphate Buffer pH 7.2-7.4
TECHNICAL TIP For a complete procedure and protocol for the use of these washes and fixatives please see the following site:
www.neuroscienceassociates.com/perf-solution1 or 2 or 3.htm
To fix cornea, one should use the 1220SK Perfusion Wash, Technical 1000 ml If you want a custom wash
following fixative: 2% Glutaraldehyde, 1% 1221SK Perfusion Fixative, Technical 1000 ml or fixative made, please
Paraformaldehyde (Formaldehyde) in a 0.1M 1219SK Perfusion Wash, Reagent 1000 ml
just let us know and we
Sodium Cacodylate buffer; pH 7.4 containing 1224SK Perfusion Fixative, Reagent 1000 ml
0.02% Picric Acid. (Assouline, et al 1992) 1222SK Perfusion Wash, Super Reagent 1000 ml
will be happy to make you
1223SK Perfusion Fixative, Super reagent 1000 ml whatever you require.

454 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec14_446-465_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 5:17 PM Page 455

Histology and Light Microscopy SECTION 14

FIXING, CLEARING, AND DEHYDRATING CHEMICALS
® Fixatives (continued)
® CoreDish™ Multiple Biopsy Containers Half Prefilled with 10% Formalin
Few recommendations concerning how the biopsies should be handled have been published. Performing a large number of biopsies means an increase in
the number of containers handled and consequently a technical overload of the transmission network, which occurs without any financial counterpart. A new
approach had to be developed in order to increase productivity.
We are proud to offer a multi-compartment container in the shape of a dish and half prefilled with 10% Neutral buffered Formalin, for holding and
transporting biopsies. It is supplied with a leak-proof closure with O-ring ensuring total protection of contents. It conforms to OSHA directives. These
CoreDisn™ measure only 15mm H x 95 mm Diameter. Each compartment is clearly identified to allow proper placement and visualization of the biopsy
being inserted. Thanks to CoreDish™ it is no more necessary to use a multiple of individual containers, thereby reducing cost and risks of confusion.
CoreDish™ available in many configurations to serve in different biopsy, such as prostate, upper GI tract and lower GI tract. A label allows recording the
related information, patient ID, doctor, date and time.

® M970-D5B-2 CoreDish™ Breast Biopsy Container

Half Prefilled with 10% Formalin
This multi-compartment container (out of five compartments, four are labeled: LUQ, RUQ, LLQ, RLQ) in the shape of a dish
and half prefilled with 10% Neutral Buffered Formalin, for holding and transporting biopsies. It is supplied with a leak-proof
screw closure with O-ring ensuring total protection of contents. It conforms to OSHA directives. The dish measures only 15 x
95 mm in diameter. Each compartment is clearly identified to allow proper placement and visualization of the breast biopsy
being inserted. A writing area for patient information is provided.
15736-10
Cat. # For Compartments
RT 15736-10 Breast 5 10/pk

® M970-D8P CoreDish™ Prostate Biopsy Container

Half Prefilled with 10% Formalin
For prostate biopsies. Eight compratments. Leakproof seal with O-ring lid. An area for patient information is provided. Seven
labeled compartments: Base, Lateral Base, Medium, Lateral Medium, Apex, Lateral Apex.

Cat. # For Compartments

RT 15736-20 Prostate 8 10/pk 15736-20

® M970-D8UGI CoreDish™ Upper GI Biopsy Container

Half Prefilled with 10% Formalin
For upper GI track biopsies. Eight compratments. Leakproof seal with O-ring lid. An area for patient information is provided.
Seven labeled compartments: Gastric Card, Gastric Body, GE Junction, Gastric ATR, Distal Esophage, Pylorus, Duodeum.

Cat. # For Compartments

RT 15736-30 Upper GI 8 10/pk 15736-30

® M970-D12LGI CoreDish™ Lower Gi Biopsy Container

Half Prefilled with 10% Formalin
For lower GI track biopsies. Twelve compratments. Leakproof seal with O-ring lid. An area for patient information is provided.
Ten labeled compartments: Proximal Flexure Colon, Hepatic Fleure Colon, Distal Transverse Colon, Ascending Colon, Splenic
flexure Colon, Cecum, Decending Colon, Terminal lleum, Rectum, Sigmmoid Colon.
Cat. # For Compartments
RT 15736-40 Lower GI 12 10/pk
15736-40
® M970-D12P CoreDish™ Prostate Biopsy Container
Half Prefilled with 10% Formalin
For prostate biopsies. Twelve compratments. Leakproof seal with O-ring lid. An area for patient information is
provided. TWelve labeled compartments: L Base, R Base, L Lateral Base, R Lateral Base, L Medium, R Medium, L
Lateral Medium, R Lateral Medium, L Lateral , L Apex, R Apex, R Lateral Apex.
Cat. # For Compartments
RT 15736-50 Prostate 12 10/pk

15736-50

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 455
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec14_446-465_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 5:17 PM Page 456

SECTION 14 Histology and Light Microscopy

FIXING, CLEARING, AND DEHYDRATING CHEMICALS
® Glutaraldehyde Glutaraldehyde

OCHCH2CH2CH2CHO F.W. 100.12 THE HIGHEST

CAS #111-30-8 PURITY!
Specific Gravity @ 20/20°C: 1.131

® EM Grade Distillation Purified

T The Universal Fixative for Electron Microscopy.
T Purified to EM Grade from commercial grade by “all-glass
vacuum-distillation.”
T THE HIGHEST PURITY, free from polymers and other contaminants. For any special concentration, or packaging requirements
T Each lot is tested and assayed in our lab before we ship and other than those already listed, please call us today. We
guarantee its purity. will manufacture in accordance to your specifications.
T Sealed under dry nitrogen.
T Refrigerated prior to shipment. ® Biological Grade
0-5˚C 16400 25% Solution 450 ml ea
After glutaraldehyde has been purified to EM grade, it has a high risk of 0-5˚C 16401 25% Solution 4 x 450 ml bx
polymerizing if it is not handled properly. Electron Microscopy Sciences 0-5˚C 16410 25% Solution 1 gal. ea
takes special precautions to assure a polymer-free, pure glutaraldehyde. 0-5˚C 16411 25% Solution 4 x 1 gal. bx
Every lot of our EM grade glutaraldehyde is assayed prior to shipping 0-5˚C 16500 50% Solution 450 ml ea
assuring you consistent purity and the highest possible quality. If stored 0-5˚C 16501 50% Solution 4 x 450 ml bx
properly, our Glutaraldehyde has a very long shelf life. 0-5˚C 16520 50% Solution 1 liter ea
0-5˚C 16521 50% Solution 4 x 1 liter bx
We package our glutaraldehyde in 10ml, single dose ampoules, sealed
under dry nitrogen, and kept refrigerated until it is shipped. We offer ® Serum Vial Glutaraldehyde
our glutaraldehyde in a wide range of percentages to simplify mixing Over the years, many of our valued customers have requested
procedures and avoiding waste. purchasing our Glutaraldehyde in serum vials. This packaging allows
EM grade glutaraldehyde, stored in volumes greater than 100ml, with the user to puncture the special non-reactive seal with a hypodermic
repeated defrosting and recapping, will polymerize in time, producing an syringe and draw out the exact quantity of Glutaraldehyde needed
absorption peak of 235nm rather than the 280nm of pure EM grade. The without opening the container. This packaging assures freshness
presence of polymerized glutaraldehyde greatly reduces its efficiency as a and purity of the Glutaraldehyde at all times
cross-linking agent, preventing proper fixation. For this reason, we provide
0-5˚C 16216 25% Aqueous EM Grade 10 x 10 ml
10ml ampoules and 100ml bottle quantities for larger applications. 0-5˚C 16214 Glutaraldehyde in serum Vial 100 ml
0-5˚C 16316 50% Aqueous EM Grade 10 x 10 ml
8% Aqueous Solution
0-5˚C 16000 10 ml ampoule ea
0-5˚C 16314 Glutaraldehyde in serum Vial 100 ml
* All other concentrations are available in serum vials upon request.
0-5˚C 16019 Box 10 x 2 ml bx
0-5˚C 16020 Box 10 x 10 ml ampoules bx ® Anhydrous EM Grade Glutaraldehyde:
0-5˚C 16021 same as 16020 10 bxs + bx Specially Prepared–10% Solution
0-5˚C 16022 same as 16020 20 bxs + bx
Rapid-Freezing on a polished metal surface, at the temp. of liquid
0-5˚C 16010 100 ml bottle ea
helium or liquid nitrogen, followed by freeze-substitution in osmium-
10% Aqueous Solution acetone, has been shown to be a very useful technique for capturing
0-5˚C 16100 10 ml ampoule ea
0-5˚C 16120 Box 10 x 10 ml ampoules bx
rapid cellular events and for preserving cell ultrastructure.
0-5˚C 16121 same as 16120 10 bxs + bx T John M. Robinson and Morris J. Karnovsky, 1991. "Rapid-freezing
0-5˚C 16122 same as 16120 20 bxs + bx Cytochemistry: Preservation of Tubular Lysosomes and Enzyme
0-5˚C 16110 100 ml bottle ea Activity". J. of Histochem., Cytochem. Vol. 39, No. 6, pp 787-792
25% Aqueous Solution Ordering Information: (please call for additional information)
0-5˚C 16200 10 ml ampoule ea
0-5˚C 16530 10% in Acetone 10 x 10 ml bx
0-5˚C 16220 Box 10 x 10 ml ampoules bx
0-5˚C 16531 10% in Ethanol 10 x 10 ml bx
0-5˚C 16221 same as 16220 10 bxs + bx
0-5˚C 16532 10% in Methanol 10 x 10 ml bx
0-5˚C 16222 same as 16220 20 bxs + bx
0-5˚C 16533 10% in Solvent of your choice 10 x 10 ml bx
0-5˚C 16210 100 ml bottle ea
We would be pleased to fill your specific glutaraldehyde needs. Please call for prices on
50% Aqueous Solution special concentrations or size requirements.
0-5˚C 16300 10 ml ampoule ea
0-5˚C 16320 Box 10 x 10 ml ampoules bx
0-5˚C 16321 same as 16320 10 bxs + bx
0-5˚C 16322 same as 16320 20 bxs + bx
0-5˚C 16310 100 ml bottle ea
70% Aqueous Solution
0-5˚C 16350 10 ml ampoule ea
0-5˚C 16360 box 10 x 10 ml ampoules bx
0-5˚C 16365 box 10 x 2 ml ampoules bx

456 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec14_446-465_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 5:18 PM Page 457

Histology and Light Microscopy SECTION 14

FIXING, CLEARING, AND DEHYDRATING CHEMICALS
 Glutaraldehyde, Pre-Made, Ready-to-Use,
in Buffer
Glutaraldehyde 0.625% in 0.1M Phosphate Buffer, Glutaraldehyde 3.0% Paraformaldehyde3% in 0.1M
pH 7.4 Phosphate Buffer, pH 7.4
0-5˚C 16535-05 Glutaraldehyde 0.625% in Phosphate Buffer, pH 7.4 500 ml 0-5˚C 16538-06 Glutaraldehyde 3% Paraformaldehyde 3% in 10x10ml
0-5˚C 16535-10 Glutaraldehyde 0.625% in Phosphate Buffer, pH 7.4 1L Phosphate Buffer, pH 7.4
0-5˚C 16538-07 Glutaraldehyde 3% Paraformaldehyde 3% in 500ml
Glutaraldehyde 2% in 0.1M Phosphate Buffer, pH 7.4 Phosphate Buffer, pH 7.4
0-5˚C 16536-05 Glutaraldehyde 2% in Phosphate Buffer, pH 7.4 500 ml 0-5˚C 16538-08 Glutaraldehyde 3% Paraformaldehyde 3% in 1 Liter
0-5˚C 16536-10 Glutaraldehyde 2% in Phosphate Buffer, pH 7.4 1L Phosphate Buffer, pH 7.4
Glutaraldehyde 2% in 0.1M Sodium Cacodylate Buffer, Glutaraldehyde 4% in 0.1M in Sodium Cacodylate
pH 7.4 Buffer, pH 7.4
0-5˚C 16536-15 Glutaraldehyde 2% in Sodium Cacodylate Buffer, pH 7.4 500 ml 0-5˚C 16539-06 Glutaraldehyde 4% in 0.1M Sodium 10x10ml
0-5˚C 16536-20 Glutaraldehyde 2% in Sodium Cacodylate Buffer, pH 7.4 1L Cacodylate Buffer, pH 7.4
Glutaraldehyde 2.5% in 0.1M Phosphate Buffer, 0-5˚C 16539-07 Glutaraldehyde 4% in 0.1M Sodium 500ml
Cacodylate Buffer, pH 7.4
pH 7.4 0-5˚C 16539-08 Glutaraldehyde 4% in 0.1M Sodium 1 Liter
0-5˚C 16537-05 Glutaraldehyde 2.5% in Phosphate Buffer, pH 7.4 500 ml
Cacodylate Buffer, pH 7.4
0-5˚C 16537-10 Glutaraldehyde 2.5% in Phosphate Buffer, pH 7.4 1L
Glutaraldehyde 5.0% Aqueous
Glutaraldehyde 2.5% in 0.1M Sodium Cacodylate 0-5˚C 16539-15 Glutaraldehyde 5% Aqueous 10x10ml
Buffer, pH 7.4 0-5˚C 16539-20 Glutaraldehyde 5% Aqueous 500ml
0-5˚C 16537-15 Glutaraldehyde 2.5% in Sodium Cacodylate Buffer, pH 7.4 500 ml 0-5˚C 16539-25 Glutaraldehyde 5% Aqueous 1 Liter
0-5˚C 16537-20 Glutaraldehyde 2.5% in Sodium Cacodylate Buffer, pH 7.4 1L Glutaraldehyde 5% in 0.1M Phosphate Buffer, pH 7.4
Glutaraldehyde 3% in 0.1M Phosphate Buffer, pH 7.4 0-5˚C 16539-30 Glutaraldehyde 5% in 0.1M Phosphate Buffer, pH 7.4 10x10ml
0-5˚C 16538-05 Glutaraldehyde 3% in Phosphate Buffer, pH 7.4 500 ml 0-5˚C 16539-35 Glutaraldehyde 5% in 0.1M Phosphate Buffer, pH 7.4 500ml
0-5˚C 16538-10 Glutaraldehyde 3% in Phosphate Buffer, pH 7.4 1L 0-5˚C 16539-40 Glutaraldehyde 5% in 0.1M Phosphate Buffer, pH 7.4 1 Liter
Glutaraldehyde 3% in 0.1M Sodium Cacodylate Buffer,
pH 7.4  Glutaraldehyde/Formaldehyde
0-5˚C 16538-15 Glutaraldehyde 3% in Sodium Cacodylate Buffer, pH 7.4 500 ml Fixative (Karnovsky’s)
0-5˚C 16538-20 Glutaraldehyde 3% in Sodium Cacodylate Buffer, pH 7.4 1L This fixative contains 3% glutaraldehyde and 2% formaldehyde in 0.1M
Glutaraldehyde 3% Sodium Phosphate Buffer, pH 7.2 phosphate buffer, pH 7.4
0-5˚C 16539-45 Glutaraldehyde 3% in Sodium Phosphate Buffer, pH 7.2 10x10 ml Karnovsky’s with formalin 2% and Biological
0-5˚C 16539-50 Glutaraldehyde 3% in Sodium Phosphate Buffer, pH 7.2 500 ml glutaraldehyde 3% in 0.1m Phosphate Buffer
0-5˚C 16539-55 Glutaraldehyde 3% in Sodium Phosphate Buffer, pH 7.2 1L 0-5˚C 15731-10 Karnovsky Fixative Reagent Grade 1L
Glutaraldehyde 4% in 0.1m Phosphate Buffer, pH 7.3 Karnovsky’s with paraformaldehyde solution
0-5˚C 16539-60 Glutaraldehyde 4% in 0.1m Phosphate Buffer, pH 7.3 10x10 ml
0-5˚C 16539-65 Glutaraldehyde 4% in 0.1m Phosphate Buffer, pH 7.3 500 ml
and EM grade glutaraldehyde
0-5˚C 16539-70 Glutaraldehyde 4% in 0.1m Phosphate Buffer, pH 7.3 1L
0-5˚C 15732-10 Karnovsky Fixative EM Grade 1L
Please Note: This kit can be formulated to fit your requirements. Please contact us.
Glutaraldehyde 2% Paraformaldehyde 2% in
Phosphate Buffer, pH 7.4
0-5˚C 16536-06 Glutaraldehyde 2% Paraformaldehyde 2% in 100ml  Glutaraldehyde Spill Control; G-gard-ER
Phosphate Buffer, pH 7.4 Transforms glutaraldehyde to a nearly neutral solution and renders the
0-5˚C 16536-07 Glutaraldehyde 2% Paraformaldehyde 2% in 500ml solution acceptable for sewer disposal. Prepares glutaraldehyde for
Phosphate Buffer, pH 7.4
biodegradation. Reduces biocidal activity and odor. 65g G-gard pre-
0-5˚C 16536-08 Glutaraldehyde 2% Paraformaldehyde 2% in 1 Liter
Phosphate Buffer, pH 7.4 treats one gallon of 1% solution.
Glutaraldehyde 2.5% Paraformaldehyde 1% in RT 24142-01 Glutaraldehyde Spill Control 64g
RT 24142-10 Glutaraldehyde Spill Control 10x64g
Phosphate Buffer, pH 7.4
0-5˚C 16537-06 Glutaraldehyde 2.5% Paraformaldehyde 1% in 100ml

0-5˚C
Phosphate Buffer, pH 7.4
16537-07 Glutaraldehyde 2.5% Paraformaldehyde 1% in 500ml
 Ampule Breaker
Phosphate Buffer, pH 7.4  Ampule Cracker
0-5˚C 16537-08 Glutaraldehyde 2.5% Paraformaldehyde 1% in 1 Liter
Phosphate Buffer, pH 7.4  Breaksafe
Glutaraldehyde 2.5% Aqueous See page 214, 1104 
0-5˚C 16537-16 Glutaraldehyde 2.5% , Aqueous 10x10ml
0-5˚C 16537-17 Glutaraldehyde 2.5% Aqueous 500ml
0-5˚C 16537-18 Glutaraldehyde 2.5% Aqueous 1 Liter
Glutaraldehyde 3.0% Aqueous
0-5˚C 16537-19 Glutaraldehyde 3% Aqueous 100ml
0-5˚C 16537-20S Glutaraldehyde 3% Aqueous 500ml
0-5˚C 16537-21 Glutaraldehyde 3% Aqueous 1 Liter

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 457
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec14_446-465_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 5:18 PM Page 458

SECTION 14 Histology and Light Microscopy

FIXING, CLEARING, AND DEHYDRATING CHEMICALS
® Fixatives (continued)
® Michel’s Fixative, pH 7.0 – 7.4
® HISTOCHOICE™ MB® * RT 18040-05 Michel’s Fixative 500 ml
RT 18040-10 Michel’s Fixative 1L
The Molecular Biology Fixative RT 18040-20 Michel’s Fixative Pre-filled 20 x 10 ml
T SAFE - Contains no Formaldehyde, Glutaraldehyde or Mercury
T NON-TOXIC – Is completely odorless and can be safely disposed
of down the drain
TECHNICAL TIP
HISTOCHOICE™ MB® Tissue Fixative is the first fixative designed for the Tissue Biopsy in Michel's Fixative
molecular biologist. It is specialty formulated to preserve antigenic sites Place tissue biopsy in Michel’s fixative for 24-48 hours and then wash
for antibody probes and nucleic acid sites for immunohistochemistry. the tissue with Michel’s Buffer three changes a minimum of 10 minutes
HISTOCHOICE™MB® replaces formaldehyde based, alcohol based, each change and freeze at –70˚C.
Zenkers, B-5, B-3, Bouin’s and other fixatives with superior results.
Tissue fixed in HISTOCHOICE™MB® exhibit vibrant staining, better
nuclear and cytoplasmic detail, and will retain a crisp appearance even
® Mirsky’s Fixative™
after long-term fixation. T Saponin/Glyoxylate Fixative
T Preserves Immunohistological activity
Because this formula is designed specially for molecular biology applications, T Contains no formaldehyde
HISTOCHOICE™MB® fixed sections do not require pre-digestion or other T Fast-acting
recovery procedures to make important sites available. This means you
spend less time preparing slides and more time doing research. Mirsky’s Fixative™ is a superior fixing agent for use in
More than a fixative, HISTOCHOICE™MB is a preservative that leaves
® immunohistological and immunological protocols. Mirsky’s contains no
antigens and nucleic acids in their native state, allowing binding for formaldehyde or glutaraldehyde. Therefore, it has considerably reduced
specific probes. Primary antibodies can often be diluted several-fold due toxicity and virtually no odor. Mirsky’s Fixative is neutral, buffered, and
to the increased number of preserved antigenic sites, saving cost on isotonic (308 mOsmol). Additionally, Mirsky’s Fixative does not contain
every slide you process. toxic or hazardous buffers such as cacodylate or barbital. Hardening or
shrinkage of tissue is considerably reduced.
HISTOCHOICE™MB® fixed tissue retains a much more natural look and
feel than formalin fixed tissue. It is important to remember that these Double reactive sites afford excellent cross-linking properties while
tissues are not fixed by formalin, but rather preserved by maintaining sample enzyme activity. Samples processed in Mirsky’s
HISTOCHOICE™MB®. Fixative for light microscopy can subsequently be used in electron
microscopy procedures. Special buffer systems may be used in place of
RT 64115-01 HISTOCHOICE™MB® Fixative 1L
RT 64115-04 HISTOCHOICE™MB® Fixative 4L the buffer provided.
RT 64115-44 HISTOCHOICE™MB® Fixative 4x4L Use as a replacement for formalin and/or glutaraldehyde fixatives in
* HISTOCHOICE™ is registered name of Amresco immunohistological and immnocytological staining protocols. Tissue size
is unlimited, as long as the sample is no thicker than 0.5cm in at least
® Hollande’s Fixative one plane to assure uniformity of tissue penetration. The gross visual
A modification of Bouin’s solution. It is stable and will decalcify small appearance will be different than in formaldehyde and tissue may seem
bone specimens. Tissue that is fixed with Hollande’s can be stained “raw”. This is due to double site binding of the fixative with a resultant
successfully with most stains, and the cupric acetate in the solution reduction in tissue shrinkage. Microscopic examination of tissue
stabilizes red blood cell membranes and cosinophil and endocrine cell morphology will be noticeably improved. This material is intended to
granules so that less lysis occurs than with Bouin’s solution. Hollande’s maintain enzyme and antibody activity. For best results, tissue section of
is widely used as a fixative for biopsy specimens of the gastrointestinal high digestive enzyme content should be thoroughly rinsed in saline
tract. solution before fixation (e.g. trypsin in intestinal samples). Once fixed,
Thorough washing of the fixative prior to placing the specimen in a tissue may be retained in Mirsky’s Fixative and ethanol indefinitely.
phosphate buffered formalin solution is necessary because the salts Mirsky’s Fixative is normally distributed as a concentrated two bottle
present in the solution will form an insoluble phosphate precipitate. system, although high through-put laboratories often use the single
Packaged in leak-proof histo-containers; prefilled ready-to-use. bottle ready-to-use format. The two bottle system is comprised of
Mirsky’s Fixative 10X Concentrated and Mirsky’s Fixative 10X Buffer. To
Cat.# Cup Size Filled Pack/cs reconstitute to working strength, add 1 part Mirsky’s Fixative 10X Buffer
RT 64120-10 15 ml 10 ml 50/cs
RT
64120-20 30 ml 20 ml 50/cs
to 8 parts distilled or deionized water, mix thoroughly, then add 1 part
RT
64120-30 60 ml 30 ml 20/cs Mirsky’s Fixative 10X Concentrate and mix again.
Bulk packaging is available: The two bottle system has a shelf life of 12 months while the ready-to-
RT
64120-01 Hollande’s Fixative 1L use format has a shelf life of 30 days.
RT
64120-04 Hollande’s Fixative 4L
0-5˚C 15560 Mirsky’s Fixative System 200 ml
0-5˚C 15561-05 Mirsky’s Fixative Ready-to-Use 500 ml
® McDowell Trumps Fixative 0-5˚C 15561-10 Mirsky’s Fixative Ready-to-Use 1L
RT 18030-05 McDowell Trumps Fixative 500 ml 0-5˚C 15561-20 Mirsky’s Fixative Ready-to-Use 2L
RT 18030-10 McDowell Trumps Fixative 1L

458 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec14_446-465_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 5:18 PM Page 459

Histology and Light Microscopy SECTION 14

FIXING, CLEARING, AND DEHYDRATING CHEMICALS
® Russell’s Zenker Fixative ® Gold Chloride Aqueous Solutions
(Russel’s Modified Zenker) RT 16586 Gold Chloride 0.1% Aqueous 500 ml
RT 16587 Gold Chloride 0.2% Aqueous 500 ml
Due to the hazardous nature of mercury, Zenker’s fluid is no longer
RT 16588 Gold Chloride 0.5% Aqueous 500 ml
available however in place of it we are offering Russell’s Zenker RT 16589 Gold Chloride 1.0% Aqueous 500 ml
Fixative, which contains Zinc Chloride, and the staining results produces RT 16590 Gold Chloride 10.0% Aqueous 500 ml
by this fixative are comparable to those of Zenker’s Stock solution.
Russell’s Modified Zenker’s is used in the same manner as Zenker’s ® Gum Mastic
stock solution. 0-4˚C 16590-01 Gum Mastic, 2.5% in Alcohol 500 ml
0-4˚C 16591 Gum Mastic, 5% in Alcohol 500 ml
RT 64123-05 Russell’s Modified Zenker’s Solution 500 ml
0-4˚C 16592 Gum Mastic, 10% in Alcohol 500 ml
RT 64123-06 Russell’s Modified Zenker’s Solution 1L
0-4˚C 16595 Gum Mastic, 10% in Isopropanol 500 ml

® Formic Acid 96%, Reagent, A.C.S. ® Hexamethylenetetramine,

HCOOH F.W. 46.03 CAS #64-18-6 A.C.S. Reagent, Granular
Specific Gravity: 1.22 (Urotropine; Methenamine)
RT 15750 225 ml C6H12N4 F.W. 140.19 CAS #100-97-0
RT 15760 1 liter Assay ............................................................................99.0-100.5%

® Formalin Prefilled HistoTainer™ Specifications:

Residue after Ignition ................................................................0.1%
The HistoTainer™ (Empty Vials, see page 482) is half filled with 10%
Neutral Buffered Formalin as a fixative. These ready-to-use prefilled Chloride ................................................................................0.014%
containers are timer saving and make your work more efficient. Sulfate ..........................................................................To Pass Test
EMS # Description Vial Size Prefilled Qty
Heavy Metals. ........................................................................0.001%
RT 15743-20 Formalin Prefilled HistoTainer 20 ml 10 ml 24 Used in silver stains.
RT 15743-40 Formalin Prefilled HistoTainer 40 ml 20 ml 24 Swift, J.A. (1968) Microsc. Soc. 88, 449.
RT 15743-60 Formalin Prefilled HistoTainer 60 ml 30 ml 24 RT 16710 50 g
RT 15743-90 Formalin Prefilled HistoTainer 90 ml 45 ml 24 RT 16710-25 25 g
RT
15743-120 Formalin Prefilled HistoTainer 120 ml 60 ml 24 RT 16712 Methynamine, 3% Aqueous 500 ml

® Gold Chloride, Hydrate ® Hexylene Glycol, Reagent, A.C.S.

(Chloroauric Acid; Hydrogen Tetrachloroaurate) (2-Methyl-2,4-pentanediol)
(CH3)2C(OH)CH2CH(OH)CH3 F.W. 118.18 CAS #107-41-5
H(AuCl4).H20 F.W. 357.79 CAS #16961-25-4
Specific Gravity @25°C-0.923
Assay ................................................................................99.9985%
Gold contents ..........................................................................49%+ A.C.S. Specifications:
A highly purified gold compound for the preparation of Colloidal Assay..........................................................................................99%
Gold sols. Preweighed to facilitate your work. IR Spectrum ..................................................................To Pass Test
(Preparation instructions for Gold Sols included) Refractive Index @20°C ................................................0.921-0.923
RT 16580 10 x 1/10 g bx Mixed with water in all proportions. Used as a dehydrating agent for
RT 16582 10 x 1/2 g bx fat tissues.
RT
16583 1g g RT 16740 450 ml
RT 16584 10 x 1 g bx RT 16750 4 x 450 ml

For ImmunoGold Reagents...

See Section 2, pages 72-90
Including not only the more commonly known
reagents for EM and LM but, as well, a newly
introduced line of products such as Silver
Enhancement specifically for EM, Ultra-Small Fab
fragments, Blocking Solutions, and even a line of
donkey gold conjugates.

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 459
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec14_446-465_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 5:18 PM Page 460

SECTION 14 Histology and Light Microscopy

FIXING, CLEARING, AND DEHYDRATING CHEMICALS
® HISTOCHOICE® Clearing Agent ® Hollande’s Fixative
Histology grade – Non-flammable, replacement for Xylene for all tissue A modification of Bouin’s solution. It is stable and will decalcify small bone
clearing needs. specimens. Tissue that is fixed with Hollande’s can be stained successfully
64114-01 Histochoice Clearing Agent 4L with most stains, and the cupric acetate in the solution stabilizes red blood
64114-04 Histochoice Clearing Agent 4x4 L
cell membranes and cosinophil and endocrine cell granules so that less
lysis occurs than with Bouin’s solution. Hollande’s is widely used as a
® HISTOCHOICE™ MB® * fixative for biopsy specimens of the gastrointestinal tract.
The Molecular Biology Fixative Thorough washing of the fixative prior to placing the specimen in a
T SAFE - Contains no Formaldehyde, Glutaraldehyde or Mercury phosphate buffered formalin solution is necessary because the salts
T NON-TOXIC – Is completely odorless and can be safely disposed present in the solution will form an insoluble phosphate precipitate.
of down the drain Packaged in leak-proof histo-containers; prefilled ready-to-use.
HISTOCHOICE™ MB® Tissue Fixative is the first fixative designed for the
molecular biologist. It is specialty formulated to preserve antigenic sites for Cat.# Cup Size Filled Pack/cs
RT 64120-10 15 ml 10 ml 50/cs
antibody probes and nucleic acid sites for immunohistochemistry. RT
64120-20 30 ml 20 ml 50/cs
HISTOCHOICE™MB® replaces formaldehyde based, alcohol based, Zenkers, RT
64120-30 60 ml 30 ml 20/cs
B-5, B-3, Bouin’s and other fixatives with superior results. Tissue fixed in Bulk packaging is available:
HISTOCHOICE™MB® exhibit vibrant staining, better nuclear and cytoplasmic RT
64120-01 Hollande’s Fixative 1L
detail, and will retain a crisp appearance even after long-term fixation. RT
64120-04 Hollande’s Fixative 4L
Because this formula is designed specially for molecular biology applications,
HISTOCHOICE™MB® fixed sections do not require pre-digestion or other ® Hydrochloric Acid, Diluted, (w/v)
recovery procedures to make important sites available. This means you HCl F.W. 36.46 CAS 7647-01-0
spend less time preparing slides and more time doing research. RT 16762 Hydrochloric Acid, 1% Aqueous 500 ml
More than a fixative, HISTOCHOICE™MB® is a preservative that leaves RT 16763 Hydrochloric Acid, 2% Aqueous 500 ml
antigens and nucleic acids in their native state, allowing binding for RT 16765 Hydrochloric Acid, 10% Aqueous 500 ml
RT 16766 Hydrochloric Acid, 20% Aqueous 500 ml
specific probes. Primary antibodies can often be diluted several-fold due
to the increased number of preserved antigenic sites, saving cost on
every slide you process. ® Hydrogen Peroxide 30% Solution-
Stabilized, Reagent, A.C.S.
HISTOCHOICE™MB® fixed tissue retains a much more natural look and feel
H2O2 F.W. 34.01 CAS #7722-84-1
than formalin fixed tissue. It is important to remember that these tissues are
Assay ....................................................................................29-32%
not fixed by formalin, but rather preserved by HISTOCHOICE™MB®. Maximum of Impurities:
RT 64115-01 HISTOCHOICE™MB® Fixative 1L Chloride(Cl) ..........................................................................0.0003%
RT 64115-04 HISTOCHOICE™MB® Fixative 4L Nitrate ................................................................................0.0002%
RT 64115-44 HISTOCHOICE™MB® Fixative 4x4L Phosphate ..........................................................................0.0002%
* HISTOCHOICE™ is registered name of Amresco Sulfate ................................................................................0.0005%
Heavy Metal ........................................................................0.0001%
® Histo-Clear®/Histo-Clear II® Iron....................................................................................0.00005%
Titratable Acid ..............................................................0.0006meq/g
Histo-Clear (Distilled essential oils –food grade) and
Histo-Clear II (A mixture of Aliphatic Hydrocarbon and RT 16790 100 ml
Distilled essential oils – food grade, reduced citrus odor) RT 16792 450 ml
are excellent non-toxic clearing agents replacing Xylene.
0-4˚C 16793 Hydrogen Peroxide, 3% Aqueous 500 ml

RT 64110-01 Histo-Clear 1L RT 64111-01 Histo-Clear II 1L ® Hydroquinone Aqueous Solution

RT 64110-04 Histo-Clear 1 gal RT 64111-04 Histo-Clear II 1 gal
0-4˚C 16795-1 Hydroquinone, 1% 500 ml
RT 64110-10 Histo-Clear 5 gal RT 64111-10 Histo-Clear II 5 gal
0-4˚C 16795-2 Hydroquinone, 2% 500 ml
Histo-Clear is register name of National Diagnostics
®
0-4˚C 16795-4 Hydroquinone, 4% 500 ml

® Histosol - Xylene Substitute

™
® Isopropyl Alcohol, Reagent, A.C.S.
Histosol™ is the original high flash point (114ºF TCC) histological clearing
(2-Propanol) CH3CH(OH)CH3 F.W. 60.10 CAS #67-63-0
agent. It is intended to be used as a replacement for xylene where the
hazards associated with aromatic hydrocarbon vapors are to be reduced. A.C.S. Specifications:
Museum-quality tissue slides can be prepared with Hitosol without Color (APHA) ..................................................................................10
change in protocol or procedure. Histosol is manufactured from Density @ 25°C..............................................................0.781-0.783
Boiling Range (including 82.3°C)..................................................1°C
petrochemical products and is miscible in all proportions with ethanol, Titratable Acid or Base ................................................0.0001 meq/g
isopropanol, and t-butanol. It is also miscible with all paraffin-based Residue after Evaporation ......................................................0.001%
tissue embedding media and all permanent mounting materials. Solubility in water ..........................................................To pass test
Water ........................................................................................0.2%
23405-01 Histosol – Xylene Substitute 1 gal
23405-04 Histosol – Xylene Substitute 4 x 1 gal RT 16930 1 qt
Histosol® is register name of National Diagnostics RT 16931 4 x 1 qt

460 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec14_446-465_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 5:18 PM Page 461

Histology and Light Microscopy SECTION 14

FIXING, CLEARING, AND DEHYDRATING CHEMICALS
 McDowell Trumps Fixative  Periodic Acid, Reagent
RT 18030-05 McDowell Trumps Fixative 500 ml H5IO6 F.W. 227.96 CAS #10450-60-9
RT 18030-10 McDowell Trumps Fixative 1L
Assay ....................................................................................>99.0%
Heavy Metals .........................................................................0.005%
 Methanol, Reagent, A.C.S. Insoluble Matters ....................................................................0.01%
(Methyl Alcohol) CH3OH F.W. 32.04 CAS #67-56-1 Iron .......................................................................................0.003%
Assay ......................................................................................99.8% Other Halogen (Cl) ..................................................................0.01%
Specific Gravity ..........................................................................0.79 Residue after Ignition ..............................................................0.01%
A.C.S. Specifications: Sulfate ....................................................................................0.01%
Residue after Evaporation ......................................................0.001%  Ainsworth, S.K. et al. (1972). Alkaline bismuth reagent for high
Boiling Range (Boiling point 64.6°C) ....................................2°C max resolution ultrastructural demonstration of periodic-reactive
sites. J. Histochem. Cytochem., 20:995.
Appearance................................................................................Clear  Mowry, R.W. (1958). Improved procedure for the staining of acid
Color (A.P.H.A.) ......................................................................10 max polysaccharides by Muller’s colloidal (hydrous) ferric oxide and
Acetone & Aldehydes (0.001%) ......................................To pass test its combination with the Feulgen and the periodic acid Schiff
Titratable Acid..............................................................0.0003 meq/g reaction. Lab. Invest., 7:566
Titratable Base ............................................................0.0002 meq/g  Mowry, R.W. (1959). Effect of Periodic Acid used prior to
Chromic Acid on the staining of Polysaccharides by Gomori’s
Water ................................................................................0.2% max methenamine silver. J. Histochem. Cytochem., 7:288
RT 18510 1 qt  Tsuchiya, A. and Ogawa, K. (1973). Ultracytochemistry of the
RT 18511 4 x 1 qt Periodic Acid (PA) - Phosphotungstic Acid (PTA) reaction. J.
Electr. Microsc., 22:290
 Michel’s Buffer  Hanker, J.S. et al (1964). Osmiophilic reagents: new
RT 18041-05 Michel’s Buffer 500 ml cytochemical principles for light and electron microscopy.
RT 18041-10 Michel’s Buffer 1L
Science New York, 146:1039
 Derenzini, M. et al (1986). An improved periodic acid-thiosemi-
carbazide-osmium technique to reveal glycoconjugates at the
 Michel’s Fixative, pH 7.0 – 7.4 molecular level in-situ. J. Histochem. Cytochem., 34:1161
RT 18040-05 Michel’s Fixative 500 ml RT 19325 25 g
RT 18040-10 Michel’s Fixative 1L
RT 18040-20 Michel’s Fixative Pre-filled 20 x 10 ml  Periodic Acid Aqueous Solutions
19324-05 Periodic Acid 0.5% Aqueous 500 ml
19324-10 Periodic Acid 1% Aqueous 500 ml
TECHNICAL TIP 19324-50 Periodic Acid 5% Aqueous 500 ml
Tissue Biopsy in Michel's Fixative
Place tissue biopsy in Michel’s fixative for 24-48 hours and then wash  Phosphate Buffer Saline (PBS)
the tissue with Michel’s Buffer three changes a minimum of 10 minutes PBS is commonly used in biochemistry. It is a salty solution containing
each change and freeze at –70˚C. calcium chloride, sodium phosphate and potassium phosphate. PBS is
isotonic and non-toxic to cells. 1X PBS final concentration is 0.137M
NaCl, 0.01M Na2HPO4, 0.0027M KCl and pH 7.4.
 Millonig’s Phosphate Buffer 0-5˚C 19342-10 Phosphate Buffered Saline, 10X 1L
Millonig (1964); Karlsson and Schultz (1965) 0-5˚C 19242-40 Phosphate Buffered Saline, 10X 1 gal
Ingredients: Sodium Phosphate, monobasic (NaH2PO4•xH2O); 0-5˚C 19343-10 Phosphate Buffered Saline, 2X 1L
Sodium Phosphate, dibasic (Na2HPO4•xH2O); 0.5% Sodium Chloride (NaCl) 0-5˚C 19343-40 Phosphate Buffered Saline, 2X 1 gal
Shipping Conditions: Ambient Temperature
0-5˚C 19344-10 Phosphate Buffered Saline, 1X 1L
0-5˚C 19344-20 Phosphate Buffered Saline, 1X 1 gal
Maximum shelf life after receipt: 1 month
The pH of this buffer is 7.4 (0.1M); the osmolarity is 440 mosmols, so
this buffer is hypertonic to most body fluids. Millonig recommended to  Phosphate Buffer, 0.2M
use this buffer for the fixation of very hydrated tissues with osmium Prepared from Sodium Phosphate Monobasic Hydrate and Sodium Phosphate
tetroxide. For marine organisms, a higher concentration of sodium Dibasic Heptahydrate Non-Sterile. Meant for research purposes only.
chloride (3%) is recommended. We supply it in a double strength (0.2M), 0-5˚C 19340-60 Phosphate Buffer, pH 6.0 1L
pH 7.4. Dilution is needed before use. 0-5˚C 19340-65 Phosphate Buffer, pH 6.5 1L
0-5˚C 19340-70 Phosphate Buffer, pH 7.0 1L
0-5˚C 11582-05 Millonig’s Phosphate Buffer 0.2M 500ml 0-5˚C 19340-72 Phosphate Buffer, pH 7.2 1L
0-5˚C 11582-10 Millonig’s Phosphate Buffer 0.2M 1L
For a complete line of all of our salt buffers
see pages 26-29 

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 461
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec14_446-465_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 5:19 PM Page 462

SECTION 14 Histology and Light Microscopy

FIXING, CLEARING, AND DEHYDRATING CHEMICALS
® Phosphomolybdic Acid, ® Picric Acid Solutions
Crystal, Reagent, A.C.S. RT 19552 Picric Acid Saturated, Aqueous 500 ml
(Dodeca-Molybdophosphoric Acid) RT 19553 Picric Acid, 0.1% in Acetone 500 ml
H3PO4.12(MoO3).24H2O F.W. 2257.6 CAS #51429-74-4 RT 19554 Picric Acid, 4.67% in 95% Alcohol 500 ml
19400 100 g
RT
® Poly-L-Lysine Solutions
® Phosphomolybdic Acid Aqueous Solutions ® A/ Poly-L-Lysine Hydrobromide, F.W.
RT 19402-1 Phosphomolybdic Acid 1% Aqueous 500 ml < 30,000 – 70,000>
RT 19402-10 Phosphomolybdic Acid 10% Aqueous 500 ml CAS #25988-63-0
A polycation, which binds to DNA, red cell membranes and any
® Phosphotungstic Acid, Crystal, Reagent, negatively, charged proteins. It is useful for promoting cell adhesion; for
Highest Purity the preparation of polycationic beads, useful in immobilization
(Tungstophosphoric Acid) techniques; immobilization of membranes; immobilization of plant
H3[P(W3O10)4]. aq F.W. 2880.17+aq CAS #12501-23-4 protoplasts. In cell culture, immobilization by micro encapsulation with
Specifications: the alginate-poly-L-lysine microcapsule system
We offer a prepared 0.1% aqueous solution, micro-filtered, which is
Solubility ......................................Practically clear, colorless solution
ideal for cell culture growth.
Ammonia (NH ) .....................................................................0.004%
RT 19320-A Poly-L-Lysine 0.1% Aqueous Solution 10 ml
Chloride (CI).............................................................................0.03% RT 19321-A Poly-L-Lysine 0.1% Aqueous Solution 100 ml
Insoluble Matter ......................................................................0.02%
Nitrate (NO3 ) .........................................................................0.004% ® B/ Poly-L-Lysine Hydrobromide, FW.
Sulfate (SO4 ) .........................................................................0.005% <70,000 – 150,000>
Heavy Metals and Iron ....................No color formation on addition of CAS #25988-63-0
..............................................................................Hydrogen Sulfide Poly-L-lysine with a molecular weight of >70,000. This solution is
Used as a Fixative: Issidorides, M.R., and Kasorchis, T. (1981). useful in promoting cell adhesion to solid substrates. Used for nuclear
Dispersed and compact chromatin demonstrated with a new EM Method: antigen-coated red cells in hymolytic plaque assay.
phosphotungstic acid-hematoxylin block-staining. Histochemistry 73,21. We offer a prepared 0.1% aqueous solution which is micro-filtered and
Used widely as a Negative Stain: is used to increase tissue adhesion to the glass slide, which is needed
for immunohistochemical and immunolabeling techniques, as well as
T As Spray method: Horne, R.W., and Pasquali-Ronchette,
I. (1974). A negative staining-carbon film technique lengthy staining procedures.
for studying viruses in the electron microscope. RT 19320-B Poly-L-Lysine 0.1% Aqueous Solution 10 ml
T Preparation procedures for examining icosahedral and RT 19321-B Poly-L-Lysine 0.1% Aqueous Solution 100 ml
filamentous viruses. J. Ultrastruct. Res. 47, 361. Locke,
M., and Kirhman, N. (1971). ® Potassium Dichromate, Crystal, Reagent,
T Hot Alcoholic phosphotungstic acid and uranyl acetate A.C.S.
as routine stains for thick and thin sections. J. Cell Biol.,
K2Cr2O7 F.W. 294.18 CAS #7778-50-9
50, 550., Farragiana, T., and Marinozzi, V. (1979). A.C.S. Specifications:
T Phosphotungstic acid staining of polysaccharides containing Insoluble and NH4OH ppt. .....................................................0.005%
structures on epoxy embedded tissues. J. Submicrosc. Cytol. Chloride ................................................................................0.001%
11, 263.Bloom, E.E., And Aghajanian, G.K. (1968). Sulfate ..................................................................................0.005%
T Fine structural and cytochemical analysis of the staining of Calcium ................................................................................0.003%
synaptic junctions with PTA. J. Ultrastruct. Res. 22, 261. Sodium ...................................................................................0.02%
Loss on drying at 105°C ..........................................................0.05%
RT 19500 100g
RT
20100 Potassium Dichromate 250 g
® Phosphotungstic Acid Aqueous Solutions
RT
RT
19502-1
19502-3
Phosphotungstic Acid, 1% Aqueous
Phosphotungstic Acid, 3% Aqueous
500 ml
500 ml
® Potassium Dichromate, Aqueous Solutions
RT 19502-5 Phosphotungstic Acid, 5% Aqueous 500 ml RT 20103-3 Potassium Dichromate, 3% Aqueous 500 ml
RT 20103-4 Potassium Dichromate, 5% Aqueous 500 ml
® Picric Acid, Reagent, Crystal, A.C.S.
(2,4,6-Trinitrophenol)
® Potassium Ferricyanide, Reagent, A.C.S.
C6H2(NO2)3OH FW 229.11 CAS #88-89-1
K3Fe(CN)6 F.W. 329.25 CAS #13746-66-2
A.C.S. Specifications:
A.C.S. Specifications:
Water...................................................................................min 30% Chloride ...................................................................................0.01%
Melting Point (dried) ........................................................121-123°C Ferro Compounds (Fe(Cn)4) ....................................................0.05%
Insoluble in Resinous Matter. ..................................................0.01% Insoluble Matters. ..................................................................0.005%
Insoluble in benzene ..................................................................0.1% Sulfate.....................................................................................0.01%
Sulfate ....................................................................................0.01% RT 20150 Potassium Ferricyanide 100 g
RT 25102-20 Potassium Ferricyanide, 20% Aqueous 500 ml
RT 19550 100 g

462 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec14_446-465_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 5:19 PM Page 463

Histology and Light Microscopy SECTION 14

FIXING, CLEARING, AND DEHYDRATING CHEMICALS
 Potassium Ferrocyanide Aqueous Solution  Schiff’s Reagent
RT 25154-2 Potassium Ferrocyanide, 2% Aqueous 500 ml For use in the Periodic Acid Leucofuchsin (PAS) method as a general
RT 25154-5 Potassium Ferrocyanide, 5% Aqueous 500 ml tissue stain.
RT 25154-10 Potassium Ferrocyanide, 10% Aqueous 500 ml 0-5˚C 26052-05 Schiff’s Reagent 500 ml
RT 25154-20 Potassium Ferrocyanide, 20% Aqueous 500 ml 0-5˚C 26052-06 Schiff’s Reagent 1L

 Potassium Hydroxide, Pellets, Reagent, ACS.  Silver Nitrate Aqueous Solutions

KOH F.W. 56.11 CAS #1310-58-3 RT 21054-1 Silver Nitrate, 1%, Aqueous 500 ml
Assay ...................................................................................>85.0% RT 21054-2 Silver Nitrate, 2%, Aqueous 500 ml
Water contains: ....................................................................10-15% RT 21054-5 Silver Nitrate, 5%, Aqueous 500 ml
RT 20155 Potassium Hydroxide 100 g RT 21054-10 Silver Nitrate, 10%, Aqueous 500 ml
RT 21054-20 Silver Nitrate, 20%, Aqueous 500 ml
 Potassium Hydroxide Aqueous Solutions
RT 20156-1 Potassium Hydroxide, 1% Aqueous 500 ml  Silver Nitrate, Reagent, A.C.S.
RT 20156-2 Potassium Hydroxide, 4% Aqueous 500 ml AgNO3 F.W. 169.89 CAS #7761-88-8
RT 20156-10 Potassium Hydroxide, 10% Aqueous 500 ml Assay ....................................................................................99.9+%
A.C.S. Specifications:
 Potassium Iodide, Granular, Reagent, A.C.S. Substances not precipitated by HCl................................max 0.010%
KI F.W. 166.00 CAS #7681-11-0 Sulfate ........................................................................max 0.0002%
Refer to Bismuth Carbonate for references on use. Copper ........................................................................max 0.0002%
RT 20158 Potassium Iodide 50 g Iron ..............................................................................max 0.0002%
Lead ..............................................................................max 0.001%
RT 25109-3 Potassium Iodide, 3% Aqueous 500 ml
References for Silver stain:
Elektronemikrokopische Swift, J.A. (1968). The electron histochemistry of
 Potassium Permanganate, Reagent, A.C.S. cystine-containing proteins in thin transverse sections of human hair. J.R.
KMnO4 F.W. 158.03 CAS #7722-64-7 Microsc. Soc. 88,449.
A.C.S. Specifications: Elektronemikrokopische Thiery, J.P. (1967). Mise en evidence des Polysaccharides
Chloride & Chlorate................................................................0.005% sur coupes fines en microscopie eletronique. J. Microsc. (Paris) 6,987.
Nitrogen Compounds .............................................................0.005% Elektronemikrokopische Rambourg, A. (1967). An improved silver
Sulfate.....................................................................................0.02% methenamine technique for the detection of periodic acid-reactive complex car-
Insoluble Matters ......................................................................0.2% bohydrates with the electron microscope.J. Histochem. Cytochem. 15, 409.
An EM fixative and a metal stain. Elektronemikrokopische Hermandez et al., (1968)). Periodic acid-chromic
J. Ultrastruct. Res., 21,424 (1968) acid-methenamine silver technique for glycoprotein detection in the electron
RT 20200 Potassium Permanganate 250 g microscope. J. Histochem. Cystochem. 16, 507.
Elektronemikrokopische Ribi, W.A. (1976). A golgi-electron microscope
 Potassium Permanganate, Aqueous method for insect nervous tissue. Stain Technol. 51,13.
Solutions Elektronemikrokopische Braak, H., and Braak, E. (1982). A simple procedure
RT 20202 Potassium Permanganate 0.25% Aqueous 500 ml for electron microscopy of Golgi-impregnated nerve cells. Neurosci. Lett. 32,1.
RT 20203 Potassium Permanganate 0.3% Aqueous 500 ml RT 21050 25 g
RT 20204 Potassium Permanganate 1% Aqueous 500 ml RT 21052 100 g

 Propylene Glycol, Reagent, A.C.S.  Sodium Bicarbonate, Powder, Reagent, A.C.S.

(1,2-Propanediol)
NaHCO3 F.W. 84.01 CAS #144-55-8
CH3CHOHCH2OH FW 76.10 CAS #57-55-6 Assay ............................................................................97.7-100.3%
Specific Gravity (H2O=1): 1.04
Specifications:
Assay ....................................................................................>99.5% Insoluble Matters ...................................................................0.015%
Specifications: Chloride ................................................................................0.003%
Residue after Ignition ............................................................0.005% Phosphate ............................................................................0.001%
Chloride ....................................................................................1ppm Sulfur Compounds ................................................................0.003%
Water ........................................................................................0.2% Ammonium ..............................................................................5ppm
Iron........................................................................................0.001%
Titratable Acid ..............................................................0.0005meq/g Potassium................................................................................0.05%
RT 20350 Propylene Glycol 450 ml RT 21125 500 g
RT 20352 Propylene Glycol 4 x 450 ml RT 21127 Sodium Bicarbonate, 5% Aqueous 500 ml
 Rosin Solution  Sodium Cacodylate Buffer
RT 20550-05 Rosin Alcohol Stock Solution 500 ml
RT 20550-15 Rosin Alcohol Working Solution 500 ml Prepared from Sodium Cacodylate Trihydrate (F.W. 214.02).
0-5˚C 11650 Sodium Cacodylate Buffer, 0.2M, pH 7.4 225 ml
 Scott’s Tap Water Substitute 0-5˚C 11652 Sodium Cacodylate Buffer, 0.2M, pH 7.4 500 ml
Magnesium sulfate buffered with sodium bicarbonate. Ready-to-use. 0-5˚C 11653 Sodium Cacodylate Buffer, 0.2M, pH 7.4 1L
0-5˚C 11654 Sodium Cacodylate Buffer, 0.4M, pH 7.2 500 ml
RT 26070-06 Scott’s Tap Water Substitute 1L 0-5˚C 11655 Sodium Cacodylate Buffer, 0.4M, pH 7.2 1L
RT 26070-07 Scott’s Tap Water Substitute 4L

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 463
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec14_446-465_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 5:19 PM Page 464

SECTION 14 Histology and Light Microscopy

FIXING, CLEARING, AND DEHYDRATING CHEMICALS
 Sodium Hydroxide, Solution  Tartrazine Solutions
CAS #1310-73-2 RT 21740 Tartrazine, 1.5% in 1.5% Acetic Acid, 500 ml
Carbonate-free. This solution is prepared from ACS Reagent grade Aqueous
sodium hydroxide, and is standardized colormetrically against potassium RT 21741 Tartrazine, 1.5% Aqueous 500 ml
RT 21742 Tartrazine, Saturated in Cellosolve 500 ml
biphthalate primary reference material.
Normal Concentration 1.98-2.02  Thionin Solutions
RT 21170 Sodium Hydroxide Solution 2N 225 ml RT 21910 Thionin, 0.5% in 20% Alcohol 500 ml
RT 21170-01 Sodium Hydroxide Solution 1N 225 ml RT 21911 Thionin, 0.1% Aqueous 500 ml
 Sodium Hydroxide Aqueous Solutions  Tissue-Tek® VIP™ Fixative
RT 21172-1 Sodium Hydroxide, 1% Aqueous 500 ml
RT 21172-2 Sodium Hydroxide, 2.5% Aqueous 500 ml Eliminate the need for routine warm water
RT 21172-3 Sodium Hydroxide, 3.1% Aqueous 500 ml flushing with the Tissue-Tek® VIP™ Fixative.
RT 21172-10 Sodium Hydroxide, 10% Aqueous 500 ml Using the unique Neutra-pHase™ technology,
the Tissue-Tek® VIP™ Fixative produces no
 Sodium Bisulfite Solution precipitates in the presence of alcohol,
A 1% aqueous stock solution for fungal staining. contrary to all other 10% neutral buffered
RT 26084-05 Sodium Bisulfite Solution 500 ml formalin products. The Tissue-Tek® VIP™
RT 26084-06 Sodium Bisulfite Solution 1L Fixative will not promote formation of salts within the tissue processor
lines which can cause costly damages to any brands of tissues
 Sodium Meta-Bisulfate Aqueous Solution processors unless regular maintenance is performed. Since the base
RT 21175-1 Sodium Meta-Bisulfite, 1% Aqueous 500 ml ingredient is formalin, it is fully compatible and can replace 10% NBF
RT 21175-3 Sodium Meta-Bisulfite, 3% Aqueous 500 ml without any adjustments to your procedures. The product is offered in
RT 21175-5 Sodium Meta-Bisulfite, 5% Aqueous 500 ml three convenient package sizes: 1 gallon, 2.5 gallons and 5 gallons.
EMS# Tissue-Tek Description Qty
 Sodium Thiosulfate Aqueous Solution 62582-01 5990 Tissue-Tek™ VIP® Fixative 1gal
RT 21360-1 Sodium Thiosulfate, 1% Aqueous 500 ml 62582-04 5990 Tissue-Tek™ VIP® Fixative 4 x 1gal
RT 21360-2 Sodium Thiosulfate, 2% Aqueous 500 ml 62582-02 5989 Tissue-Tek™ VIP® Fixative 2.5 gal
RT 21360-10 Sodium Thiosulfate, 10% Aqueous 500 ml 62582-05 5991 Tissue-Tek™ VIP® Fixative 5 gal

 Sorensen’s Phosphate Buffer  Toluene Reagent, A.C.S.

A phosphate buffered mixed salts, prepared from sodium phosphate C6H5CH3 FW 92.14 CAS #108-88-3
monobasic and sodium phosphate dibasic. Specific Gravity (H2O=1): 0.866
0-5˚C 11600-10 Sorensen’s Phosphate Buffer, 0.2M, pH 7.2 1L b.p. 110-111ºC
0-5˚C 11600-40 Sorensen’s Phosphate Buffer, 0.2M, pH 7.2 4L Assay ......................................................................................99.9%
0-5˚C 11601-10 Sorensen’s Phosphate Buffer, 0.2M, pH 7.4 1L Specifications:
0-5˚C 11601-40 Sorensen’s Phosphate Buffer, 0.2M, pH 7.4 4L Color (A.P.H.A.) ............................................................................10.
Residue after evaporation ......................................................0.001%
 Sucrose, Reagent, A.C.S. Subs. darkened by H2SO4 ................................................To pass test
C12H22O11 F.W. 342.20 CAS #57-50-1 Sulfur compound (as S) ........................................................0.003%
Specifications: Water ......................................................................................0.03%
Insoluble Matters ..................................................................0.005%
RT 22030 450 ml
RT 22032 4 x 450 ml
Loss on Drying 105ºC .............................................................0.03%
Residue after Ignition ..............................................................0.01%
Titratable acid ..............................................................0.0008meq/g  Tris (Hydroxymethyl) Aminomethane,
Chloride ................................................................................0.005% Free-base, Reagent Grade
Sulfate...................................................................................0.005% White crystalline powder
Heavy Metals ............................................................................5ppm C4H11NO3 F.W. 121.14 CAS #77-86-1
Iron ..........................................................................................5ppm
A 40% (w/v) aqueous solution. It is clear and colorless.
Invert Sugar ............................................................................0.05%
Assay ....................................................................................>99.9%
RT 21600 500 g Water .....................................................................................<0.2%
Heavy Metals ............................................................................2ppm
 Tannic Acid, Reagent, A.C.S: EM Grade RT 11700 100 g
RT 11720 500 g
C76H52O46 F.W. 1701.28 CAS #1401-55-4
RT 21700 100 g  Tris (Hydroxymethyl) Aminomethane
Maleate Buffer (pH 5.2-8.6)
 Tannic Acid Aqueous Solutions RT 11730 250 ml
21702-5 Tannic Acid, 5% Aqueous 500 ml RT 11740 500 ml
21702-10 Tannic Acid, 10% Aqueous 500 ml

464 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec14_446-465_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 5:19 PM Page 465

Histology and Light Microscopy SECTION 14

FIXING, CLEARING, AND DEHYDRATING CHEMICALS
 Water Deionized, Reagent Grade A.C.S.  Xylene: Peanut oil, 2:1
RT 23402 Xylene:Peanut oil, 2:1 500 ml
H2O F.W. 18.02 CAS #7732-18-5
EMS Reagent Grade Water is typically prepared at 18 megohm/cm  Xylene Substitute – Hemo-De® *
specific resistance using a reverse osmosis, mixed deionization, An intensive study from 1992 throughout 2000 has shown that Hemo-
activated filtration and final filtration at 0.2 microns. De® (d-Limonene) a terpene-based chemical with a pleasant citrus
Color (APHA) ............................................................................<+/-5 fragrance, was able to replace many of the clinical laboratories toxic
Bacteriological purity ..........................................................0 CFUs/L reagents, such as carbol-xylene, xylene, ethyl acetate and formalin.
Residue after evaporation ......................................................10ppm
In Parasitology – Hemo-De replaces ethyl acetate in the concentration
Coliform................................................................................negative
procedure; Hemo-De replaces carbol-xylene, xylene and formalin in
RT 22800-01 Deionized Water 1 gal
RT 22800-05 Deionized Water 5 gal the trichrome procedure.
In Histology – Hemo-De replaces xylene in most all procedures. Hem-De
 Xylenes, Reagent, A.C.S. is a superior solvent and Clearing agent that can be used in all tissue
(Xylol, Dimethylbenzene) processing, deparaffiniating and slide preparation.
C6H4(CH3)2 FW 106.27 CAS #1330-20-7 Hemo-De Features:
Specific Gravity (H2O=1): 0.865  Soluble with alcohol and toluene
b.p. 136-140°C mounting media  Low toxicity levels
This reagent is a mixture of isomers (ortho, meta, and para)  Biodegradable, non-corrosive,  Minimal tissue shrinkage
and may contain Ethylbenzene non-flammable (Combustible)  Reasonably fast drying and
 Contains no benzene and no leaves no residue
Specifications:
Color (A.P.H.A.) ..............................................................................10 Hemo-De Application:
Subs. darkened by H2SO4 ...............................................To pass test In Research and Medical – Hematology, Cytology, Pathology,
Sulfur Compounds (as S) ......................................................0.003% Microbiology, Histology, Pathology, Hospital
Water ......................................................................................0.05%
In Mechanical Applications – Cleaning of machine parts, cleaning
Residue after evaporation .....................................................0.002% tools, engines etc.
RT 23400 450 ml In Electronic Applications – Circuits boards, electronic
components, tools.
 Xylene Substitute General Applications – Clean metal and glass surfaces. Dilute
A xylene substitute for use in histology and cytology. It is safer and a more with water can be used to clean all plastic surfaces. Removal
preferable alternative to xylene. It can be used as a solvent and clearing of adhesives, glues, tars…
agent, as well as for dissolving paraffin waxes, glues and adhesives. Hem-De Information:
PROPERTIES: Chemical name: ..............d-Limonene (Terpene Hydrocarbon, n.o.s.)
Composition: ....................................d-Limonene, CAS [5989-27-5]
 Minimal tissue shrinkage. 98.0% Butylated Hydroxyanisolve (BHA),
 Dries faster with no residue. CAS [25013-16-5] <0.024%
 Non-corrosive and far less toxic than xylene. Flash Point (TCC):........................................................121ºF (49.4ºC)
 Soluble with alcohol, paraffin embedding media, and mounting media. Boiling Point: ..........................................349ºF (176ºC) @ 760mmHg
It can be used in all procedures that require xylene.Biodegradable. Freezing Point: ..........................................................................-74ºC
Shipping: ................Terpene Hydrocarbons, n.o.s. ID No. 04858003,
RT 23410-01 Xylene Substitute 1 gal Flammable Liquid, Group III
RT 23410-04 Xylene Substitute 4 x 1 gal
RT 23412-01 Xylene Substitute 1 gal
23412-04 Xylene Substitute 4 x 1 gal
 Histosol - Xylene Substitute
RT
®
RT
23412-05 Xylene Substitute 5 gal
Histosol® is the original high flash point (114ºF TCC) histological clearing NOTE: Hemo-De® is a product of Scientific Solvents
agent. It is intended to be used as a replacement for xylene where the
hazards associated with aromatic hydrocarbon vapors are to be reduced.  Russell’s Zenker Fixative
Museum-quality tissue slides can be prepared with Histosol® without (Russel’s Modified Zenker)
change in protocol or procedure. Histosol® is manufactured from Due to the hazardous nature of mercury, Zenker’s fluid is no longer
petrochemical products and is miscible in all proportions with ethanol, available however in place of it we are offering Russell’s Zenker
isopropanol, and t-butanol. It is also miscible with all paraffin-based Fixative, which contains Zinc Chloride, and the staining results produces
tissue embedding media and all permanent mounting materials. by this fixative are comparable to those of Zenker’s Stock solution.
RT 23405-01 Histosol® – Xylene Substitute 1 gal
Russell’s Modified Zenker’s is used in the same manner as Zenker’s
RT 23405-04 Histosol® – Xylene Substitute 4 x 1 gal stock solution.
Histol® is a registered name of National Diagnostics RT 64123-05 Russell’s Modified Zenker’s Solution 500 ml
RT 64123-06 Russell’s Modified Zenker’s Solution 1L

 Zinc/Formalin – see Formaldehyde/Zinc

#15675, page 454 

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 465
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec14_466-491_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 7:15 PM Page 466

SECTION 14 Histology and Light Microscopy

STAINING CHEMICALS AND PREPARED SOLUTIONS
® Certified Dyes/Stains
Certified by the Biological Stain Commission
All Dyes/Stains are for research use only. Not meant for drug, food, or household use.

Cat.# Storage Dyes/Stain C.N. # Major uses Size

10035 RT Acid Fuchsin DcR-8 Stain for connective tissue and erythrocytes; and proteinaceous material in liver. 25g
Cain’s method for mitochondria.
10050 RT Acridine Orange Pickett’s fluorescence method for fungi fluorescent against a dark background. 25g
For differentiation of nucleic acids and cytology.
10350 RT Alcian Blue 8GX AnAn-6 Acid mucopolysaccharides.Cell walls. Cartilage granules. As a carbohydrate 25g
& mucosubstance stain in different pH levels. Movat’s method for connective
tissue stain. Monroe/Frommer method for pituitary staining. AB/PAS/OG method
for human adenohypophyseal cytology.
10360 RT Alizarin Red S DcAr-5 Minute bone and fetal ossification in mammalian embryos. Used with toluidine 25g
blue for distinction of bone & cartilage in mammalian embryos.
10840 RT Aniline Blue DcK-11 Used with biebrich scarlet for staining collagen, reticulum, muscle, plasma, 25g
and nuclei. All connective tissues. Used as a counterstain with red nuclear dye.
10850 RT Auramine O DcAu-4 Staining paraffin sections of infected tissue. Acid-fast organisms exhibit 25g
fluorescence.
11150 RT Azocarmine G Alpha, beta, and all D-cells of the islets of Langerhans and animals. 5g
11240 RT Azur A A nuclear stain. Cell granules McNeal method for leukocytes. 10g
11200 RT Azur B Distinction of cellular RNA & DNA in botanical tissue. Negri body stain. 10g
Malarial parasites.
11210 RT Azur II Morphological details of marrow cells, nuclei, and bacteria. 10g
11260 RT Basic Fuchsin DcFb-26 Gram positive/negative bacteria. A pituitary stain. 25g
(Rosaniline)
18100 RT Basic Green 4 DcMg-11 In microbiology, distinction of diphtheria and other bacteria. 25g
(Malachite Green) A vital stain for onion epidermis.
11265 RT Biebrich Scarlet Used with picric acid/aniline blue for staining collagen, recticulum, muscle, and 25g
(Ponceau BS) plasma. Luna’s method for erythrocytes & eosinophil granules. Guard’s method
for sex chromatin and nuclear chromatin.
11310 RT Bismarck Brown Y PAP for staining smears. Nuclei & granules. Mucin & calciform cellsof intestine, 25g
cartilage & embryo.
11465 RT Brilliant Cresyl DcV-5 Platelets & reticulum of immature red cells. Counterstained with Wright’s stain. 10g
Blue
12410 RT Carmine DcCa-16 Glycogen stain. Elastic fibers in blood vessels, nuclei, & collagen. 10g
(Alum Lake)
12780 RT Cresyl Fast DcW-5 Vogt’s method for nerve cells. A neurological tissue stain. Nissl substance & 5g
Violet, (Cresyl PAS-positive material. Powers & Clark method for spinal cord and brain
Violet Acetate) with formalin or Bouins fixed.
12785 RT Crystal Violet DcC-38 Gram positive/Gram negative bacteria, and filaments. Holzer’s method for glial 25g
fibers (nerve). Amyloid in pathological human tissue. Determining chromatin &
nucleoli in plant tissue.
14851 RT Eosin Y DcE-40 Maximow’s method for morphological details of marrow cells; a constituent of 25g
Wright Stain for elastic fibers in blood; as a eosin-phloxine counterstain.
15010 RT Erythrosin B DcEr-5 Used with methylene blue as a plasma stain for nerve cells. Use crystal violet 10g
(Erythrosin extra for plant tissue.
bluish)
15500 RT Fast Green FCF DcGf-12 Lillie modification of Masson’s for cells, cytoplasm, muscle, and collagen; 5g
Guard method for sex chromatin.
15670 0-5°C Fluorescein Culing’s Method for fluorescent antibody staining for demonstration 1
⁄2g
Isothiocyanate of specific antigens.

466 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec14_466-491_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 7:15 PM Page 467

Histology and Light Microscopy SECTION 14

STAINING CHEMICALS AND PREPARED SOLUTIONS
® Certified Dyes/Stains (continued)

Cat.# Storage Dyes/Stain C.I. # Major uses Size

15942 RT Giemsa (Dry Powder) Thin film stain for differentiation of types of leucocytes; Rickettsiae, bacteria, & 10g
DcGe-19 inclusion bodies. May-Grunwald/Giemsa for bone marrow stain. Pinkus’acid
orcein-giemsa for connective tissue staining.
15940 RT Giemsa (solution) Same as above; Prepared ready-to-use. 100ml
DcGe-19
16620 RT Hematoxylin DcH-48 Weigert’s iron hematoxylin for nuclear stains. Gill’s hematoxylin for nuclei & 10g
nuclear chromatin
16910 RT Indigo Carmine DcI-7 A stain for Negri bodies; used with acid fuchsin. Used in picric 25g
acid in contrast to basic fuchsin. ln plant cytology.
17920 RT Light Green SF, DcL-30 Grocott’s method for fungi. Dahl’s method as a bone and calcium stain. McManus’ 10g
Yellowish method for glycogen.Fraser-Lendrum method as a connective tissue stain.
18700 RT Methyl Green DcG-10 Myeloperoxidase stain; Used with bismarck brown for mucin & calciformcells 25g
of intestine, cartilage of trachea, and embryonic tissue; Used with toluidine
blue for differentiating between diphtheria & other bacteria.
18600 RT Methylene Blue DcA-24 For use in acid-fast bacteria, acid-fast baccilli, and as a rickettsia 25g
stain. Cain’s method for mitochrondria. For staining Negri bodies in nerve cells.
18850 RT Methyl Violet 2B DcMv-5 Highman’s method for amyloid and nuclei staining. Used with crystal violet & 25g
bismarck brown Y for staining metachromatic granules of diphtheria organisms.
19010 RT Nigrosin, W.S. For staining the central nervous system. For the negative staining of bacteria; 25g
used in place of India ink.
19020 RT Nile Blue A A fat and lipid stain; differentiation of melamines and lipofuchsins. 10g
Staining for phospholipids.
19056 RT Oil Red O DcRo-3 Used as a pigment stain. 10g

19060 RT Orange II Kalter’s method used with fast green FCF, safranin O, and crystal violet for 25g
quadruple staining of tissues. Orange G substitution for better contrast.
19070 RT Orange G DcO-13 For staining fibrin, keratin, collagen, and erythrocytes. Staining alpha, beta, 25g
and gamma cells. For staining nissl substances and PAS-positive material.
19350 RT Phloxine B DcPh-6 For staining inclusion bodies and nuclei. Thomas’s method for malarial parasites. 25g
For staining hemaglobin and hemosiderin. For staining keratin, prekeratin
and mucin. A beta cell stain. Counterstain for hematoxylin.
19560 RT Pyronin Y DcPy-2 Cudder’s method combined Gram/Pappenheim stain for gonorrheal pus. 5g
Kurnick’s method used with methyl green which stains liver cells. For staining
protein in the diazosulfanilic acid technique; a substitute for azur A. Can be
used for pyronin B.
20800 RT Safranin O DcS-25 Prussian Blue method for hemosiderin. Weigert’s iron hematoxylin with 25g
methachromic dyes which stain nuclei and granules. A alkaline phosphate stain.
Flemming’s method for staining chromatin and nuclear elements.
21610 RT Sudan Black B DcZb-2 A stain for fat in animal tissue. A stain for chromosomes, golgi, and25g
leucocyte granules.
22050 RT Toluidine Blue O DcU-10 Alizarin red/Toluidine blue for distinction between bone & cartilage and the degree 50g
of ossification in mammalian embryos. Johnson’s method for methachromatic
tissue. With cresyl violet for staining DNA & RNA. With thionin for malignant cells
of biopsy specimens.
22720 RT Wright Stain DcWr-38 For differentiation of blood corpuscles. Used with brilliant cresyl blue for staining 25g
platelets and reticulum of immature red cells. For staining blood and bone
marrow films.

For further description of the above stains/dyes or for more stains/dyes, see pages 468-471 alphabetically listed.

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 467
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec14_466-491_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 7:15 PM Page 468

SECTION 14 Histology and Light Microscopy

STAINING CHEMICALS AND PREPARED SOLUTIONS
 Certified Dyes/Stains (continued)  Auramine O, Certified, C.N. #DcAu-4
 Acid Fuchsin, Certified, C.N. #DcR-8 (Pyoctanunum aureum; Basic Yellow 2; Pyoktanin Yellow; Canary Yellow)
C17H21N3HCl•H2O F.W. 321.86 CAS # 2465-27-2
(Rubin S, Fuchsin S, Fuchsin Acid, Acid Magenta, Acid Violet 19)
Solubility: 1.0% Water; 4.0% Alcohol; 1.2% Cellosolve; 1.75%
C20H17N3Na2O9S3 F.W. 585.54 CAS #3244-88-0
Glycol; 0.05% Xylene
Solubility: 0.053% Water; 1.21% Alcohol
RT
10035 25 g RT 10850 25 g

 Acridine Orange, Certified C.N. #46005  Azocarmine G, Certified, C.N. #50085

(Basic Orange 14) (Acid red 101; Basalan Carmine GE; Rosinduline)
C17H19N3HCl•ZnCl2 F.W. 369.94 CAS #10127-02-3 C28H17N3Na2O6S2 F.W. 601.57 CAS #25641-18-3
Ultrastructural probes on DNA templates within human bone marrow and Solubility: 1.0% Water; 0.1% Alcohol; 1.75% Cellosolve; 4.5% Glycol;
lymph node cells. Frenstar, J., Adv. Cell Mol. Biol., 3, 1(1974) Used to 0.01% Xylene
detect changes in DNA template activity within cells. Frenster, J. Cell RT 11150 5g
Nucl., 1, 565 (1974) Fluorescent dye for cytochemistry. J. Histochem.
Cytochem., 31, 737 (1983) J. Lab. Med., 15 (3),180, (1984)  Azur A, Certified, C.N. #52005
RT 10050 25g (Methylene Azur A)
C14H14ClN3S F.W. 291.80 CAS #531-53-3
 Alcian Blue 8GX, Certified, C.N. #AnAn-6 Solubility: Water-soluble; Alcohol-soluble
(Ingrain Blue I) Used in nuclear staining; A polychromatic blood stain.
C56H68N16S4CU F.W. 1298.88 CAS #12040-44-7 RT 11240 10G
Solubility: Water-soluble
Dye Content: Approx. 50%  Azur B, Certified, C.N. #52010
Used as a fixative: 0.5-2% Alcian Blue in Glutaraldehyde fixative (Azur I; Methylene Azur B)
enhances the preservation and contrast of the cell coat and intercellular C15H16N3SCl F.W. 305.83 CAS #531-55-5
substances. Used as a stain: For staining cell surface materials and Solubility: Water-soluble; Alcohol-slightly soluble. An important
cartilage components. component of Giemsa’s stain for blood protozoa. Used for staining
Schofield, et al., Histochem J. 7, 139,1975 semi-thin sections of plant tissue. Hoefert, L.L. (1968). Polychromatic
Used as a wetting agent: Sommer, J. R (1977). To cationize glass. stains for thin sections of Beta embedded in epoxy resin.
J.Cell Bio. 75, 245a. Alcian Blue and Ruthenium Red were used to Stain Tech. 43:145
study cartilage ultrastructure. Thyberg, J., Lohmander, S., and Friberg, RT 11200 10g
U., J. Ultrastruct. Res., 45, 407 (1973).
10350
RT 25g
 Azur II, C.N. #52010/52015
(Azur B/Methylene Blue 1:1) CAS #37247-10-2
 Alizarin Red S, Certified, C.N. #DcAr-5 RT 11210 10g
(Alizarin Carmine, Mordant Red 3)
C14H7O7SNa.H2O F.W. 360.28 CAS #130-22-3  Azur II Eosin, C.N. #52010/52015/45380
Solubility: 7.69% Water; 0.1% Alcohol. (Azur B/Methylene Blue/Eosin 1:1:1) CAS #53092-85-6
Certified for Staining Bone. Stain for nervous tissue in small
RT 11220 10g
invertebrates, and for sections of nervous tissue. Lee, “The
Microtomist’s Vade-Mecum”, 10th Ed., The Blakiston Co., Phila., 1937;  Basic Fuchsin, Certified, C.N. #DcFb-26
Dawson, Stain Tech., 1, 123 (1926); Lundvall, Anat. Anz., 27, 521
(1905); 137. Used to differentiate bone from cartilage in mammalian (Rasaniline Hydrochloride; Basic Violet 14, Dye Content: ~88% min.)
embryos; used with Toluidine Blue. William, Stain Tech., 16, 23 (1941) C20H19N3.HCl F.W. 337.86 CAS #632-99-5
RT 10360 25g Berkowitz et al., (1968). Selective staining of nervous tissue for light
microscopy following preparation for electron microscopy. J. Histochem.
Cytochem. 16:808.Sato, T., and Shamoto, M (1973). A simple rapid
 Aniline Blue Disodium Salt, Water polychrome stain for epoxy-embedded tissue. Stain Technol. 48:223.
Soluble, Certified, CN. #DcK-11 RT 11260 25g
C32H25N3O9S3Na2 F.W. 737.74 CAS #28631-66-5
(Acid Blue 22; China Blue; Cotton Blue; Marine Blue V; Soluble Blue  Basic Green 4, Certified, C.N. #DcMg-11
3M, 2R; Water Blue) (Malachite Green Oxalate; Diamond Green B; BX or P Extra; Light Green N,
Solubility: 50% Water; 0.0% Alcohol; 4.5% Cellosolve; 7.8% Solid Green O; Victoria Green B or WB; Dye Content ~90%, (oxalate form)
Glycol; 0.0% Xylene.Used in connective tissue staining procedures to 2(C23H25N2).2(C2H2O4).C2O4 F.W. 927.03 CAS #2437-29-8
stain collagen. Used in differential staining. Snodgress el al., Lab Invest. Solubility: 10.0% Water; 8.5% Alcohol; 5.5% Cellosolve; 7.0% Glycol;
26:329, 1972. 0.0% Xylene.
RT 10840 25g Used as a bacteria stain and a counterstain for botanical material.
RT 18100 25g

468 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec14_466-491_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 7:15 PM Page 469

Histology and Light Microscopy SECTION 14

STAINING CHEMICALS AND PREPARED SOLUTIONS
 Certified Dyes/Stains (continued)
 Biebrich Scarlet, Water Soluble,  Crystal Violet, Certified, C.N. #DcC-38
Certified, C.N. #26905 (Basic Violet 3; Gentian Violet; Methyl Violet 10B; Hexamethyl Violet)
(Bonceau BS; Acid Red 66; Croceine Scarlet; Double Scarlet BSF) C25H30N3Cl F.W. 407.99 CAS #548-62-9
C22H14N4Na2O7S2 F.W. 556.49 CAS #4196-99-0 Solubility: 9.0% Water; 8.75% Alcohol; 7.5% Cellosolve; 7.0% Glycol;
Solubility: 5.0% Water; 0.25% Alcohol; 1.5% Cellosolve; 1.5% Glycol; 0.0% Xylene
0.0% Xylene
Dye Contents ~88% min.
RT 11265 25 g
Certified Stain. For differentiating between gram-negative and gram-
positive bacteria. Using Safranine O as a counterstain.
 Bismarck Brown Y, Certified, C.N. #21000 Certified for staining chromatin and nucleoli in plant tissue.
(Basic Brown 1; Basic Brown G, GX, GXP; Vesuvine; Leather Brown; Biological Stains, 9th Ed. 586 (1977)
Manchester Brown; Phenylene Brown) RT 12785 25 g
C18H18N8•2HCl F.W. 419.32 CAS #10114-58-6
Solubility: 1.5% Water; 3.0% Alcohol; 3.0% Cellosolve; 7.9% Glycol;  Eosin Y, Certified, C.N. #DcE-40
0.05% Xylene (Acid Red 87, Eosin Yellowish)
RT 11310 25 g C20H6Br4Na2O5 F.W. 691.88 CAS #17372-87-1
Solubility: 44.0% Water; 2.0% Alcohol; 25.0% Cellosolve; 27.5%
 Brilliant Cresyl Blue, Certified, C.N .#DcV-5 Glycol; 0.0% Xylene.
(Brilliant Blue C; Cresyl Blue 2RN)
Used with Hematoxylin for showing cell nuclei in embryos and kidneys.
C17H21N4OCl F.W. 332.84 CAS #10127-36-3
Conn, “Biological Stain” 9th ed., The Williams and Wilkens Co.,
Solubility: 3.0% Water; 2.6% Alcohol; 2.25% Cellosolve; 8.0% Glycol;
Baltimore 1977, pg. 7.
9.5% Xylene
Component of Wright’s stain for blood corpuscles.
RT 11465 10g
Wright, J. Med. Res., 7, 138 (1902)
 Bromophenol Blue, Reagent, A.C.S. For staining bone marrow to show cell morphology. Bech, “Lab. Manual
of Hematological Tech.”, W. B. Saunders Co., Phila., 1908,
(3’,3”,5 ’5”-Tetrabromophenol-sulfonthalein)
p. 233
C19H10O5SBr4 F.W. 669.97 CAS #115-39-9
RT 14850 10g
RT 11470 5g
RT 14851 25g
RT 11471 25g

 Erythrosin B, Certified, C.N. #DcEr-5

 Carmine, Certified, C.N. #DcCa-16 (Acid Red 51, Erythrosin extra Bluish; Eosin J; Iodeosin B; Pyrosin B)
Alum Lake of Carminic acid C20H6O5I4Na2 F.W. 879.87 CAS #16423-68-0
(Natural Red 4) CAS # 1390-65-4 Solubility: 10.0% Water; 5.0% Alcohol; 7.0% Cellosolve; 8.25% Glycol;
Solubility: 0.0% Water; 0.2% Alcohol; 0.5% Cellosolve; 4.0% Glycol; 0.0% Xylene.
0.0% Xylene. RT 15010 10 g
RT 12410 10g
 Fast Green FCF, Certified, C.N. #DcGf-12
 Cresyl Fast Violet, Certified, C.N. # DcW-5 (Food Green 3)
(Cresyl Violet Acetate) C37H34O10N2S3Na2 F.W.808.86 CAS #2353-45-9
C18H15N3O3 F.W. 321.33 CAS # 10510-54-0 Solubility:4.0% Water; 9.0% Alcohol; 8.0% Cellosolve; 6.25%
Solubility: 0.13% water Dye Contents ~ 75% Glycol; 0.0% Xylene
Certified Stain. To differentiate DNA and Nissl bodies in spinal cord and The main advantage of this dye is its resistance to fading. Mammalian
brain tissues. tissue stain for visualizing collagen, muscle, cystoplasma, cells and
cornified epithelium. Kornhauser, Stain Tech., 18,95 (1943); 20, 23
For staining Nissl substances in nerve cells and for bulk staining of nerve
tissue. Stain Technol., 30, 83 (1955) (1945); Lillie, Arch. Path., 29, 705 (1940). Modified Feulgen stain for
visualizing chromosomes in root tips and other meristematic tissue.
Stain for fresh tumor tissue for biopsy. J. Lab. Clin. Med., 8, 250
(1923). Biological Stains 9th Ed., 601 (1987 DeTomasi, Stain Tech., 11, 137 (1936). Used in plant histology. O.
RT 12780 5g Conn, “Biological Stains” 9th ed., Williams & Wilkens Co., Baltimore,
1977, pp. 252-3; Haynes, Stain Tech., 3, 40 (1928).
RT 15500 5g

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 469
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec14_466-491_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 7:15 PM Page 470

SECTION 14 Histology and Light Microscopy

STAINING CHEMICALS AND PREPARED SOLUTIONS
 Certified Dyes/Stains (continued)
 Giemsa Solution, C.N. #DcGe-19  Malachite Green 4, Certified
Ingredients: Basic Green Oxalate
Glycerin (cas# 56-81-5): ............................................................61% RT 18100 25g
Methyl Alcohol (cas# 67-56-1): ............................................ 38.3%
Azur II (cas# 37247-10-2) : ....................................................0.16%  Methylene Blue Chloride,
Azur II Eosin (cas# 53092-85-6): ..............................................0.6% Certified, C.N. #DcA-24
Specific Gravity: 0.89 (Basic Blue 9; Swiss Blue)
Differentiates types of leucocytes, bacteria and inclusion bodies. C16H18N3SCl•3H2O F.W. 373.86 CAS #7220-79-3
Giemsa, Centralbl. F. Publ., Abt. 1,37, 308 (1904) Stain for thick blood Solubility: 9.5% Water; 6.0% Alcohol; 6.5% Cellosolve; 10.0% Glycol;
films; shows malarial parasites. Barber and Komp, Publ. Health Rep., 0.0% Xylene.
44, 2330 (1929) Bone marrow and stain for showing cell morphology;
 Used to distinguish autonomic nerves. Richardson, K.C., (1969)
together with May-Grunwald Solution for pap staining. Pappenheim, Anat. Rec., 164, 231. General stain for animals, histology.
Folia Haemat., 13, 338 (1912)
 A simple rapid staining procedure for methacrylate embedded
RT 15940 Giemsa Stain Solution 100ml tissue sections using chromotrope 2R and Methylene Blue.
Dougherty, M.M., and King, J.S., (1984) Stain Tech., 59, 149
 Giemsa Stain, Certified, Powder C.N. #DcGe-19  An established routine method for differential staining of
CAS #51811-82-6 epoxy-embedded tissue sections. Schroeder, H.E., Rossinsky,
RT K., and Muller, W., (1980) Microsc. Acta 83, 111
15942 10 g
 Used with Basic Fuchsin for stain epoxy-embedded tissue. Sato,
T. and Shamoto, M. (1973). A simple rapid polychrome stain for
 Hematoxylin, Certified, C.N. #DcH-48 epoxy-embedded tissue. Stain Technol., 48:223
(Natural Black I, Hydroxybrasilin) RT 18600 25g
C16H14O6 F.W. 302.29 CAS #517-28-2
Solubility: 10.0% Water; 10.0% Alcohol; 9.5% Cellosolve; 10%
 Methyl Green, Certified, C.N. #DcG-10
Glycol; 0.0% Xylene. A certified biological stain used in histology and (Zinc Chloride Salt; Ethyl Green)
cytology and plastic embedded tissues. C27H35N3Cl2.ZnCl2 F.W. 608.79 CAS #7114-03-6
Chen, Chang, S., J Arch. of Path., 93,334 (1972). Solubility: 8.0% water; 3.0% Alcohol; 1.8% Cellosolve; 3.5%
RT 16620 10g Glycol; 0.0% Xylene.
 Used as a counterstain in Almann’s aniline acid fuchsin
 Indigo Carmine, Certified, C.N. #DcI-7 technique for mitochrondria; used in Kurnick’s Methyl Green-
Pyonin stain for nuclei and cystoplasmic granules of liver cells.
(Acid Blue 74; Carmine Blue; Indigotine 1, 1A) Marker for DNA at acid and neutral conditions. J.B. Boyd, H.R.
C16H8N2O8S2Na2 F.W.466.36 CAS #860-22-0 Mitchell, (1965) Anal. Biochem., 13, 28.
Dye content: approx. 85%  Used for epoxy-embedded thick sections. Sievers, J. (1971).
Solubility: 1.3% Water; 0.0% Alcohol; 4.0% Cellosolve; 2.85% Basic two-dye stains for epoxy-embedded 0.3-1 micron sec-
Glycol; 0.0% Xylene tions. Stain Technol., 46:195
RT 18700 25g
Shunway’s stain for animal embryos. Used with Acid Fuchsin for
staining Negri bodies. Stain Tech., 5, 34 (1928)  Methyl Violet 2B, Certified, C.N. #DcMv-5
Counterstain to Hematoxylin for staining vaginal smears. Am. J. Anat.,
(Basic Violet 1; Dahlia B; Gentian Violet; Paris Violet;
61, 505 (1937).
Pyoktanium Coeruleum)
RT 16910 25g
C24H28N3Cl F.W. 393.96 CAS #8004-87-3
 Indium Trichloride, Anhydrous Solubility: 9.0% Water; 8.25% Alcohol; 9.0% Cellosolve; 8.5%
Glycol;0.01% Xylene; Dye content: 75% min.
InCl3 F.W. 221.18 CAS #10025-82-8
Chloride Content: 98% Used with Methyl Green to stain Epoxy-embedded sections.
A metal stain for nucleic acid. RT 18850 25g
J. Biophys Biochem Cytol, 11,257 (1961)  Nigrosine, Certified, C.I. #50420,
RT 16920 5g Water Soluble
(Acid Black 2; Gray R, B, BB; Indulin Black; Nigrosin W, WL; Silver Gray;
 Light Green SF Yellowish, Certified, Steel Gray)
C.N. #DcL-30 CAS #8005-03-06
(Acid Green 5; Light Green 2G, S or 2GN; Acid Green F; Fast Acid Green N) Solubility: 10.0% Water; 0.0% Alcohol; 1.0% Cellosolve;
C37H34N2Na2O9S3 F.W. 792.86 CAS #5141-20-8 11.0% Glycol; 0.0% Xylene
For negative staining of bacteria. With Basic Fuchsin, staining bacteria
Solubility: 20.35% Water; 4.0% Alcohol; 5.25% Cellosolve; 12.0%
spores. Dorner, Le Lait, 6, 8 (1926).
Glycol; 0.0% Xylene
Biochem. Biophys. Acta 69,159 (1963).
RT 17920 10 g RT 19010 25g

470 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec14_466-491_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 7:15 PM Page 471

Histology and Light Microscopy SECTION 14

STAINING CHEMICALS AND PREPARED SOLUTIONS
® Certified Dyes/Stains (continued)
® Nile Blue A, Certified, C.I. #51180 ® Phloxine B, Certified, C.N. #DcPh-6
(Basic Blue 12, Nile Blue Sulfate) (Acid Red 92; Cyanosine; Eosin 10B; Phloxine TA, N, BP Super, RB, TB,
(C20H20N3O)2SO4 F.W. 732.84 CAS #3625-57-8 or BB)
Solubility: 6.0% Water; 5.0% Alcohol; 5.0% Cellosolve; 5.0% Glycol; C20H2O5Cl4Br4Na2 F.W. 829.66 CAS #18472-87-2
0.25% Xylene. Dye content: approx. 65% Solubility: 10.5% Water; 5.0% Alcohol; 9.0% Cellosolve; 4.5% Glycol;
Differentiates melamins and lipofuscins; Used in fat staining. 0.0% Xylene
Lillie, Stain Tech., 31,151 (1956); J. Histochem., 4,377; RT 19350 25 g
Z. Anal. Chem. 260, 290 (1972).
For staining bone sections. Cytologia, 11, 261 (1940) ® Pyronin Y, Certified, C.N. #DcPy-2
RT 19020 10g (Pyronin G) C17H19N2OCl F.W. 302.81 CAS #92-32-0
Solubility: 9.0% Water; 0.5% Alcohol; 1.85% Cellosolve; 4.35% Glycol;
® Oil Red O, Certified, C.N. #DcRo-3 0.0% Xylene
(Solvent Red 27, Sudan Red 5B) RT 19560 5g
C26H24N4O F.W. 408.49 CAS [1320-06-5]
Oil Red O is lysochrome (fat soluble dye) used demonstrate fat or lipids ® Safranin O, Certified, C.N. #DcS-25
in fresh tissue sections. The polyazo group of dyes include the Oil Red,
Sudan Red and the Sudan Blacks – all these dyes are interchangeable. (Safranin T, Y or A; Basis Red 2; Cotton Red; Gossypimine)
C20H19N4Cl F.W. 350.85 CAS #477-73-6
RT 19056 10g Solubility: 4.5% Water; 3.5% Alcohol; 5.0% Cellosolve; 3.5% Glycol;
0.0% Xylene
® Orange II, Certified, C.I. #15510 RT 20800 25g
(Acid Orange 7; Acid Orange II, Y or A; Gold Orange; Mandarin G;
Orange A, P or R; Orange Extra; Tropaoelin OOO No.2) ® Sudan Black B, Certified, C.N. #DcZb-2
C16H11N2O4SNa F.W. 350.33 CAS #633-96-5 (Solvent Black 3) C29H24N6 M.W. 456.56 CAS #4197-25-5
Solubility: 3.0% Water; 0.15% Alcohol; 2.5% Cellosolve; 8.0% Glycol; Solubility: Water-insoluble; Alcohol-soluble; 4.0% Cellosolve; 1.0% Glycol.
0.0% Xylene; Dye Content: approx. 75%
RT 21610 25g
A general tissue stain with Eosin and Azur-C. French, Stain Tech., 1, 79
(1926). Counterstain for Heidenhain’s Hematoxylin in animal histology.
A substitute for Orange G if a stronger yellow is desired for contrast. J. ® Toluidine Blue 0, Certified, C.N. #DcU-10
Lab. Med., 28, 995 (1943) (Basic blue; Methylene Blue T50 or T Extra)
RT
19060 25g C15H16N3SCI FW 305.83 CAS #92-31-9
Dye Content: approx. 85% min.
® Orange G, Certified, C.N. #DcO-13 Solubility: 3.25% Water; 1.75% Alcohol; 3.5% Cellosolve; 5.5% Glycol;
(Acid Orange 10, Wood Orange 2G) 0.0% Xylene
C16H10N2O7S2Na2 F.W. 452.38 CAS #1936-15-8 T A general stain for epoxy thick sections. Barajas et al.(1981)
Solubility: 8.0% Water; 0.22% Alcohol; 1.7% Cellosolve; 3.0% Glycol; Identification of renal neuroeffector junctions by electron microscopy
0.0% Xylene; Dye Content: approx. 60% of reembedded light microscopic autoradiograms of semithin sec-
Kornhauser’s Quad stain for most elementary structures of tissues. Stain tions. J. Ultrastruct. Res. 77: 379.Campbell, R.D., And Hermans, C.O.
Tech., 18, 985 (1943) Mallory’s tissue stain for connective tissue. (1972). A rapid method for resectioning 0.5 - 4.0 micron epoxy sec-
Mallory, J. Exper. Med., 5,15 (1900). Used with safranin and tannic acid tions for electron microscopy. Stain Technol . 47:115.
for showing shoot apex in plant tissue. Stain Tech., 18, 105 (1943). RT 22050 50g
RT
19070 25g
® Wright’s Stain, Certified, C.N. #DcWr-38
® Phenol Red CAS #68988-92-1
(Phenolsulfonphthalein)
Solubility: 0.091% Water; 0.23% Alcohol
C19H14O5S F.W. 354.38 CAS #143-74-8
RT 22720 25g
A standard indicator for preparing buffers, pH range 6.4-8.2.
RT 19327 5g

® Phenol Red Sodium Salt

(Phenolsulfonphthalein Sodium Salt)
C19H13NaO5S F.W. 376.37 CAS #34487-61-1
A standard indicator for preparing buffers, pH range 6.8-8.2.
RT 19328 5g

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 471
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec14_466-491_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 7:15 PM Page 472

SECTION 14 Histology and Light Microscopy

STAINING CHEMICALS AND PREPARED SOLUTIONS
® Staining Solutions
We now offer a complete line of prepared, ready-to-use, high quality staining solutions for all standard staining
procedures used by the Biological Staining Commission and the Armed Forces Institute of Pathology.
T All solutions and concentrations are packaged and prepared T Premixed ready-to-use; saves you time and effort.
in convenient and precise quantities. T Consistently uniform results are obtained.

For a partial list of all of our stains, please see chart on pages 466-467, and for descriptions of the stains, see pages 468-471.

® Acid Fuchsin Aqueous Solutions ® Biebrich Scarlet Solution

RT 26020-02 Acid Fuchsin, 0.2% Aqueous 500 ml RT 26033-02 Biebrich Scarlet, 500 ml
RT 26020-05 Acid Fuchsin, 0.5% Aqueous 500 ml 0.2% in 1% Acetic Acid
RT 26020-10 Acid Fuchsin, 1.0% Aqueous 500 ml RT 26033-10 Biebrich Scarlet, 1% in 1% Acetic Acid 500 ml
RT 26020-11 Acid Fuchsin, 1.0% in 1% Acetic Acid 500 ml RT 26033-20 Biebrich Scarlet, 1% Aqueous 500 ml
RT 26033-25 Biebrich Scarlet – Acid Fuchsin 500 ml
® Acridine Orange Aqueous Solution
RT 26024-01 Acridine Orange 0.1% Aqueous 500 ml
® Congo Red Solution
RT 26024-02 Acridine Orange 0.2% Aqueous 500 ml RT 26090-05 Alcoholic Congo Red, 0.2% Solution 500 ml
RT 26090-20 Congo Red, 0.5% Aqueous 500 ml
® Alcian Blue Solutions RT 26090-25 Congo Red, 1% Aqueous 500 ml
RT
RT
26026-13
26026-11
Alcian Blue, 1% in 3% Acetic Acid, pH 2.5
Alcian Blue, 1% in 1% Acetic Acid
250 ml
250 ml
® Cresyl Violet Acetate Solution
RT 26026-01 Alcian Blue, 1% Aqueous 250 ml RT 26089-01 Cresyl Violet Acetate, 0.1% Aqueous 500 ml
RT 26089-20 Cresyl Violet Acetate, 2% Aqueous 250 ml
® Alcoholic Stain Solutions
RT 26090-05 Alcoholic Congo Red, 0.2% Solution 500 ml ® Crystal Violet Solution
RT 26091-01 Alcoholic Hematoxylin, 1% in 95% Alcohol 500 ml RT 26088-10 Crystal Violet, 1% Aqueous 500 ml
RT 26091-10 Alcoholic Hematoxylin, 10% in 95% Alcohol 500 ml RT 26088-15 Crystal Violet, Hucker’s Solution 500 ml
RT 26092-05 Alcoholic Iodine, 0.5% in 95% Alcohol 500 ml RT 26088-16 Crystal Violet, Lieb’s Stock Solution 250 ml
RT 26092-06 Alcoholic Iodine, 0.5% in 85% Alcohol 500 ml RT 26088-17 Crystal Violet, Lilies Solution 250 ml
RT 26092-20 Alcoholic Iodine, 2% in 85% Alcohol 500 ml RT 26088-18 Crystal Violet, Stirling’s Solution 250 ml
RT 26093-60 Alcoholic Saffron, 6% 100 ml
RT 26094-05 Alcoholic Thionin, 0.5% in 20% Alcohol 500 ml ® EA Counterstain, Gill’s Modified Solution
RT 26096 Aldehyde Fuchsin Solution 250 ml For use with Papanicolaou stain; a general tissue stain. Ready-to-use.
RT 26097 Alum Hematoxylin Solution 500 ml
RT 26050-05 EA Counterstain, Gill’s Modified 500 ml
® Alum Celestine Blue RT 26050-06 EA Counterstain, Gill’s Modified 1L
(Iron Alum – Celestine Blue) ® Ehrlich’s Hematoxylin
Lendrum & McFarlane, (1940). J. of Pathology & Bacteriology, v. 50, pp 381 Stain selectivity for nuclei. Ready-to-use.
A stain solution for nuclei. A substitute for Hematoxylin/Eosin.
RT 26040-05 Ehrlich’s Hematoxylin 500 ml
RT 26023-02 Alum Celestine Solution 250 ml RT 26040-06 Ehrlich’s Hematoxylin 1L
RT 26023-05 Alum Celestine Solution 500 ml
® Eosin Y Solution
® Alum Hematoxylin Solution RT 26051-01 Eosin Y, 0.1% Aqueous 500 ml
For staining nuclei RT 26051-10 Eosin Y, 1% Aqueous 500 ml
RT 26097 Alum Hematoxylin Solution 500 ml RT 26051-11 Eosin Y, 1% Alcoholic 500 ml
RT 26051-20 Eosin Y – Eosin B Solution 500 ml
® Aniline Blue Solution RT 26051-21 Eosin Y – Phloxine B Solution 500 ml
RT 26027-10 Aniline Blue, 2.5% in 2% Acetic Acid 500 ml
RT 26027-20 Aniline Blue-Phosphomolybdic Acid Solution 500 ml ® Fast Frozen Stain Kit
RT 26027-30 Aniline Blue-Orange G Solution 500 ml
See page 475 UUUUU
® Basic Fuchsin Solution
RT 26031-02 Basic Fuchsin, 0.25% Aqueous 500 ml ® Fast Green FCF Solution
RT 26031-05 Basic Fuchsin, 0.5% Aqueous 500 ml RT 26053-02 Fast Green FCF, 0.2% Aqueous 500 ml
RT 26031-10 Basic Fuchsin, 0.1% in 95% Methanol 500 ml RT 26053-05 Fast Green FCF, 0.5% Aqueous 500 ml
RT 26031-20 Basic Fuchsin Working Solution 500 ml RT 26053-25 Fast Green FCF, 2.5% in 2% Acetic Acid 500 ml

® Best’s Carmine Stock Solution

Stain is used for selectively staining glycogen. (Keep Refrigerated)
RT 26025-02 Best’s Carmine Stain Solution 250 ml
RT 26025-05 Best’s Carmine Stain Solution 500 ml

472 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec14_466-491_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 7:15 PM Page 473

Histology and Light Microscopy SECTION 14

STAINING CHEMICALS AND PREPARED SOLUTIONS
 Staining Solutions (continued)
 Fluorophore-Infiltrated Resin Microscopy (FIRM)  Gill’s Hematoxylin Staining Solution
Rapid staining technique that provides high-contrast fluorescence Gill’s Hematoxylin is a specially formulated solution for use as a
microscopy imaging of resin embedded samples, reminiscint of low biological stain for the nuclei and nuclear chromatin of normal and
magnification transmission electron microscopy. abnormal cells whether in whole or sliced cells. Our Gill’s Hematoxylin is
 Works with Epoxy and Acrylic type resins designed to use at its full strength. It is microfiltered prior to shipment;
 Simply mount your sections on glass slides, air dry, and overlay therefore, filtration before use is not required. For repeated use further
with 100 microliters FIRM for 30 seconds, wash and coverslip with filtration is recommended. At the discretion of the user, the Gill’s
water or an aqueous mountant. View in Rhodamine channel of a Hematoxylin No. 2 and No. 3 may be diluted with ethylene glycol (25%
standard wide field Fluorescence Microscope. is recommended) to produce a weaker stain solution.
 FIRM staining is unique in that the brightly fluorescent dye infil-
RT 26030-10 Gill’s Hematoxylin No. 1 1L
trates the resin, revealing tissue structures in negative relief, with
RT 26030-14 Gill’s Hematoxylin No. 1 4L
extremely high contrast and resolution. RT 26030-20 Gill’s Hematoxylin No. 2 1L
 Perfect for previewing specimens prior to EM Analysis RT 26030-24 Gill’s Hematoxylin No. 2 4L
 High Throughput, high contrast image phenotyping of model organ- RT 26030-30 Gill’s Hematoxylin No. 3 1L
isms such as drosophila RT 26030-34 Gill’s Hematoxylin No. 3 4L
 Ideal for material and food science analytical microscopy
 Goodpasture’s Stain Solution (MacCallum)
RT 12780-05 FIRM for Acrylic Resin Sections 10ml
RT 26031 Goodpasture’s Stain Solution 500 ml
RT 12780-06 FIRM for Epoxy Resin Sections 10ml
 Gram’s Iodine
 Giemsa Solution For use as a bacterial, fungal and inclusion body stain.
Ingredients: RT
26054-05 Gram’s Iodine Solution 500 ml
Glycerin (cas# 56-81-5): ............................................................61%
RT
26054-06 Gram’s Iodine Solution 1L
Methyl Alcohol (cas# 67-56-1): ............................................ 38.3%
Azur II (cas# 37247-10-2) : ....................................................0.16%  Harris’ Hematoxylin
Azur II Eosin (cas# 53092-85-6): ..............................................0.6% Stain selectivity for nuclei, fat and lipids. Ready-to-use.
Specific Gravity: 0.89 RT 26041-05 Harris’ Hematoxylin 500 ml
Differentiates types of leucocytes, bacteria and inclusion bodies. RT 26041-06 Harris’ Hematoxylin 1L
RT 26041-20 Harris Hematoxylin without Mercury 500 ml
Giemsa, Centralbl. F. Publ., Abt. 1,37, 308 (1904) Stain for thick blood
films; shows malarial parasites. Barber and Komp, Publ. Health Rep.,  Hematoxylin Solution
44, 2330 (1929) Bone marrow and stain for showing cell morphology; RT 26042-1 Hematoxylin, 1% Aqueous 500 ml
together with May-Grunwald Solution for pap staining. Pappenheim, RT 26042-5 Hematoxylin, 5% in SD Alcohol 500 ml
Folia Haemat., 13, 338 (1912) RT 26042-10 Hematoxylin in 95% Alcohol 500 ml
RT 15940 Giemsa Stock Solution 100 ml RT 26042-20 Heidenhain’s Hematoxylin 500 ml
RT 15941 Giemsa Stock Solution 500 ml
 ImmunoSaver Antigen Retriever
Giemsa for thin and thick film see page 478  Immunosaver allows for Immunostaining with quick and easy activation
of cell membranes and the nucleus. Immunosaver provides efficient
 Differential Quick Staining Kit antigen retrieval for successful immunostaining of a wide variety of
(Modified Giemsa) antigens under optimized conditions. Protocols for both Light and
This kit is a Modified Giemsa Stain kit for quick turn around results The kit Electron Microscopy may be found with this reagent.
may be used for rapid blood smears for differential assessment, as well as RT 64142 ImmunoSaver 100 ml
for the detection of H. Pylori microorganisms. The kit comes compete with
a fixative for air dried cell suspensions and or touch preparation slides.  Jenner Stain Solution
RT 26033-05 Jenner Stain Solution 500 ml
Applications:
Fine Needle Aspirations, Frozen Sections, Blood Smears, Cytological  Kinyoun’s Solution
Specimens, Cytopreps, Microorganism Detection, Bone Marrow Biopsies Kinyoun’s carbol fuchsin staining solution for acid-fast bacteria.
This stain offers results in 15 seconds. RT
26087-05 Kinyoun’s Solution 500 ml
RT 26087-06 Kinyoun’s Solution 1L
The Kit comes complete with 3 solutions and is available in 3 sizes.
RT 26096-25 Differential Quick Staining Kit 250 ml  Lieshman’s Stain
RT 26096-50 Differential Quick Staining Kit 500 ml RT 26086-05 Leishman’s Stain 500 ml
RT 260096-75 Differential Quick Staining Kit Gallon RT 26086-50 Leishman’s Working Buffer 500 ml

 Giemsa Stain, Certified, Powder  Light Green SF Yellowish Solution

CAS #51811-82-6 RT 26085-05 Light Green SF Yellowish, 0.2% in 0.2% Acetic Acid 500 ml
RT 26085-06 Light Green SF Yellowish, 0.2% in 0.2% Acetic Acid 1L
RT 15942 10 g
RT 26085-10 Light Green SF Yellowish, 1% Aqueous 500 ml

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 473
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec14_466-491_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 7:16 PM Page 474

SECTION 14 Histology and Light Microscopy

STAINING CHEMICALS AND PREPARED SOLUTIONS
® Staining Solutions (continued)
® New Methylene Blue Solution
® Lissamine Fast Red Solution RT 26077-05 New Methylene Blue 0.50% Aqueous 500 ml
RT 26034-05 Lissamine Fast Red Solution 500 ml RT 26077-20 New Methylene Blue Solution (Reticulocyte Stain) 500 ml

® Lugol’s Iodine ® Nuclear Fast Red Solution

For use as a bacterial, fungal and inclusion body stain. RT 26078-05 Nuclear Fast Red Solution 500 ml
RT
26055-05 Lugol’s Iodine Solution 500 ml
RT
26055-06 Lugol’s Iodine Solution 1L ® Oil Red O Solution
® Luxol Fast Blue Solution RT 26079-05 Oil Red O Saturated in Isopropanol 500 ml
RT 26079-15 Oil Red O Saturated in Propylene Glycol 500 ml
RT 26056-10 Luxol Fast Blue, 0.1% in 95% Alcohol w/Acetic Acid 500 ml
RT 26056-15 Luxol Fast Blue, 0.1% in 95% Alcohol 500 ml
® Orange G Solution
® MacFarlane’s Solution RT 26066-05 Orange G, 0.5% Aqueous 500 ml
RT 26066-15 Orange G-Phosphotungstic Acid Solution 500 ml
RT 18035-05 MacFarlane’s Stock Solution 500 ml
RT 18036-05 MacFarlane’s Working Solution 500 ml ® Papanicolaou Stain, OG-6
® Mayer’s Hematoxylin RT 26048-05 OG-6 Stain Solution 500 ml
RT 26048-06 OG-6 Stain Solution 1L
Stain selectivity for nuclei. Ready-to-use.
RT
RT
26043-05 Mayer’s Hematoxylin 500 ml ® Papanicolaou Stain, EA-50 (EA Counterstain)
26043-06 Mayer’s Hematoxylin 1L
RT
RT 26049-05 EA-50 Stain Solution 500 ml
26043-10 Mayer’s Hematoxylin 4L RT 26049-06 EA-50 Stain Solution 1L
® Modified Mayer’s Hematoxylin ® Resorcin-Fuchsin Solution
Stock Solution, Ready to use. Ingredients: Hematoxylin 0.4`%,
RT 26067-05 Resorcin-Fuchsin Working Solution 500 ml
Ammonium Aluminum Sulfate 0.5%, Sodium Iodate: 0.03%, Citric Acid
0.1%, Chloral Hydrate 5%
RT 26043-18 Modified Mayer’s Hematoxylin 500ml
® Safranin O Solution
RT 26069-05 Safranin O, 0.1% in 0.1% Acetic Acid 500 ml
® May-Grunwald Staining Solution RT 26069-15 Safranin O, 0.2% in 1% Acetic Acid 500 ml
A ready-to-use stain for bone marrow staining.
RT
® Toluidine Blue O Solution
26064-05 May-Grunwald Stain Solution 500 ml RT
RT
26064-06 May-Grunwald Stain Solution 1L 26074-05 Toluidine Blue O, 0.1% Aqueous Solution 500 ml
RT 26074-15 Toluidine Blue O, 1% Aqueous Solution 500 ml
® Methenamine Solution
A stock solution for use in bacterial and fungal stains ® Van Gieson’s Solution
(Grocott’s Method/GMS). To use with Weigert’s Iodine or Weigert’s Iron as a connective tissue stain.
RT 26083-05 Methenamine, 3% Aqueous Solution 500 ml RT 26046-05 Van Gieson’s Solution 500 ml
RT 26083-06 Methenamine, 3% Aqueous Solution 1L RT 26046-06 Van Gieson’s Solution 1L

® Methylene Blue Solution ® Weigert’s Iodine Solution

RT 26075-10 Methylene Blue, 1% Aqueous 500 ml A histological stain. Demonstration of connective tissue is useful in
RT 26075-14 Methylene Blue 1.4% in 95% Alcohol 500 ml cases of emphysema, arteriosclerosis and other vascular diseases.
RT 26075-20 Methylene Blue Working Solution 500 ml
RT 26045-05 Weigert’s Iodine Solution 500 ml
® Methyl Green - Pyronin, Purified Aqueous RT 26045-06 Weigert’s Iodine Solution 1L
Solution ® Weigert’s Iron Hematoxylin
A stain solution is for demonstrate RNA and DNA. Stain selectivity for nuclei, fungal, and general applications. Ready-to-use.
RT 18710-02 Methyl Green-Pyronin Solution 250 ml RT 26044-05 Weigert’s Iron Hematoxylin A 500 ml
RT 18710-05 Methyl Green-Pyronin Solution 500 ml RT 26044-06 Weigert’s Iron Hematoxylin A 1L
RT 26044-15 Weigert’s Iron Hematoxylin B 500 ml
® Miller’s Elastic Stain RT 26044-16 Weigert’s Iron Hematoxylin B 1L
RT 26076-05 Miller’s Elastic Stain 500 ml
RT 26076-10 Miller’s Elastic Stain 1L ® Woodstain Scarlet-Acid Fuchsin Solution
26061-05 Woodstain Scarlet-Acid Fuchsin Solution 500 ml
® Mucicarmine
RT

For use with hematoxylin and metanil yellow for the determination ® Wright Staining Solution
of carbohydrates and mucosubstances. For use as a blood stain. Ready-to-use.
RT 26080-05 Mucicarmine Stock Solution 500 ml RT 26060-05 Wright Stain Solution 500 ml
RT 26080-06 Mucicarmine Stock Solution 1L RT 26060-06 Wright Stain Solution 1L

474 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec14_466-491_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 7:16 PM Page 475

Histology and Light Microscopy SECTION 14

STAINING CHEMICALS AND PREPARED SOLUTIONS
® Prepared Staining Kits for Histology and Pathology
® Fast Frozen Stain Kit
A rapid method to stain frozen tissue for permanent use. This kit includes a unique Fast Frozen
Fix that is alcohol based, and will not interfere with immunohistochemical procedures and suitable
for Laser Capture Microdisecction (LCM). Kit consists of: 100 ml Fast Fix (15280-01), 100 ml
Eosin Y 0,5% Solution (15285-02), 100 ml Gill Hematoxylin #3 (15285-03), 100 ml Scott’s
Bluing Solution (#15285-04) and one 100 ml CitraMount® Medium (#18005)

RT 15285-00 Fast Frozen Stain Kit 100 ml

® Neat Stain® Staining Kits

Neat Stain® Kits are specifically designed for stat procedures and/or laboratories using manual staining methods. Neat Stain® is available as a rapid three-
step differential hematology stain, Gram stain and Trichrome stain staining kit. They are quite simple to use, just immerse your slides sequentially in each
reagent for the correct time, air dry and read.
T Neat – Pre-filled multi-well vessels with self-contained foil sealed
T Fast – Immerse slides sequentially in each reagent for specified time, air dry and read
T Convenient – Additional foils for re-sealing containers.
Neat-Stain™ kits are prepared for STAT procedures and /or laboratory using manual staining methods.

® Neat Stain® Hematology Stain Kit ® Neat Stain™ Trichrome Stain Kit
This 3-step stain procedure is designed for differentiation of This seven-step stain procedure is designed for the staining of stool
morphological cell types in peripheral blood smears. This kit is also specimens. Based upon the Wheatley Trichrome technique is a rapid
useful in andrology labs staining microorganism and spermatozoa. staining procedure providing good results for routine examination.
Simplified method, use of mordant prior to staining is not necessary.
Staining characteristics are similar to the Wrights and Wright-Giemsa
stains. Neat Stain offers the flexibility of a three dip staining format in Staining characteristics are similar to the traditional Wright’s and Wright-
both the stain and counter stain solution. Giemsa stains.
Kit Contains:
6 Reagent Packs,
One Plastic
Stand,
6 Re-seal Foils.
Kit performs
150 tests.
Slide Holder sold
separately, Cat. #71411-01.
RT 27104-01 Neat Stain Hematology Stain Kit
Kit Contains: 3 Reagent Packs, One Plastic Stand, 6 Re-seal Foils. Kit
® Neat Stain® GRAM Kit performs 75 tests.
This 4-step stain kit is prepared for staining bacteria from cultures or Slide Holder sold separately, Cat. #71411-01.
specimens by the differential Gram stain method.
RT 27106-01 Neat Stain Trichrome Stain Kit
This kit stains similar to the traditional Wright’s and Wright-Giemsa
stains. Neat Stain® offers the flexibility of the three dip staining sequence
in both the stain and counter stain solution. ® Slide Holder
Kit Contains: Molded from polypropylene.
6 Reagent Packs, Adjustable to hold 2 to 5 3x1”
one Plastic slides, or 10 slides back-to-back
Stand, firmly. This Slide Holder works
6 Re-seal Foils. well with all Neat Stain Kits above.
Kit performs 71411-01 Slide Holder
150 tests.
Slide Holder sold
separately, Cat. #71411-01
RT 27100-01 Neat Stain® GRAM Stain Kit

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 475
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec14_466-491_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 7:16 PM Page 476

SECTION 14 Histology and Light Microscopy

STAINING CHEMICALS AND PREPARED SOLUTIONS
® Prepared Staining Kits for Histology and Pathology (continued)
A.1 BACTERIAL STAINS
® Truant’s Fluorescent Method ® Taylor’s Method for Gram Positive
for Acid Fast Organism and Gram Negative Bacteria
For bacterial stain.
For bacterial stain.
Stain results:
Stain results:
Acid Fast: ....................................................Fluoresce reddish yellow
Artifacts: ..................................................................Fluoresce yellow Gram-Positive Organism: ......................................Blue to Blue-Black
Gram Negative Organism:..................................................Bright Red
REFERENCES:
Nuclei:..........................................................................Brownish Red
T Truant, J.P. Henry Ford Hospital Med. Bull., 10:287, 1962.
T AFIP Manual of Histological Staining Methods, 3rd ed. Ed. L. Erythrocytes: ......................................................Red to Yellow-Green
Luna: New York: McGraw Hill Publications. c. 1968. p. 219. Necrotic Tissue: ............................................................Yellow-Green
T Clark, G.: Staining Procedures. Williams and Wilkens Co., Cytoplasm: ..............................................................................Yellow
Baltimore. 3rd edition. c.1973. p. 225 Connective Tissue: ......................................................................Red
RT 26102-1A Weigert’s Iron Hematoxylin Solution A 500 ml
RT 26102-1B Weigert’s Iron Hematoxylin Solution B 500 ml
REFERENCES:
RT 26102-02 Auramine-Rhodamine Staining Solution 250 ml T AFIP Manual of Histological Staining Methods, 3rd ed., Ed. L.
RT 26102-03 Acid Alcohol 1% 500 ml Luna: New York: McGraw Hill Publications, c. 1968, p.226
T Clark, G.: Staining Procedures, Williams and Wilkins Company,
® Brown and Brenn Method for Gram Baltimore, 3rd Ed, c.1973, p.320
Positive and Gram Negative Bacteria T Taylor, R.D., Amer. J. Clin. Path. 46:472 (1966)
For bacteria stain: Gram + / Gram – bacteria and filaments of nocardia, etc. RT 26108-01 Harris Hematoxylin 500 ml
Stain results: RT 26108-02 Crystal Violet, Hucker’s 500 ml
Gram + Bacteria, Nocardia and Actinomyces Filaments: ............Blue
Gram – Bacteria, Nuclei:..............................................................Red
RT 26108-03 Basic Fuchsin Stock Sol. 0.1% 500 ml
Additional tissue elements: ......................................................Yellow
RT 26108-04 Gram’s Iodine Solution 500 ml
RT
Note: Also see the Taylor Modification of the Brown and Brenn +/- technique noted for the 26108-05 Lithium Carbonate Solution 500 ml
varying differentiation available. Over-differentiation in the B&B sep 6 is a problem with some (Saturated, aqueous)
sections; run the control slides at varying rates to determine the amount for the specific organism. RT 26108-06 Acid Alcohol, 1% 500 ml
RT 26108-07 Acetone : Alcohol, 1:1 500 ml
REFERENCES: RT
T Brown J.H. and Brenn, L. Bull. Johns Hopkins Hosp., 48:69 (1931) RT
26108-08 Acetone 500 ml
T AFIP Manual of Histologic Staining Techniques: 3rd. ed., ed. G. 26108-09 Picric Acid-Acetone Sol., 0.1% 500 ml
RT 26108-10 Acetone-Xylene I 500 ml
Luna; New York: McGraw-Hill Publications, c. 1968, p. 222 RT
RT 26105-01 Crystal Violet Staining Solution, 1% Aqueous 500 ml 26108-11 Acetone-Xylene II 500 ml
RT
26105-02 Sodium Bicarbonate, 5% Aqueous 500 ml
RT
26105-03 Basic Fuchsin Stock Solution, 0.25%, 250 ml ® Gridley’s Method for Endamoeba
RT
OR Histolytica
26105-3A Basic Fuchsin Working Solution 250 ml
RT
26105-04 Gram’s Iodine Solution 500 ml
For bacteria stain: Amoebae, their nuclei and ingested erythrocytes
RT
26105-5A Acetone:Alcohol, 1:1 500 ml Stain results:
RT
26105-06 Picric Acid-Acetone Solution, 0.1% 500 ml Erythrocytes (ingested): ..............................................................Rose
RT
26105-07 Acetone 1 qt Connective tissue: ....................................................................Green
RT
26105-08 Acetone:Xylene 500 ml Amoebae: ........................................................................Blue-green
Nuclei (amoebic): ..................................................Darker blue-green
® Brown-Hopps Method for Gram Positive
and Gram Negative Bacteria REFERENCES:
For bacterial stain. T Gridley, M.F.: Am. J. Clin. Pathology, 24:243 (1953)
Stain results: T Luna, L.G.: Histologic Staining Methods, 3rd ed.: New York:
Gram Negative Bacteria: ..............................................................Red McGraw-Hill Book Co., c.1968, p. 228
Gram Positive Bacteria: ..............................................................Blue RT 26109-01 Harris Hematoxylin, 500 ml
Background: ............................................................................Yellow OR
RT 26109-1A Weigert’s Iron Hematoxylin Solution A, 500 ml
REFERENCES: AND
T AFIP Manual of Histologic Staining Methods; ed. G. Luna, RT 26109-1B Weigert’s Iron Hematoxylin Solution B 500 ml
McGraw-Hill Publications, 3rd. ed.; New York, c. 1968, p.224 RT 26109-02 Aniline-Eosin Solution (Poison Pack) 250 ml
T Brown, R.C. and Hopps, H.C., Geographic Pathology Division RT 26109-03 Naphtol Green B Staining Solution, 1% 250 ml
Armed Forces Institute of Pathology, Washington, D.C. 20305 RT 26109-04 Acid Alcohol, 1% in 75% 500 ml
RT 26106-01 Crystal Violet Staining Solution, 1% Aqueous 500 ml Alcohol Solution
RT 26106-02 Gram Iodine Solution 500 ml RT 26109-05 Ammonia Water, 0.3% 500 ml
RT 26106-03 Basic Fuchsin Staining Solution, 0.5% Aqueous 500 ml
RT 26106-04 Gallego’s Differentiating Solution 500 ml
RT 26106-05 Cellosolve 500 ml
RT 26106-06 Tartrazine, 1.5% Aqueous 500 ml

476 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec14_466-491_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 7:16 PM Page 477

Histology and Light Microscopy SECTION 14

STAINING CHEMICALS AND PREPARED SOLUTIONS
® Prepared Staining Kits for Histology and Pathology (continued)
A.1 BACTERIAL STAINS (continued)
® Giemsa for Helicobactor Pylori and Mast ® Modified Steiner – Using Chapman’s
Cells Modification
For bacterial, fungal stains. For bacterial stain.
Stain results: Stain results:
Red Blood Cells: ..........................................................................Pink Spirochetes, Donovan Bodies, General
Nuclei: ........................................................................................Blue Bacteria,Legionairies Disease Bacteria:..............Dark Brown or Black
H-Pylori, fungi & other bacteria: ..................................................Blue Background:............................................Bright Yellow to light brown
Mast Cells: ..............................................................................Purple REFERENCES:
Rickettsia: ................................................................................Purple T Margeson L.S. Chapman CM: Use of Zinc Formalin as a
sensitizer in Silver Stain for Spirochetes. Journal of Histology
REFERENCES: 19:2, p 135-138, 6 –96 (1996)
T Helicobactor pylori in peptic ulcer disease, NIH Consensus RT 26119-01 Zinc Formalin 500 ml
Statement Online, January 1994, 12(1): 1:23 RT 26119-02 Silver Nitrate, 1% Aqueous 250 ml
T Luna 1AFIP 3rd ed. McGraw Hill, 236 0-4˚C 26119-03 Gum Mastic, 2.5% 500 ml
T Fail, Rena, AS, HT (ASCP) Medical University of South Carolina, 0-4˚C 26119-04 Hydroquinone, 2% 500 ml
Histologic. Vol. XXXIV, No 2, Nov. 2001, p. 32. RT 26119-05 Silver Nitrate, 0.04%, Aqueous 250 ml
RT 26110-01 Methanol 1 qt
RT 26110-02 Giemsa Stock Solution 100 ml A.2 FUNGAL STAINS
RT 26110-03 Acetic Acid, 1% 500 ml
® GRIDLEY’S METHOD FOR FUNGI
® May-Grunwald Giemsa for H-Pylori For stain fungal mycelia, conidia, morphological detail of yeast forms
For bacterial, fungal stain. and hyphae.
Stain results: Stain results:
H-pylori:......................................................................................Blue Mycelia, Conidia: ............................................................Deep Purple
Background:....................................................................Light purple Elastic Tissue & Mucin Background: ........................................Yellow

REFERENCES: REFERENCES:
T Carson, F. Histotechnology: A Self-Instructional Text. 1980-109. T Gridley, M.F.: American J. Clin. Path., 23:303 (1953)
RT 26114-01 Jenner’s Stain Stock Solution 250 ml T AFIP Manual of Histologic Staining Techniques: 3rd., Ed. ED. L.
RT 26114-02 Giemsa Stock Solution 100 ml Luna, New York: McGraw-Hill Publications, c. 1968, p. 229
RT 26114-03 Acetic Acid, 0.1% Solution 500 ml RT 26120-01 Chromic Acid, 4%, Aqueous 500 ml
0-4˚C 26120-02 Coleman’s Feulgen Reagent 250 ml
26120-03 Aldehyde Fuchsin Solution 250 ml
® Genta, Robason and Graham Stain
RT
RT 26120-04 Metanil Yellow, 0.25% 500 ml
for H-pylori & Gastric Morphology
Stain results: ® A Combined Hematoxylin and Eosin/
Muscle cells: ............................................................Brownish yellow Methenamine Silver Stain for the Histo-
Lamina propria ground substance: ............Light yellowish or grayish logical Diagnosis of Fungi in Tissue Sections
Smooth muscle fibers:........................................................Light Pink
Cystoplasm of neutrophils: ..................................................Pale Pink For bacterial, fungal stains.
Eosinophils: ......................................................................Intense red Stain results:
Nucleus: ..........................................................................Dark brown Organism: ........................................................................Blue-Black
Intestinal metaplasma:......................................................Bright blue Background: ..............................................................................Rose
REFERENCES: REFERENCES:
T Genta PM., Robason GO, Graham DY-Simultaneous Visualization T Lamps, Laura W. et al A Combined Hematoxylin and Eosin/
of Helicobactor Pylon and Gastric Morphology A New Stain Hum Methenamin Silver Stain for the Histological Diagnosis of Fungi In
Pathol. 25:22 1-226, 1994. Tissue Sections., J. of Histotechnology 23:4 p.341 – 345, 2000.
RT 26116-01 Uranium Nitrate, 1% 500 ml RT 26123-01 Chromic Acid, 10% 500 ml
RT 26116-02 Silver Nitrate, 1% Aqueous 250 ml RT
26123-02 Sodium Bisulfite, 1% 500 ml
0-4˚C 26116-03 Gum Mastic, 2.5% 250 ml RT 26123-03 Silver Nitrate, 5% Aqueous 250 ml
0-4˚C 26116-04 Hydroquinone, 2% 250 ml RT 26123-04 Methenamine, 3% Aqueous 500 ml
RT 26116-05 Silver Nitrate, 0.04% 250 ml RT 26123-05 Sodium Borate, 5% Aqueous 500 ml
RT 26116-06 Alcian Blue, pH 2.5 250 ml RT 26123-06 Gold Chloride, 0.2% 250 ml
RT 26116-07 Harris Hematoxylin 500 ml RT 26123-07 Sodium Thiosulfate, 0.2% Aqueous 500 ml
RT 26116-08 Acid Alcohol, 1% 500 ml RT 26123-08 Harris’ Hematoxylin 500 ml
RT 26116-09 Ammonia Water, 0.25% 500 ml RT
26123-09 Acetic Acid 3% 500 ml
RT 26116-10 Eosin Y, 1% Aqueous 500 ml RT
26123-10 Ammonia Water, 0.25% 500 ml
RT 26123-11 Eosin Y, 1% Alcoholic 500 ml

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 477
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec14_466-491_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 7:22 PM Page 478

SECTION 14 Histology and Light Microscopy

STAINING CHEMICALS AND PREPARED SOLUTIONS
® Prepared Staining Kits for Histology and Pathology (continued)
A.3 INCLUSION BODY STAINS B. STAIN FOR BLOOD AND HEMA-
TOLOGIC ELEMENTS
® Pinkerton’s Method for Rickettsia
For inclusion body stain.
® Wright-Giemsa Stain
Stain results: Lillie (1972)
Rickettsia: ........................................................................Bright Red For differentiation of blood corpuscles.
Nuclei: ........................................................................................Blue Stain results:
Erthrocytes:..........................................................................Pink-Tan
REFERENCES Eosinophiles -Granules: ..............................................................Red
T Simmons, J.S. and Gentzkow, C.J., Laboratory Methods of the Lymphocytes -Granules: ..................................................Red-Purple
United States Army 5th Ed., Lee & Febiger, Philadelphia, p. 572, -Cytoplasm: ..........................................................Blue
1944 Neutrophils -Granules: ....................................................Purple-Pink
T Luna, L.G., (ed) Manual of Histologic Staining Methods or the
AFIP, 3rd Ed., McGraw-Hill, N.Y., p. 237, c 1968 REFERENCES:
RT 26131-01 Methylene Blue Solution, 1% Aqueous Sol 500 ml T Lillie, R.D.: Factors influencing the staining of blood films and the
RT 26131-02 Basic Fuchsin Solution, 0.25%, Aqueous Sol 500 ml role of methylene violet. J. Lab. Clin. Med. 29:1181, 1944.
RT 26131-03 Citric Acid, 0.5% Aqueous Sol 500 ml T Lillie, R.D., H.J. Conn’s Biological Stains, 8th Ed, William’s &
RT 26131-04 Gram’s Iodine Solution 500 ml Wilkins, Baltimore, p. 438, 1972.
OR
RT 26149-01 Wright-Giemsa Stain 500 ml
RT 26131-4A Lugol’s Iodine 500 ml
RT 26149-02 Phosphate Buffer, pH 6.5 500 ml
RT 26131-05 Sodium Thiosulfate, 5% Aqueous Sol 500 ml

® Wolbach’s Giemsa Method ® Giemsa Thin Film Stain

Lillie (1965); Giemsa (1904)
Wolbach, Todd, and Palfrey (1922)
Differentiation of leucocytes, rickettsia, bacteria and inclusion bodies.
Nuclei, collagen. Stain results:
Stain results: Nuclei, additional leukocyte features are similar to
Nuclei, Bacteria:..........................................................................Blue Wright Stain results: ..................................................Reddish Purple
Rickettsia:................................................................................Purple Plasmodic cytoplasm: ................................................................Blue
Collagen, other tissue elements: ....................................Pink to rose Chromatin: ..................................................................................Red
REFERENCES: REFERENCES:
Wolbach, S.B., Todd, J.L. and Palfrey, F.W., The Etilogy of Pathology T Clark, G., Staining Procedures, Williams & Wilkins Co., Baltimore,
Typhus, Harvard University Press, Cambridge, MA., p. 13 – 14, c 3rd Ed., p. 125, c. 1973
1922
RT 26153-01 Giemsa Thin Film Staining Solution, 250 ml
Luna, L.G., (ed), Manual of Histologic Staining Methods of the AFIP, OR
3rd Edition, McGraw-Hill, NY, p. 119, c. 1968 RT 26153-02 Phosphate Buffer, pH 6.5 500 ml
RT 26153-03 Giemsa Stock Solution 250 ml
RT 26132-01 Giemsa Stock Solution 250 ml

RT 26132-1A
OR
Giemsa Working Solution 500 ml
® Giemsa Thick Film Stain
RT 26132-02 Rosin Alcohol Stock Solution, 10% 500 ml Lillie (1965); Barber and Komp (1929)
OR Stain malarial parasites.
RT 26132-2A Rosin Alcohol Working Solution 500 ml Stain Results:
RT 26132-03 Lugol’s Iodine 500 ml Malarial Parasites: ............................................Clear Red Chromatin
OR Cytoplasm: ........................................................................Clear Blue
RT 26132-3A Gram’s Iodine 500 ml Red Corpuscles: ........................................Not seen due to lacking of
RT 26132-04 Sodium Thiosulfate, 5% Aqueous 500 ml hemoglobin during dying
REFERENCES:
T Clark, G. Staining Procedures, Williams and Wilkins Company,
Baltimore, 3rd Ed., p. 126, c. 1973
T Lillie, R.D. Histologic Technic and Practical Histochemistry, 3rd
Ed., McGraw-Hill, New York, 1965.
T Barber, M.A. & Komp, H.W., Pub. Health Rep., 44:2330-41, c.
1929
RT 26154-01 Giemsa Thick Film Staining Solution, 250 ml
OR
RT 26154-02 Phosphate Buffer – pH 7.0 500 ml
RT 26154-03 Giemsa Stock Solution 250 ml

478 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec14_466-491_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 7:16 PM Page 479

Histology and Light Microscopy SECTION 14

STAINING CHEMICALS AND PREPARED SOLUTIONS
® Prepared Staining Kits for Histology and Pathology (continued)
B. STAIN FOR BLOOD AND HEMATOLOGIC ELEMENTS (continued)
® Thomas Method for Malarial Parasites ® Rhodinile Blue Stain
Thomas (1953) Stains for hematologic elements.
Stain Results: Stain results:
Nuclei: ........................................................................................Blue Heinz Bodies ..................................................................Deep Purple
Plasma Cell Cytoplasm: ..............................................................Blue Erythrocytes..........................................Yellow-Orange to Blue-Green
Malarial Parasites: ......................................................................Blue Reticulocytes ..............................................................................Blue
Erythrocytes: ..............................................................................Pink
Other Tissue Elements: ..................................Shades of Rose to Red
REFERENCES:
T Simpson, C.F., Carlisle, J.W., and Mallard, L.: Stain Technology,
REFERENCES: 45:22 (1970)
Thomas, J.T. Stain Techn., 28:311-312, 1953. T Clark, G.: Staining Procedures, Williams and Wilkins Company,
Baltimore, 3rd Ed., C. 1973, p. 131.
Luna, L.G. (ed.) Manual of Histologic Staining Methods of the AFIP,
3rd Ed. McGraw-Hill, New York, P.129, c.1968 RT 26162-01 Rhodinile Blue Stain Sol. 500 ml
RT 26155-01 Phloxine B Solution, 0.5% 500 ml
RT
26155-02 Methylene Blue – Azur B 500 ml ® Prussian Blue Method for Hemosiderin
Staining Solution
RT 26155-03 Acetic Acid, 0.2% Aqueous 500 ml Lillie (1965); Highman (1962); Perls (1867)
Stain Results:
® Price’s Giemsa Stain Hemosiderin: ................................................................Blue or Green
Nuclei: ........................................................................................Red
Stains for hematologic elements. Background:................................................................................Pink
Stain results:
Malarial Parasites: ......................................................................Blue REFERENCES:
Tissue Nuclei: ............................................................................Blue T Perls, M., Virchow’s Arch. F. Path. Anat., 39:42-48, 1867
Bacteria: ............................................................................Dark Blue T Highman, B., Arch. Path., 33:937-938, 1942
Malarial Pigment: ......................................................................Black T Lillie, R.D., Histopathologic Technic & Practical Histochemistry,
Schistosonic egg shells:..............................................................Blue 3rd Ed., McGraw Hill, N.Y., 1965
Collagen, etc.: ....................................................................Pale Pink T Clark, G., (ed.), Staining Procedures, 3rd Ed., Williams & Wilkins,
Erthrocytes: ........................................................................Pink Rose Baltimore, p. 157, c. 1973.
RT 26170-01 Potassium Ferrocyanide, 2% Aqueous 500 ml
REFERENCES: RT 26170-02 Hydrochloric Acid, 2% 500 ml
T AFIP Manual of Histological Staining Methods, 3rd ed., L. Luna: RT 26170-03 Safranin O, 0.2% 500 ml
New York: McGraw Hill Publications, c. 1968, p. 127 RT 26170-04 Acetic Acid, 1% Aqueous 500 ml
T Price, D.L., Mil. Med., 133: 363-367, 1968.
RT 26156-01 Giemsa Stock Solution 250 ml ® 3-Amino-9-Ethyl Carbazole Method
RT 26156-02 Phosphate Buffer, pH 7.0 500 ml for Leukocyte Peroxidase
RT 26156-03 Acetic Acid, 0.2%, Aqueous 500 ml
RT 26156-04 Alcoholic Iodine, 2% 500 ml Stains for hematologic elements.
Stain results:
® Prussian Blue Stain for Sites of Peroxidase activity ................................Red-Brown Granules
Non-Hemoglobin Iron Nuclei ........................................................................................Blue
Sundberg and Broman (1955) REFERENCES:
Stain results: T Williams, W.j., Beutler, E., Erslev, A.J. and Rundles, R.W.
Particulate Iron and Non-granular cytoplasm of many Hematology, 2nd Ed. McGraw-Hill, YY, c 1977, pp 1627-1628.
Macrophages: ......................................................Blue to Blue-green RT 26173-01 Formalin-Acetone Fixative 500 ml
Other: ........................................Comparable to original films stained RT 26173-02 3-Amino-9-Ethylcarbazole 500 ml
with Wright Staining Solution Staining Solution
REFERENCES: RT 26173-03 Mayer Hematoxylin 500 ml
Clark, G.: Staining Procedures, Williams & Wilkins Co. Baltimore,
3rd Ed., c.1973, p.130. Sunberg,. R.D. and Broman, H., Blood,
10160-6, 1955.

RT 26161-1A Potassium, Ferrocyanide, 2%, Aqueous 500 ml

RT 26161-1B Hydrochloric Acid, 1% 500 ml
RT 26161-02 Wright Staining Solution 500 ml
RT 26161-03 Phosphate Buffer – pH 6.5 500 ml

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 479
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec14_466-491_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 7:16 PM Page 480

SECTION 14 Histology and Light Microscopy

STAINING CHEMICALS AND PREPARED SOLUTIONS
® Prepared Staining Kits for Histology and Pathology (continued)
C. BONES AND CALCIUM STAINS
® Alizarin Red S and Toluidine Blue O
® Canaliculi and Lacunae Stain Williams (1941); Dawson (1926)
Powers, Rasmussen and Clark (1951)
Distinction between bone and cartilage in mammalian embryos.
For bones and teeth. Stain results:
Stain results: Soft Tissues: ..................................................................Transparent
Canaliculi, lacunae, odontoblast and Osseous Tissues: ................................................................Deep Red
dentinal tubules: ..........................................Bluish to purplish black Cartilage: ............................................................................Dark Blue
REFERENCES: REFERENCES:
T Powers, M.M., Rasmusen, G.L., and Clark, G.,Anat. Rec., T Dawson A.B., Stain Techn., 1:123-4, 1926
111:117-6, (1951)
T Williams, T.W., Stain Techn., 16:23-5, 1941
T Clark, G. (ed), Staining Procedures, 3rd edition, William &
T Clark, G., (ed), Staining Procedures, 3rd Ed., Williams & Wilkins
Wilkins, Baltimore, c 1973, p. 136
Baltimore, p. 139, c. 1973
T Bodian, D., Anat. Rec., 65:89 – 97, 1936 RT
26205-01 Alizarin Red S, 0.02%, Aqueous 500 ml
T Bodian, D., Anat. Rec., 69:153 – 62, 1937 RT
26205-1A Potassium Hydroxide, 4%, Aqueous 500 ml
RT 26201-01 Cupric Nitrate, 1% Aqueous 500 ml RT 26205-02 Toluidine Blue O, 0.25% 500 ml
RT 26201-02 Protargol Solution, 1% Aqueous 500 ml RT
26205-03 Ammonium Alcohol 500 ml
RT 26201-03 Copper Shot 50 g RT 26205-05 Potassium Hydroxide, 2%, Aqueous 500 ml
0-4ºC 26201-04 Hydroquinone Reducing Solution 500 ml RT 26205-06 Sulfuric Acid Alcohol 500 ml
RT 26201-05 Gold Chloride, 1% Aqueous 250 ml
26201-06 Oxalic Acid, 2% Aqueous 500 ml
® Alizarin Red S for Calcium Deposits
RT
RT 26201-07 Sodium Thiosulfate, 5% Aqueous 500 ml
Calcium deposits stain.
® Modified Alizarin Red S Stain Results:
Calcium Sites: ..............Covered and surrounded by a heavy orange
for Fetal Specimens red precipitate which is birefringent between
Cumley, Crow, and Griffin (1939) crossed polaroids
For Minute bones and fetal ossification in mammalian embryos Background: ......................................................................Faint Pink
Stain results:
Bone: ..........................................................................................Red REFERENCES:
Soft Tissue: ..............................................Transparent and unstained T McGee-Russell, S.M., J. Histochem., 6:22-42, 1958.
T Clark, G., (ed), Staining Procedures, 3rd d., Williams & Wilkins,
REFERENCES: Baltimore, p. 140, c. 1973.
T Cumley, R.W., Crow, J.F., and Griffin, A.B., Stain Techn., 14:7 – 11, 1939 RT
26206-01 Alizarin S, 2% Solution, pH 4.2 250 ml
RT
T Dawson, A.B., Stain Techn., 1:123 – 124, 1926 RT
26206-02 Reagent Alcohol, 50% 500 ml
T Richmond, G.W. and Bennett, L., Stain Techn., 13:77 – 79, 1938 26206-03 Acetone 1 qt
RT
26206-04 Acetone – Xylene 500 ml
T Clark, G., (ed), Staining Procedures, 3rd ed., William & Wilkins, Baltimore,
p. 138, c. 1973
RT 26204-01 Alizarin S, 0.01% Aqueous 500 ml ® Pizzolato’s Method for Calcium Oxalate
RT 26204-02 Potassium Hydroxide, 1% Aqueous 500 ml For bone and its related stain.
RT 26204-03 Potassium Hydroxide, 10% Aqueous 500 ml Stain results:
RT 26204-04 Glycerol-Potassium Hydroxide 500 ml
Calcium oxalate ........................................................................Black
All other tissue elements..............................................................Red
REFERENCES:
T Pizzolato, P., J. Histochem. Cytochem., 12:333-136, 1964.
T Luna, L.G., (ed), Manual of Staining Methods of the AFIP, 3rd Ed,
McGraw-Hill, NY, c 1968, p 177.
RT
26212-01 Silver Nitrate, 5% Aqueous 250 ml
RT
26212-02 Hydrogen Peroxide, 30% 450 ml
RT
26212-03 Nuclear Fast Red (Kennechtrot) Solution 500 ml

480 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec14_466-491_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 7:16 PM Page 481

Histology and Light Microscopy SECTION 14

STAINING CHEMICALS AND PREPARED SOLUTIONS
® Prepared Staining Kits for Histology and Pathology (continued)
D. BONE MARROW STAINS E. CARBOHYDRATE &
® May-Grunwald/Giemsa Combined Stain MUCOSUBSTANCE STAINS:
Beck (1938); Pappanheim (1912)
E.1 Amyloid Stains
Stain results:
Nuclei, Bacteria:..........................................................................Blue ® Crystal Violet Stain for Amyloid
Cytoplasm: ........................................................................Pink-Rose Stain results:
Amyloid..............................................................................Violet-Red
REFERENCES: Tissue ........................................................................................Blue
T Beck, R.C., Laboratory Manual of Hematological Technique, W.B.
Saunders & Co., Philadelphia, c. 1938, pp 233 – 236
REFERENCES:
T Clark, G.: Staining Procedures, Williams and Wilkin co., Baltimore
T Clark, G. (ed), Staining Procedures, 3rd ed. Williams &Wilkins,
3rd Ed., c. 1973, p.48.
Baltimore, c. 1973, pp 131 – 132
T Conn, H. J., Biological Stains 4th Ed. Biotech Publications,
T Strumia, M.M., J Lab Clin. Med 21:930 – 934, 1935 – 1936 Geneva New York, 1940.
T Luna, L.G., (ed) Manual of Histologic Staining Methods of the RT 26301-01 Crystal Violet Solution 500 ml
Armed Forces Institute of Pathology, 3rd ed. McGraw-Hill, NY, RT 26301-02 Acetic Acid, 1% Aqueous 500 ml
c. 1968, pp 121-122
RT 26250-01 May-Grunwald Staining Solution 500 ml ® Sweat-Puchtler Method for Amyloid
OR Stain results:
RT 26250-1A Jenner Staining Solution 500 ml
RT 26250-02 Giemsa Staining Solution 250 ml Amyloid ..............................................................................Pink-Red
Nuclei ........................................................................................Blue
® Maximow’s Method for Bone Marrow Elasticia ..........................................................................Pink to Red
Background ........................................................................Unstained
Mallory (1961)
REFERENCES:
Morphology details of marrow cells.
Stain results: T Sweat, F. and Puchtler, H.: Arch. Path. 80:613, 1965
Nuclei: ........................................................................................Blue T AFIP Manual of Histologic Staining Methods, 3rd edition, Ed L.
Basophile leukocyte, mast cell granules: ....................Purple to Violet Luna: New York: McGraw Hill Publication, c. 1968, p. 154
Cartilage: ................................................................................Purple RT 26303-01 Sirius Red F3BA Solution, 1% 500 ml
Erythrocytes, eosinophile granules: ............................................Pink RT 26303-02 Mayer Hematoxylin 500 ml
Cytoplasm: ......................................................................Blue to Pink RT 26303-03 Borate Buffer, 0.1M – pH 9.0 500 ml
RT 26303-04 Alkaline Alcohol5 500 ml
References:
T AFIP Manual of Histologic Staining Methods, 3rd Ed, Ed. L. Luna:
® Laqueur’s Method for Alcoholic Hyalin
New York: McGraw Hill Publications, c. 1968, p. 120 Lacqueur (1950)
T Mallory, F.B., Pathological technique, New York, Hafner For mallory bodies, erythrocytes, bile pigment and proteinaceous
Publishing Co., 1961, p.196 material in liver.
RT 26252-01 Mayer’s Hematoxylin 500 ml Stain results:
RT 26252-02 Eosin Y, 0.1%, Aqueous 500 ml Mallory Bodies:..................................................................Bright Red
RT 26252-03 Azur II, 0.1%, Aqueous 500 ml Erythrocytes:................................................................................Red
RT 26252-04 Phosphate Buffer, 0.1M, pH 6.8 – 7.0 500 ml Cytoplasm: ......................................................................Pale Brown
Bile Pigment: ............................................................................Green
Proteinaceous material seen occasionally in some liver cells: ......Red
Hemosiderin and lipofichsin: ..............................................Unstained

REFERENCES:
T Laqueur, G.I., Amer. J. Clin. Path., 20:689-690, 1950
T Luna, L.G. (ed), Manual of Hitopathologic Staining Method of the
AFIP, 3rd ed, McGraw-Hill, NY, c. 1968, p 160
T Lillie, R.D., Fullmer, H.M., Histopathologic Technic and Practical
Histochemistry 4th ed., McGraw-Hill, NY, 1976, p 670-671
T Clark, G., (ed) Staining Procedures, 3rd ed. WilliamS & Wilkins,
Baltimore, p 51, c. 1973
RT 26306-01 Mayer’s Hematoxylin 500 ml
RT 26306-02 Acid Fuchsin-Aniline Solution 500 ml
RT 26306-03 Light Green, 1% Aqueous 500 ml
RT 26306-04 Phosphomolybdic Acid, 1% Aqueous 500 ml
RT 26306-05 Alcoholic Picric Acid 500 ml

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 481
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec14_466-491_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 7:17 PM Page 482

SECTION 14 Histology and Light Microscopy

STAINING CHEMICALS AND PREPARED SOLUTIONS
® Prepared Staining Kits for Histology and Pathology (continued)
E. CARBOHYDRATE & MUCOSUBSTANCE STAINS: Continued
E.2 Glycogen Stains
® McManus’ Method (PAS) for Glycogen
McManus (1948)
Stain results: RT 26312-01 Coleman’s Feulgen, Refrigerated 500 ml
Nuclei: ........................................................................................Blue OR
Fungi: ..........................................................................................Red
RT 26312-1A Schiff’’s reagent, Refrigerated! 500 ml
Background, when Light Green is used
RT 26312-02 Light Green Stock Solution, 0.2% 250 ml
OR
as the counter-stain: ........................................................Green, pale RT 26312-2A Light Green Working Solution 500 ml
OR
REFERENCES: RT 26312-2B Harris Hematoxylin 500 ml
T McManus, JFA: Stain Tech.; 23:99 (1948) RT 26312-03 Periodic Acid, 0.5%, Aqueous 500 ml
RT 26312-04 Acid – Alcohol, 1% 500 ml
T AFIP Manual of Histologic Staining Techniques; L.G. Luna, 3rd RT 26312-05 Ammonia Water, 0.3% 500 ml
Ed., New York: McGraw-Hill Publications, c. 1968, p. 160.
T Mowry, RW: Annals of the New York Academy of Science,
106:402 (1963).

E.3 Mucosubstance Stains

® Mayer Mucicarmine Method ® Alcian Blue Method (pH 2.5)
For mucosubstances stains. For stain weakly acidic sulfated mucosubstances, hyaluronic acid
Stain results: and sialomucins.
Mucin, Cryptococci Capsulae ................................Deep Rose to Red Stain results:
Weakly Acidic Sulfated Mucosubstances: ..........................Dark Blue
Other Tissue Elements ............................................................Yellow
Hyaluronic Acid:..................................................................Dark blue
Nuclei........................................................................................Black Sialomucins: ......................................................................Dark blue
Note: The rose color due to carmin staining will be obscured if sections
are overstained with Weigert’s Hematoxylin and/or Metanil Yellow solution REFERENCES:
REFERENCES: T AFIP Manual of Histological Stains Methods, 3rd Ed, Ed. L. Luna:
T Mallory, F.B.: Pathological Technique. Hafner Publishing Co., N.Y, New York McGraw Hill Publications, c. 1968, p. 163.
c. 1961, p. 130. T Lev, R. & Spicer. S.S., J. Histochem Cystochem, 12:309, 1964
T Luna, L.G.., (ed), AFIP Manual of Histologic Staining Methods, RT 26323-01 Alcian Blue, 1% - pH 2.5 250 ml
3rd. ed., McGraw-Hill Co., NY, C. 1968, pp161-162 RT 26323-02 Nuclear Fast Red (Kernechtrot) Solution 250 ml
26323-03 Acetic Acid, 3% Aqueous 500 ml
T Sheehan, D.C. & Hrapenak, B.B., Theory and Practice of
RT

Histotechnology, 2nd ed., C.V. Mosby Co., St. Louis. C. 1980.

pp 168-169 ® Aldehyde-Fuchsin Method (pH 1.0)
RT 26320-01 Mucicarmine Stock Solution 500 ml For stain highly acid sulfated mucosubstances.
RT 26320-02 Metanil Yellow, 0.25% 500 ml Stain results:
RT 26320-03 Weigert’s Hematoxylin Solution A 500 ml All mucins except the highly acidic sulfated mucosubstances are
RT 26320-04 Weigert’s Hematoxylin Solution B 500 ml aldehyde fuchsin negative at pH values of 1.0 and below.
® Modification of Mayer’s Mucihematein
Lillie (1965); Laskey (1950)
References:
T Johnson, W.C., Graham, J.H., and Helwig, E.B., J. Invest. Derm.,
For stain mucins, especially those derived from epithelial cells of
42:215-224, 1964
glandular tissue.
Stain results: T Luna, L.G., (ed), Manual of Histologic Staining Methods of the
Mucin:..............................................................................Deep Violet AFIP, 3rd Ed., McGraw-Hill, c.1968, p. 166
Cell Nuclei:..................................................................Pale Gray Blue RT 26328-01 Aldehyde-Fuchsin Solution – pH 1.0 500 ml
Connective Tissue: ..........................................Pale Gray to colorless RT 26328-02 Metanil Yellow Solution, 0.25% 500 ml
RT 26328-03 Alcohol Solution, 80% - pH 1.0 500 ml
REFERENCES:
T Laskey, Alice: Stain Technology, 25:33 (1959)
T Clark G.: Staining Procedures, Williams & Wilkins Co., Baltimore,
3rd Ed., c. 1973, p. 57.
RT 26321-01 Mayer’s Mucihematein, Modified 500 ml

482 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec14_466-491_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 7:17 PM Page 483

Histology and Light Microscopy SECTION 14

STAINING CHEMICALS AND PREPARED SOLUTIONS
® Prepared Staining Kits for Histology and Pathology (continued)
F. CONNECTIVE TISSUE STAINS
F.1 Van Gieson and related Stains F.2 Stains with Poly-Acid Step
® Van Gieson’s Method for Collagen Fibers ® Lillie Modification of Masson’s Trichrome
Mallory (1938); Van Gieson (1889) Lillie (1940)
For collagen, muscle and cornified epithelium. Stains cells, cytoplasm muscle and collagen of mammalian tissue
Stain results: Stain results:
Collagen:......................................................................................Red Nuclei: ......................................................................................Black
Smooth and striated muscle: ..........................Yellowish to Brownish Cystoplasm: ................................................................Brown to Pink
Cornified epithelium:................................................................Yellow Muscle:........................................................................................Red
Hyalin: ....................................................................................Yellow Erythrocytes: ..............................................................Brilliant Scarlet
Nuclei: ..........................................................................Blue to Black Collagen: ..............................................................Blue to Blue Green
Myelinated fibers: ........................................................................Red
REFERENCES: Fibrin: ..............................................................................Red to Pink
T Clark, G., (ed) Staining Procedures, 3rd Ed., Williams & Wilkins
Co., Baltimore, c. 1973, p. 50 REFERENCES:
T Luna, L (ed) AFIP Manual o f Histological Staining Methods, T Clark, G.: Staining Procedures. Williams & Wilkins Co., Baltimore,
3rd ED., New York: McGraw Hill Publications, c 1968, p.76 3rd ed., c. 1973, p.59
T Van Gieson, I., New York Med . J., 50:57-60, 1889. T Lillie, R.D., Arch. Path., 29:705, 1940
T Mallory,F.B., Pathological Technique, Hafner Publishing., RT 26364-01 Phosphomolybdic/Phosphotungstic 500 ml
New York, c. 1961, p. 152 Acid Solution
RT 26364-02 Weigert’s Iron Hematoxylin A 500 ml
RT 26350-01 Van Gieson’s Solution 500 ml
&
RT 26350-02 Weigert’s Iron Hematoxylin A 500 ml
RT 26364-03 Weigert’s Iron Hematoxylin B 500 ml
&
RT 26364-04 Biebrich Scarlet Solution, 1% 500 ml
RT 26350-03 Weigert’s Iron Hematoxylin B 500 ml
RT 26364-05 Fast Green FCF Solution, 2.5% 500 ml
RT 26364-06 Acetic Acid, 1% Aqueous 500 ml
® Puchtler-Sweat Method RT 26364-07 Lugol’s Iodine 500 ml
for Basement Membranes OR
RT 26364-7A Gram’s Iodine 500 ml
Puchtler and Sweat (1964) RT 26364-08 Sodium Thiosulfate, 5% Aqueous 500 ml
Stain results:
Basement Membranes: ..................................Black in cross section/
Gray in tangential sections ® Masson’s Trichrome for Connective Tissue
Nuclei: ............................................................................Pink to Red Sheehan and Hrapchak (1980)
For stain nuclei, agentaffen granules, collagen, cytoplasm, keratin, etc.
REFERENCES: Stain results:
T Puchtler, H. and Sweat, F.: Stain Technology, 39:163, 1964 Nuclei: ......................................................................................Black
T AFIP Manual of Histological Staining Mehtods, 3rd ed., Ed. L. Cytoplasm, Keratin, Muscle Fibers: ..............................................Red
Luna: NewYork, McGraw Hill Pub., c. 1968, p. 73 Collagen, Mucin: ........................................................................Blue
RT
26356-01 Resorcin-Fuchsin Solution 500 ml
RT
26356-02 Nuclear Fast Red (Kernechtrot) Solution 500 ml REFERENCES:
RT
26356-03 Periodic Acid, 0.5% Aqueous 500 ml T Sheehan and Hrapchak: Theory and Practice of Histotechnology,
RT
26356-04 Sodium Bisulfite Solution 500 ml
St. Louis. The Moxby Company 1980, p. 190
RT 26367-01 Bouin’s Fixative 500 ml
® Picrosirius Red Staining of Cardiac RT 26367-02 Weigert’s Iron Hematoxylin A 500 ml
Muscle Following Phosphomolybdic Acid Treatment RT 26367-03 Weigert’s Iron Hematoxylin B 500 ml
For connective tissue stains – Van Gieson stains and variants.
RT 26367-04 Biebrich Scarlet Solution, 1% 500 ml
RT 26367-05 Phosphomolybdic/Phosphotungstic 500 ml
Stain results: Acid Solution
Septa ..........................................................................................Red RT 26367-06 Aniline Blue Solution 500 ml
RT 26367-07 Acetic Acid, 1% Aqueous 500 ml
REFERENCES:
T Dolber, Paul C. and Madison S. Spach. Picrosirus Red Staining of
Cardiac Muscle Following Phosphomolybdic Acid Treatment,
Stain Technology, Vol. 62 No 1 (1987) 23 – 26.
RT 26357-01 Phosphomolybdic Acid, 0.2% Aqueous 500 ml
RT 26357-02 Sirius Red, 0.1% in SaturatedPicric Acid 100 ml
RT
26357-03 Hydrochloric Acid, 0.01N 500 ml

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 483
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec14_466-491_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 7:17 PM Page 484

SECTION 14 Histology and Light Microscopy

STAINING CHEMICALS AND PREPARED SOLUTIONS
® Prepared Staining Kits For Histology And Pathology (cont.)
F. CONNECTIVE TISSUE STAINS (cont.) REFERENCES:
T Sheehan, Dezna C., Hrapchack, Barbara B.: Theory and Practice
F.3 Elastic Tissue Stains of Histotechnology, 2nd ed. The C.V. Mosby C., St Louis,
p. 196-197, c. 1980
® Modified Verhoff Elastic Van Gieson Stain RT 26374-01 Alcoholic Hematoxylin, 5% 500 ml
For connective tissue stains – Stain with a poly-acid step RT 26374-02 Ferric Chloride, 10% 500 ml
Stain results: RT 26374-03 Weigert’s Iodine 500 ml
Nuclei ..........................................................................Grayish-Black RT 26374-04 Ferric Chloride, 2% 500 ml
Collagen Fibers ............................................................................Red RT 26374-05 Sodium Thiosulfate, 5% Aqueous 500 ml
Elastic Fibers..................................................................Bluish-Black RT 26374-06 Van-Gieson’s Solution 500 ml
Muscle......................................................................Greenish-Yellow
REFERENCES: ® Carstairs Method for Fibrin and Platelets
T Gravey, Winsome et al “A modified Verhoff Elastic Van Gieson Carstairs (1965)
Stain” The Journal of Histotechnology, Vol. 14, No. 2, pp113 For the staining of fibrin and platelets.
–114. June 1991. Stain results:
RT 26369-01 Alcoholic Hematoxylin, 3% 250 ml 48 hours or more Less than 48 hours
RT 26369-02 Ferric Chloride, 2% aqueous 500 ml Fibrin: ................................Bright Red ............Orange to Orange-Red
RT 26369-03 Lugol’s Iodine 500 ml Platelets..................Gray blue to navy................................Light Gray
RT 26369-04 Ferric Chloride, 0.4% aqueous 500 ml
Collagen: ..........................Bright Blue ..............................Bright Blue
Muscle:........................................Red ........................................Red
RT 26369-05 Van Geisons Solution 250 ml
Red Blood Cells:..............Clear Yellow ..............Red, Green or Yellow
RT 26381-01 Ferric Ammonium Sulfate, 5% Aqueous 500 ml
® Weigert’s Resorcin Fuchsin RT 26381-02 Mayer’s Hematoxylin 500 ml
RT 26381-03 Picric Acid-Orange G Solution 500 ml
Lillie (1965); Mallory (1938); Weigert (1898) RT 26381-04 Ponceau Acid Fuchsin Solution 500 ml
For stain elastic fibers in blood vessel walls, nuclei and collagen. RT 26381-05 Phosphotungstic Acid, 1% 500 ml
Stain results: RT 26381-06 Aniline Blue Solution 500 ml
Elastic Tissues: ..................................................................Dark Blue
Nuclei (red if Orth’s Carmine used): ....................................Dark Blue
Collagen: ............................................................................Red-Pink ® Modified Movat’s Stain
Miscellaneous Tissue Elements: ......Yellow (with Van Gieson’s stain) For connective tissue stains – Elastic tissue stains.
REFERENCES: Stain results:
T Mallory, FB: Pathological Technique; New York: Hafner Publishing Nuclei........................................................................................Black
Co., c. 1961, p. 168 Cytoplasm....................................................................................Red
T Clark G: Staining Procedures, Baltimore: Williams & Wilkins Co., Elastic Fibers..............................................................Purple to Black
3rd ed. c. 1973, p.60 Collagen and Bone ..................................................................Yellow
T Luna, I. G.: AFIP Histologic Staining Methods: New York: McGraw Mucopolysaccharides ......................................................Blue-Green
Hill Book Co., 3rd ed., c. 1968, p. 80 Muscle ........................................................................................Red
RT 26370-01 Resorcin-Fuchsin Solution 500 ml REFERENCES:
RT 26370-02 Van Gieson’s Solution 500 ml T Movat, H.Z.;: Demonstration of all connective tissue elements in
RT 26370-03 Weigert’s Iron Hematoxylin A 500 ml a single section. Arch Path., 60:289 – 295, 1955
RT 26370-04 Weigert’s Iron Hematoxylin B 500 ml
RT
T Roman N., et al: Orcein-hematoxylin in iodized ferric chloride as
26370-05 Acid Alcohol, 1% 500 ml
a stain for elastic tissue. Stain Technology, 42:199 –202, 1967.
RT 26385-01 Alcian Blue, 1% 100 ml
® Verhoeff’s Van-Gieson’s (VVG Method) RT 26385-02 Alkaline Alcohol 500 ml
Sheehan and Hrapchak (1980) RT 26385-03 Orcein, 0.2% 250 ml
RT 26385-04 Hematoxylin Alcoholic, 5% 250 ml
For stain elastic fibers, nuclei, collagen and other tissue elements. RT 26385-05 Ferric Chloride, 10% 500 ml
Stain results:
Elastic Fibers: ........................Blue-black to Black–Fine elastic fibrils
RT 26385-06 Lugol’s Iodine 500 ml
may not be stained with this method
RT 26385-07 Woodstain Scarlet-Acid Fuchsin Working Solution 250 ml
Nuclei: ..........................................................................Blue to Black RT 26385-08 Acetic Acid, 0.5% 500 ml
Collagen:......................................................................................Red RT 26385-09 Phosphotungstic Acid, 5% 500 ml
Other Tissue Elements: ............................................................Yellow RT 26385-10 Alcoholic Saffron, 6% 100 ml

484 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec14_466-491_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 7:17 PM Page 485

Histology and Light Microscopy SECTION 14

STAINING CHEMICALS AND PREPARED SOLUTIONS
® Prepared Staining Kits For Histology And Pathology (cont.)
F. CONNECTIVE TISSUE STAINS (cont.) ® Jones Method for Kidney
- Silver Method
® Goldner’s Trichrome Method For the staining of basement membranes, reticulum fibers, collagen
For connective tissue stains – Elastic tissue stain. Stain with a poly-acid step. and nuclei.
Stain results: Stain results:
Nuclear chromatin ....................................................Brownish-Black Basement membranes, reticulum fibers: ..................................Black
Cytoplasm ........................................................................Bright Red Nuclei: ........................................................................................Blue
Erythrocytes............................................................................Orange Cytoplasm, collagen, connective tissue:..........................Pink-Orange
Muscle ........................................................................................Red REFERENCES:
Collagen ..................................................................................Green T Jones, D.B., Amer. J. Path. 27:99 (1951)
REFERENCES: T AFIP Manual of Histological Staining Methods, 3rd Ed.,
T Luna, Lee G. Histopathologic Methods and Color Atlas of Special Ed. L. Luna: NY: McGraw-Hill Publications, c. 1968, p.97
Stains and Tissue Artifacts. Johnson Printers, Downerts Grove, IL RT
26396-01 Periodic Acid, 0.5%, Aqueous 500 ml
p151-152, c 1992. RT
26396-02 Methenamine Solution, 3%, Aqueous 500 ml
RT
RT 26386-01 Bouin’s Fluid 500 ml 26396-03 Silver Nitrate, 5% Aqueous Solution 250 ml
RT
RT 26386-02 Weigert’s Iron Hematoxylin A 500 ml 26396-04 Borate Buffer Working Solution 500 ml
RT
RT 26386-03 Weigert’s Iron Hematoxylin B 500 ml 26396-05 Gold Chloride, 0.2%, Aqueous 250 ml
RT
RT 26386-04 Ponceau Acid Fuchsin 100 ml 26396-06 Harris’s Hematoxylin 500 ml
RT
RT 26386-05 Acetic Acid, 1% 500 ml 26396-07 Alcoholic Eosin Y Staining Solution 500 ml
RT
RT 26386-06 Phosphomolybdic Acid Orange G Solution 250 ml 26396-09 Sodium Thiosulfate, 3%, Aqueous 500 ml
RT
RT 26386-07 Light Green Stock, 0.2% 500 ml 26396-11 Potassium Ferricyanide, 0.5%, Aqueous 500 ml
RT
26396-12 Sodium Metabisulfite, 3%, Aqueous 500 ml
RT
26396-13 Acid Alcohol, 1% 500 ml
F.4 Silver Methods RT
26396-14 Ammonia Water, 0.3% 500 ml

® Wilder Modification of Bielschowsky’s

Method F.5 Keratin Stains
Wilder (1935)
® Dane’s Method for Prekeratin, Keratin,
For the staining of Collagen and reticulum.
Stain results:
and Mucin
Reticulum Fibers (If beading is observed and/or a dark Keratin stain method for the staining of keratin, prekeratin, acid
background, replace the ammonium hydroxide silver mucopolysaccharides and nuclei.
Nitrate solution and the reducing solution): ..............................Black Stain results:
Collagen:....................................................................................Rose Acid Mucopolysaccharides: ........................................................Blue
Other Tissue Elements: ................................................................Red Prekeratin and Keranin: ..............................................Orange to Red
Nuclei: ....................................................................................Brown
REFERENCES:
T Wilder, H.C., Amer. J. Clin. Path.: 11:817, 1935
REFERENCES:
T Mallory, F.B.: Pathological Techniques, Phil., W.B. Saunders & T Dane, E.T., and Herman, D.L.: Stain Technology, 38:97, 1963.
Co. c. 1938 T AFIP Manual of Histological Staining Methods, 3rd Ed.,
T AFIP Manual of Hitological Staining Techniques, NY, McGraw-Hill Ed L. Luna: New York: McGraw Hill Publications, c 1968, p.83.
Publ., c. 1968/3rd ed, p. 92 RT 26401-01 Phloxine Solution, 1%, Aqueous 500 ml
RT 26392-01 Silver Nitrate, 10.2% Aqueous 250 ml
RT 26401-02 Alcian Blue Solution, 0.5% 250 ml
RT 26392-02 Ammonium Hydroxide, Conc. 500 ml
RT 26401-03 Orange G Solution 500 ml
RT 26392-03 Sodium Hydroxide, 3.1% Aqueous 500 ml
RT 26401-04 Mayer’s Hematoxylin 500 ml
RT 26392-04 Formalin, 40%, Neutralized 500 ml
RT 26392-05 Harris Hematoxylin 500 ml
OR
RT 26392-5A Van-Gieson Stain 500 ml
RT 26392-06 Nuclear Fast Red (Kernechtrot) 500 ml
RT 26392-07 Phosphomolybdic Acid, 10% Aqueous 500 ml
RT 26392-08 Uranium Nitrate, 1% 500 ml
RT 26392-09 Gold Chloride, 0.2%, Aqueous 250 ml
RT 26392-10 Sodium Thiosulfate, 5% Aqueous 500 ml

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 485
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec14_466-491_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 7:17 PM Page 486

SECTION 14 Histology and Light Microscopy

STAINING CHEMICALS AND PREPARED SOLUTIONS
® Prepared Staining Kits For Histology And Pathology (cont.)
G. CYTOPLASMIC GRANULE STAINS G.3 Other Granule Stains
G.1 Pancreatic Islet Cell Stains ® Methenamine Silver Method for
Argentaffin Cells
® Mallory-Heidenhain Azan-Gomori’s For the staining of argentaffin granules of enterochromaffin cells.
Modification for Islet Cells Stain results:
For the staining of alpha, beta and D-cells of the islets of langerhans. Argentaffin Cells: ......................................................................Black
Stain results (Bouin Fixation): Coarse connective tissue
Human Tissue Guinea Pig of the submucosa: ..............................Variable amount of blackening
Alpha granules ......................Red, bright ....................Orange - Tan by 3–31⁄2 hr. of impregnation
Beta granules ..........Orange-Brown, dull ..........................Red, fiery Granules of eosinophil leukocytes,
D-cell granules ......................Dark Blue ........................Deep Blue nuclei, smooth muscle
REFERENCES: & surface epithelium: ..............................show additional blackening
after incubation beyond 3–31⁄2 hr.
T Clark, G, (ed): Staining Procedures 3rd Ed.; Baltimore: Williams &
Granules of mast cells:..................................Remain red after nuclei
Wilkins Co., c. 1973, p. 171
& reticulum are blackened
T Gomori, G.: ”Studies on the cells of the Pancreatic islets.” Anat. REFERENCES:
Rec. 74:439 (1939)
T Clark, G.: Staining Procedures, Williams and Wilkins Co.,
RT 26450-01 Azocarmine Staining Solution, 0.1% 250 ml
Baltimore, 3rd Ed., c. 1973, p. 161.
RT 26450-02 Aniline-Alcohol, 1% Poison Pack 250 ml
RT 26450-03 Ferric Ammonium Sulfate, 5%, Aqueous 500 ml T Gomori, G., Arch. Path., 45:48, 1948.
RT 26450-04 Aniline Blue – Orange Solution 500 ml T Burtner, H.J. and Lillie, R.D., Stain Techn., 24:225-7, 1949.
RT 26450-05 Orange G, 0.2% in Alcohol 500 ml RT 26481-01 Weigert’s Iodine Solution 500 ml
RT 26481-02 Sodium Thiosulfate, 5%, Aqueous 500 ml
G.2 Mast Cell Stains RT
RT
26481-03
26481-04
Silver Nitrate, 5%, Aqueous
Methenamine, 3%, Aqueous
250 ml
500 ml
® Toren’s Method for Mast Cells RT 26481-05 Borate Buffer, pH 7.8 500 ml
Cytoplasmic granule stains: Mast cell stains. RT 26481-06 Gold Chloride, 0.1%, Aqueous 250 ml
Stain results: RT 26481-07 Saffranin O Solution, 0.1% 500 ml
Mast Cell Granules ............................................................Deep Blue
Collagen & Cartilage ........................................................Blue-Green H. FAT AND LIPID STAINS
Muscle &Elastic Fibers ................................................................Red
Fibrin ......................................................................................Purple ® Herxheimer’s Technique
Bone ........................................................................................Green To stain fat and cholesterol.
Colloid, Keratin & Erythrocytes ........................Orange Red to Orange Stain results:
REFERENCES: Nuclei ........................................................................................Blue
T Toren, D.A.: Stain Techn., 38:249-250, 1963 Fat ..................................................................................Orange-Red
Cholesterol ..................................................................................Red
T Luna, L., (ed.), Manual of Histologic Staining Methods of the AFIP,
3rd. ed., McGraw-Hill, New York, c. 1968, pp. 116-117 REFERENCE:
RT 26472-01 Giemsa Stain Solution 500 ml T Clark, G., Ed.: Staining Procedures; 3rd Ed.; Baltimore: Williams
RT 26472-02 Acetic Acid, 0.5%, Aqueous 500 ml and Wilkins Co., c. 1973, p. 143
RT 26472-03 Pollacks’s Trichrome Solution 100 ml T Conn’s, H.J.: Biological Stains; 8th Ed., Baltimore: Williams and
Wilkins Co., c. 1969, p.100
RT 26500-01 Sudan IV Staining Solution (Herxheimer II) 500 ml
RT 26500-02 Harris’ Hematoxylin 500 ml
RT 26500-04 Acetic Acid, 1%, Aqueous 500 ml

For ImmunoGold Reagents...

See Section 2, pages 72-90
Including not only the more commonly known reagents for EM and LM but,
as well, a newly introduced line of products such as Silver Enhancement
specifically for EM, Ultra-Small Fab fragments, Blocking Solutions, and even
a line of donkey gold conjugates.

486 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec14_466-491_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 7:17 PM Page 487

Histology and Light Microscopy SECTION 14

STAINING CHEMICALS AND PREPARED SOLUTIONS
® Prepared Staining Kits For Histology And Pathology (cont.)
® Fat Stains in Supersaturated Alcohol
For fat and lipid stain.
Stain results: TECHNICAL TIP
Fat ................................Deep orange-red with Oil Red O (lighter with When a stain is applied both en-bloc and as a post-stain for thin
..............................................Sudan IV) Orange-yellow with Sudan II sections, maximum contrast will be achieved.
Nuclei ........................................................................................Blue
Erythrocytes ..........................................................Sometimes Green
Cytoplasm ....................................................................Lighter Green
TECHNICAL TIP
REFERENCES:
T Lillie, R.D.,Histopathologic Technical and Practical
Staining Tips With Hematoxylin
Histochemistry, 3rd edition, McGraw-Hill, NY, 1965 1. Check a slide from each batch of slides during times the workload
is heavy to insure good staining by the Hematoxylin.
T Clark, G., (ed) Staining Procedures, 3rd edition, Williams
& Wilkins, Baltimore, p. 149, c. 1973 2. Do not allow the slides to dry out at any point during your staining
RT procedure.
26503-01 Sudan IV-Isopropanol Solution 500 ml
RT
26503-02 (or) Oil Red O-Isopropanol Solution 250 ml 3. Increase your staining time in Hematoxylin for tissues that have been
RT
26503-03 (or) Sudam III-Isopropanol Solution 250 ml in fixative longer than normal.
RT
26503-04 Mayer Hematoxylin 500 ml 4. Increase your staining time by at least 1⁄3 for autopsy tissues.
OR 5. Do not agitate the slides if you are using Ammonia water to Blue. The
RT
26503-05 Erhlich’s Hematoxylin, Diluted 500 ml tissues are more susceptible to washing off if you agitate the slides.
RT
26503-06 Sodium Phosphate, 1%, Aqueous 500 ml
6. Check the pH of the Hematoxylin daily.
® Oil Red in Propylene Glycol Method
Fat Stain results:
Fat ..............................................................................................Red
Nuclei ........................................................................................Blue TECHNICAL TIP
REFERENCES: To eliminate section contamination during the staining procedure
T AFIP Manual of Histologic Staining Methods, Ed. L. Luna, 3rd ed., please refer to:
New York, McGraw-Hill Publications, c. 1968, p. 140
T Mollenhauer, H.H. and Morre’, D.J. (1978). Contamination of
26504-01 Oil Red O Solution 500 ml thin sections, cause and elimination. Proc. 9th Int. Cong.
26504-02 Mayer Hematoxylin 500 ml Electron. Microsc., Vol.II, p.78
OR
RT 26504-2A Harris Hematoxylene 500 ml T Mollenhauer, H.H. (1986b). Stain contamination and embed-
RT 26504-03 Propylene Glycol, 85%, Aqueous 500 ml ding in electron microscopy. Proc. 44th Ann. Meet. EMSA,
RT 26504-04 Hydrochloric Acid, 5% 500 ml p.50. San Francisco Press, San Francisco
RT 26504-05 Ammonia Water, 0.3% 500 ml T Kuo, J., et al (1981). Forming and removing stain precipi-
RT 20350 Propylene Glycol, Absolute 450 ml tates on ultrathin sections. Stain Technol., 56:199
® Nile Blue A Stain
Lipid stain. Stain results:
Lipofuscins ..............................................Unstained – Natural Yellow TECHNICAL TIP
Melanin’s..................................................................................Green
RT 26511-01 Nile Blue A Staining Solution 500 ml Stability Of Special Staining Solutions
RT 26511-02 Sulfuric Acid, 1% Aqueous 500 ml General Guidelines Concerning Solutions
1. Check stock solutions regularly for signs of deterioration.
® Pearse’s Method for Phospholipids 2. All solutions should be dated and initialed by the person
For the staining of phospholipids, early lipofuchsin, etc. who prepared the solution.
Stain results: 3. Use caution to prevent cross solution contamination.
Phospholipids: ............................................................................Blue 4. Use distilled or double distilled water to prepare solutions.
Nuclei and Nucleoli: ....................................................................Red 5. Use reagent grade chemicals.
Early lipofuchsin, eosinophil granules, keratin, 6. Use dyes which are certified .
keratohyalin, human elastic tissues: ............................Blue to Purple 7. Keep solutions in well stoppered bottles at all times.
REFERENCES: 8. Refrigerated solutions should be poured into the staining jar, and
T Pearse, A. G.E., J. Pathl. Bact., 70:554-557, 1995 the bottled solution returned to the refrigerator before it warms to
room temperature.
T Luna, L.G. (ed), Manual of Histologic Staining Methods of the
9. Return all staining solutions to shelves soon after use to
Armed Forces Institute of Pathology, 3rd Ed., McGraw-Hill,
prevent mix-up.
c. 1968, p. 148.
10. Always use clean glassware.
RT 26516-01 Luxol Fast Blue MBS Solution, 0.1% 500 ml 11. Make sure that balance, pH meter, etc., are in proper working
RT 26516-02 Lithium Carbonate, 0.05% Aqueous 500 ml order.
RT 26516-03 Neutral Red Solution, 1%, Aqueous 250 ml

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 487
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec14_466-491_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 7:18 PM Page 488

SECTION 14 Histology and Light Microscopy

STAINING CHEMICALS AND PREPARED SOLUTIONS
® Prepared Staining Kits For Histology And Pathology (cont.)
I. MINERAL AND PIGMENT STAINS
® Rhodanine Method for Copper ® Hall’s Method for Bilirubin
Mineral and Pigment stain. Stain results:
Stain results: Biliverdin: ................................................................................Green
Copper ........................................................Bright Red to Red Yellow Collagen:......................................................................................Red
Nuclei ................................................................................Light Blue Muscle:....................................................................................Yellow
REFERENCES: REFERENCES:
T Sheehan and Hrapchack, Theory and Practice of Histotechnology. T Hall, M.J., Amer. J. Clin., 34:313 –316, 1960
St. Louis, The Mosby Company 1980 p. 230. T Luna, L.G., (ed), Manual of Histologic Staining Methods of the
RT 26602-01 Rhodanine Saturated Solution 100 ml AFIP, 3rd Ed. McGraw-Hill, N.Y., p. 174, c. 1968
RT
26602-02 Mayer’s Hematoxylin 500 ml RT 26611-01 Fouchet’s Reagent Refrigerated! 250 ml
RT
26602-03 Sodium Borate, 5% Aqueous 500 ml RT 26611-02 Van Gieson Solution 500 ml

® Johnson’s Method for Iron - ® Prussian Blue Method for Hemosiderin

(Microincineration) For the staining of deposits of hemosiderin.
Mineral and Pigment stain. Stain results:
Hemosiderin: ................................................................Blue or Green
Stain results: Nuclei: ........................................................................................Red
Iron Oxide ..................................................................................Blue Background:................................................................................Pink
REFERENCES: REFERENCES:
T Fenton R.H., Johnson, F.B., and Zimmerman, L.E., J. Histo-chem. T Perls, M., Virchow’s Arch. F. Path. Anat., 39:42-48, 1867
Cytochem., 12:153-155, 1964.
T Highman, B., Arch. Path., 33:937-938, 1942
T Luna, L.G., (ed.), Manual of Histologic Staining Methods of the
AFIP, 3rd edition, McGraw-Hill, NY, p.181, c 1968. T Lillie, R.D. Histopathologic Technic and Practical Histo-chemistry,
3rd Ed. McGraw-Hill, N.Y., 1965
RT 26603-01 Potassium Ferrocyanide Sol, 5% 500 ml
T Clark, G., (ed), Staining Procedures 3rd Ed., Williams & Wilkins,
RT 26603-02 Hydrochloric Acid, 5% 500 ml
Baltimore, p. 157, c. 1973
® Lillie’s Method for Iron RT 26613-01 Potassium Ferrocyanide, 2%, Aqueous 500 ml
RT 26613-02 Hydrochloric Acid, 2% 500 ml
For the staining of ferric and ferrous iron. RT 26613-03 Safranin O, 0.2% 500 ml
Stain results: RT 26613-04 Acetic Acid, 1%, Aqueous 500 ml
Ferric Iron:............................................................Dark Prussian Blue
Ferrous Iron: ......................................................Dark Turnbull’s Blue
Background:........................................................................Light Red ® Gomori’s Methenamine Silver
REFERENCES: for Urate Crystals
T Lillie, R.D., Histopathologic Technic & Practical Histo-Chemistry, Urate crystals.
3rd Ed., McGraw-Hill, N.Y., p. 407, c.1965. Stain results:
Urate Crystals: ..........................................................................Black
T Luna, G., (ed) Manual of Histologic Staining Methods of the AFIP, Background: ............................................................................Green
3rd Ed., McGraw-Hill, N.Y., p. 182, c. 1968.
RT
26604-01 Potassium Ferrocyanide (For Ferric Iron) 50 g REFERENCES:
RT
26604-1A Potassium Ferricyanide (For Ferrous Iron) 50 g T Sheehan, Dezna C. and Hrapchak, Barbara B.: Theory and
RT
26604-02 Hydrochloric Acid, 0.5% 250 ml Practice of Histotechnology, 2nd Ed.
RT
RT
26604-03 Basic Fuchsin, 0.5% Solution 250 ml T The C.V. Mosby Company, St. Louis, p.225-226, c. 1980.
26604-04 Acetic Acid, 1%, Aqueous 500 ml RT 26613-04 Acetic Acid, 1%, Aqueous 500 ml
® Oil Red O Method for Lipofuscin RT 26614-01 Silver Nitrate, 5%, Aqueous 250 ml
RT 26614-02 Methenamine, 3%, Aqueous 500 ml
Pigment stain. RT 26614-03 Sodium Borate, 5%, Aqueous 500 ml
Stain results: RT 26614-04 Gold Chloride, 0.1% 250 ml
Lipofuscin ....................................................................................Red RT 26614-05 Sodium Thiosulfate, 3%, Aqueous 500 ml
Nuclei ........................................................................................Blue
RT 26614-06 Light Green Working Solution 500 ml

REFERENCES:
T Luna, L.G., (ED.), manual of Histologic Staining Methods of the AFIP,
3rd Edition. The AFIP, 3rd Edition, McGraw-Hill, NY, p 186, c 1968.
RT 26609-01 Oil Red O Solution, 0.5% 500 ml
RT 26609-02 Propylene Glycol, 85%, Aqueous 500 ml
RT 26609-03 Mayer’s Hematoxylin 500 ml

488 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec14_466-491_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 7:18 PM Page 489

Histology and Light Microscopy SECTION 14

STAINING CHEMICALS AND PREPARED SOLUTIONS
® Prepared Staining Kits For Histology And Pathology (cont.)
J. NEUROLOGICAL TISSUE STAINS ® Woelcker’s Method for Myelin Sheath
Stain for myelin sheath, glial cells and nucleoli of neurons
Method for Supporting Elements Stain results:
Glial Cells, Nucleoli of neurons: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Black
® Ptah Method for Central Nervous Tissue Myelin sheath: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Blue
For staining microglia, fibroglia, fibrin and coarse fibrils. Background: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Clear
Stain results:
Nuclei, Fibrin, Fibroglia, Microglia: ..............................................Blue REFERENCES
Elastic Fibrils, Coarse: ..........................................................Purplish T AFIP: Manual of Histological Staining Methods, 3rd ed., Ed. L.
REFERENCES: Luna: New York: McGraw Hill Publications, c. 1968, p. 206.
RT 26684-01 Ferric Ammonium Sulfate, 2.5% Aqueous 500 ml
T AFIP Manual of Histologic Staining Techniques; (ed) G. Luna, 3rd RT 26684-02 Alcoholic Hematoxylin Stock Solution, 10% 500 ml
Ed. McGraw-Hill Publications, c. 1968, p. 199 RT 26684-03 Lithium Carbonate Solution, Saturated Aqueous 500 ml
RT 26658-01 Potassium Permanganate, 1%, Aqueous 500 ml
RT 26658-02 Phosphotungstic Acid Hematoxylin (Ptah) 500 ml Methods for Nerve Fibers and Nerve Endings
RT 26658-0 Oxalic Acid, 5%, Aqueous 500 ml ® Bodian’s Protargol Method
RT 26658-04 Lugol’s Iodine Solution 500 ml
RT 26658-05 Russel’s Modified Zenker’s Fluid 500 ml For neurological tissue stains: Nerve fiber and nerve endings.
Stain results:
Nerve Fibers, Nuclei ..................................................................Black
Methods for Nerve Cells, NISSL, Granules, Myelinin, Muscle, Erythrocytes, Lissamine
Negri Bodies, and Chromatolysis Fast Red Counterstain..................................................................Red
Background-Lissamine Fast Red Counterstain ........................Yellow
® Vogt’s Method for Nerve Cell Products Background-Aniline Blue Counterstain ........................................Blue
Stain results:
Nissl Substance: ..........................................................Intense Purple REFERENCES:
Nuclei: ....................................................................................Purple T Luna, L.G.,(ed), Manual of Histologic Staining Methods of the
Background: ..............................................................................Clear AFIP 3rd Edition, McGraw-Hill, NY, c 1968, p.195.
REFERENCES: T Clark, G., (ed.). Staining Procedures, 3rd Edition, Williams &
Wilkens Co., Baltimore, c. 1973, 98.
T AFIP, Manual of Histological Staining Methods, 3rd Ed., Ed. L.
RT 26693-01 Protargol Solution, 1% Aqueous 500 ml
Luna: New York: McGraw-Hill Publications, c. 1968, p. 212 RT 26693-02 Cooper Shot 50 g
RT 26671-01 Cresyl Violet Acetate, 2%, Aqueous 100 ml RT 26693-03 Gold Chloride, 1% Aqueous 250 ml
RT 26671-02 Acetate Buffer 500 ml RT 26693-04 Aniline Blue Solution, or 500 ml
RT 26671-1A Cresyl Violet Acetate Working Solution 250 ml RT 26693-05 Lissamine Fast Red Solution 500 ml
RT 26693-06 Oxalic Acid, 2% Aqueous 250 ml
26693-07 Sodium Thiosulfate, 5% Aqueou 500 ml
Methods for Myelin Sheaths RT

RT 26693-08 Phosphomolybdic Acid, 1% Aqu. 500 ml

® Kluver-Barrera Method for Myelin RT
RT
26693-09
26693-10
Artrazine Solution, 1.5%
Hydraquinone Reducing Solution
500 ml
250 ml
and Nerve Calls
Relation of nerve cells to neutroglia, etc. ® Hirano-Zimmerman Method
Stain results: for Nerve Cells and Fibers (1962)
Myelin, including phospholipids: ..........................Blue to Green cells For the staining of nerofibrils, dendrites, axis cylinders,
Cells and Cell products: ................................................Pink to Violet
senile plaques, etc.
REFERENCES: Stain results:
T Kluver, H., and Barrera, E.: A method for the combined staining Nucleolus and nuclear membrane:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Black
of cells and fibers in the nervous system. J. Nueropath. Exp. Neurofibrils, dendrites and axis cylinders: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Black
Neurol. 12:400 – 403, 1953 Cytoplasm of astrocytes and the cytoplasmic
T AFIP, Lab Methods in Histotechnology, ed. Edna B. Prophet, Bob membranes of macrophages: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gray
Mills. Jacquelyn B. Arrmyl, Leslie H. Sobin, M.D. Wash, D.C. Senile plaques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Black
American Registry of Pathology, c. 1992, p. 94-95.
RT 26681-01 Luxol Fast Blue MBS Solution, 0.1% 250 ml
REFERENCES:
RT 26681-02 Cresyl Violet Acetate Solution, 0.1%, Aqueous 250 ml T AFIP Manual of Histological Staining Methods, 3rd ed., Ed.
RT 26681-03 Acetic Acid, 10%, Aqueous 250 ml L.Luna: New York: McGraw-Hill Pub., c 1968, p. 198
RT 26681-04 Lithium Carbonate Solution, 0.05%, Aqueous 250 ml T Hirano, A. and Zimmerman, H.M., Arch. Neurol., 6:114-122, 1962
RT 26698-01 Silver Nitrate, 10% Aqueous 250 ml
RT 26698-02 Ammonia Water, 0.1% 500 ml
RT 26698-03 Formalin Solution, 50% 500 ml
RT 26698-04 Gold Chloride, 0.05% Aqueous 500 ml
RT 26698-05 Sodium Thiosulfate, 5% Aqueous 500 ml

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 489
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec14_466-491_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 7:18 PM Page 490

SECTION 14 Histology and Light Microscopy

STAINING CHEMICALS AND PREPARED SOLUTIONS
® Prepared Staining Kits For Histology And Pathology (cont.)
K. NUCLEAR STAINS
® Eosin-Phloxine Counterstain
Hematoxylin Method RT 26763-01 Eosin Y Stock Solution, 1% Aqueous 500 ml
® Ehrlich’s Hematoxylin RT
RT
26763-02
26763-03
Phloxine B Stock Solution, 1% Aqueous
Eosin-Phloxine Solution, Alcoholic
500 ml
500 ml
Mallory (1938); Ehrlich (1886)
Nuclei Nuclear Stains – Others
REFERENCES: ® Wolbach’s Giemsa Method
T Ehrlich, P., Biol. Centralbl., 6:214, 1886
Wolbach, Todd, and Palfrey (1922)
T Mallory, F.B., Pathological Technique, W.B. Saunders Co
Philadelphia, p 73, 1938 For the staining of : nuclei, collagen, riskettsia and bacteria.
Stain Results:
T Clark G., (ed.) Staining Procedures, 3rd edition, Williams &
Nuclei, Bacteria:..........................................................................Blue
Wilkins, Baltimore, c. 1973, pp 33-34
Rickettsia:................................................................................Purple
Luna, L.G., (Ed.), Manual of Histologic Staining Methods of the Collagen, other tissue elements:......................................Pink to rose
AFIP, 3rd ed, McGraw-Hill, NY, pp35 and 38, c 1968
RT 26753-01 Ehrlich’s Hematoxylin Solution 500 ml
REFERENCES:
RT 26753-02 Acid Alcohol, 1% 500 ml T Wolbach, S.B., Todd, J.L., and Paltrey, F.W., The Etiology of
RT 26753-03 Sodium Acetate, 1% Aqueous 500 ml Pathology Typhus, Harvard University Press, Cambridge, MA, p.
RT 26753-3A Ammonium Water, 0.3% 500 ml 13-14, c. 1922
RT 26753-3B Lithium Carbonate, Saturated Aqueous 500 ml T Luna, L.G., (ed). Manual of Histologic Staining Methods od the
AFIP, 3rd edition. McGraw-Hill, NY, p. 119, c. 1968
® Harris Hematoxylin (1900) RT 26773-01 Giemsa Stock Solution, 250 ml
Nuclei RT 26773-1A Giemsa Working Solution 500 ml
RT 26773-02 Rosin Alcohol Stock Solution, 10%, 250 ml
RT 26754-01 Harris Hematoxylin Solution 500 ml
RT 26773-2A Rosin Alcohol Working Solution 500 ml
RT 26754-1A Harris’ Hematoxylin without Mecury 500 ml
RT 26773-03 Lugol’s Iodine, 500 ml
RT 26754-03 Acid Alcohol, 1% 500 ml
RT 26773-3A Gram’s Iodine 500 ml
RT 26754-04 Sodium Acetate Solution, 1% Aqueous 500 ml
RT 26754-4A Ammonia Water, 0.3% 500 ml RT 26773-04 Sodium Thiosulfate, 5% Aqueous 500 ml
RT 26754-4B Lithium Carbonate, Sat’d, Aqueous 500 ml
® Lillie’s Method for Nucleic Acids (1965)
® Weigert’s Iron Hematoxylin Stain: Nuclear chromatin, and chromatin of plasmodia, etc.
with Methachromic Dyes Stain Results: Cells:
For Nuclear stain. Nuclear chromatin ....................................................Deep red-purple
Stain results: Cytoplasm: ......................................................................Light Green
The chromatin of plasmodia, sarcosporidia toxoplasmata
Nuclei........................................................................................Black
and histoplasmata................................................................Pale Red
Cytoplasm ........................................................................Gray-Green
Mucus, Cartilage and ........................Yellowish Brown, Deep Red or REFERENCES:
Mast Cell Granules ....................Orange-Red depending on dye used T Lillie, R.D., Histopathologic Technic and Practical Histochemistry,
3rd ed, McGraw-Hill, NY, pp 149-150, c. 1965
REFERENCES:
T Luna, L.G., (ed), Manual of Histologic Staining Methods of the
T Weigert, K., Z. Wissen. Mikro., 21:1-5, 1904
AFIP, 3rd ed. McGraw-Hill, NY, p. 131, c. 1968.
T Lillie, R.D., Histopathologic Technical and Practical
Histochemistry, 3rd edition, McGraw-Hill, NY, 1965 0-4˚C 26774-01 Schiff’s Reagent 500 ml
RT 26774-02 Hydrochloric Acid, 1N 500 ml
T Clark, G., (ed.), Staining Procedures, 3rd Edition, Williams & RT 26774-03 Sodium Bisulfite Solution 0.05M, 500 ml
Wilkins, Baltimore, p.40, c 1973. Aqueous
RT 26758-01 Weigert’s Iron Hematoxylin, Sol A 500 ml RT 26774-04 Fast Green FCF Solution, 0.01% 500 ml
RT 26758-02 Weigert’s Iron Hematoxylin, Sol B 500 ml
RT 26758-03 Fast Green FCF Solution, 0.02% 500 ml
RT 26758-04 Bismark BrownY Solution, 0.1%, 500 ml ® Taft’s Method for Nucleic Acid (1951)
RT 26758-05 Safranin O, 0.1% 500 ml Stain DNA & RNA
RT 26758-06 Acetic Acid, 1% Aqueous 500 ml Stain Results:
DNA, Deoxryibonucleic Acid: ............................................Blue Green
Counterstains for Hematoxylin RNA, Ribonucleic Acid: ......................................................Bright Red
REFERENCES:
® Eosin Y
T Taft, E.B., Stain Tech., 26:205-212, 1951
RT 26762-0 Eosin Y Staining Solution, 1%, Alcoholic 500 ml
RT 26762-1A Eosin Y Staining Solution, 1% Aqueous 500 ml
RT 26777-01 Methyl Green – Pyronin Solution 500 ml
RT 26777-02 Differentiating Solution 500 ml

490 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec14_466-491_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 7:18 PM Page 491

Histology and Light Microscopy SECTION 14

STAINING CHEMICALS AND PREPARED SOLUTIONS
® Prepared Staining Kits For Histology And Pathology (cont.)
L. PAPANICOLAOU STAINS ® Relative Aciddophilia Stain
Stain results: The least acidophilic elements stained in the phloxine
® Papanicolaou Stain for Membrane Filters control slide lose the red color after 2 minutes in the tartrazine solution.
Stain results: The most acidophilic retain the phloxine after 20 minutes in the tartrazine.
Nuclei ................................................................Deep Blue to Purple
REFERENCES:
REFERENCES: T Lendrum, A.C, J. Path. Bact., 59:399-404, 1947
T Gill, G.W., ActaCytol., 18:300-311, 1974 T Clark, G., (ed.), Staining Procedures, 3rd Edition, Williams &
T Diagnostic Cytology by Membrane Filter, Application Bulletin 100, Wilkins, Baltimore, p. 163, c. 1973.
Gelman Instrument Co., Ann Arbor, Michigan, 1978 RT 26901-01 Phloxine B Staining Solution 500 ml
RT 26801-01 Gill’s Hematoxylin No 1 500 ml RT 26901-02 Tartrazine Saturated Sol. In Cellosolve 500 ml
RT 26801-02 Hydrochloric Acid, 0.05% 500 ml RT 26901-03 n-Butyl Alcohol 450 ml
RT 26801-03 Scott’s Water Solution 500 ml
RT
RT
26801-04
26801-05
Modified Orange G Staining Sol.
Modified EA Staining Solution
500 ml
500 ml
® Leukocyte Alkaline Phosphatase
Phosphatase stain.
M. GENERAL AND REFERENCES:
T Williams, W.J., Beutler, E., Erslev, A.J. and Rundles, R.W.,
MISCELLANEOUS STAINS Hematology, 2nd ed., McGraw-Hill, NY, C. 1977, p 1628-1629
T Kaplow, L.S., AM. J. Clin. Pathol., 39:439, 1693
® Periodic Acid Leucofuchsin Method – T Kaplow, L.S. and Burstone, M.S. Nature, 200:690, 1963
(PAS) RT 26913-01 Buffered Acetone Fixative 500 ml
For General tissue stain. Stain results: RT 26913-02 Naphthol AS-BI Phosphate 100 mg
Nuclei ..........................................................................Black on Blue RT 26913-03 Dimethyl Formamide 25 ml
RT 26913-04 Fast Red Violet Salt LB, or 100 mg
Cytoplasm ..Gray, Yellow or Orange (depending on the counter stain) RT 26913-05 Fast Violet B Salts 100 mg
Collagen ..............Pink (Orange if Picric Acid is used as counterstain) RT 26913-06 Propanediol Buffer 100 ml
Reticulum ................Purplish Red (Orange red if Picric acid is used) RT 26913-07 Hematoxylin Counter Stain 500 ml
Glycogen- ..............................................................Dark Purplish Red
Epithelial mucin ..................................................Red-Purple to Violet
® AB/PAS/CG Stain
Filbrin- ......................Pink (Pink to violet if the Weigert Fibrin variant Adenohypophyseal stain. Stain results:
..............................................................was used as a counterstain) ACTH/MSH Cells ..................................Purple, Red and Orange- Red
TSH Cells ....................................................Light to dark Purple-Blue
REFERENCES: Gonadotropin Cells..............Intense Red, Blue-purple, Blue-turquoise
T Clark, G.: Staining Procedures, Williams & Wilkins Co., Baltimore, GH Cells..................................................................................Orange
3rd Ed., c. 1973, p.156. REFERENCES:
RT 26853-01 Schiff’s Reagent 500 ml T McManus, J.F.A. and Mowry, R.W., Staining Methods, Histologic
RT 26853-02 Periodic Acid, 1%, Aqueous 500 ml and Histochemical, P.B. Hoeber, NY, 1960
RT 26853-03 Sodium Bisulfite, 0.05M, Aque 500 ml T Clark, G., (ED.), staining Procedures, 3rd Edition, Williams &
RT 26853-04 Mayer’s acid Hemalum Sol., or 500 ml Wilkins, Baltimore, p. 166, c 1973.
RT 26853-05 Weigert’s Iron Hematoxylin A 500 ml
RT 26920-01 Alcian Blue 8GX Solution 1%, pH 2.6-3.0 500 ml
RT 26853-06 Weigert’s Iron Hematoxylin B 500 ml
RT 26920-02 Sodium Carbonate, 0.3% Aque 500 ml
RT 26853-07 Picric Acid, Saturated, Aque, 500 ml
RT 26920-03 Periodic Acid, 1% Aqueous 500 ml
RT 26853-08 Orange G Solution, 1% 500 ml
RT 26920-04 Schiff’s Reagent 500 ml
RT 26920-05 Phophomolybdic Acid/Orange G Sol. 500 ml

For ImmunoGold Reagents...

See Section 2, pages 72-90
Including not only the more commonly known reagents for EM and LM but, as
well, a newly introduced line of products such as Silver Enhancement specifically
for EM, Ultra-Small Fab fragments, Blocking Solutions, and even a line of donkey
gold conjugates.

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 491
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec14_492-517_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 8:37 PM Page 492

SECTION 14 Histology and Light Microscopy

® Embedding Media
® Paramat and Paramat Extra
Paramat is the original British blend of paraffin wax and plastic polymers and it has been used in
histology labs throughout the world for over 20 years. It has been found that when plastic
polymers are added to the paraffin the elasticity of the final block is greater as compared with
paraffin alone. As well the mixture offers improved tissue penetration, easier ribboning of sections,
reduced tendency to crumble, and improved overall results with fibrous tissue.
A recent development to Paramat is the addition of a very small amount of dimethyl sulfoxide (DMSO) which produces PARAMAT EXTRA. This formulation
offers additional advantages, such as faster penetration of the tissue with a more homogeneous matrix to support the specimen.
TECHNICAL INFORMATION
T Appearance: Milky-white, T Solubility in Xylene (@ 20°C/ 1g T Melting Point: 56-58°C. T Free acid content: Max. 0.01%.
pastilles. in 50ml): Clear solution within T Solidification Point: 58-56°C. T Block Structure: No mottling, no
T Crystalline Structure under the max. 16 hrs. T Tears and Vascuoles: None. shrinking.
microscope: Needles & Platelets. T Cutting results for 4mm T Adhesion of sections Very good; T Block Solidification (Room
T Effect of heating (@ 60°C/ 100g): sections: Over 75% usable protein, to microscope slides: Temperature): About 2 hrs.
Clear melt within max. 16 hrs. single; over 65% usable serial. glycerol etc. is not required to T DMSO content (Paramat Extra-
T Solubility in Xylene (section): hold the section in place. only): Less than 0.1%.
Max. 45 sec.
RT 19286-01 Paramat 1 kilo RT 19287-01 Paramat Extra 1 kilo
RT 19286-10 Paramat 10 kilo RT 19287-10 Paramat Extra 10 kilo

® Tissue-Tek® V.I.P.™ ® Paraplast Embedding Medium

Sakura Finetek - High-quality paraffin for
processing and embedding. Quality prepared ® Paraplast X-tra
wax - allows optimal sample preparation Handy pellet form melts rapidly. Melting
T Allows reduced compression in sections as Point 53-54°C. Cuts to 2 micron
thin as 2μ thickness with exceptional ribbon
T Melts at 56°C to protect samples from continuity. Extra compression
excessive heat resistance provides total support of
T Will not discolor or produce resin precipitate tissues.
T Small pellets for rapid melting in tissue RT 19214 Paraplast X-tra 1 kg
processors/embedding centers. RT 19215 Paraplast X-tra 8 kg
T Leaves no plasticizer residue to clog paraffin lines
SPECIFICATIONS:
® Paraplast Plus
Reduces infiltration time by one-third. Cuts to 2 micron thickness with
Medium Composition . . . . . . Purified paraffin and synthetic resin blend
excellent ribbon continuity. Convenient pellet form melts rapidly. Melting
Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Processing/Embedding point 56°C. Double filtered. No need for filtration before use.
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . None
RT 19216 Paraplast plus 1 kg
Melting Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56°C RT 19217 Paraplast plus 8 kg
High Temperature Stability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65°C
Solid Product Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pellets ® Paraplast Medium
Sectioning Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Down to 2μ Handy pellet form melts rapidly. Melting Point 56°C. Cuts to 4 micron
Cat.# Tissue-Tek Description Pack thickness with excellent ribbon continuity – no crumbling or cracking.
RT 62580-01 4005 Process/Embedding Wax 1 kg Double filtered. No need for filtration before use.
RT 62580-08 4005 Process/Embedding Wax 8x1 kg
RT 19218 Paraplast Medium 1 kg
RT 19219 Paraplast Medium 8 kg
® Carbowax, Polyethylene Glycol H(OCH2CH2)nOH CAS #25322-68-3
An embedding medium for microscopy and histochemistry.
Average Density Melting/Freezing
Cat.# Carbowax M.W. @ 20°C @ 60°C Range, °C Pack
RT 19700 PEG 200 viscous liquid 190-210 1.2390 1.0922 set to glass <-65 450ml
RT 19710 PEG 300 viscous liquid 285-315 1.1250 1.0928 -15 to -8 450ml
RT 19720 PEG 400 viscous liquid 380-420 1.1254 1.0930 4 to 8 450ml
RT 19730 PEG 600 viscous liquid 570-630 1.1257 1.0930 20 to 25 450ml
RT 19740 PEG 1000 Waxy 950-1050 — 1.0926 37 to 40 1 kilo
RT 19750 PEG 1450 Waxy 1300-1600 — 1.0919 43 to 46 1 kilo
RT 19760 PEG 3350 Waxy 3000-3700 — 1.0926 54 to 58 1 kilo
RT 19770 PEG 8000 Flakes 7000-9000 — 1.0845 60 to 63 1 kilo
Gao, K.X., (1993). Polyethylene Glycol as an Embedment for Microscopy and Histochemistry. CRC Press; ISBN# 0-8493-4323-2.

492 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec14_492-517_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 8:37 PM Page 493

Histology and Light Microscopy SECTION 14

 Peel Away Paraffin Embedding Wax  Para/Gard™

A New low melting point A paraffin repellent for countertops as well as equipment.
polymer paraffin is introduced Just spray and wipe away. No more paraffin build up
in the Peel-A-Way line for around your work area. Para/Gard™ is a pleasant smelling,
routine Histology work. non-toxic spray which is safe for use on metal, wood, and
plastic surfaces. Comes in a 4 oz. pump bottle.
RT 64140-01 Para/Gard 4 oz.
 This new paraffin formulation is more translucent and allows RT 64140-06 Para/Gard 6x4 oz./cs
for small dermatological and biopsy specimens to be seen and
sectioned easier.  Tissue Freezing Medium; TFM™
 Its lower polymer content is easier to remove with all cleaning An embedding matrix for frozen sections. TFM™ is an
agents. (deparaffinization) ultra pure formulation of water-soluble glycols and resins
 Its lower viscosity allows for complete infiltration using routine that provides a solid bond between the tissue and the
times established for most tissue processors. object holder with the following features:
These new paraffins are sold in 2.5 kg lined paper and re-closable  Less Ice Artifacts: TFM’s reduced water content
with a clip bag, and 4 bags per case. minimizes freeze-fracturing.
RT 19300-01 Melting Point 52 – 54ºC 2.5 kg  Less Curling: TFM allows you to pick up flat serial
RT 19300 Melting Point 52 – 54ºC 4x2.5 kg sections with ease.
RT 19302-01 Melting Point 56 – 58ºC 2.5 kg  Freezes Faster: TFM freezes very fast and offers
RT 19302 Melting Point 56 – 58ºC 4x2.5 kg better turn-around time.
RT 19304-01 Melting Point 62 – 64ºC 2.5 kg  Completely water soluble: TFM reduces tissue dislodging.
RT 19304 Melting Point 62 – 64ºC 4x2.5 kg
 Now available in 5 colors: clear, yellow, green, red and blue.
Peel away embedding molds see page 554 
RT 72592 Tissue Freezing Medium, Clear 4 oz
RT 72593 Tissue Freezing Medium, Clear 12x4 oz
RT 72592-Y
 Polyester Wax RT 72593-Y
Tissue Freezing Medium, Yellow
Tissue Freezing Medium, Yellow
4 oz
4x4 oz
A synthetic polyester wax with RT 72592-G Tissue Freezing Medium, Green 4 oz
a very low melting point RT 72593-G Tissue Freezing Medium, Green 4x4 oz
(37°C). Invented by Dr. H.F. RT
72592-R Tissue Freezing Medium, Red 4 oz
Steedman, as a ribboning
RT 72593-R Tissue Freezing Medium, Red 4x4 oz
RT 72592-B Tissue Freezing Medium, Blue 4 oz
embedding medium. Its main RT 72593-B Tissue Freezing Medium, Blue 4x4 oz
advantage over paraffin and ester waxes is its low melting point, which
reduces tissue hardening, shrinkage, and eliminates the need for
infiltration ovens.
 Tissue-Tek® O.C.T. Compound
Sakura Finetek - This is a well known water soluble glycol’s
The wax is soluble in most organic solvents, including alcohol, ethers, and resins compound that provides an excellent specimen
esters, ketones and hydrocarbons. The wax is water tolerant, almost matrix for cryostat sectioning at temperatures of -10°C and
opaque, and sections easily. No electrification of ribbons occurs during below. It leaves no residue during the staining procedure.
sectioning. Sections of 2 microns and more may be cut at room Cat.# Tissue-Tek Description Pack
temperatures between 10 and 22°C. It is advantageous to keep RT 62550-01 4583 O.C.T. Compound 4 oz
the wax in its solid state prior to use. RT 62550-12 4583 O.C.T. Compound 12/cs
RT 19312 Polyester Wax 500 g
 Cryogenic-Gel
 Polyfin ™  It replaces the messy “runny” embedding media.
Polyfin is a mixture of highly refined  It’s easy to use.
paraffins and co-polymer alloys in a  Sticks to where you want it.
convenient wax pellet. This unique  Will not run – No waste.
formulation provides optimal tissue This gel is highly viscous, water-soluble embedding medium
support while maintaining exceptional for frozen sections that “stays put”. The gel is packaged in a
clarity. Our Polyfin™ has been pump-dispenser bottle that instantly dispenses the gel in any
institutionally tested and found to function flawlessly in pressure/vacuum desired position. The dispenser has a built-in “guillotine” that
fluid flow processors. Its low melting point (55°C) eliminates any tissue cleanly severs the gel from the pump spout and prevents any “stringy”
distortion caused by excessive heat during processing. In a recent study medium from pulling away when the bottle is removed. Simply dispense
conducted by a Medical Center Histologist, monitored by a CPA firm gel on a room temperature block-holder. Use cold heat extractor to form a
using standard blind protocols, POLYFIN™ clearly demonstrated the least base layer. Dispense additional gel. Place the tissue on top of gel. Use cold
compression of seven popular paraffins. heat extractor to freeze tissue and form block.
RT 19280-01 Polyfin Embedding Medium 1 kilo Cat.# Description Pack
RT 19280-08 Polyfin Embedding Medium 8x1 kilo 62806-01 Cryo-Gel™ 4.3oz each
RT 19280-15 Polyfin Embedding Medium 15 kilo 62806-06 Cryo-Gel™ 4.3oz 12/cs

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 493
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec14_492-517_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 8:37 PM Page 494

SECTION 14 Histology and Light Microscopy

® Tissue-Tek® NEUTRA-GUARD™ Aldehyde Control Systems

These products offer a safe, efficient and economical solution for the ® Neutra Pads™
control of aldehyde wastes and/or spills:
T Revolutionary grossing pad
T 4 unique products for that absorbs and neutralizes
fast, safe and efficient 10% formalin
aldehyde neutralization
T Eliminates exposure to T Significantly reduces the
potentially hazardous effects of noxious vapors
conditions T Unique pad design encapsu-
T It is a certified lates formalin and promotes
technology for treating neutralization
formalin waste T Exclusive plastic pad backing T Neutra-Pads™ come packaged:
T Complies with federal, prevents escape of harmful 10 pads per bag, 10 bags per
state, and local liquids; keep grossing area case, each pad measures 20.3
ordinances drier, cleaner and safer x 25.4 cm (8” x 10”)
® Neutralex™
Cat. # Tissue-Tek Description Pack
T CAL/EPA certified 63332-01 4295 Neutra-Pads™ 10/pk.
technology 63332-10 4295 Neutra-Pads™ 100/pk.
T Complete aldehyde
neutralization in 15 ® Neutra-Wipes™
minutes
T No drain-clogging T Rapidly absorbs and neutralizes
polymer by-products small formalin spills
T Final neutralization T Significantly reduces the
levels down to 10 ppm effects of
T No pH adjustment noxious vapors
T Easy to use: Pre-
T Perfect liner for tissue
measured pouches are
transporting trays
ready to use convenient
to store and will not leak T Ideal as a shelf liner in tissue
or freeze during the winter months. storage areas
T Neutralex® Starter Kit consists of: T Convenient pop-up dispensing
16 Neutralex® pre-measured pouches, each pouch neutralizes container provides fast
4 liters (1 gallon) of aldehyde accessibility to wipes
Aldehyde Test Kit consisting of 100 analytical test strips
9.5 L (2.5 gallon) Reaction Container T Neutra-Wipes™ Starter Pack T Four-Roll Packs consists of:
consists of: 4 rolls, 60 wipes per roll;
Cat. # Tissue-Tek Description Pack
T 1 dispenser Wipe size: 30.5 cm x 31.8 cm
63330-SK 4046 Neutralex™ Starter Kit each
63330-16 4047 Pre-measured Pouches 16/pk. 1 roll of Neutra-Wipes™ or (12” x 12.5”)
63330-10 4050 Aldehyde Test Kit 100/pk.
63330-25 4276 9.5 L Reaction Container each Cat. # Tissue-Tek Description Pack
63334-SP 4278 Starter Pack each
63334-04 4279 4-Roll Pack each
JB-4 Embedding and Mounting Chucks, See Specimen
Preparation, page 250 UUUUU ® Neutra-Form™
JB-4 Mounting Medium, See Chemicals section, T Fast, effective control agent
page 94 UUUUU for accidental aldehyde spills
T Diminishes harmful vapors
Histocryl Embedding Resin, See Embedding Media
Kits, page 95 UUUUU T Neutralizes hazardous
aldehydes
Tissue Tack Adhesive for JB-4, See Adhesives and T Neutra-Form™ Sets consist of:
Mountants, Chemicals section page 21 UUUUU 2 containers; each container
neutralizes larger spills of 10% formalin or 2% glutaraldehyde.
Cat. # Tissue-Tek Description Pack
63335-02 4304 Neutra-Form™ Set each

494 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec14_492-517_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 8:37 PM Page 495

Histology and Light Microscopy SECTION 14

 Histocryl Resin  JB-4™ Embedding Kit

Histocryl acrylic resin has been specially A water soluble embedding media which is based on Glycol
formulated for light microscopy. It is water Methacrylate (GMA) plastic embedding. It is intended for use in
clear, and because it is hydrophilic (polar) it preparing samples for high resolution microscopes (HRLM). The
permits the use of most routine staining catalyzed monomer acts as a dehydration and infiltration agent;
techniques without prior removal or etching. therefore, complete dehydration through 100% ethanol is not necessary
(although recommended for large or dense tissues). Conventional
paraffin sections have a greater degree of shrinkage and produce
RT 14390 Kit consists of: inadequate morphology when compared to JB-4.
500ml Histocryl resin
25gm Histocryl Catalyst FEATURES:
10ml Histocryl Accelerator Complete Kit  Thin sections (.5-2.0 micron) with excellent morphological
structure preservation.
 GMA, Water Soluble  Water-clear blocks; casts in 90 minutes max. at room temp.
Glycol Methacrylate embedding medium provides excellent preservation  Good lipid and enzyme retention when processing at low
(especially enzymatic autoradiographic studies). Good for E.M., L.M., and temperatures (4°C).
Histo. Leduc. & Bernard, (1967) J. Ultrastr. Res., 4, 196-99.  Removal of JB-4 resin prior to staining is not necessary.
RT 14200 Kit consists of:  Clearing agents such as xylene and chloroform are not needed.
450ml GMA  Higher clarity and contrast than with paraffin sections.
225ml n-Butylmethacrylate  Easy processing of difficult specimens such as calcified bone
15g Benzoyl Peroxide paste. Kit and delicate embryonic tissue.
 GMA/PEG References:
1. Hofman E.O. & Flores, T.R., High Resolution LM in Renal Path., Amer. J. of Clin.
Polyethylene Glycol - Glycol methacrylate mixture. A water miscible Path., 76:5 (1981)
embedding medium for cytochemical studies and enzyme localization 2. Beckstead, J.H., Blood, 57(6):1008 (1981)
when light and electron microscopy need to be correlated. 3. Brinn, N &Pickett, P., J. Histotech., 2(5):125-130 (1979)
Spaur, R.C. & Moriarty, G., (1977) J Histochem. Cytochem., 23:163. 4. Block, Matthew H., et al., Lab. Med., 13(5)(1982)
5. Helander, K.G., J. Microscopy, 132:223 (1983)
RT 14250 Kit consists of: 6. Cole, M.B., J. Microscopy, 127:139 (1982)
450ml Glycol methacrylate, GMA 7. Higuchi, S., et al., Stain Tech., 54(1):5-12 (1979)
225ml n-Butyl methacrylate 8. Van DeVeldt, S., Am. J. Clin. Path.,73:121 (1980)
50ml Ethylene glycol dimethacrylate 9. Horton, W.A., J. Histochem. Cytochem., 31:417 (1983)
15g Benzoyl Peroxide Paste 10. Tacha, D.E. & Richard, T.C.., J. Histotech., 4(2):59 (1981)
20ml Polyethylene Glycol 400 Kit
RT 14270-00 JB-4 Kit Consists of:
800 ml Solution A
 Immuno-Bed™ Embedding Resin 30 ml Solution B
 A low viscosity media for light microscopy and immuno- histo- 12 g Catalyst Kit
chemistry techniques. RT 14270-01 JB-4 Solution A only 800ml
 It allows for the penetration of large immunoglobulins through
RT 14270-04 JB-4 Solution B only 30ml
the plastic sections for demonstration of antigenic sites.
RT 14270-06 JB-4 Catalyst 12gm
J. Histochem, Cytochem., 35:595 (1987)
14260-00 Kit consists of:  JB-4 Plus™ Embedding Kit
800 ml Solution A
JB-4 Plus offers all of the same features as JB-4 with the
30 ml Solution B following additions:
12 g Catalyst
0-5˚C
14260-01 Immuno-Bed Solution A only 800 ml  It produces less of an exothermic reaction than JB4 which is
RT
14260-04 Immuno-Bed Solution B only 30 ml good for temperature sensitive tissues.
RT
14260-06 Immuno-Bed Catalyst only 12 g  It produces harder blocks which is ideal for dense samples,
such as bone.
RT 14272-00 JB-4 Plus Kit Consists of:
For all of our Methacrylate Embedding Kits 500 ml Solution A
15 ml Solution B
including our complete Technovit line see 8 g Benzoyl Peroxide Catalyst Kit
pages 94, 97, 98-100  RT 14272-01 JB-4 Plus Solution A only 500ml
RT 14272-04 JB-4 Plus Solution B only 15ml
RT 14272-06 JB-4 Plus Catalyst 8g

For all other Embedding Media Kits

see page 92-102 

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 495
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec14_492-517_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 8:37 PM Page 496

SECTION 14 Histology and Light Microscopy

 Feather™ Scalpel Blades Selection  3. Feather; Sterile MicroScalpels;
Stainless Steel
 1. Scalpel Handle with Blade; Disposable  Micro precision, ultra sharp,  Disposable.
Made by Feather. Sterile, stainless steel disposable scalpels with a handle. points.  Available in 3 angle styles: 15,
They are packed in aluminum foil, and are available in a variety of sizes.  Sure-grip aluminum or plastic 30 and 45°.
handle-color coded for easy  Comes in a carbonate plastic
angle identification. case.
 Sterilized by gamma irradiation.

Blade
Cat.# Description Thickness Qty
72045-15 Feather Micro Scalpel, 15°, Al Handle 0.1mm 5/bx
72045-30 Feather Micro Scalpel, 30°, Al Handle 0.1mm 5/bx
72045-45 Feather Micro Scalpel, 45°, Al Handle 0.1mm 5/bx
72046-15 Feather Micro Scalpel, 15°, Plastic Handle 0.1mm 5/bx
72046-30 Feather Micro Scalpel, 30°, Plastic Handle 0.1mm 5/bx
72046-45 Feather Micro Scalpel, 45°, Plastic Handle 0.1mm 5/bx
Cat.# Description Qty/Box
72042-10 DisposableScalpel Set #10 20/bx
72042-11 Disposable Scalpel Set #11 20/bx  4. Scalpel Handles/Feather
72042-12 Disposable Scalpel Set #12 20/bx  Handle #3; 100mm long, flat with corrugated grip. For use with
72042-15 Disposable Scalpel Set #15 20/bx scalpel blades #10, #11, #12 and #15.
72042-20 Disposable Scalpel Set #20 20/bx
72042-21 Disposable Scalpel Set #21 20/bx  Handle #4; 105mm long, flat with corrugated grip. For use with
72042-22 Disposable Scalpel Set #22 20/bx scalpel blades #20, #21, #22, #23, and #24.
72042-23 Disposable Scalpel Set #23 20/bx  Handle #7; 140mm long, slender, contoured with corrugations.
72042-24 Disposable Scalpel Set #24 20/bx For use with scalpel blades #10, #11, #12, and #15

 2. Scalpel Blades/Feather
Sterile, stainless steel surgical scalpel blades, wrapped individually. #7: 72040-07

#4: 72040-04

#3: 72040-03

Cat. # Description Qty.

72040-03 Scalpel Handle #3 each
72040-04 Scalpel Handle #4 each
72040-07 Scalpel Handle #7 each

 5. Microsurgical Knife - Premier Edge™

Made from tool steel wire. Sharpened to microsurgical quality. The
knife-edges are available in three different configurations: 45, 30 and
15 degrees angle. The handle is plastic and they come sterile and in a
24 23 22 21 20 15 12 11 10 blister pack individually, 6 blister packs to a box.

Cat.# Description Qty/Box

72044-10 Sterile Scalpel Blades #10 100/bx
72044-11 Sterile Scalpel Blades #11 100/bx
72044-12 Sterile Scalpel Blades #12 100/bx
72044-15 Sterile Scalpel Blades #15 100/bx
72044-20 Sterile Scalpel Blades #20 100/bx
72044-21 Sterile Scalpel Blades #21 100/bx Cat.# Description Blade Thickness Qty
72044-22 Sterile Scalpel Blades #22 100/bx 72047-15 Microsurgical Knife, 15° 0.11–0.19mm 6/bx
72044-23 Sterile Scalpel Blades #23 100/bx 72047-30 Microsurgical Knife, 30° 0.11–0.19mm 6/bx
72044-24 Sterile Scalpel Blades #24 100/bx 72047-45 Microsurgical Knife, 45° 0.11–0.19mm 6/bx

496 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec14_492-517_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 8:38 PM Page 497

Histology and Light Microscopy SECTION 14

 Disposable Mini Scalpel - Sterile  BD* Carbon Steel Scalpel Blade 60
Feather Disposable Mini Scalpels are made from heat-treated
® Made from surgical carbon
stainless steel. The blades are smaller than standard blades, come with steel, size 60 with convex
chemical resistant, slender plastic handle. Handle is 53⁄4" (145mm) long. cutting edge. The most
Available in three popular styles: #11, #14 and #15, and packaged in a useful in histology labs.
sterile pouch, 20 per box. ISO 14001 compliant, ISO 9001 certified and These scalpel blades are 23⁄8" (6cm) long and ribbed for extra rigidity.
ISO13485 certified. They are non-sterile and are wrapped individually. Bard-Parker brand.
72050-10 #60 Scalpel Blade (BD #371340) 150/cs

 BD* Disposable Blade Knife Handles

Cat. # Description Qty.

72041-11 Disposable Scalpel, Mini, #11 20/pk.
72041-14 Disposable Scalpel, Mini, #14 20/pk.
72041-15 Disposable Scalpel, Mini, #15 20/pk.

 Feather® Safeshield™
These strong, molded plastic handles provide a secure palm-fitting grip
Disposable Scalpel – Sterile for postmortem work, trimming light plaster casts, and similar forceful
Made from heat-treated stainless steel, these scalpels are excellent for cutting. Handle size #6 and #8 Bard-Parker* brand. Handles are sold
delicate precise procedures. They fit the hand comfortably and are separately from the interchangeable listed above.
designed with safety in mind. They reduce injury and transmitted Use blade sizes 10, 11, 12, 15 for handle size 5. Use blade sizes 20,
disease from contaminated blades. They feature a clear protective, 21, 22, 23 for handle size 6. Use blade size 60 for handle size 8
retractable shield and have a color coded button on the protective shield
Cat.# Size/Length Pack
which assists with blade size identification. 72040-05 #5/ 413⁄16" (12.4cm) each
Individually packaged, 10 per box. 72040-06 #6/ 53⁄16" (13.1cm) each
72040-08 #8/ 59⁄32" (13.4cm) each

 Graduated Scalpel Handle #3

This #3 scalpel handle comes with metric graduations.

72040-30 #3 Graduated Scalpel Handle each

 Scalpel Handles
Made from carbon steel for the blades below.
Cat. # Description Qty
72051-3 Scalpel Handle #3 1/pk
72051-4 Scalpel Handle #4 1/pk

 Scalpel Blades
Premiere® Blades are made from carbon
steel, individually foil wrapped and gamma
Cat. # Description Qty. radiation sterilized. They are exceptionally
72043-10 Feather® Safeshield™ Blade #10 10/pk. strong and relatively uniformity sharp, ideal
72043-11 Feather® Safeshield™ Blade #11 10/pk.
for routine laboratory dissecting, tissue
72043-14 Feather® Safeshield™ Blade #14 10/pk.
72043-15 Feather® Safeshield™ Blade #15 10/pk. mincing and where you do not need high
72043-15C Feather® Safeshield™ Blade #15C 10/pk. cost blades.
72043-20 Feather® Safeshield™ Blade #20 10/pk.
Cat. # Description Qty
72043-21 Feather® Safeshield™ Blade #21 10/pk. 72049-10 Premiere® Blade #10 100/pk
72043-22 Feather® Safeshield™ Blade #22 10/pk. 72049-11 Premiere® Blade #11 100/pk
72043-23 Feather® Safeshield™ Blade #23 10/pk. 72049-12 Premiere® Blade #12 100/pk
72043-24 Feather® Safeshield™ Blade #24 10/pk. 72049-15 Premiere® Blade #15 100/pk
72043-25 Feather® Safeshield™ Blade #25 10/pk. 72049-20 Premiere® Blade #20 100/pk
72049-21 Premiere® Blade #21 100/pk
72049-22 Premiere® Blade #22 100/pk
72049-23 Premiere® Blade #23 100/pk
72049-24 Premiere® Blade #24 100/pk
72049-25 Premiere® Blade #25 100/pk

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 497
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec14_492-517_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 8:38 PM Page 498

SECTION 14 Histology and Light Microscopy

 Tissue-Tek® Accu-Edge® Disposable Scalpel  Tissue-Tek® Accu-Edge® Trimming Knife
Handles and Disposable Blades

Sakura Finetek–These reusable handles and disposable blades are ideal

for surgical specimens and dissecting work. These sterile stainless
steel blades are available in size #61 and #62 and are approximately 2
inches long. The durable plastic handles are autoclavable.
Cat.# Tissue-Tek Description Pack
62566-01 4791 Scalpel Handle each Sakura Finetek - Extremely sharp and light weight. Designed for surgical
62566-61 4792 Scalpel Blades #61 20/pk grossing and autopsy procedures. Extremely sharp edge allows a wide
62566-62 4793 Scalpel Blades #62 20/pk
variety of sectioning and trimming tissue samples. Disposable blades
can be easily inserted into handle.
 Tissue-Tek® Accu-Edge® Semi-Disposable
Autopsy Knife System Cat.# Tissue-Tek Description Pack
Handles:
62560-01 4786 Short, Straight each
62560-04 4790 Long, Straight each
62560-10 4787 Short, Right Handed each
62560-14 4788 Short, Left Handed each
Disposable Blades:
62561-10 4785 Short Blade,
(130 mm L x 18mm W) 50/pk
62561-20 4789 Long Blade,
(260 mm L x 18 mm W) 50/pk

Sakura Finetek–These semi-disposable autopsy knives are made of  Tissue-Tek® Accu-Edge® Replacement
high quality stainless steel with autoclavable plastic handle which Blade Scissors
accommodates all three sizes of blades while maintaining optimal
balance and control.
Cat.# Tissue-Tek Description Pack
62572-01 4781 Autopsy Knife Handle each
62572-10 4782 Autopsy Blade, 100mm 5/pk
62572-17 4783 Autopsy Blade, 170mm 5/pk
62572-20 4784 Brain Blades 5/pk

 One Piece Scalpel Blade with Handle

An all metal, carbon steel scalpel with a black enamel handle. Blade Sakura Finetek–These Accu-Edge® replaceable blade scissors are sharp
length: 11⁄2”. Overall length: 6” (165 mm). and prevent cross contamination every time a scissor is used for tissue
Cat.# Description Pack processing. Blades are made from stainless steel and are autoclavable,
72048-01 Scalpel Blade with Handle each corrosion free and easily inserted and removed with the use of an
enclosed tool. Blades are available separately or as a pair. They are sold
 Disposable Scalpel Sets 5 pairs per package: sharp-sharp, sharp-blunt, blunt-blunt.
High quality carbon steel is mounted on plastic handle, individually foil Cat.# Tissue-Tek Description Pack
wrapped and sterilized by gamma irradiation. Packed 10 each /box. They 62570-01 4794 Replacement Blade Scissors each
are exceptionally strong and relatively uniformity sharp, ideal for routine 62570-05 4795 Blades, Sharp-Sharp 5/pk
laboratory dissecting, tissue mincing and where you do not need high 62570-06 4796 Blades, Sharp-Blunt 5/pk
cost blades 62570-07 4797 Blades, Blunt-Blunt 5/pk
Cat. # Description Qty
72052-10 Scalpel Handle Set #10 10/pk For more Forceps and Fine Tweezers see Tweezers
72052-11 Scalpel Handle Set #11 10/pk and Tools section page 756-852 
72052-15 Scalpel Handle Set #15 10/pk Dissecting Forceps and Needles see Tweezers and
72052-20 Scalpel Handle Set #20 10/pk
72052-22 Scalpel Handle Set #22 10/pk
Tools section pages 818-825 

498 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec14_492-517_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 8:38 PM Page 499

Histology and Light Microscopy SECTION 14

 Lighted Forceps and Scissors: Illuminated and Ergonomic
 Increases the visibility of the  Allows for accurate orientation of
specimen tissue and specimen
 Minimizers Floaters  Reduces embedding and prep time
77905-01 Lighted Forceps, 13CM Smooth Fine Tip kit
77905-02 Lighted Forceps, 15CM Smooth Fine Tip kit Scissors Forceps
77905-03 Lighted Forceps, 18CM Smooth Fine Tip kit
77905-04 Lighted Forceps, 14CM, Smooth, Fine Tip, Ergonomic Embedding Forceps kit See your samples and your embeddings in a whole new
77905-05 Lighted Forceps, 16CM Serrated Blunt Tip kit light! These lighted forceps ease identification and location
77905-06 Lighted Forceps, 20CM Serrated Blunt Tip kit of otherwise undetectable tissue fragments, while reducing
77905-07 Lighted Mayo Scissor 17CM Blunt/Blunt Tip kit embedding time. Increases the visibility of specimen allowing
77905-07 Lighted Surgical Scissor 17CM Blunt/Blunt Tip kit for more accurate work. Made of German stainless steel, are
(Each kit includes: one instrument, power pack & battery charger) submersible and light longevity approx. 20,000 hours.

 Halstead Mosquito Forceps

Stainless Steel hemostatic forceps with box lock joint
and serrated jaws. It measures: 5” (127mm) long.
72942-5S Halstead Mosquito Forceps, Straight each
72942-5C Halstead Mosquito Forceps, Curved each
72942-5S 72942-5C
 Baby Metzenbaum Scissors
Very delicate stainless steel scissors.
72943-5S Metzenbaum Scissors 51⁄2”, (146mm), Straight each
72943-5C Metzenbaum Scissors 51⁄2”, (146mm), Curved each
72943-7C Metzenbaum Scissors 7”, (178mm), Curved each

 Doyen Scissors 72943-5S 72943-5C

Stainless Steel Scissors with two heavy blunt points;

7” (178mm) long.
72944-7S Doyen Scissors, Straight each
72944-7C Doyen Scissors, Curved each

 Yasargil Bayonet Scissors 72944-7S 72944-7C

Delicate stainless steel scissors with a spring handle;

8” (203mm) long.
72936-8S Yasargil Bayonet Scissors, Straight each 72936-8C
72936-8C Yasargil Bayonet Scissors, Curved each
72936-8S

 Dissecting Scissors -
Operating Scissors
Made from stainless steel. They come in a variety of styles
and lengths:
S/B - One sharp point and one blunt point
72968-01 72964-02
S/S - Two sharp points
B/B - Two blunt points

72964-01 Scissors, Straight, 41⁄2”,B/B. each

72964-02 Scissors, Curved, 41⁄2”, S/B.. each
72964-03 Scissors, Curved, 41⁄2”, B/B.. each
72966-01 Scissors, Curved 51⁄2”, S/B. each
72966-02 Scissors, Straight, 51⁄2”, S/S. each 72966-02 72964-03
72966-03 Scissors, Curved, 51⁄2”, S/S.. each
72966-04 Scissors, Straight, 51⁄2”, B/B.. each
72966-05 Scissors, Curved, 51⁄2”, B/B.. each
72968-01 Scissors, Straight, 61⁄2”, S/B.. each
72968-02 Scissors, Curved, 61⁄2”, S/B.. each
72968-03 Scissors, Straight, 61⁄2”, S/S.. each
72968-04 Scissors, Curved, 61⁄2”, S/S.. each
72968-05 Scissors, Straight, 61⁄2”, B/B.. each
72968-06 Scissors, Curved, 61⁄2”, B/B.. each 72964-01 72966-03

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 499
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec14_492-517_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 8:38 PM Page 500

SECTION 14 Histology and Light Microscopy

 Steel Ruler  Stainless Steel Probes

Stainless steel ruler. 1 millimeter thick, 1 centimeter wide, 1 decimeter

long. Its volume is 1 cubic centimeter and its weight in grams is the
specific gravity. One edge is graduated in millimeters.
72909 Steel Ruler each

 Perfect Loop; Light Microscopy

These probes are scalpel sharp for fine probing. They are useful for
many applications, such as micro positioning, solder probing, and band
70940 inspection.
Using our perfect loop you can pick up your freshly cut thick sections 62125-10 Stainless Steel Probes 4/set
62125-11 Stainless Steel Probes #1 each
easily onto the grid mesh without creases. The outside diameter of the
62125-12 Stainless Steel Probes #2 each
loop is 7mm. 62125-13 Stainless Steel Probes #3 each
70940 LM set of handle &Loop set 62125-14 Stainless Steel Probes #4 each
70941 LM loop only each
70942
70943
LM loop only
LM handle
5/pk
each
 Mall Probe
For a more detailed description of the Perfect Loop
see page 260 

 Crucible Tongs
Stainless steel tongs with tapered tips which meet precisely when
63324-20
closed. Length: 91⁄2” (241mm).
6" long, Chrome plated with one blunt bent end and hexagonal
shape handle

Cat. # Description Qty

63324-20 Mall Probe, 6" L, each

 Probe with Eye

72906 Crucible Tongs each

 Seeker/Probe
Stainless steel, 5" long, 2mm diameter. Flat one end with eye.

Cat. # Description Qty

63324-30 Probe With Eye, 5" L each
63324-32 Probe With Eye, 6" L each
63324-33 Probe With Eye, 7" L each
63324-34 Probe With Eye, 8" L each
Stainless steel with a hexagonal handle.
 Single end probe which comes with one fine point curved tip.
 Double ended probe which comes with one end tapered to a
point and one end curved with a rounded tip.

72945-01 Single-End Seeker/Probe each

72945-02 Double-End Seeker/Probe each

500 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec14_492-517_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 8:38 PM Page 501

Histology and Light Microscopy SECTION 14

 Huber Probe  Disposable
Delta Spreaders
 Edgeless Design —
Soft, rounded corners
63324-10 won't tear agar.
Chrome Plated. 6" long, one blunt bent end, and one chisel finish on the  Even Pressure — Unique delta shape smoothly distributes media.
other end  Ripple Handle — Allows for easy and comfortable manipulation.
Cat. # Description Qty  Sterile — May be used right out of the box.
63324-10 Huber Probe 6" L  Measurements —
172mm x 37mm,
 Forceps Jar 4mm diameter.
Made of stainless steel
with wide base and Smooth spreading
polished finished. surface achieved with
manufacturing parting line
near top of head.

Cat. # Description Qty

70498-40 Purple, Delta Spreader 500/case

 Disposable L-Shaped Spreaders

Cat. # Description Qty
 Smooth Surface — Will not tear agar
63313-03 Forceps Jar, 3" Dia x 3" High each
63313-04 Forceps Jar, 4" Dia x 4" High each
or disrupt media layer.
63313-05 Forceps Jar, 3" Dia x 4" High each  ABS Plastic — Spreaders are durable
63313-06 Forceps Jar, 4" Dia x 5" High each and lightweight.
63313-07 Forceps Jar, 4" Dia x 8" High each
 Sterile — No flaming required.
 Measurements —
 Combination Probe Set 146mm x 38mm, 4mm diameter.
Probe set include two-way handle and four probe heads. These probe
heads (A, B, C, D) are easily screwed into the handle (H). This set is very
convenient for field work or on the move.
All packed in a handy plastic zippered case. Handle is 6.5 inch long.
Cat. # Description Qty
70498-45 Green, L Spreader 500/case

 Dissecting
T-Type Pins
Stainless steel, with T shapes head pin and pointed end.

63325-00

Cat. # Description Qty

63325-00 Combination Probe Set each

 Probe and Hook

63324-40
63307-60
Chrome plated, 6" long with pointed probe in one end and pointed sharp Cat. # Description Qty
curved hook on the other end 63307-60 Dissecting T-Type Pins, 6/pk
Cat. # Description Qty
63324-40 Probe and Hook, 6" L, each

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 501
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec14_492-517_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 8:38 PM Page 502

SECTION 14 Histology and Light Microscopy

 Bacti-Cinerator IV
Features:
 Sterilizes loops and needles safely and conveniently.
 Prevents infectious spatter and/or cross contamination.
 Safeguard laboratory personnel -no open flame -no hazardous gas.
 Ideal for use in anaerobic chambers.

The Baci-Cinerator IV sterilizes by infrared heat (Heater Element contains no asbestos) - organic material
is incinerated deep inside the ceramic tunnel. To use, simply insert loop or needle into the tunnel.
62420-10 Complete sterilization takes only 5 to 7 seconds at optimum sterilizing temperature of 1,500°F. There is
no need to wait for the loops or needles to turn red. Unit does not require oxygen so it can be used in
anaerobic chambers. Operates on 120 Volt, 60 Hz. UL approved.
Cat.# Description Qty/pk
62420-10 Bacti-Cinerator IV , 115 Volt each
62420-20 Bacti-Cinerator IV , 220 Volt each
62420-40 Bacti-Cinerator IV , 240 Volt each
62420-52 Replacement Switch each
62420-51 Replacement Bacti III Heater Element, 115V each
62420-53 Replacement Bacti III Heater Element, 220V each
62420-54 Replacement Bacti III Heater Element, 240V each
62420-55 Replacement Bacti IV Heater Element, 115V each
62420-56 Replacement Bacti IV Heater Element, 220V each
62420-57 Replacement Bacti IV Heater Element, 240V each

 Inoculating Loop/Needle  Inoculating Needle

Made from 26 gauge B&S platinum wire with 15% iridium to provide rigidity
with thinner wire for delicate work. Both ends are ground smooth.
72952-10 62432-01 Inoculating Needle, 70 mm each

 Inoculating Loops
72952-20

Nichrome wire. An 8” aluminum handle with a 3” nichrome wire,

25 gauge. Loop O.D. is 4mm; loop I.D. is 2.5 mm. Available with
a loop or a needle.
72952-10 Inoculating Loop 12/pk
72952-20 Inoculating Needle 12/pk

 Calibrated Loops Our high quality inoculating loops are made from platinum wire. The 15%
iridium adds necessary rigidity permitting thinner wire for delicate work.
The loop section is welded and smoothly finished to form a “perfect circle”.
Loop B&S Length
Cat.# Dia. mm Gauge mm Pack
62433-02 2 24(0.5106 mm) 45 each
62433-03 3 24 (0.5106 mm) 45 each
62433-05 5 24 (0.5106 mm) 45 each
62434-02 2 26 (0.4038 mm) 45 each
62434-03 3 26 (0.4038 mm) 45 each
62434-05 5 26 (0.4038 mm) 45 each
62435-02 2 28 (0.3206 mm) 45 each
The 0.01 ml loops are calibrated to A.P.H.A. Standards and are made 62435-03 3 28 (0.3206 mm) 45 each
from 19 gauge B&S platinum wire with 5% rhodium. The 0.001 ml 62436-03 3 24 (0.5106 mm) 70 each
loops is made from 26 gauge B&S platinum with 15% iridium. 62436-05 5 24 (0.5106 mm) 70 each
62437-02 2 26 (0.4038 mm) 70 each
Contained Loop 62437-03 3 26 (0.4038 mm) 70 each
Cat.# Volume Diameter Length Pack 62437-05 5 26 (0.4038 mm) 70 each
62430-10 0.01 ml 4 mm 25 mm each 62438-02 2 28 (0.3206 mm) 70 each
62430-20 0.01 ml 4 mm 70 mm each 62438-03 3 28 (0.3206 mm) 70 each
62430-30 0.001 ml 1.45 mm 70 mm each

502 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec14_492-517_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 8:38 PM Page 503

Histology and Light Microscopy SECTION 14

 BIOLOOP Disposable Incubation Loops and Needles

 Eliminate the need for flaming metal loops and exposure Ordering:
to airborne pathogens. Cat.# Description Qty/cs
 Precision molded from biological inert polymers. 62446-01 10μl Loop/Needle, Yellow, Individually 500/cs
Wrapped, 500/bag
 Three color coded designs: Blue - 1μl loop/needle
62446-02 10μl Loop/Needle, Yellow, 50 Bags of 10 500/cs
Natural - 10μl loop/1μl loop 62446-03 10μl Loop/Needle, Yellow, 50 Bags of 10 500/cs
Yellow - 10μl loop/needle 62447-01 10μl/1μl Natural, Individually Wrapped 500/cs
 Irradiation sterilized. 62447-02 10μl/1μl Natural, 10 Bags of 50 500/cs
 Available either individually wrapped or in zip seal bags. 62447-03 10μl/1μl Natural, 50 Bags of 10 500/cs

 Loop and Needle - Disposable

Made from Polystyrene
 Eliminates the need for flaming metal loops and  Problem-free inoculation with smooth loop
exposure to air-borne pathogens surface
 Cross contamination due to improper sterilization  Precision molded
is eliminated  Made from virgin raw material which complies
 Surface treated for enhanced droplet adhesion with USP class VI requirements
 Supplied sterile in easy-to-open packs  Calibration certificate available
of 10 or 25  Total length: 22.7cm
 Color coded for product identification
Cat.# 62448-25 62448-10 62449-50 62449-12 62450-50 62450-12
Description White Needle White Needle Blue Loop Blue Loop Yellow Loop Yellow Loop
Unit per pack/case 25/1000 10/1000 25/1000 10/1000 25/1000 10/1000
Total Volume N/A N/A 1 μl 1 μl 10 μl 10 μl

 Needle and Knife Interchangeable Handle

Made from stainless steel, pin-vise
type Handle, which accepts either dissecting needles or a knife.
Handle: 92 mm (35⁄8") L x 6 mm (1⁄4") diameter
Needle: available with straight or bent, 60 mm (21⁄2") long
Knife: spear type with single or double edge, 75 mm (3") long
Cat.# Description Qty/pk
72953-HD Handle each/pk
72953-10 Needle, Straight 36/pk
72953-11 Needle, Bent 36/pk
72953-20 Spear Shape Knife, Single Edge 36/pk
72953-21 Spear Shape Knife, Double Edge 36/pk

 Inoculating Loop and Needle Holders

Made from durable, heat resistant brass with a fiberglass insulating
sleeve over the gripping area. The threaded collet type collar holds
all wire gauge.
62440-06 Loop & Needle Holder 6 in. (152mm) each
62440-08 Loop & Needle Holder 8 in. (203mm) each

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 503
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec14_492-517_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 8:39 PM Page 504

SECTION 14 Histology and Light Microscopy

 The EMS Germinator 500 — The Germ Terminator™
Dry Sterilizer
The GERMINATOR 500™ is a convenient effective way to quickly decontaminate your micro-dissecting
instruments. No more need for messy chemicals or open flames in the lab, and the small footprint saves
bench space! Very effective
The GERMINATOR 500 is a simple, inexpensive way to quickly decontaminate your micro-dissecting
instruments between procedures. The unique stainless steel glass bead bath remains at a constant 500
degrees F, allowing you to insert the tips of your instruments whenever you wish to decontaminate them.
And it’s fast...most micro-dissecting instruments decontaminate within 15 seconds!
• The operating temperature for the unit is 500ºF 15º (233ºC)
• No messy chemicals and no need for open flames in the lab.
The unit measures 6.75'' x 5.25'' x 5.25'' (H x W x D) and the Stainless Steel Well measures: 2.0''
diameter x 4.0'' deep(ID). The unit only weighs 4.5lbs and it is available in 110 or 220 volt. (UL Listed)

The GERMINATOR 500 has the following features:

 Easy to use  Glass Beads: 1.5mm lead free glass balls
 Fast, effective decontamination  U.L. Listed
 Small footprint saves bench space  1 YEAR WARRANTY!
 Proven durable design  Modular Cord
 Perfect for micro-dissecting scissors and forceps  Exclusive Well Collar

66118-10 EMS Germinator 500™ 110 Volt each

66118-20 EMS Germinator 500™ 220 Volt each

 Glass Bead Sterilizers

These glass bead sterilizers are quick and
easy to use and they are compact and light
weight which makes them suitable for table
tops or workbenches. They are used to
sterilize instruments used in most laboratories
and doctors' offices, dentists' offices, clinics,
hospitals etc, killing spores and bacteria
within 10 seconds!
All units are supplied with one filling of glass
beads. Glass beads size ranging 1.5 – 2.0 BS500 #66116-5 BS1000 #66116-10 BS2000 #66116-20
mm diameter.

Model BS300* BS500 BS1000 BS2000

Cabinet Size (L x W x H, mm) 185x125x135 140x142x202 150x195x225 140x142x202
Crucible Size, mm Diameter x Depth 50 x 50 50 x 75 50 x 137.5 50 x 162.5
Preset Temperature Range, °C 230 – 250 230 – 250 245 – 265 230 - 250
Initial Stabilization Time 30 minutes 30 minutes 30 minutes 30 minutes
Weight (Inclusive Glass Beads) 2.60 kg 2.90 kg 4.13 kg 4.15 gm
Wattage 75, single phase 150, single phase 250, single phase 250, single phase
Electrical 220V or 110V 220V or 110V 220V or 110V 220V or 110V
We suggest that glass beads be replaced at least once in three months.
Clean the glass beads at least once every 2 weeks. Remove glass beads when the unit is completely cool. Wash with mild soap, rinse and dry thoroughly
before re-use.

Ordering:
66116-3* Glass Bead Sterilizer, Model BS300 each 66116-20 Glass Bead Sterilizer, Model BS2000 each
(Available in Blue, Black, Red, Green, 66117-3 Glass Beads Replacement, Model BS300 each
Brown and Gray) 66117-5 Glass Beads Replacement, Model BS500 each
66116-5 Glass Bead Sterilizer, Model BS500 each 66117-10 Glass Beads Replacement, Model BS1000 each
66116-10 Glass Bead Sterilizer, Model BS1000 each 66117-20 Glass Beads Replacement, Model BS2000 each
*Model BS300 is available in colors: Black, Red, Green, Brown, Blue and Gray. Please indicate your color when ordering. If you’re not mentioned your color, we automatically ship color Blue.

504 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec14_492-517_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 8:39 PM Page 505

Histology and Light Microscopy SECTION 14

 Micro Spoon with Resin Coated Handle  Stainless Steel Spatulas

A micro spoon and spatula made from nickel stainless steel and coated
with a glazed finish resin on the handle. The wire is 0.103” (2.62 mm)
in diameter.
Overall length: 6-1⁄2” (165 mm).
The spoon end length: 1” (25 mm) x 1⁄4” (6.35 mm) wide.
Cat.# Description Pack
62410-01 Micro Spoon with Resin Coated Handle each

 Micro Spoon Heyman Type A

We offer a selection of stainless steel spatulas - a “must tool” when

handling embedding wax.
A Heyman type micro spatula made from nickel stainless steel with a Cat.# Description Qty
glazed finish. The wire diameter is 0.103” (2.62 mm). 63320-03 SS Spatula 3" Long x 9⁄16" Wide Blade each
Overall length: 6-1⁄4” (159 mm). 63320-04 SS Spatula 4" Long x 19⁄32" Wide Blade each
63320-05 SS Spatula 5" Long x 13⁄32" Wide Blade each
Flat end: 1-1⁄4” (31.35 mm) long. 63320-06 SS Spatula 6" Long x 7⁄8" Wide Blade each
The spoon end: 1⁄2” (12.5 mm) long x 1⁄8” (3 mm) wide. 63320-08 SS Spatula 8" Long x 11⁄8" Wide Blade each
63320-10 SS Spatula 10" Long x 17⁄16" Wide Blade each
Cat.# Description Pack 63320-12 SS Spatula 12" Long x 11⁄2" Wide Blade each
62411-A Micro Spoon Heyman Type A each

 Micro Spoon Heyman Type B

A Heyman type micro spatula made from nickel stainless steel with a
glazed finish. The wire diameter is 0.103” (2.63 mm).  Flexible Spatulas
Overall length: 6-1⁄4” (159 mm). This is a sword type spatula, made from stainless steel with a wooden
handle. This spatula is very thin and has bendability toward the end and
Sharpened bent end: 1-1⁄2” (37.5 mm) long. very stiff towards the handle. It offers flexibility when working with soft
V-Shaped formed other end: 1⁄2” long. materials, such as embedding waxes. The overall length is 63⁄4"
Cat.# Description Pack Cat.# Description Qty
62411-B Micro Spoon Heyman Type B each 63321 Flexible Spatulas each

Be sure to check out...

Harris Micro-Punch™ and Harris Uni-Core™
The Harris Micro-Punch™ and Uni-Cores are designed to serve research scientists
with a dissection tool for small pre-defined regions of the tissue or the specimen.
Many applications in:
 Forensics  Biomedical  Anatomy
 Electrophysiology Pharmacology  and more!

For more information, see page 305-307 

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 505
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec14_492-517_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 8:39 PM Page 506

SECTION 14 Histology and Light Microscopy

 Cartilage Knife  Saws
Three styles of manual A
bone saws are available.
The broad bladed B
Satterlee Saw (A), the
A heavy duty stainless steel blade with a riveted wooden handle. thinner rounded tip
Blade length: 31⁄2” (90mm), Total length: 81⁄2” (216mm) Charriere Saw (B), and the
72990 Cartilage Knife each solid handle Langenbech C
Metacarpal Saw (C). Each
 Autopsy Instruments saw has serrated teeth.
EMS now offers these premium grade, hardened stainless steel autopsy Cat No. Description Qty.
instruments, featuring a protective coating for extra durability and protection 70566-30 B. Charriere Saw 10-1/2” (267 mm) each
from rust and corrosion. Satin-matt finish reduces eye-fatiguing glare. 70566-31 A. Satterlee Saw 11-1/2” (292 mm) each
70566-32 Satterlee Saw Replacement Blade each
A. Brain Knife 70566-33 C. Langenbech Metacarpal Saw 9” (229 mm) each
Double-sided edged knife
for precision brain  Bone Saw
sectioning.
A
B. Skull Breaker
Fracturing hammer for
brain access. Available
with chisel bottom or hook B
bottom.
C
C. Rachitome
Curved rachitome. For A rounded end, 203mm blade. The inside handle grip is 70mm and the
specific skull fracturing. finger opening is 25mm.
72895-20 Bone Saw each
Cat No. Description Qty.
70566-10 A. Brain Knife, 9-1/2” (241 mm) Blade each
70566-11 B. Skull Breaker 5-1/2” (140 mm), Hook End each  Bone Shears
70566-12 B. Skull Breaker 5-1/2” (140 mm), Chisel End each
70566-13 C. Rachitome 8-3/4” (222 mm) each

 Brun’s Metacarpal Saw

A stainless steel saw. Its overall length is 190mm and its cutting
edge is 70mm. Made from stainless steel with a removable bar spring; perfect for
cutting cartilage and bone.
72895-30 Brun’s Metacarpal Saw each
72894-05 Bone Shears, 51⁄2”(L) (140mm) each
72894-08 Bone Shears, 8”(L) (203mm) each

CoreDish™
Multiple Biopsy Containers Half Prefilled
with 10% Formalin
We are proud to offer a multi-compartment container in the shape of a dish
and half prefilled with 10% Neutral buffered Formalin, for holding and
transporting biopsies. It is supplied with a leak-proof closure with O-ring
ensuring total protection of contents. It conforms to OSHA directives.

For more information, see page 42. 

506 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec14_492-517_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 8:39 PM Page 507

Histology and Light Microscopy SECTION 14

 Bone Rongeurs and Cutters

Made from stainless steel with a polished finish
I
E

F J
B

G K
C

L
D H

 A. Friedman
Mini Bone Rongeur, Curved. The jaw width is 2mm and it is 51⁄2" long.
77980-01 Friedman Bone Rongeur each
 H. Beyer M
Bone Rongeur. Double action
 B. Micro-Friedman – They are curved and have
Bone Rongeur, curved. a jaw width of 3.5mm and
Very delicate. The jaw width is 1.3mm. and it is 51⁄2" long. are 7" long
77981-01 Micro-Friedman Bone Rongeur each
77987-C Beyer Bone Rongeur, Double Action each
 C. Luer  I. Bohler
Bone Rongeur, curved. Delicate
Bone Rongeur. Double action. The jaw width is 3mm and they are 6" long.
The jaws width is 3mm. and it is 6"long.
77988-S Bohler Bone Rongeur, Double Action, Straight each
77983-01 Luer Bone Rongeur, 3mm Blade each
77988-C Bohler Bone Rongeur, Double Action, Curved each
 D. Lempert  J. Liston
Bone Rongeur. The jaw width is 2.5mm and the length is 61⁄2". Bone Cutting Forceps. Box joint and they are available either straight or angled.
Available either straight or slightly curved 77994-5S Liston Bone Cutting Forceps, 51⁄2" Straight each
77982-S Lembert Bone Rongeur, Straight each 77994-7S Liston Bone Cutting Forceps, 71⁄2" Straight each
77982-C Lembert Bone Rongeur, Slightly Curved each 77994-8S Liston Bone Cutting Forceps, 81⁄2" Straight each
 E. Blumenthal 77994-5A Liston Bone Cutting Forceps, 51⁄2" Angled each
77994-7A Liston Bone Cutting Forceps, 71⁄2" Angled each
Bone Rongeur. The jaw width is 3mm and it is 6" long.
77994-8A Liston Bone Cutting Forceps, 81⁄2" Angled each
77984-01 Blumenthal Bone Rongeur, Light Curved each
77984-02 Blumenthal Bone Rongeur, Full Curved each  K. Bohler
Double action bone cutting forceps. They are 6" long.
 F. Adson
77995-6S Bohler Bone Cutting Forceps, 6" Straight each
Bone Rongeur. The jaw width is 7mm and it is 8"long. 77995-6A Bohler Bone Cutting Forceps, 6" Angled each
77985-S Adson Bone Rongeur, Straight each
77985-C Adson Bone Rongeur, Slightly Curved each  L. Bone Nipper
A delicate straight 4" long nipper.
 G. Micro Cleveland
77996-6S Bone Nipper, 4" Straight each
Bone Rongeur. Curved jaws. They are available with a 4mm jaw width
51⁄2" long or 5mm jaw width and 7" long.  M. Bone Cutting Forceps
77986-04 Micro Cleveland Bone Rongeur, 4mm each These forceps are chrome plated and they are 51⁄2" long.
77986-05 Micro Cleveland Bone Rongeur, 5mm each 77997-5S Bone Cutting Forceps, 5" Straight each

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 507
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec14_492-517_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 8:39 PM Page 508

SECTION 14 Histology and Light Microscopy

® Thumb A.
® 7" (178 mm)
Dressing Ergonomic
Forceps B.
Paddle
These conventional Handle
forceps are very Forceps
popular and are C.
Available with either
available in a variety smooth, serrated,
of length, tip, and needle tips, or with
handle styles. 1 x 2 teeth.
T Made of premium 178mm versions are for those preferring a longer forcep and a wider
grade, hardened stainless steel variety of tip choices.
T Feature a protective coating for extra durability and protection
from rust and corrosion Curved styles are well suited for retreiving specimens from the inside
perimeter of transport jars and tissue separation in the water bath.
T Satin-matt finish reduces eye-fatiguing glare
T Made of premium grade, hardened stainless steel
Cat No. Description Qty. T Feature a protective coating for extra durability and protection
77937-21 4” (102 mm) Serrated Tips, Fine Grip each from rust and corrosion
77937-22 5” (127 mm) Serrated Tips, Fine Grip each
T Satin-matt finish reduces eye-fatiguing glare
77937-23 A. 5-1/2” (140 mm) Serrated Tips, Fine Grip each
77937-24 B. 6” (152 mm) 2 mm Smooth Tips, Broad Grip each
77937-25 7” (178 mm) 2 mm Smooth Tips, Broad Grip each Cat No. Description Qty.
77937-26 6” (152 mm) Serrated Tips, Fine Grip each 77937-44 7” (178 mm) Ergonomic Forceps,
77937-27 C. 6” (152 mm) Serrated Tips, Broad Grip each Paddle Handle, 3 mm Smooth Tips each
77937-28 7” (178 mm) Serrated Tips, Broad Grip each 77937-45 7” (178 mm) Ergonomic Forceps,
77937-29 8” (203 mm) Serrated Tips, Broad Grip each Paddle Handle, 3 mm Serrated Tips each
77937-30 12” (305 mm) Serrated Tips, Fine Grip each 77937-46 7” (178 mm) Ergonomic Forceps,
Paddle Handle, 3 mm 1 x 2 Teeth each
77937-47 7” (178 mm) Ergonomic Forceps,
® Adson Paddle Handle, 1.5 mm Smooth Tips each
Forceps A. 77937-48 7” (178 mm) Ergonomic Forceps,
Paddle Handle,1.5 mm Serrated Tips each
Available in 4 styles. 77937-49 7” (178 mm) Ergonomic Forceps,
All feature a paddle- Paddle Handle, Needle Tip each
style, fine-grooved 77937-54 7” (178 mm) Ergonomic Forceps,
handle. Paddle Handle, 1.5 mm Curved 30° Serrated Tipseach
77937-55 7” (178 mm) Ergonomic Forceps,
T Made of premium B.
Handle, 1.5 mm Curved 30° Smooth Tips each
grade, hardened stain-
less steel ® 5-1⁄2" (140 mm)
T Feature a protective
coating for extra durability and protection from rust and corro-
Ergonomic
sion Forceps
T Satin-matt finish reduces eye-fatiguing glare Available with smooth,
serrated, or needle
Cat No. Description Qty. tips.
77937-35 A. 4-3/4” (121 mm) Adson Tissue Forceps,
Serrated each
5½" (14 cm) ergonomic
77937-36 6” (152 mm) Adson Tissue Forceps, versions for those who
Serrated each prefer a shorter forcep.
77937-37 7” (178 mm) Adson Tissue Forceps, T Made of premium grade, hardened stainless steel
Serrated each
T Feature a protective coating for extra durability and protection
77937-38 B. 4-3/4” (121 mm) Adson Tissue Forceps,
from rust and corrosion
1 x 2 Teeth each
T Satin-matt finish reduces eye-fatiguing glare

Cat No. Description Qty.

77937-56 5-1/2” (140 mm) Ergonomic Forceps,
1.5 mm Smooth Tips, Straight each
77937-57 5-1/2” (140 mm) Ergonomic Forceps,
1.5 mm Smooth Tips, Curved 30° each
77937-58 5-1/2” (140 mm) Ergonomic Forceps,
1.5 mm Serrated Tips, Curved 30° each
77937-59 5-1/2” (140 mm) Ergonomic Forceps,
1.5 mm Serrated Tips, Straight each
77937-60 5-1/2” (140 mm) Ergonomic Forceps,
1.5 mm Serrated Tips, Needle Tip each

508 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec14_492-517_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 8:39 PM Page 509

Histology and Light Microscopy SECTION 14

® Forceps

78615-4S
® SEMKEN
These forceps are available in Serrated/Straight tips with either a
1.3mm or a 1.7mm tip width.
78608-5S Semken Forceps, 1.3mm Tip, 5" Long each
78608-6S Semken Forceps, 1.7mm Tip, 6" Long each 78615-4A

® MCPHERSON – Tying Forceps

Available with straight or angled tips with 5mm tying platform (parallel
gripping platform). 4" long.
78615-4S Mcpherson Tying Forceps, Straight each
78615-4A Mcpherson Tying Forceps, Angled each

® IRIS – Dressing Forceps

Made from stainless steel, 4" long.The forceps are delicate and the tips
are serrated (1mm wide). Comes complete with a guide pin.
78610-4S Iris Dressing Forceps, Straight each
78610-4HC Iris Dressing Forceps, Haft Curved each
78610-4FC Iris Dressing Forceps, Full Curved each

® KELMAN-MCPHERSON – Tying Forceps

These forceps are angled with a 7.5mm tying platform (parallel gripping
platform) and they are 4" long.
78616-4A Kelman-Mcpherson Tying Forceps, Angled each

® IRIS – Tissue Forceps

Same as above but with 1x2 Teeth and they are extra delicate. Made
from stainless steel and they are 4" long. The tips are 1.2mm wide.
® CASTRO-VIEJO – Micro-Dissecting Forceps with
78611-4S Iris 1x2 Teeth Tissue Forceps, Straight each
78611-4HC Iris 1x2 Teeth Tissue Forceps, Haft Curved each
Tying Platform
78611-4FC Iris 1x2 Teeth Tissue Forceps, Full Curved each These forceps are available with straight tips and in 4 configurations.
All of them are 41⁄2" long.
78620-4A Castro-Viejo w/Tying Platform, 0.12mm Teeth each
78620-4B Castro-Viejo w/Tying Platform, 0.3mm Teeth each
78620-4C Castro-Viejo w/Tying Platform, 0.5mm Teeth each
78620-4D Castro-Viejo w/Tying Platform, Smooth Jaw each
® HARMS – Micro Suturing Forceps
These forceps are delicate with a 6mm parallel platform. They are 4"
long. And they are available with either straight tips or curved tips.
78614-4S Harms Micro Suturing Forceps, Straight each
78614-4C Harms Micro Suturing Forceps, Curved each

® MICROSURGERY FORCEPS– With

Tying Platform
These are very delicate forceps with a knurling handle and are 5" long
78622-5S Microsurgery Forceps, Straight each
78622-5C Microsurgery Forceps, Curved each

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 509
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec14_492-517_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 8:39 PM Page 510

SECTION 14 Histology and Light Microscopy

 Non Slip Grip Forceps – Ergonomic  Curved Forceps

6” (152mm), Stainless Steel, Medium fine tips, curved smooth points.

78300-S and 78300-C 72910 Curved Forceps each

 Curved Forceps

78301-S; 78301-C, and 78301-B EMS Brand, Swiss made forceps from low carbon austenitic steel,
corrosion resistance, high quality, curved tips, available with different
length and tips style
 Curved Forceps with medium tips
78303-S Cat. # Description Qty
72910-6 6" (152mm L) Medium, Non-serrated Tips each
72910-6S 6" (152mm L) Medium, Serrated Tips each
72910-7 71⁄8" (180mm L) Medium, Non-serrated Tips each
72910-7S 71⁄8" (180mm L) Medium, Serrated Tips each
78304-S
This outstanding design fits nicely into all hands with perfect
functionality. These forceps offer a light touch and they are non-slip
 Curved Forceps with Fine Tips
and have high precision finish tips. They are the choice of all histologists.
These ergonomic forceps come in 7 different configurations.
Cat.# Description Pack
78300-S 140mm long. Tip width: 1.0mm. Serrated and Straight Tips each
78300-C Same as #78300-S but Curved Tips each Cat. # Description Qty
78301-S 175mm long. Tip width: 0.75mm. Serrated and Straight Tips each 72911-6 6" (152mm L) Fine, Non-serrated Tips each
78301-C Same as #78301-S. Serrated and Curved Tips each 72911-6S 6" (152mm L) Fine, Serrated Tips each
78301-B Same as #78301-S Serrated and Bent Tips each 72911-7 71⁄8" (180mm L) Fine, Non-serrated Tips each
78303-S 175mm long. Tip Width: 0.05mm. Fine and Smooth Straight Tipseach 72911-7S 71⁄8" (180mm L) Fine, Serrated Tips each
78304-S 175mm long. Tip width: 2.0mm. Smooth, Round and Straight Tips each

 DIEFFENBACH  Magic Wands

Serrefine Magic Wands are made
Stainless steel, serrated jaws. from PEEK, a high
performance plastic, with
excellent chemical
resistantance and
Cat.# Description Pack withstands high
63326-S Serrefine, 11⁄2”, Straight each temperatures (up to
63326-C Serrefine, 11⁄2”, Curved each 300ºC).
63327-S Serrefine, 21⁄4”, Straight each
63327-C Serrefine, 21⁄4”, Curved each Magic wand is ideal for use for electronic high-tech areas to
laboratories, from preparation of samples to applying adhesives,
using it as a stirring rod, or evendosing samples etc.
Cat.# Description Qty Price
63323-01 Fine tip and Flat strong tip, 6" (150mm) each
63323-02 Curved tip and flat strong tip, 6' (150mm) each
63323-03 Flat fine tip and flat sharp tip, 5" (130mm) each

 For a complete line of Tweezers, Scissors,

 Ear Punch Forceps and other related tools,
Made from stainless steel. Allows for you to make a 2mm hole through
the animal ear in just one second. It also can be used as a specimen See Tweezers, Tools and Gadgets,
puncher. pages 756-852. 
Cat.# Description Qty
72893-01 Ear Punch each

510 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec14_492-517_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 8:40 PM Page 511

Histology and Light Microscopy SECTION 14

 Dissecting Kit, 8 pieces, Stainless Steel
Kit includes:
1 41⁄2" Dissecting forceps with 1 41⁄2" Dissecting forceps 1 41⁄2" Dissecting scissors,
curved and serrated tips straight and serrated tips sharp, straight points
1 Curved dissecting needle 1 Dissecting scalpel, 6” long, 1 Plastic ruler 6", 1⁄16" div.,
1 Glass pipette with rubber bulb 11⁄2" cutting edge. millimeter and centimeter.
72950 Dissecting Kit set

 Large Dissecting Kit

Kit includes:
12 Scalpel Blades #11 with 41⁄2” Iris Scissors Jaws Forceps
#3 Handle 51⁄2” Dissecting Scissors 51⁄2” Straight Blunt tip Serrated
6” (15mm) Clear Ruler Suture Hook Jaws Forceps
6” long Light Small Probe, Blunt Set of Dissecting Needle, one 2 mm Diameter Stainless Steel
51⁄2” Kelly Hemostat, Straight Straight and one Bent Punch
61⁄4” Kelly Hemostat, Straight 41⁄2” Straight Fine Point Serrated Large Wood Handle Spatula
72951-15 Large Dissecting Kit set

 Dissecting Kit for Botany

Kit includes:
Dissecting teasing needle Dissecting forceps 4.5” curved Glass dropper
angular with metal chuck fine point with guide-pin Replacement dissecting needle
brass-chromed Dissecting forceps medium point straight, 6/pk
Dissecting teasing needle 4.5" with guide-pin Replacement dissecting needle
straight with metal chuck Dissecting Iris scissors 4.5" angular, 6/pk
brass-chromed Dissecting scalpel handle #3 Vinyl storage, zippered case
Ruler 6" No. 10 scalpel blade, 10 pcs with liner.
72951-20 Dissecting Kit for Botany set

 Anatomy Dissecting Kit 1

Kit includes:
Cartilage knife 2" blade Iris dissecting scissors, 4.5" Dissecting mall probe chrome,
Dissecting scalpel 1.5"L blade Dissecting scissor, 4.5", 6"
Narrow blade scalpel 1.5"L blade sharp/blunt points Ruler 6" plastic, metric/English
Dissecting forceps 4.5" with Dissecting teasing needle, markings
guide pin, medium points straight, metal chuck Dissecting chain & hook chrome
Dissecting forceps 4.5" with Dissecting teasing needle, Dissecting blow pipe, 6"
guide pin, curved, fine points. angular, metal chuck Double folded, vinyl storage case
72951-25 Anatomy Dissecting Kit set

 Anatomy Dissecting Kit 2

Kit includes:
Cartilage knife 2" blade Iris dissecting scissors, 4.5" Probe and hook, chrome
Dissecting scalpel handle #4 Dissecting teasing needle, Ruler 6" plastic, metric/
Dissecting scalpel handle #3 straight, metal chuck English markings
Scalpel blade #10, 1 piece Dissecting teasing needle, Dissecting chain & hook chrome
Scalpel blade #24, 1 piece angular, metal chuck Dissecting blow pipe, 6"
Dissecting scissor, 5.5", Dissecting forceps 4.5" with Double folded, vinyl
sharp/blunt points guide pin, fine points. storage case
Dissecting forceps 5"
72951-30 Anatomy Dissecting Kit 2 set

 Biology Dissecting Kit

Kit includes:
Dissecting mall probe, chrome, 6" Dissecting forceps, 4.5", chrome plated
Dissecting teasing needle, straight with metal chuck Glass dropper
Dissecting teasing needle, angular with metal chuck Ruler 6", plastic, metric/English markings
Dissecting scissors, 4.5" Single folded vinyl storage case
Dissecting scalpel
72951-35 Biology Dissecting Kit set

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 511
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec14_492-517_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 8:40 PM Page 512

SECTION 14 Histology and Light Microscopy

 Acrytol  Biomeda™ Substitutes
Mounting
Media  Clear-Mount (A Direct Substitute for BioMeda™ Crystal Mount)
Clear-Mount is a water based mounting medium designed for the permanent mounting of hydrated
Acrytol is a rapid-
tissues, which may be damaged by organic solvents. Such samples include cell smears, with peroxidase
drying mounting
and alkaline phosphatase chromogens.
medium which
enables slides to be This mounting medium preserves Fast Red, Aminoethylycarbazole (AEC), NBT/BCIP, INT/BCIP chromogens
screened immediately. and is also compatible with counter-stain such as Hematoxylin and Nuclear Fast Red. It is also suitable for
It has a low viscosity, chromogens like DAB and DAB with Nickel and Cobalt. It is not compatible with H & E staining.
allowing the medium Application: Mounting of Immunohisto slides.
to flow easily. It also prevents air For our original formula: For a more stable pH:
bubbles from becoming trapped. 0-5˚C 17985-12 Clear-Mount, (with Tris Buffer) 30 ml 0-5˚C 17985-16 Clear-Mount, (with PIPE Buffer) 30 ml
Acrytol contains an antioxidant to inhibit 0-5˚C 17985-15 Clear-Mount, (with Tris Buffer) 250 ml 0-5˚C 17985-17 Clear-Mount, (with PIPE Buffer) 100 ml
stain fading and prevent the formulation
of annual rings. A thin coating of Acrytol
 Limonene-Mount (A Direct Substitutefor BioMeda™ Clarion Mount)
is all that is needed to adhere a This mounting medium is made with limonene, a natural product from orange peels. It preserves tissues
coverglass to a microscope slide. and cell smears that can be dehydrated with organic solvents in immunohistochemistry, e.g. DAB and DAB
with nickel or cobalt. Our Limonene-Mount also works well with alkaline phosphatase chromogens, and
It is soluble in xylene, toluene and most organic solvent resistant Supper Fast Red. It is also a good choice for mounting H & E stained slides.
xylene substitutes.
Application: Mounting tissues and cell smears.
13518 Acrytol Mounting Medium Pint 0-5˚C 17987-01 Limonene-Mount 100 ml
0-5˚C 17987-06 Limonene-Mount 6x100 ml/bx
 Biomount™ 0-5˚C 17987-25 Limonene-Mount 250 ml

Some mounting media  EMS-Mount

oxidize rapidly upon EMS-Mount is a non-permanent, low viscosity an aqueous mounting medium designed for mounting of
exposure to air, tissue sections and cell smears with peroxidase and alkaline phosphatase chromogens that cannot be
forming carboxyl dehydrated with organic solvents. This mounting medium preserves Fast red, Aminoethylycarbazole (AEC),
groups. This can be BCIP/NBT, BCIP/INT chromogens and is also compatible with counterstain like Hematoxylin and Nuclear
more pronounced fast red (NFR). It is also suitable for chromogens like DAB and DAB with nickel and cobalt. (It is not
when sections have compatible with H and E staining). Refractive Index: 1.372 +/- 0.002
been cleared in a Application: Mounting of chromogens that cannot be dehydrated with organic solvents.
solution containing Reagent: Ready to use mounting medium
aldehyde. It is Storage: 2-8°C is recommended
sometimes observed that the 2-8˚C 17985-05 EMS-Mount 30 ml 2-8˚C 17985-07 EMS-Mount 250 ml
immunogold/silver signal fades after a 2-8˚C 17985-06 EMS-Mount 100 ml 2-8˚C 17985-08 EMS-Mount 1000 ml
few weeks, or even in a shorter time,
from sections that have been mounted
 EMS Shield Mount
with these media under cover slips. EMS Shield Mount is an aqueous non-permanent, low viscosity mounting medium for
The silver is still present, but has immunofluorescence. This unique formula prevents rapid photobleaching of FITC, Texas Red, AMCA, Cy2,
formed translucent silver carboxylate Cy3, Cy5, Alexa fluoro 488, Alexa fluoro 594, Green fluorescent protein (GFP), tetramethyly rhodamine
salts. Visibility can be retrieved by and Redox. The fluorescence is retained during storage at 4°C in the dark. This medium does not contain
removing the cover slip and washing in phenylenediamine, which destroys immunofluorescence of Cy dyes. Refractive Index : 1.380 +/- 0.002
xylene and then immersing the slide in Application: Immunofluorescence, confocal microscopy.
photographic developer, but this is a Reagent: Ready to use mounting medium for Immunofluorescence.
tedious procedure. Storage: 2-8°C is recommended
BIOMOUNT is a specially formulated 2-8˚C 17985-09 EMS Shield Mount 30 ml
mounting medium that reduces fading 2-8˚C 17985-100 EMS Shield Mount 100 ml
of immunogold/silver signals in sections
on glass slides. It is suitable for resins  EMS Shield Mount with Anti Fading
as well as wax embedded sections of EMS Shield Mount with antifading agent 1, 4-Diazobicyclo-(2,2,2-octane (DABCO™) is an aqueous non-
tissue. permanent, low viscosity mounting medium for immunofluorescence. This unique formula prevents rapid
RT 17894 BioMount 100ml photobleaching of FITC, Texas Red, AMCA, Cy2, Cy3, Cy5, Alexa fluoro 488, Alexa fluoro 594, Green fluorescent
protein (GFP), tetramethyly rhodamine and Redox. The fluorescence is retained during storage at 4°C in the dark.
For all of our other This medium does not contain phenylenediamine, which destroys immunofluorescence of Cy dyes. Refractive
Adhesives and Mountants, Index: 1.382 +/- 0.002
see pages 9-21  Application: Immunofluorescence, confocal microscopy.
Reagent: Ready to use mounting medium for Immunofluorescence.
Storage: 2-8°C is recommended
2-8˚C 17985-150 EMS Shield Mount with DABCO™ 30 ml
2-8˚C 17985-200 EMS Shield Mount with DABCO™ 100 ml

512 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec14_492-517_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 8:40 PM Page 513

Histology and Light Microscopy SECTION 14

 Biomeda™ Substitutes (continued)

 Fluoro-Gel (A Direct Substitute for

BioMeda™ Gel-Mount)
Fluoro-Gel is a water based mounting medium designed for the
permanent mounting of fluorescent stained tissues, which may either be
damaged or soluble in organic solvents, such as xylene or toluene. This
unique formula prevents rapid photo-bleaching of FITC, Texas Red,
AMCA, Cy2, Cy3, Cy5, Alexa Fluoro 488, Alexa Fluoro 594, Green
Fluorescent Protein (GFP), Tetramethylyrhodamine, Redox, Phycoerythrin
(RP-E), Phyocyanin (PC), and Allophycocyanin (APC). The fluorescence is
retained during prolonged storage at 4ºC in the dark.
 Fluoro Gel with DABCO™
Application: Immunofluorescence, confocal microscope. Fluoro Gel with antifading agent 1, 4-Diazobicyclo-(2,2,2-octane
For our original formula: (DABCO™) is an aqueous mounting medium for preserving
fluorescence of tissue and cell smears. This unique formula prevents
0-5˚C 17985-10 Fluoro-Gel, (with Tris Buffer) 20 ml
0-5˚C 17985-11 Fluoro-Gel, (with Tris Buffer) 100 ml rapid photobleaching of FITC, Texas Red, AMCA, Alexa fluoro 488, Alexa
fluoro 594, Cy dyes, tetramethyly rhodamine, and Redox. The
For a more stable pH:
fluorescence is retained during prolonged storage at 4°C in the dark.
0-5˚C 17985-30 Fluoro-Gel, (with TES Buffer) 20 ml Refractive Index: 1.366 +/- 0.002
0-5˚C 17985-31 Fluoro-Gel, (with TES Buffer) 100 ml
0-5˚C 17985-40 Fluoro-Gel, (with PIPE Buffer) 20 ml Application: Immunofluorescence, confocal microscopy.
0-5˚C 17985-41 Fluoro-Gel, (with PIPE Buffer) 100 ml Reagent: Ready to use mounting medium with anti-fading agent
Storage: 2-8°C is recommended
 Fluoro-Gel II Mounting Medium 2-8˚C 17985-01 Fluoro Gel with DABCO 20 ml
Fluoro-Gel II is similar to Fluoro-Gel, but Fluoro-Gel II contains DAPI (4, 2-8˚C 17985-02 Fluoro Gel with DABCO 100 ml
6-diamino-2-phenylindole), which is a counter stain for DNA. This 2-8˚C 17985-03 Fluoro Gel with DABCO 250 ml
product is to be used in in situ hybridization techniques or other 2-8˚C 17985-04 Fluoro Gel with DABCO 1000 ml
methods where fluorescence of DNA staining is required. DAPI excites
at 360 nm and emits at 460 nm, producing blue fluorescence. RNA is  Fluoro-Gel with Anti-Fading Mounting
also stained with DAPI. Medium
Application: Immunofluorescence, confocal microscopy. Fluoro-Gel Mounting Medium with a strong anti-fading agent 1,4-
phenylenediamine is an aqueous mounting medium for preserving
0-5˚C 17985-50 Fluoro-Gel II 20 ml
fluorescence of tissue and cell smears. This unique formula preserves
0-5˚C 17985-51 Fluoro-Gel II 100 ml
rapid photobleaching of FITC, Texas Red, AMCA, Cy2, Cy3, Cy5, Alexa
Fluoro 388, Alexa Fluoro 594 tetramethyly rhodamine, and Redox. The
 Fluoro-Gel III Mounting Medium fluorescence is retained during prolong storage at 4°C in the dark. This
Fluoro-Gel III Mounting Medium is similar to Fluoro-Gel, however, Fluoro- medium contains Phynylenediamine and is not suitable for
Gel III with the addition of PI (Propidium Iodide) which is a counterstain immunofluorescence of Cy dyes, Phycoerythrin (R-PR) phycocyanin (PC),
for DNA, makes this a unique mounting medium, which prevents rapid and allophycocyanin (APC). Refractive index: 1.366 +/- 0.002
photobleaching of FITC, Texas Red, AMCA, Cy2, Cy3, Cy5, Alexa Fluoro
488, Alexa Fluoro 594, Green Fluorescent protein (GFP), Application: Immuno-fluorescence, confocol microscopy.
Tetramethylyrhodamine, Redox, Phycoerythrin (RP-E), Phyocyanin (PC), Reagent: Prepared from TRIS buffer. Ready-to-use mounting medium
and Allophycocyanin (APC). The fluorescence is retained during with dark coffee color, this is normal, and does not interfere with
prolonged storage at 4ºC in the dark. This medium does not contain immuno-fluorescence
Phynylenediamine, which destroys immunofluoresccence of Cy dyes, Storage: 2 – 8°C is recommended. Protect from light. DO NOT FREEZE.
RP-E, PC, and APC. This product is to be used in in situ hybridization Cat. # Description Qty
techniques or other method where fluorescence of DNA staining is 2-8˚C 17983-20 Fluoro-Gel with Anti-Fading Agent 20 ml
required. PI excites at 535 nm, emits at 615 nm, producing a red 2-8˚C 17983-100 Fluoro-Gel with Anti-Fading Agent 100 ml
fluorescence. RNA is also stained with PI.
Application: Immunofluorescence, confocal microscope
 In-Situ Mount (A Direct Substitute for
BioMeda™ Situ Mount)
0-5˚C 17985-60 Fluoro-Gel III 20 ml
0-5˚C 17985-61 Fluoro-Gel III 100 ml In-Situ mounting medium is a unique mounting medium designed for
permanent preservation of tissue sections and cell smear with alkaline
phosphatase chromogens like NBT/BCIP and red stain.
Application: Mounting tissues and cell smears.
0-5˚C 17988-30 In-Situ Mount 30 ml

*The names BioMeda Gel Mount, Crystal Mount, Clarion, Situ Mount are all owned by
BioMeda Corporation

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 513
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec14_492-517_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 8:40 PM Page 514

SECTION 14 Histology and Light Microscopy

® Mounting Medium for all ® CFM-1 and CFM-1 Plus Antifadent
Laser Scanning and This glycerol-phosphate buffered saline based
Conventional Microscopes mountant solution has been specially formulated so as
to have a refractive index of ~1.52 @ room
A revolutionary new Mounting Medium which temperature. The addition of antifadent retards the
helps to control the effects of Refraction. bleaching of fluorochromes. Its refractive index is
These Mountant Solutions: similar to glass; therefore effects of refraction on image
quality are minimized. The CFM-1 Plus antifadent will
T Have a refractive index of 1.52 to match the be particularly useful for high magnification work,
refractive index of your slides and coverslips
where immersion oils are used to minimize distortion of
T Are simple to use – Just apply the solution the image due to the refraction of the viewing light and
to the specimen followed by a cover slip where bleaching of the flurochrome occurs.
T May be kept at room temperature – comes The solutions should also be very valuable for laser useful for high magnification work where immersion
with dropper tip to aid in dispensing scanning microscopy where, three-dimensional oils are used to minimize distortion of the image due to
T Are water miscible (aqueous glycerol imaging of specimens is carried out e.g. with confocal refraction of the viewing light. The solutions should also
based), and therefore the specimen does fluorescence microscopy where integrity of the image be particularly valuable for lasing scanning microscopy
not need to be dehydrated prior to the has to be maintained. where three-dimensional imaging of specimens is
addition of the mounting solution. carried out e.g. with confocal microscopy.
Both solutions are medium viscosity, and water-clear.
T Have a pH compatible with the specimens: The solution has a medium viscosity, and it is water-
CFM-1 has a pH of ~6.5, and CFM-2 has a pH CFM-1 Plus Antifadent have a pH of ~10
CFM-1 has a pH of ~6.5 clear, and has a pH of ~8.5
of ~8.5
T Contain an antifadent to help reduce the ® CFM-2 Mountant
bleaching of the fluorochromes (CFM-1 Plus This glycerol-tris-buffered based mountant solution has RT 17980-10 CFM-1 10 ml
Antifadent) been specially formulated to have a refractive index of RT 17980-25 CFM-1 25 ml
T May be used as a immersion oils in addition ~1.52 (at room temperature) i.e. a refractive index similar
RT 17981-10 CFM-1 Plus 10 ml
to being a mountant solution and since they
RT 17981-25 CFM-1 Plus 25 ml
to glass so that the effects of refraction on image quality
RT 17982-10 CFM-2 10 ml
are water-based, they facilitate cleaning the are minimized. This mountant solution may also be used RT 17982-25 CFM-2 25 ml
microscope optics. as an immersion oil. The CFM solutions will be particularly

® CITIFLUOR™ - Antifadent Mountant Solutions After 15 Seconds Illumination

A mounting medium for immunofluorescence, which overcomes the problems of fading.

This mounting media is designed to reduce AF2 (Glycerol solution containing additives for use
the fading of the fluorescence of dyes used with labeled tissue sections) is simply a glycerol
for labeling biological specimens. solution of the antifadent. Refractive Index is 1.47. After 1 Minute Illumination After 5 Minutes Illumination
In the technique of fluorescence microscopy, the AF3 (Phosphate-buffered saline solution containing
fluorescence is stimulated by high intensity UV and/or additives for examination of whole cell) is appropriate.
visible light. Absorption of the light populates an Refractive Index is 1.34.
excited state of the dye (usually a singlet state) and AF87, the antifadent, is contained in non-fluorescent
this leads to fluorescence. However, the excited state immersion oil. It is designed for those requiring work After 3 minutes Illumination After 45 Minutes Illumination
of the dye may undergo chemical reaction, which at high magnification. It is useful for preventing the
leads to destruction as evidenced by the fading of the fading of such dyes as DAPI, which have the tendency
fluorescence and consequent loss of the image. to disperse in glycerol based mountant solutions.
Citifluor™ mounting media is designed to solve this CFPVOH is an aqueous solution of poly (vinyl alcohol)
problem. for use as a solid mountant. Apply a few drops of the
Selection of the appropriate product: solution to your sample, and allow drying to give a temperature. With LD50’s >2000mg/kg (in rat), this
There is no universal antifadent due to the fact that clear film. Refractive Index is 1.34–1.35. product exhibits no toxicological problems.
biological material is so varied in nature that the AF100 is a solution of antifadents to be used with
fluorescence fading of fluorochromic conjugates is CFPVOH when fading of fluorescence in the poly(vinyl
a complex process.
RT 17970-25 CitiFluor™ AF1 25 ml
alcohol) is a problem. To prepare a CFPVOH solution RT 17970-100 CitiFluor™ AF1 100 ml
The general anti-fadents are AF1, AF2, and AF3. containing AF100, add 0.1ml of Af100 to 0.9ml of RT 17971-25 CitiFluor™ AF2 25 ml
The AF87 is a specialist immersion oil-based CFPVOH. If more or less of the solid mountant solution RT 17971-100 CitiFluor™ AF2 100 ml
antifadent. is required, mix the reagent in the appropriate ratio. RT 17972-25 CitiFluor™ AF3 25 ml
AF1 (Glycerol-phosphate buffered solution Once these solutions have been made up, they should RT 17972-100 CitiFluor™ AF3 100 ml
containing an additive for use with labeled tissue be used within a period of days since the solution RT 17976-10 CitiFluor™ AF87 10 ml
sections). Should be used if you normally examine deteriorates on storage. Refractive Index is 1.34-1.35. RT 17976-25 CitiFluor™ AF87 25 ml
specimens in glycol solution. If you normally use RT 17978-35 Set of CitiFluor™ 25 ml + 5 ml
All of these products have a long shelf life, a minimum
saline solution with your specimens. Refractive CFPVOH and AF100*
of 2 years. The solution can be stored at room
Index is 1.46. * Only available when ordering with CFPVOH

514 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec14_492-517_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 8:40 PM Page 515

Histology and Light Microscopy SECTION 14

 CitraMount® Mountant  Cytoseal™ Mounting
This butyl acetate and acrylic resin mixture is the first mounting medium Medium
developed for coverslipping directly from d-limonene based clearants. Premium quality; formulated from the highest
Superior results are also achieved with xylene. CitraMount® medium is quality advanced acrylic resin. It will not become
recommended for manual coversliping only as it may cause damage to brittle and crack, nor will it discolor or yellow with
the valves of automated coverslippers. age. CytoSeal dries rapidly, allowing examination
 Clear seal with drying time is less than 24 hours soon after application. It can be used with oil
 Refractive index is 1.42 – Viscosity is 90 cPs immersion objectives and in fluorescent
RT 18005-01 CitraMount® Mountant 100 ml procedures. Slides will not stick together and
RT 18005-05 CitraMount® Mountant 500 ml the medium will not “cold flow” to the edge of the slide during long
term storage. CytoSeal can be dissolved in toluene or xylene. An
 CMCP Macroinvertebrate Mounting Medium antioxidant has been added to the formulation to prevent fading of slides.
CytoSeal comes in a Controlled Drop Dispenser, with varying viscosities.
CMCP is a colorless, non resinous, water miscible mounting medium for
permanent transparent mounts. This medium used like Canada Balsam,  CytoSeal 60, which has a viscosity of 60cps,
it can be used to mount almost any material, provided it is not stained, is intended primarily for use with cover glass.
calciferous material, or thin tissue sections. This mounting media has  CytoSeal 280, which has a viscosity of 280cps is intended
the advantage of allowing live or preserved specimens to be mounted for use where minimal spread of medium is required.
directly from water or alcohol. RT 18006 CytoSeal 60 4oz.
Free living nematodes and live parasitic worms are among the organism RT 18007 CytoSeal 60 16oz.
suitable for mounting with CMCP. The CMCP mounting provide then RT 18008 CytoSeal 280 4oz.
with rapid relaxation, death, and clearing action.
RT 18003-01 CMCP-9 Low Viscosity Mountant 100 ml
 DEPEX Mounting Media
RT 18003-05 CMCP-9 Low Viscosity Mountant 500 ml A colorless, neutral, xylene miscible mountant which is suitable for
RT 18004-02 CMCP-10 High Viscosity Mountant 250 ml preparations where Canada Balsam is usually used. R.I. 1.5222 @ 23ºC.
RT 18404-05 CMCP-10 High Viscosity Mountant 500 ml RT 13514 DEPEX Mounting Media 100ml

Clearium® Mounting Media  DPX Mountant for Microscopy

Clear and coverslip your slide preparations A mixture of Distyrene, a plasticizer, and xylene. A colorless synthetic
in one easy step resin mounting media which replaces Xylene-Balsam. It preserves the
stain and dries quickly. R.I. 1.5175 @ 23ºC.
This unique product eliminates the need for hazardous RT 13510 100ml
xylene or xylene substitutes as a clearing agent in RT 13512 500ml
histology and cytology laboratories. With Clearium,
simply do away with the final step of clearing and  Entellan® A rapid mounting media for microscopy
coverslip directly from absolute isopropyl alcohol.
For long life preparations, without bubble formation at high ambient
Cat No. Description Qty. temperatures. It can be used for all dehydrated microscopic preparations.
RT 13520-11 Clearium®, Pint each Cure time is 20 minutes at room temperature. It is colorless with an acid
RT 13520-12 Clearium®, Pint 4/case number less than 2.50 and a R.I. ND20 approx 1.49-1.5. (Contains xylene).
RT 13520-13 Clearium®, 4 oz. Dripper Bottle (12) 12/case RT 14800 Entellan® 100ml
RT 14802 Entellan® 500ml
 Crystalbond; Wafer Mount
See page 372-373, 437   Eukitt™; Mounting Medium
Eukitt is a mounting medium (contains 45% Acrylic
TECHNICAL TIP Resin and 55% Xylenes), used in microscopy. It is an
DEPEX (EMS Cat. #13514) is an Improved adhesive and specimen preservative that can be used
Mounting Medium manually and in automated cover-slipping equipment.
Most mounting media cause fading of histological preparations over Adhesive and sealant for use with glass, non plastic
time. A study was conducted to find the most suitable mounting and other non-reactive materials. Spreads quickly and
media that would not fade. Depex as a Mounting Media appeared to evenly without forming any air bubbles.
have a conserving effect on the stain as compared to other available
mounting media. The study was based on Araldite embedded  Fast-drying (20 minutes)  Temperature limits: 42ºC-17ºC
semithin sections of rabbit cerebral cortex stained with Toluidine  Refractive index close to  Passive to ultraviolet light
Blue and Pyronin G. The study also showed that the average optical glass (1.510)  Can be used in place of epoxy
density of sections prepared with DEPEX after one year was higher  Chemically neutral resins for mounting petro-
than the sections treated with other mounting techniques.  Little sensitivity to water graphic thin sections
Cordula Schmolke (1993). Effects of Mounting Media on Fading of  No reaction to staining  Used in fluorescence dyes
Toluidine Blue and Pyronin G Staining in Epoxy Sections. Biotech. in bones
& Histochem. 68/3, pg.132-136 RT 15320 Eukitt™ 100ml
RT 15322 Eukitt™ 500ml

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 515
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec14_492-517_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 8:40 PM Page 516

SECTION 14 Histology and Light Microscopy

 Fluoromount-G™ Slide  Mount Quick,
Mounting Medium Solvent/Water Base
A special mounting media for immunofluorescent Mounting media for cover glass. It
staining procedures. It is a water soluble, non- comes in a convenient dispensing
fluorescing medium which is well suited for use when tube or bottle. Solvent based media
the staining procedure has an aqueous final step. It which is soluble in xylene and has a
contains 10% polyvinyl alcohol in phosphate buffered 10 minute dry time. Its viscosity is
glycerol with 0.1% sodium azide as a preservative. One 33 cps at 25°C.
bottle is sufficient to mount up to 500 slides. Refractive Index: 1.46
RT 18000 Mount Quick-Solvent Base; 30cc
0-5˚C 17984-25 Fluoromount-G 25 ml
RT 18002 Mount Quick-Water Base; 30cc
 DAPI-Fluoromount G™
 Omnimount™
DAPI-Fluoromont™ G is a water-soluble, instant blue nuclear probe
fluorescing (455nm) compound for mounting fixed slides using a staining  Optical clarity combined with exceptional
procedure having an aqueous final step. Mounting slides with DAPI durability
Fluoromont™ G stains the cell nucleus and may reduce fluorochrome  Compatible with HistoClear II
quenching during analysis of slides by fluorescence microscopy. this  Higher flash point and lower toxicity than
mounting medium also provides a semi permanent seal for long term xylene based mountants
storage of slide preparations. Specially developed to provide compatibility with National
0-5˚C 17984-24 DAPI Fluoromount-G™ 20 ml Diagnostic clearing agents, HistoClear II. Omnimount™
combined outstanding optical characteristics with low
 Glycerin Jelly fluororescence and exceptional durability. In addition to
For the mounting of hydrated sections. being the ideal partner for HistoClear II, Omnimount is a truly universal
mounting medium compatible with all common clearing agents: xylene,
RT 17998-10 Glycerin Jelly, 100ml toluene, limonene, and petroleum derived products.
RT 17998-50 Glycerin Jelly, 500ml
The Omnimount solvent has a higher flash point and a lower toxicity than
xylene based mountants, so Omnimount™ provides both a safer work
 Histomount environment and reduce shipping costs.
A mixture of xylene - mixed isomers and non hazardous ingredients to offer
a very good synthetic mountant. Once dried the refractive index is 1.58. RT 17997-01 Omnimount™ 100 ml

RT 17995-01 Histomount 100 ml  Permount™* Mounting

RT 17995-05 Histomount 450 ml
Medium
 Hydromount™ A toluene-based synthetic resin mounting
medium. The right choice for both rapid
Ideal for frozen tissue sections mounting and long term storage of slides. Its
Hydromount™ is the traditional choice whenever a low viscosity allows for a thinner mounting
nonfluorescing aqueous medium is needed. Hydromount™ layer offering better optical quality and
is water-based and is suitable for mounting specimens that bubble-free preparations. It has a refractive
have been processed in water. Hydromount™ is effective for index near that of a fixed protein which helps
frozen sections, amyloid, and immunofluorescent staining to keep images free of distortion. Ideal for
procedures. Should it become necessary, Hydromount™ mounting coverslips to slides with thick or thin
may be removed by soaking the slides in warm saline. specimens. Permount preserves most
RT 17966-01 Hydromount™ 100ml biological stains with little or no fading when
Histomount™ and Hydromount™ are Trademarked names of National Diagnostics the slides are stored in darkness. It contains an anti-oxidant to prevent the
formation of annular rings and its high softening point (155°C/311°F) makes
MM 24® Mounting Media it suitable for microprojection.
Specially formulated for automatic glass
coverslippers RT 17986-01 Permount Mounting Medium 100ml
MM 24 is a low viscosity mounting medium that is RT 17986-05 Permount Mounting Medium 500ml
*Ownership of Fisher Scientific
compatible with both aliphatic (eg Sub-X) and aromatic
(eg xylene) clearing agents. It is specially formulated to
achieve optimum results with automatic glass  Slide Coating Adhesive
coverslippers, yet is also effective for manual slide See page 555 
preparation. Set up time before permanent filing is normally 24 hours
with aromatic agents and 48 to 72 hours with aliphatics.
Cat No. Description Qty.
RT 13520-21 MM 24® Mounting Media, Pint each
RT 13520-22 MM 24® Mounting Media, Pint 4/case
RT 13520-23 MM 24® Mounting Media, 4 oz. Dripper Bottle (12) 12/case

516 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec14_492-517_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 8:41 PM Page 517

Histology and Light Microscopy SECTION 14

 Cargille Meltmounts  Liquid
 Instant thermal mountants that Coverglass;
require “no-oven-time”. SHUR/Mount™
 100% Usable; contains no solvents. Shur/Mount is a liquid
 Reversible, thermally, for particle coverglass and mounting
retrieval or re-orientation medium. Its low viscosity
minimizes bubble formation
 Soluble in toluene for special under the coverglass. An
techniques or clean-up.
antioxidant present in the
 Fluid at 65°C, a temperature chosen because it makes permanent mount and medium prevents fading of the
protects the majority of specimens from thermal changes. stain even over years of
 PCB-Free. storage. A UV absorbent present in our Shur/Mount prevents the
 Direct replacement for old mountant mediums (Canada Balsam, Aroclor yellowing of the resin.
5442, Naphrax...) Available in three types:
Cargille Meltmount™ (optical quality) is a series of mounting media which are  A toluene-based acrylic resin; rapid drying. It is used for
specifically formulated for use in microscope slide mounting and in other optical mounting and preservation of microscope slide specimens,
coupling applications. and is ideal for manual coverslipping. Refractive index: 1.49
Melt Mount is also available in a Quick-Stick™ form which can be used to make  A xylene-based formula which is used for automatic cover
permanent microscope slide mounts quickly. These Melt Mount sticks can be slipping instruments. Refractive index: 1.48
applied to a slide on a hotplate. As soon as the specimen and coverglass are  A unique water based mounting medium for Immuno pro-
positioned and the slide is cooled you have a permanent prepared slide that can be cedures.
reversed by reheating, if you should wish to retrieve a particular particle. Each RT 17990-01 Shur/Mount - Toluene Based 4 oz.
Quick-Stick™ weighs approximately 2⁄3 oz. (18g). RT 17990-12 Shur/Mount - Toluene Based 12x4 oz./cs
RT 17991-01 Shur/Mount - Xylene Based 16 oz.
1. Meltmount™ 1.539 RT 17991-06 Shur/Mount - Xylene Based 4x16 oz./cs
Has a refractive index (nD @25°C) of 1.539 and an Abbe V dispersion of 45. RT 17992-01 Shur/Mount - Water Based 20ml
RT 17992-04 Shur/Mount - Water Based 4x20ml
Its optically similar to Canada Balsam and therefore ideal for mounting many
biological specimens but without the long drying time of Canada Balsam.
 Sub-X Mounting Medium
RT 17994-10 Meltmount 1.539 1 oz.
RT 17994-11 Meltmount 1.539 Quick-Stick™ each
Sub-X Mounting Medium is a toluene based low
viscosity quick-drying, permanent mountant
2. Meltmount™ for Chrysotile Asbestos formulated to be compatible with all xylene
It has dispersion characteristics making it appropriate for mounting chrysotile asbestos. substitutes on the market. It may be used for all
RT 17994-20 Meltmount for Chrysotile 1 oz. ocverslip preparations that are cleared in xylene
3. Meltmount™ 1.582 and or toluene. It may be used for manual as
It has a refractive index nD @25°C) of 1.582 and an Abbe V dispersion of 33. well as automated coverslipping. Sub-X contains
Its optical clarity makes it the preferred choice for minimum visible absorption. an antioxidant to inhibit fading of stains.
RT 17994-30 Meltmount 1.582 1 oz. RT 13519 Sub-X Mounting Medium Pint
RT 17994-31 Meltmount 1.582 Quick-Stick™ each
4. Meltmount™ 1.605  Tissue-Tack Adhesive
It has a refractive index (nD @25°C) of 1.605 and an Abbe V dispersion of 30, making
it appropriate for mounting Asbestiform Tremolite, Anthophyllite, and Actinolite.  Good for JB-4 and JB-4 Plus Sections.
RT 17994-40 Meltmount 1.605 1 oz.
 Improves permanent adhesion of sections to the glass slide
RT 17994-41 Meltmount 1.605 Quick-Stick™ each during prolonged staining procedures and washes.
 Useful for immunofluorescent, immunoperoxidase and
5. Meltmount™ 1.662 routine staining procedures.
It has a refractive index (nD @25°C) of 1.662 and an Abbe V dispersion of 26,
optically similar to Aroclor 5442 but is PCB-free. RT 71301-01 Tissue-Tack Adhesive 100ml
RT 71301-05 Tissue-Tack Adhesive 500ml
RT 17994-50 Meltmount 1.662 1 oz.
RT 17994-51 Meltmount 1.662 Quick-Stick™ each
6. Meltmount™ 1.680
 UV Mount Medium
It has a refractive index (nD @25°C) of 1.680 and an Abbe V dispersion of 25,  A mounting medium that is designed to match the refrac-
making it appropriate for mounting Amosite and Crocidolite asbestos. tive index of JB-4 embedded sections.
RT 17994-60 Meltmount 1.680 1 oz.  Cures within 2 minutes when exposed to long wave UV light
RT 17994-61 Meltmount 1.680 Quick-Stick™ each (365nm) when applied to moist sections.
 Sections are mounted after last staining water rinse.
7. Meltmount™ 1.704
It has a refractive index (nD @25°C) of 1.704 and an Abbe V dispersion of 24,  Slides must be coverslipped.
similar to Naphrax.
0-5˚C 17996 UV Mount Medium 100ml
RT 17994-70 Meltmount 1.704 1 oz.
RT 17994-71 Meltmount 1.704 Quick-Stick™ each

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 517
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec14_518-531_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 7:57 PM Page 518

SECTION 14 Histology and Light Microscopy

 Staining Apparatus:  Coverglass
Staining Jars
 Five-Slide Gripper (with Plastic
 The 5-Slide Gripper accom- Caps)
modates 5 microscope slides  For use with cover glass
in one staining procedure. sizes 18 to 22mm.
 It fits most coplin and round-  Accommodates eight cover
open staining jars. glasses back-to-back.
 It is made from a special  Caps have been tested to
material which is resistant to be resistant against most
all chemicals and solvents which are used in staining. staining solutions
 There is no need to remove slides for drying.
 It withstands drying temperatures up to 80°C 72242-21 Coverglass Staining Jars, Screw Cap each
72242-24 Coverglass Staining Jars, Screw Cap 4/pk
71410-06 Five-Slide Gripper 6/pk

 Glass Coplin  Coverglass

Staining Jar, Staining Rack
Screw Cap Made from polished
stainless steel. Specially
5-Slide Unit. Holds 5 single
designed to be used with
1"x3" slides vertically, or 10
coplin jars.
slides back-to-back. Slides
extend above the opening,  Holds five of 22 x
allowing for the manipulation of 24mm coverglasses.
70315 70317  Comes with a handle,
them without the use of forceps.
A screw cap has a metal foil liner that withstands stains and organic 5” (12.7cm) long.
solvents and it prevents evaporation. Overall measurement:
33⁄8"(H)x25⁄8"(W) base x 23⁄8"(dia) top.
70315 Complete Unit 4/cs 72240 Coverglass Staining Rack each

 Staining Jar  Wash-N-Dry™

With Glass Lid Coverslip
An all glass jar which holds 5 to Rack
10 standard slides (3” x 1”). Holds 10 Coverslips
They can be used as a Fast & easy cleaning,
chromatography jar with a surface-treating and
choice of 2 ground glass lids. drying. Holds all slipcover
The lids are ground to the sizes including 18, 22 and
flange of the jar which deters 25mm.
evaporation. The jar with a taller
Durable and Hassle Free
lid (70316-04) accommodates larger slides: 4” x 1” (102mm x 25mm).
One piece polypropylene
70316-02 Staining Jar w/Ground Lid 4/pk rack does not require
70316-04 Staining Jar w/Tall Ground Lid 4/pk assembly and is chemically
and thermally resistant.
 Glass Coplin Staining Jar, Screw Cap Autoclavable!
5-Slide Unit. Holds 5 single 1”x 3” slides vertically, or 10 slides back- Secure Innovative design
to-back. Slides stay within the jar so that it can be capped during includes a notch to secure
staining. Complete with a screw cap and a metal foil liner. Overall coverslips with a rubber
measurement: 43⁄8"(H) x 23⁄4"(W) base x 23⁄8"(dia) top. band or loop of
70317 Complete Unit 4/cs monofilament.
Compatible Fits inside a
 Staining Rack; Coverglass 100ml beaker with space
Made from polished stainless steel: underneath for a small stir
bar when submerged.
 Securely holds thirty (30)  Spring-type detachable
22mm or 24mm cover glass handle Economical Available at a fraction of the cost of PTFE products.
 Welded stainless steel  4” (10.2cm) long. 70366-16 Wash N'Dry Cover Slip Rack each
72239-04 Large Coverglass Staining Rack each

518 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec14_518-531_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 7:57 PM Page 519

Histology and Light Microscopy SECTION 14

 Wash-N-Dry™  Vertical Staining Jar
Slide Rack w/Glass Lid
Maximum Circulation An all glass rectangular staining jar which
Offset design allows liquid accommodates 8 to 16 slides and comes
and air to completely flow with a glass lid. Its wide top eliminates
around the entire slide the need for forceps in the handling of
ensuring cleanliness and the slides. It accommodates slides up to
faster drying times. 4”x11⁄2” (103mm x 39mm) in size.
"Hands Off Design" 70318-04 Vertical Staining Jar 4/pk
Tailored to contact a
minimal amount of slide
 Slide Staining
surface area permitting
solutions and air to affect Jar, Square
entire slide. Made from polypropylene, holds
10 slides, back-to-back.
Holds 12 Slides Securely
Designed in a square shape and
holds slides for convenient
short body to conserve space
cleaning, treating, staining,
and staining solution. When the
and drying. Fits standard
cap is removed the slides can be handled without touching the solution. The
slide sizes including 25 mm and 1".
screw cap has a locking recess to support the slides and both body and cap
Laboratory Friendly Utilizes chemically and thermally resistant glass have a molded-in lug to enable them to be wired together for transit. The
infused polypropylene. Autoclavable! jars measure: 83mm(H)x33mm(W)x3mm(H)
Create A System Use in conjunction with a 200ml tall form beaker to 71405-01 Square Slide Staining Jar each
efficiently use solutions. 71405-04 Square Slide Staining Jar 4/bx
70366-17 Wash N'Dry Slide Rack each
70366-18 200ml Tall Form Beaker each  High-Density
Polyethylene
 Adjustable Staining Jar
Cover-Glass An unbreakable, high-density
Rack polyethylene Staining Jar with internal
Innovative design grooves and a shallow screw cap. The
saves you time and jar holds 5 single 1”x3” slides or 10
headache when you back-to-back slides vertically. Overall
are looking for a measurement: 41⁄2"(H) x 21⁄2"(dia)
cover-glass holder! 70319 Complete Unit 4/cs

This rack is machined from  Rectangular

polypropylene and fabricated
to accommodate a variety of
Staining Dish
cover-glasses in different Heavy, clear, soda lime glass
sizes. With The ability to stain dish, accept glass slide
simply adjust the holder to measure 75 x 25mm or 3 x 1”
fit your desired size and then This dish comes with glass
securing it by tightening the reset screws with the hex key (hex key is cover, holds 20 slides back-
included) all sizes of cover glasses are accommodated. Because the to-back horizontally. Inside dimensions: 3” x 2-5/16” x 1-3/16” deep.
holder is made from non ferrous material, it is microwaveable. The rack
70314-01 Rectangular Stain Dish each
accommodates 10 cover glasses, round, square or rectangular, adjusting
from 5 mm to 60 mm. Removable handle. Rack comes with two set of
holding rods. One set accommodate cover glasses from 5 to 25mm, and  Slide Staining
the other set for cover glasses from 5mm to 60mm. Rack;
Rack measures 1 ½” W x 1 ½” H (38 x 38 mm) Polypropylene
 Made from polypropylene;
72243 Adjustable Coverglass Rack each
autoclavable.
 Accommodates up to 20
slides 3x1” (76x26mm).
 With a removable snap-on
handle.
It measures: 23⁄4”x33⁄8”x13⁄16” 70321-20 70321-10
See page 576 for LockMailer Slide Jars  (without handle) (70x86x21mm)
70321-10 Staining Rack, Polypropylene each

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 519
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec14_518-531_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 7:57 PM Page 520

SECTION 14 Histology and Light Microscopy

EasyDip™ Slide Staining System ® Slide Staining
The EasyDip™ Slide Staining System has two components: a square Dish And
staining jar and a 12-position vertical slide staining rack. Jars can be Storage Box
loosely joined to each other laterally, therefore making sure they are kept
in the same order when moved around on the lab counter. They also are A universal slide rack and
available with five different colors to help better identity contents or container for Autoradiography
applications. and all other staining
techniques. It is molded from
black Polyethylene-
terephthalate (PET) plastic.
This unbreakable plastic has
many advantages over glass
in cytological and histological
laboratories. There are no
metals to corode. The rack
and dish are easy to clean and
are resistant to most laboratory
chemicals.
T Slide Rack: The slide rack has an open bottom for rapid drain-
The Staining Jar being made from acetal plastic will not break like ing when transfered. It holds 1”x3” (25mm x 76mm) slides in
slots numbered 1 to 25.
most glass jars do. It will resist attacks from most staining reagents
including alcohol and xylenes but not phenols. The wide stable base 71400 Slide Staining Rack each
offers greater stability while the inside is recessed, allowing for a smaller T Staining Dish: This unbreakable 3.7”(L) x 3.2”(W) x 1.9”(H) (94mm
reagent volume of only 80ml. Ideal for frozen sections, small jobs and x81mm x 49mm) staining dish has a light tight cover with a com-
special processes. Dimensions: 64mm x 76mm x 92mm (21⁄2 x 3 x 35⁄8). partment for the drying agent and a perforated slide partition to
The EasyDip™ Slide Staining support the drying agent. The partition has index numbers and a
Rack will hold up to 12 slides of surface for writing. Included is a removable clip which is placed on
25x75mm or 26x76mm (3x1") the top edge of the dish permitting staining solution to drain back
into the reservoir from the tilted rack. Staining takes place in com-
with a thickness of 1.0 to
plete darkness. The small size of the dish saves on staining liquids,
1.2mm. The lid completely developing fluids and intermediates since only 150ml is needed.
covers the EasyDip™ Slide Actual capacity is 250ml. The light tight lid is essential for evapo-
Staining Jar to minimize spill rated baths. The dish is easy to clean and especially suited for the
and evaporation. The handle is storage of enzymes. The cover will not jam in freezer storage.
permanently attached to the rack
71402 Staining Dish for One Rack each
for easy insertion or removal of
the slide. The base of the rack is placed in the vertical position to ensure T Storage Box: A black polystyrene storage box (not for staining)
the slides are in place, and are rotated sideways for easy slide removal. which can hold four of the slide racks. The box cover has a paper
Dimensions: 60 x 64 x 97mmH (21⁄4 x 21⁄2 x 33⁄4") index marked off in four sections, each numbered from
1 to 25. The box measures 71⁄2” x 65⁄8” x 11⁄2” high (19 x 17 x 5cm).
For your convenience, we offer EasyDipô Slide Staining Kit. Kit consists
of one Staining Jar and one Staining Rack, color white. 71404 Storage Box only each

Cat. # Description Qty

71385-W EasyDip™ Slide Staining Jar, White 2/cs ® Slide Staining Dish
71385-B EasyDip™ Slide Staining Jar, Blue 2/cs The dish is made from polymethylpentene “glass clear” for use with our
71385-G EasyDip™ Slide Staining Jar, Green 2/cs staining rack (Cat# 70321-10) shown above. It comes with two lids;
71385-P EasyDip™ Slide Staining Jar, Pink 2/cs
one lid should be used when the rack is not inserted. It measures:
71385-Y EasyDip™ Slide Staining Jar, Yellow 2/cs
71386-DR EasyDip™ Slide Staining Rack 2/cs 31⁄8”x4x33⁄8” (81x101x86.5mm)
71388-01 EasyDip Slide Staining Kit (Jar+Rack), White kit 70321-20 Staining Dish each

® EasyDip™
Stainless
Steel Holder
This holder is designed to
six EasyDip™ staining jars
together. Measures: 16
¾” L x 4” W x 1 ½” H
(425 x 102 x 38 mm)

Cat. # Description Vol. Qty

71388-50 EasyDip Stainless Steel Holder 1 each

520 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec14_518-531_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 7:57 PM Page 521

Histology and Light Microscopy SECTION 14

® Hellendahl
Staining Dish
The Hellendahl type dish for the staining
or use as a TLC developing chamber.
Holds up to 8 individual 3” x 1” (76 x 26
mm) slides, or 16 slides back-to-back.
These dishes are made from soda lime
glass.
The approximate inside dimensions: 76
® Vertical Slide Tray mm long x 25 mm wide x 75 mm deep.
A stainless steel tray with grooves that hold 76 x 26 mm (3” x 1”) Cat.# Description Pack
microscope slides vertically. Accommodates up to 60 slides. 70313-01 Hellendahl Staining Dish each

Cat.# Description Pack

71393-01 Vertical Slide Tray each ® Staining Dish;
20 Slide Unit
Ideal for immersing slides in
several solutions. The
removable glass slide rack has
an open bottom which allows
for rapid filling and draining. It
holds back to back 20 slides-
3” x 1” (76 x 25mm), or 3” x
11⁄2” (76 x 38mm) or 3” x 2” (76 x 51mm) in size. The staining dish
® Horizontal Slide Tray measures: 107mm(L) x 87mm(W) x 70mm(H) Our complete set consists
A stainless steel tray with grooves to hold various microscope slides of 1x Staining dish, 1x Cover, 1x Slide Rack and Handle. The slide rack
horizontally. Accommodates up to 60 slides. measures: 102mm (L) x 80mm (W) x 24mm (D).
Cat.# Description Pack 70312-20 20 Slide Unit Staining Dish Set
71394-01 Horizontal Slide Tray each 70312-21 Dish only each
70312-22 Cover only each
70312-23
® Staining Dishes 70312-24
Dish and Cover only
Slide Rack only
each
each
A variety of inexpensive staining dishes made from molded glass with 70312-25 Handle only each
and without fitted glass and Stainless Steel lids.
The following sizes are available: (Outside Measurements) ® 25 Slide Unit -
120 x 120 x 50 mm 105 x 86 x 75 mm Glass Staining
100 x 100 x 100 mm 200 x 100 x 100 mm Dish
A molded glass-staining dish
with a fitted glass lid.
Volume: 240 ml. The outside
measures 120mm x 120mm
x 75mm (H) (43⁄4" x 43⁄4" x
3"H) and the inside
measures 4" x 4" x 2". The stainless steel rack has a swing handle for
easy access and has grooves to take 76mm microscope slides, up to
40mm wide horizontally. Capacity: 25 slides. Complete set includes one
staining dish with lid and one swing handle rack.
Cat.# Description Pack
Cat.# Description Pack 71420-25 25-Slide Unit Staining Dish Complete Set Set
71423-DL Staining Dish, Fitted Glass Lid, 71420-DL 240ml Staining Dish and Lid only each
120 x 120 x 50 mm each 71420-SR 25 Slide Swing Handle Rack only each
71424-DL Staining Dish, Fitted Glass Lid,
105 x 86 x 75 mm each
71424-D Staining Dish only,
100 x 100 x 100 mm each
71424-L SS Lid for 71424-D each
71422-D Staining Dish Only,
200 x 100 x 100 mm each
71422-L SS Lid for 71422-D each
71422-DL Staining Dish and SS Lid,
200 x 100 x 100 mm each

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 521
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec14_518-531_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 7:58 PM Page 522

SECTION 14 Histology and Light Microscopy

® Staining
Dish for 30
Slide
These mix and match
components offer
greater flexibility in
meeting your
requirements. This
staining dish accommodates 16, 20 and 30 slide racks (listed below).
Slides range from 3x1" (75 x 25mm), 3" x 11⁄2" (75 x 38mm),
and 3 x 2" (75 x 38mm), and 3x2" (75 x50mm). The dish is made from
soda-lime glass. ® 30 - Slide Swing Handle Rack
The inside dimensions: 135mm (L) x 102mm (W) x 69mm (H). This 30 slide rack is made from non-tarnishing stainless steel and it is
Outside dimensions: 146mm (L) x 113mm (W) x 83mm (H) resistant to most staining solutions. The handle is permanently attached
30-slide staining set consists of one Staining Dish, one Lid, one 30- but it is swing-able to permitting for closure of the dish and easy
slide stainless steel Rack. insertion and removal of the slides.
Cat.# Description Pack ® 16/32 Slide Rack
70312-30 30-Slide Staining Dish Set This glass rack holds up to 26 single slides, or 32 slides back-to-back.
70312-31 30-Slide Staining Dish only each
The rack is made from soda-lime. Rack measures: 4” x 31⁄2” x 2”H
70312-32 Cover for 30-Slide Dish each
70312-33 30-Slide Staining Dish and Cover each Cat.# Description Pack
70312-34 30-Slide Stainless Steel Rack each
70312-35 16/32-slide Glass Rack with Handle each
® 20/40 Slide
Rack ® Fixed Handle Rack and Vertical Slide Rack
This glass rack holds 20
single slides, or 40 slides
back-to-back. This rack
is made from soda-lime
glass.

Fixed Handle Rack: A stainless steel rack with a fixed handle for use
with large slides. The rack is grooved to take 76mm microscope slides
Cat.# Description Pack up to 50mm wide horizontally. The rack accommodates up to 24 slides
70312-36 20/40-slide Glass Rack with Handle each
Vertical Slide Rack: A stainless steel rack with a fixed handle and grooves
to take 76 x 26mm microscope slides vertically for maximum use of space
® Staining and solution. The rack accommodates up to 48 slides (24 slides each row).
Dish; 50 Cat.# Description Pack
Slide Unit 71421-FR Fixed Handle 24-Slide Rack only each
71421-VR Vertical 48-Slide Rack only each
A stainless steel, slotted
rack, designed to hold ® Fixed Handle Rack and Vertical Slide Rack
50 slides individually in Fixed Handle Rack
a variety of sizes: 3”x1”, (#71422-FR): A stainless
3”x11⁄2”, and 3”x2”. The steel rack with fixed handle
unit measures approximately 200x105x83mm overall. The rack is made for use with larger slides.
from nontarnishable stainless steel and is resistant to most staining The rack is grooved to take
solutions. The handle is permanently attached allowing for closure of the 76mm microscope slides up
dish and for easy insertion and removal of the slides. The inside of the to 50mm wide horizontally.
staining dish measures: 186mm(L)x89mm(W)x68mm(H) The rack accommodates up
The complete set consists of 1x dish, 1x rack, and 1x cover. to 55 slides.
70312-50 50 Slide Unit Staining Dish Set Vertical Slide Rack (#71421-VR): A stainless steel rack with a fixed
70312-51 Dish only each handle and grooves to take 76 x 26mm microscope slides vertically for
70312-52 Cover only each maximum use of space and solutions.
70312-53 Dish and Cover only each
70312-54 Slide Rack only each Cat.# Description Pack
71422-FR Fixed Handle 55 Slide Rack only each
71421-VR Vertical 48-Slide Rack only each

522 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec14_518-531_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 7:58 PM Page 523

Histology and Light Microscopy SECTION 14

® Disposable Slide Staining
Tray Set

® Tissue-Tek® Slide Staining Set

Sakura Finetek - Designed for staining histological and cytological specimens. With up to 12 solution
wells, each deep enough for total immersions of 1x3” microscope slides. The set comes complete
with a metal frame and a snap on locking cover that protects from spills. The set consists of 10 white
polypropylene dishes, two green solvent resistant dishes, measures: 28”Lx9”W x 51⁄2H drain tray
covers. Additional staining dishes and 24-slide holders with removable handles are sold separately. Stain, Rinse and Dry on a Single Tray
Staining dish (white or green) inside measures: 38mm x 90mm x 90mm H — Then Simply Throw Away!
Cat.# Tissue-Tek Description Pack Stain, rinse, and dry your slides on a single
62540-01 4451 Slide Staining Set set working tray. Use the tray for a clean and fresh
62541-01 4456 Staining Dish, Green each working surface area for staining. These trays
62541-12 4456 Staining Dish , Green 12/pk
are made from Polypropylene / polyethylene
62542-01 4457 Staining Dish, White each
62542-12 4457 Staining Dish, White 12/pk blend and is very durable
62543-06 4465 24-Slide Holder w/Handle 6/pk Stain, rinse, and dry your slides on a single
working tray. Use the tray for a clean and fresh
working surface area for staining. The deep well
can hold liquid waste up to 38mL. Place eight
slides comfortably onto the base. With its
compact size, tray provides comfortable
transport from work area to sink. Convenient
pour spouts to easily dispose of unwanted liquid
waste. Unique dark lid protects slides when
used with fluorescents.
® Slide Staining Tray and Rack
The Tray measures 305mm (l) x 127mm (h) x
The unit consists of four-bar racks which
29.5mm The tray holds up to 8 slides
accommodates 22 slides (3x1”), and a slotted ® Coverslip Staining Rack maximum with a 38ml liquid capacity.
rack which accommodates 10 cover glasses. A
A stainless steel rack with grooves to take 22 x A complete set has 4 base trays and one lid.
stainless steel tray catches excess stain solution
22 mm coverslips vertically. It accommodates 25 The dark lid protects the slides for light sensitive
as it drains from the slides.
coverslips at a time. The rack measures 33⁄8" x applications
The unit measures:121⁄2”(L)x91⁄2”(W)x2”(H) 1"(W ) x 2"(H)
(32x24x5cm).
Cat.# Description Pack Cat. # Description Qty.
70323 Slide Staining Tray and Rack set 72241-01 Staining Rack, Vertically each 71147 Disposable Slide
Staining Tray Set set

Check out our Newest and Most Revolutionary Products...

Introducing manipulator...
For easily handling and mounting of
section ribbons.
Applications
T Frozen hydrated biological samples (CEMOVIS)
A cryosection showing vacuole, T Room temperature sectioning of water sensitive samples
mitochondria and filopodium of a
cultured cell. C. Peitsch and I. Dry resin sectioning of biological samples for chemical analysis
Iavocache, Inst. of Anatomy, Dry sectioning of industrial samples such as polymers
Bern. Bar 100 nm

For more information, see page 710 UUUUU

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 523
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec14_518-531_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 7:58 PM Page 524

SECTION 14 Histology and Light Microscopy

 Reagent Reservoirs  Sterile Biodegradable Reagent Resevoirs
Bio-Pure A special additive helps the plastic bio-degrade by allowing bacteria and
Disposable – Sterile and Non-Sterile other organisms to breakdown the complex molecular chain. This
varieties speeds up the process to reduce the resin to its natural components
within five years as opposed to 1,000 years or more.
Unique – “Trough within a trough”
maximizes reagent recovery. Biodegradable - Using a special additive to PET, our reservoirs will safely
degrade over time.
Convenience – Pour-off
spouts on all four corners. 100% Eco-Friendly - Each case of Bio-Pure Reservoirs are packed in
bio-degradable bags and recycled cardboard cases.
Stable – A wide base provides stability 100ml Sidecar Reservoir
and avoids spills.
Measurable – Graduated
marks on inside wall.
Sterile – Sterilized by gamma
irradiation.
Compatible – 25ml Reservoir with
divider accommodates eight channel
pipets on one side and one to four
channel pipets on the other. The divider
is also convenient for adding controls. 25ml reservoirs with divider
(left) and without (right)
Options – Offered in bulk cases or
individually wrapped (ideal for use in
clean rooms).

Sidecar Reservoir* Features:

 “Two-in-One design” for precise
reagent adding/mixing 70497-45 Bio-Pure 100 ml Biodegradable Reservoir - Sterile 100/case*
70497-46 Bio-Pure 25ml w/divider Biodegradable 100/case*
 Ideal and efficient to use with Reservoir - Sterile
small volume control and large vol- 70497-47 Bio-Pure 25ml Biodegradable Reservoir- Sterile 100/case*
ume test reagents 70497-48 Bio-Pure 50ml Biodegradable Reservoir - Sterile 100/case*
 “Sidecar” holds as little as 10ml of *Each Case of 100 is packaged as 10 packs of 10
liquid or as much as 20ml
 Reagent Reservoir
 Non-Sterile Cases of Reagent Resevoirs Cooler
Cat.# Description Qty.
70497-10 100ml Reservoir, Non Sterile 100/case* Benchtop Cooling of
70497-20 25ml Reservoir with divider, Non Sterile 100/case* Reagents
70497-30 25ml Reservoir, Non Sterile 100/case*
70497-35 50ml Reservoir, Non Sterile 100/case* ‘Keep Your Cool’ - Reagents are kept
70497-40 100ml Sidecar Reservoir, Non Sterile 100/case* at ~5°C for approximately 3 hours
Note: Each Case of 100 is packaged as 10 packs of 10 Reservoirs
* Patent Pending No Mess - No need for a
 Sterile Cases of Reagent Resevoirs cumbersome ice bath, the frozen gel
Cat.# Description Qty. is contained in a sealed molded cavity.
70495-10 100ml, Sterile 100/case*
Extra Time - Extends safe working time for temperature sensitive
70495-20 25ml with divider, Sterile 100/case*
70495-30 25ml, Sterile 100/case* reagents
70495-35 50ml Reservoir, Sterile 100/case* Extend benchtop working time and keep reagents cool up to 3 hours.
70495-40 100ml Sidecar, Sterile 100/case*
70496-10 100ml, individually wrapped 50/case Fitted - Each 100ml* Reservoir fits perfectly and snuggly onto the Cooler
70496-20 25ml with divider, individually wrapped 50/case ensuring uniform cooling
70496-30 25ml, individually wrapped 50/case 70497-50 100ml Reservoir Cooler each
70496-35 50ml Reservoir, individually wrapped 50/case 70497-51 50ml Reservoir Cooler each
70496-40 100ml Sidecar, individually wrapped 50/case 70497-52 25ml Reservoir Cooler each
*Each Case of 100 is packaged as 10 packs of 10

524 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec14_518-531_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 7:58 PM Page 525

Histology and Light Microscopy SECTION 14

® WINLAB Slide Staining Racks and Carriers
STAINLESS STEEL AND PLASTIC SLIDE RACKS
T They are very good chemically as well as thermally
T Has limited uses in microwave and solvents.
T When it comes to inserting the slide, easy to break the glass or
tear the tape on abrupt edges.
WINLAB SLIDE RACKS
T WINLAB Racks made from Poly-ceramic that maintains its
structural integrity to 200°C in any solvent while being
microwaved.
71430 - 71435
T WINLAB Racks last a lot longer than any other materials.
T Save time and money.
3. WINLAB 30-Slide
ADVANTAGES OF WINLAB SLIDE RACKS: Rack Carriers
T Made from Poly-ceramic with more than 40 years of product Steel wire hooks molded to the
development and state of the art molding technology. polypropylene handle to form Slide Rack
T Microwave Safety – in a distortion-free rack Hanger. The Slide Rack Hanger is very easy
to attach or detach from the WINLAB Slide
T Chemical Resistant – to all solvents below 200°C
Racks.
T Designed – for histology and cytology staining and coverslipping
T Quality Control – Every rack is tested for performance criteria 30 Slide Rack Carriers fit all Models LS-30
and dimensional accuracy, ensuring consistency, which makes and LSM-30 above.
WINLAB a name you can trust 4. WINLAB 20-Slide Rack
T WINLAB Racks fit the Tissue-Tek Tape Machines1 Carriers
T Easy Slide Insertion - V-Grooves slots Same construction as 30-Slide Rack Carrier
but they fit all LS-20 and LSM-20 Slide
71430-20 & 71431-20 Racks
5. WINLAB 30-Slide Rack Carrier for
InstrumeC/Dako Slide Racks
6. WINLAB 20-Slide Rack Carriers for
InstrumeC/Dako Slide Racks
7. WINLAB Slide Racks Wire Handles
Steel wire is bended to form a handle. Use these
Handles for manual staining and the Medite stainer.
Model W3-5 fits all WINLAB 30–Slide Racks
Model W3-6 fits all WINLAB 20-Slide Racks
8. WINLAB Plastic Handles
Model SR-20 for all 20 Slide Racks
Model SR-30 for all 30 Slide Racks
1. WINLAB 30-Slide Racks These handles are economical as well as microwave safe and solvent
WINLAB 30-Slide Racks available with two models: LS-30 and LSM-30 resistant. They may be used for all manual staining to avoid unwanted
chemical and heat contact.
The LS-30 – is held rigid by the carrier the same way as the
Sakura / Bayer models, preferred for Leica stainers. Handle positions: 1 Ordering:
x Vertical, 2 x 45 degrees, and 2 x 90 degrees.
Cat. # Description Qty
The LSM-30 version swivels by carrier as does the Medite stainless 71430-30 WINLAB 30-Slide Rack, Model LS-30 each
Steel racks and has the advantage of fitting Leica, VBS, Bayer, Sakura, 71431-30 WINLAB 30-Slide Rack, Model LSM-30 each
Medite, coverstaining machines and Sakura tape coverslipper. Handle 71430-20 WINLAB 20-Slide Rack, Model LS-20 each
position: Swivel 45 degrees 71431-20 WINLAB 20-Slide Rack, Model LSM-20 each
71433-B 30-Slide Rack Carrier, Blue each
WINLAB 30-Slide Racks measure: 41⁄2”L x 21⁄2”H x 13⁄8W 71435-B 20-Slide Rack Carrier, Blue each
(115 x 65 x 35 mm) 71433-Dako 30-Slide Rack Carrier, Blue,
for InstrumeC/Dako Slide Racks each
2. WINLAB 20-Slide Racks 71435-Dako 20-Slide Rack Carrier, Blue,
WINLAB 20-Slide Racks available in two models: LS-20 and LSM-20
for InstrumeC/Dako Slide Racks each
(LSM-20 is fit Medite stainers) 71437-30 Wire Handle for 30-Slide Rack each
WINLAB 20-Slide Rack is fitted to a Sakura Staining Dish, either Green 71437-20 Wire Handle for 20-Slide Rack each
or White and also fits most other staining dishes. 71437-40 SR-20 Plastic Handle for the 20-Slide Unit each
71437-50 SR-30 Plastic Handle for the 30-Slide Unit each
Racks measure 3” L x 2 ½ “ H x 1” W (77x64x25mm)

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 525
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec14_518-531_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 7:58 PM Page 526

SECTION 14 Histology and Light Microscopy

® Glass Slide Processing Holder
The holder is designed to
hold securely five 1x3”
microscope slides. It
comes with a handle for
easy manipulation. Up to
50 slides (10 holders) can
be processed at one time
in one staining vessel from
start to finish without
interruption.The slide
holder has two sides- one being black and the other white. This allows for
easy grouping and identification of the slides. The holder is ideal for both
frozen and paraffin sections.
The Slide Holder can be used to:
® StainTray™ - 1. Fix frozen sections in acetone.
Slide 2. Deparaffinize and rehydrate paraffin sections.
Staining 3. Isolate sections on the slide with our PAP Pen (#71310).
4. Immunostain, incubate and wash.
System 5. Counter stain.
An ideal device for 6. Mounting with medium.
immunohistochemistry The holder measures: 61⁄4”x 31⁄2” (159mm x 89mm) excluding the handle.
slide staining. The
71524-01 Glass Slide Processing Holder each
StainTray™ has a black base, made from tough ABS plastic, withstanding
71524-10 Glass Slide Processing Holder 10/pk
a wide range of chemicals (except chlorinated hydrocarbons). It will
accept up to 20 slides on four plastic rails covered with a polymer strip
to perfectly hold the slides even if the tray is held at an angle. When ® Immuno Stain Moisture Chamber
humidity is needed, the wells between the rails will hold the water
securely without splashing. Rails are raised not only to avoid water
touching the slides but also make the slides more easily retrievable. The
base will also hold excess stain solution that drips from the slides. Four
rubber feet add to the base for stability. Units are stackable to save
space.
Two covers are available:
T A clear cover, allowing for visual examination. Made from PETG
with temperature a range of -20ºC to 60ºC
T A black cover for fluorescent work. Made from ABS with a
temperature range of -80ºC to 80ºC. This low-cost, high precision moisture chamber for ten slides is another
Dimensions with the cover: innovative product from Evergreen.
20-Slide unit: 38 x 24 x 4.5 cm H (15 x 93⁄8 x 13⁄4” H) Each moisture chamber is divided into ten individual compartments with
10 Slide unit: 24 x 24 x 4.5 cm H (93⁄8 x 93⁄8 x 1”) approximately half-inch empty space between the compartments. When
This tray is not only suitable for routine staining requiring the chamber lid is closed, eight barrier dividers are placed into the
a humid chamber but is also ideal for hematology, empty spaces between the microscope slide compartments completely
cytology and microscopy laboratories isolating all compartments. This is a very desirable feature when doing
immuno staining.
Ordering:
The microscope slides are placed on four pedestal posts and four corner
EMS # Description Qty
71396-C 10-Slide StainTray™ with Clear Lid 1 posts each 0.460 inch (11.5 mm) high thus raising the surface of the
71396-B 10-Slide StainTray™ with Black Lid 1 slides approximately half-inch off the floor to keep the slides away from
71398-C Clear Lid only for 10-Slide StainTray 1 the water below and to make the slides easily retrievable (either by hand
71398-B Black Lid only for 10-Slide StainTray 1 or by forcep).
71397-C 20-Slide StainTray™ with Clear Lid 1
The chamber is fabricated out of heavy-duty polystyrene with an air-tight
71397-B 20-Slide StainTray™ with Black Lid 1
71399-C Clear Lid only for 20-Slide StainTray 1 design to keep moisture in. The chambers are designed to be stackable
71399-B Black Lid only for 20-Slide StainTray 1 in order to save counter and/or refrigerator space.
Available in clear, black and amber.
Dip Miser; Staining Cup See Specimen Prep.,
page 247 UUUUU 62010-35 Immuno Stain Moisture Chamber Clear each
62010-36 Immuno Stain Moisture Chamber, Amber each
For more Staining Molds and Supplies, See Grid 62010-37 Immuno Stain Moisture Chamber, Black each
Section, pages 145-149 UUUUU

526 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec14_518-531_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 7:59 PM Page 527

Histology and Light Microscopy SECTION 14

 General Supplies for Histology  Cutting Board;
Polypropylene
 Glasgow Washout Brushes This cutting board is autoclavable,
Four rows of white bristles locked in a unbreakable, non-absorbent, and
wooden handle for the cleaning of the easy to clean. It is a useful item in
bench-top, around microtomes and any laboratory. Measurements:
microscopes etc. The overall length is 300mm(L) x 210mm(W) x 9mm(H).
10". 63308 Cutting Board each
Cat.# Description Pack
65580-01 Glasgow Washout Brush, Hard each  Cork Sheets
65580-03 Glasgow Washout Brush, Medium each
65580-05 Glasgow Washout Brush, Soft each Resin bonded cork sheets for
65580-06 Glasgow Washout Brush, Very Soft each specimen preparation.

 Scratch Brushes
with Metal Ferrules
These pen shaped handles are available in Cat.# Desc. Pack
four different types. They are offered with 63303-28 Sheets, 305 x 305 x 1.6 mm 6/pk
metal ferrules for improved durability. Used
for fine deburring, polishing, as well as rust  Cork Boards
removal and the cleaning and removal of All resin bonded cork dissecting boards.
deposited wax. Cat.# Description Pack
The overall length is 41⁄4" long, and the 63304-01 Cork Board, 305 x 305 x 20mm each
brush is 1⁄8" wide. Refills are available and 63304-03 Cork Board, 450 x 450 x 20mm each
63304-02 Cork Board, 450 x 305 x 20mm each
are packaged 12/box.
Cat.# Brush Cat.#
Complete Brush Pack Material for Refill Pack
 Cork Discs
65582-01 each Steel Ferrules Brush 65582-R1 12/pk These discs are 20mm diameter and
65582-03 each Nylon Ferrules Brush 65582-R3 12/pk are 3mm thick. Perfect to be used with
65582-05 each Fiberglass Brush 65582-R5 12/pk a cryostat
65582-07 each Brass Brush 65582-R7 12/pk

Cat.# Description Qty/pk

63305 Cork Discs 100/pk

 Wood Handle Metal Brushes  Post Mortem

A four-row brush made in Germany from 0.10mm crimped steel or
brass wire set in a wooden handle. Excellent for use as a cleaning brush
Board Table
or for surface texturing on soft metals. The overall length is 85⁄8” Low profile made from
stainless steel post mortem
Catalog # Description Qty table, which includes #63302-
65585-S Steel Bristle Brush each
77 mortem boards. This board
65585-B Brass Bristle Brush each
is rested at a slight gradient to
 Camel Hair Brushes aid drainage away from the operator. The table has rubber feet to prevent
Useful for dusting and cleaning embedding movement and a removable perforated tray is provided for specimen fluid
center, balances, and sensitive instruments. drainage, as well as storage area for dissecting instruments. The overall
Camel hair is mounted on wooden handle with table measures 668 x 313 x 108 mm (263⁄8 x 123⁄8 x 31⁄8”), The board size
metal ferrule. Available with three styles: is: 454 x 307 x 18mm (173⁄4” x 121⁄8 x 11⁄16”), Tray size: 307 x 105 x 18mm
(121⁄8 x 41⁄8 x 11⁄16”).
 Round, camel hair portion has full body
and slightly pointed tip. Brush size 3⁄4" Cat.# Description Qty
diameter x 11⁄2" long. Overall length is 9". 63301 Post Mortem Board Table each
 Paint brush style 1, camel hair portion is
1" long x 1" wide. Overall 6" long.
 Paint brush style 2, camel hair portion is
11⁄4" long x 2" wide. Overall 81⁄4" long.

Cat. # Description Pack

65575-01 Camel Hair Round Brush each
65576-01 Camel Hair Paint Brush, Style 1 each
65577-01 Camel Hair Paint Brush, Style 2 each

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 527
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec14_518-531_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 7:59 PM Page 528

SECTION 14 Histology and Light Microscopy

 DissecTable™ Set  The EMS DispoCut™ Dissecting Board
The first and only reversible dissecting table for the laboratory
The DispoCut™
 The DissecTable™ Board Base Disposable Dissecting
Made from high impact polystyrene Board is strong yet
inexpensive enough to
To make dissecting more
throw away. It is
comfortable, this heavy duty base
especially developed to
is used to elevate the DissecTable™
provide a clean, safer
Board to the right height. The bases
and more efficient way
are stackable and will not move
of handling infectious
sideways during the dissecting
tissue specimens for the
work. The base will also retain
pathologist. It can be
excess fluid if necessary.
used on both sides, a great money saving feature. Printed with helpful
Dimensions: 481 mm x 656 mm x 91 mm (191⁄4” x 261⁄4 “x 33⁄8”) imperial and metric dimensional scales in inches, centimeters and
millimeters. Available in three sizes to accommodate small biopsies to
 The DissecTable™ Board large gross anatomy procedures.
Made from high-density polyethylene DispoCut™ is extrusion made using a copolymer resin in order to
A new and unique approach increase impact and high and low temperature performance. Copolymer
makes this dissecting board more resins are also used because they retain the ability to be flexed an
convenient thanany other board unlimited number of times without breaking. Chemically, DispoCut is
found on the market today. It is no inert. At regular temperatures most oils, solvents and water have no
longer necessary to buy different effect, allowing it to perform under adverse weather conditions or as a
sizes as this board offers a large product component exposed to harsh chemicals.
surface on one side and two smaller ones on the other side. Each surface has many conveniently located rulers including seven
Made from heavy-duty thick polyethylene, it will last for years to come dimensional circles from 4 to 16 mm in diameter and five larger ones
without changing shape, bending or swelling. In order to contain fluids, from 2 to 6 cm in diameter. Surface will not dull knifes. Perfect for use
a drain groove is carved all around the edge of the DissecTable™ with dissecting pins. All sizes of DispoCut™ Disposable Dissecting
On one side, you will find a large cutting area including dimensional Boards are ideal for pathology labs, medical schools, classroom
scales in inches and centimeters, along with a 60 x 80 mm grid made dissections, forensic labs, medical research labs, pharmaceutical labs,
of 48 x 10 mm squares. Six dimensional circles are also printed from surgery and more.
1/8 to 5/8 in. and 4 to 14 mm in diameter. Temperature performance range: -17 °F to 160 °F, Melting point: 162
Flip it over and the other size, others two cutting boards haft the size °C, 324 °F
with the same dimensional features printed on each one of them. All Sterilization: DispoCut™ may be wiped down with alcohol with no effect
corners have rubber feet giving more stability to the working surface. on the material. There are many types of autoclaves on the market.
Dimensions: 575 mm x 400 mm x 12.5mm (23” x 16” x 1⁄2”) DispoCut™ is being autoclaved (in excess of 3 years) in many
situations. There are some extreme settings which will be damaging and
 The DissecTable™ we suggest a trial to determine performance in your equipment. Ethylene
Set oxide gas sterilization has no effect of an kind on DispoCut™ and may
The set is consists of be repeated any number of times.
DissecTable™ Board Base and
63308-20 DispoCut™ 6 x 8 in. (152 x 203 mm) 24/pk
DissecTable™ Cutting Board 63308-30 DispoCut™ 9 x 12 in. (229 x 305 mm) 24/pk
63308-40 DispoCut™ 12 x 19 in. (305 x 483 mm) 12/pk
Ordering:
Cat.# Description Qty
63309-DT DissecTable Board Base each  Dissecting Boards
63309-DB DissecTable™ Board each Made from 5⁄8” thick high-density
63309-01 DissecTable™ Set each poly-ethylene. A white
background with X,Y scales in
 Disposable centimeters offers a quick
Dissecting Board orientation and sizing of the
Manufactured from white, water specimens. It is chemical and stain resistant and comes with a spill
resistant cardboard and sponge control border and rubber feet to prevent spillage and sliding. To secure
sandwich. The board measures: the specimen to the board, styrene-capped pins are available(optional).
297 x 420 x 5mm (10” x 16” x Boards are available in two sizes.
3”) Measurements: Board B 13”(L)x11”(W)x5⁄8”(H)(33x28x1.6cm)
Board C 23”(L)x16”(W)x5⁄8”(H)(58.4x40.6x1.6cm)
Cat.# Description Qty
63306 Disposable Dissecting Board 10/pk 63307-20 Dissecting Board B each
63307-30 Dissecting Board C each
63307-50 Dissecting Pins 100/bx

528 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec14_518-531_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 7:59 PM Page 529

Histology and Light Microscopy SECTION 14

 Dissecting Pan and Mat  Petri Dish
This dissecting pan is made Incubation Trays
from aluminum, which is rust For the organization of all of
free and easy to clean. It your Petri dishes. Increases
comes with a removable your incubator capacity.
reusable vinyl pad, which
accepts dissecting as well as These trays are stackable and
push-pins to hold down your can be autoclaved. They are
specimen during dissecting. designed to hold five 10 cm
The pad measures 13 1/8” x 9 diameter or fifteen 6 cm
3/8” x 2 ¼” thick diameter Petri dishes. Each
tray comes with two large label areas for critical sample identification by
63313 Dissecting Pan & Vinyl Mat each either using a marker or a label.
 Instrument Trays Features:
With Cover  Increase incubator capacity
Natural polypropylene. Steam  Transport and store Petri dishes with ease while maintaining
autoclavable at 250°F even CO2 circulation
(121°C) Smooth with  Easy sample grouping and identification
rounded corners. They are  Autoclavable
easily cleaned and sterilized. Made from polypropylene, the tray measures
The cover protects the instruments from contamination. 97⁄8” x 95⁄16” x 13⁄8” high (251 x 237 x 35 mm).
Inside bottom dimensions: Cat.# Description Pack
71395-03 Petri Dish Incubation Tray 3/pk.
 Tray 1: 4”x7”x2 ⁄8” deep (102x178x54mm)
1

 Tray 2: 43⁄4”x9”x31⁄4” deep (121x229x83mm)

 Tissue-Tek® Microtome Waste Collection Tray
 Tray 3: 6”x11”x5” deep (152x279x127mm)
Sakura Finetek - This
unique tray assists in the
63312-01 Instrument Tray 1 each
63312-02 Instrument Tray 2 each collection of all of the waste
63312-03 Instrument Tray 3 each trimmings from paraffin
blocks, therefore this
system helps eliminate
 Tray, Dispensing slippery hazards caused by
These trays, which are 1⁄4” paraffin shavings on the
thick, are fabricated from floor or the work area. The
either low or high density set includes a durable plastic tray, bag holder and 25 disposable waste
polyethylene. They come collection bags.
complete with a poly- Cat.# Tissue-Tek Description Pack
ethylene dispensing valve 63318-01 4657 Waste Collection Set set
which is located as close to 63318-25 658 Waste Collection Bag 250/cs
the bottom as possible on the corner.
The tray is suitable for specimen preparation procedures.  Tissue-Tek®
Cat.# Inside Dimensions Material Pack Cold Plate
63007-01 12”x16”x3”Deep LDPE each
63007-02 16”x20”x4”Deep LDPE each Sakura Finetek - This cold
63007-03 18”x22”x4”Deep LDPE each plate is made from a poly-
63007-04 22”x26”x4”Deep HDPE each styrene top and base
molded together for a tight
 Instrument seal, with an additional
Styrofoam insulator at the
Trays base to prolong cooling and prevents moisture accumulation. The plate
Blue polyethylene. freezes in about 4 hours in a freezer and the surface remains cold for up
 These deep trays keep to 3 hours. The plate is ideal in chilling and preparing paraffin blocks for
fluids from splashing. sectioning at the microtome or for other laboratory procedures. Not for
 Has a smooth surface and rounded Available in 2 sizes: use with organic solvents such as toluene, xylene, acetone. It holds up
internal corners for easy cleaning.  Size 1 measures: to 24 cassettes or embedding rings. Measures11”(L)x51⁄2”(W)x1”(H).
 It is lightweight and noiseless as 20”x12”x6” deep Packed 6 cold plates and
compared to heavy metal trays.  Size 2 measures: 1 insulator base per package; 4 packages per case.
213⁄8”x151⁄2”x6” deep Cat.# Tissue-Tek Description Pack
62536-01 4650 Cold Plate 1 pack
63310-02 Instrument Tray 1, 6” Deep each
62536-04 4650 Cold Plate 4 Packs/cs
63310-06 Instrument Tray 2, 6” Deep each

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 529
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec14_518-531_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 7:59 PM Page 530

SECTION 14 Histology and Light Microscopy

 Cotton Gloves  Gloves; Lint Free,  Lightweight Cotton
Clean-room Inspector Gloves

These well tailored, high quality gloves are made Finest quality, stretch nylon, one size fits all. These gloves are un-hemmed and lint-free. They
from 100% cotton. They offer softness and Cat. # Size Qty. are tailored cotton gloves which are ideal for
comfort. A perfect choice for handling photographs. 71090 Mens 6 pair/pk inspection jobs. These gloves are available in
Cat. # Size Qty. 71092 Womens 6 pair/pk one-size fits all for either men or women.
71118-01 Small 6prs/pk
Cat. # Size Qty.
71118-03 Medium 6prs/pk
71119-01 Women 12/pk
71118-05 Large 6prs/pk
71119-05 Men 12/pk

 Gloves; Latex Exam Gloves With Aloe Vera and Vitamin E

Made from 100% natural latex with the addition of Product specification
Aloe Vera and Vitamin E, offering the softness, Mean Tensile
tactile sensitivity and skin protection. Economical Strength: Before aging 24Mpa
ambidextrous style, beaded cuff, and are After aging 20Mpa
Elongation: Before aging 750% min.
chemically resistant to acids, alcohols, ketones and
After aging 700% min.
alkalis. Packed in a convenient dispenser box, Thickness Finger 0.15mm ± 0.01mm
100/box. Non-sterile. Available either with Palm 0.14mm ± 0.01mm
powdered (biologically cornstarch dusting, ~ Cuff 0.11mm ± 0.01mm Latex Conform®
2mg/glove) or powder-free gloves.

Cat. # Size Qty. Cat. # Size Qty. Cat. # Size Qty.

Light Powdered Latex Gloves Powder-Free Latex Gloves Powder-Free Latex Gloves
71110-01 Small 100/bx 71114-01 Small 100/bx with Aloe-Vera and Vitamin E
71110-20 Small 10bxs /cs 71114-20 Small 10bxs/cs 71114-50 Small 100/bx
71111-01 Medium 100/bx 71115-01 Medium 100/bx 71114-51 Small 10bxs/cs
71111-20 Medium 10bxs/cs 71115-20 Medium 10bxs/cs 71115-50 Medium 100/bx
71112-01 Large 100/bx 71116-01 Large 100/bx 71115-51 Medium 10bxs/cs
71112-20 Large 10bxs/cs 71116-20 Large 10bxs/cs 71116-50 Large 100/bx
71116-51 Large 10bxs/cs Latex Powder Free

 Nitrile Exam Textured Gloves

Powder-Free Green Gloves with Aloe Vera
Made from 100% synthetic nitrile, contains no latex. It is an extremely tough glove yet gentle on the hand.
It offers superior textile strength and they are puncture resistant when compared to other similar thickness
of latex or vinyl gloves. There are no natural rubber protein allergens as is present in natural latex rubber
gloves. With the addition of Aloe Vera, the powder-free gloves will provide the user with superior comfort,
excellent flexibility and dexterity. Textured gloves provide a positive grip on wet and or dry surfaces. The
nitrile compound provides a broad range of hand protection against accidental chemical splashes.

Product specification
Type: Nitrile exam gloves – non-sterile - Textured Cat. # Size Qty. Cat. # Size Qty.
Color: Blue (w/o Aloe Vera), Green (with Aloe Vera) Powder-Free Nitrile Gloves Powder-Free Nitrile Gloves with Aloe-Vera
Mean Tensile 71106-20 Small 100/bx 71107-20 Small 100/bx
Strength: Before aging 24Mpa 71106-21 Small 10bxs/cs 71107-21 Small 10bxs /cs
After aging 20Mpa 71106-30 Medium 100/bx 71107-30 Medium 100/bx
Elongation: Before aging 740% min. 71106-31 Medium 10bxs/cs 71107-31 Medium 10bxs/cs
After aging 730% min. 71106-40 Large 100/bx 71107-40 Large 100/bx
Thickness Finger 0.21mm ± 0.03mm 71106-41 Large 10bxs/cs 71107-41 Large 10bxs/cs
Palm 0.14mm ± 0.03mm 71106-50 X-Large 100/bx 71107-50 X-Large 10bxs/cs
Cuff 0.11mm ± 0.03mm 71106-51 X-Large 10bxs/cs 71107-51 X-Large 100/bx

530 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec14_518-531_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 7:59 PM Page 531

Histology and Light Microscopy SECTION 14

 Vinyl Exam White Gloves SAFETY TIP
Made from synthetic polyvinyl chloride,
The standard latex surgical gloves do not
powder-free, ambidextrous, medical grade offer adequate skin protection when handling
non-sterile gloves, Seamless, chemical glutaraldehyde. Nitrile or Neoprene gloves provide
resistant and excellent sensitivity, these vinyl the protection that is needed. However, dexterity
gloves offer a unique balance of softness is inhibited with these gloves. Therefore, double-
flexibility and strength. gloving with latex gloves is recommended for
delicate work.
Product specification Cat. # Size Qty. Raewyn Eager, Dept. of Zoology, Auckland
Type: Vinyl exam gloves – non-sterile – 71108-10 Small 100/bx
University. EM News.
Ring Roll Bead Cuffs 71108-12 Small 10bxs /cs
Newsletter of the New Zealand Society for
Color: White 71108-20 Medium 100/bx
Mean Tensile
Electron Microscopy. No. 24, Dec. 1992
71108-22 Medium 10bxs/cs
Strength: 9Mpa 71108-30 Large 100/bx
Elongation: 740% min. 71108-32 Large 10bxs/cs
Thickness Finger 0.10mm ± 0.01mm 71108-40 X-Large 100/bx
Palm 0.10mm ± 0.01mm 71108-42 X-Large 10bxs/cs SAFETY TIP
Overall Length, mm: 235 (Small & Medium),
In the past several years there has been
245 (Large & x-Large)
documentation in the medical literature of
numerous cases of latex allergy in medical and
 Cut-Resistant Gloves; other laboratory personnel. Many people are
experiencing itchy hands, shortness of breath or
Safeknit™ other signs of allergic reactions when they use
The comfortable choice when choosing a latex gloves in their laboratory work. Some people
high performance cut resistant glove. are changing to powder free gloves with some
Safeknit is a blend of abrasion-resistant relief; however, other people get relief only after
Spectra® fiber and other synthetics. The mix changing to another type of glove.
of these fibers form a rugged cut resistant E. Ann Ellis, Ellis EM Consulting Service,
barrier that offers the histologist sensitivity 1316 SW 61st Terrace, Gainesville, FL. 32607
for manipulation but with extreme comfort
and productivity.

NOTE: These gloves are neither puncture proof nor water resistant. They should not be used to protect against intentional For Skin Protection, see Dermaplus
cutting. Avoid use near moving blades. For applications which are related to fluids where a water resistant glove is required,
we recommend either double gloving or using Nitrile Gloves, (Cat # 71106-71109 or 71068.) Safety Section page 1106 

71066-06 Medium Duty Safeknit™ Glove Size 6 each For our complete line of
71066-07 Medium Duty Safeknit™ Glove Size 7 each Protective Gloves and Supplies,
71066-08 Medium Duty Safeknit™ Glove Size 8 each
71066-09 Medium Duty Safeknit™ Glove Size 9 each
See pages 948-949 
71066-10 Medium Duty Safeknit™ Glove Size 10 each
71066-11 Medium Duty Safeknit™Glove Size 11 each

 Finger Cots; Latex—  Gloves Dispenser

Powder Free  Easy to mount with
keyholes, tape
Inexpensive, expandable finger cots.
 Accepts most brands
Seamless. Protective dexterity
of gloves
without covering the entire hand.
 Available either top loading
Powderless, non-rolled. 31⁄2mil
or side loading
(0.0030"), 23⁄4" (40mm)L.
 Color white and clear front

EMS # Description, (L x W x H)
64365-01 Single Gloves Dispenser, 11.5” x 4.75” x 5.25” each
64365-02 Double Gloves Dispenser, 11.50” x 4.75” x 10.25” each
64365-03 Triple Gloves Dispenser, 11.5” x 4.75” x 15.25” each

Marking Pens, See Specimen Preparation,

pages 310-311 
Fro-Marker - A pen for use with frozen sections See
71130 Latex Finger Cots Small 1 gross/pk Specimen Preparation, page 309 
71131 Latex Finger Cots Medium 1 gross/pk Para-Marker - A pen for use with paraffin sections
71132 Latex Finger Cots Large 1 gross/pk See Specimen Preparation, page 309 

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 531
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec14_532-539_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 9:13 PM Page 532

SECTION 14 Histology and Light Microscopy

® Tissue Marking Dyes ® Manomark™ Pen
Writes on all plastic, glass,
metal, wool, paper and cloth,
including PTFE, fluoropolymer
resins. With its precision seal
valve the pens life is preserved
and as well it allows for a
smooth flow of ink even if it’s
left uncapped. Once dry, the
solvent base ink is
temperature resistant from 0ºC to 155ºC (32ºF – 310ºF)> Markings are
insoluble in water or hydrocarbons, resist many solvents, and are easily
removed with alcohol.
72127-AS Manomark Pen Assorted
A specialized dye for marking tissue biopsies and pathology specimens. (4 black, 2 red, 2 green, 2 blue, 2 orange) 12/pk
72127-B1 Manomark, Black only each
T For use with frozen or fixed tissues. 72127-B12 Manomark, Black only 12/pk
T Permanently mark the margins of excised surgical specimens
for exact orientation.
T Specially formulated binding pigment that evenly coats the
® Solvent-Resistant Pens & Teeny Writers
tissue without penetrating the tissue surface. Solvent Resistant Pens feature
T The marking dyes do not interfere with diagnostic interpretation due an ultra-permanent ink.
to the fact colors are not similar to standard histopathology dyes. T Resistant to xylene, alcohol, acetone and formalin
T Fast drying, easy-to-use, and ideal for work with frozen sectioning. T Ideal for histology and cytology
T Dyes are available individually (8oz/bottle) or as a set of a 2oz T Markings will not run on embedding cassettes
per bottle with the following colors: blue, black, red, yellow, or frosted/painted slides and labware, even after
green, purpleand orange. The set also comes with 50 applicator repeated washes and solution treatments
sticks and a wooden storage case. T Remove markings with acetic acid, an ethanol/xylene
Cat.# Description Pack mixture or paraffin. Testing advised before use
63020-01 Tissue Marking Dye Set 7 x 2 oz
Teeny Writers are perfect general use lab markers.
63020-BK Black Marking Dye Refill 8 oz
63020-BL Blue Marking Dye Refill 8 oz T The Twin-Tip Teeny Writer has a fine tip and an ultra fine tip
63020-YL Yellow Marking Dye Refill 8 oz T The original Teeny Writer has an extra fine tip
63020-RD Red Marking Dye Refill 8 oz T Both are ideal for writing on Tough-Tags and Tough-Spots
63020-GR Green Marking Dye Refill 8 oz T Use for labeling samples stored at room temperature
63020-OR Orange Marking Dye Refill 8 oz and not exposed to chemicals and/or caustic agents
63020-PUR Purple Marking Dye Refill 8 oz
The Twin-Tip Too laboratory marking pen provides a
® Wet Surface Pen new option for all writing needs. It is the best of both
worlds. It is resistant to most mild laboratory chemicals
and gives the flexibility of a twin tip pen for fine tip writing
on small tubes and labels. Keep it close by utilizing the Twin-Tip
included handy pocket clip. Teeny Writer
Testing is recommended.
Cat. # Description Color Tip (Millimeters) Qty.
62053-B Solvent Resistant Black Extra Fine (0.6) each
62053-R Solvent Resistant Red Extra Fine (0.6) each
62054-B Twin-Tip Black Fine/Ultra Fine (0.7/0.3) each
62052-B Teeny Writer Black Extra Fine (0.4) each

® Securline II
This unusual pen will write clearly on wet surfaces, such as marking slots
on wet Southern, Northern, and Western blots Use it for marking Marker
alignment dots on blotting filters placed over agar plates containing Fine tip, ultra permanent
bacterial colonies or phage plaques. Mark lanes on wet plots prior to ink that resists solvents
cutting the filter into strips to be incubated separately with different such as xylene, alcohol,
antisera or probes. It can be used to correct or write on wet labels that acetone and formalin.
were kept in a water bath, in liquid nitrogen or in a freezer at 0 degrees. Ideal for histology and cytology labs.
The Wet Surface Pen is extremely useful for marking filters during Cat.# Description Qty
processing under water-based buffers. The pen can, of course, also can 72107-B1 Securline II Marker, Black each
be used to write on dry paper as a standard ball pen. 72107-B10 Securline II Marker, Black 10/bx
72107-R1 Securline II Marker, Red each
72128 Wet Surface Pen, Black each 72107-R10 Securline II Marker, Red 10/bx

532 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec14_532-539_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 9:13 PM Page 533

Histology and Light Microscopy SECTION 14

® WRITE-ON™ Marker Pens
These pens are made from specially formulated ink and are to be used on anterior surfaces
as well as sides of histology cassettes. The ink will dry almost instantly and withstands
temperatures up to 195°C and is resistant to solvents.
72106-01 Write-On™ Marker Pen, Red each
72106-10 Write-On™ Marker Pen, Red 10/pk

® Marker Pen; Markal Sharpie

Smear resistant, water-resistant, fast-drying no. 15 fine line. Usable on glass, porcelain,
metals, and plastics.
72110 Black Felt Tip each
72120 Black Felt Tip box/12
72130 Red Felt Tip each
72140 Red Felt Tip box/12

® Slide Markers - SHUR/Mark™

A perfect marker designed to mark glass slides and cassettes with priming action; comes
with a replaceable felt tip.
T Quick drying; will not smudge or T Consistent ink flow with effortless
smear. writing.
T Chemically resistant; especially to alco- T Replaceable priming tip, which elimi-
hol, xylene and many other solvents. nates clogged and/or worn out tips.
TO USE: Simply depress the tip until the tip is saturated with ink.
72100-01 Shur/Mark Black each
72100-12 Shur/Mark Black 12/pk
72102-01 Shur/Mark Red each
72102-12 Shur/Mark Red 12/pk
72104-12 Shur/Mark Replacement Tips 12/pk

® Slide Markers - Histo-Mark Pen

The Histo-Mark pen is designed to work like a pen. It is a fine-line marker that can be used
on any surface. The Histo-Mark pen is solvent resistent, especially to alcohol, acetone,
xylene, xylene subsite and toluene. Marking quality remains consistent throughout the life of
the ink barrel.
72155-01 Histo-Mark Pen each
72155-12 Histo-Mark Pen 12/bx

® High Opacity – Paint Markers

Constructed aluminum barrel, actuating ball and hard felt tips, these markers permanently
cover nearly any surface. Weatherproof. Resistant to alcohol and acetone. Contain xylene.
Markers are available in black, red and white with bullet tips. Except model 130, it writes
like a pen with white ink for marking on dark surfaces, including carbon tabs, which is use
in SEM specimen mounting purpose.
Cat. # Description Pack
72167-R1 Small Marker, Red each
72167-R2 Large Marker, Red each
72168-W1 Pen-like Marker, White each
72168-W2 Large Marker, White each For our complete line of Light Boxes,
72168-B1 Small Marker, Black each See Photography section, pages 742-743
72169-B2 Large Marker, Black each

® StatMark Pen
Permanent ink in an ultrafine tip is ideal for labeling microscope slides and cassettes.
StatMark Pens are made of rigid nylon that allow for precise hand marking on glass slides
as well as on most tissue embedding cassettes. This quick drying ink is highly resistant to
aqueous based stains, alcohols, xylene and xylene substitutes. StatMark Pens do not dry
out easily and last twice as long as many of the leading 'laboratory' pens.
Cat. # Description Pack
72109-01 StatMark Pen each
72109-12 StatMark Pen 12/box

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 533
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec14_532-539_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 9:14 PM Page 534

SECTION 14 Histology and Light Microscopy

® Transport/Sample Collection Vials and Tubes

® 1. Transport Vials ® 2. Transport Tubes
Transport Vials - ideal for sample Transport Tubes—Ideal for rapid
collection and storage. Made from virgin sample collection when a plug cap
polypro-pylene, they are available in three is needed. Made from virgin
sizes, and come either sterile or non- polypropylene (PP) or polystyrene
sterile. Graduations provide convenient and (PS). They also work well in
accurate references. 5 ml and 10 ml sizes Olympus automated testing
are supplied with white screw cap; 50 ml equipment. Tube volume is 12 ml.
are supplied with blue cap that has a Plug caps are available in yellow
molded-in sealing ring for a leak-proof fit. color and you can choose from
T Conical tubes with freestanding skirts hollow top (HT) or hollow bottom
T Tubes are autoclavable (HB)
T Write-on area on side

Cat.# Description Pack Cat.# Description Pack

63034-05 5 ml Transport Vials with white caps, Non-sterile 4x250/pk 63036-PS 12 ml PS Conical Bottom w/skirt Tube, no cap 1000/pk
63035-05 5 ml Transport Vials with white caps, sterile 20x25/pk 63036-PP 12 ml PP Conical Bottom w/skirt Tube, no cap 1000/pk
63034-10 10 ml Transport Vials with white caps, Non-sterile 4x250/pk 63037-PS 12 ml PS Flat Bottom Tube, no cap 1000/pk
63035-10 10 ml Transport Vials with white caps, sterile 20x25/pk 63037-PP 12 ml PP Conical Bottom Tube, no cap 1000/pk
63034-50 50 ml Transport Vials with blue caps, Non-sterile 500/pk 63040-HT Hollow Top Plug Cap, yellow 1000/pk
63035-50 50 ml Transport Vials with white caps, sterile 20x25/pk 63040-HB Hollow Bottom Plug Cap, yellow 1000/pk

® Large, Screw Cap ® EZFlip™ Conical

Centrifuge Tubes Centrifuge Tubes
Premium quality general pur-pose (Patented*)
centrifuge tubes with printed
graduations T Leak-proof – Hinged, flip-cap
design.
SUPERIOR CLARITY
T One handed opening and closing.
& DURABILITY
T Good chemical resistance –
T 50ml: Made from premium
low protein binding.
polypropylene copolymer
for excellent chemical T 15 ml and 50 ml – Sterile.
resistance; withstands T Freezer/Refrigerator capability.
temperature extremes of –40°C
to 125°C; high centrifugation of T Clarified polypropylene – good
6000RCF with exceptional clarity. visibility of contents.
T 15ml: Available in poly-styrene T Easily maintain aseptic conditions.
or polypropylene. Polystyrene T Compatible with all major centrifuges and rotors.
offers glass-like clarity and can
withstand 1800RCF.
Polypropylene has excellent EzFlip™ Conical Centrifuge tubes offers a safer alternative to screw cap
chemical resistance and can tubes. A patented closure system improves ergonomics and versatility.
withstand 6400 RCF. An improved tube and cap design increases mechanical strength to
These tubes are available in bulk, bag pack, or in expanded styrene withstand aggressive centrifugal forces. The 15 ml tube’s maximum
foam trays. As well they are available non-sterile or sterile relative centrifugal force (RCF) is 8,500 x g, and the 50ml tube’s
maximum RCF is 9,500 x g.
Cat.# Volume Material Sterile Pack
64763-01 15ml Polystyrene Sterile Tray 50 Tubes are graduated and feature a writing area. All EZFlip™ tubes are
64764-01 15ml Polypropylene Sterile Tray 50 available in rack or bag of 50, case of 500.
64763-02 15ml Polystyrene Sterile Bag 25 Ordering:
64764-02 15ml Polypropylene Sterile Bag 25
Cat.# NUNC # Description Size, mm Qty/ Qty/
64763-10 15ml Polystyrene Non Sterile Bag 500
Dia x L Pack Case
64764-20 15ml Polypropylene Non Sterile Bag 500
63030-25 362695 PP,15 ml EZFlip™ Conical 17 x120 50 -----
64760-01 50ml Co-Polymer Sterile Tray 25
Centrifuge Tube, Rack
64760-10 50ml Co-Polymer Sterile Bag 25
63030-5C 362695 PP,15 ml EZFlip™ Conical 17 x120 ----- 500
64760-20 50ml Co-Polymer Sterile 20 bags/25/pk
Centrifuge Tube, Rack
64761-01 50ml Co-Polymer Non Sterile Tray 25
63031-25 362697 PP, 50 ml EZFlip™ Conical 30 x115 25 -----
64762-01 50ml Co-Polymer Non Sterile Bag 25
Centrifuge Tube, Rack
64762-20 50ml Co-Polymer Non Sterile Bag 500
63031-5C 362697 PP, 50 ml EZFlip™ Conical 17 x120 ----- 500
Centrifuge Tube, Rack

534 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec14_532-539_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 9:14 PM Page 535

Histology and Light Microscopy SECTION 14

® The B.O.P.® Kit* (Biopsy Organizer Plates)
Introducing the World’s First Single Specimen Container for Multiple Endoscopic Biopsies
Simply stated, a BOP kit is a secure plate of specialized, easy to open and reseal biopsy specimen containers
in an anatomical map format.
®The BOP Kit: ® The BOP Kit Light Box
The BOP Starter Kit includes 1 case of 12 BOP Kits and An Essential Accessory for both GI/Endo Department
2 of the B.O.P Kit Table Top Light Box; one for use in and the Receiving Lab
the GI/Endoscopy specimen collection area, and the
other for use in the laboratory for enhanced
®The BOP Kit Slim Light Pad:
This light box is ultra thin, only 1⁄2" (14mm) thick. This
visualization in specimen retrieval.
new technology provides bright, even 5400K light for
® The BOP Kit Table Top Light Box illuminating specimen containers and easily finding What Can A B.O.P Kit Do
Provides bright, even light for illuminating specimen even small specimen material with the clear plastic For My GI Department?
containers and enhancing visualization for specimen 8" x 10" illumination panel. 12 VAC adapter provided. T Streamlines and Simplifies sub-
retrieval via the 8" x 10" illumination area. Runs on “D” * Product of 3GEN SCIENTIFIC – Designed by a pathologistk mission of multiple biopsy spec-
cell batteries or an AC Adapter (sold separately). imens
T Reduces the risk of misidentifi-
Cat.# Description Qty.
cation of specimens
63920-01 BOP Starter Kit, 12 kit/cs with 2 Light Boxes each
63921-01 BOP Kit for Lower GI, 12 Kit/case each T Saves time, effort and money
63920-50 BOP Table Top Light Box each T Reduces storage space
63920-60 Slim Light Pad for BOP Kit w/Adapter each T Maintains all patient’s speci-
mens in a single container

® Peel n’ Seal ® Thumbs-Up

Pre-Cut, Breathable and Non-Breathable Microtubes
Sealing Membranes for Flasks Made of autoclaveable
Breathable - A breathable option is available for polypropylene
cell culture applications T Opens with flip of thumb!
Non-Breathable - A non-breathable option is T Easy retrieval from rotors
available for general sealing applications T Special reaction vessels
Sterile - All membranes have been gamma in lid
irradiated to remove cyto-toxins and other contaminants T Color option for easy
Protects - Liquid-tight membranes keep solutions safe from outside identification
contamination during storage T RNase and DNase free
Proven - Non-breathable Peel-n-Seal is made from our Titer-Tops material T Temperature range: -
and breathable Peel-n-Seal is made from our Breathe-Easier material; both 196ºC to 130ºC
are trusted and proven throughout the life science industry T RFC rating of 17,00 x g
Temperature Ranges Cat. # Description Qty
Breathable: -20ºC to 80ºC/Non-Breathable: -40ºC to 100ºC 72370-0 0.5 ml Thumbs-Up Microtubes, Clear 1,000/pk
72370-1 0.5 ml Thumbs-Up Microtubes, Blue 1,000/pk
Peel-n-Seal Utilizes: Breathe-Easier and Titer-Tops 72370-2 0.5 ml Thumbs-Up Microtubes, Green 1,000/pk
Cat. No. Description Flask Size Qty 72370-3 0.5 ml Thumbs-Up Microtubes, Pink 1,000/pk
Breathe-Easier 72370-4 0.5 ml Thumbs-Up Microtubes, Purple 1,000/pk
77578-10 Breathable Peel-n-Seal, 1.50" (38.1mm) dia. 250ml 50/pack 72370-5 0.5 ml Thumbs-Up Microtubes, Yelllow 1,000/pk
77578-20 Breathable Peel-n-Seal, 1.63" (41.4mm) dia. 500ml 50/pack 72371-0 1.5 ml Thumbs-Up Microtubes, Clear 500/pk
77578-30 Breathable Peel-n-Seal, 2.13" (54.1mm) dia. 1,000ml 50/pack 72371-1 1.5 ml Thumbs-Up Microtubes, Blue 500/pk
Titer-Tops 72371-2 1.5 ml Thumbs-Up Microtubes, Green 500/pk
77578-40 Non-Breathable Peel-n-Seal, 1.50"(38.1mm) dia. 250ml 50/pack 72371-3 1.5 ml Thumbs-Up Microtubes, Pink 500/pk
77578-50 Non-Breathable Peel-n-Seal, 1.63"(41.4mm) dia. 500ml 50/pack 72371-4 1.5 ml Thumbs-Up Microtubes, Purple 500/pk
77578-60 Non-Breathable Peel-n-Seal, 2.13"(54.1mm) dia. 1,000ml 50/pack 72371-5 1.5 ml Thumbs-Up Microtubes, Yellow 500/pk

® Breathable Tube Membranes

T Micro-permeable Membranes T Will not bind in centrifuge rotors
for Microtubes T Easy-to-use finger tab for quick liner
T Ideal for cell growth and freeze drying removal
T Permits consistent gas exchange T Pre-cut to fit a variety of popular tube sizes
T Easy microtube cap closure T Sterile and free of cytotoxins 1 2
Cat.# Description Qty. Remove the paper liner Remove the top protective
70537-10 Breathe-EASY 100/pk. and adhere the membrane layer to expose the
70537-20 Breathe-EASIER 100/pk. to the tube opening. breathable membrane

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 535
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec14_532-539_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 9:14 PM Page 536

SECTION 14 Histology and Light Microscopy

® Hinged Lid Containers PE
These hinged lid containers are ideal for use just about anywhere. They feature a
secure snap closure with hinged lid that eliminates lost caps. Containers offer air
and moisture resistance to contents. Manufactured from flexible FD approvable
polyethylene resin.
Cat.# Capacity Diameter Height Qty
64238-01 1
⁄4oz (7.4ml) 11⁄2" (38mm) 1
⁄2"(12.7mm) 100/pk
64238-05 1
⁄2oz (14.8ml) 11⁄2" (38mm) 1" (25.4mm) 100/pk
64238-10 1oz Flat 11⁄2" (38mm) 11⁄2" (38mm) 100/pk
64238-12 1oz (29.57ml) 2" (50.8mm) 1" (25.4mm) 100/pk
64238-15 2oz (59.14ml) 2" (50.8mm) 11⁄2" (38mm) 50/pk
64238-20 4oz (118.3ml) 2" (50.8mm) 31⁄4" (83mm) 50/pk

® Polystyrene Containers – Sterile

These containers are made from polystyrene and they are clear and rigid.
T Sterile: All containers are manufactured aseptically within a state of the
art clean room.
T Various Labels: Labeling options include unlabeled printed or plain.
T Various Closures: The 30 universal uniquely relies on special seal technology.
Other sizes employ liners or crab claw closures to facilitate sample
containment.
T Some sizes are available with spoons.

Polystyrene Capacity Cap Height Diameter Case

Containers # ml Label Type Spoon Material mm mm Quantity
64240-01 60 Plain Universal No PE 61.1 44.6 300
64240-02 30 No Universal No PP 93.1 30.1 400
64240-03 30 Printed Universal No PP 93.1 30.1 400
64240-04 30 Plain Universal No PP 93.1 30.1 400
64240-05 30 No Universal Yes PP 93.1 30.1 400
64240-06 30 Plain Universal Yes PP 93.1 30.1 400
64240-07 7 No Bijou No PE 50.2 22.5 700
64240-08 7 Plain Bijou No PE 50.2 22.5 700
64240-09 150 Plain Plain No Metal 107.5 54.9 120
64240-10 100 Plain Plain No PE 76.4 50.5 200
64240-11 30 Printed Universal Yes PE 93.1 30.1 400
64240-12 60 No Plain No PE 61.1 44.6 300
64240-13 60 Printed Plain No PE 61.1 44.6 300

® Histology Containers
T Designed for the storage and transport of histology specimens in fixatives.
T Made from durable polypropylene (except 8L size, which is made of polyethylene)
T Leak-proof self-seal caps
All of the containers (except the 5ml size) have graduated markings on three sides. 2L to 8L
sizes are supplied with snap-top lids and carrying handles, and has no graduations.
Cat.# Visibility Inside Height x Top I.D. Size Pack
64233-10 Semi-Clear 2" x 1⁄2" (50 x 13mm) 5ml 500/pk
64233-11 Semi-Clear 11⁄2" x 11⁄8" (40 x 28mm) 20ml 200/pk
64233-12 Semi-Clear 11⁄2" x 15⁄8" (40 x 42mm) 40ml 200/pk
64233-14 Semi-Clear 21⁄4" x 15⁄8" (55 x 42mm) 60ml 100/pk
64233-16 Semi-Clear 27⁄8" x 15⁄8" (75 x 42mm) 90ml 400/pk
64233-17 Semi-Clear 3" x 115⁄16" (75 x 48mm) 120ml 300/pk
64233-18 Opaque 21⁄4" x 31⁄2" (55 x 88mm) 250ml 100/pk
64233-20 Opaque 4" x 31⁄2" (110 x 88mm) 500ml 100/pk
64233-22 Opaque 51⁄4" x 41⁄4" (135 x 110mm) 1000ml 100/pk
64233-24 White 43⁄4" x 71⁄4" (120 x 184mm) 2000ml 20/pk
64233-26 White 71⁄2" x 81⁄8" (190 x 126mm) 5000ml 10/pk
64233-28 White 93⁄4" x 9" (245 x 230mm) 8000ml 10/pk

536 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec14_532-539_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 9:14 PM Page 537

Histology and Light Microscopy SECTION 14

 Discups™; Disposable Paper Beakers  Tri-Seal™ * Specimen Containers
With environmental
Introducing the World’s First Patented, Leakproof, Airtight,
awareness in mind
Touch-Top Specimen Containers for the Pathology Lab
these disposable
paper beakers  Triple Seal Design – Vials are “closed in the mold” during manufacturing
create less waste  Permanent Hinge – Allows for one-hand opening and closing
and are as  Patented Leakproof Touch-Top Construction ideal for the Pathology lab
economical as
 Molded from 100% high-density, translucent polypropylene
plastic.
 Available in a variety of sizes from 13 ml to 300 ml
 Locking latch option for optimum security **
 Graduated in English and Metric units
(1⁄2 oz. or 10cc increments).  No more loose threaded screw caps to deal with – just press down the
triple-seal lid to securely close and seal
 Very economical. * Tri-Seal Containers are the product of 3GEN SCIENTIFIC
 Constructed from unwaxed, plain finished paper. ** Included in indicated products only

60954-10 Discups™, 120cc 100/pk

60954-20 Polystyrene Lids 100/pk

 4 Oz. Specimen Container

 The 4 Most Popular Styles for Pathology:

(These containers come with Locking Latch, except 15ml size)
Cat.# Description, (Overall Diameter x High) Qty.
64234-15 Tri-Seal Container 15 ml, 13⁄16" x 21⁄8" 500/pk.
64234-15B Tri-Seal Container 15 ml Bulk 2000/pk.
This 4 oz. specimen container provides a “full-turn” screw 64234-90L Tri-Seal Container 90 ml, 21⁄8" x 21⁄8" 400/pk.
thread cap, which offers an excellent “leak-proof” seal that 64234-120L Tri-Seal Container 120 ml, 25⁄8" x 21⁄8" 250/pk.
meets the NCCLS Specimen Handling Guidelines for primary 64234-240L Tri-Seal Container 240 ml, 3" x 3" 140/pk.
containers. These versatile, graduated, polypropylene
containers with polyethylene caps can be used for almost any
liquid or solid specimen for either storage or transport
purposes. They come with color coded caps: Green for
individually wrapped sterile caps; White for non-sterile ones.
64231-20 4 oz. Specimen Containers, Non-Sterile 20/bag
64231-50 4 oz. Specimen Containers, Non-Sterile 500/cs
64235-13 64235-50T 64235-50TL 64235-75T
 Antibody
Saver Tray
 Minimize the use of
expensive antibodies
when incubating filters
in the Western Blot
process 64235-120TL 64235-45TE 64235-240
 Trays are available for
popular midi and mini The Other Tri-Seal Touch-Top Containers:
and multiple lane fil- Cat.# Description, (Overall Diameter x High) Qty.
ters 64235-13 Tri-Seal Container 13 ml Tall, 15 x 95 mm 500/pk.
 Each tray is molded of polypropylene and includes an 64235-50T Tri-Seal Container 50 ml Tall, 28 x 84 mm 600/pk.
attached lid to protect from spillage. 64235-50TL Tri-Seal Container 50 ml Tall, 28 x 84 mm (with Locking Latch) 600/pk.
64235-75T Tri-Seal Container 75 ml Tall, 33 x 93 mm 400/pk.
 Trays are stackable, reclosable and reusable.
64235-90 Tri-Seal Container 90 ml Tall, 50 x 50 mm 400/pk.
 Single lane trays are linked together for easier handling 64235-120 Tri-Seal Container 120 ml Tall, 63 x 50 mm 250/pk.
but can be separated. 64235-120T Tri-Seal Container 120 ml Tall, 43 x 90 mm 25/pk.
70480-10 Single Lane Trays, 1.6 x 11.5cm (5.8 x 41⁄2") 5/pk 64235-120TL Tri-Seal Container 120 ml Tall, 43 x 90 mm (with Locking Latch) 250/pk.
70481-10 Small Square Trays, 90 x 90cm (31⁄2" x 31⁄2") 5/pk 64235-240 Tri-Seal Container 240 ml Tall, 75 x 75 mm 150/pk.
70481-20 Large Square Tray, 165 x 165 cm (61⁄2" x 61⁄2") 5/pk 64235-300TL Tri-Seal Container 300 ml Tall, 30 x 80 mm (with Locking Latch) 100/pk.
64235-45TE Tri-Seal Container 45 ml Tall, 30 x 80 mm
Tamper Evident Transport Container) 700/pk.

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 537
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec14_532-539_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 9:14 PM Page 538

SECTION 14 Histology and Light Microscopy

® EMS Click-Leak-Proof Container
WE’VE ADDED A CLICK AND REMOVED THE LEAK.
Our new EMSClick container was designed to eliminate leakage that occurs during
specimen transport. The container produces an audible “clicking” sound when the leak-
proof seal has been properly engaged, assuring accurate closure and specimen integrity
during transport.

Say Goodbye to Messy Clean-Ups and Unnecessary Exposure

T 100% virgin medical grade plastic (HDPE) provides consistent vial to vial perfor-
mance
T Audible proof of closure confirms engagement of leak-proof seal
Independently tested to perform with a 0% leak T Cap designed to enhance seal during positive and negative pressure differentials
rate under requirements detailed in: T Rounded knurls on cap offer an easy gripping surface for users
United Nations Model Regulations International Air Transport T Vial "ears" prevent cap from backing off during rough transport
Packing Instruction 620/650 Association (IATA) Packaging
Instruction 620/650
U.S. Department of The Vials are 20 ml in capacity and they measure 3.04 CM in Diameter
Transportation's Title 49 Code of International Safe Transit and are 4.43 cm in height.
Federal Regulations, §173.196 Association (ISTA) Random
International Civil Aviation Vibration Under Low Pressure Cat. No Description Qty.
Test
Organization (ICAO) Packaging 64233-08 EMSClick Container, 20 ml 100/Pack
Instruction 620/650 64233-09 EMSClick Container 800/Case

® SecurTainer™ I Tamper Evident ® SecurTainer™ II Tamper Evident

Specimen Containers Specimen Containers

Container made of polypropylene - Closure made of polyethylene This model uses a different tamper evident concept compared to the
SecurTainer I above. No locking tab to push up is necessary when the
This shatter resistant, especially designed for collection, transport and
tamper evident is used. Simply screw the cap on the container and the
specimen storage.
tamper evident sealing ring is automatically locking in place. When
T Unique integrated leak resistant seal unscrewed, the ring is detached from the cap. All other features are the
T High clarity to allow specimen to be viewed without opening same as SecurTainer I.
T The magenta lids are ribbed for easy opening
EMS # Description Qty
T Container are stackable with straight side format. 64237-02 SecurTainer I, Size 20ml 500/pk
T SecurTainer™ I is a unique tamper evident to ensure no alter 64237-04 SecurTainer I, Size 40 ml 500/pk
allow. (SecurTainer™ can be used without using the tamper 64237-06 SecurTainer I, Size 60 ml 500/pk
evident locking mechanism) 64237-09 SecurTainer I, Size 90 ml 400/pk
T For color coding purpose, use CapInsert (Cat. #68106-series) 64237-12 SecurTainer I, Size 120 ml 300/pk
Both containers and caps are manufactured without the use of CapInsert: available with colors:
plasticizers or mold release agents. All material used are free from latex.
EMS # CapInsert™ Color Qty
All containers are 95kpa compliant. Non sterile, container and caps are 61806-B CapInsert, Color Blue 100/pk
packaged separately in bag of 100. 61806-L CapInsert, Color Lilac 100/pk
EMS # Description Qty 61806-R CapInsert, Color Red 100/pk
64236-02 SecurTainer I, Size 20ml 500/pk 61806-Y CapInsert, Color Yellow 100/pk
64236-04 SecurTainer I, Size 40 ml 500/pk 61806-W CapInsert, Color White 100/pk
64236-06 SecurTainer I, Size 60 ml 500/pk 61806-AS CapInsert, Assorted Colors 100/pk
64236-09 SecurTainer I, Size 90 ml 400/pk
64236-12 SecurTainer I, Size 120 ml 300/pk

538 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec14_532-539_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 9:15 PM Page 539

Histology and Light Microscopy SECTION 14

® FlexTainer™ Containers
Made from polypropylene on/off spout. It is available in many sizes up to 8
This is a space-saving expandable accordion- liters. Come with individually wrapped.
style jug with flattens down for easy transport Cat. # Description Qty
and storage. 64228-13 Flex-Tainer™, 3 L 12/pk
64228-43 Flex-Tainer™, 3 L 48/pk
Great ideal for storing and carrying numerous
64228-15 Flex-Tainer™, 5 L 12/pk
types of fluids, it is suitable for any laboratory. 64228-45 Flex-Tainer™, 5 L 48/pk
Made of high strength polyethylene, it features 64228-18 Flex-Tainer™, 8 L 12/pk
comfortable carry grip and screw-on cap with 64228-48 Flex-Tainer™, 8 L 36/pk

® Petri Dishes —Sterile Petri Dishes

Made from polystyrene
Our Petri Dishes are available in a variety of shapes and sizes for use in routine procedures and with
automated equipment. Economical, optical clarity, dishes are precision-molded from biomedical grade
polystyrene so cultures are clearly visible without distortion. Dishes are packaged 20 each in sturdy
polyethylene sleeves. These dishes are not recommended for tissue culture application, due to non
treated by “corona effect”.
Cat. # Model Description (actual Dimension) Vol Qty
70678-10 D210-7 Dish 90x20mm – Commonly referred to as a 100x20mm dish. For unimpaired observation of specimen 500 ml 100/pk
growth with raised straight ridge around top for stable stacking
70678-20 D210-7WL Dish 90x20mm – Commonly referred to as a 100x20mm dish. This dish has three venting ribs into the 100 ml 500/pk
underside of the lid to prevent condensation build-up
70678-30 D210-8 Dish 90x25mm – Commonly referred to as a 100x25mm dish. Accommodates deeper fills for longer 125 ml 500/pk
culture periods. Used for fungal cultures, plant propagation. This dish has three venting ribs into the
underside of the lid to prevent condensation built-up
70678-40 D210-8R Dish 90x25mm – Commonly referred to as a 100x25mm dish. Similar to D210-8 but with no-vented lid 125 ml 500/pk
having a raised straight ridge around top for stable stacking.
70678-50 D210-13 Dish 55x13mm – Commonly referred to as a 60x15mm dish. For use whenever a small quantity of culture 28 ml 500/pk
is desirable. For unimpaired observation of specimen growth with raised straight ridge around top for stable
stacking. Dish has three venting ribs on the edge of the dish to prevent condensation built-up.
70678-60 D210-14 Dish 50x8mm – Commonly referred to as a 60x9mm dish. Box type dish, for classroom studies, culturing 12 ml 500/pk
of mycobacteria aerosol testing, membrane filter and immunodiffusion techniques. Tight lid prevents
sample dehydration.
70678-70 D210-15 Dish 35x10mm – Commonly referred to as a 35x10mm dish. Selected for small quantities culture media. 9 ml 500/pk
For unimpaired observation of specimen growth with raised straight ridge around top for stable stacking.
This dish has three venting ribs into the underside of the lid to prevent condensation build-up.

® Square Petri Dish ® Contact Plate

Made from polystyrene – Made from polystyrene
Radiation sterile These dishes are free from optical distortion. The dish
This dish commonly has 16 of 10 x 10 mm square grids, which is marked
referred to as a 100 x 15 numerically in one direction and alphabetically in the
mm dish. Free from other. The model 70692-20 is designed with a convex
optical distortion and bottom to save on culture medium. Dishes are packaged
sterile, these dishes are 20 per sleeve and are radiation sterile.
ideal for phase typing, Cat. # Description Vol. Qty
susceptibility testing, plate counts, and probe assays. 70692-10 Contact Plate, 60x15mm 20 ml 500/pk
The square Petri dish with grid is consists of 36 of 70692-20 Contact Plate, convex bottom, 60x15mm 15 ml 500/pk
13 x 13 mm squares, each 13 mm grid is marked
numerically in one direction and alphabetically in the ® Bacterial Cell Spreader
other. This dish has four venting ribs into the underside Made from high impact polystyrene
of the lid to prevent condensation build-up.
No flame sterilization needed. Designed for easy
Cat. # Description Qty spreading of cells onto the surface of an agar plate.
70691 Square Petri Dish with Grid, 10/sleeve 100/pk Supplied sterile in individually packs. Total length of
70691-CS Square Petri Dish with Grid, 500/cs 500/pk
handle: 176 mm, width of spreader: 36mm. Color green
70690 Square Petri Dish, Plain, 20/sleeve 100/pk
70690-CS Square Petri Dish, Plain, 500/cs 500/pk
Cat. # Description Qty
62452 Bacterial Cell Spreader 100/pk

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 539
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec14_540-555_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 9:21 PM Page 540

SECTION 14 Histology and Light Microscopy

® Histology Cassettes ® 1. Slotted Cassettes With Lids
A. Lids are packed separately
All the histology cassettes listed below are
Ordering: Each case contains 2
specially made to be used either manually
dispenser boxes of 500 cassettes
or in any leading automatic cassette and 1 dispenser box of 1000 lids.
labeling instruments.
Cat.# Color Qty/Cs
® Tissue Processing/ 70070-W
70070-P
White
Pink
2x500/cs
2x500/cs
Embedding Cassettes 70070-G Green 2x500/cs
Made from Acetyl Polymer, which is a special high density 70070-Y Yellow 2x500/cs
polymer that keeps specimens safely submerged in solution. 70070-B Blue 2x500/cs
70070-Pe Peach 2x500/cs
These cassettes are totally resistant to most histological
70070-T Tan 2x500/cs
solvents and their slots offer maximum flow through for good 70070-Gr Gray 2x500/cs
fluid exchange and proper drainage. The lids either come 70070-L Lilac 2x500/cs
attached to the cassette or are packaged separately. The lids 70070-O Orange 2x500/cs
can be opened and closed as often as necessary and they 70070-A Aqua 2x500/cs
always relock securely without danger of specimen loss.
Large labeling areas are located on three sides of the B. Lids are placed
cassette for your convenience. Each slot measures: 1x5m, on cassettes
total 128 slots per cassette. Available in 11 different non- Ordering: Each case contains 3
cytotoxic, non-metallic colors. Anterior writing area is at 45° dispenser boxes of 500 cassettes
angle to make the cassette universal. with lids already locked in place.
Cat.# Color Qty/Cs Cat.# Color Qty/Cs
70071-W White 3x500/cs 70071-T Tan 3x500/cs
70071-P Pink 3x500/cs 70071-Gr Gray 3x500/cs
70071-G Green 3x500/cs 70071-L Lilac 3x500/cs
70071-Y Yellow 3x500/cs 70071-O Orange 3x500/cs
70071-B Blue 3x500/cs 70071-A Aqua 3x500/cs
70071-PePeach 3x500/cs

® Compartment - Micro Processing/

Embedding Cassettes — 6-Compartment
Made from Acetal Polymer. These
biopsy cassettes can hold up to
six tissue specimens, each one
placed in it’s own compartment,
numbered from 1 to 6 and
measuring 1⁄4” x 7⁄16”x
3
⁄16”D(7x12x5mm). Cover and base
have over 3000 0.26mm square
openings. Cassettes keep
specimen safely submerged in
solvent and are totally resistant to
the most histological solvents.
The efficient flow-through slots maximize fluid exchange and insure proper
drainage. The one-piece integral lid eliminates the need for separate steel lids.
Large labeling areas are located on three sides of the cassette. The anterior writing
area is at a 45° angle, making the cassette, to some degree, able to be used with
certain types of cassette labeling instruments. Each case contains 4 dispenser
boxes of 250 cassettes with covers assembled.

Cat.# Color Qty/Cs Cat.# Color Qty/Cs

70078-W White 2x250/pk 70078-T Tan 2x250/pk
70078-P Pink 2x250/pk 70078-Gr Gray 2x250/pk
70078-G Green 2x250/pk 70078-L Lilac 2x250/pk
70078-Y Yellow 2x250/pk 70078-O Orange 2x250/pk
70078-B Blue 2x250/pk 70078-A Aqua 2x250/pk
70078-Pe Peach 2x250/pk

540 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec14_540-555_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 9:22 PM Page 541

Histology and Light Microscopy SECTION 14

® Biopsy Processing/Embedding Cassettes ® Micromesh™- Single Compartment
® Square Mesh Cassettes With Lids Biopsy Processing/Embedding Cassettes with Lid
Similar to slotted cassettes listed above but designed to hold biopsy Made from acetyl polymer
specimens during the embedding process, as well as in a storage file.
This new version of
A. Lids are packed separately Micromesh™ offers
Each case contains 2 dispenser boxes of 500 cassettes and 1 dispenser 1676 square openings
box of 1000 covers. (0.38 mm) allowing for
Cat.# Color Qty/Cs a greatly improved
70072-W White 2x500/cs fluid exchange without
70072-P Pink 2x500/cs having to use the
70072-G Green 2x500/cs biopsy pads. Large
70072-Y Yellow 2x500/cs anterior and posterior
70072-B Blue 2x500/cs slots in both cassette and cover ensure that the Micromesh™ biopsy
70072-Pe Peach 2x500/cs
cassettes will sink rapidly (far better than cloth mesh cassettes). A large
70072-T Tan 2x500/cs
70072-Gr Gray 2x500/cs square compartment measuring 27 mm is perfect even for needle
70072-L Lilac 2x500/cs biopsies. The cover does not protrude above the cassette, a great space
70072-O Orange 2x500/cs saving feature allowing more cassettes to be stacked in automatic labeling
70072-A Aqua 2x500/cs machines and tissue processors.

T These patented cassettes keep specimens safely submerged in liquid

B. Lids are placed on cassettes T Totally resistant to the most histological chemicals and solvents.
Each case contains 3 dispenser boxes of 500 cassettes. The lids are T The Micromesh™ ensures efficient fluid exchange and drainage.
already locked in place. T One-piece integral lid eliminates the need for separate steel lid.
Cat.# Color Qty/Cs T Lid is locked securely, no danger of specimen loss.
70073-W White 3x500/cs T Anterior writing area at a 45° angle – these cassettes are ideal for
70073-P Pink 3x500/cs automated cassettes printers.
70073-G Green 3x500/cs T Available in non-cytotoxic, non-metallic colors.
70073-Y Yellow 3x500/cs
70073-B Blue 3x500/cs Each case contains four dispenser boxes of 250 cassettes with covers.
70073-Pe Peach 3x500/cs
70073-T Tan 3x500/cs Cat.# Color Qty Cat.# Color Qty
70073-Gr Gray 3x500/cs 70074-W White 1000/pk 70074-GR Gray 1000/pk
70073-L Lilac 3x500/cs 70074-P Pink 1000/pk 70074-L Lilac 1000/pk
70073-O Orange 3x500/cs 70074-G Green 1000/pk 70074-O Orange 1000/pk
70073-A Aqua 3x500/cs 70074-Y Yellow 1000/pk 70074-A Aqua 1000/pk
70074-B Blue 1000/pk 70074-FP Fluo-Pink 1000/pk
® Process/Embedding Cassettes 70074-PE Peach 1000/pk 70074-FG Fluo-Green 1000/pk
(Without Lids) 70074-T Tan 1000/pk 70074-FY Fluo-Yellow 1000/pk
Made from Acetal copolymer –
Disposable plastic tissue ® MicroMesh™- Four-Compartment
cassettes are suitable for Biopsy Processing/Embedding Cassettes with Lid
holding and identifying tissue
samples in processing, This model is similar
embedding, and sectioning to the one above –
procedures. The cassettes fit single compartment –
securely in microtome chuck but cassettes
adapters. They are molded from have four square
a high-density polymer that is totally resistant to histological solvents. compartments each
These cassettes are designed to accept standard metal lids (#70025-10) measuring 13 mm.
and will also fit either the standard stainless steel base molds or the Cover and base have
disposable plastic ones. Only Clear one is made of polypropylene. All other about 1676 square
are made of Acetal Polymer. Stainless Steel Lids order separately. openings maximizing fluid exchange and ensuring proper drainage.
Each case contains 3 dispenser boxes of 500 cassettes. Each case contains four dispenser boxes of 250 cassettes with covers.
Cat.# Color Qty/Cs Cat.# Color Qty/Cs Cat.# Color Qty Cat.# Color Qty
70025-W White 500/pk 70025-T Tan 500/pk 70075-W White 1000/pk 70075-GR Gray 1000/pk
70025-C Clear 500/pk 70025-Gr Gray 500/pk 70075-P Pink 1000/pk 70075-L Lilac 1000/pk
70025-P Pink 500/pk 70025-L Lilac 500/pk 70075-G Green 1000/pk 70075-O Orange 1000/pk
70025-G Green 500/pk 70025-O Orange 500/pk 70075-Y Yellow 1000/pk 70075-A Aqua 1000/pk
70025-Y Yellow 500/pk 70025-A Aqua 500/pk 70075-B Blue 1000/pk 70075-FP Fluo-Pink 1000/pk
70025-B Blue 500/pk Stainless Steel Covers: 70075-PE Peach 1000/pk 70075-FG Fluo-Green 1000/pk
70025-Pe Peach 500/pk 70025-10 – 25/pk 70075-T Tan 1000/pk 70075-FY Fluo-Yellow 1000/pk

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 541
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec14_540-555_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 9:22 PM Page 542

SECTION 14 Histology and Light Microscopy

® IP ActivFlo™ Biopsy Cassettes
Patented “Fluidic Flow" pore design maximizes reagent exchange.
IP ActivFlo Biopsy Cassettes feature innovative V-shaped 0.67 mm pores that pull
fluid in and force air out.
Sloped walls create a basket for small tissue management. The one-piece
cassettes with ‘frangible lids’ have been designed for the Leica IPC Cassette IP ActivFlo Biopsy III
Printer, with <1% printing error rate.
T Available in loose and taped packaging for easy printer loading.
T Choose from eleven colors in quantities of 500 loose or 1000 taped. IP ActivFlo Biopsy II
IP ActivFlo Biopsy I
Specifications, Loose: Specifications, Taped:
CE approved CE approved. For IPC Printers
Weight .................................5 Kg Weight ..............................4.5 Kg
Dimensions: Dimensions:
(L x W x H) ..........12” x 7” x 10” (L x W x H) ...........17” x 11” x 7”
Packaged as 500/case Packaged as 1000/case

® IP ActivFlo Biopsy I Cassettes

Cat No. Description Qty. Cat No. Description Qty.
700076-10 IP ActivFlo Biopsy I, White 500/pk 700076-22 IP ActivFlo Biopsy I, Orange 500/pk
700076-11 IP ActivFlo Biopsy I, Taped White 1000/pk 700076-23 IP ActivFlo Biopsy I, Taped Orange 1000/pk
700076-12 IP ActivFlo Biopsy I, Blue 500/pk 700076-24 IP ActivFlo Biopsy I, Gold 500/pk
700076-13 IP ActivFlo Biopsy I, Taped Blue 1000/pk 700076-25 IP ActivFlo Biopsy I, Taped Gold 1000/pk
700076-14 IP ActivFlo Biopsy I, Aqua 500/pk 700076-26 IP ActivFlo Biopsy I, Yellow 500/pk
700076-15 IP ActivFlo Biopsy I, Taped Aqua 1000/pk 700076-27 IP ActivFlo Biopsy I, Taped Yellow 1000/pk
700076-16 IP ActivFlo Biopsy I, Green 500/pk 700076-28 IP ActivFlo Biopsy I, Tan 500/pk
700076-17 IP ActivFlo Biopsy I, Taped Green 1000/pk 700076-29 IP ActivFlo Biopsy I, Taped Tan 1000/pk
700076-18 IP ActivFlo Biopsy I, Lilac 500/pk 700076-30 IP ActivFlo Biopsy I, Gray 500/pk
700076-19 IP ActivFlo Biopsy I, Taped Lilac 1000/pk 700076-31 IP ActivFlo Biopsy I, Taped Gray 1000/pk
700076-20 IP ActivFlo Biopsy I, Pink 500/pk
700076-21 IP ActivFlo Biopsy I, Taped Pink 1000/pk

® IP ActivFlo Biopsy II Cassettes

Cat No. Description Qty. Cat No. Description Qty.
70076-61 IP ActivFlo Biopsy II, White 500/pk 70076-73 IP ActivFlo Biopsy II, Orange 500/pk
70076-62 IP ActivFlo Biopsy II, Taped White 1000/pk 70076-74 IP ActivFlo Biopsy II, Taped Orange 1000/pk
70076-63 IP ActivFlo Biopsy II, Blue 500/pk 70076-75 IP ActivFlo Biopsy II, Gold 500/pk
70076-64 IP ActivFlo Biopsy II, Taped Blue 1000/pk 70076-76 IP ActivFlo Biopsy II, Taped Gold 1000/pk
70076-65 IP ActivFlo Biopsy II, Aqua 500/pk 70076-77 IP ActivFlo Biopsy II, Yellow 500/pk
70076-66 IP ActivFlo Biopsy II, Taped Aqua 1000/pk 70076-78 IP ActivFlo Biopsy II, Taped Yellow 1000/pk
70076-67 IP ActivFlo Biopsy II, Green 500/pk 70076-79 IP ActivFlo Biopsy II, Tan 500/pk
70076-68 IP ActivFlo Biopsy II, Taped Green 1000/pk 70076-80 IP ActivFlo Biopsy II, Taped Tan 1000/pk
70076-69 IP ActivFlo Biopsy II, Lilac 500/pk 70076-81 IP ActivFlo Biopsy II, Gray 500/pk
70076-70 IP ActivFlo Biopsy II, Taped Lilac 1000/pk 70076-82 IP ActivFlo Biopsy II, Taped Gray 1000/pk
70076-71 IP ActivFlo Biopsy II, Pink 500/pk
70076-72 IP ActivFlo Biopsy II, Taped Pink 1000/pk

® IP ActivFlo Biopsy III Cassettes

Cat No. Description Qty. Cat No. Description Qty.
70076-83 IP ActivFlo Biopsy III, White 500/pk 70076-95 IP ActivFlo Biopsy III, Orange 500/pk
70076-84 IP ActivFlo Biopsy III, Taped White 1000/pk 70076-96 IP ActivFlo Biopsy III, Taped Orange 1000/pk
70076-85 IP ActivFlo Biopsy III, Blue 500/pk 70076-97 IP ActivFlo Biopsy III, Gold 500/pk
70076-86 IP ActivFlo Biopsy III, Taped Blue 1000/pk 70076-98 IP ActivFlo Biopsy III, Taped Gold 1000/pk
70076-87 IP ActivFlo Biopsy III, Aqua 500/pk 70076-99 IP ActivFlo Biopsy III, Yellow 500/pk
70076-88 IP ActivFlo Biopsy III, Taped Aqua 1000/pk 70076-100 IP ActivFlo Biopsy III, Taped Yellow 1000/pk
70076-89 IP ActivFlo Biopsy III, Green 500/pk 70076-101 IP ActivFlo Biopsy III, Tan 500/pk
70076-90 IP ActivFlo Biopsy III, Taped Green 1000/pk 70076-102 IP ActivFlo Biopsy III, Taped Tan 1000/pk
70076-91 IP ActivFlo Biopsy III, Lilac 500/pk 70076-103 IP ActivFlo Biopsy III, Gray 500/pk
70076-92 IP ActivFlo Biopsy III, Taped Lilac 1000/pk 70076-104 IP ActivFlo Biopsy III, Taped Gray 1000/pk
70076-93 IP ActivFlo Biopsy III, Pink 500/pk
70076-94 IP ActivFlo Biopsy III, Taped Pink 1000/pk

542 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec14_540-555_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 9:22 PM Page 543

Histology and Light Microscopy SECTION 14

® IP Biopsy VI, Two Piece Cassettes ® Supamega Tissue Processing Cassettes:
IP Biopsy VI cassettes are two-piece biopsy
cassettes with 0.67 mm pores, 45 degree
writing surface and a secure latch closure.
Taped cassettes have been designed for the
Leica IPC Cassette Printer and offer <1%
printing error rate.
T Available in loose and taped
packaging for easy printer loading.
T Choose from nine colors in quantities of 500
loose or 1000 taped.
Specifications, Loose: Specifications, Taped:
CE approved CE approved. For IPC Printers T Ideal for prostate, brain, Cat.# Color Qty
Weight: 5 Kg Weight: 4.5 Kg breast tissue and eyes 70065-W White 100/pk.
Dimensions: 12” x 7” x 10” (L x W x H) Dimensions: 17” x 11” x 7” (L x W x H) 70065-G Green 100/pk.
Packaged as 500/case Packaged as 1000/case T Extremely useful for research 70065-B Blue 100/pk.
and toxicology laboratories 70065-P
Cat No. Description Qty. Pink 100/pk.
70076-110 Jet Biopsy VI, White 500/pk T Measures: - Inside: 64mm x 70065-Y Yellow 100/pk.
70076-111 IP Biopsy VI, Taped White 1000/pk 48mm x 13mm - Outside:
70076-112 Jet Biopsy VI, Blue 500/pk 75mm x 52mm x 18mm
70076-113 IP Biopsy VI, Taped Blue 1000/pk
70076-114
70076-115
Jet Biopsy VI, Aqua
IP Biopsy VI, Taped Aqua
500/pk
1000/pk
® SupaMega Stainless Steel Base Molds
70076-116 Jet Biopsy VI, Green 500/pk The SupaMega range
70076-117 IP Biopsy VI, Taped Green 1000/pk of stainless steel base molds have
70076-118 Jet Biopsy VI, Lilac 500/pk extra deep side walls, allowing
70076-119 IP Biopsy VI, Taped Lilac 1000/pk
wax to be decanted
70076-120 Jet Biopsy VI, Pink 500/pk
70076-121 IP Biopsy VI, Taped Pink 1000/pk into the cassettes during
70076-122 Jet Biopsy VI, Orange 500/pk embedding without the risk of the
70076-123 IP Biopsy VI, Taped Orange 1000/pk usual leakage of wax. The smaller
70076-124 Jet Biopsy VI, Gold 500/pk faced mold also saves wax on medium sized blocks too large to fit into
70076-125 IP Biopsy VI, Taped Gold 1000/pk standard cassettes, negating the use of full size molds.
70076-126 Jet Biopsy VI, Yellow 500/pk
70076-127 IP Biopsy VI, Taped Yellow 1000/pk Cat.# Description Qty
62354-36 SupaMega SS Base Mold, 36 x 36 x 10mm 5/pk.
® Activflo Mini 62354-60 SupaMega SS Base Mold, 60 x 45 x 15mm 5/pk.
Biopsy Cassette
Ideal for needle biopsies and ® Strip Disposable Base
small tissues Disposable base molds are
Activflo Mini Cassettes are one third manufactured from high impact
the size of standard cassettes, and polystyrene, offering a low cost
feature sloped walls, creating a basket alternative to stainless steel.
for small tissue management. The These molds are available in a
smaller size allows double the number Specifications: choice of sizes and depths. The
of blocks to be stored, reducing CE approved molds have a smooth interior
specimen storage space. NOT FOR IPC finish and rounded corners for ease of removal. There are five molds per
Weight: 5 Kg strip and they are packed 100 strips to a case.
T Excellent solution for microwave Dimensions: 12” x 7” x 10”
and rapid tissue processors (L x W x H) T Wide range of sizes to suit T International standard sizes
T Available in eleven colors. Packaged as 500/case your needs T Convenient with 5 mold per
Cat No. Description Qty.
T Disposable – no cleaning strip
70076-128 ActivFlo Mini Biopsy-White 500/pk required
70076-129 ActivFlo Mini Biopsy-Blue 500/pk Cat.# Description Size Qty.
70076-130 ActivFlo Mini Biopsy-Aqua 500/pk 62351-07 Strip Disposable Mold 7 x 7 x 5 mm 100/pk.
70076-131 ActivFlo Mini Biopsy-Green 500/pk 62351-15 Strip Disposable Mold 15 x 15 x 5 mm 100/pk.
70076-132 ActivFlo Mini Biopsy-Lilac 500/pk 62351-24 Strip Disposable Mold 24 x 24 x 5 mm 100/pk.
70076-133 ActivFlo Mini Biopsy-Pink 500/pk 62351-30 Strip Disposable Mold 30 x 24 x 5 mm 100/pk.
70076-134 ActivFlo Mini Biopsy-Orange 500/pk 62351-37 Strip Disposable Mold 37 x 24 x 7 mm 100/pk.
70076-135 ActivFlo Mini Biopsy-Gold 500/pk 62351-33 Strip Disposable Mold 33 x 25 x 13 mm 100/pk.
70076-136 ActivFlo Mini Biopsy-Yellow 500/pk 62351-39 Strip Disposable Mold 39 x 25 x 13 mm 100/pk.
70076-137 ActivFlo Mini Biopsy-Tan 500/pk
70076-138 ActivFlo Mini Biopsy-Gray 500/pk

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 543
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec14_540-555_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 9:22 PM Page 544

SECTION 14 Histology and Light Microscopy

® Easy-Load Cassettes for Automated Labeling Instruments
Made from acetal copolymer – This newly patented cassette, allows you to load the
Micro-Writer® and Shur/Mark® Cassette Labeling Instruments in one simple operation.
Each convenient stack contains 50 unique cassettes. No more manual insertion one-by-one.
Save time and money.
Two types of cassettes are offered in order to suit your needs: Slotted tissue cassettes
and meshed biopsy cassettes.
The anterior printing area is a 45° angle which suits most cassette labeling instruments.
Lids are available as one-piece disposable plastic. It can be opened and closed as often
as necessary and it always relocks securely without danger of specimen loss
Cassettes are packaged in stacks of 50. Each case contains 2 boxes of 20 stacks
Order cassette bases and cover separately.
® Slotted Cassettes - Tissue Cassettes
Base Cat.# Cover Cat.# Color Qty/Pk
70060-W 70061-W White 2000/pk
70060-P 70061-P Pink 2000/pk
70060-G 70061-G Green 2000/pk
70060-Y 70061-Y Yellow 2000/pk
70060-B 70061-B Blue 2000/pk
70060-Pe 70061-Pe Peach 2000/pk
70060-T 70061-T Tan 2000/pk
70060-Gr 70061-Gr Gray 2000/pk
70060-L 70061-L Lilac 2000/pk
70060-O 70061-O Orange 2000/pk
70060-A 70061-A Aqua 2000/pk
® Mesh Cassettes - Biopsy Cassettes
Base Cat.# Cover Cat.# Color Qty/Pk
70062-W 70063-W White 2000/pk
70062-P 70063-P Pink 2000/pk
70062-G 70063-G Green 2000/pk
70062-Y 70063-Y Yellow 2000/pk
70062-B 70063-B Blue 2000/pk
70062-Pe 70063-Pe Peach 2000/pk
70062-T 70063-T Tan 2000/pk
70062-Gr 70063-Gr Gray 2000/pk
70062-L 70063-L Lilac 2000/pk
70062-O 70063-O Orange 2000/pk
70062-A 70063-A Aqua 2000/pk

® Macro-Cassette
Processing/Embedding Cassettes (with lids)
Made from Acetal-Polymer. Comes complete with a one piece integral lid . It is specially
designed
to hold large specimens during the embedding process, as well as in a storage cabinet. Inside
measurements: 29mm(L)x25mm(W)x11mm(D).
Cat.# Description Qty/Pk
70077-W Macro-Cassettes Cassettes, White 250/pk

® Disposable Deep Base Mold for Macro-Cassette

Made from PVC with excellent thermal exchange. Specially designed for the Macro-Cassette
above. It has a smooth interior finish and rounded corners to facilitate its removal. Will resist Macro-Cassette
temperatures from –80°C to 60°C. Not to be used with xylene or acetone. and its
Base Mold
Measures: 37 x 24 x 10mm, and 5ml volume.
Cat.# Description Qty
62353 Disposable Base Mold for Macro-Cassettes 500/pk

544 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec14_540-555_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 9:22 PM Page 545

Histology and Light Microscopy SECTION 14

® 1. Uni-Cassettes® System by Tissue Tek; ® 2. Mesh Biopsy Cassette System

Sakura Finetek The perfect cassette for the
smallest specimens. This Mesh
Tissue-Tek Uni-
®

Biopsy Cassette System is now

Cassette® System is
the easier, ideal way for
now easier to use in
processing the smallest of
every way. It is made
biopsy specimens. Using our
from a solvent and
Mesh Biopsy Cassettes, you
decalcifying solution
avoid reagent carryover in the
resistant plastic and
tissue processor and you eliminate the structural artifacts usually caused
comes with a snap-
by sponge and tea bag abrasion. They also allow direct specimen filtration
latch hinge-lock into the cassette and facilitate embedding.
disposable lid. The
cassettes have three Additional features:
textured writing surfaces. T Large venting slots improve T Tongue-and-groove seal sur-
Biopsy/Uni-Cassette® flow-through. rounds entire specimen.
cassettes are the same T Mesh screen with a blue tint T Rounded inner walls for easier
Uni-Cassette® but feature for safe specimen containment removal.
1mm pores instead of and easy visualization.
slots, which eliminates Cat.# Description Pack
the warping of most small 62502-W Mesh Cassette, White 500/cs
specimens and reduce 62502-B Mesh Cassette, Blue 500/cs
62502-G Mesh Cassette, Green 500/cs
the risk of specimen loss. 62502-P Mesh Cassette, Pink 500/cs
Features: 62502-R Mesh Cassette, Red 500/cs
T Smooth, single action, fracture-back hinge - Fractures when 62502-Y Mesh Cassette, Yellow 500/cs
being closed, then breaks easily and smoothly without rough
edges for greater protection. ® 3. Tissue-Tek® II Stainless Steel Base
T Raised Spacer nubs - Placed at the center and the corners. Molds-for Uni-Cassettes and
Helps maintain the space between the cassettes for better Process/Embedding Systems
exchange of processing reagents.
T Wider, thicker finger tab - Eliminates sharp edges; reduces These base molds are to be used
strain on operator’s finger. It simplifies opening of the lid. with Tissue-Tek® embedding
T Improved front latch - Provides secure closure while making cassettes and Tissue-Tek® Uni-
it easier to open. Cassette® cassettes. These molds
T New smooth edge, sure-locking lid - The closure guides make are made from polished stainless
it easier to close the lid. Secures sample throughout entire steel, offer optimal thermal
processing cycle. conductivity, as well as easy
T Oversize front writing surface - For large print and/or more paraffin block removal. All
information. Angled to make the cassette easier to hold and corners are precisely rounded for optimal paraffin ribboning.
label. Cat.# Tissue-Tek Description Pack
Cat.# Tissue-Tek Description Pack 62510-07 4161 SS Base Mold, 7x7x5 mm 12/pk
Tissue-Tek® Uni-Cassette® 62510-15 4162 SS Base Mold, 15x15x5mm 12/pk
62500-W 4170-02 White 1500/cs 62510-24 4163 SS Base Mold, 24x24x5mm 12/pk
62500-A 4120-02 Aqua 500/cs 62510-30 4164 SS Base Mold, 30x24x5mm 12/pk
62500-B 4157-02 Blue 500/cs 62510-37 4165 SS Base Mold, 37x24x5mm 12/pk
62500-G 4119-02 Gold 500/cs
62500-GR 4156-02 Green 500/cs ® 4. Tissue-Tek® Mega-Cassette® System
62500-P 4155-02 Pink 500/cs
Mega-Cassette® cassettes have
62500-O 4117-02 Orange 500/cs
62500-Y 4154-02 Yellow 500/cs
been designed to accommodate a
62500-L 4118-02 Lilac 500/cs large variety of samples, including
62500-T 4153-02 Tan 500/cs bone, eye, teeth etc. They are
62500-R 4135-02 Red 500/cs made from white plastic with a
Tissue-Tek® Biopsy/Uni-Cassette® snap latch, hinged-lock,
62501-W 4086 White 500/cs disposable lid. These cassettes
62501-B 4087 Blue 500/cs have three large writing surfaces
62501-G 4174 Green 500/cs and are resistant to solvent and decalcifying solutions. Measures
62501-O 4090 Orange 500/cs 30mm(L)x24mm(W)x11mm(D). A stainless steel, reusable base mold is
62501-R 4045 Red 500/cs available. Measures 31mm(L)x23mm(W)x13.5mm(D)
62501-Y 4088 Yellow 500/cs
Cat.# Tissue-Tek Description Pack
62512-30 4173 Mega-Cassette® 750/pk
62512-31 4166 Mega Base Mold 6/pk

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 545
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec14_540-555_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 9:23 PM Page 546

SECTION 14 Histology and Light Microscopy

® Precision Cryo-Embedding System
This section offers you a simple system of stainless steel well bars, chucks ® 2. Stainless
and freezing blocks, kept cold in cryostat, allow you to perform a variety of Steel Chucks
precision embedding techniques addressing the most difficult embedding These stainless steel chucks are
tasks with ease and minimum time needed. designed to be used cold for rapid
SPEED freezing, and to maximize the gripping
T 20 to 60 seconds to freeze (depending on the well size) power required to hold the embedded tissue block. The stem of the
T Multiple samples handled quickly chuck provides the focal point for a sharp tap resulting in an easily
T No monitoring necessary (for placement of heat extractor) release of the block from the well. These chucks fit many of the major
brand cryostat and can be used in most cryostats with use of an
PRECISION
adapter. These Chuck Adapters have stem measures 20mm L x 9mm
T Precise flat or on edge embedding
diameter, and fit Leica and most Microm cryostats. We also offer
T Predictable orientation adapters to use these chuck for other cryostats.
T Liquid samples easily embedded
Cat # Description Qty
T No crush artifact caused by heat extractor weight 61720-28 Small Chuck – Made of stainless steel,
REDUCED TISSUE WASTAGE 28 mm square with gridded surface each
T Less trimming the result of flat plane of embedding 61720-36 Large Chuck – Made of stainless steel,
36 mm square with gridded surface each
T Minute samples embedding in the same plane.
61721-36 Large Chuck – Stainless steel, 36 x 28 mm
EASY AND COMFORTABLE rectangular with gridded surface each
T Less cryostat adjustments 61721-55 Extra Large Chuck – Stainless steel 55 x 36 mm
T Comfortably preformed on a shelf just inside most cryostats rectangular shape with gridded surface each
T Easy to used – and safe time
® 3. Stainless Steel Over Chucks
® 1. Embedding Wells Freezing Blocks
Thee stainless steel rectangular blocks are a useful
tool for a number of tasks. They serve as a heat
extractor, designed to fit over the stem of the chuck.
The flat surfaces can also be used as an extra heat
61710-18 61712-34 extractor when using conventional cryostat embedding technique. The
freezing block also served as a dislodging tool. A light tap of the chuck
stem cleaves the plane of adhesion holding of the formed block to the
well. These blocks also serve as a convenient hand held flat freezing
surface useful in gently cooling the tissue without the use of sprays and
61713-50 61715-24 in plastering technique.
Cat # Description Qty
Cat # Description Qty 61725-01 Over-Chuck Freezing Block each
61710-18 Embedding Bar, 4-Well of 18 x 18mm each
61710-24 Embedding Bar, 4 well of 24 x 24 mm each ® 4. Chucks Bin
61710-30 Embedding Bar, 3 well of 30 x 30 mm each
61712-34 Embedding Bar, 2 wells of 30 & 24 mm each A sturdy stainless steel bin to store
61713-50 Embedding Bar, 2 well of 50 x 30 mm; over-chuck freezing block while staying
completely fills a standard glass slide each cold in cryostat. Removable cover for
61714-20 Embedding Bar, 20 x 20 mm, 9mm Deep Wells; easy access the contents.
Ideal for research applications, such as re-embedding
snap frozen blocks and embedding fresh blocks and Cat # Description Qty
embedding fresh whole small animal organs. each 61725-50 Chuck Storage Bin each
61715-24 Embedding Bar, 2 Deep Well of 24 x 24 mm x
6mm deep and two 24 x 24 mm x 9 mm deep.
Ideal for research applications such as re-embedding ® 5. Dispensing Slides
snap frozen blocks and embedding fresh whole small These thin transparent polyvinyl slides
animal organs. Using refrigerated embedding medium serve as a surface to precisely orient the
will maximize speed and prevent thawing of tissue into the desired position and as a
snap frozen tissues. each means to accurately transfer tissue to the
61716-10 Embedding Bar, Four 10 mm square wells.
Two wells are 4.0 mm deep and 2 wells are 6.0 mm
embedding well floor. Tissue is applied
deep. Designed for small specimens when multiple face down to the end of the dispensing slide where it can be visualized
sections need to be placed on a single slide. from below and manipulated into position. The face that is visible will be
This well freezes in 10 seconds at -24ºC. laid onto the well floor and will ultimately be the embedded surface to be
Useful in both clinical and research applications each sectioned.
Cat # Description Qty
61727-08 Dispensing Slide 8/pk

546 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec14_540-555_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 9:23 PM Page 547

Histology and Light Microscopy SECTION 14

® Precision Cryo-embedding System (continued)
® Well Bar Sets
® 6. Embedding Shelf We offer these Well Bar Sets to make your ordering easier and to offer
you a complete set for facilitate your work:
This removable
shelf can be Cat # Description Qty
installed below 61700-01 Well Bars Set 101 set
the opening of Includes: Three sizes well bars (61710-18, 61710-24, 61710-30); Six small
the cryostat in chucks (6 x 61720-28); Four large chucks (4 x 61720-36); Four Over-Chuck
Freezing Blocks (4 x 61725-01); One Chuck Bin (1 x 61725-50); 16 Dispensing
the most 61728-01
61728-LM Slide (61727-08); Cutting Board/Freezing Girdle (61733-01); 1 Elevated Freezing
convenient and Block (61734-01); 1 Angle Embedding Forceps (78359-124); and accessories
location available. The selves can be made in various sizes to 61701-01 Well Bars Set 102 set
accommodate most instruments. This set is dedicated for Ames / Tissue-Tek Cryostats.
Also available two more models of 3 pieces shelf size 4 x 8" for Includes: Two sizes well bars (61710-18, 61710-24); Six small chucks
temporary or permanently installation. One for Leica or Micron cryotats, (6 x 61720-28); Four large chucks, 36x28mm (4 x 61721-36); One Chuck
Adapter (61732-01); Four Over-Chuck Freezing Blocks (4 x 61725-01);
and one for Shandon Cryostat One Chuck Bin (1 x 61725-50); 16 Dispensing Slide (61727-08); Cutting
Cat # Description Qty Board/Freezing Girdle (61733-01); 1 Elevated Freezing Block (61734-01);
61728-01 Embedding Shelf, size 4 x 8" each 1 Angle Embedding Forceps (78359-124); and accessories
61728-LM Embedding Shelf for Leica/Micron each 61704-01 Small Embedding Well Bar Set set
61728-Sh Embedding Shelf for Shandon each Includes: One 18 mm Well Bars (61710-18); Four Small Chucks (61720-28);
Two Over Chuck Freezing Blocks (61725-01); Dispensing Slides (61727-08);
® 7. Well Bar Accessories included.
61704-02 Medium Embedding Well Bar Set set
Storage Platform Includes: One 24 mm Well Bar (61710-24); Four Small Chucks (61720-28);
This stainless steel plate to fit to the Laica cryostat Two Over Chuck Freezing Blocks (61725-01); Dispensing Slides (61727-08);
for storing Well Bar inside the cryostat Accessories included.
61704-03 Large Embedding Well Bar Set set
Cat # Description Qty
Includes: One 30 mm Well Bars (61710-30); Four Small Chucks (61720-36);
61730-01 Well Bar Storage Platform each
Two Over Chuck Freezing Blocks (61725-01); Dispensing Slides (61727-08);
Accessories included.
® 8. Chuck 61704-04 24/30 mm Well Bar Set set
Includes: One Well Bar with two wells 24 mm and two wells 30mm (61712-34);
Adapter Two Large Chucks (61720-36); Two Small Chucks (61720-28); Two Over
This Chuck Adapter machined Chuck Freezing Blocks (61625-01); 8 Dispensing Slides (61727-08)
to fit Shandon and Ames / 61704-05 50/30 Well Bar Set set
Tissue-Tek cryostats. Includes: One Well Bar 50 x 30 mm (61713-50); Two Large Chucks (61720-36)
Two Small Chucks 55 x 36 mm (61721-55)
61704-06 20 x 20 mm Deep Well Bar Set set
One 20 x 20 mm Deep Well Bar (61714-20); Two Small Chucks (61720-28);
Two Over Chuck Freezing Blocks (61725-01); 8 Dispensing Slides (61727-08)
61731-01 61732-01
Cat # Description Qty ® Freezing Griddle/
61731-01 Chuck Adapter for Shandon each
61732-01 Chuck Adapter for Ames/Tissue-Tek each Elevated Freezing
Block Set
® 9. Frozen Section Brushes Includes:
Flat white boar bristle brushes which are cut into an Cutting board / Freezing griddle —
angle. These stiffn bristles will prevent the frozen The steel “freezing griddle” serves as a
freezing surface on which to prepare
section from curling through the brush. We offer a set
frozen blocks when used in conjunction
of four brushes: two #1 with 3⁄8" angle cut and #2 with with the elevated freezing block. The small attached cutting board serves as a
1
⁄4" angle cut. cold surface to cut the frozen block while maintaining the freezing
Cat # Description Qty temperature. This simple piece of apparatus is kept cold in the cryostat and is
61735-01 Frozen Section Brush 4/set removed to the work bench only during the process of cutting the frozen
block. As sections are cut, they are kept cold on the freezing griddle.
Elevated Freezing Block — This steel block is kept cold in the cryostat and
in used in conjunction with the freezing griddle. The two broad sides of the
block are equipped with feet measuring 3.0 mm on one side and 4.5 mm on
the other. The feet create a space between the two steel bars in which the
frozen blocks are prepared. Additional elevating bars are supplied to further
elevate the block when preparing very thick portion of tissue.
Epoxy Coated Forceps
Putty knife and extra elevating bars
Cat # Description Qty
61706-01 Freezing Griddle/ Elevated Freezing Block Set each

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 547
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec14_540-555_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 9:23 PM Page 548

SECTION 14 Histology and Light Microscopy

® CytoSep™ Family
The Simport CytoSep™ Family is a series of Cytology Funnel sample chambers specially designed to concentrate cells into thin layer preparation. These
Cytology Funnels are disposable and manufactured to use with numerous major models, such as Shandon Cytospin™ 4 Cytocentrifuge, the Sakura Cyto-
Tek™ Cytocentrifuge, the Hettich Cyto-System. They are safer than reusable sample chambers and lower your risk of contamination to pathologic samples.
These disposable CytoSep™ Cytology Funnels are time saver compared to cleaning and sterilizing reusable sample chambers. The CytoSep™ Cytology
Funnels are recommended for the following applications:
T Bronchial alveolar lavage washes T Fine needle aspirates, and other aspirates T Pleural fluids – Synovial fluids
T Cerebrospinal fluids T Gastric washes – Oral cavity washes T Sputum
T Exudates and transudates T Pericardial fluids - Peritoneal fluids T Urine

® CytoSep™ for the Shandon Cytospin® 4 Cytocentrifuge

A. Simport Single CytoSep™ Cytology Funnels
Fully compatible with the Shandon CytoSpin® Centrifuge, the Simport CytoSep™ Cytology Funnels can be used to
deposit a thin layer of cells in a clearly defined area of a microscope slide. The filter card absorbs any access fluid.
These Cytology Funnels have the filter cards pre-attached for consistent, reliable results. No alignment necessary. All
disposable funnels are packaged with closure caps to seal in specimen for added protection. All components are also
available separately.
T For sample volumes of up to 0.5 ml, use the Single T For sample volumes of up to 0.4 ml, such as spinal
CytoSep™ Cytology Funnel with a White Filter Card Fluids, use the Single CytoSep™ Cytology Funnel
& Cap. It provides a cell deposition area of 6 mm with Brown Filter Card & Cap. It allows for a slower
(28 mm squares) and allows one sample to be run absorption of fluids. All the individual components
simultaneously on a single slide. It is not necessary are also available separately.
to use a different stainless steel slide clip.
EMS # Description Qty EMS # Description Qty
62750-10 Single Funnel with White Filter & Cap 50 62750-35 Funnel Cap only 50
62750-20 Single Funnel with Brown Filter & Cap 50 62750-40 White Filter Paper for Single Funnel 200
62750-30 Single Funnel only 500 62750-45 Brown Filter Paper for Single Funnel 200

B. CytoSep™ for the Shandon Cytospin® 4 Cytocentrifuge

Simport Double CytoSep™ Cytology Funnels
This double CytoSep™ Cytology Funnel with disposable sample chamber allows for two samples to be run
simultaneously on a single slide and is ideal for immunohistochemistry work. The Double CytoSep™ Cytology Funnels
provides a cell deposition area of 6 mm (28mm squared) for sample volumes of up to 0.5 ml. The filter card come pre
attached. Cap is included. No need to use a different stainless steel slide clip. Components are also available separately.
EMS # Description Qty
62751-10 Double Funnel with White Filter & Cap 50
62751-30 Double Funnel only 500
62750-35 Funnel Cap only 50
62751-40 White Filter Paper for Double Funnel 200

C. CytoSep™ for the Shandon Cytospin® 4 Cytocentrifuge

Simport ALL PLASTIC Single CytoSep™ Cytology Funnels
These are so easy to use, and improve turn-around time while giving more diagnostic information. Being totally
disposable, they eliminate time consuming decontamination and cleaning. They are safe to use and reduce the risk of
exposure to pathologic samples. They also decrease the possibility of cross-contamination.
This series of CytoSep™ Funnels is single-use. The disposable sample chambers do not need metal clips and are
designed to meet any processing equipment. They are capable producing high quality thin-layer slide preparation while
improving laboratory efficiency.
The disposable Sample Chambers with white Filter Cards are used for sample volumes up to 0.5 ml, the ones with the
Brown Filter Cards are for sample volumes up to 0.4 ml. The cell deposition area is 6 mm diameter (28 mm squared).
Filter Cards are pre-attached> Excellent for scanty specimens such as CSF. All components are also available separately.
EMS # Description Qty EMS # Description Qty
62752-10 Single Funnel with White Filter & Cap 40 62752-32 Funnel Base only 50
62752-20 Single Funnel with Brown Filter & Cap 40 62750-35 Funnel Cap only 50
62752-30 Single Funnel only 50 62750-40 White Filter Paper for Single Funnel 200
62750-45 Brown Filter Paper for Single Funnel 200

548 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec14_540-555_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 9:23 PM Page 549

Histology and Light Microscopy SECTION 14

® CytoSep™ Family (continued)

D. CytoSep™ for the Shandon Cytospin® 4 Cytocentrifuge

Simport ALL PLASTIC Double CytoSep™ Cytology Funnels
This double CytoSep™ Cytology Funnel with disposable sample chamber allows for two samples to be run
simultaneously on a single slide and is ideal for immunohistochemistry work. The Double CytoSep™ Cytology Funnels
provides a cell deposition area of 6 mm (28mm squared) for sample volumes of up to 0.5 ml. The filter card come pre
attached. Cap is included. No need to use a different stainless steel slide clip. Components are also available separately.
EMS # Description Qty
62753-10 Double Funnel with White Filter & Cap 40
62753-30 Double Funnel only 50
62752-32 Funnel Base only 50
62750-35 Funnel Cap only 50
62751-40 White Filter Paper for Double Funnel 200

E. CytoSep™ for the Shandon Cytospin® 4 Cytocentrifuge

Simport MEGA Double CytoSep™ Cytology Funnels
This ALL PLASTIC CytoSep™ MEGA Funnel provides an easy, efficient and cost effective method of producing high
quality thin-layer slide preparations. It eliminates the needs for stainless steel clips. It is ideally for preparation of large
volume samples.
The larger funnel is quick and easy to remove. The large rectangular cell deposition area of 22 x 14.75 mm (325 mm
squared) provides for up to 12 times the sample volume (6 ml) of the single Cyto™ Cytology Funnel. Strategically placed
baffles inhibit cell setting which results in uniform cell deposition and excellent quality slide preparations. This MEGA
funnels and cap minimize user exposure to pathogens while reducing the risk of specimen cross contamination. Can
prepared both air dried and fixed preparations.
EMS # Description Qty
62754-10 Single Funnel with Cap 40

® CytoSep™ for the Sakura Cyto-Tek® ® CytoSep™ for the Hettich Cyto-System
Cytocentrifuge The Simport CytoSep™
All components are available Funnel Chambers for the
separately. The Simport Hettich Cyto-System
CytoSep™ Cytology Funnel offers optimize lab throughput
the 1 ml fluid chamber component with multiple funnel
including 1 ml fluid chamber, 1 ml options in 2, 3 or 4
base holder, 1 ml chamber cap, funnels per slide. These
and the appropriate filter paper funnels are perfect for
every application such as
CSF, Viral infections,
Bronchial secretions and
come in four sizes from 1 ml to 8 ml. The 1 ml chamber is for small-
volume samples of low cell contents. Both 2 and 4 ml chambers are
EMS # Description Qty suggested for cell-rich samples, e.g. pleura, ascites and bronchial
62755-25 Fluid Chamber only, 1 ml 50 washing while the 8 ml chamber is perfect for large volume samples
62755-32 Base Holder only 50 such as urine.
62755-35 Cap only 50 EMS # Description Qty
62755-40 White Filter Card only 200 62756-30 One-Funnel Chamber, 1ml 10
62756-31 One-Funnel Chamber, 2 ml 10
62756-32 One Funnel Chamber, 4 ml 10
62756-33 One Funnel Chamber, 8 ml 10
62756-40 Filter for 1, 2 and 4 ml Chambers 200
62756-41 Filter for the 8 ml Chamber 200

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 549
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec14_540-555_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 9:23 PM Page 550

SECTION 14 Histology and Light Microscopy

® Processing Embedding Cassettes Systems ® 3. Tissue-Tek®
by Tissue Tek®; Sakura Finetek Base Molds for
Embedding
® 1. Tissue-Tek® Process/Embedding Cassette Rings
Made from chemical resistant plastic. These cassettes have an angled, Made from high quality
texture writing surface, ensuring positive identification throughout stainless steel for optimal
processing, embedding, sectioning and storage. Stainless steel cover is thermal conductivity, and
available separately. they have a well polished
surface for easy paraffin
block removal. All of the corners are rounded for good paraffin ribboning.
These Base Molds are for all applications in specimen embedding with
Tissue-Tek® Embedding Rings shown above.
Cat.# Tissue-Tek Description Pack
62527-16 4121 Base Mold 16x16x6 mm 12/pk
62527-22 4122 Base Mold 22x22x6 mm 12/pk
62527-32 4123 Base Mold 32x25x6 mm 12/pk
62527-38 4124 Base Mold 38x25x6 mm 12/pk
62528-22 4131 Base Mold 22x22x12 mm 12/pk
62528-32 4132 Base Mold 32x25x12 mm 12/pk
62528-38 4133 Base Mold 38x25x12 mm 12/pk

® Tissue-Tek® Embedding Supplies

by Tissue Tek; Sakura Finetek
1. Tissue-Tek® Mold
Release, Concentrate
Use this solution to coat base
molds to ensure complete
separation of embedding paraffin
from the mold. The working
Cat.# Tissue-Tek Description Pack solution is prepared by adding 5ml
62520-C 4191 Clear 1500/cs of Concentrate to 95 ml of ethyl
62520-W 4187 White 1500/cs alcohol or isopropyl alcohol. Molds
62520-A 4129 Aqua 1500/cs are dipped in solution and dried
62520-B 4184 Blue 1500/cs
prior to use.
62520-G 4128 Gold 1500/cs
62520-GR 4183 Green 1500/cs 2. Tissue-Tek®
62520-O 4126 Orange 1500/cs Marking Pencil
62520-P 4182 Pink 1500/cs These pencils are made from soft lead, which is ideal for marking plastic
62520-Y 4179 Yellow 1500/cs cassettes.
62520-25 4194 SS Cassette Cover 25/pk
Cat.# Tissue-Tek Description Pack
62530-01 4141 Mold Release 4 oz
® 2. Tissue-Tek® 62530-12 4141 Mold Release 12/cs
Embedding 62531-01 4160 Marking Pencil 12/pk
62531-06 4160 Marking Pencil 6pk/cs
Rings
Made from
polystyrene and ® Tissue-Tek® Cryomold®; Sakura Finetek
reinforced with the These disposable plastic
dual bar center Cryomolds produce a uniformly
support to prevent shaped flat surface specimen
warping, these rings block with tissue freezing medium
have a cross-hatch (O.C.T.) for frozen sectioning,
surface design that provide excellent paraffin bonding for clamping and Standard Cryomold fits directly
sectioning. into Cryobar® freezing wells of the
Tissue-Tek® II microtome/cryostat.
Cat.# Tissue-Tek Description Pack Use a Cryomold® adapter to adapt smaller biopsy and intermediate
62525-W 4151 White 1000/pk
Cryomold® molds to freezing wells on the Cryobar® unit.
62525-B 4116 Blue 1000/pk
62525-G 4115 Green 1000/pk Cat.# Tissue-Tek Description Pack
62525-P 4114 Pink 1000/pk 62534-25 4557 Standard, 25x20x5mm 100/pk
62525-Y 4113 Yellow 1000/pk 62534-10 4565 Biopsy, 10x10x5mm 100/pk
62534-15 4566 Intermediate 15x15x5mm 100/pk
62535-15 4568 Intermediate Cryomold Adapter 12/pk
Tissue-Tek® Filing Cabinet System, See page 609 UUUUU

550 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec14_540-555_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 9:23 PM Page 551

Histology and Light Microscopy SECTION 14

® Accessories for Tissue-Tek® CRYO3® ® Autopsy
Microtome/Cryostat Cryo 2000™ Cassettes
1. Cryomold® Specimen Made from stainless
Holders steel. It is fully
Plastic Cryomold®, round perforated allowing for
shapes with a tab for easy free movement of
handling. Available in fluids. It comes with a
standard and biopsy snap-cap which provides positive enclosure.
configurations. The
Cat.# Description Measure (mm)
standard mold measures
62310-12 SS Autopsy Cassettes 50(L)x25(W)x12(D) each
22mm (D) x 5mm deep.
The Biopsy mold
measures 15mm (D) x
® Embedding
5mm deep. Rings
Molded from the
2. Round Object
highest quality plastic,
Holders
our Embedding Rings
Machined from solid fit most base molds.
aluminum with an For added convenience, there are four colors from which to choose (Blue,
embossed surface for Pink, Green, Yellow). The large writing surface further eases
holding frozen embedding blocks. Measures: 26mm top diameter identification and handling.
(without ‘O’ ring), 28.55mm diameter with ‘O’ ring, 23mm body diameter, The Base measures 15⁄8" x 11⁄8" (42 x 28mm)
16mm height The Ring measures 1" x 1" (25 x 25mm)
Cat.# Tissue-Tek Description Qty/cs 62350-W Embedding Ring, White 250/bx
62532-01 4728 CRYO3 CryoMold, Standard 100/cs 62350-B Embedding Ring, Blue 250/bx
62532-12 4728 CRYO3 CryoMold, Standard 1200/cs 62350-P Embedding Ring, Pink 250/bx
62533-01 4730 CRYO3 Cryomold, Biopsy 100/cs 62350-G Embedding Ring, Green 250/bx
62533-12 4730 CRYO3 Cryomold, Biopsy 1200/cs
62350-Y Embedding Ring, Yellow 250/bx
62537-01 4726 Round Object Holder, 25mm each
62537-06 4726 Round Object Holder, 25mm 6/cs
® Disposable
Base Mold
® Tissue-Tek® Our Disposable Base
Microtome Mold is designed to fit
Lubrication Kit all existing cassettes.
This kit contains special low Because our base
temperature blended lubricants molds are disposable
and grease for the routine you save time on
maintenance of all of the Tissue- cleaning and storing
Tek microtomes. Tissue-Tek® II and they offer you less exposure to hazardous chemicals.
and Tissue-Tek® brand Cryo Cat.# Description Measure (mm) Pack
2000™. 62352-07 Disposable Base Mold 7x7x5mm 500/pk
62352-15 Disposable Base Mold 15x15x5mm 500/pk
Cat.# Tissue-Tek Description Pack 62352-24 Disposable Base Mold 24x24x5mm 500/pk
62556-01 4556 Tissue-Tek™ Lubricating Kit each 62352-30 Disposable Base Mold 30x24x5mm 500/pk
62352-37 Disposable Base Mold 37x24x5mm 500/pk

PathScan Enabler IV
Low Cost Digital Histology Slide Scanner
The PathScan Enabler IV, is designed to allow scanning of an entire
whole mounted histology sample attached to standard 1 x 3 inch
cover slipped glass slide. The PathScan Enabler IV solves low
power, large field of view, high resolution imaging problems.

For more information, see page 606. UUUUU

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 551
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec14_540-555_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 9:23 PM Page 552

SECTION 14 Histology and Light Microscopy

 Paraffin Tissue Microarrays
Paraffin tissue microarrays (TMAs) are becoming more common in the Arraymold features include:
laboratories. Current techniques including organizing, punching, and  Allow pathologist or researcher to view many different samples on the
inserting tissues is time consuming and involving costly equipment. same single slide
This Arraymold is the simple tool but great answer for this current  Helpful in finding IHC markers for control or quality assurance from
technique for laboratories to perform TMAs with less time hundreds of samples
consuming, excellent results.  Staining markers will be more consistent when hundreds of samples are
With this Arraymold, you can process up to 150 specimens onto one on one slide
single slide with very little time consuming, minimal technical training.  Used less costly antibody
 Arraymold kit is small enough to be stored in a drawer
DVD instruction accompanies each kit, with a step by step guide to
performing the entire TMAs process.  Rubber arraymold can be reused many times without losing its flexibility.

 Arraymold Kit A,  Arraymold Kit D,  Arraymold Kit G,

(60 cores) (36 cores) (24 cores)
This mold generates This mold generates This mold generates
2 mm diameter 2 mm diameter 3.5 mm diameter
sample core, 60 cores sample core, 36 cores sample core, 24 cores
per mold. Kit consists of: per mold. Kit consists of: per mold. Kit consists of:
10 Disposable 2 mm sterile dermal needle 10 Disposable 2 mm sterile dermal needle 10 Disposable 3.5 mm sterile dermal needle
2 Stylets (used to remove sample from needle) 2 Stylets (used to remove sample from needle) 2 Stylets (used to remove sample from needle)
1 Brass Plate (for setting cryoarray punches) 1 Brass Plate (for setting cryoarray punches) 1 Brass Plate (for setting cryoarray punches)
1 2 mm reusable rubber Arraymold (60 cores) 1 2 mm reusable rubber Arraymold (36 cores) 1 4 mm reusable rubber Arraymold (24 cores)
1 DVD instruction (NTSC) for showing how 1 DVD instruction (NTSC) for showing how 1 DVD instruction (NTSC) for showing how
to use the mold. to use the mold. to use the mold.

69130-10 Arraymold Kit A, 60 Cores each 69130-15 Arraymold Kit D, 36 Cores each 69130-55 Arraymold Kit G, 24 Cores each

 Arraymold Kit B,  Arraymold Kit F,  Arraymold Package Kit

(150 cores) (35 cores) To save money, you can order Arraymold
This mold generates This mold generates Package Kit. This package includes two or three
1.5 mm diameter 3 mm diameter Arraymold kits listed above.
sample core, 150 cores sample core, 35  Arraymold Kit 1: Including Arraymold Kit A
per mold. Kit consists of cores per mold. Kit consists of: and Arraymold Kit B
10 Disposable 2 mm sterile dermal needle 10 Disposable 3 mm sterile dermal needle  Arraymold Kit 2: Including Arraymold Kit A
2 Stylets (used to remove sample from needle) 2 Stylets (used to remove sample from needle) and Arraymold Kit C
1 Brass Plate (for setting cryoarray punches) 1 Brass Plate (for setting cryoarray punches)  Arraymold Kit 3: Including Arraymold Kit B
1 1.5 mm reusable rubber Arraymold (150 cores) 1 4 mm reusable rubber Arraymold (35 cores) and Arraymold Kit C
1 DVD instruction (NTSC) for showing how 1 DVD instruction (NTSC) for showing how to use
 Arraymold Kit 4: Including all three
to use the mold. the mold.
Arraymold Kit A, B, and C
69130-20 Arraymold Kit B, 150 Cores each 69130-45 Arraymold Kit F, 35 Cores each
69131-01 Arraymold Package Kit 1 (A +B) each
69131-02 Arraymold Package Kit 2 (A +C) each
 Arraymold Kit C,  Arraymold Kit E, 69131-03 Arraymold Package Kit 3 (B +C) each
(15 cores) (72 cores) 69131-04 Arraymold Package Kit 4 (A +B+C)each
This mold generates This mold generates
4 mm diameter 1.5 mm diameter  Spare Accessories for the
sample core, 15 cores sample core, 72 cores per ArrayMold
per mold. Kit consists of: mold. Kit consists of:
69130-56 Punch Needle 1.5mm 50/pk
10 Disposable 4 mm sterile dermal needle 10 Disposable 1.5 mm sterile dermal needle 69130-57 Punch Needle 2.0mm 50/pk
2 Stylets (used to remove sample from needle) 2 Stylets (used to remove sample from needle) 69130-58 Punch Needle 3.0mm 50/pk
1 Brass Plate (for setting cryoarray punches) 1 Brass Plate (for setting cryoarray punches) 69130-59 Punch Needle 3.5mm 50/pk
1 4 mm reusable rubber Arraymold (15 cores) 1 1.5 mm reusable rubber Arraymold (72 cores) 69130-62 Punch Needle 4.0mm 50/pk
1 DVD instruction (NTSC) for showing how 1 DVD instruction (NTSC) for showing how 69130-63 Styler 1.5mm each
to use the mold. to use the mold. 69130-64 Styler 2.0mm each
69130-65 Styler 3.0mm each
69130-40 Arraymold Kit C, 15 Cores each 69130-25 Arraymold Kit E, 72 Cores each 69130-66 Styler 3.5mm each
69130-67 Styler 4.0mm each

552 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec14_540-555_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 9:24 PM Page 553

Histology and Light Microscopy SECTION 14

® Micro Baskets ® Tissue Processing Capsules

Made from stainless steel and has a positive clip-on cover. It is ideal These one piece plastic capsules are hinged and perfectly aligned,
for processing micro specimens. It can be used as a holder for paraffin offering convenience and ease of use. Both the top and the bottom
sections while removing paraffin wax. Available in medium and fine of the capsule have an open mesh offering maximum fluid flow during
mesh. It measures: 20mm (dia.)x 5mm(deep). processing. A frosted marking surface assures permanent identification.
62312-10 Micro Baskets, Medium Mesh each These capsules are commonly used with the Embedding Ring System.
62312-16 Micro Baskets, Medium Mesh 6/pk They are available in two sizes.
62312-20 Micro Baskets, Fine Mesh each
To Use: Simply place the tissue in the capsule, close the cover to lock,
62312-26 Micro Baskets, Fine Mesh 6/pk
and the sample is now ready for processing.
T The 38mm(Dia.)x8mm(Deep) are intended for use with normal tissue.
® Expandable T The 29mm(Dia.)x6mm(Deep) are intended for use with Biopsy tissue.
Capsules
Made from stainless steel and Cat.# Color Capsule Size Pack
62358-W White 38mmx8mm 500/pk
comes with a positive snap cap.
62359-W White 29mmx6mm 500/pk
They are expandable. When closed
its dimensions are 40mm (dia.) x
7mm (deep) and can be expanded ® Specimen Discs
to 11mm deep. Perforated top and bottom. Accurately machined chrome plated aluminum discs that fit most
62314-01 Expandable Capsule each micro-tomes and cryostats. They have a knurled surface for better
62314-06 Expandable Capsule 6/pk specimen handling. The shanks all measure 3⁄8” (10mm) 15⁄8” Long
(40mm) in diameter and are straight. Available in a variety of disc sizes.
® Stainless Steel The thickness of the table is 1⁄8” (3mm).
Tissue Capsules
Features:
T A secure positive snap-on cover.
T Perforated on the top and bottom
for easy fluid circulation.
T Can be partitioned for up to 4
sections.
The separator is not included. They measure: 37mm(I.D.)x6mm(deep)
(17⁄16”x3⁄16”) 62355-01 Specimen Disc, size 7⁄8” (2.2cm) each
62320-01 SS Tissue Capsule each 62355-04 Specimen Disc, size 11⁄8” (2.9cm) each
62320-06 SS Tissue Capsule 6/pk 62355-07 Specimen Disc, size 11⁄2” (3.8cm) each
62320-20 Tissue Capsule Separator 2/pk 62355-10 Specimen Disc, size 2” (5.1cm) each

® Plastic ® Embryo
Tissue Dishes
Capsules These dishes are
molded from clear
glass and come with
a glass lid for the
viewing or staining of
T Molded from polyethylene; T A weighted end floats the free-floating specimens.
resistant to all processing capsule in a upright position Cat.# Description Pack
chemicals, including Zenker’s to conserve space. 70543-30 Embryo Dish, 30 mm O.D. each
fixative. T Perforated on the top and 70543-45 Embryo Dish, 45 mm O.D. each
T A three-compartment bottom for better circulation
divider which is removable of the fluid.
for specimens up to 35mm. T Snap-on hinged cover.
They measure: 35mm(I.D.)x35mm(I.D.)x10mm(deep) (13⁄8x5⁄16)
62322-12 Plastic Tissue Capsules 12/pk

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 553
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec14_540-555_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 9:24 PM Page 554

SECTION 14 Histology and Light Microscopy

® Paper Biopsy Bags ® Stainless Steel Biopsy
Due to the amazing demand Inserts
from our customers, EMS is A two-part loose fitting stainless steel
re-introducing the original capsule with welded mesh that fits inside
Paper Biopsy Bags. These the processing cassettes preventing the
bags are made from porous loss of small or friable material while
paper which provides allowing interchange of fluids.
maximum tissue safety
during processing. The bags permit proper fluid exchange and drainage. They fit all process/embedding cassettes
such as 70025 and 72025 as well as Uni-Cassettes (62500).
To Use: Simply introduce the specimen into the bag and fold its end,
enclosing the cassette or capsule – you are now ready to process as usual. Cat.# Description Pack
62328-01 Stainless Steel Biopsy Insert each
Bag measurement: Overall 1 ⁄4" W x 3" L (45 x 75 mm), Inside Seam:
3

13⁄8" W (35 mm)

Cat.# Description Qty
62326-01 Paper Biopsy Bags 100/pk.
62326-05 Paper Biopsy Bags 500/pk.

® Biopsy Foam Pads

Made from polyester urethane
foam. These pads are used to hold
biopsies in place and prevent them ® Peel Away Disposable Embedding Molds
from being lost during processing. For plastic or paraffin embedding; no block trimming needed. Inside
Biopsy samples are sandwiched fingers hold ID slip which becomes embedded in the block for positive
between two foam pads and are permanent identification.
placed either in tissue capsules or
cassettes with metal or plastic lids. 70180 Truncated Mold, size 8x8x22mm(Deep) 288/cs
70181 Truncated Mold, size 12x12x22mm(Deep) 288/cs
Foam Pad For 70182 Square Mold, size 22x22x22mm(Deep) 288/cs
Cat.# Measures Use With Qty 70183 Rectangular Mold, size 22x30x22mm(Deep) 288/cs
62325-01 25mm Dia x 2mm Thick Small Capsules 1000/pk 70184 Rectangular Mold, size 22x40x22mm(Deep) 288/cs
62325-04 34mm Dia x 2mm Thick Large Capsules 1000/pk
62325-06 30 x 25 x 2mm Thick Cassettes 1000/pk
® Adjustable
® Biopsy Bags Embedding Mold
T Made from nylon cloth, 0.2mm These two "L’s" shape and
mesh diameter. All seams are stainless steel base plate form an
heat-sealed. adjustable embed-ding mold,
T Allows for unrestricted fluid suitable for embedding various
movement around the tissue. size specimens with a minimum
T Reduces the loss of small biopsy of waste material. Available in 5 different sizes.
specimens. Cat.# Inside Measurements Pack
T Reduces cross contamination and 62361-01 Adjustable Mold, 7⁄8" x 13⁄4" x 1⁄2" (22x44x13mm) each
pressure artifacts by using sponges. 62361-03 Adjustable Mold, 7⁄8" x 13⁄4" x 3⁄4" (22x44x19mm) each
62361-05 Adjustable Mold, 7⁄8" x 13⁄4" x 1" (22x44x25mm) each
Cat.# Bag Measures Qty
62361-07 Adjustable Mold, 7⁄8" x 13⁄4" x 11⁄4" (22x44x32mm) each
62324-35 Nylon Biopsy Bag 35 x 50mm 100/pk
62361-09 Adjustable Mold, 31⁄2" x 53⁄4" x 1" (89x146x25mm) each
62324-75 Nylon Biopsy Bag 45 x 74mm 100/pk
62324-98 Nylon Biopsy Bag 98 x 75mm 100/pk
® Embedding Blocks
® CellSafe ™
T Precisely machined from hard
Biopsy Insert phenolic resin.
The CellSafe is a disposable plastic T The faces of the embedding
blocks are cut very deeply pro-
biopsy insert consisting of two hinged
viding a firm hold of the
inter-locking frames with an integral embedded specimen.
nylon mesh. The mesh is extra fine
T Suitable for cellodin or paraffin
and therefore ensures a high level of sections.
specimen security.
Available in four sizes.
Measurements—Overall: 28 mm x 25 mm x 5 mm high (1.1” x 1” x 1⁄4”); 62363-01 Embedding Block, 19x19x19mm High each
The mesh area: 18 mm x 18 mm x 2 mm high 62363-02 Embedding Block, 25x25x19mm High each
62363-03 Embedding Block, 38x38x19mm High each
Cat.# Description Pack
62363-04 Embedding Block, 51x51x19mm High each
62327-10 CellSafe™ Biopsy Insert 100/pk

554 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec14_540-555_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 9:24 PM Page 555

Histology and Light Microscopy SECTION 14

® Coverslip ® Slide Coating Adhesive
Tape Knives Prepared from 3-aminopro-
Coverslip Machine Tape pyltriethoxysilane in acetone.
Cutting Knives Good for coating glass slides to
adhere paraffin sections for further processing
without sections falling off from the slide. READY
65005-50 Coverslip Tape Knives 5/pk TO USE.
71302 Slide Coating Adhesive 100ml

Glass knife strips, see Specimen Preparation section, For Our Biobond, Tissue Sectioning
page 255 UUUUU Adhesive, see page 9 UUUUU

® Tissue Capture Pen ® Fro-Marker

A wide tipped pen designed for use with frozen sections. The pen
provides a sticky membrane which when applied to the slide and onto
which the section is placed it eliminates the section from falling off,
moving, or wrinkling on the slide during immunostaining procedures.
The membrane is stable up to 110°C and is suitable for vigorous
applications such as in-situ hybridization.

With one swift application of the EMS Tissue Capture Pen, you are able
to change your plain glass slide into a coated one.
The EMS Tissue Capture Pen is a coating pen with a wide point (18mm)
for fixing various tissue sections (paraffin embedded, frozen and formalin
sections, etc.) The unique pen is unaffected by heat up to 120ºC so it
offers secure and firm adhesion of the tissue section. It may be used in 71313-10 Fro-Marker each
Microwave staining, immunostaining, in situ etc….
One application is all that is needed, and after it is applied, allow to dry for ® Aqua-Hold
1-2 minutes. The EMS Tissue Capture may be used in conjunction with our
Pap Pen
Pap-Pen (71310) and will allow for easy placement of adherent as well as The Aqua-Hold Pap Pen
non-adherent cells on a glass slide. Immunostaining/ISH can be performed draws a liquid repellent
by applying a few drops of tissue suspension or liquid media onto the glass barrier around a section of
slide which is circled by the Pap-Pen, and then your section can be placed. tissue. Used like a paint
71314-10 EMS Tissue Capture Pen each pen, you just draw a well on a slide. The barrier creates the proper
surface tension to hold aqueous solutions such as costly antibody and
® Liquid Blocker-Super PAP PEN other valuable specimens. After application, the barrier material is
The Newest Staining Guard Pen insoluble in alcohol and acetone but can be removed after staining with
xylene. Each pen holds 13ml of long-lasting material, making hundreds of
wells. Red tint distinguishes the well drawing on the slide to easily view.
71311 Aqua-Hold Pen each

® Para-Marker
A wide tipped pen, designed for use with paraffin sections. Provides a
sticky membrane to the glass slide which not only prevents paraffin
sections from falling off but also keeps the sections flat on the slide.

New and improved... The Super PAP PEN outperforms the original PAP Pen.
The Super PAP PEN may be used at temperatures as high as 120ºF. (The old
style PAP PEN worked only up to 90ºF). WIth this high temperature feature,
one can now use the Super PAP PEN to per-form the peroxidase method,
ABC method, and Fluorescent antibodies method with satisfactory results.
71310 Super PAP PEN, Large each
71312 Super PAP PEN, Small each 71313-20 Para-Marker each

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 555
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec14_556-571_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 9:30 PM Page 556

SECTION 14 Histology and Light Microscopy

® Tissue-Tek® SmartWrite Color Slide Printer
On-Demand Color Slide Printing is what you get with this unit
Features and Benefits
T High resolution color printing - reduces need for managing multiple color slide inventory, lowering costs
T On-demand slide printing - streamlines workflow and reduces specimen identification errors
T Small footprint - fits perfectly on a microtome work station or next to a cytology slide processor
T Prints directly onto slides - eliminates errors from hand writing and label application
T Scannable 2D and 1D bar code, alphanumeric and graphic printing capabilities —
optimizes flexibility for now and in the future
T Optional SmartWrite™ Software - provides configurable label design and is
interfaceable to LIS systems
T Print resistant to Xylene, alcohol, histology reagents, stains, heat, and
chemicals*. Ensures reliable identification of slides now and in the future
Applications
T On demand slide printing - color or black labels printed directly onto slides

Specifications
Electrical Holder Light Proper loading
Power AC100–240VAC, 50/60 Hz, 60 watts Diagnostic Self diagnosis, error messages and codes
Environmental Function
Operational 10 - 40 degrees C (50 - 105 F)
Ambient Temp. Functional
Printing Technology Thermal transfer
Operational 30 - 85% (non-condensing)
Relative Humidity Print Speed Up to 9 slides/minute (monochrome)
Up to 5 slides/minute (solid colors)
Storage -10 - 60 degrees C (14 - 140 F) Up to 4 slides/minute (blended colors)
Ambient Temp.
Print Resolution 300 dpi
Storage 10 - 85% (non-condensing)
Relative Humidity Ink Type Resin thermal transfer

Physical Ribbon Types CMYK: 1000 prints; Black: 5000 prints

Height 8.6" (218.4mm) Printable Colors Multiple solid colors;
Width 7.08" (179.8mm) others available via software

Depth 12.58" (319.5mm) Slide Types 3" x 1" standard or positive charged,
smooth surface white frosted end,
Weight 16.8 lbs. (7.62 kg) clipped corners
User Interface Slide Capacity 100 slides - Blue Slide Holder
Power Button One power switch with LED indicator,
located on the upper right side of the Output Tray Capacity 15 slides
contol panel on the front of the instrument Construction Steel frame with powder-coated
Slide Feed Button One button with LED indicator located on steel and plastic covers
the upper right side of the contol panel on Data Interface USB 2.0
the front of the instrument beneath the Printer Drivers Windows™ XP/Vista/7
power button
Warranty One year parts and labor
Lid Open Button One button located on the upper left side
Applications
Standard Accessories of the instrument
On demand slide printing — color or black labels printed directly
One Operating Manual Blue Slide Illuminates blue slide holder indicating onto slides
One Quickstart Guide
One Printer Driver
One Blue Slide Holder Ordering Information
One Black Print Cartridge
Cat. # Description Qty.
One Color Print Cartridge
65455 Slide Printer each
One Print Head Cleaning Pen
65456 Scanner With Stand each
One USB Cable
65457 SmartWrite Software each
One Power Cord
65458 PC with touchstone, mouse and keyboard each
One Power Converter
65459 Slide Holder, Blue each
Optional Accessories
65455-BL Print Cartridge, Black 6/case
2D Bar Code Scanner with Stand
65455-CO Print Cartridge, Color 6/case
Tissue-Tek® SmartWrite™
Software
Touch Screen PC
Blue Slide Holder one
Black Print Cartridge 6/case * CAUTION: Contact with the Tissue-Tek® SmartWrite™ color printed label while wet with organic solvents will result in loss of printed information
Color Print Cartridge 6/case

556 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec14_556-571_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 9:30 PM Page 557

Histology and Light Microscopy SECTION 14

Electron Microscopy Sciences
® Optional Accessories for Tissue Tek SmartWrite™ Announces their State of the Art
Shuttle® Computer X50V2 PLUS Touch Screen PC
Specifications
Scientific Equipment
RAM 1GB PC3-10600 1333MHZ
DDR3 SODIMM NON-ECC
Power 40W Power Adapter. I
nput: 100- 240V AC
Repair Center
Hard Drive 250GB SATA 5400 RPM LCD Panel 15.6" 16:9 Wide Panel,
8MB 2.5" 1366 x 768 pixels
OS Windows® 7 Home Premium 32 BIT. Touch Screen Single Touch
Includes: Windows®7 Home Web Cam 1.3M Pixel
Premium 32 BIT Recovery DVD
MIC Electret Condenser Microphone
Form Factor All-in-one PC
Left Side Power-on button,
Net Weight 3.6kg Stylus pen port,
Dimension (W) 15.4" x (H) 12.8" x (D) 1.4" USB port x 2,
Processor Intel® Atom™ D510 DC-input for power supply
Dual Core CPU (1,66 GHz). Right Side 4 in 1 Card reader,
CPU on board USB port x 2, Headphone,
Memory 2 Slot (Supports up to 4 GB Mic, LAN port
DDRII, Max 2 x 2GB) Back Panel D-sub port x 1,
Serial port x 2 (optional), No equipment is too small or impossible to either
Chipset NM10
VGA Intel® GMA 3150 with a
Parallel port x 1 (optional), Repair, Refurbish, or Upgrade!
Kensington lock
powerful 400MHz core.
Dynamic Video Memory Audio IDT92HD81 2 Channel High, Our facility is equipped to handle the
Technology (DVMT) 4.0. 2W x 2 Stereo speaker
following Manufacturers:
Intel® ClearVideo Technology Accessories Quick Guide x 1,
Ethernet JMC261 IEEE 802.3u 65W Power Adapter x 1, T Balzers/Baltech T Leica
100Base-T specification power cord x 1, Driver CD x 1
T Denton T Reichert-Jung
compliant. 10MB/s,100MB/s. Wireless LAN IEEE 802.11b/g/n
Support Wake-On-LAN function Card Reader 4 in 1 Card Reader (support T Edwards T LKB
Storage Interface SD/MMC/MS/MS-pro) T Emitech T RMC-Boeckeler
Support 2.5" Hard Drive Software Shuttle Control AP
T Emscope T And Many
DataLogic® Gryphon™ GD4430-HCK1 2D Barcode Scanner T Bio-Rad More…
Specifications
Our unique service allows us to come to
Decoding Capabilities Reading Performance
1D Linear Codes Autodiscriminates Image Capture Graphic Formats: BMP, JPEG,
you, or you send the equipment to us,
all standard 1D codes including TIFF; Greyscale: 256, 16, 2 depending on the level of
GS1,DataBar™ linear codes Image Sensor Wide VGA: 752 x 480 pixels
Repair/Refurbishment needed.
2D Aztec Code; China Han Xin Code; Light Source Aiming 650 nm VLD
Data Matrix; MaxiCode; QR Code
Motion Tolerance 25 IPS Equipment such as:
Electrical
Print Contrast 25% Ratio (Min.)
Current Operating (Typical)160 mA @ 5 VDC; T Vacuum Systems T Lynx
Standby/Idle (Typical): 65 mA @ 5 VDC Reading Angle +/- 40°; Roll (Tilt): 180°;
Input Voltage 4.2 - 5.25 VDC Pitch Skew (Yaw): +/- 40° T Microtomes T Freeze Fracture
Reading Ranges Reading Beeper (Adjustable Tone); T Ultramicrotomes Instruments
Typical Depth Minimum distance determined
of Field by symbol length and scan angle.
Indicators Datalogic ‘Green Spot’ Good
T Tissue Slicers T High Pressure
Read Feedback; Good Read LED
Printing resolution, contrast,
Resolution (Max.) 1D Linear: 0.102 mm/4 mils; T Vibratomes Freezers/
and ambient light dependent. Slammers/
Code 39 5 mils: 4.0 to 19.0 cm / 1.6 to 7.5 in
Data Matrix: 0.178 mm/7 mils; T Ovens
Code 39 10 mils: 1.0 to 30.0 cm / 0.4 to 11.8 in PDF417: 0.102 mm/4 mils Propane Jet
Data Matrix 10 mils: 2.0 to 16.0 cm / 0.8 to 6.3 in Special T Baths
Freezers
Data Matrix 15 mils: 0 to 23.6 cm /0 to 9.3 in
T Shakers
EAN-13 13 mils: 1.5 to 40.0 cm / 0.6 to 15.7 in Disinfectant-Ready enclosures treated with anti-
T And Much More…
PDF417 10 mils: 0.5 to 22.0 cm / 0.2 to 8.6 in microbial additives; Highly visible 4-Dot aimer with T Tissue Processors
QR Code 10 mils: 3.0 to 12.5 cm / 1.2 to 4.9 in center cross for targeted scanning

For more information on any of

our services, a comprehensive
quote, please call, write,
or e-mail us today.

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 557
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec14_556-571_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 9:31 PM Page 558

SECTION 14 Histology and Light Microscopy

® Microscope Glass Slides -Esco
Our microscope glass slides are manufactured by Esco - Erie Scientific Co,
where reliability and quality are recognized to be the best.
T Made from the highest quality glass sheets; white glass.
T The dimensions of the slides have been standardized to millimeters
according to the U.S. Government Specifications.
T They are packed with care to assure cleanliness.
T The glass is fully annealed to minimize chipping.
Our microscope glass slides are precleaned and are made from clear-white
glass. They are individually inspected and free from moisture, dirt, and film.
All of our slides are flat, uniform and durable. They are packed 72 slides/bx
and cellophane wrapped. Physical Properties:
Glass Density: ....................................................................2.4024g/cm3
Softening Point: ............................................................................724ºC
Microscope Slide Specifications: Soda Lime Glass Annealing Point:............................................................................545ºC
Strain Point: ..................................................................................511ºC
Chemical Makeup Green (%) White (%)
Dispersion Value (Nu Value): ..............................................................64
Silicon Dioxide 72.2 72.15 Dimensional Variance: ..............................................................±1.5000
Sodium Oxide 14.5 14.25 Thermal Expansion: ..........................................(0 -300ºC) 8.36x106/ ºC
Calcium Oxide 6.5 6.25 Dielectric Constant:..................................@20ºC (68ºF) (1MHz):ET =6.7
Magnesium Oxide 4.4 4.1
Young’s Modulus: ..............................................E = 10,000,000 lbs/sq"
Aluminum Oxide 1.5 1.12
Potassium Oxide 0.3 1.15 Torsion Modulus: ................................................G = 4,000,000 lbs/sq"
Sulfur Trioxide 0.3 0.3 Poisson’s Ratio: ..........................................................................μ = 0.2
Iron Oxide 0.1 0.3 Luminous Transmittance: ............................................@ 0.040: 91.8%
Titanium Oxide 0.05 0.05 Refractive Index: ................................1.517 @ 546.07 nm wavelengths

® 1. Microscope Slide, Plain End

Cat.# Thickness Size,mm Pack
71880-01 1.2 mm 25x75 Gross
71880-10 1.2 mm 25x75 10 Gross
71880-20 1.2 mm 25x75 20 Gross

® 2. Microscope Slide, Frosted End

These slides have 3⁄4” sandblasted frosting on one end which allows for easy marking.
Cat.# Thickness Size,mm Pack
71870-01 1.2 mm 25x75 Gross
71870-10 1.2 mm 25x75 10 Gross
71870-20 1.2 mm 25x75 20 Gross

® 3. Microscope Slide, SUPERFROST® End

With a superfrosted end. These slides have one side which is frosted with a brilliant white opaque
coating that will take and retain all pen markings. They offer superior readability and they are
permanent.
Cat.# Thickness Size,mm Pack
71867-01 1 mm 25x75 Gross
71867-10 1 mm 25x75 10 Gross
71868-01 1.2 mm 25x75 Gross
71868-10 1.2 mm 25x75 10 Gross

® 4. Microscope Slide, SUPERFROST® PLUS - Adhesion Slide

These Superfrost Plus(+) glass slides are made by a new process offering the following features:
T They place a permanent positive charge in the microscope slide.
T They electrostatically attract frozen tissue sections and cytology preparations, binding them
to the slide.
T They form a bridge so that covalent bonds develop between formalin fixed sections and the glass.
T Tissue sections and cytological preparations adhere better to the Plus glass slides without
the need for special adhesives or protein coatings.
continued UUUUU

558 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec14_556-571_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 9:31 PM Page 559

Histology and Light Microscopy SECTION 14

® Microscope Glass Slides -Esco (continued)
® 4. Microscope Slide, SUPERFROST PLUS - Adhesion Slide (continued)
®

BENEFITS:
T Plus glass puts an end to background staining.
T It eliminates blue or red background staining which is often encountered in hematoxylin
and eosin staining of tissue sections mounted on albuminized glass.
T No brown background staining occurs when immuno-peroxidase or in situ DNA procedures
are performed on our Plus glass. A higher degree of enzyme digestion can be performed
on plus glass without the loss of tissue sections.
T Cytological preparations placed on Plus glass resist cell loss during enzyme digestion,
DNA denaturation and RNA hybridization.
T Plus glass improves tissue adherence in microwave staining.
T Chromic acid washes are redundant for molecular hybridization because the slides are RNAse-free.
T Plus slides are Color coded to help keep track of specimens during processing as well as filing.
The slides measure: 25x75 mm, 1 mm thick.
71869-10 Superfrost Plus Slide, White 1 gross 71869-31 Superfrost Plus Slide, Green 10 gross
71869-11 Superfrost Plus Slide, White 10 gross 71869-40 Superfrost Plus Slide, Pink 1 gross
71869-20 Superfrost Plus Slide, Blue 1 gross 71869-41 Superfrost Plus Slide, Pink 10 gross
71869-21 Superfrost Plus Slide, Blue 10 gross 71869-50 Superfrost Plus Slide, Yellow 1 gross
71869-30 Superfrost Plus Slide, Green 1 gross 71869-51 Superfrost Plus Slide, Yellow 10 gross

® 5. Superfrost® Plus Gold Slides

These slides are specially designed for the application of fresh or formalin fixed frozen tissue.
They are inherently tissue binding so there is no need to add sprays or adhesives to the slides.
FEATURES:
T Securely attach frozen breast, brain, skin and other normally difficult to bond tissue sec-
tions to the slide.
T Ideal when special stains, immunocytochemical and in situ DNA hybridization techniques
are applied on fresh and fixed frozen tissue.
T Assist tissue adherence during immunocytochemical analysis of estrogen and progesterone
receptors in fresh frozen breast tissue.
T They are compatible with both toluidine blue and hematoxylin and eosin rapid frozen section stains.
71864-01 Superfrost Plus Gold Slide 25 bx
71864-10 Superfrost Plus Gold Slide 10 cs

® 6. Colormark™ Plus Glass Slide

Specimen Slide identification is VITAL. Automated etched slide labeling instruments ensure specimen
slide integrity but are difficult to read on ordinary slides. To clearly read diamond scribed slide labels
against any surface, you need the only slide designed to be used with your automated slide labeling
instrument. You need COLORMARK slides.These brightly printed slides greatly improve etched labeling
visibility and offer all the advantages of Superfrost® slides. A bright contrasting color has been printed
on the back of the Superfrost end so that patient or specimen information etched through the painted
end on the front is clearly visible. Colormark Plus slides are adhesive coated therefore ensuring the
adhesion of the section to the slide during staining procedures.
63400-10 White Frosted End Front, Black frosted End Back 1 gross
63400-11 White Frosted End Front, Black frosted End Back 10 gross
63400-20 Blue Frosted End Front, Blue Frosted End Back 1 gross
63400-21 Blue Frosted End Front, Blue Frosted End Back 10 gross
63400-30 Green Frosted End Front, Green Frosted End Back 1 gross
63400-31 Green Frosted End Front, Green Frosted End Back 10 gross
63400-40 Pink Frosted End Front, Red Frosted End Back 1 gross
63400-41 Pink Frosted End Front, Red Frosted End Back 10 gross
63400-50 Yellow Frosted End Front, Red Frosted End Back 1 gross
63400-51 Yellow Frosted End Front, Red Frosted End Back 10 gross
63400-60 Lavender Frosted End Front, Black Frosted End Back 1 gross
63400-61 Lavender Frosted End Front, Black Frosted End Back 10 gross

continued UUUUU

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 559
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec14_556-571_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 9:31 PM Page 560

SECTION 14 Histology and Light Microscopy

® Microscope Glass Slides -Esco (continued)
® 7. Control Slides
Use our Histology Control Slides and you will always know for sure which specimen is the Patients
and which is the Control.
T Patient and Control tissue samples on the T Proof of correct staining procedures.
same slide. T Easy and permanent identification of
T Positive identification of control and patient slides.
samples. Available in two configurations: Style #329+
T Utmost adhesion of samples to slide with 3⁄4 inch of frosted area; style 334+
throughout staining procedure. with 1 inch frosted area.
63448-10 Control Slide 329+ 144/pk
63448-20 Control Slide 334+ 144/pk

® 8. Special Glass Slides:

® A. Cytology Slide: 1x3” (25x75mm), 1mm Thick
T Superfrost letters VCE and lines on the same side as the Superfrost end.
71874-01 Cyto-Slide Letters VCE & Lines 1 gross
71874-10 Cyto-Slide Letters VCE & Lines 10 gross
T Superfrost letters VC and lines on the same side as the Superfrost end.
71875-01 Cyto-Slide Letters VC & Lines 1 gross
71875-10 Cyto-Slide Letters VC & Lines 10 gross
T Dakin - A fully frosted sandblasted surface on the same side as the Superfrosted end.
71876-01 Dakin - Fully Frosted Slide 1 gross
71876-10 Dakin - Fully Frosted Slide 10 gross
® B. Round Corner Microslides: This item is discontinued. Please see SuperFrost™
Clipped Corner Slide, #s 71882-01 and 71882-10 below.

® C. Concavity Slides Polished spherical depression. Useful for tissue cultures.

Measurements:
Glass Slide Size: ..........................................................................................26mm x 76mm
Concavity Diameter: ..........................................................................................15 - 18 mm
Depth of Well: ................................................................................................0.5 - 0.8 mm

Cat.# Thickness No. Wells Pack

71878-01 1.4-1.6mm 1 12/pk
71878-03 1.4-1.6mm 2 12/pk
71878-04 1.4-1.6mm 3 12/pk
71878-05 1.95-2.35mm 1 12/pk
71878-06 1.95-2.35mm 2 12/pk
71878-07 3.12-3.22mm 1 12/pk
71878-08 3.12-3.22mm 2 12/pk

® D. Slides with Etched Rings

Useful for Fluorescent Antibody Examination. The size of the slide is 3”x1”, approximately 1 mm
thick, with an etched frosted end. Pre-cleaned. Packed 72/bx.
71879-10 Two Etched 10mm Circle Slide 1 gross
71879-11 Two Etched 10mm Circle Slide 10 gross
71879-15 Two Etched 15mm Circle Slide 1 gross
71879-16 Two Etched 15mm Circle Slide 10 gross

® 9. SuperFrost™ Clipped Corner Slide

Designed specially for the Sysmex SP-100 slide prep unit and recommended for the Diagnostics.
The 45 degree clipped corner slide offers exceptional cleanliness and resistance to sticking. The
tight tolerances for the length and width help to reduce accumulation of glass chips within the
instrument. The pre-cleaned slide is 25 x 75mm and approximately 1 mm thick.
Ideal for technicians, who routinely prepare large number of slides.
Cat.# Description Qty
71882-01 SuperFrost™Clipped Corner Slide 1 gross
71882-10 SuperFrost™Clipped Corner Slide 10 gross

560 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec14_556-571_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 9:31 PM Page 561

Histology and Light Microscopy SECTION 14

® Microscope Slide – Gold Seal® ® Large Glass Slides
In our line of slides we proudly introduce GOLD
SEAL® microscope slides for your convenience.
GOLDSEAL® slides are made from pure white glass
(soda-lime) and at accurately cut sizes. To
preserve the highest quality from manufacturer to
ultimate user, all GOLD SEAL® slides are
hermetically sealed in our Moisture-Barrier™
system, providing a dry-slide environments during
shipment and storage.
UltraStick™ (adhesion coating: APTES, 3-
Aminopropyl Triethoxysilane)– Adhesion coated
micro slides- one of the best from GOLD SEAL®-
are ideal for histological and cytological
applications demanding superior specimen-to-slide
adhesion. The enhanced silane coating eliminates
tedious procedures and special additives to your In addition to our comprehensive collection of glass slides
water bath. Procedures such as manufactured by ESCO we now carry large glass slides
immunoperoxidase, in situ DNA hybridization, which are available in 75x38mm and 75x51mm. These
enzyme digestion and frozen tissue processing will slides are precleaned, individually selected and are
benefit from the amplified adhesion characteristics suitable for large specimen sections such as, brain tissue.
of this product. Overall cost savings and assured 71860-01 75x38mm Glass Slide, 1mm Thick 1 gross/pk
quality of your prepared specimen will be 71862-01 75x51mm Glass Slide, 1.2mm Thick 1 gross/pk
recognized with UltraStick™ from Gold Seal®
Cat.# Gold Seal Description Pack
Plain Slides
® Quartz Microscope Slides
63710-05 3010 3 x 1", 1 mm Thick 1 gross
63710-25 3010 3 x 1", 1 mm Thick 25 gross
63711-05 3048 3 x 1", 1.2 mm Thick 1 gross
63711-25 3048 3 x 1", 1.2 mm Thick 25 gross
63712-05 3010-P 3 x 1", 1mm Thick – Cytologentics processing 1 gross
63712-25 3010-P 3 x 1", 1mm Thick – Cytologentics processing 25 gross
Patented Moistur-Barrier™ enclosing 5 gross inner packages
63718-05 3054 25 x 75mm, 1mm Thick, Plain 5 gross
63718-25 3054 25 x 75mm, 1mm Thick, Plain 25 gross
63719-05 3055 25 x 75mm, 1mm Thick, White Rite-On™ Frost 5 gross
63719-25 3055 25 x 75mm, 1mm Thick, White Rite-On™ Frost 25 gross
Rite-On™ Frosted Slides with brilliant white epoxy ink
There are many applications that require slides that have
63720-05 3051 3 x 1", 1mm Thick, Frosted One End, One Side 1 gross
63720-25 3051 3 x 1", 1mm Thick, Frosted One End, One Side 25 gross absolute UV transparency and high temperature
63721-05 3050 25 x 75mm, 1mm Thick, Frosted One End, One Side 1 gross properties. EMS now is introducing the highest quality,
63721-25 3050 25 x 75mm, 1mm Thick, Frosted One End, One Side 25 gross clear fused quartz microscope slides to meet all of these
63722-05 3050-P 25 x 75mm, 1mm Thick, Frosted End, One Side, requirements.
Cytogentics Processing 1 gross T The window of highest transparency to UV is
63722-25 3050-P 25 x 75mm, 1mm Thick, Frosted End, One Side,
between o.15μ to 5μ.
Cytogentics Processing 25 gross
63723-05 3049 3 x 1", 1.2mm Thick, Frosted One End, One Side 1 gross T Typical flatness measured 2" to 4" bands per inch.
63723-25 3049 3 x 1", 1.2mm Thick, Frosted One End, One Side 25 gross T Soften point is about 1250ºC (2282ºF).
UltraFrost™ Frosted Slides, white epoxy ink frosted one end, one side T Standard microscope slide thickness is 1mm.
63728-05 3063 25 x 75mm, 1mm Thick, Frosted one End with Gold Seal Logo 1 gross Cat.# Description Pack
63728-25 3063 25 x 75mm, 1mm Thick, Frosted one End with Gold Seal Logo25 gross 72250-01 Slide, 1” x 1” (25 x 25 mm) each
63729-05 3064 25 x 75mm, 1mm Thick, Frosted one End with 72250-02 Slide, 2” x 1” (50 x 25 mm) each
Pre-Print Patient Information Label and Gold Seal® Logo 1 gross 72250-03 Slide, 3” x 1” (75 x 25 mm) each
63729-25 3064 25 x 75mm, 1mm Thick, Frosted one End with 72250-04 Slide, 2” x 3” (50 x 76 mm) each
Pre-Print Patient Information Label and Gold Seal® Logo 25 gross 72250-05 Slide, 10mm x 10 mm each
Fluorescent Antibody Slides
These slides have all of the same properties of the ones
63732-05 3032 3 x 1", 1.2mm Thick with Two 10mm diameter circles,
Frosted one Side, one End with White Epoxy Ink, including Circles 1 gross above with the only difference is these are 0.5mm thick:
63732-02 3032 3 x 1", 1.2mm Thick with Two 10mm diameter circles, 72250-06 1” x 1” (25x25mm) each
Frosted one Side, one End with White Epoxy Ink, including Circles25 gross 72250-07 1” x 2” (25 x 50mm) each
UltraStick™/UltraFrost™ Adhesion Slides on frosted one end, one side with epoxy ink 72250-08 1” x 3” ( 25x76mm) each
63734-01 3039 25 x 75mm, 1mm Thick, Surface Coated with APTES for Adhesion 1 gross For Quartz Coverslips, see page 569 UUUUU
63734-10 3039 25 x 75mm, 1mm Thick, Surface Coated with APTES for Adhesion 10 gross

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 561
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec14_556-571_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 9:31 PM Page 562

SECTION 14 Histology and Light Microscopy

® Excell™ Adhesion Slides ® Adhesion Slide – TruBond™
Adhesive slides with proven performance under high
temperature and pH conditions
These adhesive, including the hydrophilic TruBond™ 360, slides
work well with automatic IHC applications. EMS is confident that
the quality of these slides will exceed your expectations. For
problems with tissue loss try our TruBond™ 380.
Available colors: White, Blue, Green and Yellow.

TruBond™ 380 TruBond™ 360 TruBond™ 200 TruView™ Fine

The Excell slide was developed with superior High Clarity, Low High Clarity, Low High Clarity, Low High Clarity, Low
Glass Type
Fluorescence White Fluorescence White Fluorescence White Fluorescence White
adhesion and wettabiliy properties, and has
been shown to perform very well in most Surface Wettability Hydrophilic Hydrophilic Hydrophobic Hydrophilic
applications. Adhesion Very Strong Strong Strong Good
T Excell Adhesion Surface for Heat
™
Edge Treatment Ground Corner Ground Corner Ground Corner Ground Corner
Induced Epitope Retrieval – Excell™ was For Manual IHC Yes Yes Yes No
developed for use in the HIER methods that
require high pH antigen retrieval solutions, For Automatic IHC Yes Yes Yes No
including EDTA. Formalin fixed paraffin For Fluorescence Yes Yes Yes Yes
embedded tissue demonstrated more con- Recommended T HIER processes when T All IHC applications T All IHC applications T All standard
sistent attachment when performing these Applications tissue type require procedures
procedures on the Excell™ surface. T HIER pH 6 & pH 9 T Routine histology
extra strong adhesion protocols
T Automated Staining – Excell™ has a uni- T Epitope enhancement
form hydrophilic surface that works extreme- & DNA probe T Routine histology
ly well with automated staining equipment. procedures T Frozen section
T Cell Culture – Excell™ surface technology T Autopsy & brain
conditions the surface to enhance the sectioning
attachment of anchorage dependent cell
lines, including many fastidious lines, such TruBond™ is packaged 100 slides per box, 10 boxes to a case.
as primary neuronal cells. Attachment and
proliferation is increased so cells achieve a Cat# Description Color Qty Cat# Description Color Qty
confluent monolayer sooner 63700-W1 TruBond™ 380 White 10/bx 63702-W1 TruBond™ 200 White 10/bx
T Plastic – Excell™ works well for both Epon 63700-W10 1000/cs 63702-W10 1000/cs
and Methyl Methacrylate sections. Its uni- 63700-B1 TruBond™ 380 Blue 10/bx 63702-B1 TruBond™ 200 Blue 10/bx
formly hydrophilic surface allows the sec- 63700-B10 1000/cs 63702-B10 1000/cs
tions to spread well during initial attachment. 63700-G1 TruBond™ 380 Green 10/bx 63702-G1 TruBond™ 200 Green 10/bx
Section adherence is maintained throughout 63700-G10 1000/cs 63702-G10 1000/cs
lengthy staining procedure. 63700-Y1 TruBond™ 380 Yellow 10/bx 63702-Y1 TruBond™ 200 Yellow 10/bx
63700-Y10 1000/cs 63702-Y10 1000/cs
T Laser Capture Microdissection – Excell™
63701-W1 TruBond™ 360 White 10/bx 63703-W1 TruView™ Fine White 10/bx
gives you the advantage of excellent tissue
63701-W10 1000/cs 63703-W10 1000/cs
adherence of all tissue types, yet it easily
63701-B1 TruBond™ 360 Blue 10/bx 63703-B1 TruView™ Fine Blue 10/bx
releases those area of interest identified for 63701-B10 1000/cs 63703-B10 1000/cs
Laser Capture Microdissection. 63701-G1 TruBond™ 360 Green 10/bx 63703-G1 TruView™ Fine Green 10/bx
63701-G10 1000/cs 63703-G10 1000/cs
Cat.# Description Qty 63701-Y1 TruBond™ 360 Yellow 10/bx 63703-Y1 TruView™ Fine Yellow 10/bx
64370-01 Excell™ Adhesion Slide 144/pk 63701-Y10 1000/cs 63703-Y10 1000/cs

® Retriever Tissue Slides

Retriever Tissue Slides are high adhesive glass microscope slides for General Properties
paraffin-embedded tissue section, including tissue arrays. The slides T Retriever Tissue Slides are made T Autoclavable
were designed and optimized for the EMS Antigen Retriever (62700 from soda lime glass T Supplied in plastic boxes of 72
series) to preserve the section attachment and tissue morphology during T Dimensions approximately 76 x pieces (call for carton price, 20
heat-induced epitope recovery in Retriever in pH6 (Low), pH9 (High), or 26mm, Thickness 1.0mm. boxes in a carton)
Universal Retriever buffer. T 90° ground edges T Carry recommended best before
Slides can also be successfully used in any other epitope-recovery T Colored or white marking area date and batch number for com-
technology (autoclave, microwave, proteolitic) and show superior 20mm, at one end, on one side prehensive information and trace-
performance over positively charged or polylysine-coated slides, T Pre-cleaned, ready for use ability
especially in high pH buffers and recovery buffers containing EDTA.
Cat.# Description Qty For more information on the Retriever,
71880-50 Retriever Tissue Slides 72/pk see pages 612-613 UUUUU

562 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec14_556-571_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 9:31 PM Page 563

Histology and Light Microscopy SECTION 14

® Poly-L-Lysine Coated
and Silane Treated ® Borosilicate Capillary
Microscope Slide Micro Glass Slide
Our premium glass slides with a frosted Made from Corning® 7740
end are now available pre-coated with borosilicate,low expansion,
either Poly-L-Lysine or Silane type I glass.
(aminoalkysilane). These slides improve Micro glass slides are precision rectangular glass capillary tubes for
the adhesion of tissues to the slide. use in microscopic viewing of liquid samples. Capillary action
63410-01 Poly-L-Lysine Coated Slides 72/bx instantly collects the sample and the thin glass walls minimize
63410-02 Poly-L-Lysine Coated Slides 144/bx evaporation. The design of these cells eliminates the needs for cover
63411-01 Silane Coated Slides 72/bx glass and the hanging drop method. These micro glass slides can
63411-02 Silane Coated Slides 144/bx withstand heat up to 500°C. Samples can be retained for future
reference by sealing or cementing open ends. Micro glass slide are
TECHNICAL TIP packaged in plastic vials.
Poly-L-Lysine Coating Of Slides I.D. tolerance ± 10%, Wall tolerance ± 20%
Poly-L-Lysine with a molecular weight greater than 150,000 (150,000- TECHNICAL — CORNING® GLASS 7740
300,000) should be used. To make a stock solution: Take 0.1% Poly-L-
Common Names – Borosilicate, Low Expansion, Type I Glass.
Lysine in distilled water and store it in a dispensing vial and freeze it at
-20°C. A drop (10-15ml) is dispersed at the end of a clean glass slide Standards – Type I, Glass A Properties:
and smeared along its length with the end of another clean glass slide in Borosilicate conforming to federal Coeff. Of Exp. ..........32.5 x 10-7 cm/cm/°C
specification DD-G-54lb and ASTM Strain Point ......................................510 °C
the same way as blood film. Make sure that the film of Poly-L-Lysine is
E-438. Also meets the U.S. Anneal Point......................................560 °C
thin enough for interference colors to be seen as it is being smeared. The Pharmacopedia specs for Type I Soften Point ......................................821 °C
slide is ready to use within minutes of drying. Borosilicate Glass. Density........................................2.23 g/cm2
If the Poly-L-Lysine is properly applied, it will not affect immunostaining, but Composition: % Approximate Youngs Mod ....................6.4 x 103 Kg/mm
2

it may cause precipitation in some silver impregnation methods. Therefore, SiO2 ............................................80.6 Refract Index ............1.74 @ Sodium D Line
It should be avoided if immunogold-silver methods are to be used. B2O3 ..............................................10 Temp Limits ..........490°C (Extreme service)
Na2O ............................................4.0 ..............................230°C (Normal Service)
Al2O3 ............................................2.3 Max. Thermal Shock ........................160 °C
® Polysine™ Microscope Misc. Traces ................................0.1
Adhesion Slide Dimensions
ID. mm Wall Length
The permanent bio-adhesive Cat. # Path x Width Thickness mm Qty.
material on our Polysine™ slide Standard Micro Glass Slides
attracts frozen and paraffin 63820-05 0.02 x 0.2 0.020 50 30/vial
embedded sections, centrifuge 63820-10 0.02 x 0.2 0.020 100 30/vial
preparation and cytology smears. 63821-05 0.03 x 0.3 0.025 50 33/vial
63821-10 0.03 x 0.3 0.025 100 33/vial
Cat.# Description Qty 63822-05 0.04 x 0.4 0.030 50 36/vial
63412-01 Polysine™ Adhesion Slide 72/bx 63822-10 0.04 x 0.4 0.030 100 36/vial
63412-02 Polysine™ Adhesion Slide 2x72/bx 63823-05 0.05 x 0.5 0.040 50 44/vial
63823-10 0.05 x 0.5 0.040 100 44/vial
® Permanox™ and 63824-05 0.10 x 1.0 0.090 50 40/vial
Polystyrene 63824-10 0.10 x 1.0 0.090 100 40/vial
63825-05 0.20 x 2.0 0.150 50 36/vial
Microscope Slides 63825-10 0.20 x 2.0 0.150 100 36/vial
Permanox™ is a strong, biologically 63826-05 0.30 x 3.0 0.300 50 31/vial
inert material resistant to non- 63826-10 0.30 x 3.0 0.300 100 31/vial
chlorinated hydrocarbons, acetone, and 63827-05 0.40 x 4.0 0.400 50 28/vial
other EM reagents. Permanox™ slides 63827-10 0.40 x 4.0 0.400 100 28/vial
allow you to do cell fixation and staining 63828-10 0.50 x 5.0 0.300 100 14/vial
on the slide; they can be cut with 63829-10 0.60 x 6.0 0.400 100 12/vial
63830-10 0.70 x 7.0 0.460 100 9/vial
scissors. Permanox™ has not been
63831-10 0.80 x 8.0 0.540 100 7/vial
shown to be autofluorescent. All of the 63832-10 0.90 x 9.0 0.600 100 6/vial
microscope slides are 1” x 3”. 63833-10 1.00 x 10.0 0.670 100 4/vial
NOTE: Long exposure to solvents will cause the 63840-05 0.05 x 1.0 0.030 50 50/vial
slide to warp. Xylene and Toluene based mounting 63840-10 0.05 x 1.0 0.030 100 50/vial
media should be avoided. Glycerol, gelatin, and 63841-05 0.10 x 2.0 0.100 50 45/vial
other aqueous based media are recommended. 63841-10 0.10 x 2.0 0.100 100 45/vial
63842-05 0.20 x 4.0 0.150 50 36/vial
63842-10 0.20 x 4.0 0.150 100 36/vial
71885 Permanox™ Microscope Slide 20/pk 63843-05 0.30 x 6.0 0.300 50 24/vial
71886 Permanox™ Microscope Slide 100/pk 63843-10 0.30 x 6.0 0.300 100 24/vial
71888 Polystyrene Microscope Slide 20/pk 63844-05 0.40 x 8.0 0.400 50 18/vial
71889 Polystyrene Microscope Slide 100/pk 63844-10 0.40 x 8.0 0.400 100 18/vial

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 563
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec14_556-571_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 5/18/15 11:49 PM Page 564

SECTION 14 Histology and Light Microscopy

® BrightSlide™ D and BrightSlide™ DB

564 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec14_556-571_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 5/18/15 11:50 PM Page 565

Histology and Light Microscopy SECTION 14

® BrightSlide™ D and BrightSlide™ DB (continued)

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 565
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec14_556-571_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 9:32 PM Page 566

SECTION 14 Histology and Light Microscopy

® Microscope Slide-Wells ® Gridded
Disposable Liquid-Holding Wells Microscope
Slides
These 3 x 1” slides have
an indexed grid on the
reverse side of the frosted
end. The ink is resistant
to stains and common
laboratory solvents. Each
square grid fills one low-
powered-field
Convenient Pre-cut, twin adhesive well stickers (1cm diameter) firmly (approximately 100X
adhere to microscope slides. Examine specimens with or without cover magnification). These slides make it easy to locate an organism or cell
slips. Available in depths of 0.25mm and 0.50mm. every time. There are 64 squares in total. The slides are available with
Multiple Applications Examine or count tissue culture cells, yeast, coatings of Poly-L-Lysine or Silane, or they can be purchased plain
bacteria and other microorganisms. Piggy-back with Microscope Slide- (uncoated). Packaged 72 slides/box.
Grids to facilitate counting and sizing. The grid measures 2 mm square-16mm total. Numbers 1-8 and alpha A-H.
Versatile - Compatible with different styles of microscopes (conventional,
inverted or dissecting).
® 1. Gridded Microscope Slides without hydrophobic coating.
Chemically Inert - Made from polyester with an acrylic adhesive. 63405-01 Grid Slides, Uncoated 72/pk
Microscope Slide-Wells are inert and stable under most laboratory conditions. 63405-02 Grid Slides, Uncoated 144/pk
63406-01 Grid Slides, Poly-L-Lysine 72/pk
70366-12 Slide Wells, 0.25mm thick 25/pk 63406-02 Grid Slides, Poly-L-Lysine 144/pk
70366-13 Slide Wells, 0.50mm thick 25/pk 63407-01 Grid Slides, Silane 72/pk
63407-02 Grid Slides, Silane 144/pk
® Microscope Slide-Grids ® 2. Gridded Microscope Slides with hydrophobic coating.
Disposable Adhesive Grids 63408-01 Grid Slides, Round well 72/pk
63409-02 Grid Slides, Square well 72/pk

® Lovins Micro-Slide Field Finder

Convenient - Easy-to adhere stickers having side-by-side twin grids

(20mm x 20mm each with 1mm line spacing) for microscope slides. Count
or measure cells and estimate the size or length of microscopic or semi-
micro objects
Versatile - Compatible with different styles of microscopes (conventional,
Marking a microscope slide to identify a particular field of interest for
inverted or dissecting). Virtually all cells and specimens placed on top of
future reference has always been a difficult problem for many
Slide-Grids can be counted and/or sized.
microscopists.
Dry Or Wet - Use with dry specimens or suspended specimens such as
The Field Finder has a precision rectangular-coordinate grid pattern, which
cells held in buffer under cover slips. Separate cover slips can be placed is accurately positioned on a special microscope slide. The slide has been
over each Slide-Grid. carefully edge ground to provide straight edges and square corners to
Chemically Inert - Made from polyester with an acrylic adhesive. Slide- ensure repeatable results
Grids are inert and stable under most laboratory conditions. Lovins Micros-Slide Field Finder helps you to index points of interest on a
microscope slide the same way you find them on a road map. A standard
70366-14 Slide Grids, 20mm x 20mm 40/pk 75 x 25mm glass slide has a photo etched grid pattern of 1mm squares,
subdivided into 0.1 mm intervals. Each square is marked with a letter and
a number. You center the detail in the field of the microscope, replace the
specimen slide with the field finder, and read the coordinates. Note
reading on slide, and you can find that detail immediately by reversing
procedure.
The pattern is imaged in vacuum deposited chrome for durability.
Cat.# Slide Size Qty
72266-01 Micro-Slide Field Finder, 75 x 25 mm each

566 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec14_556-571_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 9:32 PM Page 567

Histology and Light Microscopy SECTION 14

® PTFE Printed Slides

PTFE Printed Slides, are extremely hydrophobic, acetone proof, chemical
resistant and autoclavable. They are perfect for controlling cross-
63414-13 63414-10 63415-12
contamination in staining, immunolabeling and immunofluorescence tests.
All printed slides are precleaned. The well surface is 100% wettable, which
enhances cell attachment and increases its spreading capabilities within
the well. These slides minimize the use of expensive purified antigens 63415-32 63415-08 63415-15
and antibodies. The slides measure 3x1” (76x26x1mm).
EMS Printed Slides are manufactured to order offering maximum shelf life.
The shelf life of PTFE Printed Slides range from 18 months to two years.
However, it is recommended that all glass slides (Printed or Un-printed) be 63416-08 63416-15 63417-13
used in a timely manner to avoid glass “weathering”, (slides becoming cloudy
or hazy even with proper storage. All of our Printed Slides are autoclavable
and have a frosted end. They are intended for one time use only.
63417-15 63418-11 63419-08
All EMS printed slides are printed with White PTFE other colors are available upon request.

FEATURES:
T Super Hydrophobic Mask
63419-10 63419-12 63419-14
T Clean, Wettable Wells
T A Bioadhesive Surface Treatment to Enhance Cell and Tissue Attachment
Cat.# Number of Well Well Size Pack
63419-VIR 63420-05 63420-08
63414-13 1 Ring 13 mm Dia. 72/pk
63414-10 1 Square 10.7x10.7mm 72/pk
63415-12 1 Round 12 mm Dia. 72/pk
63415-32 1 Oval 24.4x16.7mm 72/pk
63415-08 1 Round 8 mm Dia. 72/pk 63420-11 63421-07 63421-10
63415-15 1 Round 15 mm Dia. 72/pk
63416-08 2 Round 8 mm Dia. 72/pk
63416-15 2 Round 15 mm Dia. 72/pk
63417-13 2 Ring 13 mm Dia. 72/pk 63421-11 63423-05 63423-08
63417-15 2 Square 15x15mm 72/pk
63418-11 3 Ring 11.28mm Dia. 72/pk
63419-08 3 Round 8 mm Dia. 72/pk
63419-10 3 Round 10 mm Dia. 72/pk 63422-11 63424-06
63422-06
63419-12 3 Round 12 mm Dia. 72/pk
63419-14 3 Round 14 mm Dia. 72/pk
63419-VIR 3 Round TGH VIROLOGY 72/pk
63420-05 4 Round 5 mm Dia. 72/pk
63420-08 4 Round 8 mm Dia. 72/pk 63425-05 63429-04 63430-04
63420-11 4 Ring 11.43 mm Dia. 72/pk
63421-07 5 Round 7 mm Dia. 72/pk
63421-10 5 Round 10 mm Dia. 72/pk
63421-11 Etched 5 Round 11.43 mm Dia. 72/pk 63434-02
63423-05 6 Round 5 mm Dia. 72/pk
63423-08 6 Round 8 mm Dia. 72/pk
63422-06 8 Round 6 mm Dia. 72/pk
63422-11 8 Round 11 mm Dia. 72/pk TECHNICAL TIP
63424-06 10 Round 6 mm Dia. 72/pk Our PTFE Printed slides may be used for all types of Cell Culture
63425-05 12 Round 5 mm Dia. 72/pk work and they may be sterilized by UV light, Autoclave as well as ETOH.
63429-04 21 Round 4 mm Dia. 72/pk These unique slides can be coverslipped with the addition of a little more
63430-04 24 Round 4 mm Dia. 72/pk mounting media then a plain slide would use.
63434-02 30 Round 2 mm Dia. 72/pk

® Macro/Latex Agglutination
Cat.# Glass Size Configuration Well/Ring Size Pack
63450-31 4” x 3” 3 Ring, yellow 26.4 mm 25/pk
63450-32 4.25”x2” 3 Ring, white 26.4 mm 25/pk 63450-32
63450-31 63453-61
63453-61 4.4”x2.1” 6, white oval 17.4mm x26mm 25/pk
63453-63 4.215”x2” 6 white oval 17.4mmx26mm 25/pk
63456-15 4.331”x2.165” 10 Ring white 15 mm 25/pk
63459-15
63459-15 4.75”x3.5” 15 Ring white 15 mm 25/pk
63460-15 3”x2”x1.2mm 15 Well 11.28mm (Etched) 25/pk 63453-63 63456-15
63460-15

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 567
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec14_556-571_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 9:32 PM Page 568

SECTION 14 Histology and Light Microscopy

® Cover Glass – GOLD SEAL® ® Micro Cover
GOLD SEAL® cover glass is made from pre-selected, pre-cleaned Glasses
silicate glass. It is available in various shapes and thicknesses and Manufactured from clear
is packaged with desiccants in a lint free box. Both cover glass cases white, borosilicate glass.
and slide boxes convert to convenient slide storage files. They offer super clarity, are
Standard perfectly flat, and corrosion
Cat.# GoldSeal Sizes Thickness Pcs/oz Pack resistant. All cover glasses are
No. 0 Thickness uniform in size and thickness.
63750-01 3206 22x22 mm #0 (.085-.12 mm) 208 1 oz.
63750-10 3206 22x22 mm #0 (.085-.12 mm) 208 10x1oz.
63751-01 3223 24 x 60mm #0 (.085-.12 mm) 78 1 oz.
63751-10 3223 24 x 60mm #0 (.085-.12 mm) 78 10x1oz
No. 1 Thickness
63756-01 3305 18 x 18mm #1 (.13-.17 mm) 233 1 oz.
63756-10 3305 18 x 18mm #1 (.13-.17 mm) 233 10x1oz.
63757-01 3306 22 x 22mm #1 (.13-.17 mm) 156 1 oz.
63757-10 3306 22 x 22mm #1 (.13-.17 mm) 156 10x1oz. Standard
63758-01 3307 25 x 25mm #1 (.13-.17 mm) 124 1 oz. Cat. # Sizes Thickness Pieces/oz Pack
63758-10 3307 25 x 25mm #1 (.13-.17 mm) 124 10x1oz. No. 0 Thickness — Squares
63760-01 3312 12 x 24mm #1 (.13-.17 mm) 256 1 oz. 72198-10 22x22 mm #0 (.08-.13 mm) 208 1 oz.
63760-10 3312 12 x 24mm #1 (.13-.17 mm) 256 10x1oz. 72198-11 22x22 mm #0 (.08-.13 mm) 208 10 oz.
63762-01 3315 22 x 35mm #1 (.13-.17 mm) 100 1 oz. 72198-20 22x40 mm #0 (.08-.13 mm) 116 1 oz.
63762-10 3315 22 x 35mm #1 (.13-.17 mm) 100 10x1oz. 72198-21 22x40 mm #0 (.08-.13 mm) 116 10 oz.
63765-01 3318 22 x 60mm #1 (.13-.17 mm) 58 1 oz.
63765-10 3318 22 x 60mm #1 (.13-.17 mm) 58 10x1oz. No. 1 Thickness — Squares
63766-01 3319 24 x 30mm #1 (.13-.17 mm) 108 1 oz. 72200-10 22x22 mm #1 (.13-.17 mm) 156 1 oz.
63766-10 3319 24x 30mm #1 (.13-.17 mm) 108 10x1oz. 72200-11 22x22 mm #1 (.13-.17 mm) 156 10 oz.
63768-01 3321 24 x 40mm #1 (.13-.17 mm) 80 1 oz. 72200-20 22x30 mm #1 (.13-.17 mm) 116 1 oz.
63768-10 3321 24 x 40mm #1 (.13-.17 mm) 80 10x1oz. 72200-21 22x30 mm #1 (.13-.17 mm) 116 10 oz.
63769-01 3322 24 x 50mm #1 (.13-.17 mm) 67 1 oz. 72200-30 22x40 mm #1 (.13-.17 mm) 87 1 oz.
63769-10 3322 24 x 50mm #1 (.13-.17 mm) 67 10x1oz. 72200-31 22x40 mm #1 (.13-.17 mm) 87 10 oz.
63770-01 3323 24 x 60mm #1 (.13-.17 mm) 54 1 oz. 72200-40 22x50 mm #1 (.13-.17 mm) 70 1 oz.
63770-10 3323 24 x 60mm #1 (.13-.17 mm) 54 10x1oz 72200-41 22x50 mm #1 (.13-.17 mm) 70 10 oz.
63771-01 3327 35 x 50mm #1 (.13-.17 mm) 41 1 oz. No. 11⁄2 Thickness — Squares
63771-10 3327 35 x 50mm #1 (.13-.17 mm) 41 10x1oz 72204-01 22x22 mm #1½ (.16-.19 mm) 138 1 oz.
63772-01 3328 35 x 60mm #1 (.13-.17 mm) 37 1 oz. 72204-10 22x22 mm #1½ (.16-.19 mm) 138 10 oz.
63772-10 3328 35 x 60mm #1 (.13-.17 mm) 37 10x1oz 72204-02 22x30 mm #1½ (.16-.19 mm) 102 1 oz.
63773-01 3329 43 x 50mm #1 (.13-.17 mm) 35 1 oz. 72204-20 22x30 mm #1½ (.16-.19 mm) 102 10 oz.
63773-10 3329 43 x 50mm #1 (.13-.17 mm) 35 10x1oz 72204-03 22x40 mm #1½ (.16-.19 mm) 76 1 oz.
63774-01 3334 48 x 60mm #1 (.13-.17 mm) 26 1 oz. 72204-30 22x40 mm #1½ (.16-.19 mm) 76 10 oz.
63774-10 3334 48 x 60mm #1 (.13-.17 mm) 26 10x1oz 72204-04 22x50 mm #1½ (.16-.19 mm) 61 1 oz.
63780-01 3350 13mm Dia. #1 (.13-.17 mm) 575 1 oz. 72204-40 22x50 mm #1½ (.16-.19 mm) 61 10 oz.
63780-10 3350 13mm Dia. #1 (.13-.17 mm) 575 10x1oz No. 2 Thickness — Squares
63781-01 3351 16mm Dia. #1 (.13-.17 mm) 376 1 oz.
72210-10 22x22 mm #2 (.17-.25 mm ) 116 1 oz.
63781-10 3351 16mm Dia. #1 (.13-.17 mm) 376 10x1oz
72210-11 22x22 mm #2 (.17-.25 mm ) 116 10 oz.
63782-01 3346 19mm Dia. #1 (.13-.17 mm) 276 1 oz.
72210-20 22x40 mm #2 (.17-.25 mm ) 64 1 oz.
63782-10 3346 19mm Dia. #1 (.13-.17 mm) 276 10x1oz
72210-21 22x40 mm #2 (.17-.25 mm ) 64 10 oz.
No. 11⁄2 Thickness
63786-01 3400 22 x 22mm #1½ (.16-.19 mm) 138 1 oz. ® Square and Rectangular Cover Glass
63786-10 3400 22 x 22mm #1½ (.16-.19 mm) 138 10x1oz
63787-01 3405 18 x 18mm #1½ (.16-.19 mm) 202 1 oz. T #1 thickness (0.13 to 0.16mm)
63787-10 3405 18 x 18mm #1½ (.16-.19 mm) 202 10x1oz T Packed one ounce (28 g) per case
63790-01 3419 24 x 30mm #1½ (.16-.19 mm) 94 1 oz. T Clear white borosilicate glass.
63790-10 3419 24 x 30mm #1½ (.16-.19 mm) 94 10x1oz
63791-01 3421 24 x 40mm #1½ (.16-.19 mm) 70 1 oz. Cat. # Size Thickness Pieces/oz Pack
63791-10 3421 24 x 40mm #1½ (.16-.19 mm) 70 10x1oz 72190-09* 9x9 mm #1 (.13-.17 mm) 765 1 oz.
63792-01 3422 24 x 50mm #1½ (.16-.19 mm) 58 1 oz. 72190-22* 9x22 mm #1 (.13-.17 mm) 435 1 oz.
63792-10 3422 24 x 50mm #1½ (.16-.19 mm) 58 10x1oz 72190-35* 9x35 mm #1 (.13-.17 mm) 260 1 oz.
63793-01 3423 24 x 60mm #1½ (.16-.19 mm) 47 1 oz. 72190-50* 9x50 mm #1 (.13-.17 mm) 175 1 oz.
63793-10 3423 24 x 60mm #1½ (.16-.19 mm) 47 10x1oz 72191-22* 10.5x22 mm #1 (.13-.17 mm) 335 1 oz.
72191-35* 10.5x35 mm #1 (.13-.17 mm) 215 1 oz.
72191-50* 10.5x50 mm #1 (.13-.17 mm) 150 1 oz.
72192-54* 13x54 mm #1 (.13-.17 mm) 120 1 oz.
Slide warmer, see pages 604-605 UUUUU 72192-50 24x50 mm #1 (.13-.17 mm) 65 1 oz.
For the handling of glass slides, see pen vac; 72192-75* 25x75 mm #1 (.13-.17 mm) 40 1 oz.
grid section page 150 UUUUU * For use with Bellco Leighton Tissue Culture Tubes.

568 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec14_556-571_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 9:32 PM Page 569

Histology and Light Microscopy SECTION 14

® Circular Cover Glass ® Quartz Microscope Slides and Coverslips
Cat. # Diameter Thickness Pieces/oz Pack
There are many
No. 1 Thickness
applications that require
72231-01 12 mm #1 (.13-.17 mm) 692 1 oz.
72231-10 12 mm #1 (.13-.17 mm) 692 10 oz.
slides and coverslips that
72228-01 15 mm #1 (.13-.17 mm) 443 1 oz. have absolute UV
72228-10 15 mm #1 (.13-.17 mm) 443 10 oz. transparency, and high
72229-01 18 mm #1 (.13-.17 mm) 308 1 oz. temperature properties.
72229-10 18 mm #1 (.13-.17 mm) 308 10 oz. EMS now is introducing
72221-01 22 mm #1 (.13-.17 mm) 206 1 oz. the highest quality, clear
72221-10 22 mm #1 (.13-.17 mm) 206 10 oz. fused quartz microscope slides and coverslips to meet all of these
72223-01 25 mm #1 (.13-.17 mm) 159 1 oz.
requirements.
72223-10 25 mm #1 (.13-.17 mm) 159 10oz.
No. 11⁄2 Thickness T The window of highest transparency to UV is between 0.15μ to 5μ.
72230-01 12 mm #1½ (.16-.19 mm) 597 1 oz. T Typical flatness measured 2 to 4” bands per inch.
72230-10 12 mm #1½ (.16-.19 mm) 597 10 oz. T Soften point is about 1250°C (2282°F).
72222-01 18 mm #1½ (.16-.19 mm) 266 1 oz. T Standard microscope slide thickness is 1 mm.
72222-10 18 mm #1½ (.16-.19 mm) 266 10 oz. T Standard coverslip thickness is 0.2 mm.
72224-01 22 mm #1½ (.16-.19 mm) 178 1 oz.
72224-10 22 mm #1½ (.16-.19 mm) 178 10 oz. Quartz Microscope Slides
72225-01 25 mm #1½ (.16-.19 mm) 137 1 oz.
72225-10 25 mm #1½ (.16-.19 mm) 137 10 oz. Cat.# Description Pack
72250-01 Slide, 1” x 1” (25 x 25 mm) each
No. 2 Thickness 72250-02 Slide, 2” x 1” (50 x 25 mm) each
72226-01 12mm #2 (.17-.25 mm ) 502 1 oz. 72250-03 Slide, 3” x 1” (75 x 25 mm) each
72226-10 12mm #2 (.17-.25 mm ) 502 10 oz. 72250-04 Slide, 2” x 3” (50 x 76 mm) each
72227-01 15mm #2 (.17-.25 mm ) 321 1 oz. 72250-05 Slide, 10mm x 10 mm each
72227-10 15mm #2 (.17-.25 mm ) 321 10 oz.
These slides have all of the same properties of the ones above with the
® Round Cover Slips only difference is these are 0.5mm thick:
(Bellco Brand) 72250-06 1” x 1” (25x25mm) each
72250-07 1” x 2” (25 x 50mm) each
T #1 Thickness (0.13 to 0.16mm)
72250-08 1” x 3” ( 25x76mm) each
T Packed 1 oz (28g) per case
Quartz Coverslips
Cat. # Diameter Thickness Pieces/oz Pack
Cat.# Description Pack
72195-05 5 mm #1 (.13 - .16 mm) 1100 1 oz
72255-02 Round 1” (25 mm) dia. each
72195-12 12 mm #1 (.13 - .16 mm) 650 1 oz
72256-02 Square 1” x 1” (25 x 25 mm) each
72195-15 15 mm #1 (.13 - .16 mm) 378 1 oz
72256-03 Round, 18mm (0.71”) x 0.2mm Thick (#2) each
72195-25 25 mm #1 (.13 - .16 mm) 160 1 oz
72256-04 Round, 25.4mm (1”) x 0.2mm Thick (#2) each
72256-05 Round, 33.02mm (13.0”) x 0.2mm thick (#2) each
® Round Cover Slips, German Glass 72256-06 Round, 25mm (0.984”) x 0.15-0.18mm thick (#1) each
T For neural cell cultures 72256-07 Square, 25.4mm (1”) x 0.2mm thick (#2) thick each
72256-08 Square, 25.4mm (1”) x 0.15-0.18mm thick (#1) each
T Shown to be more effective with hard to attach cells 72256-09 Square, 25mm (0.984”) x 0.075-0.125mm thick (#0) each
T #1 thickness (0.13 to 0.16mm)
T Packed 1 oz (28g) per case.
® Superslip®
Cat. # Diameter Thickness Pieces/oz Pack Micro Glasses
72196-12 12 mm #1 (0.13 to 0.16mm) 650 1 oz
72196-15 15 mm #1 (0.13 to 0.16mm) 378 1 oz Finally, your automated coverslipper
72196-25 25 mm #1 (0.13 to 0.16mm) 160 1 oz has the right coverslip to allow it to
run smoothly.
These “Superslip®” coverslips are
® Round Cover Slips – German Glass designed to work in automatic
These coverglass which are made from German glass can be used for coverslip machines and humid
growing and culturing cells that normally have poor adhesion to plastic environments without sticking or
or regular glass surfaces. The 5mm size will fit inside the 96 well plates jamming up in the middle of a run.
and still have enough room to pick up from the bottom of the well with These new superslips combine specialized production procedures with
forceps. The 8 mm size fits inside the 24 well plates. Available with our unique moisture-resistant packaging which brings you superior
#1.5 (0.16 – 0.19 mm) thickness. Packaged in convenience size: 100 coverslips.
per box
72236-40 Superslip, 24x40mm, #1 1 oz
Cat.# Description Qty 72236-41 Superslip, 24x40mm, #1 10x1 oz
72296-05 5 mm Round Coverglass, #1.5 Thickness 100/bx 72236-50 Superslip, 24x50mm, #1 1 oz
72296-08 8 mm Round Coverglass, #1.5 Thickness 100/bx 72236-51 Superslip, 24x50mm, #1 10x1 oz
72236-60 Superslip, 24x60mm, #1 1 oz
72236-61 Superslip, 24x60mm, #1 10x1 oz

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 569
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec14_556-571_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 9:32 PM Page 570

SECTION 14 Histology and Light Microscopy

 Cover Slips;
TECHNICAL TIP
Thermanox®;
Permanox plastic is nonfluorescent and may be
TMX Coverslips used with most fluorescent labels. Permanox has
NUNC™ Brand Thernanox , or TMX
®
better chemical resistance to fixation and staining
coverslips are made from a polymer solvents than polystyrene. An aqueous based mounting
(in the polyolefin family) that is medium must be used when cover slipping to prevent
highly resistant to most chemicals. warping.
Thermanox® plastic is resistant to
alcohols, aldehydes, hydrocarbons,
dilute acids (<10%) and dilute
alkalis (<2%). TMX has limited resistance to chlorinated hydro-carbons, however, it is not resistant to
TECHNICAL TIP
concentrated acids or bases. Thermanox® plastic is a flexible, trans-parent polymer that can be sectioned A simple method to determine which side of the
using a microtome and is able to withstand high temp-eratures (temperature range –70ºC to +150ºC). coverslip is treated is the "droplet" test. A drop of
Thermanox® Coverslips are culture treated on one side for enhanced cell attachment and growth. The treated water or culture medium will spread on the hydrophilic,
side is packaged face up toward the label. treated side. - If the droplet forms a bead, then the
side of the coverslip is not treated. – If the droplet
FEATURES: spreads evenly over the coverslip, the side is treated.
 Flat and remain flat  Auto fluorescent in the range 380 to 545 nm
 0.2mm (No. 2) thickness  Thernanox® cover slips can be autoclaved at
 Resistant to commonly used solvents 20 minutes steam, 20 minutes dry at 120°C
 Safe and easy to handle
Cat. # Description NNI # Pack
72274-01 Size 10.5x22 mm 174934 100/pk
72274-05 Size 10.5x22 mm 174934 500/pk
72270 Size 22x60 mm 174942 100/pk
72271 Size 22x60 mm 174942 500/pk
72272 Size 24x30 mm 150067 100/pk
72273 Size 24x30 mm 150067 500/pk
72280 13 mm Round 174950 100/pk
72281 13 mm Round 174950 500/pk
72275-01 15mm Round 174969 100/pk  Plastic Cover Slips
72275-05 15 mm Round 174969 500/pk
72282 22 mm Round 174977 100/pk Unbreakable .007” (1.57mm) flexible cellulose
72283 22 mm Round 174977 500/pk acetate, square 22x22mm. Trusal, L., Baker C., &
72285 25 mm Round 174985 100/pk Guzman, A., Stain. Tech., 54,2 pg. 77.
72286 25 mm Round 174985 500/pk
72260 Plastic Cover Slip 100/bx
Thermanox® is Nalge/Nunc product.

 Disposable Rinzl Plastic Micro Slides

 Made from optical clear vinyl with a refractive  Will not break, scratch or cut fingers.
index of glass.
 Ideal for wet mount, urines, etc.  Not auto-fluorescent.
 Economical, they can be used and discarded.  Thickness 0.0180 to 0.022" or 0.46
 Available standard size 3 x 1" and to 0.56mm.
packaged 144 per box.
71890-12 Rinzl Plastic Micro Slides (A) 12/bx
71890-01 Rinzl Plastic Micro Slides (B) 144/bx
71890-10 Rinzl Plastic Micro Slides (B) 10x144/bx

 Rinzl Plastic Coverslips

 Made from clear vinyl plastic.  Refractive index of glass.
 Unbreakable, will not scratch or cut fingers.  Economical and half the price of glass.
 Used in Biological and Medical labs, etc.  Not autofluorescent.
 Thickness 0.01" or 0.28mm.
Cat.# Description Pack
72261-18 Rinzl Plastic Coverslips, Size 18 x 18mm 100/pk
72261-19 Rinzl Plastic Coverslips, Size 18 x 18mm 1000/pk
72261-22 Rinzl Plastic Coverslips, Size 22 x 22mm 100/pk
72261-23 Rinzl Plastic Coverslips, Size 22 x 22mm 1000/pk
72261-40 Rinzl Plastic Coverslips, Size 22 x 40mm 1000/pk
72261-50 Rinzl Plastic Coverslips, Size 24 x 50mm 1000/pk
72261-60 Rinzl Plastic Coverslips, Size 24 x 60mm 1000/pk
72261-100 Rinzl Plastic Coverslips, Size 24 x 100mm 1000/pk

570 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec14_556-571_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 9:32 PM Page 571

Histology and Light Microscopy SECTION 14

 Photoetched Coverslips
These coverslips are made from pure white glass and photo
etched on the surface for a permanent gridded pattern.
 Using No. 2 (.17 -.24mm) thickness cover slips.
 Grid contains 520 alphanumeric coded squares, each
square 600 x 600μm (0.6mm x 0.6mm). Numbered 1–200.
 Used to facilitate mounting of micromaniputated cells or
chromosome spreads. 72264-18 72264-23 72265-25
Reference: Lin, Lin-Fang and Frank H. Riddle, 1981. Cat.# Coverslip Size Pack Cat.# Coverslip Size Pack
Photoengraving of Cover Slips and Slides to Facilitate Mounting of 72264-18 18 x 18 mm 25/pk 72265-25 25 mm Diameter 25/pk
Micromanipulated Cells or Chromosome Spreads, Exp. Res. 72264-23 23 x 23 mm 25/pk 72265-50 25 mm Photo-Etched
134:485-488 72265-12 12 mm Diameter 25/pk German Glass 25/pk

 Correlative Microscopy Coverslips®  Combination Scales

EMS introduces a simple coverslip with a grid image that allows cells to All of the PS-XO series of Calibration Slides is Green Float Glass, Bright
grow and later be analyzed under brightfield or fluorescence microscopy Chrome Image
before being further processed and sectioned for EM or other analysis. 1. PS300-XO
These unique coverslips do all that. High definition 300mm scale in 0.1mm
divisions with extended 0.5mm, 1.0mm and
Applications 5.0mm lines to allow calibrations in those
Light Microscopy, Fluorescence, Scanning Electron Microscopy (SEM), increments too. Series of dots and crosses, at
Transmission Electron Microscopy (TEM), High-Pressure Cryofixation 10mm intervals, included for calibrations
Features where these shapes are preferred. Supplied in
 Reticle film has been thor-  Excellent transparency polished wooden case.
oughly tested with cell culture  Does not deform at tempera- Features
 Good growth of cell culture tures (positive 100C and nega- 300mm high definition scale in 0.1mm
(equivalent to conventional tive liquid N2)
divisions with additional dot and cross series at
media)  Rigid, does not float in the
10mm centers
 Good adhesion to the substrate middle of culture
without cell polylysine  Easy to handle and cut with a 2. PS150-XO
 Resistant to normal chemicals knife or micro-punch High definition 150mm scale in 0.1mm
used in electron microscopy  Simple sterilisation using alco- divisions with extended 0.5mm, 1.0mm and
 No oxygen retention, compati- hol or UV 5.0mm lines to allow calibrations in those increments too. Series of dots
ble resin LR White  Detaches easily from resin and crosses, at 10mm intervals, included for calibrations where these
 Good optical quality in bright- after polymerisation shapes are preferred. Supplied in polished wooden case
field & UV fluorescence  Low cost
Features
150mm high definition scale in 0.1mm divisions with additional dot and
cross series at 10mm centers
3. PS100-XO
High definition 100mm scale in 0.1mm divisions with extended 0.5mm,
1.0mm and 5.0mm lines to allow calibrations in those increments too.
Series of dots and crosses, at 10mm intervals, included for calibrations
where these shapes are preferred. Supplied in polished wooden case.
66108-01 10x10 grids of 66108-02 20x20 grid of 66108-03 10x10 grids of
0.1mm squares at 5 0.5mm squares. Indexed 1mm squares. Each square Features
positions. Indexed 1-10 1-20 along top, A-T down individually indexed 0-99 100mm high definition scale in 0.1mm divisions with additional dot and
along top, A-J down side side and centre cross
cross series at 10mm centers
Specifications
Cat. # Squares Surface square unit size Avg. cells/sq. unit* Ordering Information
66108-01 100 5x1mm 0.01mm2 2-3 68073-PS300 PS300-XO Combination Scale 330x30x6mm each
66108-02 200 100mm 0.5mm2 20-25 68073-PS300-UK Same as above with UKAS Certification of Calibration,
66108-03 100 100mm 1mm2 40-50 10 Points measured on Scale each
*(eg HeLa Cell) 68073-PS150 PS150-XO Combination Scale 180x30x6mm each
68073-PS150-UK Same as above with UKAS Certification of Calibration,
All of the coverslips are produced on a polyester based film, 0.18mm thick, 10 Points measured on Scale each
22 x 22mm, 25/box. All other grid sizes and film sizes are available upon 68073-PS100 PS100-XO Combination Scale 130x30x6mm each
68073-PS100-UK Same as above with UKAS Certification of Calibration,
special order.
10 Points measured on Scale each
Ordering Information
66108-01 10x10 grid of 0.1mm squares at 5 positions 25/pk
66108-02 20x20 grid of 0.5mm squares 25/pk
66108-03 10x10 grid of 1mm squares 25/pk

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 571
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec14_572-579_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 9:36 PM Page 572

SECTION 14 Histology and Light Microscopy

 Microscope Slide  View-Pack™
Dispenser Microscope Slide
Molded from attractive gray ABA plastic. This Holder With 3-Ring
dispenser provides a method of releasing Binder
clean, dust free 1”x3” slides, one at a time. For the orderly visual display and safe
Comes with a clear molded plastic cover to transport of microscope slides. This
allow for visual checking of unused slides. loose-leaf binder has ten vinyl View-
Measurements: 43⁄8”x47⁄8”x51⁄2”. Pack™ pages (hold 160 slides). Each
Holds approximately 72 slides. page holds 16 slides 3x1” (75x25mm) in
71300 Glass Slide Dispenser each individual pockets with a white back and
clear front. A flap in the center keeps slides from falling out. Simply fold
 Levered Micro Slide the page at the center crease to retrieve slides. The 81⁄2” x 101⁄2”
(22x27cm) View-Pack pages comes with a standard 9”x12” (23x30cm) 3-
Dispenser ring binder.
 Holds a full box of 72 slides.
71544-01 View-Pack With 3-Ring Binder each
 Get a clean, fingerprint-free slide 71544-50 Refill View-Pack 10/pk
every time
 Avoid breakage
 Loading is simple
 Slide Stand
Made from stainless steel.
 Made from stainless steel and has
suction cup feet to keep the unit in Stand consists of four
place. rails, which supports
Measures 3”(L)x5”(W)x4”(H) (8x13x10cm) various microscope slides
almost vertically.
71298-01 Levered Slide Dispenser each Accommodates 68, 3x1"
slides
 Slide Holder
71533-01 Slide Stand, 455x100mm (18x4") each
Block
Made from solid high density
polypropylene blocks with 13  Compact
slanted channels (on a 10˚ Glass Slide
angle), 1⁄16"(1.5mm) (W) x 3⁄8" Storage Box;
(9mm) (D). It is made to hold The Mini Box
3x1" (75x25mm) slides during
Made from rigid polystyrene,
cleaning, draining excess
with a removable lid. This 25
immersion oil, and even drying. They are white in color and are chemically
capacity slide box measures only 3.625" (92mm)(L) X 3.25"(83mm)(W) X
resistant. Available in 40 or 90 capacity (vertically held).
1.25"(32mm) (H) .The box is available in either white, red, or blue.
71532-40 40-Slide Holder Block,
4"(W)x12"(L)(10x30.5cm) each 71455-W 25-Compact Slide Box, White each
71532-90 90-Slider Holder Block, 71455-B 25-Compact Slide Box, Blue each
7"(W)x12"(L)(18x30.5cm) each 71455-R 25-Compact Slide Box, Red each

 Secured Hinge Microscope Slide Boxes

Made from durable polystyrene (with heavy walls). This material is unaffected by humidity and is thoroughly
insect proof. Each box is secured with a rust-resistant nickel-plated clasp and hinge pin. The cork lining
prevents damage to the stored slides. To ensure proper slide identification, each slot is numbered to
correspond to the slide inventory sheet on the inside cover of the box. To save space the boxes are
stackable. Each box stores up to 100 3x1" or 25x75mm microscope slides. Available in 5 color coded
boxes making the boxes easy to identify Each box measures: 210x162x33mm (8¼ x 6½ x 1¼")
71470-W Hinged 100 Slide Box, White each
71471-W Hinged 100 Slide Box, White 10/pk
71470-B Hinged 100 Slide Box, Blue each
71471-B Hinged 100 Slide Box, Blue 10/pk
71470-G Hinged 100 Slide Box, Green each
71471-G Hinged 100 Slide Box, Green 10/pk
71470-R Hinged 100 Slide Box, Red each
71471-R Hinged 100 Slide Box, Red 10/pk
71470-Y Hinged 100 Slide Box, Yellow each
71471-Y Hinged 100 Slide Box, Yellow 10/pk

572 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec14_572-579_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 9:37 PM Page 573

Histology and Light Microscopy SECTION 14

 Molded (Living Hinge) Microscope Slide Boxes
Molded one-piece polypropylene construction with an integral living hinge. Numbering in the base
corresponds to the printed index in the covers for slide identification purpose.
Boxes are designed to be stackable to save space. The tensioned clasp insures a secure closure.
Available in 25 or 100 capacity. Fits 1 x 3" (25.4x75mm) microscope slides.

Outside Dimensions
Cat. Description L x W x H" (mm) Pack
71472 Molded 100-Slide Box 83⁄4"x63⁄4"x11⁄2" each
71473 Molded 100-Slide Box (220x175x38mm) 10/pk

 Carolina™ Blue Box

Molded from blue high-impact styrene, the Carolina™ Blue Box is manufactured to our exacting
specifications. Compared to conventional wooden boxes, the Carolina™ Blue Box is smaller in size, lighter
in weight, and held to closer dimensional tolerances. The 75x25mm (3x1") slides fit the slots and will not
slip out once in place. A shoulder on each box excludes dust and identities the top of the box. The boxes
are available in two sizes: 31⁄4" x 41⁄4" x 13⁄16" (for 25 slides) and 31⁄4" x 21⁄4" x 13⁄16" (for 12 slides).
71482-01 Carolina Blue Box, 12-Slide each
71482-10 Carolina Blue Box, 12-Slide 10/pk
71483-01 Carolina Blue Box, 25-Slide each
71483-10 Carolina Blue Box, 25-Slide 10/pk

 Large Glass Slide Storage Box

These storage boxes are available in
two sizes.
1. 100-Slide Capacity:
Durable, wood frame, covered with
heavy black embossed paper. The
hinges and latches are Nickel plated.
A numbered plastic insert provides
spacing for the handling of the slides.
The box accommodates 100 of 3x2”
slides. The box measures 93⁄4” (L)x
 100-Capacity Slide Box 21⁄4” (H) (24.7x19.7x5.7cm).
Same construction as (#71470), but with a slip-on cover; gray in color. The 71480-01 100 Slide Box,
box neasures: 9"x71⁄4"x11⁄4" (230x185x32). 3x2” Slides each
71480-10 100 Slide Box, 3x2” Slides 10/pk
71474 Slip-on Cover 100-Slide Box each
71475 Slip-on Cover 100-Slide Box 10/lot 2. 25 Slide Capacity:
Made from wood with numbered partitions which correspond to the index
 50-Capacity Slide Box card. Very durable and has a detachable lid. The box accommodates 25
Same construction as (#71470), but with a slip on cover; stackable and of 3x2” slides. The box measures: 97⁄8"x35⁄8"x25⁄8" (174x92x67mm).
gray in color. The box measures: 9"x33⁄4"x11⁄4" (230x95x32mm)
71481-01 25 Slide Box, 3x2” Slides each
71462 Slip-on Cover 50-Slide Box each 71481-10 25 Slide Box, 3x2” Slides 10/pk
71463 Slip-on Cover 50-Slide Box 10/lot
 Large Slide Microscope
 Compact 25 Slide Box Slide Boxes
Same characteristics as (#71470), but with a slip-on cover; Holds 25 1x3”
Specially designed for the 3 x 2 slides
slides. The box measures 11⁄4”(H) x 31⁄2”(W) x 51⁄2” (L).
71460 Slip-on Cover 25-Slide Box 2/pk This reinforced ABS material is rugged and
71461 Slip-on Cover 25-Slide Box 10pks/lot (20 bxs) designed not only for storage but transport of
slides as well.
 Grooved slots hold individual slides in place
 A soft cork liner ensures that slides will not slip
 Identification card, lining and grooved slots are numbered
 Stackable . The box measures 208mm (L) x 175mm (h) x 60mm.
They have a capacity of 100 slides and they are blue in color
Cat No. Description W x H x D, mm Color Qty.
41149 100 Place Tall Slide Box 208 x 175 x 60 Blue each

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 573
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec14_572-579_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 9:37 PM Page 574

SECTION 14 Histology and Light Microscopy

® True North™ Slide Box ® Color Microscope Slide Boxes
These purple unique boxes
which are made from durable
polycarbonate and rugged
stainless steel will protect
your slides in ultra-low
temperatures (as low as -80
O C). These boxes provide for
safe storage and transport of
25x75mm and 1x3” Slides.
With temperature sensitive
foam lining and grooved slide
slots which separate the slides
there is always protection for slide
contact.
For easy slide retrieval,
identification sheet, lining, and
grooved slots are numbered. These boxes are stackable and
autoclavable. They measure 208x175x34mm.
Cat. # Description Qty
71485-01 True North™ Slide Box each

® mBox® in Microarray Slide Handling

Using mBox – microarray handling without removing slides!

Molded from one piece (lid and bottom) polypropylene these slide boxes
are able to accommodate either 25 or 100 standard 3x1" (75x25mm)
slides. The attached lid is held securely by a closed latch lock. Stacking
feet maximize the stability when boxes are stacked up one atop the
other. The boxes have a cork liner to protect the stored slides. Comes
complete with a numbered slide index card. These boxes are available
in blue, red or white.
25-Slide Box measures: 51⁄2" x 31⁄2" x 11⁄4" (140x90x32mm)
100-Slide Box measures: 81⁄4" x 65⁄8" x 11⁄4" (210x170x32mm)
71458-W 25-Slide Box, White each
71458-B 25-Slide Box, Blue each
71458-R 25-Slide Box, Red each
71459-W 100-Slide Box, White each
T Immerse 20 slides in liquid during blocking, denaturating, and 71459-B 100-Slide Box, Blue each
post-arraying. 71459-R 100-Slide Box, Red each
T It separates and prevents slide damage during shipping and pro-
cessing. ® Clear Lid 100 Slide Box
T Optimally designed rack spacing for easy slide removal.
This 100-Slide Storage box has a
T Fits standard microtiter plate formats for centrifuging.
clear lid enabling lab personnel to
T Manufactured to prevent slide contamination. read the contents listed on the
T A convenient removable handle available. enclosed index without opening
the box. Made of Black ABS
Technical plastic with metal clasp hinge and
T Material: Polypropylene cork lining. Numbered slots
T Maximum continuous use temperature: 220°F (104°C) correspond to the paper index.
T Melting point: 334°F (168°C) Stackable.
T mBox withstand boiling water without softening Outside dimension: 8¼"L x 7"W
T Measures 5” L x 31⁄2” W x 11⁄2” H (127mm x 89mm x 38mm) x 1¼"H (210 x 180 x 32mm)

Cat. Description Qty

EMS # Description Qty 71477-01 Clear Lid 100 Slide Box 1/pk
72188-01 The mBox each 71477-10 Clear Lid 100 Slide Box 10/pk

574 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec14_572-579_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 9:37 PM Page 575

Histology and Light Microscopy SECTION 14

 9/4-Slide Tray
Heavy-duty cardboard
construction with cloth
hinged flaps to form a single
compartment slide holder of
various sizes horizontally.
Holds 9 3x1” slides or 4
3x2” slides. The tray
measures 235 x 78mm
(91⁄4" x 31⁄8")  Microscope Slide Tray
Cat. # Description Qty White, thermo-formed Polystyrene. Holds 20 of 1”x3” standard slides in
71497-01 9/4-Slide Tray each a horizontal position. A white background makes it easy to distinguish
71497-12 9/4-Slide Tray 12/pk
dyes and stains. The tray features a thumb cut to simplify the removal
 Slide Tray Box of slides. Measures: 71⁄2”x131⁄2” (17x34cm).
Black cloth covered 71500 Microscope Slide Tray 6/pk
cardboard box 9/4-Slide
Tray (#71497).  Slide Tray
The box has a fall-front and Cabinet
drop on lid. Supplied The outside is made from
complete with (6) 9-Slide white polypropylene, the tray
Trays. Overall rails are polystyrene, and the
measurements of the box : vertical sliding door is clear
265 x112 x 68mm acrylic; this 240-slide
(101⁄2" x 43⁄8" x 2 5⁄8") capacity cabinet holds twelve
microscope slide trays
Cat. # Description Qty (#71500) horizontally, and it
71496 Slide Tray Box each is dust free. Measurements:
73⁄4”x14”x71⁄2” high (17x36x16cm).

 Pop-Up Slide 71504 Slide Tray Cabinet each

Holder- 20 or
30 Capacity  Microscope Slide Tray
Holds 20 and 30 of 1x3" This durable, ABS hard
slides in a numbered plastic slide tray will hold up
compartment. The to 20 standard microscope
compartments are slides 75 x 25 mm (3x1”).
recessed so the specimen Ivory color consists of two
cannot be touched when rows, each with securely
the cover is closed. holds 10 slides. Each
Measurements: numbered cavity has thumb
8"(W)x131⁄2"(L)x 11⁄32"(H). cut and raise notches for
easy to remove the slide. Stackable. Measures: 11 7/8”L x 7 ¾”W x
½”H (300x195x12mm)
Cat. Description Qty
71503-01 Hard Plastic Microscope Slide Tray 1/pk
71520 Pop-Up Slide Holder, 20-Place each 71503-10 Hard Plastic Microscope Slide Tray 10/pk
71521 Pop-Up Slide Holder, 20-Place 10/pk
71522
71522-10
Pop-Up Slide Holder, 30-Place
Pop-Up Slide Holder, 30-Place
each
10/pk
 12-Slide
Holder
White thermo-formed
polystyrene. It keeps
microscope slides
seperated. Ideal for use
where slide preparation or
staining is performed.
Measurements:
33⁄8”x7”x3⁄4” (H) (86x178x19mm)
71530 12-Slide Holder 6/pk

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 575
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec14_572-579_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 9:37 PM Page 576

SECTION 14 Histology and Light Microscopy

 Microscope Slide Folder  5-Slide Mailer – Open Top
Made from heat resistant injection molded plastic Made from polypropylene,
rigid, strong and durable
The Slide Folder™ will hold up to twenty standard microscope slides 75 x with convenient flip-tops,
25mm (3x1") and is made of two parts: a base holding the slides horizontally snap-on lids. When they
offering numbered space for easy identification, and transparent doors which stand in their upright
can either cover the slides or be swung behind the SlideFolder™ for space position, they can be used
conservation while using the tray. The base is available in 5 different colors, as staining containers, with
offering color-coding for each job. Each slide location is identified with a a minimal amount of
number from 1 to 20. Removal of the slides is made easy by simply pressing solution being used. (Note:
on one end, which will lift the other end up. The two transparent hinged they are not leak-proof).
covers offer a full view of each stored slide, even bar codes can be read Available in 2 models. Model
without removing of the slide. All units are stackable and will resist 1 needs 14 ml of solution to
temperatures between –80°C and +100°C. They are not autoclavable. stain five slides up to the
Measures 7¾ x 11¾”. frosted area; Model 2 needs
12 ml of staining solutio.).
Model 1 measures 31⁄2"L x
11⁄4" W x 3⁄4" (87x30x22mm).
Model 2 measures 31⁄4"L x 13⁄16"W x 5⁄8" (82x30x17mm). Packaged 25
mailers per pack, 200 per case.
71548-01 5-Slide Container, Model 1 25/pk
71548-08 5-Slide Container, Model 1 200/cs
71549-01 5-Slide Container, Model 2 25/pk
71549-08 5-Slide Container, Model 2 200/cs

Cat # Slide Folder Color Pack

71502-B1 Blue Each  LockMailer™ - Microscope Slide Jar
71502-B10 Blue 10/pk This is tamperproof multi purpose container for mailing, staining or storing
71502-G1 Green Each microscope slides.
71502-G10 Green 10/pk
71502-GR1 Gray Each Constructed of extra strong and opaque clear polypropylene, and high
71502-GR10 Gray 10/pk density polyethylene leakproof tamper evident screw cap (The LockMailer
71502-W1 White Each can also be used without the tamper evident feature by not used the lock
71502-W10 White 10/pk tab), it will hold up to 4 standard 3 x 1” or 25 x 75mm slides vertically.
71502-Y1 Yellow Each Inside chambers are slotted to keep slides safely separated. For color
71502-Y10 Yellow 10/pk coding purposes, use Capinsert™ (#61805-series) that may be inserted
71502-10 Assorted Colors 10/pk on top of closure.
This LockMailer™ can be used as small staining vessel. This unit is
 5-Slide Container designed for maximum stability on a bench top with liquid volume only 14
Holds 5 slides; no contact with ml. Each standard volume of one slide is 2 ml, therefore when you want to
one another. Ideal for Air stain 4 slides in this vessel you need only 6 ml of staining solution.
Conveyor Transport System.
Dimensions: 35 x87mm H (13⁄8” x 37⁄16”H). Packaging: 100 per pack.
Measures: 3"(L)x5⁄8"(W)x11⁄4"(H)
(51mmx16mmx32mm)

71550 5 Slide Container 25/pk

 Plastic Slide
Mailers
Economical and EMS # Description
reusable. These 71406-10 LockMailer™ Microscope Slide Jar
polyethylene mailers Color coded CapInsert™ is available for the LockMailer™
have a sturdy resealable
clasp. The top of the EMS # Description
mailer is clearly labeled 61806-W CapInsert™, White, 100/pk
61806-B CapInsert™, Blue, 100/pk
and slide labeling is visible through the plastic cover.
61806-R CapInsert™, Red, 100/pk
71551-25 Plastic Double Slide Mailer 25/pk 61806-L CapInsert™, Lilac, 100/pk
61806-Y CapInsert™, Yellow, 100/pk
61806-AS CapInsert™, Assorted Colors, 100/pk

576 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec14_572-579_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 9:37 PM Page 577

Histology and Light Microscopy SECTION 14

Five Slide Gripper, See Grids section, page 146 >>>>>

® The UniMailer™
Following many suggestions made to us from
our customers in the labs–The UniMailer™ is a
truly versatile new model mailer which can
easily be used for handling and shipping one
or as many slides as needed with one type of
mailer.
Made from high impact polystyrene, the
UniMailer™ is a one-slide tray. Not only do
they fit snugly on top of each other but they
are also secured by an innovative locking
mechanism. You may also want to insert a
tamperproof tie or attach an ID label. Each tray allows for the placing of slide in a horizontal position for
full visibility. Slides can be easily inserted or removed. As well UniMailer™ can also be used to provide
safe storage for those valuable slides you want to protect.
It accommodates 25 x 75 mm (1” x 3”) slides with or without cover glass. The mailer measures 89 mm
x 29 mm x 6 mm (31⁄2” x 11⁄8” x 3⁄4”).
Identification can be made on three sides or on top. The mailer is available in many popular pastel
colors for easy identification. Packaging: 50 per box, 200 per case.
Cat. # Description Pack
71537-B UniMailer™, Blue 50/pk.
71537-G UniMailer™, Green 50/pk.
71537-P UniMailer™, Pink 50/pk.
71537-W UniMailer™, White 50/pk.
71537-Y UniMailer™, Yellow 50/pk.

® Cyto-Tek® Slide Mailer

Sakura Finetek - Designed for safe transport or mailing of up to two glass slide 1x3". Unbreakable
plastic container with flip top cap fits through mail system.

Cat. No. Tissue-Tek Description Pack

62625-10 4310 Cyto-Tek® Slide Mailer 100/cs

® Solid Cardboard Slide Mailers

® 1-Slide Mailer
Made from 0.050” (1.29 mm) solid cardboard, measures 33⁄4” x 15⁄8” when folded. The mailer holds one
3” x 1” glass slide with or without cover glass and has a thumb groove for easy removal. A special cut
corner identifies the top of the mailer.
Cat. # Description Pack
71539-01 Single Slide Mailer 100/pk.
71539-10 Single Slide Mailer 1,000/pk.

® 2-Slide Mailer
Made from .085” (2.17 mm) chipboard and measures 3” x 41⁄4” when folded. This mailer is unprinted
on both sides which provides warnings for medical specimens and as well as address. Each mailer
conforms to U.S. Postal regulations regarding minimum size for First Class.
Cat. # Description Pack
71540 2-Slide Mailer 25/pk.
71540-CS 2-Slide Mailer 1,000/pk.

® 4-Slide Mailer
The same construction as 2-slide mailer above, but holds 4 of 3x1" slide.
Cat. # Description Pack
71541 4-Slide Mailer - Cardboard 20/pk
71541-CS 4-Slide Mailer - Carboard 200/case

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 577
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec14_572-579_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 9:37 PM Page 578

SECTION 14 Histology and Light Microscopy

® The SlideFile™
The most convenient, organized and versatile way of storing 3” x 1” (75 x 25 mm) microscope slides
vertically. This impact resistant SlideFile™ Storage System can hold up to 400 slide per unit in just 1720
cm3 (105 cu. in.) and are stackable for space saving.
Each SlideFile System includes a slide box and two removable trays. A transparent hinged cover makes
it easy to see at a glance the content of the box.
Features:
T SlideFile™ System is a removable tray inside the storage box having 100 numbered slots. All
slides are stored vertically for easy insertion and removal.
T In the upright position, one is able to read bar codes without having to remove the slide from
the box.
T For space saving purposes, you can double the amount of slides simply by storing two slides
side-by-side per slot. And for maximum storage space–long-term storage–simply remove the
SlideFile Tray and line up 400 slides in three rows.
T Six drain holes incorporated into the tray ensure complete emptying of the liquid when using
the slide holder for drying purposes.
T Two index cards numbered from 1 to 100 are included to allow for slide recording titles.
Dimensions: 86 mm x 248 mm x 83 mm high (33⁄8” x 93⁄4” x 31⁄4” high)
The SlideFile™ System is available in five colors: White, Blue, Green, Pink and Yellow
Cat.# Description Pack Cat.# Description Pack
71450-01 SlideFile System, White each 71452-10 SlideFile System, Green 10/pk.
71450-10 SlideFile System, White 10/pk. 71453-01 SlideFile System, Pink each
71451-01 SlideFile System, Blue each 71453-10 SlideFile System, Pink 10/pk.
71451-10 SlideFile System, Blue 10/pk. 71454-01 SlideFile System, Yellow each
71452-01 SlideFile System, Green each 71454-10 SlideFile System, Yellow 10/pk.

® SlideFile™ Jr. – Storage System

Similar to the SlideFile™, the junior model can hold up to 200 slides per unit in just 860cm3 (53 cu. in.),
and it is stackable to save space. Each SlideFile™ Jr. includes a slide box and a removable tray. A tinted
hinged cover makes the contents of the box easy to see at a glance.
Removable tray inside the storage box having 50 individual numbered slots. All slides are stored upright
for easy insertion and removal as well as reading the bar codes without removing the slides.
To save space , you can double the amount of the slides simply by storing 2 slides per slot. And for
maximum storage space, simply remove the tray and line up 200 slides in 3 rows for long term storage.
This system is not autoclavable. The system measures: 82mm x 140mm x 86mm(H). (31⁄4" x 51⁄2" x 33⁄8"H)

Cat.# SlideFile™ Jr. Color Qty Cat.# SlideFile™ Jr. Color Qty
71448-B1 Blue each 71448-W1 White each
71448-B10 Blue 10/pk 71448-W10 White 10/pk
71448-G1 Green each 71448-Y1 Yellow each
71448-G10 Green 10/pk 71448-Y10 Yellow 10/pk
71448-P1 Pink each
71448-P10 Pink 10/pk

® Drain Rack™
Made from high impact polystyrene.
This rugged tray used as a drain rack can hold up to
200 microscope slides in 100 individual numbered
slots. All sides are stored upright for easy insertion ® DrainRack Jr.
and removal. A unique feature with the DrainRack™ is Made from high impact polystyrene
the ability to read bar codes without having to remove
This model is similar to the DrainRack™ above
the slides from the rack. For space saving purposes,
but can hold up to 100 microscope slides in
you can double the amount of slides simply by storing
50 individual numbered slots. The rack is
2 slides per slot, giving you a capacity of 200 slides
autoclavable. Dimensions: 75mm x 125mm x
per tray instead of 100. The racks are not autoclavable.
25mm H (3" x 5" 1" H)
They measure: 75mm x 231mm x 25mm H (3" x 9" x 1" H) Cat.# DrainRack™ Color Qty
Cat.# DrainRack™ Color Qty Cat.# DrainRack™ Color Qty 71445-B Blue 10/pk
71446-B Blue 10/pk 71446-W White 10/pk 71445-G Green 10/pk
71446-G Green 10/pk 71446-Y Yellow 10/pk 71445-P Pink 10/pk
71446-P Pink 10/pk 71445-W White 10/pk
71445-Y Yellow 10/pk

578 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec14_572-579_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 9:38 PM Page 579

Histology and Light Microscopy SECTION 14

 Slide Tray Racks
& Aluminum Slide Trays
Stainless Steel slide tray racks that accept aluminum slide trays. The
rack allows air to circulate over the slides and both sizes of racks
hold up to 100 slides. The aluminum slide trays have elevated ridges
to separate 76 x 26mm slides and finger holes for easy removal.
Ideal for drying fresh mounts. THE Aluminum slide trays are available
in two configurations: 10 slide position and 20 slide position.

71506-10 Aluminum Slide Tray, 10-Slide – 13"L x 4" W (330 x 100mm). Accommodates 10 slides each
71506-20 Aluminum Slide Tray, 20-Slide – 13"L x 71⁄2" W (330 x 190mm). Accommodates 20 slides each
71508-10 Stainless Steel Slide Tray Rack for 10-Slide Tray Accommodate 10 Aluminum Slide Tray,10-Slide -
13"L x 83⁄8"W x 41⁄2"H (330 x 212 x 112mm) each
71508-20 Stainless Steel Slide Tray Rack for 20-Slide Tray Accommodate 5 Aluminum Slide Tray,20-Slide -
13"L x 73⁄4"W x 41⁄2"H (330 x 197 x 112mm) each

 Slide Tray for 100 Slides

Made from tough, resilient ASB plastic which offers long life. Holds 100-standard 1 x 3" slides
positioned vertically for easy insertion in pre-numbered grooves allowing for simple identification and
retrieval. Dimensions: 141⁄4"L x 1⁄4"W x 33⁄4"H (360 x 38 x 100mm).
A cover which is optional is made from clear polystyrene offering full visibility and it protects the slides
from dirt and dust when they are not in the drawer.
71510-01 100-Slide Tray, Vertical each
71510-10 100-Slide Tray, Vertical 10/pk
71511-01 100-Slide Tray Cover each
71511-10 100- Slide Tray Cover 10/pk

Slide Warmers, see pages 604-605  71510-10

For all of our Slide Storage and Filing Cabinets, see pages 607-610 

 Specimen Mailers  Histology

1. Single Mailing Container, These Containers
fiberboard screw cap mailing cases  Designed for the storage
meet all US Postal Regulations in and transport of histolo-
mailing biological specimens. It also gy specimens in fixa-
meets IATA regulations regarding tives.
shipments of infectious substances.  Made from durable
They are constructed of heavy duty polypropylene (except
fiberboard and have crimped metal rims 8L size, which is made
and seamed metal bottoms. The metal of polyethylene)
screw caps are autoclavable and offer a  Leak-proof self-seal
secure closure. caps
Available in several sizes: All of the containers (except
61003 SM2, size 13⁄4"ID x 7"L 12/pk the 5ml size) have graduated markings on three sides. 2L to 8L sizes are
61004 SM3, size 21⁄4"IDx 51⁄2"L 12/pk supplied with snap-top lids and carrying handles, and has no graduations.

2. Double Mailing Container

The set consists of an inner Cat.# Visibility Inside Height x Top I.D. Size Pack
aluminum screw cap container and 64233-10 Semi-Clear 2" x 1⁄2" (50 x 13mm) 5ml 500/pk
64233-11 Semi-Clear 11⁄2" x 11⁄8" (40 x 28mm) 20ml 200/pk
an outer fiberboard screw cap
64233-12 Semi-Clear 11⁄2" x 15⁄8" (40 x 42mm) 40ml 200/pk
mailing tube. This double type unit 64233-14 Semi-Clear 21⁄4" x 15⁄8" (55 x 42mm) 60ml 100/pk
is required by US Postal for mailing 64233-16 Semi-Clear 27⁄8" x 15⁄8" (75 x 42mm) 90ml 400/pk
of etiologic agents or biohazard 64233-17 Semi-Clear 3" x 115⁄16" (75 x 48mm) 120ml 300/pk
specimens. Each aluminum 64233-18 Opaque 21⁄4" x 31⁄2" (55 x 88mm) 250ml 100/pk
container is autoclavable and the 64233-20 Opaque 4" x 31⁄2" (110 x 88mm) 500ml 100/pk
cap is lined to prevent leakage. 64233-22 Opaque 51⁄4" x 41⁄4" (135 x 110mm) 1000ml 100/pk
64233-24 White 43⁄4" x 71⁄4" (120 x 184mm) 2000ml 20/pk
61011 DM2, tube size 13⁄4" x 7" Alum. can size 11⁄2" x 63⁄8" 12/pk 64233-26 White 71⁄2" x 81⁄8" (190 x 126mm) 5000ml 10/pk
61015 DM4, tube size 23⁄4"x 61⁄4" Alum. can size 21⁄2" x 6" 12/pk 64233-28 White 93⁄4" x 9" (245 x 230mm) 8000ml 10/pk

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 579
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec14_580-595_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 9:53 PM Page 580

SECTION 14 Histology and Light Microscopy

® Sectioning For Histology
® Microtome Blade Holders
Stainless Steel, Disposable Microtome Blade Holders which fit most Durable - Because we use the highest quality stainless steel and the most
microtomes and cryostats. If you are looking for a system that combines the advanced manufacturing processes, these blade holders are less
quality cutting characteristics of reusable blades with the convenience and susceptible to nicks and normal wear and tear.
consistency of disposable ones our blade holders are your answer. Convenient - Insert, clamp, adjust the angle, and cut. That’s all it takes.
Our blade holders are: Universal - For the first time, the quality and convenience of disposable
Versatile - The holders are designed to readily accommodate blades of blades are available for all rotary microtomes and cryostats - Even the
differing thicknesses. Such adaptability allows the histologist maximum popular Miles Tissue Tek™ (adapter required).
flexibility especially when difficult tissues are encountered.

Order information:
Cat.# Description Pack
63050 Standard Microtome Blade Holder – 100% stainless steel construction. each
2 years warranty. For use with our blades #63060-01 and #63061-01. 63050
The holder measures: 6"(152mm) L x 11⁄2"(38mm) W x 7⁄16"(10mm) T
63050-E Blade Holder w/Extended Handle – Same as #63050, but with an each
Extended Handle to eliminate the knife guard interference.
63⁄8" (160mm) long
63050-LP Blade Holder for Low Profile Blades – Same as #63050 but designed each
for use with any Low Profile (LP) Microtome Blades, #63063, 63050-E
#63065-LP, #63068-LP
63050-LPE Blade Holder for Low Profile Blades, w/Extended Handle – each
Same as #63050-LP, but with an Extended Handle to eliminate
knife guard interference.
63050-HP Blade Holder for High Profile Blades – Same as #63050 but designed
for use with any High Profile (HP) Microtome Blades, #63062-01, 63050-HP
#63065-HP, #63068-HP each
63050-HPE Blade Holder for High Profile Blades w/Extended Handle – Same as
#63050-HP, but comes with an Extended Handle to eliminate knife
guard interference. each
63050-LH Universal Blade Holder – Patented SHUR/Sharp™ blade holder designed
for interchangeable use of Low and High profile blades. each 63050-LP

® Cryostat Adapter
With this device, you can adapt all the above Blade Holders (63050-) to the Sakura Tissue-Tek® Cryostat. The adapters simply screw onto the back of the
blade holder for mounting directly to the Cryostat. Guaranteed to improve the quality of your sections.
Cat.# Description Pack
63050-CA Cryostat Adapter for using Our Blade Holders (63050-) in Tissue-Tek Cryostat each

® Tissue-Tek® Accu-Edge® Rotary

Microtome Blade Holders
Sakura Finetek - The Original One-touch and Heavy-duty holders. The one-touch holder
offers easy and quick clamping of disposable blades. The heavy-duty holder has no
internal parts to clean or maintain, making it virtually maintenance-free. These holders fit
any rotary microtome, including Leica, Shandon, Leitz, Surgipath and Tissue-Tek. Each
set includes a blade holder, one dispenser of Accu-Edge® Disposable Blades (63068-LP),
maintenance tools, replacement parts and a storage case.
Cat.# Tissue-Tek Description Pack
63048-10 4687 One-Touch Holder each
63048-20 4683 Heavy-duty Holder each

580 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec14_580-595_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 9:54 PM Page 581

Histology and Light Microscopy SECTION 14

® Sectioning For Histology (continued)

® Tissue-Tek® Accu-Edge® Cryostat Disposable

Blade Holders
Sakura Finetek
1. For Tissue-Tek II® Cryostat
Designed for use with Tissue-Tek II® Microtome/cryostat. Long lasting, easy-to-maintain.
This stainless steel blade holder provides easy access to the blade and the tissue section.
A anti-roll device keep sections from curling. Built-in magnets facilitate blade positioning.
2. For AO/Reichert Cryostat
Designed for AO/Reichert cryostat microtome. It has a right mounted plate to
accommodate its off-center blade position and anti-roll device and fits older AO/Reichert
cryostat models.
3. Universal Cryostat Holder
Designed to fit IEC, Bright, Leitz, Shandon-Lipshaw and other models. It features a
centered blade fixing plate, an anti-roll device. All the above Holders comes with a black
resin coated faceplate which offers better visualization of specimens. Each set includes a
blade holder, one disposable blade (#63068-LP), maintenance tools, replacement anti-roll
plate and storage case.
Cat.# Tissue-Tek Description Pack
63046-02 4682 Tissue-Tek II Blade Holder each
63046-10 4680 AO/Reichert Blade Holder each
63046-20 4681 Universal Blade Holder each

® Anti-Roll Device
An Anti-Roll (A/R) Device which may be used with all our blade holders. It snaps on or off
by a unique magnetic attachment system. Its clear plastic plate which is positioned above
the sectioning blade prevents any sample curling.
63051-10 Anti-Roll Device each
63051-12 Extra Plate each

® EMS Ultra-Microtome Aid

Made from hard plastic (Delrin) with a beautifully machined finish to handle many of your
instruments that need to be at your fingertips during sectioning.
This EMS Ultra-microtome Aid is a safe place to rest your diamond knife, diamond trimming
tool, tweezers, hair curl or eye lash, diamond knife cleaning rods, perfect-loop for picking up
sections.
Note: This unit is not a safe device to store your sectioning knives, such as diamond or glass
knives, after you’re done the sectioning.
70612 EMS Ultramicrotome Aid each

® Tissue-Tek Object Holder Mechanism

The Tissue-Tek Object Holder Mechanism is a unique device which conveniently fits into
existing Miles Tissue Tek cryostats and permits X,Y and Z orientation of ball end chucks.
It speeds up the process of cutting frozen sections. The Object Holder also enables the
histologist to orient the specimen at any plane making sectioning of the correct portion
of the specimen much easier. The holder comes complete with clamp and three ball
end chucks.
63055-10 Tissue-Tek Object Holder each
63055-12 Extra Ball End Chucks each

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 581
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec14_580-595_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 9:54 PM Page 582

SECTION 14 Histology and Light Microscopy

® Leica® Disposable Microtome Blades
Made from high quality stainless steel. High and low profile disposable blades for use with all
Leica microtomes as well as the Cryocut and Cryostat. A PTFE-fluorocarbon resin-coated
edge allows sections to slide off the edge without distortion. They minimize compression.
Comes 50 blades in a dispenser box.
Low profile blade measures: 2.98"(L) x 0.318"(W) x 0.010"(T) (75.74 x 8.09 x 0.27mm)
High profile blade measures: 2.98"(L) x 0.557"(W) x 0.012"(T) (75.74 x 14.14 x 0.32mm)
Cat.# Description Leica # Pack
63065-LP Low Profile Leica Blade 819 50/bx
63065-HP High Profile Leica Blade 818 50/bx

® Disposable Microtome Blades; Stainless Steel

The quality of sectioning depends on the quality of The Edge
the blade being used. With sharp durable edges, Years of research went into choosing the optimum stainless steel and edge combination. Repeated
our blades represent a new standard in sectioning testing was performed by histologists to assure that SHUR/SHARP blades represent the ultimate in
quality. consistency for sectioning technology. Chatterless and compression free ribbons will become routine
Our blades are available in three different types: no matter what the tissue is.
Standard Blade
For routine tissue samples, the standard blade offers
an unsurpassed level of quality at an affordable price.
63063-01
Premium Blade 63061-01
When more difficult specimens are encountered,
simply switch to our premium type- a heavy duty
blade which allows you to achieve ribbons of
unsurpassed quality.
63062-01 63064-01

Description Cat.# Pack

Disposable Microtome Blade, Uncoated, Heavy Duty. Measures: 3"L x 0.498"W x 0.02"T (76.22 x 12.6 x 0.52mm). 35 blades/box, 10boxes/case. 63061-01 35/bx
63061-10 10bx/cs
Disposable Microtome Blade, Uncoated. Use with 63050-HP, 63050-HPE and all high profile blade holders. 63062-01 60/bx
Measures: 3"L x 0.562"W x 0.012"T (76.22 x 14.28 x 0.32mm). 60 blades/box, 10 boxes/case. 63062-10 10bx/cs
Disposable Microtome Blade, Low Profile, Coated. Measures: 3"L x 0.312"W x 0.012"T (76.22 x 7.92 x 0.32mm). 50 blades/box, 10 boxes/case. 63063-01 50/bx
63063-10 10bx/cs
Disposable Microtome Blade, High Profile, Coated. Measures: 3"L x 0.553"W x 0.012"T (76.22 x 14.05 x 0.32mm). 50 blades/box, 10 boxes/case.63064-01 50/bx
63064-10 10bx/cs
Note: Coated Blades: blades are coated with PTFE

® Tissue-Tek® Accu-Edge® Disposable ® Disposable Microtome Blades - Feather®

Microtome Blades Blades
Sakura Finetek - These ultra
sharp, high quality microtome
sectioning blades offer
striation, distortion and chatter
free sections. These ultra-sharp blades section specimens without striations,
Comes in a dispenser with 50 distortions, or chattering. The dispenser delivers a new blade in
blades. Low profile blades fit seconds, automatically ejecting the used blade. Holds 50 blades. Low
all Accu-Edge® Blade Holders profile blades fit all Accu-Edge Blade Holders for microtomy and
for microtomy and cryotomy cryotomy: 63048-10, 63048-20, 63-46-10, 63046-20, and 63046-
#63048-10, #63048-20, #63046-02, #63046-10, #63046-20. The high 02 (see page 325). 50 blades per dispenser, 10 dispensers per case.
profile blades are suitable for blade holders that are 14mm in height. The blades measure:3.15" x 0.31 x 0.09" (80.0 x 8 x 0.24mm)
Packed 50 blades per dispenser. Cat.# Description Pack
63069-LP Low Profile Microtome Feather® Blade 50/bx
Low profile blade measures: 3.15"(L) x 0.314"(W) x 0.010"(T)
(80.07x8.31x0.26mm)
High profile blade measures: 2.982"(L) x 0.550"(W) x 0.012"(T)
(75.74 x 13.98 x 0.31mm)
Cat.# Description Tissue-Tek Pack
63068-LP Low Profile Accu-Edge Blade 4689 50/bx
63068-HP High Profile Accu-Edge Blade 4685 50/bx

582 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec14_580-595_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 9:54 PM Page 583

Histology and Light Microscopy SECTION 14

® Sectioning For Histology (continued) ® Tissue-Tek® Quick Ray™
Tissue Microarray System: Building Superior Results
® Tissue-Tek®
Microtome The Tissue Microarray are a collection of
multiple tissue cores that are arranged in
Lubrication Kit an XY fashion inside of a paraffin block
This kit contains special low allowing for histological analysis
temperature blended lubricants
The Tissue-Tek® Quick-Ray™ technique
and grease for the routine
produces superior quality TMAs in less time
maintenance of all of the Tissue-
than with traditional methods, and
Tek microtomes. Tissue-Tek® II
accomplishes finished products at a
and Tissue-Tek® brand Cryo
fraction of the cost. The Tissue-Tek®
2000™.
Quick-Ray™ uses a hollowed tip to
remove tissue cores as small as 1 mm
Cat.# Tissue-Tek Description Pack
62556-01 4556 Tissue-Tek™ Lubricating Kit each
from paraffin-embedded tissue (donor
block). The extracted tissue is then inserted
® Section Lifters into a preformed recipient block—the
Made from polished stainless steel. These section lifters come in three Quick-Ray™ System is the only system
sizes: available that uses a preformed paraffin
recipient block.
Model A: Blade measures 11⁄2"x11⁄2" (38 x 38mm),
overall length is 6" (138mm) The finished block is sectioned using a
microtome; the sections are mounted on
Model B: Perforated blade. Blade measures: 23⁄8"x23⁄8" (60 x 60mm). glass slides and then stained. Each TMA
Overall length is 7" (150mm) block can be cut into 300-400 sections at
4-5 μ, which can then be subjected to
independent tests. Common tests include
immunohistochemistry and fluorescent in
situ hybridization.
Compact design and versatility make building a Tissue-Tek® Quick-
Ray™ TMA astoundingly simple. The construction of a TMA block can
be done on any clean counter, and does not require a dedicated space.
The Quick-Ray system is the only system available that uses a pre-
formed paraffin receipent block. There is no other system or instrument
that provides a ready to use paraffin recipient block. The finished block
is then sectioned using a microtome; the sections are mounted on glass
63076-10 Section Lifter Model A each slides and then stained. Each TMA Block can be cut into 300-400
63076-20 Section Lifter Model B each sections at 3-4 microns.
FEATURES:
® Microtome Oil T Ready-to-use paraffin recipient block
A chemically pure, high-grade lubricant used T Compact design and versatility
in precision instruments. Should be used T No dedicated space required for TMA block formation
periodically to lubricate cross-rollerbearings The Tissue-Tek® Quick-Ray™ Tissue Microarray System consists of:
for microtomes.
• One puncher
• Four paraffin recipient blocks (1 mm, 2 mm, 3 mm, and 5 mm)
• One basemold
• Four punch tips (1 mm, 2 mm, 3 mm, and 5 mm)
• One 1-mm punch guide
60744 Microtome Oil, 100ml each
Cat. # Description Qty.
® Top Shelf with Light 62595-01 Tissue-Tek® Quick-Ray™ System each
62595-02 Punch Guide, 1 mm each
This optional Workshelf with liight is an added for user convenience 92595-03 Quick-Ray™ Punch Tip 1 mm each
when operating Tisue-Tek® Cryo 2000™ Microtome/Cryostat. 62595-04 Quick-Ray™ Punch Tip 2 mm each
Cat. # Tissue-Tek Description 62595-05 Quick-Ray™ Punch Tip 3 mm each
62547-06 4706 Top Shelf with Light each 62595-06 Quick-Ray™ Punch Tip 5 mm each
62595-07 Quick-Ray™ Recipient Block 1 mm each
62595-08 Quick-Ray™ Recipient Block 2 mm each
® For our Ralph Maker see page 596 UUUUU 62595-09 Quick-Ray™ Recipient Block 3 mm each
62595-10 Quick-Ray™ Recipient Block 5 mm each
® For our Glass Knife Strips see page 255 UUUUU 62595-11 Quick-Ray™ Basemold 3/pack

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 583
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec14_580-595_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 9:54 PM Page 584

SECTION 14 Histology and Light Microscopy

® Tissue-Tek® VIP® 6 Tissue Processor ® TISSUE-TEK® VIP® 6 ACCESSORIES

The Tradition Of Processing Excellence Meets Inovation ® The Paraffin Scrapper, Small (6034) – This scrapper can be
used to remove paraffin from any VIP® Tissue Processor or TEC™
Introducing VIP-6 – the next Embedding System. 1/pack
generation of proven Tissue-Tek®
Vacuum Infiltration Tissue Processor, Reagent Bottle, Complete (6035)
with reliable, easy-to- use design. – Tissue-Tek VIP ® 6 Vacuum Infiltration
Processor Accessory. This reagent bottle
Designed for streamlined operation, is used to store reagents on the VIP® 6
the VIP® 6 utilizes enhanced reagent to be used during processing. The
features for greater productivity reagent bottle is sold complete with all
including automatic transfer during attachments includes.
processing, illuminated cabinet that
enables observation of reagent levels Reagent Bottle Labels (6036) -
and 7 mixing options. Tissue-Tek® VIP® 6 Vacuum Infiltration
Processor Accessory. Reagent bottle
Furthermore, VIP® 6 features smart labels affix to the front of a reagent
instruments designed to make bottle distinguishing one reagent from
processing easier than before. another. Labels size: 10x8”.
Continuous mixing, short cycles, and
a heated retort lid take processing to Paraffin Waste Bags (6045) -
the next level. Tissue-Tek® VIP® 6 Vacuum Infiltration
Processor Accessory. The paraffin waste
FEATURES: bags line the paraffin waster container
T Save – secure and environmentally friendly in the VIP 6. After paraffin has drained
T Automatically transfer 3 reagents at a time including paraffin into the paraffin waste container during
during processing a solution exchange simply remove the
T Continuous mixing for efficient processing bag from the container and dispose of
T High-resolution LCD color touch screen allows easy access to according to local regulations.
programs Fume Filter (6160) –The fume filter
T 3 user-defined cleaning cycles with optional drying cycles for the VIP 6 Vacuum Infiltration
T Programmable rinses with water, alcohol, water/alcohol, Processor is sufficient in removing
alcohol/water, or an external solution fumes that are generated during routine
T Options for user-defined solutions, solution configurations, and use. It is recommended that the filter be
programs replace once a month.
T Advanced filtering combines fume condenser system and 2
disposable activated carbon filters eliminates the use of water
T User-defined 150 or 300-cassette capacity configuration EMS # Tissue-Tek Description Qty.
62593-6 6030 Tissue-Tek® VIP® 6 Tissue Processor each
T Two levels of password protection for complete instrument and
VIP® 6 Tissue Processor Accessories
information security
62593-54 6034 The Paraffin Scrapper, Small each
62593-55 6035 Reagent Bottle, Complete each
SPECIFICATIONS 62593-56 6036 Reagent Bottle Labels, (8x10 Colors) Set
62593-65 6045 Paraffin Waste Bag 12/case
Application: ................Processes routine and biopsy tissue samples 62593-70 6160 Fume Filter 2/case
Dimensions: ............24” (W) x 27” (D) x 54” (H) (60 x 68 x 136 cm)
Weight: ....................................................................352 lb (160 kg)
Power Requirements: ..............................................115 VAC, 60 Hz
Process Capacity: ..................Up to 300 Tissue-Tek® Uni-Cassettes®
Fume Control: ..................Fume condenser system and 2 disposable
activated carbon filters
Reagent Reservoirs: ........................................10 reagent reservoirs,
4 removable paraffin reservoirs
Program Memory: ......................................50 processing programs,
3 user-defined cleaning programs
Password Protection: ................2 levels, 4 managers, and 20 users
P/V Cycle Time: ................................user defined 30 – 180 seconds

584 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec14_580-595_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 9:54 PM Page 585

Histology and Light Microscopy SECTION 14

® TISSUE-TEK® VIP® 5 ACCESSORIES ® Sakura Processing Reagents & Tissue

EMS # Tissue-Tek Description Qty. Processor Supplies
62592-50 4899 Activated Carbon Cartridge, 2/case – Used each Tissue-Tek® VIP™ Fixative
with Tissue-Tek® VIP™5, VIP™ E150 and E300 Eliminate the need for routine warm water
Tissue Processors. The activated carbon flushing with the Tissue-Tek® VIP™ Fixative.
cartridges can be incinerated for disposal.
Using the unique Neutra-pHase™ technology,
62592-40 4397 Printer - For QA purpose, a printer can be each
connected to the Tissue-Tek® VIP™ processor.
the Tissue-Tek® VIP™ Fixative produces no
It allows to keep printed records of the precipitates in the presence of alcohol,
processed runs, noting any error conditions. contrary to all other 10% neutral buffered
System parameters and other useful formalin products. The Tissue-Tek® VIP™
information can be printed Fixative will not promote formation of salts
62592-51 5181 Retort Gasket – The Retort Gasket can be used each within the tissue processor lines which can
with all models of Tissue-Tek® Tissue Processor. cause costly damages to any brands of tissues processors unless
This gasket nust be replaced periodically to
regular maintenance is performed. Since the base ingredient is formalin,
ensure proper sealing of the retort during
processing, each
it is fully compatible and can replace 10% NBF without any adjustments
62590-50 1550 Paraffin Scraper each to your procedures. The product is offered in three convenient package
62592-54 5264 Basket Transport Tray each sizes: 1 gallon, 2.5 gallons and 5 gallons.
62592-55 5265 150-Cassette Basket with Handles each
62592-56 5266 65-Cassette Basket with Handles each
Tissue-Tek® Processing/
62592-57 5267 150-Cassettes Basket without Handle each Embedding Medium
62592-58 5268 75-Cassettes Basket without Handles each Tissue-Tek® VIP™ Paraffin – its unique
62592-59 5269 Basket Hook for Basket 5267 each composition allows reduced compression
62592-60 5270 Basket Hook for Basket 5268 each sections as thin as 2μm. The low melting
62592-61 5271 Basket Divider, 6/case
62592-62 5272 Reagent Bottle (s/n 52140294 or 52150705 each
point (56°C) protects samples from heat
and lower) damage. Will not dis-color under normal processing conditions. Leaves
62592-70 5280 Reagent Bottle (s/n 52140295 or 52150706 each no plasticizer residue to clog paraffin lines in tissue processors and
and higher) embedding centers. Supplied in small pellets for rapid melting. Eight
62592-63 5273 Reagent Bottle Labels (150/300), each convenient 1 kg bags per case.
62592-64 5274 Paraffin Container (with Inserts), each
62592-65 5275 Displacement Block, each Tissue-Tek® Filter Carbon
62592-66 5276 Drain/Fill Hose each Tissue-Tek® VIP™ Vacuum Infiltration
62592-68 5278 Paraffin Container Back Insert each Processor Filter Carbon Replacement
62592-69 5279 Paraffin Container Front Insert each activated filter carbon, 3.25 lb carton. For use
with VIP™ Tissue Processor: 1000, 2000,
® TISSUE-TEK® VIP® E Series 150, 300 3000 series
ACCESSORIES
EMS # Tissue-Tek Description EMS# Tissue-Tek Description Qty
62591-61 1521 Cassettes Basket (Complete)- Used with Tissue- each 62582-01 5990 Tissue-Tek™ VIP® Fixative 1gal
Tek® VIP™ E150 & E300 Tissue Processors. Each 62582-04 5990 Tissue-Tek™ VIP® Fixative 4 x 1gal
basket can hold up to 150 Uni-cassette®. Lid 62582-02 5989 Tissue-Tek™ VIP® Fixative 2.5 gal
and dividers are included 62582-05 5991 Tissue-Tek™ VIP® Fixative 5 gal
62591-62 1522 Reagent Bottle, each - (If all the attachments each 62582-50 5992 Spigot for items 5889 & 5991 each
are also needed, order item number 62591-66) 62580-01 4005 Tissue-Tek™ VIP® Paraffin 1 kg
62591-63 1523 Reagent Bottle Cap – Rear, each. (For use with each 62580-08 4005 Tissue-Tek™ VIP® Paraffin 8 x 1 kg
item 62591-62) 62583 4663 Tissue-Tek™ Filter Carbon 3.3 lb (1.5kg)
62591-64 1524 Reagent Bottle O-Ring – Rear, each. (Install on each
the back connector of item 62591-62 to provide each
a sealed connection with instrument)
62591-65 1525 Reagent Bottle Cap/O-Ring – Front, each. each
(Install on the front connector of item number
62591-62)
62591-66 1526 Reagent Bottle (Complete with all the each
attachments)

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 585
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec14_580-595_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 9:54 PM Page 586

SECTION 14 Histology and Light Microscopy

® Tissue-Tek® TEC™ 5 Tissue Embedding SPECIFICATIONS

Console System Application: ..............Modular system aid in embedding histology specimen
Product Codes: ......................................................#5100 Complete System
The Tissue-Tek® ....................................................(Modular, including 1 Embedding Module
TEC™ 5 System ............................................................[#5101] and 1 Cryo Module [#5102])
provides a compact, Dimensions
single workstation (complete system):..............................................35.6”W x 25.3”D x 14.8”H
that enable both ................................................................................(90.4 x 64.2 x 37.7 cm)
specimen orientation Embedding Console: .......................................... 22.6”W x 25.3”D x 14.8”H
and paraffin ..............................................................................(57.5 x 364.2 x 37.7 cm)
embedding. It can Cryo Console: .................................................... 13.0”W x 24.3”D x 14.8”H
be customized to ..............................................................................(33.0 x 61.7 x 37.57cm)
user preferences by placing the TEC™ 5 modules in a left-to-right or Weight:
right-to-left arrangement for optimal workflow. Embedding Console: ................................................................26kg (57 lbs)
Cryo Console:..........................................................................22 kg (48 lbs)
Other included advances that optimized operations include a finger Power Requirement: ............................................................115 VAC, 60Hz
touch-plate and optional foot pedal for precise control of paraffin flow, a Paraffin Chamber Capacity:.............................................................. 4 Liters
dispensing tower knob to adjust the flow rate to specific tasks, and an Left and Right Thermal Chamber capacity: ............................1.5 Liters each
automatic ON/OFF switch that allows manual override for greater Temperature Ranges:
flexibility. The TEC™ 5 also offers other advances for heightened Paraffin Chamber: ........................................50°C to 75°C (122°F to 167°F)
performance, like temperature control over key areas for uniform Thermal chambers: ......................................50°C to 75°C (122°F to 167°F)
regulation (all heated areas from 50°C to 75°C in 1°C increments; Cryo Heating Forceps Wells: ................................50°C to 75°C (122°F to 167°F)
Module plate from – 10°C to 0°C in 1°C increments) individual Cooling Plate: ..................................................- 10°C to 0°C (23°F to 32°F)
Optional: ..................................................................Electric Forceps: 1 to 5
temperature control for left and right Thermo Storage Compartments to
Cooling Plate: ......................................................................Up to 60 blocks
allow use as either paraffin baths or warming caddies for base molds, Working Area: ......................Insulated warm area holds up to 20 cassettes
and an efficient cooling system to maintain temperature levels even
when the plate is full.
More TEC™ 5 features includes six easy-to-reach forceps wells, an
ample chilling area for approximately 60 specimens blocks, a panel
display of temperatures in all heated and cooled areas and easy-to-clean
surfaces with no hidden corners to catch paraffin debris. Electrical
forceps are optional.
FEATURES:
T Two module configuration option (left-to-right or right-to-left) EMS # Tissue-Tek Description Qty.
62590 5100 Tissue-Tek® TEC™5 Embedding System each
T User control over paraffin 62590-01 5101 Tissue-Tek® TEC™5 Embedding Module each
• Paraffin flow control via finger touch-plate and optional foot pedal 62590-02 5102 Tissue-Tek® TEC™5 Cryo Module each
• Adjustable gravity feet paraffin dispenser 62590-03 5200 Tissue-Tek® TEC™Plus, Cryo Console - each
provides a large, refrigerated surface for the
T Temperature control rapid cooling of paraffin blocks. The nylon
• 50°C to 75°C in 1°C increments in all heated areas work surface matches the Embedding
• – 10°C to 0°C in 1°C increments in Cryo Module plate Console height for optimum efficiency.
Accommodates approximately 60 base
• Efficient cooling system molds/cassettes. Quiet compressor; reduces
• Individual temperature control over left and right Thermal storage noise fatigue. Constant digital display
Compartment (can be used as a paraffin bath or warming caddy indicates cold plate temperature during
operation. Plates cools to -5°C in about 20
for base molds)
minutes. Temperature is adjustable from -
• Panel temperature display for all heated/cooled area 10°C to 0°C
T Fully programmable ON/OFF control 62590-50 1550 Paraffin Scraper each
62590-51 1551 Tamper, Large 3/pk
• Automatically starts up and shuts down
62590-52 1552 Tamper, Small 3/pk
• Allows manual override to bypass timer operation 62590-53 1553 Lamp 2/case
62590-71 5781 150-Cassette Transfer Tray each
T Environmentally safe refrigerant
62590-72 5782 75/65-Cassette Transfer Tray each
T Six forceps wells 62590-73 5783 TEC™ 5 Base Mold Divider each
T Optional electrical forceps available 62590-74 5784 TEC™ 5 Magnifying Glass each
T Chilling area for approximately 60 cassette specimens 62590-75 5785 TEC™ 5 Foot Pedal each
62590-76 5786 TEC™ 5 Electric Forceps each
65290-78 5788 TEC™ 5 Arm Rest – consists of 2 individual each
parts with an adhesive backing that can be
placed on either side of the TEC™ 5 working
space for added protection against contact
with the hot plate while embedding. They are
packaged 2 per set.

586 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec14_580-595_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 9:54 PM Page 587

Histology and Light Microscopy SECTION 14

® ACCU-CUT® SRM™ 200 Rotary Microtome

The Accu-Cut® SRM™ 200 FEATURES
Rotary Microtome is designed T The universal cassette clamp ensures that the specimen block is held securely in
to work with the Accu-Edge® place, while the orienting clamp allows the user to precisely position the
Blade System to offer specimen surface to the blade.
unparalleled performance. This T Specimen retraction not only protects the specimen surface, it helps ensure that
manual microtome features a the microtome blade remains sharp and effective.
smooth-running hand-wheel T A trimming lever allows the user to advance the specimen 10 or 50 microns to
helps minimize stress on the operator’s hands and optimize facilitate accurate and fast trimming of the specimen block
both efficiency and productivity, three-axis specimen T The micron thickness setting is an adjustable visual display, which ensures
orientation, specimen retraction, lateral displacement of the accuracy with each rotation of the handwheel. For ease of use, the handwheel
Blade Holder and trimming functions. brake engages in any position.
The SRM™ 200 was designed with blade compatibility in T For added convenience and safety, the Universal Blade Holder base has a lateral
mind, maximizing the performance of the Accu-Edge Blades. displacement feature. This allows the operator to utilize the full length of the
microtome blade without having to release the blade clamping mechanism or
directly manipulate the blade.
Dimensions: ....16”W x 18.5”D x 12”H (40 x 47 x 29.5 cm)
T Cleaning and maintenance is easy, thanks to the sliding cover that protects the
Weight: ........................................................ 29 kg (64 lbs)
inside of the instrument from sectioning debris. (Waste Tray #63318-01 and Bag
Thickness setting range:..........................0.5 – 60 microns.
#63318-25 are available separately)
Available two models: retracting and non-retracting. T Accessories included for use with low- and high-profile.

EMS # Tissue-Tek Description Qty. EMS # Tissue-Tek Description Qty.

62660 1429 Accu-Cut® SRM™ 200 Rotary Microtome, each Optional Accessories
Retracting 62660-61 1441 Dust Cover each
62660-NR 1429N Accu-Cut® SRM™ 200 Rotary Microtome, each 62660-62 1442 Holder for Reusable Knife each
Non-Retracting 62660-63 1443 Fixed Clamp Attachment each
Accessories included with system 62660-64 1444 Specimen Clamp, 40 x 40 mm each
62660-54 1434 Blade Holder Base Assembly each 62660-65 1445 Specimen Clamp, 50 x 55 mm each
62660-55 1435 Holder for Disposable Blades each 62660-66 1446 V-Insert each
62660-56 1436 High-Profile Back-Plate each 62660-67 1447 Microtome Oil, 50 ml each
62660-57 1437 Low-Profile Back-Plate each 62660-69 1469 Holder for High Profile Blades each
62660-58 1438 Orienting Clamp Attachment each 63318-01 4657 Microtome Waste collection Set
62660-59 1439 Universal Cassette Clamp 63318-25 4658 Waste Collection Bags 250/case
62660-60 1440 Maintenance Kit (Including Microtome Oil) each 62536-04 4650 Cold Plate 24/case

® Tissue-Tek® Film® Coverslipper ® Tissue-Tek® Film® Coverslipper Accessories

Tissue-Tek®Film® Link System (6134) – The Link System combines the Prisma® and
Coverslipper is designed to the Film® into one fully integrated system offering complete walk away
automate the manual task of convenience. The Link performs an automatic robotic transfer of slide
permanently mounting a basket from stainer to coverslipper
histology or cytology stained
Solvent Bottle (4745) – 500 ml
slide. The Film® Coverslipper
glass bottle holds xylene for use in the
has the ability to link with
Film™ Coverslipper
Prisma Slide Stainer which
makes this instrument a fully Solvent Bottle Caps (4746) – The
integrated system offering xylene bottle cap is positioned on the
complete walk away xylene bottle to prevent excess fumes.
convenience. Coverslips up to twenty slides per minute with a cellulose The cap is designed with a hole to fit
tri-acetate film coated with a xylene-activated resin on the lower surface. into the xylene dispensing area.
The flexible film, with optical clarity equal to glass, is automatically Waste Bottle (4748) – 200 ml
applied to the slide, eliminating the use of sticky mounting media and glass bottle used to collect excessive xylene drained from the dispensing
extended xylene contact. Selectable mounted film length and batch or area of the Film® Coverslipper
single slide operating capabilities.
Waste Bottle Cap (4749) – The Waste Bottle Cap is positioned on
the waste bottle to prevent excess fumes. The cap is designed with a
SPECIFICATIONS hole to fit into the waste area.
Dimensions: ............28.3” W x 23.2” D x 27.1” H (72 x 59 x 69 cm)
Exhaust Duct Adapter (4750 & 4751) – The Tissue-Tek® Film®
Weight: ....................................................................165 lbs (75 kg)
Electrical: ..................................................................115VAC, 60 Hz Coverslipper offers an optional Duct Connection Adapter which connects
Coverslipping Capacity: ......Continuous loading of 60 slides at a time to an external exhaust system, for added protection. Two sizes are
Throughput: ................................Coverslips 1 slide every 3 seconds, available, 38 mm and 75 mm.
up to 1,080 slides per hour continued on next page UUUUU
Operational Temperature: ............................................10°C to 40°C
Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 587
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec14_580-595_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 9:54 PM Page 588

SECTION 14 Histology and Light Microscopy

® Tissue-Tek® Film® Coverslipper Accessories ® Tissue-Tek® Glas™ g2 Coverslipper

(continued) Elevate Traditional Glass Coverslipping With
Stainer & Coverslipper Slide Tissue-Tek® Automation
Basket (4768) - Basket for Tissue-
Tek™ Stainers and Coverslipper for Introducing Tissue-Tek® Glas™ g2 – the premier
use with the Film® and SCA™ automated glass coverslipper that link to the Tissue-
Coverslippers, the Prisma®, DRS- Tek® Prisma® Stainer to provide a true walkaway
601™ Histology/Cytology Slide system
Stainers and the RSG-61™ The Tissue-Tek® Glas Coverslipper is a state-of-the-art
Hematology Slide Stainer. The special instrument automated coverslipping procedures to a
basket design reduces cross new level. With a throughput of up to 400 slides per
contamination and carry-over. The hour, the Tissue-Tek® Coverslipper provides clean
basket can also be used in a bubbles-free slides fast and consistently. The flexibility design accommodates both
microwave oven. The slide baskets histology and cytology specimens. Mounting medium volume is easily and
are available in case quantity. adjustable for all type of specimens. Coverglass size 40, 50, 55 and 60 mm can
Coverslipping Film (4770) – be changed easily and the speed of coverslipping can be modified for specimens
Cellulose tri-acetate film coated with more difficult to coverslip. This Coverslipper is enabled to be used with xylene or
a xylene-activated resin on the lower xylene substitutes.
surface. The flexible film, with optical
FEATURES:
clarity compatible to glass, is
automatically applied to the slide, eliminating the use of sticky T Links with Tissue-Tek™ Prisma® T Programmable drying time
mounting media and extended expose to xylene. Selectable mounted
Stainer T Independent operation and loading
film length and batch or single-slide operating capabilities. The Film is T Unloading station accommodates when linked to Prisma® Stainer
available 5 rolls per case, each roll can coverslip 1,000 slides. 12 slide baskets (240 slides) T Up to 9 programs accommodate 8
T Continuous loading different sizes of glass coverslips
Coverslipper Film Cutter Blades (4772) – Blades are used T Low mounting medium alert T 2 drying fans on top and bottom of
inside the Film® Coverslipper to preciously cut each roll of film to the
T 500 ml mounting medium capacity slides
precise dimensions of the slide. The Coverslipper Film Cutter Blades
T Slide gripper accommodates T Advanced filtration system for
are available 5 blades per case. safe, comfortable
slides with paper labels
Fume Filter (6160) – The fume SPECIFICATIONS
filter for the Film® Coverslipper is Application: ........................................................Histology, cytology specimens
sufficient in removing fumes that are Products: ......................#6500 - Tissue-Tek® Glas™ g2 Automated Coverslipper
generated during routine use. It is #6168 – Link System to Tissue-Tek® Glas g2 Coverslipper with Tissue-tek®
recommended that the filter be Prisma® Automated Slide Stainer #6130
replaced once a month. Fume Filter s Dimensions: ........................29.53” W x 24.41” D x 29.53” H (75 x 62 x 75 cm)
are packaged 2 to a case. Electrical: ..................................................................115 VAC, 1.7 Amps, 60 Hz
Weight: ....................................................................................242 lbs (110 kg)
Activated Carbon Filter Block
Alarm: ......................................Audible beeps, including low mounting medium
(4775) – Activated Carbon Filter alert and screen display messages
Block for use with Tissue-Tek® SCA™ Process Mode: ......................................Continuous loading – intelligent loading
Coverslipper Fume Controller. This Slide Retrieval Speed: ..........................................................Variable – 5 speeds
Filter Block is easily installed to Process Capacity: ....................................................Up to 20 slides per basket
provide fume filtration during Mounting Medium:..........................................................................500 capacity
operation, coverslipping 5,000 slides. Fume Controls: ..............................................Exhaust fan and activated carbon
Tissue- Tissue-Tek® Glas™ Mounting Medium is designed specially to be used on the
EMS # Tek Description Qty. Glas™ Coverslipper to maximize performance, producing clean, bubble-free slides.
62665 4740 Tissue-Tek® Film® Coverslipper each This xylene-based mounting medium is medium viscosity and can be opened and
62666-PR 6134 Link System for Connectivity Film® and each
placed directly onto the mounting medium area of the coverslipper, no pouring
Prisma® Stainers
62665-55 4745 Solvent Bottle , 500 ml each
needed. Each 16 oz bottle coverslips up to 10,000 slides.
62665-56 4746 Solvent Bottle Cap each Link System combines the Prisma® Stainer and the Glas™ g2 into one fully
62665-58 4748 Waste Bottle, 200 ml each integrated system offering complete walk away convenience.
62665-59 4749 Waste Bottle Cap each
62665-60 4750 Exhaust Duct Adapter,38mm each EMS # Tissue-Tek Description Qty.
62665-61 4751 Exhaust Duct Adapter, 75mm each 62664 6500 Tissue-Tek® Glas™ g2 Coverslipper each
62665-67 4768 Stainer & Coverslipper Slide Basket each 62666-G2 6168 Link System
62665-68 4768 Stainer & Coverslipper Slide Basket 10/case 62552-01 6419 Tissue-Tek® Glas™Mounting Medium each
62665-71 4770 Coverslipping Film 5 rolls/case 62664-54 6504 Receiving Rack each
62665-72 4772 Film Cutter Blades 5/case 62664-55 6505 Waste Bottle each
62593-70 6160 Fume Filter 2/case 62664-56 6506 Exhaust Hose Assembly, 38 mm Diameter each
62662-75 4775 Activated Carbon Filter Block 2/cs 62664-57 6507 Exhaust Hose Assembly, 75 mm Diameter each
(SCA® Coverslipper) 62593-70 6160 Fume Filter 2/case

588 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec14_580-595_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 9:54 PM Page 589

Histology and Light Microscopy SECTION 14

® TISSUE-TEK® GLAS™ COVERSLIPPER Plastic Waste Tray (6430) – The

SUPPLIES plastic waste tray is seated in the metal
housing next to the nozzle reservoir. The
® Tissue-Tek® Glas™Mounting Medium (6419) – Is designed
purpose of the waste tray is to collect
specially to be used on the Glas™ Coverslipper to maximize performance,
any mounting medium waste that may
producing clean, bubble-free slides. This xylene-based mounting
be generated during coverslipping
medium is medium viscosity and can be opened and placed directly onto
operations. The plastic tray is removable
the mounting medium area of the coverslipper, no pouring needed. Each
and disposable. It should be replaced
16 oz bottle coverslips up to 10,000 slides.
periodically as necessary.
Loading Drawer (6421) – This loading
Priming Bottle (6433) – The
drawer for the Tissue-Tek® Glas™
priming bottle is used only during set up
Coverslipper is for holding slides prior to
procedure prior to nomal operation of the
coverslipping. The loading drawer is divided
instrument. The priming bottle has a
into three sections , accommodating up to
narrow tube extending from the bottle,
three slide basket per section, holding total
which is used to connect to the
of 60 slides. Xylene or xylene substitute
mounting medium tube located on the
may be added to the loading drawer to
instrument. This priming bottle should be
prevent sides from drying out prior to
filled with xylene and manually pumped through the mounting medium
coverslipping. The drawer may be removed
line to remove any trapped air or air bubbles which may be present in
from the loading area and covered to
the line before operation.
prevent evaporation when not in use.
Waste Bottle (6435) – The purpose of the waste bottle is to collect
Drawer Cover (6422) – The drawer
xylene waste which was generated during priming procedures. This
cover is used to cover the Loading Drawer,
plastic waste bottle and lid are used only during set up procedures.
which helps prevent evaporation of solvent
when the instrument is not in use. Exhaust Hose (6439) – The DRS 200 exhaust hose can be used to
externally vent off the instrument fumes if desired. The DRS 2000 is
Nozzle Reservoir (6423) – The
equipped with an internal fume exhaust system
nozzle reservoir consists of small plastic
bottle and lid which is sealed inside a Stainer and Coverslipper Slide
metal housing. The nozzle reservoir is Basket (4768) - Basket for Tissue-
used for keeping the mounting medium Tek™ Stainers and Coverslipper for use
nozzle tip from drying out during use. It with the Film® and SCA™ Coverslippers,
should be filled with xylene or a the Prisma®, DRS-601™
compatible solvent. The mounting Histology/Cytology Slide Stainers and the
medium tip is positioned inside the RSG-61™ Hematology Slide Stainer. The
reservoir when the instrument is in the special basket design reduces cross
stand by mode or not in operation. contamination and carry-over. The
basket can also be used in a microwave
Coverglass Holders (6425, 6426,
oven. The slide baskets are available in
6427 & 6428) – The coverglass
case quantity.
holders is used for holding coverglass
which will be used for application during
coverslipping operations. Three standard
sizes are available for use on the Glas™
Coverslipper, 40 mm, 50 mm, and 60 EMS # Tissue-Tek Description Qty.
mm. Each holder can hold up to 200 62552-01 6419 Tissue-Tek® Glas™ Mounting each
coverglasses at one time. These holders Medium, 16 oz
62663-61 6421 Loading Drawer each
are seated on the coverglass stage of
62663-62 6422 Loading Drawer Cover each
the instrument and are removable for 62663-63 6423 Nozzle Reservoir each
ease of loading. 62663-65 6425 Coverglass Holder for 40 mm each
Receiving Rack (6429) – This 62663-66 6426 Coverglass Holder for 50 mm each
62663-67 6427 Coverglass Holder for 55 mm each
receiving rack is for retrieve slides which
62663-68 6428 Coverglass Holder for 60 mm each
have been completed by the 62663-69 6429 Receiving Rack, each
coverslipping process. Each metal rack 62663-70 6430 Plastic Waste Tray each
is grooved and capable of holding up to 62663-73 6433 Priming Bottle each
20 slides. As each slide enters the rack, 62663-75 6435 Waste Bottle each
the rack is advanced to the next 62663-79 6439 Exhaust Hose each
position, anticipating receiving the next 62665-67 4768 Stainer and Coverslipper Slide Basket each
slide. Rack are easy to remove and 62665-68 4768 Stainer and Coverslipper Slide Basket 10/case
replace with the convenient handle.

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 589
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec14_580-595_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 9:55 PM Page 590

SECTION 14 Histology and Light Microscopy

® Tissue-Tek® Prisma® Slide Stainer Stainer and Coverslip Slide

Automatic Slide Stainer Basket (4768) - Basket for Tissue-
Tek™ Stainers and Coverslipper for use
Suitable for high volume
with the Film® and SCA™ Coverslippers,
laboratories which do not want
the Prisma®, DRS-601™
to sacrifice quality. The Prisma®
Histology/Cytology Slide Stainers and the
has the ability to be linked with
RSG-61™ Hematology Slide Stainer. The
the FilmCoverslipper (by use
special basket design reduces cross
Link System for Connectivity
contamination and carry-over. The
with Prsima® Stainers #62666)
basket can also be used in a microwave
which makes this instrument a
oven. The slide baskets are available in
fully integrated system, offering
case quantity.
complete walk away convenience. Continuous loading of baskets
enables high throughput and the intelligent loading feature allows 20-Slide Basket Load/Unload
Prisma® to handle as many as 360 slides per hour. The Prisma® is Adapter (6135) – The 20-Slide
compatible with histology and cytology staining protocols. Reagent basket load/unload adapter allows users
reservoir configurations allows for simultaneous runs of H & E and to align the slide baskets in the middle
special stains. position of the start station when the
expanded reservoir are being used.
ADDITION FEATURES:
20-Slide Basket Adapter (6136) –
T Ability to set multiple loading and unloading stations based on
slide volume 20-Slide Basket Adapters are to be used
• Program up to 3 stations for continuous loading in conjunction with the Slide Baskets on
the Tissue-Tek® Prisma® Slide Stainer.
• Program up to 5 stations for efficient unloading
10-Slide Basket, Slecial Stain
T 2 drying stations to reduce potential bottlenecks (6137) – Basket for the Tissue-Tek®
T 2 optional heating stations for special stains like PAS, Giemsa Plasma® Slide Stainer. For use with the
stain, and Mucicarmine stain Tissue-Tek® Plasma® Slide Stainer with
T Compatible with histology and cytology protocols, including PAP special stain capability. The basket has
and non-gyn a 10 slide capacity and is specifically
T Touch sensitive color menu screens designed to reduce carry-over and
contamination
SPECIFICATIONS
10-Slide Basket Adapter (6138) –
Dimensions: ..........49.2” W x 28” D x 24.8” H (125 x71.3 x 63 cm)
Slide Basket Adpters are to be used in
Weight: ..................................................................330 lbs (150 kg)
Electrical: ..................................................................115VAC, 60 Hz conjunction with the Slide Baskets on
Process Capacity: ..................................Continuous Loading of up to the Tissue-Tek™®Plasma® Slide Stainer
60 slides in three baskets with Special Stain.
Throughput: ..............Up to 500 slides per hour (method dependent) 10-Slide Basket Load/Unload
Operational Temperature:..............................................10°C to 40°C Adapter (6139) – The 10-Slide
basket load/unload adapter is used with
® PRISMA® ACCESSORIES: the special stain setup to accommodate
Tissue-Tek® Prisma® Slide Stainer with Special Stains (6131) the 10-slide basket. When the adapter
– The Prisma® complete with all option for use with special stains like
is placed in a start station the Tissue-
PAS, Giems, Mucicarmine stain.
Tek® Plasma® recognizes the 10-slide
Link system for Connectivity with Film® Coverslipper (6134) basket and prepares to run it in the
– The Link System combines the Prisma® and the Film® into one fully special stain mode.
integrated system offering complete walk way convenience. The Link
performs an automatic robotic transfer of slide baskets from stainer to
coverslipper
Link System to Tissue-Tek™ Glas g2 Coverslipper (6168) –
The Link System combines the Prisma® and the Glas g2 Coverslipper
(Tissue-Tek #6500) into one fully integrated system.

590 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec14_580-595_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 9:55 PM Page 591

Histology and Light Microscopy SECTION 14

® Tissue-Tek® Prisma® Slide Stainer (continued)

Special Stain reservoir 180 ml (6140) – The Special Stain 3 Position Reservoir Tray (6152) –
Reservoirs can be combined with the standard or expanded solution The solution reservoirs are arranged in a
configuration. The special stain configuration includes eight solution one level configuration and are
reservoirs. The special stain reservoirs can accommodate a volume of positioned in either a 3 or 4 position
160 - 180 ml of solution reservoir tray. These trays can hold
multiple solutions to allow for easy
Heated Solution Reservoir 180 ml (6141) – The heated Solution
placement into and removal from the
Reservoir works in conjunction with the special stain setup.
instrument. The trays are designed to
The two independent heated stations can be programmed to heat
ensure proper orientation when placed
special stains to 30 – 70°C.
into the instrument.
Special Stain Reservoir Lid (6144) – The Lid for the Special Stain
3 Position Reservoir Tray Lid ( 6153) – This 3-Position Reservoir
Reservoir is a single lid used to cover the special stain reservoir when
Tray Lid is a one piece lid to cover all reservoirs located in the 3-position
not in use.
reservoir tray.
Small Solution Reservoir, 285 ml
4 Position Reservoir Tray (6154) – Same as 3-position reservoir
(6145) – The Small Solution Reservoir
tray but has 4-position.
can be used with the standard solution
reservoir. With the expanded 4 Position Reservoir Tray Lid (6155) – Same as 3-position
configuration there are a total of 54 reservoir tray lid but designed for 4-position reservoir tray.
stations and are arranged with 6 station Special Stain Reservoir Tray (6156) – This special stain reservoir
in the front row and eight station in the tray is a 8-position tray that holds the special stain reservoirs inside the
other six rows> The small solution Prisma® Slide Stainer.
reservoirs can accommodate 255 – 285
ml of solution. Fume Filter (6160) - The fume filter
for the Tissue-Tek® Film® Coverslipper
Small Solution Reservoir Lid (6146) – The Lid for the Small and Tissue-Tek ® Prisma® Stainer is
Solution Reservoir is a single lid use to cover the small solution sufficient in removing fumes that are
reservoirs when not in use. generated during routine use. It is
Standard Solution Reservoir, 820 recommended that the filter be replace
ml (6147) – The Standard once a month. Fume filters are
configuration of standard solution packaged 2 to a case.
reservoirs is a total of 30 stations with Start & End Labels (6161) – The station labels are designed to be
six stations in the front row and eight attached to the Start, End or PE station for reservoir identification.
stations in the other three rows. The
standard reservoir accommodates 680 – Basket Adapter Labels (6162) – Color coded basket adapter labels
820 ml of solution are positioned on the basket adapters for easy stain identification
Load/Unload Reservoir, 830 ml Screen Protection Sheet (6163) – This accessory is for use
(6148) – This is a Standard Solution exclusively with the Tissue-Tek® Prisma® Slide Stainer, to protect the
Reservoirs with handles are placed in control panel from scratch.
the front row of the instrument. These Compact Flash Card (6164) – The compact flash card allows data
reservoirs have a handle for easy to be transferred to the PC. This accessory is for use exclusively with the
removal and are used as the start/end Tissue-Tek® Prisma® Slide Stainer.
stations. The reservoir volume is 830
ml.
Wash Reservoir, 850 ml (6149) – The Wash Reservoir is a
specially designed reservoir to be used exclusively with the Tissue-Tek®
Prisma® Slide Stainer that contains openings positioned for maximum
water flow. Each reservoir has an 850 ml volume.
820/830 ml Reservoir Lid (6151)
– The Lid for the Standard Solution is a
single lid used to cover the reservoirs Exhaust Duct Adapters (6165 &
when not in use. 6166) – The Tissue-Tek® Prisma® Slide
Stainer offers an optional Duct
Connection Adapter which connects to
an external exhaust system for added
protection. Two sizes are available, 38
mm and 75 mm,

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 591
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec14_580-595_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 9:55 PM Page 592

SECTION 14 Histology and Light Microscopy

ORDERING:  Tissue-Tek® CryO3®Microtome/Cryostat

EMS # Tissue-Tek Description Qty. The Tissue-Tek® CryO3®
62667 6130 Tissue-Tek® Prisma® Automated Stainer each Microtome/Cryostat is the redefining
62667-SS 6131 Tissue-Tek® Prisma® Automated Stainer with each state-of-the art, the next generation
Special Stain Option of excellent, with 3 different models
62666-PR 6134 Link System for Film® Coverslipper to each
Prisma® Stainer
to meet your laboratory needs and
62666-G2 6168 Link System for Glas® g2 Coverslipper to each budget demands: select motorized
Prisma® Stainer sectioning, or automated
62665-68 4768 Stainer & Coverslipper Slide Basket 10/cs disinfection, or both. But no matter
62667-55 6135 20-Slide Basket Load/Unload Adapter each which model of CryO3® you choose,
62667-56 6136 20-Slide Basket Adapter each you’ll also benefit from time-proven
62667-57 6137 10-Slide Basket 4/case features, operating simplicity and
62667-58 6138 10-Slide Basket Adapter each reliability, minimal maintenance.
62667-59 6139 10-Slide Basket Load/Unload Adapter each
62667-60 6140 180 ml Solution Reservoir each FEATURES
62667-51 6141 180 ml Heated Solution Reservoir each
62667-54 6144 180 ml Reservoir Lid each
 Safe, integral
62667-65 6145 285 ml Solution Reservoir each disinfection and
62667-66 6146 285 ml Reservoir Lid each productivity-enhancing
62667-67 6147 820 ml Solution Reservoir each features
62667-68 6148 830 ml Load/Unload Reservoir each  Rapidly disinfect the chamber
62667-69 6149 850 ml Wash Reservoir each without exposure to liquid toxic
62667-71 6151 820/830 ml Reservoir Lid each chemical or residue
62667-72 6152 3-Position Reservoir Tray each
 Stable ±10° (Z) and 360° (Y)
62667-73 6153 3-Position Reservoir Lid each
specimen orientation – better
62667-74 6154 4-Position Reservoir Tray each
control for precision sectioning
62667-75 6155 4-Position Reservoir Lid each
62667-76 6156 Special Stain Position Reservoir Tray each  12 configurable Cryobar®
62593-80 6160 Fume Filter 2/case positions
62667-81 6161 Start & End Labels each • Round specimen holder in 3
62667-82 6162 Basket Adapter Labels each sizes
62667-83 6163 Screen Protection Sheet each • Round biopsy and standard
62667-84 6164 Compact Flash Card each
Cryomold® position offer
62667-85 6165 Exhaust Duct Adapter, 38 mm each
62667-86 6166 Exhaust Duct Adapter, 75 mm each standardized specimen
orientation
• Cryo® area cools to -20°C
 Tissue-Tek® DRS™ 2000 Slide Stainer Supplies
below chamber temperature;
EMS # Tissue-Tek Description Qty.
62668-40 2008 DRS Carbon Filter 2/case down to -50°C
62668-08 2208 DRS Hose Assembly each  Menu-driven software; all digital
62665-67 4768 Stainer & Coverslipper Slide Basket each control
62665-68 4768 Stainer & Coverslipper Slide Basket 10/cs  240 x 60 pixel graphic LCD
62668-64 4974 DRS 2000 Solution Reservoir each display
62668-65 4975 DRS 2000 Wash Reservoir each
62668-66 4976 DRS 2000 Reservoir Lid each
 Smooth precision, reliable performance
62668-67 4977 DRS 2000 Basket Hook each  Ball-bearing microtome, computer controlled
62668-68 4978 DRS Basket Adapter each  Precise sectioning – from 1 μm to 99 μm
62668-69 4979 DRS Wash Station Plug each  Motorized advance/retract – with limit protection
62668-71 4981 DRS 2000 Drain Hose each  Easy-to-use anti-roll-rack – simplifies specimen transfer to the
62668-75 4985 DRS 2000 Wash Reservoir Grommet each slides.
62668-76 4986 DRS 2000 Six Reservoir Lid each
62668-83 4993 DRS 2000 Seven Reservoir Lid each
 Manual or optional motorized trimming and sectioning
 Blade holder accepts both Accu-Edge® low-profile and high-profile
 Maintenance=free microtome located outside the chamber
 Tissue-Tek® DRS™ 601 Slide Stainer Supplies
 12 Cryobar® specimen positions, including 4 Cryo+® position that
EMS Tissue-Tek Description Qty.
62668-40 2008 DRS Carbon Filter 2/case enable rapid cooling to – 50°C
62669-53 2203 DRS 601 Plastic Stain Reservoir each  Easy to operate, yet sophisticated
62669-55 2205 DRS 601 Reservoir Lid each  Preconfigured memory settings allow rapid recall of the
62669-56 2206 DRS 601 Tray Assembly each parameters specific to a specimen type
62669-57 2207 DRS 601 Washing Reservoir each  Streamlined, all-digital control panels; multilingual
62668-08 2208 DRS Hose Assembly each
62669-59 2209 DRS 601 Basket Hook each
 Easily customized parameters to operator and/ or procedure
62669-60 2210 DRS 601 Water Drain Hose each
62665-67 4768 Stainer & Coverslipper Slide Basket each continued 
62665-68 4768 Stainer & Coverslipper Slide Basket 10/cs

592 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec14_580-595_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 9:55 PM Page 593

Histology and Light Microscopy SECTION 14

® Tissue-Tek® CryO3®Microtome/ ® TISSUE-TEK® MICROTOME/CRYOSTAT Cryo3®

Cryostat (continued) ACCESSORIES
® Easily programmed setup menu Cryomold®, Round , Standard
T 12- or 24-hour format time setting (4728) – Clear plastic with handling tab,
T LCD contrast adjustment allows adaptation to various light measures 22mm diameter x 5mm deep
conditions. Cryomold®, Round , Biopsy (4730)
T ON/OFF settings for – Clear plastic with handling tab,
• Key sound measures 15mm diameter x 5mm deep
• Audible alarms (though always displayed) Specimen Holder, Small (5807,
• Auto disinfect after defrost 5808 & 5809) – Tissue-Tek Cryo3®
T Chamber temperature: 0°C to -35°C ±1°C specimen holders are used for mounting
T Section thickness: 1 μm to 99 μm ±1 μm specimens with O.C.T. Compound, which
T Retract/advance speed: 500 μm/sec or 800 μm/sec. will be frozen for sectioning. Three sizes
are available. The small holder can accommodate a specimen size up to 25
T Retraction: no retraction or retraction distance from 1μm to 99 μm ±1 mm. In addition, Tissue-Tek® Cryomolds™, standard and biopsy sizes, can
μm be used to create a uniformly shaped flat surface to aid in trimming and
T Defrost start time: one cycle per day. sectioning. An O-ring is positioned around perimeter of the holder for
T Automated defrost may be programmed to run at night or on-demand added protection while handling. An etched marking at the base of the post
as desired can be used for positioning if the specimen holder is removed from the
® Innovative ozone disinfection Models #5801 D & chuck.
#5802 DM) designed for maximum safety in routine Heat extractor, Standard
operation (5811 & 5815)– This flexible heat
T Disinfection performed within 75 minute extractor is used to aid in rapidly freezing
T Abort sequence takes less than 15 minutes specimens for frozen sectioning technique.
The flat side of the heat extractor allows for
T Defrost cycle not required prior to initiating disinfection cycle
positioning directly on top of the specimen.
T No residue inside chamber: by-product is O2 Changing the surface orientation allows for
® Password-secure chamber access the indented side of the extractor to be
T Chamber window is interlocked and sealed until all ozone is used with the Cryomold technique. The
catalyzed into oxygen extractor may be mounted on left side of
T Chamber also can be locked at any time to minimize accidental the chamber, above the cryobar for easy
exposure to pathogens access. Using the heat extractor greatly
T User –selectable warning messages alert of potentially hazardous reduces the rate of freezing specimens.
conditions Cryobar Insert, 4-Cavity (5819) –
® Dynamic debris removal system These unique inserts enable flexibility in
configuring the Cryo3 cryobar the meet the
Practical, easy removal of access debris and O.C.T. shavings
needs of each laboratory. Each insert is
T Debris system can eliminate shavings that accumulate on blade plate easily removed and replaced. The 4-cavity
during sectioning insert is used to accommodate the
T Optional attachment enables easy removal of debris at chamber base specimen holder post, which can be
T Microbial filter is easily detached and discarded positioned directly into each well for freezing
T Vacuum can be adjusted to increase power as necessary Cryobar Insert, 4-Post (5820) – These unique inserts enable flexibility
SPECIFICATIONS in configuring the Cryo3 cryobar the meet the needs of each laboratory.
Application: ........................................................................Cryotomy Each insert is easily removed and replaced. The 4-post insert is used to
Models:..........#5800 Basic – Standard features: High- & Low-profile accommodate cryomolds, which can be positioned directly into each well
blade holders, specimen orientation; motorized advanced/retract for freezing. Cryomolds create a uniformly-shaped, that surface, which
..........................#5801 – Standard features plus ozone disinfection make trimming and sectioning easier and
and vacuum debris removal system faster.
..........................#5802 – Standard features plus ozone disinfection, Utility Tray (5824) – This removable
vacuum debris removal system, plus motorized sectioning utility tray is positioned inside the Cryo
Dimensions: ..........................................23.5” W x 29.5” D x 46.5” H chamber to the right of the Microtome. It
(60 W x 75 D x 118 cm H) provides ample space to accommodate
Weight (with microtome): ........................................387 lbs (176 kg) miscellaneous items such as OCT
Electrical: ........................................115 VAC @ 11 amps, 50/60 Hz. Compound, disposable blades, brushes etc. The four holes may be used to
store extra specimen holders for future use.

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 593
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec14_580-595_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 9:55 PM Page 594

SECTION 14 Histology and Light Microscopy

Waste Bottle (5825) – This 2-liter waste ® Tissue-Tek® CryO3®Microtome/Cryostat

bottle is a plastic container which is (continued)
positioned on the lower left front side of the
Anti Roll Plate (5832) – The anti-roll plate is used on the CryO3 to
Cryo3 instrument. The waste bottle is
assist in stopping tissues from rolling while performing microtomy.
responsible for collecting residual moisture
and debris generated from the defrost cycle Steel Knife Holder (5833) – The steel knife holder is an adapter
or manual disinfection procedures. which holds a steel
knife in place on
Vacuum Filter Set (5826) – This set is
the Cryo3.
used with Cryo3 models 5801 and 5802,
consists of a microbial filter, a coarse debris Drain Cleaning
filter and a corrugated vacuum hose. The Brush (5834) –
filter is connected to a port located inside the This device is used
chamber and the other end is connected to to periodically clean the drain hole inside the instrument, located at the
the blade holder port. When the vacuum bottom left-side of the chamber. The drain is responsible for channeling
system is on, debris and unwanted trimmings residual fluid generated from the defrost
generated during sectioning are collected cycle into the waste bottle.
and contained in the filter. The filter is Ozone Port Screen (5835) - The
disposable and should be removed and ozone port screen is a small, round mesh
replaced every 2 months or as often as screen used to protect the ozone port from
necessary. debris. It should be placed over the ozone
Vacuum Hose attachment (5827) – port located at the base of the chamber on
This vacuum hose attachment is used in the right side.
conjunction with the vacuum filter set and Fluorescent Lamp (5836) - The
can be attached to the corrugated vacuum fluorescent lamp is mounted inside the
hose, which connects the microbial filter. chamber and is used to light the chamber
When the vacuum system is powered on, the while sectioning. The light is illuminated
hose attachment can be used to remove each time the chamber window is open. A
debris from the base of the chamber or other function key located on the display can be
areas inside the instrument. Tissue-Tek® pressed to illuminate or turn off the lamp
Cryo3® models 5801 & 5802 come standard manually.
with the vacuum debris removal system.
Ozone Lamp Assembly (5828) – The ORDERING
ozone lamp is responsible for generating EMS # Tissue-Tek Description
ozone inside the chamber for the purpose of 62548 5800 Tissue-Tek CryO3® Microtome/ each
automatically disinfecting the cryo chamber. Cryostat Basic
Ozone disinfection is standard in both CryO3 62548-D 5801 Tissue-Tek CryO3® Microtome/Cryostat each
models, 5801 & 5802.The ozone lamp Automatic Disinfection
assembly should be replaced every 1000 62548-DM 5802 Tissue-Tek CryO3® Microtome/Cryostat each
cycles. The instrument software provides a Select Motorized and Automatic Disinfection
reminder message when the useful life is 62532-12 4728 Plastic Cryomold®, Round, Standard, 1200/case
nearing its end. 62532-01 4728 Plastic Cryomold®, Round, Standard, 100/case
62533-12 4730 Plastic Cryomold®, Round, Biopsy 1200/bx
Foot Pedal (5829) – The optional foot 62533-01 4730 Plastic Cryomold®, Round, Biopsy 100/bx
pedal is designed to be used for hand-free 62548-57 5807 Specimen Holders –Small 6/cs
automated sectioning when using CryO3 62548-58 5808 Specimen Holders – Medium 6/cs
model 5802, which comes standard with For specimen up to 38 mm
motorized sectioning. It can be used to take 62548-59 5809 Specimen Holders – Large 6/cs
the place of using the control panel to For specimen up to 55 mm
operate the motorized function of the 62548-61 5811 Heat Extractor Standard each
instrument. The foot pedal is an optional 62548-65 5815 Heat Extractor Large each
item. 62548-69 5819 Cryobar Insert, 4-Cavity each
Anti Roll Rake (5831) – The newly 62548-70 5820 Cryobar Insert, 4-Post each
designed anti-roll rake is a unique anti-roll 62548-74 5824 Utility Tray each
62548-75 5825 Waste Bottle each
device mounted above the microtome chuck,
62548-76 5826 Vacuum Filter Set each
which is used to easily and consistently
62548-77 5827 Vacuum Hose Attachment each
obtain sections from frozen specimen blocks.
62548-78 5828 Ozone Lamp each
The grooved edge of the rake attaches to 62548-79 5829 Foot Pedal each
frozen O.C.T., preventing the section from 62548-81 5831 Anti-Roll Rake each
curling to produce a clean flat section to 62548-82 5832 Anti-Roll Plate each
mount on a microscope slide. The anti-roll 62548-83 5833 Steel Knife each
rake can be easily adjusted by manipulating 62548-84 5834 Drain Cleaning Brush each
the back knob located on the left side of the 62548-85 5835 Ozone Port Screen each
rake. This technique independent method is 62548-86 5836 Fluorescent Lamp each
ideal when using Cryomoldds®. 62548-87 5837 Drain Cover each

594 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec14_580-595_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 9:55 PM Page 595

Histology and Light Microscopy SECTION 14

® Cyto-Tek® Centrifuge and Accessories; Sakura Finetek
Enhance Your Cell Preparation - Proven Reliability
® CYTO-TEK® Cytocentrifuge
Three Chamber sizes for samples from 0.1 to 12 ml:
T 1, 6, and 12 ml disposable chambers accommodate a wide range of sample sizes.
T One size fits all: the 1 ml filter combines versatility with convenience; handles all routine
specimens up to 1 ml with only one set of accessories.
T User-selectable, rectangular viewing/target areas: 49, 196, and 420mm2 essentially eliminates
the need for multiple slides.
T Viewing area up to 14 x 30 mm.
Place acceleration, automatically controlled:
T Ensures specimen integrity through automatic, microprocessor-controlled, optional acceleration.
T Paced acceleration is “Always On”, eliminating operator bias in assessing cell fragility. ® Cyto-Tek® Centrifuge
T Accommodates fragile cells requiring delicate handling.
Funnel Chambers
T Speed adjusts from 500 to 2,500 rpm in 100-rpm increments.
Enhance your cell recovery up to 100%
T Programmable times range from 1 to 60 minutes in 1 minute increments.
Digital controls: T Highly polished specimen chamber that
T Speed and time settings are retained in memory with a battery backup. minimizes cell attachment.
T Streamlined touch pad and 2 digital displays control and monitor all functions. T 33% thicker clamp wall (for greater
T Easy to use, easy to train. claming tension) that provides paced
fluid absorption.
Forced airflow control: T Window ledge to help secure filter and
T Unique design, no rotor cover to sterilize. keep cells in target area.
T Eliminates aerosol for greater operator safety. T “V” cutout to add rigidity helping to hold
Reliable: funnel chamber in place.
T Manufactured with the same quality care as all other Tissue-Tek® instruments.
T Enjoy years of trouble-free operation with virtually no maintenance required.
Efficiently silent:
T Even at maximum speed, the Cyto-Tek runs smoothly and quietly.
Superior clinical performance:
T A consistently high rate of cellular recovery is extremely important for accurate morphological
evaluation of cerebrospinal fluid.
T Well-defined rectangular target area for optimal results.
T Better preservation of cellular structure.
T With a G force of up to 735, the Cyto-Tek can handle low molecular weight organisms such as Ordering:
microbacteria and viruses. Tissue-
T Operates on 115 VAC, 60 Hz. Cat.# Tek Description Pack
62610-01 4329 1 ml Fluid Chamber 200/cs
Dimensions 62610-50 4333 1 ml Filter Paper 200/cs
36.0cm(W) x 23.0cm(H) x 38.0cm(D) (14.2" x 9.1" x 15.0") 62610-55 4336 1 ml Base Holder 200/cs
62610-60 4335 1 ml Chamber Cap 200/cs
Weight: 154.5 kg (32.0 lb) 62612-06 4331 6 ml Fluid Chamber 12/cs
References: 62612-50 4327 6 ml Gasket 25/pk
1. Kobayashi TK, Ueda M, Yamaki T, Yakushiji M. Evaluation of cytocentrifuge apparatus with special reference to the cellular 62614-12 4328 12 ml Fluid Chamber 12/cs
recovery rate. Diagn Cytopathol. 1992; 8(4): 420-423 62614-50 4337 12 ml Gasket 25/pk
2. Saceanu CA, Pfeiffer NC, McLean T. Evaluation of sputum smears concentrated by cytocentrifugation for detection of acid- 62615-12 4326 6-/12 ml Base Holder 12/cs
fast bacilli. J. Clin Microbiol. 1993; 31:2371-2374. 62615-25 4334 6-/12 ml Chamber Cap 25/cs

EMS ROR (Residual Oil Remover)

EMS is proud to introduce the ROR-It is not a lens cleaner in the usual sense-
it goes far beyond what a routine cleaner does. ROR is specifically designed
to emulsify and remove microscopic oil residues- a by product of
environmental pollution –from the surface and pores of glass and plastic.

For more information, see page 736. UUUUU

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 595
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec14_596-610_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 10:42 PM Page 596

SECTION 14 Histology and Light Microscopy

® Histology Ralph Knife-Maker
Model EMS-2

Precision designed, easy to use, reliable knife maker to produce

25.5mm (1") or 38 mm (1-5/16") wide Ralph glass knives when used
with EMS histology grade microtomy glass or any other 5.8mm to
6.2mm thick quality glass strips. This glass knife maker will
® The EMS 3030 Histo Pro H and E
automatically compensate for changes in thickness of the glass strips Slide Stainer
(typically 5.8mm to 6.2mm thick). The new EMS slide stainer offers the end user the ability to have a stainer
with 30 stations and a continuous load option with multiple protocols.
Cat. # Description Qty
90051-06 Ralph Knife Maker EMS-2
This state of the art stainer which is only 32” long has a built in fume
for 25.4mm Knife Edge each extraction as well as the ability to connect to a lab fume hood.
90051-38 Ralph Knife Maker EMS-2 Specifications of Slide Stainer
for 38mm Knife Edge each
1. Capacity
T Number of Stations: 30
® Histology Glass Ralph Knife Maker T Number of Rinse Stations: 5 (user selectable)
Model EMS-1 T Rinse Water Flow Control: Software programmable for 1 station
individually adjustable for 5 stations
T Number of Load Station: 1
T Number of Unload Station: 1
T Reagent Container Volume: 350 ml
T Slide Carrier Capacity: 30 slides
T Drying Station Temp. Range: 40–70˚ C
2. User Interface:
T Display: Active matrix TFT 6.5” display
T Touch Screen: Resistive touch pad
T Number of programs: 50
T Number of steps in a program: 50
Rugged designed, easy to use, reliable glass knife maker to produce T Programmable Flow Rates: 500, 1000, 1500, and 2000 ml/min,
programmable for individual step.
25.4mm (1") wide Ralph glass knives when used with EMS histology
grade of microtomy glass or any other 6 mm thick quality glass strips. 3. Physical Characteristics
These Ralph glass knives can be used on Rotary or Retracting T Width: 32" (80 cm)
Microtomes, for sectioning paraffin, JB-4 or methyl methacrylate T Depth: 25" (63 cm)
specimen blocks. T Height: 18" (45 cm)
T Weight: 65 lbs (30 kg)
Cat. # Description Qty
90050-06 Ralph Knife Maker EMS-1 4. Electrical Characteristics
for 25.4mm Knife Edge each Voltage: Available for 115 Volts AC or 230 volts AC
90050-38 Ralph Knife Maker EMS-1 Cat.# Description Quantity
for 38mm Knife Edge each 63122 H and E Slide Stainer each

596 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec14_596-610_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 10:43 PM Page 597

Histology and Light Microscopy SECTION 14

® Histo-Tek® SL Slide Stainer
Automated Slide Staining for Low Volume Labs
Introducing Histo-Tek® SL, an automated slide stainer that offers a new
level of convenience and standardization for low-volume labs.
The Histo-Tek® SL provides reliable automated slide staining with
countertop convenience. Able to stain up to 100 slides per hour,
the Histo-Tek® SL eliminates labor-intensive manual staining while
standardizing the process for optimal quality and error reduction. The
Histo-Tek® SL features 15 programmable staining protocols with up to
35 steps each for maximum flexibility. Protocols can be saved and shared
across multiple devices via USB drive for complete slide staining
standardization.
Key Features Specifications
and Benefits Dimensions:............................Centimeters (W x D x H): 81 X 79 x 41
T Stains ~100 slides ......................................................Inches (W x D x H): 32 x 31 x 16
per hour Weight: ..........................................................................25 kg (55 lb)
T Eliminates labor Number of Stations: ......................................................................24
intensive hand Dedicated Stations: ......................1 unload station and 1 load station
staining Rinse Stations: ................................................................................2
T Smaller footprint fits Reagent Volume:....................................................................350 mL
most countertops Number of Programs: ..........................................................Up to 15
T Standardizes the Steps in a Program:..............................................................Up to 35
staining process for Slide Baskets:....30-count basket, 20-count basket, 10-count basket
optimal quality
error reduction Cat. # Description Qty
62669-90 Histo-Tek® SL Slide Stainer each
T 22 Stain Reservoirs for many staining protocols
Accessories and consumables for the
T Bi-directional robotic arm allows for progressive and regressive
Histo-Tek SL Slide Stainer
staining protocols
62669-91 Slide Rack 30 Count each
T Two plumbed rinse stations for wash flexibility 62669-92 Slide Rack Adapter each
T 30 slides per arm movement for small batch control 62669-93 Slide Rack Adapter 20 count each
T Charcoal filter or optional vent kit 62669-94 Slide Rack 20 Count 10/Pack
T 15 easily programmable staining protocols with 1 - 35 steps each 62669-95 Slide Rack Adapter 10 Count each
for maximum staining flexibility 62669-96 Slide Rack 10 Count each
62669-97 Special Stain Reservoir each
T Optional special stain reservoirs
62669-98 Charcoal Filter 2/Pack
T Save staining programs onto a USB drive for multiple Histo-Tek® 62669-99 Vent Kit and Hose each
SL Stainers 62669-85 White Slides each
T Tinted fume cover to protect from UV light 62669-86 White Slides - Charged each

Datacolor ChromaCal™
Color Calibration System

Before... After...
See how it’s done, pages 160-163 UUU
Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 597
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec14_596-610_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 10:43 PM Page 598

SECTION 14 Histology and Light Microscopy

Vibrating Microtomes EMS is proud to

Our top-of-the-line high precision, vibrating introduce the
microtomes, are the finest slicers in the HistoPro 200
world for all specimen preparation
® HistoPro®
200
Paraffin Infiltration
Processor
HistoPro® 200 offers unique
reagent / paraffin infiltration
capability with programmable
processing time, temperature,
agitation and vacuum in an easy to
use, compact, cost conscious
package.
T Up to 100 Cassettes
T 2.0 Liter Reagent / Paraffin Capacity
T Compact Footprint: Only 9” wide x 20” depth
T Programmable Processing Time
T Programmable Processing Temperature
Features at a Glance
T Programmable Vacuum Cycle
• Z-axis blade adjust minimizer Designed and Made in U.S.A.
• Custom blade holder with angle set to user requirement
• Set START and STOP position for blade travel Specifications
• Vibration speeds from 50 to 120 Hz Capacity
Number of Cassettes: ........................................100 max in a basket
• Amplitudes from 0.5mm to 2.25mm
Paraffin Capacity ....................................2.0 Liters (without samples)
• Controlled blade advance at 10 microns per sec. ..................................................................1.5 Liters (with samples)
• Ice water bath easily removed for cleaning Processing Parameters:
Reagent Temperature:......................................37 deg C – 65 deg. C
• Optional LED light source Temperature Accuracy ......................+/- 2 Deg C at Sensor Location
• Optional magnifier for clear observation Vacuum: ..............................................5 PSI (25 cm) below ambient
Vacuum Cycle......................................0 – 100% in 20% increments
• Optional stereoscope, choice of x5-x10 fixed or x10-40 ..................................................................over 5 Minute Cycle Time
zoom for optimal observation Agitation: ................................................................Stir Bar Agitation
On the 7000smz-2 additional features: User Interface:
Display: ......................................16 Characters x 2 lines LCD display
• Includes a Z-axis calibration device
Membrane Keypad ..................................................................6 Keys
• Choice of manual or automatic operation Alarm ........................................................................Audible Beeper
• Auto programming by storage of the first slicing speed and Physical Characteristics
distance profile Width: ..............................................................................9" (23 cm)
Depth: ............................................................................20" (51 cm)
Height: ............................................................................15" (38 cm)
Weight: ..........................................................................13 lbs (6 kg)
Electrical Characteristics
Voltage:................................................100 - 230 volts AC, 50/60 Hz
Power ........................................................................150 watts max.

Ordering Information
Cat. # Description Qty
62596-10 HistoPro® 200 Parafin Infiltration Processor each
New models new options,
see pages 994–997 UUU

598 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec14_596-610_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 10:43 PM Page 599

Histology and Light Microscopy SECTION 14

® Tissue Embedding Center ® THE EMS Tissue Embedding
Introducing a new Tissue Embedding Center with the latest in circuit Center
board and component technology. Uniquely designed with The Histo-Pro 150 offers superior operating convenience for
microprocessor temperature sensors, a single console which maximizes tissue embedding processes in a modular ergonomic design.
space utilization, high-contrast viewing areas
and multifunctional work stations. The entire unit is encased in a FEATURES AND BENEFITS:
durable, non-heat conductive housing. T Two Module system.
T All stainless steel work surfaces
T User friendly proprietary PAT interface
T Large cold plate and cassette bath.
T Fully programmable time and temperature
T Adjustable paraffin flow rate
T Self draining forceps holder.
T Auto Defrosting cold plate
T Four Liter paraffin tank.
T Ability to turn on automatically

Features:
T Microprocessor controlled for dependability and performance.
T Single module design.
T Low and flat work-surface which facilitates operator efficiency.
T User friendly membrane switches.
T 4-liter capacity paraffin reservoir which minimizes refilling frequency.
T Heated forceps warmer and illuminated paraffin dispenser enhance
user friendliness.
T Warming oven with removable shelf and double hinged lid for
convenient access to preheated base mold. System Specifications: Histo Pro 150H Hot Modlue
T Wax bath complete with drainage shelf, debris screen, and hinged lid. Capacity:
T Heated work area which provides a flat working surface with the excess Paraffin Tank: 4 liters
paraffin draining under the surface into the wax bath; complete with a Mold Oven: 7” (17.5 cm)Wide x 7” (17.5 cm)
hand and foot switch for activating the dispensing head. Deep x 2.25” (5.7 cm) Tall
T Generous illumination. Cassette Bath: 8” (20 cm) Wise x 11” (28 cm)
Long x 2.1”(5.3 cm) Deep
T The cold plate offers 170 sq. in. (1100cm2) of compressor cooled User Selected Temperature Ranges:
working surface with removable stainless steel drainage tray beneath. Paraffin Tank: 40-70˚ C
T Tactile membrane touch-pad for easy temperature setting and Mold Oven: 40-70˚ C
monitoring. Cassette Bath: 40-70˚ C
Forceps Holder: 40-70˚ C
T Full one year warranty. Work Surface: 40-70˚ C
Physical Characteristics:
Width: 20”(51 cm)
SPECIFICATIONS: Depth: 22.5”(57.2 cm)
Height: 12.5”(32 cm)
Dimensions: Weight: 35 lbs (16 kg)
Overall ............................23.75”(L)x31.5”(W)x11”(H) (60x81x28cm) Electrical Characteristics:
Hgt of Work Surface..........Workstage 2.75”(7cm) above countertop Voltage: 115 Volts AC or 230 Volts AC
Wax Reservoir ...................75”(L)x4.75”(W)x4”(D) (19.5x12x9.5cm) Power: 800 Watts Max
Wax Bath ......................10.25”(L)x8.5”(W)x1.75”(D) (26x21.5x4cm) Histo Pro 150CS Cold Module
Warming Oven ....6.5”(L)x7.5”(W) x min 2.5” max 6” (14 - 16.5cm) Capacity:
Cold Plate ..................................11.75”(L)x14.5”(W) (29.5x36.6cm) Cold Plate Area: 15.8” (40 cm) x 14” (35 cm)
Temperature Range -10˚C - +10˚C
Weight ............................................................Overall 72 lbs (33kg)
Physical Characteristics:
Temp Ranges: Width: 16”(40 cm)
Wax Reservoir ....................................................40° - 70°C +/-2°C Depth: 22.5”(57.2 cm)
Work Surface......................................................40° - 70°C +/-5°C Height: 12.5”(32 cm)
Wax Bath............................................................40° - 70°C +/-2°C Weight: 35 lbs (16 kg)
Electrical Characteristics:
Cold Plate ..............................................................ambient to -5°C Voltage: 115 Volts AC or 230 Volts AC
Power Supply ..............................................Overall 120 VAC, 50 Hz Power: 200 Watts Max
Fuse Rating ......................................................Power plug 5 amps
Cat.# Description Quantity
62300 Tissue Embedding Center each
63120 HistoPro 150 Tissue Embedding System each

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 599
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec14_596-610_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 10:43 PM Page 600

SECTION 14 Histology and Light Microscopy

® CryoJane™ The Cryostat Frozen Sectioning Aid System

The CryoJane® Tape-Transfer System creates frozen sections as thin as 2
microns with the same quality as sections cut from paraffin blocks. Sections
are wrinkle-free, uncompressed, and fully intact when bonded to the
microscope slide. The CryoJane uses adhesive coated slides and adhesive
tapes to capture sections instead of using an anti-roll plate or brush. CryoJane
is suitable for routine cryosections and is indispensable for sectioning difficult
tissues including fatty breast and undecalcified bone.
T Preserves sample morphology
T Increases quality, reduces repeats and streamlines workflows
T Allows fast and virtually effortless serial sectioning

With the CryoJane Tape-Transfer System, thin tissue sections remain Cryojane® System Includes the Following:
unflawed even after mounting. This makes CryoJane ideal for applications that The Leica CryoJane Tape-Transfer System includes the control unit,
require perfectly thin sections to clarify structural relationships and reveal (ECU) with a power cord, UV Flash Unit with Temperature Controlled Pad,
morphological detail. The CryoJane Tape-Transfer System is adaptable to Hand Roller and Mounting, Bracket, Door Bar, five Cable Clamps, one
most cryostats on the market. Slide Storage Shelf, 125 1X Adhesive Slides, 10 1/2X Adhesive Slides,
T Sections can be fixed "anhydrously" to preserve virtually all fine 10 4X Adhesive Slides, one roll of Tape Windows (400 tapes per roll), a
structures present in the snap-frozen block of tissue manual, one set of Replacement Fuses, Knife Facet Wipers and a one
T Water-soluble enzymes, antigens and nucleo-proteins are preserved year Parts Warranty from date of install.
in situ Note: System does not include: Snap Freezer, oil bath or oil
T With appropriate fixation and staining, true localization of enzyme and embedding accessories
antigen activity can be visualized
T The bond between the section and the slide is solvent resistant and Products required by the CryoJane System:
permanent, preventing section loss during staining ® Protective Oil
Accessories Kit
APPLICATIONS Oil in the bath is maintained at –8°C
T Histological stains inside the cryostat and will not melt the
T Immuno stains tissue when brushed on the frozen block-
T In situ hybridization face. Frozen blocks coated with this
T Laser Microdissection and Laser Capture Microdissection protective oil can be stored for up to one
T Frozen tissue arrays and other molecular diagnostic studies year in a freezer without dehydration.
The Protective Oil Accessories Kit includes the following: Temperature
ADVANTAGES controlled Oil Bath, 4 oz Bottle of Protective Oil, and Oil Brush. Please
T Ideal for fatty tissues - Keeps fatty tissues such as skin, breast & note that when purchased separately from the CryoJane system,
undecalcified bone together. Excellent for serial sections of brain. installation of the Protective Oil Bath Accessory requires that the
T Consistent results - Consistent results help operators maintain pro- CryoJane® system be returned to Electron Microscopy Sciences.
ductivity and preserve tissue samples CryoJane™ System Ordering
T Safe for protocols - 8 millisecond, long-wave UV (360 nm) is safe for Cat. # Description Qty.
protocols such as In situ Hybridization 62800-10 CryoJane® Tape-Transfer System, 110Volt each
T 2-60 um - Sections can be cut between 2-60 um in thickness 62800-20 CryoJane® Tape-Transfer System, 220Volt each
T Temperature controlled - Temperature controlled pad for optimal sec- 62803-30 *Protective Oil Accessories Kit each
tion transfer conditions
*Installation of the Protective Oil Bath Accessory requires that the CryoJane®
system be returned to Electron Microscopy Sciences.

CryoJane Tape-Transfer Process

UUU UUU UUU

600 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec14_596-610_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 10:43 PM Page 601

Histology and Light Microscopy SECTION 14

® CryoJane™ The Cryostat Frozen Sectioning Aid System ® Cryogenic-Gel
(continued) T Replaces the messy T Stick to where
"runny" embedding you want it.
media. T Will not run –
T Easy to use. No waste.
It is a highly viscous, water-soluble embedding medium for
frozen sections that "stays put". The gel is packaged in a
pump-dispenser bottle that can instantly dispense the gel
in any position. The dispenser has a built-in "guillotine"
that cleanly severs the gel from the pump spouts and
Tape Windows Hand Roller prevents any "stringy" medium from pulling away when the bottle is
removed. Simply dispense gel on room temperature blockholder. Use cold
Cat. # Description Application Notes Qty. heat extractor to form a base layer. Dispense additional gel. Place the
62800-40 Block-Holder Deep-waffled, large face tissue on top of gel. Use cold heat extractor to freeze tissue and form
block-holder securely anchors
block. Each bottle contains 4.3oz (159ml), 12/case
frozen embedding medium or tissue. 5/pk
62800-44 Microtome Adapts to the microtome chuck Cat.# Description Pack
Chuck Adapter for the use of Block-Holders above. 62806-01 Cryo-Gel™, 4.3oz (128ml) per Dispenser Each
(Please specify cryostat model when ordering) each 62806-06 Cryo-Gel™, 4.3oz (128ml) per Dispenser 12/cs
62800-46 Hand Roller Hand Roller, required in the
CryoJane® process for laminating
Tape Window to block-face. each ® CureMount™ -
62800-53 Fuses - 1-Amp SLO-BLOW ceramic core wound. Mounting Medium
Used in the CryoJane™ ECU. 5/pk
62800-X Adhesive Slides Glass slide with adhesive coating,
CureMount™ is a UV curable mounting medium
when polymerized, bonds the still-frozen of low viscosity for use with all dehydrated sections.
section from the tape to the slide. 125/pk CureMount™ is a polymer that cures to a refractive
Avoid thawing the section. ½ x coating slides for mild to normal tissues. index of 1.55. It closely matches the refractive index
62800-1X Adhesive Slides Glass slide with adhesive coating, of dehydrated tissue. The coverslip can be optimally
when polymerized, bonds the still-frozen positioned and cured under UV fluorescent illumination.
section from the tape to the slide. 125/pk The coversliped slide is "dry" in less than 30 seconds.
Avoid thawing the section. 1x coating slides for mild to normal tissues.
The coverslip can easily be removed by heating the
62800-4X Adhesive Slides Glass slide with adhesive coating,
when polymerized, bonds the still-frozen
slide briefly, soon after curing or after a longer time by immersing in
section from the tape to the slide. 100/pk xylene. All unstained tissue elements and the cured polymer will be
Avoid thawing the section. 4x coating slides for use with hard un-calcified bone) invisible, making the stained elements stand
or fatty tissues. out in exquisite detail. Comes in brown glass dropping bottle, 60 ml.
62800-72 Tape Windows CryoJane Tape, applied to the block-face
The CureMount™ Starter Kit contains: One CureMount™ Curing Lamp
with the Hand Roller to capture the
frozen section as it is being cut. 200/pk
and two bottles of CureMount™
Eliminate the need for a brush or anti-roll device. Cat.# Description Pack
62800-74 Protective Oil Used for coating frozen section 62804-02 CureMount™ II, Mounting Medium
blocks to prevent dehydration for Paraffin Section 60ml
during long-term storage. 4oz
62800-76 Aqueous Buffer Used in the preparation of the
Salt Mix aqueous fixative, which preserves ® Accessories for Paraffin Tape-Transfer System –
morphological detail in frozen sections. 2/pk Paraffin Sectioning Aid (PSA)
2 vials per package, (each vial makes 180 ml of buffer). The Paraffin Tape-Transfer System is not available.
62800-78 Knife Facet Wipers Effectively cleans both facets of Kit components are available for purchase.
knife-edge without dulling the blade.
10 wipers/pack 10/pk Cat.# Description Pack
62820-1X Regular Adhesive Slide, 1x 100/pk
62820-4X Adhesive Slide for Bone and Fatty Tissue, 4x 100/pk
CryoJane® Accessories and Supplies Ordering 62820-35 TPC Solvent, 1 pt (473 ml) each
Cat.# Description Qty. 62820-36 TPC Solvent Can each
62800-40 Block-Holder 5/pk 62800-72 Tissue Tape Window, 400/Roll each
62800-44 Microtome Chuck Adapter 62800-46 Hand Roller each
(Please specify cryostat model when ordering.)
62800-46 Hand Roller
62800-53 Fuses - 1-Amp 5/pk
62800-X Adhesive Slides - ½ x Coating 125/pk
62800-1X Adhesive Slides - 1x Coating 125/pk
62800-4X Adhesive Slides - 4x Coating 100/pk
62800-72 Tape Windows 200/pk
62800-74 Protective Oil 4 oz.
62800-76 Aqueous Buffer Salt Mix 2/pk
62800-78 Knife Facet Wipers 10/pk

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 601
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec14_596-610_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 10:43 PM Page 602

SECTION 14 Histology and Light Microscopy

® Forceps Warmer ® Histo Orientator
This forceps warmer is indestructible:An all The convenient 2”x2” (51x51mm) heated surface
metal, space saving unit. Three heated well can be used for either “de-wrinkling” of paraffin
prevent wax build-up and allow for easy sections or for the “rapid attachment” of fresh
tissue orientation at the embedding centers. frozen sections. A quick touch of the slide to the
hot plate will remove wrinkles and bubbles on your
Features and Benefits:
sections.
T 80°C warming temperature provides You can also keep a unit on your cryostat to
consistent and constant heat to forceps ensure solid attachment of frozen sections to the slide which prevents
T Angled forceps wells make retrieving and replacing the forceps easy loosening of the tissue during agitation in hand staining.
T Heat resistant housing is constructed for safety to prevent burns The unit measures: 41⁄2”x23⁄4”x 31⁄4” (114x70x82mm). 120 Vac, 60 Hz,12
T Three convenient wells provide ample space for different forceps Watts. Temperature range: Ambient to 65°C.
T Small compact size to maximize laboratory bench top space 63205 Histo Orientator each
T Portable for easy accompany to Embedding Station area
T Select switch – Light indicator and fused for safety, ON/OFF ® Large Paraffin Wax Dispenser
T Switch protector casing prevents paraffin wax contamination
6.25 Gallons of Liquid Paraffin on Demand!
Cat. # Description Qty
63201-10 Forceps Warmer, 100-120 VAC, 50/60Hz, each Holds 6.25 gallons of paraffin wax with clear lexan
0.5A; 5”W x31⁄4”D x 3” H lid permits easy viewing of paraffin without
63201-20 Forceps Warmer, 220-240 VAC, 50/60Hz, each contamination. High spigot accommodates large
0.25A 5”W x31⁄4”D x 3” H transfer vessels. The unit comes with
microprocessor temperature regulation, built-in
® Paraffin Wax Dispenser clock. Ambient to 65°C. Dimensions: 14” W x
ELECTROTHERMAL 15”D x 23”H (35.6 x 38.1 x 58.4 cm), weight 45
lbs (20.5 kg).
The most reliable Wax Dispenser
on the market T Microprocessor controlled – Accurate and
uniformity temperature control
T Provides immediate ‘Wax-on-Tap.’ T Security – Advanced software & mechanical devices assure safety.
T For use in Pathology laboratories, etc. The Paraffin Dispenser have been tested by a registered independent body
T Thermally insulated tap heater with to rigorous international quality and safety standards, and, have been found
independent temperature control to be in compliance with UL, CSA and CE.
eliminates wax solidification.
Product Description EMS # Description Qty.
T Anodized black interior, stove enamel black and white aluminum 62840-10 Large Paraffin Dispenser, 100-120VAC, each
exterior with a black metal lid which is durable and easy to 50/60Hz, 4.5 Amp
clean. 62840-20 Large Paraffin Dispenser, 220-240VAC, each
T 1 gallon Capacity (4.5 liters). 50/60Hz, 2.25 Amp
T Built-in controller provides temperature control from ambient to
75°C. ® Paraffin Block Trimmer
T A non-drip swivel lever with replaceable filter makes the – Wax Trimmer
dispensing of wax easy. Our Wax Trimmer is an appliance for
T Tap heater maintains temperature within the tap to keep the removing excess paraffin from embedding
wax molten. tissue cassettes.
SAFETY It is compact, tabletop design fits easily in
T Safety over-temperature at 105°C. any histology lab. Melted paraffin is shaved
T Non-resettable thermal fuse. away. Collection tray stays in place by magnetic contact with the unit. The
convenient PE disposable tray liner allows easy disposal of the runoff wax.
PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS No need to scrape out the collection tray.
Model # Chamber Chamber Overall Shipping
Capacity Dimensions Dimensions Weight FEATURES:
(L) Inches (cm) Inches (cm) Lb. (kg) T Multiple blocks may be T UL listed power cord
H Dia H Dia trimmed simultaneously T Includes 5 pieces disposable
MH8523BX1 4.5 8.25 8.25 12 11 10 T Grooved surface for proper drip tray liner
15 15 30 28 4.5
MH85238 4.5 8.25 8.25 12 11 10
wax drainage T Dimensions: 11 ¼” (including
15 15 30 28 4.5 T Two temperature settings – tray) W x 5”D x 8”H (15x23x18
Low setting is approx. 80°F cm). 8 lbs (3.6kg)
Ordering and high setting is 90°F T Electrical 115VAC, 50/60Hz, 4 Amp
Cat.# Model # Electrical, 50/60 Hz
Volts Watts EMS # Description Qty.
62839-10 MH8523BX1 115 175 62850-10 Wax Trimmer, 115VAC each
62839-20 MH8523B8 230 175 62850-50 Replacement Plastic Liner 50/pack
62850-51 Replacement Plastic Liner 6packs/cs

602 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec14_596-610_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 10:43 PM Page 603

Histology and Light Microscopy SECTION 14

® Flotation Bath & Flotation Workstations – Made in the USA
Helps your tissue preparation easier, safer and more efficient.
The unit comes with conveniently removable glass dish, scratch and T Heat-resistant plastic housing maintains cosmetic appearance
chemical resistant plastic housing, microprocessor controlled electronics T Removable glass dish for easy cleaning
and a high contrast background for optimum specimen viewing combined T 2" x 6" or 2" x 8" Convection Slide dryer & 2" X 2" HISTO
with the HISTO Orientator™ for flattening sections and a Slide Dryer, Orientator™ for eliminating wrinkles.
all in one compact unit. The systems are now available in Low Profile For those flotation bath applications not requiring the add convenience of
8"x 8" x 2 ¼" deep dish versions as well as for those labs wanting to float Slide Dryer and HISTO Orientator™, the basic Flotation Bath provides all the
larger ribbons, 8"x 11" x 2". functional need of the Flotation Workstation at the affordable price. The
T Magnetic non-contact switch function for years flawlessly baths again come in two sizes , 8x8x2 ¼" or 8x11x2" .
T Microprocessor-controlled heating, ambient to 65°C The Flotation Bath and Flotation Workstation have been tested by a
T Flat membrane switches for safety and simplicity registered independent body to rigorous international quality and safety
T Fluorescent white lighting positioned for improve tissue viewing standards, and, have been found to be in compliance with UL, CSA and CE.
glare-free

Microprocessor temperature regulation.

2” x 8”
Optional programmable feature can
Convection Slide Dryer
have the instrument on when you
arrive and turn-off at days-end

2” x 2” HISTO/Orientator™
Magnetic on/off switch addresses for Eliminating Wrinkles
reliablity issues of competitive
mechanical switches

8” x 11” Removable Glass

Dish for Easy Cleaning

Microprocessor-Controlled
Heating, amb. to 65° C

Heat-Resistant Plastic
Housing maintains indefinite
cosmetic appearance

Bright, energy conserving

LED light array positioned for
improved tissue viewing w/o glare Low-Profile for
user comfort
FWS-L (8”x 11”x 2”)
shown w/SDR-FL

Convenient trough for

positioning a blotting paper
to accelerate slide drying

Slide rack accessory for drain-drying

slides can be ordered for positioning on
the front or on either side of the bath.

EMS # Description Qty. EMS # Description Qty.

63214-10 Flotation Workstation, 8 x 8 x 2 ¼" Deep Dish, 63214-53 Slide Drying Rack, Front mounted,
2 x 6" Slide Dryer,120VAC each for 8 x 11dishes holds 39 slides,
63214-11 Flotation Workstation, 8 x 11 x 2", Deep Dish, a 13" x 1" space is available for placing blotting paper each
2 x 8" Slide Dryer 120VAC each 63214-54 Slide Drying Rack, Front mounted,
63214-20 Flotation Workstation, 8 x 8 x 2 ¼" Deep Dish, for 8 x 8 models, holds 39 slides,
2 x 6" Slide Dryer 220VAC each a 13" x 1" space is available for placing blotting paper each
63214-21 Flotation Workstation, 8 x 11 x 2" Deep Dish, 63214-55 Slide Drying Rack, Side mounted,
2 x 8" Slide Dryer 220VAC each for all 8 x 8 and 8 x 11 models;
63213-10 Flotation Bath, 8 x 8 x 2 ¼" Deep Dish, 120VAC each Can be mounted on left or right side,
63213-11 Flotation Bath, 8 x 11 x 2", 120VAC each older models may require some assembly;
63213-20 Flotation Bath, 8 x 8 x 2 ¼" Deep Dish , 220VAC each holds 34 slides, a 13" x 1" space is available
63213-21 Flotation Bath, 8 x 11 x 2", 220VAC each for placing blotting paper each
63214-50 Glass Dish Replacement, 8 x 8 x 2" (20 x 20 x 5mm) each 63214-51 Fluorescent Light Bulb Replacement 2/pk
63214-52 Glass Dish Replacement, 8 x 11 x 2" (20 x 28 x 6mm) each

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 603
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec14_596-610_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 10:44 PM Page 604

SECTION 14 Histology and Light Microscopy

 SHUR/Dry™ Slide Dryer III– Forced Air  Portable
Slide Warmer
With precision temperature
control and a PTFE coating
on the surface for easy
cleaning this rugged
portable warmer is perfect
for many applications .
Its design allows for slides,
coverslips and glassware to
keep them at the optimum temperature for motility testing. The
aluminum heating surface measures 7” x 11” The unit features a simple
solid state temperature control that is calibrated at 37OC (98˚F) and it is
This is the most up-to-date technology apply to slide drying method. housed in a durable plastic case with a great carrying handle. The
This new design allows users to increase their productivity while hinged lid may be closed when not in use and the power cord is
maintaining super results. Adjustable shelf accepts an assortment of detachable and it stores in the box. The Slide warmer comes in 115 volt
slide racks with and/or without coverslipper adapters. Chamber and 220 Volt .
dimensions: 19”W x 9”D x 14” H (48x23x36 cm). Overall dimension:
22”W 16”D x 20”H ( 56x41x51 cm) Cat. # Description Qty.
71318-01 Slide Warmer, Portable Kit, 115 Volt each
 Temperature from ambient to  Microprocessor controlled 71308-02 Slide Warmer, Portable Kit, 220 Volt each
70°C ± 1°C  Recessed 9 W fluorescent
 Adjustable air flow lighting
 51 CFM of air flow  Four 3,200 rpm fans  STEP UP™ SLIDE WARMER
 Digital programming

Cat. # Description Qty.

63224-10 SHUR/Dry Slide Dryer III,
100-120VAC, 50/60Hz, 2 Amp each
63224-20 SHUR/Dry Slide Dryer III,
220-240VAC, 50/60Hz, 1 Amp each
63224-50 Addition Shelf each

 Forced Air
Slide Dryer
The dryer is designed to Our Step Up™ Slide Warmer’s unique patent pending design helps you
rapidly dry slides by save space while still meeting a busy lab’s needs.
blowing warm air over The Step Up™ holds twice as many slides as a flat unit of the same size
the surface of the slides. and also makes retrieving your slides easier since the end of the slide is
The slide dryer not on the flat surface.
accommodates
two slide racks directly
Model XH-2003
from a stainer and allows
 Anodized black surface provides contrast with samples
the slides to be stained
 Removable tray for easy cleaning
in approximately 20-30 minutes.
 Digital LED temperature display and temperature setting
FEATURES: Capacity ..................................................................40 3” x 1” slides
Temperature range ..........................Room temperature to 70°C ±1°
 A temperature control dial which allows the user to set the Power requirements ..........................................300W (110V, 60Hz)
temperature from ambient to 75°C. Overall size ..............................................................14” x 14” x 4”H
 A hinged lid made from durable stainless steel. Shipping Weight ......................................................................22 lbs.
 A glass front for see-through viewing.
 A zinc coated steel casing with a stoved epoxy finish. Cat. # Description Qty.
 A self-resetting thermal switch to protect the unit from 71319-50 Step UpTM Slide Warmer, 115 Volt each
electrical surges. 71319-250 Step UpTM Slide Warmer, 220 Volt each

The unit measures: 11”(L) x 93⁄4”(W) x 5”(H) (27x25x 13cm)

Power: 110 VAC, 60 Hz, 2 Amps.
Cat. # Description Qty.
63223 Forced Air Slide Dryer each
63223-20 Force Air Slide Dryer, 220-240VAC, 1 Amp each

604 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec14_596-610_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 10:44 PM Page 605

Histology and Light Microscopy SECTION 14

® Covered Slide Warmer — with Hinged Lid
25 x 8 Surface
Ideal for use in the fields of cytology, histology, pathology, and biology
for paraffin tissue section mounting. Thermal heater ensures even heat
transfer. Anodized black surface provides contrast. LED temperature
display. Size 25 x 8”
T Thermostatic heat control
T Anodized black surface provides contrast
T LED temperature display, both set temperature and display
temperature
T Thermostat setting range from room temperature to 70°C
Cat. # Description Qty.
71321-10 for 115 Volt each
71321-20 for 220 Volt each

® Slide Warmers
These slide warmers are ideal for use in cytology, histology, pathology
and biology for paraffin tissue section mounting. Available in two sizes.
T Thermostatic heat control
T Anodized black surface provides contrast
T LED temperature display, both set temperature
and display temperature
T Thermostat setting range from room temperature to 70ºC

Cat. # Description Qty.

71319-10 101⁄4" x 7" 115 Volt, Ambient to 70ºC 23 Slides
(26x18cm)
71319-220 101⁄4" x 7" 220 Volt, Ambient to 70ºC 23 Slides
(26x18cm)
71320-10 25" x 8" 115 Volt, Ambient to 70ºC 66 Slides
(63x20cm)
71320-220 25" x 8" 220 Volt, Ambient to 70ºC 66 Slides
(63x20cm)

® Slide Warmers
Our Large Size Economical Slide Warmer
T Temperature range from slightly above ambient to 65ºC
T Two sizes – Accommodates up to 66 slides
T Large slide capacity with space-saving design
T 2 years warranty
T CE Certified
These Slide Warmers are designed for cytology, histology, pathology,
and other biological applications in industrial and clinical lab
environments.

T Uniform heat transfer over entire heating surface T Model 26007 and 26022 are CE certified.
T Black Anodized heavy gauge aluminum worktop T Model MH6616: Temperature ranges slightly above ambient to 100ºC,
for maximum specimen contrast. with dry slides across the drying bars, angled on the bar or lying flat
T Model 26025 features LED display and a dust cover without bars.

Electrical, 50/60Hz Overall Dimension

Cat.# Model Volts Watts W" x D" X H" (cm) Slide Capacity Qty.
71317-10 MH6616X1 120 150 15.5 x 7.12 x 3.5 50, 1" x 3" (25 x 76mm) each
71317-20 MH6616 230 150 (39 x 18 x 9) 50, 1" x 3" (25 x 76mm) each

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 605
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec14_596-610_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 10:44 PM Page 606

SECTION 14 Histology and Light Microscopy

® Oven/Incubator
This Oven/Incubator with an aluminum inner chamber, and venting is up to the task of providing many years of long service
in busy labs. The cast aluminum chamber provides for dependable temperature uniformity and the vent efficiently expels
moisture and vapors. The unit comes complete with a removable shelf.

FEATURES: T The aluminum chamber is easy to clean and it

provides excellent temperature uniformity.
T A magnetic latch assures positive door closure.
T Oven works on the gravity convection heating
T An aluminum chamber provides excellent temperature
method.
uniformity.
T The unit comes complete with one removable metal APPLICATIONS:
T A thermometer port at the top of the oven
shelf, three-wire cord, and plug. T General drying and
accommodates any partial immersion thermometer.
T The chamber is vented through the top to allow for Ordering: incubation applications.
the removal of moisture and other vapors. 63230-10 Oven/Incubator, 120 Volts each
T Polymerization of resins.
T Heats up rapidly. (56°C in 9 minutes). 63230-20 Oven/Incubator, 240 Volts each

SPECIFICATIONS:
Chamber Dimensions Overall Dimensions Weight Electrical Temp. Operating
Inch (cm) Inch (cm) Lb. (Kg) 50/60Hz Uniformity Temp.Range
W H D W H D Ship Volts Amps Watts @100ºC °C
16.00 11.5 16.20 18.5 22.5 13.5 57 120
2.90 500 +/-5ºC +5ºC - 210ºC
(41) (29) (41) (47) (57) (34) (26) 240

For our Lynx Automated Tissue Processor see pages 987-989 >>>>>

PathScan Enabler IV
Low Cost Digital Histology Slide Scanner
Obtain ultra high resolution images from a glass tissue slide in about a minute
without a microscope.
Overview
The PathScan Enabler IV, is designed to allow scanning of an entire whole mounted
histology sample attached to standard 1 x 3 inch cover slipped glass slide. The
PathScan Enabler IV solves low power, large field of view, high resolution imaging
problems. This fourth generation histology scanner scans an area of 1.42 x 0.85
inches (36.14 x 21.59 mm), resulting in useable images up to 10,248 x 6,120
pixels, uninterpolated. File size can be as large as 188 megabytes. Produces image
files which can be saved in a variety of formats including TIFF, PICT, BMP, GIF, etc.
Compatible with PC Windows based computers.

Key Features Images from the PathScan Enabler IV System

T Low cost histology slide scanner To view additional images at high resolution, please visit our web site at www.emsdiasum.com.
T One button control, scans, saves and (if
available) opens image in Adobe Photoshop
T Typical scan times is under a minute
T Holder accepts two 1 x 3" slides
T 7200 dpi resolution, 3.5 microns per pixel
T Single pass scan mode
T 16/8 bits per color sampling rate
T Dynamic range up to 4.2 O.D
Rat Brain Tongue
T Real time sharpening, automatic color
correction
T Rapid accurate fixed focus
T SilverFast Ai Studio Software
T USB2 interface
T Fourth generation, 1000's sold!

Ordering:
89010 Pathscan Enabler IV Slide Scanner each Lung Bone

606 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec14_596-610_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 10:44 PM Page 607

Histology and Light Microscopy SECTION 14

 Storage
 Held Secure™ Slide/Cassette Storage System
A durable corrugated filing box kit for the proper filing, identification, and storage of glass slides or cassettes.
The complete set comes unassembled in packages of 10.
 Designed to hold up to 2,000 slides or 500+ Slide/Cassette case for slide retrieval
cassettes per box documentation
 Partitioned Drawers for easy retrieval  25 Index Cards come with each Slide Kit for
 Double tabbed in back for additional safety slide retrieval documentation
 Printing on box front designed for easy  Additional cards and removable tray labels
inventory identification available for bulk purchase
 Internal corrugated construction designed for  Internal corrugated construction supports up to
multiple stacking 250 lbs and the tray remains easily accessible
 Sold in unassembled cases of 10 boxes  Manufactured in the USA
 50 In/Out Cards come with each
63280-50 File System Set for Slides 10 bx 63280-53 Cassette In/Out cards 1000/cs
63280-51 File System for Cassettes 10 bx 63280-54 Slide Index Cards 500/cs
63280-52 Slide in/Out Cards 1000/cs 63280-55 Removable Tray Labels 500/roll

 Slide/Cassette Filing System

Our moisture resistant, plastic covered corrugated boxes interlock to stack ten high, each supporting up to
500 lbs of overhead cassette and slide weight. Each box accommodates 2000 slides or 500 tissue blocks to
meet your varied storage requirements. Come unassembled; boxes require minimal storage space and can
be easily assembled as needed
63280-20
Slide storage File with four compartments, each has one drawer, drawer inside measures 101⁄2"L x 2 "W x
11⁄2"H (267 x 60 x 40mm), each drawer has one center divider, each division is 11⁄8" wide, accommodates up  Economical  Durable
to 250 slides or 500 slides per drawer, or 2000 slides per file, 10 stackable files per case or 20,000 slides.  Convenient  Versatile
When these boxes are used as a cassette storage file, each compartment has two drawers, one on top of the
other. Four compartments or eight drawers, each drawer accommodates 63 cassettes or 500 cassettes per
file. 10 stackable files per case or 1500 cassettes.
Overall dimension of each file is 111⁄2"(L) x 12"(W) x 4"(H) (295 x 300 x 100mm)
Cat.# Description Pack
63280-10 Slide Storage File Box 10/cs 63280-10
63280-20 Cassette Storage File Box 10/cs

 HistoPrep Modular File Drawers

Individually, self-contained, stackable drawers. They hold approximately 250 Histo cassettes or embedding
rings. Supplied in economical two-drawer packages with interlocking ridges on the top and the bottom for easy
stacking of as many cabinets as you want. Each drawer is encased in a rugged, high impact plastic sleeve, so
your cassettes are completely enclosed and protected. They come with color decals which allow you to
organize each by function. Cassettes are not included. The unit measures: 153⁄4”(L)x9”(W)x2”(H) (40x23x5cm).
63284 HistoPrep Modular File Drawers 2/pk

 Tissue File Cases

A histological embedment block cataloging and storage system. This file system incorporates the necessary features
offering embedment block protection, simplified cataloging, reduction of filing error and facilitation of retrieval. All of
this while conserving space and being very affordable. The tissue files come with 100 partitioned compartments
arranged 10 deep and 10 across. By removing alternating partitions, each compartment can be doubled or
quadrupled in size. For other storage needs, the partitions may also be removed. For cataloging, each compartment
is numerically indexed on a permanent chart inside the lid which also provides space for detailed information.
Tissue files are made from solid fiberboard with a protective, attractive, scuff-resistant exterior green covering. Its
hinged lid lifts open and with a cloth stay support the lid can be kept in the open position.
Tissue File Specifications:
 Embedment Block Capacity: 100–200 per file.  Dimensions:
 Compartments: 100 of 11⁄2” x 1 x 21⁄4” Outside: 151⁄4”x101⁄2”x23⁄8” (387x267x60mm) 63286-01 Tissue File Case each
(38 x 25 x 57mm) Inside: 147⁄8”x97⁄8”x21⁄4” (378x251x57mm) 63286-06 Tissue File Case 6/pk
 Approximate Shipping Weight: 2 lbs. (0.9Kg) 63286-10 Tissue File Case 12/pk
 Compartment Arrangement: 10 across x 10 deep

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 607
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec14_596-610_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 10:44 PM Page 608

SECTION 14 Histology and Light Microscopy

® Storage (continued)
® Micro Slide Files
A prepared Microscope Slide Cataloging and Storage System. The slide files contain 48 partitioned
compartments which will hold an estimated 10 of 1x3” glass slides per cell (480 slides per case) or
10 of 3x2” slides per cell (240 slides per case) by removing two alternate long partitions. A 3⁄8”
(100mm) cushioning space surrounding the partitioned compartment serves as a protective barrier
against damage to the stored slides. For other storage needs, all or alternate partitions are removed
for conversion to larger size compartments.
For cataloging and slide retrieval, each compartment is numerically indexed to a permanent chart on
the underside of the lid which also provides space for information.
The files are constructed from solid fiberboard with a protective and attractive, scuff-resistant green
exterior. The reinforced hinged lid conveniently lifts open with a cloth stay support and keeps the lid
in the open position for easy slide filing and retrieval.
Slide File Specifications:
T Microscope Slide Capacity: 480 25x75mm (1x3”) T Dimensions:
or 240 76x51mm (3x2”) slides per Slide File Outside: 24.1x15.2x8.3cm (91⁄2x6x31⁄4”) 63282-01 Slide File Case each
T Compartments: 8 2.9x1.6x7.6cm (11⁄8x5⁄8x3”) Inside: 23x14.1x7.8cm (91⁄16x59⁄16x31⁄16”) 63282-06 Slide File Case 6/pk
T Compartment Arrangement: 4 across x 12 deep T Approximate Shipping Weight: 63282-12 Slide File Case 12/pk
- Partitions are removable to enlarge each cell. 0.45kg (1 lb) per unit

® Space Saver - Steel File Cabinet System

1. Slide Cabinet System Each cabinet comes with a package of
T Store up to 54,000 slides in only 2 square Memorandum Markers, and a set of movable
feet of space. Compressor Blocks.
T Low cost slide storage. The cabinet measures: 153⁄4”(W)x183⁄4”(D)x43⁄4”(H)
T Ideal for use in Pathology, Cytology, (40x47x12cm)
Hematology, Histology, Dermatology,
74780-10 EMS Cabinet System Base each
Research, Education.
74780-20 EMS Micro-Slide Cabinet each
T Sturdy - Built to last.
Our newly introduced cabinets for filing 3x1” slides
2. 35mm Slide Cabinets
is the most effective system available to the ever- For 2x2 Slides and Kodachrome Transparencies.
growing problem of slide storage and retrieval.
These slide cabinets have the same construction
They are compact, sturdy and and features as our Micro-Slide Cabinet (Cat#
economical!!! 74780-20). Each file comes with three drawers
The cabinets are stackable and are secured by and can store up to 2,250 slides.
interlocks. The base (order separately) lifts the 35mm Slide Cabinets interlock with themselves and
cabinets 43⁄4” off the floor. All units are constructed with Micro-Slide Cabinets, for total flexibility and
from heavy gauge reinforced cold rolled steel, storage convenience. The depth and width
electrostatically finished in dura-baked enamel in dimensions are the same as (Cat#74780-10)
74780-20 an attractive green color. Drawers are easily shown above; the height is about 1” (25cm) lower
removable and interchangeable. They have rolled and uses the same base as our
edges on each side for added strength. The riveted (Cat# 74780-10).
card holder on the front of the drawer speeds up 74780-30 EMS 35mm Slide Cabinet each
slide retrieval.
Each cabinet has 6 drawers, with two
compartments per row, so you can store as many
as 750 slides per drawer. The outside walls and
center divider are lower than the slides, allowing for
74780-30 easy removal of any slide.
Each drawer has an exclusive built-in hand grip at
the rear and a full sized handle at the front which
allows the drawers to be removed and used as
74780-10
trays.

608 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec14_596-610_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 10:44 PM Page 609

Histology and Light Microscopy SECTION 14

® Storage (continued)
® Tissue-Tek Lab Aid®
®

® A. Slide Filing System

Allows for the convenient storage and retrieval of microscope slides or transparencies. Two different vertical filing drawer
sections can be stacked in any combination. Each 1" drawer section has 14 drawers and holds 465 (1" x 3") slides per drawer.
Each 2" drawer section has 7 drawers and holds 271 (3" x 2") slides or 271 (2" x 2") transparencies per drawer.
T Requires only 19 x 19" of floor space. T Constructed from welded steel for easy stacking
T Slide backstops easily attach inside drawers to hold and durability.
slide in place. T Two colors choices: olive green or beige.

Cat.# Tissue-Tek Description Color Pack Cat.# Tissue-Tek Description Color Pack
62650-10 4010 Floor Base Green each 62650-16 4016 Drawer Section 2" x 7 Green each
62651-10 4011 Floor Base Beige each 62651-16 4017 Drawer Section 2" x 7 Beige each
62650-12 4012 Top Cap Panel Green each 62651-19 4019 Slide Backstop Beige each
62651-12 4013 Top Cap Panel Beige each 62650-27 4027 Replacement 1" Drawer Green each
62650-14 4014 Drawer Section 1" x 14 Green each 62650-01 4020 Slide Liner, Coil Spring ------ each
62651-14 4015 Drawer Section 1" x 14 Beige each

® B. Block Filing Cabinet

Allows for the organized storage of blocks that have been embedded using: Tissue Cassettes, Biopsy Cassettes, Mesh
Cassettes, Mega Cassettes, Processing/Embedding Cassettes and Embedding Rings
T One-piece construction eliminates hinges and doors for dust-free storage.
T Six impact-resistant plastic drawers feature generous space for identification.
T Compact in size (17" x 91⁄2" x 15") and stackable.
Cat.# Tissue-Tek Description Pack
62515-01 4192 Cabinet only each
62516-10 4171-02 Cabinet with 1500 Uni-Cassettes® Color White #62500-W each
62516-15 4189 Cabinet with 1500 #62520-W (white) Processing/Embedding Cassettes each
62516-20 4190 Cabinet with 1500 #62520-C (clear) Processing/Embedding Cassettes each
62516-25 4169 Cabinet with 1000 #62525-W White Embedding Rings each

® C. Lab-Aid® Ultra™ Storage Cabinets

Safe, Secure, and Trusted
Security and capacity are the primary characteristics of the Lab Aid® Ultra™ Cabinet for
slides or cassettes. This modernized system offers large capacity storage with integrated
security features. A sturdy steel construction ensures long-term use and a drawer lock 62653-11
prevents tampering guaranteeing specimen safety. Each drawer front has a plastic covered
labeling tab assuring positive identification. Inside, convenient removable slide and block
trays accommodate up to 82,000 microscope slides or 21,000 tissue blocks. Coding strips
can be used to separate slides or blocks by numbers. Filing cabinet can be bolted together
and stacked two high for maximum storage capacity.
62653-01
62653-13
EMS # Tissue-Tek Description Qty
62653-01 3991 Lab-Aid® ULTRA™ Cabinet for Slide System. Accommodate up to 82,000 Microscope Slides Each
62653-02 3992 Lab-Aid® ULTRA™ Cabinet for Block System. Accommodate up to 21,000 tissue blocks Each
62653-04 3985 Coding Strips, Green Color. 100/cs
62653-05 3986 Coding Strips, Yellow Color. 100/cs
62653-06 3987 Coding Strips, Blue Color. 100/cs
62653-07 3988 Coding Strips, Brown Color. 100/cs
62653-08 3993 Foam Inserts. To use as slide stopper 50/cs
62653-09 3994 Metal Hook for Slide Trays. For added safety, this hook can be used to assist in the removal of slide trays 1 each
62653-10 3995 Metal Hook for Slide Trays. For added safety, this hook can be used to assist in the removal of tissue block trays 1 each
62653-11 3996 Standard Slide Tray – 2 Rows. Made of sturdy plastic and features four compartments for storage of microscope slides. 1 each
Each tray accommodates up to 512 slides
62653-12 3997 Large Slide Tray – 1 Row. The large tray features one row per tray, is available to accommodate large slides 1 each
62653-13 3998 Block Tray. Made of sturdy plastic and features 4 rows per tray accommodating 35 blocks in each row. 1 each
Block Tray can be stacked 2-high in each drawer, enabling a total block capacity of 21,000
62653-14 3999 Lock Key. This key is used to lock and unlock the slide or block filling cabinet as necessary 1 each

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 609
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec14_596-610_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 10:44 PM Page 610

SECTION 14 Histology and Light Microscopy

® Storage (continued)
® Electropolished Stainless Steel Freezer Racks
High Quality, Ultra-Durable Freezer Racks
for Long Term Sample Storage
No Sharp Edges - All edges have been ground down to remove the sharp
surfaces that plague standard freezer racks
Electropolished - This step cleans up all weld points that, over time, may be the
starting points for corrosion.
Superior Construction - Superior construction and design have created a more
sturdy rack than what is currently available on the market
Durable - Racks are designed and finished to last longer in the demanding
freezer environment where samples are housed
Surgical Finish - Electropolishing leaves racks ultra-shiny and free from any
surface contaminants
Multiple Sizes - Several vertical and horizontal options are available to fit a
variety of freezer configurations
T A superior design was chosen to increase structural integrity.
T All weld points have been ground down to eliminate sharp points and
areas where corrosion can occur. Racks For 3" Boxes — 61615-55 Racks For 2" Boxes — 61615-60
T Structural edges and shelves have been ground and racks have been
electropolished to remove sharp egdes.

Cat. No. Description Dimensions Qty

61615-25 4 x 4 Freezer Rack, 22.125" L x 5.50" W x 1 Rack
holds (16) 3" boxes 12.625" H
61615-30 3 x 4 Freezer Rack, 16.625" L x 5.50" W x 1 Rack
holds (12) 3" boxes 12.625" H
61615-35 3 x 3 Freezer Rack, 16.625" L x 5.50" W x 1 Rack 61615-50
holds (9) 3" boxes 9.625" H 61615-45
61615-40 3 x 4 Freezer Rack, 16.318" L x 5.50" W x 1 Rack
holds (12) 2" boxes 8.875" H
61615-45 4 x 4 Freezer Rack, 21.625" L x 5.50" W x 1 Rack
holds (16) 2" boxes 8.875" H
61615-50 4 x 5 Freezer Rack, 21.625" L x 5.50" W x 1 Rack
holds (20) 2" boxes 11.063" H
61615-55 1 x 9 Freezer Rack, 5.63" L x 5.63" W x 1 Rack
holds (9) 3" boxes 28.875" H
61615-60 1 x 9 Freezer Rack, 5.63" L x 5.63" W x 1 Rack 61615-40
holds (9) 2" boxes 19.25" H 61615-35

® Cardboard Freezer Boxes

and Dividers
For Use With Stainless Steel
Freezer Racks
Store cryogenic vials in liquid nitrogen or in
mechanical freezers in our freezer storage boxes. Box
footprint is 133 x 133 mm. Select a box and a 61615-30 61615-25
partition that fit the size and number of vials for your
needs. Cardboard boxes can be labelled with Cryo-Tags for easy identification. ® Cryogenic Labels
Both the boxes and dividers are available in packs of 12. see pages 694-698 <<<<<
Cat. No. Description Dimensions Qty ® Wet Grip Labels for Moist, Frosty or
61615-65 2” Freezer Boxes 133mm x 133mm, 50mm 12/Pack
61615-70 3” Freezer Boxes 133mm x 133mm, 75mm 12/Pack
Frozen Tubes see page 698 <<<<<
61615-75 Freezer Box Divider, 64 Hole 8 Columns, 8 Rows 12/Pack
61615-80 Freezer Box Divider, 81 Hole 9 Columns, 9 Rows 12/Pack ® Hi/Lo Write-On Temperature Tape
61615-85 Freezer Box Divider, 49 Hole 7 Columns, 7 Rows 12/Pack see page 1140 <<<<<
61615-90 Freezer Box Divider, 100 Hole 10 Columns, 10 Rows 12/Pack

610 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec15_611_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 11:10 PM Page 611

SECTION 15

Antigen Retrieval
The Retriever
Retriever Slides
Buffers
Blocking Solutions
Antibody Diluents
Antigen Retrievers in IHC

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 611
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec15_612-616_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 11:13 PM Page 612

SECTION 15 Antigen Retrieval

The Solution for Antigen Unmasking

® The Retriever
Our Unique Retriever solves the problem of staining formalin fixed tissues.
This is an affordable solution to all known major problems with immuno-
histochemistry on paraffin sections. Ease of use combined with high
reproducibility of the results will give you the best quality immunostaining.
The Retriever is a bench-top model for thermally processing slides of
formalin-fixed, paraffin embedded tissues prior to immunostaining. The
model has been designed to ensure identical processing of all the samples
during a processing cycle, as well as the identical processing of the
samples in individual sessions. The retriever preserves processed tissues.

Now you can:

T Run antigen unmasking in 6 various buffers at once.
T Perform gentle antigen retrieval that does not damage
the tissue morphology.
T Get identical results every time.
T Compare series of slides treated in independent sessions.

How does the Retriever work?

Basically it is a pressure cooker. However, a pressure cooker specially
designed to unmask the antigen on tissue sections. The core principle is
heating of the chambers with the slides at high temperature (>120˚C) and
high pressure. Sensors control the heating profile for the temperature and
pressure to be reached at certain pace and over certain time. We did a lot of
tests to find the optimal settings. When the required temperature is reached,
it will be kept for several minutes. After that the slides will be cooling over 2
hours. Specially designed thermal walls of the unit control the speed of
cooling of the inner chamber and slides Slide Chamber

Who would benefit from using our Retriever? Chamber Rack

T Investigative Pathology, where the high quality of staining (a picture Technical Specifications of Retriever:
may be published!) is required. Height ................................................................................ 335 mm
T Any labs that is short on technical personnel: any student or post- Capacity .............................................................................. 9 litres
doc can process slides for the staining without using much time Max. Instrument length .................................................... 228 mm
T Small routine pathology labs, where a limited number of slides Width.................................................................................. 340 mm
should be processed daily
Net Weight........................................................................ 4.5 kilos
T Anyone who uses highly valuable samples, such as tissue arrays or
unique tissue samples: Simplicity and reliability of the unit ensures Internal Chamber Dimensions (d/h).......................... 210/230 mm
the safety of your sample, and a high quality antigen unmasking Max. Load Weight .................................................................. 3.0kg

How To Use:
Step 1. Close the lid by a simple
Deparaffinized sections on slides are placed into twist.
the Processing (Tissue Slide) Chambers. Retriever
can accommodate simultaneously from 1 to 6
Chambers, which allows you to process a series of
slides in up to 6 different antigen unmasking
buffers within the same session. Fill the chambers Step 3.
with a buffer of your choice. Push the Start button.
Step 2. The tissues will be
processed automatically.
Place the Chambers into the Rack.
In about two hours
Fill the Retriever with 750 ml of deionized/distilled (depends on the load) you
water. Place the Rack into Retriever. can open the lid and
proceed immunostaining.

612 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec15_612-616_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 11:13 PM Page 613

Antigen Retrieval SECTION 15

Other Specifications:
Examples of Staining
Fuses - Located under the control module, fuses F1 OA, 32 x 6.3mm, PCNA (Nuclear antigen)
ceramic sand filled, Mains plug top fuse (User replaceable), F1 3A to Sections of formalin-fixed, paraffin
BS1362 UK ONLY. embedded tissue of human duodenum
Rating - Models are rated continuously for intermittent use. were deparaffinized and processed in
Retriever to unmask the antigen. We used
Body- Deep drawn aluminium. Lid - Aluminium. one cycle in R-Buffer C (pH 6.0) with
Heater- Externally surface mounted mechanically fixed electric element. cooling of the slides overnight. Antibody
PC-10 against proliferation marker PCNA
Temperature Cut Out - Thermal fuse.
(nuclear) was used together with R-Detect
Pressure - Calibrated pressure release valve. HRP detection system for immunostaining
Max. Single Fault Temperature - 133.3°C of sections.

Environment Conditions - indoor use - temperature 5°C to 40°C - E-cadherin (Membranous,

altitude up to 2000m - maximum relative humidity 80% for temperatures extracellular domain)
up to 31°C decreasing linearly to 50% relative humidity at 40°C. - mains Sections of formalin-fixed, paraffin
supply voltage fluctuations not to exceed +10% of the nominal voltage embedded tissue of human cervix were
deparaffinized and processed in Retriever
Input Connections - Mains inlet socket 'hot' format conforming to IEC 302. to unmask the antigen. We used one cycle
Safety Shut Down - See "Temperature Cut Out". in R-Buffer C (pH 6.0) with cooling of the
slides overnight. Antibody HECD-1 against
Choosing A Buffer: cell adhesion molecule E-cadherin was
If you already know the buffer that can be used for Microwave used together with R-Detect HRP detection
treatments of sections in order to unmask you antigen of interest, system for immunostaining of sections.
the high chances are that the same buffer may be used in Retriever.
To improve the morphology of tissue of the processed sections,
Choosing Buffer: Correction for the Nature of the
use one of our supplied ready-to-use buffers by choosing them
Antigen and Epitope.
according to pH.
The choice of the buffer depends on the nature of the antigen and the
We have commercially available the following buffers: location of the epitope of interest. We advise you to first run the test for the
T R-Buffer A pH 6.0 most appropriate buffer using the tissues where the expression of the
T R-Buffer B pH 8.0 antigen does occur. General guidelines for choosing the buffer:
T R-Buffer C pH 4.5 Most of the nuclear antigens (apoptosis-related, survival-related,
T R-Buffer U pH 6.0 proliferation-related) R: Buffer A (or AG).
T G variants of the same buffers for a more gentle processing Cell adhesion molecules, cell membrane antigens (extracellular
of the tissues. domain) R: Buffer A (or AG)
To successfully retrieve the antigen of interest on fixed sections, please Cytoskeleton and cytoskeleton-associated molecules – R: Buffer A (or AG)
remember that two factors define the choice of buffer:
Intracellular domain of some adhesion molecules and surface
T The nature of the antigen/epitope and of the antibody used receptors – R: Buffer B (or BG)
for its detection
Intracellular domain of some adhesion molecules and surface
T The fixative used and the degree of fixation. receptors – R: Buffer C (or CG)
Correction for Fixative & Degree of Fixation Most of antibodies raised against a linear peptide – R: Buffer U (or UG)
The suggested protocol for processing tissues is optimized for routinely Ordering Information:
formalin-fixed and paraffin embedded material. If the tissue used for
sections was insufficiently fixed, overfixed (was left in formalin for too long), Cat.# Description Quantity
or other fixative was used, the protocol may require some modifications. 62700-20 Retriever 220 volt each
The easiest correction is to use EMS's own specially formulated buffers for 62700-10 Retriever 115 volt each
a gentle (G) tissue processing. Use them instead of the basic buffers. For 62706-10 R-Buffer A (10x) 250 ml
62706-11 R-Buffer B (10x) 250 ml
overfixed material try using U buffer or run the additional cycle in the same
62706-12 R-Buffer C (10x) 250 ml
buffer. 62706-13 R-Buffer U (10x) 250 ml
Fixative Used on Tissues Buffer 62707-10 R-Buffer AG (2x) 250 ml
62707-11 R-Buffer BG (2x) 250 ml
Formalin, buffered ..............................................R-Buffer A, B, C or U
62707-12 R-Buffer CG (2x) 250 ml
Formalin-Zn ........................................................R-Buffer A, B, C or U 62707-13 R-Buffer UG (2x) 250 ml
Mirsky fixative ................................................................Under testing 62705-01 Slide Chamber 3/pk
Boonfix I..........................................................................Under testing 62705-02 Chamber Rack each
62705-03 Lifting Device each
Boonfix II ........................................................................Under testing
62705-04 Cord Set (UK) each
PLP ..................................................................R-buffer AG, BG, or CG 62705-05 Cord Set (Europe) each
62705-06 Cord Set (US) each
62705-07 Green Silicone Sealing Gasket each

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 613
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec15_612-616_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 11:13 PM Page 614

SECTION 15 Antigen Retrieval

Examples of Staining
® R-UNIVERSAL Epitope Recovery Buffer
Ki-67 (Nuclear antigen) (10x stock)
Sections of formalin-fixed, paraffin Why the Universal Buffer?
embedded tissue of human sigmoid were Epitope recovery on formalin-fixed, paraffin embedded tissue sections,
deparaffinized and processed in Retriever requires heat-induced treatment in buffer or, sometimes, proteolitic
to unmask the antigen. We used one cycle treatment of the deparaffinized tissue section. Which buffer to use,
in R-Buffer C (pH 6.0) with cooling of the greatly depends on the exact antibody and the properties of the
slides overnight. Antibody MIB-1 against recognized epitope, therefore, one can find in literature and practice
proliferation marker Ki-67 (nuclear) was use of many buffers, including Citrate pH 3.4, Citrate 6.0, EDTA 8.0,
used together with R-Detect HRP detection Tris 9.0- 10.0, Tris-EDTA, etc.
system for immunostaining of sections.
Moreover, for individual antigens also the time of recovery in the
CD8 (Membrane) individual buffer should be defined, as this may be different, and the
Sections of formalin-fixed, paraffin treatment often destroys the epitope.
embedded tissue of human sigmoid were
deparaffinized and processed in Retriever EMS offers a novel (patent-pending) technology for epitope recovery,
to unmask the antigen. We used one cycle primarily based on reversing the fixation effects of formaldehyde, which
in R-Buffer A (pH 8.1) with cooling of the created links primarily between Îμ-amino groups of lysine and other
slides overnight. Antibody #4B11 against amino-groups.
T-cell marker CD8 (cell membrane) was The buffer was extensively tested in pathology Departments in United
used together with R-Detect HRP detection Kingdom, and has shown excellent results when used with different
system for immunostaining of sections. antibodies, including those that normally require for successful staining
treatment only in Low, or only High pH buffers, or require protolithic
® Retriever Tissue Slides treatment.
Retriever Tissue Slides are high adhesive glass microscope slides for The EMS Universal Buffer may be used in any heat-induced epitope
paraffin-embedded tissue section, including tissue arrays. The slides recovery system (the time and temperature of treatment should be
were designed and optimized for the EMS Antigen Retriever (62700 tested), but was specifically adjusted for tissue sections processing in
series) to preserve the section attachment and tissue morphology during our Antigen Retriever (62700 Series).
heat-induced epitope recovery in Retriever in pH6 (Low), pH9 (High), or
Using our Universal Buffer in our Retriever guarantees the highest rate of
Universal Retriever buffer.
success in recovering epitope for any antibody, especially one that was
Slides can also be successfully used in any other epitope-recovery never previously used on formalin-fixed sections.
technology (autoclave, microwave, proteolitic) and show superior
performance over positively charged or polylysine-coated slides,
Properties
Clear, non-toxic solution.
especially in high pH buffers and recovery buffers containing EDTA.
Presentation
General Properties R-Universal Buffer is supplied as 10x concentrate. For epitope recovery
T Retriever Tissue Slides are made from soda lime glass dilute 1 part of stock with 9 parts of deionized water.
T Dimensions approximately 76 x 26mm, Thickness 1.0mm. Application
T 90° ground edges For epitope recovery dilute 1 part of stock with 9 parts of deionized
T Colored or white marking area 20mm, at one end, on one side water.
T Pre-cleaned, ready for use Stability and Storage
T Autoclavable The preparation is stable for 1 year when stored unopened at +4˚C.
T Supplied in plastic boxes of 72 pieces (call for carton price, 20 Every lot is issued with a certificate indicating the expiry date.
boxes in a carton) After opening, store at +4˚C in the refrigerator and use within 6 months.
T Carry recommended best before date and batch number for
comprehensive information and traceability Certification
Each lot is certified for compliance to specifications. The product is
produced under DIN EN ISO 9001 :2008 Quality Management system
71880-50 Retriever Tissue Slides 72/pk for the products in Immunoassay Development and Measurement,
71880-50-CS Retriever Tissue Slides 20/pk case Products for Bioanalytics and lmmunoassays.

® ImmunoSaver Antigen Retriever

Immunosaver allows for Immunostaining with quick and Ordering Information
0-4˚C 62719-10 R-UNIVERSAL Epitope Recovery Buffer
easy activation of cell membranes and the nucleus.
(10x stock) 125 ml
Immunosaver provides efficient antigen retrieval for 0-4˚C 62719-20 R-UNIVERSAL Epitope Recovery Buffer
successful immunostaining of a wide variety of (10x stock) 500 ml
antigens under optimized conditions.
Protocols for both Light and Electron Microscopy may
be found with this reagent.
64142 ImmunoSaver 100 ml

614 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec15_612-616_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 11:14 PM Page 615

Antigen Retrieval SECTION 15

Reduce The Background,

Not The Specific Staining
Reliable time tested solution to unmask antigen
on formalin-fixed sections
Any antibody preparation has
some potential to produce non-
specific reaction in the assay.
This originates from:
• non-specific antibodies that ® Section Block
are present in some proportion A new class of blocking solutions based on chemically modified and
in any polyclonal antibody preparation, including affinity purified ones fragmented ultra-pure casein. Effectively reduces unwanted binding of
(often "affinity purified" means only isolation of IgG fraction on Prot primary antibody and conjugates you use to charged surface of the slide
A/G column, not the purification on the antigen column under very and tissue section. Greatly reduces non-specific binding while preserving
stringent conditions) the specific reaction, by saturating potential non-specific protein-protein
• low specificity antibodies among specific ones in polyclonal interactions. Moreover, in contrast to BSA-based, IgGm casein or serum
-based blocking solutions there is no interaction of specific antibody and
• fragments of fallen apart IgGs in stored preparations, including
blocking protein itself. or oth Is not comparable to other commercially
monoclonal
available or home-made blocking solutions. Recommended for research
• separate heavy and light chains of specific antibodies, produced by and diagnostic pathology, especially for retrieved sections and polyclonal
most hybridomas antibodies..
All these are capable of binding non-specifically to molecules on tissue ® Antibody Diluent
sections, blots, fixed cells and other objects for immune detection. In
Buffer for diluting your primary and secondary antibodies, especially if
case of retrieved formalin sections the risk of non-specific reaction is
they were stored for a while, even at -20 in glycerol, or in refrigerator.
even increased, since to active the epitope recovery the proteins
Nonspecific binding of the antibodies, negative effects of disturbing
comprising the tissue sections are denatured during HIER, thus making
substances and low or medium affinity cross-reactivities of the
accessible many domains that are charged and are capable of binding
antibodies will be minimized, making your result more reliable. Excellent
the test immunoglobulins on non-specific manner.
for IHC (frozen and formalin sections), flow cytometry on fixed cells,
The standard means to block non-specific binding of specific antibody Western Blot and other immune assays.
preparation is to add some irrelevant protein, such as BSA, other serum,
When used in pathology, in also greatly reduces non-specific reactivity
casein, etc. However, everyone who tried to do this knows that
of human serum components and immunoglobulins in tissue, vessels
increasing (for effective blocking) concentration of such blocking agent
and cells with mouse antibodies used on section.
leads to a great reduction of specific reaction as well. This is due to
large blocking molecules binding to accessible sites on section and thus For especially "trouble"-giving antibodies, as well as for in situ PCR
sterically blocking access of specific antibodies to epitopes of interest applications, this dilutent may also be used as a washing buffer,
(schematically represented in the figure on the left, top). All our buffers preventing secondary binding of your analystes during washing.
developed for immune assays contain instead short (0.6-2 kD) peptides ® HRP-Conjugate Dilutent
that are capable of block effectively non-specific reaction while not
Specifically designed for preparing solution of your HRP-conjugate used
affecting the specific binding of antibody.
as the detection reagent. It is the Antibody-dilutent buffer with additional
The presented collection of Immunohistology buffers has also some component for stabilizing your HRP-conjugate. Allows you to further
other benefits (see below) and allows you to achieve the best quality IHC standardize the assay preparing ready-to-use conjugate solutions in
result without compromising the antigen detection. The buffers can also advance and store them in refrigerator without loss of activity.
be used in other immune assays, such as immunofluorescence on
sections, flow cytometry on fixed cells, western blot, hybridization of
sections with antibody detection. Ordering Information
The Retriever IHC buffers empower you to control non-specific staining Cat. # Description Qty.
on every step of immunohistochemistry. They are especially highly 62710 Section Block 50 ml
recommended for research pathology where, in contrast to diagnostics, 62711 Section Block 125 ml
many polyclonal and/or low-affinity antibodies are used. 62712 Section Block 500 ml
62713 Antibody Dilutent 50ml
All buffers available in 50 ml, 125 ml and 500 ml package. Ready to
62714 Antibody Dilutent 125ml
use. 62715 Antibody Dilutent 500ml
62713-01 Antibody Dilutent for Frozen Sections 50ml
62714-01 Antibody Dilutent for Frozen Sections 125ml
62715-01 Antibody Dilutent for Frozen Sections 500ml
62716 HRP Conjugate Dilutent 50 ml
62717 HRP Conjugate Dilutent 125ml
62718 HRP Conjugate Dilutent 500 ml
62718-15 Slide Washing Buffer 10 X 500 ml

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 615
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec15_612-616_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 6/30/14 11:14 PM Page 616

SECTION 15 Antigen Retrieval

EMS is proud to introduce a broad ® IV. Citrate Buffer pH 6.0 (10x) (continued)
selection of Antigen Retrievers in IHC... retriever in IHC. Please refer to primary antibody protocol.
Reagent: 10 X, pH 6 antigen retriever solution.
® I. Trypsin Reagent Preparation of Working Solution: Dilute this 10X buffer as needed (e.g.
Description: Trypsin is used for proteolytic digestion of formalin-fixed 90 ml of deionized or distilled water + 10 ml of this buffer), mix well, 1X
paraffin-embedded (FFPE) tissue sections prior to application of antibodies. buffer can be stored at 2–8ºC
In IHC most commonly used fixative like formalin; mask tissue antigens
Cat. # Description Qty.
(cellular, membrane and nuclear) by cross-linking process, this results in poor
64142-07 Citrate Buffer pH 6.0 100 ml
or no staining in IHC. Trypsin digestion improves immunoreactivity of some 62142-08 Citrate Buffer pH 6.0 1000 ml
antigens in FFPE tissue sections. For cytokeratin clone AE3 and AE1/AE3,
this enzyme works much better than boiling the tissue with citrate buffer. ® V. EDTA Buffer pH 8.5 (10x)
Storage: 2–8˚C. DO NOT FREEZE Description: This buffer is intended for heat-induced antigen retriever on
Intended Use: Use as antigen retriever for some antibodies in IHC. formalin-fixed paraffin-embedded (FFPE) tissue sections prior to application of
Please refer to primary antibody protocol for IHC. antibodies. In IHC most commonly used fixative like formalin mask tissue
Reagent: This enzyme is supplied as concentrated form along with buffer. antigens (cellular, membrane and nuclear) by cross-linking process, this
The kit comes in 2 sizes. Small: Reagent B (Buffer) is 15 ml and the results in poor or no staining in IHC. The use of this buffer on FFPE tissue
Reagent E (Enzyme) is 2 ml section improves accessibility of antibodies to tissue antigens.
Large: Reagent B (Buffer) is 100 ml and the Reagent E (Enzyme) is 10 ml Storage: 2–8˚C. DO NOT FREEZE
Cat. # Description Qty. Intended Use: 1X buffer solution is intended for heat-induced antigen
64142-01 Trypsin Kit Small Kit retriever in IHC. Please refer to primary antibody protocol.
62142-02 Trypsin Kit Large Kit Reagent: 10 X, pH 8.5 antigen retriever solution.
Preparation of Working Solution: Dilute this 10X buffer as needed (e.g.
® II. Pronase Reagent, Ready To Use
90 ml of deionized or distilled water + 10 ml of this buffer), mix well, 1X
Description: Pronase is used for proteolytic digestion of formalin-fixed
buffer can be stored at 2-8ºC
paraffin-embedded (FFPE) tissue sections prior to application of antibodies.
In IHC most commonly used fixative like formalin mask tissue antigens Cat. # Description Qty.
(cellular, membrane and nuclear) by cross-linking process, this results in 64142-09 EDTA Buffer pH 8.5 100 ml
62142-10 EDTA Buffer pH 8.50 1000 ml
poor or no staining in IHC. Pronase digestion of FFPE tissue section
improves accessibility of antibodies to tissue antigens. ® VI. Tris Buffer pH 10.0 (10x)
Storage: 2–8˚C. DO NOT FREEZE Description: This buffer is intended for heat-induced antigen retriever on
Intended Use: Use as antigen retriever for some antibodies in IHC. Please formalin-fixed paraffin-embedded (FFPE) tissue sections prior to application
refer to primary antibody protocol for IHC. of antibodies. In IHC most commonly used fixative like formalin mask tissue
Reagent: Ready-to-use Pronase reagent available in 2 sizes: 15 and 100 ml. antigens (cellular, membrane and nuclear) by cross-linking process, this
Cat. # Description Qty. results in poor or no staining in IHC. The use of this buffer on FFPE tissue
64142-03 Pronase Reagent 15 ml section improves accessibility of antibodies to tissue antigens.
62142-04 Pronase Reagent 100 ml Storage: 2–8˚C. DO NOT FREEZE
® III. Pepsin Reagent, Ready To Use Intended Use: 1X buffer solution is intended for heat-induced antigen
Description: Pepsin is used for proteolytic digestion of formalin-fixed retriever in IHC. Please refer to primary antibody protocol.
paraffin-embedded (FFPE) tissue sections prior to application of antibodies. Reagent: 10 X, pH 10 antigen retriever solution.
In IHC most commonly used fixative like formalin mask tissue antigens Preparation of Working Solution: Dilute this 10X buffer as needed (e.g.
(cellular, membrane and nuclear) by cross-linking process, this results in 90 ml of deionized or distilled water + 10 ml of this buffer), mix well, 1X
poor or no staining in IHC. Pepsin digestion of FFPE tissue section improves buffer can be stored at 2-8ºC
accessibility of antibodies to tissue antigens. Cat. # Description Qty.
Storage: 2–8˚C. DO NOT FREEZE 64142-11 Tris Buffer pH 10.0 100 ml
Intended Use: Use as antigen retriever for some antibodies in IHC. Please 62142-12 Tris Buffer pH 10.0 1000 ml
refer to primary antibody protocol for IHC. ® VII. ImmunoHistoZyme™, Ready-to-Use
Reagent: Ready-to-use Pepsin reagent available in 2 sizes: 15 and 100 ml Description: ImmunoHistoZyme is used for proteolytic digestion of
Cat. # Description Qty. formalin-fixed paraffin-embedded (FFPE) tissue sections prior to application
64142-05 Pepsin Reagent 15 ml of antibodies. In IHC most commonly used fixative like formalin mask tissue
62142-06 Pepsin Reagent 100 ml antigens (cellular, membrane and nuclear) by cross-linking process, this
® IV. Citrate Buffer pH 6.0 (10x) results in poor or no staining in IHC. ImmunoHistoZyme digestion of FFPE
Description: This buffer is intended for heat-induced antigen retriever on tissue section improves accessibility of antibodies to tissue antigens.
formalin-fixed paraffin-embedded (FFPE) tissue sections prior to application of Storage: 2–8˚C. DO NOT FREEZE
antibodies. In IHC most commonly used fixative like formalin mask tissue Intended Use: Use as antigen retriever for some antibodies in IHC. Please
antigens (cellular, membrane and nuclear) by cross-linking process, this refer to primary antibody protocol for IHC.
results in poor or no staining in IHC. The use of this buffer on FFPE tissue Reagent: Ready-to-use ImmunoHistoZyme Reagent.
section improves accessibility of antibodies to tissue antigens. Cat. # Description Qty.
Storage: 2–8˚C. DO NOT FREEZE 64142-13 ImmunoHistoZyme 15 ml
Intended Use: 1X buffer solution is intended for heat-induced antigen 62142-14 ImmunoHistoZyme 100 ml

616 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec16_617_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 7/2/14 1:43 AM Page 617

SECTION 16

Scanning Electron Microscope

Supplies
Scintillators
Specimen Mounts
SEM Specimen and FIB and STEM Sample Holders
Portable Storage Containers and Mount Storage
Boxes
Colloidal Compounds and Conductive Adhesives
Conductive Adhesives Tabs, Tapes, and Sheets
WETSEM® Capsules for Hydrated SEM Samples
- QuantomiX WETSEM®
- Product Listings
- WETSEM® Applications
- WETSEM® Gallery
- FAQs
- Publications
- Request a Feasibility Study
SPM, AFM, SEM Calibration Standards
Scanning Electron Microscope Digital Images
MeX 3D Scanning Electron Microscope

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 617
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec16_618-639_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 7/2/14 1:37 AM Page 618

SECTION 16 Scanning Electron Microscope Supplies

® Scintillators
® P47 Scintillators better than plastic or phosphor scintillators. Light emission peaks at about
They are coated with a thin layer of well 560nm which means that S20 photocathodes are most suitable for detecting
selected P47 phosphor (Y1Si2O7:Ce3+; the emission. YAG is suited for high current operations. The response is better
yttrium silicate activated with cerium), then for the P47 discs below 5kV and again at higher accelerating voltages,
and have a high signal output and a good where the performance of powder scintillators fall off while the response of
working life. They need not be coated the YAG continues to increase linearly. The crystal should be coated with
with aluminum prior to use unless 50nm of aluminum prior to use. If the layer becomes damaged it can be
cathodoluminescence studies are required. removed with sodium hydroxide. The crystals are mounted with the matt
surface in contact with the light pipe as this has shown to increase
® YAG Single Crystal Scintillator Discs the efficiency.
ADVANTAGES:
® YAP Single Crystal Scintillator Discs
T Low Phosphor Noise.
YAP (Yttrium Aluminum Perovskite activated by Ce3+) shares the same
T High Resistance to Radiation
Damage. advantages as YAG but is more efficient in terms of light output than YAG
crystals. As well, the emission spectrum peaks at about 378nm, and this
T Long Working Life.
corresponds closely to the maximum sensitivity of the S11 photocathode
T Possible Application in which in general is used in most scanning electron microscopes. (There
Ultrahigh Vacuum Conditions.
would be more improvement in signal by using a YAP crystal rather than
YAG (Yttrium Aluminum Garnet activated YAG in these microscopes). The decay time of YAP (40ns) is faster than
by Ce3+) has a very fast response time of YAG (80ns) so its overall performance is superior to YAG. YAP crystals
50-60ns and they do withstand well to the should be coated with 50nm of aluminum prior to use.
bombardment by electrons or ions far

Dia.(mm) Cat.# Cat.# Cat.#

xThick(mm) Instrument P-47 YAG YAP

6.2x1 Phillip Quad Detector 82010 82040 82070

7.5x1 ISI Mini-SEM 82012 82042 82072
8.8x2 Jeol JSM T20, T200, T300, 340 82013 82043 82073
9.0x3 ETEC 82014 82044 82074
10.0x1 Cambridge except S600, AMRAY 1200 82016 82046 82076
12.0x1 Cambridge S600 82017 82047 82077
12.0x.17 Zeiss SEM 82018 82048 82078
12.4x3.2. Cameca 82020 82050 82080
13.7x1 ISI Mini-SEM, Jeol 82021 82051 82081
16.4x.17 Novascan, SEMCO/Zeiss 82022 82052 82082
18.0x1 Camscan, Balscan, Cambridge S-4 82024 82054 82084
19.0x1 Jeol U3, JSM2 82026 82056 82086
19.0x7.3. ARL SEMQ 82028 82058 82088
19.8x1 Hitachi w/metal ring. 82029 82059 82089
20.0x1 AMRAY except 1200, Jeol 50A, 35,Hitachi 82030 82060 82090
20.0x2 Philips SEM 82032 82062 82092
Note: P-47 is usually in-stock. YAG and YAP delivery time is 6-8 weeks.

® Light Pipe Scintillators

The light pipe is the connection P47P Light Pipes
between the scintillator and the Microscope Substrate Style Length Cat. No.
phosphomultiplier tube (PMT). It Cambridge Quartz Angled —— 82000-10
transfers the photons produced by Cambridge Quartz Straight 74mm 82000-74
the scintillator for detection by the Cambridge Quartz Straight 89mm 82000-89
PMT. We coat the scintillator Cambridge Quartz Straight 104mm 82000-104
material directly on the light pipe Cambridge Quartz Straight Up to 200mm 82000-x *
which improves the signal. Light Cambridge Acrylic Reduced Tip 88mm 82001-88
Pipes are available in optical quality Cambridge Acrylic Reduced Tip 100mm 82001-100
quartz and optical grade acrylic. Cambridge Acrylic Reduced Tip 120mm 82001-120
Cambridge reduced-tip models are only available in acrylic. High voltage Cambridge Acrylic Reduced Tip Any 82001-x*
wire and corona ring are included. JEOL pipes include a flange. Price JEOL U-2, U-3 Quartz 1⁄4" Collar 60mm 82004-60
includes one Re-coating Certificate. Re-coating is typically needed twice JEOL JSM-35 Quartz 1⁄2" Collar 60mm 82005-60
per year. Re-coating
Service ———— Various ————- 82008-RS
* Replace the asterisk by the length of the Light Pipe

618 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec16_618-639_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 7/2/14 1:37 AM Page 619

Scanning Electron Microscope Supplies SECTION 16

® Specimen Mounts
We have now expanded our Specimen Mount section due to the increased demand for us to offer more of a variety. To make your SEM work easier and save
you a great deal of time searching for the right mount, we now offer you a complete line of specimen mounts.
Aluminum Mounts - Made from ultra-pure aluminum. The more popular mounts are available in two grades of finish: standard and polished (luster).
Standard finish: lathe finish; economically priced. Polished finish: A cloth polished finish which produces a smooth and luster surface.
Carbon Mounts - Spectroscopically pure.

® AMRAY 1000/1200 ® AMRAY, Cambridge, Leica, ZEISS/LEO, FEI/Philips,

Head: 1" dia. (25.4mm), CamScan, Tescan,
pin 1⁄8" dia. (3.1mm) aluminum, Slotted Head
Head: 2.48" dia. (63 mm),
pin 1⁄8" dia. (3.2mm)
Aluminum: Standard
75636-70 10/pk
75636-80 50/pk
75636-90 100/pk 75636-70
Aluminum: Standard
75100 10/pk
75110 50/pk ® Cambridge S-4, Mark II,
75120 100/pk 75100 S-410...
Head: 11⁄4" dia. (31.7mm)
® AMRAY 1000/1200/1400 x 3⁄16" H (6.4mm)
Head: 1⁄2" dia. (12.7mm),
pin 1⁄8" dia. (3.1mm) Aluminum: Standard
75050 10/pk
Aluminum: Standard
Aluminum: Standard 75060 50/pk
75140 10/pk 75070 100/pk
75150 50/pk
75160 100/pk Carbon (Spectro-pure): Standard
76180 10/pk
Polished
Polished 76181 50/pk 75050
75165 10/pk
75166 50/pk
75167 100/pk 75140 ® Cambridge, Leica, LEO, ZEISS, Philips, FEI,
Carbon (spectro-pure):
Carbon (Spectro-pure):Standard
Standard CamScan, Tescan, ETEC
76140 10/pk Slotted Head, numbered 1-alpha/4-numeric.*
76150 50/pk Head: 1⁄2” (12.7mm), pin 1⁄8" dia. (3.2mm)
76160 100/pk
Pin Height: 8mm
® AMRAY 1400 Aluminum: Standard
Slotted Head 1⁄2" dia. (12.7mm), 75220-12 500/pk 75220-12
pin 1⁄8" dia. (3.1mm) * Designate number sequence when ordering

Aluminum: Standard
75170 10/pk ® Cambridge, Leica, ZEISS/LEO, FEI/Philips, PHENOM,
75172 50/pk CamScan, Tescan Slotted Head
75174 100/pk Head: 18 mm, pin 1⁄8" dia. (3.2mm)
d Pin Height: 8mm
Carbon (Spectro-pure): Standard Aluminum: Standard
76170 10/pk 75636-10 10/pk
76171 50/pk 75170 75636-20 50/pk
75636-30 100/pk 75636-10
® AMRAY, Cambridge,
Leica, ZEISS/LEO, ® Cambridge, Leica, ZEISS/LEO,
FEI/Philips, CamScan, FEI/Philips, PHENOM, CamScan,
Tescan Slotted HEad Tescan, ETEC and Amray, Mini
Head: 2" dia. (50 mm), Head: 6.6 x 1.3mm
pin 1⁄8" dia. (3.2mm) Pin Height: 9.5 mm
Aluminum: Standard
Aluminum: Standard
75636-40 10/pk 75638-10 10/pk
75636-50 50/pk 75638-10
75638-20 50/pk
75636-60 100/pk 75638-30 100/pk
75636-40

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 619
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec16_618-639_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 7/2/14 1:38 AM Page 620

SECTION 16 Scanning Electron Microscope Supplies

® Specimen Mounts (continued)

® Cambridge, Phillips, Camscan, PHENOM, B&L, ® FEI/Philips, ZEISS/LEO,

Etec, Zeiss, etc. Cambridge, Leica, Amray,
Tapered end pin, Slotted head 1⁄2" Tescan and Camscan SEMs
dia. (12.7mm), pin 1⁄8" dia. (3.1mm) 9 Divisions
Head: 1" dia. (25mm)
Aluminum: Standard
Aluminum: Standard
Pin Height: 9.0mm
75200 10/pk
75210 50/pk Pin: 1⁄8" dia. (3.2mm)
75220 100/pk Aluminum: Standard
75230 500/pk
75183-40 10/pk
Polished 75183-50 50/pk
75235 10/pk 75183-60 100/pk 75183
75236 50/pk 75200
75237 100/pk
75238 500/pk ® Leica, Cambridge, Leo,
Carbon (Spectro-pure): Standard
FEI, Phillips, PHENOM,
76200 10/pk Zeiss, Camscan etc.
76210 50/pk Aluminum slotted head.
76220 100/pk Head: 1" (25.4mm) x 1⁄2" (12.7mm) H,
Pin: 1⁄8" dia. (3.1mm)
® Cambridge, Leo, Phillips
500, Cameca etc.
Aluminum small, slotted head
Head: 3⁄8" (9.6 mm) x 7⁄16" (11.2 mm) H, 75183 10/pk
Pin: 1⁄8" (3.1mm) 75184 50/pk
75185 100/pk
75183

® Leica, Cambridge, Leo,

FEI, Phillips, Zeiss, Camscan
75180 100/pk etc.
75181 500/pk 75180 Aluminum large slotted head.
Head: 1 1⁄4" (32mm) x 1⁄2" (12.7mm) H,
® Cambridge, Leo, Philips Pin: 1⁄8" dia. (3.1mm)
500, Cameca etc.
Aluminum, non-slotted head. Head 1”
(25.4 mm), pin 3.1 mm x 11mm long
total (or 8 mm pin only)
75187 10/pk
75188 50/pk
75189 100/pk 75187

® Hitachi
75186 100/pk 75186 M4 Tapered hole, female thread
Head: 1" dia. (26mm),
® FEI/Philips, ZEISS/LEO, Cambridge, Leica, Height: 1⁄4" (6mm)
Amray, Tescan and Camscan , PHENOM, SEMs Comes either plain or with
3-Divisions 9 divisions.
Head: 1⁄2" dia. (12.7 mm)
Pin Height: 9.0 mm
Pin: 1⁄8" (3.2mm) Aluminum: Standard
75183-10
Aluminum: Standard 75621 10/pk 75621
75183-10 10/pk 75622 50/pk
75183-20 50/pk 75623 100/pk
75621-d 10/pk 75621-d
75183-30 100/pk
75622-d 50/pk (9 divisions)
75623-d 100/pk

620 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec16_618-639_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 7/2/14 1:38 AM Page 621

Scanning Electron Microscope Supplies SECTION 16

® Specimen Mounts (continued)

® Hitachi ® Hitachi M4 Thread

Head: 5⁄8" dia. (15mm) Head: 11⁄4" (32mm)
Height: 1⁄2" (13mm) Height: 1⁄4" (6.0mm)
Aluminum: Standard
75635-70 10/pk
75635-80 50/pk 75635-70
Aluminum: Standard 75635-90 100/pk
75630 10/pk
Same as above but with 12 divisions
75631 50/pk
75635-70D 10/pk
75632 100/pk 75630 75635-80D 50/pk
75635-90D 100/pk
® Hitachi
Head: 9⁄16" (14mm),
Height: 3⁄8" (10mm)
® Hitachi M4 Thread
Head: 1" dia. (25mm)
Height: 3⁄8" (10mm)
Aluminum: Standard
75650 10/pk Aluminum: Standard 75635-40
75651 50/pk 75635-40 10/pk
75652 100/pk 75650 75635-50 50/pk
75635-60 100/pk

® Hitachi S-450
M4 Tapered hole, female thread ® Hitachi M4 Thread
Head: 5⁄8" (15mm), Head: 5⁄8" dia. (15mm)
Height: 1⁄4" (6mm) Height: 3⁄8" (10mm)
Comes plain or with 3 divisions
Aluminum: Standard Aluminum: Standard
75635-10 10/pk
75600 10/pk
75635-20 50/pk 75635-10
75610 50/pk
75635-30 100/pk
75620 100/pk
75600-d 10/pk
75610-d 50/pk 75600 ® Hitachi M4 Thread
75620-d 100/pk Head: 11⁄4" (32mm)
Carbon (Spectro-pure): Standard 75600-d
Height: 3⁄8" (10mm)
76470 10/pk (3 divisions) Aluminum: Standard
76471 50/pk 75635-75 10/pk
75635-85 50/pk
® Hitachi S-500 75635-95 100/pk 75635-75
Threaded pin
Head: 1" dia. (25mm),
pin: 1⁄4" dia. (6mm) ® Hitachi M4 Thread
Head: 2" (50mm)
Height: 1⁄4" (6.0mm)
Aluminum: Standard
75635-77 10/pk
75635-87 50/pk
75640 10/pk
75635-97 100/pk 75635-77
75642 50/pk
75644 100/pk 75640

® Hitachi, M4 ® Hitachi M4
Head: 1 ¼” (32mm) Surface: 1” (25mm),
Height: ¼” (6mm) Height: 5/8" (16mm)
75660 Aluminum: Standard
Aluminum: Standard 75662-10 10/pk
75660 10/pk 75662-20 50/pk
75661 50/pk 75662-30 100/pk
75662 100/pk
75662-10

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 621
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec16_618-639_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 7/2/14 1:38 AM Page 622

SECTION 16 Scanning Electron Microscope Supplies

® Specimen Mounts (continued)

® ISI, ABT, Topcon, ® JEOL

Aluminum Head: 11⁄4" dia. (32mm)
Head: 5⁄8" (15mm) x 1⁄4" (5mm) H Height: 3⁄8" (10mm)
Aluminum: Standard
75830-70 10/pk
75830-80 50/pk
75830-90 100/pk 75830-70

75433 50/pk
75434 100/pk ® JEOL
75433
Head: 11⁄4" dia. (32mm)
Height: 3⁄16" (5mm)
® ISI, ABT, Topcon, Aluminum
Head: 0.93" dia. (23.7mm) Aluminum: Standard
Height: 3⁄8" (9.5mm) 75830-40 10/pk
75830-50 50/pk
75830-60 100/pk
23.7 mm

75830-40
75436 10/pk 9.5 mm

75437 50/pk
75438 100/pk 75436 ® JEOL, Aluminum
Head: 11⁄4" dia. (32mm)
® Coates & Welter Height: 3⁄8" (10mm)
Head: 3⁄4" dia. (19mm)
Pin: 3⁄8" dia. (9.6mm)
75702 10/pk
75703 50/pk
75704 100/pk
75702

Aluminum: Standard
75250 10/pk ® JEOL, Aluminum
75252 50/pk Head: 2" dia. 50mm
75254 100/pk Height: 3⁄16" (5mm)
75250

® JEOL
Head: 3⁄8" dia. (10mm) 75705 10/pk
75706 100/pk
Height: 3⁄16" (5mm)
75705

® JEOL, Aluminum
Aluminum: Standard Head: 2" dia. 50mm
75350 50/pk Height: 3⁄8" (10mm)
75360 100/pk
75370 500/pk 75350
75707 10/pk
75708 100/pk
® JEOL
Head :1" dia. (25mm)
75705
Height: 13⁄16" (20mm)

Aluminum: Standard ® JEOL, Aluminum

75830-10 10/pk 75830-10 Head: 1" dia. (25mm)
75830-20 50/pk Height: 1⁄2" (12.7mm)
75830-30 100/pk

25.0 mm

75690 10/pk
75691
12.7 mm
50/pk
75692 100/pk
75690

622 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec16_618-639_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 7/2/14 1:38 AM Page 623

Scanning Electron Microscope Supplies SECTION 16

® Specimen Mounts (continued)

® JEOL, Aluminum ® JEOL JSM 840

Head: 12.2mm x 10mm H Head: 1⁄2" dia. (12.5mm)
Height: 1⁄4" (5mm)
75726 50/pk
75727 100/pk 75740
Aluminum: Standard
75726-d 50/pk 75740 50/pk
75727-d 100/pk 75742 100/pk
75744 pk/250
75726-d
(3 divisions) Carbon (Spectro-pure): Standard
76330 10/pk
75726
76331 50/pk

® JEOL
Head: 3⁄8" dia. (10mm),
® JEOL JSM 840
Head: 1"Dia (25mm),
Height: 3⁄8" (10mm)
Height: 1⁄4" (5mm)
Aluminum: Standard
75300 10/pk
75310 50/pk 75300
75320 100/pk Aluminum: Standard
75330 50/pk0 75700 10/pk
75710 50/pk
Carbon (Spectro-pure): Standard 75720 100/pk
76300 10/pk 75700
76310 50/pk
76320 100/pk ® JEOL JSM 840
Head: 1" Dia (25mm),
® JEOL, ISI Height: 3⁄8" (10mm)
Head: 5⁄8" dia. (15mm),
Height: 3⁄8" (10mm)
Aluminum: Standard
Aluminum: Standard 75721 10/pk
75440 10/pk 75440 75722 50/pk
75450 50/pk 75723 100/pk
75460 100/pk 75721
75470 50/pk0
® JEOL JSM 840
Carbon (Spectro-pure): Standard Head: 11⁄4" dia. (31.5mm),
76440 10/pk
Height: 13⁄16" (20mm)
76450 50/pk
76460 100/pk
Aluminum: Standard
75800 10/pk
® JEOL, ISI 75810 50/pk 75800
Head: 5⁄8" dia. (15mm), 75820 100/pk
Height: 5⁄8" (15mm)
® LEO Microscope
Aluminum: Standard Tapered end pin. Slotted head 1⁄2" dia.
75400 10/pk (12.7mm), pin 1⁄8" Dia (3.1mm)
75410 50/pk 75400
75420 100/pk x 5mm Length
75430 50/pk0 75190 50/pk
75191 100/pk
75192 50/pk0

® JEOL JSM 840 ®

Head: 1⁄2" dia. (12.5mm), Zeiss
Height: 3⁄8" (10mm) Flat End Pin Head: 1⁄2" dia. (12.7mm)
Slotted Head, 1⁄8" dia. (3.1mm) Pin
Aluminum: Standard
75730 50/pk 75730
75500 50/pk
75732 100/pk
75510 100/pk
75734 pk/250
75520 500/pk

75500

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 623
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec16_618-639_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 7/2/14 1:38 AM Page 624

SECTION 16 Scanning Electron Microscope Supplies

® 45° Angle SEM Aluminum ® Specimen Mount Tweezers:
1) Head: ⁄2" dia. (12.7mm),
1
Dumont Specimen mount Tweezers, the finest tweezers available.
1
⁄8" (3.1mm) pin
Choose the one that best suits your needs.
75240 10/pk
75242 50/pk 75240 76800

2) Head: 3⁄8" dia. (10mm),

Height: 3⁄8" (10mm)
75340 10/pk
75342 50/pk 75340
76802
3) Head : 5⁄8" dia. (15mm)
Height: 3⁄8" (10.0mm)
Aluminum: Standard
75241-10 10/pk
75241-20 50/pk 75241 76804
75241-30 100/pk

4) Head :1" dia. (25mm)

Height: 13⁄16" (20mm)
Aluminum: Standard
75241-40 10/pk Polished Dumoxel Antimagnetic Steel:
75241-50 50/pk 76800 Tweezers 2E1⁄2 (0=12.7mm) each
75241
75241-60 100/pk 76802 Tweezers 2E1⁄4 (0=6.4mm) each
76804 Tweezers 2E1⁄8 (0=3.2mm) each
® Combination 45º –
90º SEM ® SEM Mount Forceps
Aluminum slotted head with 3.1mm
diameter pin, fits most SEMs

75344 each

75344
Made from stainless steel with a serrated handle and a guide pin. The
® Combination 45º – tip is bent at a 45 degree and formed into a ring, which has a diameter
90º SEM, For Hitachi of 10mm when fully closed. 150mm long.
Aluminum slotted head.
76805 SEM Mount Forceps each
Head: 15mm x M4
Height: 10mm
® Unique Uni-Band Gripper
75344-H
75344-H each

® Double 45º,
For Hitachi
Aluminum
Head: 25mm x M4
Height: 4mm Unique Uni-Band Gripper - Made of 300 Series Memory Stainless Steel
75346-H which is harder than titanium. Perfect gripper for handling specimen
75346-H each mount stubs.
76806 Unique Uni-Band Gripper each
® Double 90º,
For Hitachi
Aluminum
Head: 25mm x M4
Height: 16mm
75355-H each 75355-H

624 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec16_618-639_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 7/2/14 1:38 AM Page 625

Scanning Electron Microscope Supplies SECTION 16

® Carbon Planchet for SEM ® Carbon Planchet Holder
Two configurations are offered: 1⁄2"dia.
1) 1⁄2" (12.7mm) surface 1⁄16" (12.7mm) and 1" dia. (25mm) with 1⁄8"
(1.6mm) height (3.1mm) pin.
76250 10/pk 76284 Carbon Planchet Holder, 1⁄2" each
76252 50/pk
76254 100/pk
76250 ® Pyrolytic Graphite
Planchet for SEM
Surface polish to 1 μm glassy finish
2) 1" (25.4mm) surface
1
⁄16" (1.6mm) height
76270 10/pk EMS $ Planchet Size, Dia x Thickness, mm Qty
76272 50/pk 76290-32 Pyrolytic Graphite Planchet, 25.4 x 3.2 each
76274 100/pk 76290-16 Pyrolytic Graphite Planchet, 25.4 x 1.6 each
76270 76291-32 Pyrolytic Graphite Planchet, 13.7 x 3.2 each
76291-16 Pyrolytic Graphite Planchet, 13.7 x 1.6 each

® PYROID® Pyrolytic Graphite Product Line — Vitreous Carbon Substrate

Our PYROID® pyrolytic graphite is a very Physical Properties of PYROID® Pyrolytic Graphite
light weight, 5’9’s pure, solid crystal Property Direction* Metric Units English Units
composition, with no granular Density ----- 2.22 g/cc 1.37 lb/ft3
components, extremely smooth surface, Flexual Strength
capable of withstanding cryogenic Room Temperature a 840 kg/cm2 12,000 psi
2750°C a 3,500 kg/cm2 50,000 psi
temperatures as well as temperatures
Compressive Strength
in excess of 3000°C Room Temperature a 1,050 kg/cm2 15,00 psi
The material is extremely anisotropic, c 1,750 kg/cm2 25,000 psi
meaning it conducts heat and electricity Shear Strength
in the a-b plane like cooper but acts Room Temperature a 70 kg/cm2 1, 000psi
Coefficient Thermal Expansion
like a ceramic in the normal direction.
Room Temperature a .60 x 10-6 cm/cm°C 1.0 x 10-6 in/in°F
In an annealed state, the thermal and 2200°C a .68 x 10-6 cm/cm°C 1.2 x 10-6 in/in°F
conduction properties increase up to Room Temperature c 6.8 x 10-6 cm/cm°C 12.0 x 10-6 in/in°F
four to eight times that of aluminum 2200°C c 8.0 x 10-6 cm/cm°C 14.7 x 10-6 in/in°F
and cooper respectively. Thermal Conductivity
Room Temperature a 345 W/m°K 200 BTU/(hr ft2)(°F/ft)
The material has zero porosity making it
1650°C a 114 W/m°K 66 BTU/(hr ft2)(°F/ft)
extremely stable and exhibits no Room Temperature c 1.73 W/m°K 1.00 BTU/(hr ft2)(°F/ft)
outgassing. It is ideal for use in 3000°F c 1.30 W/m°K 0.75 BTU/(hr ft2)(°F/ft)
corrosive environments including acids Electric Resistivity
and chlorine, and is highly transparent Room Temperature a 500 μΩcm
to organic samples and electrons, for 1650°C a 200 μΩcm
analytical work, such as x-ray Room Temperature c 0.6 Ωcm
investigation, metallurgical, crystal 1650°C c 0.22 Ωcm
Scleroscope Hardness a 103 103
growth, medical imaging technology
c 68 68
etc. Oxidation Threshold 650°C 1200°F
Pyroid® is trade mark name of MINTEQ Permeability Helium Leak Tight at
10 – 6 mmHg

® Sample Stub Vacuum Desiccators

Precision machined from a block of aluminum – anodized black - this Sample Stub Vacuum Desiccators
accommodates 18 SEM Mounted Sample Stubs, pin style, under vacuum for year long.
T Compact and sturdy – will last as long as you T Acrylic Clear top for easy viewing the contents
own them T Interlock when stack together to safe space
T Prevents oxidation from occurring to the sam- T Ideal for transport and storage samples for SEM,
ple during long term storage TEM, FIB, AFM, etc.
T All pin stubs are kept secure inside the cham- Measures: 13 cm x 13cm x 4.5cm High. Chamber
ber by a built in “O” ring in each position cavity is 10.4cm diameter x 18mm deep. Lid is made
T Very simple to use - Just need small vacuum with 10mm thick clear acrylic.
pump to evacuate air out of the chamber
76550 SEM Stub Vacuum Desiccator each

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 625
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec16_618-639_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 7/2/14 1:38 AM Page 626

SECTION 16 Scanning Electron Microscope Supplies

SEM for Forensics (continued)
EMS is pleased to now offer these specialized products for forensic investigation.

® Forensic Gunshot Residue Field Kits ® Forensic Gunshot Residue

Our comprehensive line of high-quality GSR field Lab Kit
sampling kits includes certified SEM pin stubs Includes ten 12.7mm SEM pin mounts in clean,
with double-coated adhesive carbon tabs in glass storage tubes (25mm OD x 55mm high)
plastic tubes. The certified SEM pin stubs have secured in a compact transport box with labels.
very low amounts of Pb, Sb and Ba, not This Kit is designed to avoid any contamination of
detectable by SEM/EDX. The caps securely hold GSR samples. Choose from either standard
the GSR sample disc for easy GSR collection. 12.7mm pin mounts with 8mm pins or with
Pre-labeled discs and tubes are both ready-for-sampling. A sturdy, sealed shorter 6mm pins. Also available as a sample kit without mounts and tabs.
tamper evident transport box is also included.
Cat. # Description Qty.
Kit contents: Product Details 76480-18 Forensic Gunshot Residue Lab Kit:
T Certified SEM pin mounts 3-Disc GSR Field Kit, with two 10 each 12.7mm SEM pin mounts (8mm pin), with mounted carbon tabs
with adhesive carbon discs (12mm; 0.47 dia.) in capped glass tubes, 12 blank labels kit
sampling discs plus a control disc to
76480-19 Forensic Gunshot Residue Lab Kit:
in pre-labeled tubes enhance certainty of the analysis. 10 each 12.7mm SEM short pin mounts (6mm pin for ZEISS/LEO),
T Powder-free nitrile gloves 4-Disc GSR Field Kit, is useful for with mounted carbon tabs (12mm; 0.47 dia.) in capped glass tubes,
T Evidence label sampling palm and back separately 12 blank labels kit
T Chain of custody label on box on both hands. Sample Kit without pin mounts and tabs:
T Tamper-evident cardboard 5-Disc GSR Field Kit, is 76480-22 Forensic Sample Kit:
transport box (4-1/2"W x compatible with FBI requirements, 10 capped glass sample tubes, 12 blank labels kit
3-3/4"D x 3"H) with four discs plus a control disc.
T Tamper evident seal ® Forensic Field Sampler
T Instruction sheet Glass specimen vial (25mm OD x 55mm
high) with a high-purity certified 12.7mm
Cat. # Description Qty.
SEM pin stub specimen mount (see below),
76480-11 3 Disc Forensic Gunshot Residue Field Kit kit
76480-13 4 Disc Forensic Gunshot Residue Field Kit kit both with and without an adhesive carbon
76480-15 5 Disc Forensic Gunshot Residue Field Kit kit conductive tab, mounted into the plastic
cap. Our Forensic Field Sampler has been
® Forensic Collection Kit designed to collect forensic evidence with minimum interference and/or
contamination from the sampler. Three versions are available: without
These kits are suitable for field work and adhesive carbon tab, with ready-to-use adhesive carbon tab, or with
gunshot residue in the lab or out. covered carbon tab (plastic cover needs to be removed prior to use).
Manufactured from a special – certified Choice of standard 12.7mm SEM pin mount with 8mm pin or 12.7mm
aluminum alloy, containing only trace SEM pin mount with shorter 6mm pin (ZEISS/LEO)
amounts of Barium (~0.00010%), Copper
(~0.0139%), Zinc (~0.0094%), Nickel (~0.00309%, and Antimony
Investigation Applications for SEM or Light Microscopy:
(~0.00080%). These sample mounts are suitable for typical forensic T Gunshot residue (GSR) T Paint chips
sample studies. The kit consists of 10 pin mounts (12.74mm diameter) T Powder samples T Particle sampling
10 carbon adhesive tabs, 10 storage vials, and one plastic tweezer. Two T Fiber samples T Glass fragments
styles of glass vials are available as well as one in plastic.
Ideal for SEM specimen preparation on the most frequently used SEM pin
Cat. # Description Pack stubs, facilitating easy carbon coating for SEM/EDX investigation.
76480-01 Kit with Glass Shell Vial, size 23.7mm Dia x 37mmH kit
76480-02 Kit with Glass Shell Vial, size 23.5mm Dia x 74mmH kit The Forensic Field Sampler can be securely stored in the glass specimen
76480-03 Kit with Plastic Vial, size 23.5mm Dia x 52.5mmH kit vial and easily shipped with the cap holding the sampler stub in place.
Adhesive carbon tabs secure the evidence material.
® Numbered Gunshot Cat. # Description Qty.
Residue Sampler 76480-31 Forensic Field Sampler without Adhesive Carbon Tab 100/pk
Numbered, certified aluminum mount with a 76480-32 Forensic Field Sampler with Adhesive Carbon Tab,
double-coated adhesive carbon tab applied to ready to use 100/pk
secure the sample in a clean, glass vial 25mm 76480-33 Forensic Field Sampler with Adhesive Carbon Tab,
OD x 55mm high (1" x 2.17"). Packaged in a and clear plastic cover 100/pk
76480-34 Forensic Field Sampler without Adhesive Carbon Tab,
box of 100. Numbers can be specified as 100
Short Pin 100/pk
consecutive numbers between 0 and 9999 (greatest numbers). Please 76480-35 Forensic Field Sampler with Adhesive Carbon Tab,
inform customer service about the numbering sequence when ordering ready to use, Short Pin 100/pk
this product. 76480-36 Forensic Field Sampler with Adhesive Carbon Tab,
Cat. # Description Qty. and clear plastic cover, Short Pin 100/pk
76480-16 Numbered Gunshot Residue Sampler 100/pk

626 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec16_618-639_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 7/2/14 1:39 AM Page 627

Scanning Electron Microscope Supplies SECTION 16

SEM for Forensics (continued)
EMS is pleased to now offer these specialized products for forensic investigation.

 Forensic Certified  Gunshot 76800

Mounts Residue
This mount is made from a Tweezers
special certified Aluminum alloy Dumont Gunshot
76802
which does not contain any of Residue Tweezers,
the objectionable elements that may interfere with samples collected for the finest tweezers
GSR . These mounts are available with an 8mm pin, or 6mm pin. available. Choose
the one that best 76804
Cat. # Description Qty.
suits your needs.
76475-05 Forensic Certified Mount, with 8mm Pin 10/pack
76475-10 Forensic Certified Mount, with 8mm Pin 100/pack Polished Dumoxel
76475-50 Forensic Certified Mount, with 8mm Pin 500/pack Antimagnetic Steel
76475-52 Forensic Certified Mount, with 6mm Pin 10/pack
76475-53 Forensic Certified Mount, with 6mm Pin 100/pack Cat. # Description Qty.
76475-54 Forensic Certified Mount, with 6mm Pin 500/pack 76800-GS Gunshot Residue Tweezers 2E1⁄2 (0=12.7mm) each
76802-GS Gunshot Residue Tweezers 2E1⁄4 (0=6.4mm) each
Gunshot Residue Tweezers 2E1⁄8 (0=3.2mm)
 SEM Single Mount 76804-GS each

Storage Tube  Circular Cover Glass – GOLD SEAL®

A plastic tube and plug. The pin
mount 1⁄8" (3.1mm) in diameter is GOLD SEAL® cover glass is made from pre-selected, pre-cleaned silicate
inserted securely to the plug and glass. It is packaged with desiccants in a lint free box. Both cover glass
protected by the tube. Ideal for cases and slide boxes convert to convenient slide storage files.
storage or mailing. Cat. # Dia. Thickness Pieces/oz Pack
76530-01 SEM Single Mount Storage Tube 10/pk 72231-01 12 mm #1 (.13-.17 mm) 692 1 oz.
76530-05 SEM Single Mount Storage Tube 50/pk 72231-10 12 mm #1 (.13-.17 mm) 692 10 oz.
76530-10 SEM Single Mount Storage Tube 100/pk 72228-01 15 mm #1 (.13-.17 mm) 443 1 oz.
72228-10 15 mm #1 (.13-.17 mm) 443 10 oz.
72229-01 18 mm #1 (.13-.17 mm) 308 1 oz.
 SEM Single Mount 72229-10 18 mm #1 (.13-.17 mm) 308 10 oz.
Storage Tube 72221-01 22 mm #1 (.13-.17 mm) 206 1 oz.
72221-10 22 mm #1 (.13-.17 mm) 206 10 oz.
and Mailer, for Hitachi 72223-01 25 mm #1 (.13-.17 mm) 159 1 oz.
72223-10 25 mm #1 (.13-.17 mm) 159 10oz.t
A plastic tube and plug for M4 threaded 72230-01 12 mm #1½ (.16-.19 mm) 597 1 oz.
Hitachi mounts. 15mm in diameter Tube. 72230-10 12 mm #1½ (.16-.19 mm) 597 10 oz.
A 15 mm Hitachi mount can be inserted 72222-01 18 mm #1½ (.16-.19 mm) 266 1 oz.
securely to the plug and then protected 72222-10 18 mm #1½ (.16-.19 mm) 266 10 oz.t
72224-01 22 mm #1½ (.16-.19 mm) 178 1 oz.
by the tube. Ideal for storage as well as mailing.
72224-10 22 mm #1½ (.16-.19 mm) 178 10 oz.
The internal diameter of the tube is 0.83”(21mm). The Outer 72225-01 25 mm #1½ (.16-.19 mm) 137 1 oz.
measurements of the tube are: 0.9” (23mm) x2.05” H (52mm) 72225-10 25 mm #1½ (.16-.19 mm) 137 10 oz.

76535-01 SEM Hitachi Single Mount Storage Tube 10/pack

76531-05 SEM Hitachi Single Mount Storage Tube 50/Pack  Metal Specimen Discs for use
76531-10 SEM Hitachi Single Mount Storage Tube 100/PAck with the Atomic Force Microscope

 SEM
Mount
Forceps
These are high quality metal discs with smooth edges and flat surfaces for
use in Atomic force Microscopy.
Made from stainless steel with a serrated handle and a guide pin. The tip is
bent at a 45 degree and formed into a ring, which has a diameter of 10mm Cat. # Description Qty
75010-10 10 mm Specimen Metal Discs for AFM 50/pk
when fully closed. 150mm long.
75010-12 12 mm Specimen Metal Discs for AFM 50/pk
76805 SEM Mount Forceps each 75010-15 15 mm Specimen Metal Discs for AFM 50/pk
75010-20 20 mm Specimen Metal Discs for AFM 50/pk

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 627
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec16_618-639_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 7/2/14 1:39 AM Page 628

SECTION 16 Scanning Electron Microscope Supplies

SEM for Forensics (continued)
EMS is pleased to now offer these specialized products for forensic investigation.

 Mica Sheets and Disks  Conductive Carbon

Adhesive Tabs
The Highest Quality (V-1 or V-2) for AFM
Applications to the Medium Quality (V4 to V- Standard Carbon Conductive Adhesive
6) for Replication, Thin Film Deposition Tabs – Tabs are formed by two sides of
EMS Mica Sheets offer a clean surface for thick conductive adhesive (45 μm on each
E.M. applications, carbon filming and particle side) with the center conductive core film
spraying, as well as for AFM applications. (35 μm). With the total thickness of 125
μm, these tabs will offer reasonably firm, smooth surfaces for a variety
There are two types of mica: muscovite and phlogopite. Generally, one
SEM applications, including gunshot residue analysis. Tabs are protected
differs from the other by color (Muscovite is Ruby, Green or White;
by white liners, which do not have to be removed when samples are
Phlogopite is Amber, Yellow, or Silver) The maximum operating
ready to be mounted.
temperature for Muscovite is about 500 – 600˚C and for Phlogopite is
about 800 – 900˚C.  No out-gassing
Our line consists of High Quality Muscovite Mica. This mica peels off very  Conductive adhesive is carbon filled acrylic glue
thin up to 0.0001" uniform layers, exposing "virgin" mica upon splitting.  Solvent free
 Adhesive can be removed by ethyl acetate, ethanol, isopropyl
For more information on our Mica Sheets and Disks, alcohol or alcohols
please see page 284-285.  Service temperature is up to 60ºC (140ºF)
Tabs contain some traces of Si, Sb, S, Fe, Mg, Na.
Thick Carbon Conductive Tabs or Image Tabs – The stiff and smooth
Muscovite Mica V-1 Quality: surface conductive tabs are 260 μm thick, including 200 μm thick
Cat.# Mica Size Quality Thickness (mm) Pack conductive carbonate base, coated 30 μm thick on each side with
71855-01 50 x 75mm V-1 0.15 – 0.21 each conductive adhesive. However, these tabs are not as conductive and
71855-05 25 x 75 mm V-1 0.26 – 0.31 each sticky as the Standard Carbon Conductive Tabs. Thick Carbon
71855-10 25 x 25 mm V-1 0.15 – 0.21 10/pk
Conductive Tabs are used for photographic background as well as for
71855-11 25 x 25 mm V-1 0.26 – 0.31 10/pk
71855-15 15 x 15 mm V-1 0.15 – 0.21 10/pk
Jet Scan applications, where the tabs must be removed and filed away.
71856-01 9.5 mm Diameter V-1 0.15 – 0.21 10/pk Ultra-Thin Carbon Conductive Adhesive Tabs – These tabs have Core
71856-02 12 mm Diameter V-1 0.15 – 0.21 10/pk material which is nonconductive cloth (70 μm) with Carbon Filler
71856-03 15 mm Diameter V-1 0.15 – 0.21 10/pk Conductive Adhesive (2 x 45μm). Total thickness is 160 μm.
71856-04 20 mm Diameter V-1 0.15 – 0.21 10/pk
Spectro Grade Carbon Adhesive Tabs – High purity conductive
Muscovite Mica V2 Quality:
carbons for less interference signals, such as X-Ray analysis.
Cat.# Mica Size Quality Thickness (mm) Pack
71857-01 50 x 75mm V-2 0.15 – 0.21 each
Ultra-Smooth Carbon Adhesive Tabs – Carbon adhesive tabs that
71857-05 25 x 75 mm V-2 0.26 – 0.31 each eliminate issues with rough surfaces, insufficient tackiness, and
71857-10 25 x 25 mm V-2 0.15 – 0.21 10/pk hardness with significantly lower contaminant levels under EDS. Tabs
71857-11 25 x 25 mm V-2 0.26 – 0.31 10/pk are made in USA and very popular, and may be used in place of other
71857-15 15 x 15 mm V-2 0.15 – 0.21 10/pk conductive adhesive in many applications in conventional and field
71858-01 9.5 mm Diameter V-2 0.15 – 0.21 10/pk emission microscopes. They are also widely used in forensic laboratories
Muscovite Mica V4 Quality: for study of gunshots residues. Without the addition of conductive
Cat.# Mica Size Quality Thickness (mm) Pack
coating, small nonconductive particles can often be imaged and X-Ray
71853-01 50mm x 75 mm V-4 0.26 – 0.31 10/pk analyzed, cutting down your analysis time. These tabs are composed of
71853-05 25mm x 75mm V-4 0.26 – 0.31 10/pk a thin film of strong adhesive approximately 1⁄2" diameter. Over 99%
71853-10 25mm x 25mm V-4 0.15 – 0.21 10/pk transparent to EDS, with a very small amount of nickel (0.6%) and
71853-11 25mm x 25mm V--4 0.26 – 0.31 10/pk copper (< 0.3%).
71853-15 15mm x 15mm V-4 0.15 – 0.21 10/pk Refrigeration will increase shelf life but tabs need to be warmed up to
71854-01 9.5mm Diameter V-4 0.15 – 0.21 10/pk
room temperature before use (usually more than one hour)
71854-15 12.7mm Diameter V-4 0.15 – 0.21 10/pk
Cat. # Description Qty.
Muscovite Mica V5 Quality:
77825-06 Standard Carbon Adhesive Tabs, 6mm Dia. 100/pk.
Cat.# Mica Size Quality Thickness (mm) Pack 77825-09 Standard Carbon Adhesive Tabs, 9mm Dia. 98/pk.
71850-01 50mm x 75 mm V-5 0.15 – 0.21 10/pk 77825-12 Standard Carbon Adhesive Tabs, 12mm Dia. 100/pk.
71851-05 25mm x 75mm V-5 0.26 – 0.31 10/pk 77825-25 Standard Carbon Adhesive Tabs, 25mm Dia. 54/pk.
71850-10 25mm x 25mm V-5 0.15 – 0.21 10/pk 77824-12 Thick Carbon Conductive Tabs, 12mm Dia. 100/pk.
71850-11 25mm x 25mm V-5 0.26 – 0.31 10/pk 77825-12-SP Ultra Thin Carbon Adhesive Tabs, 12mm Dia. 200/pk.
71850-15 15mm x 15mm V-5 0.15 – 0.21 10/pk 77826-12 Spectro Grade Carbon Adhesive Tabs, 12mm Dia. 120/pk.
71852-01 9.5mm Diameter V-5 0.15 – 0.21 10/pk 77827-12 Ultra-Smooth Carbon Adhesive Tabs, 12mm 100/pk.
77827-25 Ultra-Smooth Carbon Adhesive Tabs, 25mm 50/pk.

628 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec16_618-639_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 7/2/14 1:39 AM Page 629

Scanning Electron Microscope Supplies SECTION 16

® Specially Designed Specimen Holders for SEM
Our specimen holders are designed to improve your productivity and allow ® 3/ Multi Pin Holder
you to view more than one sample at a time. You will save pump down
time, keep your chamber cleaner and get more work done. All mounts are The multi Pin Holder is designed to
machined from solid aluminum and come with spring clips/or set-screws save time. It accommodates 3 or 5
to hold your specimens securely. All mounts are made to fit onto your of 1⁄2" (12.5mm) diameter surface,
stage and are designed to fit through all standard specimen exchange 1/8" (3.1mm) diameter pin.
ports, and have a center-threaded port to accept the Adapter Pins. Be sure
75920
to order the Adapter Pin that fits your instrument. For this reason, we offer Cat. # Description Qty
three different types of pin adapters, which are threaded and ready to 75920 3-Pin Holder, 25mm Dia x 10mm H, Flat Base each
screw on to the base of the holders. 75920-01 3-Pin Holder, 25mm Dia x 10mm H, with Adapter Pin A each
Adapter A: Overall measurement: 28mm long x 3.1mm diameter (step- 75920-02 3-Pin Holder, 25mm Dia x 10mm H, with Adapter Pin B each
up portion is 6.25mm L x 4.8mm diameter), 75920-03 3-Pin Holder, 25mm Dia x 10mm H, with Adapter Pin C each
75921 5-Pin Holder, 32mm Dia x 10mm H, Flat Base each
Adapter B: Overall measurement: 28mm long x 6mm diameter, 75921-01 5-Pin Holder, 32mm Dia x 10mm H, with Adapter Pin A each
Adapter C: Overall measurement: 34.5mm long x 16mm diameter 75921-02 5-Pin Holder, 32mm Dia x 10mm H, with Adapter Pin B each
All adapters have a threaded portion 5mm in length. 75921-03 5-Pin Holder, 32mm Dia x 10mm H, with Adapter Pin C each

® 1/ Universal SEM Sample Holder ® 4/ ISI DS 130 and 150 First

Stage Sample Mounts
This is a 10mm in diameter, 5mm
high, copper sample holder to fit the
stage of the ISI DS 130 and 150
SEM’s. The inner cylinder is height
adjustable so that you can adjust the
sample to the correct working distance

Adapter Pins 75910 79525

75925 ISI First Stage Holder each
This holder will hold almost any sample from 3mm to 29mm in diameter
plus various odd shaped samples, which one of their dimensions is not
greater than 29mm. The samples are easily inserted or removed from the
® SEM Sample
holder. The holder is made from aluminum and is supplied with four remov- Holders Set
able sample arms so that it can hold very small samples as well, and it pro- For your convenience, we now
vides good electrical contact to the stage. The AMRAY base is the standard offer a SEM Sample Holder Set
base and it measures: 48mm x 42mm x 12mm Thick for the above SEM Holders in a
For all other makes and models you can choose an Adapter Pin to screw on solid wooden box and finely
to the AMRAY base holder. finished. Set consists of one
Universal Holder, one Thin
Cat. # Description Qty Sample/Vertical Mount Holder,
75910 Universal SEM Holder – AMRAY Base each one each 3-Pin and 5-Pin
75910-01 Universal SEM Holder – AMRAY Base with Pin A each
75910-02 Universal SEM Holder – AMRAY Base with Pin B each
Holders with a hex hey and
75910-03 Universal SEM Holder – AMRAY Base with Pin C each Adapter Pin A.
75930 SEM Sample Holder Set each

® 2/ Vertical Mounts for Thin Samples

This holder is designed to hold thin samples
® Pin Mount
vertically in the SEM or any microscope. It is Stub Adapters
25mm in diameter and 10mm thick. Each of Made from aluminum, used to adapt
the two jaws can hold up to 3mm thick 1⁄8" (3.1mm) pin diameter SEM
samples. The spring loader is gentle and strong stubs. Available in 10, 15 and
enough to keep thin and fragile samples vertical 16mm diameters.
so that cross sections can be studied. This
75940-10 Pin Stub Adapter 10mm(H)x10mm(D) each
holder is very useful for cross sections of 75915 75940-11 Pin Stub Adapter 15mm(H)x10mm(D) with M4 each
silicone wafers or multiplayer capacitors. Tapered hole on one side
This holder can be adapted to any adapter pin listed above 75940-15 Pin Stub Adapter 38mm(H)x15mm(D) with M4 each
to accommodate your instrument. Tapered hole on one side
75940-16 Pin Stub Adapter 38mm(H)x16mm(D) each
Cat. # Description Qty
75915 Thin Sample/Vertical Mount Holder, Flat Base each
75915-01 Thin Sample/Vertical Mount Holder, with Adapter Pin A each
75915-02 Thin Sample/Vertical Mount Holder, with Adapter Pin B each
75915-03 Thin Sample/Vertical Mount Holder, with Adapter Pin C each

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 629
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec16_618-639_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 7/2/14 1:39 AM Page 630

SECTION 16 Scanning Electron Microscope Supplies

® Specially Designed Specimen Holders for SEM (continued)
® Cross Sectional Holder ® Variable Tilt Mount
Made from non-magnetic
This mount which is made from
stainless steel with 3.1mm
aluminum is used for the mounting
(1⁄8") diameter pin and
and tilting of samples from 0° – 90°
adjustable angle turn-screw.
as well as for SEM investigation with
Just insert specimens edge-on
small working distances. The mount
and observe the cross section
is marked for 30°, 45°, 70° and 90°.
directly.
The table measures 11 x 11mm
75942-01 Cross Sectional Holder each (0.46" x0.46")and the overall size
is 14 x 14 x12.7mm
® Four-Pin Stub Holder (0.55"x0.55"x0.5").
It accommodates four pin types, up to 12.5
(1⁄2") surface specimen stubs, with 1⁄8" 75952-05 Variable Tilt Mount holder, For Pin each
(3.1mm) diameter pin. 75952-05H Variable Tilt Mount, M4 Hitachi Each

® TEM Grid Holder on a Pin

This EMS new release allows for the holding of
75944-04 Four-Pin Stub Holder each
up to 4 grids. Made from Aluminum with a
brass Screw this holder allows you to image
® Five 10mm and analyze specimens on TEM Grids in the
Stub Holder SEM. The Overall diameter of the holder is 1"
Accommodates five 10mm diame- (25mm) with a 1/8" Pin (3.2mm) and a longer
ter specimen stubs, with 1⁄8" pin 0.6" (15mm). The Grid locations are all numbered
(3.1mm) diameter pin. 75949-03 TEM Grid Holder on Pin each

75945-05 Five 10mm Stub Holder each ® Multi Holder for 4

Pin Stubs
® Thin Sample
This multi pin stub adapter for JEOL
Holder 32x11mm is designed to save time It
Ideal for the examination of cross
is made from vacuum aluminum
sections of thin samples, such as
with stainless steel set screws. It
wafers, multi-layer of capacitors,
accommodates up to fourt standard
plastics, metals, etc.
12.7mm (1⁄2") pin stubs with 3.2mm
1. For most AMRAY: 1⁄2"
(1⁄8") pin.
diameter (12.7mm), 1⁄8" (3.1mm) diameter pin (3.1mm) with split
openings up to 1⁄4" (6.4mm). Available with either 8mm (5⁄16") pin height 75953-02J Multi Pin Stub Adapter, Jeol each
or 15mm (9⁄16") pin height.
2. For ISI, JEOL, TOPCON: Double set screw for a secure holding of ® Multi Holder for 6 Pin Stubs
the specimen during observation. 15mm(9⁄16") (dia). x 10mm(3⁄8") (H),
This 42mm in diameter multi pin
6.4mm (1⁄4") split.
holder is designed to save time It is
75948-08 Thin Film Holder, 8mm(L) Pin each made from machined aluminum
75948-15 Thin Film Holder, 15mm (L) Pin each with stainless steel set screws. It
75948-10 Thin Film Holder, 15x10mm Stub each
accommodates up to six standard
® Universal Vise 12.7mm (1⁄2") pin stubs with 3.2mm
A single set screw loading vise for fast (1⁄8") pin.
and easy to hold specimens for SEM. 75953-25h Multi Holder for 6 Pin Stubs, Hitachi, M4 each
The jaws are 1" (25mm) long, 7⁄16"
(11mm) wide and 5⁄16" (8mm) high. 1⁄8"
(3.1mm) pin.
75950-01 Universal Vise each

® Metallurgical Mount
Accommodates up to 31.8 mm (11⁄4")
diameter of a metallurgical specimen with
at least 0.8 mm (1⁄8") clearance. Pin 3.1 mm
(1⁄8"), depth is 8 mm (5⁄16").
75952-01 Metallurgical Mount each

630 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec16_618-639_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 7/2/14 1:39 AM Page 631

Scanning Electron Microscope Supplies SECTION 16

® Multi Pin Holder for 8 Pin Stubs ® 45° Pin Stub Holder
This 45 degree pin stub holder allows for a higher SE
signal without having to tilt the specimen stage and it
accommodates any standard 12.7mm (1⁄2") pin stubs
with 3.2mm (1⁄8") pin.. Grooved, machined aluminum
with stainless steel Allen set screw.

75952-45 45° Pin Stub Holder, 3.2mm (1/8") pin each

This 50mm in diameter multi pin holder is designed to save time It is
made from machined aluminum with stainless steel Allen wrench
screws. It accommodates up to eight standard 12.7mm (1⁄2") pin stubs. ® 45° Multi Holder for 3 Pin Stubs
75952-08 Multi Pin Holder for 8 Pin Stubs, 3.2mm ( ⁄8”)
1
each This 25.4 mm in diameter 45 Degree multi pin
75952-08H Multiple Holder for 8 Pins Hitachi, M4 each holder is designed to save time. It allows for a
higher SE signal without having to tilt the
specimen It is made from machined aluminum
® Multi Pin Holder for 12 Pin Stubs with stainless steel Allen set screws. It
accommodates up to three standard 12.7mm
(1⁄2") pin stubs with 3.2mm (1⁄8") pin.
75952-60 45° Multi Holder for 3 pin stubs, each

® 45° Multi Holder for

6 Pin Stubs
This 35 mm in diameter 45 Degree multi
pin holder is designed to save time. It
allows for a higher SE signal without
This 62 mm in diameter multi pin holder is designed to save time It is having to tilt the specimen It is made from
made from machined aluminum with stainless steel Allen wrench machined aluminum with stainless steel Allen set screws. It
screws. It accommodates up to twelve standard 12.7mm (1⁄2") pin stubs accommodates up to six standard 12.7mm (1⁄2") pin stubs.
75952-70 45° Multi Holder for 6 pin stubs, 3.2mm (1⁄8”) each
75952-12 Multi Pin Holder for 12 pin stubs, 3.2mm(1/8”) each
75952-70H 45O Multi Holder for 6 pin stubs, Hitachi, M4 each
75952-12H Multi Holder for 12 Pin Stubs, Hitachi, M4 each
® Set Screw Vise
® Multi Holder for 29 Pin Stubs This set screw vice which is made from machined
This 90 mm in diameter multi pin aluminum with stainless steel allen set screws has an
holder is designed to save time It open slot that is 4mm (.157") wide x 5mm (.197")
is made from machined aluminum deep. It measures 12.7mm (1⁄2") dia. x 17.7mm (0.70")
with 302 stainless steel springs high. And has a 3.2mm (1⁄8") dia. pin.
that hold the pin stubs in place. It
75941-01 Set Screw Vise, 12.7mm each
accommodates up to twenty nine
standard 12.7mm (1⁄2") pin stubs
® Large Set Screw Vise
75952-29 Multi Holder for 29 pin Stubs, Hitachi, M4 each
75952-29H Multi Pin Holder for 29 pin stubs, 3.2mm (1⁄8”) each

® Multi Holder for 49 Pin Stubs

This 117 mm in diameter multi pin
holder is designed to save time It is
made from machined aluminum
with 302 stainless steel springs 75941-03H
75941-03
that hold the pin stubs in place. It
accommodates up to forty nine This set screw vice which is made from machined aluminum with
standard 12.7mm (1/2") pin stubs stainless steel allen set screws has an open slot that is 10mm (.394”)
wide x 5mm (.197") deep. It measures 25mm (1") dia. x 17.5mm
75952-29 Multi Holder for 29 pin Stubs, Hitachi, M4 each (0.69") high.
75952-29H Multi Pin Holder for 29 pin stubs, 3.2mm (1⁄8”) each
75941-03 Large Set Screw Vise, 25mm, 3.2mm (1/8”) Pin each
75941-03H Large Set Screw Vise, 25mmx10mm (H), M4 each

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 631
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec16_618-639_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 7/2/14 1:39 AM Page 632

SECTION 16 Scanning Electron Microscope Supplies

® Double Slot Mini Vise ® Thin Specimen Split Mount
Double-slot set screw vise with (2) 1mm on Pin Stub
wide x 3mm deep slots. Clamp thin 12.7mm (1/2") dia., 3.2mm (1/8") dia. pin
specimens or cross sections. Effectively For examination of thin samples from paper, plastics,
holds wafers and thin samples up to 1mm metals, textiles, plants, etc., in cross section. Features
(.039") thick. a wide opening up to 6.4mm (1/4"). Grooved head.
Dimensions: 15mm dia x 6mm H. Height of head is 7.4mm (0.29").
Material: Aluminum with 2 stainless steel allen set screws. Pin Length: 8mm (.314"). Pin is centered.
Includes allen wrench. Material: Machined aluminum with stainless steel allen set screw.
75943-H Double Slot Set Screw Vise, M4, 15 x 6mm H each Includes allen wrench.
75950-08 Thin Specimen Split Mount, 1/2", 8mm L pin each
® Large Double Slot Vise, 25mm
Large Double-Slot Set Screw Vise with (2) 2.5mm ® Thin Specimen Split Mount
X 5mm deep slots. Clamp thin specimens and (AMRAY), 15mm
cross sections without conductive paint or tape. 15mm (0.59") dia., 3.2mm (1/8") dia. pin
Dimensions: 25 x 10 mm (1 x 0.4"). Opens to 3.75mm (3/8").
Material: Machined aluminum with 2 stainless Pin length: 14.3mm (9/16")
steel allen set screws.
Height of head: 10.2mm (0.4"), centered split.
Includes allen wrench. Pin is off-center.
75947-H Large Double Slot Set Screw Vise, Material: Machined aluminum with two stainless
25mm x 10mm H, M4 each steel allen set screws.
Includes allen wrench.
® Large Double Slot Vise, 75950-09 Thin Specimen Split Mount, AMRAY each
32mm
32mm Large double slot set screw vise with ® Double Slot Mini Vise,
(2) 2.5mm wide X 5mm deep slots.
15mm
Clamp thin specimens and cross sections Features (2) 1mm wide X 3mm deep slots.
without conductive paint or tape. Clamp thin specimens and cross sections
Dimensions: 32 X 10mm (1-1/4" x 0.394") without tape or conductive paint.
Material: Machined aluminum with 2 stainless steel allen set screws. Pin Length: 3.2mm (1/8").
Includes allen wrench.
Material: Machined aluminum with 2 stainless steel allen set screws.
75947-HH Large Double Slot Set Screw Vise,
32 x 10mm, M4 each Includes allen wrench.
75951-03 Double Slot Set Screw Vise, 15mm each
® 45° Pin Mount and 90° Profile,
Combination Holder ® Large Double Slot
For Hitachi S-800,
Vise, 25mm
Features (2) 2.5mm by 5mm deep slots.
S-4000, S-4100,
Clamp thin specimens and cross sections
S-4200, S-4300, without conductive paint or tape.
S-4500, S-4700
Dimensions: 25 x 8 mm (1 x 0.32") with
and S-3600N SEMs.
3.2mm (1/8") pin.
For cross sections up to 6.35mm (1/4"). Available in aluminum or brass Material: Machined aluminum with 2 stainless steel allen set screws.
with stainless steel allen set screws. Includes allen wrench.
Includes allen wrench. 75951-04 Large Double Slot Set Screw Vise, 25mm each
75950-07-A 45°/90° Combination Holder, Aluminum each
75950-07-B 45°/90° Combination Holder, Brass each

632 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec16_618-639_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 7/2/14 1:39 AM Page 633

Scanning Electron Microscope Supplies SECTION 16

® Metallurgical Mount Holder, 1" and 25mm
This mount holder which is made from machined aluminum with stainless steel Allen
screws is specifically for 1” or 25mm metallurgical mounts.
75941-05 Metallurgical Mount Holder, 1" and 25mm,3.2mm (1⁄8") x 8mm (D) each
75941-05H Metallurgical Mount Holder, 1" and 25mm, Hitachi, M4 each
75941-05 75941-05H

® Metallurgical Mount Holder, 1-1/4" and 30mm

This mount holder which is made from machined aluminum with stainless steel Allen screws
is specifically for 11⁄4" and 30mm metallurgical mounts.

75941-06 Metallurgical Mount Holder, 1-¼" and 30mm, 3.2mm (1⁄8") x 8mm (D) each
75941-06H Metallurgical Mount Holder, 1-¼" and 30mm, Hitachi, M4 each
75941-06 75941-06H
® Metallurgical Mount Holder, 1-1/2" and 40mm
This set screw vice which is made from machined aluminum with stainless steel allen set
screws has an open slot that is 10mm (.394”) wide x 5mm (.197") deep. It measures 25mm
(1") dia. x 17.5mm (0.69") high.
75941-08 Metallurgical Mount Holder, 1½" and 40mm, 3.2mm (1⁄8”) x8mm (D) each
75941-08H Metallurgical Mount Holder 1 ½" or 40mm, Hitachi, M4 each
75941-08
75941-08H
® Metallurgical Mount Holder, 2" and 50mm
This mount holder which is made from machined aluminum with stainless steel Allen screws
is specifically for 2" and 50mm metallurgical mounts.

75941-09 Metallurgical Mount Holder, 2" and 50mm , 3.2mm (1⁄8") x 8mm(D) each
75941-09H Metallurgical Mount Holder, 2" and 50mm, Hitachi, M4 each
75941-09 75941-09H

® Geological Thin ® Dual Geological

Section Holder Thin Section Holder
This thin section holder is made from This thin section holder made from aluminum 75941-18
75941-15
aluminum with copper clips and brass screws. with copper clips and brass screws. The unit
The unit measures 55x30x8mm and holds a measures 55 x 58 x 8mm and it holds two
standard geological thin section or slide standard geological thin sections or slides of
measuring 47 x 27mm. The holder comes 47 x 27mm. The holder has convenient
complete with 2 clips to insure nothing tweezer inserts which allow for easy loading.
moves. The holder has convenient tweezer Tweezer inserts enable easy loading. Clips 75941-18H
75941-15H are provided for secure holding.
inserts which allow for easy loading.
75941-15 Geological Thin Section Holder, 9.5mm each 75941-18 Dual Geological Thin Section Holder, 9.5mm Pin each
75941-15H Geological Thin Section Holder, Hitachi M4 each 75941-18H Dual Geological Thin Section Holder, Hitachi M4 each

® Variable Size Geological ® Quadruple Geological

Thin Section Holder Thin Section Holder
This thin section holder is made from This thin section holder made from
vacuum grade aluminum with copper clips 75941-16H aluminum with copper clips and brass
and brass screws . The unit measures screws. The unit measures 107 x 58 75941-19
51x32x8mm and holds either standard thin x 8mm and it holds four standard
sections of 47 x 27mm or smaller or larger geological thin sections or slides
thin sections. Smallest size would be of 47 x 27mm. The holder has
40x20mm. The holder comes complete with convenient tweezer inserts which
2 clips to insure nothing moves. The holder 75941-16 allow for easy loading. Tweezer
75941-19H
has convenient tweezer inserts which allow inserts enable easy loading. Clips
for easy loading. are provided for secure holding.

75941-16 Variable Size Geological Thin Section Holder, 9.5mm Pin each 75941-19 Quadruple Geological Thin Section Holder, 8.5mm Pin each
75941-16H Variable Size Geological Thin Section Holder, Hitachi M4 each 75941-19H Quadruple Geological Thin Section Holder, Hitachi M4 each

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 633
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec16_618-639_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 7/9/14 11:48 AM Page 634

SECTION 16 Scanning Electron Microscope Supplies

® Small FIB Grid Holder ® Multiple FIB
Holds up to 2 FIB grids of the same thickness. Handy Grid Holder
FIB grid holder on a standard 12.7mm (1/2") pin stub. Larger size enables this FIB grid
Can also be used to safely store FIB grids with thin holder to handle multiple FIB
sections attached. grids of the same thickness. Can
Overall Dimensions: 12.7mm (1/2") x 7.8mm (0.3mm) also be used to safely store FIB
H w/o pin. grids with thin section (lamellae) attached. Convenient brass
Pin: Standard 3.2mm (1/8"). thumbscrews make loading and unloading easy.
Material: Vacuum grade aluminum with brass screw. Overall Dimensions: 22.5 x 29 x 13.5mm (7/8" x 1-1/8" x 5/8").
Includes Philips screwdriver #0. Pin: Standard 3.2mm (1/8").
Cat. # Description Qty Material: Vacuum grade aluminum with brass thumbscrews.
75950-02 Small FIB Grid Holder, 12.7mm, Pin each Cat. # Description Qty
75950-05 Multiple FIB Grid Holder each
® Single 1/2" FIB Sample and
Grid Holder
Holds a FIB sample mounted on standard 1/2" ® 1" FIB Sample
(12.7mm) pin stub for FIB milling and lift-out and Grid Holder
procedures. Conveniently holds two FIB grids Holds an FIB sample mounted on a
close to the sample to mount prepared TEM standard 25mm (1") pin stub for FIB milling
lamellae on the FIB grid for TEM imaging. Cost- and lift out procedures. Can also be used
effective holder suitable for all FIB/SEM systems to hold FIB grids of the same thickness to
which accept pin mount holders, including the mount the prepared lamellae on an FIB grid for TEM imaging. This cost-
FEI, ZEISS and Tescan systems. For the JEOL and Hitachi systems, use effective and versatile holder is suitable for all FIB/SEM systems which
a pin mount adapter. accept pin mount holders, including the FEI, ZEISS and Tescan systems.
For the JEOL and Hitachi systems, use a pin mount adapter. Convenient
Overall Dimensions: 22.4 x 12.7 x 11.7mm (0.88" x 0.5" x 0.46").
brass thumbscrews make loading and unloading easy.
Pin: Standard 3.2mm (1/8").
Overall Dimensions: 50 x 29 x 13.5mm (2" x 1-1/8" x 5/8").
Material: Vacuum grade aluminum with brass screws.
Pin: Standard 3.2mm (1/8").
Includes Philips screwdriver #0.
Material: Vacuum grade aluminum with brass screws.
Cat. # Description Qty
Cat. # Description Qty
75950-03 Single 1/2" FIB Sample and Grid Holder, Pin each
75950-06 1" FIB Sample and Grid Holder, Pin each

® Double 1/2" FIB Sample and Grid Holder

Holds FIB samples mounted on two standard 1/2" Material: Vacuum grade aluminum with brass screws.
(12.7mm) pin stubs for FIB milling and lift-out procedures. Overall Dimensions: 36.5 x 12.7 x 11.6mm (1.44" x 0.5"
Conveniently holds two FIB grids close to the sample to x 0.46").
mount prepared TEM lamellae on the FIB grid for TEM Pin: Standard 3.2mm (1/8").
imaging. Cost-effective holder suitable for all FIB/SEM
Philips screwdriver #0 included.
systems which accept pin mount holders, including the
FEI, ZEISS and Tescan systems. For the JEOL and Hitachi Cat. # Description Qty
systems, use a pin mount adapter. 75950-04 Double 1/2" FIB Sample
and Grid Holder, Pin each

Turn Your SEM into a 3D Measurement Device

MeX 3d Surface Metrology With The SEM
MeX is a stand alone software package that turns any SEM
with digital imaging into a true surface metrology device.
Using stereoscopic images the software automatically retrieves 3D information and
presents a highly accurate, robust and dense 3D dataset which is then used to perform traceable
metrology examination. The results are obtained irrespective of the SEM magnification providing
metrology at macro and micro levels.
For more information, see pages 670–675. UUUUU

634 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec16_618-639_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 7/9/14 11:49 AM Page 635

Scanning Electron Microscope Supplies SECTION 16

® Bulk Holders ® SEM Clamps
® SEM Bulk ® Mini SEM Clamp, 12.7mm
Specimen Holder Mini SEM Clamp on a standard 12.7mm (1/2") pin
For clamping irregular, stub. Suitable for holding flat or thin specimens such
bulky samples as silicon chips, foil, wires, and small tubes.
Material: Vacuum-grade aluminum with brass screw.
Opening: 15.9mm (5/8") wide X 25.4mm
75954-01 Mini SEM Clamp 12.7mm, Pin each
(1") long X 9.5mm (3/8") deep.
Pin Diameter: 3.2mm (1/8").
Material: Machined aluminum with stainless steel allen set screws. ® Small SEM Clamp, 15 x 10mm
Allen wrench included. 15mm (0.6") long with 10mm (0.4") wide clamping area and standard
pin stub 3.2mm (1/8"). Suitable for holding samples up to 7mm overall
75951-06 SEM Bulk Specimen Holder each thickness. Perfect for small tubes, strips, wires, and smaller flat
samples.
® Large Bulk Overall Dimensions 23 x 20 x 9mm (0.9"x0.78"x0.35")
Specimen Holder Material: Machined aluminum with brass screws.
Opening: 32mm (1-1/4") wide X
32mm (1-1/4") long X 13mm
(1/2") deep.
Pin Diameter: 3.2mm (1/8").
Material: Machined aluminum with
stainless steel allen set screws.
Allen wrench included. 75954-02 Small SEM Clamp 15 x 10mm, 3.2mm (1/8") Pin each
75951-07 Large Bulk Specimen Holder each

® Medium SEM Clamp,

® X-Large Bulk Specimen Holder 25 x 15mm
Holds up to 2" 25mm (1") long with 15mm (0.6") wide
specimens clamping area. Features standard pin
Opening: 52mm (2") stub 3.2mm (1/8"). Suitable for holding
wide X 40mm (1- samples up to 7mm overall thickness.
1/2") long X 13mm Perfect for small tubes, strips, wires,
(1/2") deep. and smaller flat samples.
Pin Diameter: Overall Dimensions: 33 x 25 x 9mm
3.2mm (1/8") (1.3"x1"x0.35")
Material: Machined aluminum with stainless steel allen set screws. Material: Machined aluminum with brass screws.
Allen wrench included. 75954-03 Medium SEM Clamp 25 x 15mm, 3.2mm (1/8") Pin each
75951-08 X-Large Bulk Specimen Holder each
® Recessed SEM
® XX-Large Bulk Specimen Holder Clamp, 25 x
Holds up to 3" specimens 15mm
Achieve background-free
imaging and no contact with
sample surface in imaging area
with this 5mm recessed clip
Clamping Area: 25mm (1") long X
15mm (0.6") wide.
Maximum Thickness: 7mm under
the clamping strips.
Opening: 80mm (3-1/8") wide X 48mm (1-7/8") long X 13mm (1/2") deep. Overall Dimensions: 33 x 25 x 11mm 1.3"x1"x0.43").
Pin Diameter: 3.2mm (1/8"). Material: Machined aluminum with brass screws.
Material: Machined aluminum with stainless steel allen set screws. 75954-05 Recessed SEM Clamp 25 x 15mm, 3.2mm (1/8") Pin each
Allen wrench included.
75951-09 XX-Large Bulk Specimen Holder each

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 635
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec16_618-639_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 7/2/14 1:40 AM Page 636

SECTION 16 Scanning Electron Microscope Supplies

® SEM Clip Specimen Mounts ® 38mm Dia., Pin Mount
Available with one, two or three clips
Specially designed for easy, quick and clean
mounting of any type of thin specimen on
specimen stubs.
These spring-loaded clips accommodate samples of up to 2mm
thickness. Samples are held securely by small spring-loaded clips and 75923-21 75923-22 75923-23 side view
allow for easy change of samples. Adhesives are not required,
75923-21 SEM Clip, 38mm Pin Mount, 1 clip each
eliminating possible outgassing issues and saving time
75923-22 SEM Clip, 38mm Pin Mount, 2 clips each
T Available with single and multiple clips 75923-23 SEM Clip, 38mm Pin Mount, 3 clips each
T Ideal for holding silicon chips, paper, wire, threads, thin films,
sheet metal, etc. ® 25mm Dia., Cylinder Mount, M4
T SEM Clip Mounts with multiple clips can hold larger samples or Available with one, two, or three clips. For Hitachi
multiple smaller samples.

® 18mm Dia., Pin Mount

For FEI/Philips, ZEISS/LEO, Cambridge, Leica,
Amray, CamScan and Tescan SEMs. Made in USA. 75930-05 75930-10 75930-20 bottom view
Mount with one clip
75930-05 SEM Clip, 25x6mm x M4 Cylinder Mount, 1 clip each
75923-10 SEM Clip, 18mm Pin Mount, 1 clip each 75930-10 SEM Clip, 25x6mm x M4 Cylinder Mount, 2 clips each
Shorter version for ZEISS/LEO SEM/FIBs with 6mm pin height 75930-20 SEM Clip, 25x6mm x M4 Cylinder Mount, 3 clips each
75923-11 SEM Clip, 18mm Pin Mount, 6mm pin height, 1 clip each

® 32mm Dia., Cylinder Mount, M4

® 25mm Dia., Pin Mount Available with one, two, or three clips. For Hitachi
Available with one, two or three clips

75923-12 75923-13 75923-14 side view 75930-15 75930-25 75930-35 bottom view

75923-12 SEM Clip, 25mm Pin Mount, 1 clip each 75930-15 SEM Clip, 32x10mm x M4 Cylinder Mount, 1 clip each
75923-13 SEM Clip, 25mm Pin Mount, 2 clips each 75930-25 SEM Clip, 32x10mm x M4 Cylinder Mount, 2 clips each
75923-14 SEM Clip, 25mm Pin Mount, 3 clips each 75930-35 SEM Clip, 32x10mm x M4 Cylinder Mount, 3 clips each
Shorter version for ZEISS/LEO SEM/FIBs with 6mm pin height
75923-15 SEM Clip, 25mm Pin Mount, for ZEISS/LEO SEM/FIBs ® 50mm Dia., Cylinder Mount, M4
6mm pin height, 1 clip each
75923-16 SEM Clip, 25mm Pin Mount, for ZEISS/LEO SEM/FIBs
6mm pin height, 2 clips each
75923-17 SEM Clip, 25mm Pin Mount, for ZEISS/LEO SEM/FIBs
6mm pin height, 3 clips each
75954-15 75954-25 75954-30
® 32mm Dia., Pin Mount
Available with one, two, or three clips

75954-35 75954-40 bottom view

75923-18 75923-19 75923-20 side view 75954-15 SEM Clip, 50x6mm x M4 Cylinder Mount, 1 clip each
75954-25 SEM Clip, 50x6mm x M4 Cylinder Mount, 2 clips each
75923-18 SEM Clip, 38mm Pin Mount, 1 clip each 75954-30 SEM Clip, 50x6mm x M4 Cylinder Mount, 3 clips each
75923-19 SEM Clip, 38mm Pin Mount, 2 clips each 75954-35 SEM Clip, 50x6mm x M4 Cylinder Mount, 4 clips each
75923-20 SEM Clip, 38mm Pin Mount, 3 clips each 75954-40 SEM Clip, 50x6mm x M4 Cylinder Mount, 8 clips each

® SEM Clip Replacement Clips and Screws

Clips are made from spring grade beryllium-copper alloy. Thickness: 0.25mm (0.01"), overall length:
12.7mm (1/2"), width at tip:1.6mm (1/16"), hole diameter: 2.2mm (0.087").
75954-06 SEM Clips pkg/10
75954-07 SEM Screws, Brass, M2 x 3mm length pkg/10

636 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec16_618-639_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 7/2/14 1:40 AM Page 637

Scanning Electron Microscope Supplies SECTION 16

 Special Grids for SEM
Finder grids for SEM; a valuable tool for analytical studies. The grids are available in 10mm diameter and they can
be placed directly on the stub surface and used to identify the area of interest in which the studies are performed.
80100-Cu SEM, Finder Grids, Copper 25/vial

 SEM Finder Grids

These new SEM grids are designed to aid in the identification and  100 Radial sectors are easily identified by reference to decimal numbers
localization of SEM specimens when placed on standard SEM stubs. in the annular rim and alphabet letters in the four quadrants.
The SEMF1 has several features that are incorporated for easier location of  A matt surface on one side is for correct positioning – matt side up.
the specimen and identification of areas of special interest
The SEMF2 allows for easy characterization and analysis of particles and suspensions.
 Referring to the annular rim identifies north, south, east and west.
The SEMF3 uses an alpha-numeric index, allowing up to 25 predetermined
 The four quadrant markers are tapered towards the center.
specimens to be fixed and then located in a SEM.

Type SEMF1 Type SEMF3

Referring to the annular rim identifies 25 cells are identified by reference
north, south, east and west. The four to their alpha-numeric position. The
quadrant markers are tapered towards the large asymmetric cut-out feature in
centre. 100 Radial sectors are identified the rim enables the right view to be
by reference to decimal numbers in the easily obtained when placing on a
annular rim and alphabet letters in the SEM stub.
four quadrants.

Overall Diameter:....................................................................10 mm
Overall Thickness: ................................................................~50 μm
Material: ........................................................Copper, Nickel or Gold Overall Diameter:....................................................................10 mm
Overall Thickness: ................................................................~50 μm
Type SEMF2 Material: ........................................................Copper, Nickel or Gold
The larger cells are identified using
numbers from 1 – 57. Each large cell is
sub-divided into 4, making a total of 228 Ordering:
identifiable cells by reference to their 80101-Cu SEMF1, Copper 10/vial
number and geographical location. 80101-Ni SEMF1, Nickel 10/vial
80101-Au SEMF1, Gold 5/vial
80102-Cu SEMF2, Copper 10/vial
80102-Ni SEMF2, Nickel 10/vial
Overall Diameter:....................................................................10 mm 80102-Au SEMF2, Gold 5/vial
Overall Thickness: ................................................................~50 μm 80103-Cu SEMF3, Copper 10/vial
Material: ........................................................Copper, Nickel or Gold 80103-Ni SEMF3, Nickel 10/vial
80103-Au SEMF3, Gold 5/vial

 Beryllium Planchets Specification Limits

These planchets are prepared from high purity beryllium (min. 98.5%) by Characteristic Unit Value Lower Upper
electro-fusion to provide vacuum tight (~1x10-9atm-cm3/sec) and ±10% Lot Identification: Lot Number 5077
dimensional tolerances. Chemistry Composition
Beryllium Assay % 99.00 98.5 —
Notes:
Beryllium Oxide % 0.90 - 1.50
1. Beryllium is a hazardous substance. Care should be taken seriously when Iron Content % 0.1000 - 0.1300
working with this material. Aluminum Content % 0.04 - 0.10
2. Beryllium is a strategic commodity that is controlled by the U.S. government for
Magnesium Content % <0.0100 - 0.0800
reasons of nuclear non-proliferation and anti-terrorism. Its’ ECCN No is 1C230. If
you export this material, you must follow the Export Administration Regulations.
Silicon Content % 0.0300 - 0.0600
Diversion contrary to U.S. Law is prohibited. Carbon Content % 0.13 - 0.15
3. Following is the typical Specification Limits of our Be that supply by us: Other Metallic – each % <0.0400 - 0.0400
Ordering:
Carbon Rods, Cord, and Fiber, See Vacuum Pumps, Cat. # Planchet Size Qty
76010 Be Substrate Planchet 1cm Dia x 0.25mm Thick each
Acc., & Evaporation Supplies, page 960 >>>>>
76014 Be Substrate Planchet 1.27cm Dia x 0.25mm Thick each
76015 Be Substrate Planchet 2.5cm Dia x 1.0mm Thick each
Gel-Pak Storage/Carrier Boxes, page 236, 377 >>>>> 76016 Be Substrate Planchet 50.8cm Dia x 1.0mm Thick each
76017 Be Substrate Planchet 101.6cm Dia x 1.0mm Thick each

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 637
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec16_618-639_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 7/2/14 1:40 AM Page 638

SECTION 16 Scanning Electron Microscope Supplies

® Holders & Accessories ® FIB Sample Holder
Fortress™ FIB Holder with CastleGuard™ Protection
® SampleSaver™ Fortress™ FIB Holders are reusable holders that secure FIB sample that
® Portable Storage Containers are held in a specific orientation without the use of adhesives, adhesive
Our custom storage container for the tabs, or conductive paints. Fortress™ FIB Holders can be used to
storing and transporting of samples for position a thin, whole or cut TEM grid / disk in an orientation such that
SEM, TEM, FIB, AFM, etc. This device is either in-situ or an ex-situ. FIB lift-out technique can be used to attach a
different from a vacuum storage unit or FIB-prepared sample. Physical protection of the mounted sample on the
from desiccators. The unit allows you to grid is provided with the CastleGuard™ protection design. Up to 30
evacuate and backfill or purge with dry Fortress FIB Holders can be stored in a single SS200 Sample Saver™
nitrogen. You can then pressurize the storage container.
container to eliminate the possibility of
diffusion into the container. It is ideal for
Features:
T Unique clamping mechanism secures sample without over tight-
shipping or storing sensitive samples from lab to lab.
ening
Cat. # Description Qty T Standard 1⁄8" pin mount fits most FIBs and SEMs
76540-01 Small Portable Storage Container, SS100 each
76540-02 Large Portable Storage Container, SS200 each
T Peripheral support structure protects specimens during handling
and transport
T Economical design enables user to prepare and store samples on
the same holder
® Sample Racks for the SS100 Sample T Compatible with Sample Saver™ Storage containers for secure
Saver™ storage and transport in an inert environment
These sample racks are designed to fit into the SS100
Sample Saver™ for the storage of TEM grid boxes or ® Fortress™ FIB Holder – Low Profile
aluminum stubs that needed to store in safe Low Profile Fortress™ FIB
environment. Holder to hold either a
standard FIB lift out specimen
on a grid or an H-Bar cut
Sample.

Cat. # Description Qty

76541-10 Model SS100-TEM – TEM Grid Box Holder. Consists of 3 vented TEM set ® Fortress™ Sample Loader
grid boxes and storage rack to fit into SampleSaver™ SS100 Securely holds the Fortress™
76541-20 Model SS100-125 – 1⁄8" SEM Stub Holder. Consists of 3 tiers sample set Low Profile holder under a
rack. Each shelf holds 5 SEM stubs with 1⁄8" pin. (SEM stubs not included) stereomicroscope and permits
76541-30 Model SS100-375 – 3⁄8" SEM Stub Holder. Consists of 3 tiers sample set
viewing from 2 angles without
rack. Each self holds 3 SEM stubs with 3⁄8" pin (SEM Stub not included)
76541-40 Model SS100-125-1 – 1⁄8" SEM Stub Holder. Consists of 3 tiers set changing focus on the
sample rack. Bottom shelf holds 1" dia sample mount and top two microscope.
shelves each hold 5 SEM stubs with 1⁄8" pin (SEM stubs not included)
76541-50 Model SS100-375-1 – 3⁄8" SEM Stub Holder. Consists of 3 tiers set Cat. # Description Qty.
sample rack. Bottom shelf holds 1" dia sample mount and two 75956-01 FIB sample Holder for Low Profile each
top shelves each hold 3 SEM stubs 3⁄8" pin (SEM stubs not included) 75956-50 Fortress™ Sample Loader for Low Profile each

® Fortress™ FIB Holder – High Profile

® Sample Racks for the SS200 Sample Saver™ High Profile Fortress™ FIB Holder to hold a standard FIB lift-out
These sample racks are designed to fit into the SS200 Sample Saver™ for the
specimen on a grid.
storage of TEM grid boxes or aluminum stubs that needed to store in safe
environment. ® Fortress™ Sample Loader
Securely holds the Fortress™ High Profile holder under a
Cat. # Description Qty
76542-00 Model SS200-FIB – FIB Sample Holder to store SBT CastleGuard™ set stereomicroscope and permits viewing from 2 angles without changing
Holders (CastkeGuard™ holders not included) focus on the microscope.
76542-20 Model SS200-125 – 1⁄8" SEM Stub Holder. Consists of 5 tiers sample set
rack. Each shelf holds 5 SEM stubs with 1⁄8" pin. (SEM stubs not included)
76542-30 Model SS200-375 – 3⁄8" SEM Stub Holder. Consists of 5 tiers sample set
rack. Each self holds 3 SEM stubs with 3⁄8" pin (SEM Stub not included)
76542-40 Model SS200-125-1 – 1⁄8" SEM Stub Holder. Consists of 5 tiers set
sample rack. Bottom shelf holds 1" dia sample mount and top four
shelves each hold 5 SEM stubs with 1⁄8" pin (SEM stubs not included)
76542-50 Model SS200-375-1 – 3⁄8" SEM Stub Holder. Consists of 5 tiers set
sample rack. Bottom shelf holds 1" dia sample mount and four top
shelves each hold 3 SEM stubs 3⁄8" pin (SEM stubs not included)
Cat. # Description Qty.
75957-01 FIB sample Holder – High Profile each
75957-50 Fortress™ Sample Loader for High Profile each

638 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec16_618-639_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 7/2/14 1:40 AM Page 639

Scanning Electron Microscope Supplies SECTION 16

 Storage Boxes 76600  EMS Specimen Storage Boxes for
Hitachi Mounts
 Specimen Mount Holders
 SEM Paper
1) Box with insert and lid; holds 4 of 1⁄2" dia.
(12.5mm) surface and 1⁄8" dia. (3.2mm) pin mounts
Storage Box
for Pin Mounts
76600 Mount Holder Box, Pin Type each An inexpensive solution
76610 Mount Holder Box, Pin Type 10/pk
for storing Pin Mounts
76620 Mount Holder Box, Pin Type 100/pk 76700
With a Pop Up box which stores
2) Box with insert and lid; up to 8 mounts: 1⁄2" (12.7mm)
holds 4 of 10mm x 10mm mounts head, 1⁄8" (3.2mm) diameter pin.
76700 Mount Holder Box for Jeol each Box Dimensions: 7cm long x
76710 Mount Holder Box for Jeol 10/pk 3.8cm wide x 3.5cm high (23⁄4 x 11⁄2 x 13⁄8")
76720 Mount Holder Box for Jeol 100/pk
76505 SEM Paper Storage Box 50/Pack

3) Box with insert and lid; 76730  Wooden Storage Box

holds 4 of 12.5mm x 12.5mm mounts
EMS offers a high end wooden
76730 Mount Holder Box for Jeol 840 each
storage box for the storage of
76732 Mount Holder Box for Jeol 840 10/pk
76734 Mount Holder Box for Jeol 840 100/pk 12.7mm (1⁄2") pin mounts. The
box can store up to 128
4) Universal Reversible Mount Holders mounts in rubber foam with
complete indexed sides)
Box with insert and lid; holds 12 of 10 and 15mm
diameter mounts or 12 of 3.2mm (1⁄8") pin mounts 76500
76500 Universal Mount Holder each
76510 Universal Mount Holder 10/pk
76520 Universal Mount Holder 100/pk

5) Sample Mount Storage Box 76507 Wooden Storage Box for Pin Mounts each
A soft silicone base in a hinged plastic box; the base
has 9 cavities, each 1" (25mm) in diameter and 1⁄4"  EMS18 Pin Mount
(6mm) deep. The box accommodates up to 9 Storage Box
mounting stubs of either 1" (25mm) in diameter or a 76525 and Holder
1
⁄8" diameter pin. Overall measurements: The EMS Specimen mount Box
43⁄4"(L)x35⁄8"(W)x11⁄4"(H) (12cm x 9.5cm x 3cm) and holder is a unique storage
box for Pin mounts with 3.2mm
76525 Mount Holder each
(1⁄8”) Pins. The box is numbered
1-18 and it can accept mounts
ranging in size from 6.4mm to
50 mm. With the ability to hold
 SEM Single Mount Storage Tube as follows: 18 of 12.7mm; 8 of 25mm; 2 of 32mm and even
A plastic tube and plug. The pin mount 1⁄8" (3.1mm) in 38 or 50 mm The maximum specimen height between
diameter is inserted securely to the plug and protected mount surface and closed lid is 16mm (5⁄8").
by the tube. Ideal for storage or mailing.
76506 18 Pin Mount Storage Box and Holder each
76530-01 SEM Single Mount Storage Tube 10/pk
76530-05 SEM Single Mount Storage Tube 50/pk  EMS- Hitachi SEM
76530-10 SEM Single Mount Storage Tube 100/pk
Mount Storage Box
 SEM Single Mount Storage Tube EMS introduces a unique box
for Hitachi SEM mounts with
and Mailer, for Hitachi
M4 threaded hole in the base.
A plastic tube and plug for M4 threaded Hitachi mounts. The box is numbered 1 – 10 to
15mm in diameter Tube. A 15 mm Hitachi mount can be accommodate Hitachi mounts
inserted securely to the plug and then protected by the tube. from 15 to 32mm diameter.
Ideal for storage as well as mailing. The internal diameter of The box can hold the following:
the tube is 0.83”(21mm). The Outer measurements of the
 10 x 15mm mounts
tube are: 0.9” (23mm) x 2.05” H (52mm)
 8 x 25mm mounts
76535-01 SEM Hitachi Single Mount Storage Tube 10/pk  2 x 32mm mounts
76531-05 SEM Hitachi Single Mount Storage Tube 50/pk
76531-10 SEM Hitachi Single Mount Storage Tube 100/pk 76503 EMS-Hitachi SEM Mount Box each
76504 EMS-Hitachi SEM Mount Box 10/pk

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 639
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec16_640-649_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 7/1/14 8:54 AM Page 640

SECTION 16 Scanning Electron Microscope Supplies

® Certified Conductive Adhesives
EMS introduces a new reliable line of conductive adhesives which are certified by the Bureau
Veritas Quality International. Quality Standards: ISO 9001; EN29001; ANSI/ASQC Q91
® Silver Conductive 18DB70X ® Carbon Conductive
Silver Conductive Coating 18DB70X is a direct Adhesive 502
substitute for Silver Conductive Fluid 416, which is no A High Temperature Conductive Paint
longer available. This material was specially formulated
for use in geographic areas that demand the use of low Conductive Adhesive 502 is a combination of
VOC (Volatile Organic Compounds) products. It provides specially processed carbon particles in a
low ohms at very thin dry film thickness on almost any fluoroelastomer resin system designed to provide
surface, and exhibits excellent long term shielding and high resistance values. In its cured form, it exhibits
grounding properties. both high and low temperature flexibility and
Typical Properties: moisture resistance.
T As supplied (Liquid)
Pigment ..................................................Silver Advantages:
Binder ....................................................Acrylic T Withstands ambient temperatures of over
Solids content by weight ..............50.8% ± 5% 500°F (260°C)
Density ............................13.9 lb/gal (1.67kg/l) ® Silver Conductive T Remains flexible over temperature range of
T As applied: Adhesive 503 –40°F to over 500°F (260°C)
VOC ....................................0.5 lb/gal (59.6g/l) A High Temperature Conductive Paint T Cures at room temperature
Diluent ................Acetone (1:1 ratio by volume)
Drying time Silver paint 503 is a flexible, high temperature T Good adhesion to a variety of substrate
5 minutes air dry to touch/10 minutes to handle conductive material designed for a wide variety of T Excellent oxidation resistance
then 5 minutes at 180°–225°F (82° – 107°C) or uses, and adheres to most substrates. T Ready to use - easy to apply
air cure for 24 hrs.
T When dried: Advantages: T Typical Properties (as supplied)
Service temperature ..................300°F (150°C) T Withstands ambient temperatures of over Pigment ..............Specially Processed Carbon
Sheet resistance ......0.015 ohms/sq. in./mil (25μm) 500°F (260°C) Binder....................................Fluoroelastomer
Attenuation..............................................75 dB T Remains flexible over temperature range of Diluent ................MethylEethylKketone (MEK)
–40°F to 500°F Color......................................................Black
RT 12684-15 Silver Conductive Coating 15 g
T Highly conductive – good adhesion to sub- Consistency ............................................Fluid
strates Density ..........................7.2lbs/gal (0.87 kg/l)
® Silver Conductive Adhesive T Dries at room temperature Solid content by weight ..........................13%
T Ready to use – easy to apply Viscosity ..............................600 ± 200 mPas
Paste 478SS (Brookfield RVT @ 20rpm)
Our adhesive 478SS is a conductive, silver-based
polymer which is used for thick film coatings where T Typical Properties (as supplied): Flash point....................................23°F (-°5C)
liquid silver is not an option. Once cured, it offers a very Pigment ............Specially Treated Silver 56% Shelf life for this product is one year under
high Tg (glass transition temperature) 153°F (67°C) to Binder....................................Fluoroelastomer original seal. Store in cool place
prevent blocking, and offers superior adhesion to Carrier ..........Methyl Isobuthyl Ketone (MIBK)
T Typical Properties (as cured)
polyester film. Adhesive 478SS can be cured at 200°F Color ......................Silver - Consistency: fluid
Density........................14.6 lbs/gal (1.75kg/L) Color......................................................Black
(93°C) within 15 minutes. Higher temperatures will
Solid content by volume ..........................18% Maximum service
reduce the time needed to achieve a final cure. Temperature: ..........................525°F (275°C)
Weight solids ..........................................62%
T Typical Properties (as supplied): Viscosity............................................1700cps Sheet resistance........130 ± 100 ohms/sq.in./
Shelf life for this product is two years under ..................................................1 mil dry film
Pigment ..................................................Silver
Binder ................................................Polyester original seal. Store in cool place Drying
Color ........................................................Silver T Typical Properties (as cured):
Air drying of the product is adequate for most
Dilutent ....................................Carbitol Acetate Color......................................................Silver applications. To assure complete solvent loss, the
Consistency ............Paste (13,000-28,000 cps) Service temperature ................525°F (275°C)
Solid content..................................72.5-75.5% coating can be baked for 15 minutes at 302°F
Sheet resistance ................0.05 ohms/sq. in/
Flash point ................................230°F (110°C) (150°C)
..................................................1mil dry film
Shelf life ..............6 months under original seal
Drying 12684-30 Carbon Conductive Paint 502 30 g
T Typical Properties (as cured): RT

Air dry coated part approximately 10 minutes

Color ......................................................Silver
(depending on humidity) before carrying out
Sheet Resistance ..<0.025 ohm/square inch @1 mil continued UUUUU
resistance checks. Air dry to touch in 30
RT 12685-15 Silver Conductive 15g seconds and it is ready for use in 2 minutes.
Adhesive 478SS
RT 12685-25 Silver Adhesive 25ml RT 12686-15 Silver Conductive 15g
478SS Thinner Adhesive 503

640 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec16_640-649_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 7/1/14 8:54 AM Page 641

Scanning Electron Microscope Supplies SECTION 16

 Certified Conductive  Colloidal Compounds and Conductive
Adhesives (cont.)
Adhesives
 Graphite Conductive  A) Silver Adhesives
Adhesive 154 Liquid; Colloidal Silver: 1-Methoxy-2-propanol
Adhesive 154 is an easy-to-apply resistance coating base. Fast drying. Average grain size less than
designed to provide high lubricity, conductivity, and 1 μm and Silver content is 60%. Sheet resistance is
excellent release properties to many non-conductive 0.02 ohm per square inch @ 1 mil thickness.
substrates, including most plastics. It is made from a Comes with a brush attached to the cap. Service
dispersion of colloidal graphite in an isopropanol base temperature is 30 minutes at 200°C.
which quickly air-dries, forms an uniform thin film
adherent layer. Air dries to touch in 5 minutes and is RT 12630 Silver Liquid 15g  D) Leit-C-Plast
ready for use in 30 minutes. After air drying, bake for RT 12641 Colloidal Silver A special adhesive with very high electrical
5 minutes at 167°F (75°C) to achieve optimum coating Extender 25ml conductivity and permanent plasticity for the
qualities in a shorter curing cycle. preparation of big specimens in SEM work.
 Typical Properties (as supplied) Paste; Colloidal Silver: Clear Lacquer base. Thick RT 12667 Leit-C-Plast 15g
Pigment ............................................Graphite base — ideal for non-flowing requirements. Easily
Color......................................................Black applied with micro-spatula or wooden toothpick.
Binder ......................................Celluosic resin Particle size ranging from 0.4–1 μm. 80% are less
Carrier ..........................................Isopropanol than 1 μm. Cure in 16–20 hours at room
Dilutent....................Isopropanol or equivalent temperature or 30 minutes at 125–150˚C
Consistency ..........................................Liquid
Weight solids ..........................................20%
RT 12640 Silver Paste 25g
Volume solids..........................................14% RT 12641 Colloidal Silver
Flash point ..................................52°F (11°C) Extender 25ml  E) Tempfix Adhesive
Shelf life ............6 months under original seal A thermoplastic adhesive for mounting powder
 Typical Properties (as cured) Wooden Picks, See Specimen Prep. specimens and small particles for SEM. It does
page 366  not contain any solvents and it is stable in high
Color ............................................Matte black
vacuum. It is not sticky at room temperature but
Service temp. ............................150°F (65°C)
Sheet resistance ..................1.2 K ohms/sq inch
 B) Graphite Adhesives becomes adhesive at 40°C and melts at 120°C.
..................................................@ 1 mil dry film Water Base: Flat surface texture. The average flake Tempfix may also be used as an embedding
size is 1μm. Service temperature: 200°C. medium.
RT 12691-30 Graphite Conductive Adhesive 154 30g
RT 12650 Graphite, Water base 50g RT 12668 Tempfix Adhesive Set each
 Graphite Conductive Isopropanol base: Flat surface texture.
Adhesive 112 The average flake size is 1μm. Service
Adhesive 112 is an air drying graphite coating of temperature is 65°C.
TECHNICAL TIP
unusually high conductivity. It provides excellent Mounting Powders,
RT 12660 Graphite, Isopropanol base 30g
static bleed properties and acts as a protective Granules, And Fibers
energy absorbing layer. It also offers good shielding RT 12661 Graphite Extender 30ml
performance (30-50 db over 50-450 MHz) at a
The thermoplastic adhesive, Tempfix (EMS
coating thickness of 2 mils. It is water based and  C) CCC Cat.# 12668), is an excellent smooth
useful in solvent prohibited applications. Carbon embedding medium for stabilizing powders,
Adhesive granules and fibers. Tempfix becomes sticky
To use: Air dry until all water has flashed off. Air An electrically at 40°C and melts at 120°C. To use: spread
dries to touch in 20 minutes, to handle in 25 minutes. Carbon a thin layer over a sample support disc and
It will continue to harden for 24 hours. It can be Conductive
forced dried at temperatures up to 160°F (71°C).
allow to cool. The sample is then sprinkled
Cement for on the hard surface and the temperature is
 Typical Properties (as supplied) specimen raised to 40°C for 30-60 seconds and
Pigment ............................................Graphite mounting in all allowed to cool again to room temperature.
Binder ..................................................Acrylic SEM work. After Excess particles are then removed by gentle
Dilutent ..................................................None drying of the cement, immediate investigation of
brushing or compressed air. At room temper-
Color......................................................Black conductive specimens is possible. Non-conductive
ature Tempfix has a smooth featureless
Solid content ..........................................34% specimens need only to be coated with carbon or
surface that allows specimens to be imaged
Shelf life ............6 months under original seal metal. Thinner is available if the cement viscosity is
too thick. and clearly distinguished from the support
 Typical Properties (as cured) media. Silvio Marchese-Ragona, Renee Jobe,
Color......................................................Black RT 12664 CCC Adhesive 30g
Aleda Jacobs. “AFM Preparation Techniques
Service temp.........................350°F (190.8°C) RT 12665 CCC Thinner 30ml for Bulk and Powder Samples”. EMSA
Sheet resistance: ..........20 ohms/square inch Bulletin 22:3 Nov., 1992.
............................................@ 1 mil dry film
RT 12693-30 Graphite Conductive Adhesive 112 30g continued 

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 641
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec16_640-649_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 7/1/14 8:54 AM Page 642

SECTION 16 Scanning Electron Microscope Supplies

® Certified Colloidal Compounds
® EMS Conductive GOLD Paste ® Two Part
Conductive
Silver Epoxy
This electrically conductive silver
epoxy is used for adhering
samples as well as solderless
connections such as bonding in electric design, prototype and repair
work, circuit board repair, surface mount connections, static discharge,
shielding and grounding. It is also ideal for the bonding of heat sensitive
components. Its curing time is within ten minutes at 100°F (38°C), or at
room temperature. Conductivity is 0.001 ohm/cm.
12642-14 Two Part Silver Epoxy 14g/kit

® Conductive
Silver Pen
This pen is designed for
making instant conductive
silver traces. It is ideal for applying samples to SEM stubs. A unique valve tip
allows for very smooth flow with normal writing pressure and it is spring loaded
® EMS Conductive Epoxy Gold-Paste to prevent clogging. For conductivity traces, solderable termination’s are
This EMS one part Epoxy Gold Paste is a gold-filled conductive bonding,
possible using a 250°F cure for 15-20 minutes. Tin, lead, or silver solder can
exhibiting high electrical conductivity and bond strength. This Gold Paste is
be used (Do not exceed 350°F for more than 5 seconds). Each pen is filled
used in preference to silver-epoxy or other silver preparations to avoid silver
with approximately 100 feet of traces. Silver content: 39-45% with less than
migration problems, or when a higher signal is required.
10 micron diameter. The thinner that is used for this pen is Butyl Acetate.
This Gold Paste is well suited to all SEM work, and it bonds well to alumina 12644-01 Conductive Silver Pen, Standard Tip each
ceramic substrate, phenolic circuit boards, and transistor headers. It is also 12644-02 Conductive Silver Pen, Micro Tip each
useful in a variety of applications in solid state and hybrid circuits including
attachment, bonding semiconductor devices, heat sinks, capacitor chips. ® Flex Conductive Pen
Properties of Epoxy Gold-Paste: This micro-tip pen is used
Composition: 88% Gold for drawing flexible
System: One-part epoxy conductive silver traces on
Viscosity: 175,000 cps Mylar® and any flex
Pot Life (25°C): 6 months circuitry. Dries in minutes. 8.5g (0.3oz)
Cure: 15 hrs. @150°C, or 1 hr. 12645-01 Flex Conductive Pen each
@ 150°C plus 2 hrs. @200°C
Elec. Resist (Ohm-cm): 4 x 104 ® Opaque
Bond Shear Strength: 1000 psi White, Extra
Outgasing (postcure): 0.70% 1000 hrs @125°C
Thinner: Butyl carbitol acetate or butyl
Fine Pen
Permanently mark on nearly any surface in white color and the marking
cellosolve acetate
is waterproof. This pen is ideal for SEM, marking sample identification
Serv. Temp. Range: -65°C to +200°C
on carbon tabs, aluminum stubs, conductive tape or any similar
12640 Gold Epoxy Paste 2g surface. The pen contains xylene.
12685-25 Gold Thinner( Butyl Carbitol Acetate) 25 ml 72168-01 Opaque White Pen each

® EMS Conductive Gold-Paste ® Graphite Spray 12648

This EMS Conductive Gold-Paste is a one part adhesive. Fast drying – dries An easy to use graphite spray to coat small
at room temperature. Maximum service temperature is 65°C. This adhesive samples. Its electrical resistance is 1-2
is not for permanent use, useful for testing and temporary work where a Kohm/sq” at 1 mil thickness. It is fast drying
high signal is required from the adhesive. and produces a very flat, thin, and uniform
Gold content is ~75%, including sphere sizes < 2 μm, and flake size <10 graphite film. Its service temperature is up
μm, in organic binders and a solvent. Keep refrigerated for good shelf life. to 204°C.
Sheet resistance is 0.02 to 0.05 ohm-cm @ 1 mil thickness. 12648 Graphite Spray 450g
12642 EMS Conductive Gold-Paste 2 gm
12643 Conductive Gold-Paste Extender 25ml

642 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec16_640-649_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 7/1/14 8:54 AM Page 643

Scanning Electron Microscope Supplies SECTION 16

 EPO-TEK – Epoxy Conductive Adhesive
 EPO-TEK® EE129-4  EPO-TEK® H20E
Epo-Tek EE129-4 is a room temperature cure, silver-filled epoxy,
®
Epo-Tek® H20E is a two component, 100% solid
designed for making electrical connection in SEM mounting sample, circuit silver-filled epoxy system, silver-resin paste and
assembly, semiconductor, LCD applications. liquid hardener, mixing ration is 1:1.
Epo-Tek® EE129-4 comes with two parts: A & B and mixing ratio is 1:1.  Epo-Tek H22E features high thermal
Shelf life is one year at room temperature conductivity, and is very well suited for
extensive high temperature applications
Works well with surface like Au, Ag-Pd, Cu, brass, Kovar, stainless steel, (300 – 400°C)
as well as ceramic, PCB, solder masks, most plastic and glasses
 Epo-Tek H20E is also a conductive adhesive
 Low temperature cures capable from 23°C to 80°C. of choice for old or new applications.
 Suggested for cryogenic cooling applications  Its applications include: chip bonding and
electronic bonding as well as SEM mounting.
 Works well in SEM, microscopy applications
 H20E contains no solvents and will not
 Works well in aerospace hybrid circuits and ITO electrodes in
outgas.
LCD packaging and assembly
 When cured, H20E is resistant to solvents,
 Reasonable pot life of 3 hours, allows for preparation.
resin and moisture
 Smooth thixotropic paste allows for many way of application
 Long Pot life (2½ days)
 Shelf life is one year when store at 23°C
Maximum Bond Line Cure Schedules:
100°C......................15 minutes 23°C............................24 hours Maximum Bond Line Cure Schedules:
80°C ...............................1 hour Pot Life .........................3 hours 175°C......................15 minutes 120°C............................2 hours
70°C..............................2 hours 150°C .............................1 hour 80°C............................24 hours
Typical Properties (to be used as a guide only, not a specification) Typical Properties (to be used as a guide only, not a specification)

Physical Properties: Physical Properties:

Color: Part A – silver; Part B – silver Color: Part A – silver; Part B – silver
Consistency: Smooth, thixotropic – 4000 cPs Consistency: Smooth, thixotropic
Viscosity (@ 100 RPM / 23˚C): 2,000 – 4000 cPs 2,200 – 3,200 cPs
Viscosity (@ 100 RPM / 23˚C):
Thixotropic Index: 4.6 Thixotropic Index: 3.69
Glass Transition Temp (Tg): ≥ 45˚C (Dynamic cure Glass Transition Temp (Tg):≥ 80˚C (Dynamic cure 20 – 200˚C / ISO 25 Min;
20 – 200˚C / ISO 25 Min; Ramp -10 – 200˚C @20˚C/Min)
Ramp -10 – 200˚C @20˚C/Min) Coefficient of Thermal Below Tg: 31 x 10-6 in/in/˚C
Coefficient of Thermal Below Tg: 30 x 10-6 in/in/˚C Expansion (CTE): Above Tg: 158 x 10-6 in/in/˚C
Expansion (CTE): Above Tg: 227 x 10-6 in/in/˚C Shore D Hardness: 75
Shore D Hardness: 63 Lap Shear Strength @ 23˚C: 1,475 psi
Lap Shear Strength @ 23˚C: 1,110 psi Die Shear Strength @ 23˚C: ≥ 5 kg / 1,700 psi
Die Shear Strength @ 23˚C: ≥ 5 kg / 1,700 psi Weight Loss: @200˚C: 0.59%; @250˚C: 1.09%; @300˚C: 1.67%
Weight Loss: @200˚C: 0.18%; @250˚C: 0.54%; Degradation Temp (TGA): 425˚C
@300˚C: 2.06% Operating Temp: Continuous: -55˚C to 200˚C
Degradation Temp (TGA): 303˚C Intermittent: -55˚C to 300˚C
Operating Temp: Continuous: -55˚C to 150˚C Storage Modulus @ 23˚C: 808, 700 psi
Intermittent: -55˚C to 250˚C Ion: Cl- 73 ppm; Na+ 2 ppm; NH4+ 98 ppm; K+ 3 ppm
Storage Modulus @ 23˚C: 156, 318 psi
Particle Size: ≤ 45 microns
Ion: Cl- 223 ppm; Na+ 26 ppm
NH4+ 22 ppm; K+ 12 ppm Electrical Properties:
Particle Size: ≤ 45 microns Volume Resistivity @ 23˚C: ≤ 0.0004 Ohm-cm
Electrical Properties: Thermal Properties
Volume Resistivity @ 23˚C: ≤ 0.0003 Ohm-cm Thermal Conductivity: 2.50 W/mK
Volume Resistivity @ 23˚C Thermal Conductivity: 29 W/mK Based on Thermal Resistance Data:
(23˚C/24 hour cure): 0.01 Ohm-cm R=L x K-1 x A-1
Thermal Resistance: (Junction to Case): TO-18 package with
Thermal Properties nickel-gold metalized 20 x 20 mil chips and
Thermal Conductivity: 1.60 W/mK bonded with Epo-Tek H20E (2 mil thick)
Epo-Tek®H20E: 6.7 to 7.0˚C/W
Solder: 4.0 to 5.0˚C/W

RT 12670-EE Epo-Tek® EE129-4 Adhesive 1 oz RT 12671-20E Epo-Tek® H20E Adhesive 1 oz

continued 

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 643
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec16_640-649_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 7/1/14 8:54 AM Page 644

SECTION 16 Scanning Electron Microscope Supplies

 EPO-TEK – Epoxy Conductive Adhesive (continued)
 EPO-TEK H20S ®
 EPO-TEK® H22
Epo-Tek® H20S is a modified version of Epo- Epo-Tek® H22 is a two component, silver-filled epoxy system. Mixing ratio
Tek®H20E. Epo-Tek® H20S is a highly reliable, two of silver resin paste and liquid hardener is 100:4.5. Pot life 16 hours, and
component, silver-filled epoxy with a smooth, shelf life is 6 months at room temperature.
thixotropic consistency (mixing ratio 1:1). This
modified version offers high electrical conductivity,  Smooth, free-flowing, slightly thixotropic paste
short curing cycles, proven reliability, and the  High Tg allows it to be used for high temperature applications
convenient mix ratio, Epo-Tek® H20S is extremely ≤300°C)
simple to use. Epo-Tek® H20S pot life is 2.5 days  Contains no solvents – It is a NASA approved low outgasing epoxy.
and shelf life is one year when store at room  Excellent resistance to solvents, chemicals and moisture
temperature.  Extended pot life and fast curing at low temperature <100°C
Maximum Bond Line Cure Schedules:  Designed for die bonding and sealing hybrid circuit. Recommended
for SEM small angle cleavage and wafer bonding.
175°C ..........................................45 seconds
150°C ............................................5 minutes Maximum Bond Line Cure Schedules:
120°C ..........................................15 minutes 150°C................................................................................5 minutes
100°C ..........................................45 minutes 120°C..............................................................................10 minutes
80°C ............................................90 minutes 100°C..............................................................................20 minutes
80°C................................................................................45 minutes

Typical Properties (to be used as a guide only, not a specification) Typical Properties (to be used as a guide only, not a specification)

Physical Properties: Physical Properties:

Color: Part A – silver; Part B – silver Color: Part A – silver; Part B – amber
Consistency: Smooth, thixotropic – 4000 cPs Consistency: Smooth, flowing paste
Viscosity (@ 100 RPM / 23˚C): 1,800 – 2,800 cPs Viscosity (@ 100 RPM / 23˚C): 12,000 – 20,000 cPs
Thixotropic Index: 5 Thixotropic Index: 2.36
Glass Transition Temp (Tg): ≥ 80˚C (Dynamic cure Glass Transition Temp (Tg): ≥ 100˚C (Dynamic cure
20 – 200˚C / ISO 25 Min; 20 – 200˚C / ISO 25 Min;
Ramp -10 – 200˚C @20˚C/Min) Ramp -10 – 200˚C @20˚C/Min)
Coefficient of Thermal Below Tg: 31 x 10-6 in/in/˚C Coefficient of Thermal Below Tg: 39 x 10-6 in/in/˚C
Expansion (CTE): Above Tg: 120 x 10-6 in/in/˚C Expansion (CTE): Above Tg: 224 x 10-6 in/in/˚C
Shore D Hardness: 57 Shore D Hardness: 80
Lap Shear Strength @ 23˚C: 1,240 psi Lap Shear Strength @ 23˚C: 1,980 psi
Die Shear Strength @ 23˚C: ≥ 5 kg / 1,700 psi Die Shear Strength @ 23˚C: ≥ 5 kg / 1,700 psi
Weight Loss: @200˚C: 0.40%; @250˚C: 0.60%; Weight Loss: @200˚C: 0.09%; @250˚C: 0.23%;
@300˚C: 1.37% @300˚C: 1.42%
Degradation Temp (TGA): 414˚C Degradation Temp (TGA): 454˚C
Operating Temp: Continuous: -55˚C to 200˚C Operating Temp: Continuous: -55˚C to 250˚C
Intermittent: -55˚C to 300˚C Intermittent: -55˚C to 350˚C
Storage Modulus @ 23˚C: 339, 720 psi Storage Modulus @ 23˚C: 540, 120 psi
Ion: Cl- 162 ppm; Na+ 0 ppm Ion: Cl- 175 ppm; Na+ 60 ppm
NH4+ 282 ppm NH4+ 148 ppm; K+ 6 ppm
Particle Size: ≤ 20 microns Particle Size: ≤ 45 microns
Electrical Properties: Electrical Properties:
Volume Resistivity @ 23˚C: ≤ 0.0005 Ohm-cm Volume Resistivity @ 23˚C: ≤ 0.005 Ohm-cm
Thermal Properties Thermal Properties
Thermal Conductivity: 3.25 W/mK Thermal Conductivity: .94 W/mK

RT 12672-20S Epo-Tek® H20S Adhesive 1 oz RT 12673-22 Epo-Tek® H22 Adhesive 1 oz

644 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec16_640-649_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 7/1/14 8:54 AM Page 645

Scanning Electron Microscope Supplies SECTION 16

 Loctite Adhesives  Krazy GlueTM Pen
Loctite 409™ Super Bonder ®
The one we all know and have used. Ready to use.
For a general-purpose gel adhesive, clear, Requires no mixing or preparation. This pen contains
gap fills 0.010”; surface insensitive Ethyl, cyanoacrylate. Clear in color and bonds immediately.
tensile shear strength 3,200 psi, and Comes in a 3g tube.
temperature range –65°F to 180°F. Cure
speed: fixture - 75 seconds, full - 24 hours.
Loctite 454™ Prism® RT 12646-05 Krazy GlueTM Pen each
For use with porous surfaces, clear, gap fills
0.010”, surface insensitive Ethyl, gel type,  MikrostikTM Adhesive,
tensile shear strength 3200 psi, temperature Non-Conductive
range –65°F to 180°F. Cure speed: fixture Fast drying, ultrathin clear adhesive suitable for mounting
– 15 seconds, full - 24 hours. small particles which can be submerged in other adhesives.
Loctite 4861™ Prism® It can be diluted with methyl ethyl ketone. Quick-drying.
For use with flexible surfaces, clear, gap fill 0.008”, surface flexible Alkyl, Comes in a bottle with an applicator brush. 14 ml.
viscosity 4,000 cP, tensile shear strength 2465 psi, temperature range –65°F to 12646-01 MikrostikTM Adhesive, Non-Conductive 14ml
212°F. Cure speed: fixture – 25 seconds, full – 24 hours.
Loctite 349™ Impruv®  SEM Specimen Preparation Stand
For bond glass/metal, appearance: clear/straw, cure type: UV, viscosity: Specimen mounts of different
9,500cP, shore hardness: D70, temperature range: –65°F to 266°F sizes are placed in the outer ring
of the holder base. The center
Loctite 4011™ Prism®
Designed for the assembly of difficult-to-bond materials, such as wood, paper, hole of the base will hold a bottle
leather and fabric. Suitable for use in the assembly of disposable medical of conductive adhesive. One side
devices. The product provides rapid bonding of a wide range of materials, of the base takes 10 of the 1⁄8"
including metals, plastic and elastomers. Cure speed: 2 to 20 seconds pin mounts; reverse side takes
depending on the material. 10 of 10 to 15mm diameter
mounts.
Chemical type: Ethyl cyanoacrylate, transparent, colorless to straw colored
fluid. One part required no mixing. Low-viscosity (100 cP). Cure by humidity, 76750 ⁄8" SEM Preparation Stand
1
each
and temperature range –65°F to 180°F
RT 72570-09 Loctite Super Bonder 409 3 g Tube  Adhesive
RT 72571-54 Loctite Prism 454 Adhesive 3 g Tube Tabs
RT 72572-61 Loctite Prism 4861 Adhesive 20 g Press these self-sticking
RT 72582-01 Loctite 349 Impruv Adhesive 50 ml
adhesive tabs to the
RT 72573-11 Loctite Prism 4011 Adhesive 20 g
surface of an SEM
mount, then lift off tab
Loctite 404 Quick Set Tissue Adhesive for applying the sample.
This adhesive is perfect for those applications where a Each box contains 72
quick-curing adhesive is needed. Comes in an applicator- sheets of 36 tabs each.
tipped bottle, 0.33 oz. (10ml). Tab measures 12mm in diameter. Non-conductive.
RT 12687-01 Loctite 404 Quick Set Tissue Adhesive 10ml 76760 Adhesive Tabs 2592 tabs/box

Loctite™ 460 Adhesive

Our LoctiteTM 460 is a quick curing low viscosity glue that  Conductive “Lift-N-
can be used for mounting samples to any substrate (glass, Press” Adhesive Tabs
metal and/or plastic). It is soluble in acetone. Comes in an This 1⁄2" (12mm) diameter conductive
applicator-tipped plastic bottle — 20 g. tabs are similar to our adhesive tabs,
RT 12646-08 LoctiteTM 460 Adhesive each but they work like carbon adhesive tabs.
Just remove tab from the roll, press
Loctite® Fixmaster® Poxy Pak™, onto surface where you want the film,
Fast Cure Epoxy lift “tab” and peel it off. The tabs can be cut to desired size before
This fast cure, general purpose epoxy bonds virtually any being removed from its backing, for use on smaller samples.
material. It will also fill or seal cracks and rebuild worn
surfaces. Comes in a 1 oz. syringe with a built-in plunger FEATURES:
for easy dispensing without equipment. Working time is  Smoother background – Over  Content a traces of nickel
approximately 4 minutes. Includes nozzle and mixing stick. 99% transparent to EDS (<0.6%) and copper (<0.3%)
This unique adhesive may be made electrically conductive  High strength adhesive  250 tabs per roll.
with the addition of any conductive powder (Silver, Carbon  Better particle detection  An affordable double-sided
etc.)  Adhesive only 0.002” thick conductive tab for all SEM
RT 12646-09 Loctite® Fixmaster® Poxy Pak™, samples.
Fast Cure Epoxy each 76762-01 Conductive Adhesive Tabs 250/roll

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 645
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec16_640-649_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 7/1/14 8:54 AM Page 646

SECTION 16 Scanning Electron Microscope Supplies

® Conductive Carbon Adhesive Tabs ® Low Temperature Hot Glue Gun
Standard Carbon Conductive Adhesive Tabs – Tabs are formed by two This low temperature mini
sides of thick conductive adhesive (45 μm on each side) with the center glue gun is safe and allows 72171
conductive core film (35 μm). With the total thickness of 125 μm, these for the easy application of the
tabs will offer melt glue to the aluminum
reasonably firm, stub for the mounting of bulk
smooth surfaces for or irregular shaped
a variety SEM specimens for SEM. Comes
applications, complete with a 40” cord,
including gunshot and two glue sticks. Accepts 5⁄16" diameter all temperature or low
residue analysis. temperature glue sticks. 110 volt, 10 watts.
Tabs are protected 72171-00 Low Temp Hot Glue Gun each
by white liners, 72171-10 Low-Temp Glue Sticks 10/pk
which do not have to
be removed when
samples are ready to ® Rubber Cement
be mounted. Excellent adhesive for all paper pasting and
mountings of drawings and photographs. It is
T No out-gassing
also used to adhere specimens to SEM Stubs.
T Conductive adhesive is carbon filled acrylic glue Any excess cured cement can be easily
T Solvent free removed. A 4 oz bottle comes with a brush in
T Adhesive can be removed by ethyl acetate, ethanol, isopropyl alco- the cap.
hol or alcohols
72170 Rubber Cement each 72170
T Service temperature is up to 60ºC (140ºF)
Tabs contain some traces of Si, Sb, S, Fe, Mg, Na.
TECHNICAL TIP
Thick Carbon Conductive Tabs or Image Tabs – The stiff and smooth THE MOUNTING OF SPECIMENS FOR SEM
surface conductive tabs are 260 μm thick, including 200 μm thick WITH THE COMMON GLUE GUN
conductive carbonate base, coated 30 μm thick on each side with Specimens are usually attached to SEM stubs by means of either
conductive adhesive. However, these tabs are not as conductive and sticky sticky tape, adhesives, or melt adhesives.
as the Standard Carbon Conductive Tabs. Thick Carbon Conductive Tabs are T Sticky tapes are very convenient and fast; but the
used for photographic background as well as for Jet Scan applications, bonds formed are not strong or stable. In
where the tabs must be removed and filed away. addition, it is difficult to attach large, bulk, and
Ultra-Thin Carbon Conductive Adhesive Tabs – These tabs have Core irregular shaped specimens with tape.
T Adhesives, usually solvent based, can form
material which is nonconductive cloth (70 μm) with Carbon Filler Conductive
strong bonds, however, for the satisfactory
Adhesive (2 x 45μm). Total thickness is 160 μm. operation of the coater and the SEM, the solvent
Spectro Grade Carbon Adhesive Tabs – High purity conductive carbons must be evaporated completely which can take a
for less interference signals, such as X-Ray analysis. considerable amount of time.
T Melt adhesives can set up strong bonds very
Ultra-Smooth Carbon Adhesive Tabs – Carbon adhesive tabs that
quickly, however, the procedure for its use is
eliminate issues with rough surfaces, insufficient tackiness, and hardness cumbersome.
with significantly lower contaminant levels under EDS. Tabs are made in Mounting with melt adhesives using a common glue gun is
USA and very popular, and may be used in place of other conductive quicker and more convenient. Several glue guns were examined
adhesive in many applications in conventional and field emission and tested. The temperature at the nozzle of conventional glue
microscopes. They are also widely used in forensic laboratories for study of guns was found to be between 180-195°C which could cause
gunshots residues. Without the addition of conductive coating, small damage to heat-sensitive specimens.
nonconductive particles can often be imaged and X-Ray analyzed, cutting However, now there is a so-called low temperature glue gun and
down your analysis time. These tabs are composed of a thin film of strong adhesive (see New Products, Section III in this N/V)that
adhesive approximately 1⁄2" diameter. Over 99% transparent to EDS, with a overcomes this problem. The nozzle temperature measures only
very small amount of nickel (0.6%) and copper (< 0.3%). at 106°C. The general procedure is very simple: the melt is
dispersed from the nozzle directly onto the surface of a stub.
Refrigeration will increase shelf life but tabs need to be warmed up to room While the adhesive is still molten or soft, the specimen is applied
temperature before use (usually more than one hour) to it, forming a strong bond quickly. The specimen can be
Cat. # Description Qty. repositioned by softening the adhesive with the hot nozzle of the
77825-06 Standard Carbon Adhesive Tabs, 6mm Dia. 100/pk. glue gun.
77825-09 Standard Carbon Adhesive Tabs, 9mm Dia. 98/pk. There is no evidence of any degassing of the melt adhesive in
77825-12 Standard Carbon Adhesive Tabs, 12mm Dia. 100/pk. either the sputter coater or the SEM. The glue gun can also be
77825-25 Standard Carbon Adhesive Tabs, 25mm Dia. 54/pk. used in mounting granular or powdered specimens. A drop of
77824-12 Thick Carbon Conductive Tabs, 12mm Dia. 100/pk. melt adhesive is deposited and smeared onto the stub. The
77825-12-SP Ultra Thin Carbon Adhesive Tabs, 12mm Dia. 200/pk. granular or powdered specimen is adhered to the adhesive by
77826-12 Spectro Grade Carbon Adhesive Tabs, 12mm Dia. 120/pk. either sprinkling or dipping it.
77827-12 Ultra-Smooth Carbon Adhesive Tabs, 12mm 100/pk. G.W. Bailey, and J.A. Small, Editors, Proc. 50th Annual Meeting of
77827-25 Ultra-Smooth Carbon Adhesive Tabs, 25mm 50/pk. the EMSA/MAS/MSC/SMC. (1992) pg. 410-411.

646 Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec16_640-649_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 7/1/14 8:55 AM Page 647

Scanning Electron Microscope Supplies SECTION 16

® Conductive Adhesive Tapes

® 1) Scotch Conductive Tapes:
We offer two types of foil: Aluminum foil tape
(Scotch 1170) and copper foil tape (Scotch 77800 Aluminum Tape, Single Sided 1⁄4” x 18yds 1 roll
1181) with conductive adhesive. 3” core, 1⁄4” 77799 Aluminum Tape, Single Sided 1⁄2” x 18yds 1 roll
(6.35mm) width x 54 ft (16.5m) long 77798 Aluminum Tape, Single Sided 1” x 18yds 1 roll
77801 Copper Tape, Single Sided 1⁄2” x 18yds1 roll
Technical Data Copper Aluminum 77802 Copper Tape, Single Sided 1⁄4” x 18yds1 roll
Foil Thickness, mils 1.4 2
Total Thickness, mils (mm) 3(.076) 4(.102)
Adhesion oz/ln (N/10mm) 35(3.81) 35(3.81) Double Sided Copper Conductive Tape
Electrical Resistance With the same technical properties of our
Through Adhesive .005(.032) .01(.07) 77802 shown above this conductive tape is
ohm/in(ohm/cm)
12.7mm(W)x16.4m(L).
Continuous Long Term °C 155° 155°
Functional Days-Weeks °C 175° 175° 77802-22 Copper Conductive Tape, Double Sided each

® 2) SEM Conductive Tapes:

Cu Contained Al Contained We now offer a new line of conductive tapes,

Technical Data Nickel Tape Nickel Tape that are electrically conductive and offer a
PAD Pressed thin Cu Pressed thin Al clean background. They were developed
Overall Thickness 0.075mm 0.09mm
especially for SEM.
PAD 0.035mm 0.05mm
Adhesive 0.040mm 0.04mm 77810 Copper/Nickel Tape each
Conductive resistivity 0.004ohm/sq. Inch 0.008ohm/sq. Inch 77811 Copper/Nickel Tape 5 Rolls/pk
Adhesive Power/25mm width 920 gf 840 gf 77813 Aluminum/Nickel Tape each
Capacity after 60 min 0.1mm 0.1mm 77814 Aluminum/Nickel Tape 5 Rolls/pk

® 3) Double Sided Carbon Tape

With carbon double-sided tape, small particle sizes, such as 15-20 77816 each
microns, can be mounted on the adhesive and produce good background 77817 Double Sided Adhesive Carbon Tape 8mm(W) x 20m(L) (5⁄16" x 65) 5 Rolls/pk
77817-05 Double Sided Carbon Tape, 5mm(W)x20m(L) each
structure. Our Double sided Carbon tape is also available in five widths to
77817-12 Double Sided Carbon Tape, 12mm(W)x20m(L) each
accommodate varying specimen mount surface sizes and applications. 77817-20 Double Sided Carbon Tape, 20mm(W)x20m(L) each
77817-50 Double Sided Carbon Tape, 50mm(W)x20m(L) each
Double sided Carbon Tape Same as above however with Aluminum base as opposed
PAD Isolate unwoved cloth
to the unwoven base above. Offers a smoother surface
Overall Thickness 0.16mm
PAD 0.07mm 77817-05-Al Double Sided Carbon Tape, 5mm(W)x20m(L) each
Adhesive 0.045mmx2 77817-08-Al Double Sided Carbon Tape, 8mm(W)x20m(L) each
Conductive resistivity 50ohm/sq. Inch 77817-12-Al Double Sided Carbon Tape, 12mm(W)x20m(L) each
Adhesive Power/25mm width 1,000 gf 77817-20-Al Double Sided Carbon Tape, 20mm(W)x20m(L) each
Capacity after 60 min 0.2mm 77817-50-AL Double Sided Carbon Tape, 50mm(W)x20m(L) each

® 3a) Carbon Conductive Tape, Double Coated ® 4) Double Sided Conductive Cohesive Sheets
EMS introduces this unique double sided carbon tape which is 260 microns in Features:
thickness. The base which is Polycarbonate and 200 microns thick has on T Minimum impurities -
both of its sides 30 microns of conductive glue giving it a total thickness of Maximum conductivity.
260 microns. The tape has one transparent liner on one side and a white T Produces minimum gas
thicker one on the reverse which protects the tape in shipping. under vacuum conditions.
Specifications: T Easy handling.
Core Diameter: 3" (76mm)
Adhesive: Carbon Filled Acrylic Glur These conductive cohesive sheets offer good adhesion to the
Remover: Ethyl acetate, ethanol, isopropanol and or alcohol specimen and yield good conductivity and background structures,
Temperature: 60ºC(140ºF)-Maximum even with particles as small as 15 microns.
Impurities: Cu, Si, Sb, S, Na, P, Fe and Mg* Sheet size: 5cm(W)x12cm(L)
* These are considered to be small impurities but they may be present
Technical Adhesive Conductive
77819-12 Double sided Carbon Conductive Tape, 12mm (W) x 5m (L) each Data Thickness Power Resistivity
77819-25 Double Sides Carbon Conductive Tape, 25mm (W )x 5m (L) each Silver Sheet 0.13mm 880 gf/25mm 0.00ohm/5mm2
77819-65 Carbon Conductive Tape in sheet form, 65mm (W )x 300mm (L) each
Carbon Sheet 0.16mm 1,100 gf/25mm 4,000ohm/5mm2
77820 Silver Cohesive Sheet 5/pk
77822 Carbon Cohesive Sheet 10/pk
77822-01 Carbon Cohesive Sheet (Technical Grade) 10/pk

Electron Microscopy Sciences In PA: (215) 412-8400 • Toll-Free (800) 523-5874 647
Fax (215) 412-8450 or 8452 • email: sgkcck@aol.com or stacie@ems-secure.com • www.emsdiasum.com
EMS_Full Line 2014_sec16_640-649_EMS_Full Line 2013_sec01 7/1/14 8:55 AM Page 648

SECTION 16 Scanning Electron Microscope Supplies

® XYZ-Axis Electrically Conductive, 3M™ Double Sided Tape 9712

3M™ XYZ-Axis Electrically
Electrical Properties: Contact Resistance
Conductive Tape 9712 is an
Substrate Tested
isotropically conductive pressure
Aluminum/ Aluminum/ Copper/ Copper/
sensitive tape. The tape consists of
Aluminum Stainless Steel Aluminum Copper
a 3M adhesive loaded with
conductive fibers. The result is a <24Ω <21.5Ω <16Ω <.66Ω
Based upon four wire (Kelvin probe) resistance measurements made with crossed pieces of Foil/Type
double-sided tape providing both 9712 or 9713/Rigid plate construction using a 1.0" x 1.0" square piece of 3M tape Type 9712 or 9713.
good adhesion and good electrical The rigid metal surface was prepared with a Scotch-Brite™ pad to roughen the surface and cleaned with
performance with very high isopropyl alcohol.
conductivity. Adhesion Properties:
The 9712 Tape is an excellent choice when needing to bond your Adhesion in oz./in(g/cm)
samples for all SEM work. 20 Min at 24 Hours at 20 Min at 24 Hours at
Substrate 72°F (22°C) 72°F (22°C) 158°F (70°C) 72°F (22°C)
Specification:
Adhesive Type: Filled Acrylic Stainless Steel >41(457) >42(468) >43(479) >53(590)
Filler Type Conductive Fibers Aluminum >35(390) >33(367) >36(401) >43(479)
Release Liner Silicone treated PolyCoated Kraft Copper >47(412) >39(434) >43(479) >55(613)
Paper The tape is available in 3 sizes and it comes on a 3” Core(76mm)
Remover: Acetone Cat. # Description Qty
Thickness Approximate: Tape Only; .005” (.127mm) 77808-63 XYZ-Axis Electrically Conductive, 3M™ Double Sided Tape, each
Release Liner; .004” (.010mm) 9712, 6.35mm (W) x 32.9m (L)
77808-12 XYZ-Axis Electrically Conductive, 3M™ Double Sided Tape, each
Temperature Range: Short Term Exposure; 250ºF (121ºC) 9712, 12.7mm (W) x 32.9m (L)
Long Term Exposure; 158ºF (70ºC) 77808-25 XYZ-Axis Electrically Conductive, 3M™ Double Sided Tape, each
9712, 25mm (W) x 32.9m (L)

® XYZ-Axis Electrically Conductive, 3M™ Double Sided Tape 9713

3M™ XYZ-Axis Electrically
Conductive Tape 9713 is an Electrical Properties: Contact Resistance
isotropically conductive pressure Substrate Tested
sensitive tape. 3M tape 9713 Aluminum/ Aluminum/ Copper/ Copper/
conducts electricity through the Aluminum Stainless Steel Aluminum Copper
thickness (Z-axis) and in the
plane of the adhesive (X, Y <2.5Ω <2.0Ω <1.0Ω <0.5Ω
Based upon four wire (Kelvin probe) resistance measurements made with crossed pieces of Foil/Type
planes) and is ideal for EMI/RFI 9712 or 9713/Rigid plate construction using a 1.0" x 1.0" square piece of 3M tape Type 9712 or 9713.
shield and EMI/RFI gasket The rigid metal surface was prepared with a Scotch-Brite™ pad to roughen the surface and cleaned with
attachment to metal surfaces. isopropyl alcohol.
The tape consists of a high performance 3M adhesive loaded with
Adhesion Properties:
conductive fibers. The result is a double-sided tape providing both
Adhesion in oz./in(g/cm)
good adhesion and good electrical performance. The conductive
15 min. at 1 hr. at 24 hr. at 1 hr. at 24 hr. at
fibers in 3M tape 9713 also provide improved handling
Substrate 72°F (22°C) 72°F (22°C) 72°F (22°C) 158°F (70°C) 158°F (70°C)
characteristics. The 9713 Tape is an excellent choice when
needing to bond your samples for all SEM work Stainless
Steel > 30 (335) > 45 (502) > 50 (558) > 50 (558) > 55 (613)
Specification:
Aluminum > 20 (223) > 35 (390) > 40 (446) > 40 (446) > 55 (613)
Adhesive Type: Filled Acrylic
Copper > 20 (223) > 40 (446) > 45 (502) > 40 (446) > 60 (669)
Filler Type Conductive Fibers
Release Liner Silicone treated PolyCoated Kraft The tape is available in 5 sizes and it comes on a 3” Core(76mm)
Paper Cat. # Description Qty
Remover: Acetone 77809-12 XYZ-Axis Electrically Conductive, 3MTM Double Sided Tape,